The Flinders University of South Australia

Calendar 1991 Volume 2

The Umvers1ty's postal address 1s + GP 0 Box 2100, Adelaide 5001, Australia

The telephone number 1s • (08) 201 3911

and the FAX number 1s • (08) 201 3000

~

' \ ' \ \~ ' ' \

' \

'

'

\ ' '\

\ ,, \ \ \ .., \

\ "' \ \ ...... . \ \

\c;, \ ' "' ,c

v

Published by The Flinders Unzverszty of South Australia

Typeset, composed and printed by Flznders Press

""(08) 201 2332

ISSN 0727 4254

Foreword

The Calendar 1s pubhshed m three volumes for 1991

+ Volume 1 (conta1n1ng details of staff committees and boards, statutes prizes and scholarsh1ps, and other information about the Un1vers1ty) 1s pubhshed m April of the year to which 1t refers

+ Volume 2 (conta1n1ng details of courses of study, 1nclud1ng syllabuses and statutes relevant to course structures) 1s pubhshed in the previous December

+ NOTE From 1January1991, the Umversity will merge with the Sturt Campus of the South Austrahan College of Advanced EducatIOn Details relevant to the Sturt campus for 1991 mcludmg academic calendar, details of staff, details of courses and other 1nformation ts contamed m Volume 3 of the Calendar which will be pubhshed m January 1991

Other off1c1al Un1vers1ty pubhcahons

+ Annual Report

+ Research Report (pubhshed annually)

+ Undergraduate Handbook (pubhshed annually for mtendmg students)

Contents

Statutes

4

O 1 Interpretatzon 6 1 M atnculatzon 6 2 Enrolment of Students 6 3 The Academic Year 6 4 Maintenance of Order 6 5 Conduct of Examinations

7 1 Bachelors Degrees and Diplomas and Other Academic Awards

Schedule 1 The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts 10 the School of Humanities

Schedule 2 The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts 10 the School of Social Sciences

Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D

Schedule 3 The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts 1n the School of Informat10n Science and Technology

Schedule 3A The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelo• of Arts m the School of B10log1cal Sciences

Schedule 4 The Fzrst Year of the Degree of Bachelor of Science Schedule 5 The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science 1n

the School of Information Science and Technology Schedule 6 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of

Bachelor of Science 10 the School of Physical Sciences Appendix A Appendix B

Schedule 7 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science 1n the School of B1olog1cal Sciences

Schedule 8 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science 1n the School of Earth Sciences

Appendix A Schedule 9 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of

Bachelor of Econom1cs Schedule 9A The Ordinary and Honours Degree of

Bachelor of Econom1cs (Account1ng) Appendix A

Schedule 9B The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Commerce

Appendix A Appendix B

Schedule 9c The Ordmary Degrees of Bachelor of Commerce and Bachelor of Arts (AS1an 'ltudies)

Appendix A Schedule 10 The Ordinary and Honours Degree of

Bachelor of Education Appendix A

Schedule lOA The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Education (Physical Educahon)

9 9

13 15 15 27

28

31

33 34 35 40 40

43

46 49

51

54 55 57

62

67 68

74

75 76

77 78 79

80 81

81 82

83

Schedule 11 Degrees of Bachelor of Med1cme and Bachelor of Surgery 85 Appendix A 86

Schedule 12 The Honours Degree of Bachelor of Medical Science 86 Schedule 13 The Degree of Bachelor of Social Admmistration 87

Appendix A 88 Schedule 15 The Diploma m Education 88

~m~A 00 Appendix B 90 Appendix C 90 Appendix D 91

Schedule 16 The Diploma m Social Sciences 91 Appendix '\ 92

Schedule 17 The Diploma m Educational Admimstratron 94 Schedule 20 The Diploma m Accountmg 95 Schedule 23 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Theology 96

Appendix A 98 AppendlX B 99

Schedule 25 The Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science 1n the School of Med1c1ne 100

Schedule 26 The Diploma m Humanities JOI Schedule 28 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of

Bachelor of Science 1n the School of Social Sciences 102 Appendix A 103 ~m~B 1ro

Schedule 29 The Diploma m Apphed Statistics 103 Schedule 30 The Diploma m Populatron Studies 104 Schedule 31 The Certificate of Graduate Studies m Education 105

Appendix A 106 Schedule 32 The Diploma m Primary Health Care 107

Appendix A 108 Appendix B 108 Appendix C 108 Appendix D 109 Appendix E 109 Appendix F 109

Schedule 33 The Diploma m Computer Science 110 Schedule 34 The Graduate Certificate m Mathematics Education 110

Appendix A 111 Schedule 35 The Graduate Diploma m Archaeology 112 Schedule 36 The Graduate Diploma m Legal Studies 113 Schedule 37 The Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Health Science 114

Appendix A 115 Schedule 38 The Associate Diploma m Apphed Science 115

AppendlX A 116 Schedule 39 The Honours Degree of Bachelor of Brotechnology 118

7 3 Masters Degrees

Schedule 1 The Degrees of Master of Arts, Master of Commerce, Master of Econom1cs, Master of Science and Master of Theology

Appendix A Appendix B AppendlX C

Schedule 2 The Degree of Master of Arts (Drama) Schedule 3 The Degree of Master of Education Schedule 4 The Degree of Master of Psychology (Chmcal)

119

122 123 123 124 125 126 127

5

Appendix A 127 Schedule 4A The Degree of Master of Psychology (Educat10nal) 127

~ffi~A 1~ Schedule 5 The Degree of Master of Social Admm1stration 128

Appendix A 129 Schedule 6 The Degree of Master of Educational Admm1stration 129 Schedule 7 The Degree of Master of Educat10n (Special Educat10n) 130 Schedule 8 The Degree of Master of Pohcy and Adm1mstrahon 131

AppendJX A 132 Schedule 9 The Degree of Master of Educational Management 133

Appendix A 133 Schedule 10 The Degree of Master of Special Educat10n 134

AppendJX A 134 Schedule 11 The Degree of Master of Educational Studies 135 Schedule 12 The Degree of Master of Arts (Women's Studies) 135

Appendix A 136 Schedule 13 The Degree of Master of Theolog1cal Studies 137

AppendJX A 137 Schedule 14 The Degree of Master of Science (Primary Health Care) 138

Appendix A 138 Appendix B 139 ~ffi~C Ll9 Appendix D 139 Appendix E 140 Appendix F 140

Schedule 15 The Degree of Master of Economics by Coursework m the School of Social Sciences 140

Appendix A 141 Schedule 16 The Degree of Master of Nutrition and Dietetics 141

Appendix A 142 Schedule 17 The Degree of Master of Nutritional Science 142

AppendJX A 143 Schedule 18 The Degree of Master of Science (Health Service Management) 143

AppendJX A 144

7 4 Degrees of Doctor of Philosophy and Doctor of Medicine Schedule 1 The Degree of Doctor of Philosophy Schedule 2 The Degree of Doctor of Med1c1ne

7 5 Degrees of Doctor of Letters and Doctor of Science

Rules for Higher Degree Theses

144 147 148

149

150

Rules Applicable to Staff and Students Library Rules

152

152 156 158 159

Computer Fac1l1ty Rules General Rules Applicable to Students Laboratory Rules Applicable to Students

Prmc1pal Dates for 1991

Enrolment of Students

6

160

173

Syllabuses

School of B10log1cal Sciences

School of Earth Sciences

School of Educat10n School of Humanities

Englzsh French Spanish Drama Philosophy Italian Visual Arts and Archaeology Modern Greek Legal Studies Australian Studies Programme Cognates Diploma zn Humanztzes Honours Programmes

School of Information Science and Technology Computer Science Mathematics Statistical Science

School of Med1cme School of Physical Sciences

Chemistry Physzcs Associate Diploma zn Applied Science

School of Social Sciences Economics Accounting and Finance Economzc History Geography Population and Human Resources Programme History American Studzes Politics Psychology Asian Studies Soczology Australian Studies Programme Development Studies Programme Multidzsciplznary Topics School Topics Women's Studies Second Ma1or Social Admznzstratron Policy and Adminzstratzon

Studies m Engineering

Studies m Theology

Index to Topics

176

193 210

270 271 274 281 288 293 301 313 320 327 328 330 333 337 358 358 363 374

380 420 420 429 435

438 438 456 467 470 480 484 500 505 523 540 557 571 573 582 588 589 595 605

615 620

644

7

Statutes

Statutes1

Statute 0.1 Interpretation

1. In these statutes-the masculine includes the feminine and vice versa; the singular includes the plural and vice versa; expressions referring to writing shall, unless the contrary intention appears, be construed as including references to printing, lithography, photography and other modes of representing or reproducing words in a visible form; words or expressions contained in these statutes shall be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of the Acts Interpretation Act 1915-1975 (as amended) and of The Flinders University of South Australia Act 1966 (as amended) as in force at the date at which these statutes become binding upon the University.

2. In these statutes-a reference to a committee, which committee is not constituted by virtue of the statutes, means a committee constituted by resolution of the Council of the Flinders University of South Australia in pursuance of its powers under Sections 19 and 19a of the Flinders University of South Australia Act 1966 (as amended).

6.1 Matriculation'·'

General

1. A candidate shall: (a) have satisfied the educational

requirements specified below; and (b) lodge an enrolment in the form

prescribed by the Council: to become a matriculated student of the University.

!.Statutes 0.1 to 5.2 and Statutes 7.6 to 9.2 are published in Volume 1 of the Calendar.

* Amendments awaiting approval by the Governor.

Matriculation Examination

2. A Matriculation Examination shall be held towards the end of each calendar year. The examination shall be designed, in general scope and standard, for candidates who have or are deemed to have completed five years of academic secondary education (following seven years of primary education) in South Australia.

3. (a) Such subjects as may be approved by the Council from time to time, classified within one or more groups, shall be available to candidates at the matriculation examination.

(b) Candidates' results in each subject shall be classified (not necessarily for publication) in such manner as may be approved by the Council on the recommendation of the Joint Matriculation Committee.

Educational Requirements for Matriculation

4. To fulfil the educational requirements for matriculation a candidate shall:

(a) present at one matriculation examination or at two matriculation examinations in consecutive years such numbers of subjects satisfying such grouping requirements and other conditions as may be approved by the Council from time to time; and

(b) attain in those subjects so presented an aggregate of scaled scores not less than a figure determined from time to time by the Council, provided that if a candidate presents more than the required number of subjects the aggregate of scores shall be that candidate's highest aggregate of scaled scores of the minimum

9

Statutes

number of sub1ects which comply with the provis10ns of section (a) of this clause

Assessment 5 A candidate

(a) who was prevented by illness from attendmg or completmg the matr1culati0n examination in the sub1ect or sub1ects concerned, or

(b) who satisfied such other grounds as may be approved by the )amt Matnculabon Committee, may on the production of evidence satisfactory to the Joint Matnculat1on Committee have an assessment made of the results which that candidate was likely to obtam m each sub1ect concerned or may be examined in any manner approved by the )amt Matr1culatton Committee Such assessment or exam1nahon if approved by the )amt Matnculat10n Committee, may be used for the purposes of complymg with the provlSlons of Clause 4 of this statute

The Matriculallon Board 6 There shall be a Matriculation Board

consistmg of the Vice Chancellor or his nominee who shall be Chairperson the Deans of the several Schools and the Chairperson of the Board of Studies in Theology or theu nominees and six other members of the academic staff appomted by the Council for terms of two years

7 (a) The Board shall advise the Council on all apphcat10ns under th1S statute for status for prov1s1onal matnculatton and an such other matters as the Council may refer to it

(b) In the case of a candidate for matnculahon who is suffenng severe and continuing physical or other d1sab1hty and who presents evidence sahsfactory to the Matnculat10n Board, the Council, on the advice of the Board, may vary the prov1s1ons of Clauses 4 and 5

The Jomt Matnculahon Committee 8 (a) There shall be a )amt Matnculat10n

Committee of The University of Adelaide and The Flinders

10

University of South Australia, cons1sttng of eleven members

(b) Each Umversity Council shall appoint five members

(c) The ten appomted members shall elect a Chairperson who shall hold office for a term of two years

(d) If an appomted member be elected Chairperson that person shall thereupon cease to be an appointed member, and the resultant vacancy shall be filled by the relevant Un1vers1ty Councll

9 In addition to its powers under Clauses 3 and 5 the Joint Matnculahon Committee shall advise the Councils of the two Un1vers1t1es on any matters related to matnculatton

Status

10 A candidate who submits satisfactory evidence of educational quahf1cat1ons gamed otherwise than at the Matriculation Examination may be declared quahfled for matnculat10n or be granted such status towards matnculahon as shall be determined rn each case

11 A candidate who under Clause 10 is granted status towards rnatnculatlon on account of educational quahficatlons obtamed outside South Austraha may be required to satisfy the Matnculahon Board that his or her knowledge of English is sufficient for the purpose of undertaking Un1vers1ty studies

Prov1s1onal Matr1culation 12 On the recommendation of the

Matr1culat1on Board, and on such cond1t1ons as may be determined 1n each case, a candidate who has not fulfilled the educational requirements for matnculahon specified in Clause 4 may be admitted to prov1s1onal matriculation

13 A candidate admitted to provmonal matnculatrnn shall be deemed during the penod of prov1s1onal matnculation to be a matriculated student of the U n1versity The provisional matnculant's academic progress will be reviewed by the Matnculahon Board at the end of each year at which time prov1s1onal

matriculation status may be converted to full matriculation, renewed for a further year or cancelled according to cond1tlons spec1f1ed from time to time by the Matriculation Board

Special and Adult Matriculation

14 On the recommendat10n of the Matriculation Board the Council may allow such mod1f1cat1ons in the operation of the provis10ns of this Statute as it deems flt for any person

Savmg Clause

15 Notw1thstand1ng the provts1ons of Clause l(a) a candidate who had full!lled or partially fulfilled the educat10nal requirements for matnculahon under any former matriculation statute by passing in appropriate sub1ects at the matriculation examination prescribed 1n that statute shall remam qualif10d or partially quahf10d for matnculat10n as the case may be

16 (a) The Council may make such rules as are contemplated by this statute or as are necessary or expedient for the purposes of this statute

(b) Notwithstandmg the provis10ns of Clause lS(a), no rules made pursuant to Clauses 3(a), 4(a) or 4(b) shall take effect until the expiration of two years from the date upon which such rules are made EXCEPT that the prov!Slons of Clauses 3 and 4 of the statute m force immediately prior to the enactment of this clause shall be deemed to be such rules for the purposes of this statute

(c) Any rules approved by the Council under this Statute shall be pubhshed 1n a Schedule hereto

Matr1culatton Rules

1 Matrzculatzon Examznatzon The followmg exammat10ns shall be recogn17ed as the Un1vers1ty's matriculation examination The Year 12 Public Exammat10n conducted by the Semor Secondary Assessment Board of South Australia

61 Matrzculatzon

Examinations conducted by other Austrahan State Authorities for university entrance 1n those sub1ects included 1n Group 1 (u) of Rule 2 below

2 Sub1ects (a) The subiects available at the

matriculation exam1natlon shall be placed m three groups as follows

Group I (i) Those publicly examined by

the Senior Secondary Assessment Board of South Australia Accounting P, Ancient History, Art P, Aspects of Austrahan Society, Australian H1story1

Modern Standard Chinese, Classical Studies, Dance Performance and Theory Drama P, Dutch Econom1cs 1

English P English as a Second Language, French, Geography P, German Hungarian, Indonesian, Itahan Japanese, Khmer, Lahn Latvian Legal Studies P L1thuan1an Malaysian, Medieval History, Modern Greek Modern H1Story (Asia) Modern History (Europe), Modern History (World), Modern History (Umted States of Amenca), Music History and Literature, Music Performance and Theory, Pohsh, Poht1cs P, Religion Studies P, Russian Spanish, Ukra1n1an, Vietnamese

(11) Language sub1ects examined by authoritzes rn other Australzan States Such language subiects examined by Authorities 1n other Austrahan States as are accepted for Un1vers1ty adm1ss1on 1n the relevant State, provided that the same language is not offered by SSABSA for umversity selection (for example Ancient Greek, Hebrew, Serbo Croatian and Turkish offered by the V1ctonan Curnculum and Assessment Board and

11

Statutes

Croatian, Estonian, Serbian and Turkish offered by the N S W Board of Semor School Studies)

Group II Those publicly examined by the Senzo1 Secondary Assessment Board of South Australia Agricultural Science, Biology Chemistry, Geology1 Mathematics 1 MathematH'S 2, Mathematics IS Physics

Group Ill Those publicly examined by the Senzor Seconaary Assessment Board of South Australia (No sub1ects have yet been approved tn this Group Proposals for new sub1ects are under cons1deration )

(b) A candidate wrll not be deemed to have presented a sub1ect for matriculation purposes unless he or she obtains a scaled score greater than zero m that subject

3 Educatzonal requzrements for Matrzculatzon

12

To fulfrl the educabonal reqmrements for matnculat10n a candidate shall (1) rf quahfymg m 1987 or earher

present at one matr1culat1on exam1natton at least five sub1ects which satisfy the cond1t10ns m Rules 4, 5 and 7

(11) rf quahfymg m 1988 either present at one matr1culatlon examination at least five subjects which satisfy the cond1t1ons in Rules 4, 5 and 7 or present at the 1987 matnculatron exam1nabon a total of at least five subjects and present at the 1988 matr1culahon exam1nat1on such subjects as wrll allow hrm or her to accumulate a total of at least frve subjects which satrsfy the cond1t10ns 1n Rules 4, 5 and 7 or

(m) rf quahfying in 1989 or a subsequent year ezther present at one matr1culat1on examination at least five sub1ects which satisfy the cond1hons 1n Rules 4 5 and 7 or present at one

matriculation examination at least five subjects and present at the follow1ng matr1culat1on examtn ahon such sub1ects as will allow him or her to accumulate a total of at least five subjects which satisfy the cond1hons in Rules 4, 5 and 7

4 Grouping requirements A candidate must present at least one sub1ect from Group I and at least one sub1ect from Group II A candidate may not present more than one sub1ect from Group III

5 Unacceptable combznatzons of sub1ects (1) Sub1ect to (m) below, not more than

two of the following sub1ects shall be counted Ancient History Austrahan History Medieval History Modem History (AS1a) Modern History (Europe) Modern History (U mted States of Amened) Modern History (World)

(11) Ancient History and Classical Studies shall not both be counted ,

(m) Modern History (World) shall not be counted in combination with any other Modem History option,

(rv) Malaysian and Indonesian shall not both be counted

(v) A candidate counting Mathematrcs IS shall not also count Mathemabcs 1 or Mathematics 2,

(VJ) Only one of Croatran, Serbian and Serbo Croatian shall be counted

6 Scaling The examination results of candidates shall be scaled according to procedures approved by the Council

7 Aggregate Score A candidate must attam m the subjects prescribed in Rule 2 a m1n1mum aggregate score as determined by Council from ttme to trme and calculated as m Rule 8 (The mmrmum aggregate score rs 59 )

8 Calculatzon of Aggregate Score The aggregate score shall be calculated as the aggregate of the highest frve scaled scores 1n sub1ects which satisfy the

conditions xn Rules 4 and 5 provided that candidates quahfy1ng over two consecutive years and presenting the same sub1ect twice will be credited only with the higher score for that subject

9 Educatwnal Requzrements for Adult Matrzculatzon (1) To fulfil the educat10nal reqmre

ments for Adult Matnculat10n a candidate shall

(a) For those who have attained the age of twenty years or have not undertaken full time secondary educatzon for a perwd of two years before 1 January of the year m which they take the1r final matrzculatzon sub7ect

(1) Present at not more than three matriculation examinations a total of at least five sub1ects which satisfy the conditions of Rule 5 and which mclude at least one from Group I and at least one from Group II,

(2) Attam m the best five sub1ects prescnbed 1n Rule 9 (1) (a) (1) and not mclud Ing more tha-i one subject from Group III a m1n1mum aggregate score as determined by Council from time to time (The mm1mum aggregate score 1s 59 or the eqmvalent aggregate )

(b) For those who have attained the age of twenty nme years before 1 January of the year zn which they take then fmal matrzculatzon sub7ect

(1) Present at not more than three matr1culat1on exam1nat1ons a total of at least four subjects which satisfy the cond1hons of Rules,

(2) Attam m the best four sub1ects prescnbed 1n Rule 9 (1) (b) (1) and not mclud

61 Matrrculatzon

Ing more than one sub1ect from Group III a m1n1mum aggregate score as determined by the Council from time to hme (The mrnrmum aggregate score is 48 or the eqmvalent aggregate )

(n) A candidate may not count towards Adult Matnculat1on the results of any sub1ects completed m the fmal year of full lime secondary education

(m) A candidate presentmg the same sub1ect more than once will be credited only with the highest score for that sub1ect

NOTES

(1) The minimum aggregate scores referred to 1n the above rules allow for subject scores on a 0 100 or 0 20 scale

(2) Candidates who follow the two year opt10n allowed under clauses 3(n) and (in) are advised to present at least five grouped sub1ects 1n their first year, and in the second year may repeat all or some of those subjects perhaps with one or more different subjects or a different group of sub1ects altogether The matr1culat1on aggregate will be calculated from the best five sub1ects which satisfy the groupmg and other requirements set out 1n the rules

6 2 Enrolment of Students

1 The Council may prescnbe that students who wISh to commence a course of study for any degree or diploma shall apply for admiss10n to that course of study by a par!Icular date An apphcat10n for adm1ss1on submitted after that date will not necessarily be accepted, and 1f accepted will incur such late admission fee as the Council may prescnbe

2 The Council havmg regard to the resources of the Un1vers1ty with respect to staffing, accommodation and fac1httes available for teaching may place hmitatlons on the numbers of students to be admitted to any course of study for a degree or diploma or to anv particular

13

Statutes

course and may determine the method by which students will be admitted Only students granted adm1ss1on may enrol for such courses

3 The Council havmg regard to the educational ob1echves of a particular topic or course of study may place hm1tahons on the categories of students, determined according to relevant educational cr1ter1a1 permitted to enrol in that topic or course of study

4 All students shall enrol no later than the date prescribed each year by the Councd An enrolment submitted after that date will not necessarily be accepted, and if accepted will incur such late enrolment fee as the Counc1l may prescribe

5 In add1tton to Tu1t1on or Reg1strahon Fees, every student shall pay a Student Services Fee prescribed by the Council

6 In particular cases the Council may reduce or waive any fee payable by a student The Director of Adm1n1strahon and Registrar shall have power to grant an extension of time for the payment of fees or reduce or waive any late fee 1f the reasons for being late are deemed by the Director of Adm1n1stratton and Registrar to be adequate

7 Fees shall be paid at the time of enrolment except that a student may elect to pay the fees for the second semester d ur1ng the first two weeks of that semester A student whose second semester fees are not paid by the end of the second week of that semester will incur such addit anal fee as may be prescribed by the Councd unless an extension of time has been approved 1n advance by the Director of Adm1n1stration and Registrar

8 A student who has neither quahfled to matriculate nor been granted prov1s1onal matnculat1on may not enrol in any topic, except 1n circumstances and under conditions approved by Council on the recommendation of the Matnculat1on Board A student granted such approval to enrol shall

14

(a) sign the Matnculat10n Roll which shall be appropriately annotated

(b) pay the same fees and be sub1ect to the same statutes regulations and

rules as a matnculated student, (c) be mehg1ble for the award of any

scholarship or pnze, and ( d) not be permitted to enrol for any

degree or diploma or to present towards any degree or diploma any topic which has been passed unless the student becomes matnculated

Council shall make regulations governing the 1mplementatton of this clause

9 A student who enrols in the Un1vers1ty shall be sub1ect to the statutes, regulations and other lawful directions of the Un1vers1ty until the student (a) quahfles for the degree or diploma

for which the student is enrolled, (b) nollf1es the Director of

Adm1n1strat1on and Registrar of withdrawal as a student, or

(c) fails to re enrol by the last day of the enrolment period in any year followmg the last year of enrolment

10 If it appears to the Board of the appropnate School or where appropriate, to the Board of Studies m Theology that it ts not in the interests of the Un1vers1ty or of other students or of the pubhc (having regard to the profession for which the student is quahfymg) that any student should be permitted to enter upon or proceed with a course of studies, the Board may recommend to the Council that the enrolment of such a student be not permitted or be terminated Such a recommendation shall be referred to the Board of Enqmry estabhshed under Statute 6 4 Maintenance of Order, which shall conduct an enquiry under the cond1t1ons prescribed for 1nveshgahng complaints against students, and advise the Council After receiving such advice the CouncII may re1ect or terminate the enrolment of the student

Regulatrnns Made Under Clause 8

1 There shall be a category of non­matnculated students up to a cumulative hm1t of three such students in any d1sc1phne, or six such students in a single d1sc1plme School or m Theology topics at any time who may be enrolled in a School or by the Board of Studies m Theology at

the dtscretron of that School or Board provided that m the opm10n of the Matriculatron Board these regulatrons and other Council pohc1es have been comphed with

2 Apphcatrons must be received annually

3 No non matriculated student may enrol in more than 12 units In any one year

4 No 1n1tral or renewing apphcatron will be considered If received after 1st February

5 No non matriculated student may count towards any degree or diploma any units gained while a non matnculant student, except as provided under 6 below

6 A non matnculated student who, after not less than three and no more than four years of study has (1) satisfied the requirements for the

conversion of prov1s1onal matncu latron to full matnculation over 36 units, and

(2) gamed a grade ol C or better m at least two lust year 12 unrt topics leading to a ma1or sequence 1n different d1sc1phnes, or 1n at least 27 units from first year topics hsted under Statute 7 1, Schedule 4 1n at least two different d1sc1phnes

shall be granted full matnculatron status and shall then be allowed to count towards a degree or diploma those units gained while a non matnculated student, provided that any units gained 1n a topic sub1ect to a pre requ1s1te shall not be counted unless the pre requisite has also been satisfied the waiving of a pre requisite by a d1sc1phne or School Board or the Board of Studies m Theology shall not constitute the fulfilment of that pre reqms1te for the purposes of this paragraph

7 The appltcation of the above regulations shall always be 1Im1ted to the availab11Ity of places w1th1n such quotas as may be approved by CouncII after all matriculated applicants have been enrolled

6 3 The Academic Year 1 Week 1 of the Academic Teaching Year

shall begm on the Monday nearest the first day m March

6 4 Maintenance of 01dei

2 Weeks 1 to 16 shall constitute the first semester

3 Weeks 8 and 9 shall conslltute the first mid semester break

4 Weeks 17 and 18 shall be the mid year exam1natron period

5 Weeks 17 to 21 shall cons!Itute the mid year break

6 Weeks 22 to 37 shall constitute the second semester

7 Weeks 30 and 31 shall constitute the second mid semester break

8 Weeks 38 and 39 shall be the end of year examination penod

9 The Council shall have power to vary this formula to meet any special ctrcumstances ans1ng tn any year

10 The lengths of terms m the Schools of Med1c1ne and Education shall be determined from trme to time by the Council on the recommendation of the Academic Programmes Committee

11 The Council may make such rules as are contemplated by this Statute or as are necessary or expedient for the purposes of this Statute

Rules Made Under Clause 11 of Statute 6 3 The Academic Year

1 Onentat10n Week 1f held shall be m weekO

2 Weeks 16 and 37 shall be free of classes in all top1cs, except those 1nvolv1ng continuous assessment or having no examination 1n the following examination penod

3 Weeks 19 and 31 will be the common vacation weeks designated by the Austrahan Vice Chancellors Committee The third A VCC common week will be programmed d ur1ng Easter week

6 4 Maintenance of Order·

1 Students of the Umvers1ty are bound by the statutes regulations and other lawful directions of the Un1vers1ty and are

Amendments awa1tmg approval by the Governor

15

Statutes

expected to conduct themselves in a inanner which does not 1mpa1r the functioning of the Un1vers1ty and the reasonable freedom of other persons to pursue their studies, researches, duties or lawful act1v1t1es In the Un1vers1ty or to part1c1pate m the hie of the University

Deftn1bons

2 In this statute, unless the context otherwise requires, the expression

'Expel and "expulsion" means the cancellation of enrolment of a student and term1nahon of all nghts and pnv1leges as a student of the Un1vers1ty 1nclud1ng the nght to enter or to be on land or premises of the UmverSity and the nght to part1c1pate m the life of the Umversity and such expulsion may be for either a spec1f1ed or an 1ndefln1te penod

16

"Mzsconduct' includes

(1) any conduct which 1mpa1rs the reasonable freedom of other persons to pursue their studies, researches, duties or lawful act1v1hes 1n the Un1vers1ty or to participate in the hfe of the Un1vers1ty

(2) wilful d1sobed1ence of a reasonable direction of a senior officer of the Un1vers1ty,

(3) actmg dishonestly or unfairly m connection with any examination conducted by or w1thm the Un1vers1ty or the preparation or presentation of any essay exercise or thesis, or failing to comply with the requirements of a supervisor of any exam1nat1on,

(4) assaulting, attempting to assault or threatening a person on Un1vers1ty premises

(5) d1sobeymg or fa!lmg to observe any prov1s1on of any statute or rule or any resolution of the Council,

(6) d1vulgmg any conf1dent1al 1nformat1on relating to any Un1vers1ty matter

(7) entering any place w1th 1n the premises of the Un1vers1tywh1ch the student is forbidden by a semor officer of the Umvers1ty or by a by law, statute or regulation to enter

(8) fa1lmg to comply with any penalty imposed under this statute,

(9) fa1lmg to leave any bu1ldmg or part of a bmldmg of the UmverSity forthwith upon bemg directed by a senior officer of the Un1vers1ty to leave it,

(10) ml!m1datmg obstructmg d1sturb-1ng, delaying or 1nfluenc1ng improperly or attempting so to do any Board of Enqmry or Appeals Committee set up under this statute or any member of any such Board of Enquiry or Appeals Committee or any witness who 1s appeanng or who has been called to appear before any such Board of Enqmry or Appeals Committee,

(11) wilfully damagmg or wrongfully dealmg with any Umvers1ty property or any property upon Un1vers1ty premises,

(12) wilfully obstructmg or attemptmg to deter any officer or employee of the Un1vers1ty 1n the performance of duties

(13) wilfully obstructmg any teachmg or research activity examination or off1c1al meeting or proceeding of the University

Senior officer of the University means the Chancellor a Pro Chancellor, the Vice Chancellor, a Pro Vice Chancellor, the Dean of a School, the Director of Adm1n1strat1on and Registrar, the L1branan the Dean of a Hall of Residence, any member of the academic staff of the UmverSity and any person for the time being acting tn the office of any such officer and any other member of the staff of the Umvers1ty whom the Council may designate as a senior officer for the purposes of this statute

Student means an enrolled student of the Un1vers1ty other than one who 1s a full l!me member of the staff of the Un1vers1ty

"Supervisor" means any person appointed by the Un1vers1ty to supervise an examination of the Un1vers1ty

Teaching staff means the Professors Readers, Senior Lecturers, Lecturers, Senior Tutors, Senior Demonstrators,

Tutors and Demonstrators of the Un1vers1ty

3 A dec1s10n by a person or body exercising any power or authority under this statute that a student has been guilty of misconduct 1s conclusive save as herein provided

Complamts of Alleged Misconduct

4 (1) Any complamt allegmg misconduct on the part of a student or students shall be made in writing to the Vice Chancellor

(2) Where a complamt 1s made or where 1t otherwise appears to the Vice Chancellor that a student may have misconducted himself or herself the Vice Chancellor (a) may suspend the student for a

penod not exceeding 28 days and

(b) shall refer the complamt or apparent misconduct (as the case may be) 1n wnting to the Director of Adm1n1strat1on and Registrar to be dealt with by a Summary Enqmry

(3) Upon such referral the Summary Enqmry shall proceed to deal with such referral and shall determine (a) whether misconduct has

occurred1

(b) whether any suspens10n imposed by the Vice Chancellor is confirmed, continued terminated or revoked,

(c) what further or other penalty 1s imposed

(4) In relat10n to the proceedmgs of a Summary Enquiry the prov1s1ons of Clauses 5 14 (mclusive) hereunder shall apply and m relat10n to the proceedmgs of a Board of Enqmry the prov1s10ns of Clauses 17 to 23 (mclus1ve)

(S) In add1t10n to its powers pursuant to Clause 4(3)(b) hereof a Summary Enquiry may terminate any suspension imposed by the Vice Chancellor prior to its conclusion of its proceedings

6 4 M amtenance of Order

(6) A determ1nat1on made 1n accordance with the provts10ns of Clause 4(2) and 4(3) hereof shall be advised m wr1t1ng to the Director of Adm1n1stratton and Registrar and to the student or students concerned who shall also each be provided with a copy of the f1nd1ngs and reasons for any determination of a Summary Enquiry w1th1n seven days of such determination being made

Summary Enqu1r1es

5 A Summary Enquiry is empowered to hear all cases referred to It by the Vice Chancellor pursuant to Clause 4 2 hereof and shall except 1n cases of a minor nature or which are not disputed, determine to refer any complaint or allegation of misconduct so referred to 1t to a Board of Enqmry

6 A Summary Enquiry shall compnse (a) two members appomted by the V1ce­

Chancellor from the group of Pro Vice Chancellors and Deans of Schools, one of whom shall be appomted by the Vice Chancellor as Chatrperson

(b) one student appomted by the Vice Chancellor from the student members of the Academic Programmes Committee If a student member of the Academic Programmes Committee is not available for appointment or 1s unw1lhng to serve the V1ce­Chancellor shall appomt the General Secretary of the Students Association

7 The Chairperson of the Summary Enqmry shall (1) mform the student of the details of

the complaint of misconduct or apparen+ misconduct which has been made or occurred,

(2) convene a meetmg of the Summary Enqmry with the person makmg the complaint or with the Vice Chancellor (as the case may be), the student complamed agamst and any other person deemed to be relevant by the Chairperson

17

Statutes

(3) give each person appearing and havmg knowledge of the matter reasonable opportunity to be heard1

(4) If so desired by the student complained against and the person making the complaint or the Vice Chancellor (as the case may be) permit both or either of them to be assisted at the enquiry by another member of the Un1vers1ty provided that the member nominated by either is not also a pracht1oner of the Supreme Court of South Australia,

(5) explore reasonable avenues for setthng the complaint before 1nvok1ng any d1sc1phnary powers,

(6) have the power to conduct the enquiry in such a manner as the Chairperson deems appropriate and to terminate the proceedings at any point, 1f in the op1n1on of the Summary Enquiry it is unposs1ble for any reason to complete the enquiry

8 If the Summary Enquiry finds misconduct proved the Summary Enqmry may impose any penalty a Board of Enqmry may impose and may suspend any such penalty on such terms as 1t may determine

9 (1) A student who has been expelled from the Un1vers1ty (otherwise than for a ltmited penod) shall not be re enrolled except by the permiss10n of the Counctl

(2) A student who has been expelled from the Un1vers1ty for a hm1ted penod shall not have any of the nghts and pnv1leges of an enrolled student or be re enrolled, dunng the period of such expulsion

(3) A student whose nght to enter or be on the land and premises of the Un1vers1ty has been suspended by a Summary Enquiry or a Board of Enqmry or by an Appeals Committee (on an appeal from a Board of Enqmry) shall not have any of the nghts and privileges of an enrolled student or be re enrolled dunng the period of suspension

10 A student who is suspended under Clause 4 shall dunng the penod of suspension

18

not be entitled to be on the land and premises of the Un1vers1ty for any reason or purpose except for the purposes of the heanng by a Summary Enqmry or Board of Enquiry to which the matter has been referred or the heanng of any appeal from such Summary Enquny or Board or except as may be otherwise authonsed by the Vice Chancellor

11 Any findings, reasons and penalties handed down by a Summary Enqmry shall be reported to the next succeedmg meeting of the Council and recorded 1n the minutes of that meeting

12 (1) A Summary Enqmr; cons!ttuted to hear a charge or charges of misconduct shall be empowered (a) to deal with a charge or charges

of misconduct against another student or other students sub1ect to the consent of the student or students concerned and the un1vers1ty repre sentahve,

(b) to deal with another charge or other charges against the same student)

(c) to hear concurrently charges of misconduct against more than one student where the alleged offences anse from the same event, provided that any student may request a separate heanng in which event the Chairperson shall have absolute discretion to determine whether the Summary Enqmry shall conduct a separate heanng of the charges against that student,

(d) if it forms the opm10n that m the mterests of iustice It should do so either to refrain from dealing with any charge or charges of misconduct or, at any stage of hearing a charge before it pronounces a dec1s1on, to refrain from further heanng

13 Whenever a Summary Enquiry has been constituted (1) the Chairperson shall preside

(2) the quorum shall be two persons of whom one shall be the Chairperson,

(3) the Chairperson shall have a dehberatlve but not an addit10nal casting vote

(4) the Director of Admmistrat10n and Registrar shall appoint a member of the adm1n1strahve staff to act as Secretary of the Summary Enqutry,

(5) subiect to the reqmrement of a quorum the Summary Enquiry shall continue to act notw1thstand1ng any vacancy in its membership

(6) any member of the Summary Enquiry may continue to act notw1thstand1ng that since the Summary Enquiry was so constituted that member ceased to be a Pro Vice Chancellor, a Dean of School, or student member of the Academic Programmes Committee

14 (1) A student shall be gmlty of m1sconduct tf, rn the op1n1on of the ma1onty of the Summary Enquiry including the Chairperson, the student (a) wilfully interrupts the

proceedings of any Summary Enqmry

(b) acts tn an insolent manner to the Summary Enquiry or a member thereof durmg the sittings thereof,

(c) m the presence of the Summary Enquiry obstructs or assaults any person in attendance or any officer of the un1vers1ty 1n the execution of duty

( d) wilfully disobeys any drrect10n made by the Summary Enqmry to leave and remain outside the place where the Summary Enquiry is meeting

(e) w!lfully prevancates m givmg evidence to the Summary Enqmry

(2) The Summary Enqmry m whose presence any offence under this clause is committed may forthwith impose on that student one or both of the followmg penalties (a) a fme of up to $200

6 4 Maintenance of Order

(b) suspension for not more than 28 days of the nght to enter or be on the land and premises of the un1vers1ty, or any spec1f1ed bmldmg or land of the un1vers1ty or any specified part thereof

(3) Every such penalty shall be good and valid without any other order or ad1ud1cat1on whatsoever

(4) If any student found gmlty of misconduct under subsection (1) hereof makes to the Summary Enquiry before its r1s1ng such an apology for the misconduct as a Summary Enquiry in its uncontrolled d1scret1on deems satisfactory the Summary Enqmry may

1

rf 1t thinks fit remit the penalty either wholly or m part

Appeals Ar1s1ng from Summary Enqu1r1es

15 A student or the Vice Chancellor may appeal to a Board of Enquiry against the f1nd1ngs of or the 1mpos1tlon of any penalty by a Summary Enqmry The Board of Enquiry may affirm, annul, or vary the fmdmgs or penalty of the Summary Enqmry (by reducmg or 1ncreas1ng any such penalty or by imposmg another penalty m its place) The decis10n of the Board of Enquiry upon such an appeal IS final and conclusive and shall be reported to the next succeeding meeting of the Council and recorded 1n the minutes of that meeting

16 (1) An appeal shall be mstituted by notice 1n wnhng lodged with the Director of Admin1strat1on and Registrar by the Vice Chancellor or by the student concerned w1th1n fourteen days after the dec1s1on appealed against has been not1f1ed to the student

(2) The notice shall specify concisely the nature and grounds of the appeal and whether the whole or part only and which part, of the decision appealed against 1s complained of and shall also state with sufficient particulanty the grounds of such complamt and except by leave of the

19

Statutes

Board of Enquiry the appellant shall not be entitled at the heanng of the appeal to rely on any ground not so stated

(3) Where the Board of EnquHy considers that the notice of appeal does not comply with the reqmrements of sub clause (2) ofth1s clause rt may (a) refuse to hear the appeal or (b) ad1ourn the hearmg untJl the

requirements of subclause (2) have been complied with to the satisfaction of the Board and permit the notice of appeal to be amended as necessary for this purpose,

(c) contrnue or ad1ourn the hearing on such terms as the Board may in its d1scretton thmk l!t

(4) The Board of Enqmry shall consider the fmdmgs of the Summary Enqmry and the reasons for such f1nd1ngs No other evidence shall be received on the heanng except by leave of the Board

(5) Sub1ect as aforesaid the prov1s10ns of Clauses 17 to 23 below shall mutatzs mutandzs apply

Board of Enquiry

17 (1) There shall be w1thm the Umvers1ty a Board of Enquuy to be selected on each occasion on which 1t 1s called to sit in the manner hereinafter prescnbed

20

(2) A Board of Enqmry shall consist of a Chairperson, two members of the full-time teachmg staff and two students

(3) At the regular March meetmg of the Academic Programmes Committee each year the Director of Adm1n1strat1on and Registrar shall select by random selection two panels cons1st1ng respectively of twelve members of the full time teaching staff and twelve students These two panels shall be known as the Full time Teachmg Staff Panel and the Student Panel respectively and shall remain in existence until

the selection of the succeeding panel, provided that 1f any member of the Full time Teachmg Staff Panel or the Student Panel shall cease to be a member of the full time teachmg staff or a student that person shall thereupon cease to be a member of a panel

18 The Chairperson of the Board of Enqmry shall be a person appomted for this function by the Council for a term of three years The cond1t1ons of this appointment shall be determined from time *o time by the Council

19 Whenever a Board of Enqmry 1s called upon to sit the Director of Adm1n1stratron and Registrar shall constitute a Board by (a) adv1s1ng the Chairperson 1n writing

(b) (1) The Directorof Admm1stral!on and Regtstrar shall select by random selection two members from the full l!me teachmg staff panel and two members from the student panel who are available and willing to serve on a Board of Enqmry

(2) The Director of Admm1strat10n and Registrar shall give the student or students concerned and the un1vers1ty represent ative appointed under Clause 24(4) below at least seven days notice of the t1me1 date and place of the 1ml!al select10n of the members of the Board of Enqmry

(3) The student or studen,s and the un1vers1ty representative shall each be entitled to be present at the 1n1tial selection of members of the Board, but if any or all of them are not present the Director of Adm1n1stration and Registrar shall proceed with the 1ml!al selection in their absence

(4) Sub1ect to the prov1s10ns of sub clause (5) hereof, the student or students and the un1vers1ty representatives shall1

1f present each be enl!tled to challenge not more than three persons as they are selected by

the Director of Administration and Registrar without assigning any reason

(5) Where the Board 1s bemg constituted to hear charges against more than one student the students shall, if present be en!Jtled between them to challenge not more than three persons as they are selected by the Director of Admm1strat10n and Registrar without ass1gn1ng any reasons and the university representative shall s1m1larly be entitled to challenge not more than three persons

(6) If a panel becomes exhausted before a full Board of Enqmry 1s constituted a Board of three or four members may act provided that one of them 1s the Chairperson appointed in accordance with this Statute

(7) If on any occas10n 1t 1s found to be 1mposs1ble to appoint a Board of Enqmry as herem­before provided, the Chancellor may for the occasion in question appoint a Board of Enquiry compns1ng the Chairperson and two members, none of whom shall be members of the panels or members of the Appeals Committee, and the Board of Enqmry so appomted shall be a Board of Enqmry w1thm the mearing of this statute The appomtment by the Chancellor of a Board of Enqmry under this sub clause shall be conclusive evidence that it ts impossible to appoint a Board of Enquiry as here1nbefore in this clause provided

20 The funct10ns of a Board of Enqmry shall be (1) to hear and adiud1cate upon any

charge or charges of misconduct which have been referred to 1t in accordance with this statute

(2) to hear and adjudicate upon any appeal referred to 1t 10 accordance with this statute, and

6 4 Maintenance of Order

(3) to impose any penalty In accordance with this statute and with Statute 6 5 Conduct of Exam1nat1ons

21 (!) A Board of Enqmry constituted to hear a charge or charges of misconduct shall be empowered (a) to deal with a charge or charges

of mISconduct against another student or other students sub1ect to the consent of the student or students concerned and the Umversi(y representa!Ive

(b) to deal with another charge or other charges against the same student

(c) to hear concurrently charges of misconduct against more than one student where the alleged offences anse from the same event, provided that any student may request a separate heanng in which event the Chairperson shall have absolute discretion to determine whether the Board shall conduct a separate heanng of the charges against that student

(d) 1f it forms the opm10n that m the interests of 1ustice 1t should do so either to refrain from dealmg with any charge or charges of misconduct or, at any stage of heanng a charge before it pronounces a decision, to refrain from further heanng

(2) If a Board of Enqmry reframs from heanng any charge or charges the Director of Adm1n1strat1on and Registrar shall select a new Board of Enqmry which shall have the power to deal with the charge or charges as 1f 1t had been ongmally selected to deal with that charge or those charges

22 Whenever a Board of Enqmry has been constituted (!) the Chairperson shall preside, (2) the quorum shall be three persons

of whom one shall be the Cha1rperson1

21

Statutes

(3) the Chairperson shall have a deliberative but not an add1tional casting vote

( 4) the Duector of Admm1Strat10n and Registrar shall appoint a member of the adm1n1strahve staff to act as Secretary of the Board,

(5) subiect to the reqmrement of a quorum the Board shall continue to act notw1thstand1ng any vacancy 1n its membership,

(6) the Board shall contmue to act notwithstandmg that after it has been so constituted new panels have been selected

(7) any member of the Board may continue to act notw1thstand1ng that since the Board was so constituted that member has ceased to be a student or a member of the teaching staff

23 If after the consl!tut10n of the Board of Enqmry and before it has made its fmdmg the Chairperson shall die or become mcapable by reason of accident illness or prolonged absence, of conhnu1ng to act as Chairperson of the Board of Enqmry the Council or the Chancellor on behalf of the Council, shall appomt a new Chairperson and the Board of Enquiry shall then commence de nova A statement in writing by the Chairperson of 1ncapac1ty by reason of accident illness or prolonged absence of continuing to act as Chairperson of the Board of Enquiry shall be conclusive thereof and in case the Chairperson rs unable to make such a statement a statement of the Chancellor to the same effect shall be conclusive

Hearing of Boards of Enquiry

24 In respect of a hearmg before a Board of Enquiry the followmg provis10ns shall be observed

22

(1) The Director of Admmistrat10n and Registrar shall give each charged student notice in writing not less than twenty one days before the date of the heanng of the place and time of the commencement of the hearing and of the student's nghts under this clause

(2) Each student shall be enl!tled to select one other student of the Un1vers1ty or one member of the staff of the University (being in either case a person willing to act) as the students adviser for the purposes of the heanng and the name of such adviser shall be notified in wnting to the Secretary of the Board not later than two days before the date of the hearmg

(3) As an alternative to sub clause(2) above, the student may elect to have a legal representative (being a practitioner of the Supreme Court of South Austraha) for the purpose of the heanng in which case the name of such legal representative shall be notified 1n wnting to the Secretary of the Board not later than seven days before the date of the hearing but the Board may 1n its discretion at any time and upon such terms as it thmks fit allow the student to have a legal representative notw1thstand1ng an 1nsuff1c1ency or absence of notice

(4) The Vice Chancellor shall appomt one member of the staff of the Un1vers1ty to represent the Un1vers1ty at the hearing provided that if a student elects to be legally represented at the heanng the Vice Chancellor may appomt a legal representative (being a practitioner of the Supreme Court of South Australia) for the purpose of the heanng

(5) Each student the student's adviser or legal representative (if any) and the Un1vers1ty representative shall be entitled to be present throughout the heanng except (a) if they or any of them fail to

comply with a duect10n of the Chairperson of the Board 1n which case the Board may continue the hearing zn camera m the absence of any or all of them,

(b) when the members of the Board wish to confer among themselves or to consider their dec1s1on

(6) Any hearmg of a Board of Enqmry may proceed or continue 1n the absence of the student, the student's adviser or legal representative and the Un1vers1ty representative provided that proper notice has been given as to the tJme, date and place of that hearing

(7) The student or the student's adviser (or legal representative), but not both may call and examine any w1tness1 cross examine any witness called on the part of the Umvers1ty and sub1ect to sub clause (9) below, address the Board at the conclus10n of the evidence

(8) The Umvers1ty representative whether a legal representative or otherwise, may call and examine witnesses, cross examine witnesses called on the part of the student and sub1ect to sub clause (9) below, address the Board at the conclus10n of the evidence

(9) (a) A Board of Enqmry may m its d1scretlon 1n any case before it determine that all subm1ss1ons to the Board shall be m wntmg

(b) Whenever any subm1ss10n has been received by the Board m wr1hng, the Board, the student and the Un1vers1ty represent at1ve shall each have the nght to call before 1t the author of such subm1ss1on and to question the author on any matter set out in the subm1ss1on

(c) After the Umvers1ty has made a written subm1ss1on to the Board a copy of any written subm1ss1on made to the Board by or on behalf of a student shall be supphed to the Un1vers1ty representative who shall be entJtled to make an answering subm1ss1on in wr1t1ng to the Board, and vice versa

(10) A heanng of the Board shall be m private unless the student elects that 1t shall be open to members of the Un1vers1ty provided that, when two

6 4 M azntenance of Order

or more students are charged before the Board and their election under tills sub clause differs the heanng shall be m private

(11) At every hearmg the Board shall have complete authority to keep order m the proceedings mcludmg the authority to order any person to leave because of unruly conduct, and it may order that an open heanng be continued in private If In its op1n1on order cannot be otherwise kept

(12) Subject to this statute and to any rules or regulations made thereunder, the procedure of the Board mcludmg the order m which evidence may be called and addresses heard, is 1n the discretion of the Board

25 (!) A student shall be gmlty of misconduct if, 1n the op1n1on of the maiority of the Board, mcludmg the Chairperson, the student

(a) wilfully mterrupts the proceedings of any Board,

(b) acts in an insolent manner to the Board or a member thereof during the sittings thereof,

(c) m the presence of the Board, obstructs or assaults any person in attendance or any officer of the Umvers1ty m the execution of duty

(d) wdfully disobeys any d1rect1on made by the Board to leave and remain outside the place where the Board 1s meeting,

(e) wilfully prevaricates m g1vmg evidence to the Board

(2) The Board m whose presence any offence under this clause is committed may forthwith impose on that student one or both of the fol!owmg penaltJes (a) a !me of up to $200, (b) suspension for not more than

28 days of the right to enter or be on the land and premises of the Un1vers1ty, or any spec1f1ed bmldmg or land of the Un1vers1ty or any spec1f1ed part thereof

23

Statutes

(3) Every such penalty shall be good and vahd without any other order or ad1ud1cat1on whatsoever

(4) If any student found gmlty of misconduct under sub sect10n (1) hereof makes to the Board before its rismg such an apology for the misconduct as the Board in its uncontrolled d1scret1on deems satisfactory the Board may, if it thmks fit, remit the penalty either wholly or m part

26 The fmdmgs of a Board of Enqmry together with the Board's reasons and any penalties imposed by it shall be pubhshed m wntmg

27 Any findmgs and penalties handed down by a Board of Enqmry shall be reported to the next succeeding meeting of the CouncII and recorded in the minutes of that meetmg

Penalties of Boards of Enqumes

28 A Board of Enqmry may impose any one or more of the followmg penalties

24

(!) a fme of up to $200, (2) suspens10n from attendances at

classes, (3) suspension from use of laboratones (4) suspens10n from use of the library, (5) suspens10n of the nght to enter or

be on the land and prenuses of the Un1vers1ty, or any spec1fled bulld1ng or land of the Umversity or any specified part thereof,

(6) exclusion or suspension from attendance at any exam1nahon, imposed prior to or durmg the currency thereof,

(7) cancellat10n or refusal of credit for any exam1nahon in any case where cheating or dishonesty in exam1nahons 1s estabhshed,

(8) expuls10n from the Umversity for a hm1ted period,

(9) expuls10n from the Umversity and 1n addition thereto or in substitution therefor, may order that restitution be made to the Umversity or any other orgamsat10n or person of any property taken or removed or for any damage to property or loss incurred as a result of any act or misconduct

29 Any penalty imposed by a Board of Enqmry may be suspended by the Board upon such terms as the Board may determine

30 (!) A student who has been expelled from the Umversity (otherwise than for a hmited period) shall not be re enrolled except by the permission of the Council

(2) A student who has been expelled from the Umversity for a hmited penod shall not have any of the nghts and pnV!leges of an enrolled student, or be re enrolled, during the penod of such expulsion

(3) A student whose nght to enter or be on the land and premises of the Umversity has been suspended by a Board of Enqmry pursuant to Clause 28 or by the Appeals Committee on an appeal from a Board of Enqmry shall not have any of the nghts and privileges of an enrolled student, or be re enrolled, durmg the period of suspension

31 A student who is suspended under Clause 4 or under Clause 28 shall dunng the period of suspension not be entitled to be on the land and premises of the university for any reason or purpose except for the purposes of the hearmg by a Summary Enqmry or Board of Enqmry to which the matter has been referred or the hearmg of any appeal from such Board, or except as may be otherwise authorised by the Vice Chancellor

Appeals Committee

32 (!) The Council shall, at its regular March meeting each year appoint an Appeals Committee consistmg of five members of the Council, including one student member unless no student member ts willing to accept appointment

(2) The Council may at any time fill any vacancy m the membership of the Appeals Committee

(3) A quorum of the Appeals Committee shall be three, and it may contmue to act notwithstandmg any vacancy 1n its membership

(4) Where the Chancellor IS of the opm10n that a member of the Appeals Committee is involved in or 1n connection with a matter under reference or appeal to the Committee or has sat as a member of the Summary Enquiry or Board of Enqmry from which the appeal is made the member shall not part1c1pate in the Committee s cons1deratlon of that matter and his place may be taken by another member of the Council appointed by the Chancellor to do so

33 A student may appeal to the Appeals Committee from the 1mpos1hon of any penalty by or from the fmdmgs of a Board of Enquiry The Appeals Comnuttee may affirm annul or vary the f1nd1ngs of a Board of Enquiry, and may also or alternatively, confirm annul reduce or increase any penalty or impose another penalty m place of a penalty already imposed by a Board of Enqmry The dec!Slon of the Appeals Committee upon an appeal is final and conclusive and shall be reported to the next succeeding meeting of the Council and recorded tn the minutes of that meeting

34 (1) An appeal shall be mstltuted by notice 1n wnhng lodged with the Director of Adm1n1strat1on and Registrar by the student concerned withm fourteen days after the dec1s1on appealed against has been notified to the student

(2) The notice shall specify concisely the nature and grounds of the appeal, and whether the whole or part only and which part of the dec1s1on appealed against 1s complained of, and shall also state with suff1c1ent part1cular1ty the grounds of such complaint and except by leave of the Appeals Committee the appellant shall not be entitled at the hearmgs of the appeal to rely on any ground not so stated

(3) The Appeals Committee may refuse to hear any appeal which, in its d1scret1on, It considers does not comply with the reqmrements of due notice

6 4 Maintenance of Order

35 (1) The Director of Admmistrat10n and Registrar shall cause to be transmitted to the Appeals Committee the record of the proceedmgs before the Board of Enqmry together with eny documents or things received 1n evidence on the hearing before the Board of Enquiry

(2) No evidence shall be received on the hearing of the appeal other than such transcript and documents and thmgs except by leave of the Appeals Committee

(3) Sub1ect as aforesaid the Appeals Committee shall observe mutatis mutandzs the provisions made 1n respect of Boards of Enqmry m Clauses 17 to 23 above

General

36 (1) In the imposit10n of any penalty under this statute the authority imposmg the penalty shall take cognizance of any other penalty imposed upon the student by any authonty outside the University 1n respect of or ansing out of the same misconduct

(2) If any penalty is imposed by an authority outside the Un1vers1ty tn respect of misconduct which has already been penahsed under this statute, or If for any other reason 1t may seem desirable an authority empowered to impose a penalty under this statute may remit, suspend on such terms as it may think proper, terminate or reduce the penalty or replace it by another penalty to which the student agrees to submit An agreement by a student to submit to a penalty does not pre1udice any right of appeal agamst the fmdmgs of the authority

37 (1) A fme imposed under this statute shall be paid mto the general !unds of the University

(2) A !me imposed under this statute is payable withm fourteen days of its 1mpos1hon or 1f the fine rs Imposed zn absentia with1n fourteen days of receipt by the student of notificat10n of its 1mpos1hon, provided that an

25

Statutes

extension of time for payment may be granted by the person or body 1mpos1ng the fine and provided also that payment of a fme shall be suspended while an appeal from the dec1s1on 1mpos1ng it 1s 1n progress

38 It a student does not comply with any penalty properly imposed under this statute the Director of Adm1n1stratlon and Registrar shall report the matter to the Council and if the Counc1l 1s satisfied that the penalty has not been complied with 1t may by resolution, expel the student concerned for a period of one year

39 A Board of Enquiry, Summary Enqmry or the Appeals Committee may proceed with the hearmg of any charge of alleged m1sconduct by a student or of any appeal and may impose any penalty 1n respect thereof in accordance with this statute, notw1thstandmg that subsequent to the alleged offence the person concerned ceased to be a student of the Un1vers1ty

40 Any notice required to be given to a student under this statute shall be suff1c1ent if 1t 1s given 1n person to the student or is sent by registered post or cert1f1ed mail addressed to the student at the last address known to the Director of Administration and Registrar as the student s place of residence and when given by post shall be deemed to have been received by the student at the expiry of four clear days after posting

41 (1) The Counc!l 1s empowered to make rules or regulations not inconsistent with the Act or any statute for the maintenance of order w1th1n the University and for carrying out or g1vmg effect to this statute

26

(2) Nothmg m this statute affects the power of any person or body in the University duly authorised to administer any Un1vers1ty regulation not inconsistent with this statute and in particular nothing 10 this statute affects any power of any person or body within the Un1vers1ty to preclude a student from a course or otherwise deal with the student s case by reason of failure to satisfy academic requirements

42 (1) Statute 6 4 Mamtenance of Order enacted on the twenty sixth day of January 1978 1s repealed

(2) Notw1thstandmg such repeal (a) The Full time Teachmg Staff

Panel and the Student Panel appointed under the repealed statute and in office 1m1nediately before such repeal shall until a Full time Teachmg Staff Panel and a Student Panel are first appointed pursuant to sub clause 17(3) of this statute respectively continue in office and be deemed to be panels appomted under this statute

(b) The Appeals Committee appomted under the repealed statute and in office 1mmed1ately before such repeal shall be deemed to have been appointed under this statute and shall continue in office until an Appeals Committee is flrst appomted under Clause 32(1) of this statute

(c) Any complamt of mISconduct made under the repealed statute and not disposed of before such repeal may be dealt with under the prov1s1ons of the repealed statute which shall continue in force so far as necessary for that purpose

(3) Such repeal shall not (a) Affect the operatwn of the

repealed statute or alter the effect of the doing suffering or om1ss1on of anything prior to such repeal, or

(b) Affect any duty, ob1Igat10n or habihty imposed, created or incurred or any penalty forfeiture or punishment incurred or imposed or hable to be incurred or imposed pnor to such repeal or

( c) Affect any proceedmg or remedy in respect of any such duty, obhgatwn, hab1hty penalty forfeiture or punishment as aforesaid

Rules Made Under Clause 41(1) of Statute 6 4 Mamtenance of Order

1 A Board of Enqmry or Summary Enqmry may direct that in respect of any sitting of any open hearing, all observers be required to 1denhfy themselves before being admitted to the meeting room

2 No hearing of a Board ot Enquiry or Summary Enquiry shall proceed for longer than ten hours on any one day or continue past the hour of 10 p m on any day

3 Each Board of Enqmry or Summary Enquiry shall ma1nta1n a complete record of its hearmg by such method as the Board may reasonably determine and arrange

4 One copy of the record of the heanng or any part thereat shall be made available to the student charged or the students adviser (or legal representative) on request to the Secretary of the Board or Summary Enquny

5 At the conclus1on of the heanng of any matter referred to it the Board of Enqmry or Summary Enquuy may sub1ect to the consent of the student charged and the Un1vers1ty representative direct that the full record of its heanng or any part thereof be transmitted to the Library where it shall be accessible to any member of the University

6 5 Conduct of Examznatwns

1 A student shall not dunng any examination (1) Be in possession of any books notes

or diagrams other than those which the examiners have specified may be taken into that particular examination, or

(2) directly or mdtrectly give assistance to any other student or

(3) dtrectly or tndtrectly accept assistance from any other student or

(4) permit any other student to copy from or otherwise use his or her papers, or

(5) use any papers of any other student or

6 5 Conduct of Examznatzons

(6) by any other improper means whatever obtain or endeavour to obtain, directly or 1nd1rectly assistance in his or her work, or give or endeavour to give directly or indirectly assistance to any other student, or

(7) be gmlty of any breach of good order or propriety

2 When a student ts alleged to have committed a breach of any of the proviswns of this statute a complamt shall be made in writing to the Vice Chancellor, and such complaints shall be dealt with under the prov1s1ons of Statute 6 4 Mamtenance of Order and if the complaint 1s found proved the student, 1n addition to any other penalty which may be imposed under the prov1s1ons of Statute 6 4 shall lose that examination

3 A student who 1s detected comm1tt1ng, or apparently committing a breach of any of the prov1s1ons of this statute shall be summa1tly d1sm1ssed from the examination t oom

4 A student may not communicate with a member of the teachmg staff of the Un1vers1ty on any matter relating to any exam1nahon between the holding of that examination and the publication of the results

5 The Council may make such rules as are contemplated by this Statute or as are necessary or expedient for the purposes of this Statute

Rules Governing Conduct 1n Examinations

(a) Candidates are required to obey any 1nstruct1ons given by an examination supervisor for the proper conduct of the examination

(b) No candidate shall be admitted to an examination after half an hour from the time of commencement of the examination

(c) No candidate shall be permitted to leave an examination room before the expiry of half an hour from the time the examination commences Where in

All such enquiries should be directed to the Director of Admm1strat10n and Registrar

27

Statutes

special cases this rule is varied an appropriate announcement will be made

(d) No candidate shall be re admitted to an examination room after he or she has left it unless durmg the full penod of the absence the candidate has been under approved superv1s1on

(e) Smoking ts not permitted 1n exam1nahon rooms any candidate who leaves the exam1nat1on room for the purpose of smokmg will not be provided with approved superv1s1on durtng that period, and will not be re admitted to the exammat10n room (Rule (d) above)

7 1 Bachelors Degrees, Dzplornas and other Acadernzc Awards

1 The Bachelors' degrees diplomas and other academic awards offered in the Un1vers1ty shall be those specified 1n the schedules to this statute

2 Schedules as approved by the Council, and syllabuses as approved by the Academic Programmes Committee, shall define the course of studies to be undertaken for each Bachelors degree, diploma or other academic award

3 A student's prog1amme of studies for the year shall be approved by the Dean of the appropnate School or the Chairperson of the appropnate Board of Studies or the Dean s or Chairperson s nominee

4 On the recommendation of the Board of a School the Academic Programmes Committee may approve a student's admission to candidature for an honours degree m that School although the degree is not specified rn the schedules as being available m the School, provided that the degree is one which is offered 1n the University and that the student enrols for a programme of studies equivalent to a programme of studies available for an honours degree in the School

5 A unzt is the measure of weighting given to a topic as specified Ill the syllabus for that topic A normal year s work by a full time student is valued at 36 units

6 There shall be such classifications of pass and fall for topics in ordinary and postgraduate Bachelors degrees 1n

28

diplomas and Ill other academic awa1ds as shall be determined by Council §

7 There shall be such class1ficat1ons for honours degrees as shall be determined by the Council t

8 A student who fails to quahfy for an honours degree may be awarded an ordinary degree

9 Exammat10ns shall be held at !!mes approved by the Council

10 (1) In each School there shall be an Exam1nat1ons Board compr1s1ng members of the academic staff of that School and such other persons, not being persons enrolled for a Bachelor's degree, a diploma or other academic award in the School, as the Board of the School may appoint from time to time

(2) If two or more Schools share respons1b1hty for the teaching of any degree, diploma or other academic award a Joint Examinations Board may be appomted by the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendat1on of the approprtate Boards from among the riembers of the appropriate Exam1nahons Boards

(3) .¥here a Board of Studies has been estabhshed to administer a Bachelor's degree, diploma or other academic award there shall be an Exam1nat1ons Board compr1s1ng those members of that Board of

§ The Council has detenmned that the class1flcat10n of pass and fail for topics shall be the following gr«des

A D1simct10n B Credit C Pass NGP Non graded PdSS NA Not Assessed D Compensatory Result F Fail A grade of A 8 C or D m any topic w1!1 subject to the l1m1tat1on on the number of D grades which may be counted result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree or diploma A grade of F will result m no umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree or diploma For the purpose of Schedules mcorporatmg the grades NGP (Non graded Pass) or NI\ (Not Assessed) the grades NGP and NA are deemed to be at least equivalent to a grade of C (Pass)

t The Council has deternuned that the class1ficat1ons for the honours d gree shall be

Class I Class II A Class II B Class III

Studies who are not enrolled for a Bachelor s degree, diploma or other academic award adm1n1stered by the Board and such other persons not being persons enrolled for a Bachelor s degree or diploma or other academic award adm1n1stered by the Board as the Board may from time to time appoint

11 The Exammat10ns Boards shall have the followmg dulles (a) to admmISter such penod1c

exam1nat1ons as may be prescribed and to determ ne the results obtained by students in each topic or course, taking into account the results of examinations and any other forms of assessment,

(b) to determme m the case of any student who fails to pass a topic, what further work and examinations (1f any) the student must complete sahsfactonly before being granted a passmg grade m that topic

(c) to determine what restnctions (If any) should be placed on a students future programme of study

(d) to determme which student should be granted supplementary or special examinations

(e) to review the academic progress of students and, where appropriate to recommend preclusion from further studies of students whose progress is deemed to be unsatisfactory, and

(f) to recommend that students precluded from further studies be permitted to re enrol and the cond1t10ns (1f any) under which such enrolment should be permitted

12 For the pti.rposes of adm1nistenng Clauses 11, 17, 18 and 19 of this statute, the Science L1a1son Comm1ttee 1 as estabhshed by the Academic Programmes Committee, shall have the powers of an Examinations Board

13 (1) The Boards of the Schools and the Boards of Studies may prescribe pohc1es to be followed by their respective Examinations Boards in the dIScharge of their funct10ns and the Exammat10ns Boards shall give effect to those pohc1es

7 1 Bachel01 s Degrees

(2) The Academic Programmes Committee may also prescribe pohc1e~ to be followed by Exam1nat1ons Boards in the discharge of their functions and Examinations Boards shall give effect to those pohc1es Jn the event of a conflict between any pohcy prescnbed by the Academic Programmes Committee and that prescnbed by a Board, the pohcy of the Academic Programmes Committee shall prevail

14 The decisions of an Examinations Board concerning particular students shall not be sub1ect to review by the relevant Board of School or Board of Studies

15 With the approval of a Board of School or Board of Studies the functions of the Exam1nahons Board may be discharged by the relevant Standmg Committee Where the Standing Committee meets 1n place of the Examinations Board, the prov1s1ons of this statute pertaining to the Exammat10ns Board shall apply mutatis muta"ldzs to the Standing Committee

16 The member or members of the teachmg staff responSible for each topic shall report to the appropriate Exam1nc1.tlons Board on the performance of each student enrolled in that topic

17 (1) The Exammat10ns Board of a School or of a Board of Studies shall reqmre a student to show cause why the student should not be precluded from further studies 1n the Un1vers1ty 1f the student has not obtamed grades of C or better (a) mat least 24 of the 72 umts of

topics most recently attempted, or

(b) m atleast one third of the umts which the student has attempted 1n any three consecutive years of enrolment or

(c) m at least one topic m any two consecutive years of enrolment

(2) Any iepresentat10ns made by a student required to show cause under sub clause 17 (1) shall be considered by the appropnate

29

Statutes

Examinations Board with all other relevant circumstances and the Exam1nattons Board may decide (a) to take no action or (b) to perffilt the student to take

only such topics as 1t may approve during the current or followmg year or

(c) to recommend to the Academic Programmes Committee that the student be precluded from enroll1ng again in the Un1vers1ty unless and until permitted by the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendat1on of the Exam1nat1ons Board of the School or Board of Studies adm1n1ster1ng the course of studies in which the student wishes to enrol or re enrol and then only under such conditions (if any) as the Academic P1 a grammes Com m1ttee on the recommendation of the Exam1nattons Board may prescribe

(3) If a student required to show cause under sub clause 17(1) fails to respond to that request the appropriate Exam1nahons Board shall recommend to the Academic Programmes Committee that the student be precluded from enrollmg again in the Un1vers1ty unless and unlll permitted by the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Exam1n at10ns Board of the School or Board of Studies administering the course of studies in which the student wishes to enrol or re enrol, and then only under such condit10ns (if any) as the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Examinations Board may prescribe

18 The Examinations Board of a School or of a Board of Studies may at any time review the academic progress of a student enrolled 1n a course of studies or rn topics admimstered by that School or Board of Studies If the Exammat10ns Board 1udges the student's progress to be

30

unsatisfactory rt may require the student to show cause why he or she should be permitted to continue wrth studies or to enrol for further studies After consideration of the student s representat10ns (if any) and all other circumstances, the Examinations Board may decide

(a) to take no action or

(b) to permit the student to take only such topics as 1t may approve dunng the current or following year, or

(c) to recommend to the Academic Programmes Committee that the student be precluded from further studies 1n all or any topics for which the School or Board of Studies is responsible unless and until permitted to re enrol in such topics by the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Exam1nat1ons Board and then only under such condit10ns (if any) as the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Examinations Board may prescribe

19 After consideration of a recommendation from an Examinations Board under Clauses 11, 17 or 18 the Academic Programmes Committee may, after making such enquiry as 1t thinks fit decide (a) that the student be precluded from

further studies In the Un1vers1ty as recommended by the Examinahons Board, or

(b) that the student be permitted to continue studies 1n the Un1vers1ty under such conditions (1f any) as the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the appropriate Examinations Board may prescribe

20 A student who has been precluded from a particular topic or topics or programme of studies, and who wishes to enrol In topics offered by another School or Board of Studies must apply to that School Board or Board of Studies and may not enrol m topics offered by that School or Board of Studies unless permitted to do so by the Academic Programmes

Committee on the recommendation of that Board

21 The appropriate schedule to this statute may

(a) prescribe that all the requirements for award of a degree diploma or other academic award be completed w1th1n a spec1f1ed penod of time,

(b) prescribe that a student who withdraws from or falls to re enrol in, a course shall require the approval of the appropriate School Board or Board of Studies to re enrol in that course

(c) hm1t the number of l!mes a student may be permitted to attempt a topic

( d) prescribe the grade at which topics must be completed 1n order for a student to be pernutted to proceed with a course

22 On the recommendation of the appropnate Board of School or Board of Studies the Council may determine the amount of status (1f any) a student shall be granted towards a degree, diploma or other academic award on the basis of work completed or quahf1cat1ons obtained in the Un1vers1ty or elsewhere

23 Schedules and syllabuses shall take effect from the date of approval by the Council or such other date as the Council may determme and shall be published m the Un1vers1ty Calendar and such other pubhcat1ons as the Council may decide

24 In all cases where the statutes, schedules or syllabuses affecting the course of study for any degree, diploma or other academic award of the Umvers1ty have been or shall be suspended, repealed or altered Council may nevertheless allow students who have prevmusly enrolled under those statutes schedules or syllabuses to complete their course of study thereunder but may impose such conditions or mod1f1cat1ons as the Council may deem desirable in each case

25 If by any reasons of physical d1sab1hty a student is unable to perform any of the work prescribed for a topic the appropriate Board may allow him or her to substitute for such work other work or another topic substantially equal m

7 1 Schedule 1

standard and in such cases may impose such other cond1t1ons as it may deem desirable

26 A student shall be entitled to be admitted to a degree, diploma or other academic award if he or she has fulfilled all the cond11Ions prescnbed by this statute and the schedule appropriate to that degree, diploma or other academic award

27 Unless a student provides reasons considered satisfactory by the Exammal!ons Board of the appropriate School or Board of Studies a student will be deemed to have failed a topic if he or she withdraws from enrolment In that topic after two thirds of the duration of the teachmg penod for that topic

SCHEDULE 1 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts (B A ) m the School of Humamhes

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree 1s set out 1n terms of baste d1sc1phnes1 topics units and grades) defmed as follows A basic dzsczplzne m the School of Humanities 1s a d1sc1phne 1n which at least 36 umts are bemg attempted m a major sequence cons1st1ng of at least 12 units at first year level, 12 units at second year level, and 12 units at third year level The Board may specify core requirements w1th1n each d1sc1phne and these are set out in the d1sc1phne syllabuses A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded Unzts are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined m each case by the Board of the appropnate School, a normal years work by a full time student bemg valued at 36 umts Grades are the class1flcat10ns of pass and fail for topics 1n the ordinary degree and shall be A B c NGP D F

=

D1sttnction Credit Pass Non graded Pass Compensatory Result Fail

31

Statutes

A grade of A, B, or C m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree • A grade of D will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited for the degree, sub1ect to Clause 2 below A grade of F m any topic will result m no umts forthat topic bemg credited towards the degree

2 To quahfy for the ordmary degree a student must complete at least 108 umts, with a grade of C or better m at least 84 units, and a grade of D or better in the rema1n1ng units These grades must mclude a grade of C or better m the 24 umts winch cons!ttute the tlurd year levels of the two basic disciplmes The 108 umts reqmred for the degree must be made up m the followmg way (a) at least 33 umts makmg up a maior

and

sequence 1n a basic d1sc1phne w1th1n the School of Humamltes (the basic d1sc1phnes available are Drama, English, French Italian, Legal Studies, Modem Greek, Phtlosophy, Spamsh and Visual Arts and Archaeology)

(b) at least 33 umts makmg up a maior sequence 1n a second different basic d1sc1phne or in a second ma1or sequence designated by the Board, and approved by the Council as a ma1or sequence for purposes of this clause This basic d1sc1phne may be taken within the School of Human1t1es or w1th1n any other School m the Umversity With the perm1ss1on of the Board 1t may alternattvely be taken at the Umversity of Adelaide

and (c) 36 umts (or however many more are

required to make up the m1n1mum total of 108 umts) which may be selected from any disciphne or d1sc1phnes w1th1n the Un1vers1ty (or which may, with the perm1ss1on of the Board be taken wholly or m part at the Umvers1ty of Adelaide) provided that not more than 36 uruts

For the purpose of this Schedule the grade NGP (Non Graded Pass) 1s deemed to be at least equivalent to a grade C {Pass)

32

for the degree, (or 39 umts m the case of a completed ma1or), are taken at the Umversity of Adelaide

3 A student who gams a grade of D m any topic m a d1sc1plme m the School of Humamt1es may not proceed to higher level work m that disc1plme without the perm1ss10n of the Board

4 A student who fads the same topic twice may not re enrol in that topic without the pemuss1on of the Board

5 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student may not enrol in any year in more than 48 umts for the ordmary degree

6 A student may enrol for the honours degree as a full time or as a part time student on such conditions as the Board may determine

7 A student may proceed to the honours degree after completmg all the requirements for the ordinary degree, or 1f he holds any other degree or tertiary quahfJcatJon deemed to be of an eqmvalent standard, provided that hts performance m fulfilhng those requirements or that other degree or quahf1cat10n 1s considered by the Board to be of a sufftc1ently high standard A full time student proceeding to honours under the prov1s1ons of this clause wdl be required to complete 36 units of honours topics w1th1n one academic year

8 Some d1sc1phnes 1n the School of Humanities offer a two-year (72 unit) honours programme A student may proceed to the honours degree after completmg 72 umts towards the ordmary degree, mcludmg at least 24 umts m sequence in each of two basic d1sciphnes, provided that his performance m those units is considered by the Board to be of a sufflc1ently high standard A full time student proceeding to honours under the prov1s1ons of this clause will be required to complete 72 units of honours topics over two years The Board of the School may review a student's performance at the end of the first honours year and may 1f 1t deems that his work has not been of a sufficient standard refuse him perm1ss1on to proceed to the honours degree A

student who has completed the first honours year but does not proceed to the second honours year may be awarded the ordinary degree or may be required to undertake such add1t1onal studies and exam1nat1ons as the Board shall determine to quahfy for the ordinary degree

9 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student may not enrol 1n any honours year in more than 48 units

SCHEDULE 2 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts (B A ) m the School of SoCial Sciences

1 In this schedule

A dzsczplzne is a ma1or area of study 1n which teaching ts offered Social Science d1sc1p1Ines are those adm1n1stered w1th1n the School of Social Sciences and comprise Accounting and Finance American Studies Asian Studies Econom1c History Econom1cs Geography History Pohtics Psychology Soc10logy

A baszc dzsczpllne is a Social Science d1sc1phne in which a ma1or sequence of at least 33 umts 1s bemg attempted cons1shng of a m1n1mum of 9 first year level umts and at least 24 upper level umts spec1f1ed by the Board as constituting a ma1or sequence in that disctphne Ma1or sequence requirements In basic dzsczplznes are spec1f1ed in Appendix A

A second ma1or sequence IS a sequence of at least 33 units cons1st1ng of a m1n1mum of 9 ftrst year level units and at least 24 upper level umts Approved second ma1or sequences are specif1ed in Appendix B

A mznor sequence 1s a sequence of at least 21 units normally cons1st1ng of a minimum of 9 first year level units and at least 12 upper level umts to be selected from any of the sequences hsted 1n Appendix A and Appendix B except Australian Studies and Development Studies

A topzc 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final grade 1s recorded

7 1 Schedule 2

A multzdzsczplznary topzc is a topic designated as such by the Board of the School Mul!Id1sc1plmary topics are hsted m Appendix C

Unzts are a measure of we1ght1ng given to topics determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School a normal year's work by a full time student being valued at 36 units

Grades are the class1ficat1ons of pass and fail for topics m the degree and shall be A = D1stmct10n B Credit C Pass D F =

Compensatory Result Fail

A grade of A B or C m any topic will result tn the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree Except as stated 1n Clause 2 below a grade of D will result in the full number of units for that topic being credited for the degree A grade of F m any topic will result in no units for that topic being credited toward the degree

2 To qualify for the ordmary degree a student shall complete at least 108 umts with a grade of C or better m at least 84 units and a grade of D or better in the rema1n1ng units The 108 units shall include (a) a mm1mum of 33 and a maximum of

48 first year level umts of which 21 of the first 33 completed shall be m Social Sciences disciphnes and no more than 12 of the first 33 shall be 1n any one d1sc1phne

(b) at least 33 umts with a grade of C or better tn a ma1or sequence In one basic d1sc1plme m the School of Social Sciences as spec1f1ed in the programme for the d1sc1phne 1n Appendix A

(c) 12 units from the mult1d1sc1phnary topics hsted m Appendix C

(d) either (1) a ma1or sequence of at least 33

units with a grade of C or better In another baste d1sc1phne or 1n an approved second ma1or sequence spec1f1ed In Appendix B

33

Statutes

or

- (11) A mmimum of 21 umts with a grade of C or better in a minor sequence

or

If this option ts chosen a maximum of 60 units may be taken in the d1sc1phne 1n which the basic ma1or sequence is taken

(111) up to 48 units of elective topics where two ma1or sequences or a ma1or and minor sequence are not taken These units may be selected from any d1sc1phne or d1sc1phnes w1th1n the Un1vers1ty or may, with the perm1ss1on of the Board be taken wholly or m part at the Umverszty of Adelaide provided that not more than 39 units for the degree are taken at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide If this option is chosen a maximum of 60 units may be taken 1n the d1sc1phne 1n which the basic ma1or sequence 1s taken

3 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not proceed to any topics at second or third year level until the student has completed or is enrolled to complete at least 33 units at first year level

4 Except with the permission of the Board, a student may not enrol in any year 1n a cornb1nat1on of topics valued at more than 42 units

5 A student who holds any other degree or other approved tertiary quahflcahon may be granted status 1n not more than 36 units on account of that quahf1cahon A student who has not completed a degree or other tertiary qualification may be granted status 1n not more than 72 units for previous tertiary study

6 Except with the permiss10n of the Board, no topic may be attempted more than twice

7 A student may proceed to the honours degree of Bachelor of Arts provided that

34

the student s performance in the ordinary degree was of a standard considered suffzc1ent by the Board, or 1f the student holds any other degree or tertiary quahf1cat1on deemed to be of an equivalent standard, provided that the student's performance 1n obtaining this quahflcatlon was of a standard considered sufftcient by the Board

8 To quahfy for the honours degree of Bachelor of Arts, a student shall complete sat1sfactonly at least 36 units at honours level including at least 12 units of thesis A student s course of study for the honours degree must be approved by the Heads of Disciplme(s)/Umt(s) mvolved Honours programmes are outlined 1n Appendix D

Appendzx A

Basic D1sc1phne Reqmrements The following requirements for ma1or sequences in basic d1sc1pltnes have been approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Arts

American Studzes At least 33 units comprising Either a History I topic or Politics I and 12 units from topics 1n American Studies at each of second and third year levels

Aszan Studies At least 33 units compns1ng one topic selected from Asian Studies I Economics I or Economics IA Geography I A History I topic Pohtics I Psychology I Indonesian I Indonesian IA or Indonesian

Studies I Soczology I and 12 units from topics 1n Asian Studies at each of second and third year levels Second year level units must be completed pnor to enrolment in third year level units

Economzc Hzstory A m1n1mum of 33 units comprising ezther Economics I or

Economics IA plus Introductory Macroeconom1cs and 12 units from topics in Econom1c History at each of second and third year levels

Economzcs A m1n1mum of 33 units comprising ezther Econom1cs I or Econom1cs IA plus Introductory Macroeconom1cs and 12 units from topics 1n Econom1cs at each of second and thud year levels Econom1cs I or Econom1cs lA and Intro ductory Macroeconom1cs must be completed pnor to enrolment in topics 30201 Macro econom1cs and 30202 M1croeconom1cs

Geography At least 33 units compris1ng Geography I and 12 units from topics 1n Geography at each of second and third year levels 1nclud1ng two of the follow1ng sequences of topics

(1) 32213 Social Geography and 32307 The Western City Geography and Pubhc Policy,

(n) 32215 Uneven Development and 32308 Regional Econonuc Development,

(m) 32216Austrahan Environmental Patterns and 32311 Australian Resources Management

12 umts of second year level topics must be completed prior to enrolment m third year topics

History At least 33 umts compnsmg A History I topic and 12 umts from topics m History at each of second and third year level A first year History topic must be completed pnor to enrolment 1n second year level topics, and second year level topics must be completed prior to enrolment 1n third year level topics

Politics At least 33 umts compnsmg (a) Politics I (12 umts) (b) either

topic 35213 Political Philosophy and Its History (6 umts) or

7 1 Schedule 2

topic 35218 Basic Issues m Contemporary Poht1cal Theory (6 umts) and one other core topic (md1cated by an asterisk alongside the topic number 1n the Syllabus sectrnn) (6 umts)

(c) 12 umts of other upper year level (second or thud year) topics offered m the D1sc1phne

Psychology At least 33 units compns1ng 36110 Psychology I - which must be completed pnor to enrolment m any other Psychology topic 36230 Psychology II A Cogmbve Approach (12 umts) and 12 units from third year level topics excluding topic 36301 Research Methods and topic 36318 Supervised Literature Review and Research Proiect

Students transferrmg to the B A degree from the B Sc degree will be permitted to offer 36120 Psychology IS m place of topic 36110

Socwlogy At least 33 umts compnsmg Soc10logy I and 12 umts from topics m Sociology at each of second and thud year levels Twelve units of second year level topics normally must be completed prior to enrolment in third year level topics Since Soc1ology I was introduced for the first time m 1978, students who have passed a fust year Social Science topic pr10r to 1978 as the first year of a Soc10logy ma1or may offer that topic m place of Soc10logy I

Appendix B

Second Ma1or Sequences The follow1ng requirements for second ma1or sequences have been approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences or the Board of the respective School for the ordmary degree of Bachelor of Arts

Australian Studies At least 33 umts compnsmg One topic selected from Asian Studies I English I Drama I Econom1cs I or

History IC History ID History IE

35

Statutes

Econom1cs IA Philosophy I 22209 (18209) The Mass Media m Geography I Politics I Austraha 6 History IA Soc10logy I 22214 (16227) Austrahan Archaeology II 6 History IB Visual Arts and 22232 (13232) Australian Drama - Part II 6 History IF Archaeology I 23211 (35215) Australian Government 24 umts chosen from the topics listed m and Pubhc Policy 6 Groups A, B and C below 232I2 (41202) (33229) Gender m To ensure breadth and compleXIty of sub1ect Austrahan History 6 matter students must select at least 6 units 23218 (32218) Austrahan C11Ies as Human from each group except that no more than 6 Environments 6 units may be chosen from the d1sc1phne 23303 (35304) Internat10nal Poht1cs making up their first ma1or sequence Australian Foreign Pohcy 6 Group A Umts 23305 (33325) Australian Rehg1ous 22201 (18207) Austrahan Prose and History 6

Poetry m the Nmeteenth 23306 (33329) Australian Welfare History 6 Century 6 23307 (35327) 'Race and Australian

22202 (16231) Austrahan Art 1788 c 1900 6 Pohhcs 6 22203 (16232) Austrahan Art c 1900 to 23308 (35328) Poht1cs of the Austrahan

the Present Day 6 States 22204 (18208) Australian Prose and 23309 (32311) Austrahan Resource

Poetry m the Twenbeth Management 6 Century 6 23312 (41302) Femm1sm and Cultural

22213 (16226) Australian Archaeology I 6 Studies 6

22231 (13231) Australian Drama Part I 6 24202 (53781) Growing Up in Australia 6

22233 (16225) Nmeteenth Century 24203 (53785) History of Australian

Austrahan Architecture 6 Educat10n 6

22234 (21213) Language, Literature and the Law Austrahan Development Studies Contexts 6

22235 (18270) Austrahan Studies 6 At least 33 umts compnsmg

Group B Fzrst Year

23203 (41201) Women 1n Contemporary One topic selected from

Australian Society 6 Asian Studies I Econom1cs I or Econom1cs IA

23205 (33204) Twentieth Century Geography I Austraha 6 A History I topic

23206 (33224) Coloma! Austral!a 6 Pohl!cs I 23207 (35321) Party, Party System and Soc10logy I

Society 1n Australia 6 Second and Thzrd Year

23208 (38321) Austrahan Society 6 At least 6 umts from each of the followmg 23216 (32216) Australian Environmental groups

Patterns 6 23217 (32217) Water Resources and Group I

Austrahan Society 6 52201 (39222) Contemporary World

23301 (31301) Australtan Economic Development

Development 6 (Compulsory Core topic)

24201 (53780) Youth 1n Austraha 6 (This topic may not be counted both towards

24208 (53228) Education and Society 1n the Development Studies ma1or sequence and

Australia 6 as a mull!d1sc1plmary topic)

Group C Group II

22206 (14293) Apphed Philosophy Issues 52202 (35214) Pohhcs of New States for Austrahans 6 52215 (32215) Uneven Development

36

52216 (35218) Basic Issues 1n Contemporary Pohllcal) Theory

52302 (30302) Economic Development 52305 (38305) Soc10logy of the Developing

Soc1ehes 52312 (32308) Regional Econom1c

Develop1nent

52313 (35329) International Polthcs Concepts and Issues

Group III 52203 (35203) Government and Poht1cs of

the Chmese People s Republic

52205 (31205) Japanese Econom1c Development

52207 (35207) The Pohtics of Underdevelopment -The Afncan Case

52208 (33208) Modern India 52209 (33227) History of Modern Southeast

Asia 52211 (33201) Nineteenth and Twentieth

Century Lahn America 52304 (35301) Pohtical Change m

20th Century Chma 52306 (35306) Southeast Asian Pohtical

Development 52307 (35313) Comparative Strategies for

Development 52308 (30308) Comparative Economic

Systems 52309 (35322) ASEAN 52314 (38327) Comparative Sociology 52315 (30315) Asian Economic

Development

Indonesian

At least 33 umts comprising the followmg Indonesian I or Indonesian IA or Indonesian Studies I or Introductory Indonesian A plus Introductory Indonesian B 37250 Indonesian II and 37360 Indonesian III

7 1 Schedule 2

Latin American Studies

At least 33 units compr1s1ng

12120 Spamsh IA or

I 12110 Spamsh 1 * or equivalent command of Spanish or Portuguese, plus 24 umts of the following second and third year level topics of which at least 6 units must be at third year level and m the case of students also ma1ormg in Spamsh at least twelve units must be taken from group B

Group A 12218

12219

12212

12215 12216

12319

Group B

33201

39224

33324

33326

30110 or

Um ts Lahn American Studies A Introduction to Lahn Amen ca 6 Contemporary Lahn Amen ca 6 Lahn American Literature in the 19th and 20th Centuries 6 Lahn Amencan Poetry 6 Modern Lahn American Novel 6 Contemporary Lahn American State and C1v1l Society 6

19th and 20th Century Lahn America Social Change 1n Lahn Amen ca (This topic may not be offered both as a mul!Id1sci phnary topic and as a topic toward the ma1or in Lahn American Studies) Cuban Revolution,

6

6

1959 1976 6 Conquest and Colomzat10n of Mexico and Peru 1519-1550 6 Econom1cs I 12

Students also maionng m Spamsh may not mclude Spamsh IA (12120) or Spamsh I (12110) m the1r maior but must take one of the followmg topics

37

Statutes

30130 Econom1cs IA 12 32110 Geography I Society

Environmental Place 12 33170 History JG The Americas

1700 1900 12 35110 Pohllcs I 12 38110 Soc10logy I 12 14110 Philosophy I 12

Women's Studies

At least 33 units compns1ng A m1n1mum of 9 units of first year level topics accepted by any School of the University and 12 units from topics 1n Womens Studies at each of second and third year levels

Education

At least 33 units compns1ng (a) any first year level topic (m1n1mum of 5

(9 units) (b) 2 topics each of 6 units at second year

level (c) 2 topics each of 6 umts at thtrd year level

In selectmg second and thtrd year level topics students must take at least 18 units from topics m one of the following Groups

Group I Institut1onal/Soc1al issues and approaches Topics in this group focus on education as a s1gn1f1cant social 1nstttution which relates the 1nd1v1dual to society Attention is paid to the development of formal educatron systems and to less formal educational agencies and their significance for cultural, poht1cal and economic hfe

38

t 53920 The Ongrns of Modern Education

t 53922 Educat10n and Society 53218 Crosscultural Perspectives in

Education 53223 Soc10logy of Educat10n 53225 Research Methods m

Education 53228 Educat10n & Society m

Austraha 53780 Youth m Australia 53785 History of Austrahan

Education Twentieth Century Issues

53923 Educat10n Systems for the Thtrd World

Group II Ind1V1dual issues and approaches Topics m this group focus on the study of education as a process involving 1nd1v1dual children or learners exposed to a given curriculum They cover the characteristics and development of children learners, and the nature and outcomes of learning The topics available are

t 53920 Introductory topic t 53783 Child Development m

Contemporary Society 53921 Educallon and the Ind!Vldual 53222 Psychology and Educat10n 53225 Research Methods m

Education 53231 Language 1n Education

Human1ttes

Ma1or sequence requirements for d1sciphnes in the School of Human1t1es are spec1f1ed 1n Schedule 1, The Ordmary Degree of Bachelor of Arts m the School of Humanities

B1ological Sciences

At least 33 units compns1ng Units

Perspectives in Biology or B1olog1cal Sciences I 12 or 9 At least 12 umts selected from the followmg 86235 Introduct10n to Cell and Molecular

B10logy 3 86220 Heredity and Evolution 6 86222 B1olog1cal Experimentation II 3 86223 Ammal Phys10logy 3 86225 Basic Microb10logy 3 86226 Behav10ur and Neurob10logy 3 86228 Plant Anatomy, Phys10logy and

Development 3 86230 Populat10n Ecology 3

At least 12 umts selected from the followmg 87364 Plant Phys10logy and Development

(86229) 4 5 87365 Plant Phys10logy and Development

(86229) 6

t Second year topic In each of the b10logy topics offered m this programme a knowledge of the subiect matter of 86110 Perspectives m B10\ogy and of any topics numbered m brackets 1s assumed

87367 Plant Evolut10n and Speciat10n (86220) 3

87371 Neurob10!ogy A (86226) 4 5 87372 Neurob10!ogy B (86226 or

86228, 86235) 4 5 87390 Ammal Behav10ur (86220) 6 87391 Commumty Ecology (86222 86230) 6 88352 Microb10!ogy

(86221 86225, 86228) 3 5 88358 Cell and Developmental B10logy

(86220) 4 5 and any 3 um ts of the second year topics from the above hst

In special circumstances and sub1ect to specific approval, students may be permitted to take other topics from the School of B10logical Sciences These are listed in Schedule 3A the Ordinary and Honours degree of Bachelor of Arts m the School of B10logical Sciences

Information Science and Technology (Professor G I Gaudry- Head of D1sc1pllne of Mathematzcs) (Professor J N Darroch - Head of D1sc1pline of Statistical Science) (Associate Professor M f Brooks - Head of Disczplzne of Computer Science)

General Programme 36 units compns1ng

Fzrst year Units 12 units compns1ng 60130 Mathematics I (9 umts) and one of 65103 Elements of Data Analysis (3 umts)

or 65104 Elements of Stat1st1cal Science I

(3 umts) 12

Second Year 12 units from topics in the School of Informat10n Science and Technology with at most 3 umts at first year level 12

Third year 12 units from second or third year level topics in the School of Information Science and Technology 12

This programme offers great flexibility m the choice of topic combtnahons The following two choices are given as illustrative examples only

Example A Fzrst Year 60130 Mathematics I 9 65103 Elements of Data Analysis 3

7 1 Schedule 2

Second Yea1 60201 Several Variable Calculus 6 60202 Lmear Algebra 3 60203 Elementary Differential Equat10ns 3

Third Year 61201 Discrete Mathematics 1 3 63201 Prmciples of Analysis 3 65205 Statisl!cal Science 6

Example B F1rst year 60130 Mathematics I 9 65103 Elements of Data Analysis 3

Second Year 61241 Combmatorics 3 67214 Numerical Analysis 3 61201 Discrete Mathematics I 3 65104 Elements of Statistical Science I 3

Third Year 65205 Stal!stical Science 6 65206 Linear Model Computations 3 67233 Lmear Programmmg 3

Computer Science Programme 36 units compnsing

First Year 68110 Computer Science I

Second Year 68211 Data Structures 68212 Informat10n Systems 68213 Program Structures 68214 Computer Systems

Third Year 68311 Database Management and

9

3 3

3

3

Apphcat10ns 3 68312 Language Translators 3 68313 Programming Language Concepts 3 68315 Artificial Intelligence 3 68316 Theory of Computat10n 3

Theology The Board of the School of Social Sciences has approved ma1or sequences 1n five areas of Theology which may be offered as Second Ma1or Sequences towards the degree of Bachelor of Arts m the School of Social Sciences Details appear immediately followmg Appendix D to this Schedule

University of Adelaide Students may be permitted to make up a second ma1or sequence at the Un1vers1ty of

39

Statutes

Adelaide under the followmg cond1l!ons (a) the ma1or sequence is taken 1n a d1sc1phne

not offered in the Un1vers1ty,

(b) the approval of the Board has been granted

(c) the approval of the Head of Department concerned at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide has been obtained, and

( d) the student has already completed at least 9 first year units in the d1sc1phne concerned The topics shall be selected from offerings 1n each of the first, second and third years of the degree programmes in sequence, and

(e) no more than 39 umts for the degree are taken at the Umversity of Adelaide

Appendix C

Mult1d1sc1phnary Topics

The follow1ng topics have been approved as mult1disc1plmary topics which satisfy the degree requirement spec1f1ed 1n Clause 2(c) of Statute 7 1 Schedule 2

Umts 39204 Abongmes and Australian Society 6 39205 The Ecology of Man and Society 6 39206 Revolut10n 6 39208 Urbamsat10n 39209 Recreational Resource Evaluation

and Management 39211 Demography 39212 Pubhc Decis10n Malnng 39215 Federahsm m Austraha

6

6

6

6 6

39216 Famme 6 39218 Agemg 6 39219 Culture of Dis1llus10n 6 39222 Contemporary World Development 6 39224 Social Change m Lalin Amenca 6 39225 Mull!culturahsm 6 39226 Disease and Society 39227 Environmentalism 39228 Sport Issues and History

Appendix D

Honours Programmes

Amerzcan Stud1es

6 6 6

A single honours programme consists of the followmg

40

(a) Amencan Studies honours topics 18 (b) 34450 American Studies honours

thesis of no more than 18 000 words 18

A 101nt honours programme may be arranged by the student and the Heads of Disc1phnes concerned A hst of possible combinations may be obtained from the Disc1pltne

Asian Studies A single honours programme consists of the followmg (a) three topics from among the

Asian Studies honours topics bemg offered 24

(b) 37450 Thesis of not more than 20 000 words 18

Econonizc Hzstory A single honours programme consists of the followmg (a) Economic History honours topics 24 (b) 31430 Thesis m Economic History 12

A Joint honours programme usually consists of the followmg (a) Economic History honours topics

offered 6 or 12

(b) Honours course work 1n the second disc1plme 12 or 18

(c) 31430 Thesis m Economic History 12

Economzcs A single honours programme in Economics consists of the following which is a JOint programme of Flinders Un1vers1ty and the Umversity of Adelaide The honours programme is weighted at 36 units, of which topic 30420 carnes 30 per cent and each of the other topics ts worth 14 per cent Students are normally required to take topics 30420, 30401, 30402 and any three other hsted topics

30420 Economics Honours Thesis of not more than 12 000 words

30401 Advanced M1croeconom1cs 30402 Advanced Macroeconomics 30421 Labour Economics 30422 Internat10nal Trade 30423 Internat1onal F1nanc1al Issues 30424 Pubhc Economics 30425 Money 30426 Economic Development 30427 Econometrics 30428 Mathematical Economics 30429 Methods of Economic Research

30431 History of Economic Thought 30432 Economic History Any other approved topic

The full time programme includes coursework in both the first semester and the second semester but there is less coursework tn the second semester when students complete their theses, preparatory work and the def1n1hon of thesis topics having been undertaken before the end of the previous December The part time programme will normally Involve completion of the coursework prior to commencement of work proper on the thesis Full time and part time students must have their 1nd1v1dual programmes approved by the Honours Co ordinator

Geography A single honours programme consists of (a) Two topics from among the Geography

honours topics being offered which may include by special arrangement a topic from another discipline or School (6 umts each) 12

(b) 32422 Modem Geographical Thought 6 (c) 32440 Thesis and Literature Review 18

Hzstory A single honours programme consists of the followmg (a) Two topics, one from among the History

honours offenng in each semester (12 umts each) 24

(b) 33430 Thesis of not more than 15,000 words 12

The thesis is wntten under the supervision of a member of the History staff and is due on October 1

Polztzcs A single honours programme consists of the followmg (a) Two topics from among the Pohtrcs

honours topics being offered which by special arrangement may include a maximum of 6 units of topics from another d1sc1phne or School 12

(b) 35421 General Paper and Readmg Course 6

( c) 35450 Thesis of 15 000 to 18,000 words 18

The thesis is wntten under the superv1s1on of a member of the Pohtrcs staff and should be initiated in late December of the preceding year

7 1 Schedule 2

Psychology Except with the perm1ss1on of the Head of D1sc1phne, the honours progra1nme In Psychology will consist of (a) 36401 Conceptual Foundat10ns

of Psychology 6 (b) Three topics (4 umts each) selected

from the hst of Psychology honours topics 12 By arrangement this component may include (1) not' more than one topic (4 umts)

selected from the honours programme 1n Psychology at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide or honours program1nes in other d1scip1Ines at Fhnders or

(u) not more than two topics (8 umts) selected from the hst of Psychology Diploma topics approved by the Head of D1sc1phne

(c) 36440 'thesis of not more than 15,000 words 18

Soczology Except with the perm1ss1on of the Head of Disciphne, the honours programme tn Sociology will normally consist of (a) 38441 Advanced Soc10log1cal Theory 6

38442 Apphed Soc10logy 6 38443 Advanced Soc10log1cal

Research Methods 6 (b) 38440 Sociology Honours Thesis 18

Womens Studies A single honours programme consists of the followmg (a) 41405 Cntrque and Construct m

Womens Studies 6 (b) Two topics (6 umts each) selected from

the hst of Women s Studies honours topics bemg offered which by special arrangement, may include a maximum of 6 units oftopic(s) from another d1sc1phne or School, from the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide or from the South Austrahan College of Advanced Educat10n 12

(c) 41440 Women's Studies Honours Thesis of not more than 18,000 words 18

Joint Honours Joint honours programmes may be arranged between the student and the Heads of D1sciphnes involved and are usually of the form

41

Statutes

(a) Coursework in one d1sc1phne 12 26202 New Testament Exegesis

(b) Coursework in a second d1sc1pltne 12 Pauhne Epistles 6

(c) 39430 Thesis either smgly or 26203 New Testament Exegesis

101ntly supervised 12 J ohann1ne Literature 6 26204 New Testament Exegesis

Ma1or Sequences tn Theology Luke Acts 6

(see Appendix B) 26205 New Testament Exegesis Hebrews and Revelation 6

Old Testament (c) 26301 New Testament Theology 6 36 units compns1ng

And 6 units selected from second year topics (a) 25101 Introductwn to the Literature

and History of the Old in Old Testament not previously credited

Testament 6 Systematic Theology and 36 units compns1ng 26103 Introduct1on to the (a) 27101 Introduction to Theology

New Testament, 6 Revelation and Faith, 6 and and 26102 Prehm1nary New 28101 Early Church History 6

Testament Greek 0 (b) 12 units selected from topics (b) 12 units of second year level topics 1n Group A 12

selected from the following (c) 12 umts selected from the topics 25201 Old Testament Exegesis m Group A not prev10usly credited

The Pentateuch (may not be and Group B 12 taken with 25205) 6

Group A (Topics which may be taken at either 25202 Old Testament Exegesis The Deuteronom1c History

second or third year level)

(may not be taken with 25205) 6 27201 The Person and Work of Chnst 6

25203 Old Testament Exegesis 27202 Humamty and Grace 6

The Prophets 6 27203 Church and M1mstry 6

25204 Old Testament Exegesis 27204 Sacraments 6

TheWntmgs 6 27205 The Holy Spmt 6

25205 Old Testament Studies Israel s 27207 Eschatology 6

Sacred Study (may not be 27208 Chnstlan Ethics 6 taken with 25201 or 25202) 6 27213 Theology of God and the Tnmty 6

( c) 25301 Old Testament Theology 6 27215 Chnstlan Social Ethics 6

And 6 units selected from second year topics 27216 Liturgy Theology Symbol, in New Testament not previously credited Celebrat10n 6

New Testa'tlent Group B (Topics which may be taken at third 36 units compr1s1ng year level only)

(a) 25101 Introduction to Literature 27301 Study of Rehg10ns 6 and History of the Old 27307 Woman Man and God 6 Testament, 6

and Church History 26103 Introduction to the 36 units comprrs1ng

New Testament, 6 (a) 27101 Introduct10n to Theology and Revelation and Faith, and 6 26102 Preliminary New Testament 28101 Early Church History 6

Greek 0 (b) 12 unrts selected from the topics (b) 12 units of second year level topics m Group A 12

selected from the followmg ( c) 12 units selected from the topics in 26201 New Testament Exegesis Group A not prev10usly credited and

Synoptic Gospels 6 Group B 12

42

Group A (Topics which may be taken at either second or third year level) 28202 Mediaeval Church HIStory 6 28203 Reformat10n Church History 6 28204 The Church m the Modern World

(17th 20th Century) 6

28207 The Euchanst m History and Tradition 6

Group B (Topics which may be taken at third year level only) 28301 History of Chnst1an M1ss10ns 6 28303 History of Ecumenism 6 28305 Australian Rehg10us History 6 28306 Patristic Seminar 6 28307 History of Spmtuahty Semmar 6 28308 The L1turg1cal Year History and

Meaning 6

Historical and Systematic Theology 36 units compns1ng (a) 27101 Introduct10n to Theology

Revelation and Faith 6 and 28101 Early Church History 6

(b) 12 units selected from the topics m Group A 12

(c) 12 umts selected from the topics m Group A not prev10usly credited and Group B 12

Group A (Topics which may be taken at either second or third year level) 27201 The Person and Work of Chnst 6 27202 Humanity and Grace 6 27203 Church and Mm1stry 6 27204 Sacraments 6 27205 The Holy Spmt 6 27207 Eschatology 6 27208 Chnstian Ethics 6 27213 Theology of God and the Tnmty 6 27215 Chnsllan Social Ethics 6 27216 Liturgy Theology Symbol,

Celebrat10n 6 27217 B10medical Ethics 6 28202 Mediaeval Church History 6 28203 Relormat10n Church History 6 28204 The Church m the Modern World

(17th 20th Century) 6 28207 The Euchanst m History and

Trad1t1on 6

Group B (Topics which may be taken at third year level only) 27301 Study of Rehg10ns 6

7 1 Schedule 3

27307 Woman Man and God 6 28301 Histo1y of Chns!Ian M1ss10ns 6 28302 History of Liturgy 6 28303 H1st0Jry of Ecumenism 6 28305 Austrahan Rehg1ous History 6 28306 Patnshc Seminar 6 28307 History of Spmtuahty Semmar 6 28308 The L1turg1cal Year History &

Meanmg 6

SCHEDULE 3 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts (B A ) m th,e School of Informat10n Science and Technology

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree 1s set out in terms of topics units grades and programmes at study defrned as follows A topzc IS a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result ts recorded Units are the measure of weighting grven to topics determined In each case by the Board of the appropriate School Grades are class1flcahons of pass and fail for topics in the ordinary degree and shall be, A B c NGP D F

Distinction Credit Pass Non graded Pass Compensatory Result Fail

A grade of A, B C Dor NGP many topic will result in the full number of units for that topic bemg credited towards the degree ,A grade of F m any topic will result 1n no units for that topic being credited towards the degree A programme of studzes is an approved combination of topics representing a normal ihree years work for an ordinary degree or a normal four years' work for an honours degree

'

The Ordinary Degree 2 To qualify for the ordmary degree a

student shall obtam a total of at least 108 units 1 sub1ect to the m1n1mum requirements and provided that the student (a) shall not be permitted to count more

than 24 units with a grade of D

43

Statutes

(b) may attempt second third or fourth year level topics before all fmt second or third year topics are completed provided the necessary pre requ1s1tes and co requ1s1tes are satisfied,

(c) complete one of the programmes listed in (4), (5) or (6) with a grade of A, B C or NGP in all the prescribed topics,

(d) shall not include more than 48 umts of first year level topics in the degree except with the perm1ss1on of the Board where topics designated any level or with no level specified shall be regarded as first year level topics and

(e) shall complete 12 umts from topics outside the School

3 Unless a student provides reasons considered satisfactory by the Chairperson or nominee a student shall not be permitted to enrol in a topic rn the School after one third of the durat10n of the teaching penod for that topic 1

Programmes

Mathematics Programmes 4 In the following programmes

Mathematics Core Group refers to the follow1ng comb1nahon of topics Mathemat1cs Core Group IM2 60130 Mathemal!cs I 68110 Computer Science I 60201 Several Vanable Calculus 60202 Linear Algebra 60203 Elementary Differential

Equations 67214 Numencal Analysis 67252 Classical Mechanics 63201 Principles of Analysis 63311 Complex Analysis

(a) Apphed and Computahonal Mathemailcs Programme IAC M athematzcs Core Group together with 63214 Mathemal!cs for the

Physical Sciences

1 Refer to Clause (9) Statute 7 i for withdrawal from topic

44

63344 Parl!al Differential Equations

63346 D1fferenl!al Equat10ns 67215 Numerical Approximation 67253 Continuum Mechanics 67303 Calculus of Variations 67314 Numencal Methods of

Linear Algebra

67315 Numerical Solution of Differential Equations

67353 Analytical Mechamcs 67389 Computational Pro1ect and 61201 Discrete Mathematics I or

65205 Stat1sl!cal Science and further units drawn from other topics

Recommended topics are 63345 Dynamical Systems

67233 Lmear Programmmg 67332 Operat10ns Research I

67333 Operahons Research II

67361 Classical Hydrodynamics

67364 Elast1C1ty and Flmd Mechanics

(b) General Mathematics Progamme IG3

M athematzcs Core Group together with 61201 Discrete Mathemal!cs 1 65205 Stat1st1cal Science and

61212 Foundat10ns of Geometry

or

61213 Geometric Structures

and further topics of which at least 9 umts shall be selected from third year level topics 1n Mathematics, Statistical Science or Computer Science Recommended topics are

61202 Discrete Mathemahcs II 61241 Combmatoncs 67233 Lmear Programming

67332 Operat10ns Research I 67333 Operal!ons Research II

(c) Pure Mathematics Programme IP3

M athematzcs Core Group together wzth 61201 Discrete Mathematics I

61243 ClasSical Differential Geometry

61314 Groups and Rmgs 61315 Commutative Algebra and

Galois Theory 63313 Integration Theory 63315 Harmonic Analysis

63363 Methods of Mathematical Physics

65205 Stat1st1cal Science and further umts drawn from other topics Recommended topics are 61202 Discrete Mathematzcs II 61241 Combmatoncs

Computer Science Progamme IC2 IC3

5 The first and second year level Computer Science topics 68110 Computer Science I 68211 Data Structures 68212 Informatzon Systems 68213 Program Structures 68214 Computer Systems

and at least 5 of the followmg third year level Computer Science topics 68311 Database Management and

Apphcat1ons 68312 Language Translators 68313 Artlf1c1al Intelhgence 68316 Theory of Computat10n 68317 Advanced Program Structures 68318 Advanced Data and Knowledge

Base Systems 68319 Computer Networks 68321 Computat10nal Logic

and all of the topics 60130 Mathematics I 60201 Several Variable Calculus 60202 Lmear Algebra 60203 Elementary D1fferent1al

Equat10ns 61201 DIScrete Mathematzcs I 61202 Discrete Mathematzcs II

7 1 Schedule 3

65205 Stat1st1cal Science 67214 Numerical Analysis

and further umts drawn from other topics which cannot mclude 67201 Computmg wzth FORTRAN

Stahstzcal Science Programme IS2 IS3 6 The Stat1st1cal Science topics

65205 StatIStzcal Science 65206 Lmear Model Computat10ns 65303 Apphed StatIStzcal Science A 65304 l'\pphed Stat1st1cal Science B 65305 Stochastic Processes 65306 Lmear Model Theory 65307 Theory of Statzstzcal Inference 65351 Random Variables and the topics 60130 MathematICs I 68110 Computer Science I 60201 Several Variable Calculus 60202 Lmear Algebra 60203 Elementary Differential

¥quations 61201 Discrete Mathematzcs I 61241 Combmatoncs 67214 Numerical Analysis

and further units drawn from other topics

The Honours Degree 7 To qualzfy for the honours degree a

student shall complete an honours programme as specified in Clause 9

8 A student who has quahf1ed for the 'I f ordmary degree of Bachelor o Arts at a

sufficiently high standard or obtamed a quallf1cat10n deemed by the Board to be equzvalent may be permitted by the Board to enrol for the honours degree of Bachelo~ of Arts by takmg an honours programme

9 (a) The honours programme may be taken m any one of the followmg spec1ahsahons (1) apphed mathema!Ics, (u) 1 computer science,

I (111) numerical analysis, (iv) statISttcs, and (v) pure mathematzcs

Entry in.to an honours programme in a given spec1altsation will be restricted to those students who have quahf1ed for the

45

Statutes

46

ordinary degree in the same spec1ahsat1on or are deemed by the Board to have equivalent qual1f1cations (b) In each of the programmes of study

for the honours degree spec1f1ed 1n paragraph (a) a student shall complete ten topics

(c) Each programme consists of a certain numl:ier of compulsory topics and a certain number of optional topics

( d) The opt10nal topics may be selected from among the honours or graduate level topics in any field offered in the School of Informat1on Science and Technology in the current year or in the Faculty of Mathematical Sciences at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide Topics may also be chosen with permission of the Board from those, at a sufficiently high level, which are available in other Schools of Flinders Un1vers1ty and which represent a sequel to third year level already completed by the student

(e) A student may be permitted by the Board to subshtute a proiect for the seminar or for one or more of the optional topics

(f) A student may on application to the Board be permitted to substitute approved second or third year level topics amounting to a total of 9 units for two optional honours level topics The second or third year level topics so chosen may be selected from any topics in the School of Information Science and Technology not already taken by the student but 1n the case of the other schools of the University these topics must 1n add1t1on form a logical extension of the work ah eady done by the student

(g) The programmes of study m the indicated spec1ahsatlons are as follows (1) Applied Mathemahcs

63450 Applied Mathemahcs Honours Programme

(11) Computer Science 68450 Computer Science

Honours Programme

(111) Numerical Analysts 67450 Numerical Analysis

Honours Programme (iv) Sta!JstJcal Science

65450 Stahstical Science Honours Programme

(v) Pure Mathemahcs 61450 Pure Mathemahcs

Honours Programme

SCHEDULE 3A The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts (B A ) m the School of B10log1cal Sciences 1 In this schedule the course of study for

the degree 1s set out 10 terms of topics, units and grades defined as follows A topzc 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded Unzts are the measure of we1ght1ng given to topics determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School Grades are the class1f1cat1ons of pass and farl for topics 1n the ordinary degree and shall be A B c NGP D F WF

=

= =

D1sttnctlon Credit Pass Non graded Pass Compensatory Result Fail Withdrawn Fail

AgradeofA,B C,NGPorDmanytopic will result m a full number of units for that topic bemg credited towards the degree subject to the hmitat10ns of Clauses 2 and 3 hereunder A grade of F or WF 1n any topic will result In no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 To quahfy for the ordinary degree a student shall obtam a total of at least 108 units 1nclud1ng (a) at least 33 units of first year level

topics as spec1f1ed 1n Clause 7 and (b) at least 18 units of the B10logy core

topics as spec1f1ed 1n Clause 7 for AB2, and

(c) at least 15 units of third year level topics 10 Biology as spec1f1ed in Clause 7 for AB3, and

(d) 36 umts makmg up a ma1or sequence offered by the Schools of H uman1tles, Social Sciences or Information Science and Technology or m except10nal circumstances with the perm1ss1on of the School Board, a ma1or sequence offered by any other School Board of Studies or D1sc1phne 1n the Un1vers1ty

3 In accumulat1ng the 108 units required for the degree a student (a) shall except with the permission of

the Board, be permitted to enrol in any AB2 topics only if he or she has obtamed a grade of C or better m topic 86110 Perspectives m Biology

(b) shall not be permitted to count more than 48 umts of first year level topics,

(c) shall not be permitted to count more than 24 umts with a grade of D

(d) shall not be permitted to count more than 6 units of Special Topics 1n Biology

4 Status towards the B A m Biology (a) A student who holds any other

degree or approved terllary quahflcahon may be granted status 1n not more than 36 units on account of that qualification

(b) A student may be granted status m not more than 72 units for approved tertiary work which has not been counted towards a completed degree or other tertiary quahfication

5 A student who has qualified for the ordmary degree of Bachelor of Arts or who holds a quahf1cation deemed by the Board to be eqmvalent or who holds a lesser quahf1cahon and sahsfactor1ly completes such additional work as the Board prescribes 1n each case may be permitted by the Board to enrol for the honours degree of Bachelor of Arts A candidate for the honours degree IS

requued to have reached a high standard in the ordinary degree work, preferably rn the coursework as a whole, but at least in those topics relating to the field m which the honours work 1s to be undertaken

6 To quahfy for the honours degree of Bachelor of Arts a student shall undertake

7 1 Schedule 3

a prescnbed course of work 1n a field of b10logy outlmed m AB4 m Clause 7

7 The programmes of study for the ordmary and honours degree of Bachelor of Arts shall be

Ftrst Year , In the first year of the degree a student shall complete not1less than 33 first year level units mcludmg 86110 Perspectives m Biology (12 umts), and at least 12 umts of first year level topics offered by the Schools of Hmnamt1es, Information Science and Technology or Social Sciences as part of a ma1or sequence

Secood Year (AB2) I

In each of the b10logy topics offered m these programmes a grade of C or better m 86110 Perspectives in Biology and, except where a higher grade 1s md1cated m the syllabus, of D or better in any other topics numbered 1n brackets is assumed or the perm1ss1on of the topic co ordinator 1s required

' The second year level requirements are

Bzology Core Umts 86220 Evolut10n and Heredity

(86100 or 86110) 6 86222 B10logical Expenmentat10n II

(86100 or 86110) 3 86235 Introduct10n to Cellular and

Molecular B10logy (86110) 3

Plus at least 6 umts chosen from the followmg Bzology optzonal topics

86223 Ammal Phys10logy (86100 or 86110) 3

86225 Basic M1crob10logy (86100 or 86110) 3

86226 Beha\j1our and Neurobiology (86100 or 86110 or 36j'10 or 36120) 3

86229 Plant Anatomy Physrnlogy and Development (86100 or 86110) 3

86230 Populat10n Ecology (8610p or 86110) 3

Students with at least a D grade m 74100 Chem1Stry I or 74101 Introductory Chemistry can also chqse from the followmg B10logy opt10ns

I 86231 B10log1cal Expenmentat10n l

(74100 or 74101, 86100 or 86110) 6 86224 Basic Metabohsm

(74100 or 74101

47

Statutes

86100 or [86110 & 86235]) 3 or 86227 Cell Phys10logy (74100 or 74101, 89304 Physiological Systems

86100 or [86110 & 86235]) 3 ( + prac) (86223) 35

86228 Molecular B10logy 87371 Neurob10lgy A (86226) 45 (74100 or 71101, 86100 or [86110 & 86235]) 3 87372 Neurob10logy B (86226) 45

Non Bzology Core 87395 Ammal Behav10ur (86220) 3 At least 12 units at second year level from the

Schools of Human1tles1 Information Science or

and Technology or Social Sciences which must 87390 Ammal Behaviour (+ prac)

form part of a ma1or sequence in the chosen (86220 & 86222) 6

School (see Clause 2(d)) 87391 Commumty Ecology (86222, Optzons 86230) 6 In add1t10n to the core and opt10n topics above, 87392 Ecosystem Ecology (86222, any other topic (mcludmg first year level topics 86230) 6 up to a hmit of 48 umts) may be taken 88325 Fungal Populat10n B10logy

(86220, 86222, 86230) 3 Third Year (AB3) The third year level reqmrements are 88359 M1crob10logy (86221, 86225, (a) at least 15 umts from the followmg topics [86224 or 86228] 5

87330 Plant B10chemistry or (86228 & 86229) 45 88352 M1crob10logy (+ prac) (86221,

86225, [86224 or 86228] 6 87364 Plant Phys10logy and

Development (86229) 45 88360 Immunology (88352) 3 or or

87365 Plant PhyS1ology and 88361 Immunology ( + prac) Development (88352) 45 ( + prac) (86229) 6

87367 Plant Evolut10n and 88358 Cell and Developmental

Speciallon (86220) 3 Biology (86220) 45

or Phys10logy of Manne 87369 Plant Evolut10n and Specrnt10n 88390

( + prac) (86220) 4 Orgamsms (86220) 3

87397 Ecophys10logy of Plants 89335 B10cbem1cal Control (86220) 3 Mechamsms (86228) 6 or or

87398 Ecophys10logy of Plants 89345 B1ochem1cal Control (+ prac) (86220 Mechamsms (S) (86228) 4 [86227 or 86229]) 4

89336 DNA Structure, Function & 88390 Phys10logy of Manne Mam pulat10n (86228) 6

Orgamsms (86220) 3 or

89301 Cell and Membrane 89346 DNA Structure Funct10n &

Phys10logy (86229, Mampulallon (S) (86228) 4

[86223 or 86227]) 35 Molecular & Cellular Biology or 89339

89302 Cell and Membrane Phys10logy Laboratory (see topic entry) 6

( + prac) (86229, or

[86223 or 86227]) 45 89349 Molecular & Cellular B10logy Laboratory (theory)

89310 Phys10logical Systems (86223) 3 (see topic entry) 3

48

89340 Pro1ects 1n Molecular & Cellular B10logy (89339 +co reqmsites)

89369 Genetlcs (86220 86221 86222)

45

45 (b) plus at least 12 umts that complete a

maior sequence of 36 umts m the Schools of Human1t1es Social Sciences or Information Science and Technology (see Clause 2(d)),

(c) plus such additlonal topics taken from any School as are reqmred to complete 108 units These can include second year biology options (see AB2 above),

(d) up to 6 umts of Special Topics m B10logy (see Syllabus), subiect to their availability and to specific approval of the topic co ordinator

Fourth Year (AB4 =BA Honours) Fields of study available include animal phys10logy, behav10ural b10logy, b10chemistry cell phys10logy, plant systematics and spec1at1on developmental biology ecology genetics, immunology m1crob1ology palaeob10logy plant phys10logy populatlon genetics, manne biology and biology with psychology Ehgibihty for enrolment m particular areas depends on topics taken in AB3

SCHEDULE 4 The Fust Year of the Degree of Bachelor of Science (B Sc ) 1 In this schedule the course of study for

the first year of the degree 1s set out in terms of topics, units and grades defined as follows A topzc 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Units are the measure of weighting given to topics determmed m each case by the Board of the appropriate School Grades are the class1f1cahons of pass and fail for topics m the ordmary degree and shall be A B c NGP D F

=

=

D1sttncbon Credit Pass Non graded Pass Compensatory Result Fail

AgradeofA B C,NGPorDmanytopic will result 1n the full number of units for

7 1 Schedule 4

the topic being credited towards the degree sub1ect to the hm1tat1ons of Schedule 5 (Clause 2 (b)), Schedule 6 (Clause 2) Schedule 7 (Clause 2), and Schedule 8 (Clause 2) A grade of F 1n any topic will result in no umts for the topic bemg credited towards the degree

2 Students should enrol mat least 36 umts (108 units are required 1n total for the degree of Bachelor of Science) In order to sal!sfy the reqmrements of this Schedule,, students must be credited with at least 27 units from three of the following sub1ect areas with a m1n1mum of 9 units 1n any sub1ect

Sub1ect Area Chem1stiy

Physics

Topics 74100 Chem1stiy I

77102 Physics I Earth Sciences B1olog1cal Sc1entes

81100 Earth Sciences I 86100 B1olog1cal

Units

9

9

9

Psychology Mathematics Computer Science

Science I 36120 Psychology IS 60130 Mathematics 1 68110 Computer

Science 1

9 9

9

Students 1 may make up the

their 36 'units either from

9

balance of the above

sub1ect hshngs or from other topics offered m the Umversity

3 Students mtendmg to proceed to particular second and third year programmes must include among their chosen first year topics any pre requ1s1te topics hsted below and are also advised to select topics from amongst the recommended topics

Second year M1n1mum Recontmended programmes pre requisite topics

topics

Mathematics 60130 68110 Mathematics I Computer

Science I Statistical 60130 68110 Science Mathen1atics I Computer

Science I* 65103 Elements of Data Analysts 65104 Elements of Statistical Science I

Although not compulsory for complet1on of Fust Year reqmrements this topic 1s a core topic m the degree reqmrements of the School of Information Science and Technology

49

Statutes

Second year Minimum Recommended Chemistry & 74100 programmes pre requzszte topics Earth Sciences Chemistry I

topics (PS) 81100 Earth

Computer 60130 Sciences I

Science Mathematics I 77102 Physics I

68110 Computer (or 77101

Science I Introduction to Phys1cs)t

Physics (Pl) 60130 60130 Mathematics I Mathematics I

77102 Physics I (or 60117 Introductory

Physics 60130 Mathematics A (P2) Mathematics I or 60118

77102 Physics I Introductory

Theoretical 60130 Mathematics B)

Physics (P3) Mathematics I Meteorology 81100 Earth 77102 Physics I and Sciences I 68110 Oceanography* 77102 Physics I Computer (E21) 60130 Science I Mathematics I

Physics and 60130 Geophysics 81100 Earth 74100 (E24) Sciences I Chemistry I

Computer Mathematics I 77102 Physics I (or 74101 Science (P4) 77102 Physics I 60130 Introduction to

68110 Mathematics I Chemistry) Computer Science I Geophysics 81100 Earth 74100

(E27) Sciences I Chemistry I Chemistry 74100 60130 (PS) Chemistry I Mathematics I

77102 Physics I 77102 Physics I (or 77101 Introduction Geology 81100 Earth to Physics)t (E26) Sciences I 60130 74100 Mathematics I Chemistry I (or 60117 60130 Introductory Mathematics I Mathematics A and 77101 or 60118 Introduction Introductory to Physics or Mathematics B) 77102 Physics I

and 60118 Chemistry & 74100 Introductory Physics {P6) Chem1sby I Mathematics B

77102 Physics I Hydrology 81100 Earth 60130

Mathematics I (E28) Sciences I 77102 Physics I

Chemistry & 74100 77102 Physics! 74100 Biology (P7) Chemistry I (or 77101 Chemistry I

86100 Introduction to 60130 B1olog1cal Phys1cs)t Mathematics I Science I

Geology and 81100 Earth 77102 Physics I 60130 Mathematics I Biology Sciences I (or 77101

(or 60117 (E29) 86100 Introduction to

Introductory B1olog1cal Physics)

Mathematics A Science I

or 60118 Introductory Mathematics B) In some cases the Board of the School of Earth Sciences may

consider permitting students with outstandmg grades in Mathematics I and Physics I to proceed to Meteorology and

t 86100 B1olog1cal Science I or81100 Earth Sciences I must also Oceanography or Geophysics without having done Earth be taken 1£77101 Introduct10n to Physics 1s chosen Sciences I

50

Second year Mzn1mum programmes pre requisite

topics

74100 Chemistry I

Biology 86100 (82) B1olog1cal

Sciences I 74100 Chemistry I (or 74101 Introduction to Chemistry) at D grade or better

Manne 81100 Earth Sciences A Sciences I (EB2) 86100

B1olog1cal Science I 77102 Physics I 60130 Mathematics I

r Manne 86100 Sciences B1olog1cal (BE22) Science I

81100 Earth Sciences I 74100 Chemistry I 60130 Mathematics I

Psychology 36120 (S26) Psychology IS

Reco1nmended topics

60130 Mathematics I (or 60117 Introductory Mathematics A)

86100 B1olog1cal Science I 68110 Computer Science I 65104 Elements of Statistical Science I 60130 Mathematics I (or 60117 Introductory Mathematics A or 60118 Introductory Mathematics B) 74100 Chemistry I (or 74101 Introduction to Chemistry) 77102 Phys1csI (or 77101 Introduction to Physics)

7 1 Schedule 5

SCHEDULE 5 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Science (B Sc ) m the School of Information Science and Technology

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degr

1ee 1s set out 1n terms of topics,

units, grades and programmes of study defmed as follows A topzc IS a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Umts are the measure of we1ghtmg given to topics determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School Grades are the class1ficat10ns of pass and fat! for topics m the ordmary degree and shall be A B c NGP NA D F

D1sttnctton Credit Pass Non graded Pass Not Assessed Compensatory Result Fail

A grade of A, B, C Dor NG Pm anytop1c will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree A grade of F m any topic will result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree A programme of studzes is an approved combination of topics representing a normal three years' work for an ordinary degree or a normal four years' work for an honours degree

The Ordinary Degree

2 To qualify for the ordmary degree a student shall obtam a total of at least 108 units sub1ect to the m1n1mum requirements and provided that the student (a) shall not be permitted to count more

than 24 units with a grade of D, (b) may attempt second, thud or fourth

year level topics before all first second or third year topics are completed, provided the necessary pre requ1s1tes and co requ1s1tes are sat1sf1ed,

(c) complete one of the programmes hsted m (4), (5) or (6) with a grade

51

Statutes

of A,B C or NGP m prescribed topics,

(d) shall not mclude more than 48 umts of first year level topics m the degree except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, where topics designated 'any level' 'Or with no level spec1f1ed shall be regarded as first year level topics and

(e) shall sal!sfy the requirements of Schedule 4 The first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science (B Sc )

3 Unless a student provides reasons considered satisfactory by the Chairperson or nominee a student shall not be permitted to enrol in a topic 1n the School after one third of the durat10n of the teachmg period for that topic 1

Programmes

Mathematics Programmes 4 In the followmg programmes Math

emat1cs Core Group refers to the followmg combmat10n of topics

Mathematics Core Group IM2 60130 Mathematics I 68110 Computer Science I 60201 Several Variable Calculus 60202 Lmear Algebra 60203 Elementary D1fferenl!al

Equations 67214 Numerical Analysis 67252 Class1cal Mechanics 63201 Princ1ples of Analysis 63311 Complex Analysis

(a) Apphed and Computatrnnal Mathematics Programme IAC Mathe1natics Core Group together with 63214 Mathemal!cs for the

Physical Sciences 63344 Pama! Differential

Equations 63346 D1fferenl!al Equal!ons 67215 Numencal Approxtmat1on

67253 Continuum Mechanics 67303 Calculus of Variations 67314 Numerical Methods of

Lmear Algebra

1Refer to Clause (9) of Statute 7 1 for withdrawal from topic

52

67315 Numerical Solul!on of D1fferent1al Equations

67353 Analytical Mechamcs 67389 Computat10nal Pro1ect and 61201 Discrete Mathematics I or 65205 Sta1Ist1cal Science and further units drawn from other topics

Recommended topics are 63345 Dynamical Systems 67233 Lmear Programmmg 67332 Operat10ns Research I 67333 Operal!ons Research II 67361 Classical Hydrodynamics 67364 Elast1c1ty and Fluid

Mechanics

(b) General Mathematics Programme IG3 Mathematics Coie Group together with 61201 Discrete Mathemal!cs 1

65205 Stal!st1cal Science and 61212 Foundat10ns of Geometry or 61213 Geometric Structures and further topics of which at least 9 umts shall be selected from third year level topics 1n Mathemat1cs1

Stattst1cal Science or Computer Science

Recommended topics are 61202 Discrete Mathemal!cs II 61241 Combmatoncs 67233 Lmear Programmmg 67332 Operat10ns Research I 67333 Operat10ns Research II

(c) Pure Mathematics Programme IP3 Mathematics Core Group together with 61201 Discrete Mat'Iemal!cs I 61243 Classical Differenl!al

Geometry 61314 Groups and Rmgs

61315 Commutative Algebra and Gal01s Theory

63313 Integrat10n Theory 63315 Harmomc AnalySis 63363 Methods of Mathematical

Physics 65205 Stat1st1cal Science and further units drawn from other topics

Recommended topics are 61202 Discrete Mathematics !I 61241 Comb1natoncs

Computer Science Programme IC2 IC3 5 The first and second year level Computer

Science topics 68110 Computer Science I 68211 Data Structures 68212 Informat10n Systems 68213 Program Structures 68214 Computer Systems and at least 5 of the followmg third year level Computer Science topics

68311 Database Management and Apphcat10ns

68312 Language Translators 68313 Programmmg Language

Concepts 68315 Art1f1C1al Intelhgence 68316 Theory of Computat10n 68317 Advanced Program Structures 68318 Advanced Data and Knowledge

Base Systems 68319 Computer Networks 68321 Computat10nal Logic and all of the topics 60130 Mathematics I 60201 Several Vanable Calculus 60202 Lmear Algebra 60203 Elementary D1fferent1al

Equat10ns 61201 Discrete Mathematics I 61202 Discrete MathematJcs !I 65205 Sta!Js!Jcal Science 67214 Numencal Analysis and further units drawn from other topics which cannot mclude 67201 Computmg with FORTRAN

7 1 Schedule 5

Statist1cal Science Programme 182 183

6 The Statistical Science topics 65205 Stat1st1cal Science 65206 Lmear Model Computat10ns 65303 Apphed Stat1stJcal Science A 65304 Apphed Stat1st1cal Science B 65305 Stochastic Processes 65306 Lmear Model Theory 65307 Theory of Stat1s!Jcal Inference 65351 Random Vanables and the topics 60130 MathematJcs 1

68110 Computer Science I 60201 Several Vanable Calculus 60202 Lmear Algebra 60203 Elementary D1fferen!Jal

Equations 61201 Discrete Mathematics I 61241 Combmatoncs 67214 Numencal Analysis and further units drawn from other topics

The Honours Degree 7 To quahfy for the honours degree a

student shall complete an honours programme as spec1f1ed in Clause 7

8 A student who has quahfied for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Science at a suff1C1ently high standard or obtamed a quahf1cat10n deemed by the Board to be eqmvalent may be permitted by the Board to enrol for the honours degree of Bachelor of Science by taking an honours programme

9 (a) The honours programme may be taken in any one of the following spec1ahsahons (1) apphed mathematics (11) computer science, (111) numerical analysis, (iv) statistics, and (v) pure mathematJcs

Entry into an honours programme tn a given specialisation will be restricted to those students who have quahf1ed for the ordinary degree 1n the same spec1altsahon or are deemed by the Board to have equivalent qualifications (b) In each of the programmes of study

for the honours degree spec1f1ed m

53

Statutes

54

paragraph (a) a student shall complete ten topics

(c) Each programme consists of a certain number of compulsory topics and a certain number of optional topics

( d) The optwnal topics may be selected from among the honours or graduate level topics m any field offered m the School of Information Science and Technology 1n the current year, or 1n the Faculty of Information Science and Technology at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide Topics may also be chosen with perm1ss1on of the Board from those at a sufficiently high level which are avatlable 1n other Schools of Flinders Un1vers1ty and which represent a sequel to third year level already completed by the student

(e) A student may be permitted by the Board to subslltute a pro1ect for the seminar or for one or more of the optional topics

(f) A student may on appl!catwn to the Board be permitted to subslltute approved second or third year level topics amounting to a total of 9 units for two opt1onal honours level topics The second or third year level topics so chosen may be selected from any topics in the School of Information Science and Tech nology not already taken by the student, but in the case of the other schools of the Un1vers1ty these topics must, rn addition form a logical extension of the work already done by the student

(g) The programmes of study m the indicated specialisations are as follows

(i) Applied Mathematics 63410 Applied Mathematics

Honours Programme (u) Computer Science

68410 Computer Science Honours Programme

(m) Numerical Analysis 67 410 N umencal Analysis

Honours Programme

(1v) Stat1shcal Science 65410 Statistical Science

Honours Programme (v) Pure Mathematics

61410 Pure Mathematics Honours Programme

SCHEDULE 6 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science (B Sc ) m the School of Physical Sciences

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree IS set out 1n terms of programmes, topics, units and grades defined as follows A programme is an approved combrnatlon of topics representing a year s full trme study A topic IS a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded Unzts are the measure of weighting grven to topics, determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School a normal year's work by a full llme student bemg valued at 36 umts Grades are the class1ficat1ons of pass and fail for topics 1n the ordinary degree and shall be A B c NGP NA D F

D1stlnctxon Credit Pass Non graded pass Not Assessed Compensatory Result Fail

A grade of A, B C, D, NGP or NA many topic will sub1ect to the proviswns of Clauses 2 and 3 hereunder result in the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree A grade of F 1n any topic will result 1n no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 To quahfy for the ordmary degree a student shall, sub1ect to the prov1s1ons of Clauses 3, 4 5 and 6 hereunder, complete 108 units compns1ng at least 84 units at a grade of C or better and no more than 24 umts at a grade of D*t

Pract1cal classes are compulsory for students enrolled m the School Unsatisfactory part1c1pation will result m failure m the programme

t Satisfactory part1c1pat10n m laboratory classes and attent10n to tutorial exercises m all Physics topics are compulsory Unsatisfactory part1c1pat10n m these areas will result m failure

3 The 108 umts which make up the ordinary degree shall mclude (a) more than 35 umts selected

according to the requirements for the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science as prescribed in Schedule 4

(b) more than 35 um ts resulting from satisfactory completion of one of the second year level programmes approved by the Council on the recommendation of the Board of the School Details of the approved programmes are set out 1n Appendix A

(c) more than 35 units resulting from satisfactory completion of one of the thud year level programmes approved by the Counc!l on the recommend ah on of the Board of the School Details of the approved programmes are set out 1n Appendix B

The 108 umts shall mclude no more than 48 units at first year level

4 Entrance to second and third year level programmes will depend on completion of not less than 18 umts of grade C or better m the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science and satisfactory fulfilment of the spec1f1c pre requ1s1tes for the appropriate topics of that programme

5 The Exam1nahons Board may grant a maximum of 6 conceded units in any one of second or third year level programmes lrsted 1n order to bnng a student's total 1n that programme to the required number of units, not exceeding 36 units Any such conceded units will be counted as unspecified compensatory result units (grade D) for the purpose of Clause 2 above, but a topic grade of fail (F) will be unchanged on the students academic record

6 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student may not enrol more than twice in the same topic

7 To quahfy for the honours degree a student shall complete satisfactorily at least 36 units 1n one of the honours programmes approved by the Council on the recommendat10n of the Board of the School Deta!ls of approved honours programmes are set out 1n Appendix C

7 1 Schedule 6

8 Entrance into an honours programme will be restricted to students who have quahfied for the Ordmary Degree of Bachelor of Science at a sufficiently high standard or obtained a quahficat1on deemed by the Board to be eqmvalent

9 A student who withdraws durmg the honours year shall not re enrol as an honours student 1n the School except with the perm1ss1on of the Board and on such cond1hons as it may determine

Appendix A Second Year Programmes Pl This programme leads to further studies for the ordinary and honours degrees of Bachelor of Science 1n Physics It normally leads to programme P31 It is designed for the student who requires a balanced exposure to experimental and theoretical aspects of Physics Entry into the programme 1s normally restricted to students who have completed not less than 18 units at grade C or better in the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science (Schedule 4) these units to include 77102 Physics I and 60130 Mathemal!cs I

There are no optional topics in this programme The programme comprises the following topics Physics Topics (Core) Units Semester 77210 Problem Solving 1n Physics 3 77211 Quantum Mechanics I 3 i 77220 Electromagnetic Theory I 3 2 772i2 Electronics 6 77221 Physics Laboratory 2 3 2 77223 Optical Physics 3 2

Mathematics Topic (Core) 60201 Several Vanable Calculus 6 60202 Linear Algebra 3 2 60203 Elementary Differential

Equations 3 2 632i4 Mathematics for the

Physical Sciences 3 2

P2 This programme leads to further studies for the ordinary and honours degrees of Bachelor of Science m Physics Subrect to the approval of the Board of the School of Informat10n Science and Technology, it may also lead to the ordinary and honours degree of Bachelor

55

Statutes

of Science tn Mathematics The programme ts designed for the student who ts mainly interested 1n the theoretical aspects of Physics and it normally leads to programme P32 It can also lead to programmes m the School of Information Science and Technology Entry into the programme is normally restricted to students who have completed not less than 18 units at grade C or better 1n the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science (Schedule 4) these units to mclude 77102 Physics I and 60130 Mathemal!cs I There are no optional topics 1n this programme The programme comprises the following topics Physics Tot>tcs (Core) Units Semester 77210 Problem Solving in Physics 3 77211 Quantum Mechanics 3 i

77220 Electromagnetic Theory 1 3 2 77221 Physics Laboratory 2 3 2 77223 Optical Physics 3 2

Mathematics Topics (Core) 60201 Several Vanable Calculus 6 60202 Linear Algebra 3 2 60203 Elementary D1fferenttal

Equations 3 2 67214 Numerical Analysis 3 1 63201 Pnnc1ples of Analysis 3 2 63214 Mathematics for the

Physical Sciences 3 2

P3 This programme leads to further studies for the ordinary and honours degrees of Bachelor of Science in Physics It normally leads to programme P33 It is designed for the student who is interested in the computational aspects of Physics

Entry into the programme is normally restricted to students who have completed not less than 27 units at grade C or better in the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science (Schedule 4), these units to include 77102 Physics I and 60130 Mathematics I

There are no optional topics in this programme

The programme comprises the following topics

Physics Topics (Core) Units Semester

77210 Problem Solving 1n Physics 3 77211 Quantum Mechanics 1 3 1

77220 Electromagnetic Theory 1 3 2 77221 Physics Laboratory 2 3 2 77223 Optical Physics 3 2

56

Mathematics Topics (Core)

60201 Several Vanable Calculus 6 1

60202 Linear Algebra 3 2 60203 Elementary Differential

Equations 3 2 67214 Numencal Analysis 3

63214 Mathematics for the Physical Sciences 3 2

Computer Science Topic (Core)

68211 Data Structures 3

P4 This programme leads to further studies for the ordinary and honours degrees of Bachelor of Science 1n Physics or Computer Sciences It 1s designed for the student who requires a balanced exposure to Physics and Computer Science and who wishes to keep open the poss1bihty of ga1n1ng a Bachelor of Science degree 1n either Physics or Computer Science It normally leads to either programme P34 or P35 Entry into the programme 1s normally restricted to students who have completed not less than 27 units at grade C or better 1n the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science (Schedule 4), these units to mclude 77102 Physics I 60130 Mathematics I and 68110 Computer Science I This programme contains optional topics wluch are listed

The programme comprises the follow1ng topics

Physics Topics (Core) 77211 Quantum Mechanics 1 77220 Electromagnetic Theory 1 77222 Physics Laboratory 2A

Mathemahcs Topics (Core)

Units Semester

3

3 2 1 5 2

60201 Several Vanable Calculus 6 60202 Linear Algebra 60203 Elementary Differential

Equations 63214 Mathematics for the

Physical Sciences

Computer Science Topics (Core) 68211 Data Structures 68212 Information Systems 68213 Program Structures

Optional Topics

Either 77212 Electronics

or both of

77210 Problem Solving 1n Physics

67214 Numerical Analysis

3

3

3

3 3 3

6

3 3

2

2

2

2 2

1

Appendix B Third Year Programmes

P31 Physics

This programme 1s designed for the student who wishes to qualify for the ordinary or honours degree of Bachelor of Science m Physics and who requires a balanced exposure to the expenmental and theoretical aspects of Physics Entry into this programme is normally for students who have completed programme Pl There are no optional topics 1n this programme The programme compmes the following topics Physics Topics (Core) Units Semester 77310 Elcctromagnet1c Theory

and Optics 45 77311 Quantum Mechanics 2 45 77312 Physics Laboratory 3 3 1 77320 Plasma and Astrophysics 45 2 77321 Thermal Physics 3 2 77322 Quantum Theory of Matter 45 2 77323 Instrumentation 6 2

Mathematics Topics (Co e)

63311 Complex Analysis 3 67353 Analyt1cal Mechanics 3 1

P32 Theoretical Physics

This programme 1s designed for the student who rs pnmanly interested m theoretical physics It leads to the ordinary or honours degree of Bachelor of Science m Physics Entry mto this programme 1s normally for students who have completed programme P2 There are no optional topics in this programme

The programme comprises the following topics

Physics Topics (Core) Units Semester

77310 Electromagnet.Jc Theory and Optics 45

77311 Quantum Mechanics 2 45 77313 Physics Laboratory 3A 1 5 77320 Plasma and Astrophysics 45 2 77321 Thermal Physics 3 2 77322 Quantum Theory of Matter 45 2

Mathemallcs Topics (Core) 63311 Complex Analysis 3 I 1 63313 Integration Theory 3 I 67353 Analyhcal Mechanics 3 63363 Method'> of Mathematical

Physics 3 2 67303 Calculus of Vanat1ons 3 2

7 1 Schedule 6

P33 Computational Physics

This programme rs designed for the student who wishes to quahfy for the ordmary or honours degree of Bachelor of Science in Physics and who has an interest 1n the computat10nal side of Physics Entry mto this programme rs normally for students who have completed programme P3 There are no optional topics in this programme

The programme compnses the followmg topics

Physics Topics (Core) Units Semester

77310 Electromagnetic Theory and Optics

77311 Quantum Mechanics 2 77313 Physics Laboratory 3A 77320 Plasma and Astrophysics 77321 Thermal Physics

45 4 5 I 5 I 4 5 2 3 2

77322 Quantum Theory of Matter 4 5 2

Mathematics Topics (Core) 63311 Complex Analysis 3 67353 Analyttcal Mechanics 3 67215 Numerical Approx1matton 67315 Numencal Solution of

D1fferentml Equations

3

45

2

2

P34, P35 Physics and Computer Science

These programmes are designed for students who wish to quahfy for a Bachelor of Science 1n Physics and Computer Science Entry to these programmes rs normally for students who have completed programme P4 Programme P34 will provide entry to the honours degree of Bachelor of Science in Physics wh!le programme P35 provides entry to the honours degree of Bachelor of Science in Computer Science These programmes contain optional topics which are hsted

Programme P34 comprises the followmg topics

Physics Topics (Core) Units Semester

77310 Electromagnetic Theory and Optics 45 1

77311 Quantum Mechanics 2 45

77321 Thermal Physics 3 2

77322 Quantum Theory of Matter 45 2

Mathematics Topics (Core)

63311 Complex Analysis 3 1

67353 Analytical Mechanics 3

Computer Science Topics (Core)

68214 Computer Systems 3

57

Statutes

68319 Computer Networks 3 taken 77102 Physics I or have satisfactonly 68315 Art1C1cial Intelhgcnce 3 2 completed 77101 Introductwn to Physics and Ophonal Topics have taken either 60130 Mathema!Ics I or Either 60116 Introductory Mathema!Ics 77323 Instrumentation 6 2 The programme comprises the following or both topics 77320 Plasma and Astrophysics 45 2

Chemistry Topics (Core) Units Semester 68316 Theory of Computation 3 2

74210 Chemistry Laboratory II (General Techniques) 2

Programme P35 comprises the following 74211 Chemistry Laboratory II

topics (Organic) 2

74213 Organic Chemistry II 3 Physics Topics (Core) Units Semester

74214 Thermodynamics and 77310 Electromagnetic Theory K1net1c Theory 3

and Optics 45 74215 Molecular Properties 3

77311 Quantum Mechanics 2 45 1 74216 Computing Methods 10

77321 Thennal Physics 3 2 Chemistry 3 Computer Science Topics (Core) 74220 Chemistry Laboratory II 68214 Computer Systems 3 (Physical) 2 2

and at least fwe topics chosen from 74221 Chemistry Laboratory II

(Inorganic) 2 2 68311 Database Management

74223 Organic Synthesis 3 2 and Applications 3

68312 Language Translators 3 2 74224 Equ1hbnum and Rate

Processes 3 2 68313 Programming Language

74225 Inorganic Chemistry II 3 2 Concepts 3 68315 Arhf1c1al Intelhgencc 3 2

68316 Theory of Computation 3 2 Topics totallmg at least 7 umts may be chosen 68317 Advanced Program Structures 3 from optwns hsted below 68318 Advanced Data and

Knowledge Base Systems 3 Physics Topics Units Semester

68319 Computer Networks 3 77212 Elechon1cs 6

68321 Computational Logic 3 77220 Electromagnetic Theory 1 3 2

Optional Topics 77222 Physics Laboratory 2A [ 5 2

Either Mathematics Topics

77323 Experimental Physics 2 6 2 60201 Several Variable Calculus 6

or both 63214 Mathematics for the

77320 Plasma and Astrophysics 2 Physical Sciences 3 2

45 60202 Linear Algebra 3 2

77322 Quantum Theory of Matter 45 2 60203 Elementary Differential

Equations 3 2 PS Earth Sciences Topics (Programme adviser Pi ofessor R H Prager) 84205 Sedimentary Environments

This programme is for students intending to and Basin Analysis 3

study the three ma1or areas of chemistry 84284 Optical Mineralogy Laboratory A 2

(inorganic organic, and physical) at third year 81217 Surface and Sub-Surface level (Programme P40) for the ordinary degree Hydrology I 3 of Bachelor of Science in chemistry, or as a 84221 Petrology 3 2 prelude tomore spec1ahsed studies leading to 84282 Structural Geology an honours degree Laboratory 2 2

Entry to this programme is normally restricted 84213 Structural Geology 3 2

to those students who have completed not Biology Topics less than 18 umts of grade C or better m the 86227 Cell Physiology 3 first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science 86222 B1olog1cal (Schedule 4) Students must have gamed a C Expenmentattons I 3

grade or better m 74100 Chemistry I, and have 86228 Molecular B1ology 3 2

58

Computer Science Topics

68211 Data Structures 3

68212 Information Systems 3 2

68213 Program Structures 3 2

P6 (Programme adviser Professor B G Baker)

This is a programme 1n chemical physics fo1 students with mathematical interests and ab1hty who wrsh to pursue broader studies in a sequential third year programme (P43) for the ordmary degree of Bachelor of bc1ence or as a prelude to further studies in chemistry and physics leading to an honours degree Entry to this programme 1s normally restncted to those students who have completed not less than 28 units of grade C or better in the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science mcludmg 74100 Chemistry I 77102 Physics I, and at least 60130 Mathematics I The programme compnses the followmg topics

Chemistry Topics

74210 Chemistry Laboratory II (General Techniques)

74214 Thermodynamics and K1nehc Theory

74215 Molecular Properties

74216 Computing Methods 1n Chemistry

74220 Chemistry Laboratory II (Physical)

74221 Chemistry Laboratory II (Inorganic)

74224 Equtl1bnum and Rate Processes

74225 Inorganic Chemistry II

Physics Topics

Units Semester

2

3

3

3

2 2

2 2

3 2

3 2

77211 Quantum Mechanics 1 3

77220 Electromagnetic Theory 1

Mathematics Topics

60201 Several Vanable Calculus

63214 Mathematics for the Physical Sciences

P7

3 2

6

3 2

(Programme adviser Dr M f Thompson) ' This programme is for students with a

particular interest in the chemistry of b10log1cal systems who mtend to study chemIStry with some b10logy at third year level (Programme P42) for the ordmary degree of Bachelor of Science or as a prelude to more spec1altsed studies leading to an honours

7 1 Schedule 6

degree Entry to this programme is normally restricted to those students who have completed not less than 18 umts of grade C or better m the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science (Schedule 4) and have gamed a C grade or better m 74100 Chemistry I, and have taken 86100 B10log1cal Science I and either 60130 Mathemallcs I or 60117 Introductory Mathemal!cs A or 60118 Introductory Mathematics B Students completing the P7 and P42 programmes are ehg1ble for consrderation for adm1ss1on to the course for Master of Nutntion and D1etet1cs (see Statute 7 3 Schedule 16)

The programme comprises the following topics

Chemistry Topics Units Semester

74210 Chemistry Laboratory II (General Techniques) 2

74211 Chemistry Laboratory II (Organic) 2

74213 Organic Chemistry II 3 74214 Thermodynamics and

Kinetic Theory 3 74215 Molecular Proryert1es 3 74216 Computing Methods 1n

Chemistry 3 74220 Chemistry Laboratory II

(Physical) 2 2 74221 Chemistry Laboratory II

(Inorganic) 2 2 74223 Organic Synthesis 3 2 74224 Equ1hbnum and Rate

Processes 3 2 74225 Inorganic Chemistry II 3 2

Biology Topics

At least 7 units chosen from the hst below with regard to the pre-requ1s1tes necessary for programme P42 Each student enrolment must be discussed with and approved by the programme adviser after consultation with the School of B1olog1cal Sciences

86227 Cell Physiology 3 86222 B1olog1cal ExpenmentatJon I 3

86228 Molecular Biology 86225 Basic M1crob1ology

PB

3

3

(Programme adviser Dr N f Clark)

2 2

This ts a programme for students who wish to pursue the study of both chemistry and earth sciences in a sequential third year programme (P41) for the ordmary degree of Bachelor of Science, or as a prelude to further studies in either chemistry or 1n sciences leading to an honours degree Entry to this programme is

59

Statutes

normally restricted to those students who have completed not less than 18 units of grade C or better m the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science (Schedule 4) Students must have gamed a C grade or better m 74100 ChemIStry I 81100 Earth Sciences I and have taken 77102 PhySics I and either 60130 Mathematics I or 60117 Introductory Mathematics A or 60118 Introductory Mathematics B The programme comprises the follow1ng topics

Chemistry Topics 74210 Chemistry Laboratory JI

(General Techniques)

74214 Thermodynamics and Ktnehc Theory

74215 Molecular Properties 74216 Computing Methods 1n

Chemistry

74220 Chemistry Laboratory II (Physical)

74221 Chemistry Laboratory II (Inorganic)

74224 Equ1hbnum and Rate Processes

74225 Inorganic Chemistry II

Earth Sciences Topics 15 units from 84205 Sedimentary Envuonments

and Basin Analysis 84281 Optical Mineralogy

Laboratory

81217 Surface and Sub-Surface Hydrology I

84221 Petrology 84282 Structural Geology

Laboratory

84213 Structural Geology

P40 Chemistry

Units Semester

2

3 2

3 I

3

2 2

2 2

3 2

3 2

3

3

3

2

3

2

2 2

(Programme adviser Professor R H Prager)

Entry to this programme is normally restncted to students who have completed satlsfactonly the programme PS and It leads to either of the honours programmes 1n chemistry (P48, P49)

The programme comprises the follow1ng topics

Chemistry Topics

74310 Chemistry Laboratory III (Physical)

Units Semester

2 74311 Organic Chemistry IIIA 3 74312 Chemistry Laboratory III

(Inorganic) 2 74313 Structural Methods 1n

Chemistry 3

60

74314 Physical Chemistry III 4 5

74315 Inorganic Chemistry III 74321 Organic Chemistry IIIB 74330 Chemistry Laboratory III

(Organic) 74332 Chemistry Laboratory III

Techniques

Optional Topics

45

3

2

2

2

2

2

At least 10 units of optional topics must be taken Each student enrolment must be discussed with and approved by the progran11ne adVIser

74320 Introduction to Crystal Structure Determination

74322 Physical Organic Chemistry

74323 Reactive Intermediates 74324 B10-organ1c Chemistry 74325 B10-1norgan1c Chemistry 74326 Introduction to Matenals

74327 Photochem1shy and Spectroscopy

74328 Apphed Electrochem1stry

74329 Heterogeneous Catalysis 74331 Chemistry Laboratory III

Pro1ects 77310 Electromagnetic Theory

and Optics

Units Semester

1 5

3 15

1 5 1 5

1 5

15

15

15

2

45

2

2

2

2

2 2

2 2

2

2

P41 Chemistry and Earth Sciences (Programme advzser Dr MR Taylor)

Entry to this programme ts normally restncted to students who have completed sattsfactonly the programme PS and it leads to certain of the honours programmes 1n chemistry and earth sciences

The programme comprises the following topics

Chemistry Topics 74310 Chemistry Laboratory III

(Physical) 74312 Chemistry Laboratory III

(Inorganic) 74314 Physical Chemistry III 74315 Inorganic Chemistry III 74320 Introduction to Crystal

Structure Determination 74325 B10-111organ1c Chemistry

74326 Introduction to Matenals 74327 Photochemistry and

Spectroscopy 74328 Applied Electrochem1stry 74329 Heterogeneous Catalysis 74332 Chemistry Laboratory III

Techniques

Units Semester

2

2

45

45

15 2

15 2 1 5 2

1 5 2

15 2

1 5 2

2 2

Earth Science Topics At least 12 units chosen from the options below Each student enrolment must be discussed with and approved by the programme adviser after consultation with the School of Earth Sciences

Units Semester 81313 Chemical Oceanography 1 5 84328 Sedimentary Geochemistry 3

84324 Economic Mineral Deposits II

84317 Tectonics 84397 Mineral and Geochemical

Methods

81317 Surface and Subsurface

3

2

2

Hydrology II 3

P42 Chemistry and Biology

2

1 and 2

(Programme adviser Dr M J Thompson)

Entry to this programme is normally restricted to students who have completed satisfactorily the programme P7, and It leads to either of the honours programmes (P48 P49) in chemistry or to the honours programme in b1ochem1stry (B4) m the School of Bzolog1cal Sciences Students comple!Ing the P7 and P42 programmes are ehg1ble for consideration for adm1ss1on to the course for Master of Nutnt1on and Dietetics (see Statutes 7 3 Schedule 16)

This programme comprises the following topics Chemistry Topics Units Semester

74312 Chemistry Laboratory Ill (Inorganic)

74311 Organic Chemistry IIIA 74313 Structural Methods 1n

2

3

Chemistry 3 74315 Inorganic Chemistry III 4 5

74321 Organic Chemistry IIIB 3

7 4322 Physical Organic Chemistry 3

74323 Reactive Intenned1ates 1 5

74324 Bio-organic Chemistry 1 5

74325 Bio-inorganic Chemistry 1 5

74330 Chemistry Laboratory III (Organic) 2

74332 Chemistry Laboratory III Techniques 2

Biology Topics and Options

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

At least 9 units from the hst below Each student enrolment must be discussed with and approved by the programme adviser after consultation with the School of B1olog1cal Sciences

88352 M1crob1ology

88360 Immunology 88361 Immunology 89335 B1ochem1cal Control

Mechanisms

6

3

45

6

2

2

2

7 1 Schedule 6

89336 DNA - Structure Function and Manipulation

89339 Molecular and Cellular B10logy Laboratory

89345 Bmchem1cal Control Mechanism (S)

89346 DNA - Structure Function and Manipulation (S)

89349 Molecular and Cellular Biology Laboratory

6

6

4

4

(Theoi:y) (S) 3

P43 Chemistry and Physics

2

(Programme adviser Professor B G Baker)

This programme provides for studies 1n chemistry physics, and mathematics The core is designed to allow for subsequent entry into an honours programme 1n inorganic and physical chemistry Entry to this programme is normally restricted to students who have completed satisfactorily the programme P6

Units Sen1ester 74310 Chemistry Laboratory III

(PhysicaJ) 2 74312 Chemistry Laboratory III

(Inorganic) 2 74314 Physical Chemistry III 4 5

74315 Inorganic Chemistry III 77310 Electromagnetic Theory

and Optics 74326 Introduction to Materials 74327 Photochemistry and

Spectroscopy 74328 Applied Electrochem1stry 74329 Heterogeneous Catalysis 74332 Chemistry Laboratory III

(Techniques) 77222 Physics Laboratory IIA 60202 Linear Algebra 60203 Elementary Differential

Equations

Optional Topics 3 units from EITHER 74320 Introduction to Crystal

Structure Determ1nat1on

and 74325 B10-1norgan1c Chemistry ar 77321 Thennal Physics

Honours Programmes

P39 Physics

45

45 1 5

1 5 1 5

1 5

2

1 5

3

3

15

15

3

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Entry into the honours physics programme 1s restncted to students who have achieved a

61

Statutes

sufflcrently high standard m an appropnate third year programme or its equivalent The programme compnses lectures and pro1ect work The pro1ect work includes, for students spec1ahs1ng in experimental physics, experiments carried out 1n the research laboratories under the superv1s1on of a member of staff or, for theoretical physics students, further reading or lecture courses or research work earned out under the superv1s1on of a member of staff Students will be examined on each topic taken and on their pro1ect work Students should enrol m topic 76401 (36 umts)

Students spec1alls1ng in expenmental physics take 76471 Physics Seminar and seven other topics Students spec1ahs1ng 1n theoretical physics take 76471 Physics Semmar 76472 Theoretical Physics Seminar and eight other topics The add1tlonal topics a1e chosen sub1ect to the approval of the professor responsible for the co-ordination of undergraduate teaching in physics, normally, the ma1onty of these topics will be chosen from the followmg

Semester

76421 Relatrvrty and Electromagnetic Theory 1

76431 Advanced Quantum Mechanics 1 76432 Special Topics m Quantum

Mechanics 2 76441 Atomic Colhs1on Processes 2 76442 Plasma Physics 2 76451 Advanced Stat1st1cal Mechanics 1 76463 Particle Physics 2 76461 Nuclear Theory 1

P48 Orgamc Chemistry (Programme adviser Dr W Adcock)

Entry into the honours organic chemistry programme 1s normally restricted to students who have achieved a sufficiently high standard m programme P40 or P42 Entry from other program!T'es may be approved by special arrangement with the professor of chemistry concerned This honours programme will consist of a research pro1ect upon which a report will be required together with attendance at lectures, research colloqu1a and seminars leading to appropriate examinations Research work is available 1n the fields of natural product

62

synthesis med1c1nal chemistry, heterocychc chemistry, stereochemistry, reaction mechanisms organometalhcs and physical organic chemistry Students should enrol 1n topic 72410 (36 umts)

P49 Physical or Inorganic Chemistry (Programme adviser Professor B G Baker)

Entry into honours physical or 1norgan1c chemistry 1s normally restricted to students who have achieved a suffrcrently high standard m programmes P40 P41, P42 or P43 This honours programme consists of a research pro1ect and attendance at research seminars and colloquia and the equivalent of about six topics chosen 1n consultation with the research supervisor Students will be examined rn each topic taken Research work 1s available 1n the general area of theoretical chemistry spectroscopy, X-ray crystallography, electro chemistry solid state and surface chemistry and heterogeneous catalysis Students should enrol m topic 73420 (36 umts)

SCHEDULE 7 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science (B Sc ) m the School of B10log1cal Sciences

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree 1s set out in terms of topics units and grades defined as follows A topic is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded Units are the measure of we1ght1ng given to topics determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropriate school Grades are the class1fications of pass and fail for topics in the ordinary degree and shall be A B NGP D F WF

D1stlnchon Credit Non-graded Pass Compensatory Result Far! Withdrawn Far!

Sub1ect to the hm1tahons of Clause 3 below a grade of A B C, D, or NGP in any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree A grade of F or WF m any topic will result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 To qualify for the ordmary degree a student shall obtam a total of at least 108 units 1nclud1ng (a) at least 27 units from first year level

topics as specified in Schedule 4, and

(b) at least 27 units of the second year level Biology core and option topics specified m Clause 6 for B2 and

(c) at least 24 units of tlurd year level B10logy topics

3 In accumulating the 108 units required for the degree a student (a) shall, except with the permission of

the Board be permitted to enrol 1n any B2 topics or permitted to transfer into a Biology B Sc programme only 1£ he or she has obtained a grade of C or better m 86100 B10logical Sciences I, and a grade of Dor better m 74100 Chemistry I or 74101 Introduct1on to Chemistry

(b) shall not be permitted to count more than 48 units of first year level topics,

(c) shall not be permitted to count more than 24 units with a grade of D,

( d) shall not be permitted i.o count more than 6 units of Special Topics 1n

B10logy

4 Status towards the B Sc m B10logy (a) A student who holds any other

degree or approved tertiary qualrf1cahon may be granted status in not more than 36 units on account of studies completed for that quahflcahon

(b) A student may be granted status m not more than 72 units for approved tertiary work which has not been counted towards a completed degree or other tertiary qualification

5 A student who has qualified for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Science or who holds a quahflcat10n deemed by the Board to be equivalent or who holds a lesser quahf1cation and satisfactorily completes such addit10nal work as the Board prescribes 1n each case may be permitted by the Board to enrol for the honours degree of Bachelor of Science A candidate for the honours degree 1s required to have reached a high standard 1n the ordinary degree work, preferably

7 1 Schedule 7

in the course work as a whole but at least 1n those topics relating to the field in which the honours work IS to be undertaken

6 The programmes of study !or the ordmary and honours degree of Bachelor of Science shall be

Second Year (B2) A grade of C or better m either 86100 Biological Sciences I or 86110 Perspectives in Biology and, except where a higher grade 1s Indicated In the syllabus of D or better in any other topics numbered in brackets is assumed or the perm1ss1on of the topic co ordinator 1s required The second year level requirements are

(a) all of the followmg Bwlogy core topics

Units 86220 Evolution and Heredity

\86100 or 86110) 6 86231 B10logical

ExpenmentatJ.on I (86100 or 86110) 3

86222 B10log1cal Expenmentat1on II (86100 or 86110) 3

(b) and at least 12 units chosen from the followmg Bwlogy optwnal topzcs

86223 Ammal Phys10logy (86100 or 86110) 3

86224 Basic Metabolism (74100 or 74101 86100 or [86110 and 86235]) 3

86225 Basic M1crob1ology (86100 or 86110) 3

86226 Behaviour and Neurob10logy (86100 or 86110 or 36110 or 36120) 3

86227 Cell Phys10logy (74100 or 74101 86100 or [86100 and 86235]) 3

86228 Molecular B10logy (74100 or 74101 86100 or [86110 and 86235) 3

63

Statutes

86229 Plant Anatomy 87371 Neurob10logy A Phys10logy and (86226) 45 Development

87372 Neurob10logy B (86100 or 86110) 3 86230 Populat10n Ecology (86226) 45

(86100 or 86110) 3 87395 Animal Behaviour ( c) add1t10nal non B10logy topics (1f (86220) 3

any) that are requ1red to complete a or normal years work of about 36 units 87390 Animal Behaviour

(+ prac) (86220 Third Year (B3) and 86222) 6

The third year level requirements are 87391 Community Ecology (a) at least 24 units of the followmg (86222 and 86230) 6

th1rd year level B10logy topics 87392 Ecosystem Ecology Units

87330 Plant B10chem1Stry (86222 and 86230) 6

(86228 and 86229) 45 88325 Fungal Populat10n

87364 Plant Phys10logy and B10logy (86220,

Development (86229) 45 86222 and 86230) 3

or 88359 M1crob10logy (86221 87365 Plant Phys10logy and 86225, [86224 or 86228]) 5

Development(+ prac) or (86229) 6 88352 M1crob10logy (+ prac)

87367 Plant Evolution and (86221, 86225 [86224

Spec1at10n (86220) 3 or 86228]) 6 or 88360 Immunology (88352) 3

87369 Plant Evolut10n and or Speciat10n (+ prac) 8836I Immunology(+ prac) (86220) 4 (85352) 45

87397 Ecophys10logy of Plants (86220) 3 88358 Cell and Developmental or B10logy (86220) 45

87398 Ecophys10logy of Plants 88390 Phys10logy Manne ( + prac) (86220,

Orgamsms (86220) 3 [86227 or 86229]) 4 89335 B1ochem1cal Control

88390 Phys10logy of Manne Mechanisms (86228) 6 Orgamsms (86220) 3 or

89301 Cell and Membrane 89345 B1ochem1cal Control

Phys10logy (86229, Mechanisms (S) (86228) 4

[86223 or 86227]) 35 89336 DNA Structure or Function and

89302 Cell and Membrane Mampulat10n (86228) 6 Phys10logy (+ prac) or (86229 [86223 or 89346 DNA Structure Function 86227]) 45 and Mampulat10n (S)

(86228) 4 89310 Phys10log1cal Systems

(86223) 3 89339 Molecular and Cellular or B10logy Laboratory

89304 Phys10log1cal Systems ( + (see topic entry) 6 prac) (86223) 35 or

64

89349 Molecular and Cellular Brnlogy Laboratory (theory) (see topic entry) 3

89340 Pro1ects 1n Molecular and Cellular Brnlogy (89339 + co reqmsites) 4 5

89341 Topics in B10technology (89336) 4 5

89369 Genetics (86220 86221 and 86222) 4 5

In addition to the above students may be permitted to enrol in up to 6 umts of Special Topics in B10logy (see syllabus), subject to their ava1lab1hty and to spec1f1c approval by the topic co-ordinator

(b) to reach the m1n1mum of 108 units required for an ordinary degree students may enrol 1n

(i) any of the opt10nal topics 86223 86230 in the B2 list above

(u) topics from other Schools (though no more than 48 umts of first year level topics may count towards a degree)

7 To qualify for the honours degree of Bachelor of Science a student shall undertake a prescribed course of work 1n a field of brnlogy outlined for B4

Fourth Year (B Sc Honours) Fields of study available include ammal physiology, behavioural b1ology, b1ochem1stry b10technology, cell phys10logy, plant systematics and spec1atlon developmental biology ecology, genetics 1mmunology m1crob1ology, palaeo-b1ology, plant phys1ology, population genetics, marine b10logy, and brnlogy with psychology Ehg1b11rty for enrolment 1n particular areas depends on topics taken in B3

Programmes BE22, 32 & 42 (B Sc Honours - Marine Science).:-

8 To qualify for the B Sc (Honours) degree in Marine Science a student shall obtain a total of at least 144 umts including

A set of programmes very s1mtlarto the following is also offered by the School of Earth Sciences (see Programmes EB2 3 and 4) Students should consult the Calendar entry for these programmes before choosing the degree that best suits their needs

7 1 Schedule 7

(a) the followmg first-year level topics at a grade of D or better

60130 Mathematics I 74100 Chemistry I 81100 Earth Sciences I

Units

9

9

9

86110 B10logical Sciences I 9

(b) at least 36 umts of topics specified in Clause 11 for programme BE22 including all core topics, and

(c) at least 26 umts of topics specified 1n Clause 11 for progra1nme BE32, 1nclud1ng all core topics, and

(d) at least 36 umts of the topics specified in Clause 11 for the programme BE42

9 In accumulat1ng the 144 units for the degree a student (a) shall except with the permiss10n of

the Board be permitted to enrol in the programme BE22 or transfer this programme only if he or she has obtained a grade of C or better in 81100 Earth Sciences I and 86110 B1olog1cal Sciences I and in one of 60130 Mathematics I, 74100 Chemistry I or 77102 Physics I

(b) shall not be permitted to count more than 48 units of first year level topics

( c) shall not be permitted to count more than 30 units from topics with a grade of D, and furthermore shall not be permitted to count more than 18 units from topics with a grade of D towards the combined total required for programmes BE22, BE32 and BE42 for the purpose of this rule first-year level topics taken after the completion of the first 36 units shall be deemed to constitute part of the BE22 programme

10 Status toward the B Sc (Honours-Manne Science) in B10logy may be granted up to no more than 72 units to a student who holds any other degree or approved tertiary qualification, or part of such quahf1cahon on account of that quahf1catlon or approved tertiary work

11 The programmes of study for the honours degree of Bachelor of Science xn Manne Science shall be

65

Statutes

Programme BE22 82371 Manne Sclence

The second year programme comprises Laboratory II 4

(a) each of the followmg Marine 84205 Sedimentary Environments

Science core topics and Basin Analysis 3

Units 87391 Commumty Ecology 6

77102 PhySICS I 9 87392 Ecosystem Ecology 6

82218 Oceanography 3 88390 Physrology of Manne

82271 Marine Science Laboratory Organisms 3

1 (b) Such additronal topics from the

86220 Evolutron and Heredity 6 follow1ng approved hst as are

86231 Bro logical required to complete a normal year's work of at least 36 umts

Experimentation I 6 Units

86222 B10logical Dynamical Oceanography 2 Expenmentahon II 3 82303

86230 Populatron Brology 3 82306 Selected Aspects of Meteorology Hydrology

(b) such add1honal topics from the and Oceanography 3 follow1ng approved hst as are 82323 Experimental Skills in required to complete a normal year s Meteorology and work of at least 36 units Oceanography 3

Units 82311 M1cro-Meteorology and 60201 Several Variable Calculus 6 Chmatology 2 63214 Mathematics for the 82317 The Weather Forecast II 1

Physical Sciences 3 87366 Ecophysrology of 68115 Computer Programmmg 45 Australian Plants 45 72202 Orgamc Chemistry 3 87390 Animal Behaviour 6 73213 lnorgan1c Chemistry 3 88352 Microb10logy 6 82207 The Weather Forecast I 1 89335 B1ochem1cal Control 82219 Meteorology and Mechanisms 6

Chmatology 3 89336 DNA-Properties, Function 86223 Animal Physiology 3 & Man1pulat1on 6 86224 Basic Metabolism 3 89339 Molecular Cellular

86225 Basic Microbiology 3 B10logy Laboratory 45

86227 Cell Physrology 3 89369 Genetics 45

86228 Molecular B10logy 3 89375 Manne Ecology

86229 Plant Anatomy, Field Tnp 2

Physrology & 89376 Manne Ecology

Development 3 Field Tnp 3

(c) any other topics with the approval or any of the opt10nal topics hsted

of the Board for the BE22 programme

Programme BE32 (c) any other relevant topics with the

approval of the School Board The third year programme compnses

(a) each of the following Marzne Programme BE42 Science core topics (a) Compulsory core

Units A ma1or research pro1ect supervised 81213 Chemical Oceanography 2 by staff members from either the 81301 Data Analysis m Earth Schools of B1olog1cal Sciences or

Science 3 Earth Sciences, amounting to one 82321 Physical Oceanography 2 half of an academic year 18 units

66

(b) At least 18 umts selected from Umts

81404 Acqms1t10n & Analysis of Satellite Image Data 3

82405 Ocean C1rculat1on Theory 3

82406 Problems m Geophysical Flmd Dynamics 3

82407 Turbulence 3 82408 Sea Levels and Tides 3 or any topics taken from the lzst of app1 oved addztwnal topics for the BE32 programme

SCHEDULE 8 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science (B Sc ) m the School of Earth Sciences·

1 In this schedule the course of studies for the degree is set out m terms of topics units and grades defined as follows

A topic IS a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Unzts are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropriate School, a normal year's work by a full-time student being valued at 36 umts Grades are the class1f1cahons of pass and fall for topics m the ordmary degree and shall be A = B = c = D = F

D1shnchon Credit Pass Compensatory Result Fall

A grade of A, B, C or D m any topic will, sub1ect to Clause 2 hereunder, result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree A grade of F m any topic will result m no umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree

2 (a) To qualify for the ordmary degree m Earth Sciences a student shall complete a m1n1mum of 108 units, such that 84 umts are at a grade of C

• It IS recommended that those students mterested in undertaking an honours programme consult the Head ofD1sc1phne regarding their second and tlurd year enrolments

7 1 Schedule 8

or better, and no more than 24 units at grade D

(b) Topics shall be selected sub1ect to approval by the D!Sciphne co ordmators and shall mclude (1) topics for a mimmum of 36

umts and a maximum of 48 umts, mcludmg 81100 Earth Sciences I which sal!sfy the reqmrements of Schedule 4

(2) Topics for at least 36 umts from one of programmes E21 E24 E26, E27, E28, E29 and EB2 together with topics for at least 36 umts from one of programmes E31, E34, E36, E37 E38 E39 and EB3 Details of the programmes approved by the Council on the recommendation of the Board of the School are set out m Appendix A

3 The Exammat10ns Board may grant a maximum of 3 conceded units in any one of the second or third year level programmes hsted in order to bring a students total m that programme to the required number of units, not exceeding 36 units Any such units will be counted as unspecified compensatory result units (grade D) for the purpose of Clause 2 above, but a topic grade of fail (F) will be unchanged on the student's academic record

4 Except with the permtss10n of the Board, a student may not enrol more than twice 1n the same topic

5 Entrance to the honours year 1s normally restncted to those students who have satisfied the Earth Sciences honours pre­requ1s1tes as set out in Appendix A hereunder

6 To quahfy for the honours degree a student shall complete sa!tsfactonly a course of studies approved by the Counc1l on the recommendation of the Board of the School Details of the approved courses of study are set out in Appendix A hereunder

7 A student who withdraws dunng the honours year shall not be permitted to re-enrol as an honours student in the

67

Statutes

School except with the penmss1on of the Board and on such cond1tions as 1t may determine

Appendix A

Programmes Leadmg to Honours Courses m the D1sc1plme of Meteorology, Hydrology and Oceanography

The followmg programmes do not represent a formal constraint but rather a recommendatJ.on for those students who wish to proceed through to third year and also honours level m Meteorology and Oceanography with the assurance that all pre- and co-reqms1te topics have been mcluded m their studies

E21 Meteorology and Oceanography'

Topics

82218 Oceanography 81217 Surface and

Subsurface Hydrology I

82219 Meteorology and Climatology

82216 Applied Astronomy 82207 The Weather

Forecast I 82291 Meteorolog1ca\

Oceanograph1cal and Hydrolog1cal Measurements

77220 Electromagnetic Theory I

77212 Electron1cs 60201 Several Vanablc

Calculus 81214 Mechanics II 67201 Computing with

FORTRAN

63214 Mathematics for the Physical Sciences TOTALS

First Second semester

Uruts Lab/ Leet/ week week

3

3

3

3

3 3

3

2

2

2

2 6 2 + 2

6

3

3

3

4

semester Lab/ Leet/ week week

2

3

2

1 + 2

1 + 2 40 5 + 14 5 + 9

E31 Meteorology and Oceanography•

Topics

82312 Radiation m the Atmosphere

F1rsl Seccmd semester

Umts Lab/ Leet/ week week

2

semester Lab/ Leet! week week

1 5

It 1s recommended that those students mterested m undertaking an honours programme consult the Head of D1sc1plme regarding their &econd and third year enrolments

68

82311 M1cromcteorology and Chmatonomy 2 l 5

82305 Dynamical Meteorology 2 1 5

82303 Dynamical Oceanography 2 1 5

82321 Physical Oceanography 2 1 5

81313 Chemical Oceanography 2 1 5

82324 Selected Aspects of Meteorology Hydrology and and Oceanography 3

82317 Weather Forecast II

81301 Data Analysis m the Earth Sciences 3 2

82391 Meteorolog1cal and Oceanographical Measurements II 9 9 9

67214 Numerical Analysis 3 2

63311 Complex Analysis 3 2

60203 Elementary D1fferent1a! Equations 3 2

60202 Lmear Algebra 3 2 TOTALS 40 9 +125 9 + 95

E31 Option

82323 Expenmental Skills m Meteorology and Oceanography 3 (Opportunity basis

at any time)

E41 Meteorology and Oceanography E42 Oceanography E43 Meteorolgy While programmes E21 and E31 are designed to lead students Into an honours programme m Meteorology and Oceanography entry IS

normally restricted to students who have achieved an average grade of B or better In relevant third year topics Honours programmes may also be suitable for mterested students from other third year undergraduate programmes which provide a sound background m mathematics and physics Honours courses are designed to enable students to choose the extent and direction of speciahsat10n which best smts the mdmdual

Honours students will study a mimmum of 6 topics The balance of their time, normally 50 per cent, will be spent 1n pursuing an approved research topic the nature of which will be decided in d1scuss1on with the Head of D1sc1phne, who will also recommend suitable lecture topics from amongst those offered m Earth Sciences, Physical Sciences and Informallon Science and Technology at both Flinders and Adelaide Un1vers1tles

The balance between coursework and research pro1ect may be vaned under special circumstances, for example, where a student might benefit from a more formal 1ntroductlon to fluid dynamics via a coursework path Intendmg students are recommended to consult, 1n the first instance, the Head of D1sc1phne prior to enrolment

The followmg honours topics are regularly offered by the Disciplme -

81402 Hydrology Honours Topic 81403 Glaciology 81404 Acqmsit10n and Analysis of Satelhte

Sensed Image Data m the Earth Sciences

81415 Groundwater Modellmg 82401 Atmospheric Circulat10n Theory 82402 Atmospheric Development Theory 82403 Atmospheric lnstabihty Theory 82405 Ocean Circulat10n Theory 82406 Problems m Geophysical Flmd

Dynamics 82407 Turbulence 82408 Sea Level and Tides 82409 Spherical Astronomy (only if

82216 Apphed Astronomy has not been taken)

82410 Aeronautics for Meteorologists

Programmes Leadmg to Honours Courses m the D1sc1plme of Marme Geology and Geophysics

The followmg programmes are suggested for those students who wish to proceed through to the honours year m the Disciphne of Manne Geology and Geophysics All pre- and co­reqmsite topics for programmes E44 and E46 are assured by this guidance Intendmg students are recommended to consult, m the first mstance, with the Head of Disciplme, when enrollmg

E24 Geophysics A

Topics

84213 Structural Geology

84221 Petrology 83204 Exploration

Geophysics I 83218 Contrnental Dnft

and Plate Tectomcs 60201 Several Variable

Calculus 60203 Elementary

Differentral Equatmns

60202 Lmear AJgebra 67201 Comput.J.ng with

FORTRAN

77220 Electromagnetic Theory I

84297 Geological Field Techniques

83297 Exploration Geophysics Lab IA TOTALS

E34 Geophysics A

Topics

84317 Tectonics

84205 Sedimentary Environments and Basm Analysis

84314 Econonnc Mmeral Deposits I

83218 Contmental Dnft and Plate Tectomcs

83312 Exploration Geophysics II

77310 Electromagnetic Theory and Optics

77212 Electrorucs

63311 ComplexAnalys1s

67253 Contmuum Mechanics

84398 Geological Field Camp II

83395 Se1sm1c Laboratory

83344 Exploratory Geophysics Laboratory II

TOTALS

7 1 Schedule 8

F1rsl semester

Umts Lab/ Leet! week week

Second semester

Lab/ Leet/ week week

3

3

3 2

2 1 (tut) 2

3 2

6 4

3 2

3 2

3 2

3 2

4 0 5 (+ 10 day camp)

2 13 36188 12

First semester

Umts Lab/ Leet/ week week

Seeo11d semester

Lab/ Leet/ week week

2

3 2

3 2

3 2

3 2

45 3

6 2 2

3 2

3 2

4 (10 day camp)

2 1

2 1

385 0 11 4 7

69

Statutes

E44 Geophysics A (Course adviser Dr F H Chamalaun)

Entry requirements Entry into the Honours geophysics A programme is normally restncted to those students who have either satisfied the requirements of the ordinary degree of B Sc m the Schools of Informat10n Technology and Science or Physical Sciences and obtained an average of B or better for the followmg group of topics

81100 Earth Sciences I 83218 Contmental Dnft and Plate Tectomcs

or satisfied the requirements of the ordmary degree of B Sc m the School of Earth Sciences and achieved a high standard m programmes E24 and E34

Course requirements students enrolled in the honours course will study a m1n1mum of 6 topics selected in consultation with the course adviser Each student will also undertake a research pro1ect leading to an honours thesis Performance during the year will be assessed on the basis of coursework exam1nattons, honours thesis and parhc1patlon 1n research seminars

E26 Geology

Topics

84205 Sedimentary Environments and Basm Analysis

84213 Structural Geology

84221 Petrology 83204 Exploration

Geophysics I 83218 Contmental Dnft

and Plate Tectonics 65104 Elements of

Stat1st1cal Science I 74225 Inorganic

Chemistry II 74214 Thennodynam1cs

and K.1netic Theory 67201 Computmg

With FORTRAN

84282 Structural Geology Laboratory

84281 Optical Mineralogy and Petrography Laboratory

70

Firsl semester

Units Lab/ Leet/ week week

3 2

3

3

3 2

Second semester

Lab/ Leet/ \I.eek week

2 1 (tut) 2

3 2

3 I (tut) 2

3 1 (tut) 2

3 OS(tut) 2

3 2

2 1 3

4 05

83297 Explorat10n Geophysics Laboratory IA

84297 Geolog1cal Field Techniques TOTALS

E36 Geology

Topics

84317 Tectonics 84328 Sedimentary

Geochemistry 83218 Cont.mental Drift

and Plate Tectonics 84324 Economic Mineral

Deposits 11 84389 Special Topics

m Palaeontology 81217 Surface and

Subsurface Hydrology I

81301 Data Analysis m the Earth Sciences

83312 Exploration Geophysics II

74326 Introduction to Matenals

84312 Petrogenes1s Laboratory

84397 Mmcralog1cal and Geochem1cal Methods

84383 Sedimentary Environments Laboratory

84398 Geological Field Camp II

83309 Earthquake Seismology and the Earth s Interior TOTALS

2 13

4 0 5 (+ IO day camp)

39 3 3 6 5 5 3 12

First semester

Umts Lab/ Leet! week week

2

3 2

Second semester

Lab/ Leet! \\eek week

3 2

3 2

3

3 2

3 2

3 2

15 2

2 2

2

2

4

45 39 5

(10 day camp)

3 10

(112 Scm)

9

E46 Geology and Marme Geology t (Course advisers Professor C C von der Borch and Dr A E Grady) Entry requirements entry mto the Geology and Manne Geology honours courses is normally restncted to those students who have satisfied the requirements of the ordmary

0 It is recommended that those students Interested m undertaking an honours programme consult the Head 0£D1sc1plme regarding their second and thud year enrolments

t Due to changes m programme structures introduced m 1982 there 1s a corresponding change 1n honours pre-reqmsites which came into effect m 1983

degree of B Sc m the School of Earth Sciences and achieved a high standard in programmes E34 and E36 Course requirements students enrolled 1n

these honours courses will study a m1n1mum of 6 topics selected in consultation with the course adviser Each student will also undertake a research pro1ect leading to an honours thesis Performance during the year will be assessed on the basis of coursework, exam1nahons 1 honours thesis and part1c1pahon 1n research seminars

Programmes Leadmg to Interd1sc1plmary Honours Courses The follow1ng programmes do not represent a formal constraint but rather a recommendahon for those students who wish to proceed through to third year and to honours level studies m programmes E47 and E48 with the assurance that all pre- and co-requ1s1te topics have been included 1n their studies

E27 Geophysics B

First Second semester semester

Topics Umts Lab/ Leet/ Lab/ Leet/ week week week week

83204 Exp\orat10n Geophysics I 3 2

83218 Continental Dnft and Plate Tectomcs 3 2

60201 Several Variable Calculus 6 4

60203 Elementary Differential Equations 3 2

60202 Lmear Algebra 3 2

67201 Computmg With FORTRAN 3 2

67253 Contmuum Mechamcs 3 2

63214 Mathematics for the Physical Sciences 3 2

77220 Electromagnetic Theory I 3 2

77212 Electromcs 6 2 2

83297 Exploration Geophysics Laboratory IA 2 I 3 TOTALS 38 i 3 8 2 14

E37 GeophyS1cs B First Second

semester semester Topics Umts Lab/ Leet/ Lab/ Leet/

week week week week 83309 Earthquake

Seismology and the Earth s Intenor 45 3

7 1 Schedule 8

81301 Data Analysis m the Earth Sciences 3 2

83218 Contmental Dnft and Plate Tectomcs 3 2

83312 Explorat10n Geophysics II 3 2

67214 Numerical Analysis 3 2

63311 Complex Analysis 3 2

67353 Analytical Mechamcs 3 2

77310 Electromagnetic Theory and Optics 45 3

77323 Expenmental Physics II 6 2 2

83395 Se1sm1c Laboratory 2

83394 Explorat10n Geophysics Laboratory II 2

83416 Geophysical Well-Loggmg 3 2

TOTALS 40 0 i4 4 8

E47 Geophysics B (Course advisers Dr J Bye and Dr SA Greenhalgh)

Entry into the honours geophysics programme is restricted to students who have achieved a sufficiently high standard m the third year programme E37 or its equivalent The programme comprises lectures and pro1ect work Students will study a minimum of 7 topics to be chosen from those offered in Earth Sciences, Physical Sciences and Information Science and Technology selected 1n consultation with the course advisers Performance during the year will be assessed on the basis of coursework, examinations honours research pro1ect and participation 1n research seminars

E28 Hydrology

Topics

81217 Surface and Subsurface Hydrology I

82291 Meteorolog1cal Oceanographtca\ and Hydrological Measurements

82219 Meteorology and Climatology

First Second semester semester

Units Lab/ Leet! Lab/ Leet/ week week week week

3 2

3 3 3

3 2

It 1s recommended that those students mtcrested m undertakmg an honours programme consult the Head ofD1sc1phne regard mg their second and third year enrolments

71

Statutes

84205 Sed1mentari; 81214 Mechanics II 3 2 Envrronments 74224 Equthbnum and and Basm Analysis 3 2 Rate Processes 3 25

74225 Inorganic 36 5 Chemistry II 3 2 Optrnnal addztwnal topic

74221 Chemistry 75383/283 Instrumentat10n/ Laboratory II Electromcs 5 4 2 (lnorgamc) 2 6

TOTAL POSSIBLE UNITS 41 5 6 113 17 5 67214 Numencal

Analysis 3 2 E48 Hydrology 67201 Computmg

(Course Adviser Professor G Stanger) with FORTRAN 3 2

65205 Stahst1cal Entry reqmrements entry mto the Hydrology Science 6 5 honours course 1s normally restricted to those

63214 Mathematics for students who have satisfied the requirements the Physical Sciences 3 2 of the ordmary degree of B Sc m the School 74210 Chemistry of Earth Sciences, and achieved a high Laboratory II

(General Techniques) 2 6 standard m programmes E28 and E38 81313 Chemical Course requirements students enrolled in this

Oceanography 2 2 honours course will study a minimum of 6 36 topics, selected in consultation with the course

Optwnal addttwnal topic adviser Each student will also undertake a

74214 Thermodynamics research pro1ect leading to an honours thesis and K:metlc Theory 3 25

TOTAL POSSIBLE UNITS 39 26 5 8 9 Performance during the year will be assessed on the basis of coursework) examinations

E38 Hydrology honours thesis and parhc1pahon in research seminars

First Second semester semester

Topics Umts Lab/ Leet/ Lab/ Leet/ E29 Geology & B10logy week week week week First Second

81317 Surface and semester semester Topics Umts Lab/ Leet/ Lab/ Leet/ subsurface week week week week

Hydrology II 3 2 84205 Sedimentary 81318 Hydrological Environments and

Measurements Basm Analysts 3 2 and Practice 2 84213 Structural

82324 Selected Aspects Geology 3 2 of Meteorology 84221 Petrology 3 1 (Iut) 2 Hydrology and 84282 Structural Geology Oceanography 3 Laboratory 2 1 3

84328 Sedimentary 84281 Optical Mmeralogy Geochemistry 3 2 and Petrology

84393 Sedimentary Laboratory 4 05 Environments 84297 Geological Field Laboratory 2 Techmques 4 05 (+ 10 day field

81301 Data Analysis m camp) the Earth Sciences 3 2 65104 Elements of

67315 Numerical Solut1on Stat1shcal Science I 3 1 (tut) 2

of Differential 86220 Evolution and Equations 45 4 3 Heredity 6 3

84213 Structural Geology 3 2 86230 Population Ecology 3 02 2

84282 Structural Geology 86229 Plant Anatomy Laboratory 2 1 3 Physiology and

82207 The Weather Development 3 02 2 Forecast I

82311 M1crometeorology and Chmatonomy 2 1 5 * It is recommended that those students mterested m undertaking

82312 Radiat10n m the an honours programme consult the Head ofD1sc1phne regarding Atmosphere 2 1 5 their second and third year enrolments

72

74225 Inorganic Chemistry II 3 1 (tut) 2

TOTALS 37 27 75 55 10

E39 Geology & B10logy first Second

semester semester Topics Umts Lab/ Leet/ Lab/ Leet/

week week week week

84317 Tectonics 2

84328 Sedimentary Geochemistry 3 2

OR

81313 Chemical Oceanography 2

84389 Special Topic m Palaontology 3

84324 Economic Mmeral Deposits II 3 2

81217 Surface and Subsurface Hydrology I 3 2

84383 Sedimentary Environments Laboratory 2

84398 Geological Field Camp II 4 05 {+IO day field camp)

84397 Mmeralogical and Geochemical Methods 2

86222 B10log1cal Expenmentat10n II 3

87369 Plant Evolution and Speciat10n 4 2

87392 Ecosystem Ecology 6 (tut) 0 5 2

(+ 2 field camps)

89371 Vertebrate Palaeontology Special Topic 3 summer/vacation

field camp TOTALS 38 or 45 7 25 6

37

EB2 Marine Sciences A1

The second year programme comprises (a) each of the followmg Manne Science

core topics FITSt Second

semester semester Topics Um ts Lab/ Leet/ Lab/ Leet/

week week week week 60201 Several

Variable Calculus 6 4

63214 Mathematics for the Physical Sciences 3 1 (tut) 2

81214 Mechamcs II 3 1 (tut) 2

82218 Oceanography 3 2

1 A set of programmes very similar to EB2 EB3 and EB4 ts offered by the School of B10log1cal Sciences (see Programmes BE22 BE32 and qE42) Students should consult the Calendar entry for these programmes before choosmg the degree that best swts their needs

82271 Manne Science Laboratory I

86220 Evolut10n and Heredity

86221 B10log1cal Expenmentauon I

86222 B10log1cal ExpenmentaUon II

86230 Populatton Ecology

6

3

3

3

7 1 Schedule 8

06

3

2 05

(b) such add1t10nal topics from the followmg approved list as are required to complete a normal year's work of at least 36 units

67201 Computmg with FORTRAN

74100 Chemistry I

74214 Thermodynamics and KmetJc Theory

77220 Electromagnetic Theory I

82207 The Weather Forecast I

82219 Meteorology and Climatology

86224 Basic Metabolism

86225 Basic M1crob10logy

86227 Cell Phys10logy

86228 Molecular Biology

86229 Plant Anatomy Physiology and Development

3

9 2

3 OS(tut) 2

3

3

3

3

3 0 5

3

3 02

2

2

2

2

2

2 2

05 2

2

(c) any other relevant topics with the approval of the Board

EB3 Marine Sciences A1

The third year programme comprises (a) each of the followmg Manne Science

core topics

Topics

81301 Data Analysis m the Earth Sciences

82303 Dynamical Oceanography

82321 Physical Oceanography

82371 Manne Science Laboratory II

87391 Commumty Ecology

87392 Ecosystem Ecology

88390 Phys10Jogy of Manne Orgamsms

Umts

3

2

2

45

6

6

3

First semester

Lab/ Leet/ week week

1 5

2 2

Second semester Lab/ Leet/ week week

2

1 5

3

05 (tut) 2 (+field camps)

73

Statutes

(b) Such additwnal topics from the followmg approved llst as are required to complete a normal year s work of at least 36 units

81313 Chemical Oceanography

82324 Selected Aspects of Meteorology Hydrology and Oceanography

82323 Expenmental Skills m Meteorology and Oceanography

82311 M1crometeorology and Chmatonomy

82317 The Weather Forecast II

87397 Ecophyswlogy of Plants

87390 Ammal Behaviour

2

3

3

2

15

(opportunity basis at any ume)

1 5

3 04 I 5 6 2 25

88352 M1crob1ology 6 0 6 3 89335 B1ochem1cal Control

Mechamsms 6 3 5 89336 DNA - Properties

Functmn and Mampulatmn 6 3 5

89339 Molecular and Cellular B10logy Laboiatory 6 2 3

89369 Genetics 4 5 3 5

or any of the optwnal topics listed for the EB21 programme (c) any other relevant topics with the

approval of the School Boa,d

EB4 Marine Sc1ences1

While Programmes EB2 and EB3 are designed to lead students into the honours programme in Manne Science entry 1s normally restricted to students who have achieved an average grade of B or better 1n relevant third year topics Honours students will study a m1n1mun1 of 6 topics The balance of their time, normally 50 per cent, will be spent in pursuing a ma1or research pro1ect supervised by staff members from the Schools of Biological Sciences or Earth Sciences The Honours topics regularly offered by the Discipline are shown under programmes E41, E42 and E43 Other smtable topics may be selected from the recommended additional topics of programme EB3 The ch01ce of both the research pro1ect and topics should be decided in discussion with the course advisor 1 A set of programmes very s1mliar to EB2 EB3 and EB4 1s

offered by the School of B10log1cal Sciences (see Programmes BE22 BE32 and BE42) Students should consult the Calendar entry for these programmes before choosmg the degree that best SUlts their needs

74

SCHEDULE 9 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Economics (B Ee )

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree 1s set out 1n terms of topics cognate topics units and grades defined as follows A top1c 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded A cognate topic 1s a topic 1n another d1sc1pltne spec1f1ed by the d1sc1phne of Econonucs as being closely related to the study of Economics Cognate topics are approved as such by the disciplme of Economics in consultation with the student at the time of enrolment Un1ts are the measure of weighting given to topics determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal year s work by a full-!lme student bemg valued at 36 units Grades are the class1f1cations of pass and fail for topics in the ordinary degree and shall be A B

Distinction Credit

c Pass D Compensatory Result F Fall A grade of A, B, or C 1n any topic will result 1n the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree Subject to the prov1s1ons of Clause 2, a grade of D will result m the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree A grade of F will result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 To quahfy for the ordmary degree a student shall complete 108 umts with a grade of C or better 1n at least 84 units and a grade of Dor better 1n the remaining units The degree shall include (a) A minimum of 33 and a maximum of

48 first year level units of which 21 of the first 33 completed shall be m Social Sciences or Information Science and Technology d1sc1phnes and no more than 12 of the first 33 completed shall be 1n any one d1sc1plrne For the purposes of this clause, topic 39103/65103 may be

(b)

(c)

(d)

regarded as either a Mathematics or Computer Science topic

Units

30110 Economics I with a grade 12

or 30130 Economics IA plus 30112 Introductory

Macroeconomics 18

30201 Macroeconomics 6

30202 Microeconomics 6 30205 Quant1tat1ve Methods for

Economics I 6 30206 Quantitative Methods for

Economics II 6 or 30207 Introductory

Econometrics 6 with a grade of C or better 1n 18 units A m1n1mum of 18 and a maximum of 30 units in third year level Economics topics, with a grade of C or better in 18 units

(e) A minimum of 78 units of Economics and cognate topics

3 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not proceed to any topics at second or third year level until he has completed or ts enrolled to complete at least 33 units at first year level

4 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol 1n any year 1n a comb1nahon of topics valued at more than 42 units

5 Except with the permission of the Board, a student shall complete the course of studies for the degree w1th1n a period of 10 consecutive calendar years, or where status has been granted for work done elsewhere, within such period as the Board shall determme at the time that status is granted

6 A student who holds any other degree or other approved tertiary qualification may be granted status tn not more than 36 units on account of that quahf1catlon A student who has not completed a degree or other tertiary quahfrcahon may be granted status 1n not more than 72 units on account of previous tertiary study

7 1 Schedule 9A

7 Except with the permission of the Board, no topic may be attempted more than twice

8 A student may proceed to the honours degree after completmg all the requirements for the ordinary degree or 1f the student holds any other1 degree or tertiary quahficahon deemed to be of an eqmvalent standard provided that the student s performance 1n fulf1lhng those requirements or that other degree or quahficat10n 1s considered by the Board of the School of Social Sciences to be of a sufflc1ently high standard

9 To qualify for the Honours degree a student shall complete sat1sfactonly at least 36 units at Honours level Including a thesis, in a programme approved by the Council on the recommendation of the Board of the School of Social Sciences Details of the programme of studies are specified m Appendix C of Schedule 2 The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts m the School of Social Sciences

SCHEDULE 9A The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Econom1cs (Accountmg ) (B Ee (Ace ))

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree is set out in terms of topics, units and grades defined as follows

A topzc is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded

Units are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined in each case by the Board of the appropnate School, a normal year s work by a full-time student bemg valued at 36 umts

A ma1or sequence IS a sequence of a minimum of 33 units of related topics cons1st1ng of a minimum of 9 first year level units and at least 12 units at each of second year and third year level Approved ma1or sequence requirements are spec1f1ed in Appendix A

Grades are the class1flcat1ons of pass and fail for topics 1n the ordinary degree and shall be

75

Statutes

A B c D F

D1shnchon Credit Pass Compensatory Result Fail

A grade of A, B or C in any topic w11l result in the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree A grade of D or F will result in no units for that topic bemg credited towards the degree

2 To qualify for the ordmary degree a student shall complete 108 umts with a grade of C or better m all umts The degree shall include

(a) a ma1or sequence in Accounting as specified m Appendix A

(b 1 a ma1or sequence 1n Economics as specified 1n Appendix A,

Units

( c) 40111 Commercial Law A 6 30205 Quantitative Methods for

Economics I 6

40211 F1nanc1al Management 6

Electives 18 (d) A maximum of 48 first year level

units

3 Except with the permission of the Board, a student may not proceed to any topics at second or third year level until the student has completed or is enrolled to complete at least 30 units at first year level

4 Except with the permission of the Board, a student may not enrol in any year In a comb1nahon of topics valued at more tnan 36 units

5 Except with the permission of the Board a student shall complete the course of studies for the degree w1th1n a period of 10 consecutive calendar years or where status has been granted for work done elsewhere w1th1n such period as the Board shall determ ne at the time that status is granted

6 A student who holds any other degree or other approved tertiary quahflcation may be granted status in not mare than 36 units on account of that quahficahon A student who has not completed a degree or other tertiary quahficat1on may be

76

granted status in not more than 72 units on account of previous tertiary study

7 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, no topic may be attempted more than twice

8 A student may proceed to the honours degree after completmg all the requirements for the ordinary degree or if the student holds any other degree or tertiary quahf1cahon deemed to be of an eqmvalent standard provided that the student's performance 1n fulfilling those requirements or that other degree or qualification 1s considered by the Board of the School of Social Sciences to be of a sufficiently high standard

9 To qualify for the honours degree a student shall complete satisfactorily at least 36 units at honours level, including a thesis The honours programme shall consist of the followmg

Umts

(i) 40411 Accounting Theory 6

40418 Research Methods m Accounting 6

(u) Undertake two of 40413 Management Science 6

40419 Managenal Planning and Control 6

40421 Public Sector and Non Profit Management 6

40423 Advanced Financial Management 6

40424 Management Information Systems 6

(m) A thesis of not more than 12,000 words 12

Appendzx A

Ma1or Sequence Reqmrements The following requirements for ma1or sequences have been approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Economics (Accounting)

Accounting 40110 Accountmg I 40210 Accountmg II

Units

12 12

40311 Fmancial Accountmg 40323 External Aud1tmg

Economics 30110 Economics I or 30130 Economics IA plus

6 6

12

12

30112 Introductory Macroeconom1cs 6 Two Thud Year level topics m the D1sc1phne of Econom1cs 12

SCHEDULE 9B The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Commerce (B Com)

1 In this schedule A topzc is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final grade 1s recorded Unzts are a measure ofwe1ghhng given to topics determined In each case by the Board of the appropnate School, a normal years work by a full-time student being valued at 36 units A ma7or sequence ts a sequence of a m1n1mum of 33 units of related topics cons1stlng of a m1n1mum of 9 first year level units and at least 12 units at each of second year and third year level Approved ma1or sequence requirements are spec1f1ed 1n Appendix B A mznor sequence is a sequence of at least 21 units of related to pt cs 1nclud1ng a maximum of 12 first year level units Approved minor sequence requirements are specified m Appendix A Grades are the class1f1cat1ons of pass and fail for topics m the degree and shall be A Distinction B = Credit C Pass D Compensatory Result F Fall A grade of A, B or C m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree A grade of D or F will result m no umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree

2 To quahfy for the ordmary degree a student shall complete 108 umts with a grade of C or better m all umts The degree shall mclude

7 1 Schedule 9B

Units (a) Fzrst year core topzcs

40110 Accountmg I 30110 Economics I or 30130 Economics IA

plus

30112 Introductory Macroeconomics

40111 Commercial Law A

40113 Quanl!ta!Ive Methods or 30205 Quan!Ital!ve Methods for

Economics I

or

12

12

18 6 6

6

68110 Computer Science I 9

It is recommended that students 1ntend1ng to undertake a ma1or or a minor sequence in Economics should enrol in topic 30205 Quantztat1ve Methods for Economics I mstead of topic 40113 Quant1tatzve Methods

(b) Second or third yea1 core toplcs 40210 Accountmg II 12

40211 Fmanc1al Management 6 40212 Marketmg Management 6 or 40215 Personnel Management 6

(c) Such other topics as are required to form a ma1or (as spec1f1ed) m Appendix B) Such other topics as are required to form at least one minor (as spec1f1ed m Appendix A) Any other topics offered by any School or D1sc1phne of the Uni vers1ty including multi d1sc1phnary topics m the School of Social Sciences

(d) A maximum of 48 fust year level units

(e) One only ma1or sequence from among those spec1f1ed m Appen d1xB

(f) At least one minor sequence from those specified m Appendix A which does not include topics chosen from a student's ma1or sequence of study

77

Statutes

3 Except with the pern11ss1on of the Board, a student may not proceed to any topics at second or third year level until the student has completed or is enrolled to complete at least 30 units at fust year level

4 Except with the perrmss10n of the Board a student may not enrol in any year 1n a comb1nat1on of topics valued at more than 36 units

5 Except with the permiss10n of the Board a student shall complete the course of studies for the degree w1th1n a period of 10 consecutive calendar years or where status has been granted for work done elsewhere, w1th1n such penod as the Board shall determme at the time that status is granted

6 A student who holds any other degree or other approved tertiary quahficat10n may be granted status 1n not more than 36 units on account of that quahf1cat1on A student who has not completed a degree or other tertiary qualif1cat1on may be granted status 1n not more than 72 units on account of previous tertiary study

7 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board1

no topic may be attempted more than twice

8 A student may proceed to the honours degree after completmg all the requirements for the ordinary degree or if the student holds any other degree or tertiary quahf1cation deemed to be of an equivalent standa1d, proVIded that the studenfs performance rn fulf1Ihng those requirements or that other degree or qualification 1s considered by the Board of the School of Social Sciences to be of a suff1c1ently high standard

9 To qualify for the honours degree a student shall complete sallsfactonly at least 36 units at honours level including a thesis The honours programme shall consist of the following

78

Umts

(a) core honours topics from the disciplrnes of Accounting and Finance Econom1cs1 Economic History or Computer Science 12

(b) other honours topics from the disciplmes named m (a) above 12

(c) a thesis of not more than 12 000 words 12

Appendix A

Mmor Sequence Reqmrements The following requirements for minor sequences have been approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Commerce

Accountzng 40110 Accountmg I 4021 O Accountmg II

Asian Studzes 37110 Asian Studies I or 37150 Indonesian I 01

37170 Indonesian Studies I or 37151 Introductory Indonesian A and 37152 Introductory Indonesian B

Units 12 12

plus any 2 Asian Studies ma1or topics offered at second year level or any other topic sequences approved by the Head of the Disciplme of Asian Studies including sequences such as University of Adelaide s Japanese I and II or Chmese I and II (sub1ect to quota)

Audztzng 40210 Accountmg II 12 40322 Internal Auditmg 6 40323 External Auditmg 6

Business Finance 40211 F1nanc1al Management 6 40315 Corporate Fmance 6 plus 2 of 40321 Investments 6 40214 Small Enterprise Pabey

and Finance 6 and ezther 30305 Publtc Finance 6

or 30356 International Finance 6

Business Law 40111 Commercial Law A 6 40216 Commercial Law B 6

40313 Taxation Law & Practice 6

40317 Contemporary Issues in Taxation Law 6

Business Polzcy 40212 Marketmg Management 6 40213 Busmess Pabey and Strategic

Plannmg 6 40319 Strategic Manogement 6

plus 40318 Advanced Management

Accounting or 40211 F1nanc1al Management

Computer Sczence

6

6

68110 Computer Science I 9 and at least 12 units from topics in Computer Science at second year level

Economzcs 30110 Economics I 12

or 30130 Economics IA 12

plus 30112 Introductory Macroeconomics 6 plus 30201 Macroeconomics 6 30202 M1croeconom1cs 6

Economzc History 30110 Economics I 12

or 30130 Economics IA 12

plus 30112 Introductory Macroeconomics 6 and at least 9 units from topics 1n Economic History at second year level (or at third year level with the approval of the Head of Discipline)

Finance 40211 F1nanc1al Management 6 40214 Small Enterprise Pabey and

Finance 6 40315 Corporate Fmance 6 40321 Investments 6

Geography 32110 Geography I 32213 Social Geography 32215 Uneven Development

Management Accounting 40210 Accountmg II

12 6 6

12

7 1 Schedule 9B

40213 Busmess Pohcy and Strategic Planning 6

40318 Advanced Management Accounting 6

Psychology 36110 Psychology I 12 or 36120 Psychology IS 9 36234 Group and Collective Processes 3 36233 Study of Personality 3 or

Methods component of Topic 36230 3

36334 Orgamsat10nal Psychology I 3 36332 Human Motivation 3

Socwlogy 38110 Soc10logy I 12 and two of 38208 Soc10logical Theory 6 38209 Introduction to Social Structure 6 38305 Soc10logy of Developmg Societles 6 38306 Political Sociology 6 38324 Economic Sociology 6

Appendix B

Ma1or Sequence Reqmrements

The follow1ng requirements for ma1or sequences have been approved by the Board of the School of Sacral Sciences for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Commerce

Accounting and Finance A minimum of 33 units compns1ng 40110 Accountmg I 40210 Accountmg II 40311 F1nanc1al Accounting 40312 Auditmg or 40314 Advanced Fmancial Accountmg

Economics A m1n1mum of 33 units compnsing 30110 Economics I or 30130 Economics IA plus 30112 Introductory Macroeconomics

79

Statutes

and 12 units from topics in Econom1cs at each of second and third year levels

Economic History A m1n1mum of 33 units compns1ng

30110 Economics I or 30130 Economics IA plus 30112 Introductory Macroeconom1cs and 12 units from topics 1n Econom1c History at each of second and third year levels

Computer Science

36 units compns1ng

First year 68110 Computer Science I

Second year 68211 Data Structures 68212 Informahon Systems 68213 Program Structures 68214 Computer Systems

Third year 68311 Database Management and

Apphcat10ns 68312 Language Translators 68313 Progratnmmg Language Concepts 68315 ArtiflClal Intelligence 68316 Theory of Computat10n

SCHEDULE 9C The Ordmary Degrees of Bachelor of Commerce and Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) (B Com, BA (Asian Studies)) 1 In this schedule

80

A topic is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final grade ts recorded Unzts are a measure of we1ght1ng g11en to topics determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School a normal years work by a full-time student being valued at 36 units Grades are the class1f1cations of pass and fail for topics m the degrees and shall be A D1shnctlon B Credit C = Pass D Compensatory Result F Fall

A grade of A B, or C 1n any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic being credited towards the degrees A grade of D or F will result in no units for that topic bemg credited towards the degrees

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Bachelor of Commerce, Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) a candidate

(a) shall have completed at least 36 umts of the first year requirements for the Degree of Bachelor of Commerce at a sufficiently high standard

(b) shall have his or her candidature approved by the Dean of the School of Soc1al Sciences or the Dean s nominee

A student will be expected to nominate upon adm1ss1on one Asian Studies concentration from among those spec1f1ed m Appendix A

3 To qualify for the degrees of Bachelor of Commerce and Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) a student shall complete 108 umts with a grade of C or better m all units In addition to the first-year requirements specified m Clause 2(a) of Schedule 9B Degree of Bachelor of Commerce these units shall include

Units

(a) 40210 Accountmg II 12

(b)

40211 Financial Management 6 40212 Marketmg Management 6 Topics from Group A, B, C or D (Appendix A) 12

40311 F1nanc1al Accounting 6 40312 Auditmg 6

or 40314 Advanced F1nanc1al

Accounting 6 40213 Business Policy

& Strategic Planmng 6

40319 Strategic Management 6 Topics from Group A B C or D (Appendix A) 12

(c) Asta Business Seminar Programme I 6 Topics from Group A, B, C D (Appendix A) 24

Elective topic selected from among the topics otfered m any School or D1sc1phne of the Un1vers1ty 6

(d) AS!a Busmess Semmar Programme II International Business The Asian

6

Context 12 Topics from Group A, B, C, D (Appendix A) 24 Elective topic selected from among the topics offered m any School or D1sc1plme of the Un1vers1ty 6

(e) A maximum of 72 first year level units

(f) One only Asian Studies con centrat1on from among those spec1f1ed m Appendix A

4 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not en1ol 1n any year tn a comb1nat1on of topics valued at more than 36 umts

5 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student shall complete the course of studies for the degree within a period of 10 consecutive calendar years or where status has been granted for work done elsewhere, w1th1n such period as the Board shall determme at the time that status 1s granted

6 A student who holds any other degree or other approved tertiary quahf1cat10n may be granted status in not more than 36 units on account of that quahf1catlon A student who has not completed a degree or other tertiary quahflcat1on may be granted status 1n not more than 72 units on account of previous tertiary study

7 Except with the perm1ss10n of the Board, no topic may be attempted more than twice

Appendix A

The following requirements for Asian Studies have been approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences for the degrees of Bachelor of Commerce and Bachelor of Arts (Asian Studies) Only one o! these concentrations may be included 1n the combined degrees

7 1 Schedule 10

Group A Asian Studies Um ts (generalist) 37110 Asian Studies I 37216 Modern Asia and the West Other Asian Studies ma1or topics Other Asian Studies topics

Group B Indonesian Studzes Indonesian Language ma1or 37314 Indonesian Poht1cal Economy 37361 Language and Nat10nal Culture

in Modern Indonesia Asian Studies topics

Group C Japanese Studies Japanese Language maior~ (Umvers1ty of Adelaide) Asian Studies topics

Group D Chinese Studies Chinese Language ma1or* (Umvers1ty of Adelaide) Asian Studies topics

SCHEDULE 10 The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Education (B Ed )

12 6

18 24

36 6

6 12

36 24

36 24

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree is set out in terms of topics, units, and grades defined as follows

A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded ' Unzts are the measure ofwe1ght1ng given to topics, determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal years work by a full-time student bemg valued at 36 umts Grades are the class1f1cat1ons of pass and fail for topics m the ordmary degree and shall be

A B c NGP D p

= =

D1st1nchon Credit Pass Non-graded Pass Compensatory Result Fall

A grade of A, B, C or NGP m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the

Sub1ect to Umvers1ty of Adelaide quotas

81

Statutes

degree Except as md1cated m Clause 2 and 4, a grade of D will result m the full number of units for that topic being credited for the degree The grade of Fm any topic will result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the degree of Bachelor of Educatwn a candidate shall have met one of the follow1ng requirements

(a) the completwn, at a grade of C or better, of suff1c1ent first year units to cons!Itute a full first year programme m any other School of the Un1vers1ty

(b) the eqmvalent of (a) above from another un1vers1ty

(c) quahficatwn for a degree of the Un1vers1ty other than a degree rn the School of Education or

(d) the eqmvalent of (c) above from another un1vers1ty, or approved 1nst1tutlon

The Board of the School m special cases and sub1ect to such cond1hons as the Board may prescribe 10 each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not sat1Sf1ed any of the above cond1twns, but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 Candidates admitted under (c) or (d) of Clause 2 may be granted status 10 not more than 72 units for this degree on account of the quahficatwn held and the rules regarding the maximum number of umts at D grade allowed (Clause 4 below) will also apply A student who has not completed a degree may be granted status m not more than two-thirds of the total units for thrs degree for previous tertiary study

4 To quahfy for the ordmary degree of Bachelor of Educatwn a student shall complete at least 144 umts with a grade of NGP or C or better m at least 120 umts mcludmg topic 53417 Teachmg Observation and Experience1 and a grade of D or better 10 the rema1n1ng 24 units of which no more than 12 units may be from topics offered by the School of Educatwn and which shall not mclude more than 4 units from topics in the

82

Curriculum Studies sequence The work required for the degree ts specified xn Appendix A

5 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student shall complete the course of study for the degree w1thm a penod of 10 consecutive years or where credit has been granted for work completed elsewhere within such period as the Board may determine at the time the credit 1s granted

6 Except with perm1ss1on of the Board, no topic may be attempted nlore than twice and no student may attempt topic 53417 more than once

7 To quahfy for entry to the honours degree of Bachelor of EducatIOn, a student shall normally

(1) have completed all the reqmrements for the ordmary degree of Bachelor of Education,

(u) have achieved an average grade of B or better m at least 24 umts of the Curriculum Studies sequence

8 To quahfy for the honours degree of Bachelor of Educatwn, a student shall complete 36 units 10 one academic year (unless permission to extend this time 1s granted by the Board of the School of Education) 1 compns1ng the follow1ng

(1) 24 umts of honours topics approved by the Board of the School of Educahon1

(11) an honours thesis counting for 12 umts

Appendix A

The Board of the School of Educatwn has determined that the programme of studies for the degrees of Bachelor of Educatwn shall be as follows (a) Thirty SIX of the umts spec1f1ed by sectwn

(b) below shall compnse a maior sequence as defined in Schedule 21 Clause 2 or its equivalent 1n another School of the Un1vers1ty

(b) 72 umts, mcludmg a mm1mum of 36 second and third year units 10 a d1sc1phne or d1sc1phnes other than Education

(c) 12 umts selected from the following 6 unit topics

Units

53218 Cross Cultural Perspectives 1n Education

53222 Psychology and Educatwn

53223 Socwlogy of Educatwn

53224 Aesthe!Ics and Educatwn

53225 Research Methods m Education

53227 Philosophy and Educatwn

53228 Educatwn and Society m Australia An H1stoncal

6

6

6

6

6

6

AnalySis 6

53230 Computers m Schools 6

53231 Language in Education 6

56230 Computers m Schools 6

53782 Behaviour Management 1n Schools 6

53785 HIStory of Australian Educa!Ion 20th Century Issues 6

(d) One topic selected from the followmg

53781 Growmg Up m Australia 6

53783 Child Development m Contemporary Society 6

(e) 53215 Curriculum Studies I Curnculum Theory 6

(f) 53367 Curriculum Studies II Arts (m Educatwn) 6

(g) 53368 Curriculum Studies II Language and Readmg 6

(h) 53369 Curriculum Studies II Mathematics 6

(1) 53371 Curriculum Studies II Social Studies 3

(J) 53372 Curriculum Studies II Science 3

(k) 53373 Curriculum Studies II Educat10nal Media 1

(l) One topic selected from the followmg 4 topics 53441 Curriculum Studies III

Handicapped Child 4

53442 Curriculum Studies III Abong1nes and Education 4

7 1 Schedule JOA

53443 Curnculum Studies III Music and Education

53444 Curnculum Studies III Religion and Education

(m) 53445 Curriculum Studies IV Curriculum Organ1sahon

(n) 53446 Curriculum Studies V Educational Evaluation

(o) 53416 Curriculum Studies VI Curnculum Overview

(p) 53417 Teachmg Observa!Ion and Experience

SCHEDULE lOA The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Educat10n (Physical Education) (BEd (PE))

4

4

4

4

6

6

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree 1s set out 111 terms of topics units and grades defined as follows A topzc 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded Unzts are the measure of weighting grven to topics determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropriate School, a normal year's work by a full-time student being valued at 36 units Grades are the classrfrcahons of pass and fail for topics in the ordinary degree and shall be A B c NGP D F

=

Drstinctton Credit Pass

Non graded Pass Compensatory Result Fail

A grade of A, B, C or NGP m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic being credited towards the degree Except as indicated 1n Clause 2, a grade of D will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited for the degree The grade of F m any topic will result rn no units for that topic being credited for the degree

2 To qualify for the ordmary degree of Bachelor of Educat10n (PhySical Educatrnn) a student shall complete 144

* No new enrolment m the programmes leadmg to the Ordinary degree will be accepted m i991

83

Statutes

umts with a grade of C or better m 120 units and meeting the requirements specified in clauses hereunder

3 The 144 umts which make up the ordmary degree shall mclude (a) 36 umts first year level umts (b) (1) 12 umts const1tutmg the

second year of a ma1or sequence as defined in Schedule 2, Clause 2 or its equivalent in another School of the Umversity 12

(n) 53263 Physical Act1V1ty Phys10log1cal Bases 4

(m) 53264 Physical ActlVlty B1omechan1cs 4

(1v) 53265 Physical Act1V1ty Growth and Development of Skills 4

(v) 53262 Physical Act1v1ty Forms 1n Society 6

(v1) 53233 Culture and Childhood 6

(vu) 53110 Teaching Orienta hon 0

(c) 36 umts of one of the Year III level programmes approved by the Council on the recommendat1on of the Board of the School Details of approved programmes are set out in Appendix At

(d) 36 umts of one of the Year IV level programmes approved by the Council on the recommendat1on of the Board of the School Details of approved programmes are set out in Appendix At

(e) 36 of the umts spec1f1ed m the approved programme shall cornpnse a ma1or sequence as defined 1n Schedule 2, Clause 2 or its equivalent in another School of the Un1vers1ty

4 The 120 umts at C level or better shall include all the units spec1f1ed in sections (u 1v) of the programmes

5 In add1hon the student 1n order to be awarded the degree shall by the time of completion of the unit requirements hold

t Copies of Appendtx A and of the lists of approved awards and cert1f1cates may be seen m the Registry

84

(1) five current sports coaching awards approved by the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Board of the School of Educat10n, t

(u) a current sw1mm1ng instructor certificate approved by the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Board of the School of Educat10n andt

(111) a current first aid certificate approved by the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Board of the School of Educat10n t

Any one award may not be used to satisfy more than one of the cntena listed in this clause

6 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student may not proceed to any topics at second year or third year level until he has completed or is enrolled to complete at least 36 units at first year level

7 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student shall complete the course of study for the degree w1thm a penod of 10 consecutive years, or where credit has been granted for work completed elsewhere, w1th1n such penod as the Board may determine a+ the time that credit 1s granted

8 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student may not enrol in any year in a combination of topics valued at more than 39 units

9 A student who holds any other degree or other approved tertiary qualification may be granted status in not more than one third of the total units for this degree on account of that qualification A student who has not completed a degree or other tertiary quahf1cat1on may be granted status in not more than two thirds of the total units for this degree for previous tertiary study

10 Except with the permiss10n of the Board, no topic may be attempted more than twice

11 A student may proceed to the honours degree of Bachelor of Educat10n (Physical Educat10n), provided that the students performance in the first 144 units of the

Bachelor of Educat10n (Physical Education) was of a standard considered suff1c1ent by the Board, or 1f the student holds any other degree or tertiary quahf1cahon deemed to be of an eqmvalent standard provided that the student's performance m obtammg this quahf1cahon was of a standard considered sufficient by the Board

12 To quahfy for the Honours degree of Bachelor of Educat10n (Physical Educat10n) a student shall complete 36 units meeting the follow1ng requirements

Units (a) Not less than 6 units or more than

18 umts of Physical Educat10n honours topics being offered 6 18

(b) Coursework or supervised study 1n any school in the Un1vers1ty This is chosen 1n consultation with the student s supervisor and 1s to be approved by the Board m advance 6 18

(c) 53431 Physical Educat10n Honours Thesis 12

SCHEDULE 11 The Degrees of Bachelor of Med1cme and Bachelor of Surgery (B M , B S )

1 In this schedule a topic 1s a prescnbed amount of academic work for whrch a final result 1s recorded Grades are the class1flcahons of pass and fail for work towards the degrees taken m the School of Medicine In returning results rn individual topzcs the following grades shall be used A = D1sbnct1on outstanding or

exceptional performance B Credit better than

satisfactory but not exceptional performance

c = Pass clearly satisfactory performance

NGP Non-graded Pass (for use m topics which can be assessed only on a satisfactory/ unsatisfactory basis)

D = Margmal result acceptable as a passing grade only 1n

7 1 Schedule 11

association with better results for other topics in the same year

NA Not assessed F Fail clearly unsatisfactory

performance In returnmg results for the work of each year of the course as a whole the followmg grades shall be used P = Pass F Fail

2 To quahfy for the degrees of Bachelor of Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Surgery a student shall sat1sfactonly complete the course of studies prescribed by this schedule dunng not less than six years of full-time study unless granted status for studies previously undertaken in the Un1vers1ty or elsewhere The Final Exammat10ns Board of the School of Med1c1ne may, at its absolute d1scret1on approve the award of degrees with honours to students who have demon strated d1shngu1shed performance through the whole course

3

4

5

6

7

The topics to be studied 1n the various years of the course and the other work to be earned out are listed rn Appendix A

The content of the topics and the arrangement of work w1th1n them shall be as prescribed from time to time 1n the syllabuses

Progression through the course is determined on the basis of the student's performance In the work of each year as a whole Each student 1s required to obtain a pass in the work of each year of the course 1n order to be permitted to proceed to the subsequent year

A student who has twice failed m the work of any year of the course may be requued to show cause why he or she should not be precluded from further studies In the Un1vers1ty

A student who at any lime withdraws from or fails to re enrol in, the course leadmg to the Degrees of Bachelor of Med1cme and Bachelor of Surgery shall be permitted to re enrol in that course only with the pnor approval of the Standmg Committee of the Board of the School of Med1cme

85

Statutes

Appendzx A

Fzrst Year 90154 Med1cme m the Community 90155 Chemical Basis of Med1cme 90156 B10log1cal Basis of Med1cme 90157 Cellular Basis of Med1cme Elective topics (see separate entry below)

Second Year 90290 2nd year Medicine Non-Elective

Aggregate compnsmg 90271 Tissues, Attack and Defence Systems

of the Body 90272 Musculo-skeletal System 90273 Nervous System 90274 Endocrme/Reproduct1ve/D1ges!Ive

Systems 90275 Renal/Respiratory/Card10vascular

Systems 90276 Psychosocial/Psychob1olog1cal

Systems 90277 lntroduct10n to Clinical Skills 90278 Cell B10logy Elec!Ive topics (see separate entry below)

Third Year 90390 3rd year Medzczne Non-Elective

Aggregate compnsmg 90371 Tissues Attack and Defence Systems

of the Body 90374 Endocrme/Reproducllve/D1gest1ve

Systems 90375 Renal/Respiratory/Card1ovascular

Systems 90376 Psychosocial/Psychob10log1cal

Systems 90377 Introduct10n to Clinical Skills 90378 Themes 90379 Musculo-skeletal/Nervous System Elec!Ive topics (see separate entry below)

Fourth Year 90490 4th year Medzczne Non-Elective

Aggregate compnsmg 90451 Case Studies 90452 Clm1cal Skills 90453 Anatomy D1ssect10n 90454 Chmcal Pharmacology 90455 Health Services 90456 Chmcopatholog1cal Correlat10n Elecllve topics (see separate entry below) Nursmg attachment (see separate entry below)

86

Fzfth Year 90590 5th year Medzczne Aggregate

compns1ng 90551 Med1cme I 90552 Surgery I 90553 Obstetncs and Gynaecology 90554 Paediatncs 90555 Psychiatry 90560 Structured Chrucal Exammallon

Szxth Year 90690 6th year Medzczne Aggregate

comprising 90651 Med1cme II 90652 Surgery II 90653 Pnmary Care and Community

Med1c1ne 90654 Chmcal Opt10n I 90655 Clm1cal Opt10n II 90656 Elecl!ve I 90657 Elecl!ve II

Elective topics Each student will normally be reqmred to take elective topics amounting to one quarter of the year's work m each of the first, second, third and fourth years of the course the sixth year topic 90650 Szxth Year Medzczne mcludes two elective topics The elective topics approved for each year of the course are prescribed 1n the syllabuses

Nursing attaclzment Each student admitted to the course m 1977 or subsequent years, unless spec1f1cally exempted, ts required to undertake a five day nursing attachment w1th1n the Fhnders Medical Centre dunng a scheduled vaca!Ion penod between the end of the third year of the course and the begmnmg of the fifth year of the course Details of the nursmg attachment are given under the syllabuses relating to the first year of the course

SCHEDULE 12 The Honours Degree of Bachelor of Medical Science (B Med Sc)

1 In this schedule a topzc 1s a prescnbed amount of academic work for which a fmal result 1s recorded

2 In order to be ehg1ble for adm1ss10n as a candidate for the degree a student shall have demonstrated outstandmg ab1hty m

her or his studies 1n the course for the degrees of B M B S , or equivalent degree

3 A student who wishes to enrol as a candidate for the degree must apply to the Board of the School of Medicme for approval of her or his proposed programme of studies and for appoint ment of a member of the academic staff to supervise her or his programme of studies

4 To qualify for the degree a candidate (a) shall undertake a programme of

studies amounting to the equivalent of one academic year of full hme study 1n Honours Medical Science, as prescribed m the syllabus for that course, and shall satisfy the examiners 1n that course of studies and

(b) shall have successfully completed the third year of the course of studies for the degrees of B M B S of the Un1vers1ty or the equivalent proportion of an under graduate medical course in another approved University

5 Except with the permission of the Board of the School of Medicme a candidate will be required to sahsfactonly complete her or his approved programme of studies for the degree rn one academic year Where perm1ss1on is granted for the programme of studies to extend over more than one academic year the Board shall 1nd1cate at the hme of approving the programme of studies the time available for satisfactory completion of the student s programme

SCHEDULE 13 The Degree of Bachelor of Social Adm1mstrat10n (B Soc Admm )

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree IS set out 1n terms of topics, units and grades defined as follows A topic is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Units are the measure of weighting given to topics determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropriate School, a normal

7 1 Schedule 13

year s work by a full-trme student being valued at 36 units Grades are the class1f1cahons of pass and fall for topics 1n the ordinary degree and shall be A D1stinct1on B Credit C Pass NGP Non-graded Pass D Compensatory Result F Fail A grade of A B C or NGP m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic being credited towards the degree Except as stated 1n Clause 3 below, a grade of D will result In no units for that topic being credited for the degree A grade of F In any topic will result 1n no units for that topic being credited towards the degree A discipline rs a ma1or area of study rn which teaching is offered

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the degree of Bachelor of Social Admtnistrahon a candidate (1) shall have qualified for a degree of

the University or for an approved degree of another 1nst1tuhon

(2) except with the permiss10n of the Board, shall have included in his undergraduate studies a m1n1mum of 36 units or the equivalent from disciphnes 1n the social and behavioural sciences approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences and ltsted in Appendix A,

(3) shall have his or her candidature approved by the Dean of the School of Social Sciences or the Dean s nominee

The Board of the School of Social Sciences in special cases and sub1ect to such conditions as the Board may prescnbe 1n each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not qualified for a degree but whose tertiary quahf1cat1ons are accepted as satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 (1) To quahfy for the degree of Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strat1on a student shall complete sallsfactonly a programme of studies as specified 1n Appendix A, requinng two years of

87

Statutes

full time study or its equivalent 1n part time study Satisfactory completion of the programme requires at least 72 units In first year, 6 units of D may be counted with a grade of C or better requrred m the remammg 30 umts A grade of C or better ts required 1n 36 units of second year topics

(2) Persons who hold the Diploma m Social Adm1n1stration of the Un1vers1ty are qualified for and may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strahon on surrender of their Diploma

4 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student may not proceed to any topics at second year level untd he has completed or 1s enrolled to complete at least 36 umts at frrst year level

5 Except with the perm1ss10n of the Board a student may not enrol in any year in a comb1nabon of topics valued at more than 42 units

6 Except with the perm1ss10n of the Board a student shall complete the course of study for the degree w1thm a period of five consecutive years, or where status has been granted for work completed elsewhere, w1th1n such other penod as the Board may determine at the hme status 1s granted

7 A student who fa!ls to obtam a C grade or better 1n the same topic on more than one occasion shall be required to show cause 1n accordance with the prov1s1ons of Clause 18 of the statute why the student should be permitted to attempt that topic again

8 A student who obtains a grade of D or lower 1n three or more topics shall be required to show cause in accordance with the prov1s10ns of Clause 18 of the statute why the student should he permitted to proceed to the complet10n of the degree

Appendzx A

Approved Disciphnes The disc1phnes 1n the social and behavioural SCiences referred tom Clause 2(2) of Schedule 13 mclude Anthropology Biology Economics,

88

Education Geography, History, Law Philosophy, Poht1cs Psychology, Soc10logy and other related d1sc1phnes

Programme Requirements Fzrst Year

50821 Social Admm1strat10n 6 50823 Human Development and the

Social Environment 6 50824 Fieldwork A 6 50825 Social Work 6 50826 Social Work Pracl!ce 6 50827 Social Welfare Services 6

Students who have ma1ored m psychology or another behavioural science 1n their previous studies, and who believe they have substantially covered the sub1ect matter of topic 50823 may with the approval of the Head of D1sc1plme, subsl!tute another topic of equal umt we1ghtmg Students who wish to consider this opt10n should consult the lecturer m charge of topic 50823

Second Year 50921 Fieldwork B 12

Twenty four units of topics chosen from 50922 Human Service Organ1sahons 6 50923 Evaluation of Human Services 6 50924 Social Pohcy 6 50925 Social Plannmg 6 50926 Community Organisation 6 50927 Social Groupwork 6 50928 Social Work with Ind1V1duals

and Fam1hes 6 50929 Social Work m Selected Settmgs 6 50931 Social Casework 6 50932 Professional Issues 1n Agency

Practice 6 50933 Change m Human Services 6

With the approval of the Head of D1sc1phne a student may substitute 6 units of third year or higher level studies relevant to the purposes of Social Adm1mstrat10n offered by another d1sc1phne w1th1n the Un1vers1ty Students who wish to consider this option should consult the Director of Studies

SCHEDULE 15 The Diploma m Education (Dip Ed ) 1 In this schedule the course of study for

the diploma 1s set out in terms of topics,

units grades and programmes defined as follows A topzc 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Unzts are the measure of weighting given to topics, determ1ned 1n each case by the Board of the appropriate School, a normal year s work by a lull-time student bemg valued at 36 units Grades are the class1f1cations of pass and fail for topics m the diploma and shall be A Distin ch on B Credit c Pass NGP Non-graded Pass D Compensatory Result F Fail A grade of A, B1 C, or NGP in any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the diploma Except as stated m Clause 3 below, a grade of D will result m the lull number of units for that topic being credited for the diploma A grade of F 1n any topic will result 1n no units for that topic being credited towards the diploma A programme is an arrangement of topics into a co ordinated course of study leading to a teaching quahf1cation, as denoted by the form of Teaching Observatwn and Practice m (3) below

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Diploma in Education a candidate (1) shall have met one of the followmg

requirements (a) quallficatwn for a degree of

the University other than the degree of Bachelor of Educa hon or the Bachelor of Educa hon (Physical Educatwn) at a standard acceptable to the Board or the School of Education

(b) quallf1catwn for an approved degree or its equivalent for another tertiary 1nstitut1on at a standard acceptable to the Board of the School of Education

(2) shall have his candidature approved by the Dean of the School or the Dean's nominee

7 1 Schedule 15

The Board of the School 1n special cases and sub1ect to such cond1t1ons as the Board may prescribe in each case may accept as a candidate a pe1son who has not qualified for a degree but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To qualify for the diploma a student must complete satisfactorily a programme of studies which shall mclude one of the followmg topics with a grade of NGP or C or better

56008 Teachmg Observatwn and Practice (Secondary School)

56009 Teachmg Observatwn and Practice in Abong1nal Education

56010 Teaching Observation and Practice 1n Secondary School (Special Educatwn)

4 Students who enrol m 56008 Teachmg Observation and Practice 1n the Secondary School, shall qualify for the diploma after completmg the eqmvalent of a one year full-time programme which shall mclude 36 umts with a grade of NGP or C or better 1n at least 28 units, and a grade of D or better 1n the rema1n1ng 8 units, provided that these requirements are satisfied w1th1n two consecutive years The 36 umts shall comprise the pro gramme of studies given 1n Appendix A

5 Students who enrol for 56009 Teachmg Observation and Practice in Abong1nal Educatwn shall qualify for the diploma by completing the equivalent or a one year full-lime programme which shall mclude at least 36 umts with a grade of NGP or C or better 1n at least 28 units and a grade of D or better 1n the rema1n1ng 8 units provided that these requirements are satisfied w1th1n two consecutive years The 36 units shall comprise the pro gramme of studies given 1n Appendix B

6 Students who enrol m 56010 Teachmg Observation and Practice in the Secondary School (Special Educat10n) shall quahfy for the diploma by completing the equivalent of a one year full-time programme which shall mclude at least 36 umts with a grade of NGP or C or better 1n at least 28 units and a grade of D or better 1n the rema1n1ng 8 units,

89

Statutes

provided that these requirements are satisfied w1th1n two consecutive years The 36 umts shall compnse the pro gramme of studies given 1n Appendix C

7 Except with the permiss10n of the Board a student shall complete a programme of study w1thm the lime allowed for its complet10n to qualify for the diploma or, where credit has been granted for work completed elsewhere, w1th1n such period as the Board may determine at the time that credit IS granted

8 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student may not enrol in any year in a comb1natton of topics totalling more than 39 units

9 Except with the permiss10n of the Board no topic may be attempted more than twice and no student may attempt topics 56008 56009 and 56010 more than once

Appendzx A

Umts

(a) 56008 Teaching Observation and Practice and its co-requ1s1te 5

56007 Educational Media 1

(b) At least 12 units selected from the Special Methods topics, available from 56011 Special Methods English 6

56012 Special Methods Drama 6

56013 Special Methods History 6

56014 Special Methods Geography 6

56015 Special Methods Econo1n1cs 6

56016 Special Methods Social Sciences 6

56017 Special Methods Italian 6

56018 Special Methods French 6

56019 Special Methods Spamsh 6

56020 Special Methods English as a Second Language 6

56023 Special Methods Special Topic A 6

56024 Special Methods Special Topic B 6

56025 Special Methods Rehg1ous Instruction 6

56039 Special Methods Mathematics 6

90

56040 Special Methods Science 6 56041 Special Methods Physics 6

56042 Special Methods Chemistry 6 56043 Special Methods B10logy 6

NOTE Certain pre-requ1s1tes have to be met for admission to these topics as 1nd1cated in the syllabuses

(c) 12 umts selected from the Educat10n Studies available as listed m Appendix D

Appendix B Units

(a) 56009 Teachmg Observat10n

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

and Practice 1n Abong1nal Education and its co requ1s1te 5

56007 Educat10nal Media 1

56021 Special Methods Abongmal Education 6

One other Special Methods topic selected from those listed in Appendix A subsect10n ( c)

53218 Cross Cultural Perspectives 1n Education 6

53359 Abong1nal Education 6

One other Education Studies topic selected from those listed 1n Appendix D 6

Appendzx C Units

(a) 56010 Teachmg Observat10n and Practice in the Secondary School (Special Educat10n) and its co requ1s1te 5

56007 Educat10nal Media 1

(b) 56001 Issues m Special Educat10n 6

( c) 56022 Special Methods Teachmg the Special Child 6

(d) At least 6 umts selected from the Special Methods topics, available from 56011 Special Methods English 6

56012 Special Methods Drama 6

56013 Special Methods History 6

56014 Special Methods Geography 6

56015 Special Methods Economics 6

56016 Special Methods Social Sciences 6

56017 Special Methods Italian 6 56018 Special Methods French 6 56019 Special Methods Spanish 6 56020 Special Methods English as

a Second Language 6 56023 Special Methods Special

Topic A 6 56024 Special Methods Special

Topic B 6 56025 Special Methods Rellg10us

Instruction 6 56039 Special Methods Mathematics 6 56040 Special Methods Science 6 56041 Special Methods Physics 6 56042 Special Methods Chemistry 6 56043 Special Methods B10logy 6

(e) 6 units sel~cted from tPe Education Studies topics available as listed 1n Appendix D

Appendix D

The Educat10n Studies topics available for programmes in the Diploma in Education are

Units 53218 Cross Cultural Perspec!Ives

rn Education 53222 Psychology and Educat10n 56223 Sociology in Education 53224 Aesthe!Ics and Educat10n 53225 Research Methods m Educat1011 53227 Philosophy and Educat10n 53228 Education and Society m Australia

An Hrstoncal Analysis 56230 Computers m Schools 53780 Youth m Australia 53781 Growing up 1n Australia 53782 Behaviour Management 1n Schools 53783 Child Development m

Contemporary Society 53785 History of Australian

Education Issues

SCHEDULE 16 The Diploma m Social Sciences (Dip Soc Sc )

6 6 6 6 6 6

6 6 6 6 6

6

6

1 In this schedule the course of study for the diploma 1s set out 1n terms of topics units and grades defined as follows

7 1 Schedule 16

A topic is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Units are the measure of we1ght1ng given to topics, determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropnate School, a normal years work by a full-time student bemg valued at 36 units Grades are the class1f1cat1ons of pass and fall for topics m the diploma and shall be A D1shnct1on B Credit C Pass F Fall A grade of A B or C m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic being credited towards the diploma A grade of D or F m any topic will result 1n no units for that topic being credited towards the diploma

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Diploma in Social Sciences a candidate (1) shall have met one of the followmg

requirements

(2)

(3)

(a) quallficat10n for a degree of the University at an appro pnate standard 01

(b) quallficat10n for an approved degree or an approved equivalent from another tertiary 1nst1tut1on at an appropnate standard

shall have completed the reqmre ments for a ma1or sequence in a basic d1sc1phne prescribed in Schedule 2 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts in the School of Social Sciences or eqmvalent work approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences, or for adm1ss1on to the programme 1n Social Adm1n1stra !Ion, shall have the degree of Bachelor of Social Administration or its equivalent shall have his or her candidature approved by the Dean of the School of Social Sciences or the Dean s nominee

The Board of the School of Social Sciences, 1n special cases and sub1ect to such cond1hons as the Board may

91

Statutes

prescribe 1n each case, may accept as a candidate a person who has not met these requirements but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To qualify for the Diploma m Sacral Sciences a student shall complete satrsfactorrly at least 36 umts from one of the programmes of studies specified 1n Appendrx A wrth a grade of C or better m all umts The 36 umts shall mclude at least 24 umts of honours or diploma level topics and may mclude a maximum of 12 units of first, second or third year undergraduate level topics approved by the nominee of the Dean as essential preparation for the student's proposed programme of study at fourth year level

4 Except wrth the perm1ss10n of the Board, a student shall complete the course of study for the diploma withm a per10d of 3 consecutive years1 or where credit has been granted for work completed elsewhere, w1th1n such period as the Board may determme at the trme that credit is granted Subject to other prov1s10ns ofthrs clause, the trme limit for complet10n of the programme m Sacral Admm1strat10n shall be 4 consecutive years

5 Except wrth the perm1ss10n of the Board, a student may not enrol in any year in a comb1nat1on of topics valued at more than 42 umts

6 A student who fails to obtam a C grade or better 1n the same topic on more than one occas1on shall be required to show cause 1n accordance with the prov1s1ons of Clause 18 of the Statute why the student should be permitted to attempt that topic agam

7 Except wrth the perm1ss1on of the Board, no topic presented for the diploma may repeat work undertaken for earher degrees, unless four years have elapsed since the previous degree was awarded

Appendix A

The programmes listed below have been approved by the Board

(a) Except where the approved programme

92

provides for the 1nclus1on of topics from outside the drscrplme mvolved all topics for the diploma must be taken from the d1sc1phne in which the student is enrolled for the diploma

(b) Where an approved programme mcludes spec1f1c prov1s1on to include topics from outside the d1sc1phne concerned the approval of the other drscrphne rs required

Anzerzcan Studies The programme for students takmg the Diploma rn Social Sciences 1n the Amencan Studies consists of 36 umts chosen as follows

Units

34403 Readmgs m American Brbhography and Historiography 12

and 24 umts chosen from the followmg

18202 North American Themes 6 34301 Literature and Society m America 6 34304 Reg10ns m America 6 34305 The Makmg of Umted States

Foreign Policy 6 34306 History of Women m the US

1780 1939 6 3440112/4 Studies m American

Sacral Crrtrcrsm 12/6/6 34405 Commumty m America 6 34406 Literary Perspectrves on Umted

States Culture 6 34440 American Studies Diploma Literature

Review A literature review and small scale research pro1ect written under the superv1s1on of a member of staff 12

Asian Studies Students !along the Diploma m bocral Sciences 1n Asian Studies will complete 36 units chosen from the follow1ng

Units

(a) At least 24 umts selected from honours level Asian Studies topics

(b) A maximum of 12 umts chosen from the followmg 37215 Uneven Development 6

37303 South East Asian Political Development

37304 The Partrt10n of Indra, 1935 1947

6

6

37306 ASEAN (by special perrmss1on) 6

37309 Soc10logy of Developmg Soc1ettes 6

In special cases, the Director of Asian Studies may approve a thesis, worth 12 units, of approximately 15,000 words to be written under the superv1s1on of a member of the staff 37440 Asian Studies Diploma Thesis 12

Development Studies Students takmg the Diploma m Social Sciences 1n Development Studies will complete 36 umts chosen from the followmg topics to provide a coherent course of studies subject to the approval of the Director of Studies m Development Studies

(a) 52450 Development Studies Diploma Thesis 12

(b) At least 12 umts chosen from approved Honours or Diploma level topics

(c) Not more than 12 umts from approved undergraduate topics, of which no more than 6 umts may be taken outside of the School of Social Sciences

Economics Students takmg the Diploma m Social Sciences in Econom1cs must complete 36 units 1

as follows

a m1n1mum of 24 units based upon

(a) 30401 Advanced M1croeconom1cs 30402 Advanced Macroeconomics

(b) At least two topics from 30421-30432

and A maximum of twelve units of Econom1cs or Economic History topics from th1rd year level or above, or a 12,000 word thesis 1n heu

Economic Hzstory Students takmg the Diploma m Social Sciences in the Econom1c History d1sc1phne must complete 36 units as follows

(a) A maximum of 12 umts selected from third year level Econom1c History topics

(b) A mm1mum of 24 umts from honours level Economic History topics

(c) A 15,000 word thesis may be substituted for 12 units of coursework

Geography Students takmg Geography for the Diploma

7 1 Schedule 16

1n Social Sciences will complete 36 units chosen from the followmg

(a) Honours topics up to a total of 36 umts but excludmg topic 32440 Thesis and Literature Review

(b) A topic from another d1sc1phne or School deemed by the Head of the D1sc1plme of Geography to be cognate to the advanced study of Geography and not exceedmg 6 units

(c) 32450 Thesis 12

(d)

A thesis of approXImately 10,000 words to be wntten under the superv1s1on of a member of the staff

Up to a maximum of 12 units chosen from the followmg topics

32213 Social Geography 6

32303 Environmental Perception and Behaviour 6

32306 Physical Resource Analysis 6

32307 The Western City Geography and Pohcy 6

32308 Regional Economic Development 6

Any topic approved under (b) above which 1s not listed as a fourth-year topic

History (a) Two th1rd year level History topics 12

Two honours level History topics 24

or (b) Where a student prefers to substitute a 12

umt thesis for part of the coursework he may do so In this case the thesis would normally replace one of the two honours level topics and the student's programme would be

Two thud year level History topics 12

One honours level History topic 12

33440 History Diploma thesis 12

Policy and Admzmstratzon Students takmg the Diploma m Social Sciences in Policy and Administration will be expected to take 36 umts chosen from the (ollowmg to provide a coherent course of studies subject to the approval of the Dtrector of Studies m Pohcy and Admm1strat10n

93

Statutes

(a) 6 units of directed, independent, research leading to a minor dissertation (topic 51440)

(b) at least 18 umts chosen from approved Honours or Diploma level topics,

(c) not more than 12 umts selected from approved third year level topics, of which no more than 6 units may be taken outside the School of Social Sciences

(d) An approved reJearch methods topic should be included 1f one has not already been taken

Politz cs (a) 35425 B1bhograpluc Studies m

Politics 12 (b) two Honours level topics 6 each (c) two third year level Pohtics

topics 6 each

Population and Human Resources Students taking the Diploma in Social Sciences 1n Population and Human Resources will complete 36 umts chosen from the following

(a) 31414 Advanced Population Studies 6 (b) A m1mmum of 6 umts chosen from

(c)

(d)

94

approved topics, including the following 32411 Urbamsat10n and Development

inSEASla 6 30401 Advanced M1croeconom1cs 6 38413 Soc10logy of Developmg

Soc1ettes 6 38438 Family State and Society 6

Not more than 12 umts chosen from the following topics 32213 Social Geography 6 32309 Research Methods m

Geography 6 32215 Uneven Development 6 30302 Economtc Development 6 30303 The Econom1cs of Labour 6 35313 Comparative Strategies for

Development 6 39211 Demography 6 39218 Agemg 6 39222 Contemporary World

Development 6 39216 Famine 6 39226 Disease and Society 6 32460 Population and Human

Resources Diploma thesis 12

Sociology The Diploma m Social Sciences m Soc10logy comprises 36 umts of Soc10logy topics, 24 of which must be at Honours or Diploma Level Students enrolled for a Diploma may choose topics from the followmg

38413 Soc10logy of Developmg Societies 6 38414 Urban Sociology 6 38434 Advanced Research Methods 6 38435 Socrnlogy of Knowledge 6 38436 Medical Soc10logy 6 38437 Social Problems 6 38438 Family State and Society 6 38439 Economy and Society 6 38444 Soc1olog1cal Perspectives on the

State and Bureaucracy 6 38445 Value Clanf1cat10n and Apphed

Sociology 6 38450 Sociology Diploma TheSIS 12

Social Admzmstratzon Students taking the Diploma in Social Sciences in Soetal Admin1Strat10n will be expected to take 36 units chosen from the follow1ng, to provide a coherent course of studies with a ma1or emphaS1s, sub1ect to the approval of the D1rector of Post-BaS1c Studies in Social Adm1n1stratlon

(a) Diploma topics offered m the d1Sc1plme of Social Adm1nistratlon,

(b) Second year topics m the course for the Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strat1on

(c) Not more than 12 umts chosen from third year, honours, diploma or masters topics m other d1Sc1plmes m the University

(d) A d1ssertat10n of approxzmately 10,000 words in assoctatton with seminars, under the supervision of the staff in Social Adm1mstrat10n (12 umts)

SCHEDULE 17 The Diploma m Educat10nal Adm1mstrabon (Dip Ed Admm )

1 In thlS schedule the course of study for the diploma IS set out m terms of topics and umts defmed as follows A topzc is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded

Unzts are the measure of we1ghtmg given to topics determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School, a normal year's work by a full-time student being valued at 36 units

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Diploma 1n Educational Adm1n1s trahon, candidates shall have

(1) sa!Isfaed the reqmrements for entry to the course of studies for the degree of Master of Educational Adm1mstrat10n

(2) sat1Sf1ed the Standmg Committee of the School of Educatrnn that there are excepttonal circumstances which prevent the1r proceedmg to complete the programme of studies for the degree of Master of Educational Adm1n1strat1on *

(3) shall have the1r candidature approved by the Dean of the School or the Dean's nominee

3 The Board of the School, in special cases and sub1ect to such cond1tlons as the Board may prescribe in each case, may accept as a candidate a person who has not quahf1ed for a degree, or who has less than two year s relevant experience, but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

4 To quahfy for the diploma a candidate shall sat1sfactonly complete 36 umts

5 Except with the perm1ss10n of the Board, a candidate shall complete the course of study for the diploma withm a penod of 3 consecutive years

6 Candidates who desire that courses which they have completed m the Umvers1ty or elsewhere be credited towards the Diploma in Educational Adm1n1strahon may on written apphcahon, be granted such exemption from the requirements of (4) as the Board shall determme

7 Failure to achieve a grade of C or better ma topic or topics totallmg at least twelve units tn each year of enrolment until all coursework has been completed will constitute przma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 1 Clause 10

Exceptrnnal c1rcumstanccs which might be acceptable to the Standing Committee ofthc School of Education would mcludc the cases of overseas students who can spend only one full acadenuc year m Austraha

7 1 Schedule 20

8 The Board of the School of Educatrnn shall appomt the Educational Admm1stra tton Programme Committee to oversee the candidate's programme of studies The candidate shall do the work requ1red of him by the Committee The programme of work may include appropriate topics of an equivalent level offered by thIS Um vers1ty or by other approved mst1tut10ns

SCHEDULE 20 The Diploma m Accountmg (Dip Ace )

1 In thIS schedule the course of study for the diploma rs set out in terms of topics, units, and grades defined as follows A topzc is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Units are the measure of weighting given to topics determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School, a normal years work by a full-time student bemg valued at 36 u.,1ts Grades are the class1ftcattons of pass and fall for topics m the diploma and shall be A D1Stmct10n B Credit C Pass F Fail A grade of A, B, or C m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the diploma A grade of D or F m any topic will result m no umts for that topic bemg credited towards the diploma

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Diploma in Accounting a candidate

(1) shall have met one of the followmg requirements

(a) quahfica!Ion for a degree of the Umvemty

(b) quahficatrnn for an approved degree or its equivalent from another tertiary institution

(2) shall have his/her candidature approved by the Dean of the School or the Dean's nominee The Board of the School in special cases and sub1ect to such cond1ttons as the Board may prescribe in each case, may accept as a candidate a person

95

Statutes

who has not quahf1ed for a degree but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To quahfy for the diploma a student shall complete sat1sfactorily the 78 units spec1f1ed 1n the follow1ng programme of studies with a grade of C or better

Part A 30110 Economics I or 30130 Economics IA and

Units 12

12

30112 Introductory Macroeconom1cs 6

Part B 40110 Accountmg I 12 40111 Commercial Law A 6 40113 Quanl!tat1ve Methods 6 40210 Accountmg II 12 40211 Fmancrnl Management 6

40216 Commercial Law B 6 40311 Fmancial Accountmg 6 40312 Aud1tmg 6 40313 Taxat10n Law and Prac\lce 6

Status for courses completed at the Un1vers1ty or equivalent courses at other institutions may be granted for the topic m Part A and for up to 24 units m Part B Apphcat10n for status IS to be made with the apphcat1on for adm1ss1on The Board will advise the extent of status allowed at the time of adm1ss1on to the diploma

4 Except with perm1ss1on of the Board, a student shall complete the course of study for the diploma w1th1n a period of six consecutive years or where status has been granted for work completed outside the diploma, w1th1n such penod as the Board may determine at the tnne that status is granted

5 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol In any year In a combination of topics valued at more than 42 units

6 A student who falls to obtam a C grade or better in the same topic on more than one occasion shall be required to show cause In accordance with the prov1sions of Clause 18 of the statute why the student should be permitted to attempt that topic again

96

SCHEDULE 23 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Theology (B Th )

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree is set out tn terms of areas of study, topics units and grades defined as follows The areas of study are B1bhcal Studies and HIStoncal and Systemal!c Theology

A topic ts a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded

Units are a measure of weighting given to topics, determined tn each case by the appropnate Board, a normal year's work by a full lime student bemg valued at 36 units

Grades are the class1ficattons of pass and fail for topics In the ordinary degree and shall be A B c NGP D F

= = =

Dist1nct1on Credit Pass Non graded Pass Compensatory Result Fall

A grade of A, B, C or NGP m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree Except as stated In Clause 3 below a grade of D will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited for the degree A grade of F will result m no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 The degree IS admmIStered by the Board of Studies m Theology (heremafter called the Board) which shall advise the Council through the Academic Programmes Committee on all matters relating to the teaching, examination and adm1n1stratton of courses leadmg to a degree or diploma m Theology mcludmg approval of persons responsible for each topic adm1n1stered by the Board

3 To quahfy for the ordmary degree a student shall complete at least 126 umts with a grade of C or better mat least 102 units and a grade of D or better in the rema1n1ng units The 126 units shall include

(a) atleast 90 umts selected from topics xn the two areas of study, as prescribed in Appendix A 1nclud1ng (1) 42 umts of B1bhcal Studies

topics (n) 48 umts of HIStoncal and

Systematic Theology topics (b) at least 36 umts selected from topics

offered by the Schools of the Un1vers1ty of which at least 24 units must be from one d1sc1p1Ine and at least 24 units at levels more advanced than first year

At least 28 of these 36 umts shall be completed with a grade of C or better and the rema1n1ng 8 units shall be completed with a grade of D or better

4 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student shall complete the course of study for the ordinary degree w1th1n a period of ten years

5 A student who fails to obtam a C grade or better 1n the same topic on more than one occasion shall be required to show cause 1n accordance with the prov1s1ons of Clause 9 of the statute why the student should be permitted to attempt that topic again

6 (1) A student who holds any other degree or other approved tertiary quahflcatton may be granted status 1n not more than 42 units on account of that quahflcatrnn A student who has not completed a degree or other tertiary quahf1cat10n may be granted status in not more than 84 units for previous tertiary study

(2) Notw1thstandmg any grant of status under the prov1S10ns of Clause 6(1) above a student must satisfy the reqmrements of Clause 3(b) above

7 (1) A student may proceed to the honours degree of Bachelor of Theology provided that hIS performance in the ordinary degree was of a standard considered sufficient by the Board or, 1f he holds any other degree or tertiary qualification deemed to be of an eqmvalent standard, provided that his performance in obta1n1ng this quahficat1on was of a standard conSidered sufficient by the Board

7 1 Schedule 23

(2) To quahfy for the honours degree of Bachelor of Theology a student shall complete sat1sfactonly at least 36 units at honours level in one or two areas of study normally 1nclud1ng at least 12 units of thesis Honours programmes are outhned in Appendix B

8 The Board shall conSist of (a) The Chancellor and the Vice

Chancellor ex offlcrn (b) A Chairperson appomted as

provided m Clause 9(1) of thIS schedule

(c) Six members of the academic staff of the UmverSity appomted by the Council on the recommendation of the Academic Programmes Committee

(d) Six members appomted by the Council on the recommendation of the Adelaide College of D1vm1ty Incorporated

(e) Two students enrolled for a degree adm1n1stered by the Board elected In accordance with rules approved by the Council on the recom mendation of the Board

(f) Not more than two persons appomted by the Council on the recommendation of the Board

9 (1) The Chairperson of the Board shall be a member of the academic staff of the UmverSity appomted by the Council on the recommendation of the Board save that the lust Chairperson shall be appmnted by the Council The Chairperson shall be appomted for a term of three years and shall be ehg1ble for re appointment

(2) The Council on the recommendation of the Board shall from among the academic staff appointed under Clause 8(c) above appomt a Deputy Chairperson of the Board who shall hold office for a term of two years and shall be el1g1ble for re appointment

10 The term of office of members appomted under Clause 8(c) and 8(d) above shall be two years Half of the members appomted under each sub clause shall retire at the

97

Statutes

end of each year and shall be eligible for re appointment Following the appointment of the first Deputy Chairperson, the rema1n1ng members appointed under each sub clause shall draw by lot to determme which of them will serve an 1n1t1al term of one year and which will serve a full term of two years

11 (1) There shall be a Standmg Committee of the Board

(2) The Board shall have full power to delegate to the Standmg Committee all or any of the powers, functions duties and d1scret1ons conferred upon the Board by the Statutes of the University

(3) The Standing Committee shall be responsible to the Board and shall exercise all powers functions duties and discret10ns delegated to it by the Board in accordance with any d1rect1ons given or pohc1es or conditions prescribed by, the Board

(4) The Standing Committee shall consist of (a) The Chairperson or, in his

absence, the Deputy Chairperson of the Board

(b) Four other members of the Board, elected by the Board, two of whom shall be members appointed under the provisions of Clause S(c) above and two of whom shall be members appointed under the prov1s1ons of Clause 8(d) above

12 (1) The Chairperson or, 1n his absence, the Deputy Chairperson shall perform such duties as may from trme to time be prescnbed by the Council, and (amongst others) he shall

98

(a) be Chairperson of the Board and the Standing Committee of the Board and shall preside at all meetmgs of those bodies at which he shall be present provided that the Chairperson with the approval of the Board may delegate the Chairperson ship of the Standing Com mittee to the Deputy Chairperson

(b) convene meetings of the Board and the Standmg Committee at his own d1scret1on or on the written request of the Vice Chancellor or of two members of the Board

(c) sub1ect to the control of the Board, exercise a general super intendence over the Board s adm1n1strattve business

(2) If the Chairperson and the Deputy Chairperson are not available or are unable to act, the Vice Chancellor may convene a meeting of the Board or Standing Committee or in the case of emergency, arrange for some other member of the Board to act for the Chairperson

Appendix A

The following requirements for combinations of topics w1th1n the two areas of study have been approved by the Board of Studies in Theology for the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Theology

Biblical Studies Level Units

42 units compns1ng 25101 Introduct10n to the

Literature and History of the Old Testament 1 6

26103 Introduction to the New Testament 1 6

26102 Preluninary New Testament Greek 1 0

12 umts selected from the followmg topics 25201 Old Testament Exegesis

The Pentateuch 2 6 (may not be taken with 25205)

25202 Old Testament Exegesis The Deuterononuc History 2 6 (may not be taken with 25205)

25203 Old Testament Exegesis The Prophets 2 6

25204 Old Testament Exegesis The Wntings 2 6

25205 Old Testament Studies Israel's Sacred Story (may not be taken with 25201 or 25202)

12 units selected from the following topics 26201 New Testament Exegesis

Synoptic Gospels 2 26202 New Testament Exegesis

Paulme Epistles 2 26203 New Testament Exegesis

Johann1ne Literature 2 26204 New Testament Exegesis

Luke Acts 2 26205 New Testament Exegesis

Hebrews and Revelation 2

6 umts selected from the lollowmg topics 25301 Old Testament Theology 3 26301 New Testament Theology 3

Hrstoncal and Systemal!c Theology 48 units compnsing

6

6

6

6

6

6 6

12 units of ftrst year topics and 36 units selected from second and thud year topics at least 12 selected from topics 1n Group A and at least 12 selected from Group B

Fzrst year topzcs 27101 Introduct10n to Theology

Revelat10n and Faith 1 6 28101 Early Church History I 6

Second and thzrd yea1 topzcs GROUP A

27201 The Person and Work of Chnst

27202 Humanity and Grace 27203 Church and Mmrstry 27204 Sacraments 27205 The Holy Spmt 27206 Creat10n 27207 Eschatology 27213 Theology of God and

theTnmty 27307 Woman Man and God

GROUPE

28202 Mediaeval Church History

28203 Relormat10n Church History

28204 The Church m the Modern World (17th 20th Century)

28207 The Euchanst m History and Tradition

28301 History of Chnstran M1ss1ons

28302 History of Liturgy 28303 History of Ecumenism 28304 The Enghsh Relormat10n

2 or 3 2 or 3 2 or3 2 or 3 2 or3 2 or3 2 or 3

2 or 3 3

2 or3

2 or 3

2 or 3

2 or3

3 3 3 3

6 6 6 6 6 6 6

6 6

6

6

6

6

6 6 6 6

7 1 Schedule 23

28305 Austrahan Rehg10us History 3

28306 Patnstrc Semmar 3 28307 History of Spmtuahty Seminar 28308 The Liturgical Year History and

Meaning GROUP C

27208 Chnsllan Ethics 27215 Chnstran Sacral Ethics 27216 Liturgy Theology

Symbol, Celebration 27217 Bio medical Ethics 27301 Study of Rehg10ns 27307 Woman Man and God 28206 Religion, Science and

Society in Europe 1500 1700

Appendzx B

Honours Programmes

2 or3 2 or3

2 or3 2 or 3

3 3

2

6 6 6

6

6 6

6 6 6 6

6

An honours programme consists of one of the following combinations A full time student should complete the programme in one year of study A part time student should complete the 18 units of coursework in the first year of study and the Honours Thesis 1n the second year Topics from the Ordinary Degree or Master of Theological Studies degree programmes taken as part of an Honours programme will be assessed at the Honours Level Attendance at the Post graduate and Honours Research Seminar 1s required throughout the honours programme A student may begm the programme m February or July

Old Testament Units

29430 Honours Thesrs 18 25401 Bibhcal Hebrew 0 29401 Honours Seminar 0

18 Umts selected from the lollowmg 25301 Old Testament Theology (must be

taken if not already taken for the ordmary degree) 6

Any of the topics 25201 25202 25203 and 25204 not taken for the ordmary degree (exegesis from the Hebrew Texts Pre reqmsite 25401) 6 25402 Readings m Old Testament Studies 6 Approved topics from the Master of Theological Studies Programme 6

New Testament 29430 Honours Thesis 18

99

Statutes

26401 Advanced New Testament Greek 0 29401 Honours Seminar 0 18 umts selected from the followmg 26301 New Testament Theology (must be

taken if not already taken for the ordmary degree) 6

Any of the topics 26201 26202 26203 26204, and 26205 not taken for the ordinary degree (exegesis from the Greek text, Pre reqmsite 26401) 6 26401 Readmgs m New Testament Studies 6 Approved topics from the Master of Theological Studies Programme 6

Biblical Studies 29430 Honours Thesis 18 25401 Biblical Hebrew 0 26401 Advanced New Testament Greek O 29401 Honours Semmar 0 Either 25301 Old Testament Theology or 26301 New Testament Theology whichever was not taken for the ordinary degree 6 12 umts selected from the followmg Not more than one of the topics 25201 25202, 25203 and 25204 not taken for the ordmary degree 6 (exegesis from the Hebrew text Pre reqmsite 25401) 6 Not more than one of the topics 26201 26202 26203 26204 and 26205 not taken for the ordinary degree (exegesis from the Greek text Pre reqmsite 26401) 6 Approved topics from the Master of Theological Studies Programme 6

Systematic Theology 29430 Honours Thesis 18 29401 Honours Seminar 0 18 umts selected from the followmg Not more than two third year Systematic Theology topics not taken for the ordinary degree 12 27403 Readmgs m Systematic Theology 6 29403 Readmgs m B10ethics 6 Approved topics from the Master of Theological Studies Programme 6

Church History 29430 Honours Thesis 18 29401 Honours Seminar 0 18 umts selected from the followmg Not more than two thlfd year Church History topics not taken for the ordinary degree 12

100

28403 Readmgs m Church History 6 Approved topics from the Master of Theolog1cal Studies Programme 6

Historical and Systematic Theology 29430 Honours Thesis 18 29401 Honours Semmar 0 18 umts selected from the followmg at least 6 umts m Systemallc Theology and at least 6 units in Church History Any one of the thlfd year Systematic Theology topics not taken for the ordinary degree 6 27403 Readmgs m Systematic Theology 6 28403 Readmgs m Church History 6 29403 Readings 1n B1oeth1cs 6 Approved topics from the Master of Theological Studies Programme 6

SCHEDULE 25 The Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science (B Sc ) m the School of Med1cme

1 In this schedule a topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work on the basis of which a fmal result will be determmed

2 In order to be ehg1ble for adm1ss1on as a candidate for the degree a student (i) (a) shall have qualified for the

ordinary degree of Bachelor of Science or hold a quahf1cahon deemed by the Board of the School of MedlClne to be equivalent to that degree or

(b) shall have completed a tertiary quahf1cahon acceptable to the Board of the School ofMedicme and satisfactorily completed such additional work as the Board of the School of Medicme may prescribe 1n each case and

(u) shall have reached a suffmently high standard 1n the work of the ordinary degree or its equivalent or the additional required work parh cularly 1n those areas relating to the field of study m which it is proposed that the work for the honours degree shall be taken

3 (i) The Board of the School ofMedicme shall appomt a Bachelor of Science Honours Committee to be responsible for

(a) approvmg the admiss10n of students to the programme of studies for the degree,

(b) approvmg the proposed programme of studies 1n each case, and

(c) appomtmg a supervisor and two assessors for each student

(11) The Bachelor of Science Honours Committee w11l 1nclude one member nommated by the Board of the School of B10log1cal Sciences

4 To qualify for the degree a candidate (1) shall undertake one academic year

of full time study m topic 91410 Honours Science (Medzczne) 1 as prescnbed m the syllabus for that topic and

(11) shall satisfy the examiners m that topic

5 Each candidate will be requ1red to complete sat1sfactonly the approved programme of studies for the degree m one academic year

6 There shall be an Exammat10ns Board for the degree compnsmg (1) the Bachelor of Science Honours

Committee and (u) the supervISor of each student

enrolled for the degree

SCHEDULE 26 The Diploma m Humamties (Dip Hum )

1 In this schedule the course of study for the diploma IS set out m terms of topics umts and grades defmed as follows A topic 1s a prescnbed amount of academic work for which a fmal result 1s recorded Unzts are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined in each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal year's work by a full time student bemg valued at 36 umts Grades are the class1f1cahons of pass and fail for topics m the diploma and shall be A D1st1nctlon B = Credit C = Pass NGP D F =

Non graded Pass Compensatory Result Fail

7 1 Schedule 26

A grade of A, B, C and NGP many topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the diploma Except as stated in Clause 3 below, a grade of D wdl result m the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the diploma A grade of F in any topic will result 1n no units for that topic bemg credited towards the diploma

2 For adm1ss10n to the course of studies for the Diploma of Humamt1es candidates (1) shall have met one of the followmg

requirements (a) quahfication for a degree of

the Un1vers1ty or

(b) quahficat10n for an approved degree or an approved equivalent from another tertiary institution

(11) shall have had theu candidature and course of studies approved by the Board of the School of Humaml!es on the recommendation of the supervisor of the thesis topic

(111) shall have had the supervisor of the thesis topic approved by the Board of the School of Humamt1es The Board of the School of Humamties, 1n special cases and sub1ect to such cond1t1ons as the Board may prescribe 1n each case, may accept as a candidate a person who has not qualified for a degree but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To quahfy for the Diploma m Humaml!es a student shall complete sat1sfactonly at least 36 umts of studies with a grade of C or better m at least 27 umts and a grade of D or better 1n the rema1n1ng units These umts shall mclude (1) 9 umts of thesis at honours level, (11) at least 9 umts from honours topics

offered w1thm the School of Humanities The units for the diploma may mclude a maximum of 18 umts of topics taught at thud year level m the School of Humamt1es With the perm1ss10n of the Board of the School of Humaml!es a student may mclude m the topics for the Diploma a

101

Statutes

maxtmum of 12 units from topics offered m another School of the Un1vers1ty at third year or honours level However all students must complete a 9 unit thesis topic at honours level m the School of Humanities and at least 9 units of an honours topic 1n the School of Humanities

4 Except with the permiss10n of the Board, a student shall complete the course of study for the diploma withm a period of three years, or where credit has been granted for work completed elsewhere, withm such penod as the Board may determine at the time that credit 1s granted

5 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol in any year 1n a comb1nat1on of topics valued at more than 45 units

6 A student who falls to obtam a C grade or better 1n the same topic on more than one occas1on shall be required to show cause 1n accordance with the prov1s1on of Clause 18 of the statute why the student should be permitted to attempt that topic again

7 Except with the permiss10n of the Board, no topic presented for the diploma may repeat work undertaken for earlier degrees, unless four years have elapsed since the previous degree was awarded

SCHEDULE 28 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science (B Sc ) m the School of Socrnl Sciences

1 In this schedule a disczplzne is a maior area of study 1n which undergraduate teaching 1s offered Social Science disc1phnes are those administered w1th1n the School of Social Sciences and comprise American Studies, Asian Studies, Economic History, Economics, Geography, History, Politics, Psychology, Soc10logy

102

A baszc dzsczpline 1s the Social Science d1sc1phne 1n which the core topics of a programme sequence are offered Programmes are spec1f1ed 1n Appendix A The first digit of the programme label

spec1f1es level of topics (e g, 1st year, 2nd year, 3rd year) The second digit specifies the basic d1sc1phne (e g, Psychology= 6) A topic is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded A core topzc is a topic in the compulsory section of a programme specification A cognate topzc 1s a topic 1n another disciplme specified by a basic disciplme as bemg closely related to study m that basic disciplme Cognate topic hsts are provided by the basic disciplme Units are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School a normal year's work by a full llme student bemg valued at 36 units Grades are the class1f1cat1ons of pass and fail for topics m the degree and shall be A = D1sttnchon B = Credit C Pass D Compensatory Result F Fail

2 To quahfy for the ordmary degree a student shall complete a m1mmum of 108 topics with a grade of C or better m at least 84 umts and a grade of D m the remammg units The 108 umts shall include (a) a m1n1mum of 27 units from the first

year level topics spec1f1ed in Schedule 4 mcludmg 36120 Psychology IS,

(b) Topics to a total of 36 units from programme S26 and at least 36 units from programme S36 Details of the programmes approved by the Council on the recommendation of the Board of the School are set out mAppendixA

( c) Not more than 48 units of first year level topics

3 Except with the permission of the Board a student may not proceed to any topics at second or third year level until the student has completed or 1s enrolled to complete at least 27 units at first year level

4 Except with the permiss10n of the Board, a student may not enrol in any year 1n a comb1nahon of topics valued at more than 42 umts

5 A student who holds any other degree or other approved tertiary quahflcat10n may be granted status m not more than 36 units on account of that quahflcatton A student who has not completed a degree or other tertiary quahf1cahon may be granted status 1n not more than 72 units on account of previous tertiary study

6 Except with the permission of the Board, no topic may be attempted more than twice

7 A student may proceed to the honours degree after completmg all the requirements for the ordinary degree, or if the student holds any other degree or tertiary quahf1cat1on deemed to be of an eqmvalent standard, proVIded that the student s performance m fulfillmg those requirements or that other degree or quahf1cat10n is considered by the Board of the School of Social Sciences to be of a suff1c1ently high standard

8 To quahfy for the honours degree a student shall complete sallsfactonly a course of studies approved by the Council on the recommendallon of the Board of the School Details of the approved courses of study are set out in Appendix B

Appendix A

S26 Psychology

Core Umts 36230 Psychology II

A Cogmtive Approach 12 36231 Phys10log1cal Basis of Behaviour 3

Optzons Topics to a total of at feast 6 umts from other second level Psychology topics and a total of at least 12 umts at second or third year level from topics m the Schools of B1olog1cal Sciences, Med1c1ne, Information Science and Technology or Physical Sciences (Lists of recommended topics may be obtamed from the D1sc1plme of Psychology)

S36 Psychology Core 36301 Research Methods 6

7 1 Schedule 29

Optzons Topics to a total of at least 15 umts selected from other third year level Psychology topics at least 3 topics must be taken from Group A and at least one topic from Group B

Group A 36336 States of Awareness 3 36337 Leammg and Memory 3 36318 Supervised Literature Review

and Research Proiect 6 36333 Development during Adulthood

and Agemg 3 36338 Cogmllve Processes 3 36339 Psychophys10logical Theory and

Measurement 3

Group B

36334 Orgamsat10nal Psychology I 3 36332 Human Motlvallon 3 36331 Introduct10n to Psychopathology 3 36335 Health Psychology 3 and elective topics to corrlplete a total of 36 umts

Appendix B

S46 Psychology Honours Core Umts 3640 I Conceptual Foundat10ns of

Psychology 36440 Psychology Honours Thesis

Optwns At least 4 umts from the followmg topics

6 18

36419 Psychob10logy 4 36439 Neuropsychology 4 36441 Sleep and Arousal Disorders 4

Add1t10nal fourth year level Psychology topics or topics approved by the Head of Disc1plme to complete a total of 36 umts

SCHEDULE 29 The Diploma m Applied Statlsbcs (Dip App Stats )

1 In this schedule the course of study for the diploma 1s set out 1n terms of topics, umts and grades defmed as follows A topzc is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded

103

Statutes

Unzts are the measure of we1ghting1g1ven to topics determmed m each case by the Board of the appropriate School, a normal year's work by a full-hme student bemg valued at 36 umts Grades are the class1flcahons of pass and fail for topics m the diploma and shall be A = D1st1nchon B Credit C Pass f = Fad A grade of A, B, and C m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the diploma A grade of Fm any topic will result m no units for that topic bemg credited towards the diploma

2 For admission to the course of studies for the Diploma in Applied Stallsllcs candidates (i) shall have met one of the followmg

requirements (a) quahflca.10n for a degree of

the Un1vers1ty, or (b) quahflcahon for an approved

degree or an approved eqrn­valent from another tertiary 1nstltuhon

(u) shall have had their candidature and course of studies approved by the Board of the School of Information Science and Technology on the recommendation of the Selection Committee

3 To qualify for the Diploma m Applied Statisllcs a student shall complete sa!lsfactonly 36 umts of studies, with a grade of C or better These umts shall include (i) a 12 umt prachcal project, (n) 24 umts from third year level topics

and/or Honours topics in Stahshcal Science 1n the School oflnformahon Science and Technology or in the Department of Mathematlcal Stat1st1cs at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide

4 Except Wlth the permission of the Board of the School of lnformahon Science and Technology a student shall complete the course of study for the diploma Wlthm a penod of two years

104

5 A student who fads to obtain a C grade or better 1n the same topic on more than one occas1on shall be required to show cause in accordance with the prov1s1ons of Clause 21 of the statute why the student should be permitted to attempt that topic again

6 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, no topic presented for the diploma may repeat work undertaken for earlier degrees

SCHEDULE 30 The Diploma m Population Studies (Dtp Pop St )

1 In this schedule the course of study for the diploma is set out in terms of topics, umts and grades defmed as follows A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Units are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropriate School a normal year's work by a full time student bemg valued at 36 umts Grades are the class1f1cabons of pass and fad for topics m the diploma and shall be A = D1sbncbon B = Credit C Pass D Fail A grade of A B or C m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the diploma A grade of Pm any topic will result m no units for that topic being credited towards the diploma

2 For admission to the course of studies for the Diploma m Populat10n Studies a candidate (i) shall have met one of the followmg

requirements

(a) quahflcat10n for a degree of the Un1vers1ty at an appro pnate standard or

(b) quahflcatton for an approved degree or an approved equi­valent from another tertiary 1nstitutton at an appropriate standard

3

(u) shall have completed the reqmre ments for a ma1or sequence in a basic d1sc1phne prescribed in Schedule 2 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts in the School of Social Sciences or eqmvalent work approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences

(m) shall have his or her candidature approved by the Dean of the School of Soc1al Sciences or the Dean s nominee

The Board of the School of Social Sciences, 1n special cases and sub1ect to such cond1t1ons as the Board may prescribe 1n each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not met these requirements but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

To qualify for the Diploma m Populat10n Studies a candidate shall complete sahsfactor1ly at least 36 units, as spec1f1ed in the following programme of studies, with a grade of C or better

Units (a) 32460 Populat10n Studies

Diploma Thesis 12 (b) Core Populat10n Studies topics

(candidates must complete both of these topics) 32503 Populat10n Studies 6 32508 Populal!on Data Analysis 6

(c) Elecl!ve Populat10n Studies topics (candidates must complete at least two of the followmg topics) 32506 Reg10nal Development

and Planmng 6 32509 Human Resource

Development 6 32511 Urbamsat10n and

Development 6 32514 Populat10n Economics 6

The topics hsted under (b) and (c) are Masters level topics and candidates takmg them for the Diploma m Population Studies will be assessed at fourth year level Candidates who have completed these topics for the diploma will not be permitted to enrol in them again for a Masters degree

7 1 Schedule 31

4 Except with the pe1m1ss1on of the Board a student shall complete the course of study for the diploma withm a penod of 3 consecutive years, or where credit has been granted for work completed elsewhere, w1th1n such period as the Board may determine at the time that credit is granted

5 Except with the permiss10n of the Board a student may not enrol tn any year in a comb1nat1on of topics valued at more than 42 umts

6 A student who fails to obtam a C grade or better 1n the same topic on more than one occasion shall be required to show cause in accordance with the prov1s1ons of Clause 21 of the statute why the student should be permitted to attempt that topic again

7 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, no topic presented for the diploma may repeat work undertaken for earlier degrees unless four years have elapsed since the previous degree was awarded

SCHEDULE 31 The Certificate of Graduate Studies m Educat10n (CGSE·) 1 In this schedule the course of study for

the cert1f1cate IS set out 1n terms of topics units and grades defined as follows A topzc IS a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Unzts are the measure of weighting given to topics determined rn each case by the Board of the appropriate School a normal year s work for a full time student being valued at 36 umts Grades are the classifications of pass and fad for topics 1n the certificate and shall be A D1sttnchor B Credit C Pass F fail A grade of A B or C m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the certrfrcate A grade of F wrll result 1n no units for that topic bemg credited towards the certificate

Sub1ect to approval by Council

105

Statutes

2 Candidates may be admitted to the course of studies for the Certificate of Graduate Studies rn Education 1£ they hold either an appropnate honours degree or a quahhcat10n deemed by the Board of the School of Educat10n to be an appropriate basis for this course of study and 1£ their candidacy has been approved by the Dean of the School of Educat10n or the Dean's nominee

3 The Board of the School of Educat10n m special circumstances and sub1ect to such cond1tlons as the Board may prescribe in each case, may accept as a candidate a person who has not met these require ments but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

4 To qualify for the Certificate of Graduate Studies 1n Education a student shall sat1sfactonly complete at least 18 units from one of the programmes of study specified m the Appendix to thlS schedule with a grade of C or better m all umts

5 Except with the perm1Ss10n of the Board a student shall complete the course of study for the certificate w1thm a penod of two consecutive years

6 The course of study pursued by a candidate shall form a coherent spec1ahsm, and this specialism shall be noted on the student s official transcnpt

7 Credit for work completed by the student other than as a candidate for this certificate shall not be granted by the Board

Appendix A

The programmes hsted below have been approved by the Board of the School of Education

1 Statzstzcs Evaluation and Computer Studies Units 54001 Stat1st1cal Descnpt10n

and Inference 6 54002 Sample Surveys and Field

Studies 6 54003 Mult1vanate Analysis and

Text Analysis 54004 Computers m Society

106

6 6

2 Educatzonal Psychology 54101 Learning Development and

Educational Practice 6 54102 Psychology and lnstruct10n 6 54103 Research m Cogmt10n and

Instruction 6 54104 Issues m the Theory and Pracl:Ice

of lnstruct10nal Psychology 6 54015 Behav10ur Problems 6

3 Physical Educatzon 54601 Sport and Athletics m Modern

Society 6 54602 Play Leisure and Games 6 54603 Advanced Exercise Phys10logy 12 54604 Laboratory Techmques m

Exercise Phys10logy 12 54606 Issues in Austrahan Sports

History 12 55111 Concepts of Work, Leisure

and Recreation 6

4 History and Soczology of Educatzon 54301 Soc10logy of Educat10n 6 54302 Soc10logy of Educat10n

Themes and Issues 6 54303 Durkheim on Educat10n 6 54304 Edi..cat10n and Social Theory 6 54401 Popular Educat10n m England

1780 1870 6 54402 Popular Educat10n m Australia

to 1900 6 54403 School and Society m England

and Amenca A Study in Selected Readmgs 6

54404 Popular Educat10n m Australia smce 1900 6

54802 Adult/Further Educat10n Htstoncal and Soc1olog1cal Approaches 6

54901 EducatIOn, Ideology and Culture 6

5 Currzculum

54501 Curriculum Development and Culture 6

54502 Curriculum Theory 6 54503 Curnculum Innovation and

Implementation 6 54504 Classroom Processes 6 54505 Programme and Curnculum

Evaluation 6 54506 Issues 1n Programme and

Curriculum Evaluation 54902 Language and Educat10n

6 6

54904 Current Developments in Abongmal Educat10n 6

6 Early Childhood 54701 Development m Early Cluldhood 6 54702 Issues m Early Chtldhood

Educat10n 6 54 703 Models and Outcomes m Early

Chtldhood Educat10n 6 54013 Early Development and

Except10nahty 6

7 Special Educatzon 54010 Current Perspectives m

Special Education 6 54011 Systems and the Professional

in Special Education 6 54012 Curriculum Theory and

Special Education 6 54013 Early Development and

Except10nahty 6 54014 Mental Retardation 6 54015 Behav10ur Problems 6 54016 Educatrnn of Children wJth

Physical Disabihties 6 54018 Education of Children with

Learnmg Difficulties 6 54021 Educat10n of Hearmg

Impaired Students I 6 54022 Educatrnn of Hearing

Impaired Students II 6 54023 Education of Visually

Impaired Students I 6 54024 Educatrnn of Visually

Impaired Students II 6

8 Educatwnal Management 55101 Development of Admmistratlve

Concepts 6 55102 The Orgamsahon m Actrnn 6 55103 Human Commumcahon 6 55104 Managmg Human Resources 6 55105 The Austrahan Educatrnn

System 6 55106 Current Issues m Educatrnn

Educat10nal Admmistration 6 55107 Planmng and Admmistratrnn 6 55110 The School and the Commumty 6 55114 Understandmg Research m

Adm1n1strahon 6 55115 Leaders and Leadership 6 55116 Selected Management Issues 6 55117 Selected Management

Approaches 6 54803 Tertiary Education 6

7 1 Schedule 32

SCHEDULE 32 Di~loma m Primary Health Care (Dip P H C )

1 Applicants may be accepted as candidates for the Diploma m Primary Health Care if they are (a) medical graduates of this or of an

approved University, provided that they have also completed not less than two years of post registration experience approved for this purpose, or1

(b) other graduates of this or of an approved Un1vers1ty or 1nshtuhon of higher educatrnn, provided that they have completed not less than two years of post graduate experience approved for this purpose, or,

(c) persons who have sattsfactonly completed the fmal exammation of a professional 1nshtution approved for this purpose by the Board of the School of Medicme and who have not less than three years of approved professional experience or

(d) persons who have obtamed some other qualification approved for this purpose by the Board of the School of Med1c1ne and who have not less than three years of approved professional expenence

(e) Apphcants may be offered quahfymg studies to be determmed by the Board of the School of Medicme On the satisfactory completrnn of the quahfymg studies the student will be accepted as an admitted candidate for the diploma

2 To qualify for the diploma the candidate shall satlsfactonly complete 36 umts of coursework

3 Except with the permissrnn of the Board of the School of Medicme a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the diploma for not less than one year and not more than two years and a part time candidate for not less than two years and not more than four years from the month from wluch the candidature was dated

4 The diploma is offered 1n stx programmes, details of which are m the syllabuses for

107

Statutes

the Master of Science (Primary Health Care)

Pnmary Health Care Palha!Ive Care Commumty Mental Health Add1ct10n Studies Commumty Child Health Health Educat10n

The Board of the School of Med1cme may specify the programme of studies for the diploma in appendices to this schedule This programme may mclude postgraduate level topics at other approved 1nst1tut1ons

5 Candidates who deme that topics they have satisfactorily completed m the Un1vers1ty or elsewhere be credited towards the diploma may on written apphcatlon be granted such exemption from the reqmrements of Clause 3 as the Board shall determme (The maximum amount of status which will be granted towards the diploma m respect of work from another quah!Icat10n will be 12 umts)

6 Candidates who apply for admission to the Master of Science (Primary Health Care) course dunng their studies towards the diploma, shall, on adm1ss1on to their Masters candidature, cease to be enrolled m the diploma

7 In the event that apphcat10n to become a candidate for the Master of Science (Primary Health Care) degree occurs after complet10n of the diploma the award of the Masters degree shall be subiect to the candidate surrendering the diploma

AppendzxA

Primary Health Care Umts

Core Topics 95001 Commumty Orgamsa!Ion

and Health 4 95002 The Management of Services

m Primary Health Care 95003 The Process of Learmng 95004 Health Programmes 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 95006 Commumty Health Research

108

4 4 4 4 4

Elective Topics 95009 Health Counsellmg 6 95010 Internat10nal Health 6 95011 The Basis of Add1ct1ve Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95013 Medical Demography 6 95014 Commumty Nutrit10n 6 95015 Gerontology and Health 6 95016 Behav10ural Management 6 95029 IndIV1dual Study m Primary

Health Care 6 95035 Healthy C1!Ies Pubhc Health

in Action 6 95037 Women's Health 6

Appendix B Palhat1ve Care

Core Topzcs 95001 Commumty Orgamsat1on

and Health 95003 The Process of Learnmg 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 95006 Commumty Health Research 95023 The Prac!Ice of Palhat1ve Care 95024 Psychological Aspects of

Palha!Ive Care 95025 Oncology Aspects of

Palha!Ive Care

Umts

4 4 4 4 6

4

4 95026 Commumty Care and Orgamsat10n 4

Elective Topics 95009 Health Counsellmg 6 95010 Internat10nal Health 6 95011 The Basis of Add1c!Ive Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 95013 Medical Demography 95014 Commumty Nutrit10n 95015 Gerontology and Health 95016 Behav10ural Management 95029 Ind1VIdual Study m Pnmary

Health Care 95035 Healthy C1!Ies Pubhc Health

in Action 95037 Womens Health

Appendix C

Community Mental Health Core Topzcs 95001 Commumty Orgamsat10n

and Health

4 6 6 6 6

6

6 6

Units

4

95002 The Management of Services 1n Primary Health Care

95003 The Process of Learning 4 4

95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95017 Mental Health Programmes 95018 Community Mental Health

Research 95019 Basis of Commumty Mental Health

Elective Topics

4

4 6

95009 Health Counselling 6 95010 International Health 6 95011 BaSIS of Add1ct1ve Behaviour 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95015 Gerontology and Health 6 95020 Systematic Approaches to

Children, Family and Community 6 95021 Child Community Mental Health 6 95022 Community Development m

Mental Health 6 95029 Ind1V1dual Study m Primary

Health Care 6 95035 Healthy Cities Pubhc Health

1n Action 6 95037 Women's Health 6

Appendix D Addiction Studies

Core Topzcs 95001 Commumty Orgamsat10n

and Health 95002 The Management of Services

m Primary Health Care 95003 The Process of Learnmg 95004 Health Programmes m Add1ct1ve

Behav10ur

Units

4

4 4

4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95011 The BaSIS of Addictive Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95027 Addictive Behav10ur Research 4 95028 Intervent10n Skills m Addictive

Behaviour 4 95036 Health Programmes m Add1ct10n

Behaviour

Appendix E Commumty Child Health

Core Topics

Units

95001 Commumty Orgamsat10n and Health 4

7 1 Schedule 32

95002 The Management of Services m Primary Health Care 4

95003 The Process of Learnmg 4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95030 Child Development 6 95031 Material and Child Health 4 95032 School and Commumty Health 4

' Elective Topics 95009 Health Counsellmg 6 95010 Internat10nal Health 6 95011 The Basis of Addictive Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95013 Medical Demography 6 95014 Commumty Nutrit10n 6 95015 Gerontology and Health 6 95016 Behav10ural Management 6 95021 Child Commumty Mental Health 6 95029 Individual Study m Primary

Health Care 6 95035 Healthy Cities - Pubhc Health

in Action 6 95037 Women's Health 6

Appendix F

Health Educat10n Umts

Core Topics 95001 Commumty Orgamsat10n and

Health 4 95003 The Process of Learmng 4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95006 Commumty Health Research 4 95033 Health Educat10n 4 95034 Health Education Programmes 4

Elective Topics 95009 Health Counsellmg 95010 Intemat10nal Health

6 6

95011 The Basts of Addictive Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95013 Medical Demography 6 95014 Commumty Nutrition 6 95015 Gerontology and Health 6 95016 Behav10ural Management 6 95029 Individual Study m Primary

Health Care 6 95035 Healthy C1t1es - Pubhc Health

m Act10n 6 95037 Women's Health 6

109

Statutes

SCHEDULE 33 The Diploma m Computer Science (Dip Comp Sc )

1 In this schedule the course of study tor the diploma is set out in terms of topics units, and grades defined as follows

A topzc is a prescnbed amount of work for which a final iesult is recorded Unzts are the measure of we1ght1ng given to topics determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School, a normal year s work by a full time student being valued at 36 units Grades are the class1f1cations of pass and fail for topics m the diploma and shall be A D1st1nctlon B = Credit C Pass D Fail A grade of A, B or C m any topic will result m the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the diploma A grade of F rn any topic will result in no units of that topic being credited towards the diploma

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Diploma 1n Computer Science, a graduate (1) shall have met one of the following

requirements

(a) quahflcat10n for a degree of the U n1vers1ty

(b) quahflcat10n for an approved degree or its equivalent from another tertiary 1nst1tution

(11) shall have his or her candidature approved by the Board of the School of Informatron Science and Technology on the recommendation of the Selection Committee

3 To quahfy for the Diploma m Computer Science a student shall complete sahsfactonly 48 units of studies with a grade of C or better These umts shall include

110

(1) the 9 umt topic 68110 Computer Science I

(a) the followmg 3 umt topics 62811 Data Structures 68212 Informa!Ion Systems 68213 Program Structures

68214 Computer Systems

(m) 18 umts selected from tlurd year level topics and at the Head of D1sc1phne's d1scret1on, Honours topics offered by the Computer Science D1sc1phne

(iv) the 9 umt topic, 68401 Software Engmeermg Pro1ect

Status may be granted for (1) if the graduate is accepted as having a background in Computer Science eqmvalent to that achieved by the satisfactory completion of the current 9 unit topic 68110 Computer Science I Status for courses completed at the Un1vers1ty or equivalent courses at other 1nshtutlons may be granted for the topics m (a) Appltcahon for status should accompany the apphcat10n for adm1ss10n The School Board will advise the extent of status allowed at the time of adm1ss1on to the diploma

4 A student who farts a topic twice may not enrol 111 that topic without the perm1ss1on of the School Board on the recom mendahon of the D1sc1phne

5 Except with perm1ss10n of the School Board, a student shall complete the course of study for the diploma w1th1n a penod of four consecutive years or where status has been granted, w1th1n such penod as determined by the School Board on the recommendation of the Diploma Selection Committee

6 Except with perm1Ss10n of the School Board on the recommendation of the D1sc1phne status will not be given for any topic that has been counted towards another degree

7 Except with the perm1ss10n of the School Board on the recommendation of the D1sc1phne, no topic presented for the d1plon1a may repeat work counted towards another degree

SCHEDULE 34 The Graduate Certificate m Mathematics Education (Grad Cert Maths Ed )

1 In this schedule the course of study for the cert1f1cate 1s set out in terms of topics, units and grades defined as follows

2

3

4

A topic is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded Unzts are the measure of we1ght1ng given to topics, determined in each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal se1nester s work by a full time student bemg valued at 18 umts Grades are the class1flcahons of pass and fall for topics in the cert1f1cate and shall be A B

D1st1nct1on Credit

C Pass NGP Non graded pass F Fail A grade of A B C and NG Pm anytop1c will result m the lull number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the cert1f1cate A grade of F 1n any topic will result 1n no units for that topic being credited towards the certificate

For admission to the course of studies for the certificate candidates shall hold an approved degree or diploma in teaching or an approved equivalent quallflcatlon and shall have their candidacy and programme of studies approved by the Dean of the School of Information Science and Technology or the Dean s nominee The Board of the School of In!orrrahon Science and Technology 1n special cases and sub1ect to such conditions as the Board may prescribe in each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not met these requirements but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

To quahfy for the Graduate Certificate m Mathematics Education a student shall complete sahsfactonly at least 18 units selected from the topics spec1f1ed 1n the Appendix to this schedule, mcludmg at least 12 umts selected from one of the groups of core topics, and shall gain a grade of C or better m all units

Except with the perm1sSion of the Board a student shall complete the course of study for the certificate w1thm a penod of two consecutive years

7 1 Schedule 34

5 1Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board no topic presented for the certificate may repeat work undertaken for earlier degrees or diplomas

Appendix A

Topics for the Graduate Cert1f1cate zn Mathematics Educatzon The core topics for the certificate are offered 10a101nt programme by the South Australran higher education institutions In association with the Adelaide Consortmm for Math emahcs Educat10n It is anhc1pated that all core topics from the same group will be offered at the same venue Students enrolled In the Certificate at Fhnders Umversity w1ll normally select their non core topics from Group C which compnses topics offered at Flinders Umvers1ty They will normally mclude a pro1ect topic Core topics n1ay be sub1ect to a quota and not all topics will necessauly be offered in any one semester In some cases students may need to undertake prehm1nary bndg1ng studies pnor to enrolment to ensure that they have the necessary assumed mathematical background

Group A Core Topics The group A core topics are intended for teachers who are currently teaching some 1un1or secondary mathematics, or who wish to undertake such teaching, but whose formal training was 1n another area All of the topics assume a knowledge of at least one of the publicly exammed SSABSA Year 12 Mathematics subjects or the equivalent Topzc Units Semester

School of Mathematics Curnculum 3 2

Applymg Mathematics 3 2 65401 Exploratory

Data Analysis 3 2

Geometry for Teachers 3 2

Thmkmg Mathemallcally 3 2

Group B Core Topzcs The group B core topzcs are intended for the professional development of mathematics spec1ahst teachers who wish to update their background 1n mathematics relevant to the senior secondary curnculum 1n mathematics education and teaching methodology and 1n the use of modern technology

111

Statutes

The topics assume a pass 1n at least one first year level tertiary level mathematics topic such as Mathematics I at this Un1vers1ty

Topics Units Semester

65402 Modern Stal!stics 3 1 61421 Modellmg with

Mathematics 3 1 61412 Discrete Mathemal!cs 3 1 61420 Mathemal!cs

Education 3 1

Further Topics

Group C Topics

Units

61423 Certificate Project 3 61426 Mmor Certificate Project 1 5 61421 Certificate Mathemallcs Studies 3

61422 Directed Readmg Studies 3 61425 Mmor Directed Readmg Studies 1 5

Group D Topics Subject to the approval of the Dean or the Dean s nominee perm1ss1on may be given for the 1nclus1on 1n the Cert1f1cate of other topics offered by the School of Informat10n Science and Technology provided that it is appropriate to the student's background and interests and the aims of the Certificate and does not overlap with other topics offered for the Certificate In special c1rcumstances, it might be possible to include topics from other rnst1tuhons rn this group

SCHEDULE 35 The Graduate Diploma m Archaeology (Grad Dip Arch )

1 In this schedule the course of study for the diploma is set out 1n terms of topics, units and grades defined as follows

112

A topzc is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result IS

recorded

Unzts are the measure of weighting given to topics determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropnate School, a normal years work by a full llme student bemg valued at 36 umts

Grades are the class1f1cahons of pass and fail for topics m the graduate diploma and shall be

A D1shnchon B = Credit C Pass NGP Non-graded pass D = Compensatory Result F Fail

A grade of A B C and NG Pm any topic will result 1n the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the graduate diploma A grade of D or F in any topic will result 1n no units for that topic being credited towards the graduate diploma

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for Graduate Diploma m Archaeology candidates

(i) shall have met one of the following requirements (a) quahflcat10n for a degree of

the Un1vers1ty or (b) quahficat10n for an approved

degree or an approved equivalent from another tertiary 1nst1tut1on

(n) shall have had thelf candidature and course of studies approved by the Board of the School of Human1t1es The Board of the School of Human1t1es, in special cases and sub1ect to such conditions as the board may prescnbe in each case, may accept as a candidate a person who has not quahf1ed for a degree but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To quahfy for the Graduate Diploma m Archaeology a student shall complete sat1sfactonly at least 36 units of studies with a grade of C or better

These umts shall mclude (i) the compulsory thesis (6 umts) core

topic 16451 Archaeological Theory and

Method (n) three topics (18 umts) of which at

least two must be chosen from the semester length topics m Group A and at least one from the practical topics m Group B (note that the assessment system for postgraduate students will differ from that of undergraduate students)

(m) a 6000 word research paper (12 units)

Group A sub1ects (Umversity of Adelaide topics) 9460 Roman Art and Architecture

IV 6738 Later Roman Art and

Architecture IV 4732 Archaic Greek Art and

Architecture IV 3070 Classical Greek Art and

Architecture IV

(Flinders Un1vers1ty topics) 16218 Introduct10n to Archaeology 16221 The Museum 16226 Australian Archaeology I 16227 Australian Archaeology II 16237 Celtic Art

Group B sub1ects At least one of the followmg

(Umversity of Adelaide topic) 2220 Bmldmg surveys

(Flinders Umversity topic) 16450 Introduct1on to Science and

Archaeology

4 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student shall complete the course of study for the graduate diploma withm the penod of three years, or where credit has been granted for work completed elsewhere w1th1n such penod as the Board may determine at the time that credit 1s granted

5 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol in any year 1n a comb1nahon of topics valued at more than 45 umts

6 A student who falls to obtam a C grade or better in the same topic on more than one occasion shall be required to show cause 1n accordance with the prov1s1on of Clause 18 of the statute why the student should be permitted to attempt that topic again

SCHEDULE 36 The Graduate Diploma m Legal Studies (Grad Dip Leg Stud ) 1 In this schedule the course of study for

the grad1ate diploma is set out in terms of topics, units grades and programmes, defmed as follows

7 1 Schedule 36

A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Units are the measure of weighting given to topics determined rn each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal years work by a full !Im~ student bemg valued at 36 units Grades are the class1fications of pass and fail for topics m the graduate diploma and shall be A B c D F

D1stinctlon Credit Pass Compensatory Result Fall

A grade of A, B, C in any topic will result 1n the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the graduate diploma A grade of D wlll result m the full number of units for that topic being credited for the graduate d1ploma, except as stated m Clause 3 below A grade of F 1n any topic will result in no units for that topic bemg credited towards the graduate diploma

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Graduate Diploma m Legal Studies a candidate (i) shall have met one of the followmg

requirements (a) quahflcat10n for a degree of

the University at an appro pnate standard, or

(b) quahficat10n for an approved degree or its equivalent from another tertiary institution at a standard acceptable to the Board of the School of Humanities

(u) shall have his or her candidature approved by the Dean of the School or the Dean s nominee

The Board of the School m special cases and sub1ect to such conditions as the Board may prescribe 1n each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not qualified for a degree but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To quahfy for the Graduate Diploma m Legal Studies a student must complete satisfactonly at least 36 umts from the

113

Statutes

following programme of studies, 1nclud1ng the 12 unit core topic with a grade of C or better in at least 24 units 1nclud1ng the core topic, and a grade of D or better In the rema1n1ng elective units

Units (a) 21110 Introductwn to Legal

Studies (core topic) 12 (b) 21211 Legal Studies Topic #1 6

21212 Legal Studies Topic #2 6 21213 Language Literature

and the Law 6 21314 The Wnter and the Law 6 21411 Supervised Research

Topic 6 21412 (39215) Federalism m

Austraha 6 21413 (38314) Soc10logy of

Deviance 6 21414 (38521) Cnmmology 6 21415 (38326) Soc10logy of

Law 6 21416 Legal Aspects of

Multiculturalism 6 21416 Psychology and the Law 6 21418 (14242) Freedom Law

and Society 6 21419 (14249) Legal

Reasomng 6 21420 (35215) Australian

Government and Public Polley

21520 (14248) Philosophy of Law 6

21521 (14246) Medical Ethics 6 4 A student who fatls to obtain a C grade or

better 1n the same topic on more than one occasion shall be required to show cause why the student should be permitted to attempt that topic agam

5 Except with the perm1ss1on of Board no topic presented for the diploma may repeat work undertaken for earher degrees

6 Except with the permisswn of the Board, a candidate will complete the course of study for the diploma withm three consecutive years

SCHEDULE 37 The Ordmary Degree of Bachelor of Health Science (Environmental Health) (B H Sc EnvH) 1 In this schedule the course of study for

114

the degree 1s set out in terms of topics units grades and programmes of study defmed as follows A topzc is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a fmal result is recorded Unzts are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropriate School Grades are the classifications of pass and fall for topics m the ordmary degree and shall be A Distinction B Credit C Pass D Compensatory Result F Fail A grade of A, B, or C 1n any topic will result in the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree Except as stated 1n Clause 2 below, a grade of D will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree A grade of F m any topic will result in no units for that topic bemg credited towards the degree A programme of studies is an approved combination of topics representing a normal three years work for an ordinary degree

2 To qualify for the ordmary degree a student shall satisfactorily complete the programme of studies prescnbed in the Appendix to this Schedule with a grade of C or better in at least 84 units 1nclud1ng the Env1onmental Health topics and in the topics which comprise the third year of the programme and a grade of D or better in the rema1n1ng units

3 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student may not enrol in any year in a comb1nahon of topics valued at more than 42 umts

4 Except with the permiss10n of the Board no topic may be attempted more than twice

5 A student who holds any other degree or approved tertiary quahflcahon may be granted status in not more than 36 units on account of that quahf1cahon A student who has not completed a degree or other tertiary quahflcation may be granted status in not more than 72 units on account of previous tertiary study

Appendix

The programme of studies for the Bachelor of Health Science (Environmental Health) has been approved by the Board of the School of Med1c1ne and is as follows

Year 1 Semester 1

96101 Introductrnn to Ecology 96102 Chemistry, Health, Environment 96103 Commumcatrnn Skills 96104 Introduc!Ion to Environmental

Health

Semester 2

96105 Human Brnlogy 96106 PhySics for the Health Service 96107 Computers and Information

Management 96108 Environmental Health

Year2 Semester 1

Um ts 3 6 6

3

3 3

6 6

Research Methods 3 Introduction to Law 3 Organic and Brnchemistry 6 Environmental Health 3 6

Semester 2 Introductrnn to Bmldmg 3 Sociology 3 Microbrnlogy 6 Environmental Health 4 6

Year3 Semester 1

Toxicology 3 B mldmg and Plannmg 6 Occupatrnnal Health and Safety 6 Social Psychology 3

Semester 2

Pubhc Health Engmeermg 6 Management and Adm1n1stratton 3 Law2 6 Health Educatrnn 3

Schedule 38 The Associate Diploma m Apphed Science (Assoc Dip App Sc )

1 In this schedule the course of study for the associate diploma is set out 1n terms of topics units and grades defined as follows

7 1 Schedule 38

A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result ts recorded Units are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropnate School A normal semesters work by a full time student is valued at 18 units Grades are the class1f1cations of pass and fad for topics in the associate diploma and shall be A B c NGP D F

= D1shnctron Credit Pass Non graded Pass Compensatory Result Fail

A grade of A B, C, NGP or Din any topic will result 1n the full number of units for the topic being credited towards the associate diploma sub1ect to Clause 3 below A grade of Fin any topic will result in no units for the topic being credited towards the associate diploma

2 Candidates may be admitted to the course of studies for the associate diploma if they hold one of the following quahf1cat1ons (a) a sat15factory result m Year 12 as

may be determined by the Matnculatron Board (on the advice of the Science Liaison Committee)

(b) satisfactory completwn of cert1f1cates from the Department of Technical and Further Education as may be determined by the Science Liaison Committee

(c) sal!sfactory completwn of the Mature Age Entry test

The Matnculatron Board 1n special cases and sub1ect to such cond1hons as the Board may prescribe in each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not met these requirements but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To qualify for the Associate Diploma In Apphed Science a student shall have completed at least 72 umts selected according to the requirements of one of the programmes hsted m the Appendix to this schedule, with a grade of C or better

115

Statutes

1n at least 54 units and a grade of D or better 1n the rema1n1ng units

4 Except with the perm1ss1on of the appropnate School Board, a student shall complete the course 1n no less than two years

5 Sub1ect to the permiss10n of the appropnate School Board a student may transfer after satisfactory completion of Part I of the Associate Diploma m Applied Science to the course of study for the Bachelor of Science A student enrolled for the degree of Bachelor of Science may transfer to the Associate Diploma in Apphed Science sub1ect to the requirements of this schedule

To quahfy for the Associate Diploma m Applied Sc1ence1 a student shall complete one of the following programmes which have been approved by the Boards of the appropnate Schools

Appendix A (a) Natural Sciences Programme

Entry to this programme will normally assume a knowledge of Physics and Chemistry at Year 11 level

Part I Students must complete the follow1ng

Units 1 81100 Earth Sciences 1 and 9

65103 Elements of Date Analysis 3 2 60117 Introductory Mathematics A or9

60118 Introductory Mathematics B or9 60130 Mathemal!cs I 9

3 79101 Introduct10n to Physics D and 9 79102 Apphed Physics

Laboratory ID 4 5 or 79103 Physical Pnnciples I and 9 79104 Apphed Physics

L•boratory 1 4 5

Part II Students must complete the followmg

1 79105 Introduct10n to

116

Chemistry D and 9 79106 Apphed Chemistry

Laboratory ID 4 5 or 79107 Chemical Prmciples I and 9 79108 Apphed Chemistry

Laboratory I 4 5

2

3

(b)

1 2

86100 B10logical Sciences I or 86110 Perspectives in Biology

9 12

* Synoptic Laboratory I and 1 5 81217 Surface and Sub surface

Hydrology I and 3 82218 Oceanography and 3 82219 Meteorology 3 Students should also complete opt10nal first or second year Science topics sub1ect to approval by the Board to gam a total of at least 72 umts

Geology and Geophysics Programme Entry to this programme will normally assume a knowledge of basic Science at Year 12 level

Part I Students must complete the followmg

Units 81100 Earth Sciences 1 79107 79108

or

Chemical Pnnc1ples I and Apphed Chemistry Laboratory I

79105 Introduct10n to Chemistry D

9

9

45

and 9 79106 Apphed Chemistry

Laboratory ID 4 5 3 79103 Physical Prmciples I and 9

79104 Apphed Physics Laboratory 1 4 5

or 79101 Introduct10n to Physics D and 9 79102 Apphed Physics

Laboratory ID 4 5 4 at least 12 units selected from the

followmg topics 86100 B10logical Sciences I 9 60017 I Introductory Mathematics 60018 A or B 9 65103 Elements of Data Analysis 3 60130 Mathemal!cs I 9 86610 Perspecl!ves m B10logy 12

Part II Students should complete 81217 Surface and Sub surface

Hydrology 3 83204 Explorat10n Geophysics I 3 84213 Structural Geology 3 84221 Petrology 3 84281 Opllcal Mmeralogy

& Petrology 3 84297 Geological Field Techmques 4

• Modified vers10n of 88217 The Weather Forecast I yet to be developed

(c)

1

2

3

(d)

1

Students should select optwnal first or second year Science topics sub1ect to approval by the Board to complete a total of at least 72 units It is recommended that some or all of the followmg topics be included m the elective component of t1'e programme

83210 Geological Field Techniques 3 84205 Sedimentary Environments etc 3 84282 Structural Geology

Laboratory 2 84383 Sedimentary Environments

Laboratory 3 84389 Special Topics m

Palaeontology 3

Apphed Physics Programme Entry to this programme will assume a knowledge of Physics at Year 12 level

Part I Students should complete

Units 79103 Physical Prmciples I and 9 79104 Appl!ed Physics

Laboratory I 45 60117 / Introductory Mathematics 60118 A or B 9

79105 Introduct10n to Chemistry D and 9

79106 Apphed Chemistry Laboratory ID 45

or 81100 Earth Sciences I and 9 65103 Elements of Data

Analysis and 3 67201 Computmg with Fortran 3

Part II Students should enrol for 79201 Apphed Physics 2 9 79205 Physics Laboratory 2 3 79202 Apphed Physics 3 9 Students should also complete optwnal first or second year science topics sub1ect to approval by the Board to complete a total of at least 72 umts

Apphed Chemistry Programme Entry to this programme will assume a knowledge of Chemistry at Year 12 level

Part I 79107 Chemical Prmciples I and 9 79108 Apphed Chemistry

Laboratory 45

2

3

7 1 Schedule 38

60117 / Introductory Mathemal!cs 60118 A or B

79101 Introduct10n to Physics D and

79102 Apphed PhySlcs Laboratory ID

or 86100 B10logical Science I and 65103 Elements of Data

Analysis and 65104 Elements of Statistical

Science

Part II Students should enrol for 79203 Apphed Chemistry

9

9

45

9

3

3

Laboratory 2 12 79204 Chemical Pnnciples 2 9 Students should also enrol for optional first or second year science topics sub1ect to approval by the Board to complete a total of at least 72 units

(e) Programmes m B10logy Part I Topics available 1n Part I can include introductory topics where students have not taken Mathematics Chemistry and Physics programmes at Year 12 (although some knowledge of chemistry and basic mathematics at Year 12 would still be an advantage) or can include topics from first year of the Bachelor of Science programme where students have completed the correspondmg PES subjects at Year 12

Students must complete 86100 B10logical Science I Students must also complete 27 units from the followmg 60117 / Introductory Mathematics 60118 A or B 9

79105 Introduction to Chemistry D and 9

79106 Apphed Chemistry Laboratory ID 45

79107 Chemical Prmciples I and 9 79108 Apphed Chemi•try

Laboratory I 45

79101 Introduct10n to Physics D and 9 79102 Apphed Physics

Laboratory ID 45

79103 Physical Prmciples I and 9

117

Statutes

ll8

79104 Apphed Physics Laboratory I

81100 Earth Sciences I

45

9

Where students have already completed studies equivalent to these topics to the satisfaction of the School of B1olog1cal Sciences students may select further topics from first year to complete the req u1rements of Part I Alternatively students may undertake any first year topic available w1th1n the Dtsctpltnes of Mathematics, Stat1st1cal Science Psychology Computer Science w1thm the Umvers1ty provided that they have met the requirements of assumed knowledge (1f any) and provided that they have been admitted to the topic quota (1f any) Enrolment in topics requ1r1ng assumed knowledge will be at the d1screhon of the Director of Studies

Part II Environmental Science Programme Pre requ1s1te a grade of C or better 1n 86100 B10log1cal Science I Students should take or have taken 81100 Earth Science I and either 60117 Introduct10n to Mathemallcs A or 60118 Introduction to Mathematics B To complete Part II m the Environmental Science strand students must complete 36 umts mcludmg the followmg 86222 B10log1cal Expenmentat10n II 3 86230 Populat10n Ecology 3 86229 Plant Anatomy Phys10logy

and Development 3 86220 Evolut10n and Heredity 6 86223 Ammal Phys10logy 3 88390 Phys10logy of Manne

Organisms 3

Molecular Brnlogy and M1crob10Iogy Programme Pre requ1s1te a grade of C or better 1n 86100 B10log1cal Science I and a grade of D or better 1n

79105 Introduct10n to Chemistry D and 79106 Apphed Chemistry Laboratory ID or 79107 Chemical Prmc1ples I and 79108 Apphed Chemistry Laboratory I

Students should have completed or should complete either 60117 Intro duct10n to Mathematics A or 60118 Introduction to Mathematics B

To complete the requirements of the Molecular B10logy and M1crob10logy Programme, students should complete 36 units including at least the following

86231 B10log1cal Expenmentat10n I 6 86225 Basic M1crob10logy 3 86224 Basic Metabolism 3 86228 Molecular B10logy 3

NB add1ttonal topics are being developed and some changes may be made to this programme for 1992

Schedule 39 The Honours Degree of Bachelor of B10technology (B B10tech ) m the Schools of B10log1cal Sciences and Medtcme 1 In this schedule the course of study for

the degree 1s set out 1n terms of topics, units grades and programmes of study defmed as follows A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Unzts are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School Grades are the class1flcahons of pass and fail for topics m the ordmary degree and shall be A B c NGP D F

Distinction Credit Pass Non graded Pass Compensatory Result Fail

A grade of A B C or NGP many topic specified m Clause 2 will result m the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree Topics 1n which a grade of D IS obtamed will be counted towards the degree provided that the total of D umts does not exceed 24

2 To quahfy for the Honours degree a student shall obtam a total of at least 144 units 1nclud1ng

(a) At first year level 86100 B10log1cal Science I 7 4100 Chemistry I 68110 Computer Science I

9 9 9

and a further 9 units of optional topics, approved by the Brntechnology Programme Committee, or, 1n exceptional

circumstances such other combinations of topics as approved by the B10technology Programmes Comrruttee

(b) At second year level 88201 B10technology I 12 88202 Legal, Ethical and Social

Aspects of B10technology 3 86231 B10log1cal Experimentat10n I 6 86228 Molecular Biology 3 86224 Basic Metabohsm 3 86225 Basic M1crob1ology 3 and a further 6 umts of opt10nal topics approved by the B10technology Programme Committee

(c) At third year level xxxxx B10technology II 9 89339 Molect!lar and Cellular

Biology Laboratory 6 89336 DNA Properties funct10n

and mampulat10n 6 88352 M1crob10logy 6 xxxxx Topic 1n Business

Management I 3 and a further 6 umts of opt10nal topics approved by the Biotechnology Programme Committee

(d) At fourth year level xxxxx B10technology Laboratory 9 xxxxx B10technology lII 12 xxxxx Biotechnology Practice 12 xxxxx Topic 1n Business

Management II 3

7 3 Masters Degrees 1 The Masters degrees offered m the

Umversity shall be those specified m the schedules to this statute *

2 A person who wishes to become a candidate for a master's degree shall make apphcat10n to the Registrar subm1ttmg an outlme of the studies the person proposes to pursue and detads of the person's quahficatlons for undertaking them A person who 1s not a graduate of the Umversity shall submit documentary evidence of the person's quahf1cattons and academic record

3 A person who holds an honours degree of the UmverSity or who holds quahflcat10ns deemed by the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be at least

• Amendment awa1tmg approval of H E The Governor

7 3 Masters Degrees

equivalent to an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty may be accepted for enrolment as a candidate for a degree of Master (et seq ) provided that (a) the candidature and programme of

studies have been approved by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology,

(b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and appropriately supervised and that the apphcant 1s 1udged by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be quahf1ed to undertake it, and

(c) the applicant may be requued as a pre requ1s1te for enrolment as a candidate, to undertake and to complete to the satisfaction of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology such quahfy1ng examinations as may be prescribed by the Board

4 A person who does not hold an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty, or who does not hold quahf1cahons deemed by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be at least eqwvalent to an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty will be required as a pre requ1s1te to enrolment as a candidate, to undertake such topics and to complete to the sat1Sfact10n of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology such qualtfymg exanunahons as may be prescnbed by the Board, proVIded that (a) the candidature and programme of

studies have been approved by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology, and

(b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and appropriately supervtsed and that the apphcant IS 1udged by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be

' quahfled to take 1t 5 Notwithstandmg the prov1s10ns of Clause

4 the Academic Programmes Committee may m special cases and sub1ect to such cond1t1ons as the Committee may pre scribe in each case, accept as a candidate

119

Statutes

a person who does not hold a degree of a un1vers1ty or a quahf1cahon deemed by the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be at least equivalent to a degree of a un1vers1ty1

but who has given evidence satisfactory to the Committee of fitness for masters studies and whose candidature 1s supported by the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology

6 The Academic Programmes Comrruttee may accept a candidate at any time and shall specify the month from which the candidature shall be dated

7 The Academic Programmes Committee may accept at any time a student takmg qualifying topics or exam1nat1ons as pre requ1s1te to enrolment as a candidate and shall specify when the student shall enrol and the amount of time which shall be permitted for the complet10n of those topics or exam1natlons

8 When an applicant has been accepted as a candidate or as a quahfymg student the applicant shall enrol as a student m the appropnate School of the Umvemty and shall pay the appropnate fees

9 A student shall re-enrol dunng the prescribed enrolment period each year until such time as (a) the student has completed to the

sa!Isfact10n of the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology all of the topics or exam1nahons required as a pre requ1s1te to enrolment as a candidate or

(b) the student has completed all work required for the award of a master's degree or

(c) the student has ceased to be a student of the UmverSity

10 A candidate may be accepted as a full­tune student or a part-time student, but a part time student wdl be accepted only 1f the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology IS

satISfied that the student 1s able to devote suff1c1ent time to the approved studies and sub1ect to such cond1bons as the Board may prescribe

120

11 (a) The Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Stuc,hes m Theology may on the recommendation of the candidate's supervisor permit a candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy to transfer to a master's degree In such cases the School Board concerned shall determme whether the whole or any part of the penod of candidature for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall count towards the penod of candidature for the masters degree

(b) The Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology may at any time approve a transfer between full !Ime and part time candidature In such cases the School Board concerned shall determine the m1n1mum and maximum penods for which the candidature may pursue approved studies

(c) The Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology may at any time approve an 1nterm1ss1on of candidature for a penod not exceedmg twelve months In such cases the School Board shall deterpune the m1n1mum and maximum penods for which the candidate may pursue approved studies upon resumption of candidature

12 One or more supervisors shall be appomted for each student A supemsor shall be either

(a) a member of the academic staff of the Umvers1ty appointed by the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology, or

(b) m special cases, a suitably qualified person having a close assoc1at1on with the University appointed by the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology

Where more than one supervisor 1s appointed, one of them shall be nommated as the chief supervisor In the case of students whose degree programme includes coursework a co ordinator for

the coursework topics shall be appomted 1n add1t1on to the supervisor

13 Where a student has only one supervisor and that supervisor ceases to be a member of staff of the University or is absent from the University for a period exceedmg three months or is otherwise unavatlable or unable to act as the supervisor, the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies in Theology may after one month, and shall after three months appomt a new supervisor or temporary superv1soz: who shall act m place of the supervisor

14 A student shall pursue the approved studies under the superv1s1on of the appointed supervisor or supervisors to the sat1sfact1on of the Academic Programmes Committee (and sub1ect to any special cond1tlons that may be approved by the Committee) At the end of each academic year each supervisor shall submit a written report to the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology on the work of each student under the supervisors charge In the case of a qualifying student or a candidate who ts proceeding to a master s degree either wholly or partly by coursework, the annual report may take the form of a report of examination results to the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology The supervisor shall also report to the School Board when in the supervisor's op1n1on a student is not making satisfactory progress or is not fulflllmg the condihons prescribed for the candidature or appears unlikely to reach the standard required The School Board shall report accordmgly to the Acadenuc Programmes Committee

15 The Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology shall upon receipt of the supervisor's report and may at any other hme review the progress of a student and may either (a) allow the student to contmue as a

master's student, or (b) ask the student to show cause why

his candidature should not be terminated

16 If in the opimon of the Academic Progratnmes Committee a student 1s not

7 3 Masters Degrees

making satisfactory progress the Committee may, on the recommendation of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies in Theology termmate the enrolment of the student

17 Schedules defmmg the nature and extent of the work to be completed by candidates and the fees to be paid by candidates and quahfymg students shall be drawn up from time to hme by the Academic Programmes Committee Such schedules shall become effechve from the date of approval by the Council or from such other dates as the Council may deternune

18 On complellon of the approved programme of studies< a candidate proceeding to a degree either wholly or partly by thesis shall lodge with the Registrar four copies of the thesis prepared m accordance with the rules for thesis approved by the AcadeID!c Programmes Committee

19 After considermg the reports of the exammers of a candidate the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology shall report to the Academic Programmes Committee whether in its view (a) the degree should be awarded, or (b) the degree shou,d be awarded

sub1ect to minor amendments to the thesis as may be spec1f1ed or

(c) the candidate should be reqmred to take an oral exam1natlon, or

(d) the degree should not be awarded but the candidate should be permitted to resubmit the thesis or take such further examination as the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology shall prescribe or both, or

(e) the degree should not be awarded and the candidate should not be allowed to present for the degree agam

20 Except with the permiss10n of the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the School or Board of Stud1rs 1n Theology concerned, a candidate may not resubmit a thesis for exanunatton on more than one occasion

21 The Academic Programmes Committee shall after cons1derahon of a report of

121

Statutes

the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology, decide whether a masters degree shall be awarded to a candidate who has fulfilled all the cond1t1ons prescribed for that degree

22 The Academic Programmes Committee may delegate to the School Boards any or all of its powers and functions spec1f1ed m Clauses 5 6 7 and 14 of this statute

23 A School Board, or the Board of Studies 1n Theology may delegate to its Examination Board its Standing Committee or any other spec1f1ed cornm1ttee of the Board or Board of Studies any or all of its functions specified m this Statute Any such delegation at functions must be reported to the Academic Programmes Committee

SCHEDULE 1 The Degrees of Master of Arts (M A ), Master of Commerce (M Com ), Master of Economics (M Ee ), Master of Science (M Sc ) and Master of Theology (M Th ) 1 A candidate may not qualify for the degree

of Master of Arts Master of Econom1cs Master of Science, Master of Theology or Master of Commerce until the expiration of one year from the date upon which the candidate qualified for an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty or its approved equivalent, or two years from the date upon which the candidate qualified for the ordinary degree of the Un1vers1ty or its approved equivalent

2 Except by perm1ss10n of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for masters degree for not less than one year and not more than two years and a part time candidate for not less than two years and not more than four years from the month from which the candidature was dated

3 When approving a candidate s pro gramme of studies the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology shall determme whether the degree shall be taken by exam1nat1on or by thesis or by both

122

4 Any School which offers a master's degree either wholly or partly by coursework and examination may specify the programme of studies for that degree 1n an appendIX to this schedule

5 In the case of the master s degree by thesis m the School of Informat1on Science and Technology the thesis should deal m a umf1ed and thorough 'vay with a particular computing mathematical or statistical question, and should be wntten 1n accordance with accepted standards of scholarship style a'ld presentation It should furnish eVIdence of deep understanding of the sub1ect, wide reading and the power to integrate information obtained from various sources into a un1f1ed whole

While ong1nal mathematical d1scovenes of s1gn1f1cance are not required the thesis should be an ong1nal exposition of value to scholars m the field which 1t treats

6 At least three months before a candidate is due to submit a thesis to the Registrar for exam1natton 1 or to complete the prescribed work 1n the case of a masters degree by examination, the candidate's supervisor shall notify the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies 1n Theology and shall 1ecommend the appointment of examiners

7 The Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology shall appoint two or more examiners, at least one of whom shall be external to the Umvers1ty except that for students m the School of Social Sciences proceeding to the Master of Arts or Master of Economics degrees either wholly or partly by exam1nahon, the thesis component shall be exa1n1ned by at least one external examiner and each topic of the coursework programme shall be examined by at least two examiners who may be internal or external to the Un1vers1ty

8 The examiners shall each submit to the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology a written report on the students thesis and m the case of students proceedmg to the degree either wholly or partly by coursework a report of the examination results of each coursework topic

Appendix A

Master of Arts and Master of Science by Coursework m the School of Information Science and Technology

1 The Board of the School shall appomt a Committee of three, including the studeniis supervisor, to oversee the student s programme of studies The student shall do the work required by the Committee

2 The Committee shall approve each term the courses or essays being undertaken and shall report the details to the Board

3 The student shall pass six approved topics (lecture courses or seminars) at honours or post graduate level, of which at least three shall be an advancement on the standard programmes of the honours year

4 In add1hon to work described 1n paragraph 3 above approximately half of the student's time shall be given to study under the detailed superv1s1on of the supervisor and the student shall wnte a number of essays on topics approved by the Committee Such essays should be original and presented in adequate form in terrns of style and content They should embody the results of independent study and reflection but need not contain original mathematical results The number and length of these essays may be vaned at the discret10n of the Committee but should not exceed six essays of about ten pages each

5 The student s Committee may 1f 1t deems flt, ask the student as a formal require ment to present a pubhc seminar on his work

6 For each student on the recommendation of the appropriate Committee, the Board shall appoint an Examining Committee of three examiners of whom at least one must be external to the University The Exammmg Committee shall meet at the appropnate IIme to conduct the examination of the candidate and shall report its f1nd1ngs to the Exam1nat1ons Board of the School

7 In its assessment of the candidate, the Examining Committee will take into cons1derat10n the results obtamed by the

7 3 Schedule 1

candidate in the six approved topics the essays written by the candidate and the report of the candidate's superv1Sor It may 1n add1t1on adm1n1ster to the candidate any further tests oral or written, that it considers necessary

8 The Exammmg Committee shall make one of the following recommendations (a) That the degree of Master of Arts or

Master of Science (as appropriate) be awarded

(b) That the candidate do further spec1f1ed work before undergoing a re exam1nat1on

(c) That the degree be not awarded

Appendix B

The Degree of Master of Science m Chmcal B10chem1stry (M Sc )

1 In order to be admitted to the course of studies leading to the degree of Master of Science 1n CIIn1cal Biochemistry a candidate must have (i) qualified for the honours degree of

Bachelor of Science of the Un1vers1ty 1nclud1ng ma1or approved studies 1n Biochemistry or Chemistry, the degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery of the University or for an equivalent degree or quahficat10n approved by the Board of the School of Medicme and

(n) spent a mmimum of two years full time employment 1n an appropriate d1agnost1c laboratory service

2 To qualify for the degree of Master of Science 1n Chn1cal B1ochem1stry a candidate shall complete satISfactonly the coursework (Part One of the require ments) and ongrnal research (Part Two of the reqmrements) prescribed by thIS appendix

3 In this appendix a topzc is a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Grades are the class1flcahon of pass and fail for work towards the degree and shall be

A = D1shnchon outstanding performance

123

Statutes

4

B

c

NGP

D

Credit performance considerably better than average Pass clearly satisfactory but not 1mpress1ve performance Non graded pass (for use in topics which can be assessed only on a sa hsf a ctory I unsa ti sf acto ry basis) Compensatory Result marginally satisfactory performance

NA = Nat assessed F Fail clearly unsatisfactory

performance

The topics const1tut1ng the course of studies for the degree are Part One Units

94507 D1agnost1c Laboratory Practice 18

94508 Chemical Pathology 18 94506 Research Pro1ect and

Dissertation for M Sc in Clinical B1ochem1stry 36

5 The content of the topics shall be prescribed from time to hme tn the syllabuses

6 The topics compnsmg Part One of the requirements tor the degree must be completed sat1sfactor1ly before presentation of the d1ssertatlon embody mg the results of the research pro1ect compns1ng Part Two of the requ1ren1ents

7 W1thm twelve months of the student s adm1ss1on to candidature for the degree, the Board of the School of Med1cme shall approve the sub1ect matter of the student's proposed research pro1ect and dissertation and shall appoint a member of staff to supervise the proposed research

Appendix C

The Degree of Master of Arts hy Coursework m the School of Social Sciences (M A )

1 To qualify for the degree of Master of Arts by coursework m the School of Social Sciences, a student shall complete

124

sat1sfactortly at least 54 units 1n a m1n1mum of three semesters from one of the approved programmes offered in the School, details of which are spec1f1ed In the syllabuses A grade of C or better or NGP must be obtamed m all 54 umts

2 To provide for situations 1n which a technique such as programming or a language IS a necessary part of a candidate's course of studies up to 12 units may consist of instructional topics

3 The smallest assessable piece of work in the coursework M A programme shall be 6 units The term thesis 1 is reserved for pro1ects with a we1ghmg of at least 12 units

4

5

Where a thesis component is included in a programme 1t shall be not less than 12 units and not more than 24 units

The Higher Degrees Committee of the School shall appomt a course co ordinator for each candidate whose degree programme includes coursework In add1t1on ,f a thesis is included, the Committee shall appoint a supervisor for the thesis component of the programme

6 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, no candidate may attempt a topic more than once Failure to achieve a grade of C or better in at least 12 units of coursework 1n each year of enrolment before the thesis shall constitute przma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

7 Each topic of the coursework programme shall be examined by at least two examiners, either internal or external to the University Course co ordinators are ehg1ble to act as examiners of topics in the programme

8 At least one examiner of the thesis component of a programme shall be external to the Un1vers1ty The supervisor may not act as an examiner of the thesis After cons1denng the reports of the examiners of a thesis the Higher Degrees Committee of the School shall decide

(a) that the thesis be passed, (b) that the theSIS be passed sub1ect to

minor specified amendments being earned out to the satisfaction of the candidate s supervisor

Amendment awaiting Counc1l approval

(c) that the thesis not be passed but the student be required to carry out ma1or spec1f1ed rev1s1ons to the satisfaction of the examiners, or

(d) that the thesis not be passed In the event of there bemg disagreement among the examiners of the thesis the usual procedures for resolving such disagreement shall be followed

9 The d1sc1phne concerned shall return a result to the Higher Degrees Committee of the School for each topic m a candidate's programme as soon as practicable after the complet10n of all work and assessment 1n that topic

10 When a candidate has completed the approved programme of study the d1sc1phne concerned shall return one of the follow1ng overall recommendations to the Higher Degrees Committee of the School (a) that the degree should be awarded, (b) that the degree should not be

awarded but the student should be permitted to undertake such further work or take such further exam1natlons as may be prescribed, or

(c) that the degree should not be awarded

SCHEDULE 2 The Degree of Master of Arts (Drama) (MA (Drama))

1 A person may be accepted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts (Drama) 1f he/she holds an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty with a rna1or in Drama which includes Drama Centre Studies or professional experience or qualtftcatlons deemed by the Board of the School of Humanities to be at least equivalent to an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty with a ma1or 1n Drama

2 To quahfy for the degree of Master of Arts (Drama), a candidate shall sat1sfac tor1ly complete a course of studies representing two years of full time study which shall include supervised production, minor thesis and approprtate coursework, each of which shall constitute at least 25 per cent of the total workload

7 3 Schedule 2

3 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board ot the School of Humanities a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the master's degree for not less than one year and not more than two years and a part time candidate for not less than two years and not more than four years from the month from which the candidature was dated

4 The Board of the School of Humamlles shall appoint a course co ordinator for all three components of the course The course co ordinator shall either supervise all work done for the degree or share some of that respons1b1ltty with one or more other members of staff The co ordinators shall ensure that a candidate s programme of studies 1s properly co ordinated and report on the candidate's progress as though he/she were the only supervisor

5 At least three months before a candidate is due to submit his/ her minor thesis for exam1nat1on to the Director of Administration and Registrar, the candidates course co ordinator shall nol!fy the Board of the School of Humanities, which shall appoint the examiners for the corµponents of the course (a) Neither the course co ordinator nor

the superv1sor(s) shall be an examiner of the candidate's minor thesis which shall be exammed by two or more examiners, at least one of whom shall be external to the University

(b) The same exammers shall also examine the supervised production and the work done for each of the topics of the coursework pro gramme unless the Board decides that either the supervised production or the work done for the topics of the coursework programme, or both, shall be exammed solely by two internal examiners only one of whom may be the course co ordinator or a supervisor of any component of the candidate s work

6 The exammers shall submit to the Board of the School of Humanities written reports on the work submitted for the

125

Statutes

degree The degree shall be awarded only 1f satisfactory reports are received on all three components of the course

SCHEDULE 3 The Degree of Master of Educatmn (M Ed )

1 A person may be accepted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Educat10n 1f that person holds the Diploma m Educat10n or the degree of Bachelor of Educat10n or the degree of Bachelor of Educat10n (Physical Educahon) or the degree of Bachelor of Special Educat10n of the Umvers1ty at a level approved by the Board of the School of Educat10n or a quahfJcat10n deemed by the Board to be at least equivalent to one of the above awards

2 A candidate may not quahfy for the degree of Master of Educat10n unlll the expiration of one year from the date upon which the candidate quahfJed for an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty or its approved equivalent, or two years from the date upon which the candidate quahf1ed for an ordmary degree of the Un1vers1ty or its approved equivalent

3 Except by perm1ss10n of the Board of the School of Educat10n a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the masters degree for not less than two years and not more than three years, and a part time candidate for not less than three years and not more than six years from the month from which the candidature was dated

4 The Board of the School shall appomt the Higher Degrees Committee to oversee the candidate s programme ot studies The candidate shall do the work reqmred of him by the Committee The programme of work may include appropnate Masters level topics from another Masters degree programme, either within this University or elsewhere

5 The degree consists of 72 units Candidates may choose to submit either (a) a thesis of 36 units plus 36 units of

coursework completed at a grade of C or better, or

126

(b) a programme of 72 umts course work including a special pro1ect of

12 umts, completed at a grade of C or better Thirty six units of coursework must be completed before the thesis 1s commenced The degree shall be awarded on the basis of the whole programme which shall mclude the evaluat10n of the separate coursework topics and of the thesis, with the proviso that the thesis shall be of a standard acceptable to the School Board

6 The thesis shall be exammed by at least two examiners appointed by the Board one of whom shall be external to the University

7 The thesis shall include advanced study, consisting of intensive reading under the guidance of an intenm supervisor, leading to the submission of a proposal, in which the intended research 1s delineated and 1usllfled The proposal shall be exammed by a committee which shall either accept the proposal, re1ect it, or require that it be re submitted w1thm a stated time The proposal shall be submitted w1thm one term of commencement of the thesis or pro1ect in the case of full time students and w1th1n two terms of commencement of the thesis or research pro1ect in the case of part time students On completion of the requued coursework or coursework and thesis candidates may be required to take an oral or comprehensive examination

8

9

Grades are the classifications of pass and fail for topics and shall be A Dishnchon B Credit C Pass F Fail Failure to achieve a grade of C or better 1n at least 12 units in each year of enrolment before the thesis or research pro1ect shall constitute prima facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

Candidates who desire that topics that they have satisfactorily completed m the Un1vers1ty or elsewhere be credited towards the degree of Master of Education may, on written apphcahon, be granted

such exemption from the requirements of (5) as the Board shall determme

10 At least two months before a student is due to submit a thesis or research pro1ect to the Director of Administration and Registrar for examination the candidate's supervisor shall notify the Board of the School of Educat10n and shall recommend the appointment of examiners The examiners shall each submit to the Board of the School of Education a written report on the student's thesis or research pro1ect

SCHEDULE 4 The Degree of Master of Psychology (Chmcal) (M Psych (Cho ))

1 A person may be accepted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Psychology (Chmcal) 1f the person holds an honours degree of the Umvers1ty m the field of Psychology or qualifications deemed by the Board of the School of Social Sciences to be equivalent

2 To quahfy for the degree of Master of Psychology (Chmcal) a candidate shall satisfactorily complete 72 units of work as specified m the Appendix to thIS schedule, consisting of 18 units of super vised practicum an 18 unit research dissertation and 36 units of coursework A grade of C or better or NGP must be obtained 1n all 72 units

3 The dISsertalion shall be exammed by at least two examiners one of whom should be external to the University

4 Failure to achieve a grade of C or better or NGP m 8 or more umts of the first 20 units of coursework or 1n 12 or more units of practicum shall constitute pnma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

5 Except by perm1sSion of the Board of the School of Social Sciences a full l!me candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the masters degree for not less than two years and not more than three years, and a part time candidate for not less than three years and not more than five years from the month from which the candidature was dated

7 3 Schedule 4 & 4A

Appendix A

Compulsory topics First Year Units 36551 Essentials of Behaviour

Modification 4 36552 Further Apphcat10ns m

Behaviour Mod1f1cat1on 4 36521 Counsellmg 4 36526 Clm1cal Neuropsychology 4 36555 Psychopathology and

Professional Issues 4

36536 Psycholog1cal Assessment 4 36553 Introduct10n to Chmcal Child

Psychology 4 36554 Intervent10n m Childhood

Disorders 4 36541 Practicum A 6

Compulsory topics, Second Year

Opt10nal topic 4 36542 Pracl!cum B 6 36543 Pracl!cum C 6 36540 DISsertat10n 18

Optwns (1 to be selected) 36547 Current Trends in Chn1cal

Psychology 4 36544 Rehab1htat10n 4 36528 Community Psychology 4 36534 Chmcal HypnoSis 4 36546 Usmg Small Computers m

Human Service Organ1sat1ons 4

SCHEDULE 4A The Degree of Master of Psychology (Educational) (M Psych (Educ ))

1 A person is ehg1ble for admission as a candidate for the degree of Master of Psychology (Educat10nal) 1f the person holds an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty m the field of Psychology or quahfl catwns deemed by the Board of the School of Social Sciences to be equ1 valent In addition the candidate must hold a Bachelor of Educat10n Diploma of Education or its equivalent and have two years teaching expenence or its equivalent

2 To quahfy for the degree of Master of Psychology (Educatwnal) a candidate shall sat1sfactonly complete at least 74 units of work, as specified in the

127

Statutes

Appendix to this schedule conststmg of 18 units of supervised practicum an 18 unit research d1ssertat1on and at least 38 units of coursework A grade of C or better or NGP must be obtained in all units in order to qualify for the degree

3 The dissertat10n shall be exammed by at least two examiners one of whom shall be external to the Un1vers1ty

4 Failure to achieve a grade of C or better or NGP 1n 12 or more units of the first 24 units of coursework or in 12 or more units of practicum shall constitute pnma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

5 Except by permiss10n of the Board of the School of Soc1al Sciences a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the Master's degree for not less than two years and not more than three years and a part time candidate for not less than three years and not more than five year.;; from the month from which the candidature was dated

6 Except by perm1ss10n of the Board of the School of Social Sciences no topic may be attempted more than once

Appendix - M Psych (Educational)

Compulsory Topzcs Units 36521 Counsellmg 4 36553 Introduct10n to Clmical Child

Psychology 4 36554 Intervent10n m Childhood

Disorders 4 36556 Professional Practice tn

Educahonal Psychology 4 54504 Classroom Processes 6 54102 Psychology and lnstructmn 6 54010 Current Perspechves m

Special Educat10n 6 36540 D1ssertat10n 18 36541 Practicum A 6 36542 Prachcum B 6 36543 Prachcum C 6

A further topic of at least 4 umts shall be selected from either List A or List B The Course Controller will approve the course of study for each student each year

128

List A Units 36526 Chmcal Neuropsychology 4 36544 Rehab1htat10n 4 36528 Commumty Psychology 4

List B 54012 Curnculum Theory and

Special Education 6 54013 Early Development and

Exceptlonahty 6 54014 Mental Retardat10n 6 54015 Behav10ur Problems 6 54016 Educat10n of Children with

Physical Disabthhes 6 54017 Educatmn of Children with

Commun1catton D1ff1culttes 6 54018 Educatmn of Chtldren with

Learning D1fflculttes 6 With the permission of the Course Controller, an alternative graduate level topic 1n Psycho logy or Educahon not hsted m A or B may be selected

SCHEDULE 5 The Degree of Master of Social Admm1strat10n (M Soc Admm ) 1 A person may be accepted as a candidate

for the degree of Master of Social Admmistrat10n 1f that person holds the degree of Bachelor of Social Admm1stra t1on of the University with credit or d1stlnchon 1n the course or quahf1cat1ons deemed by the Board of the School of Social Sciences to be an appropnate basis for this masters programme

2 To qualtfy for the degree of Master of Social Adm1n1stratlon a candidate shall satlsfactonly complete 54 units compr1s mg 24 urnts by thesis and 30* umts by coursework

3 Except by permiss10n of the Board of the School of Social Sciences a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the masters degree for not less than one year and not more than two years and a part-time candidate for not less than three semesters and not more than four years from the month from which the candidature was dated

4 The Board of the School of Soctal Sciences may specify the programme of studies for the degree in an appendix to this schedule

Amendment awaiting Counc1l approval

5 Before being accepted, a candidate must submit to the Director of Higher Degree Studies m the disciplme a satisfactory proposal for a programme of studies 1nclud1ng thesis and coursework as specified m Appendix A

6 Except with the permiss10n of the Board, no candidate may attempt a topic more than once Failure to achieve a grade of C or better 1n at least 12 units of coursework in each year of enrolment before the thesis shall consiltute przma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

7 The Board of the School of Social Sciences shall appoint two or more examiners, at least one of whom shall be external to the University for the thesis and for the coursework programme each topic of the programme shall be examined by at least two examiners who may be internal or external to the University

Appendix A

A candidate s proposal for a programme of studies must be approved by the Director of Higher Degree Studies 1n consultatton with the Head of Disc1phne or his nominee

The 30 units of coursework should be selected so that they relate to but are broader than the thesis topic They will consist of (a) up to 24 units of topics withm the

D1sc1phne (b) no more than 12 units of topics selected

from graduate or post graduate level courses w1th1n the Un1vers1ty

The proposal for a thesis must idenl!fy a well defmed subiect of study, m an area m which the D1sc1phne 1s able to provide superv1s1on It must indicate the cand1clate s present level of knowledge in that area, clarify the aspects, on which further study will be concentrated and mdicate the methodology to be used

SCHEDULE 6 The Degree of Master of Educat10nal Admm1strahon (MEdAdmm)

1 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the degree of Master of Educat10nal

7 3 Schedule 6

Adm1n1strat1on/ Diploma of Educational Administration, candidates (1) shall have met the following

minimum requirements

(a) have quahfred for an appro pr1ate degree or equivalent quahf1catlon,

(b) shall have not less than two years relevant work experience

(2) shall have theu candidature approved by the Dean of the School or by the Dean's nominee

2 The Board of the School m special cases and subject to such cond11Ions as the Board may prescribe 1n each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not qualified for a degree, or who has less than two years' relevant experience but who has given sahsfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 Except by permiss10n of the Board of the School of Educat10n, a full l!me candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the masters degree for not less than two years and not more than three years, and a part time candidate for not less than three years and not more than six years from the month from which the candidature was dated

4 The Board of the School of Educal!on shall appomt the Educational Adm1n1stratxon Programme Committee to oversee the candidate's programme of studies The candidate shall do the work reqmred of him by the Committee The programme of work may include appropnate Masters level topics from another Masters degree programme, either w1th1n this Un1vers1ty or elsewhere

5 The degree consists of 72 units Candidates may choose to submit either (a) 48 urnts of coursework and a

research report of 24 units, or

(b) a programme of 72 units of coursework 1nclud1ng a special pro1ect of 12 units, completed at a grade of C or better

Thirty six units of coursework must be completed before the research pro1ect is commenced The degree shall be awarded on the baSJS of the whole programme which shall include the evaluat10n of the

129

Statutes

separate coursework topics and of the research pro1ect, with the proviso that the research report shall be at a standard acceptable to the School Board

6 The research project shall be exammed by at least two exammers appomted by the Board of the School

7 The research project shall mclude advanced study, cons1shng of 1ntens1ve readmg under the guidance of a supervisor, leading to the subm1ss1on of a p-oposal 1n which the intended research is delineated and jUst1fled The proposal shall be submitted w1th1n one semester of commencement of the research pro1ect in the case of full time candidates and w1th1n two semesters of commencement in the case of part time students The research report shall embody the outcome of the proposed research

8 Grades are the class1f1cabons of pass and fail for topics and shall be A d1stmct10n B = Credit C Pass F Fail Failure to achieve a grade C or better 1n at least 12 units of coursework in each year of enrolment before the research pro1ect shall constitute przma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

9 Candidates who desire that topics which they have sat1sfactonly completed m the Un1vers1ty or elsewhere be credited towards the degree of Master of Educational Adm1n1strahon may on written application be granted such exemphon from the requirements of (5) as the Board of the School shall determine

10 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, a student may not enrol in any year 1n a comb1nahon of topics valued at more than 36 umts

11 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, no candidate may attempt a topic more than twice

12 At least two months before a student is due to submit a research report to the Duector of Adm1n1stration and Registrar for examination, the candidate's

130

supervisor shall notify the Board of the School of Education and shall recom mend the appo1nt1nent of examiners, at least one of whom shall be external to the School The examiners shall each submit to the Board a written report on the student's research report

13 On complet10n of the required programme a candidate may be required to take an oral or comprehensive exam1nahon before the degree 1s awarded

SCHEDULE 7 The Degree of Master of Education (Special Education) (M Ed (Spec Ed))

1 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the degree of Master of Educat10n (Special Educat10n), candidates (1) shall have met the followmg

m1n1mum requirements (a) have qualified for an appro.

pnate degree or equivalent quahf1catlon

(b) shall have not less than two years relevant work expenence,

(2) shall have their candidature approved by the Dean of the School or by the Dean s nominee

2 The Board of the School, 1n special cases and sub1ect to such cond1hons as the Board may prescribe in each case, may accept as a candidate a person who has not quahf1ed for a degree, or who has less than two years' relevant expenence, but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 Except by perm1ss1on of the Board of the School of Educat10n, a ft,ll hme candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the master's degree for not less than two years and not more than three years and a part time candidate for not less than three years and not more than six years from the month from which the candidature was dated

4 The Board of the School of Educat10n shall appomt the Special Educat10n Higher Degrees Programme Committee to oversee the candidate's programme of studies The candidate shall do the work required of him by the Committee The

programme of work may include appro pnate masters level topics from another master's degree programme, either w1th1n this Un1vers1ty or elsewhere

5 The degree consists of 72 units Candidates may choose to submit either (a) a thesis of 36 umts plus 36 umts of

coursework completed at a grade of C or better or

(b) a programme of 72 umts of coursework 1nclud1ng a special proiect of 12 umts completed at a grade of C or better

Thirty six units of coursework must be completed before the thesis is commenced The degree shall be awarded on the basis of the whole programme which shall mclude the evaluatwn of the separate coursework topics and of the thesis with the proviso that the thesis shall be of a standard acceptable to the Board

6 The thesis shall be examined by at least two examiners appointed by the Board of the School

7 The thesis shall mclude advanced study, consisting of intensive reading under the guidance of a supervisor leading to the submission of a proposal 1n which the intended research 1s dehneated and iusttfted The proposal shall be submitted w1th1n one term of commencement of the research pro1ect in the case of full time candidates and within two terms of commencement in the case of part time students The thesis or research report shall embody the outcome of the proposed research

8 Grades are the class1f1cat1ons of pass and fail for topics and shall be A Distinction B Credit C Pass F Fail Failure to achieve a grade of C or better In at least 12 units of coursework tn each year of enrolment before the thesis or research pro1ect shall constitute przma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

9 Candidates who desire that topics which they have satisfactorily completed m the

7 3 Schedule 8

Un1vers1ty or elsewhere be credited towards the degree of Master of Education (Special Education), may on written application be granted such exemption from the reqmrements of (5) as the Board of the School shall determme

10 Except with the permission of the Board a student may not enrol 1n any year 1n a combination of topics valued at more than 36 umts

11 Except with the permisswn of the Board, no candidate may attempt a topic more than twice

12 At least two months before a student rs due to submit a thesis or research report to the Director of Admin1stratton and Registrar for exam1nat1on the candidate s supervisor shall notrfy the Board of the School of Educat10n and shall recommend the appointment of examiners The examiners shall each submit to the Board a written report on the student's research report

13 On completion of the required course work or coursework and thesis a candidate may be required to take an oral or comprehensive examination before the degree is awarded

SCHEDULE 8 The Degree of Master of Pohcy and Admm1stratton (MPolAdmm) 1 A person may be accepted as a candidate

for the degree of Master of Polrcy and Adm1n1strahon 1f that person holds an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty 1n a field acceptable to the Board of the School of Social Sciences or other qualrficatwns deemed by the School Board to be an appropriate basrs for this master s programme

2 To qualrfy for the degree of Master of Pabey and Admimstratwn a candidate shall satisfactorily complete 54 ~ um ts compr1s1ng a d1ssertat1on and coursework

3 Except with the permisswn of the Board of the School of Social Sciences a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the master s degree for not less than three semesters and not more

Amendment awa1tmg Council approval

131

Statutes

than two years, and a part time candidate for not less than two years and not more than four years from the month from which the candidature was dated

4 The Board of the School of Social Sciences may specify the programme of studies for the degree in an appendix to this schedule This programme may include master's level topics at other approved 1nst1tut1ons

5 Before bemg considered by the Board, a card1date must submit to the Director of Studies 1n Policy and Adrn1n1strat1on a satisfactory proposal for a programme of studies 1nclud1ng coursework and d1ssertahon as specified 1n Appendix A

6 Candidates who desire that topics they have satisfactorily completed rn the Un1vers1ty or elsewhere be credited towards the degree of Master of Policy and Adm1n1strahon may on written application be granted such exemption from the requirements of Clause 2 as the Board shall determme

7 Except with the permiss10n of the Board no candidate may attempt a topic more than once Failure to achieve a grade of C or better in at least 12 units of coursework in each year of enrolment before the dissertation shall constitute przma facie evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

8 The dissertat10n shall contribute to the overall assessment for the degree Assessment of the dissertation will be earned out by at least two examiners, one of whom shall normally be external to the Un1vers1ty

Appendix A

A candidate's study proposal should outhne a well defined area of interest indicate the candidate's present level of knowledge in that area, and clanfy aspects on which further study will be concentrated The proposal must be approved by the Director of Studies m Policy and Administration 1n consultation with staff members teaching topics in the degree programme

The work for the degree shall consist of

132

(a) at least 12 umts of mdependent supervised study leading either to a dissertat10n (51501) or to a proiect (51510),

(b) a 6 umt readmg semmar (51502) (c) at least 18 umts of core topics and (d) not more than 12 umts of elective topics

Core topics 51506 Pubhc Pohcy 51507 Australian Government and Pohllcs 51508 Historical Studies m Social Science 51509 Socwlogical Perspectives on the State

and Bureaucracy 51511 (55101) Development of

Adm1n1strat1ve Concepts 51512 (55102) The Orgamsallon m Actwn 51513 (55107) Plannmg and Admimstrat10n 51514 The Design of Social Policy Research 51515 (50524) Issues m Social Pohcy 51516 (50525) Plannmg the Social Services 51517 (50526) Admimstration of Human

Service Organ1sahons 51518 (50527) Review and Evaluatwn m

Human Service Organisations 51520 Seminar in Social Adm1nistrahon 51521 Family State and Social Pohcy 51522 Value Clanficallon and Pubhc Pohcy 51523 (32503) Populatwn Studies 51524 (55103) Human Commumcatwn 51525 (55104) Managmg Human Resources 51527 Economics and Pubhc Pohcy 51528 Analysis and Management of Change

in Human Services 51532 Urban Plannmg, Housmg and

Pubhc Pohcy

Additwnal topics may be added to the core list Candidates should consult the Director of Studies in Pabey and Adm1n1strahon for an up to date hst of these

Elective topics By agreement with the Director of Studies, candidates may include other topics at master s level not mcluded m the core hst that are relevant to their interests in policy and adrn1n1strahon By arrangement, topics at that level olfered by other mstitutwns may be included Permissible elective topics include the followmg 51503 Pohcy and Admmistrat10n Selected

Areas (supervised readmg topic) 51504 Pohcy and Admmistratwn Selected

Issues (supervised reading topic) 51529 Elecl!ve Studies A 51531 Elecl!ve Studies B

SCHEDULE 9 The Degree of Master of Educational Management (M Ed M )

1 A person may be admitted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Educat10nal Management 1f that person holds an appropnate honours degree or quah ficat10ns deemed by the Board of the School of Educat10n to be an appropnate basis for this master s programme and has not less than two years relevant work experience

2 To qualify for the degree of Master of Educational Management a candidate shall sal!sfactonly complete a programme of studies compr1s1ng 36 units of coursework and 12 units of directed research The programme of studies may include coursework from any other approved masters programme either in this University or elsewhere Except with the perm1ss10n of the School Board a candidate shall complete the programme of studies 1n not less than three semesters and not more than eight semesters

3 The degree shall be awarded on the basis of the whole programme of studies, which shall mclude the evaluat10n of the separate coursework topics and the directed research completed at a grade of C or better On the complet10n of the required programme a candidate may be required to take an oral or other examination before the degree is awarded

4 The School Board shall appomt the Committee of the Diploma and Higher Degrees 1n Educational Adm1n1stratlon Programme to oversee the candidate's programme of studies and candidates shall do the work reqmred of them by the Committee

5 Except with the perm1ss10n of the Board no candidate may attempt a topic more than once Failure to aclueve a grade of C or better 1n at least 12 units of coursework 1n each year of enrolment shall constitute przma facie evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3, Clause 14

7 3 Schedule 9

6 Candidates who deme that topics which they have sa!Isfactonly completed towards a master's degree 1n the University or elsewhere be credited towards the degree of Master of Educational Management may on written apphcat10n be granted by the School Board such exemption from the requirements of Clause 2 above as 1t may determine

Appendix A

The Committee of the Diploma and Higher Degrees 1n Educational Adm1n1strahon Programme has determined that the programme of studies for the degree of Master of Educat10nal Management shall be as follows

Units (a) 55113 Coursework Pro1ect in

Educational Adm1n1stration 12 (b) 55101 Development of Adm1n1stratlve

Concepts 6 55107 Planning and Adm1n1stration 6 55115 Leaders and Leadership 6

(c) Either 55103 Human Commun1catlon 6

or 55104 Managmg Human Resources 6

(d) Not more than 12 umts chosen from the lollowmg 55105 The Australian Educat10n

System 6 55106 Current Issues in Education

(Educat10nal Admm1strallon) 6 55109 The Economics of Education 6 55110 The School and the

Community 6 55111 Concepts of Work, Leisure

and Recreation 6 55112 Special Interest Topic

(Educat10nal Admm1strat10n) 6

55116 Selected Management Issues 6 55117 Selected Management

Approaches 6 and either 55103 Human Commun1cahon 6 or 55104 Managing Human Resources 6

133

Statutes

(provided that the topic has not already been credited towards the degree)

With the pnor approval of the Educatrnnal Adm1n1strahon Programme Committee topics from any other approved master's level programme either 1n this Un1vers1ty or elsewhere, may be included 1n the 1nd1v1dual student's programme under ( d) above

SCHEDULE 10 The Degree of Master of Special Education (M Spec Ed )

1 A person may be admitted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Special Educat10n if that person holds an appropnate honours degree or quah flcatrnns deemed by the Board of the School of Educat10n to be an appropriate basis for this masters programme and has not less than two years relevant work experience

2 To qual!fy for the degree of Master of Special Education a candidate shall sahsfactonly complete a programme of studies compns1ng 36 units of coursework and 12 umts of directed research The programme of studies may include coursework from any other approved master s programme either in this Unrversrty or elsewhere Except with the permission of the School Board a candidate shall complete the programme of studies 1n not less than three semesters and not more than eight semesters

3 The degree shall be awarded on the basis of the whole programme of studies, which shall include the evaluat10n of the separate coursework topics and the directed research completed at a grade of C or better On the completrnn of the required programme a candidate may be required to take an oral or other exam1nat1on before the degree 1s completed

4 The School Board shall appomt the Committee of the Special Educat10n Programme to oversee the candidates programme of studies and candidates shall do the work reqmred of them by the Committee

5 Except with the permiss10n of the Board no candidate may attempt a topic more than once Failure to achieve a grade of C

134

or better 1n at least 12 units of coursework in each year of enrolment shall constitute przma fac1e evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

6 Candidates who desire that topics which they have satisfactorily completed towards a master's degree 1n the Un1vers1ty or elsewhere be credited towards the degree of Master of Special Education may on wntten appltcahon be granted by the School Board such exemption from the requirements of Clause 2 above as it may determme

Appendzx A

The committee of the Special Educat10n Programme has determined that the pro gramme of studies for the degree of Master of Special Educat10n shall be as follows

Units (a) 54025 Coursework Pro1ect in

Special Educat10n 12 (b) 54010 Current Perspectives in

Special Educat10n 6 (c) Not more than 30 units chosen from

the followmg 54011 Systems and the Professional

1n Special Education 6 54012 Curnculum Theory and

Special Education 6 54013 Early Development and

Except10nahty 6 54014 Mental Retardat10n 6 54015 Behaviour Problems 6 54016 Educat10n of Children with

Physical Disabilities 6 54018 Educat10n of Children with

Learning Difficulties 6 54021 Education of Heanng

Impaired Students 1 6 54022 Education of Heanng

Impaired Students II 6 54023 Educatrnn of Visually

Impaired Students 1 6 54024 Educat10n of Visually

Impaired Students II 6 54007 Directed Study (Special

Interest Topic) 6

With the pnor approval of the SpeCial Education Programme Committee topics from any other approved Master s level programme, either in this Un1vers1ty or elsewhere may be included in the 1nd1v1dual students programme under (c) above

SCHEDULE 11 The Degree of Master of Educat10nal Studies (M Ed Studies)

1 A person may be admitted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Educat10nal Studies 1f that person holds an appropriate honours degree or quah flcat10n deemed by the Board of the School of Education to be an appropriate basis for this masters programme

2 To qualify for the degree of Master of Educat10nal Studies a candidate shall sal!sfactonly complete a programme of studies compns1ng 36 units of coursework and 12 units of directed research The programme of studies may include coursework from any other approved master's programme, either 1n this Un1vers1ty or elsewhere Except with the perm1ss1on of the School Board a candidate shall complete the programme of studies in not less than three semesters and not more than eight semesters

3 The degree shall be awarded on the basis of the whole programme of studies, which shall include the evaluation of the separate coursework topics and the d1rected research completed at a grade of C or better On the complet10n of the required programme a candidate may be required to take an oral or other exam1nat1on before the degree 1s completed

4 The School Board shall appomt the Committee of the Higher Degrees Programme to oversee the candidates' programme of studies and candidates shall do the work reqmred of them by the Committee

5 Except with the perm1ss10n of the Board no candidate may attempt a topic more than once Failure to achieve a grade of C or better in at least 12 units of coursework in each year of enrolment shall constitute przma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purpose of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

7 3 Schedule 11 & 12

6 Candidates who deme that topics which they have satisfactorily completed towards a masters degree m the Um vers1ty or elsewhere be credited towards the degree of Master of Educational Studies may on wntten apphcahon be granted by the School Board such exemption from the requirements of Clause 2 above as it may determine

SCHEDULE 12 The Degree of Master of Arts (Women's Studies) (MA (Women's Studies)) 1 Applicants may be accepted as candidates

for the degree of Master of Arts (Women's Studies) 1f they hold an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty in any area of study or a Graduate Diploma in Womens Studies with a thesis component from the South Australian College of Advanced Educa hon, or other quahf1cahon, deemed by the School Board to be equivalent to an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty and to constitute an appropriate basis for the master s programme

2 To quahfy for the degree of Master of Arts (Womens Studies) a candidate shall sahsfactonly complete 54 ... units compr1s­mg 12 or 24 umts of mdependent study leading to the completion of a thesis and 24 or 36 units of coursework which shall include 12 units of compulsory core topics

3 Except with perm1ss10n of the Board of the School of Social Sciences a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the masters degree for not less than three semesters* and not more than two years and a part time candidate for not less than two years and not more than four years from the month from which the candidature was dated

4 The Board of the School of Social Sciences may specify the programme of studies for the degree 1n an appendix to this schedule This programme may include masters level topics at other approved institutions

5 Before his or her apphcahon 1s considered by the Board a candidate must submit to the Director of Studies a satisfactory proposal for a programme of studies

$ Amendment awaiting Council approval

135

Statutes

1nclud1ng coursework and dissertation as specified m Appendix A

6 Candidates who desrre that topics they have satrsfactonly completed m the Un1vers1ty or elsewhere be credited towards the degree of Master of Arts (Women's Studies) may, on written application be granted such exemption from the requirements of Clause 2 as the Board shall determme

7 Except with perm1ss1on of the Board no c~nd1date may attempt a topic more than once Failure to achieve a grade of C or better 1n at least 12 units of coursework in each year of enrolment before the thesis shall constitute prima facie evidence of unsatrsfactory progress for the purpose of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

8 Assessment of the thesis will be earned out by at least two examiners, one of whom shall normally be external to the Un1vers1ty

Appendix A

A candidate's study proposal should outhne a well defined area of interest 1nd1cate the candidate s present level of knowledge in the area and clarify aspects on which further study will be concentrated A proposal must be approved by the Drrector of Studies M A (Womens Studies) m consultat10n with staff members teaching topics in the degree programme (a) 12 or 24 umts of mdependent, supervised

study leading to a thesis, (b) 12 units of compulsory core topics, and (c) not more than 24 units of electives

Core topics Units 41510 MA (Womens Studies) Thesis 12 41520 MA (Women's Studies) Thesis 24 41508 Femimst Quest10ns 6 41509 Research Strategies 6

Elective Topics History 41502 Women's Studies History (Fhnders) 05521 Austrahan Femmist Hrstonography

(Adelaide) 04531 Women m History (SACAE)

136

Theory 05522 History of Femmist Thought

(Adelaide) 41503 Women's Studies Theones (Fhnders) 04532 Femmist Theory (SACAE) 04533 Women and the Divis10n of Labour

(SACAE) 41505 Critique and Construct in Feminist

Knowledge (Flmders) 41506 Theones of Race and Gender

(Flmders)

Social and Political Analysis 04534 Women and Social Pohcy (SACAE) 04535 Family, Femmism and the State

(SACAE) 04536 Gender and Trade Un10ns (SACAE) 51521 Family, State and Social Polrcy

(Fhnders) 04537 Gender Issues m Educat10n (SACAE) 41511 Womens Health (Fhnders) 05524 Women and Environments (Adelaide)

Cultural Analysis 04538 Women Wnters and the Literary

Tradit10n (SACAE) 41504 Women's Studies Cultural Texts

(Flmders) 04539 Sem10trcs and Gender Representat10n

(SACAE) 04541 Women and Popular Culture

(SACAE) 04542 Language and Gender (SACAE) 04543 Mothers, Daughters and Memory

(SACAE) 04544 Femmme Sub1ectrvity (SACAE) 04545 Female Sexuahty (SACAE)

Other 41501 Women's Studies Introduction

(Flmders) 05523 Special Topics in Women's Studies

(Adelaide) 41507 Women's Studies Readmg Topic

(Flmders) 04546 Womens Studies Special Semmar

(SACAE)

Addit10nal topics may be added to the electrve hst Candidates should consult the Drrector of Studies MA (Women's Studies) for an up to date hst of these

SCHEDULE 13 The Degree of Master of Theolog1cal Studies (M Th St )

1 A person may be accepted as a candidate for the Degree of Master of Theological Studies if the person holds an honours degree of the University m Theology or quahficat10ns deemed by the Board of Studies to be equivalent

2 To qualify for the degree of Master of Theological Studies, a student shall complete satisfactorily at least 54* umts from one of the approved programmes offered by the Board of Studies m Theology details of which are specified m the Append!X A grade of C or better must be obtained in all 54* units

3 The 54* units shall comprise coursework of up to 48* units and a thesis opt.Ion of not more than 12 units

4 The Board of Studies shall appoint a course co-ordinator and, where appropriate, a thesis supervisor for each candidate

5 Except Wlth the permission of the Board of Studies no candidate may attempt a topic more than once

6 Failure to achieve a grade of C or better in at least 12 units of coursework in each year of enrolment before the thesis shall constitute prima facre evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

7 Each topic of the coursework programme shall be exammed by at least two examiners, either internal or external to the University

8 At least one of the two examiners of the thesis shall be external to the University The supervisor may not act as an examiner of the thesis After considering the reports of the exammers of a thesis the Board of Studies shall decide (a) that the thesis be passed with a grade

of C, B1 or A,

(b) that the thesis not be passed but the student be reqmred to carry out specified revisions to the satisfaction of the examiners, or

(c) that the thesis not be passed

Amendments awa1tmg Council approval

7 3 Schedule 13

In the event of there being disagreement among the examiners of the thes1s1 the usual procedures for resolving such disagreement shall be followed

9 When a candidate has completed the approved programme of study, the course co ordinator concerned shall return one of the followmg overall recommendat10ns to the Board of Studies (a) that the degree should be awarded,

(b) that the degree should not be awarded but the student should be permitted to undertake such further work or take such further exam1n at1ons as may be prescribed, or

(c) that the degree should not be awarded

Appendix A

The degree may be completed by three semesters* of full time study or two years or more of part !!me study The programme may be commenced at the begmnmg of the first semester, or at the beginning of the second semester The degree programme consists of 54* units made up of a coursework component of not more than 48* units and a thesis option of not more than 12 units The coursework component shall comprise

(a) not less than 12 umts from the followmg Core Masters topics

Umts

29501 The New Testament as Canon 6 29502 Readings in Asian Religions 6 29503 Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy and

Popular Piety 6 29504 Special Topic m Theological

Studies 12 29505 Reformat10n Thmkers and their

Thoughts 6

(b) with special permiss10n not more than12 units chosen from other Masters programmes

(c) not more than 30 umts chosen from the followmg topics which Wlll be assessed at the Masters level

Umts

25301 Old Testament fheology 6 25402 Readmgs m Old Testament

Studies 6

137

Statutes

26301 New Testament Theology 6 26402 Readings rn New Testament

Studies 6 27403 Readings in Systematic

Theology 6 28301 History of Chnstran M1ss1ons 6 28302 History of Liturgy 6 28303 History of Ecumenism 6 28307 History of Spmtuahty 6 28403 Readmgs m Church History 6 29402 Readmgs m Pastoral Studies 6 29403 Readings in B1oeth1cs 6

Part1c1pat1on in the Honours seminar throughout the programme 1s required The above topics may not be taken 1f already included m the candidates undergraduate degree

The thesis option may be taken either as a 12 unit thesis or as a 6 unit research pro1ect

29510 M TH ST thesis 12 29520 M TH ST research proiect 6

SCHEDULE 14 The Degree of Master of Science (Primary Health Care) (MSc PH C)

1 Applicants may be admitted as candidates for the degree of Master of Science (Primary Health Care) 1f they (1) hold the degrees of Bachelor of

Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Surgery of this or of another approved Un1vers1ty, provided that they have also completed not less than two years of post registration expenence, or

(2) hold another approved degree of this or of another approved Un1vers1ty or 1nst1tutton of higher education, provided that they have completed not less than two years of relevant post-graduate experience

(3) Apphcants may be offered quahfymg studies to be determmed by the Board of the School of Med1cme On the sallsfactory complet10n of quahfymg studies, the student will be accepted as an admitted candidate for the degree

2 To quahfy for the degree of Master of Science (Primary Health Care) a

138

candidate shall satisfactonly complete 72 units compns1ng 36 units of coursework and 36 umts leadmg to the complet10n of a thesis

3 Except with perm1ss10n of the Board of the School of Med1cme a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the degree for not less than 2 years and not more than 4 years, and a part lime candidate for not less than 3 years and not more than 6 years from the month from which the candidature was dated

4 The degree 1s offered 1n six programmes details of which are specified m the syllabuses

Primary Health Care Palhahve Care Commumty Mental Health Add1ct10n Studies Commumty Child Health Health Educat10n

The Board of the School of Med1cme may specify the programme of studies for the degree m appendices to thIS schedule The programmes may include Masters level topics at other approved 1nstltut1ons

5 Candidates who deme that topics they have sat1sfactor1ly completed 1n the University or elsewhere be credited towards the degree may, on wntten apphcahon be granted such exemption from the requirements of Clause 3 as the Board shall determme

6 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board, no candidate may attempt a topic more than twice Failure to achieve a grade of C or better or NGP m any 18 of the 36 units of coursework shall constitute przma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3, Clause 14

7 Assessment of the thesis will be earned out by at least two examiners, one of whom shall normally be external to the Un1vers1ty

Appendix A

Primary Health Care

Core Topzcs Units 95001 Community Orgamsat10n

and Health 4

95002 The Management of Services in Primary Health Care 4

95003 The Process of Learnmg 4 95004 Health Programmes 4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95006 Commumty Health Research 4 95007 Thesis Preparation 95008 TheSIS

Elective Topzcs 95009 Health Counsellmg 95010 Internat10nal Health

9

27

6 6

95011 The Basis of Addicl!ve Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95013 Medical Demography 6 95014 Commumty Nutnt10n 6 95015 Gerontology and Health 6 95016 Behavioural Management 6 95029 Individual Study m Pnmary

Health Care 6 95035 Health Cil!es - Pubhc Health

in Action 6 95037 Womens Health 6

Appendix B

Palhahve Care

Core Topzcs Units 95001 Community Organisation

and Health 4 95003 The Process of Learmng 4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95006 Commumty Health Research 4 95023 The Pracl!ce of Palhal!ve Care 6 95024 Psychological Aspects of

Palhal!ve Care 4 95025 Oncology Aspects of

Palhal!ve Care 4 95026 Commumty Care and

Organisation 4 95007 Thesis Preparat10n 9 95008 Thesis , 27

Electzve Topzcs 95009 Health Counsellmg 6 95010 Internat10nal Health 6 95011 The BaSIS of Addicl!ve Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95013 Medical Demography 6 95014 Commumty Nutnt10n 6 95015 Gerontology and Health 6

7 3 Schedule 14

95016 Behav10ural Management 95029 Ind!Vldual Study m Primary

Health Care 95035 Health Cil!es - Pubhc Health

in Action 95037 Womens Health

Appendzx C

Commumty Mental Health

Core Topics 95001 Community Organisation

and Health 95002 The Management of Services 1n

6

6

6 6

Umts

4

Pnmary Health Care 4 95003 The Process of Learnmg 4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95017 Mental Health Programmes 4 95018 Commumty Mental Health

Research 4 95019 Basis of Commumty Mental Health 4 95007 Thesis Preparat10n 9 95008 Thesis 27

Elective Topzcs 95009 Health Counselling 6 95010 Internat10nal Health 6 95011 BaSIS of Addictive Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95015 Gerontology and Health 6 95020 Systematic Approaches to

Children Family and Commumty 6 95021 Child Commumty Mental Health 6 95022 Commumty Development m

Mental Health 6 95029 Individual Study m Primary

Health Care 6 95035 Healthy Cities Pubhc Health

in Action 6 95037 Women's Health 6

Appendzx D

Add1ct1on Studies

Core Topzcs Units 95001 Commumty Orgamsatwn

and Health 4 95002 The Management of Semces m

Primary Health Care 4 95003 The Process of Learnmg 4

139

Statutes

95004 Health Programmes 4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95011 Basis of Add1c!Ive Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95027 Add1c!Ive Behav10ur Research 4 95028 Intervent10n Skills m Add1c!Ive

Behaviour 4 95036 Health Programmes m Add1ct10n

Behaviour 4 95007 Thesis Preparation 9 95008 Thesis 27

Appendix E

Commumty Chdd Health Units

Core Topics 95001 Community Organisation

and Health 4 95002 The Management of Services m

Pnmary Health Care 4 95003 The Process of Learnmg 4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95030 Child Development 6 95031 Malena! and Child Health 4 95032 School and Commumty Health 4

Elective Topics 95009 Health Counselling 6 95010 Internat10nal Health 6 95011 The Basis of Add1ct1ve Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95013 Medical Demography 6 95014 Community Nutrition 6 95015 Gerontology and Health 6 95016 Behav10ural Management 6 95021 Child Commumty Mental Health 6 95029 Ind1v1dual Study m Pnmary

Health Care 6 95035 Healthy C1t1es Pubhc Health

1n Action 6 95037 Womens Health 6

Appendix F

Health Education Units

Core Topzcs 95001 Commumty Orgamsat10n

and Health 4 95003 The Process of Learnmg 4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4

140

95006 Commumty Health Research 4 95033 Health Educat10n 4 95034 Health Educat10n Programmes 4

Elective Topics 95009 Health Counsellmg 6 95010 Internat10nal Health 6 95011 The Basis of Add1cuve Behav10ur 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95013 Medical Demography 6 95014 Commumty Nutnt10n 6 95015 Gerontology and Health 6 95016 Behavioural Management 6 95029 Ind1v1dual Study m Pnmary

Health Care 6 95035 Healthy C1t1es Pubhc Health

1n Action 6 95037 Womens Health 6

SCHEDULE 15 The Degree of Master of Economics by Coursework m the School of Social Sciences (M Ee ) 1 A person may be accepted as a candidate

for the degree of Master of Economics by Coursework if that person has obtained an Honours degree of Bachelor of Econom1cs of The Flinders Un1vers1ty of South Australia or the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide with First or good Second Class Honours or a quahficahon deemed by the Board to be at least equivalent of one of the above awards, or who has given evidence satisfactory to the Board of his or her fitness to undertake work for the degree

2 To qualify for the degree of Master of Economics by Coursework in the School of Social Sciences, a student shall complete sa!Isfactonly at least 54* umts from one of the approved programmes offered m the School details of which are specified m Appendix A and the Syllabuses, and shall have obtamed an average grade of B or better 1n the coursework topics

3 The smallest assessable piece of work 1n the Coursework M Ee programme shall be 6 units The term thesis 1 is reserved for projects with a we1ghtmg of at least 12 umts

4 Candidates must choose four approved topics a supervised thesis or pro1ect work,

Amendment awa1tmg Council approval

where the thesis or pro1ect work accounts for about one half of the work done for the degree and complete the graduate research workshop and seminar >:<

5 The Higher Degrees Committee of the School shall appomt a Course Co ordinator for each candidate In add1t10n the Committee shall appomt a supervisor of the pro1ect work of a candidate where that pro1ect work accounts for one half of the work of the degree

6 Each candidate's programme of study must be approved by the Course Co ordinator at enrolment each year

7 Each topic of the Coursework programme shall be exammed by at least two examiners either internal or external to the Un1vers1ttes Course Co ordinators are eligible to act as examiners of topics 1n the programme

8 The D1sc1phne concerned shall return a result to the Higher Degrees Committee of the School for each topic m a candidate's programme as soon as pracl!cable after the complet10n of all work and assessment 1n that topic

9 Except with the perm1ss10n of the Board no candidate may attempt a topic more than once Failure to achieve an average grade of B or better m the coursework undertaken shall constitute przma facze evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purpose of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

Appendzx A

Compulsory Topics (24 umts) 30501 Micro economics 6 30502 Macro economics 6 30503 Economics of Public Policy 6 30523 Graduate Research Workshop

and Seminar 6

Optzons (6 units) One option must be chosen from

30504 Transport Economics 6 30530 Advances m Economic Theory I 6 30531 Advances m Economic Theory II 6 30532 Advances m Quant1tahve

Mathemal!cal and Applied Economics I 6

Amendments- awaiting Council approval

7 3 Schedule 16

30533 Advances m Quant1tat1ve Mathemal!cal and Applied Economics II 6

30534 Advances 1n Quant1tat1ve Mathematical and Applied Economics III 6

Thesis or pro7ect worl<. (24 units) 30510 M Ee coursework thesis 24

SCHEDULE 16 The Degree of Master of Nutr1t10n and Dietetics (M N D )

1 In this schedule a topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Units are the measure of weighting given to topics, determined 1n each case by the Board of the appropnate School, a normal years work by a full-lime student bemg valued at 36 units Grades are the class1llcations of pass and fail for topics m the degree and shall be A = D1stmct10n B Credit C Pass NGP Non graded Pass F Fail A grade of A, B, C or NGP m any topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree A grade of F m any topic will result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Degree of Master of Nutnt10n and D1eteltcs a candidate shall (1) have quahf1ed for a Bachelor's

degree of a Un1vers1ty 1n some area of the sciences or for an equivalent degree or approved eqmvalent quahftcahon from another tertiary inshtuhon

(11) normally have completed approved training 1n b1ochem1stry and phys10logy to at least second year University level and

(m) have his or her candidature approved by the Board of the School of Med1c1ne

In exceptional circumstances candidates without these pre-requmtes may be admitted 1n accordance with the terms of Clause 5 of the statute

141

Statutes

3 To qualify for the degree of Master of Nutnt10n and Dietetics the student shall complete satlsfactonly a programme of studies as specified in Appendix A, requmng two years of full llme study Satisfactory completion of the programme requires a pass 1n the 72 units compns1ng the first and second year of the programme

4 Persons who hold the Bachelor of Nutntton and Dietetics of the Un1vers1ty may be awarded the degree of Master of Nutnt1on and Dietetics after completion of add1t1onal studies and assessment to be approved by the Board of the School of Medicme and on surrender of their Bachelor's degree

5 Except with the permiss10n of the Board, a student may not proceed to any second year topics until he or she has sallsfactonly completed the first year topics

6 The topics compnsmg the course of study for the degree shall normally be taken over two consecutive years Except with the permiss10n of the Board of the School of Medicme, no candidate may attempt a topic more than once

7 A student who at any llme withdraws from, or fails to re enrol 1n, the course leadmg to the degree of Master of Nutntrnn and Dietellcs shall be permitted to re enrol in that course only with the pnor approval of the Standmg Committee of the Board of the School of Medicme

Appendix A

Programme Requirements

Fzrst Year Units

92431 Commumty Orgamsatrnn for Health 2

92432 Human Nutntrnnal Sciences 4 92433 Nutntrnn m Health and Disease 8 92434 Nutntrnnal Care Pracllce (Chmcal) 6 92435 Nutntrnnal Care Pracllce

(Commumty) 9 92436 Food Studies I (Techmcal

& Productrnn) 3 92437 Food Service Management 4

142

Second Year 92525 Nutntrnnal Care Pracllce II 18 92526 Elecllve m Nutntrnn & Dretellcs 9 92527 Professrnnal Management

& Adm1n1strahon 3 92528 Current Issues m Nutnt10n 3 92529 Food Studies II (Social

& Environmental) 3

SCHEDULE 17 The Degree of Master of Nutntronal Science (M N S )

1 In this schedule a topzc rs a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Units are a measure of weighting wven to topics, determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School, a normal year's work by a full time student being valued at 36 umts Grades are the class1ficahons of pass and far! for topics m the degree and shall be

A D1shnctlon B = Credit C = Pass NGP = Non graded Pass F = Fall A grade of A, B, C or NGP many topic will result m the full number of umts for that topic bemg credited towards the degree A grade of F m any topic will result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 For adm1ss10n to the course of studies for the Degree of Master of Nutntronal Science a candidate shall (i) have qualified for a Bachelor's

degree of a Un1vers1ty in some area of the sciences or for an equivalent degree or approved equivalent qualtflcation from another tertiary 1nshtuhon,

(u) normally have completed approved tra1n1ng in b1ochem1stry and physrnlogy to at least second year Umversity level, and

(111) have his or her candidature approved by the Board of the School of Medicme

In exceptional circumstances candidates without these pre requmtes may be admitted in accordance with the terms of Clause 5 of the statute

3 To quahfy for the degree of Master of Nutnt10nal Science the student shall complete satisfactorily a programme of studies as spec1f1ed in Appendix A, requ1nng two years of full time study Satisfactory completion of the programme requires a pass 1n the 72 units compns1ng the first and second year of the programme

4 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not proceed to any second year topics until he or she has sal!sfactonly completed the first year topics

5 The topics compns1ng the course of study for the degree shall normally be taken over two consecutive years Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board of the School of Med1c1ne no candidate may attempt a topic more than once

6 A student who at any time withdraws from or fails to re enrol 1n the course leading to the degree of Master of Nutnbonal Science shall be permitted to re enrol in that course only with the pnor approval of the Standing Committee of the Board of the School of Medicme

7 Assessment of the thesis will be earned out by at least two examiners, one of whom shall normally be external to the University

Appendix A

Programme Requirements

First Year

92431 Community Organisation for Health

92432 Human Nutritional Sciences 92433 Nutnt10n m Health and Disease 92436 Food Studies I (Techmcal

Units

2

4 8

& Product10n) 92438 Nutnt10n Educat10n

3

5 92439 Introduct10n to Research Methods 4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 Approved topics available in Flinders Un1vers1ty or another institution 6

Second Year

92500 Thesis 36

7 3 Schedule 18

SCHEDULE 18 The Degree of Master of Science (Health Service Management) (M Sc (HS M))

1 Apphcants may be admitted by the Board of the School of Medicme as candidates for the degree of Master of Science (Health Services Management) if they

(i) hold the degrees of Bachelor of Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Surgery of this or of another approved University or their equivalent of another Umversity provided that they have also completed not less than two years of post registration experience, or

(u) hold another approved degree or graduate diploma of this or of another approved Un1vers1ty or 1nstttuhon of higher education, provided that they have completed not less than two years of relevant post graduate experience

Applicants without these quahfications may be admitted by the Board of the School of Med1c1ne to a programme of quahfy1ng studies 1n accordance with the terms of Clause 3(c) of the statute On satisfactory complet10n of the quahfymg studies, the students shall be permitted to enrol for the degree of Master of Science (Health Service Management) and the Board shall determine 1n each case the extent to which the quahfymg studies shall be credited towards the degree

2 To quahfy for the degree of Master of Science (Health Service Management) a candidate shall satisfactorily complete 72 units compns1ng 36 units of coursework and 36 umts leadmg to the complet10n of a thesis

3 Except with the approval of the Board of the School of Medicme, a full time candidate shall pursue the approved studies for the degree for not less than two years and not more than four years and a part time candidate for not less than 3 years and not more than 6 years from the month from which candidature was dated

4 Candidates who desire that topics they have sat1sfactor1ly completed 1n the Un1vers1ty or elsewhere be credited

143

Statutes

towards the degree may, on written apphcahon, be granted such exemption from the requirements of Clauses 2 and 3 as the Board shall determine, sub1ect to the proviso that no more than 36 units of status will be granted

5 Grades are the class1flcahons of pass and fail for coursework topics and shall be A D1shnchon B c F

Crea1t Pass Fad

Except with the approval of the Board, no candidate may attempt a topic more than twice Failure to achieve a grade of C or better m any 12 of the 36 umts of coursework shall constitute prime fac1e evidence of unsatisfactory progress for the purpose of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

6 The Board of the School of Medicme may specify the programme of studies for the degree m appendices to this Schedule The programme may include Masters level topics 1n other approved 1nst1tuhons

7 Assessment of the theSlS will be earned out by two examiners, appointed by the Board of the School of Medicme, one of whom shall normally be external to the Un1vers1ty

Appendix A

Programme Units

95001 Community Organ1sahon and Health 4

95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4

95006 Commumty Health Research 4

95007 Thesis Preparat10n Semmar 9

95008 Thesis 27

95041 Fmancial and Behav10ural Management 4

95042 Decis10n makmg and Ethics for Health Services 5

95043 Health Services Law

95044 Health Services Economics and Finance

95045 Health Care Management

144

5

5

5

7 4 Degrees of Doctor of Philosophy, and Doctor of Medzczne 1 There shall be degrees of Doctor of

Philosophy and Doctor of Medicine These degrees shall be admmistered by the Academic Programmes Committee which shall have regard to the recom mendations of the Boards of the Schools or the Board of Studies m Theology

2 A person who wishes to become a candidate for a doctoral degree shall make appllcation to the Registrar subm1thng an outline of the studies the person proposes to pursue and details of the person's quahf1cat1ons for undertaking them A person who is not a graduate of the Umversity shall submit documentary evidence of quahf1cations and academic record

3 A person who holds an honours degree of the Umversity or who holds quail ficat10ns deemed by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be at least equivalent to an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty may be accepted for enrolment as a Doctor of Philosophy student provided that (a) the candidature and programme of

studies have been approved by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology, except that, 1n the case of a person already holdmg the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy, or an equivalent quahf1cat1on acceptance for enrolment must have been approved by the Academic Programmes Committee and

(b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and appropriately superv1sed and that the apphcant is iudged by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be quahfled to undertake it, and

(c) the applicant may be reqmred as a pre requ1s1te for enrolment as a doctoral student to undertake and to complete to the satisfaction of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology such qualifying exam1nat1ons as may be prescribed by the Board

7 4 Degrees of Doctor of Philosophy, and Doctor of Medicine

4 A person who holds the degrees of Bachelor of Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Surgery of the Umversity or who holds quahficat10ns deemed by the Board of the School of Medicme to be at least equivalent to the degrees of Bachelor of Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Surgery of the Un1vers1ty may be accepted for enrolment as a Doctor of Med1c1ne student proVIded that (a) the candidature and programme of

studies have been approved by the Board of the School of Medicme and

(b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and appropriately supervised and that the apphcant is iudged by the Board of the School of Medicme to be qualified to undertake it, and ( c) the apphcant may be required as a pre requ1s1te for enrolment as a doctoral student to undertake and to complete to the satisfaction of the Board of the School of Medicine such qualifying exam1nattons as may be prescribed by the Board

5 A person who does not hold an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty or who does not hold quahficat10ns deemed by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be at least equivalent to an honours degree of the Un1vers1ty will be required as a pre requ1s1te to enrolment as a doctoral student to undertake such topics and to complete to the satisfaction of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology such quahfymg examinations as may be prescribed by the Board provided that (a) the candidature and programme of

studies have been approved by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology, and

(b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and supervised and that the applicant is Judged by the Board of the appro priate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be quahfied to take it

6 Notwithstanding the provis10ns of Clause 5 the Academic Programmes Committee

may 1n special cases and sub1ect to such conditions as the Committee may prescribe 1n each case accept as a doctoral student a person who does not hold a degree of a university or a quahficahon deemed by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology to be at least eqmvalent to a degree of a un1vers1ty but who has given evidence satisfactory to the Committee of fitness for doctoral studies and whose candidature is supported by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology

7 The Academic Programmes Committee may accept a doctoral student at any time and shall specify the month from which the candidature shall be dated

8 The Academic Programmes Committee may accept at any time a student taking qualifying topics or examinations as pre requ1s1te to enrolment as a doctoral student, and shall specify when the student shall enrol and the amount of time which shall be permitted for the completion of those topics or exam1nahons

9 When an apphcant has been accepted as a doctoral student or as a student taking qualifying topics or examinations as a pre requ1s1te to enrolment as a doctoral student the applicant shall enrol as a student m the appropriate School of the Umversity and shall pay the appropriate fees

10 A student shall re enrol durmg the prescribed enrolment period each year until such time as

(a) the student has completed to the sa!!sfact10n of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology all of the topics or examinations required as a pre requ1s1te to enrolment as a doctoral student, or

(b) the student has completed all the work required for the award of a doctoral degree, or

(c) the student has ceased to be a student of the Un1vers1ty

11 A doctoral student may be accepted as a full time or part time candidate, but a

145

Statutes

part time candidate will be accepted only if the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology is satisfied that the part time candidate ts able to devote suff1c1ent time to the approved studies, and subject to such cond1tlons as the Board may prescribe

12 The Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology may (a) on the recommendat10n of the

candidate's supervisor, permit a candidate for a masters degree to transfer his candidature to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, and m such cases the Board concerned shall determine whether the whole or any part of the period of candidature for the master's degree shall count towards the penod of candidature for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy

(b) at any !!me approve a transfer between full time and part !!me candidature, and in such cases the Board concerned shall determine the m1n1mum and maXImum periods for which the candidate may pursue approved studies

(c) at any time approve an 1nterm1ss1on of candidature for a period not exceeding twelve months In such cases the Board shall determine the m1n1mum and maximum periods for which the candidate may pursue approved studies upon resumption of candidature

13 One or more supervisors shall be appointed for each student A supervisor shall be either

146

(a) a member of the academic staff of the Umversity appomted by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology, or

(b) m special cases a Sllltably qual!fled person having a close association with the Umversity appomted by the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology

Where more than one supervisor is appomted, one of them shall be nominated as the chief supervisor

14 Where a student has only one supervisor and that supervisor ceases to be a member of the staff of the Umversity or is absent from the Un1vers1ty for a penod exceeding three months or 1s otherwise unavailable or unable to act as the supervisor, the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology may after one month and shall after three months, appoint a new supervisor or a temporary supervisor who shall act 1n the place of the supervisor

15 A student shall pursue the approved studies under the superv1s1on of the appointed supervisor or supervisors to the sat1sfact1on of the Academic Programmes Committee (and sub1ect to any special cond1t1ons that may be approved by the Committee) At the end of each academic year each supervisor shall submit a written report to the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology on the work of each student under the supervisor s charge In the case of a student who 1s taking qualifying topics or exam1nat1ons the annual report may take the form of a report of examination results to the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology The supervisor shall also report to the Board when in the supervisor's opinion a student 1s not making satisfactory progress, or ts not fulf1lhng the conditions prescribed for the candidature, or appears unlikely to reach the standard requrred

16 The Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology shall upon receipt of the supervisors report and may, at any other time, review the progress of a student and may either

(a) allow the student to contmue as a doctoral student

(b) transfer the candidature to a master's degree, or

( c) ask the student to show cause why his candidature should not be terminated

17 If m the opimon of the Academic Programmes Committee a student 1s not making satisfactory progress the Com m1ttee may after consulting the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of

Studies m Theology termmate the enrolment of the student

18 Schedules defmmg the nature and extent of the work to be completed by the candidates and the fees to be paid by candidates and students undertaking qualifymg studies shall be drawn up from time to time by the Academic Programmes Committee Such schedules shall become effective as from the date of approval by the Council or from such other date as the Council may determme

19 On complet10n of the approved pro gramme of studies a student proceeding to a doctoral degree either wholly or partly by thesis shall lodge with the Registrar four copies of the thesis prepared in accordance with the rules of theses approved by the Academic Programmes Committee

20 After cons1der1ng the reports of the examiners of a candidate for a doctoral degree, the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies tn Theology shall report to the Academic Programmes Committee whether 1n its view

(a) the degree should be awarded, or

(b) the degree should be awarded sub1ect to minor amendments to the thesis as may be spec1f1ed or

(c) m the case of a candidate who has submitted a thesis for the degree of Doctor of Ph!losophy an appropnate master s degree should be awarded, or

( d) the candidate should be required to take an oral examination or

(e) the degree should not be awarded but the candidate should be permitted to resubmit the thesis or take such further examination as the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology shall prescnbe or both or

(f) the degree should not be awarded and the candidate should not be allowed to present for the degree again

21 Except with the perm1ss10n of the Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the School or Board

7 4 Schedule 1

of Studies concerned a candidate may not resubmit a thesis for examination on more than one occasion

22 The Academic Programmes Committee shall after cons1deratton of a report of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology decide whether a doctoral degree shall be awarded to a candidate who has fulfllled all the conditions prescnbed for the award of that degree

23 The Academic Programmes Committee may delegate to the School Board or the Board of Studies m Theology any or all of its powers and functions specified in Clauses 6, 7 8 and 15 of this statute

24 A School Board or the Board of Studies rn Theology may delegate to its Exam1nat1on Board its Standing Committee or other spec1f1ed committee of the Board, any or all of its functions specified in this statute or 1n any schedule to this statute

SCHEDULE 1 The Degree of Doctor of Philosophy (Ph D )

1 Except by permiss10n of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology a full time candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall pursue the approved studies for a penod of not less than two and not more than four years and a part time candidate for a penod of not less than three and not more than SIX years from the month from which the candidature was dated

2 The Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies m Theology may permit a candidate to pursue at another Un1vers1ty or approved institution such part of the candidates studies as it thmks flt In such cases the candidate will be required to work for at least two years on an approved programme of studies except that 1n exceptional circumstances the Board may approve a reduction 1n this penod under such cond1t1ons as 1t may determine In each case

3 In any year of the candidature a candidate may be permitted by the supervisor to

147

Statutes

spend not more than nine weeks away from the Un1vers1ty on fteldwork, but any period or absence in excess of nine weeks must be approved in advance by the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology

4 At the conclus1on of the approved studies or by the end of the fourth year from the date of registration as a full hme student, or by the end of the sixth year of reg1strat1on as a part time student, each candidate for the degree shall present a theSIS embodymg the results of the work done durmg the candidature and conta1n1ng a s1gn1f1cant contnbut1on to knowledge or scholarship w1thm the scope of the sub1ect provided that m exceptional circumstances and by special perrn1ss1on of the Board of the appro priate School or the Board of Studies 111

Theology an extension of time may be allowed

5 Matenal previously presented for any other degree shall not form a substantial part of the thesis presented for the degree

6 In the case of a candidate who ts required to undertake qualtfymg topics and exam1nahons any work undertaken before the complet10n of the qual!fymg exam1nahon shall not be presented for the degree without the approval of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology

7 At least three months before a student is due to submit a thesis to the Registrar for examination the candidate's supervisor shall nol!fy the Board of the appropnate School or the Board of Studies 1n Theology and shall recommend the appointment of examiners

8 The Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendation of the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies m Theology shall appomt at least two examiners who shall be external to the Umvers1ty and may appomt additional examiners

9 The exammers shall each submit to the Board of the appropriate School or the Board of Studies in Theology a written report on the candidate s thesis

148

SCHEDULE 2 The Degree of Doctor of Med1cme (M D ) I The degree of Doctor of Med1cme will be

awarded for an ong1nal contribution of dtstrnguished ment to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of med1c1ne It will normally be awarded followmg the submission of a thesis It may in exceptional circumstances be awarded on the basis of pubhshed work

2 To be ehg1ble to become a candidate for the degree of Doctor of Medicine a person shall either hold the degrees of Bachelor of Med1cme and Bachelor of Surgery of the Umvers1ty or hold the degrees of Bachelor of Med1cme and Bachelor of Surgery, or an equivalent degree, of a university other than The Flinders University of South Australla approved for this purpose by the Board of the School of Med1c1ne

3 The thesis or pubhshed work shall not be submitted until at least five years after the candidate has qualified for the degrees of Bachelor of Med1cme and Bachelor of Surgery or an equivalent degree, nor until the candidate has spent at least frve years followmg graduat10n substanl!ally engaged m the practice and study of med1c1ne or 1n sc1enhflc work relevant to medicine

Adm1ss1on to the Degree by Thesis 4 Candidates will normally be reqmred to

complete at least two years of the work for the degree w1thm the School of Med1c1ne, the Flinders Medical Centre or an approved afflhated rnst1tut1on Addrttonal work may be earned out in any other place or places approved by the Board of the School of Med1cme

5 Material previously presented for any other degree shall not form a substantial part of the thesis presented for the degree

Adm1ss10n to the Degree by Pubhshed Work 6 A candidate shall not be accepted to

proceed to the degree on the basis of pubhshed work unless the Board of the School of Medicine 1s satisfied that he or she has had a post graduate association with the School, the Flmders Medical Centre or another approved 1nstttuhon for at least three years

7 5 Degrees of Doctor of Letters and Doctor of Science

7 A candidate shall apply m wntmg to the Registrar on the prescribed form g1vmg particulars of the work the candidate proposes to submit together with a curriculum vitae

8 If the candidature ts approved by the Board of the School of Med1cme the candidate shall lodge with the Registrar four sets of reprints or copies of such work bound in accordance with the Rules for Higher Degree Theses

9 The bound work shall mclude (a) an mtroduct10n descnbmg the theme

of the published work submitted and statmg how the publieation IS related to the theme The mtroduct10n must also mdicate which port10ns of the work are claimed to be or1g1nal,

(b) a statement which, m the case of work earned out con101ntly, clearly states the extent to which the candidate was responsible for the 1n1tiation, conduct and d1rect1on of such con101nt research, and

(c) a statement which clearly 1nd1cates any portions of the work submitted that have previously been submitted for any degree in the Un1vers1ty or any other 1nstltutlon

Exam1nahon for Degree of Doctor of Med1c1ne 10 At least three months before a student ts

due to submit a thesis to the Registrar for examination the candidate's supervisor shall notify the Board of the School of Medicine and shall recommend the appointment of examiners

11 The Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendat10n of the Board shall appomt at least two exammers who shall be external to the Un1vers1ty, and may appoint add1tional examiners

12 The exammers shall each submit to the Board a wntten report on the candidate's thesis

7 5 Degrees of Doctor of Letters and Doctor of Science 1 There shall be a degree of Doctor of

Letters (D Litt ) and a degree of Doctor of Science (D Sc )

2 To be eligible to become a candidate for a higher doctorate a person shall either be a graduate of the Umversity of at least five years standing, or hold equivalent quahficahons 1n another un1vers1ty or mstttut10n recogmsed for the purpose by the Umvers1ty and have a substantial assoc1atton with the Un1vers1ty

3 A person w1sh1ng to become a candidate shall furnish satisfactory evidence that he has made a substantial and scholarly contr1but1on to the advancement of letters the arts or science On the basis of such evidence the Board of the appropriate School shall determme whether to or not to accept him as a candidate for the appropnate degree

4 The award of the degree shall be determined on a consideration of such of !us pubhshed work and any unpubhshed work that the candidate may submit m support of his candidature

5 A candidate shall, m submittmg published or unpublished work for exan11nahon for a degree (a) state the main sources from which

the information IS derived and the extent to which the candidate made use of the work of others,

(b) state what part, if any, of the work submitted for the degree has been submitted for any other degree, and

(c) provide m respect of each co authored pubhcat1on a signed statement outhn1ng the nature and extent of the candidate s own contnbutton to the pubhcatton and 1nclud1ng the name and current address of at least one of the other co authors to enable the Un1vers1ty or the examiners to verify the s1gn1f1cance of the candidate's contr1buhon

6 The candidate shall lodge with the Registrar three copies* of the work submitted for the degree The Academic Programmes Committee on the recommendat10n of the Board of the appropriate School shall appoint examiners, at least two of whom shall be external to the Umvers1ty

• The Rules for Higher Degree Theses apply for the presentalion of unpublished material

149

Statutes

7 After considering the reports of the examiners, the Board of the appropriate School may recommend to the Council that the degree be awarded

8 The fee to be paid on acceptance as a candidate shall be prescribed from time to time by the Council

Rules for Higher Degree Thesesf

1 The form and method of reproduct10n of each thesis to be submitted for a degree shall be subiect to approval as follows (a) a sample copy of each of four

representative pages m the form proposed by the candidate shall be submitted to the Librarian so that the method of reproduction may be approved,

(b) unless otherwise approved by the Librarian, theses shall be presented on quarto or A4 paper on one side of the paper only, double spaced and with margms of at least l'/z mches on the left hand side and 3/4 mch on the right hand side and sufficient at the top and bottom to allow for tnmmmg during bmdmg

2 Each thesis, when submitted for a degree, shall be m the form and by the method of reproduct10n approved by the Librarian 1n accordance with Clause 1 above

3 When the thesis is submitted for exammatrnn four copies shall be lodged with the Registrar Ifthe thesis, or any part of 1t, is typewritten, the four copies shall include the original and the first carbon copy

4 The thesis shall mcorporate m the followmg order (a) a title page givmg the title of the

thesis 1n full, the names and degrees of the candidate, the name of the School of the Umversity associated

t Candidates are advised to consult the followmg pubhcatrons for guidance m the preparation of theses Australia CS IR O Guide to authors (Melb CS IR 0 1953) Trelease SF How to write scientific and technical papers (Baltimore W1lhams & W1lkms 1958) Royal Society of London General notes 011 the preparation of sc1ent1flc papers (Lond Royal Society 1950) Turab1an K L Manual for writers of term papers theses and dissertations rev ed (Chicago UP 1955) La Nauze J A Presentation of llistoncal theses notes for university students (Melb U P 1966) Crutchley B Preparation of manuscnpts and co"ectwn of proofs 2nd ed (Cambridge U P i964)

150

with the work and the date when submitted for the degree

(b) table of contents, (c) a summary in not more than

500 words (d) the followmg declaration signed by

the candidate I certify that this thesis does not

incorporate without acknow­ledgement any material prevrously submitted for a degree or diploma 1n any umversity, and that to the best of my knowledge and behef it does not contain any material previously pubhshed or written by another person except where due reference ts made 1n the text "

(e) an acknowledgement by the candidate of help given or work earned out by any other person or organ1sahon,

(f) the mam text, (g) appendices if any, (h) b1bhography

5 Diagrams, figures, photographs, etc , should, where pracllcable be drawn or photographed on quarto or A4 paper All full page figures should form a nght hand page with the legend either at the bottom or 1f necessary, on the page facing the figures Diagrams maps, tables etc exceeding quarto or A4 size, should be folded so as to read as a nght-hand page when open If diagrams, figures, photo graphy, etc, are to be mounted on a page, a dry mounting process should be used

6 Wherever possible, tables should be inserted in the appropriate place in the text, but lengthy or bulky tables should appear as an appendix

7 The thesis shall be sewn, trimmed and bound with stiff covers covered with dark cloth

8 On the spme of the thesis shall be given, m gold lettermg of suitable size, the surname of the candidate and the title of the thesis, abbrevrated if necessary If the lettering will not fit across the spme it shall run along the spme readmg from top to bottom

9 When pubhshed papers are submitted as addit10nal evidence they shall be bound m the back of the thesis as an appendix

10 When a thesis 1s accepted for the award of a degree two copies shall be lodged by the Registrar m the Library and one copy shall not be available for loan In the case of a type written thesis the two copies shall be the ongmal and the first carbon copy and the ongmal copy shall not be available for loan In appropriate cases the second copy lodged m the Library may by arrangement with the Librarian, be housed m a School This second copy must be available for loan to approved borrowers on demand

11 Unless otherwise approved by the Academic Programmes Committee in accordance with the provisions of Clause 13 below access to theses accepted for the award of a degree shall be subiect to the following cond1t1ons (a) academic staff and research students

of the Un1vers1ty may consult any thesis without the prior consent of the author

(b) for three years after the degree has been awarded other readers must obtain the consent of the author or the head of the discipline concerned or the L1brar1an before being permitted to consult the thesis,

( c) for three years after the degree has been awarded no copy may be made of the thesis or part of it without the prior consent of the author

12 When a thesis has been accepted for the award of a degree the author shall be asked 1f he ts prepared to waive the condit10ns referred to m Clause 11 (b) and ( c) above

13 A request from an author to place a spec1f1c restnct1on on access to his thesis other than those referred to 1n Clause 11 above will be subiect to approval by the Academic Programmes Committee Such request will be considered by the Committee only on the grounds that the thesis contains confidential matenal or that it was a condition imposed by the owner of private records and matenal used by the author

14 Each person consultmg a thesis shall sign a statement acknowledgmg that he has been given access to the thesis for consultat10n only and that no part will be

Rules

published or paraphrased without the prior consent of the author and that the authors hterary rights will be respected

151

Rules Applicable to Staff and Students

Library Rules

I. Opening and Closing of The Library

1. The Libra1y shall open from 9.00a.m. to 5.00p.m. except on Saturdays, Sundays, public holidays and such other occasions as the Council on the recommendation of the Academic Programmes Committee may direct that it be closed. It shall also be opened at such other times as the council on the recommend­ation of the Academic Programmes Committee may direct.

II. Persons Entitled to use The Library

152

2. The following persons are entitled to use The Library under the conditions set out in these Rules.

(a) Members of the University Council.

(b) Members, full-time or part-time of the academic staff of the University of the status of Tutor or Demonstrator and above and other persons accorded equivalent status by the University.

(c) Visiting Professors, Honorary Fellows and Visiting Scholars of the University.

(d) Professionally qualified non­academic staff of the University.

(e) Technical staff of the Uni­versity of the status of Technical Officer or Tech­nician and above.

(f) Research Assistants of the University.

(g) Other general staff of the University.

(h) Higher degree students of the University.

(i) Honours students of the University.

(j) Students of the University enrolled for any course of study or topic other than for honours or for a higher degree.

(k) Graduates of the University, on lodging a deposit determined by Council on the recom­mendation of the Academic Programmes Committee.':'

(1) Graduates of other tertiary institutions recognised by the University, on payment of an annual fee determined by Council on the recom­mendation of the Academic Programmes Committee.*"'

(m) Retired members of the academic staff and of the professionally qualified non­academic staff of the University.

3. Other persons who wish to use The Libra1y inay, on application to the University Librarian, be permitted to do so for approved purposes under conditions determined in each case by the University Librarian. The University Librarian may withdraw the permission to use The Library at any time.

III. Conduct of Readers

4. No books, periodicals, or other Library material shall be removed from The Library, except in accord­ance with the provisions of Clause 6.

5. (1) Readers who in the opinion of the University Librarian, or in his absence, the next most senior officer on duty in The Library, have been guilty of

* The Council has determined a deposit of $20. ** The Council has determined an annual fee of $i5.

misconduct or who interfere with the comfort of other readers make excessive noise cause damage in The Library or d1sf1gure or mutilate a book per1od1cal or other Library material 1n any way may be excluded for the remainder of that day by the Umversity Librarian, or 1n hrs absence, the next most senior officer on duty m The Library, and shall compensate the Umvers1ty for any damage caused For any misconduct or breach of the Rules the Umversity Librarian may (a) impose a fine of not more

than $20 (b) exclude the reader for a

further penod of up to five days or

(c) in cases where the Un1vers1ty Librarian considers the penalties specified m (a) and (b) above to be inappropriate or inadequate, report the misconduct or breach of the Rules to the Vice Chancellor who shall take such action as he may deem appropriate, cons1s tent with the Statutes of the Umvers1ty If the University Librarian Imposes a fine he shall report In wnting to the Registrar of the Un1vers1ty the amount of such f1ne 1

and the reason for it, and the fme shall be paid to the Registrar w1th1n seven days of its 1mpos1t1on

For the purposes of this clause m1Sconduct shall be as defmed m Statute 6 4 Mamtenance of Order

(2) Bags, cases mk m bottles food or dnnk may not be taken into The Library

(3) A readmg place may not be reserved during the reader s absence from The Library

Library Rules

without the prior permission of the U n1vers1ty Librarian

(4) Smokmg m The Library 1S not permitted

(5) Footwear which may damage the floor must not be worn

IV Borrowmg from The Library

6 Persons entitled to use The Library under Clause 2 are also entitled to borrow from The Library under cond1tions of loan determined from time to time by the Academic Programmes Committee and approved by the Council and publrshed as an Appendix to these Rules

7 Persons permitted to use The Library under Clause 3, may be permitted to borrow under cond1t1ons determined by the University L1brar1an 1n each case

V General

8 Persons present 1n The Library at any time must 1dent1fy themselves to the Un1vers1ty L1brar1an or in Ins absence, the next most senior officer on duty m The Library when requested to do so

9 No broadsheets handbills, news papers or other material (other than official notices of The Library or Umvemty) may be d1stnbuted or displayed w1thm the Library except with the approval of the Umvers1ty Librarian

10 So long as any fine imposed under these Rules remains unpaid or so long as any person keeps an item to which that person is not entitled, the nght of the defaulter to use The Library is suspended

11 The Councrl on the recommendation of the Academic Programmes Committee may vary any of the fore going rules at any time either 1n specific cases or generally

153

Rules Applzcable to Staff and Students

Appendix

Cond1tlons of Loan under The Library Rules Clause 6

1 Books and penod1cals from the Reserve Collection, Reference Collection, Rare Book Room Special Collection Newspaper Collection, Science Callee tton bound and unbound penod1cals housed m the Medical Branch Library, specially reserved material and rn1croform and aud1ov1sual material are not available for loan

2 Books and penod1cals from the Reserve Collect1on, the Rare Book Room the Special Collectwn and specially reserved matenal shall be issued for use w1th1n The Library for such penods of time as the Un1vers1ty Librarian may from time to time determine Each item issued for use w1th1n The Library must be returned by the due lime The penalty for keeping any such item beyond the specified time 1s SO cents an hou1 The reader's Umversity Student Card or Library Card must be deposited for each item 1Ssued

3 Books and penod1cals from the Mull!ple Copy Collect10n are available for loan only durmg the penod The Library IS

closed The items may be borrowed only in the period beginning one and a half hours before and ending fifteen minutes before The Library is closed and must be returned no later than thn1y minutes after The Library IS next opened The penalty for keepmg any such item beyond the spec1f1ed time 1s 50 cents an hour

4 No pubhcat10n lodged m Schools by arrangement with the Un1vers1ty Librarian may be borrowed for use outside the Schools except through The Library

5 Books and bound and unbound penodrcals may be borrowed by persons referred to m Clause 2 of the Rules as follows

154

(a) Members of the Unzverszty Counczl The persons referred to 1n Clause 2(a) may have on loan up to 30 items at any one time Books may be borrowed for four weeks These loans may be renewed for a further period 1f 1n the meantime there have

been no apphcat1ons for them Penod1cals may be borrowed for one week These loans are renewable only at the discretion of the Un1vers1ty Libra nan

(b) Academic staff The persons referred to in Clause 2(b) may have on loan up to 30 items at any one tune Books may be borrowed for four weeks These loans may be renewed for a further penod if in the meantime there have been no apphcat1ons for them Penod1cals may be borrowed for one week These loans are renewable only at the d1scret10n of the Un1vers1ty L1branan

(c) Vzsztzng Professors Honorary Fellows Vzsztzng Scholars The persons referred to in Clause 2(c) may have on loan up to 30 items at any one time Books may be borrowed for four weeks These loans may be renewed for a further penod if 1n the meantime there have been no apphcat1ons for them Penod1cals may be borrowed for one week These loans are renewable only at the discret10n of the U n1vers1ty L1branan

(d) Professzonally quallfzed non academic staff The persons referred to 1n Clause 2(d) may have on loan up to 6 items at any one time Books may be borrowed for four weeks and per1od1cals for one week These loans are renewable only at the d1scret1on of the Un1vers1ty L1branan

(e) Technzcal staff The persons referred to In Clause 2(e) may have on loan up to 6 items at any one time Books may be borrowed for four weeks and penod1cals for one week These loans are renewable only at the d1scret1on of the Un1vers1ty L1branan

(f) Research Assistants The persons referred to 1n Clause 2(1) may have on loan up to 12 items at any one time Books may be borrowed for four weeks and

penod1cals for one week These loans are renewable only at the discretion of the Unrvers1ty Librarian

(g) Other general staff The persons referred to in Clause 2(g) may have on loan up to 4 books at any one time Books may be borrowed for two weeks The loans are not renewable These persons may not borrow per1od1cals

(h) Higher degree students The persons referred to 1n Clause 2(h) may have on loan up to 20 items at any one time Books may be borrowed for four weeks These loans may be renewed for a further period if 1n the meantime there have been no apphcations for them Penod1cals may be borrowed for one week These loans are renewable only at the d1scret1on of the University L1branan

(i) Honours students The persons referred to in Clause 2(i) may have on loan up to IO books at arty one time The books may be borrowed for two weeks The loans may be renewed once only for a further period of two weeks at the d1screhon of the Un1vers1ty Librarian, 1f In the meantime there has been no other application for the book These persons may not borrow per1od1cals

(J) Students other than honours or higher degree The persons referred to in Clause 2(J) may have on loan up to 6 books at any one time The books may be borrowed for two weeks The loans are not renewable These persons may not borrow penod1cals

(k) Graduates of the University The persons referred to In Clause 2(k) may have on loan up to 4 books at any one tzme The books may be borrowed for two weeks The loans are not renewable These persons may not borrow penod1cals

(l) Graduates of other tertiary znstztut1ons The persons referred to 1n Clause

Library Rules

2(1) may have on loan up to 4 books at any one time The books may be borrowed for two weeks The loans are not renewable These persons may not borrow per1od1cals

(m) Retired members of academic and professzonally qualzfied non academic staff The persons referred to 1n Clause 2(m) may borrow under the condit10ns of the loan applymg to the correspondmg category of currently employed staff

6 Every item borrowed from The Library must be returned by the date due The penalty for keepmg any item beyond the specified time 1s 50 cents a day

7 Items borrowed personally from The Library must be returned to The Library, or the branch from which they were borrowed by hand The penalty for return by any other means (e g by post) will be 50 cents a vo1ume

8 For each item borrowed a loan trans action must be recorded by Library staff No item may in any circumstances be taken out of The Library until a loan record has been made for it Any infringement of this clause renders the borrower liable to a fine not exceeding $20 a volume

9 A reader must present a University Student Card or Library Card on each occasion when borrowing from The Library

10 Notwithstanding the conditions of loan In operation at any time under clause 6 of the Rules the Un1vers1ty L1branan may recall an item at any time and thereupon the item shall be returned w1th1n three workmg days of the date of the notice The penalty for keepmg any such item beyond the specified tzme IS 50 cents a day

11 All items on loan from The Library shall be returned on a date to be fixed each year by the University Librarian for the annual check The Library shall be closed for borrowmg durmg the period needed to complete the annual check

155

Rules Applicable to Staff and Students

12 Borrowers of items shall be held responsible for any loss, 1n1ury muttlat1on or disfigurement by wnbng or other marks and shall be reqmred to pay the full cost of replacing or repa1nng such items

13 No book or penod1cal shall be borrowed until It has been m The Library at least seven days after being catalogued

14 Except as provided in clause 3, books and penod1cals rnay be borrowed until fifteen minutes before closing time

15 Notw1thstandmg anythmg m the above, the Un1vers1ty L1brar1an shall have d1scretion to issue any material from The Library for special purposes for such periods of time and under such condthons as he shall determine

Computer Fac1hty Rules

I Definitions

1 A computer fac1hty includes terminals, computers, word processors and other ancillary equipment or software owned or operated by the Flmders Umvers1ty of South Australia (the Umvers1ty)

2 (a) A Responsible Officer 1s a person appomted to be m charge of a computer fac11rty

(b) A Responsible Officer may delegate to any person all or any of his or her powers and duties (except this power of delegat10n)

(c) To the extent of the powers and duties so delegated the delegate shall be deemed to be a Responsible Officer for the purposes of these rules

(d) Such a delegat10n shall not derogate from the power of the Responsible Officer to act in any matter under these rules

II Cond1t1ons for Use of a Computer Fac1hty

3 (a) It 1s a basic cond1t10n of use of a computer fac11Ity by any person that the user shall mdemmfy and keep 1ndemn1f1ed the Un1vers1ty against all hab1hty and all costs claims,

156

demands, proceedings actions, suits and expenses whatsoever ans1ng either directly or 1nd1rectly as a consequence of or by virtue of, the use of that computer fac1hty by that person

(b) A person by usmg a computer fac1hty shall be conclus1vely deemed to have accepted this habihty

4 The Umvers1ty shall not be hable for any erroneous 1nformat1on supplied 1n or by a computer fac11Ity or anythmg that may be done or suffered 1n relrance upon such 1nformatton or ans1ng from it 1nclud1ng any costs, claims and demands that may be incurred

5 (a) A person shall not process or provide for processing material which 1s subiect to copynght or the subiect of a patent or prov1s1onal patent or an apphcahon for a patent or the processing or use of which 1nfnnges upon the nghts of any person (which term includes a body corporate)

(b) This rule does not apply where the copyright, patent or other relevant nght 1s held by the user, or 1s held by the Un1vers1ty and the material is used with the express consent of a Responsible Officer

6 The user of a computer facility shall observe (1n add1t1on to these rules) such local rules as may from time to time be in force and displayed In or 1n the v1c1n1ty of the computer fac1hty The display of a document purporting to be, or to contain local rules in or In the v1cin1ty of, a computer fac1hty shall be suffic1ent evidence that such local rules are vahd and in force at the relevant time unless the contrary IS proved

7 In, or In relation to the use of a computer fac1hty the user shall not (a) Fail to conform to instructions given

by the Responsible Officer relevant to the operation of the computer fac1hty, mcludmg (but not necessanly hm1ted to) (1) Instruct10ns with regard to

logging documenting or other

wise contiolhng the use of equipment or software

(11) lnstruct10ns for the mamte nance of safe, clean and tidy working conditions

(b) Operate or use any item of equipment or software unless authorised to do so

(c) Change or attempt to change, copy, or 1n any other way interfere with, software data or files which have been developed by another person unless authorised to do so by the Responsible Officer

(d) Change or attempt to change or m any other way interfere with any item of equipment or system soft ware, unless authonsed to do so by the Responsible Officer

(e) Remove from the computer facility materials supplted or produced 1n it other than matenals supplied or produced for the users sole benefit, unless permitted to do so by the Responsible Officer upon pro duct10n of an order signed by the person entitled to those matenals requesting their delivery to the person seeking to remove them

(f) Without the written approval of the Responsible Officer divulge to any other person the password associated with the users identity in the records of the computer fac11Ity, or a password entrusted to the user in the course of the user's duty

(g) Fail to report to the Responsible Officer a loss of confident1ahty of any password 1mmed1ately upon the user becoming aware of it

(h) Without the written approval of the Responsible Officer use any password other than the password associated with the users own idenllty m the records of the computer fac1hty entrusted to him or her 1n the course of his or her duty

Computer Faczlzty Rules

(i) Fail to log out when leavmg a terminal where there is no intention on the part of the user to return to it or where there 1s reasonable hkehhood that the terminal may be used by others before the user does return

(J) Fail to report to the Responsible Officer immediately upon becoming aware of it that unauthonsed access has been gained or attempted, to the computer facility or that any attempt has been made to interfere with the system software

(k) Enter, or remain 1n, areas designated as restricted areas, unless permitted by the Responsible Officer to do so

(l) Reserve or attempt to reserve, any equipment or fac1hty (1nclud1ng drsk allocation or desk or bench space) unless penmtted by the Responsible Officer to do so

(m) Act In any other manner which might be detrimental or pre1ud1c1al to good order 1n the computer fac1hty, or to the safety or security of the computer fac11rty its equipment or materials, or persons using the same

III Powers of Responsible Officer

8 Notw1thstand1ng anything contained 1n, or imphed by these rules, a Responsible Officer may in circumstances which 1n the opm10n of the Responsible Officer warrant such action (a) Determme local rules (not

mconsistent with these rules) for the use of a particular computer fac1hty, such rules to be displayed m that computer facility and by virtue of such display to have the same force as these rules

(b) Close any computer facility or any part of it

(c) Withdraw or remove from use any equipment or material, or dis continue any service, or any computer facility

9 A Responsible Officer may (a) (i) Require any person to provide

satisfactory evidence of his or

157

Rules Applicable to Staff and Students

her identity before permitting that person to use a computer fac1hty

(11) Recover from any person matenal or property belongmg to or which has been entrusted to a computer fac1hty

(111) Order any person to leave any part of the premises of a computer fac1hty

(b) A person shall not fail to comply with any requirement or order of a responsible officer under this rule, or fail to dehver to the Responsible Officer on demand any material or property requested by the Responsible Officer pursuant to paragraph (a)(n)

IV Power to Exclude Persons Contravening Rules

10 (a) If a person acts m any manner contrary to these rules, or contrary to any local rules for the time being 1n force, the Responsible Officer may exclude that person either tempo ranly or permanently from all or any of the computer fac1h!Ies of the Un1vers1ty1 and may withdraw other related pr1v1leges from that person A person so excluded for a period exceeding one week may appeal against the exclusion to the Vice Chancellor who shall appomt an umpire to hear and determine the appeal in a summary manner The decision of the umpire shall be final Pending such decision, the exclusion shall stand

158

(b) Notw1thstandmg paragraph (a) of thrs rule, where the person excluded is an enrolled student the Responsible Officer shall not exer crse the powers of exclusion and withdrawal of privileges pursuant to that paragraph without first as soon as practicable, consulting with the Dean of the student s School, or, 1n the absence of the Dean, with an appropriate senior member of the academic staff of the School as to the effect of the proposed exclus10n on work which has been set in that

student's course or courses However, the Responsible Officer may suspend the student's nght of access to any computer fac1hty and its privileges pending such consultat1on 1 and after such consultation if exclusion 1s determmed shall notify the Dean of the exclusion and withdrawal of privileges determined, and of the reasons for the same Any penod of suspension shall be taken into account 1n calculating the period of any exclusion

V Liab1hty for Damage

11 Where a person acts in any manner contrary to these rules or deliberately misuses any computer fac11Ity so as to cause loss of, or damage to that fac1hty, that person shall be hable to reimburse the Un1vers1ty for the cost of replacing the loss or repairing the damage and any further expense incurred as a result thereof Use of a computer facility is conclusive evidence that such habihty has been accepted by the user

VI General

12 Nothmg m these rules or m anythmg done under these rules affects the operation of any of the by laws statutes and regulations of the Un1vers1ty In particular Statute 6 4 Mamtenance of Order applies to any contravention of these rules by a user (bemg a student of the Un1vers1ty) amounting to misconduct as defined therein notw1thstand1ng any exclusion or suspension of the user under the prov1s1ons of Rule 10

General Rules Applicable to Students

1 The attention of all students 1s drawn to the By laws made under The Flmders Umvers1ty of South Australia Act and to Statute 6 4 Mamtenance of Order, which are published m the Umvers1ty Calendar

2 Any member of the academic staff may d1sm1ss any student from his class for any cause he shall deem suff1c1ent, or he may

report any breach of d1sc1plme to the appropriate authority referred to m Statute 6 4

3 The fees paid by any student excluded from classes for d1sc1phnary reasons shall not be refunded to him unless the Council shall otherwise determine

4 The possession of firearms fireworks, home-made explosives or explosive material of any kmd on the Umvers1ty grounds or m any Umvemty bmlding 1s forbidden

5 Each School shall have power to make its own further rules about the use of its fac1ht1es All students using those fac1hhes will be bound by such rules

Laboratory Rules Applicable to Students

1 For students taking regular courses 1nvolv1ng laboratory work an appropriate laboratory will be open at such hours as shall be considered necessary by a nominated staff member of the d1sc1pline concerned Persons engaged in advanced work or ong1nal research may work at such additional times as the supervisor may arrange

2 The fac1hhes of a laboratory may also be made available for or1g1nal research carried on by students or graduates not proceeding to a degree in the Umvers1ty at such times and under such cond1hons as the Dean of the School may determine, the fee for use of a laboratory and its fac1hbes 1 and the charges for matenals, to be determined 1n each case

3 All preparahons and equipment made from matenals supplied by the Umvers1ty shall remam the property of the Un1vers1ty

4 No experiments of a dangerous nature may be performed without the express sanction of the supervisor concerned

5 Any accident must be reported at once to the person currently in charge of the laboratory

6 The Dean of a School may impose a fine not exceedmg $10 for any breach of

General Rules and Laboratory Rules

disc1phne 1 misconduct, misuse of appa ratus or reagents, or waste of gas, water and eiectnc1ty, or he may report any misconduct or offence on the part of a student to the appropriate authority referred to m Statute 6 4 If he imposes a fine, the Dean shall report m writmg to the Director of Administration and Registrar the amount of such fine, and the reason for 11 and the fme shall be paid to the Director of Admm1strat10n and Registrar w1thm seven days of the hme of its impos1hon

159

Principal Dates

1991 Academic Year

for the University generally

First Semester - Orientation Week begins

Classes begin

Mid-semester Break

Classes end

':'Mid-year Examinations

Mid-year Break

AVCC Common Vacation Week begins

Second Semester - Classes begin

Mid-semester Break

AVCC Common Vacation Week begins

Classes end

*End-of-year Examinations

25 FEBRUARY

4 MARCH

22 APRIL-3 MAY

4 JUNE

24 JUNE-5 JULY

24 JUNE-26 JULY

8 JULY

29 JULY

23 SEPTEMBER-4 OCTOBER

30 SEPTEMBER

8 NOVEMBER

18-29 NOVEMBER

':'It is sometimes necessary for examinations to extend beyond these dates.

For Diploma in Education, Bachelor of Education and Bachelor of Education (Physical Education), dates will be available from the Education School Office.

For the School of Medicine

First Year Medicine - as for the University generally

Second and Third Year First Semester (14 weeks)

Second Semester (14 weeks)

160

Begins

Mid-semester Break

Ends

Mid-year Examinations

Begins

Mid-semester Break

Ends

End-of-year Examinations

4 MARCH

22-26 APRIL

14 JUNE

24 JUNE-5 JULY

29 JULY

23-27 SEPTEMBER

8 NOVEMBER

18-29 NOVEMBER

Fourth Year

Term 1 (12 weeks) Begins 11 FEBRUARY

Ends 3 MAY

Term 2 (12 weeks) Begins 21 MAY

Ends 9 AUGUST

Term 3 (12 weeks) Begins 26 AUGUST

Ends 15 NOVEMBER

Exammattons NOVEMBER 25 29

Fifth Year

Term 1 (7 weeks) Begms 4 FEBRUARY

Ends 22 MARCH

Tern! 2 (7 weeks) Begins 2 APRIL

Ends 17 MAY

Term3 (7 weeks) Begms 27 MAY

Ends 12 JULY

Term 4 (7 weeks) Begms 22 JULY

Ends 6 SEPTEMBER

Terms (7 weeks) Begins 16 SEPTEMBER

Ends 1 NOVEMBER

Examinations NOVEMBER 11 22

Sixth Year

Term 1 (6 weeks) Begms 2 JANUARY

Ends 8 FEBRUARY

Term2 Begms 11 FEBRUARY

Ends 22 MARCH

Term 3 Begins 25 MARCH

Ends 3 MAY

Term4 Begins 6MAY

Ends 14 JUNE Terms Begins 17 JUNE

Ends 26 JULY

Term 6 Begins 29 JULY

Ends 6 SEPTEMBER

Term 7 Begins 9 SEPTEMBER

Ends 18 OCTOBER

Term 8 Begms 21 OCTOBER

Ends 29 NOVEMBER

For the Master of Nutrztzon and Dietetics and Master of Nutrztzonal Science

First Semester (16 weeks) Begms

Mid semester Break Ends

Mid year Exam1nations

4MARCH

29 APRIL 3 MAY

28JUNE

1 5 JULY

161

Principal Dates

Second Semester (16 weeks) 1

Begins 29 JULY

Mid semester Break

Ends

End of year Examinations

23 27 SEPTEMBER

22 NOVEMBER

25 29 NOVEMBER

For the Master of Science and Diploma m Primary Health Care and for the Master of Science (Health Service Management)

First Semester

Second Semester

January 1991

(13 weeks) Begins 4 MARCH

Mid semester Break 22 APRIL 3 MAY

Ends 14 JUNE

Mid year Examinations 24 JUNE 5 JULY

(13 weeks) Begins 29 JULY

Mid semester Break 23 4 OCTOBER

Ends 8 NOVEMBER

End of year Exam1natlons 18 29 NOVEMBER

University meetings, Publzc Holidays and other principal events

1 TUESDAY Public Holiday - New Year's Day

2 WEDNESDAY

3 THURSDAY

4 FRIDAY

7 MONDAY

8 TUESDAY

9 WEDNESDAY

10 THURSDAY

11 FRIDAY

14 MONDAY

15 TUESDAY Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1nabon Board Social Sciences 1 00 pm

16 WEDNESDAY Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1natton Board, Humanities 2 00 pm

Board of the School of B10log1cal Sciences 3 00 p m

17 THURSDAY Board of the School of Earth Sc1ences/Exammat10n Board 2 00 pm

Standmg Committee Med1cme 5 15 p m

18 FRIDAY Science L1a1son Committee 10 00 am

162

Przncipal Dates

21 MONDAY

22 TuESDAY

Standmg Committee/Exammat10n Board Theology 2 30 p m

23 WEDNESDAY Board of the School of Humamties 2 00 pm

24 THURSDAY Board of the School of Educat10n 2 00 p m

25 FRIDAY

28 MONDAY Public Holiday- Austraha Day

29 TuESDAY Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1natlon Board Social Sciences 1 00 pm

30 WEDNESDAY Higher Degrees Committee Humamties 2 00 pm

31 THURSDAY Standmg Committee/Exammat10n Board, Educat10n 9 15 am

February 1991

1 FRIDAY Board of the Centre for Muticultural Studies 2 15 pm

4 MONDAY

5 TuESDAY Standmg Committee/Exammat10n Board, Social Sciences 1 00 pm

Higher Degrees Committee Med1c1ne 5 15 p m

Acadenuc Programmes Committee 5 15 p m

6 WEDNESDAY Higher Degrees Comm1ttee, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Standing Committee Humanities 2 00 p m

7 THURSDAY Standmg Committee, Medicme 5 15 p m

8 FRIDAY

11 MONDAY Standmg Committee/Exammallon Board, Theology 2 30 p m

12 TUESDAY

13 WEDNESDAY Board of the School of Humamlles 2 00 p m

14 THURSDAY

15 FRIDAY Science L1a1s1on Committee 10 00 a m

18 MONDAY

19 TUESDAY

20 WEDNESDAY Board of the School of B10logical Sciences 3 00 p m

21 THURSDAY Board of the School of Educat10n 9 15 a m

Standmg Committee, Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

22 FRIDAY Council 2 30 p m

25 MONDAY

26 TuESDAY Standmg Committee/Exammat10n Board, Social Sciences 1 00 pm

27 WEDNESDAY Higher Degrees Comm1ttes Humanities 2 00 pm

28 THURSDAY Board of Research 2 15 p m

Board of the School of Medicme 5 15 p m

29 FRIDAY

163

Prznczpal Dates

March 1991

1 FRIDAY

4 MONDAY

5 TUESDAY

6 WEDNESDAY

7 THURSDAY

8 FRIDAY

11 MONDAY

12 TUESDAY

13 WEDNESDAY

14 THURSDAY

15 FRIDAY

18 MONDAY

19 TUESDAY

20 WEDNESDAY

21 THURSDAY

22 FRIDAY

25 MONDAY

26 TUESDAY

27 WEDNESDAY

28 THURSDAY

29 FRIDAY

Aprzl 1991

1 MONDAY

2 TUESDAY

164

Resources Committee 1 30 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Med1c1ne 5 15 p m

Academic Programmes Committee 5 15 pm (Opt10nal)

Higher Degrees Committee, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Standmg Committee Humanities 2 00 pm

Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1nation Board, Education 9 15 a m

Standmg Committee, Medicme 5 15 p m

Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1natton Board, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Board of the School of Humanities 2 00 pm

Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 00 p m

Welfare Services Committee 8 00 am

Plannmg Committee 9 00 a m

Board of Studies/Standmg Committee/Exammat10n Board Theology 2 30 p m

Matnculation Board 9 15 a m

Board of the School of Informat10n Science and Technology 2 00 p m

Board of the School of B10logical Sciences 3 00 p m

Standing Committee Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

Board of the School of Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Medicme 5 15 p m

Council 2 30 p m

Board of the School of Educat10n 9 15 a m

Board of Research 2 15 p m (Opt10nal)

Publzc Holiday - Good Fnday

Publzc Holzday - Easter Monday

Academic Programmes Committee 5 15 pm

Higher Degrees Committee Medicme 5 15 p m

Pnnc1pal Dates

3 WEDNESDAY Higher Degrees Corrurnttee, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Humam!Jes 2 00 p m

4 THURSDAY

5 FRIDAY

8 MONDAY

9 TUESDAY

10 WEDNESDAY

11 THURSDAY

12 FRIDAY

15 MONDAY

16 TUESDAY

17 WEDNESDAY

18 THURSDAY

19 FRIDAY

22 MONDAY

23 TUESDAY

24 WEDNESDAY

25 THURSDAY

26 FRIDAY

29 MONDAY

30 TUESDAY

May 1991

1 WEDNESDAY

2 THURSDAY

3 FRIDAY

6 MONDAY

7 TUESDAY

Standmg Comm1ttee/Exammat10n Board Educat10n 9 15 a m

Board of the Centre for Mul!Jcultural Studies 2 15 p m

Standmg Comm1ttee/Examma!Jon Board, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Standing Committee, Humanities 2 00 p m

Standmg Committee, Med1cme 5 15 p m

Conferrmg of Degrees, Adelaide Festival Theatre 10 30 a m and300pm

Board of the School of Humamt1es 2 00 pm

Board of the School of B1olog1cal Sciences 3 00 p m

Board of the School of Educat10n 9 15 a m

Standmg Committee, Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

Board of the School of Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Med1cme 5 15 p m

Public Holiday - Anzac Day

Council 2 30 p rh

Higher Degrees Committee, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Humam!Jes 2 00 p m

Standmg Comm1ttee/Examma!Jon Board, Educa!Jon 9 15 a m

Board of Research 2 15 p m (Op!Jonal)

Resources Committee 1 00 p m

Academic Programmes Committee 5 15 p m (Opt10nal)

Higher Degrees Comm1ttee, Medicme 5 15 p m

8 WEDNESDAY Standmg Committee Humamties 2 00 p m

165

Principal Dates

9 THURSDAY

10 FRIDAY

13 MONDAY

14 TuESDAY

15 WEDNESDAY

16 THURSDAY

17 FRIDAY

20 MONDAY

21 TuESDAY

22 WEDNESDAY

23 THURSDAY

24 FRIDAY

27 MONDAY

28 TuESDAY

29 WEDNESDAY

30 THURSDAY

31 FRIDAY

June 1991

3 MONDAY

4 TUESDAY

Welfare Services Committee 8 00 a m

Planning Committee 9 00 a m

Standmg Committee Medicme 5 15 p m

Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1natlon Board Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Humanz!tes 2 00 pm

Board of the School of B10log1cal Sciences 3 00 p m

Public Holiday-Adelaide Cup Day

Matriculation Board 9 15 a m

Board of the School of Information Science and Technology 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Educat10n 9 15 am

Standmg Committee, Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

Board of the School of Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Med1cme 5 15 p m

Council 2 30 p m

Board of Studies m Theology 2 30 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Humanities 2 00 p m

Board of Research 2 15 p m

Science L1a1son Committee 10 00 am

Higher Degrees Committee, Med1cme 5 15 p m

Academic Programmes Committee 5 15 p m

5 WEDNESDAY Higher Degrees Committee, Social Sciences 1 00 pm

Standing Committee, Humanities 2 00 p m

6 THURSDAY Plannmg Committee 9 00 am

7 FRIDAY

10 MONDAY

11 TuESDAY

12 WEDNESDAY

166

Standmg Comm1ttee/Exammat10n Board Educat10n 9 15 p m

Board of the Centre for Multicultural Studies 2 15 p m

Publzc Holiday- Queens Birthday

Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1nation Board, Soc1al Sciences 1 00 p m

Board of the School of Humanzttes 2 00 p m

13 THURSDAY

14 FRIDAY

17 MONDAY

18 TUESDAY

19 WEDNESDAY

20 THURSDAY

21 FRIDAY

24 MONDAY

25 TUESDAY

26 WEDNESDAY

27 THURSDAY

28 FRIDAY

July 1991

1 MONDAY

Welfare Services Committee 8 00 am

Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of B10logical Sciences 3 00 p m

Standmg Committee Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

Board of the School of Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Educatwn 9 15 a m

Board of Research 2 15 p m (Opt10nal)

Board of the School of Med1cme 5 15 p m

Council 2 30 (Opt10nal)

2 TUESDAY Higher Degrees Committee Med1c1ne 5 15 p m

Academic Programmes Committee 5 15 p m (Opt10nal)

3 WEDNESDAY Higher Degrees Committee, Social Sciences 1 00 pm

Higher Degrees Committee Humamt1es 2 00 p m

Princzpal Dates

4 THURSDAY Standmg Committee/Exammatwn Board Educa!Jon 9 15 am

5 FRIDAY

8 MONDAY

9 TUESDAY Resources Committee 1 00 p m

10 WEDNESDAY Standing Committee, H uman1tles 2 00 p m

11 THURSDAY Planning Committee 9 00 a m

Standing Committee Med1c1ne 5 15 p m

12 FRIDAY

15 MONDAY Board of Studies/Standmg Comm1ttee/Exammat10n Board Theology 2 30 p m

16 TUESDAY

17 WEDNESDAY Board of the School of Humam!Jes 2 00 p m

18 THURSDAY

19 FRIDAY

Board of the School of PhyS1cal Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of B10logical Sciencs 3 00 p m

167

Pnnczpal Dates

22 MONDAY

23 TUESDAY

24 WEDNESDAY

25 THURSDAY

26 FRIDAY

29 MONDAY

30 TuESDAY

31 WEDNESDAY

August 1991

1 THURSDAY

2 FRIDAY

5 MONDAY

6 TuESDAY

7 WEDNESDAY

8 THURSDAY

9 FRIDAY

12 MONDAY

13 TuESDAY

14 WEDNESDAY

15 THURSDAY

16 FRIDAY

19 MONDAY

20 TuESDAY

Matnculat10n Board 9 15 a m

Board of the School of Informat10n Science and Technology 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Educat10n 9 15 a m

Standmg Committee, Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

Board of the School of Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Medicme 5 15 p m Council 2 30 p m

Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1natlon Board, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Humanities 2 00 pm

Standing Committee/Exammat10n Board, Educat10n 9 15 a m

Board of Research 2 15 p m

Board of the Centre for Muticultural Studies 2 15 p m

Examination Board, Information Science and Technology 3 00 p m

Academic Programmes Committee 5 15 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Standing Committee, Humanities 2 00 p m

Welfare Services Committee 8 00 am

Standing Committee, Medicine 5 15 p m

Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Humam!les 2 00 p m

21 WEDNESDAY Board of the School of B10logical Sciences 3 00 pm

22 THURSDAY Board of the School of Educat10n 9 15 am

Standmg Committee, Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

Board of the School of Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

23 FRIDAY Council 2 30 p m

26 MONDAY

168

27 TuESDAY

28 WEDNESDAY

29 THURSDAY

30 FRIDAY

September 1991

2 MONDAY

3 TUESDAY

4 WEDNESDAY

5 THURSDAY

6 FRIDAY

9 MONDAY

10 TUESDAY

11 WEDNESDAY

12 THURSDAY

13 FRIDAY

16 MONDAY

17 TuESDAY

18 WEDNESDAY

19 THURSDAY

20 FRIDAY

23 MONDAY

24 TUESDAY

25 WEDNESDAY

26 THURSDAY

27 FRIDAY

30 MONDAY

October 1991

1 TuESDAY

Prznczpal Dates

Higher Degrees Committee, Humanities 2 00 pm

Board of Research 2 15 p m (Opt10nal)

Higher Degrees Committee Medicme 5 15 p m

Academic Programmes Committee 5 15 pm (Opt10nal)

Higher Degrees Committee, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Standing Committee, Humanities 2 00 p m

Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1nahon Board, Education 9 15 a m

Resources Committee 1 00 p m

Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1nahon Board, Soc1al Sciences 1 00 p m

Board of the School of Humamties 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 00 p m

Planning Committee 9 00 a m

Standmg Committee Medicme 5 15 p m

Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of Studies m Theology 2 30 p m

Board of the School of Information Science and Technology 2 00 p m

Board of the School of B10logical Sciences 3 00 p m

Standmg Committee Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

Board of the School of Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Medicme 5 15 p m

Matnculat10n Board 9 15 a m

Board of the School of Educat10n 9 15 a m

Council 2 30 p m

Academic Programmes Committee, 5 15 p m

169

Principal Dates

2 WEDNJ:SDAY

3 THURSDAY

4 FRIDAY

7 MONDAY

8 TUESDAY

9 WEDNESDAY

10 THURSDAY 11 FRIDAY

14 MONDAY

15 TuESDAY

16 WEDNESDAY

17 THURSDAY

18 FRIDAY

21 MONDAY

22 TuESDAY

23 WEDNESDAY

24 THURSDAY

25 FRIDAY

28 MONDAY

29 TuESDAY

30 WEDNESDAY

31 THURSDAY

November 1991

1 FRIDAY

4 MONDAY 5 TuESDAY

170

Higher Degrees Committee Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Humanities 2 00 pm

Standing Comm1ttee/Exarn1natlon Board, Education 9 15 a m

Board of Research 2 15 p m (Opt10nal)

Board of the Centre for Multicultural Studies 2 15 p m

'itand1ng Comm1ttee/Exam1nat1on Board, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Medicme 5 15 p m

Standmg Committee Humamties 2 00 p m

Standmg Committee Medicme 5 15 p m

Public Holiday- Labour Day

Board of the School of Humamties 2 00 p m

Board of the School of B10logical Sciences 3 00 p m

Board of the School of Educahon 9 15 a m

Standing Committee Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

Board of the School of Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Medicme 5 15 p m

Council 2 30 p m

Higher Degrees Committee Human1t1es 2 00 p m

Board of Research 2 15 p m

Resources Committee 1 00 p m

Higher Degrees Committee Medicme 5 15 p m

Academic Programmes Committee 5 15 pm (Opt10nal)

6 WEDNESDAY

7 THURSDAY

8 FRIDAY

11 MONDAY

12 TuESDAY

13 WEDNESDAY

14 THURSDAY

15 FRIDAY

18 MONDAY

19 TuESDAY

20 WEDNESDAY

21 THURSDAY

22 FRIDAY

25 MONDAY

26 TuESDAY

27 WEDNESDAY

28 THURSDAY

29 FRIDAY

December 1991

2 MONDAY

3 TuESDAY

4 WEDNESDAY

5 THURSDAY

6 FRIDAY

9 MONDAY

10 TuESDAY

11 WEDNESDAY

Principal Dates

Higher Degrees Committee, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Standing Committee, Humanities 2 00 p m

Standing Committee/Examination Board Education 9 15 a m

Standing Committee, Medicine 5 15 p m

Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

Standing Comm1ttee/Examinat1on Board, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Board of the School of Informal!on Science and Technology 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Humamt1es 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 00 p m

Welfare Services Committee 8 00 a m

Board of Studies m Theology 2 30 p m

Matnculat10n Board 9 15 a m

Academic Programmes Committee 5 15 p m

Board of the School of B10log1cal Sciences 3 00 p m

Board of the School of Educat10n 9 15 a m

Standmg Committee Earth Sciences 1 30 p m

Board of the School of Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

Counc!l 2 30 p m

Resources Committee 1 00 p m

Board of Research 2 15 p m

Board of the School of Med1cme 5 15 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Humanities 2 00 pm

Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1nation Board Education 9 15 a m

Board of the Centre for Mull!cultural Studies 2 15 pm

Standing Comm1ttee/Exam1nat1on Board Earth Sciences 2 00 p m

Higher Degrees Committee, Social Sciences 1 00 p m

Standmg Comm1ttee/Exammat10n Board Humaml!es 2 00 pm

171

Prznczpal Dates

12 THURSDAY

13 FRIDAY

16 MONDAY

17 TUESDAY

18 WEDNESDAY

19 THURSDAY

172

Standmg Comm1ttee/Exammat10n Board, Theology 2 30 p m

Council 2 30 p m

Science L1a1son Committee 10 00 am

Board of Research 2 15 p m

Enrolment of Students

Admzsszon

The Un1vers1ty offers bachelors degrees 1n Arts, Commerce Econom1cs, Econom1cs (Account1ng)i Education Med1c1ne Science and Theology and students must apply for adm1ss1on on the prescribed form, copies of which are available from the South Austrahan Tertrnry Adm1ss10ns Centre (SATAC) 230 North Terrace Adelaide 5000 (Students who wish to proceed to a bachelor's degree in Education should apply 1n the first instance for adm1ss10n to a bachelor s degree m Arts Econom1cs or Science ) Apphcat1on for adm1ss10n must be lodged with the South Australian Tertiary Adm1ss1ons Centre

Adnusszon of Overseas students

Students should apply directly to the Un1vers1ty There ts no spec1f1ed closing date, but apphcants would be well advised to apply by 30 November of the year precedmg the year of intended enrolment

Apphcat10n forms and details of courses and fees may be obtamed from The Internat10nal Student Offzce, The Flmders Umvers1ty of South Austraha, Bedford Park South Austraha 5042

Amendments to Enrolment and Wzthdrawal

Students who wish to vary their enrolment must complete an Apphcat10n to Change Topic Details form obtamable from the Student Records Office m the Registry Students should 1mmed1ately no!tfy the Student Records Offzce of any change of address A student wtShmg to withdraw from the Un1vers1ty must inform the Student Records Offzce m wntmg It zs not suffzc1ent that a student merely tell a member of the staff that they mtend to withdraw from a topic

A student who wishes to withdraw should be fam1har with the provIS1ons of the Statutes and Schedules relatmg to enrolment and the various courses available Withdrawals from topics after certam dates will be recorded as failures

Academic Progress

Statute 7 1 Bachelors' Degrees and Diplomas and Other Academic Awards and a number of the Schedules of Statute 7 1 provide that where a student's academic progress 1s unsatisfactory the student may be asked to show cause why he or she should not be precluded from further enrolment m the course School or Umverstty as appropriate

Students Faczlzty zn English

It 1s the pohcy of the Umvers1ty that students who enrol should have sufficient fac1hty m English to enable them to cope with their studies without undue difficulty Students from overseas are required to pass an Enghsh test orgamsed by the Overseas Student Office but students who are already Austrahan residents are not required to undertake such a test It 1s sometimes the case that students are enrolled and subsequently have d1ffzculty with their course because of their poor prof1c1ency in English In such cases the Un1vers1ty reserves the nght to ask the student concerned to sit a test m Enghsh devtsed by the Umvers1ty and where the student 1s unable to satisfy the requirements of that test, the student1s enrolment may be cancelled

Examznatzon and assessment matters

Examination Periods Examinations are conducted 1n June and November, and may be final or end of semester exam1natlons 1 depending on the dura!ton of the topic It should be noted that occas10nally 11 might be necessary to hold examinations at times outside of the normal hours Such !tmes could mclude Saturday mornings, or evenings, although use of evening times would be rare Formal examinations are generally held m the Sports Centre and pnor to the examinations a timetable will be posted on notice boards The main notice board is at the front of the Registry bmldmg

Rules of Conduct 1n Examinations Students should fam1hanse themselves with

173

Enrolment of Students

the rules of conduct at examinations as set out m Statute 6 5 m Volume 2 of the Calendar

Examinations Timetable A prov1s1onal exam1nat1on timetable will be posted on the Registry notice board about four weeks before exam1nattons begin If there 1s a clash in the prov1s1onal exam1nahon llmetable students should inform the Exam1nat1on Officer in the Registry as soon as possible About two weeks before the exam1nahons the final timetable will be posted on the notice board, and it 1s the students' respons1b1hty to check their personal exammat10n llmetable A supplementary exammat10n will NOT be granted on the grounds that a candidate made an error in readmg the exammat10n l!metable The timetable should be checked from the notice board and NOT by telephone Umversity staff will not be held responsible for allegedly incorrect 1nformahon conveyed by telephone

Apphcations for Special Examinations If students are prevented from sitting for an exam1nation, or believe that their performance in a exam1natlon was seriously 1mpa1red, by illness or other ctrcumstances, they should inform the Director of Administration and Registrar in writing attaching the appropriate

174

documentary evidence to their letter However, 1t 1s preferable to lodge the appropriate apphcahon form for special examinations available from the Student Records Office Part I of the form should be completed and returned to the Registry not more than three working days after the date of the examination concerned, and Part II should be forwarded by the applicants doctor Where a student 1s unable to obtain the appropriate form from the Registry, a letter to the Director of Adm1n1stration and Registrar will be suff1c1ent 1n some circumstances and in some Schools Some Schools, however require the lodgement of the correct Un1vers1ty form which provides the Un1vers1ty with more information than the usual medical cert1f1cate Students should note that appl!cat10ns forms which are mcompletely filled m, are lodged outside the specified three workmg days or do not contain enough information might result in the student's apphcahon being unsuccessful

Deadhnes for Lodgement of Assignments Some Schools have rules relating to assessment and assignment deadlines and these will be made known m class or m the School handbooks

Students are expected to procure the prescribed edition of all set text-books. Where no edition is prescribed they should procure the latest edition. Those books indicated by a asterisk (*) are available in paperback or student editions.

Students are advised to check against the Timetable. Changes may have been made to topic availability since going to press.

175

School of Biological Sciences

Students are expected to procure the prescribed edition of all set books. Where no edition is prescribed they should procure the latest edition. Those books indicated by an asterisk (*) are available in paperback or student editions.

The name of the staff member primarily responsible for a topic, and to whom enquiries about the topic should be directed, is shown in italics below the topic title.

86100 BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE I Dr C.M. Bull

Units: 9 Level: First year Duration: Full year Class Contact: 3 lectures and 3 hours practical work per week Pre-requisite: A knowledge of Chemistry or Physics to Matriculation level

A topic comprising lectures and practicals in which the principles unifying modern biology are introduced. Emphasis is placed on the similarities in the life processes of plants and animals at the various levels of biological organisation (molecular, cellular, whole organism, population). This topic is designed for B.Sc. students and assumes a knowledge of Chemistry or Physics to Matriculation level. Students who do not fulfil this requirement should consult the topic co-ordinator.

Set book Keeton, W.T. and Gould, J.L. Biological

science, 4th ed. (Norton, 1986)

Reference book Raven, P.H. and Johnson, G.B. Biology

(Times Mirror/Mosby, 1986)

References are listed in the Biological Science I manual.

86110 PERSPECTIVES IN BIOLOGY Dr K.E. Dixon

Units: 12 Level: First year Duration: Full year Class Contact: 3 lectures, 3 hours laboratory work and one tutorial per week

This topic is suitable for students who have completed Matriculation Biology and also for those who lack any significant background in science, including Biology. It is intended to serve students who wish, in their later years, to study non-science subjects and also students who wish to proceed to further studies in Biology. Completion of this topic therefore leads to a number of second and third year Biology subjects as part of a degree of Bachelor of Arts in Biology and of some other degrees. The course is concerned with providing a broad introduction to biological systems, levels and organisms.

Set book Wessells, N.K. and Hopson, J.L. Biology

(Random House, 1988)

Reference books Alberts, B. and others The molecular biology

of the cell, 2nd ed. (Garland, 1989) Brock, T.D. Biology of microorganisms,

4th ed. (Prentice Hall, 1984) Keeton, W.T. and Gould, J.L. Biological

sciences, 4th ed. (Norton, 1986) Margulis, L. and Schwartz, K.V. Five

kingdoms (Freeman, 1982) Raven, P.H. and Johnson, G.B. Biology

(Times Mirror/Mosby, 1986)

Set books and Text books are required reading on which students may be tested. Students are expected to have their own copies of all books listed as Set books or Text books; multiple copies of these books will not be available in the Library. Preliminary reading is reading which the student is expected to have completed before the commencement of teaching and on which he or she may at any time be tested. Further reading and Recommended reading, where not otherwise specified, indicate reading which the student is expected to do in the course of studying the Set books. Reference books are books which the student will find useful in the course of studying the topics for which they are specified.

176

Rech, R and Moore E Introductzon to psychopharmacology (Raven 1971)

Thompson RF Introductzon to psycho logical psychology (Harper & Row, 1975)

V1llee C A , Solomon, E P and Davis PW Bzology (Saunders, 1985)

86220 EVOLUTION AND HEREDITY Dr R T Wells

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 lectures or tutorials and one 3 hour practical session per week plus 2 field trips Pre requisite A grade of C or better 1n either 86100 B10log1cal Sciences I or 86110 Perspectives in Biology

The aim of the course 1s to provide a comprehensive overview of the mechanisms pnnc1ples and evidence of evolution by natural selection The course is broadly d1v1ded into the followmg areas (1) Concepts of evolut10n - the hIStory and philosophy of evolut10n (11) Mechanisms of evolution - studies of microevolution (genetics) and macro evolution (111) Evidence of evolution -including phylogenies and macromolecules, the fossil record plant and animal evolution, (iv) Reanalysis of the concepts m the hght of the precedmg mcludmg the evolut10n of information carrying systems

Reference books Ayala F j and Kiger, j A Modern genetics

2nd ed (Ben1amm Cummmgs, 1984) Bold, H C , Alexopoulos, C j and Delevoryas,

TD Morphology of plants and fungi, 4th ed (Harper and Row, 1980)

Dobzhansky, T et al Evolutzon (Freeman, 1977)

Faegn, I{ and van der P11I, L The prznczples of pollmatzon ecology, 3rd ed (Pergamon, 1979)

Foster, A S and Gifford, E M Comparative morphology of vascular plants (Freeman, 1974)

Futuyma D j Evolutzonary bwlogy (Smaeur, 1986)

Futuyma D and Slatkm M Coevolutzon (Smauer, 1983)

Gifford, EM and Foster AS Morphology and evolutzon of vascular plants, 3rd ed (Freeman, 1989)

Bzologzcal Sczences

Hiidebrand M Analysis of vertebrate structure 2nd ed (Wiley 1982)

Kaufman, PB Plants, their bzology and importance (S1nauer, 1989)

Kent, G C Comparative anatomy of the vertebrates 6th ed (Mosby, 1987)

Kershaw, DR Animal diversity (Umvers1ty Tutonal Pr, 1983)

Maynard Smith, J Evolutzonary genetics (Oxford 1989)

Raff RA and Kaufman D Embryos, genes and evolutzon (Macmillan 1983)

Russell Hunter, W D A life of invertebrates (Macmillan 1979)

Sober, E , ed Conceptual zssues zn evolutzonary bwlogy, 3rd ed (MIT Pr 1986)

van der Pt]l L Principles of dispersal zn higher plants 3rd ed (Sprmger Verlag 1982)

Weaver RF and Hedrick, PW Genetzcs (Brown, 1989)

86222 BIOLOGICAL EXPERIMENTATION II Dr G C Kirby

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours of lectures/tutonals or practical work per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 86100 Biological Sciences I or 86110 Perspectives 1n B10logy

This topic will mtroduce students to the sequence of achVIhes associated w1th sc1entif1c 1nvest1gahon observation modelhng expenmental design to 1nveshgate alternative hypotheses and stahshcal analysis of data generated from observations and experiments There will be a senes of lectures and tutorials covering simple probability, stat1st1cal comparison of two or more groups by parametnc or non parametnc tests simple correlation and regression analyses, methods of random samplmg and the selectrnn of appropriate control groups in various expenments Practical exercises 1llustratlng the scientific method will be chosen from a range of areas in organ1sm1c and population biology

Reference books Medawar, PB Advice to a young sczent1st

(Harper & Row 1979)

177

School of Bzological Sciences

Parker, R E Introductory stat1stzcs for bzology 2nd ed (Edward Arnold 1987)

Scheller, WC Statistics for the bzological sciences, 2nd ed (Addison Wesley, 1979)

Sokal, RR and Rohlf, F J Introductzon to bzostatistzcs (Freeman 1973)

86223 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY Associate Professor R V Baudznette and Dr K f Sanderson

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours of lectures per week Pre requ1s1tes A grade of C or better 1n either 86100 B10logzcal Sciences I or 86110 Perspecllves m B10logy plus 86235 Intro duct10n to Cell and Molecular B10logy

This topic uses a comparative approach to the study of ammal phys10logy It considers the physical and chem1cal pr1nc1ples which govern gas exchange, temperature regulation, water and solute balance, the processing of 1nformahon, feeding and digestion, movement and 1ntegrahon of function through neuro endocrme control There is a balance of vertebrate and invertebrate material

Set book Eckert, R Randall, D and Augustine, G

Animal physzology 3rd ed (Freeman 1988) or Schmidt Nielsen K Animal physzology

adaptation and environment 4th ed (Cambndge UP 1990)

Reference books Gordon, MS Ammal physzology, 4th ed

(Macmillan 1982) Hamsworth, FR Animal physzology

(Addison Wesley, 1981) McFarland W N et al Vertebrate life 2nd ed

(Macmillan, 1985) Schm1dt-Nrnlsen K Scalzng (Cambndge U P ,

1984)

86224 BASIC METABOLISM Dr LA Burgoyne and Dr f F Wheldrake

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqUIS!tes A grade of C or better m 86100

178

Biological Sciences I (or1n 86110 Perspectives m B10logy plus 86235 Jntroduct10n to Cell and Molecular B10logy) plus a grade of D or better m ezther 74100 Chemistry I or 74101 Introduction to Chemistry

A topic that fam1hanses the student with the main features of intermediary metabohsm through a mixture of lecture seminars and readmg Both the readmg and the lecture material is monitored by a senes of assessable exercises that are given 1n some of the hour slots An exam at the end of the course completes the assessment

Topics - Basic nutrition of monogastrics 1nclud1ng the vitamins Carbohydrate meta bohsm, (glycolys1s gluconeogenesis, pentose phosphate pathway), mtrogen metabohsm (amino acids, purines, pyr1mid1nes N excret1on)i hp1ds (triglycerides sterols, phosphohp1ds, prostraglandms) Special aspects of the above topics will be considered with respect to some specialised tissues

Set book Mathews, C K and Van Holde, KE

Bzochemistry (Ben1amm/Cummmgs Pubhshers, 1990)

Reference books Lehnmger, AL Prznciples of bzochemzstry

(Worth, 1982) Smith, E L et al Principles of bzochemzstry

general aspects, 7th ed (McGraw Hill, 1983)

Smith E L et al Principles of bzochemzstry mammalian bzochemistry 7th ed (McGraw Hill, 1983)

Zubay G Bzochemistry (Addison Wesley, 1983)

86225 BASIC MICROBIOLOGY Dr G f Wigmore

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact A total of 20 hours of lectures and 6 practical classes over 1 semester Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better in either 86100 B10log1cal Sciences I or 86110 Perspectives in Biology

The ob1ect1ve is to enable students to understand sufficient of the basic theoretical aspects of m1crob1ology to appreciate the ways in which microbes functton as hvtng organisms

and their role 1n the biosphere and to master the handlmg of microbes m the laboratory m order to be able to perlorm experiments with them

The lectures will cover the structure, function and genetics ofbactena, viruses and eukaryot1c microbes and their interactions with the eukaryohc world (symbiosis disease and enV!ronmental microb10logy) The pracl!cal work will include the handhng 1solahon and 1dent1ficahon of common bactena with some expenments on anhmicrob1al treatments and media preparation

Set book Brock TD Bwlogy of mzcroorganzsms

5th ed (Prenl!ce Hall 1988)

Reference books Alcamo IE Fundamentals of mzcrobwlogy

(Addison Wesley 1985) Boyd RF General mzcrobzology, 2nd ed

(Times Mirror/Mosby 1988) Burrows W Burrows textbook of

mzcrobzology, 22nd ed (Saunders, 1985) Cano R J and Colome, JS Mzcrobzology

(West Pubhshmg 1986) Goodenough U Genetzcs, 3rd ed (Holt,

Rmehart and Wmston 1984) Rosenberg, E and Cohen I R Mzcrobzal

bzology (Saunders, 1983) Stamer, RY Adelberg, E A and Ingraham,

J L General mzcrobwlogy, 5th ed (Macmillan, 1986)

Stolp, H Mzcrobzal bwlogy (Cambndge UP 1988)

Van Demark P J and Batzmg B L The microbes an zntroductzon to their nature and zmportance (Ben1am1n/Cumm1ngs, 1987)

86226 BEHAVIOUR AND NEUROBIOLOGY Dr K f Sanderson

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact A total of 22 hours of lectures and tutorials plus 12 hours practical work Pre requisite A grade of C or better in ezther 86100 B10logical Sciences I or 86110 Perspectives m B10logy or 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS

This topic will mtroduce the study of

Bzologzcal Sczences

neurob10logy The pracl!cals will mclude an introduction to the anatomy of the brain and to the experimental study of behaviour

Reference books Kandel E R and Schwartz, J H Prznczples of

neural sczence 2nd ed (Arnold 1985) Shepherd GM Neurobzology, 2nd ed

(Oxford U P , 1988)

86227 CELL PHYSIOLOGY Professor A B Hope

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact A total of 20 hours of lectures and 3 three hour practical sessions Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better 1n 86100 B1olog1cal Sciences I (or in 86110 Perspectives m B10logy plus 86235 Introduct10n to Cell Molecular B10logy) plus a grade of D or better m ezther 74100 Chemistry I or 74101 Introduction to Chemistry

This topic will cover the membrane basis of control of solute and water traffic between cells, the basis of energy conservation 1n the hght reactions of photosynthesis energy 1nterconvers1ons 1n respiration and transport nerve and muscle cell excitabihty cell contrachb1hty, neuromuscular Junction and synapses sensory receptors and membrane properties effects of environmental temperature radiations on cell function

Set book Alberts B et al Molecular bzology of the

cell, 2nd ed (Garland, 1989), or Darnell J Lodish H and Ball!more D

Molecular cell bzology, 2nd ed (Freeman 1990)

86228 MOLECULAR BIOLOGY Professor A W Murray

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours of lectures per week Pre reqmsites A grade of C or better m 86100 B1olog1cal Sciences I (or 1n 86110 Perspectives m B10logy plus 86235 Introducl!on to Cell Molecular B10logy) plus a grade of D or better m ezther 74100 Chemistry I or 74101 Introduct10n to Chemistry

179

School of Bzological Sciences

A course of lectures covering the basic mechanisms whereby inherited information is transmitted within and between cells The followmg topics will be considered DNA as the genetic material organ1satlon of the genome DNA rephcation and repair genetic code mechanisms oftranscr1pt1on and protein synthesis protein structure, processing and targeting enzymes, assembly of supra molecular structures A final section will deal with regulatory mechanisms which operate w1th1n cells and to modulate the response of cells to external signals

Set book Mathews CK and van Holde, KE

Bwchemzstry (Beniamm 1990)

Reference books Alberts, B et al Molecular bwlogy of the

cell, 2nd ed (Garland, 1989) Darnell, J , Lod1sh, H and Baltimore D

Molecular cell bwlogy (Freeman 1986) Fre1felder, D Essentials of molecular bzology

(Jones & Bartlett, 1985) Lehnmger A L Prznczples of bzochemzstry

(Worth 1982) Stryer L Bzochemzstry, 2nd ed (Freeman,

1981) Watson, j D Molecular bzology of the gene

4th ed (WA Beniamm Inc, 1987)

86229 PLANT ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY AND DEVELOPMENT Dr S D Tyerman and Dr G P Findlay

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 22 lectures and 4 three hour practical sessions Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better 1n either 86100 B10log1cal Sciences I or 86110 Perspectives in Biology

The topic discusses anatomical, physiological and developmental events characteristic of various states In the hfe cycle of plants e g seed germ1nat1on seedhng estabhshment, vegetative growth floral 1n1tiatlon and floral development fert1hsahon, fruit growth, senescence and dormancy The role of plant hormones In the control of various phys10log1cal and developmental events will be discussed where appropnate The influence of environmental cond1t1ons on the behaviour

180

of plants lS also discussed in relation to conditions in the field

Reference books Dale j E and M1lthorpe F L eds The growth

and functwnmg of leaves (Cambndge UP 1983)

Devhn, RM and Witham, F H Plant physwlogy 4th ed (PW S 1983)

Fahn, A Plant anatomy (Pergamon, 1982) Luettge U and H1g1nbotham, N Transport zn

plants (Sprmger, 1979) Moorby, J Transport systems zn plants

(Longman, 1981) Sahsbury, F B and Ross, CW Plant

physzology 3rd ed (Wadsworth 1985) Sutchffe j F and Baker, DA Plants and

mmeral salts, 2nd ed (Arnold 1981) Waremg P F and Ph1lhps I D j Growth and

dzfferentzatzon zn plants, 3rd ed (Pergamon 1984)

W1lkms M B ed Advanced plant physzology (Pitman 1984)

W1llmer C M Stomata (Longman, 1983) Znnmerman, M H Xylem structure and the

ascent of sap (Sprmger 1983)

86230 POPULATION ECOLOGY Dr CM Bull

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 23 lectures or tutorials plus 3 three-hour practical sessions Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better 1n either 86100 B10log1cal Sciences I or 86110 Perspectives 1n Biology

This topic is designed to provide an 1ntroduchon to the concepts of population ecology, 1nclud1ng hfe table analysis populat10n growth models populat10n regulation, dispersal, hfe history patterns and genetic structure of populations

Set books Began, M, Harper, J L and Townsend CR

Ecology mdwzduals populatzons and communztzes (Blackwell, 1986)

Krebs C j Ecology the experimental analysis of dzstrzbutwn and abundance 3rd ed (Harper & Row 1985)

Reference books Colmraux P Ecology (Wiiey, 1986)

Recher, HF Lunney D and Dunn I A natural legacy ecology zn Australia 2nd ed (Pergamon 1986)

Smith R L Elements of ecology, 2nd ed (Harper & Row, 1986)

86231 BIOLOGICAL EXPERIMENTATION I Dr J F Wheldrake and Dr G f Wigmore

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 three hours laboratory session per week plus 1 lecture per week Pre requisites A grade of C or better in 86100 B1olog1cal Science I or 86110 Perspectives in B10logy plus a grade of D or better m either 74100 Chemistry I or 74101 Introduct10n to Chemistry Students with Dor better m 71102 Physics I but no chemistry may be permitted to enrol with the perm1ss1on of the co ordinator

The aim of the topic is to introduce students to a wide range of techniques used in biological laboratory experiments Its general theme is laboratory experimentation 1n the area of cellular or subcellular b10logy, but whole organisms are used where appropriate It consists of 8 x three week modules in the following areas laboratory safety basic laboratory techniques and the inherent hmitat1ons of biological experiments microscopy and the interpretation of images, genetics mutants and me1os1s, pH and b10log1cal systems plant phys10logy, m1crob1ology glycolys1s and fermentation 1n yeast, enzyme assay and induction

86235 INTRODUCTION TO CELLULAR AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY Dr K f Sanderson

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 86110 Perspectives m B10logy

A course of lectures and tutonals designed to provide an elementary background in cellular and molecular b10logy for students who have completed 86110 Perspecllves m Biology and who wish to proceed with further studies m

Bzologzcal Sciences

the School of B10log1cal Sciences For B A students enrolled m the School of B10log1cal Sciences the course is part of the core, and for other B A students the course 1s available as an option The course deals with unicellular organisms and cells in organs and tissues and includes topics such as cell ultrastructure, energy conversions 1n m1tochondr1a and chloroplasts cell genellcs and d1fferenliat10n

Set book Wolfe, SL Introductwn to cell bwlogy

(Wadsworth, 1983)

Reference books Alberts, B et al Molecular bwlogy of the

cen 2nd ed (Garland 1989) Darnell, ) Lod1sh H and Balllmore D

Molecular cell bwlogy (Freeman 1990) Prescott D M Cells (Jones & Bartlett 1988)

87330 PLANT BIOCHEMISTRY Dr D C Ellwtt

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre reqmsites 86228 Molecular B10logy 86229 Plant Anatomy Phys10logy and Development, or perm1ss1on of the topic co ordinator

This topic will deal with cellular and b10 chemical processes that are essentially characteristic of plants Processes covered will include nitrogen f1xat1on photosynthesis, cell wall production, secondary products, b10 chemical and molecular aspects of hormones, molecular aspects of plant defense mechanisms, plant biotechnology The topic while predom1nantlv about plants will discuss other b1olog1cal systems where appropnate for a better understanding of plants

Reference books Leaver C ) and Sze H , eds Plant

membranes structures functzon, bzogenesis (Proc ARCO Plant Res Inst) (Alan R Liss, 1987)

Stumpf P K and Conn E E , eds The bzochemzstry of plants, vols 1 8 (Academic 1980)

Watson, ) D et al Molecular bzology of the gene, 4th ed (Ben1amm/Cummmgs, 1987)

181

School of Bzologzcal Sczences

87364, 87365 PLANT PHYSIOLOGY AND DEVELOPMENT Dr GP Findlay with Dr DC Ellzott and Dr S D Tyerman

Umts 87364 4 5 87365 6 (mcludmg 1 5 umts of prac!Ical work) Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 87364 3 lectures per week, 87365 3 lectures per week and 3 hours practical work per week Pre requ1s1te Fam11Iar1ty with the sub1ect matter of 86229 Plant Anatomy, Phys10logy and Development

Thzs topic deals with a range of phys10log1cal and developmental phenomena characteristic of higher plants The sub1ect matter covered 1n lectures and seminars includes solute and water transport mineral nutnhon photo synthesis 1n whole plants, morphogenehc behaviour of mer1stemat1c regions apical dominance responses of plants to various environmental st1muh and flowering Hormonal control of seed and bud dormancy and germ1nahon Senescence and absc1ss1on Hormonal structure and assay

Reference books In add1!Ion to those hsted under topic 86229

Plant Anatomy Phys10logy and Development Barlow, PW and Carr, DJ eds Positional

controls in plant development (Cambndge UP, 1984)

Dale, J E and M1lthorpe, F L , eds The growth and functzonmg of leaves (Cambndge UP 1983)

Devlm R M and Witham F H , eds Plant physzology (PWS 1983)

Esau IC Vascular d1fferent1atzon zn plants (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1965)

Fahn, A Plant anatomy (Pergamon 1982) Galston, AW and Davies P J Control

mechanisms zn plant development (Pren!Jce Hall, 1970)

Hall j L Flowers T j and Roberts R M Plant cell structure and metabolism, 2nd ed (Longman 1982)

Smith, H and Gnerson D , eds The molecular bzology of plant development (Blackwell 1982)

Steeves, TA and Sussex, I M Patterns zn plant development (Pren!Jce Hall, 1972)

Waremg, P F and Ph!lhps, I DJ Growth and d1fferentzatzon zn plants (Pergamon, 1981)

182

WJ!kms M B Advanced plant physzology (Pitman 1984)

87367 87369 PLANT EVOLUTION AND SPECIATION Dr MA Whalen

Umts 87367 3 (lectures only), 87369 4 (mcludmg 1 umt of practical work) Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week or 2 lectures and 27 hours practical work Pre reqms1te 86220 Evolut10n and Heredity

Reproductive b1alogy of terrestrial and marine flowering plants 1nclud1ng breeding systems, modes of pollination, plant polhnator inter actions, floral evolution and gene flow Plant spec1ahon and systematics 1nclud1ng modes of spec1ahon, hybnd1sahon, polyplo1dy and assessment of phylogenetic relationships and b10geograph1c patterns with particular emphasis on the evolution of the Australian flora

Practicals will include a survey of important plant fam1hes m the Austrahan flora and an 1ntroduchon to field and laboratory oriented techniques used in studies of plant reproductive biology (e g nectar analyses the use of fluorescent dyes as pollen markers, and field observat10ns of pollmator behav10ur) and of spec1atlon and systematics (e g the use of electrophoret1c, morpholog1cal, cytological and numerical techniques)

Reference books Ayala, F J Populatzon and evolutzonary

genetics (1982) Barker, W R and Greenslade, P j M

Evolutzon of the flora and fauna of arzd Australza (1982)

Brown, j H and Gibson, A Bzogeography (Mosby, 1983)

Endler J A Geographic varzatzon, speciatzon and clznes (Prmceton, 1977)

Futuyma, DJ Evolutzonary bzology 2nd ed (Smauer, 1986)

Gottheb, L D and Jam S Plant evolutzonary biology (Chapman & Hall 1988)

Grant, V Plant speczatzon (Columbia, 1981) Grant, W F Plant bzosystematzcs (Academic,

1984) Harborne, J B and Turner, B L Plant

chemosystematzcs (Academic 1984)

Hedrick, PW Genetzcs of populatzons Gones & Bartlett 1985)

Jones, CE and Little, R Handbook of experzmental pollznatzon bzology (Van Nostrand 1983)

Keast, A Ecologzcal bzogeography of Australza (1981)

Otte D and Endler j A Speczatzon and zts consequences (S1nauer 1989)

Real, LA Pollznatzon bzology (Academic, 1983)

Richards A j Plant breedzng systems (Allen & Unwm, 1986)

Wiley, E 0 Phylogenetzcs the theory and practzce of phylogenetzc systematzcs (Wiley 1980)

87371 NEUROBIOLOGY A Dr K J Sanderson

Umts 4 5 (mcludmg 1 umt of practical work) Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours lectures/seminars per week plus a total of 27 hours pracllcal work Pre requ1s1te Fam1hanty with the sub1ect matter of 86226 Behav10ur and Neurob10logy

This topic examines 1ntegrat1on and development in the nervous system, both 1n vertebrates and in some invertebrates Neural integration will be examined 1n detail 1n the mammahan systems for movement, balance v1s1on and hearing

Reference books Camh1 JM Neuroethology (Smauer, 1984) Kandel, E R and Schwartz J H Prznczples of

neural sciences 2nd ed (Elsevier, 1985) Kuffler SW Nicholls JG and Martm AR

From neuron to brain 2nd ed (S1nauer, 1984)

Shepherd, GM Neurobzology, 2nd ed (Oxford U P , 1988)

87372 NEUROBIOLOGY B

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 45(mcludmg1 umt of practical work) Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours lectures/seminars per week plus a total of 27 hours practical work Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 86226 Behaviour and Neurobiology

Bzologzcal Sciences

In this topic the neurochem1cal, neuro endocnne pharmacological and behavioural aspects of the nervous system will be discussed A detailed cons1derat1on of neurochem1cal transm1ss1on by b1ogen1c amines and neuro peptides will be considered and related to recent developments 1n the following areas

(a) Learnmg and Memory (b) Control of Motor Funct10n (c) Drug Tolerance (d) Human Behav10ural Pathology (e) Neuro endocrme Disorders (f) Others to be determmed by mterest of

students

Reference books Cotman, CW and McGaugh J L Behavzoural

neuroscience (Academic, 1980) Kandel, ER and Schwartz J H Prznczples of

neural sczence 2nd ed (Arnold 1985)

87390 87395 ANIMAL BEHAVIOUR Dr RT Wells

Units 87390 6 (mcludmg 3 umts of pracllcal work) 87395 3 (lectures only) Level Thzrd year Duration Semester Class Contact 87390 2 lectures per week, 1 tutonal every 2 weeks 6 hours practical proiect per week 87395 2 lectures per week 1 tutorial every 2 weeks Pre requisite A grade of C or better 1n 86220 Evolution and Heredity or permission of topic co ordinator In addition students enrolling m 87390 must have a grade of C or better m 86222 B10log1cal Expenmentat1on JI

This topic aims to provide a detailed overview of the sc1entif1c study of animal behaviour It traces the h1stoncal development of the field from natural history to modern ethology It includes lectures and tutorials on behavioural concepts, neuronal commun1cat1on and circuitry, sensory systems and their role in the complex behaviours of selected invertebrates and vertebrates (communication, onentahon, nav1gat1on etc ) behavioural ecology (altruism parental investment mating systems and terntonahty) and social behaviours of invertebrates and vertebrates 1nclud1ng man

Set book McFarland D Anzmal behavzour (Pitman

1985)

183

School of Bzological Sciences

Reference books Camh1, JM Neuroethology (Smauer, 1984) Clutton Brock, TH and Harvey, PH 1 eds

Readings zn soczobzology (Freeman 1978) Gould, j L Ethology (Norton, 1982) Gner

1 j W Bzology of ammal behavzour

(Mosby, 1984) Krebs J R and Davies, N B Behavzoural

ecology an evolutzonary approach 2nd ed (Blackwell 1984)

Lehner P The handbook of ethological methods (Garland STPM, 1978)

Wiison E 0 Soczobiology a new synthesis (Belknap, 1975)

87391 COMMUNITY ECOLOGY Dr CM Bull

Umts 6 (mcludmg 2 um ts of practical work) Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 6 hours practical pro1ect per week, plus 1 tutorial every two weeks Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 86230 Populat10n Ecology and 86222 B10log1cal Exper1n1entation II or perm1ss1on of the topic co ordinator

This topic will explore the interactions between species in ecolog1cal commun1ties 1

and the consequences of those 1nterachons on both the dynamics of mdlVldual populations and the structure of the commun1t1es Areas covered include 1nterspec1f1c compeht1on predator prey 1nteractions, plant herbivore 1nterachons host parasite interactions mutuahsm, equ1ltbr1um and non equ1hbnum models of community structure

Set books Begon, M Harper j L and Townsend C R

Ecology zndzviduals, populatzons and communities (Blackwell 1986)

Krebs, C j Ecology the experimental analysis of dzstrzbutzon and abundance, 3rd ed (Harper & Row, 1985)

Reference books Cohnvaux, P Ecology (John Wiley & Sons,

1986) Diamond, J and Case, T J Community

ecology (Harper & Row 1986) K1kkawa j and Anderson, D J Community

ecology pattern and process (Blackwell 1986)

184

Recher, HF, Lunney D and Dunn, I A natural legacy ecology zn Australia, 2nd ed (Pergamon 1986)

Smith R L Elements of ecology, 2nd ed (Harper & Row, 1986)

87392 ECOSYSTEM ECOLOGY Dr CM Bull, Dr R T Wells and Dr G C Kzrby

Um ts 6 (mcludmg 2 umts of prac!Jcal work) Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week, 1 tutonal every two weeks and 2 field camps Pre reqms1tes A grade of C or better m 86230 Populat10n Ecology and 86222 B10log1cal Expermentatlon II or permission of the topic co ordinators

This topic wtll introduce students to the dynamics of ecosystems by exam1n1ng the cyclmg of energy and physical matter through ecosystems, the processes forming ecosystems and the factors which influence the complexity and stab11Ity of ecosystems

Set book Colmvaux P Ecology (John Wiley & Sons, 1986)

Reference books Dodson, j R and Westoby, M eds Are

Australian ecosystems different? (Proc Ecol Soc Aust Vol 14) (Blackwell 1985)

Recher H F , Lunney, D and Dunn I A natural legacy ecology rn Australia 2nd ed (Pergamon 1986)

Smith R L Elements of ecology, 2nd ed (Harper & Row 1986)

Whittaker, RH Communztzes and eco systems, 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1975)

87397, 87398 ECOPHYSIOLOGY OF PLANTS Dr S D Tyerman

Umts 87397 3 (lectures only), 87398 4 (mcludmg 1 umt of prac!Jcal work) Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week or 2 lectures and 27 hours of practical work as a three day field tnp Pre reqms1tes 87397 86220 Evolut10n and Heredity 87398 86220 Evolut10n and Heredity 86229 Plant Anatomy, Phys10logy and Development or 86227 Cell Phys10logy

The topic aims to introduce students to whole plant phys10logy and ecophys10logy by studymg phys10log1cal adaptat10ns that have taken place in a vanety of plants in response to aridity, the marine environment, extremes of temperature low nutrients, salinity, fire and herb1vory Where possible Austrahan examples will be used For 87398 a three day field tn p is planned to a semi arid zone (Brookfield Conservat10n Park) durmg the mid semester break (22nd Aprd 3 May, exact dates to be arranged) The field tnp will mvolve studying the water relations energy balance and photosynthetic strategies of arid zone plants using field equipment commonly used by plant phys10log1sts For those mterested m the manne environment a separate choice of proiects wdl be avadable

Reference books Barnes RS K and Hughes, RN An

zntroductzon to marzne ecology, 2nd ed Blackwell, 1988)

Fitter, A H and Hay R K M Environmental physzology of plants, 2nd ed (Academic, 1987)

Gill, AM Groves, RH and Noble, IR, eds Fire and the Australzan bzota (Austrahan Academy of Science 1981)

Harborne, J Introductzon to ecologzcal bzochemzstry, 2nd ed (Academic, 1982)

Kirk, j T 0 Lzght and photosynthesis zn aquatzc ecosystems (Cambridge UP 1986)

Lange, 0 L , Nob le P S , Osmond, G B and Ziegler H , eds Physzologzcal plant ecology, encyclopedia of plant physzology, new series vol 12A 12B and 12C (Sprmger Verlag, 1981)

Nobel PS Bzophyszcalplantphyszologyand ecology (Freeman 1983)

Parsons, T R Takahashi M and Hargrave, B Bzologtcal oceanographc processes, 3rd ed (Pergamon, 1988)

Pate, j S and McComb, A j eds The bzology of Australian plants (Um ofW A Pr, 1981)

Sahsbury, F B and Ross, CW Plant physzology, 3rd ed (Wadsworth, 1985)

88325 FUNGAL POPULATION BIOLOGY Dr G C Kzrby

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqms1tes A grade of C or better m 86220

Bzologzcal Sciences

Evolut10n and Heredity and 86222 B10log1cal Experimentat10n II and 86230 Populat10n Ecology or perm1ss1on of topic co ordinator

This topic will focus on recent advances in knowledge about the populat10n b10logy of fungi The ma1or taxonomic groups of fungi and the roles they play as decomposers, symb1onts, pathogens and food sources will be reviewed Fungal spores will be discussed in relation to dispersal Genetic vanatton 1n fungal populations has been documented recently, especially 1n relation to breeding systems The dynamics of fungal populations will be analysed for plant pathogens and yeasts 1n culture vessels The population genetics of fungi will be related to the evolution of fung1c1de resistance and virulence genes tn pathogen populat10ns

Reference books Burdon j j Dzseases and plant populatzon

bzology (Cambridge UP, 1987) Day P R Genetzcs of host paraszte znter

actzon (Freeman, 1974) Hudson, H j Fungal bzology (Edward Arnold

1986) Kendrick B The fzfth kmgdom (Mycologuc

Pub , 1985) Rayner ADM et al Evolutzonary bzology

offungz (Cambridge UP 1987) Wicklow, D T The fungal community

(Dekker, 1981)

88352 MICROBIOLOGY Dr K 0 Cox, wzth Dr D EA Catcheszde, and Dr G f Wzgmore

Umts 6 (mc!udmg 1 umt of practical work) Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours of lectures per week, and 3 hours of practical work per week for 8 weeks Pre reqms1tes 86225 Basic M1crob10logy at C or better, 86221 B10log1cal Experimentat10n I and either 86228 Molecular B10logy or 86224 Basic Metabohsm or 86235 Introduction to Cellular and Molecular Biology and perm1ss1on of the topic co ordinator

This topic 1s designed to give students a broad understandmg of the maior elements of m1crobiology 1nclud1ngbactenology, bactenal genetics, virology and immunology, and will probe these topics in greater depth than was

185

School of Bzological Sciences

posstble m Baste M1crob10logy The pracncal work 1s designed both to expand slnlls m handling bactena and to apply these skills to the study of bacteria in particular environments In add1hon students will be encouraged to acquire some basic slnlls 1n v1rolog1cal and serological techniques Assessment will be made on the basis of assignments performance in the laboratory and written exam1natlon

Sub1ect material covered 1n this topic will mclude The d1vers1ty of bactena Bacter1olog1cal techniques 1nclud1ng the pnnc1ples of class1flcat1on, 1dent1f1cahon cult1vat1on, 1solat1on and enumeration Structure and b1osynthes1s of bacterial cell wall components Control of bacteria ster1hsahon antisepsis, ant1b1otic therapy Bactena as pathogens - toxins, aggress1ns Bacterial diseases, ep1dem1ology 1nfectious drug resistance transposons bacter1oc1ns, virulence plasmids, catabohc plasmids Applled m1crob1ology Micro organisms and the production of fermented foods, food supplements spec1ahty chemicals organic feed stocks antib1ot1cs and steroids M1crobiolog1cal processes including silage, rethng, sewage treatment M1crob1ological assays The diversity of viruses techniques for the ISolahon assay and identification of animal viruses, viral rephcat1ve strategies, and common viral diseases Immunologtcal topics w11l 1nclude cells of the immune system, anti body production, antibody antigen reactions, complement reactions serology and hu1noral and cell mediated immune responses 1n common m1crob1al infections Serological techniques

Reference books Austin, B and Priest F Modern bacterial

taxonomy (Van Nostrand Remhold, 1986) Brock, TD Biology of microorganisms

5th ed (Prentice Hall, 1988) Burrows, W Burrows textbook of micro

bzology (Saunders 1985) Crueger, W and Crueger A Biotechnology

a textbook of zndustrzal microbzology (Science Tech Inc 1984)

Davis B D et al Microbzology, 4th ed (Harper & Row, 1989)

Fields B N ed Virology (PrentJce Hall, 1982) Fraenkel Conrat H and Kimball, P C

Virology (Prentice Hall, 1982)

186

Gardner, j F and Peel M M Introductzon to sterzlzzatwn and dzsznfectzon (Churchill L1vmgstone 1986)

Gibson, D T Microbial degradatzon of organic compounds (Dekker, 1984)

Holt j G et al Bergey's manual of systematic bacterwlogy (WI!ltams & W1lkms 1984)

Linton, AH Microbes, man and anzmals (Wiley 1982)

Mims CA The pathogenesis of znfectzous disease (Academic, 1982)

Palmer, E L and Marlin M L , eds An atlas of mammalzan viruses (CR C 1982)

Paul WE Fundamental immunology 2nd ed (Raven, 1989)

Playfair j H L Immunology at a glance, 3rd ed (Blackwell, 1984)

Rmtt, IM Essential immunology, 6th ed (Blackwell, 1989)

Stanier, RY et al General microbiology, 5th ed (Macm1llan, 1986)

Starr M P et al The prokaryotes (Sprmger Verlag 1981)

88355 VIROLOGY

This topic will not be offered m 1991

88358 CELL AND DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY Dr N G Brink, Dr K Dixon and Dr R Rush

Umts 4 5 (mcludtng 1 umt of practical work) Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours of lectures and 3 hours practical work per week Pre reqms1te Fam1ltanty with the subiect matter of 86220 Evolut10n and Heredity

In this topic the process of embryogenes1s in animals will be descnbed and analysed at the cellular and molecular levels Cellular d1fferenhahon, growth and morphogenesis will be discussed in terms of the role of cytoplasmic 1nformat1on cell cell interactions and the genetic regulation of these processes

Reference books Browder L W Developmental bzology,

2nd ed (Saunders, 1984) Davidson, EH Gene activzty zn early

development, 3rd ed (Academic, 1986) Gilbert S F Developmental bzology (Smauer,

1985)

Graham, C F and Waremg FF eds Development control zn anzmals and plants, 2nd ed (Blackwell 1984)

Nieuwkoop PD, johnen, AG and Albers, B The epzgenetzc nature of early chordate development (Cambridge U P 1985)

Raff, RA and Kaufman, T C Embryos, genes and evolutzon (Macmillan, 1983)

Saunders, j W Developmental bzology (Macmillan 1984)

Slack, j MW From egg to embryo (Cambridge UP, 1983)

Walbot V and Holder, N Developmental bzology (Random House, 1987)

Wessells, N J( Tissue znteractzons and development (Longm•n Cheshire 1984)

88360, 88361 IMMUNOLOGY DrKO Cox

Umts 88360 3 88361 4 5 (mcludmg 1 5 umts of practical work) Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 88360 2 lectures per week 88361 2 lectures and 1 practical session per week Pre requ1s1te 88352 M1crob1ology

The ob1echve of this topic is for students to understand the properties and functions of antigens 1mmunoglobuhns and the various cells and organs of the immune system in order to appreciate both normal and abnormal immune function

Concepts to be covered 1n the lecture series include ontogeny of the immune response, roles of vanous cells especially lymphoc;ytes humoral 1mmun1ty cell mediated 1mmun1ty, nature of 1mmunoglobuhns antigens and immunogens mechanisms of immunological tolerance, the role of the ma1or histo compatibility complex Immune processes in some disease states (e g cancer and autoimmune disease) will also be studied

In the practical classes1 students will learn some basic 1mmunolog1cal procedures

Reference books Davis B D et al Mzcrobzology, 4th ed

(Harper & Row, 1989) Herbert, W j W1lkmson P C and Stott, D I

D1ctzonary of zmmunology 3rd ed (Blackwell 1985)

Bzologzcal Sciences

Klem, j Immunology the sczence of self nonself dzscrzmznatzon (Wiley 1982)

Male, D Champ10n, B and Cooke A Advanced immunology (L1ppmcott 1987)

Paul, WE Fundamental immunology, 2nd ed (Raven, 1989)

Playfair j H L Immunology at a glance, 3rd ed (Blackwell, 1984)

R01tt I M Essential zmmunology, 6th ed (Blackwell, 1989)

Weir D M ed Handbook of experzmental immunology, 4th ed (Blackwell, 1986)

88390 PHYSIOLOGY OF MARINE ORGANISMS Assoczate Professor R V Baudmette and Dr S D Tyerman

Umts 3 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre-requisites 86220 Evolution and Heredity

This topic deals with the phys10log1cal adaptations of vertebrates, invertebrates plants and microbes to the marine environment Topics include (1) the ecophys10logy (mcludmg osmoregulat10n) of micro and macro algae and ang1osperms1 (11) resp1rahon, motion, ion balance and osmo regulation of animals in an aqueous medium, d1vmg phys10logy (111) manne microbial ecology and m1crob1al energy strategies b1olum1nescence (1v) fish and ftshenes, manne pollut10n and toxicology

Reference books Austin B Marzne mzcrobzology

(Cambridge UP, 1988)

De1ours, P, Bohs L, Taylor, CR and Weibel, E R Comparative physzology lzfe zn water and on land, F1dra Research Series, vol 9 (L1viana Press Springer Verlag 1987)

S E B Symposza XXXIX Physzological adaptations of marzne animals, MS Laverack ed (1985)

187

School of Bzologzcal Sczences

89301, 89302 CELL AND MEMBRANE PHYSIOLOGY Dr GP Fzndlay and Professor AB Hope, wzth Dr S D Tyerman

Umts 89301 3 5, 89302 4 5 (mcludmg 1 umt of practical work) Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 89301 2 lectures per week, 89302 2 lectures per week and an average of 30 hours practical work in the semester Pre requ1s1te Famt11ar1ty with the sub1ect matter of 86223 Ammal Phys10logy or 86227 Cell Phys10logy and 86229 Plant Anatomy Phys10logy and Development

This topic deals with the cellular phys10logy of animals, plants and fungi Emphasis is placed on the role of cell membranes 1n controlling solute and water movement w1th1n and between cells, and 1n energy transduction, all as part of the funct10nmg of processes such as v1s1on, hearing, conduction of the nervous impulse muscular contraction ep1thehal transport transport of solutes by roots, xylem and phloem photosynthesis and plant movements

Reference books Aidley D j The physzology of excztable cells,

2nd ed (Cambridge UP 1979)' Bowlmg D j F Uptake of zons by plant roots

(Chapman & Hall, 1976) Clarkson D T Ion transport and cell

structure zn plants (McGraw Hill, 1974) Haupt, W and Fe1nle1b, M E , eds

Encyclopedza of plant physzology, new series vol 7, Physiology of movements (Sprmger, 1979)

Hope, AB and Walker, NA The physzology of gzant algal cells (Cambridge U P , 1975)

House, CR Water transport zn cells and tzssues (Arnold 1974)

Luettge U and Pitman, M G eds Encyclopedza of plant physzology, new series vol 1 Part B Transport in plants, tzssues and organs (Springer 1976)

Nicholls, D G Bzoenergetzcs (Academic, 1982)

Nobel, PS Introductzon to bzophyszcalplant physzology (Freeman 1974)

Staehelm, LA and Arntzen, G j eds Encyclopedza of plant physzology, new senes, vol 19, Photosyntheszs III (Spnnger 1986)

188

89304, 89310 PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS Associate Professor R V Baudznette

Not offered m 1991

Umts 89304 3 5 (includmg one half umt of practical work) 89310 3 (lectures only) Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 89304 2 lectures per week plus a total of 15 hours pracltcal work 89310 2 lectures per week Pre requisite A grade of C or better in 86223 Ammal Phys10logy or approval from the topic co ordinator

This topic considers the mechanisms operative in the control of mammalian cardio respiratory digestive, renal and metabolic systems and their overall role in homeostasis Emphasis is placed on the integrated activities of these systems through neuroendocnne control and their relationship to the effect of envuonment 1n the whole animal About one third of the course considers material of a comparative nature, torpor and hibernation locomotion, high altitude and d1v1ng phys10logy the foetus phys10logical scalmg and aspects of marsupial physiology

Set book Berne RM and Levy MN Prznczples of

physzology (Mosby 1990)

Reference books Berne, RM and Levy MN Physzology,

2nd ed (Mosby, 1988) Bouverot, P Adaptatzon to altztude hypoxza

zn vertebrates (Springer-Verlag, 1985) Calder, WA Szze functzon and lzfe hzstory

(Harvard UP, 1984) Eckert, R , Randall, D and Augustine G

Anzmal physzology 3rd ed (Freeman, 1988) Guyton, AC Textbook of medzcal

physzology, 9th ed (Saunders, 1986) Schmidt Nielsen K Anzmal physzology

adaptation and environment, 4th ed (Cambridge UP, 1990)

Schmidt Nielsen K Scalzng (Cambridge, 1984)

Seymour, R, ed Respzratzon and metabolism of embryonzc vertebrates Gunk, 1984)

Taylor CR, Johansen K and Bolts L eds A companzon to anzmal physzology (Cambridge U P , 1982)

Tyndale B1scoe 1 CH and Janssens PA The developzng marsupial (Sprmger 1988)

Vander, A J et al Human physzology 5th ed (McGraw Hill, 1990)

89335 BIOCHEMICAL CONTROL MECHANISMS

89345 BIOCHEMICAL CONTROL MECHANISMS (S) Professsor A W Murray

Umts (89335) 6 (89345) 4 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 5 lectures per week for 8 weeks In 89335 this 1s combmed with small group tutorials in the latter part of the semester that examine current literature 1n this field Pre requisite 86228 Molecular B10logy at C grade or better, or perm1ss1on of the topic co ordinator

This topic will consider the mechanisms involved In co-ord1nat1ng and regulating cellular reactions and 1n enabhng cells to respond to external signals (hormones) Topics w1ll 1nclude a general overview of regulation covalent modification of proteins (particularly protem phosphorylat10n), control of transcription in prokaryotes and eukaryotes, non steroid animal hormones (classes and functions of hormones and growth factors receptors mechanisms of signal transm1ss1on) d1fferentiation in a simple system cancerous cell as a model for abnormal biological control

Reference books Alberts, B et al Molecular bzology of the

cell, 2nd ed (Garland, 1988) Mathews, C K and van Holde E Bzo

chemistry (Ben1amm, 1990) Rawn, J D Bzochemistry (Harper & Row,

1983) Smith, EL et al Prznciples of bzochem1stry,

7th ed (McGraw Hill 1983) Smith, H and Grierson, D , eds The

molecular bzology of plant development (Blackwell, 1982)

Stryer, L Bzochemzstry, 3rd ed (Freeman, 1988)

Watson, JD et al Molecular bzology of the gene, 4th ed (Ben1amm/Cummmgs 1987)

Bzologzcal Sczences

89336 DNA STRUCTURE FUNCTION AND MANIPULATION

89346 DNA STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND MANIPULATION (S) Dr D EA Catcheside

Umts (89336) 6, (89346) 4 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 5 lectures per week for 8 weeks In 89336 this 1s combmed with small group tutonals m the latter part of the semester that examine current literature tn this field Pre requ1S1te 86228 Molecular B10logy at C or better or perm1ss1on of the topic co ordinator

DNA Structure - eluc1dat1on of sequence higher order structures chromatin the way 1nformat1on 1s earned on the DNA DNA rephcahon (1n1hahon, enzymes and proteins involved) topo1somerases repair Physical properties of DNA and its prepart10n (mcludmg the kmellcs of hybnd1sat10n)

The b10log1cal basis for molecular clonmg of DNA, plasmids bacter1ophages1 restr1ct1on and mod1ficat1on, transformation The construction of recombinant molecules, host vector systems, selection of spec1f1c clones Polymerase chain reaction

Mechanisms of RNA synthesis and processing control of RNA synthesis

Organelle genomes, sizes conservation 1nterorganelle gene transfer, RNA and polymerases of organelles Ma1or genes, intrans, reading frames and promoter regions for organelles

Reference books Bradbury E M , Maclean, N and Matthews, H R

DNA, chromatin and chromosomes (Blackwell, 1981)

Brown TA Gene clonzng an introduction (Van Nostrand Rembold, 1986)

Lewm, B Genes IV (Oxford UP, 1990) Old R W and Pnmrose S B Prznc1ples of

gene manipulatzon, an introduction to genetic engineering, 3rd ed (Blackwell, 1985)

Sambrook j , Fntsch, E F and Mamalls T Molecular cloning, a laboratory manual, 2nd ed (Cold Sprmg Harbor, 1989)

Watson, JD et al Molecular bzology of the gene, 4th ed (Ben1amm/Cummmgs, 1987)

189

School of Bwlogical Sciences

89339 MOLECULAR AND CELLULAR BIOLOGY LABORATORY

89349 MOLECULAR AND CELLULAR BIOLOGY LABORATORY (Theory) Dr D EA Catcheside

Umts (89339) 6 (89349) 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 89349 2 lectures per week, m 89339 this is combmed with 6 hours of laboratory and associated work each week Pre reqmsite 89349 Complet10n of the B2 core at C grade or better and at least one of 86228 Molecular Bwlogy and 86225 Basic M1crob1ology at C grade or better or perm1ss1on of the topic co ordinator 89339 Completwn of the B2 core at C grade or better plus a B grade in at least one of 86221 Biological Expenmentatwn I 86228 Molecular Bwlogy or 86225 Basic Micro biology or perm1ss1on of the topic co ordinator Co reqmsites 89349 None 89339 At least one of 88352, 88360, 88355, 89336, 89369 and 89341

An 1ntroduct1on to techniques and materials used in 1nveshgatlng the molecular processes of hv1ng organisms In 89339, this is combined with laboratory work in b1ochem1cal, genetic m1crob1olog1cal and 1mmunolog1cal techniques

Reference books Bell J E ed Spectroscopy zn bwchemistry,

Vols I and II (CRC, 1981)

Brown, S B ed An zntroductzon to spectroscopy for bzochemzsts (Academic, 1980)

Catsimpoolas, N , ed lsoelectrzc focuszng (Academic 1977)

Cooper, TC The tools of bwchemistry (Wiley, 1977)

Everaerts FM lsotachophoreszs theory, instrumentation and applzcatzons (Elsevier 1976)

Fox B W Techniques of sample preparatwn for liquid sczntillatwn counting (North Holland 1976)

Freifelder D M Physical biochemistry (Freeman, 1976)

190

Goding J W Monoclonal antibodies principles and practice (Academic, 1983)

Jakoby W B and Pastan, I H , eds Cell culture methods zn enzymology, vol 58 (Academic, 1979)

Miller, J H Experiments zn molecular genetics (Cold Sprmg Harbor 1974)

Old R W and Primrose S B Principles of gene 1 zanzpulatwn 3rd ed (Blackwell, 1985)

Pollack, R ed Readings zn mammalzan cell culture (Cold Sprmg Harbor 1973)

Rickwood, D , ed Centrzfugatwn a practical approach (Informat10n Retrieval, 1978)

Rovozzo G C and Burke, C N A manual of baszc vzrologzcal techniques (Prentice Hall 1973)

Sambrook J Fritsch, E F and Maniatis T , Molecular cloning a laboratory manual, 2nd ed (Cold Spring Harbor 1989)

Scheeler, P Centrzfugatzon zn biology and medical science (Wiley, 1982)

Schleif RF and Wensmk, PC Practical methods zn molecular bwlogy (Springer Verlag 1981)

Weir, D M et al Handbook of experzmental immunology, 4th ed (Blackwell, 1986)

Yeoman, MM Plant cell culture technology (Blackwell 1986)

89340 PROJECTS IN MOLECULAR AND CELLULAR BIOLOGY Dr f F Wheldrake

Umts 4 5 (mcludmg 4 umts of practical work) Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 9 hours per week of prac!lcal work Pre reqmsite A grade of C or better m 89339 Molecular and Cellular Bwlogy Laboratory or approval from the topic co ordinator Co requisites Enrolment 1n one or more of 89335 88360, 88361 88355, 88352 or 89369

Students will conduct two projects Each pro1ect will be under the superv1s1on of one of the members of staff Students will work mdividually m this topic and will have md!Vldual proiects The obiective will be for students to gain experience in planning and execution of laboratory work 1n one or more of the fields of Microbiology B10chemistry, Genetics, Immunology and Molecular Genetics

89341 TOPICS IN BIOTECHNOLOGY Dr DE A Catcheszde wzth Dr f F Wheldrake and Dr G f Wzgmore

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures or seminars per week Pre reqmsite 89336 DNA Structure Funcllon and Manipulation at C grade or better or pernuss1on of the topic co ordinator Co requ1s1tes None required However, students are recommended to have completed 89339 Molecular and Cellular B10logy Laboratory and be enrolled m 89340 Pro1ects m Molecular and Cellular B10logy

The ob1ect1ves of this topic are to show how the current understanding of b1olog1cal processes has been applied to the man1pulat1on of hv1ng systems for econom1c benefit, and to examine current basic and applied research hkely to extend such uses of hv1ng systems The spec1f1c examples dealt with will be drawn from the followmg areas gene probes as diagnostic reagents and for flngerpnnhng genetic man1pulahon of plants and plant cell culture transgenic animals and animal cell culture, monoclonal antibodies as diagnostic reagents and molecular tools protein eng1neenng genetic manipulation and large scale cult1vahon of m1croorgan1sms for the production of useful matenals such as amino acids, antlb1ohcs alkaloids, enzymes foods and beverages steroids v1tam1ns, and for apphcat1ons in mining, waste disposal and energy production The topic will also consider the legal, social and ethical aspects of b10technology and the practicahl!es ofbrmgmg the products of b10technology to the market

Set book Primrose SB Modern bzotechnology

(Blackwell 1987)

Reference books Australian Journal of Bzotechnology

(Australian Industrial Publishers, 1987 onwards)

Bw/technology (Macmillan 1983 onwards) Costa, MS et al Mzcrobzology of extreme

environments and zts potentzal zn bwtechnology (Elsevier 1989)

Dhawan, V Applzcatwns of bwtechnology zn forestry and horticulture (Plenum, 1989)

Bzologzcal Sciences

Genetic Engzneerzng and Biotechnology Yearbook 198819 (Elsevier, 1988)

Hlggms I j et al Bwtechnology, prznczples and applzcatwns (Blackwell, 1985)

Laskin A I ed Enzymes and zmmobzllsed cells zn bzotechnology (Ben1amm/ Cummmgs 1985)

Lindsay, RC and Willis, BJ, Bzotechnology challenges for the flavour and food industry (Elsevier, 1989)

Mantell S H et al Prznczples of plant bwtedhnology (Blackwell, 1985)

Marx, J L, A revolutzon zn bzotechnology (Cambridge UP 1989)

Old R W and Primrose S B Prznczples of g~ne manzpulat1on an zntroductzon to genetic engzneerzng, 3rd ed (Blackwell, 1985)

Peppler H j and Perlman D Mzcrobzal technology, 2nd ed (Academic 1979)

Prave P et al Baszc biotechnology a students guzde (VCH, 1987)

Rehm H j and Reed, G Bwtechnology, a comprehensive treatzse (Verlag Ch1m1e 1981)

Robson B and Garnier J Introduction to proteins and protein engzneering (Elsevier 1986)

Sikora, K and Smedley, H M Monoclonal antzbodzes (Blackwell 1984)

Trends zn bzotechnology (Elsevier 1982 onwards)

Spier R and Griffiths, j B Ammal cell bwtechnology (Academic 1985)

Walker JM and Gmgold EB Molecular bwlogy and bwtechnology (Royal Soc Chemistry 1988)

Wang, D et al Fermentation and enzyme technology (Wiley 1979)

Yeoman, MM Plant cell culture technology (Blackwell 1986)

89369 GENETICS Dr NG Brznk

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week and 6 tutonals per semester Pre reqmsites 86220 Evolution and Heredity 86221 B10logical Experimentat10n I, 86222 B10logical Expenmentat10n II

191

School of Bzologzcal Sciences

This topic will deal with the genetlcs of eukaryotlc organisms 1nclud1ng humans and will consider genome organ1sat1on, mechanisms and control of genetic recomb1nat1on, cytolog1cal and genetic maps, repet1t1ve genes mobile genes, gene 1nacttvation, genetic control of development, quantitative genetics with apphcahon to plant and animal breeding somatic genetics Tutorial sessions w11l mainly be concerned with problem solving

Set book Zubay, G Genetics (Ben1am1n Cummings,

1987)

Reference books Ayala, F J and luger, J A Modern genetics

(Ben1amin Cummings, 1984) Goodenough U Genetics 3rd ed (Saunders

1984) Suzuki D T , Griffiths A J F , Miller, j H and

Lewontin, RC An zntroductzon to genetic analysis, 4th ed (Freeman 1989)

SPECIAL TOPICS IN BIOLOGY

Umts 1 to 6 umts, as arranged Level Third year Pre requ1s1tes As determined by the topic co ordinator

Special topics m B10logy may be available from time to time, depending upon the resources available to the school Enrolment in any of these topics is sub1ect to the spec1f1c approval of the topic co ordinator and may be sub1ect to a quota where resources are limited Students are invited to enquire about such topics from the Dean or from academic counsellors In 1991 the followmg special topics will be available

87396 Commumty Ecology A 89362 Developmental B10logy A

Units

4 1

89363 Developmental B10logy B 2 89370 Vertebrate Palaeontology I 2 89371 Vertebrate Palaeontology II 3

(pre reqms1te Vert Paleont I) 89375 Manne Ecology Field Tnp 2 89376 Manne Ecology Field Tnp 3 89390 Readmgs m Populat10n B10logy 2 89391 Readmgs m Orgamsmic B10logy 2

192

89392 Readmgs m Molecular B10logy 2 89398 B10logy Essay A 1 89399 B10logy Essay B 1

NOTE Topics 89398 and 89399 are mtended specifically for students who as a result of unforseen circumstances still need one or two units to complete their degree in Biology

Honours Topics zn Bwlogy

A candidate for the Honours topics 1n Biology is required to reach a high standard 1n ordinary degree work, preferably in topic work as a whole, but at least 1n those sub1ects relating to the field m which the student wishes to undertake studies for Honours Some particular field of B10logy will be studied more intensively and research work will be undertaken Candidates are required to give their full time for at least an entire academic year to their studies

86400 HONOURS BIOLOGY Dr R T Wells

Umts 36 Level Fourth year Durat10n Full year

Fields m which the topic is available mclude the followmg

Ammal developmental b10logy ammal physiology, behavioural biology b1ochem1stry, cell phys10logy b10physics ecology genellcs immunology marsupial biology m1crob1ology, neurophysiology and neuroanatomy, plant taxonomy and speczat10n plant phys10logy and development populat10n b10logy vertebrate palaeontology and b10logy with psychology A programme of studies leadmg to a B Sc Honours in Marine Science (B10logy) IS also available, students should consult Dr Wells for details

Students are expected to procure the prescribed edition of all set text-books. Unless otherwise noted, the latest edition should be obtained. Those books indicated by an asterisk (*) are available in paperback or economical student editions.

The name( s) of the staff member( s) primarily responsible for a given topic, and to whom enquiries pertaining to the topic should be directed, is (are) shown in italics below the topic title.

First Year Topics in Earth Sciences

81100 EARTH SCIENCES I Dr A. White

Units: 9 Level: First year Duration: Full year Class Contact: 3 lectures and 3 hours of laboratory work per week and 5 tutorials per semester plus at least 4 days of field classes Pre-requisites: A knowledge of Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry at Matriculation level is desirable. Attendance at all practical classes is compulsory.

A comprehensive view of the Planet Earth is taken, beginning with its position and history in the Solar-system; moving closer to consider first the atmosphere, its composition, dynamics and their influence on our weather, then to consider the oceans, their composition and dynamics, especially those processes which affect mankind. We then consider water

Earth Sciences

masses on land and below its surface, and water resources as a component of the hydrological cycle. This leads to discussing weathering and erosion, sediment deposition, sedimentary rocks, palaeontology, interpretation of past sedimentary environments and stratigraphy. We then progress through discussions of crystals and minerals to igneous processes and rocks and metamorphic processes and rocks, together with fracturing and folding of rocks. This leads in turn to discussion of earthquakes and the Earth's interior together with its gravitational and magnetic fields, models of the Earth's structure, and the plate-tectonic theory of crustal dynamics.

Reference books Bennison, G.M. Introduction to geological

structures and maps, 3rd ed. (Arnold, 1975) Brown, G.C. and Mussett, A.E. The

inaccessible earth (Allen & Unwin, 1981) Bruce, J.P. and Clark, R.H. Introduction to

hydrometeorology (Pergamon, 1966) Clark, I.F. and Cook, B.J. Perspectives of the

earth (Aust. Academy of Sciences, 1983) Collinson, J.D. and Thompson, D.B.

Sedimentary structures, 2nd ed. (Unwin Hyman, 1989)

Dana, J.D. and Hurlbutt, C.S. Manual of mineralogy, 19th ed. (Wiley, 1977)

Gass, I.G., Smith, P.J. and Wilson, R.C.L., eds. Understanding the earth, 2nd ed. (Artemis, 1972)

Gross, M.G. Oceanography, a view of the earth, 4th ed. (Prentice Hall, 1987)

Hamblin, W.K. The earth's dynamic systems, 4th ed. (Burgess, 1985)

Set books and Text books are required reading on which students may be tested. Students are expected to have their own copies of all books listed as Set books or Text books; multiple copies of these books will not be available in the Library. Preliminary reading is reading which the student is expected to have completed before the commencement of teaching and on which he or she may at any time be tested. Further reading and Recommended reading, where not otherwise specified, indicate reading which the student is expected to do in the course of studying the Set books. Reference books are books which the student will find useful in the course of studying the topics for which they are specified.

193

School of Earth Sciences

Ludbrook, N H A guzde to the geology and mzneral resources of South Australza (SA Govt Prmt 1980)

Lutgens F K and Tarbuck, E J The atmosphere 3rd ed (Prentice Hall, 1986)

Miller, A and Anthes, RA Meteorology 5th ed (Memll, 1985)

Pettijohn F j and Potter, P E Atlas and glossary of przmary sedimentary structures (Sprmger Verlag 1964)

Pickard G L and Emery W j Descrzptzve physzcal oceanography, an introduction, 4th ed (Pergamon, 1982)

Selley RC Ancient sedimentary environments, 3rd ed (Chapma'I & Hall, 1985)

Skmner BJ and Porter, S C Physical geology (Wiley 1987)

Talbot, J L and Nesbitt, R W Geological excursions in the Mount Lofty Ranges and the Fleurzeu Peninsula (Angus & Robertson, 1968)

Tw1dale, C R , Tyler, M j and Webb B P , eds Natural history of the Adelaide region (Royal Society of S Aust 1976)

Ward, RC Principles of hydrology, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1975)

Wells, N The atmosphere and ocean a physical zntroductzon (Taylor & Francis, 1986)

York, D Planet Earth (McGraw Hiii, 1975)

81105 EARTH SCIENCES IS

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 lectures per week

The topic consists of the lecture content only of 81100 Earth Sciences I The workload will include set essays, the details of which will be announced during lectures The topic ts not available to students who have completed 81100 Earth Sciences I and 1t 1s not an acceptable pre requ1s1te for second or third year topics m the School of Earth Sciences

Reference books As for 81100 Earth Sciences I

194

Second Year lnterdzsczplmary Topzcs zn Earth Sciences

81214 MECHANICS II Dr R A D Byron Scott

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1tes 77102 Physics I and 60130 Mathematics I

Rigid body dynamics Cartesian tensors Flmd dynamics

81217 SURFACE AND SUBSURFACE HYDROLOGY I Dr G Stanger and Dr f M Hacker

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week

A review of all components of the hydrolog1cal cycle, 1nclud1ng Rainfall d1str1buhon and measurement, evapo-transp1rahon losses, surface water character1st1cs and measurement Groundwater occurrence, d1str1buhon, flow and explo1tat1on under a variety of geological cond1hons Prachcahties of floods, droughts and water management The course will also introduce water chemistry water quahty evalualton (chemical and b1olog1cal) water pollution studies and the use of isotopes 1n hydrology

Reference books Bruce, J P and Clark RH Introductzon to

hydrometeorology (Pergamon 1966) Hem j D Study and znterpretatzon of the

chemzcal characterzstzcs of natural water 3rd ed (Dept of the Interior, U S Geolog1cal Survey, 1985)

Price, M Introducing groundwater (Allen & Unwm 1985)

Shaw, E M Hydrology in practice 2nd ed (Van Nostrand Remhold, 1988)

Ward, RC Principles of hydrology, 2nd ed (McGraw-Hill, 1975)

81302 PLANETARY EXPLORATION Dr f A T Bye and Dr RA D Byron Scott

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requisite Perm1ss1on of the lecturers

Comparative study of planetary atmospheres, solar processes and planetary evolution

Text book Jones B W The solar system (Pergamon,

1984)*

Reference books Kapa! Z The realm of the terrestrial planets

(The Institute of PhyS1cs, 1979) Robertson, E C, ed Nature of the solzd earth

(McGraw Hill 1972) Runcorn, S l( and Urey1 H 1 eds The moon

(Reidel 1971) The solar system (Sc1ent1fic American

September, 1975) White 0 R The solar output and zts

varzatzon (Colorado Associated UP 1977)

Thzrd Year Interdzsczplznary Topics zn Earth Sciences

81301 DATA ANALYSIS IN THE EARTH SCIENCES

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmS1te A knowledge of the FORTRAN language, such as can be obtained from 67201 Computmg with FORTRAN

Theory and practice of time series analysis techniques relevant to the Earth Sciences Theoretical foundations for the analysis of random processes, basic statistical analysis, curve fitting Fourier analysis, d1g1tal filtenng, spectral estimation systems analysis and the apphcat10n of the above

Reference books Benda!, j S and Piersol, AG Random data

analyszs and measurement procedures, 2nd ed (Wiley 1986)

Davis, JC Statistics and data analysis zn geology (Wiley, 1973)

Earth Sciences

jenkms GM and Watts D G Spectral analyszs and zts apphcatzons (Holden Day 1968)

Yuen, CI< and Fraser, D Dzgztal spectral analysis (CSIRO Pitman, 1979).

81313 CHEMICAL OCEANOGRAPHY DrH H Veeh

Umts 2 Level Th1rd year Duration first semester Class Contact 11/2 hour lectures per week Pre requmtes Normally 81100 Earth Sciences I and 74100 Chem1Stry I

The ocean as a chemical system ma1or and minor elements in sea water, chemical spec1atlon, factors affecting the d1stnbut1on of stable and radioactive isotopes in the sea, dissolved gases the carbonate system the nutrient elements paleoceanography

Text book Broecker, W S and Peng, T H Tracers zn the

sea (Lamont Doherty, 1982)

Reference books Horne RA Manne chemistry (Wiley

Intersc1ence, 1969) Parsons, T R , Takahashi M and Hargrave, B

Bzologzcal oceanographic processes, 3rd ed (Pergamon 1984)

R.tley, JP and Chester, R Introductzon to marzne chemistry (Academic 1971)

81317 SURFACE AND SUBSURFACE HYDROLOGY II Dr G Stanger

Umts 3 Level Normally th1rd year but could be taken 1n second year as a follow on topic from 81217 Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requmtes 81217 (Surface and Subsurface Hydrology I) IS essential In addition, some second year maths, geology and computing 1s useful, though not essential

Bu1ld1ng upon the pr1nc1ples discussed 1n 81217, th1S topic takes a more detailed look at the water sciences, 1nclud1ng some of the ma1or water problems which we face locally, nationally and internationally We discuss

195

School of Earth Sciences

some of the technical aspects of environmental hydrology notmg the effects of human interference upon the hydrolog1cal cycle, and the extent to which we are capable of managing our own water resources

Reference books As for 81217

81318 HYDROLOGICAL MEASUREMENTS AND PRACTICE Dr G Stanger

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact A two hour practical session each week Pre reqms1te 81217 (Surface and Subsurface Hydrology I) Co reqms1te 81317

This is designed as a practical 11 hands on 1

supplement to the mam hydrology topic It will be of mterest mamly to those mtendmg to pursue hydrology or hydrologically related careers

Second Year Topics m Marine Geology and Geophysics

83204 EXPLORATION GEOPHYSICS I Dr A White

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite None

Pr1nc1ples of geophysical methods used in study of the earth s crust and 1n mineral exploration using gravity res1stlv1ty and I P methods

Text book Telford, W M Geldhart L P , Shernff R E ,

and Keys DA Applied geophysics (Cambndge U P , 1976)

Reference books Dobrm MD Introductzon to geophysical

prospecting, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1976) Grant, F S and West, G F Interpretatzon

196

theory zn applied geophysics (McGraw Hill 1965)

Gnffzths, D H and Kmg, R F Applied geophysics for engzneers and geologists (Pergamon 1965)

Keller G V and Fnschknecht F C Electrical methods zn geophysical prospecting (Pergamon 1970)

Orellana, E and Mooney HM Master tables and curves for vertical electrzcal soundzng over layered structures (Intersc1enc1a, 1966)

Parasn1s, D S Mznzng geophyszcs 2nd ed (Elsevier, 1973)

Van Nostrand, R and Cook I( Interpretation of reszstzvzty data, Geological survey Profess10nal paper 499 (U S Govt Pnntmg Offzce, 1966)

83218 CONTINENTAL DRIFT AND PLATE TECTONICS Dr F H Chamalaun

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week

The topic will develop a dynamic view of the h1stoncal development of the earth s crust and discuss processes in the upper mantle which are responsible for continental dnft, ocean floor spreading and plate tectonics Its emphasis will be on the geophysical evidence oba1ned from se1sm1c1ty marine magnetic anornahes, heat flow, gravity and isostasy and explosion seismology

Reference books Bott, M H P The znterzor of the earth, 2nd ed

(Arnold 1982) Gass I G , Smith, P j and Wilson, R C L

Understanding the earth, 2nd ed (Artemis, 1972)

Hart, P J and Belousov, V V The earth's crust and upper mantle (American Geophysical Umon, 1969)

Jacobs, j A Russell, RD and Tuzo Wilson j Physics and geology, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1974)

Talwan1, M et al Island arcs, deep sea trenches and back arc baszns (American Geophysical Union, 1977)

Toksoz, M N , Uyeda S and Francheteau j Oceanzc rzdges and arcs (Elsevier, 1980)

Wylhe, P j The dynamic earth (Wiley, 1971)

83297 EXPLORATION GEOPHYSICS LABORATORY IA DrA White

Units 2 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 afternoons per week Pre reqmsites Normally 77102 Physics 60130 Mathematics I 81100 Earth Sciences I Co requ!Slte 83204 Exploratrnn Geophysics I

Analysis and interpretation of geophysical survey data acqmred by methods covered m 83204 Exploratrnn Geophysics I model experiments f1eld demonstrations and computer modelling techniques

Reference books As for 83204 Exploratrnn Geophysics I

84205 SEDIMENTARY ENVIRONMENTS AND BASIN ANALYSIS Professor C C von der Borch

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqms1te 81100 Earth Sciences I

Tectonic aspects of sedimentary basin formation, modern depos1tlonal systems 1nterpretat1on of ancient sedimentary environments using modern analogues, chemical, m1neralog1cal and textural aspects of modern and ancient sediments, sedimentary structures and hydrauhcs, strat1graph1c nomenclature, introductory se1sm1c stratigraphy, integration of above factors 1n basin studies, economic mineral deposits 1n sediments

Text books Leeder, M R Sedimentology, processes and

products (Allen & Unwm 1982) Walker, R G Facies models (Geological

Associatrnn of Canada, 1979)

Reference books Blatt, H Sedimentary petrology (Freeman

1982) Collinson, J D and Thompson D B

Sedimentary structures, 2nd ed (Unwm Hyman, 1989)

Lewis D W Practical sedimentology (Hutchmson Ross 1984)

Earth Sczences

Petll1ohn F j and Potter, P E Atlas and glossary of prunary sedimentary structures (Sprmger Verlag 1964)

Reading H G Sedimentary environments and facies, 2nd ed (Blackwell 1986)

84213 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY Dr A E Grady

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te 81100 Earth Sciences I Recommended cognate topic 84282 Structural Geology Laboratory

Deformation of rocks, description and class1f1cation of cleavages, faults and 101nts and folds mterpretat10n of geological structures studies of classical deformed regions

Text book Hobbs B E Means, W D and W1lhams P F

An outline of structural geology (Wiley, 1976)*

Reference books Badgley P C Structural and tectonic

principles (Harper & Row, 1965) Davis, G H Structural geology of rocks and

regzons (Wiley, 1984) Denms, JG Structural geology (Ronald,

1972) Sitter, LU de Structural geology, 2nd ed

(McGraw Hill 1964) Hills, E S Elements of structural geology,

2nd ed (Chapman & Hall, 1972)* Spencer E W Introductzon to the structure

of the earth (McGraw Hill, 1969)* Spry, A Metamorphic textures (Pergamon,

1969)* Verhoogen, j et al The earth (Holt, Rinehart

& Wmston 1970)

84221 PETROLOGY Dr M J Abbott

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 81100 Earth Sciences I

197

School of Earth Sciences

Act1v1ty and evolution of magmas, charactenshcs and class1flcahons of igneous rocks and some common assoc1at1ons in the field, contact and regional metamorphism -processes reactions and products metamorphic fac1es and fac1es series, synthetic s1hcate systems - binary and simple ternary­and d.pphcat1ons to petrogenes1s

Reference books Best, M G Igneous and 1netanzorphzc

petrology (Freeman 1982) Cox, K G , Bell, J D and Pankhurst, R J The

mterpretatwn of igneous rocks (Allen & Unwm, 1979)*

Ehlers E G The mterpretatwn of geological phase diagrams (Freeman, 1972)

Ernst, W G Petrolog1c phase equilibria (Freeman, 1976)

Gillen C Metamorphic geology (Unwm Hyman 1982)

Hall, A Igneous petrology (Longman Sc1entil!c & Technical, 1987)*

M1yash1ro, A Metamorphism and metamorphic belts (Allen & Unwm, 1973)

Turner, F J Metamorphic petrology, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1981)

Verhoogen, J et al The earth (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston 1970)

Wmkler, H G F Petrogenesis of metamorphic rocks 5th ed (Sprmger Verlag 1979)

84281 OPTICAL MINERALOGY AND PETROGRAPHYLABORATORY Dr M ! Abbott

Units 4 Level Second year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 3 hours laboratory work per week plus 9 lectures during the first semester and 3 hours laboratory work per week durmg the second semester Pre reqms1te 81100 Earth Sciences I Co reqms1te 84221 Petrology

Theory and microscopic study of opl!cal properties of minerals and study of igneous sedimentary and metamorphic rock types in thin section

Text books Deer, WA, Howie, RA and Zussman J An

introduction to the rock formzng mznerals (Longman 1971) •

198

Jones, NW and Bloss, FD Laboratory manual for optical mineralogy (Burgess 1980)*

Mackenzie, W S and Guilford, C Atlas of rock forming 1n1nerals zn thzn sectzon (Halsted, 1980)*

Reference books Bloss F D Introductwn to the methods of

optical crystallography (Holt Rmehart & Wmston, 1961)

Dana, JD and Hurlbut, CS Manual of mineralogy, 19th ed (Wiley, 1977)

Mackenzie, W S et al Atlas of igneous rocks and their textures (Longman, 1982)*

Nockolds SR et al Petrology for students (Cambridge UP, 1978)*

Wahlstrom, E E Optical crystallography, 5th ed (Wiley, 1979)

Williams, H et al Petrography, 2nd ed (Freeman, 1982)

84282 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY LABORATORY Dr A E Grady

Umts 2 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre reqmsite 81100 Earth Sciences I Co requisite 84213 Structural Geology

Geometnc techniques 1n structural geology and prmciples of geological map interpretation

Reference books Compton RR Geology m the field (Wiley,

1985)* Phzlhps, F C Use of stereographic pro1ectwn

m structural geology, 3rd ed (Arnold 1971) Ragan, D M Structural geology, 3rd ed

(Wiley, 1985)*

84284 OPTICAL MINERALOGY LABORATORY A Dr M ! Abbott

Units 2 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours laboratory work per week plus 9 lectures Pre reqms1te 81100 Earth Sciences I

Theory and m1croscop1c study of optical properties of minerals

Text book Jones, NW and Bloss, FD Laboratory

manual for optzcal mineralogy (Burgess, 1980)*

Reference books Bloss, FD Introductwn to the methods of

optzcal crystallography (Holt Rmehart & Wmston, 1961)

Wahlstrom, E E Optzcal crystallography, 5th ed (Wzley, 1979)

84297 GEOLOGICAL FIELD TECHNIQUES Dr A E Grady and Dr M J Abbott

Umts 4 Level Second year Duration First semester and vacation Class Contact 27 hours during first semester and 10 days during vacation Pre requisite 81100 Earth Sciences I

Instruction in the techniques of geological mapping involving air photo interpretation as well as field exercises The vacation component takes the form of a field camp based on a comprehensive geological mappmg exercise in a locality remote from Adelaide 1n the Flmders Ranges or the Olary D!Slrzct Followmg the camp a geological report and map will be prepared for assessment

Reference books Allum JAE Photogeology and regwnal

mappzng (Pergamon 1966) Bureau of Mineral Resources Photo

znterpretatzon for survey and exploratzon geologists (Australian Mmeral Foundat10n, 1979)

Compton, RR Geology zn the field (Wiley, 1985)"

Lahee, F H Fzeld geology, 6th ed (McGraw Hill, 1969)

Ludbrook NH A guzde to the geology and mzneral resources of South Australia (Dept of Mmes and Energy S Aust, 1980)*

Miller V C Photogeology (McGraw Hill, 1961)

Parkm L W ed Handbook of SA geology (Geo! Survey of SA 1969)

von Bandai, HF Aerogeology (Gulf, 1962)

Earth Sciences

Second Year Topics m Meteorology and Oceanography

82216 APPLIED ASTRONOMY Dr RA D Byron Scott

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre-requ!Siles 77102 PhySlcs I and 60130 Mathematics I

Reference systems in astronomy and geophysics, spherical trigonometry, elementary terrestrial navigation the celestial sphere, astronav1gation

Reference books Blance ed Norze's nautical tables (Imray

Laune None & Wilson, 1977) Nautical almanac for the year 1991

(H M S 0 , 1989) Smart WM Textbook on spherical

astronomy, 6th ed (Cambndge UP, 1977) U S Naval Oceanographic Office Szght

reductzon tables for marine navigatzon, vols 1 4 (US Govt Prmtmg Office, 1970)

88217 PLANETARY SCIENCE Dr J A T Bye and Professor G W Lennon

Umts 3 Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requisites Perm1ss1on of the lecturers

Orbits, the motion of natural and art1f1c1al bodies m the planetary system Results of theoretical and observational studies on the planets and their atmospheres

Reference books Van de Kamp, P Elements of astromechanzcs

(Freeman 1964) Jones, B W The solar system (Pergamon, 1984)'

82218 OCEANOGRAPHY Dr f A T Bye and Professor G W Lennon

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requ1s1tes Normally studies in Part I of the B Sc degree or the Associate Diploma of Applied Science

199

School of Earth Sciences

Survey of problems and methods of oceanography c1rculahon generation and statistics of ocean waves tides and their analysis Mean sea level Conservation equations Surface exchange and the heat budget

Text books Natural history of the Adelaide regzon

(Royal Soc of SA, 1976)* Pond, S and Pickard G L Introductory

dynamical oceanography, 2nd ed (Pergamon 1983)"

Reference books D1etr1ch, G General oceanography

(Intersc1ence, 1963) Sverdrup, H U et al The oceans (Prenltce

Hall 1963) Von Arx, W S lntroductzon to physical

oceanography (Addison Wesley, 1964)

82219 METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATOLOGY Dr RA D Byron Scott

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqmsites 77102 Physics I and 60130 Mathemaltcs I

Thermodynanucs of dry air, water substance and moist air Construction and use of thermodynamic diagrams The hydrostaltc equation pressure height formulae and thickness of an 1sobanc layer Stab1hty of a stratified environment Geostroph1c gradient and cyclostroph1c flow The thermal wmd and its appltcahon to d1fferent1al chart analysis The contmuum hypothesis The contmmty equation, horizontal divergence and vertical velocity, pressure tendency Circulation and vort1c1ty, with apphcat1ons to synoptic meteorology

Reference books Hidy, GM The wznds (Van Nostrand, 1967)* Mcintosh, D H and Thom, AS Essentwls of

meteorology (Wykeham 1969)* Petterssen S Introduction to meteorology,

3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1969)*

200

82207 THE WEATHER FORECAST I Mr W Grace

Umts 1 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 lecture per week Pre reqms1te 82219 Meteorology and Chmatology

Observational techniques of synoptic meteorology Synoptic messages and the organisation of the global meteorological network The graphical representation of synoptic data The lectures wt!! be open ended 1n duration and by their nature will invite student part1c1patton

82291 METEOROLOGICAL, OCEANOGRAPHICAL AND HYDROLOGICAL MEASUREMENTS Dr f M Bennett

Umts 3 Level Second year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 3 hours per week Co requ!Sltes 81217 Surface and Subsurface Hydrology I, 82218 Oceanography, 82219 Meteorology and Chmatology

An introductory programme of laboratory and field measurements with emphasis on the illustrat10n of phySical prmc1ples

Reference book Schwerdtfeger P Physzcal principles of

micro meteorologzcal measurements (Elsevier 1976)

82271 MARINE SCIENCE LABORATORY I Dr f M Bennett and Dr I A T Bye

Umts 1 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours (av) per week Co requts1te 82218 Oceanography

A programme of laboratory and field measurements involving the oceanographic component of topic 82291

Third Year Topics m Marine Geology and Geophysics

83309 EARTHQUAKE SEISMOLOGY AND THE EARTH'S INTERIOR Dr SA Greenhalgh

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre requ1S1tes Normally 60130 Mathema!Ics I 77102 Physics I and 81100 Earth Sciences I

The principal sub1ect matter is earthquake seismology, with the fmal 20 per cent devoted to structure and physical properties of Earth s deep interior Main topics are geological effects of earthquakes se1sm1c waves in the earth, earthquake seismogram interpretation, source mechanisms, earthquake pred1ct1on and control, structure and constltut1on of the Earth's crust mantle and core

Text book Bath M Introductzon to seismology 2nd ed

(Birkhauser 1979)

Reference books Bolt, B Earthquakes (Freeman, 1988) Bott, M H The znterzor of the earth, 2nd ed

(Arnold, 1982) Hodgson, J Earthquakes and earth structure

(Prentice Hall 1964) Jacobs j A Russel, RD and Wilson J T

Physics and geology 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1974)

Richter C F Elementary seismology (Freeman 1958)

83311 SEISMIC EXPLORATION Dr SA Greenhalgh

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmsztes Normally 60130 Mathema!Ics I 77102 Physics I 81100 Earth Sciences I

Elementary se1sm1c wave theory, refraction se1sm1c explorat1on reflection se1sm1c exploration The topic covers baste pnnc1pals,

Earth Sciences

field methods, instrumentation, data processing and se1sm1c interpretation and applications

Text book Dobrm, MD and Savit, CH Introductzon

to geophysical prospecting 4th ed (McGraw Hill 1988)

Reference books Fitch, A Sezsmzc reflectzon znterpretatzon

(Gebruder Borntraeger, 1976) Helbig, l( and Tre1tel, S , eds Sezsmzc

exploration, vols 1 19 (Geophysical Press, 1984)

Mooney, HM Handbook of engzneerzng geophysics (Bison Instruments 1976)

Musgrave, A Sezsmzc refraction prospecting (Society ofExploration Geophysicists, 1967)

Sengbush R L Seismic exploratwn methods (Prentice Hall, 1988)

Sheriff R E Seismic stratigraphy (International Human Resources Development Corporation, 1980)

Sheriff, RE and Geldhart, L P Exploratzon seismology, vol I and II (Cambridge UP 1982)

Wakers, K H Reflectzon seismology (Wiley 1987)

83312 EXPLORATION GEOPHYSICS II Dr F H Chamalaun

Units 3 Level Thlfd year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requisite 83204 Exploration Geophysics I

Contmuat10n of 83204 Interpretat10n of magnetic anomaltes and electro magnetics

Text book Telford, W M Geldhart L P Sheriff, R E

and Keys DA Applied geophysics (Cambridge UP 1976)

Reference books Grant, F S and West, S F Interpretatwn

theory zn applied geophysics (McGraw Hill 1965)

Keller, G V and Frischknecht F C Electrical methods zn geophysical prospecting (Pergamon, 1970)

201

School of Earth Sciences

83394 EXPLORATION GEOPHYSICS LABORATORY II Dr F H Chamalaun

Umts 2 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 afternoon per week Pre requ1s1tes 83312 Exploration Geo physics II and some computing expenence

Interpretation techniques 1n aeromagnehc surveying and E M surveying

Reference books As for 83312

83395 SEISMIC LABORATORY Dr SA Greenhalgh

Umts 2 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 afternoon per week Pre reqmsite 83204 Explorat10n Geophysics I Co requ1s1te 83311 Se1sm1c Exploration

Analysis and 1nterpretat1on of se1sm1c refraction and reflection data model experiments, field demonstrations computer apphcat1ons case h1stones

Reference books As for 83311 Seismic Explorat10n

84312 PETROGENESIS LABORATORY Dr M J Abbott and Dr A E Grady

Umts 2 Level Third year Durahon First semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes 84281 Optical Mineralogy and Petrography Laboratory, 84213 Structural Geology, 84221 Petrology

The study in hand specimen and in thin section of selected igneous and metamorphic rock suites, with emphasis on the interpretation of m1neralog1es and textures, and their importance 1n the deduction of the history and tectonics of the areas concerned

Text books As for 84281

Reference books Joplm, GA A petrography of Australian

igneous rocks, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1971)

202

)oplm GA A petrography of Australian metamorphic rocks (McGraw Hill, 1968)

Spry, A Metamorphic textures (Pergamon 1969)*

Vernon, RH Metamorphic processes (Murby, 1976)

84314 ECONOMIC MINERAL DEPOSITS I DrA E Grady

Not offered m 1991

84324 ECONOMIC MINERAL DEPOSITS II Dr A E Grady

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact Lectures and laboratory classes for 1 day per week Pre requisites 84221 Petrology, 84205 Sedimentary Environmental & Basin Analysis, 84213 Structural Geology, 83204 Explorat10n Geophysics I 83218 Contmental Dnft & Plate Tectonics

Principles of fluid hydrocarbon genesis exploration techniques

Text book North, F K Petroleum geology (Allen &

Unwm, 1985)

Reference book Tissot, B P and Welte D H Petroleum

formatzon and occurrence, 2nd ed (Sprmger Verlag, 1984)

84317 TECTONICS Dr A E Grady

Units 2 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact The eqmvalent of 2 hours per week Pre reqmsites 83218 Contmental Dnft and Plate Tectomcs, 84221 Petrology, 84205 Sedimentary Environments and Basin Analysis and 84213 Structural Geology Co requisite 84312 Petrogenesis Laboratory

A topic 1nvest1gatlng palaeotecton1cs (as evidenced by terrestrial geology and geophysics), and modern tectonics (as evidenced by global geology and geophysics) and their possible correlation

Reference books Auboum j Geosynclines (Elsevier 1965) Badgley, P C Structural and tectonzc

principles (Harper & Row, 1965) Bemmelen, R W van Geodynamzc models

(Elsevier, 1972) Cox A Plate tectonzc.;; and geomagnetic

reversals (Freeman 1973)* Le P1chon1 X , Francheteau, J and Bonnin, J

Plate tectonics (Elsevier, 1973) Runcorn, S I{ ed Palaeogeophyszcs

(Academic 1970) Scientific American Continents adrzft

readings (Freeman 1972) Sugimura A and Uyeda S Island arcs, Japan

and zts environs (Elsevier 1973) Tarling D H and Runcorn S I{ Implzcatzons

of continental drzft to the earth sciences (Acadeffilc, 1973)

Wylhe P j The dynamic earth (Wiiey, 1971)

84389 SPECIAL TOPICS IN PALAEONTOLOGY Professor C C von der Barch

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact I lecture per week plus I day field tnp and 9 laboratory sessions Pre or Co requlSltes Normally 84205 Sedimentary Environments and Basin Analysis

Topic involves survey of invertebrate groups of important fossils, evolutionary sequences concepts of index fossils and zones trace fosstls

Reference book Clarkson EN K Invertebrate palaeontology

and evolutzon (Allen & Unwm 1983)

84319 GEOPHYSICAL WELL LOGGING Dr A White

Not offered m 1991

84328 SEDIMENTARY GEOCHEMISTRY DrH H Veeh

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requisite 7 4100 Chemistry I

Earth Sciences

Basic prmciples of chemistry as applied to the solution of sed1mentolog1cal problems equ1hbnum concepts in natural water systems, mineral equ1hbna in sediments, ma1or and minor element cychng through the environment redox processes isotopes in sediments

Text book Drever, j I The geochemistry of natural

waters 2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1988)

Reference books Berner RA Principles of chemical

sedimentology (McGraw Hill, 1971) Garrels, R M and Chrtst, C L Solut1ons1

mznerals and equzlzbrza (Harper & Row 1965)

Stumm W and Morgan, j j Aquatic chemistry 2nd ed (Interscience 1981)

84383 SEDIMENTARY ENVIRONMENTS LABORATORY Professor C C von der Borch

Umts 2 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Co or Pre requ1s1tes 84205 Sedimentary Environments and Basin Analysis 84281 Optical Mineralogy and Petrography Laboratory or 84284 Opllcal Mineralogy Laboratory A

Petrography of modern sediments and ancient sedimentary rocks using grain mounts, thin sections, stained slabs and acetate peels, reservoir properties of sandstones and carbonates, detailed stratigraphic log and factes analysis of a sequence of strata

Text books Adams, A E , Mackenzie 1 W S and

Guilford C Atlas of sedimentary rocks under the microscope (Longman, 1984)

l{err, PF Optical mzneralogy, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1959)

Lewis, D W Practical sedimentology (Hutchmson Ross 1984)

Reference books As for 84205 and Bouma, AH Methods for the study of

sedimentary structures (Wiley, 1969)

203

School of Earth Sciences

84397 MINERALOGICAL AND GEOCHEMICAL METHODS Dr M J Abbott and Dr H H Veeh

Umts 2 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite 74225 lnorgamc Chemistry II

X ray d1ffrachon studies, determ1nahons of mineralogy of mixtures and semi quantitative abundances cell-size and compos1t1onal determ1nations of minerals 1n 1somorphous senes Chemical analysis of sediments and their interpretation

Reference books Carver, RE Procedures in sedzmentary

petrology (Wiley Interscience 1971) Grasshoff, K Methods of seawater analysis

(Verlag Chemie, 1976) Hutchmson, CS Laboratory handbook of

petrographzc technzques (Intersc1ence, 1974)

Jenkins, R and de Vries, J L An zntroductzon to X-ray powder diffractometry (Phihps, n d )'

Thompson, M and Walsh, J N A handbook of inductively coupled plasma spectrometry (Blackie, 1983)

Zussman, J , ed Physical methods zn determznatzve mzneralogy, 2nd ed (Academic, 1977)

84398 GEOLOGICAL FIELD CAMP II Dr A E Grady and Dr M J Abbott

Umts 4 Level Third year Duration Vacation Class Contact 10 days Pre requisite 84297 Geological Field Techniques

This topic mvolves 10 days field geological mappmg and two da;s travellmg to and from the camp area Subsequent laboratory processing of specimens and data is required and the results Wiil be presented In the form of written reports and geological maps

Reference books Compton R R Geology zn the field (Wiley,

1985) Lahee, F H Field geology 6th ed (McGraw

Htll 1969)

204

Third Year Topics m Meteorology and Oceanography

82303 DYNAMICAL OCEANOGRAPHY Dr J AT Bye

Umts 2 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 11/2 lectures per week Pre requmte See footnotes [1], [2]

The governing equations for motion in the sea, transport equations and their use in ocean modelling Theory of oceanic phenomena 1nclud1ng upwelling, estuanne dynamics shelf waves and surface waves and currents

Reference books Bye j AT The flow series of thallasso models

(Selected topics m Atmospheric and Manne Sciences No 6 Flmders Umversity, 1974)

Heath R Lecture notes on the geostroph1c method (Selected topics m Atmospheric and Manne Sciences, No 4 Fhnders Un1vers1ty, 1974)

Pond, S and Pickard, G L Introductory dynamical oceanography 2nd ed (Pergamon, 1983) •

Proudman, J Dynamical oceanography (Methuen 1963)

82305 DYNAMICAL METEOROLOGY Dr RA D Byron Scott

Umts 2 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 11/2 lectures per week Pre requisite See footnotes [1], [2]

Denvatton of the scaled equations for motion on a spherical rotating earth Co ordinate transformations and conformal mappings of large scale flow The vort1c1ty equation and its use 1n simple prognostic models

Text book Holton J R An zntroductzon to dynamic

meteorology, 2nd ed (Academic 1979)

[1] These topics have common pre req111s1tes VIZ normally 60220 Mathematics II and 75221 Electromagnetic Theory I

(2] These topics have a further common pre requ1s1te VIZ 81214 Mechamcs II

82324 SELECTED ASPECTS OF METEOROLOGY, HYDROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY Professor P Schwerdtfeger, Dr/ M Hacker and Professor G W Lennon

Umts 3 Level Third year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 lecture per week

In this topic students are offered reading material to enable them to develop interests in each of the three areas indicated by the lltle Each student is assisted to provide researched talks to the class and prepare essays

82311 MICRO METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATONOMY Professor P Schwerdtfeger and Dr JM Hacker

Umts 2 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 11/2 lectures per week Pre reqmsites See footnote [1]

A d1scuss1on of the energy fluxes atmospheric boundary layer, parametensat1on and modelhng

Text books

m the their

Sellers, W D Physical climatology (Chicago up' 1969)

Schwerdtfeger, P Physical principles of micro meteorological measurements (Elsevier 1976)

Reference books Munn, RE Descriptive mzcro meteorology

(Academic, 1966) Priestley CH B Turbulent transfer m the

lower atmosphere (Chicago UP 1965) Sutton, 0 G Micro meteorology (McGraw

Hill, 1953)

82312 RADIATION IN THE ATMOSPHERE Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Umts 2 Level Thud year Duration First semester Class Contact 11/2 lectures per week Pre reqms1tes See footnote [1]

Earth Sciences

A course deahng with solar and infra red radiation, atmosphenc attenuation processes and terrestrial albedos

Reference books Kondratyev, K Ya Radiatwn m the

atmosphere (Academic 1969) Paltndge, G W and Platt C M R Radiative

processes zn meteorology and climatology (Elsevier, 1976)

Robinson, N Solar radiation (Elsevier 1966) Schwerdtfeger P Physical principles of

micro meteorologzcal measurements (Elsevier 1976)

82317 THE WEATHER FORECAST II Mr W Grace

Umts 1 Level Thud year Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 lecture per week 1

Pre reqmsites 82219 Meteorology and Climatology 82207 The Weather Forecast I

A d1scuss1on of basic forecasting methods with particular reference to southern Australia The lectures will be open ended m durat10n and by their nature w1ll 1nv1te student parhc1pat1on

82321 PHYSICAL OCEANOGRAPHY Dr/ A T Bye and Professor G W Lennon

Umts 2 Level Thud year Duration First semester Class Contact 11/2 lectures per week Pre reqms1tes 82218 Oceanography

Physical properties of sea water and small scale processes in the ocean, and aspects of the general circulation

Reference books Kraus EB Atmosphere ocean mteractwn

(Oxford Clarendon, 1973) Krause G Lecture notes on physical

properties of sea water (Selected topics m Atmospheric and Manne Sc1encec;, No 2, Flmders Umvers1ty, 1973)

[1] These topics have common pre requisites viz normally 60220 Mathematics II and 75221 Electromagnetic Theory I

205

School of Earth Sciences

82323 EXPERIMENTAL SKILLS IN METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY Professor G W Lennon and Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Units 3 Level Third year Duration In vacation Class Contact Ansmg from School programmes, research contacts with national oceanographic 1nst1tutes and with organ1sat1ons running 1nternahonal or national research programmes 1n meteorology, attempts wdl be made to provide fac11ities on research vessels or to run off campus meteorolog1cal stations at which students can perform 1ntens1ve oceanograph1cal or meteorolog1cal field work under close academic superv1s1on for periods of a week or more Pre requ1s1te Normally successful completion of Programme E21 Co requisite Enrolment in Programme E31

The profess1onal practices of physical oceanography and meteorology require a broadly based experience of manne affairs 1n the former case and of diverse techniques for observmg the atmosphere m the latter Though most observational techniques are introduced 1n lecture and laboratory sessions, some can only be learnt thoroughly m an off shore or off campus operational environment The opportunity offered here 1s to gain such experimental skills whilst contnbuttng to an operational research programme Where possible the student Wiii be reqmred to analyse some of the data acquired and to prepare a report on that analysis A subs1d1ary aim is to gain experience of a wide range of nautJ.cal or meteorolog1cal skills 1nclud1ng the apprec1at1on, through use, of modern sophisticated manne instrumentation in the oceanographic case, and of up to date airborne instrumentation 1n the atmospheric case

82391 METEOROLOGICAL AND OCEANOGRAPHICAL MEASUREMENTS II Dr f M Bennett and Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Umts 9 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact 9 hours per week

206

Co requ1s1tes 82303 Dynamical Ocean ography, 82305 Dynamical Meteorology, 82311 Micrometeorology and Chmatonomy, 82312 Radiat10n m the Atmosphere 82321 Physical Oceanography

Experiments and analytical methods 1n meteorology and oceanography 1n the laboratory and m the field

Text book Schwerdtfeger P Physical principles of

mzcro meteorological measurements (Elsevier 1976)

82371 MARINE SCIENCE LABORATORY II Dr f M Bennett, Dr f A T Bye and Professor G W Lennon

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 9 hours per week Co reqmsite 82321 Physical Oceanography

This laboratory complements the lectures of 82321 Physical Oceanography, and mtroduces the student to the principles and usage of modern physical oceanographic instrumentation and the remote sensing of the marine environment

Honours Interdzsczplznary Topzcs zn Earth Sczences

81403 GLACIOLOGY Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 11/2 hours per week and supplementary study

The study of snow and ice mcludmg the physical properties and geographical distribution of snowfields glaciers, icebergs and sea ice

Reference book Paterson, W SB The physics of glaciers,

2nd ed (Pergamon 1969)

81404 ACQUISITION AND ANALYSIS OF SATELLITE SENSED IMAGE DATA IN THE EARTH SCIENCES Professor G W Lennon

Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te A knowledge of FORTRAN

Introduction to satellite tracking and tracking aids Data transm1ss1on formats analog/ d1g1tal, APT, HRPT, etc Pre processing techniques rad1ometr1c correct1on, geometrical correction, destr1p1ng, etc Analysis techniques histogram analysis and stretching boundary detection, gradient operators, image series analysis The course 1s intended for Honours students who perceive a need or interest in Satelltte Remote Sensing with particular reference to the marine and meteorolog1cal d1sc1pllnes The course will focus on image processing and enhancement techniques using the MC 68000 system developed by the School of Earth Sciences and the generation of image series from data obtamed by the Schools GMS rece1v1ng station

Honours Topics m Manne Geology and Geophysics

83416 GEOPHYSICAL DATA PROCESSING Dr SA Greenhalgh

Level Honours/Masters Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes 83311 Se1sm1c Exploration, 60201 Several Vanable Calculus 60202 Lmear Algebra and 60203 Elementary D1fferentral Equatrons

The intent ofth1s topic is to provide theoretical basis by which to understand and use modern d1g1tal data processmg technrques m geophysics, based on the Fourier and Z transform Topics include hnear systems theory convolution, correlation and spectral analysis, samphng theory, d1g1tal filters, Fast Fourier transform deconvolution fan filtering array analysis image formation and spatial

Earth Sczences

ftltering, data inversion, apphcat1ons to seismology, gravity magnetics and optics

Reference books Bracewell R The Fourier transform and its

applicatzons, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1978) Cooper, G R and McG1llem, C Probalzstzc

methods of szgnals and systems analyszs 2nd ed (Holt, Rmehart and Wmston 1986)

I<anasew1ch, E Tzme sequence analysis zn geophysics, 3rd ed (Alberta UP, 1981)

Oppenheim, AV and Schafer R W D1g1tal signal processing (Prentice Hall, 1975)

Robinson, E and Tr1etel, S Geophyszcal signal analysis (Prentrce Hall, 1981)

Y1lmaz, 0 Se1smzc data processing (Society of Exploratron Geophys1c1sts, 1987)

83417 THEORETICAL SEISMOLOGY Dr SA Greenhalgh

Level Honours/Masters Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre requisites 60201 Several Variable Calculus, 60202 Lmear Algebra 60203 Elementary D1fferent1al Equatrons and 63311 Complex Analysis

This topic 1s designed as a comprehensive mtroductron to the mathematical theory underlymg elastic wave propagatron with applications to earthquake and exploration seismology Students completing the course should be able to understand much of the current literature in theoretical seismology, and to carry out 1nd1v1dual investigation Topics include the wave equation and vanous forms of solution body wave theory, ray acoustics, surface wave and normal mode theory elastic waves 1n layered media plates and rods, seismometer theory, lamb problem, propagation of waves 1n absorptive media, and synthetic seismogram computations

Reference books Achenbach, JD Wave propagatzon rn elastic

solids (North Holland, 1984) Aki, K and Richards, P G Quantitative

seismology theory and method-. (Freeman, 1980)

Bath, M Mathematzcal aspects of sezsmology (Elsevier, 1968)

Ewmg WM Jardetzky, W and Press, F Elastzc waves in layered medza (McGraw Hrll, 1957)

207

School of Em th Sciences

Morse, P and Ingard, I{ Theoretical acoustics (McGraw Hill, 1968)

Pilant, W Elastzc waves zn the earth (Elsevier, 1980)

Redwood, M Mechanical waveguzdes (Pergamon, 1960)

83419 CONCEPTS OF SEISMIC STRATIGRAPHY Professor C C von der Barch and Mr A Mitchell

Umts 3 Level Honours Duration Second semester Class Contact Eqmvalent of 2 lectures per week, 1nclud1ng practical work Pre requ1s1tes 84205 Sedimentary EnVIron ments and Basin Analysis, 83311 Se1sm1c Exploration

Advanced fac1es models, fac1es geometnes, se1sm1c sequence analysis, se1sm1c fac1es analysis, strat1graph1c apphcat1ons to hydrocarbon exploration

Reference books As for 84205 and Sheriff, RE Seismic stratigraphy

(lnternat1onal Human Resources Development Corporat10n, 1983)

ADVANCED ASPECTS OF GEOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICS Head of Discipline

Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact Normally 2 hours per week per topic

Students will normally take one or more of the followmg topics

83410 Geomagnetic Induct10n Phenomena (Dr A White)

83415 The Earths Magnellc Field (Dr F H Chamalaun)

84401 Petrofabrics and Experimental Deformat10n (Dr A E Grady)

84403 Advanced Mmeralogy and Petrogenesis (Dr M f Abbott)

84406 Principles of Structural Analysis (Dr A E Grady)

208

84404 CURRENT ASPECTS OF MARINE GEOCHEMISTRY DrH H Veeh

Level Honours Duration First semester Class Contact 1 hour per week combined with supplementary reading of recent contnbutions to the hterature

Further development of ideas introduced at the Second and Third Year level, with emphasis on the marine environment Areas of study to be discussed include chemical models of the ocean, hydrosphere lithosphere 1ntetactlons chemical evolution of oceans and atmosphere, quaternary geochronology and isotope climatology

83418 BASIN TECTONICS Dr F H Chamalaun

Level Honours Duration By arrangement Class Contact 3 hours per week

Sedimentary basins are fundamental geological structures and the host environment for 011, gas and coal deposits The course will examine modern hypotheses concerning the physical mechanisms of basin formation, and the effects of temperature, pressure and stress on the basin's history

Reference material will be made available during the course

Honours Topzcs zn Meteorology, Hydrology and Oceanography

ADVANCED ASPECTS OF METEOROLOGY

Level Honours Duration Full year Class Contact An average of 2 hours per week per topic per semester

A further development of sub1ects mtroduced at the Third Year Level, which usually includes

82401 Atmospheric Circulat10n Theory (Dr R A D Byron Scott)

82402 Atmospheric Development Theory (Dr R A D Byron Scott)

82403 Atmospheric Instability Theory (Dr RAD Byron Scott)

82404 Boundary Layer Meteorology (Dr f M Hacker)

and often includes special topics given by v1s1tlng lecturers and other staff members

ADVANCED ASPECTS OF HYDROLOGY

Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact An average of 2 hours per week per topic per semester

81402 Hydrology Honours Topic (Drs G Stanger and f M Hacker)

81415 Groundwater Modellmg (Dr J AT Bye)

ADVANCED ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY

Level Honours Duration Full year Class Contact An average of 2 hours per week per topic per semester

Areas of study m oceanography are given by v1s1hng lecturers or staff members In any one year, three of the followmg four topics will be offered

82405 Ocean Circulation Theory (Dr J AT Bye)

82406 Problems m Geophysical Fluid Dynamics (Dr f A T Bye)

82407 Turbulence (Dr f A T Bye) 82408 Sea Level and Tides (Professor

G W Lennon)

82409 SPHERICAL ASTRONOMY Dr R A D Byron Scott

Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite Only available to those who have not taken 82216 Applied Astronomy

The syllabus is the same as for 82216 Applied Astronomy, but candidates tackle harder homework problems and sit a more comprehensive examination

Earth S czences

82410 AERONAUTICS FOR METEOROLOGISTS Dr RAD Byron Scott Dr f M Hacker and Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requ1s1tes 82291 Meteorological Oceanographical and Hydrological Measurements 82219 Meteorology and Climatology (with a grade of B or better)

This is an optional topic for students contemplating an av1at1on career or use of the FIAMS aircraft for meteorological research

Theory and prac!!ce of barometric altimetry radar alttmetry and vanometry Computation of True Air Speed from Rectified Air Speed, various methods of measunng aucraft heading Aircraft pos1t1on fixing, ground speed and track by visual, VOR/NDB, OMEGA/VLF satelhte and inertial techniques Honzontal wmd velocity, TAS/HDG & GS/TRACK m air navigation w1ndf1nd1ng with a fully instrumented aircraft Aeronautical determination of vertical air velocity with special reference to the 5 hole-probe/Collms AHS techniques, computation of w and its use 1n flux measurements Theory of pressure pattern flymg

Reference books Bureau of Meteorology Manual of

meteorology Part 2 Aviation meterology (AGPS 1977)

Dommasch, D 0 , Sherby, S S and Connolly, T F Airplane aerodynamzcs 4th ed (Pitman, 1967)

I<ayton, M and Fned, WR eds Avionzcs navzgatzon systems (John Wiley, 1969)

Meteorological Office Handbook of avzatzon meteorology, 2nd ed (HMSO, London 1971)

Millicer H Aerodynamzcs for soarzng pilots (Glidmg Club of Victoria 1976)*

Miine Thomson, L M Theoretzcal aero dynamzcs 4th ed (Dover, 1973)

Welch, A & L and Irvmg, F New soarzng pzlot 3rd ed (John Murray 1977)

209

School of Education

The syllabuses for topics in each programme offered within the School of Education are set out in terms of the current degree and diploma regulations which are described in the schedules to Statute 7 .1 Bachelors Degrees and Diplomas and other Academic Awards and Statute 7.3 Masters Degrees. Statute 7.4 describes the regulations concerning the degree of Doctor of Philo-sophy. Students enrolled in programmes leading to the degree of Bachelor of Education will need to consult the syllabus for the School or Schools within which their non-education topics are chosen.

Students are expected to procure the prescribed edition of set textbooks. Books available in paperback or student editions are indicated by an asterisk (*).

Inquiries concerning programme requirements and requests for variations or for status for studies completed elsewhere should be directed to the Secretary of the School Board in the Registry or to the co-ordinator of the programme within the School. For 1991 the co-ordinators are: Bachelor of Education, Mr D. Hogben Diploma of Education, Dr D. Grundy Educational Administration, Dr P.W. OBrien Special Education, Mr G.M. Cooper Other Higher Degrees in Education, Dr A. Russell Inquiries about specific topics should be directed to the staff member whose name is shown below the topic title.

The assessment methods noted for each topic are those used or proposed in 1990; they will not necessarily be the same in 1991. Students should note that topics that attract small enrolments may be withdrawn despite

being adve1iised in the Calendar. Quotas may also be placed on some topics; students will be notified of such restrictions at the time of enrolment.

Topic entries are arranged so that topics included in the Bachelor of Education and Diploma in Education programmes run in numerical order beginning at topic 53215; Masters level topics are arranged in numerical order beginning after topic 56022.

In the case of Education Studies topics, numbers 53218-53228, 53231, 53235, 53780 53782 and 53784, a selection will be offered as appropriate.

Education in the Bachelor of Arts Degree

Education may be taken as a second major in the Bachelor of Arts Degrees within the Schools of Humanities and Social Sciences. The topics available involve the study of Education as an academic discipline rather than focusing narrowly on teaching methods and curriculum content for teachers. The topics are divided into two strands.

Strand 1: Institutional and social issues and approaches

Topics 53218 Cross-cultural Perspectives in Education

53223 Sociology of Education 53225 Research Methods in

Education 53228 Education and Society in

Australia 53780 Youth in Australia

Set books and Text books are required reading on which students may be tested. Students are expected to have their own copies of all books listed as Set books or Text books; multiple copies of these books will not be available in the Library. Preliminary reading is reading which the student is expected to have completed before the commencement of teaching and on which he or she may at any time be tested. Further reading and Recommended reading, where not otherwise specified, indicate reading which the student is expected to do in the course of studying the Set books. Reference books are books which the student will find useful in the course of studying the topics for which they are specified.

210

53785 History of Austrahan Educat10n Twentieth Century Issues

53920 The Ongms of Modern Education

53922 Educat10n and Society

Strand 2 Ind1v1dual issues and approaches Topics 53222 Psychology and Educat10n

53225 Research Methods m Education

53231 Language m Educat10n 53783 Child Development m

Contemporary Society 53920 The Ongms of Modem

Education 53921 Educat10n and the IndlVIdual

A second ma1or 1n Education 1n a B A consists of a m1n1mum of 33 units compr1s1ng

First year Any first year level topic from the Schools of Humanities or Social Sciences with a m1n1num of 9 units

Second year Topic 53920 and either topic 53922 or 53783

Third year Two topics from 53218, 53223 53225, 53228, 53780, 53785 53921 53922 and 53231, with the requirement that students must spec1ahse in one of the strands by completing a m1n1mum of three topics 1n that strand over second and third year

Pre requ1s1tes Students must complete at least 21 umts of lust year topics at C grade or better to enter topics from the second ma1or 1n Education

Bachelor of Educatzon and Dzploma zn Educatzon Topzcs

53215 CURRICULUM STUDIES I Currtculum Theory Dr K Szmpson

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week seminar every two weeks Pre requ1s1te None

B Ed and Diploma

ThIS topic attempts three tasks

1) the 1dentiflcahon of a set of basic choices which confront any person engaged m the educational process which are basic 1n the sense that they commit the process to aims at a general level

2) the 1den!Jficat10n of those d1sc1plmes/ cons1derat1ons relevant to the rationahsahon and implementation of basic dec1s1ons and

3) the use of (1) and (2) as a framework for the analysis and examination of a specific educational theory to be selected when the topic commences

Reference books Curlis, SJ and Boultwood, M EA A short

history of educatzonal ideas 4th ed (Umvemty Tutonal Pr 1966)

Dearden R F H1rst P H and Peters R S Education and the development of reason (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1973)

Dearden R F The phzlosophy of primary educatzon (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1968)

Hust, PH and Peters RS The logzc of educatzon (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1970)

Lapp, D et al Teachzng and learning (Macmillan, 1975)

Moore T W Educational theory an mtroductwn (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1974)

Phdhps, D C Theories, values and education (Melbourne UP, 1971)

Smith, B 0 Stanley, W and Shores, J Fundamentals of curriculum development, rev ed (Harcourt, Brace & World, 1957) out of pnnt

T1bble, J W ed The study of educatwn (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1966)

Whitehead, A N The aims of educatwn (Free Press, 1967)

53218 CROSS CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES IN EDUCATION Dr G R Teasdale

Umts 6 Level Second or th1rd year, Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 one hour lecture and 1 two hour workshop per week Pre requ1s1te None

In broad focus thIS topic will conSider educational settings where two or more

211

School of Educatwn

cultures are interacting Ma1or themes will include (a) cross cultural encounters and the process of schoohng, some histor1cal perspectives (b) theoretical, practical and methodolog1cal issues in studying cross cultural interaction in educational settlngs1

( c) current research, with particular reference to studies of teaching styles and modes of learning m other cultures and (d) interpersonal and language skills required for effective commun1cahon in cross cultural situations

Reference books Bochner, S , ed Cultures zn contact

(Pergamon, 1982) Bnshn, R W et al Intercultural znteractzons

(SAGE, 1986) Chnst1e M j Aborzgmal perspectives on

teaching and learning the role of language in Aboriginal educatzon (Deakm UP, 1985)

Coombs, H C , Brandl, M M and Snowdon, WE A certazn heritage (CR ES, AN U, 1983)

Harns S Culture and learning (Australian Ins!Itute for Abongmal Studies 1984)

Harns, S Two way Aborzgznal schooling (Abongmal Studies Press 1990)

Harvey B and McGmty S eds Learning my way (Umvers1ty of WA Press 1989)

l{eeffe, I< Aborzgznal education, culture and power (Abongmal Studies Press 1991)

Ritchie, j and Ritchie, j E Growmg up in Polynesia (Allen & Unwm, 1979)

53222 PSYCHOLOGY AND EDUCATION DrM f Lawson

Umts 6 Level Second or third year, Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 seminar/ workshop per week Pre requ1s1te None

The purpose of this topic 1s to examine

(1) the influence of recent cogmt1ve psychology on models of learning, teaching and development

(2) examples of apphcat10ns of this hterature to problems of teaching in classrooms and to self 1nstructton

Purpose (1) will mvolve large group lectures and seminars

212

Purpose (2) will 1nvolve preparation of seminar and workshop reports and a research report Lectures will be concerned with topics 1n the follow1ng areas learning and memory, cogn1t1ve development, complex cogn1tlve behaviour th1nk1ng problem solving motivat1on 1nd1vidual differences 1ntelhgence and ab1htles, instruction

Reference books Biggs J Cognitive processes and educational

practice (ACER 1990) Bjorklund D Children's thinking (Brooks

Cole, 1989) Gage, N L and Berliner, D C Educational

psychology, 4th ed (Houghton Mifflin, 1988)

Donaldson M Children s minds (Fontana, 1978)

Doyle W and Good, T Focus on teaching (Chicago UP 1982)

Flavell, j Cogmtwe development, 2nd ed (Prenl!ce Hall, 1985)

Flower L Problem solving strategies for writing, 2nd ed (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1985)

Gagne, E The cognitive psychology of school learning (Little Brown 1985)

Good, T and Brophy j Educatwnal psychology, 3rd ed (Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1986)

Rohwer, W Rohwer, C and Howe, J Educatzonal psychology (Holt Rinehart & Winston, 1980)

53223 SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION Dr f Maddock

Umts 6 Level Second or third year, Dip Ed Duration First and second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

The aim of the topic will be to md1cate the way 1n which a soc1olog1st views the processes of teaching and learnmg Topics will mclude d1sc1pltne and social control, stratification and the curnculum, and innovations affecting the roles of the teacher and the pupil

Preliminary reading Berger PL and Berger, B Soczology a

bzographzcal approach, 2nd ed (Penguin, 1976)

53224 AESTHETICS AND EDUCATION Dr NA Nilsson

Units 6 Level Second or third year, Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

By 'aesthetics 1s meant ph1losoph1cal aesthetics

This topic 1s concerned centrally with disputes about values, but in particular about what 1s aesthetically good and bad This concern 1s not restncted to what goes on in concert halls and picture galleries Questions about the quality of our hves and the importance of our environment are to some extent aesthetJ.c questions and should be as interesting to thoughtful students of the physical and social sciences as to students of the humanities

This central concern with values 1s used as a pomt of entry mto the general philosophy of aesthetic cntlc1sm In this, such matters as the following are introduced art1st1c representation the nature of works of art meaning and truth 1n the arts, art as the expression of emot1on1 art and morahty creativity The relevance of these questions to formal education in literature and the arts 1s obvious The educational relevance of the topic ts not however restricted to schoohng Fundamental educational questions such as mdoctrmat10n and the development of taste will be discussed Indeed, returnmg to the central concern with values, the whole course could well be focused upon the quest10n If there 1s no disputing about taste can there be anythmg properly called an 'aesthe!Ic education' at all?

Reference books Beardsley, M C Aesthetics (Harcourt Brace,

1958) Brook, D Art and educatzon (Experimental

Art Foundallon, SA, 1985)* Coleman, F J ed Contemporary studies m

aesthetics (McGraw Hill, 1968) Gombnch, EH Art and illuszon (Pha1don,

1962) Goodman, N Languages of art (Oxford U P ,

1969) Lipman, M , ed Contemporary aesthetics

(Allyn & Bacon, 1973)

B Ed and Diploma

Margolis, J ed Philosophy looks at the arts, 3rd ed (Temple U P , 1987)

Osborne, H , ed Aesthetics m the modern world (Thames & Hudson, 1968)

Pole, D Aesthetics, form and emotion (Duckworth, 1983)

Royal lns!Itute of Philosophy Lectures, vol 6, 1971 72 Philosophy and the arts (Macmillan, 1973)

Saw R L Aesthetics an zntroductzon (Macmillan, 1972)

Sparshott F E The structure of aesthetics (Toronto UP, 1963)

Wollhe1m R Art and its ob7ects (Pengum, 1968)

Ziff P Antzaesthetics (Reidel, 1984)

53225 RESEARCH METHODS IN EDUCATION Professor f Anderson

Umts 6 Level Second or tlurd year, Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours of lectures and practicals per week Pre requ1s1te None

The ma1or aim of the topic 1s to become familiar with methods and tools useful for conductmg action research studies Students will examine a range of data gathermg techmques, both 1nd1VIdual and group measures, for assessing achievement, ab1hty and other personality traits, will use b1bhograph1c sources 10 educat10n, 1den1Ify researchable problems and formulate hypotheses, interpret and evaluate published research, develop procedures for collecting analysing, reporting and evaluating data and use the computer as a tool in statistical analysis The topic, which is practically oriented mcludes (a) methods of collectmg data (e g observation, quest1onna1res, 1nterv1ews test instruments, analysts of documents soc10metnc techmques) (b) methods of analysmg data (e g basic descnp!Ive sta!Ist1cs, hypothesis testmg, use of the computer) and (c) methods of reportmg results ( e g evaluating reports in the research hterature presenting f1nd1ngs 1 and report wntmg)

Prachcal sessions involve collecting data and analysmg these m the M1cr0Lab usmg a stahst1cal package for microcomputers, to answer spec1f1c research questions

213

School of Educatzon

Opportuml!es are provided to develop particular interest areas 1n the form of an md!Vldual proiect

It IS recognised that those enrolling m the topic often have a wide range of backgrounds 1n both stat1st1cs and computing ranging perhaps from zero to undergraduate ma1ors 1n the field However the emphasis 1s on methods of research in educational environments not on statistics as such and no preVIous work in statistics or computing is assumed

Text book Kerlmger, F N Foundatzons of behavzoral

research, 3rd ed (Holt Rmehart & Wmston, 1986)*

Reference books Johnson M C A review of research methods

zn educatzon (Rand McNally 1977) l(erhnger, F N Behavioral research a

conceptual approach (Holt, Rinehart and Wmston 1979)*

Moser, C and Kalton, G Survey methods m social investzgatzon (Heinemann, 1971)

Runyon R P and Haber A Fundamentals of behavzoral statistics, 6th ed (Addison Wesley, 1988)

Siegel, S Nonparametric statistics for the behavzoral sciences (McGraw Hill, 1956)*

53227 PHILOSOPHY AND EDUCATION Dr K Simpson

Units 6 Level Second or third year Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

The topic ts primarily directed to intending teachers, but it is open to any student with an interest in wider educational issues Beg1nn1ng with a cons1derahon of the concept of 1ndoctnnatlon, and of various related concepts commonly occurring in educat1on1sts' d1scuss1on the topic will outline a relativ1shc approach to the understandmg of these concepts, and discuss from this standpoint some issues of a very general kind, and some more spec1f1c issues in curricular theory The status of various kinds of claim to knowledge and m particular of value 1udgments, will be a contmumg concern of the topic While the development and apphca!Ion of a relat1V1st1c v1ewpo1nt will be a main purpose in the top1c1

214

a reasonable effort will be made to famzharise students with opposed views No previous knowledge of phdosophy 1s assumed

Prelzmznary readzng Gribble J Introductzon to philosophy of

educatzon (Allyn & Bacon, 1969) Snook, I Indocrznatzon and educatzon

(Routledge & Kegan Paul 1972)

Reference books Dearden, R F , Hirst P H and Peters R S

eds Educatzon and the development of reason (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1973)

Hirst P H Knowledge and the curriculum (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1974)

Scheffler, I Conditzons of knowledge (Scott, Foresman, 1965)*

Snook, I Concepts of zndoctrznatzon (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1972)*

Trigg, R Reason and commztment (Cambridge U P , 1973)

Wilson, BR Ratzonality (Blackwell 1970) Winch, P The zdea of a social science

(Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1958)

53228 EDUCATION AND SOCIETY IN AUSTRALIA An Histor1cal Analysis Dr D Grundy

Units 6 Level Second or third year, Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

The topic will draw material for lectures, tutorials and essays from the issues listed below

1) government poltcy, the power of the state, and the organ1sat1on of 19th century popular education,

2) church schoohng and state aid, 3) secular education and social values,

4) the significance to social class relal!ons of compulsory, free, state provided schooling,

5) curriculum reform in Australian state education systems,

6) social planning and post pnmary schoolmg, 1900 1939,

7) school teachmg as a pubhcly regulated practice,

8) private schoolmg 9) the commg of umversal secondary

educat10n, smce 1939

Reference books Austin, AG Australian educatzon, 1788

1900, 3rd ed (Pitman, 1972)*

Austin A G and Selleck, R) W The Australzan government school 1830 1914 (Pitman, 1975)*

Cleverley, J F and Lawry J F , eds Australzan educatwn in the twentieth century (Longman, 1972)

Fogarty, R Catholic education zn Australia, 1806 1950 (Melbourne UP, 1959)

Gregory, J S Church and state (Cassell 1973)*

Grundy, D Secular compulsory and free (Melbourne UP, 1972)*

Hyams B K et al Learnzng and other thzngs sources towards a social hzstory of educatzon zn South Australza (SA Govt Prmter, 1988)

Hyams, BK and Bessant B Schools for the people? (Longman, 1972)*

Selleck, R) W The new educatzon (Pitman, 1968)

Turney C Pzoneers of Australzan education, vols 1, 2 and 3 (Sydney UP, 1969 1972 and 1983 respectively)

53230 COMPUTERS IN SCHOOLS Professor f Anderson

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours of lectures and practicals per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic serves as an 1ntroductton to the use of computers across the curnculum at all levels from pre school to adult The potential of m1crocomputers 1s explored through a wide range of educational apphcat1ons 1n different sub1ect areas and some of the important issues 1n schools computing are raised No previous computing experience 1s assumed

At the end of the topic the student wdl feel comfortable about the use of microcomputers will use a word processor and spelling checker for ma1or assignments, will be fam1har with a range of educat10nal software and be able to evaluate this software critically, will use computers routinely for storing and retrieving

B Ed and Dzploma

1nformahon using general apphcat1ons software and will have suff1c1ent knowledge of programming to make simple mod1f1cations to programmes for 1nstruct1onal use

Reference books Alcock, D Illustratzng BBC BASIC

(Cambridge UP, 1986)* Anderson ) Computing zn schools an

Australzan perspective (Australian Council for Educational Research 1984) *

Anderson, J , ed Computers zn the language classroom (Australian Reading Assoc1atlon 1985)*

Chandler, D Young learners and the mzcrocomputer (Open UP, 1984)*

Coburn, P , et al Practical guzde to computers zn education, 2nd ed (Addison Wesley, 1985)•

Culbertson ) A and Cunnmgham L L , eds Microcomputers and educatzon (Eighty fifth Yearbook of the Nat10nal Society for the Study of Educat10n), (Chicago UP 1986)

Harns N D C ed World yearbook of education 1985159 educatzon for the new technolog1es (Kogan Page, 1988)

Lathrop A and Goodson, B Courseware zn the classroom selecting organ1z1ng and uszng educatzonal software (Addison Wesley 1988)*

Megarry ) et al , eds World yearbook of educatzon 1982183 computers and educatzon (Kogan Page, 1983)

Kelly, AV Mzcrocomputers and the cumculum (Harper & Row, 1984)'

Oliver, R Us1ng computers zn schools (Heron Computmg, 1986)*

Papert, S Mzndstorms children, computers and powerful zdeas (H'arvester Pr, 1980)*

Poole L Apple Ile users guzde (Osborne McGraw Hill, 1985)'

Wellington,) ) Chzldren, computers, and the cumculum (Harper & Row 1985)

53231 LANGUAGE IN EDUCATION Dr RA Kelly

Umts 6 Level Second or third year, Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqmsite Sal!sfactory complet10n of any of 56017, 56018, 56019, 56011or56020

215

School of Educatzon

The central concern of this topic is with the study of language use especially with those aspects of the field which are of educat10nal interest

Prelzmznary readzng Brown, G and Yule, G Dzscourse analysis

(Cambridge UP, 1983)

53359 ABORIGINAL EDUCATION Dr GR Teasdale

Units 6 Level Thnd year, Dip Ed Class Contact 3 hours per week Duration Second semester Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of 56021 or Third year status m Abongmal Studies maior

The topic provides a detailed analysis of current approaches to the education of Abongmal Australians Areas of study will include (a) Abongmal world view and educalion (b) Models of two way schoolmg ( c) Abong1nal 1n1tiat1ves in education and the independent Abong1nal school movement (d) Homeland schoolmg (e) Issues m the teachmg of English language hteracy and numeracy, (I) Bilingual educat10n and (g) Current research 1n1hahves

Reference books Australian Aboriginal Studies (Penod1cal) Christle, M J Abor1gznal perspectives on

experience and learning (Deakin U P , 1985)

Chnslie, M ) The classroom world of the Aboriginal child (NT Department of Educalion 1985)

Coombs C , Brandl M M and Snowdon WE A certain heritage (CR ES , AN U 1983)

Elhs C) Aboriginal music educatzon for lzvzng (Queensland UP 1985)

Folds, R Whitefella school educatzon and Aborzgznal resistance (Allen & Unw1n, 1985)

Ham1lton, A Nature and nurture (Australian Inslitute for Abongmal Studies, 1981)

Harns S Culture and learning (Australian Institute for Abongmal Studies, 1984)

Harns, S Two way Aborzgznal schooling (Abongmal Studies Press, 1990)

Keeffe K Aborzgmal educatzon, culture and power (Abongmal Studies Press 1991)

216

McG1nty, S and Harvey, B , eds Learning my way (Umvers1ty of WA Press, 1989)

Report of the House of Representatives Select Committee on Aborzgznal Education (AGPS, 1985)

Teasdale, G R and Whitelaw, A) The early childhood educatzon of Aboriginal Australians (ACER, 1981)

The Aboriginal child at school (Penod1cal)

53367 CURRICULUM STUDIES II Arts (m Educat10n) Dr B Mageean

Umts 6 Level B Ed Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week P•e reqms1te 53215 Curnculum Studies I

Classes will mainly attempt to increase 1n both range and depth the students' knowledge of music, visual art, dance and drama The role of the aesthetic pattern of expenence will be considered with questions relating to the theory of knowledge and the nature of the symbol, ntual, mystery and myth Such matters will be mtegrated with psychological and pedagogical perspectives to assist the treatment of the problems of teaching, and the dec1s1ons that teachers must make

Reference books Bryant, P E Perceptzon and understanding

in young children (Methuen, 1974) Douglas, M Natural symbols (Barne &

Rockliff, 1970) Freeman, N H Strategies of representatzon

in young children (Academic 1980) Gombnch, EH Ideals and zdols (Pha1don,

1979) Gombnch, E H Art and illuszon, 5th Ed

(Pha1don, 1980) Gregory R L Eye and brazn, 3rd ed

(We1denfeld & Nicholson 1977) Langer S K Philosophy in a new key

(Harvard U P , 1957) Lonergan, B) F Insight a study of human

understanding, rev ed (Longmans, 1967) Mach, E Contrzbutzons to the analysis of the

sensatzons (Open Court, 1897) Newman, G Teachzng children muszc and

Fundamentals of music method, 3rd ed (WC Brown 1989)

Paynter, J and Ashton, P Sound and silence (Cambridge UP 1970)

Read, H E Educatzon through art (Faber, 1963)

Read, HE Art and educatzon (Cheshire, 1964) Thorpe, j and Thorpe, D Sounds fun

(Hememann Educat10nal, 1988)

53368 CURRICULUM STUDIES II Language and Reading Professor J Anderson

Umts 6 Level B Ed Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite 53215 Curriculum Studies I

The main aim of this topic is to assist the prospecllve primary school teacher to develop sound pedagogical strategies 1n the teaching of reading and writing as developmental processes, based upon a sound knowledge of theory and research

More specific aims are to develop an understanding of the nature of the processes of reading and writing, to be aware of factors that influence reading comprehension and comprehens1b1hty of text to gain some fam1har1ty with recent research and developments 1n the language area, to introduce some of the approaches to the teachmg of readmg and the language arts to develop an awareness of problems that students experience and how to help those with learning d1ff1culttes, and to use micro computers and examine the range of educational software available in order to gauge how the new technologies may contribute to learning and teaching

Set book Wmch, G and Hoogstad V eds Teaching

reading a language experience approach (Macmillan, 1985)

Reference books Anderson, J and Lovett, K eds Teaching

reading and wrztzng to every chzld (Australian Readmg Assoc , 1983)

Chandler, D and Marcus S Computers and literacy (Open U P 1985)

Chapman, L j Reading development and coheszon (Hememann 1983)

johns, j L Handbook for remedzatzon of readzng dzffzcultzes (Prentice Hall, 1986)

B Ed and Dzploma

Knott R The Englzsh department zn a changing world (Open U P , 1985)

Pearson, PD and Johnson DD Teaching readzng comprehenszon (Holt Rinehart & Wmston, 1982)

Robinson, B Mzcrocomputers and the language arts (Open U P , 1985)

Smith F Understanding readzng a psycho lznguzstzc analyszs of readzng and learning to read, 4th ed (Holt, Rinehart & Wmston, 1988)

Trelease, j The read aloud handbook (Pengum, 1986)

53369 CURRICULUM STUDIES II Mathematics Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 5 Level B Ed Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite 53215 Curriculum Studies I

The aim of this course 1s to develop 1n prospective primary school teachers an informed understanding of the mathematics that comprises the primary mathematics curri culum, current knowledge about learning 1n mathematics, and an ab1hty to plan appropriate and effective classroom learning experiences in primary school mathematics

The course will focus on

1 Mathematzcs (a) as a curriculum outhne for use in

schools (b) as a means for formulatmg and solvmg

problems (c) as a meaningful and powerful means

of commun1cahon (d) as a context m which to develop

reasoning skills

2 Mathematical thznkzng Students will be introduced to recent research fmdmgs about thmkmg and learning 1n mathematics

3 Classroom practzce Classroom practice 1n mathematics will be studied 1n relation to (a) methodologies developed from

research findings about thinking and learning

217

School of Educatwn

(b) the use of materials to represent mathematical concepts and processes

(c) the use of technology (d) relevance of social issues

Reference books Crmkshank, D E and Sheffield, L J Teaching

mathematzcs to elementary school chzldren (Memll, 1988)

Educatrnn Department of South Austraha Mathematics currzculum guzdelznes receptwn to year 7 + (1980)

Hughes, M Children and number diffzculties in learning mathematics (Blackwell 1987)

Liebeck P How children learn mathematics (Pehcan 1988)

Reys, RE , Suydam, M N and Lmdqmst, M M Helping chzldren learn mathematics, 2nd ed (Prenllce Hall, 1989)

Shuard H Primary mathematzcs today and tomorrow (Longman 1986)

The Open Umvers1ty Calculators m the przmary school (1983)

W1lhams, E M and Shuard, H Przmary mathematics today 3rd ed (Longman 1988)

Journals Ar1thmet1c Teacher Australtan Mathematics Teacher Educational Studies 1n Mathematics Journal for Research in Mathematics

Education Mathematics in Schools Mathematics Teaching NCTM Year books The Mathematics Teacher

53371 CURRICULUM STUDIES II Social Studies Dr G G Partington

Umts 3 Level B Ed Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqms1te 53215 Curriculum Studies I

The overall aim of the topic 1s to mtroduce prospective primary school teachers to problems concerning what is most s1gnif1cant 1n knowledge about human societies and what w1thm this knowledge may be most relevant to the development of understandmg of pnmary school children Combmed with this

218

overall theore!Ical aim 1s the eqmppmg of the prospective primary school teacher with the practical skills needed to teach social studies 1n a vanety of ways

Within the overall theoretical aim attention will be paid to conflicting claims about needs interest and experience 1n primary school studies As part of the course there will be simulations of teaching s1tuat1ons and problems faced in the course of educating pnmary school children 1n social studies

Set books Flew, A Thznkzng about social thznkzng

(Blackwell, 1985) Barcan A , ed The qualzty of the cumculum

(Aust Council for Educat10nal Standards, 1982) Partmgton, G The zdea of an hzstorzcal

educatwn (NFER/Nelson, 1980)

Reference book South Austrahan Department of Educat10n

Year one to year seven soczal studies curriculum outlines teaching soczal studies through enquiry (S A Govt Prmter, 1984 and after)

53372 CURRICULUM STUDIES II Science Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 3 Level B Ed Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqms1te 53215 Curnculum Studies I

This topic 1s designed to achieve the followmg ob1ectives

1) To explore the nature of SCience and to develop a model useful as a framework for th1nk1ng about and teaching science at the primary school level,

2) to consider the status of science 1n the primary school curnculum now, its likely place in the future, and its relationships with other sub1ects1

3) to explore the s1gmf1cance of the know ledge, skills, expenence that pupils might acquue 1n studying science 1n the pnmary school,

4) to examine the content of science programmes and the ratrnnale for the selection of particular content, bearing 1n mmd the purposes underlymg the teachmg of science,

5) to consider vanous approaches to the teaching of science and how methodo log1es relate to purposes, to situations to resources,

6) to gain some expenence with activities appropriate for children at the pnmary school level

Reference books Cann, A A and Sund, R B Teachzng sczence

through discovery (Merrill, 1985 and 1989)

Dnver, R ed Chzldren's zdeas zn science (Open UP 1985)

Good R G How chzldren learn sczence (Macmillan, 1977)

Osborne, R and Freyberg, P Learning zn science (Hememann 1985)

South Australian Education Department Science curriculum guzdelznes

UNESCO Handbook for science teachers (Hememan Educ 1980)

53373 CURRICULUM STUDIES II Educat10nal Medm Staff of the School of Educatwn

Umts 1 Level B Ed Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

Practical use of eqmpment and methods of producmg software for all aud10/visual aids hkely to be available m the classroom

Reference books Brown, J W , Lewis, B B and Harcleroad, F F

AV znstructwn technology, media & methods, 6th ed (McGraw Htll, 1983)

Davis, RH , Alexander, LT and Yelon, SL Learning system design (McGraw Hill 1974)

Kemp, J E and Dayton, D K Planning & produczng znstructzonal media (Harper & Row 1985)

Minor, E and Frye, H R Technzques for producing visual and znstructzonal media (McGrawHill, 1970)

B Ed and Diploma

53780 YOUTH IN AUSTRALIA Dr f L Kapferer

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Second or third year, Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite (Students who have completed 53781 Growmg Up m Austraha may not take this topic for credit)

This topic takes as its central concern the 1nvestlgat1on and understanding of some of the contemporary problems of young people in Australia The role of the school in recogn1s1ng and deahng with these problems is explored, with particular emphasis on the school/work/ unemployment nexus A central focus of the course will be upon the school as a soc1ahs1ng agency, with particular reference to secondary schoohng -

Reference books Brake, M The socwlogy of youth culture

and youth subcultures (Routledge & Kogan Paul, 1980)*

Committee of Enquiry into Education zn South Australia (Karmel Report) (197lr

Committe of Enquiry into Educatwn and change in South Australia (Keeves Report) (1982)'

Connell, W F et al 12 to 20 studies of city youth (Hicks Smith, 1975)*

Connell R W et al Making the difference (Allen & Unwm, 1982)·

Dwyer P Wilson, B and Woock, R Confronting school and work (Allen & Unwm, 1984)*

Edgar, D Introductwn to Australian society (Prentice Hall, 1980)*

Hill, B The schools (Pengum 1977)' McLaren, D Our troubled schools (Cheshire

1968)'

53782 BEHAVIOUR MANAGEMENT IN SCHOOLS Dr A Russell

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Second or third year, Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

219

School of Educatzon

This topic exammes mamly psychological theories and research deahng with the nature and mod1f1cahon or control of student behaviour The emphasis is placed on the cons1derat1on of various alternative approaches The topic will cover the followmg causes of student problem behaviour, d1sc1phne behaviour analysis, interpersonal relations, reality therapy, transactional analyses research relating to the relative effectiveness of different approaches About equal weight will be given to theoret1cal/ research questions and practical poss1b1hbes arising from theones or research

Reference books Cangelosi J S Classroom management

strategies (Longman 1987)-Charles, C M Buzldzng classroom dzsczplzne

from models to practzce, 3rd ed (Longman, 1989)*

Denscombe, M Classroom control (Allen & Unwm, 1985)-

Duke, D L and Meckel, A M Teacher's guzde to classroom management (Random House 1984)*

Froyen, LA Classroom management (Mernll 1988)

Gazda, G et al Human relatzons development a manual for educators 3rd ed (Allyn & Bacon 1984)*

Lawrence, J, Steed, D and Young, P Disruptive children disruptive schools? (Croom Helm, 1984)*

Martin ] Models of classroom management (Detsehg 1981)*

Sulzer Azaroff B and Mayer GR Achieving educational excellence (Holt, Rinehart & Wmston, 1986)

Wheldall, K , ed The behavzourzst zn the classroom (Allen & Unwm 1987)*

Wheldall K and Merrett F Positive teaching the behavzoural approach (Allen & Unwm, 1984)*

53783 CHILD DEVELOPMENT IN CONTEMPORARY SOCIETY Dr A Russell and Mr G M Cooper

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 lecture dnd 1 seminar per week plus practical work Pre requ1s1te None

220

This topic has two main aims The first 1s to study the nature of child development mamly over the years from O to early adolescence Most attention will be given to social, cognitive and language development The role of the family, peer group and school m ch!ld development w!ll be considered bnefly The second main aim Involves an examination of some issues or problems m child development ans1ng from recent social changes These will mclude child abuse its nature and effect on the child, divorce and its impact on children, child development 1n non trad1tlonal families (e g smgle parent fam1hes)

Reference books Asher, S R and Cote, J D eds Peer re1ectzon

zn childhood (Cambndge UP, 1990) Burns, A and Goodnow J Children and

famzlzes zn Australia contemporary zssues and problems, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm 1985)

Colhns WA ed Development during middle childhood (Nat10nal Academy Pr , 1984)

Fmkelhor, D et al A source book on child sexual abuse (SAGE, 1986)

Fowler W Potentials of childhood Vol 1 hzstorzcal vzew of early experience (DC Heath, 1983)

Lamb M E, ed Nontradztwnal famzlzes parenting and chzld development (Lawrence Erlbaum 1982)

Lerner RM Concepts and theories of human development, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1986)

Newson J and Newson, E Seven years old zn the home environment (Pengum 1978)

Schneider B H Rubm, K H and Ledmgham, J E , eds Children's peer relatzons (Sprmger, 1985)

53784 MODERN TEACHING PRACTICES OVER TWO CENTURIES Dr D Grundy

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisite None

The development of modern education systems, starting In the eighteenth century

provides the context for this study of teachmg as a h1stoncally constituted practice Texts on teaching will be drawn for analysis from eighteenth century enhghtenment pro1ects, from Sunday schools from the mon1tor1al, dame and common day schools of the early nineteenth century, from the later model infant and elementary schools, from the Australian state school systems at the end of the century, and, followmg the New Educat10n and the impact of psychology from the pnmary schools of the 1930s and from furth,er developments after the Plowden report Particular attention will be given to teaching as a moral practice, supervening upon pedagogical theory and techmque Schoolmg practices will be analysed in hke manner to discover in what sense they are an extension of teaclung These enqu1r1es can be applled to understand the s1gn1f1cance of arguments between conservative and progressive curriculum exponents

Prelzmznary readzng Cleverley, ) and Ph1lhps D C From Locke

to Spock (Melbourne UP, 1976)

Reference books Austin, A G and Selleck R j W The

Australian government school 1830 1914 (Pitman Pacific, 1975)

Digby A and Searby, P Children, school and society m Nineteenth Century England (Macmillan, 1981)

Gaitan, M j Simon B and Croll, P Inside the primary classroom (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1980)

Goldstrom J M Educatzon Elementary educatzon 1780 1900 (David & Charles, 1972)

Kaestle, C F Joseph Lancaster and the monztorzal school movement A docu mentary history (Teachers College Pr , Columbia Umv 1973)

Stewart, W A and Mccann educational innovators (St Martm, 1969)

WP The 1750 1880

Turney, C Sources zn the history of Australzan educatzon 1788 1970 (Angus & Robertson, 1975)

B Ed and Diploma

53785 HISTORY OF AUSTRALIAN EDUCATION TWENTIETH CENTURY ISSUES DrBK Hyams

Units 6 Level Second or thud year, Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisite None

ThIS topic will address important modern aspects of educat10nal pohcy m order to enable students to develop informed opinions on various issues In the process there will be reference to the appropriate contexts in which these aspects stand - social pohttcal and economic Special attention will be given to South Austrahan examples Topics which may be treated include

1) Equality of opportunity especially regarding the development of secondary schooling, the concept of disadvantage

2) Teachers their tra1n1ng, conditions of employment and their professional and industrial organisation

3) Non state schools the ethos of the denom1natlonal and independent schools, the "state aid" controversy

4) The Federal phenomenon the growmg influence of the Commonwealth govern ment on school and tertiary education

5) Educat10n and poht1cs mvolvement of government pohc1es of political parties, pressure groups, school and local community

6) Educational reform, especially since World War II curriculum change, evolving notions of control the impact of demo graphy schoolmg and employment

Prelzmznary reading Connell, R W and Irving T Class structure

zn Australian history (Longman, 1980) Mcintyre, S Winners and losers the pursuit

of social 1ustice zn Australia (Allen & Unwm, 1985)

Mcintyre, S Oxford history of Australia, vol IV, 1900 1940 (Oxford UP 1986)

Sinclair, WA The process of development zn Australia (Cheshue, 1976)

221

School of Educatwn

Text book Hyams, B K et al Learnzng and other thzngs

sources towards a soczal history of educatwn zn South Australia (SA Govt Prmter 1988)*

Reference books Bessant, B and Spaull AD Teachers zn

conflzct (Melbourne U P , 1972) Bessant, B and Spaull, AD Polztics of

schooling (Pitman, 1976) Cleverley, j , ed Half a millwn children

studies of non government education zn Australza (Longman Chesh1re 1978)

Cleverley j and Lawry, j, eds Australian education zn the twentzeth century (Longman, 1972)

Harman G S and Smart, D , eds Federal intervention zn Australzan education (Georgian House 1982)

Hyams, BK and Bessant, B Schools for the people an zntroductzon to the hzsto1y of state education zn Australia (Longman 1972)

Turney C Pioneers of Australian education vol III studies zn the development of educatwn zn Australia 1900 50 (Sydney up' 1983)

53920 TIIE ORIGINS OF MODERN EDUCATION Dr D Grundy and Dr G G Partington

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

Modern educational pohc1es and practices will be studied by cons1denng the controversial development of three fundamental concerns (1) what knowledge IS and how 1t IS best acqmred and imparted, (2) whether learnmg should be treated as a natural process or as a cultural practice and (3) education as an instrument of social transformation These themes will be studied m a broad histoncal context, with particular reference to 18C arguments over the education of the poor, extendmg to the 19C development of state controlled elementary schoohng systems the rise of collegiate secondary school curncula and the problems ofthe1r amalgamation under 20C programmes of socrnl opportumty through educat10n The development of

222

alternative radical pedagogies will be considered, as also the relationsh1p between education, social class, gender and culture Changmg ideas of childhood and adolescence will be noted

Reference books Bantock G H Studies zn the history of

educatwnal theory, vol II, The mznds and the masses 1760 1980 (Allen & Unwm, 1984)

Cleverley, j and Lawry, j, eds Australian education in the Twentieth Century (Longman, 1972)

Cleverley, j and Ph1lhps, D VISlons of childhood Influential models from Locke to Spock (Allen & Unwm, 1987)

Digby, A and Searby, P Children, school and society in Nineteenth Century England (Macmillan 1981)

Entwistle, H Class, culture and education (Methuen, 1978)

Stewart, WA and Mccann, W P The educatzonal innovators 1750 1880 (St Martm 1969)

53921 EDUCATION AND THE INDIVIDUAL Dr A Russell and Staff of the School of Educatwn

Umts 6 Level Th1rd year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week

The aim of this topic is to examine the nature of 1ndiv1dual differences 1n children and the way education (curriculum teaching methods and school organisation) has responded to or taken account of the differences Themes covered will be chosen from among the followmg (a) ab1hties, (b) giftedness and creativity, (c) intellectual d1sab1ht1es, (d) learnmg d1fficult1es (e) cogmt1ve styles and learning, (f) personahty and learning (g) emot10nal/behav10ural disturbance, (h) sex differences, (1) social class differences, (J) cultural differences (k) the concept of eqmty

Reference books B1orklund, D F Children's thmkzng

developmental functions and individual differences (Brooks/Cole 1988)

Horowitz F D and O'Brien, M , eds The gifted and talented, developmental perspectives (American Psychological Assoc1at10n, 1985)

Howley A Howley C B and Pendarvis E D Teaching gzfted children principles and strategies (Little Brown, 1986)

Jenkms J J and Paterson, D G, eds Studies in individual differences the search for intelligence (Appleton Century Crofts, 1961)

Langford, P, ed Educatzonal psychology an Australian perspective (Longman Cheshire, 1989)

Sternberg R J 1 ed Human abzlltzes an information processing approach (W H Freeman, 1985)

Stockard j Schmuck P A , Kempner K Wilhams P Edson, S K Smith M A Sex equity zn education (Academic, 1980)

53922 EDUCATION AND SOCIETY Staff of the School of Educatwn

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

Thts topic constitutes an 1ntroduct1on to the study of education as a social 1nstltuhon The aim of the topic is to examine some of the ways 1n which education establishments respond to social forces and the extent to which such estabhshments (and other educational inshtuhons such as the famtly and the mass media) influence societal trends Issues to be examined may include the following the school as a social 1nshtut1on, education and the state, knowledge and the accumulation of cultural capital, the outcomes of education, social inequaltty

Reference books Edgar D Introduction to Australian soczety

(Prentice Hall, 1980) Sargent, M Soczology for Australians

(Longman, 1983) Western, J S Social znequalzty in Australian

society (Macmillan 1983) Young, MF D ed Knowledge and control

(Collier Macmillan 1971)

B Ed and Diploma

53441 CURRICULUM STUDIES III Handicapped Child Dr D f Thomas

Umts 4 Level B Ed Fourth year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

The introduction to this topic will concentrate on fundamental concepts and current issues in special education Reference will be made to the development of the mtegratrnn of handicapped children mto ordmary schools and to the problems facmg the fam1hes of handicapped ch!ldren

Reference books Golby M Greenwald, j and West R eds

Curriculum deszgn (Croom Helm 1975) Hallahan, D and Kauffman j M Exceptzonal

children zntroductzon to special educatwn 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1982)

Swann W ed The practzce of special educatwn (Blackwell 1981)

Tansley, A E and Gulhford R The educatzon of slow learning children 2nd ed (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1965)

53442 CURRICULUM STUDIES III Abor1g1nes and Education Dr G R Teasdale

Units 4 Level B Ed Fourth year Duration First or second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Curriculum Studies II

This topic 1s concerned with current approaches to the educatrnn of Aborigmal children It 1s based on the assumpt10ns that Abong1nal parents have the nght to determine the nature of their chtldren's schoohng, and that non Abong1nal teachers require sens1hv1ty in interpreting and responding to the wishes of Abong1nal commun1hes Areas of study will mclude

a) typical patterns of child rearing m Abong1nal society,

b) trad1t10nal Abongmal styles of teachmg and learning,

c) the teachmg of Enghsh language hteracy and numeracy to Abong1nal chtldren

223

School of Educatwn

d) interpersonal skills reqmred for effective commun1cahon in cross cultural settings,

e) a study of community and homeland schools (e g, Strelley, Hermannsburg Worawa Y1p1nnya), and

f) an analysis of current research in1t1attves

Reference books Chnst1e, M J Aborzgznal perspectzves on

experience and learnzng (Deakin U P , 1985)

Coombs H C , Brandl, M M and Snowden W E A certazn heritage (CR ES , AN U, 1983)

Folds, R Whitefella school educatzon and Aborzgznal resistance (Allen & Unw1n 1987)

Hamilton A Nature and nurture (Aust Inst for Abonginal Studies, 1981)

Harns, S Culture and learning (Austrahan Inst for Abonginal Studies, 1984)

Harris S Two way Aborzgznal schoolzng (Abongmal Studies Press, 1990)

Harvey B and McG1nty, S , eds Learnzng my way (University of WA Press, 1989)

Keeffe K Aborzgznal educatzon culture and power (Abonginal Studies Press, 1991)

Report of the House of Representatives Select Committee on Aborzgznal Education (AGPS, 1986)

Teasdale G R and Whitelaw, A j The early childhood educatzon of Abongznal Australians (ACER 1981)

Watts B H Aborzgznal futures (AGPS, 1982)

53443 CURRICULUM STUDIES III Music and Education DrB Mageean

Umts 4 Level B Ed Fourth year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Perm1ss1on of lecturer 1n charge

The topic is designed for a student whose interest in music has been developed already to some extent and who has demonstrated some skills in practical and theoretical mus1c1ansh1p Lectures and practical work will be organised in terms of four basic themes The assessment will take the form of one wntten assignment related to one of the

224

themes and one practical pro1ect which shows abihty to act m terms of the ideas developed in the course

Course outlzne Theme I Music as a social h1stoncal cultural

and rehg1ous phenomenon Theme II The psychology of perception, and

of perceptual motor development Theme III What 1imus1c" is taught, and why

the skills and values involved Theme IV Orgamsat10n and teachmg

strategies

Reference books Bryant, P E Perception and understanding

zn young children (Methuen, 1974) Cheyette, I and Cheyette, H Teaching muszc

creatively zn the elementary school (McGraw Hill 1969)

Grant, W, ed Muszc zn educatzon (Butterworth, 1963)

Lang, P Music in western czvzllzatzon (Dent, 1963)

Langer, S K Philosophy zn a new key (Harvard UP 1957)

Moog, H The musical experience of the pre school child (Schott 1976)

Newman G Teaching children muszc, 3rd ed (Wm C Brown, 1989)

Paynter, J and Aston, P Sound and szlence (Cambndge UP, 1970)

Thorpe J and Thorpe, D Sounds fun (Hememann Educat10nal 1988)

53444 CURRICULUM STUDIES III Religion and Education Dr B Mageean

Umts 4 Level B Ed Fourth year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Perm1ss1on of lecturer in charge

Offered for the student who possesses a good background m the study of Theology or Rehg1on, the topic attempts to identify critical issues that anse in cons1der1ng what to teach under the general heading of Rehg1on, and to discuss these 1n the hght of actual solutions adopted m the schools

Text book Polkmghorne J The way the world is

(SP CK Triangle 1983)

Reference books Brown, R H The wzsdom of sczence

(Cambridge UP 1986) Castle E B Anczent educatzon and today

(Pengum, 1961) Castles G M and Rossiter G M Curnculum

theory and rellgzous education (Aust Assoc for Rehgmus Educatmn 1983)

Claxton, G Wholly human (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1981)

Crawford, M L and Rosszter, G M Mzsszonarzes to a teenage culture (Christian Bros Province Resource Group, 1988)

Dodd, C H The founder of Chrzstzanzty (Fontana, 1973)

Douglas M Natural symbols (Barne & Rockhff 1970)

Hick, J God and the universe of fazths (Macmzllan, 1973)

Lonergan, BJ F lnszght (Longmans, 1967) 0 Hear A Experience, explanation and fazth

(Routledge & Kegan Paul 1984) Polkmghorne J One world (SP CK, 1986) Smart N and Hecht R D Sacred texts of the

world, a universal anthology (Macmillan, 1982)

Trethowan The absolute and the atonement (Allen & Unwm 1971)

53445 CURRICULUM STUDIES IV Curriculum Organ1sahon Dr G G Partzngton'

Umts 4 Level B Ed Fourth year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes Curriculum Studies I and II

The overall aim of the topic 1s to enable prospective primary school teachers to understand some of the curricular 1mphcat1ons of different types of educatmnal theory Spec1ftc aims include an improved capacity to 1dent1fy clusters of educational theory, to assess the differences between and within such clusters, and to understand what may be counted as improvement of development from conflicting perspectives Classroom practices and school orgamsatwn will be analysed m

B Ed and Dzploma

the hght of the main substantive theories which have influenced primary education during the twentieth century

Set books Dearden, R The philosophy of przmary

educatzon (Routledge 1968) Hirst, P H Knowledge and the curriculum

(Routledge, 1974)

Reference books Bantock G H Studzes m the hzstory of

educatzonal theory (Allen & Unwm, 1984) Entwistle, H Class, culture and education

(Methuen, 1977) 0 Keeffe, D ed The wayward curriculum

(Social Affairs Umt 1986)

53446 CURRICULUM STUDIES V Education Evaluation Mr D Hogben

Umts 4 Level B Ed Fourth year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes Curnculum Studies I and II

In this topic a cons1derat1on of the logic of evaluation and of important evaluation concepts forms the basis for an examination of past and present school evaluation practice particularly at the primary school level In add1twn to developmg some understandmg of evaluation and the roles it plays in schools, students will gain expenence 1n the develop ment and use of evaluation procedures

Reference books Bloom B S , Hastmgs, J T and Madaus, G F

Handbook on formatzve and summatzve evaluation of student learning (McGraw Hill, 1971)

Gronlund NE Measurement and evaluation zn teaching (Macmillan, 1976)

Scriven M The logzc of evaluatzon (Edgepress, 1980)

Scnven, M Evaluation thesaurus (Edgepress 1981)

Shipman, M Assessment in przmary and mzddle schools (Croom Helm 1983)

South Australian Educatmn Department Student assessment policy statement (1988)

225

School of Educatzon

53416 CURRICULUM STUDIES VI Curriculum Overview Dr K Simpson and Mr D Hogben

Umts 6 Level B Ed , Fourth year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week

Current curriculum developments will be examined as represented by pubhcattons and working documents of education authorities and of 1nd1v1dual schools Cons1derahon will be given to the educational soc1olog1cal, psychological poh!Ical and other theones embodied in such materials as will the ways in which issues are 1denttfied and approached Students will be expected to prepare a ma1or 101nt study of an educational issue of current interest

Reference books

A guide to a process of curriculum development (Educat10n Dept of SA 1977)

Choice and dzverszty zn government schooling Canberra Schools Comm1ss1on (collected papers from 1980 on)

Educating for the twenty first century a charter for government schooling in South Australia (Education Dept of SA 1989)

Educatzon and change in South Australia Report of the Committee of Enqmry mto Education m South Austraha (1982)

Part1c1patzon and equity zn Australian schools (Commonwealth, Schools Comm1ss10n 1984)

Schooling for 15 and 16 year olds (Commonwealth Schools Comm1ss1on 1984)

School's curriculum I Schools Directorate (Educat10n Dept of SA 1977)

South Australia, Committee of Enquiry into Educat10n m South Australia 1969 1970, Education zn South Australia report (SA Govt Pnnter, 1971)

Documents are regularly added to the holdmg m the School of Educat10n Curriculum Library and reference made to them

226

53417 TEACHING OBSERVATION AND EXPERIENCE Mr D Hogben

Units 6 Level B Ed Fourth year Duration First semester Class Contact A total of 9 weeks full time Pre requ1s1te Satisfactory completion of Curnculum Studies II Co requ1s1te Enrolment 1n Curriculum Studies III, V, VI topics

Students spend one week full time 1n pnmary schools early in the semester and a further 8 weeks 1n schools later Through the wntten record of observations, formal recording of teaching plans and procedures and the regular supervised teaching carried out in relevant areas of the school curriculum, students are expected to demonstrate their ab1hty to 1dent1fy educational theories and to account for their own records and classroom practices in terms of a coherent theoretical pos1tton

53421 CURRICULUM THEORY Dr K Simpson

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

An extended study of themes mtroduced m the Curriculum Studies sequence in particular 1n Curriculum Studies I and IV, involving examination of various accounts of formal and highly general features of curriculum pohcy and development

53422 EMPIRICAL AND EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES Staff of the School of Educatzon

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

An extended study of themes mtroduced m the Curriculum Studies sequence, in particular Curriculum Studies V and VI, such as the nature of alternative modes of 1nvesttgabon and their significance in the observation and analysis of classroom phenomena

53423 SUBSTANTIVE CURRICULUM ANALYSIS Dr G G Partington

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

An extended study of themes mtroduced m the Curriculum Studies sequence, 1n particular in Curriculum Studies IV and VI concerned with substantive features of specific curriculum po1Ic1es packages and practices

Prelzmznary reading Hirst, P M /(nowledge and the curriculum

(Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1974)* Partington G G The idea of an hzstorzcal

education (National Foundation for Educational Research, 1980)

53424 HONOURS THESIS (B Ed) Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 12

A theSis of 10 000 15,000 words to be wntten under the superv1s1on of a member of staff The thesrs will normally be expected to display a relahonsh1p between the D1sc1pltne studied outside the School and some aspect of the study of curriculum

53432 CONCEPTUAL PROBLEMS OF LEISURE AND PLAY Mr Rf Paddick

Umts 9 Level Honours, B Ed (P E ) Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic provides a critical examination of defln1hons and theories current in the study of leisure and play and related achv1hes1 with the purpose of estabhshmg a coherent and defensible view of the place of leisure in modern society

Prelzmznary reading Hmzmga, J Homo ludens (Paladm, 1970)

Set book Haworth, J T and Smith M A , eds Work

and leisure (Lepus, 1975)

B Ed and Diploma

Reference books Gerber, E W and Morgan, W J Sport and the

body a philosophical symposium 2nd ed (Lea & Febiger, 1979)

Kaplan, M Leisure theory and policy (Wiley 1975)

Morgan, W J and Meier, KV eds Philo sophic znquzry zn sport (Human Klnet1cs, 1989)

Murphy J F Concepts of leisure (Prentice Hall, 1974)

Smts, B The grasshopper (Toronto U P , 1978)

53433 ADVANCED EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY Dr R T Withers

Umts 9 Level Honours Duration Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1S1te 53461 or its eqmvalent

1) The structure and function of skeletal muscle

2) The effect of exercise on skeletal muscle 3) Energy release dunng muscular activity 4) The acute and chronic effects of exercise

on the circulatory and respiratory systems 5) The phys10logical bases of trammg 6) Body composit10n 7) The influence of environment on human

performance 8) Agemg 9) The female athlete

Text books American College of Sports Med1cme Guzde

lines for graded exerczse testing and exercise prescription 3rd ed (Lea & Febiger 1986)*

Astrand, P 0 and Rodahl, K Textbook of work physzology (McGraw Hill, 1986)"

McArdle, W D , Katch, F I and Katch, V L Exercise physiology energy nutrition and human performance, 2nd ed (Lea & Febiger 1986)

Vander A J 1 Sherman J H and Luciano, D S Human physzology the mechanisms of body functzon, 4th ed (McGraw Hill, 1986)'

227

School of Educatwn

53434 DIRECTED STUDY (Honours) Mr Rf Paddick and Dr R T Withers

Umts 6 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact By arrangement

This topic allows students to pursue a chosen programme of study not covered by topics already available

Students wIShmg to take this topic are responsible for securing the agreement of a member of staff to supervise A descnptlon of the proposed programme and assessment, together With the recommendat10n of the staff member concerned, should be submitted for approval to the Standmg Committee of the School of Educat10n before the start of the academic year

56001 ISSUES IN SPECIAL EDUCATION DrD f Thomas

Umts 6 Level Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week

Thts topic affords an 1ntroduction to baste concepts 1n Special Education These include aspects of the social psychology of disabihty the integration issue and problems in curr1 cul um development for the chdd WI th leammg difftculties

Reference books Booth, T and Swann, W , eds Including

pupils with disabilities (Open U P , 1987) Golby, M, Greenwald j and West R, eds

Curriculum design (Croom Helm, 1975) Hegarty S and Pocklmgton, K Educating

pupils with special needs zn the ordinary school (NF ER Nelson 1982)

Ryan, j and Thomas, F The polztics of mental handicap (Pengum 1980)

Swann, W , ed The practice of special educatzon (Blackwell 1981)

56007 EDUCATIONAL MEDIA Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 1 Level Dip Ed Duration First semester Pre requ1s1te None

The topic concerns itself with the apphcat10n

228

of educational technology to the classroom and involves the demonstration of the ways in which audio visual materials may be used to promote effective pupil learning

The content of this course will comprise an overview of the most common resources used in the classroom VIZ flat pictures, overhead pro1ector transparencies, 35 mm slides, filmstrips, 16 mm films telev1s1on broadcasts, audio and videotape, video cameras, computers and duphcatmg Students will be required to learn how to use these resources and how to prepare audio visual materials

Reference books Brown J W , Lewis, RB and Harcleroad, F F

AV znstructzon technology media and methods, 4th ed (McGraw Htll, 1973)

Davis, RH ,Alexander,L T, Yelon SL Leaming system design (McGraw Hill, 1974)

Kemp j E and Dayton D K Planning and producing znstructzonal media (Harper & Row, 1985)

Minor, E and Frye, H R Techniques for producing visual and znstructzonal medza (McGraw Htll, 1970)

56008 TEACHING OBSERVATION AND PRACTICE Co ordinator Dr D Grundy

Umts 5 Level Dip Ed Duration M1mmum of 9 weeks in first semester Pre requisite None Co reqmsite 56007 Educat10nal Media

Candidates for the Diploma m Educat10n take part 1n supervised teaching practice and observation 1n specified schools in the metropolitan area A satisfactory level of proficiency 1n practice is necessary for the award of the diploma

56009 TEACHING OBSERVATION AND PRACTICE IN ABORIGINAL EDUCATION Dr G R Teasdale

Umts 5 Level Dip Ed Duration Minimum of 9 weeks in first semester Co reqmsites 56021 Special Methods Abongmal Educat10n and 56007 Educat10nal Media

Students are required to undertake a nine week block of field experience 1n the second half of the first semester m an Abongmal school m South Australia or the Northern Territory (It should be noted however that the University cannot guarantee the avallab1hty of suitable schools from year to year, and students may not always be allocated to their preferred locahty )

56010 TEACHING OBSERVATION AND PRACTICE IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL (SPECIAL EDUCATION) Co ordznator Mr MG Cooper

Umts 5 Level Dip Ed Duration Minimum of 9 weeks 1n first semester

None Pre requ1s1te Co requ1s1te 56007 Educat10nal Media

Candidates for the Diploma 1n Education take part in superv~sed teaching practice and observation 1n spec1f1ed schools in the metropolrtan area A satisfactory level of prof1c1ency 1n practice 1s necessary for the award of the diploma Students enrolled m this course will be required to devote about halfthe1r teaching practice and observation to spec1al/remed1al teaching

56011 to 56043 SPECIAL METHODS (Dip Ed) Co ordinator Dr D Grundy

Students are required to select topics totalling at least 12 umts The followmg mformat10n refers to the group of topics 56011 to 56043 as a whole Level Dip Ed Duration First semester Class Contact A total of SIX hours per week 1n specified weeks of first semester and as arranged dunng Teaching Practice Pre reqms1te 12 Third year umts at C or better for each Special Methods topic

The course provides an 1ntroduct1on to methodological studies m spec1f1c teachmg areas Curricula, teaching methods and associated problems are examined from a practJ.cal onentahon, although a theoretJ.cal basis is attempted to provide for the develop ment of ind1v1dual teaching styles by students Available topics are hsted in Clause 5 (c) of

B Ed and Diploma

Schedule 15 to Statute 7 1 Students seekmg other topics may be able to arrange a special topic with the co ordmator of the Diploma m Education

56021 SPECIAL METHODS ABORIGINAL EDUCATION Dr GR Teasdale

Units 6 Level Dip Ed Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

This topic is concerned with current approaches to the educat10n of Aboriginal ch!ldren It 1s based on the assumpt10ns that Abonginal parents have the nght to determine the nature of theu chtldren's schooling, and that non Abong1nal teachers require sens1tJ.v1ty 1n interpreting and responding to the wishes of Abong1nal communities Areas of study will include (a) typical patterns of child rearing 1n Abong1nal society (b) trad1honal Abong1nal styles of teaching and learning (c) the teaching of Enghsh language, hteracy and numeracy to Abor1g1nal children (ct) interpersonal skills required for effective commun1cahon in cross cultural settings, (e) a study of commumty and homeland schools (e g Strelley, Hermannsburg Y1pmnya), and (f) an analySis of current research 1n1ttahves

Reference books Australian Aborzgznal Studies (Penod1cal) Chnst1e, M) Aborzgznal perspectives on

experience and learning (Deakin U P 1985)

Coombs, H C, Brandl, MM and Snowdon, WE A certain herztage (C R E S A N U , 1983)

Eagleson, RD , Kaldor, S and Malcolm, I G English and the Aborzginal child (CD C, 1982)

Elhs, C) Aborzgmal music educatzon for living (Queensland UP, 1985)

Folds, R Whztefella school educatzon and Aborzgmal resistance (Allen & Unwm, 1987)

Hamilton, A Nature and nurture (Aust Inst of Abongmal Studies, 1981)

Handbook for Aborzginal bilingual educa twn zn the Northern Temtory (NT Department of Education, 1986)

229

School of Educatwn

Harns, P, Measurement zn tribal Aborzgznal communities (NT Department of Educat10n, 1980)

Hams S Culture and learning (Austrahan Inslltut10n for Abongmal Studies 1984)

Harns S Two way Aboriginal scltoollng (Abongmal Studies Press, 1990)

Harvey, B and McGmty S eds Learmng my way (Umvemty of WA Press, 1989)

I<eeffe, I< Aborzgznal educatzon culture and power (Abongmal Studies Press, 1991)

Lipscombe, R and Burnes, D eds Aborzgznal literacy brzdgmg the gap (ARA, 1982)

Report of the House of Representatives Select Commzttee on Aborzgznal Education (AGPS, 1985)

Teasdale, G R and Whitelaw, A J The early childhood educatzon of Aborzgznal Australians (ACER, 1981)

The Aborzgmal child at school (Penod1cal)

56022 SPECIAL METHODS TEACHING THE SPECIAL CHILD Co ordinator Mr MG Cooper

Umts 6 Level Dip Ed Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours per week School v1s1ts will also be arranged

The focus m this topic will be the educatzon of pupils exper1enc1ng learning d1ff1culhes affecting most and 1n many cases, all of the sub1ects in the trad1honal secondary school cumculum The thrust of the topic will be to introduce students to

1) alternatzve curncula for such pupils The phdosophy, advantages and hm1tat10ns of these alternatives would be considered against a background of curr1culum development, and

2) the d1agnoSis and remediatzon of learnmg d1ff1culhes in hteracy and numeracy

Students will be expected to obtam expenence of these educat10nal problems durmg teachmg practice and have the opportunity of learning more about such approaches through placement m high school departments where sound practice 1s already in operation

230

Reference books Ahman A F and Conway, R N F Cognztzve

strategies for special educatwn (Routledge, 1989)

Ashman, A F and Elkms ) Educating children with special needs (Prentice Hall, 1990)

Blankenship, C and Lilly, M S Mam streamzng students wzth learning and behavwur problems (Holt Rmehart & Wmston, 1981)

Mercer, CD and Mercer AR Teaching students with learmng problems (Memll 1981)

Smith D D Teaching the learning disabled (Prentice Hall 1981)

Westwood, P Remedial teachers' handbook (Ohver & Boyd 1975)

56223 SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION Dr f Maddock

Umts 6 Level Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisite None

The aim will be to md1cate the way m which a soc1olog1st views the processes of teaching and learnmg Topics will mclude d1Sc1plme and social control stratification and the curriculum, and Innovations affecting the roles of the teacher and the pupil

Prel1mznary reading Berger PL and Berger, B Soczology a

bwgraphical approach, 2nd ed (Pengum, 1976)

56230 COMPUTERS IN SCHOOLS Professor f Anderson

Umts 6 Level Dip Ed Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours of lectures and practicals per week Pre requisite None

This topic serves as an introduction to the use of computers across the curriculum at all levels from pre school to adult The potentzal of microcomputers IS explored through a wide

range of educational applications in different sub1ect areas and some of the important issues in schools computing are raised No previous computing experience is assumed

At the end of the topic the student will feel comfortable about the use of microcomputers, will use a word processor and spellmg checker for ma1or assignments will be fam1har with a range of educational software and be able to evaluate this software crit1cally1 will use computers routinely for stonng and retrieving information using general apphcat1ons software and will have sufficient knowledge of programming to make simple mod1f1cations to programmes for instructional use

Reference books Alcock D Illustrating BBC BASIC

(Cambridge UP, 1986)* Anderson, J Computing in schools an

Australian perspective (Australian Council for Educational Research, 1984)

Anderson, j ed Computers zn the language classroom (Australian Reading Association, 1985)*

Chandler D Young learners and the microcomputer (Open UP 1984)*

Coburn P et al Practzcal guide to computers zn educatzon (Addison Wesley 1982)*

Culbertson, J A and Cunningham, L L , eds Microcomputers and educatwn (Eighty fifth Yearbook of the Nat10nal Society for the Study of Educat10n) (Chicago UP, 1986)

Hams, N D C , ed World yearbook of educatwn 1988189, educatwn for the new technologies (Kogan Page, 1988)

Kelly AV Microcomputers and the cumculum (Harper & Row, 1984)'

Lathrop, A and Goodson, B Courseware zn the classroom selectzng, organzzzng and uszng educational software (Addison Wesley, 1983)*

Megarry, j et al , eds World yearbook of educatzon 1982183, computers and educatwn (Kogan Page 1983)

Ohver R Uszng microcomputers and the cumculum (Harper & Row 1984)*

Papert, S Mzndstorms children, computers and powerful ideas (Harvester Pr 1980)*

Poole, L Apple Ile user's guzde (Osborne McGraw Hill, 1985)*

Wellmgton, j j Children computers and the cumculum (Harper & Row, 1985)*

C G S E and M Ed and M Ed Studies

Certificate of Graduate Studies m Education

This programme involves advanced course work in aspects of research theory and pracllce m the fields of Educallon, Special Education or Educational Management This professionally onented programme IS aimed at (a) persons currently employed in Education Special Education or Education Management, (b) those who would hke to be so employed, and (c) those who have a basic interest in developing their knowledge 1n these areas The programme of studies will provide students with an introduction to basic skills and concepts in these areas

The minimum entry requirement is a four year degree at an acceptable level

This programme requires students to complete a coherent programme of study compr1s1ng 18 units of coursework in one spec1ahst strand The strands of study available are

Statistics Evaluation and Computer Studies Educat10nal Psychology Physical Education History and Soc10logy of Educat10n Curriculum Early Childhood Educat10n Philosophy of Educat10n Special Educatwn Educational Management

Detatls of the strands are contained in Statute 7 1, Schedule 31

Master of Educatwn and Master of Educatwnal Studies Degrees Topics

The topics hsted below are available to students enrolled in the Degrees of Master of Educat10n (M Ed ) and Master of Educatwnal Studies (M Ed Studies) - see Statute 7 3 Schedules 3 and 10 respecllvely

As part of the M Ed and M Ed Studies Degrees, students should focus their studies w1th1n particular areas The specialisms currently offered are

Statzstzcs, Evaluation and Computer Studzes Topics 54000, 54001, 54002, 54003, 54004, 54505, 54506 (Convener Professor j Anderson)

231

School of Education

Educatwnal Psychology Topics 54101, 54102, 54103, 54104 54001, 54002 54003, 54701, 54801 (Convener Dr M J Lawson)

Philosophy and Educatzon Topics 54201, 54202, 54203 54204, 54501 54502, 54506, 54601 54602 54801, 55111 (Convener Dr K Simpson)

Hzstory!Socwlogy Topics 54301, 54302 54303 54304, 54401 54402 54403, 54404 54802, 54901 (Convener Dr J Kapferer)

Curriculum Topics 54501, 54502, 54503, 54504,54505,54506,54902,54904(Convener Dr K Simpson)

Physical Education Topics 54601 54602, 54603 54604 54606, 55111 (Convener Mr R J Paddick)

Early Childhood Educatwn Topics 54701, 54702 54703 54704, 54013 54101, 54102 54103 54104 54504, 54505 (Convener Dr A Russell)

As part of the above specrnhsms 54007 Directed Study may also be ava!lable Select10n of topics should be discussed with the appropriate convener

The Board's expectat10n would be that the programme of a Masters candidate shall normally include at least three six unit topics, or their equivalent, in the strand representing the area of the thesis topic or the Coursework Pro1ect

In addition to its coursework and research Master of Educat10n Degree and the Master of Educat10nal Studies the School of EducatIOn has Master of Education (Special Education) Master of Educat1onal Adm1n1strat1on, Master of Special Education, and Master of Educa-t1onal Management Degrees (see below) As well, the School provides opportum!Ies for smtably quahf1ed candidates to pursue a programme of study and research leadmg to either the Degree of Master of Arts (M A ) or Doctor of Philosophy (Ph D ) Areas m which the staff of the School of Educat10n can provide research superv1s1on include those listed above Prospective candidates should discuss proposals for research with the Co ordmators of Higher Degree Programmes

232

53609 RESEARCH PROJECT Co ordinator Dr A Russell

Umts 18 Level Graduate Class Contact Personal d1rechon Pre requisite Satisfactory completion of 36 units in M Ed programme

The research pro1ect will be on a particular topic in one of the areas of specialty w1th1n the M Ed The results of the research will be presented 1n bound form

53610 THESIS Co ordinator Dr A Russell

Umts 36 Level Postgraduate Durat10n One year full-ttme Class Contact 1 two hour class per week and personal direction Pre requ1s1te 36 units in M Ed programme

The thesis seminar consists of advanced coursework leading to a thesis

The coursework which ts prelrm1nary to the thesis, will involve 1ntens1ve supervised reading in an area of particular interest On the basis of this readmg the student will be required to submit a thesis proposal and, 1f this is accepted, proceed to the thesis

54000 EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH METHODOLOGIES Mr D Hogben

Umts O Level Graduate Duration Full year Class Contact None Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing

The purpose of this topic which has zero weighting is to provide an introduction to educat10nal research methodologies Students are strongly advised to work through the material described below early m the period of their graduate enrolment

Under the general editorship of R M Jaeger, the American Educational Research Assa c1ahon has produced a series of audio cassette tapes, each accompanied by a study guide, with the general l!tle of 'Alternal!ve Methodologies m Educat10nal Research'

These tapes and accompanymg study gmdes are available for students borrowing from the School of Educat10n and are housed m the Educa!ton Electromcs Workshop (Room 140)

Titles of the md1vidual tapes/study gmdes, and their authors are given below Glass, G V Quasz experimental research

methods zn educatzon tzme serzes experzments

Kaestle; C F Recent methodological developments zn the hzstory of American educatzon

Porter, AC Comparative experiments zn educational research

Scnven, M Philosophical enquiry m educational research

Shulman LS Dzsczplznes of znquzry zn education an overview

Stake, R E Case study methods m educational research

Withey S and Jaeger RM Survey methods in education

Wolcott H Ethnographic research methods zn education

54001 STATISTICAL DESCRIPTION AND INFERENCE IN RESEARCH Mr D Hogben

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre-requ1s1te Master's level standing Although there are no formal pre requ1s1tes for this topic, a background 1n some baste behavioural statistics course would be an advantage Students without this background are advised to consult the book suggested for prehminary reading, or some similar text (students who have completed 53560 Sta!tst1cs and Research Methods m Educat10n may not take this topic for credit)

This topic provides students with an mtroduct10n to the employment of stahshcal analysis m educahonal research The topic covers the use of stat1st1cal techmques both for summarising and descr1b1ng single d1stnbut10ns - and relahons between and among vanables - and also for makmg generahsat10ns from samples to populat10ns on the basis of stat1sl!cal mference Throughout the topic emphasis is placed on

M Ed and M Ed Studies

the necessity for careful and critical thmkmg about the nature of data, its analysis, and the meanmg attached to calculated stahshcs and probability levels In addit10n to theorehcal work, students will gain experience with microcomputer (Apple) and the employment of appropriate statistical packages Interested students can also work with SPSS on the mainframe computer

Prelzmznary reading Runyon, RP and Haber, A Fundamentals

of behavwural statistics 6th ed (Addison Wesley, 1988)

Set book Hinkle, DE, Wiersma W and Jurs S G

Applied statistics for the behavwral sciences (Houghton Mifflm, 1988)

Reference book Cook, TD and Campbell, D T Quasi

experzmentatzon deszgn and analyszs issues for fzeld settings (Rand McNally 1979)

54002 SAMPLE SURVEYS AND FIELD STUDIES Professor J Anderson

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ!Slte Master's level standing (students who have completed 53560 Stahstics and Research Methods m Educat10n may not take this topic for credit)

The focus of this topic is on research methods and statistical techniques needed to conduct a sample survey or field study Special emphasis 1s given to the computer as a tool in drawing samples in adm1n1strahon of mall question naires, in data analysis, and in report pro duct10n As part of the topic some recently completed surveys are cr1t1cally examined samplmg techmques simulated, vahdity of measuring instruments assessed, and secondary analysis undertaken The aim of the topic 1s to provide an appreciat10n of the strengths and weaknesses of field research as well as a sound groundmg m all phases of conducting small to medium scale surveys in education

233

School of Educatzon

Prelzmznary reading l{erhnger, F N Foundatzons of behavioural

research (Holt, Rmehart & Winston, 1979)

Text book Kidder, L H and Judd C M Research

methods in social relatwns (HRW Internatmnal, 1986)

Reference books Gardner, G Soczal surveys for soczal planners

(Holt, Rmehart & Wmston 1978) Meadenhall, W , Ott, L and Scheaffer, R L

Elementary survey sampling (Wadsworth, 1971)

54003 MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS AND TEXT ANALYSIS Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqms1tes Masters level standing 54001 Stat1st1cal Description and Inference in Research (students who have completed 53560 Statistics and Research Methods 1n Education may not take this topic for credit)

This topic aims to prepare students and research workers in the behavioural sciences to select or devise appropnate designs for surveys and/or experiments they may conduct as well as to analyse and interpret research fmdings reported m the literature In the first part of the topic the focus is on stat1st1cal analysts and research design contlnu1ng from the foundatwn laid m Topic 54001 Concentration is on hnear regression, including multiple regression, analysis of variance and covariance Computensed statistical packages are used for all analyses In the second part of the topic consideration is given to ways in which the computer may be used as a tool in the analysis of texts In this part of the topic students will develop proficiency in the use of microcomputers for word processing and such other text pro cessing applications as gauging readab11tty gap analysis tracmg the threads that tte text together, and creating, stonng and processmg of text files

Set book Hinkle, DE , Wiersma, W and Jurs, SA

Applied statistics for behavioural sciences (Houghton, Mtfflm, 1988)

234

Reference books Edwards AL Multzple regresswn and the

analysis of variance and covariance (Freeman, 1979)

Lee A, Mclnerney 1 P and Mulhns, P STATCALC a statzstzcs program for the Apple family of computers (A j Lee, 1984)

Overall, J E and Klett C J Applzed multzvarzate analyszs (McGraw Hill 1972)

SPSSX users guzde (McGraw Hill 1983)

54004 COMPUTERS IN SOCIETY ISSUES AND APPLICATIONS Professor f Anderson

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing

The ma1or purpose of this topic 1s to examine the impact of the new information techno log1es on society in general and on education In particular No previous knowledge of computing is assumed Among topics to be included are the communications explosion, art1f1cial mtelhgence laser disc technology, the computer as a personal tool in the home and at school desktop pubhshmg computers and the consumer, computer cnme, data banks and privacy, informatics and the third world According to speczal mterests the student will have the opportunity to explore the impact of computing technologies In industry com merce, banking, med1c1ne, schools or explore such issues as automation unemployment and le1sure 1 the cashless society, computers and women networking tn schools the computer as tutor tool or tutee

Reference books Arbtb, MA Computers and the cybernetzc

soczety (Acadeffilc 1984)" Culbertson, J A and Cunnmgham L L eds

Mzcrocomputers and educatzon (Eighty fifth Yearbook of the Natrnnal Society for the Study of Educatrnn) (Chicago UP, 1986)

Forester T , ed The 1nformat1on technology revolutzon (Blackwell, 1985)*

Graham N The mznd tool computers and thezr zmpact on society (West 1983)*

Hams N D C ed World yearbook of educatzon 1988/89 educatzon for the new technologies (Kegan Page, 1988)

Maddison, J Education zn the mzcro electronics era (Open UP, 1983)*

W1lhams, Sir Bruce Lzvmg with technology (Boyer Lectures, AB C, 1982)*

54007 DIRECTED STUDY Dr A Russell

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact By arrangement with tutor Pre requisite Master's level standing (students who have completed 53502/53503 Directed Study may not take thlS topic for credit)

This topic allows students in exceptional cases, to pursue a chosen programme of study under the direction of a member of staff, 1n an area not covered by topics already available

Students w1sh1ng to take this topic are responsible for securing the agreement of a member of staff to superv1Se and should for this purpose present as informative an account as possible of the proposed programme, and show evidence of developed interest of an appropriate kmd Normally the topic will be available to part lime students only after they have commenced the Masters programme A descnpt10n of the proposed programme and assessment, together with the recom mendations of the staff member concerned should be submitted for approval to the Standmg Committee of the School through the Higher Degree Committee before the start of the half year m which the topic IS offered

54008 COURSEWORK PROJECT IN EDUCATION Dr A Russell

Umts 12 Level Graduate Duration Whole year or first or second semester Class Contact Personal direction Pre requ1s1tes Master's level standing and successful complet10n of at least 36 umts of the M Ed degree Students may not complete both thlS topic and 53610 Thesis or 53609 Research Pro1ect

This topic is designed to enable students to develop areas of mterest ansmg out of the theoretlcal and research hterature m

M Ed and M Ed Studies

education A range of activities including practical work, 1s perm1ss1ble In each case students must md1cate the ab1hty to work independently, and demonstrate mastery of the literature in an area of education Students may analyse and evaluate the literature In order to show its strengths and limitations Alternallvely they may examme the possible uses or 1mphcations of the hterature This could involve discussion of how the implications might be tested, how the hterature relates to educational practice, or how the hterature apphes to the analyS1s and understanding of particular problem areas

Students are responsible for securing the agreement of a member of staff to superv:tse thelf pro1ect ThlS can be done through 1nd1v1dual negotiation or via d1scuss1on with the strand convener In consultation with the supexv1sor the student will prepare a proposal for the proiect which has to be approved by the Standing Committee of the School The proposal should provide an outline and 1usllflcat10n of the work to be undertaken This normally will include a spec1f1cation of the hterature to be examined, a statement of purpose, the rationale for or s1gn1f1cance of the work and an outlme of how the pro1ect is to be undertaken (e g methods used 1! data are to be collected)

Assessment IS based on a Ima! report of 12 000 words which is to be submitted in duphcate1

m type-written and soft bound form

54101 LEARNING, DEVELOPMENT AND EDUCATIONAL PRACTICE Dr M f Lawson

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (Students who have completed 53510 Educat10nal Psychology may not take thlS topic for credit)

ThlS topic mvolves a study of current theory and research m the psychology of leammg and cogmtlve and affectlve development and the apphcatlons of psychological pnnc1ples to educational practice Students will review ltterature 1n the areas of learning and memory, cogn1t1ve development, motivation, 1nd1v1dual differences and mtelhgence Students will be

235

School of Education

expected to undertake practical proiects and laboratory exercises related to issues 1n these broad areas and to prepare reports on these proiects

Text book Anderson, J R Cogmtzve psychology, 2nd ed

(Freeman 1985)

Reference books Best, J B Cogmtzve psychology, 2nd ed (West

Publishmg, 1989) Bramerd, CJ Piaget's theory of mtellzgence

(Prentice Hall, 1978) Bushnell, I and Mullm, J Cognztzve

psychology a computerized laboratory course (Erlbaum, 1987)

Donaldson, M Children's minds (Fontana, 1978)

Gagne, E The cogmtzve psychology of school learning (Little Brown, 1985)

Good, T and Brophy, J Educational psycho logy, 3rd ed (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1986)

Ne1sser, U Cognztzon and reality (Freeman, 1976)

Norman, D Memory and attention, 2nd ed (Wtley, 1976)

Strlhngs, NA et aL Cognitive science an introduction (MIT Press, 1989)

54102 PSYCHOLOGY AND INSTRUCTION Dr M J Lawson

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes Master's level standing 54101 Learmng, Development and Educa !tonal Practice, or equivalent (Students who have completed 53510 Educatrnnal Psychology may not take this topic for credit)

This topic will mvolve an exanunatrnn of the maior theones of mstructrnnal psychology and their impact on educational practice Students wtll be expected to review hterature m this area and to analyse specific tnstruchonal materials, and to undertake a practical proiect on a relevant mstruct1onal problem The maior focus of the topic will be on the works of Skinner, Piaget, Gagne and 1nforrnatlon­process1ng theorists

236

Reference books Becker, W C , Engelmann, S and Thomas, D

Teaching 1 and Teaching 2 (Science Research Associates 1975)

Berger, D , Pezdek, I< and Banks, W Applications of cognztzve psychology (Eerlbaum, 1987)

Borkowski J and Day, ) , eds Cogmtzon zn special children cogmtzve approaches to retardation, learning dzsabzlztzes and giftedness (Ablex 1987)

Bramerd, C) Piaget's theory of intelligence (Prentice Hall, 1978)

Bybee, R and Sund, R Pzagets for educators 2nd ed (Merrzll, 1982)

Kirby,) R and Biggs, J B Cogmtzon, develop ment and znstructzon (Academtc, 1980)

Klahr, D Cognztzon and znstructzon (Erlbaum, 1976)

Gagne, RM Essentials of learning for znstructzon (Dryden, 1975)

Paris, S , Olson, G and Stevenson, H Learn1ng and motzvatzon zn the classroom (Erlbaum, 1983)

Skmner, B F The technology of teaching (Appleton Century-Crofts, 1968)

54103 RESEARCH IN COGNITION AND INSTRUCTION DrMJ Lawson

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two and a half hour seminar per week Pre-reqwsites Master's level standmg 54101 Learning, Development and Educational Practice and 54102 Psychology and Instructrnn, or eqmvalent (Students who have completed 53515 Educatrnnal Psychology II may not take this topic for credit)

In this topic students wtll have an opportumty to examme m depth a problem which has emerged m the literature of cogmtrnn and mstructton Students will prepare a literature review in a given area and will become fam1har with research techniques used in that area Jn the latter part of the course students wtll plan, execute and report on a small-scale research pro1ect m the chosen area of study The prmctpal focus of the course will be upon the curriculum areas of wr1t1ng, reading and mathematics

Reference books Achenbach TM Research zn developmental

psychology (Free Pr, 1978) Barron j and Sternberg R Teaching

thznkzng skills (Freeman 1987) Bramsford j and Stern, B The zdeal

problem solver (Freeman, 1984) Cook, TD and Campbell, D Quasi

experzmentatzon (Rand McNally, 1979) Encsson I{ and Simon, H Protocol analyszs

(MIT Pr , 1984) Fnth, U Cogmtzve processes in spelling

(Academic, 1980) Puff CR ed Handbook of research methods

on human memory and cognztzon (Academic, 1982)

Schoenfeld, A Mathematical problem solving (Academic 1985)

54104 ISSUES IN THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF INSTRUCTIONAL PSYCHOLOGY Dr B Mageean

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two and a half hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes Master's level standing 54101 Learn1ng1 Development and Educational Practtce and 54102 Psychology and Instruction, or equivalent (Students who have completed 53515 Educat10nal Psychology II may not take this topic for credit)

The not10n that empmcal psychology has results that can be apphed m the area of teaching will be examined 1n this topic 1n the hght of questions relatmg to the practice of em pm cal psychology, the phtlosophy of mmd and the procedures of mstruct10n The outcome of the 1nqu1ry has some surpns1ng aspects

Reference books Baars B j A cognztive theory of

consczousness (Cambndge UP, 1989) Claxton, G Cogmtzve psychology - new

dzrectzons (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1980) Dennett, D C Brainstorms (Harvester, 1978) Dillon R F and Sternberg R j Cognztzon and

mstructzon (Academic 1986) Egan, !( and Nodaner, D, eds lmagznation

and educatzon (Open UP 1988)

M Ed and M Ed Studies

Freeman NH Strategies of representatzon m young children (Academic, 1980)

Hulme, C Reading retardatzon and multz­sensory teaching (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1981)

Langford P Concept development m the secondary school (Croom Helm, 1987)

Mann, L On the trail of process (Grune Stratton, 1979)

Ne1sser, U ed Concepts and conceptual development (Cambndge U P , 1989)

Ryle, G The concept of mmd (Hutchmson, 1949)

White R Learning science (Blackwell, 1988)

54201 VALUES AND EDUCATION Dr NA Nzlsson

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53520 Philosophy of Educat10n may not take this topic for credit)

In this topic education is considered as a form of pracl!cal theory as the systemaltc attempt to answer questions about what is to be done Such an answer would be the conclusion of an exercise in practical reasoning or deliberation The central concept 1n such an endeavour is that of a reason for action Values are essentially reasons for action

There are two main branches of practical ph!losophy, thus conceived

a) Theory of values which ts pnmanly concerned with the companson of ob1ects, s1tuat1ons, strategies etc 1n order to determme which is preferable to the other as a basis for rational dec1s1on making The central concepts here are better or worse than, good bad, preference, and value itself Moral values are particularly important 1n practical reasoning which 1s concerned with educational problems

b) The second roam branch of prachcal philosophy 1s normative theory which deals with who ought to reahse which values and how This is dealt with m the compamon topic 54203 Prachcal Reasonmg and Educat10n

237

School of Educatwn

Prelzmznary reading Gorovitz, S et al Phzlosophical analyszs

(Random House, 1979) Qumton, A The nature of things (Routledge,

1973)' Scnven M Pnmary philosophy (McGraw­

Hill, 1966)

Reference books Baier, K The moral poznt of view (Cornell

up. 1958) Baier, K and Rescher, N, eds Values and the

future (Free Pr, 1971) Brandt, R B A theory of the good and the

right (Clarendon Press, 1979) Hamson, J Our knowledge of right and

wrong (Allen & Unwm, 1971) Mackie, J L Ethics (Pengum Books, 1977)' Midgley, M Beast and man (Methuen 1979)* Nerlich, G Values and valuzng

speculatwns on the ethical life of persons (Oxford UP, 1989)

Purpel D and Ryan, K, eds Moral educatwn (Phi Delta Kappa, 1976)

Rescher, N Introductwn to value theory (Pren!Jce Hall 1969)*

Scnven, M The logic of evaluatzon (Edgepress, 1980)*

Scnven, M Evaluation thesaurus (Edgpress, 1980)

Wdhams, B Morality (Cambndge UP 1972)* Wnght G H van Varieties of goodness

(Routledge 1963)

54202 KNOWLEDGE AND EDUCATION Dr K Simpson

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre-requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53520 Philosophy of Educat10n may not take this topic for credit)

This topic will concern itself with some questions about knowledge which have ansen both m philosophy and m the study of education

Possible issues include the value of the quest for certainty the role of scepttc1sm or cnttc1sm m the quest for knowledge the pubhc1ty or pnvacy of evidence, and the question whether

238

knowledge claims are relative to cultural or other contexts W1th1n the lrm1ts of this general charactens atlon of the concerns of the topic the choice of specific questions or works for discussion will take into account, as far as possible the particular interests of students

Reference books Chisholm, RM Theory of knowledge

(Prentice Hall 1977) Gorovitz, S et al Philosophical analysis

(Random House, 1965) Hust P Knowledge and the curriculum

(Routledge & Kegan Paul 1974) Lakatos, I and Musgrave, A eds Crztzczsm

and the growth of knowledge (Cambndge up 1970)

Scheffler, I Conditw11s of knowledge (Scott Foresman, 1965)

Scnven M Primary philosophy (McGraw Hill 1966)

Urmson J 0 Philosophical analysis (Oxford UP, 1956)

Warnock, M Schools of thought (Faber & Faber, 1977)

Wdson, BR, ed Ratwnality (Blackwell, 1974)

54203 PRACTICAL REASONING AND EDUCATION Dr NA Nilsson

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53520 Philosophy of Educat10n may not take this topic for credit)

In this topic education 1s considered as a form of practical theory as the systematic attempt to answer questions about what 1s to be done Such an answer would be the conclusion of an exercise 1n practical reasoning or deliberation The central concept in such an endeavour is that of a reason for action

There are two main branches of practical philosophy, thus conceived

a) Normative theory which is pnmanly concerned with estabhshmg what people ought to do The most important classes of reasons to be considered 1n this respect are desires1 interests and values The

central concepts here are ought, reasons for action, rules duties, decision, choice and accountab1hty This provides the sub1ect matter of the present topic

b) The second main branch of practical philosophy IS theory of values Values are essentially reasons for action This is dealt with m the compamon topic 54201 Values and Education

Prelzmznary reading Gorovitz, S et al Ph1losoph1cal analyszs

(Random House, 1979) Hofstadter D R and Dennett, D C The

mznd s I fantaszes and reflectzons on self and soul (Pengum, 1982)

Qumton A The nature of thzngs (Routledge, 1973)

Scriven, M Przmary philosophy (McGraw­Hdl 1966)

Reference books Aristotle The ethics of Aristotle the

Nzcomachean ethics rev ed Translated by J AK Thomson (Pengum, 1976)·

Davidson D Essays on actions and events (Clarendon Pr, 1980)*

Dennett D C Braznstorms phzlosophzcal essays on mznd and psychology (Harvester 1979)·

Edgley, R Reason m theory and practzce (Hutchmson, 1969)

Fitzgerald, R , ed Human needs and polztzcs (Pergamon 1977)

Gauthier D P Practical reasonzng the structure and foundatzons of prudential and moral argument (Clarendon Press, 1963)

Hookway, C and Pettit, P, eds Action and mterpretatzon (Cambridge U P , 1978)

Hudson, W D , ed The zs ought question a collect10n of papers on the central problem zn moral phzlosophy (Macmillan, 1969)*

Mackie, J L Ethzcs znventmg rzght and wrong (Pengum 1977)*

Nozick R Anarchy, state and utopza (Blackwell, 1974)*

Nozick, R Phzlosophzcal explanatzons (Clarendon Pr, 1981)

Parf1t, D Reasons and persons (Clarendon Pr , 1984)*

Rawls, J A theory of 7ustzce (Oxford U P 1972)*

M Ed and M Ed Studzes

Raz, J , ed Practical reasonzng (Oxford U P , 1978)'

Wright, G H van Norm and actzon a logzcal enquiry (Routledge 1963)

54204 INTRODUCTORY SYMBOLIC LOGIC Dr K Simpson

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requisite Not avatlable to students with credit for work in the area of formal logic

This topic will offer an introduction to sentential calculus taken as an uninterpreted formal system to alternative ways of inter pretmg this system to elementary predicate calculus, to some applications of these systems, and to some problems of translation between formal systems and natural language No acquaintance with formal logic is presumed

Prelzmznary reading Black, M Crztical thznkzng, 2nd ed (Prentice

Hall 1965) Cop1 I Introductzon to logzc, 5th ed

(Macmillan, 1978)

Set books Cop1, I Symbolzc logzc, 4th ed (Macmillan

1973) Langer, SK An mtroduct10n to symbolic

logic, 2nd ed (Dover, 1953) OR Mates, B Elementary logzc 2nd ed

(Oxford U P , 1972)

Reference books Fraenkel, A , Bar Hillel, Y and Levy, A

Foundatzons of set theory, 2nd ed (North Holland, 1973)

Nilsson NJ Prznczples of artzfzczal zntellzgence (T10ga, 1980)

Strawson, P An zntroductzon to logical theory (Methuen, 1963)

Qume, WV 0 The ways of paradox (Random House 1966)

Qume, WV 0 Phzlosophy of logzc (Prentice Hall, 1970)

239

School of Educatwn

Qume, WV 0 Methods of logzc, 4th ed (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1982)

54301 SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION Dr f Maddock

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master s level standing (students who have completed 53530 Soc10logy of Educat10n may not take this topic for credit)

The topic will attempt a cnl!cal appreciat10n of soc10logical theory and method as apphed to the study of educat10n

Seminar d1scuss1ons follow first hand contact with writings 1n the field Areas include culture and society role and status strat1f1cation, social mob1hty, types of society, soc1ahsat1on, social change, knowledge and the curriculum

Prelzmznary reading Berger P L Invztatzon to sociology (Penguin,

1966)* Mills, CW The socwlogzcal zmagmatzon

(Pengum, 1972)*

Reference books Brown, R , ed Knowledge, education and

cultural change (Tavistock 1973) Cosm B R et al eds School and soczety

(Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1971) Dale, R et al , eds Schooling and capztalzsm

(Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1976) Halsey A H et al , eds Education, economy

and soczety (Free Pr, 1961) Musgrave PW ed Socwlogy, hzstory and

educatwn (Methuen 1970) Young MF D ed Knowledge and control

(Colher-Macmillan, 1971)

54302 SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION THEMES AND ISSUES Dr f L Kapferer

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53530 Soc10logy of Educat10n may not take this topic for credit)

240

Through an analysis of a small number of s1gn1flcant monographs in the sociology of education, students in this course are introduced to important themes in the field (e g 1 equality of opportunity, social class and reproduction, school community relations etc ) While the theorel!cal and methodo logical issues raised by these works provide the central focus of the course, students will also be expected to apply the fmdmgs of the authors studied to the contemporary Australtan context

Two hours each will be spent upon a discuss10n of (a) the fmdmgs and methodology, and (b) the theorel!cal orientation and imphcahons for Australtan education, of SIX ma1or works

Preliminary reading Connell R W et al Makzng the difference

(Allen & Unwm 1982)· Connell, W F et al 12 to 20 (Hicks Smith,

1975)* Hill, B The schools (Pengum, 1977)* Lofland, j Dozng social lzfe (Wiley, 1976)

Reference books Bowles, S and Gmtis, H Schoolzng m

capitalist Amerzca (Routledge 1976) Hargreaves D H Soczal relations zn a

secondary school (Routledge, 1967) Hollingshead AB Elmtown's youth (Wiley,

1975)' Jackson, B and Marsden, D Education and

the workzng class (Pengum, 1966)* Whyte, W F Street corner soczety 2nd ed

(Chicago U P , 1955)* W1lhs, P Learning to labour (Saxon House,

1977)'

54303 DURKHEIM ON EDUCATION Dr f Maddock

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing

This topic will focus on Durkheim's detailed study of the evolut10n of the French educa t1onal system, with particular emphasis on the changing content and structure of the curn culum The aim will be to show how the

content and structure of the curriculum may be related to social, economic and political developments m an attempt to penetrate the obscurity surrounding contemporary curricular movements Students will have the opportunity to specialise by applymg some of Durkheim s ideas to an educational system of their choice

Preliminary reading Giddens A Durkheim (Fontana/Collins

1978)

Set book Durkheim, E The evolutzon of educatzonal

thought (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1977)

Reference book Lukes, S Emile Durkheim (Pengum, 1973)

54304 EDUCATION AND SOCIAL THEORY Dr J L Kapferer

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53535 Educat10n and Social Theory may not take this topic for credit)

This topic comprises an introduction to the work of some of the ma1or social theorists and an attempt to apply their work to the study of education Conservative technocratic, romantic and egahtar1an 1deolog1es of educat10n will be analysed through a study of particularly, Karl Marx and Max Weber

The first four weeks of this course will be devoted to (a) an analysis of some of the ma1or concepts ubhsed by Weber and Marx 1n their studies of modem European society, e g bureaucracy ideology class, status etc , and (b) the apphcat10n of these concepts to the study of educat10n The remamder of the course will focus upon dominant ideological themes in western education conservatism, technocracy, romanticism and egahtananism

Preliminary reading Marx, K and Engels F The German ideology

(any ed1t10n)

M Ed and M Ed Studies

Weber, M From Max Weber ed and transl H H Gerth and C W Mills (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1964)

Reference books Ehot, TS Notes towards the defmitzon of

culture (Faber 1962)* Ellul j The technological society (Knopf,

1964)* Ilhch, I Deschoolzng society (Harper & Row

1971)' Williams R The long revolution (Penguin,

1965)"

HISTORY OF EDUCATION POPULAR EDUCATION AND THE MODERN WORLD Dr D Grundy and Dr B K Hyams

The Master of Education programme will include 1n its coursework options, a set of four semester topics 1n a course of study Popular Education 1n the Modern World The four topics are as follows

1 Popular Educat10n m England 1780 1870 (54401, see below)

2 Popular Educat10n m Austraha to 1900 (54402, see below)

3 School and Society m England and America A Study m Selected Readmgs (54403 see below)

4 Popular Educat10n m Austraha smce 1900 (54404 see belowi

Students may enrol in all four topics as part of their M Ed programme Less than four can be taken but not less than two of which at least one will be either Popular Education zn England 1780 1870 or School and Society in England and America A Study zn Selected Readings

54401 POPULAR EDUCATION IN ENGLAND 1780 1870 Dr D Grundy or Dr B K Hyams

Units Level

6 Graduate 1

Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53551 Popular Educat10n m England 1780 1870 or 53555 Schoolmg Systems may not take this topic for credit)

241

School of Educatwn

This topic will examme (1) the arguments advanced for popular education tn late eighteenth century England, (2) the sub sequent social con:fhct over the content of popular educat10n and its control, and (3) the resultmg orgamsat10n of publicly funded systematic elementary schoohng to 1870 These factors will be used to discover the way social forces and educational ideas combine in the rise of state regulated compulsory schoolmg

Reference books Bantock G H Studies rn the history of

educatwnal theory vol 11, The mmds and the masses, 1760 1980 (Allan & Unwm, 1984)

Digby, A and Searby P Children, school and society zn nineteenth century England (Macmillan, 1981)

Hurt, J Education in evolutzon (Paladin 1971)

Simon B Studies zn the history of education, 1780 1870 (Lawrence & Wishart, 1960)

See also the Higher Degrees brochure of the School of Educat10n

54402 POPULAR EDUCATION IN AUSTRALIA TO 1900 Dr D Grundy or Dr B K Hyams

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes Masters level standing 54401 Popular EducatJon m England 1780 1870, or 54403 School and Society m England and America a Study in Selected Readings or their equivalents (students who have completed 53552 Popular Educat10n m Australia to 1900 or 53555 Schoolmg Systems may not take this topic for credit)

This topic will examine the education reform controversies 1n the Australian colonies with respect to their English background and the conditions of colonial settlement This study will include such issues as the state aid controversy, the development of the Australian schools inspectorate the emergence of centralised state control of pubhc education, curriculum development, and the relat1onsh1p between popular elementary schoolmg and social class in Australia

242

Prelzmznary reading Austm AG Australian educatwn 1788

1900 church stand and educatzon m colonial Australia (Pitman, 1961)

Grundy, D Secular, compulsory and free' the Education Act of 1872 (Melbourne UP 1972)

Hyams, B K and Bessant B Schools for the people? an introduction to the history of state education in Australia (Longman, 1972)

See also the Higher Degrees brochure of the School of EducatJon

Text book Hyams, B K et al Learning and other thmgs

sources towards a social history of educatwn m South Australia (S A Govt Prmter, 1988)

54403 SCHOOL AND SOCIETY IN ENGLAND AND AMERICA A STUDY IN SELECTED READINGS Dr D Grundy or Dr B K Hyams

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requisite Master's level standing (students who have completed 53553 School and Society 1n England and America a Study m Selected Readmgs or 53550 History of Western Education may not take this topic for credit)

This topic will analyse various mterpretat1ons advanced 1n historical studies of the relat1onsh1p between popular education, social structures ideological pnnc1ples and the organ1satlon of schooltng

Prelzmznary reading Hurt JS Elementary schooling and the

working classes 1860 1918 (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1979)

Katz M B Class, bureaucracy and schools the illuswn of educatzonal change in America (Praeger, 1971)

McCann, P ed Popular education and soczalzzatzon zn the twentieth century chapters 3 4 9 (Methuen, 1977)

Tyack, DB The one best system a history of Amerzcan urban educatwn (Harvard U P 1974)

See also the Higher Degrees Brochure of the School of Educallon

54404 POPULAR EDUCATION IN AUSTRALIA SINCE 1900 Dr D Grundy or Dr B K Hyams

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes Masters level standing Topic 54401 Popular Education m England 1780 1870 or topic 54403 School and Society in England and Amenca or their equivalents (students who have completed 53554 Popular Educat10n m Australia smce 1900 or 53550 History of Western Educat10n may not take this topic for credit)

This topic will consider the development of popular education w1th1n the social and political contexts of the twenlleth century There will be scope for the study of non government schooling, reformist movements 1n curricula, the involvement of the state in prov1d1ng post primary education, and of the bureaucracies in relation to their employees, parhament and the economy Atten!Ion will be given to the contnbullon of Enghsh and Amencan sources to Australian pohc1es and practices Students will also be afforded the opportumty of undertakmg a hm1ted piece of ong1nal research on a selected topic

Preliminary reading Bessant, B and Spaull, AD Politics of

schooling (Pitman, 1976) Cleverley, J and Lawry, J, eds Australian

education zn the twentieth century studies in the development of state educatwn (Longman, 1972)

Turney, C, ed Pzoneers of Australzan educatwn, vol 3 studies of the develop ment of educatwn zn Australia 1900 50 (Sydney U P , 1983)

See also the Higher Degrees Brochure of the School of Educat10n

M Ed and M Ed Studies

Text book Hyams, B K et al Learning and other thmgs

sources towards a social hzstory of educatwn m South Australia (SA Govt Pnnter 1988)*

54501 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT AND CULTURE Dr G G Partington

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53575 Cumculum Theory and Development may not take this topic for credit)

The topic considers the relationship in curriculum theory and practice between educational goods and cultural contingency Are there any universal or trans cultural educallonal aims and 1! so what are they and what 1s their Justification? Do contingent facts, whether concerning 1nd1v1duals, groups or whole soc1et1es facts about, for instance, ethn1c1ty, gender social class or other cultural categortes, determine the educationally good and ought they to do so? What purchase have such concepts as core curriculum equaltty of educational opportunity education for democracy and educahon to the hm1t of the learners potential? I-low 1s development, or progress identified 1n child centred, in radical reconstruction1st in 1nstrumentahst, and 1n hberal theortes of education?

Reference books Bloom AD The closing of the American

mmd (Pengum, 1987) Cooper, D Illuswns of equality (Routledge &

Kegan Paul, 1980) Dearden, RF Theory and practice zn

educatwn (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1984) Demaine J Contemporary theories zn the

socwlogy of educatwn (Macmillan, 1981) Entwistle, H Class, culture and education

(Methuen 1977) Flew, A Thmkmg about social thmkzng

(Basil Blackwell, 1985) Hirsh, ED Cultural literacy what every

Amerzcan needs to know (Houghton M1ffhn, 1987)

Hirst, P H Knowledge and the curriculum (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1974)

243

School of Educatzon

0 Hear, A Education society and human nature (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1981)

54502 CURRICULUM THEORY Dr K Simpson

Units 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact I two hour seminar per week Pre-requ1s1tes Masters level standing 54501 Curriculum Development and Culture, or 54201 Values and Educat10n, or 54202 Knowledge and Education or equivalent (students who have completed 53757 Curnculum Theory and Development may not take this topic for credit)

This topic attempts an account of formal or general educat10nal theory, which is taken to be the baszs on which the adequacy of any putatively comprehensive body of curncular recommendation may be determined

The concerns of the topic mclude the role of def1n1tlon and analysis of concepts, the nature of theories the notions of profess1onal authonty and responsib1hty, the case for takmg certain conceptual issues to be central in an account of educational theory, and the roles played by academic d1sc1phnes, value onentattons and so on in the development of curriculum

Reference books Moore, T W Educational theory an intro

ductzon (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1974) Moore T W Philosophy of educatwn

(Routledge & Kegan Paul 1982) O'Connor, DJ Introductzon to the philo

sophy of educatzon (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1957)

54503 CURRICULUM INNOVATION AND IMPLEMENTATION Staff of the School of Educatzon

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing (students who have completed 53577 Curnculum Implementation and Classroom Processes may not take this topic for credit)

244

In this topic students will analyse research and models of 1nnovatlon 1n education The course includes studies of influential national cumculum pro1ects as well as school based curnculum development and deals with the various poht1cal social and educational factors and processes involved 1n attempts to instltutionahse curriculum changes 1n schools

Reference books Eggleston, ) The socwlogy of the school

cumculum (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1977) Lawton D The politics of the school

curriculum (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1980) Marsh, C and Stafford, K Curriculum

Australian practices and zssues (McGraw Hill, 1984)

McDonald, B and Walker R Changing the cumculum (Open Books, 1976)

Reid WA and Decker, D F Case studies rn cumculum changes (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1975)

54504 CLASSROOM PROCESSES Staff of the School of Educatzon

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53577 Curnculum Implementation and Classroom Processes may not take this topic for credit)

As curriculum finds its meaning in the inter relationships among teachers, pupils and curriculum materials 1n classrooms, this course focuses on the study of 1nteract1on patterns 1n classrooms The topic includes an analysts of research on teacher effectiveness, teacher dec1s1on making and teaching as a hngutshc process and models of the teachmg learnmg process

Reference books Brophy ) and Good, TL Teacher student

relatzonships (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston 1974)

Dunkm M and Biddle B The study of teaching (Holt Rmehart and Wmston 1974)

Eggleston ) Teacher decmon making m the classroom (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1979)

Joyce, B and Well M Models of teaching (Prentice-Hall, 1980)

Peterson, P L and Walberg, H Research on teaching (McCutchan, 1979)

Spindler, G , ed Doing the ethnography of schooling (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1982)

Stubbs, M and Delamont, S Exploratwns in classroom observatwn (Wiley, 1976)

54505 PROGRAMME AND CURRICULUM EVALUATION MODELS AND ISSUES Mr D Hogben

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requisite Master's level standing (students who have completed 53590 Educallonal Evaluat10n Issues Models and Techniques may not take this topic for credit)

This topic 1s designed to introduce students to the study of evaluation, particularly as various procedures and techniques are employed 1n attempts to deternune the value of educational programmes and curricula A number of the evaluation approaches or models which have emerged over the years are exam1ned1 their underlying assumptions 1dent1fled, and their advantages and disadvantages considered In the course ofth1s examination several theore bcal and practical issues are noted and discussed This d1scuss1on of issues is ltm1ted, more detailed and careful examination ts undertaken 1n 54506 Issues in Programme and Curriculum Evaluation

Reference books In addition to consulting Reference books mcludmg the followmg, students will be directed to readmg from published articles and papers, and a number of unpublished papers

Davis, E Teachers as curriculum evaluators (Allen & Unwm, 1980)

Guba, E G and Lmcoln, Y S Effective evaluatwn Uossey Bass, 1981)

House E R Evaluating with validity (Sage, 1980)

House, ER, ed New dzrectzons zn educatwnal evaluatwn (Palmer, 1986)

Madaus, G F, Scnven M and Stufflebeam, D L Evaluatwn models (Kluwer Ni1hoff, 1983)

M Ed and M Ed Studies

Popham, W j Educatwnal evaluatwn, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1988)

Patton M Q Creative evaluatwn, 2nd ed (Sage 1987)

Rossi PH and Freeman HE Evaluatzon a systematic approach, 3rd ed (Sage, 1985)

Scnven, M Evaluatwn thesaurus (Edgepress, 1981)

Worthen, BR and Sanders, j R Educatwnal evaluation alternative approaches and practical gwdelmes (Longman, 1987)

Worthen BR and Sanders, j R Educatwnal evaluation theory and practice (Charles A )ones 1973)

54506 ISSUES IN PROGRAMME AND CURRICULUM EVALUATION Mr D Hogben

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre reqms1te Master's level standmg 54505 Programme and Curriculum Evaluation Models and Issues (students who have completed 53590 Educatwnal Evaluat10n Issues Models and Techniques may not take thIS topic for credit)

Issues 1dentif1ed from the consideration of evaluallon approaches or models m 54505 Programme and Curriculum Evaluation Models and Issues are examined in detail A central issue is the current tendency 1n evaluation, both 1n theory and 1n practice, to by pass values themselves on the grounds that value 1udgments can only ever be subjective Other ISsues explored take account of the developed mterests of the students enrolled for the topic, but will most hkely mclude accountab1hty, comparative versus non comparative evaluation, needs and needs assessment, qualitative versus quant1tat1ve evaluatJ.on1 evaluation uhhsat1on

Reference books In add1t10n to the Reference books hsted for 54505 Programme and Curriculum Evaluation Models and Issues and those listed below, students will be directed to readmg from published articles and papers, and a number of unpublished papers

Adelman C , ed The politics and ethics of evaluatwn (Croom Helm 1987)

245

School of Educatzon

Evaluatzon Studzes review annual (Sage 1976 on)

House, E R The logic of evaluative argument CSE Monograph Series m Evaluatzon, No 7 (Cahforma UP, 1977)

Patton, M Q Ut1l1zatzon focused evaluatzon, 2nd ed (Sage, 1986)

Rossi, P H , ed Standard practice for evaluation practzce Gossey-Bass, 1982)

Scriven M The logic of evaluatzon (Edgepress 1980)

Standards for educational programs products and materials (McGraw Hill, 1981)

Stufflebeam, D L et al Conducting educational needs assessment (Kluwer­N11hoff, 1985)

White, AR Modal thinking (Blaclcwell, 1975) Worthen, BR and White, KR Evaluating

educational and social programs (Kluwer N11hoff 1987)

Wright, G H , von The vanetzes of goodness (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1963)

54601 SPORT AND ATHLETICS IN MODERN SOCIETY Mr R J Paddick

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes Master's level standmg 54201 Values and Educat10n or 54202 Knowledge and Education or consent of instructor

Students m this topic will examme the attempts to describe and explam the place of sport and athletics in contemporary society Issues such as the conflicts in professional sport, the use of sport in pohtics, confhcttng ideologies of sport and the decline of Olympism will be considered

Reference books Cantelon H and Gruneau R Sport culture

and the modern state (Toronto UP, 1982) Fraleigh, W P Rzght actwns m sport (Human

Kmel!cs, 1984) Gerber, E W and Morgan W J Sport and the

body a phzlosoph1cal symposium, 2nd ed (Lea & Feb1ger 1979)

Guttmann A From rztual to record (Columbia UP , 1978)

Lenk, H Social philosophy of athletics (Stzpes, 1979)

246

Lowe, B l(an1n, D B and Strenk, A Sport and mternatzonal relatzons (Stipes, 1978)

Morgan, W J and Meier KV eds Philo sophzc znqu1ry zn sport (Human Kmetics, 1987)

Reiss SA TheAmencan sporting expenence (Leisure Press, 1984)

Segrave J 0 and Chu D The Olympic Games in transition (Human l{Jnet1cs, 1987)

Suits, B The grasshopper (Toronto UP, 1978)

54602 PLAY, LEISURE AND GAMES Mr Rf Paddick

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre reqmsites Master's level standing 54201 Values and Educat10n or 54202 Knowledge and Education or consent of instructor

In this topic students will examine def1n1tions and theones of play, leisure and games with a view to developing a critical appreciation of modern institutions based on these concepts

Reference books Entwistle, H Education, work and leisure

(Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1970) Haworth J T and Smith M A , eds Work and

leisure (Lepus, 1975) Hmzmga J Homo ludens (Paladm 1970) Smith, P K , ed Play m animals and humans

(Blackwell, 1984) Smts, B The grasshopper (Toronto U P , 1978) Wmmfnth, T and Barnett, C The philosophy

of leisure (St Martms 1989)

54603 ADVANCEI;> EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY Dr R T Withers "

Umts 12 Level Graduate Durat10n Full year Pre requisites Master's level standing 53461 Physical Act1V1ty Exercise Phys10logy or its eqmvalent (students who have completed 53623 Advanced Exercise Physiology may not take this topic for credit)

This topic will provide students with a detailed treatment of the followmg

1) Acute and chronic effects of exercise on the body

2) Exercise prescnphon 3) The phys10logical bases of trammg

Set books American College of Sports Medicme Guide

Imes for graded exercise testing and exercise prescnptzon (Lea & Febiger, 1986)•

Astrand, P 0 and Rodahl K Textbook of work physiology (McGraw Hzll, 1986)*

McArdle, W D , Katch, F I and Katch, V L Exercise physrology energy, nutrition and human performance, 2nd ed (Lea & Febiger, 1986)

Vander, A J , Sherman, J H and Luciano, D S Human physzology the mechanisms of body functzon, 4th ed (McGraw Hill, 1986)*

54604 LABORATORY TECHNIQUES IN EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY Dr R T Withers

Umts 12 Level Graduate Duratrnn Full year Pre reqmsites Masters level standmg 53461 Physical Act1V1ty Exercise Phys10logy or its equivalent

The students will be acquamted with non 1nvas1ve laboratory techniques used in sports physiology Emphasis will be placed on rehabihty together with an appraisal of the assumpt10ns underlymg the methods There will be a d1scuss1on of the current avallable instrumentation

Reference books Anderson, K L , Shephard, R j , Denolm, H ,

Varnauskas, E and Mas1ron1, R Fundamentals of exercise testing (World Health Orgamsatrnn, 1971)

BroZek, J and Henschel, A , eds Techniques for measuring body compositzon (National Academy of Sciences, 1961)

Carter, j EL The Heath Carter somatotype method (San Diego State Umversity Syllabus Service, 1980)

Clausen, j L , ed Pulmonary functzon testing guidelines and controversies equipment, methods and normal values (Academic, 1982)

M Ed and M Ed Studies

Consolaz10, C F, Johnson, RE and Pecora, L J Physzological measurements of metabolic functzons in man (McGraw Hill 1963)

)ones, NL and Campbell, E j M Clzmcal exercise testing, 2nd ed (Saunders, 1982)

MacDougall, j D , Wenger, HA and Green, H j, eds Physzological testing of the elite athlete (Mutual, 1982)

Ruppel, G Manual of pulmonary functzon testing (Mosby, 1979)

Wasserman, l( , Hansen, J E , Sue, D Y and Whipp, BJ Principles of exercise testing and mterpretatzon (Lea & Febiger, 1987)

54606 ISSUES IN AUSTRALIAN SPORTS HISTORY Dr W Vamplew and Dr J A Daly

Umts 12 Level Graduate Durallon Full year Class Contact 1 two hour semmar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 54605 may not take this topic for credit)

This topic will examine ma1or issues in the history of sport m Australia with special reference to the econom1c, social, and political role of sport A sectrnn of the topic will be devoted to South Australia A pro1ect will be undertaken in the second semester

Set books Daly, j A Elysian fields (G1llmgham, 1982) Dunstan, K Sports (Sun Books, 1981)

Reference books Cashman, R and McKernan, M Sport in

history (Queensland UP, 1979) Cashman, R and Mcl(eman, M Sport money,

morality and the media (N S W U P 1981) Corns, P Lords of the ring (Cassel, 1980) lnghs G Sport and pastime in Australza

(Methuen 1912) Lawrence, G and Rowe D Power play

(lremonger, 1986) , Sandercock, L and Turner, I Up where

Cazaly (Granada, 1981) Stewart, R The Australian football business

(Kangaroo Press, 1983) Stoddart, B Saturday afternoon fever

(Angus & Robertson 1986)

247

School of Education

54701 DEVELOPMENT IN EARLY CHILDHOOD Dr A Russell

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requisite Master's level standing (students who have completed 53648 Development m Early Childhood may not take thIS topic for credit)

The topic aims to introduce students to research and theory about development in early childhood Three main areas will be covered (a) factors 1nfluenc1ng development, with attentrnn given to the effect of the family environment on early development, d1vorce1

child abuse and the nature of parenthood, (b) language development, where mterest will centre on factors affecting language acqu1s1tion and development, and (c) social development 1nvolv1ng areas such as peer relations, fnendshrp, social cogn1hon and social skills As part of the topic, students will be expected to complete a small scale study of young children

Reference books

Asher, S R and Co1e ] D , eds Peer re1ectzon m childhood (Cambndge UP, 1989)

Cartledge, G and Milburn J F Teachzng soczal skills to children innovative approaches, 2nd ed (Pergamon, 1986)'

Hetherington, EM and Arasteh, ] D , eds Impact of dzvorce, smgle parentmg and stepparentzng on children (Erlbaum, 1988)

Oskarnp, S , ed Family processes and problenzs soczal psychologzcal aspects (Apphed Social Psychology annual, vol 7, Sage 1987)

Rutter, M Maternal deprzvatzon reassessed 2nd ed (Pengum, 1981)*

Schneider B H , Rubm K H and Ledmgham, J E, eds Children's peer relations zssues zn assessment and znterventzon (Springer, 1985)

Smith P K and Cowie, H Understandzng c/nldren's development (Blackwell, 1988)

248

Tunmer, WE, Pratt, C and Hernman ML, eds Metalznguzstzc awareness zn chzldren (Spnnger Verlag, 1984)

Wachs TD and Gruen G E Early expenence and human development (Plenum 1982)

54702 ISSUES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION Dr A Russell

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53649 Issues m Early Childhood Education may not take thIS topic for credit)

The topic aims to explore several of the maior current problems or issues 1n early childhood educatrnn EmphaSis will be placed on the analysis of research findings beanng on the issues The main issues to be covered are (a) the uclass size J question, (b) the acqu1s1hon of readmg (c) transitions m early childhood (e g, pre school to school), (d) early childhood educatrnn for Abongmes, (e) play m early childhood and (f) sex-role stereotypes Most of the work will be from Journal articles

Reference books

Abt Associates Children at the Center (Abt Associates, 1979)

Austraha Department of Educat10n Pre school education a revzew of polzcy, practice and research (AGPS, 1981)*

Block, j H Sex role identity and ego development Oossey Bros, 1984)

Cleave, S et al And so to school a study of contznu1ty from pre school to infant school (NFER - Nelson 1982)*

LISs MB, ed Social and cognztzve skills sex roles and chzldren's play (Academic, 1983)

McConnoch1e, K and Russell, A Early childhood services for Aborigznal children (AGPS, 1982)*

Pepler, D and Rubm, K eds The play of children (S Kanger, 1982)*

54703 MODELS AND OUTCOMES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION Dr A Russell

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing

There are two parts of the topic The first involves a comparison of a range of early childhood programmes, each of which claims to have one or more unique charactenst1cs It will include 'trad1tional pre schooling, the Montessori approach and several programmes that have developed out of the Head Start movement (1nclud1ng the 'Bere1ter Engelmann' programme, Gray 1s 'Early Tra1n1ng Pro1ect', Levenste1n's Mother Child Home Programme' and We1kart s 'Perry Pre School Pro1ect') The companson will cover areas such as general philosophy and attitude to children, the role of teachers and parents the curriculum and evidence about short term and long term outcomes of the programmes

The second part of the topic is devoted to the early years of schooling and involves an examination of research on (a) the comparison of programmes and (b) the relat10nship between teacher behaviour and outcomes

Reference books Anderson, L N , ed Tzme and school learning

(St Martm Press 1984)

Bennett, N , Desfurges, C , Cockburn, A and W1lkmson B The qualzty of pupil learning experiences (Lawrence Erlbaum, 1984)*

Borich, G D Effective teaching methods (Merrill, 1988)

Lazar, F and Darlington, R Lasting effects of early educatzon a report from the consor tzum for longitudinal studies (Society for Research in Child Development, Monograph No 195, 1982)

Miller, LB and Dyer ) L Four pre school programs their dimenszons and effects (Society for Research m Child Development Monograph No 162, 1975)

Roopnanne, ) L and ) ohnson ) E eds Approaches to early childhood educatzon (Merrill, 1987)

M Ed and M Ed Studies

Wittroch, MC ed Handbook of research on teaching, 3rd ed (Macmillan 1986)

54704 EARLY CHILDHOOD CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT DrM Ebbeck

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hour seminar per week Pre requisite Masters level standing

This topic aims to investigate the changing field of early childhood prov1510n w1thm Austraha and 1n selected overseas countries focussmg on the early childhood profess10nal as a curriculum planner, developer and evaluator Emphasis will be placed on the perceived intended and actual curriculum, the relationship between an early childhood continuum and curriculum processes 1denti fymg and respondmg to change as related to the inclusive curriculum, utihs1ng the research base for improving early chddhood curricula, increasing effectiveness as an early childhood practitioner and curriculum developer and evaluating educational issues and processes as these apply to early childhood settmgs for the age range of birth to eight years

Reference books Carr W and Kemmms, S Becoming critical

knowing through action research (Deakm U P 1986)

Chazan, M , Laing A and Harper G Teaching fzve to eight year olds theory and practice zn educatzon (Blackwell, 1987)

Clark M M Children under five educatzonal research and evidence (Gordon & Breach, 1988)

Marsh, C and Stafford, K Curriculum practices and issues (McGraw Hill 1988)

Print M Curriculum development and design (Allen & Unwm, 1987)

Seefeldt, C ed The early childhood curriculum a revzew of current research (Teachers College Pr, 1987)

Spodek, B , Saracho, 0 and Peters D Professzonalzsm and the early childhood practitzoner (Teachers College Pr , 1985)

249

School of Educatzon

54801 ADULT EDUCATION THE ADULT ASA LEARNER Dr NA Nilsson and Dr M f Lawson

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53536 Adult Education The Adult As a Learner may not take this topic for credit)

This topic 1s designed to provide an mtroduct10n to the study of adult educat10n through the use of philosophical and psycho logical frameworks In the first sect10n phllo soph1cal issues concerning the terms "adult" and adult education' will be considered In the second section students will examine these terms from a psycholog1cal and 1nstructional perspective

The first section will involve exam1nation of conceptual problems and common fallac1es, 'pedagogy and andragogy', the very notion of what it is to be a child or an adult, ideals and values, the idea of maturity how to be educated as a child - the so called 'world of childhood , how to be educated as an adult -different VIews of 'the educated man', problems of d1scr1m1nat1on in adult learning, organ1sat1on of adult learning, adults as consumers or adults as merchandise the post secondary enquiry industry as a source of wisdom in these matters The second section of the topic will deal with the followmg issues views of the adult m developmental psycho logy, ageing and cognition, models of adult learning and their instructional 1mphcat1ons

Reference books Birren, J and Sehove KW Handbook of the

psychology of agzng 2nd ed (Van Nostrand, 1985)

Botwimck, J Agzng and behavzour, 3rd ed (Sprmger, 1984)

Chipman, S , Segal, J and Glaser, R Thznkzng and learnzng skills vol 2 (Erlbaum, 1985)

Cropley, A J Lifelong educatzon a psycho logical analysis (Oxford UP, 1979)

Ryabash, J , Hoyer W and Roedm, P Adult cognztzon and agzng (Pergamon, 1986)

250

54802 ADULT/FURTHER EDUCATION SOCIOLOGICAL APPROACHES Dr f Maddock

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53537 Adult/ Further Education Histoncal and Soc1olog1cal Approaches may not take this topic for credit)

Reference books Cos1n1 B R ed Educatzon structure and

society (Pengum 1972) Gleeson, D and Mardle, G Further education

or traznzng? a case study zn the theory and practzce of day release educatzon (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1980)

Gorz, A , ed The dzviszon of labour the Labour process and class struggle zn modern capztalzsm (Harvester Pr, 1978)

Karabel J and Halsey A H , eds Power and ideology zn educatzon (Oxford UP, 1977)

Central Advisory Counctl for Education, Mmistry of Educat10n Great Brztazn 15 to 18 (H M S 0 1959)

Musgrave PW Soczology, history and educatzon (Methuen, 1970)

Ryne, A C and Weir AD Getting a trade (Hodder & Stoughton, 1978)

Tipton, B Conflict and change zn the technzcal college (Hutchinson, 1973)

Venables E Apprentices out of thezr time (Faber & Faber, 1974)

54810 MODELS OF LANGUAGE USE Dr R Kelly

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour lecture per week Pre requisite Perm1ss1on of the lecturer

This topic offers a cntlcal appraisal of current theories of language and language use and their relevance to the concerns of language learning and the design of courses for language learnmg Evaluat10n of the achievement of course goals will be assignments requ1nng the analysis of genuine instances of language in use and of the lmgmsllc demands of certam areas of language use (Enghsh for academic purposes for instance)

54811 MODELS OF LANGUAGE LEARNING Dr R Kelly

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour lecture per week Pre requisite Perm1ss1on of the lecturer

This topic offers a crillcal appraisal of current theories of language learning and of their relevance to the design of courses for language learning Evaluation of achievement of course goals will be assignments requiring a critique of the assumptions and emp1r1cal under p1nn1ng of the theories discussed

54812 MODELS OF COURSE DESIGN FOR LANGUAGE LEARNING Dr R Kelly

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour lecture per week Pre requ1s1te Pernuss1on of the lecturer

This topic offers a cnllcal appraisal of current apphcat10ns of theories of language, language use and language learning to the design of courses for language learning Evaluation of achievement of the goals of the course will be by assignments that reqmre an analysis of current apphcattons of theories 1n the areas dealt with to the design of particular courses and to the development of language teachmg approaches

54901 EDUCATION, IDEOLOGY AND CULTURE Dr f L Kapferer

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing

This topic investigates educational ideas and practices which are seen as either transfonmng or maintaining the hfe chances of individuals and groups m Australian society The mter

M Ed and M Ed Studies

relationships among educational practices, ideological constructions of social reahty and culture contexts are examined from a sociological and comparative perspective The ma1or focus of the course will be upon educational ideas and practices considered to be socially d1v1s1ve, the main organising concept bemg the notion of cultural imperialism Within this framework, educational issues associated with race, ethn1c1ty, gender and class will be examined 1n some detail

Prelzmznary reading Butts, R F Assumptions underlying

Australian educatzon (ACER, 1955) Partridge, PH Society, schools and progress

m Australia (Pergamon, 1968)

Reference books Browne, R K and Magm, D j , eds Soczology

of educatzon (Macmillan, 1976) Karabel j and Halsey A H eds Power and

ideology zn educatzon (Oxford U P , 1977) Mannheim K Ideology and utopia

(Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1960) Henry, j Essays on educatzon (Pengum, 1971)

54902 LANGUAGE AND EDUCATION Dr RA Kelly

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requisite Master's level standing

1) Language as a system phonology syntax, lexts semantics

2) Language zn use language events, discourse text speech acts coherence cohesion, social contexts, language processing

3) Educational zmplzcat1ons for education in general, Enghsh and second and foreign language learning

Prelzmznary reading Wilson, D and Smith, N Modern lznguzstzcs

The results of Chomsky's revolutzon (Pengum, 1979)

251

School of Educatzon

54904 CURRENT DEVELOPMENTS IN ABORIGINAL EDUCATION Dr G R Teasdale

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per fortmght Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing

In this topic students will have the opportumty to make a detailed analysis of current issues and developments in the education of Aborigmal Australians If possible a field tnp will be made to central Australia to VlSlt schools, meet with Abong1nal groups, and part1c1pate in seminars with local educators

Issues for review mclude (i) ma1or reports on Abongmal educat10n published durmg the precedmg 3 or 4 years (n) curriculum research and development m Aborigmal pre , primary and secondary schools, (111) trad1t1onal methods of teachmg learnmg and child reanng 1n Abong1nal society and their utlhsatlon 1n contemporary schooltng (1v) the movement towards Abor1g1nal self determ1nahon in education, the development of 'alternative' and homeland schools (v) trammg for employment Abor1g1nal part1c1patton in further and higher educat10n Aborigmal teacher education

Reference books Australian Aboriginal Studies (Periodical) Christle, M) Aboriginal perspectives on

experience and learmng (Deakm U P , 1985)

Christie, M ) The classroom world of the Aborzgmal child (NT Department of Educat10n, 1985)

Coombs C Brandl M M and Snowdon WE A certain heritage (C R E S A N U , 1983)

Ellis, C) Aborzgmal music educatzon for lzvzng (Queensland UP, 1985)

Folds R Whitefella School educatzon and Aborzgznal reszstance (Allen & Unwm 1987)

Hamilton A Nature and nurture (Australian Institute for Aborigmal Studies, 1981)

Harns, S Culture and learning (Australian Inslltute for Abongmal Studies, 1984)

252

Harns, S Two way Aborzgznal schooling (Aborigmal Studies Press 1990)

Harvey B and McG1nty, S , eds Learning my way (Umversity of WA Press 1989)

l{eeffe l{ Aborzgznal education, culture and power (Aborigmal Studies Press, 1991)

Report of the House of Representatives Select Committee on Aborzginal Education (AGPS, 1985)

Teasdale, G R and Whitelaw, A) The early childhood educatzon of Aborzgznal Australians (ACER, 1981)

The Aborzginal child at school (Periodical)

Master of Special Educatzon (M Spec Ed)

Master of Educatzon (Special Educatzon) (M Ed (Spec Ed)) Degrees Topics

and Graduate Certificate zn Special Educatzon

Students of the M Spec Ed and the M Ed (Special Educat10n) will be expected to study general aspects of special education trans cend1ng the usual categorical d1stlnct1ons of type of d1sab1ltty as well as the more trad1honal d1v1s1on of courses according to categories of handicap In addit10n for the M Spec Ed , students will undertake a 12 unit Coursework Pro1ect 1n Special Education, whereas for the M Ed (Spec Ed ) students will undertake a 36 unit thesis or an 18 unit research pro1ect 1n

the area of special education or welfare of the handicapped Students will be expected to take 12 units (or in some cases 18 units) of coursework in topics from the M Ed programme other than those designated below The first topic on the followmg list is compulsory for all students

54010 Current Perspectives m Special Education

54011 Systems and the Profess10nal m Special Education

54012 Cumculum Theory and Special Educat10n

54013 Early Development and Except10nahty

54014 Mental Retardat10n

54015 Behav10ur Problems 54016 Educat10n of Children with Physical

D1sab1hhes 54018 Educat10n of Children with Learnmg

D1ff1cult1es 54021 Education of Hearmg Impaired

Students I 54022 Educat10n of Hearmg Impaired

Students II 54023 Educat10n of Visually Impaired

Students I 54024 Educat10n of Visually Impaired

Students II 54025 Coursework Pro1ect m Special

Education

53610 THESIS Dr D f Thomas Mr GM Cooper and DrB Mageean

Umts 36 Level Postgraduate Duration One year full time Class Contact 1 two hour class per week and personal d1rectlon Pre reqms1te 36 umts m the M Ed (Spec Ed ) programme

The thesis semmars for M Ed (Spec Ed) students consist of advanced coursework leading to a thesis The coursework, which is preliminary to the thesis w1ll 1nvolve intensive reading in the area of particular interest in Special Education On the basis ofthts reading the student will be reqmred to submit a thesis proposal and, tf this is accepted, proceed to the thesis

53609 RESEARCH PROJECT Dr D f Thomas, Mr G M Cooper and Dr B Mageean

Umts 18 Level Graduate Class Contact Personal d1rectton Pre requ1s1te Satisfactory completion of 36 umts m the M Ed (Spec Ed ) programme·

The research pro1ect for M Ed (Spec Ed ) students 1s mtended to give students the opportumty of applymg research techmques to an issue in the education or welfare of the handicapped Students will part1c1pate m semmars as directed by the Special Educat10n

M Spec Ed M Ed (Spec Ed) and G C S E

co ordinator and must submit a detailed proposal for approval before proceedmg to the research pro1ect

54010 CURRENT PERSPECTIVES IN SPECIAL EDUCATION Dr D 1 Thomas

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two to three hour seminar per week Pre requisite Master's level standing (students who have completed 53640 The Handicapped Child may not take this topic for credit)

This topic, compulsory for students spec1ahs 1ng 1n Special Education will examine issues of current interest 1n Special Education Parl!cular attent10n will be paid to the pred1ct1on of handicap and educational failure, the relat10nsh1p between d1sab1hty and handicap and matters relating to integration, 1nclud1ng normahsabon and labelling

Reference books Bawd, A Exceptional children zn class

(Hargreen, 1986) Brennan, WI< Changing special education

(Open U P , 1982) Lilly, M S , ed Children with exceptzonal

needs a survey of special educatzon (Holt Rmehart & Wmston 1979)

Mann L and Sabatmo D A eds The fourth review of special educatzon (Grune & Stratton, 1980)

Mittler, P People not patients (Methuen, 1979)

54011 SYSTEMS AND THE PROFESSIONAL IN SPECIAL EDUCATION DrB Mageean

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing

This topic aims to promote and gmde useful reflection on the notion of Special Education, of whatever type In particular, the role of the

253

School of Educatzon

systematic in knowledge and action is considered, and fundamental strands of educat10nal thought are used to provide the framework for a d1scuss1on of professional dec1s1on making 1n Special Education D1scuss1on 1s focused on matters such as systems analysts 1n relation to the purposes of groups and mdividuals the theory of rights and social 1ust1ce, the contr1but1on of psychology, soc10logy social psychology and other research traditions and the notions of professional autonomy and authonty

Reference books

Booth, T and Swann W Including pupils with disabilities (Open UP 1987)

Bowers, T Special educatzon needs and human resources management (Croom Helm, 1988)

Cooper, D E Illuszons of equality (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1975)

Ford J et al Special educatzon and social control (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1982)

Giilham, B Reconstructing educational psychology (Croom Helm, 1978)

Howell K Inszde special educatzon (Merrill 1983)

Janis I and Mann, L Deczszon makzng (Free Pr, 1977)

Johnson T J Professzons and power (Macmillan, 1972)

Kelly, E J Philosophical perspectives zn special educatzon (Merrill, 1971)

Laura, RS Problems of handicap (Macmillan 1980)

Lonergan BJ F Insight - a study of human understanding (Longmans 1957)

Macpherson R JS Ways and meanings of research zn educatzonal admznzstration (UN E, 1987)

Mann, L and Sabatino, DA 2nd review of special children (JSE Pr, 1974)

Musgrave PW Soczology, history and educatzon (Methuen, 1970)

Peters, R S Ethics and educatzon (Allen & Unwm 1966)

Peters T J and Watennan R M In search of excellence (Warner, 1984)

254

Ryan, j and Thomas F The politics of mental handicap (Pengum, 1980)

Schon, DA Educating the reflective practitzoner (Jossey Bass, 1987)

Stewart, j C Counselling parents of exceptzonal educatzon (Mernll 1978)

Swann W ed The practice of special educatzon (Blackwell, 1981)

Tomltnson, S A sociology of special educatzon (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1982)

Whitehead, A N The azms of education (Williams & Norgate, 1932)

Wilson, J Fantasy and common sense in educatzon (Martm Robertson, 1979)

54012 CURRICULUM THEORY AND SPECIAL EDUCATION Dr D /Thomas

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two to three hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing

This topic 1s concerned with the apphcatton of curriculum theory to the education of handicapped children It examines the ideas of some of the pnncipal curnculum theonsts notably Hirst Peters, White and Midwinter, and reconstructs the well known dis agreements 1n terms of their 1mphcattons for the handicapped Reference to the concept of mastery learning the behavioural ob1ecttves approach and curnculum evaluation will be mcluded

Reference books Brennan W K Shaping the educatzon of slow

learners (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1974) Goldby, M , Greenwald, J and West R, eds

Curriculum deszgn (Croom Helm, 1975) Harlen, W, Darwin, A and Murphy, M

Match and mzsmatch (Oliver Lloyd, 1977) Hirst, P H Knowledge and the curriculum

(Allen & Unwm, 1975) Holt, M The common curriculum - zts

structure and style in the comprehensive school (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1978)

Mittler P People not patients (Methuen, 1979)

Morgenstern, F Teachzng plans for handicapped children (Methuen 1981)

54013 EARLY DEVELOPMENT AND EXCEPTIONALITY Mr GM Cooper

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact By arrangement with tutor Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53642 Early Development and Except1onahty may not take this topic for credit)

This topic will 1n1t1ally examine pre and post natal factors in development and their relation to the def1n1hon of except1onahty in the early stages Models of development will then come under review, 1n the hght of cur rent expenmentahon and conceptuahsahon in relation to the psycholog1cal processes involved

Students will be required to prepare a b1bho graphy related to this general area of study, and to review and analyse in depth one selected sub1ect area

Reference books

Bruner J S Studzes zn cognitive growth (W!ley, 1966)

Clarke, A D B and Clarke A M Early experience myth and evzdence (Open Books, 1977)

Fallen, NM and Umansky W Young children with special needs 2nd ed (Memll, 1985)

Hare!, S and Shapua, Y The at rzsk znfant (Excerpta Med1ca, Amsterdam Oxford Prmceton, 1980)

K1tano, M K and Kirby D F Gifted educatzon A comprehenszve vzew (Little Brown, 1986)

Sawin, D B , Hawkins, R C , Walker, H 0 and Penticuff, J F Exceptzonal znfant Vol 4 Psychosoc1al risks in 1nfant­enVIronment transactions (Bruner/Maze!, 1980)

Schaffer, HR Mothering (Open Books, 1977)

M Spec Ed M Ed (Spec Ed) and G C S E

54014 MENTAL RETARDATION Mr GM Cooper

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact By arrangement with tutor Pre-requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53644 Specialist Elective Mental Retardat10n may not take thIS topic for credit)

During the first stage of the topic, attention will focus upon multi d1sc1phnary approaches toward mental retardation Particular areas of study will be mtroduced relatmg to mental retardat10n with respect to (a) class1fJcat1on and et10logy, (b) psychological processes, (c) social cultural aspects, and (d) curnculum development

The remammg sect10n of the topic IS designed to give students the opportumty to appraISe cr1hcally an area of mental retardation The area of study will be selected by the student m consultat10n with the tutor A ma1or paper based upon an extensive research review will be developed and each student will be reqmred to lead discuss10n of their area of study dunng seminars

Reference books

Fallen, NM and Umansky, W Young children with special needs 2nd ed (Memll, 1985)

Mittler, R and de Jong, j M eds Research to practzce zn mental retardation vol I, Care and znterventzon, vol II, Educatzon and traznzng, vol III, B1omed1cal aspects (Umversity Park Pr, 1977)

Payne, j S and Patton, j R Mental retardatzon, 2nd ed (Mernll, 1985)

Rosen, M Clarke G R and KlVltz, M S Habilitatzon of the handicapped (Umvers1ty Park Pr 1977)

Sailor, W and Guess, D Severely handicapped students An znstructzonal design (Houghton M1ffim, 1983)

255

School of Educatzon

54015 BEHAVIOUR PROBLEMS Dr A Russell

May not be offered m 1991

Units 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact By arrangement with tutor Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 5364 7 Speciahst Electtve Behav10ur Problems may not take thts topic for credit)

Thts topic will focus on (i) developing an understanding of chtldren 1s behavioural problems at a theoretical level and (n) developmg a mastery of some skills and techniques for the management of such problems Topics w1ll 1nclude an exam1natlon of different theoretical models for the explanation and management of behavtour problems Special attent10n will be given to the behavioural and human1shc/1nterpersonal skills models The nature of social skt!ls m cht!dhood and vanous trammg programmes for social skills will also be studied The tssues of home and school causes of behaviour problems will be exammed

Reference books Asher S R and Cote J D eds Peer re1ectzon

m childhood (Cambndge UP, 1990) Cangelosi J S Classroom management

strategies (Longman, 1987)* Cartledge G and Mt!bum J F eds Teaching

social skills to children, 2nd ed (Pergamon 1986)*

Charles, C M Building classroom disc1plme 3rd ed (Longman, 1989)*

Gazda, GM et al Human relatzons development a manual for educators (Allyn & Bacon, 1977)*

Herbert, M Behavzoural treatment of problem chzldren a practical manual (Academic, 1981)*

Kaufmann JM Characterzstzcs of cluldren's behavzor disorders, 2nd ed (Memll, 1981)

Lawrence, J Steed, D and Young, P Disruptive children dzsruptzve schools? (Croom Helm, 1984)*

Schneider, B H , Rubm K H and Ledmgham, J E , eds Children's peer relatwns (Sprmger Verlag, 1985)

Wheldall, K, ed The behavwurzst m the classroom (Allen & Unwm 1987)*

256

54016 EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH PHYSICAL DISABILITIES Staff of the School of Educatwn

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per vveek Pre requisite Master s level standing

Thts topic will focus on the educat10n of children with motor, orthopaedic and neurolog1cal disab1ht1es, together with children who suffer from chronic illness An intensive review will be made of underlying psycholog1cal1 social and medical factors Spec1f1c educational needs will then be identified across the whole range from birth to adulthood Constderat10n also will be given to curriculum 1mphcatlons, school organisa­tion integration 1n ordinary schools, inter dtsciplmary approaches to treatment, and vocational preparation

Prelzmznary readzng Cruickshank, W M ed Psychology of

exceptzonal children and youth, 4th ed (Prentice Hall, 1980)

Laura R S , ed Problems of handicap (Macmillan, 1980)

Reference books Anderson E M The disabled schoolchild

(Methuen 1973) Burton, L The family life of sick children

(Routledge & Kegan Paul 1975) Goffman, E Stigma (Pengum, 1963) Haskell, S H , Barrett, E K and Taylor, H

The educatzon of motor and neurologically handicapped children (Croom Helm, 1977)

Jones, EE et al Social stigma the psycho logy of marked relatzonsh1ps (Freeman 1984)

Lmdemann, j E Psychological and behavzoral aspects of disability (Plenum, 1981)

Magrab, PR, ed Psychologzcal management of pediatric problems Vol l Early life condztzons and chronic diseases Vol II Sensorzneural condztzons and soczal concerns (Umverstty Park Pr, 1978)

Mulltns, J P A teacher's guzde to management of physically handicapped students (Thomas, 1979)

Stubbms, ] , ed Social and psychology aspects of dzsabzlzty (Umversity Park Pr 1979)

Thomas, D The soczal psychologzcal of chzldhood disability (Methuen 1978)

54018 EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH LEARNING DIFFICULTIES Dr B Mageean

Unzts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53643 Spec1ahst Elective Learning D1sab1htles may not take this topic for credit)

This topic aims to appraise compare and mtegrate different tradit10ns currently contributing to the debate on the 1dentiflcatlon of, and response to, factors that fac1htate or 1nh1b1t successful 1nstruct1on The ma1or trad1t1ons are those of remedial education behaviour programming psychoeducat1onal assessment and planning medical approaches and research in cogn1t1ve science and neuropsychology Instructional organ1sahon will be discussed 1n the hght of cons1derat1ons emerging from this integrated package, and an attention to what we already know about teachmg

Text book Howell, KW and Morehead M K

Curriculum based evaluation for speczal and remedial educatzon (Merr!ll, 1987)

Reference books Becker, WC et al Teachzng a course in

applied psychology (SRA, 1975) Beech, ] R Learning to read (Croom Helm,

1985) Beech ] R and Colley A, eds Cognztzve

approaches to reading (Wdey, 1987) Bryant, P E Perceptzon and understandzng

in young chzldren (Methuen 1974) Bryant P and Bradley L Children's readzng

problems (Blackwell, 1985) Bradley, L Assesszng reading dzffzculties

(Macm!llan, 1980) Coltheart, M et al Deep dyslexza (Routledge

& Kegan Paul, 1980)

M Spec Ed, M Ed (Spec Ed) and G C S E

Crmckshank, W M and Hallahan, D P Perceptual and learning dzsabzlztzes zn children 2 vols (Syracuse UP 1975)

Doehring, D G et al Reading disabzlzties (Academic, 1981)

Farnham Diggory S Learnzng disabilztzes (Open Books, 1979)

Fnth, U , ed Cognztzve processes in spelling (Academic, 1980)

Gaddes W H Learning dzsabzlztzes and brazn functzon (Sprmger Verlag, 1980)

Howell KW et al Evaluating exceptzonal children (Mernll, 1979)

Hulme C Reading dzsabzlzt1es and multi sensory teaching (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1981)

Kirby ] R and Biggs ] B Cognztzon development and znstructzon (Academic 1980)

Kmghts, R M and Bakker D ] psychology of learning (Umversity Park Pr, 1976)

The neuro dzsorders

Lerner J W Learning dzsabilzties 4th ed (Houghton Mifflm, 1986)

Lesgold, AM, ed Cognztzve psychology and instructzon (Plenum Pr, 1978)

Mann, L On the trail of process (Grune & Stratton, 1979)

Mann, L and Sabatmo, D A Foundatzons of cognztzve process zn remedzal and speczal educatzon (Aspen System Corp, 1985)

Miles TR and Miles E Help for dyslexic chzldren (Methuen, 1983)

Mitchell D The process of readzng (Wiley 1982)

Pavhdis, GT and Miles, T R Dyslexza research and its applzcatzon to educatzon (Wiley 1981)

Pnbram K ed On the bzology of learnzng (Harcourt, 1969)

Reitan, R M and Davison, L A Clznzcal neuropsychology - current status and applicatzons (Wiley 1974)

Ryle, G The concept of mznd (Hutchmson, 1949)

Smith, D D Teachzng the learnzng dzsabled (Prentice Hall, 1981)

Tansley, P and Panckhurst, J Chzldren with speczfzc learnzng dzffzculties (NFER, 1981)

257

School of Educatwn

Vellutmo, FR Dyslexia (MIT Pr, 1979)

Wallace G and McLoughlm, J A Learning disabilities (Merrzll 1979)

Westwood, P The remedzal teacher's handbook (Oliver & Boyd, 1975)

Westwood P Commonsense methods for children with special needs (Croom Helm, 1987)

Worrell, J and Nelson CM Managing instructzonal problems (McGraw Hill, 1974)

54021 THE EDUCATION OF HEARING IMPAIRED STUDENTS I Staff of the School of Educatwn

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour lecture/semmar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing

This topic is an introductory course in the education of deaf students and those with hearing impairment The language develop ment of these students and their associated learning d1ff1cult1es form the basis for the study of the prmc1ples of educatmg the hearmg impaired The problems of educating the hearing impaired in the ordinary classroom and the organ1sahon of special education services to support their integration will be included Reference will also be made to the pr1nc1ples of hearing assessment and the acoustic characteristics of speech sounds

Reference books Boothroyd A Hearing impairments in young

children (Prentice Hall 1982)

Bloom, F Our deaf children (Martms, 1974)

Eisenberg RB Auditory competence in early life (University Park Press, 1976)

Meadow K P Deafness and child development (Cahforma U P , 1980)

Northern, ) L and Downs MP Hearing in children, 3rd ed (W1ll1ams & W1lkms, 1984)

Ross, M with Brackett, D and Maxon, A Hard of hearing children m regular schools (Prentice Hall, 1982)

258

54022 THE EDUCATION OF HEARING IMPAIRED STUDENTS II Staff of the School of Educatwn

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour lecture/seminar per week Pre reqmsite Master's level standing and successful completwn of 54021 The Education of Hearing Impaired Students I or equivalent

This topic is a development of the area covered in The Education of Hearing Impaired Students I The focus will also mclude new topics, namely non oral approaches to educating hearing impaired students and variations in signing, parents' interaction with their deaf chtldren, the use of hearing aids and auditory processing problems

Reference books Furth, H G Deafness and learning a

psychosocial approach (Wadsworth 1973) Lloyd L L Communication assessment and

interventzon strategies (Un1vers1ty Park Press 1976)

Moores D F Educating the deaf psychology principles, and practzces (Houghton M1fflm, 1978)

Northern, J L ed Hearing disorders, 2nd ed (Little, Brown, 1984)

Sanders, DA Aural rehabzlztatzon a management model, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1982)

Scheshnger, IM and Nam1r L eds Sign language of the deaf psychological, linguzstic and soczologzcal perspectives (Academic 1978)

Simmons Martin, A and Calvert D R eds Parent znfant intervention communi catwn disorders (Grune & Stratton 1979)

54023 THE EDUCATION OF VISUALLY IMPAIRED STUDENTS I Staff of the School of Educatwn

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour lecture/seminar per week Pre reqmsite Master's level standmg

The topic Wiil deal with the followmg areas def1n1t1on of visual 1mpa1rment, causes of visual 1mpa1rment prevalence of such cond1t1ons, background and history of the field, educational pnnc1ples and alternatives for the visually 1mpa1red, the 1ntegrahon of the visually 1mpa1red into ordinary schools and society at large and current issues and future trends in services in this area

Reference books BIShop, VE Teaching the vzsually lzmzted

chzld (Thomas, 1971) Chapman E K Visually handicapped

chzldren and young people (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1978)

Crmckshank, W M and Hallahan D P Perceptual and learnzng dzsabzlztzes zn chzldren (Syracuse U P 1975)

Graham, M D , ed Internatzonal Symposzum on Science and Blindness (American Foundat10n for the Blmd, 1972)

Hanninen, KA Teachzng the visually handicapped (Mernll 1975)

Logan, ) Readings in visually handzcapped education (Special Learning Corporation, 1978)

Lowenfeld B The changing status of the blind from separation to zntegratzon (Thomas, 1975)

Manbeck, M E The meanzng of blindness attitudes towards blzndness and blznd people (Indiana U P , 1973)

Napier GD Handbook for teachers of the visually handicapped (Instruct10nal Materials Reference Centre 1974)

54024 THE EDUCATION OF VISUALLY IMPAIRED STUDENTS II Staff of the School of Educatzon

May not be offered m 1991

Units 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour lecture/seminar per week Pre requ1S1tes Master s level standmg and successful complet10n of 54023 The Educat10n of VISually Impaired Students I or eqUivalent

This topic will continue the 1nvestigahon of aspects of the education of the visually impaired begun m Topic 54023 Greater spec1ahsat10n will be reqUired relatmg to the

M Spec Ed, M Ed (Spec Ed) and G CS E

psychology of percertual deficit mstruct10nal consequences of such def1c1t and the organisation and 1ntegrat1on of educational services

Reference books Fra1berg, S Inszghts from the blznd (Meridian

1977) Gaddes, W H Learnzng dzsab1l1tzes and

brazn functzon, 2nd ed (Sprmger Verlag, 1985)

O'Connor, N and Hermehn B Seeing and hearing and space and tzme (Academic 1978)

Stocker, C S Listenzng for the vzsually impaired a teachzng manual (Thomas, 1973)

54025 COURSEWORK PROJECT IN SPECIAL EDUCATION Mr G M Cooper, Dr D f Thomas and DrB Mageean

Umts 12 Level Graduate Duration Whole year or first or second semester Class Contact Pre requ1s1te

Personal direction Master s level standing

This topic 1s designed to enable students to develop areas of interest ans1ng out of the theoretical and research hterature in special education A range of activities, 1nclud1ng practical work, IS perm1ss1ble In each case students must 1nd1cate the abihty to work independently and demonstrate mastery of the literature in an area of special education Students may analyse and evaluate the hterature in order to show its strengths and hm1tattons Alternatively they may examine the possible uses or 1mphcat1ons of the hterature This could involve discussion of how the 1mphca!Ions might be tested, how the hterature might be used in special education practice or how the literature might apply to the analysis and understandmg of particular problem areas Students are responsible for securing the agreement of a member of staff to supervise their pro1ect This can be done through individual negotiation or via discussion with the strand convener In consultation with the supeIVIsor the student will prepare a proposal for the pro1ect which has to be approved by the Standing Committee of the School The proposal should provide

259

School of Educatwn

an outhne and 1ushf1cat1~n of the work to be undertaken This normally will include a spec1f1cat1on of the hterature to be examined a statement of purpose, the rationale for or s1gn1flcance of the work, and an outline of how the project is to be undertaken (e g methods used 1f data are to be collected)

Assessment is based on a final report of 12,000 words which 1s to be submitted in duplicate, m type wntten and soft bound form

54026 EDUCATIONAL COUNSELLING Dr C MacMullzn

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 three hour seminar/ practical class per week Pre requ1s1te Master s level standing

This topic 1s designed to provide students with understanding and competence in the use of basic counsellmg slulls m educallonal settings The ma1or theones and practices of counselhng are examined along with an 1nvestlgatlon of the literature perta1n1ng to counselltng children and adolescents their parents and others involved in the education process Particular attention is paid to counsel ling students with special needs and their famihes Counselling competence 1s developed through practical exercises and feedback is provided through the use of v1deorecord1ng

Text book Egan, G The skilled helper, 3rd ed (Brookes/

Cole, 1986)

Reference books Belkin, G S Practical counselling in schools

2nd ed (Brown 1981) Corey, G Theory and practice of counselling

and psychotherapy, 3rd ed (Brookes/Cole, 1986)

Geldard, D Baszc personal counselling (Prentice Hall, 1989)

Gibson, R L and Mitchell, M H Introductwn to counsellzng and guidance, 3rd ed (Macmillan, 1990)

Stewart, j C Counselling parents of exceptzonal children 2nd ed (Merrill 1986)

Turnbull A P and H R Families professwnals and exceptwnaltty special partnership (Merrill, 1986)

260

54027 ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION IN SPECIAL EDUCATION Mrs S Yates

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 three hour seminar/ practical class per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing

This topic is concerned with the assessment and evaluation of exceptional students The issues to be covered will focus on both formal and informal methods of assessment with clear attention being paid to observational methods and curriculum based assessment The apphcahon of principles of assessment to education will be clearly addressed

Text book Taylor R L Assessment of exceptwnal

students educatwn psychological procedures, 3rd ed (Prentice Hall, 1989)

Reference books Howell KW and Morehead, M K

Curriculum based evaluation for special and remedial educatwn (Merrill, 1987)

Luft1g R L Assessment of learners with special needs (Allyn & Bacon, 1989)

McLoughlm L A and Lewis R B Assessing special students strategzes and procedures, 3rd ed (Mernll, 1990)

Salvia j and Hughes, C Curriculum based assessment testing what zs taught (Macmillan, 1990)

Swanson H L and Watson, B L Educatwn and psychological assessment of exceptwnal children (Merrill 1989)

Tindal, GA and Marston, D E Classroom based assessment evaluating instructional outcomes (Merrill 1990)

54028 EDUCATING GIFIED STUDENTS RESEARCH AND PRACTICE MsM McCann

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 hour lecture/1 hour tutorial Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing

This topic combines current research on advanced thinlnng abihhes with progressive guidehnes on curriculum and instruction for gifted students The topic has its foundat10ns 1n recent developments in cognitive science psychological research and education research and practice The concept of multiple intelligences is examined with theories of divergent thinking skills and most appropnate educational programmes The course content will cover the topics Thinking skills, Perception, Social/emot1onal development of gifted students, Counsellmg gifted students, Curnculum development for gifted students

Text books B1orklund D S Children's thznkzng (Brooks/

Cole 1989) Clark, B Growing up gifted, 3rd ed (Mernll

1988) Davis, G A and Rimm S B Educatzon of the

gifted and talented, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1989)

Feldhusen, J , Van Tassel Baska j and Seeley K Excellence zn educating the gifted (Love Pubhshmg 1989)

Horowitz, FD and O'Brien, M , eds The gzfted and talented developmental perspectives (Washmgton A PA )

54029 EMPLOYMENT AND PERSONS WITH DISABILffiES Mr f Ford

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 three hour seminar per week Pre requisite Masters level standing

This topic will focus on an analysis of the contemporary issues, conceptual models and instructional strategies relevant to prepanng persons with d1sab1hties for competitive employment Topics will mclude (i) the nature and meaning of work to the individual and to society, (u) soc1opohhcal issues regarding equal employment opportunities and part1c1pat10n, (111) strategies for creatmg service opt10ns for meanmgful employment, (v) social ecology of the workplace, and (v) economic disincentives to competitive employment

M Ed Ad and M Ed M

Master of Educatwnal Admmzstratwn and Master of Educatwnal Management Degrees Topics

54803 Tertiary Educat10n 55100 Research Pro1ect (Educat10nal

Adm1n1strahon) 55101 Development of Adm1n1strative

Concepts 55102 The Orgamsat10n m Act10n 55103 Human Commun1cat1on 55104 Managing Human Resources 55105 The Australian Educat10n System 55106 Current Issues in Education

Educational Administration 55107 Planmng and Admmistrat10n 55108 The Design of Social Pohcy Research 55110 The School and the Commumty 55111 Concepts of Work, Leisure and

Recreation 55112 Special Interest Topic (Educat10nal

Adm1n1strahon) 55113 Coursework Pro1ect 1n Educational

Admin1strat1on 55114 Understandmg Research m

Administration 55115 Leaders and Leadership 55116 Selected Management Issues 55117 Selected Management Approaches 55118 Issues 1n Human Resources

Development 55119 Approaches m Human Resources

Development

54803 TERTIARY EDUCATION Dr PW OBrzen

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requisite Master's level standing (students who have completed 53565 Tertiary Educat10n may not take this topic for credit)

The topic mtroduces the student to current areas of research in tertiary education, with an emphasis on developing an appreciation of

261

School of Educatzon

the value of comparative studies for prov1d1ng an understanding of problems and prospects in the Australian context The ma1or concern is with the adm1n1strahon and organ1satton of tertiary education in Austraha with particular emphasis on student selection, assessment and retention

Reference book Hossler, D Creating effective enrolment

management systems (The College Board, 1986)

55100 RESEARCH PROJECT (EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION) Co ordinator of Educational Admzn1strat1on Programme

Umts 24 Level M Ed Admin Duration Full year Pre reqmSite 36 umts of the M Ed Admin programme 1nclud1ng an approved Masters level topic on Research Methods

This proiect affords students the opportumty of applying the research techmques relatmg to a particular d1sc1phne 1n the pursuit of an indiVJdual topic It is hoped that students will thus obtain practical experience of one of the kmds of research which they may be called upon to carry out as practising administrators, and they will also use the pro1ect to examine 1n detail an aspect of admznzstratzon which interests them

The completed report should not exceed 35,000 words

Reference book Macpherson, R JS ed Ways and meanings

of research in educational admrnzstratzon (New England UP, 1987)

55101 DEVELOPMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE CONCEPTS Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53651 Evolvmg Concepts of Adm1n1stratlon may not take this

'topic for credit)

262

This topic introduces an h1stoncal review of adm1n1strahve theory and is intended to give the candidate some understandmg of the vanous concepts which have contnbuted to current thought about the task of adm1n1s tenng organ1satlons

Concepts to be discussed include the following sc1enhf1c management bureau cracy, the human relations and behavioural approaches to management, and the concept of the human service organ1satlon

Reference books Hasenfeld Y and Enghsh, RA , eds Human

service organzzatzons (Michigan UP 1974) Hoy, W K and Miske! C G Educatzonal

admmzstratzon theory research and practice, 3rd ed (Random House, 1987)

Hunt J W The restless organizatzon (Wiley Australasia 1972)

Lansbury, RD and Spillane, R Organzs atzonal behavzour the Australian context (Longman Cheshire, 1983)*

Owens, R G Organzzatzonal behavzor in education, 3rd ed (Prentice Hall International, 1987)*

Sam, RC and Hasenfeld, Y , eds The management of human services (Columbia up' 1978)

55102 THE ORGANISATION IN ACTION Staff of the School of Educatzon

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requmte 55101 Development of Admmistral!ve Concepts (students who have completed both 53652 Patterns of Organisation and Organ1sahonal Change and 53681 The Orgamsat10nal Process may not take this topic for credit)

This topic examines the process of adm1n1s tenng organisations, with special reference to their continuing development Various approaches to planned change, the change process and resistance to it will be studied Selected ma1or orgarnsat10nal problems encountered by the administrator, such as conflict and cns1s1 will be examined, together with strategies for dealmg with them

Reference books Amsworth, W M and W1lhs, Q F eds

Australian organzzatwnal behaviour readings, 2nd ed (Masm1llan, 1985)

Hoy W K and Miske!, C G Educatzonal admznzstratzon theory research and practice, 3rd ed (Random House, 1986)

Hunt J W The restless orgamzatzon (Wiley Australasia 1972)

Owens R G Organzzatzonal behavior zn education, 3rd ed (Prenbce Hall IntematJ.ona1 1

1987)*

Appropriate 1ournal articles will be recommended as the topic proceeds

55103 HUMAN COMMUNICATION Staff of the School of Educatzon

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre-requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53653 Communication and Interpersonal Relations may not take thzs topic for credit)

This topic enquires into the nature and functions of human commun1cahon in general, with spec1f1c reference to educational settings Topics covered include (1) Communzcatzon as a Concept Human Communzcatzon as a Process Models Deflmtzons and Theorzes Intrapersonal Communzcatzon - self awareness, perceptual factors, (2) Inter personal Communzcatzon - group dynamic, verbal/non-verbal commun1catlon, analysts commun1cahon, (3) Organzsatzonal Com munzcatzon - formal/1nformal, verbal/non verbal, negot1at10ns, and (4) Aspects of mass communzcatzon and the mass media

Reference books Bettinghaus, E P Persuasive communz

catzon, 2nd ed (Holt Rmehart & Wmston, 1973)

Burgoon, M and Ruffner, M Human com munzcatzon (Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1978)

More, EA and Laird, R I( Organzsatzons zn the commumcatzons age (Pergamon, 1985)

Rasberry, R W and Lemome, L F Effective managerzal commumcatzon (Kent 1986)

M Ed Ad and M Ed M

Reuss, C and Silvis, D , eds Inszde organzs atzonal comnzunzcatzon (Longman, 1985)

Weinberg, SB, ed Messages a reader zn human communzcation, 3rd ed (Random House, 1980)

55104 MANAGING HUMAN RESOURCES Staff of the School of Educat10n

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre reqmsite None (students who have completed 53655 Personnel m Educat10n Systems may not take thIS topic for credit)

This topic will examine pohcies and practices designed to ensure that an organisation's human resources are developed so as to satisfy the needs of both the organisation and the individual Areas to be studied include personnel situations and problems, career development and programmes designed to enhance the quahty of work hfe Topics covered include (1) Human Resources Management, (2) Staff Planning (3) Employee Relatzons, (4) fob Analysis, Recru1tement, Selectzon (5) Individual Assessment, (6) Trammg and Development, (7) Career Management and EEO, (8) Performance Appraisal, (9)Absence and Turnover, (10) Occupatzonal Health and Safety, (11) Stress and Burnout, (12) Quality of Work Life

Reference book Schuler, R S , Dowlmg, P and Smart, J P

Personnel/human resource management m Australia (Harper & Row 1988)

55105 THE AUSTRALIAN EDUCATION SYSTEM DrBK Hyams

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre-requ1s1te Master s level standing (students who have completed 53657 The Australian Educat10n System may not take this topic for credit)

263

School of Educatzon

This topic provides an exam1nahon of the pohttcal context m which the adm1mstrat10n of educat10n m Australia must operate It offers a study of the followmg aspects

1) The hIStoncal and cons!Itu!Ional basIS the origins, development and rationale of the state education bureaucracies,

2) Legal nghts and responSib1htes legal 1mphcattons of authority and account ab1hty of educational adm1n1strators at system and 1nstttutlonal level,

3) Pohttcal mfluences the mteract10n of poh!Ics and educat10n mcludmg the role of pohhcal parties, teachers' organ1sat1ons and federal, state and commun1ty pressure groups representing parent and other sectional interests,

4) Issues m the control of educa!Ion debate and developments tn federal 1ntervenhon, state decentrahsatton and the autonomy of educational 1nshtubons

Reference books Bessant, B and Spaull, A Polztzcs of

schooling (Pitman 1976) Birch, I K F Forming Australia's educatzon

polzcy (Macmillan, 1976) Harman, G S The politics of education a

bibliographical guide (Queensland U P , 1974)

Hannan, GS Research zn the polltzcs of education 1973 1978 an international review and bibliography (ANU, 1979)

)eeks, DA ed Influences rn Australian educatwn (Carrols, 1974)

Partndge, P H , Society schools and progress rn Australia, 2nd ed (Pergamon, 1973)

Turney, C , ed Pzoneers of Australian educatwn vol 2 (Sydney UP 1974)

55106 CURRENT ISSUES IN EDUCATION EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION Dr BK Hyams

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour semmar per week Pre-requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53682 Current Issues in Education Educational Adm1n1s­trat10n may not take thIS topic for credit)

264

The aim of thIS topic IS to allow students to study m depth a small number problems which raise important issues for educational adm1mstrators Examples of posSible sub1ects for exam1nat1on include the notion of accountab1hty of teachers and/or schools to society, the question of compensatory educa!Ion for the disadvantaged child, the emphasis m the cumculum (mcludmg the "standards debate and 1 relevance") and educational reform The topics will be chosen in consultation with the lecturer and each will be examined 1n terms of the arguments for and against a particular contention, and where poss1ble, 1n terms of their adm1n1strat1ve consequences

Reference books These will be dIScussed once particular topics are chosen

55107 PLANNING AND ADMINISTRATION Dr PW OBrzen

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53658 The Planmng Process may not take this topic for credit)

This topic examines planning as an adm1n1s­trahve process within the education and other pubhc agencies It examines planning theories smce World War II, and develops specific themes such as the debate between schools of thought plannmg athtudes and plannmg methods The topic also examines suggested causes of the apparent failure of planning in pubhc agencies

Reference books Bryson, j M , Strategic plannmg for public

and non profit organizations Gossey Bass, 1988)

David F R Concepts of strategic management (Merrill, 1987)

55110 TIIE SCHOOL AND THE COMMUNITY Mr f Pederson

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53674 The School and The Commumty may not take th!S topic for credit)

The baSic theme of the course 1s the role of the school in the community Vanous aspects which will receive detailed attention include the exerc1s1ng of parental rights to choose their children's school, parent involvement in school governance, home/school relation slnps the community school movement and the relat10nsh1p between the school and other social agencies The d1ScusS1ons will mclude an analysis of the relat10nsh1p between school and commumty from both the md1v1dual school s and the system's points of vtew

Reference books Craft, M Raynor, j and Cohen L , eds

Lznkzng home and school, 2nd ed (Longman, 1972)

Kmdred, L W Bagm, D and Gallagher, D D The school and community relations (Prentice Hall 1976)

M1dw1nter, E Education and the community (Allen & Unwm, 1975)

Nisbet, j D et al Towards community educatwn (Aberdeen UP, 1980)

Pettit, D Opening up schools (Penguin, 1980)

55111 CONCEPTS OF WORK, LEISURE AND RECREATION Mr Rf Paddick

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre-requmte M Ed Admm standmg or consent of mstructor (students who have completed 53673 Concepts of Work, Leisure and Recreat10n may not take this topic for credit)

M Ed Ad and M Ed M

This topic comprises a study of different theories of work leisure and recreation and their 1mphcat10ns for dealmg with the alleged contemporary problems of leisure Areas to be studied mclude relat10nsh1ps of leisure and work, the growth of leisure, education, values and leisure

Text books Haworth, j T and Smith M A eds Work and

leisure (Lepus, 1975) Smts, B The grasshopper (Toronto U P , 1978)

Reference books Castle, R , Lewis, D and Mangan, J , eds

Work, leisure and technology (Longman Cheshire, 1986)

Cunningham, H Leisure zn the zndustrzal revolutwn (Croom Helm, 1980)

Kaplan M Leisure theory and policy (Wiley, 1975)

Parker, S Lezsure and work (Allen & Unwin, 1983)

Parker, S Work and retirement (Allen & Unwm, 1982)

Parker, S and Paddick, R J Leisure zn Australia (Longman Cheshire, 1990)

Veal, A j Leisure and the future (Allen & Unwm, 1987)

55112 SPECIAL INTEREST TOPIC (EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION) Co ordinator of Educatwnal Admznzstratzon Programme

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact Ind1v1dual consultat10n and visits to appropriate 1nst1tutlons as required by the superv1sor Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students who have completed 53684 Special Interest Topic (Educat10nal Adm1mstrat10n) may not take this topic for credit)

Students takmg this topic will select an individual area of interest, 1n consultation with their supervisor The selection will depend on the availab1hty of specialist advisers

Study of this area will comprise a survey of the relevant literature and research, and where relevant, an attachment to an appropriate institution for practical experience The

265

School of Educatwn

emphasis on this topic will be on the adm1n1strat1ve impltcahons of the issues mveshgated and candidates will be expected to develop a rationale for pos1t1ve adm1n1strahve strategies 1n their chosen area

55113 COURSEWORK PROJECT IN EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION Co ordinator of the Educatwnal Admznzstratzon Programme

Units 12 Level Graduate Duration Whole year or first or second semester Class Contact Personal d1rechon Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing (students may not complete both thIS topic and 55100 Research Project (Educat10nal AdmmIStrahon)

ThIS topic IS deS1gned to enable students to develop areas of interest ans1ng out of the theore!Jcal and research ltterature m adm1n1strahon A range of achv1htes is perm1ss1ble in the topic In each case students must demonstrate mastery of the research ltterature in an area of adm1rustrat1on, analysing and evaluatmg 1t to show its strengths and weaknesses Through their project they must then show how imphcahons from the literature might be tested, how the literature may be used in adm1n1strahve practice, or how the literature may apply to the analysIS and understandmg of particular problem areas

Students are responsible for securing the agreement of a member of staff to supervise the1r project This can be done through 1nd1vidual negot1at1on or via d1scuss1on with the strand convener In consultation with the supervisor, the student will prepare a proposal for the project which has to be approved by the Standmg Committee of the School The proposal should provide an outlme and 1ushf1cahon of the work to be undertaken This normally will mclude a spec11Icat10n of the hterature to be examined, a statement of purpose the rationale for or sign1f1cance of the work and an outhne of how the pro1ect IS

to be undertaken (e g methods used 1f data are to be collected)

Assessment 1s based on a fmal report of 12,000 words which 1s to be submitted m duplicate, m type wntten and soft bound form

266

Reference book Macpherson, R) S ed Ways and meanings

of research zn educational admznzstratzon (New England U P , 1987)

55114 UNDERSTANDING RESEARCH IN ADMINISTRATION Dr PW OBrien

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing and consent of the lecturer

This topic is an introduction to research 1n adm1n1strahon, and to studies 1n the field Analysis of ma1or studies and dissertations as well as the design of inveshgahons are central activities 1n the topic A broad range of social and behavioural science methods and kinds of studies are considered The topic also considers reading and cr1t1ques of studies and achv1hes related to problem 1denhf1catton and the design of studies The use of research findings by dec1s1on makers is also considered

Set book Macpherson, R) S , ed Ways and meanings

of research in educational admznzstratzon (New England U P 1987)

55115 LEADERS AND LEADERSHIP Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requisite Master's level standing and consent of the lecturer

This topic examines the development of the concepts of 'leader' and leadership Selected models of leadership are also explored, and the relat10nsh1p between leadership and followersh1p are analysed The role of leadership in empowering the workforce and as a key to organisational effectiveness 1s discussed The topic further examines the techniques, personal quahhes and organ1s a!Ional factors which help or hmder effective leadership, and analyses the nature of leadership tra1n1ng

Prelzmznary reading Bryman, A Leadership and organisations

(Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1986) Smith, P B and Peterson M F Leadership

organzsatzons and culture (Sage 1988)

Reference books Adair, J Effective leadership (Pan 1983) Bass BM Leadership and performance

beyond expectatzons (The Free Press 1985) Bennis, W and Nanus, B Leaders the

strategies for taking charge (Harper and Row, 1986)

ICellerman, B Leadership multzd1sczpl1nary perspectives (Prentice Hall 1984)

Kouzes J M and Posner, B Z The leadership challenge how to get extraordinary tlungs done in organisations (Jessey Bass, 1987)

Stodg1ll, R M Stodgill s handbook of leadership a survey of theory and research (The Free Press, 1981)

55116 SELECTED MANAGEMENT ISSUES Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Consent of the lecturer and programme co ordinator

This topic involves attendance at seminars and supervised reading on selected management issues which will be studied in depth Examples of possible subiects for examination include the role of women in management cross national differences in managerial attitudes and behaviours, and d1ffer1ng conceptions of such issues as leadership and participatory decisionmaking The topic includes completion of assignments totalhng 6,000 words

55117 SELECTED MANAGEMENT APPROACHES Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqms1te Consent of the lecturer and programme co ordinator

M Ed Ad and M Ed M

This topic involves attendance at seminars and supervised reading on selected management approaches which will be studied m depth Examples of possible subiects for examination include current approaches in strategic human resource management computer based management tra1n1ng, and managing special pro1ects The topic includes complet10n of assignments totallmg 6,000 words

55118 ISSUES IN HUMAN RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Consent of the programme co ordinator

The focus of this topic is on management concerns 1n the tra1n1ng and development of its human resources, with some emphasis on cross cultural settmgs The topic aims to make participants aware of the changing emphasis m HRD brought about by soc10logical, psychological and economic developments m the past twenty years, compares HRD and HRM, examines organisational corporate perspectives culture and productivity issues as well as personal issues such as appraisal career development and motivation and introduces the roles and competencies of HRD practitioners

Preliminary reading Schuler, RS and Jackson, S Lznkzng

competitive strategies wzth human resource management practices (Academy of Management Execul!ve, 1987)

Reference books Dunphy D C Organzsatzonal change by

choice (McGraw Htll, 1981) Nadler, L Handbook of human resources

development (john Wiley, 1984) Sredl, H j and Rothwell, W J The ASTD

reference guzde to professional training roles and competencies, vol 1 (HRD Press 1987)

267

School of Educatwn

55119 APPROACHES IN HUMAN RESOURCES DEVELOPMENf Staff of the School of Educatwn

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Consent of the programme co ordinator

This topic examines a micro vrew of HRD with special emphasis on management of the HRD funct10n It provides students with a managerial perspective on planning organ1s1ng and controlling the associated achVIhes Themes covered include strategic human resource management needs asses sment, programme design adm1n1strahon and evaluation transfer of learning, modern approaches (CBT, interactive video, self paced learning) and future perspectives

Reference books Craig, R Traznzng and development

handbook, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1987) Pepper, A D M anagzng the trazmng and

development functzon (Gower, 1984) Sredl, HJ and Rothwell, W J The ASTD

reference guide to professional roles and competenczes, vol 2 (HRD Press, 1987)

53356 EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY Dr R T Wzthers

Umts 4 5 Level Second or thud year (Non medical students may apply) Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours Pre requ1s1te First year Med1c1ne or equivalent

The effect of exercise on skeletal muscle, energy release during muscular activity the post exercise metabolism, the respiratory exchange ratio, the acute and chronic effects of exercise on the circulatory and respiratory systems, the concept of physical fitness submaximal work tests, the phys10logy of marathon running, training for aerobic power, the phys10logical basis of mterval trammg and its practical application, the physiology of strength, planning a 12 month fitness programme the effect of environment on physical performance, the female athlete, agemg

268

Set book McArdle W D Katch, F I and I<atch, V L

Exercise physiology energy, rutrztzon and human performance, 2nd ed (Lea & Febiger, 1986)

54045 EDUCATION IN AUSTRALIA Dr BK Hyams

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Graduate level standing and consent of Standmg Committee of School of Education

This topic examines the Australian education system as an introduction to the nature of Austrahan contemporary society It encompasses the h1stoncal d1mens1on, the pohtico constitutional framework, and issues of 1deolog1cal and social concern which have contnbuted to shapmg the salient features of Australian education pohcy and practice Special attention will be given to aspects such as pragmatism as a s1gn1flcant 1ngred1ent 1n pubhc pohcy the dominance of bureaucracy the role of the non government sector, and to the eclectic nature of Australian educational developments Students will be given the opportunity to spec1ahse in one particular aspect of contemporary Australian education, e g education for 1nd1genous m1nor1t1es Australian special education the impact of new technologies on Australian education the sociology of Australian education, or current management practices The end result wdl be seen as a system which shares some ma1or features of education systems in western nations 1n general but which departs from them in some interesting ways

NOTE Not all special areas will be available each year

Reference books Birch, I IC F Forming Australza s education

polzcy (Macmillan, 1976) Christie, M J Aborzgznal perspectzves on

experzence and learnzng (Deakm U P 1985)

Connel R W et al Making the difference (Allen & Unwm 1982)

Hyams, BK et al Learning and other things sources towards a history of soczal educatzon m South Australia (S A Govt Prmter, 1988)

Marsh, C ) and Stafford K Curriculum Australzan practices and issues (McGraw Hdl, 1984)

W1lhams Sir Bruce Living with technology (Boyer Lectures, AB C , 1982)

MEdAd andMEdM

269

School of Humanities

Major Sequences

The requirements for degrees and the Diploma offered in the School of Humanities are set out in Statute 7.1. Bachelors Degrees and Diplomas. Persons requiring any additional information about degree requirements are advised to consult the Associate Dean, Dr J.P. Harwood, the School of Humanities Admin­istrative Officer, or the Secretary of the School Board in the Academic Section of the Registry, Ms Maxine Mcinnes.

Syllabuses for topics taught in the School of Humanities are set out on the following pages. Students requiring additional information about any particular topic should contact the Topic Convener or Co-ordinator whose name is included at the top of the topic syllabus. Students requiring additional information about the studies of a Discipline in general should contact the Director of Studies of that Discipline.

Topics are listed under each Discipline in numerical order. The first two digits of a topic number indicate the Discipline in which it is offered. The following codes are used for the various Disciplines within the School:

10 - English 15 - Italian 11 - French 16 - Visual Arts and

12 - Spanish 13 - Drama 14 - Philosophy

Archaelogy 18 - Cognate Topics 19 - Modern Greek 21 - Legal Studies

Study methods and assessment procedures vary from Discipline to Discipline. Students are advised to read the separate entries for each Discipline, where information on these matters will be found. Lectures, tutorials, seminars and practical classes are held within

the School, and supervised and unsupervised projects may also be prescribed. Particular importance is attached to the personal supervision of undergraduates in tutorials. In certain topics the tutorial is the principal teaching medium. Students attend tutorials either individually or in small groups. Regular work in the language laboratory prepares candidates for the oral examinations in foreign languages.

Students in the School of Humanities are invited to attend lectures or seminars held in topics or Disciplines in which they are interested but for which they have not formally enrolled.

Students who have completed the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Arts and whose work is of sufficiently high standard may proceed to a 36-unit Honours programme. Some disciplines in the School also offer a 72-unit Honours programme in which students may enrol after completing 24 units in each of two major sequences and 24 units of cognates, provided they have obtained a grade of B or better in the second year of the major sequence in the discipline(s) concerned. For details of the Honours programmes, see index.

Students who are not eligible to enter an Honours programme, or who do not wish to do so, may instead apply to enrol in a Diploma in Humanities programme. In 1991 new Graduate Diplomas in Legal Studies and Archaeology will also be available. For details of Graduate Diplomas offered by the School of Humanities, see index.

The term Level refers to the lowest level at which a topic may be taken. Level: First year thus means that the topic in question may be taken in First, Second or Third year of the

Set books and Text books are required reading on which students may be tested. Students are expected to have their own copies of all books listed as Set books or Text books; multiple copies of these books will not be available in the Library. Preliminary reading is reading which the student is expected to have completed before the commencement of teaching and on which he or she may at any time be tested. Further reading and Recommended reading, where not othenvise specified, indicate reading which the student is expected to do in the course of studying the Set books. Reference books are books which the student will find useful in the course of studying the topics for which they are specified.

270

ordinary degree Level Second year means that a topic may be taken m Second or Thrrd year Level Thzrd year means that a topic may be taken m Thrrd year only

Except where spec1f1cally provided to the contrary any of the ma1or topics here hsted may be offered instead as a cognate Students should note that as well as the maior topics offered by each D1sc1phne, they may also take Australian Studies as a ma1or sequence, provided that, rf the degree rs taken wrthm the School of Humanities, Australian Studies 1s taken in con1unctron with another ma1or sequence offered m the School of Humamtres Students should obtam from the School Office a copy of the Human1t1es Enrolment Handbook and may also consult the appropriate Director of Studies if they wish Additional information 1s also available from D1sc1phne offices

Important Notes

Except 1n special circumstances approved by the School Board full time students are required to complete or concurrently be enrolled 1n, three first year level ma1or topics (or two first year ma1or topics together with Topic 13130) before enrollmg m any other topics

With the permission of the Board, students may include 1n their degree topics from the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide that are not available at Flmders

In 1991 students wrll also be able to mclude 1n their degree any of three languages that are bemg offered with the help of the SA Instrtute of Languages Arabic IIB (begmners), Advanced Russian, and Ukran1an Studies It is intended to teach these languages 1n a sequence over the next three to four years, to allow students a once only opportumty to complete a ma1or

Further 1nformahon 1s avatlable from the Associate Dean of Humanities

Special Topics

A number of D1sc1plmes wrthm the School offer one or more Special Topics as 1nd1cated m therr Syllabuses The followmg general defrmt10n and cond1t10ns apply to all such Special Topics

English

A student who has developed a particular interest not catered for by the standard offerings of the D1sc1phne may propose such a particular area of interest as a special study In considering any such proposal the Discipline Wiil have particular regard to the academic content of the area and the ava1lab1hty of appropnate superv1s1on

Council requires syllabuses for special topics to be submitted by the relevant School Boards to the Academic Committee and all enrolments for special topics before the approval of syllabuses by the Academic Committee are designated as prov1s1onal

M a7or Topics in English

Director of Studies Dr L M Baird

The Discipline offers the ma1or sequence

10110 10210 10310

Enghsh I Enghsh II Enghsh III

Umts 12 12 12

The D1sc1plme also offers a range of cognates at second and third year levels, and (for those students who qualify) a range of honours courses Ill fourth year

The main emphasis in English courses is on acqumng both knowledge (of texts cntrcal approaches, h1stor1cal contexts and genres) and skills 1n reading and wnt1ng Frequent wnttng assignments, of varying length and d1ff1culty, from tutorial papers to term essays, provide opportumty for students to practise entreat wnhng and to receive frequent detailed feedback from tutors

Attendance at lectures and tutorials rs obhgatory and those students who do not for any reason, attend at least 80 per cent of lectures and tutorials will normally b-e considered not to have done that topic where possible students who cannot complete the required number of attendances will be asked to withdraw, otherwise a grade of failure will be recorded

Students m Enghsh will be given specrfrc assistance 1n the techniques of hterary study and 1nstruct1on 1n tne preparation and presentation of essays and papers They are advised to acquire an adequate dictionary such

271

School of Humanities

as The Australzan Concise Oxford Dictzonary and a literary handbook such as M H Abrams, A Glossary of Literary Terms

10110 ENGLISH I TEXTS AND CONTEXTS IN ENGLISH LITERATURE Convener Mr H L Tranter

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

Students will study two or three central texts, or a selection of shorter works 1n each of eight focal points in the history of literature in Engltsh, each focal point comprises a period a movement and one or more genres Ma1or genre developments will m each case be related to the histoncal context and to appropriate cntlcal approaches or techniques One of the three weekly lecture hours will usually be devoted to the 'tools' of English studies crrb.cal approaches method, and terminology, techniques and exercises in close reading and methodology m essay wntmg and bibliography

Fzrst semester Renaissance Lyrzc Poetry Shakespeare,

Donne, Marvell Renazssance Tragedy Marlowe, Doctor

Faustus Shakespeare Hamlet Augustan Satzre Pope Swift The Rise of the Novel Defoe Moll Flanders,

Jane Austen, Przde and pre1ud1ce

Second semester Romanticism Colendge, Wordsworth, !(eats Vzctorzan Fiction Bronte, Wutherzng

Heights, Dickens, Great expectatzons The Emergence of M odemism Eliot, The

waste land, Conrad, Heart of darkness Woolf, To the lighthouse Faulkner, As I lay dymg

Contemporary Wrztmg Stoppard, The real Inspector Hound, Barnes Flaubert s parrot, Carey, The fat man m history

Set books Abrams M H et al The Norton anthology of

English literature vols 1 & 2 5th ed (Norton) Shakespeare, W Hamlet (Signet)*

272

Defoe, D Moll Flanders (Worlds Classtcs)* Austen J Przde and pre1udice (World's

Classtcs)* Bronte, E Wuthermg heights (Pengum)* Dickens C Great expectatzons (Pengum)* Woolf V To the lighthouse (Panther)* Faulkner, W As I lay dying (Pengum)* Barnes, j Flaubert's parrot (Picador)• Carey, P The fat man zn history

(Queensland U P )

10210 ENGLISH II Convener Dr M Meehan

Umts 12 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week for one semester 1n each of the four sections Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 10110 English I

Students offer four sections These must include at least one from each of Groups A, B and C The fourth sect10n may either be a further section from Groups A, B, and C or a section chosen from Group D (The availability of Group D sections may be sub1ect to a m1n1mum enrolment) Details of these sections, 1nclud1ng timetables, are given in a brochure available in the English Office from November Students are strongly advised to read this brochure before choosing their sections

Set book Abrams, M H et al The Norton anthology of

English literature, vol 2 5th ed

Group A Shakespeare (first semester)

Group B Earher Nineteenth Century Literature

(first semester) Later Nineteenth Century Literature

(second semester)

Group C Modernism (first semester) Austrahan Literature (second semester) American Literature (second semester)

Group D Fiction from Realism to Metaflchon

(fzrst semester)

Forms and Metres m English Verse (first semester)

Language, Literature and the law (second semester)

New Literatures 1n English (second semester)

10310 ENGLISH III Convener Dr M Meehan

Umts 12 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutorial per week for one semester 1n each of the four sections Pre reqmS1te Agrade of C or better m 10210 English II

Students offer four sections These must include one from each of Groups A B and C The fourth section may be either a further section from Groups A B, and C, or a section chosen from Group D (The ava1lab1hty of Group D sections may be sub1ect to a m1n1 mum enrolment) Details of these sections 1nclud1ng timetables are given 1n a brochure available m the Enghsh Office from November Students are strongly advised to read this brochure before choosing their sections

Set book Abrams M H et al The Norton anthology of

Englzsh lzterature, vol 1 5th ed

Group A Medieval Literature (second semester) Old Enghsh (first semester)

Group B Renaissance Poetry (first semester) Renaissance Drama (second semester)

Group C Augustan Sa!Jre (first semester) Comedy, Pichon and Society

(second semester)

Group D Fzc!Jon from Reahsm to Metaflct10n

(first semester) Forms and Metres in Enghsh Verse

(first semester) Language, Literature and the Law

(second semester) New Literatures m Enghsh (second semester)

Englzsh

Cognates zn Englzsh

Second Year Cognates zn Englzsh

10211 ENGLISH COGNATE A Convener Dr M Meehan

Units 6 Level Second year Duration Semester* Class Contact 4 hours per week* Pre requzSite A grade of C or better m 10110 EnglISh I

This cognate consists of any 2 sections offered at Second Year level m Enghsh Quahfied students may do one or both Second Year Cognates 1n English Students ma1onng 1n Enghsh may thereby do further work at thIS level Those not ma1or1ng in English but qualtf1ed to do so may thereby include some Second Year Enghsh studies 1n their degree course In no case may the same section be counted twice

10212 ENGLISH COGNATE B Convener Dr M Meehan

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester"' Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 10110 English I

This cognate consists of any 2 sections offered at Second Year level m English Quahf1ed students may do one or both Second Year Cognates m English Students ma1ormg m Enghsh may thereby do further work at thIS level Those not ma1ormg m Enghsh but qualified to do so may thereby mclude some Second Year Enghsh studies 1n their degree course In no case may the same section be counted twice

Dependmg on choice of sect10ns 1t 1s possible to do 2 hours per week over the full year

273

School of Humanzties

Third Year Cognates zn English

10311 ENGLISH COGNATE C Convener Dr M Meehan

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours per week* Pre reqmsrte A grade of C or better m 10210 Enghsh II

This cognate consists of any 2 sections offered at Third Year level m Enghsh Quahfred students may do one or both Thrrd Year Cognates in Enghsh Students ma1onng in Enghsh may thereby do further work at !hrs level Those not maiormg m Enghsh but quahfred to do so may thereby mclude some Thrrd Year Enghsh studies m theu degree course In no case may the same section be counted twice

10312 ENGLISH COGNATE D Convener Dr M Meehan

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester* Class Contact 4 hours per week* Pre reqmsrte A grade of C or better m 10210 Enghsh II

This cognate consists of any 2 sections offered at Thrrd Year level m Enghsh Quahfred students may do one or both Thud Year

Depending on choice of sect10ns 1t 1s poss1ble to do 2 hours per week over the full year

Stream First Year

Fnst Semester Second Semester

1 11117 Beginners

French Low 11119 (9 umts) Beginners

11118 French High

Beginners (6 umts)

2 French Mid

' (6 umts)

11110 3 French Stage I

(12 umts)

274

Cognates m Enghsh Students maiormg m Enghsh may thereby do further work at !hrs level Those not maiormg m Enghsh but quahfred to do so may thereby mclude some Thud Year Enghsh studies m therr degree course In no case may the same section be counted twice

M a1or Topics zn French

Duector of Studies Dr T G Fennell

A ma1or sequence in French consists of 12 umts (for Stream 1 15 umts) of Fust Year French topics, followed by 12 umts of Second Year French topics followed by 12 umts of Third Year French topics There are three streams, and the ma1or sequence for each is shown m the table below

The French Drscrplme assigns students to the appropnate stream rn accordance wrth the following pnnc1ples

Stream 1 This stream is reserved for students with no previous knowledge of French or whose previous study is two years or less at secondary school Those with up to three years of secondary French ten or more years ago may also be considered for this stream

Stream 2 This stream 1s for students with three or four years of secondary school French In special circumstances students may be permitted direct entry to 11119 Begmners French High in the second semester but 1n such cases additional units will be required for the completion of a French ma1or sequence Consult the Head of Disc1phne for details

Second Year

11240 French Stage I

(12 umts)

11210 French Stage II

(12 units)

Tlurd Year

11350 French Stage II

(12 units)

11310 French Stage III

(12 umts)

Fourth Year

Honours French

(up to 36 units)

Consult French staff for details

Stream 3 This stream 1s for students with Year 12 French or equivalent Those whose Year 12 French 1s ten or more years old may be considered for Stream 2 Native speakers of French and most background speakers of French will be assigned to Stream 3 Students granted Stage 1 status at less than 12 umts will be required to undertake additional units for the completion of a French ma1or sequence Consult the Head of D1sc1plme for details

Aims and expected outcomes of topzcs zn French Aims Fhnders French courses have two aims The first 1s to enable students to become effective in the language The second 1s to help them acquire professional knowledge about the language and the culture Since we believe that neither one of these aims can be fulfilled without the other we keep them together in all our courses

Outcomes Outcomes vary according to the level of study but in all cases students may expect to 1) communicate appropriately 1n French with

French speakers who may take knowledge of French language and culture for granted,

2) acquire a grasp of what is d1st1ncttve about French language and culture which 1s sufficient to permit them to explain rt to themselves and others

3) become responsible for their own continuing development as students of French language and culture durmg their courses and after the completion of their degrees

It 1s possible to offer some sections of French ma1ors as cognate courses see index and consult the Director of Studies Students from Schools other than Humanities requ1nng a number of units other than those listed as available should also consult the Director of Studies

Reference books

The followmg books are recommended to all students of French

Le petzt Robert (Soc1ete du nouveau L1ttre) Collzns-Robert French English Englzsh

French dzctzonary (Collms, 1978) Harrap's new shorter French and Englzsh

dictionary, ed J E Mansion rev M Perlin and P Forbes (Harrap, 1967)

French

The most suitable reference grammar for all students of French 1s Byrne, L S R Churchill E L and Price, G Comprehensive French grammar, 3rd ed (Blackwell, 1986)

Harrap's new standard French and Englzsh dzctzonary and Grev1sse, M Le bon usage (11th and later ed) are useful works of reference and students who wish to specialise 1n French or who intend to teach the sub1ect themselves after completing their degrees may wish to have their own copies

The best French reference d1ct1onary 1s available m the library

Robert P Dzctzonnazre alphabetzque et analogzque de la langu~ francazse (Soc1ete du nouveau L1ttre, 1981)

Larousse, Grand dzctzonnazre de la langue francazse 1s available for consultation In the French Office (Room 213 Humamtrns)

Assessment and examznation procedures zn French

Topics are normally tested durmg the year as well as 1n examination at the end of the year In oral French, a student's result is determined on the basis of performance 1n practical classes throughout the year and also a short oral exam1nat1on at the end of each semester Questions asked in the oral examination will be based on the books set for this topic, as well as those set for the other French topics taken by the students

11110/11240 FRENCH STAGE I Professor I S Laurie, Dr EA Close and MrDA Askew

Umts 12 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Year 12 French or a grade of C or better m 11119 Begmners' French High or consent of Director of Studies

NOTE 11110 for Stream 3 students, 11240 for Streams 1 and 2 students

This topic is designed for students who have taken French to Year 12 in South Austraha, or whose French is approximately of this standard It is divided into four equal sections, two of which are taught 1n each semester

275

School of Humanities

Sectwn A (First semester) LANGUAGE

(Dr EA Close and Mr DA Askew) Class Contact 3 hours per week

The aims of this section are to fam1llanse students with the essenllal structures of the language, to enable them to acquire fluency in written French and to improve their aural comprehension Supplementary audio and audio visual material 1s avatlable in the language laboratory, and all students are expected to complete a programme of computer based exercises

Set books Adamson R et al Le francazs en faculte

2nd ed (Hodder & Stoughton, 1986) Byrne, L S R Churchill, E L and Price, G

Comprehenszve French grammar, 3rd ed (Blackwell 1986)

Sectzon B (Second semester) LANGUAGE

(Dr EA Close and Mr DA Askew) Class Contact 3 hours per week

This section continues the programme begun 1n Section A, but fluency 1n spoken French is emphasised at the expense of formal aural comprehens1on assignments The set books are the same as for Section A

Sectzon C (First semester) CULTURE

(Professor I S Laurze) Class Contact 2 hours per week

The aims of this section of the topic are to develop commun1cat1on skills in spoken French to the level of brief expos1hon1 and to provide an 1ntroduct1on to the images French speakers have of themselves through the discussion of modern texts

Set book Nostrand, H L et al Savozr vzvre en

Franr;azs, culture et communzcatzon (Wiiey, 1988)

Sectzon D (Second semester) CULTURE

(Professor IS Laurze and Mr DA Askew)

Class Contact 2 hours per week

Set books To be announced

276

11117 BEGINNERS' FRENCH LOW Professor IS Laurie

Umts 9 Level Fust year Duration First semester Class Contact 7 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Consent of the Director of Studies

This topic assumes no previous knowledge of French It provides a clear and intensive introduction to the basic structures of the language and aims to have students actively reading wutlng and speaking the language before the end of the first semester Self directed learning on computer diskettes and language laboratory audio cassettes 1s an attractive feature of the course The methodology used is that of the natural approach

Set books Sarner M et al Deux mondes cahzer

d'exerczces (Random House 1988) Terrell TD et al Deux mondes (Random

House, 1988)

11118 BEGINNERS' FRENCH MID Dr T G Fennell Umts 6 Level Fust year Duration First semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Some previous knowledge of French and consent of Director of Studies

This topic 1s intended for students who have not reached Year 12 level but who have some previous knowledge of the language

It revises some of the basic structures of French, and assists students 1n the skills of writing speaking reading and listening to the language Self duected learnmg on computer diskettes and language laboratory aud10 cassettes is an attractive feature of the course The methodology used is that of the natural approach

Set books Sarner M et al Deux mondes cahzer

d exerczces (Random House, 1988) Terrell TD et al Deux mondes (Random

House 1988)

Reference book Byrne L S R Churchill, E L and Price G

Comprehenszve French grammar, 3rd ed (Blackwell 1986)

11119 BEGINNERS' FRENCH HIGH Dr T G Fennell

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better 1n 11117 Begmners French Low or 11118 Beginners' French Mid, or Consent of Director of Studies

This topic completes the study of the basic structures 1n French and aims to develop further the students' prof1c1ency 1n both written and spoken French

Set books Sarner, M et al Deux mondes cahzer

d'exercices (Random House 1988) Terrell T D et al Deux mondes (Random

House 1988)

Reference book Byrne, L S R Churchill E L and Price G

Comprehensive French grammar 3rd ed (Blackwell 1986)

11210/11350 FRENCH STAGE II Mr DA Askew and Dr EA Close

Umts 12 Level Second year Duratrnn Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or above 1n 11110/11240 French Stage I

NOTE 11210 for Stream 3 students, 11350 for Streams 1 and 2 students

This topic is d1v1ded into four equal sections, two of which are taught 1n each semester

Section A (First semester) LANGUAGE (Dr EA Close)

Class Contact 3 hours per week

This sectrnn of the topic aims to help students to perfect their French language skills, through the study of topics of contemporary importance in France The work consists of a weekly written assignment a weekly class and

French

small group d1scuss1on, and regular aural comprehension exercises

Set book Byrne L S R , Churchill, E L and Price, G

Comprehensive French grammar, 3rd ed (Blackwell 1986)

Sectzon B (Second semester) LANGUAGE

(Dr EA Close) This section continues the programme begun 1n Section A

Section C (First semester) CULTURE

CLASSICAL FRENCH LITERATURE

(Mr DA Askew)

Class Contact 2 hours per week

Set books La Bruyere Les caracteres Pascal Pensees (mternal pubhcatrnn) La Fayette La prmcesse de Cleves La Fontame Fables Anthology of poetry (mternal pubhcallon)

Section D (Second semester) CULTURE

CLASSICAL FRENCH THEATRE

(Mr DA Askew)

Class Contact 2 hours per week

Set books Corneille Le Cid Racine Brztannzcus Mollere Les precieuses ridicules Mollere Don Juan Manvaux Le 7eu de l amour et du hasard Beaumarchais Le marzage de Fzgaro

NOTE The attention of students is drawn to the hst of cognates offered by the D!Sciplme of French

11310 FRENCH STAGE III All members of French staff

Umts 12 Level Third year Duratrnn Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre requisite A grade of C or above m 11210/11350 French Stage II

This topic is d1v1ded into four equal sections, two of which are taught in each semester

Sectzon A (First semester) LANGUAGE (Professor I S Laurie)

277

School of Humamtzes

Sectzon B (Second semester) LANGUAGE (Professor I S Laurze)

Class Contact for Sect10ns A and B 3 hours per week

Set books for Sectzons A and B Byrne, L S R , Churchill, E L and Price, G

Comprehensive French grammar 3rd ed (Blackwell 1986)

Grevisse, M Lebon mage (Duculot 1980) Adamson, R et al En fzn de compte (Hodder

& Stoughton 1988)

Section C (First semester) CULTURE THE INDIVIDUAL AND SOCIETY FRENCH PROSE FROM LACLOS TO ZOLA (Dr EA Close)

Class Contact 2 lectures per week

Most lectures will be m French

Set books Balzac, H de Le Cure de Tours Flaubert G Madame Bovary Laclos, PA de Les lzazsons dangereuses Stendhal, Le rouge et le nozr Zola, E La Bete humazne

Section D (Second semester) CULTURE

FRENCH POETRY FROM HUGO TO APOLLINAIRE

(Dr PS Hambly)

Class Contact 2 lectures per week

The 19th century is a Golden Age for poetry 1n France In this section, works by the ma1or poets of the period from 1820 to 1920 will be treated The changes m the idea of poetry from Romant1c1sm to Symbolism will be examined and parallels drawn with changes tn the pa1nt1ng of the time The great themes (woman, love death, art, society, etc ) will be covered Great emphaszs will be placed on the close readmg of texts The Anthology to be distrzbuted will mclude works by Hugo Lamartine, V1gny1 Gautier Banville Leconte de Lisle, Verlame, Rimbaud and Mallarme All lectures and assignments will be m French

Set books Baudelaire C Les fleurs du mal (Classiques

Garnier)

278

Baudelaire C Petzts Poemes en prose (Poes1e/ Gallzmard)

Apollmaire, G Alcools (Classiques Larousse) Anthology to be distnbuted by the Disczplme

NOTE The attention of students is drawn to the list of cognates offered by the Disciplme of French

Cognates zn French

11117 BEGINNERS FRENCH LOW Professor I S Laurze

Umts 9 Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 7 hours per week Pre requisite Consent of the Director of Studies

(See Ma1or Topics m French for topic description)

11118 BEGINNERS' FRENCH MID Dr T G Fennell

Umts 6 Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre reqms1te Some preV!ous knowledge of French and consent of the Director of Studies

(See Ma1or Topics m French for topic descnpt10n)

11119 BEGINNERS' FRENCH HIGH Dr T G Fennell

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 11117 Begmners French Low or 11118 Beginners French Mid or consent of the Director of Studzes

(See Ma1or Topics m French for topic descnpt10n)

11121 FRENCH CULTURE I Professor IS Laurie and Mr DA Askew

Umts 6 Level For Humanities students Second year For other students Fust year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmsite Year 12 French or a grade of C or better m 11119 Begmners French High or consent of the Director of Studies

NOTE Students may not credit both 11110/ 11240 French Stage I and 11121 French Culture I towards their degree

In the first semester of this topic students develop commun1cat1on skills in spoken French to the level of brief expos1tlon, and are given an 1ntroduct1on to the images French speakers have of themselves through the study of contemporary texts In the second they study more extended texts

(See 11110/11240 French Stage I, Sect10ns C and D for a detailed topic descnpt10n )

11199 FRENCH FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS Dr EA Close

Umts 9 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requlSlte Year 12 French or 11119 Beginners' French High or consent of the Director of Studies Co requ1s1te Enrolment xn the School of Med1c1ne

The aims of this topic are to fam1hanse students with the essential structures of French to improve their aural comprehension and to introduce them to French medical terminology The topic consists of the whole of Sections A and B of 11110/11240 French Stage 1 (see under Ma1or Topics), representing two thirds of the total syllabus, the remammg third consists of essays and aural compre hens1on exercises (all in French) on n1ed1cal topics

11204 AN INTRODUCTION TO FRENCH CINEMA Professor IS Laurie

Enqu1r1es to French office

French

11205 FRENCH CINEMA FRENCH COMEDY Professor f S Laurie

Enqu1r1es to French office

11206 FRENCH POETRY Professor I S Laurie

Not offered m 1991

11209 SPECIAL TOPIC IN FRENCH A All members of French staff

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration First and/ or second semester Class Contact At Convener's discretion Pre requ1s1te At Conveners d1scret1on

Under this heading a topic Elementary Latin has been offered m the past and may be available from time to time

11214 FRENCH LITERATURE (SELECTED PERIOD) Dr EA Close

Umts 6 Level Third year Duratlon Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite A grade of C or above in 11240 French Stage I

Co reqmsite 11350 French Stage II

This topic is identical with Sect10ns C and D of 11310 French Stage Ill see the syllabus under Ma1or Topics m French Students may not credit both this topic and 11310 French Stage Ill towards their degree

11216 FRENCH CINEMA DOCUMENTARY FILM Professor I S Laurie

Enqu1r1es to French office

11217 UN TOUR DE FRANCE LIN GUISTI QUE Dr EA Close

Not offered m 1991

279

School of Humanities

11219 SPECIAL TOPIC IN FRENCH B All members of French staff

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration First and/or second semester Class Contact At Convener's d1scret1on Pre requ1s1te At Convener's d1scretron

11224 HALF COGNATE IN FRENCH LANGUAGE All members of French staff

Umts 6 Level Second or third year for Humanities students, any year for others Duration First and/or second semester Class Contact At Convener's d1scretton Pre requ1s1te Consent of the Director of Studies

Spoken and written French will be taught, with par!Jcular emphaS!s on the maior morphological and syntac!Jc patterns A spec1f1c programme will be arranged for each student depending on his or her previous experience and other French topics (1f any) bemg taken for the degree

Set books Students should discuss with the Convener the texts needed for their course

Reference books Dubois J Dzctzonnazre du franqazs langue

etrangere Nzveau I (Larousse 1979) GrevISse M Lebon usage (Duculot, 1980) Harrap's standard French and Enghsh

d1ct10nary, available m the Library Robert P Dictzonnazre alphabetique et

analogique de la langue franr;aise (Soc1ete du nouveau L1ttre, 1981)

11290 LATVIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE Dr T G Fennell

Umts 12 Level Second or third year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None, but 1ntend1ng students must consult the instructor before enrolhng

Students offer Sect10ns A and B

280

Sectzon A LANGUAGE

A coverage of the fundamentals of Latvian grammar the declension of nouns pronouns and adjectives the tenses and moods of verbs, the formation and use of part1c1ples, baste syntactic structures (agreement, government, subord1nation word order, etc), other aspects of usage as covered 1n the Set Books

There will be regular practical sess10ns m the Language Laboratory to promote accuracy and fluency m the spoken language

Section B BACKGROUND STUDIES

A guided reading programme 1n Latvian hterature and/or history, with special reference to the nineteenth and twentieth centunes Subject to the availab1hty of appropriate texts the readmg programme will be structured to reflect the particular in.terests of 1nd1v1dual students

Preliminary reading Svabe, A et al Latvia on the Baltic Sea

(GaISmas P1ls, 1946) Comrie, B The languages of the Soviet Umon

(Cambridge UP, 1981) pp 146 154 Rubuhs A Baltic literature (Notre Dame

up' 1970) pp 105 159

Set books Section A Fennell, T G and Geisen, H A grammar of modern Latvian (Mouton, 1980) Fennell T G and Hounslow, I{ Patterns in Latvian morphology and syntax (Adelaides Latv1esu Skolu Padome, 1981)

Section B Andrups, ) and Kalve, V Latvian literature

(Goppers, 1954) Spekke, A History of Latvia (Goppers, 1957)

Reference books Berzn;ia Baltu:;ia V LatvieSu valodas

gramatika (Rpr Amerikas Latv1e~u Apv1enibas Kultiiras B1ro1s, 1965)

CeplitIS L et al Latviesu valodas parezzrakstibas viirdnfca (Avots, 1981)

Latvze'§u lzteratUras vesture (Z1niitl)U akadem11as 1zdevmeciba, 1957 1963)

LatvzeSu lzteriirQ.s valodas vllrdnica (Z1nc1tne, 1972- )

LatvzeSu parezzrakstzbas vardnzca (Repr Amenkas Latviesu Apviemba, 1984)

Muhlenbachs K Latvzesu valodas vdrdnica (Repr Cikagas Baltu F1lologu Kopa 1953 1956)

MU.sdzenu latvzeSu literaras valodas gramatika (Zmiiti;iu akademqas 1zdevmeciba 1959 1962)

Zeiferts, T Latvze'Su rakstnzecfbas vesture, 3rd ed (Vaidava, 1957 1960)

NB Titles not held by the Flmders Umvers1ty Library may be consulted in the instructor's personal collection

11320 THIRD YEAR COGNATE IN FRENCH All members of French staff

Umts 12 Level Third year Duration First and/or second semester Class Contact To be determined Pre requ1s1te A satisfactory standard in 11210 French Stage II or 11240 French Stage I or background deemed equivalent

Students offer ONE of the followmg opt10ns, and should consult the instructor concerned to determme a detailed syllabus

Optzon A SPECIAL STUDY IN FRENCH

LITERATURE

(Mr DA Askew and Dr EA Close)

Optzon B SPECIAL STUDY IN LANGUAGE OR

LINGUISTICS (Professor Is Laurie, Dr EA Close and Dr T G Fennell)

NOTE Students who have taken this cognate and who subsequently enter an Honours programme may have their choice of Honours topics appropriately constramed

11340 RUMANIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Dr EA Close

Not offered m 1991

Spanish

Ma7or Topics m Spanish

Director of Studies Mrs M C Robson

The D1sc1phne offers three ma1or sequences

Units

a) 12120 Spamsh IA (Begmners) 12210 Spamsh II 12310 Spamsh III

or

b) 12198 Spamsh !AS (Begmners) 12209 Spamsh IIS 12390 Spamsh IIIS for students of the University of Adelaide only

or c) 12110 Spamsh I (Advanced)

12270 Spamsh II (Advanced) 12370 Spamsh III (Advanced)

12 12 12

9 12 18

12 12 12

For optional cognates offered by the D1sc1pbne see topics followmg Spamsh IIIS m this section

For 12198 Spamsh !AS, see also Umvers1ty of Adelaide Calendar (6845 Spamsh !AS) For Medical Spamsh elecl!ves, see topics 12199 and 12221 m this sect10n

Attendance at lectures and tutorials is obl!gatory, and those students who do not, for any reason, attend at least 80 per cent of lectures and tutorials will normally be considered not to have done that topic Those students who, for whatever reason, are unable to attend one or more classes or tutonals will be expected to inform the course convener

12120 SPANISH lA MODERN SPANISH FOR BEGINNERS Members of Spanish staff

Umts 12 Level First year Dural!on Full year Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None (Native speakers and students with matnculat10n Spamsh, see 12110 Spamsh I)

This topic 1s specifically for those who want to approach the language for the first time, and is designed to develop the latest commun1cat1ve approaches to language by

281

School of Humanities

stressing involvement in two sorts of actIVIhes, those relating directly to students their interests and hves and those relating to the world of Spam and Latm America The primary goal is to encourage students to feel free to interact in Spanish as naturally and as spontaneously as possible

Set books Terrell TD et al Dos mundos a communz

catwe approach (Random House, 1990) together with the associated Cuaderno de traba70

Reference book Smith, C C Collzns Spanzsh d1ctwnary

(Collins)

12110 SP ANJSH I SPANISH FOR NATIVE SPEAKERS AND MATRICULANTS IN SPANISH Members of Spanish staff

Umts 12 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Language classes 3 per wee'<: (Full year) Literature 2 per week No week contains more than 6 contact hours Pre requ1s1te For native speakers of Spanish and students who have suff1C1ent knowledge of the language An 1nterv1eww1th the Director of Studies 1s required prior to enrolment

Sectwn A LANGUAGE

There will be classes 1n modern Spanish grammar syntax, translation language essay work and aural/oral commun1cation skills

Set books Bretz, M L et al Pasa1es Lengua 2nd ed

(Random House, 1987) together with the associated Cuaderno de practzca

Section B STUDY OF SPANISH AND LATIN AMERICAN LITERATURE

Set books A selection of Spanish wnters and texts to be provided by the DISc1plme

Garcia Marquez, G Cronzca de una muerta anunczada (Paraninfo)

A selection of Latin Amen can writers (texts to be provided by the DISc1plme)

One add1t10nal literary text to be announced

282

12199 SPANISH IB SPANISH FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS Members of Spanish staff

Units 9 (Medical students who wish to enrol in 6 units may do so under cognate 12217, 12218 or 12219 described elsewhere m thIS syllabus) Level Fust year Duration Full year Class Contact Language classes 5 6 per week Pre requisite None Native speakers and students with matnculat10n Spamsh should contact the Director of Studies

Sectwn A LANGUAGE (as described m 12120 Spamsh IA)

Set books Terrell TD et al Dos mundos a communz

catwe approach (Random House, 1990) together with the associated Cuaderno de traba70

Section B AN INTRODUCTION TO SPANISH

MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY

Reference books D1 Lorenzo I<earon, A and l(earn T P

Medical Spanish (Harcourt Brace J ovanov1ch, 1981)

Ruiz Torres, F Dzcczonarzo zngles espafiol y espanol mgles de medzcma (Alhambra 1973)

In the second semester the emphasis of the course will be on medical Spanish

NOTE 12218 Latin Amencan Studies A or 12219 Latin American Studies B may also be available to medical students as a cognate

12198 SPANISH !AS MODERN SPANISH FOR BEGINNERS Members of Spanish staff

This topic 1s available only to Un1vers1ty of Adelazde students and will be taught at the Umversity of Adelaide Campus

Umts 9 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

ThIS topic IS specifically for those who want to

approach the language for the f1rst time and is designed to develop the latest commun1 ca!Ive approaches to language by stressmg involvement in two sorts of achv1hes, those relating directly to students their interests and hves and those relatmg to the world of Spain and Lahn America The primary goal is to encourage students to feel free to interact 1n Spanish as naturally and as spontaneously as possible

The contents of this topic are the same as for 12120 Spamsh IA except that the amount of work prescribed and assessed in 12198 Spamsh !AS will be less m accordance with the fewer number of units

Set books Terrell, T D et al Dos mundos a communz

catwe approach (Random House, 1990), together with the associated Cuaderno de traba10

Reference book Smith, C C Collzns Spanish dzctzonary

(Collms)

12210 SPANISH II Members of Spamsh staff

Umts 12 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact 6 hours per week Language 3 per week, Conversation class 1 per week Literature classes 2 per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 12120 Spamsh IA or a grade of Pl or better m 12198 Spamsh !AS

Section A LANGUAGE

Set books Bretz, M L et al Pasa1es Lengua 2nd ed

(Random House 1987) together with the associated Cuaderno de practzca

Terrell T D et al Dos Mundos a communi catwe approach (Random House 1986) together with associated Cuaderno de traba10

Sectzon B CONTEMPORARY LATIN AMERICAN

AND SPANISH LITERATURE

Set books A selection of Spanish writers (texts to be provided by the D1sc1plme)

Spanish

Garcia Marquez, G Cronzca de una muerta anuncwda (Paranmfo)

A selection of Lahn American Writers (texts to be provided by the D1sc1plme)

One add1honal literary text to be announced

12209 SPANISH IIS Members of Spanish staff

Available only to second year students of the Umvemty of Adelaide

Umts 12 Level Second year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre reqms1te Agrade of Pl orbetterm 12198 Spanish IAS or equivalent

This topic 1s 1dent1cal to 12210 Spamsh II

Set books As for 12210 Spamsh II

Reference books As for 12210 Spamsh II

12221 SECOND YEAR COGNATE FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS Members of Spanish staff

Umts 9 Level Any level for students enrolled m the School of Med1cme Duration Full year Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 12199 Spamsh IB (Spamsh for Medical Students) or an eqmvalent knowledge of the language

This topic is intended to p1ov1de Medical students with the opportumty to consohdate the language work done m Spamsh IB and to acquire commun1cat1ve fluency Students study Sect10n A Language and Sect10n B Medical Texts

Section A Identical to Section A for topic 12210 (Spamsh II)

It 1s designed to consohdate grammar already studied and to develop fluency m Spamsh

Sectwn B Through the study of selected texts students revise and extend their vocabulary Emphasis will be given to commun1cat1ve competence 1n the medical profession

283

School of Humanzties

The readmgs will also have a cultural content and attenhon will focus on health issues perta1n1ng to H1span1c countries

Set books Section A Bretz, M L et al Pasa1es Lengua, 2nd ed

(Random House, 1987) together with the associated Cuaderno de pract1ca

Terrell, TD et al Dos Mundos a communi catzve approach (Random House 1986) together with associated Cuaderno de traba10

Sectzon B Material will be made available by the D1sc1p1Ine

12270 SPANISH II (ADVANCED) Members of Spanish staff

Umts 12 Level Second year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 12110 Spamsh I

This topic is designed for students who are fluent in Spanish or native speakers who have reached a satisfactory standard m 12110 Spamsh I

Students study Section A LANGUAGE and Section B LITERATURE

Sectzon A LANGUAGE

The aim of the topic is to consolidate and extend the language work done in Spanish I and to provide further practice through translation compos1t1on exercises, and computer aided 1nstruchon

Set books Bretz, M L et al Pasa7es Lengua, 2nd ed

(Random House, 1987) together with the associated Cuaderno de pract1ca

Section B LATIN AMERICAN AND SPANISH LITERATURE TRADITION AND INNOVATION

The non language component expands on the hterature studied m the first year

Set books Rullo j Pedro Paramo (Ed Planeta, 1972) Generaczon del 27 Antonio Machado, Juan

Ramon Jimenez forge Guillen (texts to be provided by the D1sc1plme)

284

Add1t10nal hterary texts to be announced at the time of enrolment

Reference books Smith, C C Collins Spanish English,

English Spanish dictzonary (Collms 1971) l{endns, C 1 501 Spanish verbs (Barron s

Educational senes, 1982)

12310 SPANISH III Members of Spanish staff

Umts 12 Level Third year Durahon Full year Class Contact 6 hours per week Language, including Conversation 4 per week Literature 2 per week Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better In 12210 Spamsh II

Sectzon A LANGUAGE

Set books Bretz, ML et al Pasa1es Lengua, 2nd ed

(Random House, 1987) together with the associated Cuaderno de practzca

Section B LATIN AMERICAN AND SPANISH LITERATURE TRADITION AND INNOVATION

Set books Rullo j Pedro Paramo (Ed Planeta, 1972) Generaczon del 27 Antonzo Machado Juan

Ramon Jimenez, forge Guzllen (texts to be provided by the D1sc1plme)

Additional hterary texts to be announced at the time of enrolment

Reference books Dorfman, A Hacza la lzberaczon del lector

latznoamerzcano (Ed1c1ones del Norte, 1984)

Rama, A La novela latznoamerzcana (Ed1c1ones de! Norte)

Rama, A Novzszmos narradores hzspano amerzcanos en marcha 1964 1980 (Marche ed1tores, 1981)

Diez Echarr1, E and Roca J M Hzstona de la lzteratura espafiola e hzspanoamerzcana (Aguiler, 1966)

12370 SPANISH III (ADVANCED) Members of Spanish Staff

Umts 12 Level Third year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre reqmsite A grade of C or better m 12270 Spamsh II Advanced

This topic is designed for students who have reached a satisfactory standard m 12270 Spamsh II Advanced

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (2 hours per week)

In this sect10n of the topic, language will be dealt with at an advanced level and will mclude essays in Spanish translations and conversation classes

Sectzon B SYNTAX (2 hours per week) A structural study of the Spamsh language Malena! to be provided by the Disciplme

Section c CONTEMPORARY LATIN Al\ilERICA

AND SPANISH LITERATURE (1 hour per week)

Set books To be announced

Reference books Iglesias M and Meiden, W Spanish for oral

and written revzew (Holt, Rinehart and Wmston, 1986)

Alarcos Llorach, E Gramatzca estructural (ed Gredos Madnd 1969)

12390 SPANISH ms Members of Spanish staff

Available only to third year students of the Umversity of Adelaide

Umts 18 Level Third year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 6 7 hours per week Pre reqmsite A grade of Pl or better m 12209 Spamsh IIS or eqmvalent

Sectzon A LANGUAGE

Set books Bretz M L et al Pasa1es Lengua, 2nd ed (Random House 1987) together with the associated Cuaderno de practzca

Spanish

Reference book Iglesias, M and Me1den, W Spanzsh for oral

and written review (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1986)

Section B LATIN AMERICAN AND SPANISH LITERATURE TRADITION AND INNOVATION

Set books Rulfo, J Pedro Paramo (Ed Planeta, 1972) Generaczon del 27 Antonzo Machado Juan

Ramon Jimenez Jorge Guillen (texts to be provided by the D1sc1plme)

Add1t10nal literary texts to be announced

Section c LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES

This component of the topic will introduce the student to the ma1or social, poht1cal and economic issues facing Latin America today

Reference books Skidmore, TE and Smith, PH Modem Latzn

Amenca 2nd ed (Oxford UP, 1989) Pendle, GA A history of Latzn America

(Pengum, 1985)

Cognates in Spanish

12216 MODERN LATIN AMERICAN NOVEL Dr E Gomez Soto

Umts 6 Level Second or third year for students m the School of Humani1les, any level for students in other Schools Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqms1te Satisfactory standard m 12110 Spanish I or 12120 Spamsh IA or eqmvalent

A study of tendencies and d1rect10ns m contemporary Latin American novehsts Particular reference will also be paid to the development of narra1Ive techniques and style in the contemporary Latin American novel The topic will consist of lectures and seminars

Set books These will vary from year to year and will be selected accordmg to availabihty of works and students' particular interests Approximately 6 full length novels will be studied m close detail

285

School of Humanities

Reference books Conte, R Lengua7e y vzolencza, Introducczon

a la nueva novela hzspanoamerzcana (Al Barak, 1972)

Fernandez Moreno C et al America Latzna en su literatura (S1glo Ve1nt1uno Escritores 1972)

Grossmann, R Hzstorza y problemas de la lzteratura latznoamerzcana (Rev1sta de Occidente, 1972)

MacAdam, A J Modern Latzn American narrative (Chicago UP, 1977)

12217 SPECIAL HALF COGNATE IN SPANISH Members of Spanzsh staff

Umts 6 Level Second year for students in the School of Humanities, any level for students 1n other Schools Duration First semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic consists of the first semester of 12120 Spanish IA Modern Spanish for Beginners

12218 LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES A An Introduct1on to Latin America Dr M Scurrah

Umts 6 Level Second or third year for students in the School of Human1t1es, any level for students 1n other Schools Duration First semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requisite None

This topic will introduce the student to the ma1or social pohtical and economic issues facing Latin America today, employing a multldJSciplmary approach and begmnmg with a historical overview from pre Colombian through the Coloma! penod and the 19th century to today Contemporary issues involving governance economic development social change, human rights and ethnic issues will be covered

Set books Pendle G A A history of Latzn America

(Pengum 1985) Skidmore TE and Smith, PH Modern Latzn

America, 2nd ed (Oxford UP 1989)

286

Further readmg will be asSJgned for each class session

12219 LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES B Contemporary Lahn America Dr M Scurrah

Umts 6 Level Second or third year for students 1n the School of Humamtles, any level for students in other Schools Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requisite None

This topic will examine contemporary Latin American through a wide ranging exploration of Latin American politics 1nclud1ng the political systems, the political actors (parties pressure groups, etc), the role of the state and the bureaucracy, authoritarianism versus democracy, revolution, pohcy making and the influence of the international and regional contexts

Prelzmznary readzng Pendle GA A History of Latzn Amerzca

(Pengum, 1985) Skidmore, TE and Smith, P H Modern Latzn

Amerzca 2nd ed (Oxford U P , 1989)

Set books Wynia, G W The polztzcs of American

development, 3rd ed (Cambndge U P, 1990)

Wiarda, HA and Kime H F eds Latzn American polztzcs and development, 3rd ed (Westview 1990)

Further reading will be assigned for each class session

12222 LANGUAGE, SOCIETY AND CULTURE IN SPAIN AND LATIN AMERICA Members of Spanish Staff

Umts 6 Level Second or Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre-reqmSJte SatJSfactory standard m 12110 Spamsh I or 12120 Spamsh IA or 12199 Spanish IB or 12198 Spamsh !AS or eqmvalent

ThlS topic will study the use of language m relation to cultures and societies in the Spanish speaking countnes

Aspects of communicative behaviour cultural differences, parahnguistics and stylistic elements wdl be examined Particular attention will be given to the expressive rules of culture and social interaction

Set books Malena! will be distnbuted

Reference books Cotton E Spanzsh zn the Amerzcas

(Georgetown U P 1988) Diaz M , N osales F and Sabin A Las

lenguas de Espana (Mm1steno de Educac10n y Cienc1a, Madnd, 1977)

Holland D & Naomi, Q eds Cultural models zn language and thought (Cambndge UP 1987)

Resmck M C Phonological variants and dialect zdentzfzcatzon zn Latin Amerzcan Spanish (Mouton, The Hague, 1975)

Graupera, CM Nuestra lengua (NY Plaza Mayor, 1972)

12316 THIRD YEAR SPECIAL COGNATE IN SPANISH Members of Spanzsh staff

Umts 6 Level Third year m the School of Humanities, any level for students in other Schools Dura!Ion Semester Class Contact 1 or 2 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 12210 Spanish II or equivalent

Advanced language studies

12317 COMPOSITION IN SPANISH Members of Spanish Staff

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration First or second semester to be determined Class Contact 1 2 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 12210 Spanish II or equivalent

This cognate is intended to give students the opportunity to further develop composition slnlls in Spanish through extensive practice in essay wnhng Emphasis will be on sentence construction and styhst1c analysis of contemporary Spanish

Spanish

12318 CONTEMPORARY SPANISH POETRY Members of Spanish Staff

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration First or second semester, to be determined Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 12210 Spamsh II or eqmvalent

The aims of this topic are to fam1hanse students with twentieth century Spanish poetry and to stimulate their interest 1n such poetry and the wider cultural content w1th1n which 1t was wntten Students will learn to analyse and appreciate the content, themes, forms and styles of such poetry

Preliminary reading Cobb, CW , Contemporary Spanzsh poetry (1898 1963) (Twayne 1976)

Set books Matenals to be provided by the D1sc1plme

12319 CONTEMPORARY LATIN AMERICAN STATE AND CML SOCIETY Dr M Scurrah

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Full year Class Contact 1 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes 12218 Lahn Amencan Studies A and/or 12219 Latm American Studies B or consent from the Convener

This topic will examine the h1stor1cal development of the state, relations between State and C1v1l Society, authontanan and democratic forms of government Spec1f1c topics will vary accordmg to the Conveners and students' interests

Prelzmznary reading Skidmore TE and Smith, PH Modern Latzn

America, 2nd ed (Oxford U P 1989) Wyma, G W The polztzcs of Latzn American

development 3rd ed (Cambndge U P , 1990)

287

School of Humanzties

12340 THIRD YEAR SPECIAL COGNATE IN SPANISH Members of Spanish staff

Umts 12 Level Third year m the School of Humanities, any level for students in other Schools Duration Full year Class Contact 3 or 4 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 12210 Spamsh II or eqmvalent

Advanced language studies

Ma7or Topics zn Drama

Dtrector of Studies Dr f M Holledge

The followmg ma1or topics wdl be offered

Um ts 13110 Drama I 12 13220 Drama IIA 12 13280 Drama IIF 12 13310 Drama III 12 13300 Drama IIID 12

Students enrollmg m drama studies should seek advice concerning the alternatives offered in the ma1or stream and the cognates 1n Drama This advice is available from the Director of Studies Room 270 School of Humamt1es Details of cognate courses are given below under the heading Cognates in Drama Included m this mformat10n is detail of the Drama Centre coursework In the final year of an Honours programme there will be a form of exam1nat1on, normally a vzva, in which questions will be drawn from the complete range of the student's Drama studies The follow1ng books are considered as basic works of reference to be consulted in connection with all topics m Drama

Bawden, LA The Oxford companzon to fzlm (Oxford UP 1976)

Bentley E The theory of the modern stage, rev ed (Pengum, 1976)

Brockett, G 0 The theatre an zntroductzon, 4th ed (Holt & Rinehart, 1979)

Clark, B H ed European theories of the drama (Crown 1966)*

D1ckmson T A discovery of cznema (Oxford up' 1971)

288

Giannetti, L Understanding movzes, 2nd ed (Pren!tce Hall, 1976)

Monaco j How to read a film (Oxford UP, 1977)

Nagler, AM ed A source book zn theatrical history (Dover, 1959)*

The Oxford companzon to the theatre'

13110 DRAMA I INTRODUCTION TO DRAMA CONCEPTS AND PRACTICES All members of Drama staff

Umts 12 Level Ftrst year Duration Full year Class Contact Lectures and performance study sessions 4 hours weekly, seminar sessions 1 hour weekly No week contains more thanE contact hours Pre requisite None

Attent10n will be paid to drama for stage, film and television with spec1f1c reference to genre studies and particular forms, conventions and concepts Emphasis will be upon drama for which a wntten script is avatlable

Works to be studied will be drawn from the following areas classical Greek, EIIzabethan, with special reference to Shakespeare, nineteenth and twentieth century Bntish and European, m1dtwent1eth century American, contemporary Australtan drama

Students will be required to examine theatre productions, televts1on productions, and films which will be presented 1n class hours

Reading list The following texts are reqmred Beckett, S Waiting for Godot (Faber, 1982) Brecht B Mother Courage (Methuen, 1980) Buchner, G Woyzeck (Methuen 1979) Chekhov, A Uncle Vanya (Methuen, 1979) Churchill, C Cloud nine (Methuen, 1985) Eunp1des, Plays one (Methuen, 1989) Gow, M Away (Currency, 1986) Ibsen, H Plays three (Methuen, 1980) Moltere, j Tartuffe (Faber 1984) Potter, D Waiting for the boat (Faber, 1984) Shakespeare A midsummer night's dream

(Signet 1987) Shakespeare, King Lear (Signet, 1987) Sondheim, S and Lapme, j Sunday in the

park with George (Nick Hern, 1990)

Strindberg The father (Methuen 1976) Weiss, M arat!Sade (Manon Boyars 1986) Wedekmd, F Spring awakening (Methen,

1990) White, P The Ram funeral (Currency, 1985) Zola, E Therese Raquin (Pengum, 1984)

The following are recommended Brook, P The empty space (Pelican, 1984) Esslm, M The fzeld of drama (Methuen, 1987) Furst, LR & Skrme, RN Naturalism

(Methuen 1971) Grant, Realism (Methuen, 1970)

NOTE Students should refer closely to the texts hsted 1n the 1ntroductton above as baszc works of reference

13210 DRAMA II MODERN DRAMA CONCEPTS AND PRACTICES

Not offered m 1991

13220 DRAMA IIA CINEMA STUDIES I Co ordmatmg staff member Mr N F C Purdon

Umts 12 Level Second year Duratwn Full year Class Contact Screening study session 4 hours weekly, seminars 2 hours weekly prachcal class 1 hour weekly No week contains more than 6 contact hours Pre reqms1te Agrade of C or better m 13110 Drama I or co ordinators approval

The topic will consist of weekly screenings, tutorials on practical cnt1c1sm sessions and on the ma1or theones of film One practical film or video project may be undertaken and classes will be held on scnptmg and plannmg

For practical work m film, eqmpment will be made available and some elementary 1nstruct1on provided

The topic will study the specific Iocatwn of cinema w1th1n the production, transm1ss1on and reception of signs with the emphasis on the last func!Jon It will begm with an

Dra1na

examination of the relahonsh1p between narrative the d1eget1c effect and the dommatmg system of the fJctrnn feature film A wide vanety of non f1ctton experimental and m1n1mahst films will also be screened

This topic will consist of two sections

A NATIONAL CINEMA STUDIES

B GENRE STUDIES

As well as rece1v1ng a basis 1n auteur theory and cr1t1c1sm, students will explore the 1mphcatmns of genre theory

A reqmrement of the topic will be that students apply these cn!Ical theones to films currently being screened 1n Adelaide

Preliminary reading Armes R French cznenza since 1946 2nd ed ,

vols I & II (Zwemmer, 1970) Cook, D A A history of narrative fzlm 1889

1979 (Norton, 1981) Curtis, D Experimental cinema (Studrn Vista,

1971) E1senste1n S Ftlnz fornz (Dobson 1963) E1senste1n S Fzlnz sense (Faber, 1968) Eisner L The haunted screen (Secker &

Warburg, 1973) Furhammar L and Isaksson F Politics &

Film (Studrn Vista, 1971) Huaco, GA The socwlogy of film art (Basic,

1965) Monaco, J How to read a fzlm (Oxford UP,

1978) Vogel A Film as a subversive art (W1edenfeld

& Nicolson 1974) Wollen, P Szgns and meaning zn the cinema,

2nd ed (Secker & Warburg, 1972)

Besides using book resources, students will fmd frequent consultatmn of the followmg per1od1cals invaluable Cznema Papers Screen Cahiers du Cznema Sight and Sound

13270 DRAMA IIE THEATRE STUDIES

Not offered m 1991

289

School of Humanities

13280 DRAMA IIF AUSTRALIAN DRAMA -THEATRE, FILM, RADIO, TELEVISION Co ord1nat1ng staff members Dr G R Worby and Mr G H Anderson

Umts 12 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact Lecture and tutorial 2 hours seminar, practical workshop or screening 5 hours No week contains more than 7 contact hours Pre reqmszte A grade of C or better m 13110 Drama I or co ordinators approval

Co requ1s1te None Students may enrol 1n this topic providmg that they have not prev10usly undertaken topics 13230 Drama IIB or cognates 13231 or 13232

NOTE Australian Drama (parts i and 11) is hsted under cognates in Drama and as part of the Australian Studies ma1or, in each case as two 6 umt offermgs

Australian Drama - Part z Orzgzns and Influences The first semester topic looks at the role played by theatre film, radio and telev1s1on 1n Australian life to 1960 It also looks at the influence of this period on contemporary dramatic arts The aim 1s to 1nvest1gate the relahonsh1p between artists, their work, their medium and the reception and status of each at various times since settlement This will involve examination of a variety of theoretical, historical and social backgrounds as well as textual analysis, and some involvement 1n practical pro1ects 1n each medium

Australzan Drama Part zz Alternatives The 'alternatives' which form the basts of this second semester topic are theatre film radio and telev1s1on productions which have challenged accepted notions of a dominant Australian culture and its representation since 1960 There will be dlSCUSSlon of the mdustnes and institutions which support and sustain each medium Practical pro1ects form an mtegral part of this topic

Preliminary reading Irvin, E Australzan melodrama (Hale and

Ironmonger, 1981)

290

Pike, A and Cooper, R Australian film, 1900 1977 (Oxford UP 1980)

Shirley G and Adams B Australian cinema the fzrst eighty years (Angus & Robertson & Currency, 1983)

Turner G Natwnalfictzons (Allen & Unwm 1986)

Williams M Drama (Oxford UP 1977)

Set books A comprehensive hst of texts and films to be screened is available from the Drama Office Students are encouraged to attend productions of Australian plays, and off campus screenings of relevant films, and to note telev1s1on transm1ss1on of Austrahan productions

Reference books Baxter j Australian cinema (Pacific, 1970) Bertrand, I and Collins D Government and

film in Australia (Currency 1981) Blonsln A Creed, B and Freiberg, F , eds

Don t shoot darlzng-women s independent filmmakzng in Australza (Greenhouse, 1987)

Collms, D Hollywood down under (Angus & Robertson, 1987)

Dermody, S and Jacka E The screening of Australia vols 1 & 11 (Currency, 1987 88)

Esson L Ballades of Old Bohemia (Red Rooster, 1980)

Fitzpatrick, P After the doll (Edward Arnold, 1979)

Fotheringham, R Community theatre (Methuen, 1981)

Holloway, P Contemporary Australian drama, rev ed (Currency, 1987)

Love H , ed The Australian stage (NS W UP 1984)

Lausell, R and Bedby, P eds The docu mentary fzlm zn Australza (Cinema Papers and Film Victoria, 1982)

McGuire, P The Australzan theatre (Oxford UP, 1948)

McQueen H Australia's medza monopolies (Widescope, 1977)

Moran, A Images and industry (Currency, 1988)

Molloy, B Before the interval Australian mythology and feature films 1930 1960

Murray, S The New Australian cznema (Nelson, 1982)

Palmer, J Contemporary Australian play wrights (Adelaide U P , 1979)

Stratton, D The last new wave (Angus & Robertson, 1980)

Tulloch, J Australzan cinema industry, narrative and meanzng (Allen & Unw1n 1982)

Tulloch J Legends on the screen (Currency, 1981)

Rees L A hzstory of Australian drama, vols 1 and 2, rev ed (Angus & Robertson, 1978)

Walker, D Dream and dzszJluswn (A N U P , 1976)

See also Methuen and Rodop1 series on Austrahan playwrights, Theatre Australia New Theatre Australza and Cinema Papers

References cover both parts of the topic

13300 DRAMA IIID MODERN THEATRE Professor M Morley and Mr M Bramwell

Umts 12 Level Thud year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Semmars 4 hours per week No week contains more than 4 contact hours Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better 1n 13210 Drama II or 13220 Drama IIA or 13230 Drama IIB or 13250 Drama IID or 13270 Drama IIE or 13280 Drama IIF or 13231 and 13232 Drama IIF or co ord1nator's approval

This topic will concentrate on developments in theatre and production styles from the mid nineteenth century to the present day Studies of 1nd1v1dual Bntish Amencan, Russian and European directors and playwrights wdl also be mcluded

Readzng lzst Bentley E The theory of the modern stage

(Pehcan, 1989) Braun, E The dzrector and the stage

(Methuen, 1982) Brook R The empty space (Pehcan 1984) Brecht, B Mother Courage (Methuen, 1980) Chekhov, A The seagull (Methuen, 1984) Jones D R Great directors at work

(Cahforma UP, 1986) Shakespeare W A midsummer nzght s

dream (Signet) Stanislavsky K An actor prepares (Methuen,

1986) Weiss, P Marat/Sade (Manon Soyars, 1986) Wtlhams, T A streetcar named deszre

(Pengum, 1982)

Drama

13310 DRAMA Ill CINEMA STUDIES II Co ordinating staff member Mr NFC Purdon

Umts 12 Level Third year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Screening study sessions 4 hours weekly seminars 2 hours weekly No week contains more than 6 contact hours Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 13210 Drama II or 13220 Drama IIA or 13230 Drama IIB or 13250 Drama IID or 13270 Drama IIE or 13280 Drama IIF or 13231and3232 Drama IIF or co ord1nator's approval

See syllabus for 13220 Drama IIA Although the fzlms to be studied will be the same, add1t10nal material will be distributed and the workload will be appropriate to the level of a third year topic

13390 DRAMA IIIC BERTOLT BRECHT Co ordznatzng staff member Professor M Morley

Not offered m 1991

Cognates in Drama

Drama Centre topics are of cognate status only Entry to these topics IS by aud1t10n only Details are given below The Drama Centre topics are

13130 Introduct10n to Product10n and Performance Technique

13260 Production and Performance Techniques 1

13340 Production and Performance Techniques 11

Details of each topic are given below

All ma1or topics in Drama may be taken as cognates, provided that the requirements of pre requ1s1te and co requisite are met The ma1or topic 13280 Drama IIF (12 umts) 1s offered as a cognate in the form of two stx unit topics 13231 Drama IIF Part I, Austrahan Drama Ongms and Influences and 13232 Drama IIF Part II Austrahan Drama Alternatives

291

School of Humanztzes

All Honours topics 1n Drama may be taken as cognates w1thm the ordmary degree by smtably quahf1ed students and with the approval of the co ordmator of that topic Such topics retain the unit value of the Honours topic

The Drama Centre caters for highly motivated students who wish to undertake basic studies leading towards a career in the performing arts and the media Students will be chosen for their ab1hty to move towards a spec1ahsed act1V1ty m third and fourth years after first and second year studies which are primarily concerned with the problems of performance, but which also include 1ntroductlons to management, d1rectlon, and other crafts which apply 1n theatre, film, telev1s1on and radio Advanced spec1ahsed tra1n1ng is available at the post graduate level (see MA (Drama)) Select10n of students 1s by aud1hon, 1nterv1ew test and, in the case of 1ntend1ng directors or production managers, evidence of relevant experience e g production notes, ftlms, videotapes, photographs, or1g1nal writing or pa1nt1ng Aud1t10ns are normally conducted m December Supplementary aud1t10ns may be held 1n March after the enrolment penod The Drama Secretary supphes apphcation forms and other requisite details In any year students of Drama Centre topics are required to be available for one week in vacation time Such requirement will be notified in advance

Students parhc1pating in performance for the pubhc must expect add1t10nal calls on their normally free hours m the day, and especially the evenings, preceding and 1nclud1ng the performances and they should plan their work accordingly Students must provide themselves with and wear suitable practice clothes for all performance classes and rehearsals A track suit is recommended for all acting classes Students taking Movement classes must provide themselves with and wear tights and a close flttmg top when reqmred Students taking any practical classes must provide their own make up where required Students engaged 1n practical film coursework must provide themselves with cotton gloves for ed1tmg, two chp boards and a locker key deposit $5 00

292

13130 INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND PERFORMANCE TECHNIQUES Co ordmatmg staff member Dr G R Worby

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year including one week of vacation time Class Contact Practical classes and seminar d1scuss1ons 8 hours per week No week contains more than 10 contact hours, except when additional rehearsals for pro1ects are mvolved Pre requ1s1te Entrance and selection for Drama Centre by audition and interview or presentat10n of evidence of ab1hty

Co requ1s1te 13110 Drama I, or its equivalent

According to area of intended spec1ahsation, students will be mvolved m some or all of the followmg Workloads will be adiusted accordmgly

A Actmg B Movement C Voice D Film telev1s1on and radio production

A readmg hst will be d1stnbuted at the begmnmg of the year

13260 PRODUCTION AND PERFORMANCE TECHNIQUES I Co ordmatmg staff member Mr M Fuller and Dr JM Holledge

Umts 12 Level Second year Durat10n Full year mcludmg one week of vacation time Class Contact Lectures or demonstrations and practical classes 10 hours per week No week contains more than 12 contact hours except when additional rehearsals for pro1ects are involved Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 13130 Introduction to Production and Performance Techniques and 13110 Drama I or co ordinator's approval Co requmte 13210 Drama II or 13220 Drama IIA or 13230 Drama JIB or 13250 Drama IID or 13270 Drama IIE or 13280 Drama IIF

Students will be reqmred to complete A and ezther B or C

A Pro1ects in Theatre or Film and Television B Acting, Movement Voice C Film and Television Production

13340 PRODUCTION AND PERFORMANCE TECHNIQUES II Co ordmatmg staff members Mr M Fuller and Dr f M Holledge

Umts 12 Level Th1rd year Duration Full year, including one week ot vacation time Class Contact Seminars and practical classes 12 hours per week No week contains more than 14 contact hours except when add1t1onal rehearsals for productions are involved Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 13260 Production and Performance Techniques 1 Co reqms1te 13300 Drama IIID or 13310 Drama III or 13320 Drama IIIA or 13330 Drama ll!B or 13390 Drama IIIC

Students will be requued to complete A and B or C and D or A and E

A Pro1ects in Theatre or Fiim and Telev1s1on B Performance C Wntmg for Film and Telev1s10n D Directing for Fiim and Telev1s1on E Duectmg for Theatre

13231 DRAMA IIF PART I AUSTRALIAN DRAMA ORIGINS AND INFLUENCES Co ordinating staff members Dr GR Worby and Mr G H Anderson

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact No week contains more than 7 contact hours Pre requ1S1te Agrade of C or better m 13110 Drama I or co ord1nator's approval

See 13280, Part I for details of Australian Drama Origins and Influences Australian Studies maior students should also consult this topic for course information

Philosophy

13232 DRAMA IIF PART II AUSTRALIAN DRAMA ALTERNATIVES Co ordinating staff members Dr GR Worby and Mr G H Anderson

Units 6 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact No week contains more than 7 contact hours Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 13110 Drama I or co ordinator s approval

See 13280, Part II for details of Australian Drama Alternatives Australian Studies ma1or students should also consult this topic for course information

Ma7or Topics m Philosophy

Duector of Studies Mr K H Sievers

The ma1or sequence m Philosophy consists of 14110 Philosophy I (12 units), and a grade of C or better in any combination of 24 units from the second and third year topics offered by the D1sc1plme A hst of these topics 1s given below Students should realise that not all topics are offered every year and they need to make sure that they have fulfilled the pre requ1s1tes and co requ1s1tes for the topics they wish to enrol in

Cognates All Philosophy topics can also be taken as cognates Information on Cognates m Philosophy can be found followmg the details of second and third year topics

Second and Third Year Topics m Philosophy

14201 Epistemology and the Philosophy of Science

14202 Epistemology and Metaphysics (not offered m 1991)

14203 Moral Philosophy 14207 Social Philosophy (not offered m 1991)

14208 Philosophy of History and SoCial Science (not offered m 1991)

14209 Marxism Lenm1sm (not offered m 1991)

14216 AnCient and Mediaeval Phdosophy (not offered m 1991)

293

School of Humanities

14217 Modem Philosophy (not offered m 1991)

14219 Special Topic m Philosophy 14221 Onental Philosophy (not offered

m 1991) 14224 Femimsm (not offered m 1991)

14229 History of Philosophy Recent and Contemporary (not offered m 1991)

14231 Environmental Ethics 14232 Epistemology and Metaphysics I

(not offered m 1991) 14233 Soc10b10logy and Human Affairs

(not offered m 1991) 14235 The Phzlosophy of Science

(not offered m 1991)

14236 Ancient Philosophy 14238 Indian Philosophy (not offered

m 1991) 14239 Cntical Thmkmg 14241 Mmd and Knowledge 14242 Freedom Law & Society 14243 Applied Philosophy (Issues for

Australians) 14244 MarxISm Philosophical Issues 14245 Aesthellcs 14246 Medical Ethics Philosophical Issues 14247 B10 medical Ethics

14110 PHILOSOPHY I AN INTRODUCTION TO PHILOSOPHY Mr S G 0 Hair, Mr R J Allen Dr G Couvalzs, Mr IE Hunt Dr L E Johnson and Mr K H Sievers

Umts 12 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

The aim of this topic 1s to introduce students to some of the main issues 1n Philosophy and give a broad overview of its history from the ancient times to the present day

In the first half of the first semester we examine some of the issues dtScussed by the early Greek philosophers What 1s the world made of? Is pleasure the only good? Is democracy the best polillcal system?

294

In the second half of the first semester we look at a number of issues 1n pohtical philosophy and applied philosophy

In the second semester we look at ph1losoph1cal issues in Marxism, the nature of minds, 1nclud1ng art1ftcal 1ntell1gence There will also be a few lectures on reasoning and some exercises to develop basic reasoning skills

Preliminary reading Nagel, T What does it all mean> (Oxford U P

1987) Russell B A history of western philosophy

(Allen & Unwm, 1981)

Set books Philosophy I Readings for tutorials (3 vols) Smger, P Practical ethics (Cambndge U P

1979)

Recommended reading Aclmll ) Arzstotle the philosopher (Oxford

up 1981) Breh1er E The history of philosophy the

Hellenic age (Chicago UP, 1963) Breh1er, E The history of philosophy the

seventeenth century (Chicago UP, 1966) Cottmgham ) The ratzonalists (Oxford UP

1988) Kant I Fundamental principles of the

metaphysics of morals (Prometheus, 1987) Macpherson CB The political theory of

possessive individualism (Clarendon Pr , 1964)

Matson, W I A new history of philosophy, vol I Ancient & Medieval (Harcourt Brace )ovanoVIch, 1987)

Matson, W I A new history of philosophy vol II, Modern Philosophy (Harcourt, Brace Jovanovich 1987)

Osborne, M L , ed Women zn western thought (Random House 1979)

Scnven M Reasoning (McGraw Hiii 1976) Searle, J Minds, brazns and science (BBC,

1984) Smger, P , ed Applied ethics (Oxford U P ,

1986) Smger P Hegel (Oxford UP, 1983) Wood A Karl Marx (Routledge & Kegan

Paul, 1981) Woolhouse, RS The empzrzcists (Oxford U P ,

1988)

Second and Thzrd Year Topzcs m Phzlosophy and Philosophy Cognates

14201 EPISTEMOLOGY AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Mr K H Sievers

Units 6 Level Normally second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1S1te A grade of C or better m Philosophy I or consent of instructor

This topic ts intended as an overall intro ductlon to issues 1n epistemology and the philosophy of science Some of the mam areas to be covered 1n lectures are scephc1sm1

perceptual knowledge, a prwri knowledge and sczen!Ific knowledge Tutonals will focus on the two set texts

Set books

Aune, B Ratzonalzsm empzrzczsm and pragnzatzsm (New York Random House 1970)

Chalmers A What is this thing called science? 2nd ed (Queensland UP 1982)

Reference books

Armstrong, D M Belief, truth and knowledge (Cambndge UP, 1973)

Bhaskar R A realist theory of science (Harvester 1978)

Dancy, J Introductzon to contemporary epistemology (BaSil Blackwell, 1985)

Gibson j j The senses considered as perceptual systems (Allen & Unwm, 1968)

Giere R N Understanding scientific reasoning, 2nd ed (New York Holt, Remhart & Wmston, 1984)

Kuhn, T S The structure of scientific revolutwns (Chicago UP, 1970)

Newton Smith, W H The ratwnahty of science ( Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1981)

Popper, K Ob7ective knowledge (Clarendon Pr 1973)

Putnam, H Reason truth and hzstory (Cambridge UP, 1981)

Rorty, R Philosophy and the mirror of nature (Pnnceton U P 1980)

Philosophy

14202 EPISTEMOLOGY AND METAPHYSICS Mr Rf Allen

Not offered m 1991

14203 MORAL PHILOSOPHY Mr Rf Allen

Umts 6 Level Normally second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m Philosophy I, or any other first year level ma1or topic in the School of Humanities or the School of Social Sc1ences 1 or the perm1ss1on of the instructor

A study of a number of modem theories 1n the field of moral philosophy, and of certam general problems in tlus field, with special emphasis on contemporary d1scuss1on of these problems

No set books

It IS recommended that students read the followmg books, amongst others that will be detailed durmg the course

Harman, G , The nature of morality (Oxford up' 1977)

Norman R The moral philosophers (Oxford up' 1983)

Nozick, R Anarchy, state and Utopia (Oxford UP 1974)

Macintyre, A , After vzrtue (Duckworth, 1981)

Smger P Practical ethics (Cambridge U P , 1979)

Rawls j A theory of 7ustice (Harvard, 1971)

Walzer M Spheres of 7ustice (BaSic Books, 1978)

W1lhams, B Ethics and the limits of philosophy (Fontana, 1985)

14207 SOCIAL PHILOSOPHY Mr Rf Allen

Not offered m 1991

295

School of Humanztzes

14208 PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY AND SOCIAL SCIENCE Mr Rf Allen

Not offered m 1991

14209 MARXISM LENINISM Mr IE Hunt

Not offered m 1991

14216 ANCIENT AND MEDIAEVAL PHILOSOPHY Mr [( H Sievers

Not offered m 1991

14217 MODERN PHILOSOPHY Dr L E Johnson

Not offered m 1991

14219 SPECIAL TOPIC IN PHILOSOPHY

Umts 6 Level Normally second or third year Duration To be arranged Class Contact To be arranged Pre reqms1te An NGP m 14110 Philosophy I or perm1ss1on of instructor

A ph1losoph1cal topic to be announced pnor to the start of the academic year The topic may be nominated by staff or students1 with the approval of the D1sc1phne of Phdosophy Texts and methods of assessment to be determined

14221 ORIENTAL PHILOSOPHY Dr L E Johnson

Not offered m 1991

14224 FEMINISM Not offered m 1991

14229 HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY RECENT AND CONTEMPORARY Dr L E Johnson

Not offered m 1991

296

14231 ENVIRONMENTAL ETHICS Dr L E Johnson

Umts 6 Level Second or thud year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqmSite Second or thud year standmg

This topic 1s concerned with ethical questions related to the environmental considered 1n a broad sense Topics include anunal welfare the moral status of species and ecosystems and such human centred issues as the maintenance of resources, population levels and the human 1mphcattons of environmental disruption Cons1derat1on will be given to ethical theories which are hohstzc as well as those centred on 1nd1v1duals and to those which are not human centred as well as to those which are

Reference books Ehrenfeld, D The arrogance of humanism

(Oxford U P , 1978) Ehrlich P and Ehrlich, A Extinction

(Random House, 1981) Johnson, LE A morally deep world (AN U,

1987) Leopold, A A sand county almanac

(Oxford UP, 1966) Passmore, J Man's responszbzlzty for nature

(Duckworth, 1974) Regan T and Smger, P eds Ammal rzghts

and human obl1gatzon (Prentice Hall 1976)

Smger P Animal lzberatzon (Granada/ Paladm)

14232 EPISTEMOLOGY AND METAPHYSICS I MrS G O'Hazr

Not offered m 1991

14233 SOCIOBIOLOGY AND HUMAN AFFAIRS Dr LE Johnson and Dr D H Overstreet

Not offered m 1991

14235 THE PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Mr IE Hunt

Not offered m 1991

14236 ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY Mr J( H Sievers

Umts 6 Level Normally second and third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes A grade of C or better in Philosophy I or consent of instructor

The aim of this topic 1s to give a general 1ntroduchon to Ancient Philosophy 1n its social and h1storical context The ma1or figures and movements to be discussed include the Presocrat1cs, Sophists, Socrates, Plato, Aristotle, Ep1curean1sm, Sto1c1sm, and early Chnstian philosophy The mam areas that will be discussed are ancient philosophers' accounts of the natural world and knowledge, together with their moral and social philosophy

Text book

lrwm, T Classical thought (Oxford U P 1989)

Reference books

Aclmll, j L Aristotle the philosopher (Oxford UP, 1981)

Allen, RE, ed Studies in Plato's metaphysics (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1965)

Barnes, J The presocratzc phzlosophers (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1982)

Guthrie, W K C A history of Greek philosophy vols l-V (Cambridge UP 1968 78)

Kerferd, G B The Sophistic movement (Cambridge UP 1981)

lurk, G S , Raven J E and Schofield, M The presocratzc philosophers (Cambridge up' 1983)

Markus, RA, ed Augustine a collectzon of critical essays (Anchor, 1972)

14238 INDIAN PHILOSOPHY Dr L E Johnson

Not offered m 1991

Philosophy

14239 CRITICAL THINKING Dr PD Jewell

Umts 6 Level Any level 1 except for Humanities students For Humanities students, second or third year level (except with the permisston of the School Board Standmg Committee) Duratrnn This topic will be offered m first and second semester Class Contact 1 lecture 1 workshop and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes None

This topic is a study of vanous techmques of clear, logical and critical thmkmg The techmques studied will be used to analyse arguments wnte well constructed essays and deal with procedures of formal and informal logic Sc1ent1f1c method will be examined, as will the use of persuasive language Techniques of cntical reasonmg will then be apphed to controversies in ph1losophy poht1cs1 science and religion

Reference books Ayer A J Language, truth and logzc (Penguin,

1971) Barry, VE Invrtatzon to cr1tzcal thznkzng

(Holt, Remhart & Wmston, 1990) Cederblom, j and Paulsen, D Crztzcal

reasoning (Wadsworth 1986) Chalmers, A What zs this thzng called

science? 2nd ed (Queensland UP, 1982)

14241 MIND AND KNOWLEDGE Mrs G O'Hazr

Umts 6 Level Normally second or thud year Duratrnn Full year Class Contact I lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre requisites 14110 Philosophy I or consent of instructor

An exam1nat1on of a number of issues in the philosophy of mmd and theory of knowledge which are relevant to problems m the cogmllve sciences Topics covered include function ahsm intenhonahty and the theory of intentional systems, computational models of mind, perception and memory, behef, knowledge and representation consciousness and the self, mechan1sm 1 freedom and responsibihty

297

School of Humanities

Preliminary reading Boden, M Artzfzczal intelligence and natural

man 2nd ed (Harvester 1987) Hofstadter D and Dennett D eds The

minds I (Harvester, 1981) Johnson Laird, The co1nputer and the mind

an introduction to cognitive sczence (Fontana 1988)

Set books Churchland M Matter and consc1ousness1

rev ed (M I T, 1988) Dennett, D Brainstorms (Bradford, 1978) Haugeland j , ed Mind design (M I T Pr ,

1981) Lycan, Wilham G ed Mind and cognrtzon

(Blackwell, 1989)

Reference books Block, N , ed Readings zn philosophy of

psychology 2 vols (Harvard 1981) Dennett, D The 1ntent1onal stance (Bradford,

1987) Fodor, j Representatwns (Bradford, 1981) Fodor, j M odulanty of mind (Bradford, 1983) Fodor, j Psychosemantzcs (Bradford 1987) Haugeland, J Artificial intelligence the very

idea (Bradford, 1983) Mmsky, M The society of mznd (Hememann,

1987) Norman, DA ed Perspectives on cognztzve

science (Ablex, 1981)

14242 (21418) FREEDOM LAW AND SOCIETY Dr G Couvalis and Mr IE Hunt

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 one hour lectures and 1 one hour tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te Philosophy I or perm1ss1on of the instructor

An exam1natlon of some central concepts in the philosophy of law such as freedom, equahty and 1ustice A cons1deration 1s also given to some important problems 1n the philosophy of law, mcludmg the followmg Does the law infringe on or enhance our freedom? What is the baszs and 1ustificat10n for the law? What 1s the relatzonsh1p between law and morality?

Recommended reading Arthur j , Shaw W eds Justice and

economic distrzbutwn (Prentzce Hall, 1978)

298

Berhn, I Four essays on liberty (Oxford U P , 1969)

Femberg, j The moral limits of the crzmmal law vols 1 4 (Oxford U P )

Fernberg, J & Gross H P/ulosophy of law, 3rd ed (Wadsworth, 1986)

Lukes, S Marxism and morality (Oxford UP 1985)

Mill j On liberty, Norton Cntzcal Edzt10n ed David Spitz (Norton, 1975)

Norman, R Free and equal (Oxford U P 1987)

Nozzck, R Anarchy state & Utopia (Basic 1974)

Taylor, M C01m~umty anarchy and liberty (Cambndge UP 1982)

Taylor, M The possibility of co operatwn (Cambndge UP 1987)

Walzer, M Spheres of 1ustice (Basil Blackwell 1983)

Wasserstrom1 R, ed Morality & law Wolff R Understanding Rawls (Pnnceton

up' 1977)

14243 APPLIED PHILOSOPHY (ISSUES FOR AUSTRALIANS) Mr R Allen and Mr M Slade

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week - lecture/ tutonal Pre requ1s1te Philosophy I or perm1ss1on of conveners

The aim of the topic is to estabhsh that the study of phzlosophy 1s relevant to the solut10n of contemporary practical problems facing Australians By focusing on a selection of these practical problems, e g the greenhouse and ozone problems, homeless youth poverty1

unemployment sexism, racism, etc the topic will examine various ph1losoph1cal issues which are central to the causes and solutions of these problems

Wh!le completzon of Philosophy I will be a help, the topzc is designed so that it can be completed successfully Without a pnor formal study of phzlosophy

Reference books Bookch1n, M Towards an ecological society

(Montreal, Black Rose, 1980)

Capra, F The turnmg pomt (Fontana, 1983) Gorz, A Ecology as polztzcs (Boston, South

End Pr 1980) Passmore J Man's responsibzlzty for nature

2nd ed (Duckworth 1980) Rawls j A theory of 7ustzce (Clarendon Pr ,

1972) Smger, P, ed Applzed ethzcs (Oxford UP,

1986) Smger P Practzcal ethzcs (Cambndge U P ,

1979) Stretton H Capztalzsm, soczalzstn and the

envzronment (Cambndge UP, 1976) Walzer M Spheres of 7ustzce (Basil Blackwell

1983)

14244 MARXISM PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES Mr IE Hunt

Umts 6 Level Second/third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 one hour lectures and 1 one hour tutorial Pre requ1s1te Phtlosophy I or perm1ss1on of the instructor

An exam1nahon of some important issues 1n the social philosophy of Marxism The topic will cover interpretation and cnhc1sm of Marx's theory of human nature and alienation, d1alecttcal and htstoncal matenahsm, Marx's theory of freedom and social order, the theory of class and expl01tation and Marx's theory of revolution

Set books Marx K and Engels, F The Marx Engels

reader, ed Tucker RC (Norton 1972) Wood, A Karl Marx (Routledge & Kegan

Paul 1981)

Recommended readzng Bottomore T Interpretatzons of Marx (Basil

Blackwell 1988) Calhmcos, A, ed Marxist theory (Oxford

up' 1989) Cohen, G Karl Marx's theory of history a

defence (Prmceton UP, 1978) Delphy, C Close to home (Hutchmson, 1984) Draper, H Karl Marx's theory of revolution,

vols 1 3 (Monthly Review, 1977 86) Bister J Makmg sense of Marx (Cambndge

up' 1985)

Philosophy

Jessop, B The capitalist state (Martm Robertson, 1982)

l{olakowsk1, L Mazn currents of Marxism vols 1 3 (Oxford UP 1978)

Larra1n J A reconstruction of hzstorzcal materralism (Allen & Unwm 1986)

Larram j Marxism and zdeology (Macmillan, 1983)

Mclellan D , ed Marxism essential wrztzngs (Oxford UP 1988)

Marx, K Capital, vol 1 (Pengum 1976) Marx, I( Preface and zntroductzon to a

contrzbutzon to the crztzque of polztzcal economy (Foreign Languages Pr 1976)

Matthews, B Marx 100 years on (Lawrence & Wishart, 1983)

Mepham, J & Ruben DH Issues zn Marxzst philosophy, vols 1 5 (Harvester 1981)

Roemer, J ed Analytical Marxism (Cambndge UP 1986)

14245 (16240) AESTHETICS Dr G Couvalzs

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better 1n Phtlosophy I The pre reqms1te may be waIVed in special cases

This topic 1s mtended to give students a basic grounding in the main theories and problems discussed m aesthe!Ics Questrnns dealt with mclude What makes thmgs aesthetically fme? What makes somethmg a work of art? What role does form and/or emotion play 1n making a work fine? What can we learn from works of art? Are works of art morally 1mprov1ng? Do works of art take political stances, and if so, are their stances relevant to the quality of those works?

Text book Sheppard A Aesthetics (Oxford UP, 1987)

Reference books Best, D Feelzng and reason zn the arts

(Allen & Unwm, 1985) Blocker, H G The phzlosophy of art (Scnbner,

1979) Scruton R The aesthetic understanding

(Methuen, 1983)

299

School of Humanities

Lunn, E Marxzsm and modernzsm (Verso, 1985)

Johnson, P Marxist aesthetics (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1984)

Dutton D ed The forger's art (Cahforma up' 1981)

Danto, A The transfiguratzon of the commonplace (Harvard UP, 1981)

14246 (21521) MEDICAL ETHICS PHILOSOPHAL ISSUES Dr B Stoffell

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 one hour lectures and 1 one and half hour tutorial Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better in Philosophy I

This topic examines some of the ma1or ph1losophal debates that are central to the arguments surrounding the ethical aspects of medical practice The arguments in question, concerning autonomy, personahty, character, personhood and respons1b1hty are evident in the ethical issues connected with terminal care, intensive care and psychiatry

Text books Campbell R and Colhnson, D Endmg lives

(Open Umvers1ty 1988) Gillon, R Philosophical medical ethics

(Wiley 1985)

Reference books Peackocke, A and Gillett Persons and

personality (Blackwells 1987) W1lhams, B Ethics and the limits of

philosophy (Collins)

Preliminary readmg Rachels, j The end of life euthanasia and

morality (Oxford UP 1986)

Further reading/Recommended reading Lockwood, M ed Moral dilemmas in

modern medicine (OJ<!ord UP, 1985)

This topic 1s also offered in Legal Studies

300

14247 BIO MEDICAL ETHICS Mr L McNamara, Mr Rf Allen and Dr B Stoffell

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better in Philosophy I

The topic will mtroduce students to contemporary discussions on the ethical impltcations of med1c1ne and the life sciences It will explore the basic pnnc1ples, secular and Chnshan, that contribute to analysis of b10 medical issues These prmc1ples will then be apphed to such issues as the body and bodily hfe, health and illness allocat10n of health care resources, issues at the beg1nn1ng of hfe (e g reproductive technologies, abortion, disabled neonates, 1nfanhc1des), transplantation research and experimentation, behaviour control, ageing the terminally ill, dymg and death euthanasia

Reference books

Ashley BM and O'Rourke, K D Health care ethics A theological analysis, 2nd ed (CH A, 1982)

Beauchamp, TL and Childress, J F Principles of bzomed1cal ethics, 2nd ed (Oxford UP, 1983)

Beauchamp, TL and Walters, L, eds Contemporary issues in bzoethzcs (Wadsworth, 1978)

Childress, J F and Macquarrie, J , eds The Westminster Dzctzonary of Christian ethics (Westmmster, 1986)

Gillon R Philosophical medical ethics (Wiley, 1986)

Lammers, SE and Verhey, A eds On moral medicine Theological perspectives zn medical ethics (Eerdmans 1987)

Mappes, T A and Zembaty j S , eds Bzomed1cal ethics (McGraw Hill, 1986)

Marty ME and Vaux, KL, eds Health/ medicine m the fazth traditwns An enquiry znto relzgzon and n1ed1c1ne (Fortress, 1982)

Nelson, J B and Rohncht, J S Human medzczne Ethzcal perspectzves zn today's medical issues (Augsburg 1984)

Reich WT ed Encyclopedia of bzoethics, 4 vols (Free Press, 1978)

ThIS topic IS also offered as 27217 m Theology

Cognates zn Philosophy

FIRST YEAR COGNATES The D1sc1plme of Philosophy offers three first year cognates These topics are not open to students in the School of Humamt1es or the School of Social Sciences

14111 SPECIAL INTRODUCTORY TOPIC IN PHILOSOPHY

Not offered 1991

14114 SPECIAL INTRODUCTORY TOPIC IN PHILOSOPHY D

Not offered 1991

14115 SPECIAL INTRODUCTORY TOPIC IN LOGIC Dr L E Johnson and Mr S G 0 Hazr

Not offered m 1991

M a7or Topics zn Italian

Director of Studies Dr G Bolognese (Ftrst semester) Second semester To be advzsed

The D1sc1phne offers five ma1or sequences

Umts

a) 15151 Itahan Language I 6 15152 Society and Literature

m Italy I 6 15251 Itahan Language II 6

15252 Society and Literature m Italy II

15351 Itahan Language III

15352 Society and Literature m Italy III

(Advanced)

or

b) 15153 It ah an IB - Part I

15154 Itahan IB - Part II

15253 Itahan Language IIB

15252 Society and Literature m Italy II

15353 Itahan Language IIIB

15352 Society and Literature m Italy III

(Beginners)

or

c) 15140 Itahan IA

15252 Society and Literature

Italian

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

m Italy II 6

15253 Itahan Language IIB

15352 Society and Literature m Italy III

6

6

15353 Itahan Language IIIB 6

(Intermediate)

or

d) 15198 Itahan IS 9

15290 Itahan IIS 12

15391 Itahan Language IIIS 9

15392 Society and Literature m Italy ms

(Advanced for students of the Unzverszty of Adelaide only)

or

e) 15199 Itahan JBS

15291 Itahan IIBS

15393 Itahan Language IIIBS

15392 Society and Literature m Italy ms

(Beginners for students of the Unzverszty of Adelaide only)

9

9

12

9

9

301

School of Humanities

For cognates offered by the D1sc1phne, see below, under Cognates 1n ltahan

The ltahan D1sc1phne provides for three main streams of students one (Advanced) for those who on im!Ial enrolment haye Year 12 (PES) Itahan standard or its equivalent another (Intermediate) for those who have a know ledge of Itahan not beyond Year 11 or its eqmvalent and a third (Begmners) for those who have httle or no knowledge of the language

The three year course 1n the ordinary degree structure (provided for all streams) mcludes intensive instruction 1n wntten and spoken ltahan at all levels a survey of Itahan language and hterature from their ong1ns to the present day m the context of Italy's social and pohtical history, and a selection (wherever possible with ch01ce) of monographic studies devoted to particular authors, genres or penods to philology (mcludmg dialectology), to hngu1stlcs and to popular culture

The Disciplme offers the followmg segments 1n I tahan Language

1) Basic Grammar the morphology and syntax of contemporary ltahan at six progressive levels - A Elementary B Intermediate, CDE Upper F Honours,

2) Aural Oral skills comprehens10n and use of spoken Italian, at six progressive levels as for (1) Basic Grammar above,

3) Further Language addit10nal mstruct10n and practice, at various levels, aimed at supplementing the basic skills treated in (1) and (2) above, and at extendmg the student's contact with other aspects of language e g vocabulary, 1d1oms, phonology, compos1t1on levels of language, stylistics etc

Details of the segments and levels prescnbed are given in Section A in the course descriptions

In all aspects of its teachmg the Disciplme may prescribe the use of both the aud10 and visual, as well as the b1bhograph1cal resources available

302

Reference books Each student should possess an Itahan Enghsh d1ct1onary for the purpose of rapid consultation The following are recommended

Il nuovo dzzzonarzo znglese Garzantz (Garzanll, 1984)

Ragazzmi G IlNuovo Ragazzinz (Zamchelli, 1984)

Melzi, Robert C The Bantam new college Italian and English dictzonary (New York 1976)

Ragazz1n1, G and B1ag1, A Italzan and English dictzonary (Zamchelh-Longman, 1973)

Reynolds, B , ed The conczse Cambrzdge Italian dictzonary (Cambridge UP, 1975)

The Sansonz Dzctzonarzes Englzsh Italian Italian Englzsh (Collms Sansom 1981)

Anyone proceedmg beyond first year Itahan should also possess a good Itahan Itahan dictionary

The follow1ng are recommended

Devoto, G and 011, G C Dzzzonarzo della lingua italiana (Le Monmer 1971)

Dzz1onarzo Garzantz della lzngua ztalzana (GarzantI Ed1z1one Econom1ca, 1965)

Dzzzonarzo Sandron della lzngua ztalzana (De Agostmi, 1980)

Zingarelli, N Il nuovo Zzngarellz (Zan1chelh 1983)

The following reference material may be consulted m the Library

Battagha, S Grande Dzzzonarzo della lingua italzana, vols I XII (UTET, 1961 81)

Battagha, S and Pem1cone V La grammatzca italiana (Loescher, 1963)

Bruni F L ztalzano Elementz dz storza della lingua e della cultura (UTET 1984)

De Mauro, T Storza linguzstzca dell'ltalza unzta (Laterza, 1970)

Dzzzonarzo znglese italzano ztalzano znglese (SE!, 1979)

Enczclopedza ztalzana dz sczenze, lettere ed arti (Treccam, 1949)

Lepschy A L and G The Italian language today (Hutchmson 1977)

Mighorim, B and Griffith T G The Italian language (Faber & Faber 1966)

The follow1ng is available for consultation in the Disciphne office

Dzzzonarzo enczclopedzco ztalzano (Treccan1 1956)

Each student 1s also e...cpected to possess a map of Italy

15151 ITALIAN LANGUAGE I Dr G Bolognese and Mr D f O'Connor

Umts 6 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Lectures tutonals, aural-oral sessions 3 4 hours per week throughout the year Pre requ1S1te Year 12 (PES) standard m Italian or an equivalent knowledge of the language Students with httle or no previous knowledge of the language should enrol m 15153 Itahan IB Part I Students who do not have the above pre requisite but whose know ledge of the Itahan language is of year 10 or 11 standard should enrol m 15140 Itahan IA

In the first semester Basic Grammar Level B and Further Language Level A (3 4 hours per week)

Basic Grammar Level Bis a thorough reVIs1on of the basic structures of the Italian language In Further Language A students will study the use of contemporary Italian, both spoken and wntten, and will practise vanous skills such as aural comprehension oral commun1cahon translation and hngu1sbc analysis

In the second semester Basic Grammar Level C and Aural Oral Skills Level C (4 hours per week)

Basic Grammar Level C 1s a revision and consoltdation of more advanced structures of Italian, with full treatment of some of the prmcipal sect10ns of morphology and syntax lessons are designed also to extend the student's knowledge of Itahan

Aural Oral Skills Level C which will be conducted 1n tutonal groups, will further develop the student's skill m oral commun1cahon

Text books Baszc Italian Grammar I (Flinders University

ltahan Disciplme) 0 Connor D Revision exercises for students

of Italian (Longman Cheshire, 1983)

Further material to be provided

Italian

Reference books Lepschy AL and G The Italian language

today (Hutchmson 1979) Marchi, C Imparzamo l'ztalzano (Rizzoh

1984) McCormick C Chz cerca trova (A student's

reference to Italian grammar) (Longman Cheshire 1987)

15152 SOCIETY AND LITERATURE IN ITALY I Ms MA Baker, Mr D f O'Connor and Professor G A A Comm

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week throughout the year, lectures and tutonal sessions Pre reqmsite Year 12 (PES) standard m Italian or an eqmvalent knowledge of the language Students who do not have this pre reqmsite but whose knowledge of the Italian language has been ascertained by the D1sc1 phne, in consultation with the student, to be of at least Year 11 (PES) standard may be offered the possibility of enrollmg m this topic

A senes of lectures and tutorial sessions exam1n1ng social and political developments in Italy from Unification to the present day, and further lectures and tutorials on Modern Italian Literature (Narrative and Poetry) set agamst 20th Century background Students will study both literary and non literary documents

Prelunznary read1ng Hearder, H and Waley, DP, eds A short

history of Italy from classical times to the present day (Cambridge UP 1966)•

Willey, D Italians (BBC, 1984)

Students are encouraged to read as widely as possible on modern Italy before commencement of lectures

Set books Clark, M Modern Italy 18711982 (Longman,

1984) Pavese, C La casa zn collzna e altrz racconti

(Emaudi 1982) Other material to be supplied by the Disciplme

Reference books Bocca, G Storza della Repubbl1ca Italzana

(dalla caduta del Fasc1smo a ogg1) (Rizzoh, 1982)

303

School of Humanities

Cary J Three modem poets Saba, Ungarett1, Montale (New York UP, 1969)

Chandler, S B and Molinaro, ) A , eds The culture of Italy - mediaeval to modern (Gnffm House 1979)

Gughelmmo S Guida al Novecento (Pnnc1pato 1982)

)ones, F The modern Italian lyric (Wales UP, 1986)

Mack Smith, D Italy, a modern history (Ann Arbor, 1969)

Mammarella, G L'Italia dalla caduta del Fascismo a oggi (11 Muhno 1978)

Complete b1bhograph1cal hsts add1t10nal titles for further reading, lists of audio and visual matenal will be d1Stnbuted by the D1sc1phne

15140 ITALIAN IA Mr D / O'Connor and Dr G Bolognese

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 5 6 hours per week Pre-requ1S1te A knowledge of Itahan not beyond Year 11 or its eqmvalent

A LANGUAGE (4 hours per week) 1) Basic Grammar Level B A thorough

rev1s1on of the basic structures already studied followed by the study of more advanced grammar to the level of ltahan IB Part 2

2) Further Language Level A Students wdl study the use of contemporary Italian, both spoken and written, and will practise vanous skills such as aural comprehens1on, oral commun1catlon, translation and ltngu1stic analysis

3) Aural Oral skills Level B Tutorial groups to develop further the student's sk1ll 1n oral commun1cat1on

B SOCIETY & LITERATURE

(1 to 2 hours per week)

304

In the first semester, a sen es of lectures and tutorial sessions exam1n1ng social and pohl!cal developments m Italy from Umf1cat10n to the present day In the second semester, appropnate texts will be assigned by the D1sc1phne according to the student's level of achievement at the end of the first semester

Set books As for 15151 ltahan Language I and 15153

Itahan IB Part I

Consult the D1sc1phne at the !Ime of enrolment

15198 ITALIAN IS Ms MA Baker, Mr DJ 0 Connor and Professor GA A Comm

This topic 1s for students of the Umversity of Adelaide only, and 1s taught at the Umvers1ty of Adelaide

Umts 9 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact Lectures, tutorials classes in oral skills 5 6 hours per week Pre reqmS1te Year 12 (PES) standard m Itahan or an eqmvalent knowledge of the language Students with httle or no knowledge of the language should enrol m 15199 Itahan JBS

The language content of thlS topic IS the same as for 15151 ltahan Language I, the non­language content 1s the same as for 15152 Society and Literature m Italy I, except that the amount of work assessable in this section will be appropnately reduced

Set books Clark, M Modern Italy 1871 1982 (Longman,

1984) Pavese C La casa zn collzna e altrz racconti

(Emaud1, 1982)

Other material as per 15151 Italian Language 1

15153 ITALIAN IB PART I Ms MA Baker

Umts 6 Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact Lectures, tutonals1 aural oral sessions language laboratory work 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None No pnor knowledge of Italtan ts assumed

Students who have completed Year 12 (PES) Itahan or its eqmvalent should enrol m 15151 ltahan Language I Students whose knowledge of the Itahan language has been ascertamed by the D1sc1plme m consultat10n with the

student, to be of at least Year 11 (PES) standard may be offered the possibility of enrollmg m 15151 ltahan Language I or may enrol in Italian IB Part II (Intermediate' stream)

LANGUAGE (6 hours per week) 1) Basic Grammar Level A (Part I) (5 hours

per week) 2) Aural Oral Skills Level A (Part I) (1 hour

per week) This 1s an 1ntens1ve course g1v1ng the basic elements of Itahan phonology and grammar for Beginners in the language Emphasis is given to the comprehens1on and use of both spoken and written Italian The topic presupposes regular attendance as the basis for ach1ev1ng the skills necessary for simple commun1cation in the language

The language section includes lectures tutonals (with audio visual material) and language laboratory sessions Tutorial groups will be arranged to provide concentrated practice 1n aural oral skills

Set books Ella P I verbz ztalzanz per glz stranzerz

(Mondadon, 1978) Italian Beginners First Year Course (Flinders

Umversity Italian Discipline) Mazzetti, A and Comod1, A Scusz, Lez parla

italiano? (Le Monmer 1982)

Reference book Lepschy A L and G The Italian language

today (Hutchmson 1979)

15154 ITALIAN IB PART II Ms MA Baker Ms D Cavuoto and Professor G A A Comm

Umts 6 Level Fust year Duration Second semester Class Contact Lectures tutorials aural oral sessions, language laboratory work 6 hours per week Pre requisite A grade of C or better in Italian IE Part I, or its equivalent standard e g Year 11 (PES) Italian

Knowledge of Italian eqmvalent to that covered In Italian IE Part I 1s assumed This topic continues and completes the study of the language at Basic Grammar Level A as descnbed under Itahan IB Part I It also

Italian

includes studies in some modern Itahan writing, seen in relation to the social and political history of modern Italy

Students offer Sections A and B

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (5 hours per week)

1) Basic Grammar Level A (Part II) (3 4 hours per week)

2) Aural Oral Skills Level A (Part II) (1 hour per week)

Set books Eba, P I verbi ztalzanz per glz stranzerz

(Mondadon, 1978) Italzan Begznners First Year Course (Flinders

Un1vers1ty ltahan Disciphne) Mazzetti A and Comod1, A Scusz Lez parla

italzano? (Le Monmer 1982)

Reference book Lepschy A L and G The Itahan language

today (Hutchmson, 1979)

Sectzon B SOCIETY AND LITERATURE

(1 2 hours per week)

A study of selected modern texts in their socio pohttcal context

Set books Calvmo, I Marcovaldo (Mondadon)* Calvmo I Marcovaldo (Picador)

15199 ITALIAN !BS Ms D Cavuoto Ms MA Baker and Professor GA A Comm

This topic 1s for students of the Umversity of Adelaide only, and is taught at the Umversity of Adelaide

Umts 9 Level Fust year Duration Full year Class Contact Lectures tutorials, aural oral sessions, language laboratory work 6 hours per week Pre requisite None No prior knowledge of ltahan is assumed Students who have completed Year 12 (PES) ltahan or its equivalent should enrol m 15198 Itahan IS

The contents of this topic are the same as for 15153 Itahan IB Part I together with 15154 Hallan IB Part II, except that the amount of work prescribed and assessed In Section B in each semester will be appropriately reduced

305

School of Humanztzes

15251 ITALIAN LANGUAGE II Dr G Bolognese and Professor GA A Comzn

Umts 6 Level Second year Duratwn Full year Class Contact Lectures tutorials, aural oral sessions 3 hours per week Pre requzsite Agrade of C or better m 15110 Italian I or 15151 Italian Language 1, or a grade of Pl or better m 15198 Italian IS

The topic has three segments

1) Basic Grammar Level D (2 hours per week throughout the second semester) treatment of advanced points of Italian grammar, particularly syntax

2) Aural Oral Skills Level D (tutorial groups throughout the year, as required)

3) Further Language B (2 hours per week m the first semester) A detailed lmgm•llc study of Ignazio S1lone s L avventura d un povero crzstiano designed to strengthen the student s proflc1ency in syntax, aural oral slnlls and reverse translation Audio visual materials will also be set for comprehens1on and compos1Uon

Set books Basic Italzan Grammar Part I and Part II

(Flmders University Italian Disciplme 1991) Lepschy AL and G The Italian language

taday (Hutchmson 1979) ' 0 Connor, D Revision exerczses for students

of Italian (Longman Cheshire, 1983) S1lone I L'avventura dun povero crzstzano

(Mondadon 1968)

Other material to be supplied by the Disciplme

15252 SOCIETY AND LITERATURE IN ITALY II All members of staff

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact Lectures and tutonals 2 hours per week average Pre requ!Slle A grade of C or better m 15152 Society and Literature m Italy I or 15154 Italian IB Part 2 or a grade of Pl or better m 15198 Itahan IS or 15199 Itahan JBS

306

The topic has three segments

1) For all students

History of Italian Language and Literature lectures and tutorial sessions throughout the year on Italian Language and Literature from their ongms to the first half of the nineteenth century This 1s a survey course, with emphasis on the histoncal develop ment of the Itahan language and Italian literature through a detailed exam1nahon of selected representative texts

Set books An anthology of texts edited by the Italian Discipline will be made available for purchase

Reference books Dante, The dzvzne comedy ed

R Kirkpatrick (Cambridge U P , Landmarks of World Literature, 1987)

Chandler, S B and Mohnaro, J A , eds The culture of Italy - medzeval to modern (Gnffm House, 1987)

Mighonm, B Storza della lzngua italrnna (Sansom, 1963)

S1mone, R Una lingua per tutti L'ztalzano vol 1 lzngua e storza (ERi, 1980)

Whitfield J H A short history of Italzan lzterature (Sydney U P 1980)

2) For students who have done 15152 Soczety and Literature zn Italy I or zts equivalent

A study of the narrative themes and tech­niques in G1ovann1 Verga1s I Malavoglza (1 hour per week throughout the first semester)

Set book Verga, G I Malavoglza (Mondadon 1980)

3) For students who have done 15154 Italian IB Part 2 or zts equzvalent

The study of a select10n of modern and contemporary Italian texts dealing with issues relating to the changing role of women in modern Itahan society (1 hour per week throughout the first semester)

Set books Malena! will be made available by the D1sc1phne

15253 ITALIAN LANGUAGE IIB Mr D f O'Connor and Dr G Bolognese

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact Lectures tutorials aural oral sessions 3 4 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 15130 Italian IB or 15154 Italian IB Part II or a grade of PI or better m 15199 ltahan JBS

In the first semester Basic Grammar Level B and Further Language Level A (3 4 hours per week) Basic Grammar Level B is a thorough rev1s1on of the basic structures of the Itahan language In Further Language Level A students wtll study the use of contemporary ltalmn both spoken and wntten and will practise various skills such as aural comprehens1on, oral commun1cat1on 1

translation and llngu1sttc analysis

In the second semester Basic Grammar Level C and Aural Oral Slalls Level C ( 4 hours per week) Baste Grammar Level C is a rev1s1on and consolidation of more advanced structures of ltahan, with full treatment of some of the pnnc1pal sect10ns of morphology and syntax lessons are designed also to extend the student s knowledge of ltahan

Aural Oral skills Level C which will be conducted m tutorial groups will further develop the student s slnll m oral commun1catton

Text books Basic Italzan Grammar I (Fhnders Un1vers1ty

Itahan D1sc1pline, 1991)

0 1Connor D J Revzszon exercises for students of Italian (Longman Cheshire, 1983)

Further material to be provided

Reference books Marchi C Imparzamo l'ztalzano (R1zzoh,

1984)

McCormick C Chz cerca trova (A Student's Reference to Italian Grammar) (Longman Cheshire, 1987)

Italian

15290 ITALIAN HS All members of Italian staff

This topic 1s for students of the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide only, and 1s taught at the Umvers1ty of Adelaide

Umts 12 Level Second year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Lectures, tutorials aural oral sessions 4 5 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C (P 1) or better in 15198 ltahan JS

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (2 3 hours per week) 1) Basic Grammar Level D (2 hours per week

throughout the second semester) treatment of advanced points of Itahan grammar, particularly synta"{

2) Aural Oral Slnlls Level D (tutorial groups throughout the year, as required)

3) Further Language B (2 hours per week in the ftrst semester) A detailed hngu1stic study of selected Italian texts designed to strengthen the student's proficiency in syntax, 1d1om 1 aural/oral skills and compos1t1on

Set books Basic Italian Grammar Part II (Flinders

Umvers1ty ltahan D1sc1pline 1991) Lepschy, AL and G The Italzan language

today (Hutchinson 1979) O'Connor, DJ Revision exercises for

students of Italian (Longman Cheshire 1983)

Sectzon B SOCIETY AND LITERATURE (2 hours per week)

1) A study of the themes and narra!Jve techniques in Verga's I Malavoglza

2) History of Italian Language and Literature from the ongins to the fmt half of the 19th Century (a survey course with emphasis on the historical development of ltahan language and hterature through a detailed examination of selected representative texts)

Set book Verga, G I Malavoglza (Mondadon, 1980)

An anthology of texts edited by the ltahan D1sc1pline will be made available for purchase

307

School of Humanztzes

Reference book Whitfield J H A short hzstory of Italzan

literature (Sydney UP 1980)

15291 ITALIAN IIBS All members of ltalzan staff

This topic is for students of the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide only, and 1s taught at the University of Adelaide '

Umts 12 Level Second year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Lectures, tutorials aural oral sessions 5 6 hours per week Pre reqmsite A grade of C (P 1) or better m 15199 Italian JBS

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (3 4 hours per week) In the fust semester Basic Grammar Level B and Further Language A Basic Grammar Level B 1s a thorough rev1s1on of the basic structures of the Italian language In Further Language Level A students will study the use of contemporary Itallan, both spoken and written and will practise various skills such as aural comprehens1on, oral commun1cation, translation and hngu1shc analysts

In the second semester Basic Grammar Level C and Aural Oral Skills Level C Basic Grammar Level C is a rev1s1on and consohda hon of more advanced structures of Itahan des1gnetj also to extend the student s knowledge of Italian

Aural Oral Skills Level C, which will be conducted 1n tutonal groups, will further develop the student s skill m oral commun1cahon

Set books Baszc ltalzan Grammar Part I (Flinders

Umversity Italian Disciplme, 1991) 0 Connor D Revzszon exercises for students

of ltalzan (Longman Cheshire, 1983)

Further material to be provided

Reference books Marchi C Imparzamo l ztalzano (R1zzoh,

1984) McCormick, C Chz cerca trova (A students

reference to Itahan grammar) (Longman Cheshire, 1987)

Sectzon B SOCIE1Y AND LITERATURE (2 hours per week)

308

The topic has two segments

1) History of Itahan Language and Literature from the ongms to the first half of the 19th century (a survey course with emphasis on the historical development of Italian language and literature through a detailed exam1nat1on of selected representative texts),

2) The study of a select10n of modern and contemporary Itahan texts dealing with issues relating to the changing role of women 1n modern ltahan society

Set books An anthology of texts edited by the Itahan Disciplme will be made available for purchase Malena! will be made available by the D1sc1phne

Reference book Whitfield, J H A short hzstory of Italzan

literature (Sydney U P , 1980)

15351 ITALIAN LANGUAGE III Dr G Bolognese and Professor GA A Comzn

Umts 6 Level Third year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Lectures, tutonals, aural oral sessions an average of 3 hours per week Pre requ!Slte A grade of C or better m 15210 Italian II or 15251 Italian Language II

Students offer the followmg 1) Basic Grammar Level E (2 hours per week

throughout the first semester) advanced Italian syntax,

2) Aural Oral skills Level E (tutorial groups throughout the year as reqmred)

3) Further Language C (2 hours per week m the second semester) advanced study of syntax, vocabulary and idiom based on the reading of modern Itahan texts

Set books Baszc Italzan Grammar Part II (Flinders

Umversity Italian Disciplme, 1991) Lepschy A L and G The Italzan language

today (Hutchmson, 1979) O'Connor, DJ Revision exercises for students

of Italzan (Longman Cheshire, 1983) Tob1no, M Per le antzche scale (Oscar

Mondadon, 1986)

15352 SOCIETY AND LITERATURE IN ITALY III Members of the Italzan staff

Umts 6 Level Tlurd year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week average Pre reqmstte A grade of C or better m 15252 Society and Literature m Italy II

Students offer two of the four monographic studies, as follows

1) Dante Alighieri La dzvzna commedza -Inferno (Ms D Cavuoto) 2 hours per week in second semester A comprehensive study of Dantes Inferno as poetic narrative with particular attention to the poets styhst1c, h1stoncal and poht1cal concerns

Set book Ahgh1en, Dante, La dzvzna commedza,

vol I Inferno a cura d1 N Sapegno (La Nuova Italia, 1987)

2) The narrallve of Italo Calvmo (Ms MA Baker) 1 hour per week throughout the year A study of the narrative themes and techniques in a selection of Calvtno's work to be seen 1n the cultural literary context

Set books Calvino fl barone rampante

(Manchester U P , 1970) Calvmo I Le cztta znv1s1b1l1 (Emaudi 1972)

A selection of essays, prefaces and short stones to be advised

3) The development of Pirandello's Theatre (Dr G Bolognese) Two hours per week in the first semester A comprehensive study of theoretical and practical issues which lead to Pirandello's maturity in stage production

Set books Pirandello L L 'umorzsmo (Mondadon

Oscar) Boschiggia E Guzda alla lettura dz

Pirandello (Mondadon Oscar)

Italian

Recommended reading A AV V Pirandello saggzsta (Palumbo,

1982)

4) Italian and Italians m Australia (Mr D f O'Connor) Two hours per week 1n the first semester A study of Italians m Australia the htstory of Italian migration the Italtan language in Australia and Italo Austrahan poetry

Reference books Betton1, C Tra lingua, dzaletto e znglese

zl trzlznguzsmo deglz ztalianz zn Australia, (FILEF 1985)

Borne, W D Italians and Germans zn Australia (Cheshire 1954)

Cresciam G The Italzans (ABC Enterprises 1985)

Cresc1an1, G Emzgrantz o comparz V1ta Italiania in Australza Migrants or mates Italian lzfe zn Australia (Knockmore Enterprises 1988)

Di Biase, B and Paltndge B eds Italzan zn Australza language or dialect zn schools? (FILEF, 1985)

O'Bnen, IM, Australia s Italians 1788 1988, 2nd ed (Italian Htstoncal Society and the State Library of Victoria, 1989)

Pascoe, R, Buongzorno Australia (Greenhouse Pub 1987)

Randazzo, N and C1gler, M The Italians zn Australia (AE Press 1987)

Rando G Italian writers in Australza essays and texts (Wollongong U P 1983)

15353 ITALIAN LANGUAGE IIIB Dr G Bolognese and Professor G A A Comm

Umts 6 Level Thud year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Lectures, tutorials aural oral sessions an average of 3 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 15240 Italian IIB or 15253 Italian Language IIB

Thts topic is identical to 15251 Italian Language II, except that the aural oral sessions are programmed separately

309

School of Humanities

15391 ITALIAN LANGUAGE ms Mr D f O'Connor, Dr G Bolognese and Professor GA A Comm

Avaliable only to third year students of the Umversity of Adelaide

Umts 9 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact Lectures, tutorials, aural oral sessions an average of 4 hours per week Pre reqmsite A grade of C or better m 15210 Italian II or 15251 Itahan Language II

Students offer the same components as for 15351 Itahan Language III, and m addil!on

Further Language D (1 hour per week through out the year) composit10n m Italian detailed nngu1stlc analysis of contemporary Itallan texts

Set books As for 15351 Itahan Language lll, and m addil!on Bassani, G , Il gzardzno dez Fznzz Contznz

(Oscar Mondadon, 1988)

Panse, G Il prete bello (Garzanl!)

Reference books As for 15351 Itahan Language III

15392 SOCIETY AND LITERATURE IN ITALY ms All members of the Italian staff

Units 9 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 hours per week average Pre requisite A grade of C or better m 15252 Society and Literature m Italy II

Students offer three of the five monograph1c studies as described below

1) Dante Ahghien (Ms D Cavuoto) As per 15352 Society and Literature m Italy III

2) The narral!ve of Italo Calvmo (Ms MA Baker) As per 15352 Society and Literature m Italy III

3) The development of Pirandello's theatre (Dr G Bolognese)

310

As per 15352 Society and Literature m Italy III

4) Itahan and Itahans m Austraha (Mr D f O'Connor) As per 15352 Society and Literature m Italy lII

5) Dialectology (Professor GA A Comm) 2 hours per week in second semester

A h1stoncal and descnpt1ve study of the phonology of Itahan and of its prmc1pal dialects The monograph will examine the evolution and organ1sahon of the sounds of modern standard Itahan and the main phono logical features of the prmc1pal dialects of the Itahan area

Set book Matenal will be made available by the D1sc1phne

Reference books Canepar1, L Introduzzone alla fonetzca

(Emaud1 1979) Cortelazzo, M Avvzamento cntico allo studzo

della dialettologia 1talzana vol I e III (Pacm1 1969 1972)

Devoto, G and G1acomelh, G I dzalettz delle regzom d'Ital1a (Sansom, 1972)

Mul1ac1c, Z Fonologza generale e fonologia della lzngua 1taliana (II Mulmo, 1969)

Tekavc1c P Grammatica storica dell'ztallano 3 vols (II Mulmo, 1972)

The appropnate volumes of Pro fl lo dez dzalett1 ztalzanz a cura d1 M Cortelazzo (Pac1n1)

15393 ITALIAN LANGUAGE IIIBS Professor G A A Comzn, Dr G Bolognese and Mr D f O'Connor

Available only to third year students of the Umversity of Adelaide

Umts 9 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact Lectures, tutorials aural oral sessions an average of 4 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 15240 Itahan IIB or 15253 Jtahan Language IIB

Students offer the same components as for 15353 Itahan Language IIIB and m add1t10n

Further Language D (1 hour per week through out the year) Compos1tlon in Italian detailed hngu1st1c analysis of contemporary Italian texts

Set books As for 15251 Itahan Language II and m addit10n Bassani, G , Il g1ard1no dez Fznzz Contini (Oscar Mondadon, 1988) Panse, G fl prete bello (Garzanll)

Cognates zn Italian

15299 TOPIC IN ITALIAN I All me'tlbers of Italian staff

Umts 9 Level Second year for students 1n the School of Human1t1es, any level for students in other Schools Duration Full year Class Contact 3 4 hours per week through out the year Pre reqmsite Year 12 (PES) standard m ltahan, or an equivalent knowledge of the language

Not available to students who have completed 15110 ltahan I or 15151 Itahan Language I or 15152 Society and Literature m Italy I The content of this top1c1 which will consist principally of elements drawn from 15151 Itahan Language I and 15152 Society and Literature m Italy I should be arranged by the student 1n consultation with the D1sc1phne

15213 TOPIC IN ITALIAN I All members of Italian staff

Umts 6 Level Second year for students m the School of Humanities any level for students 1n other Schools Duration First semester and/ or second semester Class Contact At Convener's d1scretion Pre requ1s1te Consent of Director of Studies

Subiect to the consent of the Director of Studies students With httle or no knowledge of Italian and others who have reached Year 12 (PES) standard m Itahan or its eqmvalent may enrol in this topic For beginners the topic will consist of 15153 Itahan lB Part I or 15154 Italian lB Part II or elements of these by arrangement For students who have reached Year 12 (PES) standard m Itahan or its equivalent the topic will consist prmcipally

Italian

of elements drawn from 15151 Italian Language I and/or 15152 Society & Literature m Italy I

Sub1ect to demand a special segment may be devoted to specific language work on sub1ects useful to medical students and students mtendmg to work m the field of commumty health and migrant services

Students may not mclude m this topic any components already done or components of a lower level than those already done from the first year topics mentioned above

Set books As for 15153 Itahan lB Part I or 15154 Itahan lB Part II or 15151 Itahan Language I or 15152 Society & Literature m Italy I

15235 ITALIAN FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS AND FOR INTENDING COMMUNITY HEALTH WORKERS All members of Italian Staff

Umts 9 (A 6 umt topic 15213 Topic m Italian I is also available to students w1sh1ng to acquire fam1har1ty with medical and other spec1ahsed vocabulary) Level Second year m the School of Humanities, any level for students 1n other Schools Duration Full year Class Contact Approx 4 5 hours per week Pre-requ1s1te None, but students are required to contact the Italian D1sc1pltne

This topic 1s essentially the same as the language component of 15153 Italian lB Part I and 15154 Itahan lB Part II (for students with httle or no knowledge of Itahan) or as 15151 ltahan Language I (for students who have successfully completed Year 12 PES Itahan) except that an average of one hour per week will be devoted to Itahan medical terminology and terminology useful for those intending to work in the field of commun1ty health or migrant servtces

Not available to students who have already completed 15153 Itahan lB Part I or 15154 Itahan lB Part II or 15151 Italian Language I

Set books As for the language component of 15153 and 15154 (begmners) or as for 15151 (advanced level students) Other matenal will be made available by the Disciplme

311

School of Humanities

15245 TOPIC IN ITALIAN LANGUAGE IIB (For Medical students) Ms MA Baker

Umts 4 5 Level Elective for Medical students Duratwn Full year Class Contact To be set m consultatrnn with students Pre reqmSite A grade of C or better m 15153 and 15154 (Italian IB Parts 1 and 2), or 15199 Itahan JBS

The contents of this topic will be a selection from components of 15253 Italian Language IIB, set 1n consultation with the D1sc1phne

15298 ITALIAN LANGUAGE All members of Italian staff

Umts 9 Level Second year for students m the School of Human1hes, any level for students 1n other Schools Durat10n Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week throughout the first semester, 4 hours per week throughout the second semester Pre requ1s1te None, but students are required to consult with the D1sc1pltne

Not available to students who have completed 15110 Italian 1 or 15130 Italian IB or 15153 Italrnn IB Part 1 or 15154 Italian IB Part II A one year topic deSigned for students with httle or no prev10us knowledge of the language that aims at prov1dmg a baSic knowledge of spoken and wntten Italian The contents of this topic are the same as the language component for 15153 Italian IB Part I and 15154 Italian IB Part II

Set books As for 15153 Italian IB Part I

Reference books As for 15153 Italian IB Part I

15234 ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND ITALIANS IN AUSTRALIA Mr D O'Connor and Ms D Cavuoto

Not offered m 1991

312

15233 STUDIES IN ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LINGUISTICS Dr G Bolognese, Mr D f O'Connor and Professor G A A Comm

Umts 6 Level Second or thud year Duratrnn Full year Class Contact 1 3 hours per week Pre reqmSite A grade of C or better m 15151 Italian Language I or 15198 Itahan IS or 15251 Italian Language II or 15253 ltahan Language IIB or (with the D1Sc1plme s perm1Ss10n) 15154 Itahan IB Part 2

1) A llngmst1c study of three short plays (second year level) or two modern Italtan novels (thud year level)

Set books

Second year level Malena! will be made available by the DISC!pllne

Thud year level Bassani, G fl gzardzno dez Finzz Contznz

(Oscar Mondadon, 1988) Panse, G Il prete hello (Garzant1)

2) A hIStoncal and descnpt1ve study of the phonology of Italian and of its prmc1pal dialects The topic will examine the evolution and organ1sat1on of the sounds of modern standard Itahan and the main phonological features of the prmc1pal dialects of the Italian area

Set books Material will be made available by the D1sc1phne

Reference books Canepan, L lntroduz1one alla fonetzca

(Emaud1 1979) Cortelazzo, M Avviamento cr1tico allo

studw della dralettologra rtaliana vol I e Ill (Pac1m, 1969, 1972)

Devoto, G and Grncomelll G I dialett1 delle regiom d Italia (Sansom, 1972)

Mul1ac1c, Z Fonologia generale e fonologra della lingua 1talzana (II Mulmo, 1969)

Tekavc1c, P Grammatica storica dell'italzano, 3 vols (II Mulmo, 1972)

The appropnate volumes of Profilo de1 dzalettt ztalzanz, a cura d1 Manha Cortelazzo (Pac1m)

15320 THIRD YEAR COGNATE IN ITALIAN All members of Italian staff

Umts 12 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact To be determmed Pre reqms1te Agrade of C or better m 15210 Italian II or 15251 Itahan Language II or 15240 ltahan IIB or 15253 Italian Language IIB and 15252 Society and Literature m Italy II

Details of the opt10ns available may be obtained from the D1sc1phne of Itahan Students may not offer both this cognate and cognate 15321 towards a degree Students enrolled m 15351 ltahan Language III (or 15353 Italian Language IIIB) and 15352 Society and Literature m Italy III may also enrol for this cognate

15321 THIRD YEAR HALF COGNATE IN ITALIAN All members of Italian staff

Umts 6 Level Third year Durat10n Full year Class Contact To be determmed Pre reqmsite A grade of C or better m 15210 Italian II or 15251 Italian Language II or 15240 Itahan IIB or 15253 Italian Language IIB and 15252 Society and Literature m Italy II

Students may not offer both this cognate and cognate 15320 towards a degree Students enrolled for 15351 Italian Language III (or 15353 Italian Language IIIB) and 15352 Society and Literature m Italy III may also enrol for this cognate

This topic will consist of the followmg

1) For students who have completed 15210 ltahan II or 15251 Italian Language II or 15240 Itahan JIB or 15253 Itahan Language IIB the Further Language D component of 15391 Italian Language IIIS (provided the content of Further Language D does not form part of a topic in which the student has been or 1s currently enrolled),

Vzsual Arts and Archaeology

2) One monograph1c study to be chosen from those offered for 15352 Society and Literature m Italy IIIS Students enrolled m 15392 Society and Literature m Italy III may also enrol for this cognate, and must choose a monographic study which they have not chosen as part of 15352

Ma7or Topics zn Visual Arts and Archaeology Director of Studies Ms Louise Dauth

The D1sc1plme offers the followmg Ma1or sequence

Units Visual Arts and Archaeology I 12 Visual Arts and Archaeology II 12 Visual Arts and Archaeology III 12

Visual Arts and Archaeology II and Visual Arts and Archaeology III are composed of 6 unit topics

For cognates offered by the D1sc1phne see below1 under Cognates in Visual Arts and Archaeology

For Honours topics offered by the D1sc1phne, see under the heading Honours Programmes zn the School of Humanztzes Students may not enrol 1n a Visual Arts and Archaeology Honours topic without the approval of the topic supervisor and the Director of Studies or Head of Disciplme

Visual Arts and Archaeology I See 16110 Visual Arts and Archaeology below For enrolment in Visual Arts and Archaeology I no prev10us study of the subject is assumed Wherever possible emphasis is given to the study of ongmal works at fmt hand, either from the Visual Arts Study Collect10n, the Art Gallery of South Australia, the South Australian Museum or further afield

In addition to lectures, seminars and other work, students will be required to attend a practical studio class This 1s not a professional studio class The purpose is to study some of the media and techniques that are relevant to the academic work devoted to the history and theory of art and archaeology The supervisors of third year and Honours topics may also prescribe spec1f1c studio content Instead of formal end of year written examinations the

313

School of Humanities

D1sc1phne incorporates assessment con t1nuously into the learning process Assessment is made of written work, tutorial presentations and con tr1but1ons, visual appraisal, special pro1ects, field work topics and other testable evidence of study and research

Visual Arts and Archaeology II Aspects of the art, archaeology and architecture of Europe, Amen ca Austraha and the Pac1ftc region are studied Students may offer ANY TWO of the topics listed below, from 16202 to 16240, provided that they have sat1Sfactonly completed 16110 V!Sual Arts and Archaeology I

Students will normally be reqmred to obtam a pass (C) or better m both topics of their second year V!Sual Arts and Archaeology studies m order to proceed to the third year of the ma1or sequence S1m1larly, they will be required to obtain a pass 1n both topics of their third year Visual Arts and Archaeology studies to be eligible for the ordmary degree

Students will be reqmred to attend a prac!tcal studio class 1n the second year of the ma1or In exceptional circumstances students may be permitted to postpone this un!tl their thud year

Visual Arts and Archaeology Ill Aspects of the art, archaeology and arch1 tecture of Europe America, Australia and the Pac1f1c region ate studied

Students may offer ANY TWO of the topics hsted below from 16202 to 16240 provided that (i) they have sat1Sfactonly completed V!Sual Arts and Archaeology II and (n) they have not already had credited as components of V1Sual Arts and Archaeology II any topic that 1s to be offered as a component of Visual Arts and Archaeology III

For studio requirement see Visual Arts and Archaeology II above

Higher Degrees The degrees of M A and Ph D will normally be undertaken by theS!S although coursework may be prescribed for preliminary studies or 1n 1nd1v1dual cases at the discretion of the D1Sciplme An M A by Thesrs and Ongmal Production is also available Candidates for this degree must show both professional and

314

academic competence, and will be examined equally on their practical work and on a dissertation based on related h1stor1cal or theoretical studies

The following standard reference works on art and artists wdl be of value in many topics

Art bzblzographzes modern (American Biblrographical Centre, Clw 1971)

Art index (New York, 1933 ) A very zndex to architectural perzodzcals,

2nd ed (Hall, 1973) Benez1t, E Dzctzonnazre crztzque et

documentazre des pe1ntres sculpteurs dessznateurs et graveurs (Grund, 1960)

Encyclopedia of world art (McGraw Hill, 1959 68)

Gowmg, L, ed A bzographical dictzonary of artists (Macmillan 1983)

Gowmg, L , ed A history of art (Mdcmillan 1983)

Hams, J and Lever, J Illustrated glossary of architecture 850 1830 (Faber, 1966)

Kostof, S A history of architecture (Oxford up 1985)

Pelican history of art series (Pengum)* Propylaen Kunstgeschichte (Propylaen

Verlag, 1967) Repertoire International de la Lztterature de

l'Art (College Art Associatwn 1975) Ryerson Library Index to art perzodicals (Art

Ins!ttute of Chicago 1962) Sources and documents in the hzstory of art

senes (Prenttce-Hall) Thieme, U and Becker F A llgemeznes

Lexzkon der btldenden Kunstler von der Antzke bzs zur Gegenwart (Seemann 1907 50)

Walker, John A Glossary of art, archztecture and design since 1945 (Pren!tce Hall, 1973)

16110 VISUAL ARTS AND ARCHAEOLOGY I A SURVEY OF THE VISUAL ARTS Mr A f Flashtig and others

Umts 12 Level First year Duratwn Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week A m1nurium of 18 hours studio per year Pre requ1s1te None

The aim of Visual Arts and Archaeology I 1s to introduce the student to some of the leading ideas and principal man1festahons of art and archaeology No previous study 1s assumed

A proportion of the work 1s theoretical the remainder being archaeolog1cal, ethnographic and art historical Several guest lecturers are normally mv1ted to contribute to the topic All members of the Visual Arts and Archaeology staff contribute to Visual Arts and Archaeology 1

Contmuous assessment will be offered through essays visual tests tutorial contr1but1ons, studio classes and field work

Preliminary reading Students should read accordmg to the1r interests some of these books early in the academic year (and for maximum benefit, before lectures commence especially 1£ the student has no previous acquaintance with the sub1ect) Anderson, R L Art zn przmztzve societies

(Prentice Hall, 1979),* Arnason H H A history of modern art

rev ed (Thames & Hudson, 1977)* Attenborough D The trzbal eye (B B C , 1976) Berger ) Ways of seezng (BBC and Pengum

1973) Clark, KM Czvilisatwn (Pengum 1987)* Elsen, A E Purposes of art, 4th ed (Holt,

Rmehart & Wmston, 1981)· Flemmg W Arts and ideas, 7th ed (Holt

Rmehart & Wmston 1986) Foster H ed Post modern culture (Pluto,

1987) Gombnch, EH The story of art, 14th ed

(Pha1don, 1984)' Preble D & S Artforms, 3rd ed (Harper &

Row 1985) Rosk1ll, M What is art history? (Thames &

Hudson, 1975)*

Set book De la Crotx H and Tansey, R G Gardner s art

through the ages, 8th ed (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1986)

Recommended books Students should become thoroughly fam1ltar with the contents of the followmg texts and should consider acquiring copies of their own

Attenborough, D Tribal encounters (Le1cestersh1re Museums 1981)*

Visual Arts and Archaeology

Burn, I et al The necesszty of Australian art (Power Publtcat10ns, 1988)

Goldwater R and Treves, M , eds Artists on art from XIVth XXth century (Murray 1976)

Holt, E G A documentary history of art 3 vols (Anchor 1957 66)*

Janson, H W A hzstory of art, 3rd rev ed (Thames & Hudson 1986)

Pointon M Hzstory of art a students handbook 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm 1986)

Price, S Przmztzve art zn czvzlzzed places (Chicago UP, 1989)

Rathje W L and Schiffer, MB Archaeology (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1982)

The following topics may be offered as components of Visual Arts and Archaeology II zn a ma7or sequence

16202 ROCOCO AND ROMANTICISM IN FRANCE AND ENGLAND c 1715 c 1830 Mr A f Flashtig

Not offered m 1991

16203 EUROPEAN ART 1830 1914 Mr A f Flashtig

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite None for those takmg the topic as a cognate For those w1sh1ng to include the topic m the Visual Arts and Archaeology ma1or, a pass 1n 16110 Visual Arts and Archaeology I

The main theme of this section will be painting, its changes 1n style and social relevance, but aspects of other arts will be considered Pnnc1pally, lectures interpret the response of later 19th century and early 20th century artists to an environment profoundly changed by science and technology, and to a society affected by acute pohttcal disturbances For the most part the issues of a new art emancipated from trad1tlonal notions of p1ctonal representation will be examined in the context of the careers of crucial artists

315

School of Humanities

working in Paris, but attention will be given to the nse of s1gn1ficant groups 1n other artistic centres of Europe

Prelzmznary reading (To be completed before the start of the first semester)

Briggs A ed The nineteenth century chapters 3 and 11 (Thames & Hudson, 1970)

Pelles G Art artists and society Orzgzns of a modern dzlemma Pazntzng zn England and France 1750 1850 (Pren!Ice Hall, 1963)

Further Recommended reading for this topic will be found m the Visual Arts and Archaeology II & Ill Study Guide

16205 TWENTIETH CENTURY ARCHITECTURE

Not offered m 1991

16206 NINETEENTH CENTURY ARCHITECTURE* To be announced

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre-requ1s1te None for those taking the topic as a cognate For those w1sh1ng to include the topic m the Visual Arts and Archaeology ma1or, a pass m 16110 Visual Arts and Archaeology I

Lectures and seminars concentrate on developments from c 1770 to c 1870 Emphasis is on architecture urban form and landscape design theories and manifestations as related to classicism romanticism and rationalism in Europe, North America and Australia

A readmg hst for this topic will be available from the Secretary of the Disc1plme of Visual Arts and Archaeology

16216 ARTS OF OTHER PEOPLES Associate Professor f VS Megaw

To be next offered m 1992

* Sub1ect to ava1lab1hty

316

16218 ARCHAEOLOGY ITS HISTORY, TECHNIQUES AND METHODOLOGY Associate Professor f VS Megaw Dr FD Pate and others

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 one hour tutorial per week not more than 20 hours practical/ field work All classes will be given at Flinders University Pre requisites None for those taking the topic as a cognate For those w1sh1ng to include the topic m the Visual Arts and Archaeology ma1or a pass 1n 16110 Visual Arts and Archaeology I

This topic surveys the development of archaeology on a world wide basis with particular emphasis on the apphcat10n of modern history classical studies and the visual arts as well as demonstrating the inter relat1onsh1ps with the social physical, earth and hfe sciences

It IS hoped that students will have an opportunity to be introduced to the practical aspects of archaeology m the field and museum

Prelzmznary reading At least one from the followmg Deetz, ) In small things forgotten the

archaeology of early American life (Doubleday, 1977)

Deetz, ) Invitation to archaeology (Natural History Pr, 1967)

Fagan BM Archaeology a brief intro ductwn, 3rd ed (Little Brown, 1988)

Fagan, B M World prehistory an intro ductwn (Little Brown 1979)

Set books either Fagan, B M In the beginning an zntro

ductwn to archaeology, 6th ed (Little Brown, 1988)

or Bmford, LR In pursuit of the past (Thames

& Hudson, 1983)* Rath1e, W L and Schiffer, MB Archaeology

(Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1982)

Reference book Sherratt, A ed Cambridge encyclopedia of

archaeology (Cambridge UP, 1980)

16221 THE MUSEUM AN HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL SURVEY Assoczate Professor f VS Megaw, Ms L Dauth and others

Umts 6 Level Second or third year m the School of Humanities, any level for students 1n other Schools Durat10n Full year Class Contact One hour lecture per week and the equivalent of one hour of practical or fieldwork per week, to be organised in one of the Adelaide museum 1nst1tut1ons Some lectures will be given at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide The balance of the lectures wdl be given at Flmders University Pre reqms1te None for those takmg the topic as a cognate For those w1sh1ng to include the topic 1n the Visual Arts and Archaeology ma1or a pass in 16110 Visual Arts and Archaeology I

The topic will examme the history of the museum and art gallery as repos1tor1es of matenal culture and theu development as cultural phenomena Sub1ects to be reviewed will include the museum and the designer, the museum, the public and commun1cahon, the museum as an unnecessary 1nstltut1on, the museum as custodian of other people's cultural heritage This 1s not an introduction to museology or professional museum studies, though as far as possible the topic will be centred on the collect10ns of the Flmders Un1vers1ty Art Museum, the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide, the S A Museum, History Trust and Art Gallery of South Australia Practical work will give students an opportunity to experience at first hand the workings of a modern museum 1nstltution through two short penods of secondment such work will be under the superv1s1on of professional curatorial staff

Prelzmznary readzng Horne, D The great museum the represent

atzon of history (Pluto, 1984) Lumley, R ed The museum tzme machine

(Routledge, 1988)* Meyer KE The art museum power money,

ethzcs (Morrow, 1979)*

Set books One of the followmg

Vzsual Arts and Archaeology

Alexander E P Museums zn motzon an introductzon to the history and functions of museums (Amencan Assoc for State and Local History 1979)

Hudson K Museums of znfluence (Cambndge U P 1987)

Lee S E , ed On understandzng art museums (Prentice Hall, 1975)

Lewis RH, ed Manual for museums (National Park Service, Dept of the Interior, 1976)'

Vergo, P (ed) The new museology (Reaktrnn Books, 1989)

Reference books

Alsop ) The rare art tradztwns the history of art collecting (Thames & Hudson 1982)

Clzfford, ) The predzcament of culture twentieth century ethnography, lzterature and art (Harvard U P , 1988)

Edwards R Museum policy and develop ment zn South Australza fznal report (SA Govt Prmter 1981)

Edwards, R and Stewart, J , eds Preserving zndzgenous cultures a new role for museums (Australian Government Publishmg Serv1ce, 1980)

Horton, M and Thomas, D , eds Art Gallery of SA 1881 1951 (Art Gallery Board of SA, 1981)

Hudson, K Museums for the 1980s (Macmillan, 1977)

MacGregor A, ed Tradescant's rarztzes essays on the foundatzon of the Ashmolean museum (Oxford U P 1983)

Museums zn Australia 1975 (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Semce, 1975)

O'Doherty, B ed Museums in crzszs (Braz1ller, 1972)

Pearce, S M , ed Museum studzes zn materzal culture (Leicester U P , 1989)

Thompson ) MA ed Manual of curatorshzp (Butterworths, 1984)

W1tthn, A S Museums zn search of a usable future (MIT 1970)

317

School of Humanities

16224 STUDIES IN WESTERN ART SINCE 1900 Ms BE folly

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and I two hour tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None for those taking the topic as a cognate For those w1sh1ng to include the topic m the Visual Arts and Archaeology major a pass m 16110 Visual Arts and Archaeology I

The topic will investigate progressive and concurrent styhst1c developments 1n Western 20th century visual art1 their causes, h1stoncal precedents, and social contexts Cons1derat1on will be given to the painting, sculpture, architecture, and graphic art of Europe U S A Mexico, and to a lesser extent, Austraha The period treated will be from 1900 to the late 1960s

Prelzmznary reading Amason, H H A history of modern art Pt

(Thames & Hudson, 1969)

Reference books Arnason, H H A history of modern art, rev

ed (Thames & Hudson, 1977) Banham R Theory and design zn the first

machzne age (Architectural 1972) Chipp, H B , ed Theories of modern art

(Cahforma UP 1968) Herbert P L ed Modern art1sts on art

(Prentlce Hall, 1964) Wingler, H , ed The Bauhaus Weimar

Dessau Berlin Chicago (MIT 1969)

16226 AUSTRALIAN ARCHAEOLOGY I A CHRONOLOGIAL SURVEY Dr FD Pate

Units 6 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 one hour lectures per week, 1 hour weekly tutorial, opt10nal lab /field work Pre requ1s1te None for those taking the hop1c as a cognate For those w1sh1ng to mclude the topic m the VISual Arts and Archaeology major a pass m 16110 Visual Arts and Archaeology I

318

The topic will explore the methods, general theoretical onentatton, and h1stor1cal back ground of the d1sc1plme of archaeology ThIS will be followed by an exammat10n of subject matter of Australian Archaeology The general arms are to convey to students an awareness of how archaeologists work, the nature of their data base, and the kinds of 1nformat1on and interpretation upon which the archaeolog1cal view of Austraha s past has been constructed At the same time, students will acqmre a broad knowledge of archaeolog1cal perceptions of Australia's past as well as current research trends Sub1ects to be covered include h1stoncal development of archaeology, the nature of the archaeolog1cal record, data recovery analysis and inter pretatton, history of research in Australia ong1ns of Abong1nal occupation 1n Australia, Australia dunng the Pleistocene, the last 12,000 years of Abongxnal culture, current research and important issues the archaeology of culture contact, Australian archaeology 1n world perspective

Prel1mznary readzng Deetz, f Inv1tat10n to archaeology (Natural

History Press 1967) Rathje, W L and Schiffer, M B Archaeology

(Harcourt Brace and Jovanovich 1982)

Set book Flood J Archaeology of the Dreamtime

(Collms 1989)

Reference books Dame[ G A short history of archaeology

(Thames & Hudson, 1981) lurk R L and Thorne, AT The origin of the

Australzans (Austrahan Institute of Abongmal Studies, 1976)

Mulvaney, DJ Prehistory of Australia (Pehcan 1975)*

Mulvaney, D) and Golson J, eds Aboriginal man and envzronment zn Australia (Australian Nat10nal UmverS1ty, 1971)

White, J P and O'Connell J F A prehistory of Australia, New Guznea and Sahul (Academic, 1982)

Willey, GR and Sabio!! J A A history of American archaeology, 2nd ed (Freeman, 1980)

16227 AUSTRALIAN ARCHAEOLOGY II PROBLJ:MS IN ARCHAEOLOGICAL THEORY AND METHOD Dr FD Pate

Not offered m 1991

16231 AUSTRALIAN ART 1788 c 1900 Ms L Dauth

Not offered m 1991

16232 AUSTRALIAN ART c 1900 TO THE PRESENT DAY Ms L Dauth

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None for those w1sh1ng to take the topic as a cognate For those w1sh1ng to mclude the topic m the Visual Arts and Archaeology maior, a pass m 16110 V1Sual Arts and Archaeology I

A study of Australian European based art from 1900 with particular reference to contemporary visual arts

Set books Smith B Australian pamtmg 1788 1970,

2nd ed (Oxford UP, 1971) Burn I et al The necesszty of Australian art

(Power Pubhatrnns, 1988)

Reference books Freeland1 JM Archztecture zn Australza, a

history (Pengum, 1972) McCulloch A Encyclopedia of Australian

art, rev ed (Hutchmson, 1984) Moore, W The story of Australian art, 2 vols

(Angus & Robertson, 1980) Smith, B The antzpodean ntanzfesto essays

m art and history (Oxford UP 1976)* Snuth, B ed Documents on art and taste zn

Australia (Oxford UP 1975)* Smith, B Place, taste and tradztzon, 2nd ed

(Oxford U P , 1979) Sturgeon, G The development of Australian

sculpture 1788-1975 (Thames & Hudson 1978)*

A hst of further readmg for this topic will b~ available from the Secretary of the D1sc1phne of Visual Arts and Archaeology

Vzsual Arts and Archaeology

16237 EARLY CELTIC ART AND ARCHAEOLOGY Associate Professor JV S Megaw and DrM R Megaw

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours lectures, 1 hour tutorial per week Pre requisite A pass m 16110 Visual Arts and Archaeology I Co requisite None (though a readmg know ledge of French or German would be an advantage)

The topic will survey the art and archaeology of the European Celts from c 700 BC to AD 700, concentratmg on the culture of the pre Roman Iron Age The problems of reconstructing not only form but meaning and s1gn1f1cance in art will be examined The topic will not only offer a bridge between the D1sc1phne s other offerings 1n archaeology and art but should be relevant to students of European h+eratute and languages history and classical studies

Prelzmznary reading either Megaw, R and Megaw, V Early Celtzc art zn

Brztazn and Ireland (Shire, 1990) or Stead, IM Celtic art zn Bntazn before the

Roman Conquest (Bnllsh Museum, 1985) and either Powell, T GE The Celts, rev ed (Thames &

Hudson, 1980) or Ross A The pagan Celts (Batsford, 1986)

Set books Colhs J The European zron age (Batsford,

1984) Megaw R and Megaw V Celtic art from its

begznnzngs to the Book of Kells (Thames & Hudson 1989)*

Reference books Champion TC and Megaw, ) V S , eds

Settlement and society aspects of Wes• European soczety zn the fzrst mzllennzum BC (Leicester UP, 1985)

Fox C Pattern and purpose a survey of early Celtzc art zn Brztazn (National Museum of Wales, 1958)

319

School of Humanztzes

Henderson, G From Durrow to Kells (Thames & Hudson 1987)

Jacobsthal, P Early Celtzc art (Oxford UP 1969)

Kzlbrzde Jones, H E Celtzc craftsmanship zn bronze (Croom Helm, 1980)

Megaw JV S Art of the European iron age (Harper & Row 1970)

Thomas, C Celtic Britain (Thames & Hudson, 1986)

16238 CONTEMPORARY ABORIGINAL ART TECHNIQUES AND METHODS

Not offered m 1991

16240 (14245) AESTHETICS Dr G Couvalzs

(See under Philosophy Topic 14245)

The followzng topzcs may be offered as components of Vzsual Arts and Archaeology III zn a ma1or sequence

(Subject to restrzct10ns spelled out m the preamble above)

ANY TWO of 16202, 16203, 16205 16206 16216, 16218, 16221 16224, 16226, 16227 16231, 16232, 16237, 16238, 16239 16240

only though 1t 1s envisaged that Level II and Level III subjects will also be taught m the future, possibly from 1992 In 1991, students will be able to enrol m 19197 Modem Greek IS (which 1s mtended for native speakers or for those who have taken Matr1culat1on Greek) and 19198 Modern Greek JBS (which 1s intended for beginners) A number of "cognates ' is also avarlable to all students of Flinders and Adelaide Un1vers1tles

fhe D1sc1plme offers the followmg topics at first second and third year level m 1991

(A) Advanced 19110 Modern Greek I 12 19115 Modem Greek I

Introductory course 6 19210 Modern Greek II 12 19310 Modern Greek III 12

(B) Beginners 19120 Modern Greek JB 12 19125 Modern Greek JB

Introductory course 6 19220 Modem Greek 118 12 19320 Modern Greek IIIB 12

(C) 19199 Modern Greek for Medical Students 9

NOTE Intermediate Courses will also be ava!lable

(D) For Adelaide Umversity students only 19197 Modern Greek IS

Advanced 9 M a1or Topics zn Modern Greek 19198 Modern Greek JBS

Director of Studies Dr L Papademetre

Modem Greek as a D1sc1phne was established in the School of Humanities in 1988, when the first Professor, Dr D D1m1rouhs was appomted to the Foundat10n Chair of Modem Greek The fmt students were admitted to the D1sc1plme m February 1989 Imtially only first year courses were offered but the D1sc1pltne has now developed a second and a third year course and 1s progressively planning the development of a full range of Honours topics, as further staff are appomted In 1991, the Fhnders Un1vers1ty Modern Greek course will be available for the first time on the Umvers1ty of Adelaide campus to Adelaide students Subjects will be offered at Level I

320

Beginners

19110 MODERN GREEIC I Advanced course Dr Mzchael Tsianzkas

Umts 12 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 5 6 hours per week

9

Pre requ1s1tes Nat.Ive speakers, matnculatlon Modern Greek or eqmvalent

Sect10n A LANGUAGE (50%)

Three hours per week throughout the year d1stnbuted as follows

1) Grammar and syntax apphcat1on of the most important morphological features and syntactic structures, regular exercises and written assignments

2) Developm1

ent of reading and writing skills structuring a compos1hon choosing the appropnate vocabulary and style, based on selected texts

3) Development of conversatzonal skzlls improving listening comprehension and speakmg facihty through debate and argumentation on contemporary topics

Section B MODERN GREECE PAST AND PRESENT (50%)

Three hours per week throughout the year A series of lectures and tutorial sessions exam1n1ng important aspects of Greek literature culture and history 1n relation to Classical, Byzantine and Modern Trad1t1ons and within the context of modern Greek society

Preliminary reading

Section A

NEoeAATjVLK'fl ypaµµaTLK'fl (0 E 2: B)

Set books

Section A

hUVTUKTLK6

Tsiarukas M ed E¢apµoaµtvry lpaµµanKry Applzed Grammar (Disciplme of Modern Greek)

Ts1an1kas M KaAuT€pa EAATJVlKd A Better Greek A' (Discipline of Modern Greek)

Sectzon B Clagg R A short history of Modern Greece

2nd ed (Cambridge UP 1986) IToA( T'flS' A I crrop{ a TT/S' N€o€AATJVlKrfS'

Aoyorqv{as- (ET E, 1985) (available also m Enghsh)

Dimirouhs D , ed An anthology of Modern Greek Poetry A' (Disciplme of Modern Greek)

Tsiamkas, M , ed An anthology of Modern Greek short storzes (D1sc1phne of Modem Greek)

Reference books

Section A Crighton W M<fya EAAryvo AyyAtKdv

AECtKdv (E>.Eu8Epou8a K~S' 1960)

Modern Greek

rEwpyorrarra6d KOS A To Mc yd Ao A€fLKO TT/S' NcocAAryvLKT/S' I'AWcrcraS' (Ma>.Aid p~s-)

haKEAAapLou X N€o A€flKO TT/S' Llryµonqs- (2:18€p~s- 1983)

Stavropoulos, D N and Hornby A S Oxford Englzsh Greek learner's dzctzonary (Oxford U P , 1977)

BaaLAELa611s r AyyAo €AAryvtK6 A€fLK6 (Pengum Hellenews)

Section B t.~µapas- K e I OTop(a T~S' NrnEAA~VlK~S'

AoyoTEXVtas- 0Kapos- 1985) Woodhouse, CM Modern Greece a short

history (Faber, 1986)

19115 MODERN GREEK I Introductory course Dr M Tszanikas

Umts 6 Level Second and third year m the School of Humanities, any level for students in other Schools Duration First semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Consent of the D1sciphne Co requ1s1tes This topic cannot be taken 1n coniunct10n with Modern Greek I and/or IB The contents of this topic are the same as for 19110 Modern Greek I Advanced course, except that the students' assessment is based on the work completed in the first semester

Set books

Sectzon A Ts1arukas,M ed E¢apµoaµ€vri I'paµµaTtKTf

Applied Grammar (Disciphne of Modern Greek)

Ts1an1kas, M, ed KaAvT€pa EAAryviKd A Better Greek A' (D1sciplme of Modern Greek)

Section B Clagg, R A short hzstory of Modern Greece,

2nd ed (Cambridge UP, 1986) Ts1amkas M, ed An anthology of Modern

Greek short stones (D1sc1phne of Modern Greek)

Reference books IloAlT'flS A laTop{a TT/S' NcocAAryvtKT]S'

Aoyorqvrns- (ET E, 1985) (avadable also m Enghsh)

Woodhouse, CM Modern Greece A short hzstory (Faber, 1986)

321

School of Humonzties

19120 MODERN GREEK IB Beginners course Dr L Papademetre

Umts 12 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 5 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None No previous know ledge of the language ts reqmred

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (80%) Five hours per week throughout the year d1str1buted as follows

1) Grammar and syntax Apphcahon of basic morpholog1cal and syntactic structures a1m1ng at developing the students competence in spoken and wntten Greek Exercises in the classroom homework laboratory assignments, and regular tests

2) Conversation Improving the students' hsten1ng comprehens1on and prof1c1ency in commun1cat1on through d1scuss1on of cultural topics with the aid of audio visual material

3) Reading and wrztzng skills Analysing the structure of simple passages and wnt1ng simple compos1hons 1n Greek Regular translations from Greek into Engltsh and vice versa will assist further 1n developing wnt1ng techniques

Section B MODERN GREEK CULTURE (20o/o)

Senes of lectures focusing on Modern Greek culture with emphasis given to social life, popular culture history contemporary literature and art 1n their European context One hour per week throughout the year

Set books

Section A EA!.ryvLKa Twpa 1 +1 (plus two tapes), (Aµ µos,

1987) Hardy, D A Greek language and people (plus

two tapes) (BBC 1983) Papademetre, L A Modern Greek graded

reader (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

Add1t10nal material to be supphed by the D1sc1phne

Section B Clagg, R A short history of Modern Greece

(Cambridge UP, 1986) Woodhouse, CM Modern Greece a short

history (Faber)

322

Reference books Section A Apxi(w rn EA!.ryviKa (Umvers1ty Studio Press) H I'Afuaaa TUJll I 8iwµaTtaµwv Kat TWll EK¢pdacwv

(Umvers1ty Stud10 Press 1983)

19125 MODERN GREEK IB Introductory course Dr L Papademetre

Umts 6 Level Second and third year m the School of Humanities, any level for students in other Schools Duration First semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre requisites None Co requisites This topic cannot be taken in con1unchon with Modern Greek I and/or IB

The contents of this topic are the same as for 19120 Modern Greek IB Beginners course, except that the students' assessment is based on the work completed in the first semester

Set books

Sectzon A EA!.ryvtKd Twpa 1 +1 (plustwotapes) (Aµµos,

1987) Hardy, D A Greek language and people (plus

two tapes) (BB C , 1983)

Add1t10nal material to be supphed by the D1sciphne

Sectzon B Clagg R A short history of Modern Greece

(Cambridge UP 1986)

19199 MODERN GREEK FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS Dr L Papademetre

Umts 9 Level First year Durahon Full year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Convener s consent

This topic is spec1fically designed to assist medical students develop a sc1ent1fic understandmg of the structure of the language its rules of etymology and the lextcal meanmg used 1n medical term1nology

Set books Group A Ts1amkas,M ed E¢apµoaµtv17 I'paµµaTLKT]

Applied Grammar (D1sc1phne of Modern Greek)

Ts1an1kas M ed KaAvr€pa EAAryvtKd A Better Greek A' (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

Papademetre, L, ed EAAryvtKd yia <Pot TT]T€s-

I aTptKTf s- (D1sc1phne of Modern Greek)

Group B EAA~vtKa Tlllpa 1+1 (plustwotapes) (Aµµos) Papademetre, L A Modern Greek graded

reader (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

19197 MODERN GREEK IS Advanced (for Adelaide Umvemty students only) Dr M Tszanzkas

Umts 9 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week (lectures, tutorials) Pre requ1s1tes Native speakers matriculation Modem Greek or equivalent Students with l!ttle or no knowledge of the language should enrol m 19198 Modern Greek !BS

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (50%)

Three hours per week throughout the year d1stnbuted as follows

1) Grammar and syntax apphcat10n of the most important morpholog1cal features and syntactic structures, regular exercises and written assignments

2) Development of readzng and wrztzng skzlls structuring a compos1hon, choosing the appropriate vocabulary and style based on selected texts

3) Development of conversatzonal skills improving listening comprehension and speakmg fac1hty through debate and argumentation on contemporary topics

Section B MODERN GREECE PAST AND PRESENT (50%)

Two hours per week throughout the year A series of lectures and tutorial sessions examining important aspects of Greek hterature, culture and history in relation to Classical, Byzantine and modern traditions and w1th1n the context of modern Greek society

Modern Greek

Preliminary reading Sectwn A NE0EAAT]vud1 ypaµµaTtKT] LvvTaKTtK6 (0 EL: B)

Set books

Sectwn A Tsrarukas, M ,ed E¢apµoc;µtv~ I'paµµanKTf

Applied Grammar (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

Ts1an1kas, M KaAvrcpa EAAT]VLKa A Better Greek A (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

Sectzon B Clagg R A short history of Modern Greece

(Cambridge UP, 1986) TloN.np A !OTopLa TT}S' Nc0€Jo.AT}Vlidr; AoyorcxvlaS'

(ET E) (avadable also m Enghsh) Dururouhs, D , ed An anthology of Modem

Greek poetry A' (D1sc1plme of Modem Greek) Ts1amkas M ed An anthology of Modern

Greek short stones (D1sc1phne of Modern Greek)

Reference books

Section A Cnghton, W Miya EAAT}vo AyyAlK6v Ac(tK6v

(EAEv8e:pov8aKT]S) re:wpyorrarra8aKOS A To McyaAo Ae:(tK6 TT}S'

Nrn<A!.ryvm)s- I'Awc;c;a<; (MaAAldp~s) haKEAAap(ov X Ni o Ac(tKo TT}S' Ll T}µOTLKrj 5'

{hl6<p~s) Stavropoulos, D N and Hornby A S Oxford

Englzsh Greek learners dzct1onary (Oxford UP)

BacrtAEtaST]s f Ayy)..o cAAryvtKo Ae:(rKd (Pengum Hellenews)

Sectzon B .6.riµapas K e I crTopla TT]S' NEoEAAT]VLKl]S'

AoyoTEXvtas (I Kapos) Woodhouse, CM Modern Greece a short

history (Faber)

19198 MODERN GREEK JBS Beginners course (for Adelaide Umvers1ty students only) Dr L Papademetre

Umts 9 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre requisites None No previous know ledge of the language 1s reqmred Students with rnatnculahon Modern Greek should enrol m 19197 Modem Greek IS

323

School of Humanities

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (80%)

Four hours per week throughout the year distnbuted as follows

1) Grammar and syntax Apphcat10n of basic morpholog1cal and syntactic structures a1m1ng at developing the students competence 1n spoken and written Greek Exercises 1n the classroom, homework, laboratory assignments, and regular tests

2) Conversation Improving the students' hsten1ng comprehens1on and prof1c1ency in commun1cahon through d1scuss1on of cultural topics with the aid of audto visual material

3) Reading and wrztzng skills Analysmg the structure of simple passages and writing simple compos1ttons in Greek Regular translations from Greek into Enghsli and vice versa will assist further in developing writing techniques

Sectzon B MODERN GREEK CULTURE (20%)

One hour per week throughout the year Series of lectures focusing on Modern Greek culture with emphasis given to social llfe popular culture, history, contemporary hterature and art in their European context

Set books

Section A E!.Aryv1Kd Twpa 1 + 1 (plus two tapes),

(Aµµo<) Hardy, D A Greek language and people (plus

two tapes) (BBC, 1983) Papademetre, L A Modern Greek graded

reader (D1sc1phne of Modern Greek)

Addit10nal material to be supphed by the D1sc1pllne

Section B Clagg R A short history of Modern Greece

(Cambridge U P , 1986) Woodhouse, CM Modern Greece a short

history (Faber)

Reference books

Section A Apxl(w ra E!.!.ryviKd (Umversity Studto Press) H r>.waaa TW// lthwµar£aµw// Kat TW//

EK<f>pd arnv (Unzversity Studto Press)

324

19210 MODERN GREEK II Advanced course Professor D Dzmzroulzs

Umts 12 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 19110 Modern Greek I Advanced course

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (50%) Three hours per week 1) Compositzon One hour per week 2) Dzscusszon One hour per week 3) Translatzon One hour per week

Section B MODERN GREEK PROSE AND

POETRY (50%)

Two hours per week throughout the year

Set books Sectzon A Tszamkas M Ka!.irr<pa EMryv<Ka B (Disctphne

of Modem Greek) Papademetre, L A Modern Greek graded

reader (Disc1plme of Modern Greek) Ticp£aa6rcpa EAAryvtKa (Un1vers1ty Studio

Press 1982)

Add1t10nal material to be supplied by the D1sc1phne

Sectzon B D1mirouhs1 D, ed Anthology of Modem Greek

poetry B ' (Disciphne of Modem Greek) 8EOTOICT)S K H T£µT] Kat ro Xprjµa (KEL µcva

1984) (plus T Marketaki's film) ti.ovKas h H larop(a cvo5' Aixµa>.Wrov

(KE' 8 po< 1982) (plus N Koundouros' film) Ka(avr(ClK!lS' N AM<rys- ZopJlrras- (EA. Ka(avr(OKTl

1964) (plus M Cacoyianms' film)

19220 MODERN GREEK II B Beginners course Dr L Papademetre

Umts 12 Level Second year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre reqmsite Agrade of C or betterm 19120 Modern Greek IB Beginners course

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (60%)

Three hours per week throughout the year

1) Grammar Review 2) Conversation 3) Compositzon

Sectzon B LITERATURE (40%)

Two hours per week throughout the year The Literature component of 19110 Modern Greek I

Set books Section A EJJ.qviKa Twpa 2+2(Aµµos) Tuamkas, M 1 ed E¢apµoaµE VT/ I'paµµaTlKrj

Applied Grammar (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

Papademetre, L A Modem Greek graded reader (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

Sect10n B D1m1rouhs, D, ed An anthology of Modern

Greek poetry A' (D1sc1plme of Modem Greek)

Ts1amkas, M ed An anthology of Modern Greek short stones ( Disc1plme of Modem Greek)

Pohl!es, L History of Modern Greek literature (Clarendon, 1975)

19310 MODERN GREEK III Advanced course Members of Modern Greek Staff

Umts 12 Level Thlrd year Dural!on Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre reqmsrte Agrade of C or better m 19210 Modern Greek II Advanced course

Sectzon A LANGUAGE (50%) Three hours per week throughout the year

1) Written Greek 2) Spoken Greek 3) Translatzon

Sectzon B MODERN GREEK PROSE AND POETRY (50%)

Two one hour lectures per week throughout the year

Modern Greek

Set books Sectzon A Material to be supphed by the D1sc1phne

Sectzon B D1m!fouhs, D , ed Anthology of Modern

Greek poetry B' (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

XaTC~s !; To Arn.\6 BiiJ.\lo (Kacnavlul nj s 1985)

Ta)(Tails' K To Tplro °bT€<f>a.VL (KaaTavLwTT\S

1986)

19320 MODERN GREEK III B Beginners course Dr L Papademetre

Umts 12 Level Thrrd year Dural!on Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or better m 19220 Modern Greek IIB Beginners course

Sect10n A LANGUAGE (60%) Three hours per week throughout the year 1) Discussion 2) Compositzon 3) Translation

Sectzon B LITERATURE (40%) Two hours per week throughout the year The Literature component of 19210 Modern Greek II

Set books Sectzon A Ts1an1kas, M, ed KaAvrcpa £),).TJVLKd A -

Better Greek A' (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

Papademetre, L A Modern Greek graded reader (D1sc1p!me of Modern Greek)

ll<p1aa6TEpa E.\.\ryvtKII (Uruvers1tyStudroPress 1987)

Sectzon B Drmlfouhs D , ed An anthology of Modern

Greek poetry A (D1sc1plme of Modern Greek)

0<oT6KTJs K H Tiµlj Kat TO Xpljµa (Kn µ<va, 1984) (plus T Marketakr's film)

KaCavTCdK~s N A.\t(rys- Zopµrrds- (E).. Ka(avT(dK~, 1964) (plus M Cacoyianms' film)

325

School of Humamtzes

Cognates

19211 CONTEMPORARY GREEK THEATRE Dr L Papademetre

Umts 6 Level Second and third year students Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite Conveners consent

This topic focuses on Modern Greek 'theatre of the absurd' and the process involved 1n adaptmg/ transfernng theatncal texts on stage Representative texts and performances on videos - IN ENGLISH will be analysed and comparisons will be drawn vis a vis the European 1trad1tion' of the theatre of the absurd'

Set books Bacopoulou Halls, A Modern Greek theater

roots and blossoms (D1ogems, 1982) Z1ogas, V The matchmakmg of Antigone

(L Papademetre ed ) (D1sc1phne of Modern Greek)

Esslm, M Theatie of the absurd, 2nd ed (Pengum, 1969)

19212 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK Professor D Dzmzroulzs

Umts 6 Level Second and third year m the School of Humanities any level for students 1n other Schools Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Convener's consent

This topic is designed to introduce students with little or hm1ted knowledge of any type of Greek, to the Greek of the New Testament writers It aims to enable students to cope with the simpler of those wnters, St Mark

Set books Wenham, J W The elements of New

Testament Greek (Cambndge UP, 1967) St Mark's Gospel (any ed1l!on)

326

19213 MIGRATION THE GREE({ EXPERIENCE Dr M Tszanzkas

Umts 6 Level Second and thud year m the School of Human1t1es, any level for students 1n other Schools Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite Conveners consent

An exam1nat1on of the cultural 1mphcat1ons of m1grat1on, for both Greece and Australia with particular emphasis on trad1honal culture and literature relevant to the topic

Set books BtwµanK€;; A</>ryyryuEL;; (textbook to be

supphed by the D1sc1plme) l{apard1s, A Greeks in Australia (River Seine

Press 1988) Greek voices zn Australia, I{anarak1s, G ed

(AN U Press, 1987)

Addztzonal matenal supphed by the D1sc1plme

19214 THE POETICS OF C P CAV AFY Professor D Dzmzroulls

Umts 6 Level Second and thud year m the School of Humanities, any level for students 1n other Schools Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqt.1s1te Convener's consent

A systematic exam1nat1on of Cavafy s poetics 1n the context of European Modernism His poems will be analysed by applymg some notions of contemporary literary theory

Set books Keeley, E Cavafy's Alexandrza Study of a

myth m progress (Harvard UP, 1986) (H Ka{3a¢>mj A!«fdv8p€ta Eft!.lfry €Vo;; Mueou) (1 <apos 1979)

Bien, PK II f(a[3a¢>u;; IK€ 8po;;, 1985) Cavafy, C P Ilo< ry µam volumes A & B

(I <apos 1985) (also m English translatzon)

19215 HISTORY AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE Dr L Papademetre

Umts 6 Level Second and thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Convener's consent

A systematic exam1nat1on of the d1achron1c development of Greek (pre classical/ classical/ post class1cal), ko1ne medieval katharevousa, demottke Systematic analysis of the language's structure as it 1s manrlested in its contemporary 'standardized form

Set books Mnaµ'ITLVLWTl)S' r bvvoTTTLKrf Iarop{a TT/S'

E!.A~VLK~S' fAwacmS' (E p µ ~ < 1986)

TIETpouvtaS' E N€o€ Ai\.TJVLKrf I'paµµartKT/ (University Stud10 Press 1985)

Browning, R Medzeval and Modern Greek (Cambndge U P 1983)

L::uµewvl81)S' X IOTopla TTJ5" E)).ryvtKr}S' I'Ji.nnaas (Kuptad8~< 1983)

19216 REFLECTIONS AND VOICES ON THE CYPRIOT CULTURAL TRADITION Dr M Tszanzkas

Umts 6 Level Second and thud year m the School of Humanities any level for students 1n other Schools Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Convener's consent

Introduct10n to the history and cultural hentage of Cyprus images, texts and music of artists and writers who express the umqueness of the island through theu art

Set books :EE<f>lpT)S' r Hµ€po>.6yio KaTaCJTpwµaTOS' r

(I KapO<, 1980)

Addit10nal matenal supplied by the disciplme

Legal Studies

Ma7or Topics zn Legal Studies

Plannmg Co ordmator Dr MF Meehan

The discipline offers the ma1or sequence

Units

21110 Introduct10n to Legal Studies 12 Legal Studies II 12 Legal Studies III 12

Legal Studies at Fltnders 1s a new programme 1nvolv1ng a wide range of areas of study from the School of Humanities and Social Sciences, co ordinated from the Legal Studies d1sc1phne m the School of Humaml!es Legal Studies II and Legal Studies III will each be made up of two six umt topics Although further topics will be available from the Legal Studies disciplme m 1992 and 1993, the topics listed below (to be available 1n most instances, for Graduate Diploma students m 1991) offer a partial tnd1cat1on of the range from which the selection may be made in future years Prehm1nary details of these topics may be obtained by reference via the Index of topics to the respective d1sc1phne topic lists and a Legal Studies brochure will be available from the office of the School of Humanities m November with full details of all Legal Studies topics to be available m 1991

21110 INTRODUCTION TO LEGAL STUDIES Planning Co ordinator Dr MF Meehan

Umts 12 Level First year Dural!on Full year Class Contact Two lectures and one tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None Co requisite None

This topic will provide an introduction to the Austrahan legal system, to legal reasoning, interpretative skills and research methods The aim of the topic 1s to provide students with a basis both for practical legal mqmry and for cnt1cal analysis of the law and the legal system, drawmg on methodologies developed m a range of fields in the Humanities and Social Sciences

327

School of Humanities

Text book Morns Cook, Creyke and Geddes Laying

down the law the foundatwns of legal reasonzng1 research and writing zn Australia and New Zealand (Butteiworths, 1988)

Reference books Derham, D P , Maher, F K H and Waller L

An zntroductzon to the law (Law Book Co , 1986)

Goodrich P Reading the Law (Macmdlan, 1985)

Naf!me, N Law and the sexes (Allen & Unwm, 1990)

We1sbrot, D Australian lawyers (Longman Cheshrre, 1990)

Second and Third Year Topics m Legal Studies

The follow1ng hst is meant as an 1nd1catlon only of the vanety of topics to be available to Legal Studies students m therr second and thrrd year Most but not all of these topics will be available to Graduate Diploma students in 1991

21211 New Legal Studies Topic #1 6 21212 New Legal Studies Topic #2 6 21213 Language, Literature and the Law

(English) 6 21314 The Wnter and the Law (English) 6 21411 Supemsed Research Topic 6 21412 (39215) Federahsm m Austraha

(History) 6 21413 (38314) Socwlogy of Deviance

(Socwlogy) 6 21414 (38521) Cnmmology (Soczology) 6 21415 (38326) Socwlogy of Law

(Soczology) 6 21416 Psychology and the Law

(Psychology) 6 21417 Legal Aspects of Mult1culturahsm

(Multicultural Studies) 6 21418 (14242) Freedom Law and Society

(Philosophy) 6 21419 (14249) Legal Reasonmg

(Philosophy) 6 21420 (35215) Austrahan Government and

Pubhc Pohcy (Pol1t1cs) 6 21520 (14248) Philosophy of Law

(Philosophy) 6 21521 (14246) Medical Ethics 6

328

Australian Studies Programme

Chatrman and Co ordinator for Humanities Mr A I Patience Co ordinator for Social Sciences Mr A Patience Programme Adviser Ms L Hardcastle

There 1s a wide range of topics in a variety of D1sc1phnes 1n the Un1vers1ty focused on the study of Austraha Austrahan Studies 1s an 1nterd1sc1phnary programme available to students 1n the Schools of Humanities and Social Sciences It can be taken as a second ma1or sequence of topics in either School provided that the student 1s enrolled to complete another ma1or 1n a basic D1sciphne in his or her respective School It may not be offered as the sole ma7or zn a degree zn either School

This ma1or sequence bnngs those topics together in a coherent whole and encourages the development of perspectives of enquiry relevant to more than one D1sc1p1Ine Students must plan the pattern of topics m the maior with one of the Co ordinators Alternatively students may enrol in these topics as cognates or electives, whatever thelr degree, subject to fulfillmg the relevant pre reqms1te m any spec1f1c case Taking into account the high Austrahan content in some multi d1sc1phnary topics students are advised to consider enrolling in

39208 Urbamsatwn 39212 Public Dec1swn Makmg 39215 Federahsm m Austraha 39218 Agemg

Before enrolhng 1n a ma1or tn Austrahan Studies students should check therr proposed programme carefully with the Austrahan Studies Co ordmator m the School m which they are enrolled

Prospective ma1ors 1n Australian Studies are advised that 1t 1s possible that usual pre requ1s1tes spec1f1ed for topics hsted in Groups A B, and C may be waived for those students taking the courses as part of an Australian Studies ma1or This must be confirmed with the lecturer(s) m charge of the top1c(s) and with the relevant School Co ordmator

Ma7or sequence

A ma1or sequence in Australian Studies consists of topics chosen from the follow1ng groups of firSt second and third year topics, full details of which may be found under the topic numbers listed 1n brackets

Fzrst year

12 umts selected from one of the followmg topics (10110) English I (13110) Drama I (14110) Phtlosophy I (16110) Visual Arts

and Archaeology I (30110) Economics I (30130) Economics IA

(32110) Geography I

(33120) History lB (33140) History ID (33160) History IF (33170) History IG (35110) Politics I (37110) Asian Studies I (381IO) Soc1ology I

Second and thzrd years

24 umts chosen from the followmg three groups of sub1ects m whtch at least six umts must be chosen from each group No more than six units may be chosen from the D1sc1phne making up the student's first ma1or sequence

Group A Umts

22201 (18207) Australian Prose and Poetry m the Nmeteenth Century 6 (Not offered m 1991)

22202 (16231) Australian Art 1788c1900 6 (Not offered m 1991)

22203 (16232) Australian Art c 1900 to the present day (Ms L Dauth) (Semester) 6

22204 (18208) Australian Prose and Poetry m the Twenl!eth Century (Dr BE Matthews) (Semester) 6

22213 (16226) Australian Archaeology A Chronological Survey (Dr FD Pate) (Semester) 6

22231 (13231) Australian Drama Part I Origins and Influences (Dr G R Worby) (Semester)

22234 (21213) Language, Literature and the Law Australian Contexts (Dr MF Meehan)

6

(Semester) 6

Australian Studies Programme

22235 (18270) Australian Studies Humanities

Group B

(All Humamtzes Australian Studzes Staff) (Semester) 6

23203 (41201) Women m Contemporary Australian Society (Dr L Ryan and Dr S Sherzdan) (Semester) 6

23205 (33204) Twentieth Century Australia (Dr A R G Grzffzths) 6 (Not offered m 1991)

23206 (33224) Coloma! Australia 1856 1914 (Dr B Dzckey) 6

23207 (35321) Party Party System and Society in Australia (Dr DH /aensch) (Semester) 6

23208 (38321) Australian Society (Mr A I Patzerzce) 6 (Not offered m 1991)

23216 (32216) Austrahan Environmental Patterns (Mr K Bardsley) (Semester) 6

23217 (32217) Water Resources and Australian Society (Mr K Bardsley) (Semester) 6

23301 (31301) Australian Economic Development (Economzc Hzstory Staff) (Semester) 6

24201 (53780) Youth m Australia (Dr J Kapferer) 6 (May not be offered m 1991)

24208 (53228) Educat10n and Society m Australta an h1stoncal analysis (Dr D Grundy) (Semester) 6

Group C

22206 (14243) Apphed Philosophy (Issues for Australians) (Mr R Allen) (Full year) 6

22209 (18209) The Mass Media m Australia (Mr A S Bear) (Semester) 6

22214 (16227) Australian Archaeology Problems m Archaeological Theory and Method (Dr FD Pate) (Semester) 6

329

School of Humamtzes

22232 (13232) Austrahan Drama - Part II Alternatives (Mr G H Anderson) (Semester) 6

23211 (35215) Austrahan Government and Pubhc Pabey (Dr A W Parkin and Mr f Summers) (Semester) 6

23212 (41202) (33229) Gender m Austrahan History (Dr L Ryan) (Semester) 6 (Not avarlable m 1991)

23218 (32218) Australian Cities as Human Environments (Dr CA Forster) (Semester) 6

23303 (35304) International Politics Australian Foreign Pohcy (Dr JD E Plant) (Semester) 6

23305 (33325) Australian Rehg10us History (Dr D L Hzllzard) (Semester) 6 (Not offered m 1991)

23306 (33329) Australian Welfare History (Dr B Dickey) 6

23307 (35327) 'Race' and Austrahan Pohtzcs (Mr f Summers) (Semester) 6

23308 (35328) Politics of the Australian States (Dr D H Jaensch) (Semester) 6 (Not offered m 1991)

23309 (32311) Australian Resource Management (Dr R L Heathcote Mr K Bardsley and Mr AS Fraser) (Semester) 6

23312 (41302) Fem1n1sm and Cultural Studies (Dr S Sherzdan) (Semester) 6

24202 (53781) Growing up 1n Australia (Dr f Kapferer) 6 (Not offered m 1991)

24203 (53785) H!Story of Australian Education Twentteth Century Issues (Dr BK Hyame) (Semester) 6

330

Seminars

In addition, students in their third year of the sequence may be 1nv1ted to a short series of seminars 1n which the vanety of approaches to the study of Austraha will be discussed and common themes examined

Honours The Australian Studies sequence 1s only available 1n the ordinary degree However, there are Honours topics on Austrahan subjects in a variety of Disc1phnes See appropnate sections of the Calendar

Other Cognates available m the School of Humamtzes

34301 LITERATURE AND SOCIETY IN AMERICA Dr L M Bazrd

Umts 6 Level Second or th1rd year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te None, but students will not normally be admitted to thIS cognate until they have completed 36 umts towards theu degree

NOTE This cognate also constitutes topic 34301 m Amencan Studies

The following sections have been chosen to illustrate some of the ma1or concerns of American hterature The emphasis 1s chiefly, but not entirely, on twentieth century develop ments An optional segment of film is also included to suggest continuity of theme tn film and fict10n Students are expected to select suggested themes for study from the sections below

Romanticism and Realism Bellow, S MrSammler'splanet (Pengum) Hawthorne N The scarlet letter (Pengum) Hemmgway, E The snows of K1l1man1aro

(Pengum) Roth, P The ghost wrzter (Pengum) Twam M The adventures of Huckleberry

Fznn (Pengum) Wharton, E The age of innocence

(Pengum)

II Symbolism Elhson R Invisible man (Modem Library) Faulkner, W Light zn August (Pengum) Oates, J C Unholy loves (Dent) O'Connor F Everythzng that rises must

converge (Pengum) Vonnegut, K Mother Night (Avon)

III Social History Through Film (Opt10nal Extra) (This hst 1s sub1ect to the avallab1hty of the films) Altman, R d1r A wedding Ivory J dtr The Europeans J(azan, E d1r A streetcar named deszre Rouleau, R d1r The cruczble Silver,] d1r Hester Street

18202 NORTH AMERICAN THEMES Dr L M Baird

Units 6 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None, but students will not normally be admitted to this cognate until they have completed 36 units towards their degree

American poets and novehsts are chosen from the nineteenth and twentieth centuries to represent the development of a d1st1nct1ve Amencan voice in language structure and meaning The novel section includes three contemporary Canadian works, with the 1ntentlon of comparing themes and structures between the ltteratures of Canada and the U S In addition, the course 1s concerned with the role of women writers and with images of women m f1ct10n shaped by both male and female wnters

POETICS

Set book Moore, G , ed The Penguin book of

American verse, rev ed (Penguin)

II THE NOVEL

Set books Alther, L Kmflicks (Pengum) Atwood, M Lady oracle (Virago) Davies, R The rebel angels (Pengum) Hawthorne, N The house of the seven

gables (Pengum)

Cognates zn Humanzties

James H The Bostonians (Penguin) Munro A The beggar maid (Pengum) West, N The day of the locust (Pengum)

18207 AUSTRALIAN PROSE AND POETRY IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY

Not offered m 1991

18208 AUSTRALIAN PROSE 1N THE TWENTIETH CENTURY

Dr BE Matthews

18209 (22209) THE MASS MEDIA IN AUSTRALIA Mr AS Bear

Umts 6 Level Second or thtrd year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

A study of the mass media with particular emphasis on broadcasting and the press 1n Austraha Aspects of the history, pohtzcs and soc1ology of the mass media including analyses of news, media ownership and recent developments tn media pohcy

Reference books Armstrong M Broadcastzng law and policy

m Australia (Butterworth, 1982) Barr, T The electronic estate (Pengum, 1985) Moya!, A Clear across Australia (Nelson

1984) Wmdschuttle A The media (Pengum 1984)

18220 COMMUNICATION STUDIES Mr AS Bear

Not offered m 1991

18270 (22235) AUSTRALIAN STUDIES HUMANmES School co ordinator and all Humanztzes Australian Studies staff

Units 6 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 1 one hour lecture and 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te None

331

School of Humanities

This topic will mtroduce students to the Australian Studies debate and establish a soc10 cultural and phdosoph1cal context for further spec1ahst d1scuss1ons of Australian culture as examined in hterature1 frlm theatre1

y1sual arts archaeology and the media

Text books

Committee to revtew Austrahan studies 10

educat10n, J Walter ed Windows onto worlds (AG PS , 1987)

Australian Studies - a survey (Oxford UP, 1989)

Reference books

Fiske, J , Hodge, B and Turner, G Myths of Oz (Allen & Unwm, 1987)

Flood, J Archaeology of the dreamtime, rev ed (Collms, 1989)

Gelder, K and Salzman, P The new diversity (McPhee Gribble, 1989)

McFarlane, B Words and images (Hememann 1983)

Seal G The hidden culture folklore m Australian society (Oxford UP 1989)

Stretton H Capitalism socialism and the envzronment (Cambridge U P , 1976)

Turner G Natzonal fictzons (Allen & Unwm, 1986)

White R Inventing Australia (Allen & Unwm, 1987)

Further reading/Recommended readzng

Seminar d1scuss1on w1ll 1nclude reference to Capra, F The turning poznt sczence1 society

and the rzszng culture (Fontana, 1983)

Balod1s, J Too young for ghosts (Currency, 1985)

GrenVllle, K. Joan makes history (Queensland up 1989)

Hewett, D The man from Mukmupzn (Currency 1983)

Stow, R Tourmaline (Pengmn)

The followmg TV series and films are also recommended The Dismissal, Mad Max II, Malcolm, Scales of Justice and Women of the Sun

332

18280 BACKGROUNDS OF CONTEMPORARY CIVIUSATION Dr L E Johnson

Umts 6 Level Second year Durat10n Full year Class Contact One hour lecture plus one hour tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic undertakes an exploration of some of the ma1or ideas which serve as the background of contemporary c1v1hsahon These ideas spnng from literature, philosophy, and the arts1 and from the natural and social sciences they are not to be bound w1th1n the scope of a single academic d1sc1phne The topic endeavours to explore these ideas an 1n inter d1sc1phnary manner relating them to one another m their h1stoncal context and m the context of our contemporary awareness

Reference books Bacon, F The new organon (Macrrullan, 1960) Chadwick, 0 The reformatzon (Pengum,

1990) DalWln, C The orzgin of species (Pengum,

1988) De La Crmx, F V Gardiner's art through the

ages (Harcourt, Brace, Javonov1ch) Eagleton T L1terary theory an zntroductzon

(Blacwell, 1983) Easlea, B Witch hunting, magzc and the new

philosophy (Harvester 1980) Freud S C1v1lizat1on and its discontents

(Hogarth Press, 1963) Goethe, J W von Faust, pt 1 and pt 2

(Pengum, 1969) Jones WT A history of western philosophy,

vols III and IV (Harcourt, Brace, )ovanov1ch 1969, 1976)

N1etzche, F The birth of tragedy (Anchor, 1988)

Oldroyd, D The arch of knowledge (NS W UP, 1986)

Passmore, J Man's responsbzlzty for nature, 2nd ed (Duckworth, 1980)

Solomon, R C Continental philosophy since 1750 (Oxford UP, 1988)

Whitfield, J H A short history of Italian literature (Sydney UP, 1981)

IndlVldual lecturers will recommend readmgs from the library's holdmgs to be placed at the

reserve desk in the library There will be a shorter list for tutorial purposes and a longer hst for those who intend to write on a particular sub1ect matter

21213 (22234) LANGUAGE, LITERATURE AND THE LAW AUSTRALIAN CONTEXTS DrM F Meehan

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 two hour tutorial per week Pre requisites None, except that students will not normally be admitted to this cognate until they have completed 36 units towards their degree

This topic, also available for Austrahan Studies introduces a wide range of texts developing hnks between literature and the law, as a foundation for a more detailed analysis of legal themes in Australtan hterature D1scuss1on will be based on texts that broach central 1ur1sprudental questions, but lectures will range beyond this in explorations of the nature of legal language, the parallels between hterature and legal theory, the idea of 'poetic 1ust1ce' and the 'poet as legislator, and the practical role of the law m shapmg hterary texts

In a series of special seminars attention will be given to literary representations of the convict system, to the hterary foundations of a vaunted Austrahan 'anti authonanan1sm' and to the quest10n of abongmes and the law

Set books general

The book of fob Dickens C Bleak House (Pengum) Dostoyevsky, F Crime and punishment

(Oxford) Gay, J The beggars opera (Pengum) Kafka, F The trial (Pengum) Shakespeare, W Measure for measure The

merchant of Venzce Sophocles, Antigone, m Theban plays

(Pengum)

Set books Australian

Clarke, M For the term of hzs natural lzfe (Angus & Robertson)

Keneally, T The chant of fzmmy Blacksmzth (Pengum)

Diploma zn Humanztzes

Spence CH Handfasted (Pengum) Stow R Tourmaline (Pengum) Tucker, j Ralph Rashlezgh (Angus &

Robertson) Weller, A The day of the dog (Pan)

Prelzmznary readzng Lloyd, D The idea of law (Pengum)

21314 THE WRITER AND THE LAW Dr MF Meehan

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 two hour tutorial per week Pre requisites None, except that students will not normally be admitted to this cognate until they have completed 36 umts towards their degree

This topic will mtroduce students to the current state of law with regard to freedom of speech w1th1n a wider context of recent social debate on the sub1ect Practical cons1derat10n of the law of defamation, censorship, sedition, contempt of court and copynght will be conducted w1th1n a survey of the relations between law and wnhng both 1n contemporary society and 1n an h1stoncal review

Text book Walker, S The law of1ournalzsm znAustralza

(Law Book, 1989)

Reference books Golvan, G and McDonald M Wnters and the

Law (Law Book 1986) Armstrong, M Blakeney, M and

Watterson, R Medza law zn Australia 2nd ed (Oxford UP, 1988)

Diploma m Humanities

The Diploma in Humanities is offered to graduates or those with an approved equ1 valent qualification, who wish to complete an addthonal year of study 1n the Humanities

The Diploma provides an opportunity for students with quahfications in the Humanities to update or extend their quahficat10ns The course may also be of interest to those who seek retra1n1ng in a spec1f1c field and In some cases to those with particular vocational needs

333

' School of Humanztzes

The Diploma is not regarded as an equivalent quahf1cation to the Honours degree but is intended io provide an alternative for students who either do not wish to enrol in Honours or are not qualtf1ed to do so The Diploma can quahfy students wholly or partly for enrolment in Master's degrees if performance is at a sufficiently high standard

The programme of studies, which includes a thesis component and coursework may be taken in any one of, or a comb1natlon of the followmg fields m the Humamlles

Enghsh French Spamsh, Drama Philosophy, Itahan and Visual Arts and Archaeology

Some topics 1n Austrahan Studies may also be offered towards the Diploma

With special perm1ss1on, topics offered by other Schools may be mcluded m the Diploma programme

The course extends over one year of full time study and up to three years of part lime study The entry requirements for the Diploma are set out m Statute 7 1 Schedule 26 The Diploma in Human1t1es

Further 1nformatlon on 1nd1v1dual topics or Diploma programme requirement« may be obtamed from the Director of Studies of the d1sciphne(s) concerned or from the Associate Dean of the School, D1 J F Harwood

Diploma zn Humanities Programme

Sub1ect to the terms of Statute 7 1, Schedule 26 The Diploma m Humamlles, students may select topics for the Diploma programme in 1991 from the followmg list

Englzsh

Third year level topics -10310 Enghsh III 10311 English Cognate C 10312 Enghsh Cognate D

Honours topics -

Units

12 6

6

See index for honours topics to be offered in 1991 The Enghsh III and Honours Brochure is available from the English offtce

Thesis topic -10443 Special Topic m Enghsh by ThestS 9

334

French

The following Honours topics will be avallable in 1991 as part of a 36 unit course 1n Advanced Language Proficiency -11901 Supplementary half topic m

French Language 4 5 11941 Advanced Oral Proficiency m

French 4 5 11942 Advanced Writmg Skills m

French 4 5

Students w1shmg to take a full lime Diploma programme in French in 1991 should consult with the D1sc1phne See index for other honours topics

Spanzsh

Third year level topics -12216 Modern Lahn Amencan Novel 6 12218 Lalin American Studies A 6

12219 Lalin American Studies B 6

12222 Language, Society & Culture m Spam & Lalin America 6

12310 Spamsh III 12

12316 Third Year Special Cognate m Spamsh 6

12317 Composition in Spanish 6

12318 Contemporary Spamsh Poetry 6 12319 Contemporary Latin American 6

State and Civil Society 7

12340 Third Year Special Cognate m Spamsh 12

Honours topics -See index for honours topics to be offered in 1991

Thesis topic -12424 Diploma Topic m Spamsh

by Thesis 9

Drama

Third year level topics -13260 Production and Performance

Techniques I 13300 Drama IIID Modern Theatre 13310 Drama III Cmema Studies II 13340 Production and Performance

Techniques II*

* Drama Centre topics for which an aud1t10n 1s reqmred

12 12

12

12

Honours topics -See index for honours topics to be offered m 1991

Thesis topic -13468 Diploma Topic m Drama by Thesis 9

Philosophy

Third year level topics -14201 EpIStemology and the Philosophy

of Science 6 14203 Moral Philosophy 6 14219 Special Topic m Philosophy 6 14231 Environmental Ethics 6 14236 Ancient Philosophy 6 14239 Cnt1cal Thmkmg 6 14241 Mmd and Knowledge 6 14242 Freedom, Law & Society 6 14243 Apphed Philosophy (Issues

for Australians) 6 14244 Marxism Ph1losoph1cal Issues 6 14245 Aesthetics 6 14246 Medical Ethics Phdosph1cal Issues 6 14247 B10 medical Ethics 6

Honours topics -The Disc1phne offers Honours topics in most areas of Philosophy mcludmg Epistemology Moral and Social Philosophy Philosophy of Science, Marxism, and the History of Philosophy See index for honours topics to be offered m 1991

Thesis topic -14436 Diploma Topic m Philosophy by

Thesis

Italzan

Third year level topics -

9

15320 Third Year Cognate m ltahan 12 15321 Third Year Half cognate m ltahan 6 15351 ltahan Language III or 15353

ltahan Language IIIB 6 15352 Society and Literature m Italy III 6 15233 Studies m ltahan Language and

Linguistics 6

NOTE A combination of the following options w1th1n the ltahan Society and Literature in Italy III basic course may be extended mto a third year cognate or half cognate in ltahan provided that this work has not already been included 1n the student s basic course

Dzploma zn Humanities

Dante Pirandello The narrative of ltalo Calvino, Italian and Itahans In Australia

Honours topics -A selection of the Honours topics covering Itahan language, Dialectology, Dante, Leopardi, Manzon1 Twentieth Century Itahan Narrative will be offered in 1991 See index for further information

Thesis topic -15428 Dissertation 1n Italian Literature,

Philology, D1alectology or Language 9

Vzsual Arts and Archaeology

Third year level topics -16203 European Art 1830 1914 6 16206 19th Century Architecture 6 16218 Archaeology 6 16221 The Museum 6 16224 Studies m Western Art smce 1900 6 16226 Austrahan Archaeology II 6 16232 Austrahan Art c 1900 to the

present day 6 16237 Early Celtic Art and Archaeology 6 16240 Aesthetics 6

Honours topics -See index for honours topics to be offered m 1991

Thesis topic -16418 Diploma Topic m Visual Arts and

Archaeology by TheSIS 9

Other Humanities Topics

Third year level topics -18202 North Amencan Themes 18209 The Mass Media m Austraha

6 6

34301 Literature and Society m Amenca 6

Thesis topic -18413 Diploma Topic by Thesis 9

NOTE Many of the topics hsted above, when taken towards an undergraduate degree have certain pre requ1s1tes Students w1sh1ng to enrol In such topics for the Diploma 1n Humamt1es will normally be reqmred to satisfy such pre requ1s1tes or have completed work deemed to be equivalent

Full descnp!Ions of all the third year level and honours topics may be found elsewhere In the Calendar see index

335

School of Humanities

Graduate Diploma m Legal Studies

The Graduate Diploma m Legal Studies 1s offered to graduates or those with an approved degree or equivalent quahf1cat1on, and offers an elementary tra1n1ng 1n practical legal skills and research methods together with a wide 1nterd1sc1phnary range of courses focusing upon the nature of law and function of law in society

All students undertakmg the Diploma m Legal Studies must complete the 12 unit core sub1ect (21110 Introduct10n to Legal Studies) and an add1t1onal 24 units chosen from the follow1ng

Umts 21211 New Legal Studies Topic #1 6 21212 New Legal Studies Topic #2 6 21213 Language, Literature and the Law 6 21314 The Writer and the Law 6 21411 Supervised Research Topic 6 21412 (39215) Federahsm m Austraha 6 21413 (38314) Soc10logy of Deviance 6 21414 (38521) Cnmmology 6 21415 (38326) Soc10logy of Law 6 21416 PsycholojlY and the Law 6 21417 Legal Aspects of Mul!Iculturahsm 6 21418 (14242) Freedom, Law and Society 6 21419 (14249) Legal Reasonmg 6 21420 (35215) Austrahan Government and

Pubhc Pabey 6 21520 (14248) Philosophy of Law 6 21521 (14246) Medical Ethics 6

Most but not all of these topics will be available m 1991 Students may choose to undertake a Supervised Research Topic (21411) With the approval of the Director of Studies Further topics will become available with the appomtment of staff to the new d1Sc1plme

The course extends over one year of full time study and up to three years of part !Ime study Further details on the course and its entry requirements are set out in Statute 7 1 Schedule 36 The Graduate Diploma m Legal Studies Further tnformatton is to be obtained from the Plannmg Co ordmator of Legal Studies, Dr M F Meehan

Graduate Diploma m Archaeology

Adm1ss1on to the programme requires a Bachelor's degree with a ma1or in Archaeology or a related d1sc1plme For those students

336

wishing to proceed to advanced graduate studies the Diploma provides a quahficatlon equivalent to that of an Honours degree

All students undertakmg the Diploma m Archaeology must complete the 6 unit core topic (16451 Archaeological Theory and Method) and an add1bonal 18 umts chosen from the followmg

Group A sub1ects at least two topics

UmverSity of Adelaide topics

9460 Roman Art and Architecture IV 6738 Later Roman Art and Architecture IV 4 732 Archaic Greek Art and

Architecture IV 3070 Classical Greek Art and

Architecture IV

Fhnders Un1vers1ty topics

16218 Introduct10n to Archaeology 16221 The Museum 16226 Austrahan Archaeology I 16227 Austrahan Archaeology II 16237 Celtic Art and Archaeology

Group B sub1ects at least one topic

Umvers1ty of Adelaide topic

2220 Bmldmg Surveys

Flinders University topic

16450 Archaeological Science

In addition to the 24 units of coursework, a 6000 word research paper of 12 unit value ts required

The course extends over one year of full time study or up to three years of part !Ime study Further details on the course and its entry reqmrements are set out m Statute 7 1 Schedule 35 The Graduate Diploma m Archaeology Further information can also be obtained from Dr Donald Pate D1Sc1plme of Visual Arts and Archaeology, Fhnders Un1vers1ty

Honours Programmes zn the School of Humanities

Students who have completed the ordmary degree of Bachelor of Arts with a grade of B or better in the third year of a Humanities ma1or sequence may proceed to the Honours degree m the d1Sc1plme(s) concerned 36 umts at Honours level are required for the completion

of the degree which reqmres one year of full time studies but may also be completed through part l!me study

Some D1sc1phnes in the School of Humanities also offer a two year Honours programme Students taking a two year programme may eni;ol after completing 72 units of the ordinary degree, 1nclud1ng 24 units 1n each of two ma1or sequences, provided that they have obtained a grade of B or better 1n the second year of the ma1or sequence m the disc1plme(s) concerned 72 units at Honours level are reqmred for the complet10n of a two year programme Part time study is also available

Honours topics 1n the School of Human1t1es are either 9 or 4 5 units

Honours programmes may be completed w1th1n a single D1sc1phne Joint Honours programmes 1n which topics from two or more D1sc1phnes are combined may also be undertaken Honours topics from other Schools may form part of a 101nt Honours programme

Students should consult the appropriate Disc1plme(s) regardmg entry and other requirements (Some Honours programmes for example, require a compulsory thesis and there may be special pre requ1s1tes or co requ1s1tes for 1nd1v1dual topics )

The followmg Honours topics will be available m the School of Humaml!es m 1991 Please read the introductory statements provided by 1nd1v1dual Disciplines, which outhne any special requirements which may apply The ava1lab1hty of some topics may be sub1ect to a spec1f1ed m1n1mum enrolment

Honours Programme m English Convener Professor E D LeM1re

The Disc1plme of Enghsh offers a programme of Honours topics for students who have completed an Enghsh Ma1or sequence and achieved a grade of B or better m Enghsh III Students intending to complete Honours 1n Enghsh should also consider domg some Enghsh Cognates alongside their Ma1or at second and/or third year level, but this 1s not a requirement for entry to the Honours programme

All students domg a full (1 e 36 umts)

Honours Programme in Humanztzes

programme of Honours in English are required to write a thesis (10,000 12 000 words) under the superv1s1on of a member of the English staff A hst of general areas for thesis topics with appropriate supervisors will be given 1n a brochure available m the Enghsh Office from November There will be further details of Honours Topics given 1n this brochure, which students are strongly advised to consult before malnng their choice

In add1t10n to their work for the thesis and other topics, Enghsh Honours students are required to attend a weekly Honours seminar, and to contribute papers usually related to their work towards the thesis A seminar programme (to which staff are also expected to contribute) will be arranged early 1n the academic year

The ava!lab1hty of Honours topics may be sub1ect to a m1n1mum enrolment To reduce the consequent uncerta1nhes, prospective Honours students are asked to attend a meeting with staff 1n December of the year before beg1nn1ng their programme, so that we know which topics are hkely to be viable

English Honours Topics

10443 HONOURS TOPICS IN ENGLISH BY THESIS Professor ED LeMzre

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Duration Full year Class Contact Averaging 1 hour per week Pre requisite Entry to Honours

Other Topzcs

Students select 6 from the followmg

The followmg topics all count 4 5 umts, class contact 1s 2 hours per week, level, fourth year prerequ1s1te entry to Honours

First semester 10902 Medieval Literature (Mr H Tranter)

10907 W B Yeats (Dr f Harwood) 10909 The Hero m American F1ct10n

(Dr L Bazrd)

10911 New Literatures m Enghsh Indian (Dr S Harrex)

337

School of Humanztzes

Second semester 10901 Old Enghsh (Dr G Tulloch)

10904, Milton (Mrs F Hughes)

10905 The Enghsh Novel in the Nineteenth Century (Professor ED LeMzre)

10910 Austrahan Literature (Dr L Jacobs)

10912 New Lzteratures in Enghsh Caribbean (Dr S Harrex)

Honours Topics in French

The D1sc1phne of French offers a range of Honours topics for students w1sh1ng to complete an Honours degree wholly or partly 1n French Ehg1b1hty to enrol in these topics 1s restricted to students who have quahfted for the ordinary B A and who have achieved Honours standing in French z e Stream 1 or 2 students with a grade of B or better in 11350 French Stage II or Stream 3 students with a grade of B or better m 11310 French Stage III With the permiss10n of the Head ofDisciphne, students with Honours standing 1n another D1sc1phne may be accepted into a hm1ted number of French topics, subject to the specific requirements laid down for Honours French study, vzz that

a) Stream 3 students takmg only 4 5 units of Honours French must take either 11941 Advanced Oral Prof1c1ency in French or 11942 Advanced Wnting Skills in French

b) Stream 3 students taking 9 or more units of Honours French must take both 11941 Advanced Oral Prof1c1ency in French and 11942 Advanced Wnhng Slnlls in French

c) Stream 1 or 2 students takmg only 4 5 units of Honours French must take 11901 Supplementary Half topic in French language

d) Stream 1 or 2 students taking only 9 units of Honours French must take Ii) 11901 Supplementary Half topic in

French language, and (n) ezther 11941 Advanced Oral Pro

flClency m French or 11942 Advanced Wnhng Skills in French

e) Stream 1or2 students takmg 13 5 or more units of Honours French must take all three topics hsted under (d) above

f) All students takmg 36 units of Honours French must mclude 11402 Thesis m French

338

Members of the French staff also offer a number of Honours topics outside the formal French Honours programme these are listed below, and are not counted as French topics for the purposes of reqmrements (a) to (f) above

11901 SUPPLEMENTARY HALF TOPIC IN FRENCH LANGUAGE Professor I S Laurze

Umts 4 5 Level Fourth year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing in French Not available to Stream 3 students Co reqmsites See rules (a) to (f) above

The syllabus and other details are as for 11310 French Stage III Sect10ns A and B

11402 THESIS IN FRENCH Dr T G Fennell

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Durat10n Full year Class Contact By arrangement Pre requ1s1te Honours standing 1n French Co reqmsites See rules (a) to (f) above

In consultation with the appropnate members of staff, students will select a research topic which may be 1n an area complementary to their other French top cs but not overlapping with them The theszs will be between 10,000 and 15,000 words In length, and IS to be wntten in French Assessment will be based on both content and expression and will include a viva 1n French

11411/11911 HISTORICAL FRENCH LINGUISTICS Dr T G Fennell

Umts 9 (11411) 4 5 (11911) Level Fourth year Durat10n Full year (11411) First semester (11911) Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing in French A working knowledge of Lalln will be assumed Co reqmsites See rules (a) to (f) above

In the first semester, the topic will cover the rna1or phonological processes involved in the evolution of Lahn to modern French and the

pr1nc1pal morphological changes occurnng dunng this evolution In the second semester, Old and Middle French syntax will be studied through selected early texts

Set books There are no set books For the second semester, a select10n of old texts wtll be arranged

Reference books Fouche P Phonetique historzque du

franqazs, 3 vols (Klmcks1eck 1952 69) Fouche, P Morphologie historzque du

franqais (Klmcks1eck, 1981)

11941 ADV AN CED ORAL PROFICIENCY IN FRENCH Professor I S Laurie

Umts 4 5 Level Fourth year Duration Full year Class Contact 1 hour per week Pre requisite Honours standing in French Co reqmSites See rules (a) to (I) above

The topic aims to develop advanced skdls m oral discourse Course content includes exposition interview technique, argument, persuasion, debate, ha1son interpreting and gesture

Set book Adamson R et al En fin de compte

(Hodder & Stoughton 1988)

Reference books Sorez, H Prendre la parole (Hatler, 1976) V1gner, G Parler et convazncre (Outds,

Hachette, 1979) V1gner G Savo1r vzvre en France (Ouhls

Hachette 1978)

11942 ADVANCED WRITING SKILLS IN FRENCH Dr EA Close, Dr T G Fennell and Professor I S Laurze

Umts 4 5 Level Fourth year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 hour per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing in French Co reqms1tes See rules (a) to (I) above

The topic aims to increase students' awareness of the different wntten styles of modern French, and to improve their own writing

Honours Programme zn Humanities

skills m the language The topic IS d1v1ded into three areas weighted as 1nd1cated

1) L'evolutwn actuelle du fran9azs (50%) Students learn to wnte contemporary French of vanous styles and for vanous purposes

2) L'evolutzon de la prose fran~azse

classzque (25%) A study of the maior styles of hterary prose from the 17th century to the present day

3) Introductzon to prose composztwn (25%) An advanced course in translation from Enghsh to French

Set book Adamson, R et al En fzn de compte

(Hodder & Stoughton, 1988)

Reference book V1gner, G Ecrzre et convazncre (Out1ls Hachette 1975)

11446/11946 SELECTED FRENCH AUTHOR Professor I S Laurie, Mr DA Askew and Dr EA Close

Umts 9 (11446) 4 5 (11946) Level Fourth year Durat10n 11446, full year, 11946, by arrangement Class Contact 11446, 2 hours per week 11946, by arrangement Pre requ1s1te Honours standing in French Co reqms1tes See rules (a) to (I) above

A detailed study of a smgle French author, or of two compatible authors, chosen 1n accordance with the student's preferences and the special mterests of avadable staff French 1s the language of all wntten work

11447/11947 SELECTED FRENCH GENRE Professor IS Laurie

Umts 9 (11447), 4 5 (11947) Level Fourth year Durat10n 11447 full year, 11947, by arrangement Class Contact 11447, 3 hours per week 1194 7, by arrangement Pre requ1s1te Honours standing in French Co reqms1tes See rules (a) to (I) above

Genre idenWicatlon and associated issues Code breakmg, parody and therr relatJonslup to mode and style The subiect set for specral study m 1991 will be genre in the French cinema

339

School of Humanities

Preliminary reading Dubrow H Genre (Methuen 1982) Fowler A Kinds of lzterature an zntro

ductzon to the theory of genres and modes (Oxford UP 1982)

11448/11948 SELECTED PERIOD IN FRENCH LITERATURE Professor IS Laurie, Mr DA Askew and Dr EA Close

Umts 9 (11448), 4 5 (11948) Level Fourth year Duratzon 11448 full year, 11948 by arrangement Class Contact 11448 2 hours per week l 1948, by arrangement Pre requ1s1te Honours standing 1n French Co reqmsites See rules (a) to (f) above

A detailed study of a smgle period of French ltterature chosen in accordance with the student s preferences and the special interests of available staff French is the language of all wntten work

11449/11949 ADVANCED FRENCH READING PROGRAMME All members of French staff

Umts 9 (11449), 4 5 (11949) Level Fourth year Duratzon 11449, full year, 11949, by arrangement Class Contact Pre requ1s1te Co requ1s1tes

By arrangement Honours standing tn French See rules (a) to (f) above

Subiect to the availability of appropriate superv1s1on this topic offers students with a well defined interest in an aspect of French studies not otherwise catered for 1n the Honours programme the opportunity to pursue that interest through an extensive programme of guided reading, monitored by regular assignments and reports

Other topics offered by staff of the French D1sc1plme

11415 RUMANIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Dr EA Close

Not offered m 1991

340

11416/11916 READING PROGRAMME IN LINGUISTICS Dr T G Fennell

Umts 9 (11416) 4 5(11916) Level Fourth year Durat10n 11416, full year 11916, by arrangement Class Contact By arrangement Pre requisite 11418 General linguistics or consent of instructor

Sub1ect to the availability of appropriate superv1s1on, this topic offers students with a well defined interest 1n an aspect ofhngu1stics not otherwise catered for, the opportunity to pursue that interest through an extensive programme of gmded readmg monitored by regular assignments and reports

11418/11918 GENERAL LINGUISTICS Dr T G Fennell

Umts 9 (11418) 4 5 (11918) Level Fourth year Dural!on 11418 full year, 11918, first semester Class Contact Pre requ1s1te

2 hours per week Honours standing

In the first semester several theories of grammar will be examined, with emphasis on the transformational generative approach Data from a variety of languages will be analysed 1n practical classes In the second semester the theoretical framework will be expanded to examine a number of constructions tn English

Set books Chomsky, N Syntactzc structures (Mouton) Chomsky, N Aspects of the theory of syntax

(MIT)

11419/11919 LATVIAN AN INTRODUCTION Dr T G Fennell

Umts 9 (11419), 4 5 (11919) Level Fourth year Durat10n 11419 full year, 11919, by arrangement Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite 11290 Latvian Language and Culture or consent of instructor

The topic covers a number of areas central to Latvian grammar, and introduces students to

the old orthography and the early German attempts to codify the language The impos1hon of foreign norms will be exanuned

Set books Fennell, T G and Geisen, H A grammar of

modern Latvian, 3 vols (Mouton, 1980) Fennell T G and Hounslow K Patterns zn

Latvian morphology and syntax (Latviesu skolas padome, 1981)

Reference books A hst of references covering early German work will be made available at the beginning of the year

11421/11921 OCCITANIAN LITERATURE IN THE MIDDLE AGES Professor IS Laurie

Umts 9 (11421), 4 5 (11921) Level Fourth year Duratton 11421, full year 11921, first semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing in a Romance language or in Latin

A study of the poetry of the troubadours in the 12th and 13th centuries

Preliminary reading Curtms, E R European literature and the

Latzn Middle Ages (Routledge & Kegan Paul)

Reference books Hamlm, FR et al Introductzon a l etude de

l'ancien proven9al, 2nd ed (Droz, 1985)

11423/11923 ADVANCED READING PROGRAMME IN RUMANIAN Dr EA Close

Not offered m 1991

11425/11925 LATVIAN LINGUISTICS Dr T G Fennell

Umts 9 (11425), 4 5 (11925) Level Fourth year Durat10n 11425, full year, 11925 by arrangement Class Contact 11425, 2 hours per week, 11925, by arrangement Pre reqmsite 11290 Latvian Language and Culture or consent of instructor

Honours Programme in Hunzanztzes

The topic concentrates on the work of modern grammanans in estabhsh1ng the norms of today's standard written Latvian Consider atton ts gtven both to work in Latvia and to the work of em1gres, and the vahd1ty of conflicting claims will be examined

Reference books A hst of references covering the period of standardisation and subsequent developments will be made available at the beg1nn1ng of the year

Honours Topics zn Spanish

The D1sc1plme of Spamsh offers Honours topics In Language and Literature to students who have fulfilled the reqmrements for entry to Honours In the School of Humanities with Spanish as a ma1or sequence

An Honours topic 1n Contemporary Lahn America is not restricted to students ma1oring m Spamsh but is ava1!able to students with Honours standing In any other D1sc1phne or School

The aim of the Honours programme is to offer students the opportumty to pursue Language Culture and Literature programmes at an advanced level The topic 1n Contemporary Latin America 1s intended to provide students with a knowledge of issues concerned with State, ClVll Society and Pohllcs

Students who intend to pursue an Honours programme wholly m Spamsh or 1omtly with other D1sc1phnes are required to contact the Director of Studies pnor to enrolment to discuss their proposed Honours programme

The following topics are offered m 1991

12401 SPANISH LANGUAGE Members of Spanish staff

Umts 9 Durallon Full year Class Contact To be determined

The topic is designed to develop further skills in translating Grammar studied 1n con1unct10n with this topic will include a review of ma1or morphological and syntactic patterns

341

School of Hunzanztzes

12402 ESSAY IN SPANISH Members of Spanzsh staff

Umts 9 Duration Full year Class Contact To be determmed

The topic encourages students to develop advanced compos1t1on skills in Spanish through extensive practice in descriptive narrative and expository essay writing Emphasis will be on content1 organisation and style

12410 SPECIAL TOPIC IN SPANISH BY DISSERfATION Members of Spanzsh staff

Umts 9 Level Honours Duratrnn Full year Class Contact As required Pre requ1s1te Entry to Honours

The aim of the topic 1s to provide the opportumty for students to develop research skrlls 1n an area of ex1st1ng knowledge either in Spanish or Lahn Amencan Literature A dissertation of no more than 10,000 words will be required

Prospective students will be required also to submit a proposed topic to the Head of D1sc1phne After approval has been given a supervisor will be assigned with whom the student will work

12421 MODERN LATIN AMERICAN NOVEL Dr E Gomez-Soto

Umts 9 Duratton Full year Class Contact To be determmed

A study of tendencies and d1rectlons rn contemporary Lahn American f1ct1on Parl!cular reference will be made of the development of narrative techniques and style in the contemporary Latin Amencan novel

342

12426 CONTEMPORARY LATIN AMERICA STATE, CIVIL SOCIETY AND POLITICS Dr M f Scuirah

Umts 9 Level Honours Dural!on Full year Class Contact 1 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing 12218 Latin Amencan Studies A An Introduction to Lahn Amenca and/or 12219 Lahn Amencan Studies B Contemporary Lahn America or consent from the Convener

The topic 1s designed to permit advanced students to analyse 1n some detail Lahn Amencan pohtlcal and social systems and actors Topics covered will include, amongst others the histoncal development of the Lal!n Amencan State, the relations between the state and c1VIl society competing 2deolog1es, political actors such as the military, church, pohhcal parties, trade unions and other pressure groups peasant and urban popular movements1 the bureaucracy, government pohcy makmg, etc

Preliminary reading Pendle, G A A history of Latm America

(Pengum, 1985) Skidmore, TE and Smith P H Modern Latm

Amenca, 2nd ed (Oxford UP 1989) Wiarda H j and Kime, H F , eds Latm

Amerzcan polztzcs and development, 2nd ed (Westv1ew, 1985)

Wynia, G W The polztzcs of Latin Amerzcan development 3rd ed (Cambndge U P 1990)

There will be no set text as readings will be assigned according to the topic for each class session

Reference books Archeth, E P Cammack, P and Roberts, B ,

eds Sociology of developzng soc1etzes Latin Amerzca (Macmillan, 1987)

Diamond, L , Linz, ] and Ltpset, S M eds Democracy in developing countries Latzn America (Lynne Rlenner, 1989)

Eckstein S, ed Power and popular protest (Cahforma UP, 1989)

Hughes, SW and M11esk1, K j Politics and public policy in Latin America (Westview, 1984)

Petras J F et al Latin America bankers generals and the struggle for social 1ustice (Rowan & Littlefield, 1986)

Sloan j W Public policy m Latin America a comparative survey (Pittsburg U P 1984)

12427 SPANISH LITERATURE Members of Spanish Staff

Umts 9 Duration Full year Class Contact to be determined

This topic is designed to enable students to pursue their studies in Spanish literature at an Honours level A particular penod of Spamsh literature or selected author/swill be studied according to the ava1lab11Ity of members of staff and students particular preferences

12428 SPANISH LINGUISTICS Members of Spanish Staff

Umts 9 Duration Full year Class Contact To be determined

This topic is designed for Honours students with an interest 1n hngu1stics Particular emphasis will be given to contrastive syntax and the analysis of sentence construction hngu1stic registers and styhst1c levels in contemporary Spanish

12429 SPECIAL TOPIC IN SPANISH LANGUAGE Umts 9 Duratwn Full year Class Contact 4 5 hours per week

This topic is 1dentJcal to 12370 Spamsh III Advanced

Set books As for Spamsh III Advanced

Reference books As for Spamsh III Advanced

Honours Topics m Drama

The Drama D1sc1phne offers an Honours programme of either 72 or 36 umts which may be selected from the following topics Students should consult the Director of Studies for further details

Honours Programme in Humanztzes

13401 COMEDY Mr G H Anderson

Units 9 Level Honours DuratJon Full year Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requisites Ehg1b1hty for Honours study

The theory and practice of comedy (mcludmg farce) 1n drama of theatre film, telev1s1on and radio are examined In seminars and practical workshops The content IS predominantly modern from Europe, Amenca and Australia It includes film'i videotapes and sound tapes References are made to Athenian and Roman comedy, Medieval farce the Commed1a Delr Arte and theones of humour and laughter

Reference book Howarth W D Comic drama the European

heritage (Methuen, 1978)

13426 AUSTRALIAN THEATRE Dr GR Worby

Not offered m 1991

13427 MODERN THEATRE Profesor M Morley and Mr MR Bramwell

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Duration Full year Pre requ1s1te Class Contact 4 hours per week

This topic will concentrate on developments 1n theatre and production styles from the mid nineteenth century to the present day Studies of ind1v1dual Bnttsh, Amencan Russian and European directors and playwnghts will also be included

Reading list Bentley ER The theory of the modern stage

(Pelican, 1989) Braun E The director and the stage

(Methuen, 1982) Brook P The empty space (Pelican 1984) Brecht, B Mother Courage (Methuen, 1980) Chekhov A The seagull (Methuen 1984) Gogol, N V The government inspector

(Methuen 1985) Jones DR Great directors at work

(California U P 1986)

343

School of Humanities

Shakespeare W A midsummer nzght s dream (Signet)

Stanislavsky K S An actor prepares (Methuen, 1986)

Weiss, P Marat/Sade (Manon Boyars, 1986) Wllhams T A streetcar named desire

(Pengum, 1982)

13432 SHAiffiSPEARE Mr NFC Purdon

Umts 9 Level Third or fourth year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requ1S1tes 13210, 13220, 13270, 13280 13310, 13320, 13390 or by consultat10n with the Convener

The topic concentrates on the problems involved 1n interpreting the language of Shakespeare s texts with reference to the h1stor1cal, poetic and dramatic context 1n which they were written It is not presented as a spec1f1c tra1n1ng in acting and d1rechng but as an aid to the acqu1s1hon of verbal and VISual skills which the mtelhgent actor or director will find necessary in performance Plays for 1ntens1ve study are selected each year from current Shakespearean productions in Adelaide, and from available film and video records Students are required both to present 2nd1v1dual research and to engage in group workshops in the second semester

Prelzmznary reading W1ckam, G Early English stages vols I & II

(Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1963 72)

Set book Shakespeare, Complete works, either 1n

Alexanders edition or separate New Arden editions

Reference books Baldwm T W Shakespeare's small Latme

and Iese Greeke (Ilhn01s 1944) Blake, N F Shakespeare s language

(Macmillan 1983) Bradbrook, M Shakespeare the poet m his

world (Methuen 1978) Purdon, N The words of Mercury (Umv of

Salzburg, 1974) Righter, A Shakespeare and the idea of the

play (Chatto & Wmdus, 1964)

344

Smith, G R A classified Shakespeare biblwgraphy (Pennsylvania State U P 1963)

(See under 13934 Special Half Topic m Drama)

13434 SPECIAL TOPIC IN DRAMA All members of Drama staff

Umts 9 Level Third or fourth year Dmat10n Full year Class Contact Vanable

This 1s the equivalent of an Honours topic by thesis It offers Drama Centre students an opportunity to investigate advanced techniques in drama analysis and production both by research and practical work It also allows other students to continue work 1n an Honours topic (e g Fem1n1sm, Brecht Film Shakespeare) which they have already studied at third year level W1thm this topic at thIS level they are expected to complete work of a more or1g1nal and creative nature

Ind1v1dual reading programmes are assigned to students according to their special projects

13435 PERFORMANCE A Dr f M Holledge and Professor M Morley

Umts 9 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact 12 hours per week with additional rehearsal and performance times Pre requ1S1te 13260 Product10n and Performance Techniques I

Script analysis, acting technique group 1mprov1sahon rehearsal methods, movement and s1ng1ng, etc Investigation of performance styles, periods, spaces, in theatre and other media

Reference books Braun, E The dzrector and the stage

(Methuen, 1982) Brecht, B The Messmgkauf dialogues

(Methuen, 1977) Esslm, M The field of drama (Methuen, 1987) ltzm C Stages m the revolutwn (Methuen,

1981)

13436 PERFORMANCE B Dr f M Ho/ledge and Mr M Fuller

Umts 9 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact Rehearsal and performance time as scheduled Pre requ1S1te 13260 Product10n and Performance Techniques 1

Involvement 1n prescribed Drama Centre productions and direction exercises in all media normally one ma1or department production, one ma1or student production and two d1rect1on exercises

13437 PERFORMANCE C Dr JM Ho/ledge and Mr M Fuller

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Duratrnn Full year Class Contact 12 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes 13435 Performance A and 13436 Performance B

Research and preparation of scripts for production some of this material may be devised (see She'll be Rwt and Under Southern Eyes) some will entail text character/background analysis of con temporary as well as classical plays Skills classes in voice, movement and rehearsal/ production procedures

Reference books Boal A Theater of the oppressed (Pluto,

1979) Clements, P The improvised play the work

of Mike Leigh (Methuen, 1983) Coult, T and Kershaw, 0 Engineers of the

imaginatwn - the welfare state handbook (Methuen, 1983)

Richie, R The 7oint stock book - the making of a theatre collective (Methuen, 1987)

13438 PERFORMANCE D Dr f M Ho/ledge and Professor M Morley

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Duration Full year Class Contact Rehearsal and performance time as scheduled Pre-reqmsites 13435 Performance A, 13436 Performance B

Honours Programme zn Humanities

Realisation of group devised production (see 13437 Performance C) or presentatrnn of scripted plays Involvement m directmg exercises and in some cases solo performance

13439 THEATRE DIRECTION (3rd Year) Dr f M Holledge

Umts 9 Level Third year Duratrnn Full year Class Contact 4 hours Rehearsal time as scheduled Pre requ1S1te 13260 Product10n and Performance Techniques I or lecturer's approval

Involvement m 13435 Performance A and 13436 Performance B classes, selection of texts and execution of direction exercises attachment to Drama Centre productions Preparation and presentation of a production of a one-act play

Reference books Braun, E The director and the stage

(Methuen, 1982) Brecht, B The Messmgkauf dialogues

(Methuen, 1977) Elam, K The semwtics of theatre and drama

(Methuen, 1980) Keyssar, H Feminist theatre (Macmillan,

1984)

13451 PROJECT IN TELEVISION PRODUCTION (4th Year) Mr G H Anderson

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duratrnn Full year Class Contact By appomtment Pre reqmsite 13458 Directmg for Film and Telev1s1on

NOTE The Umversity is the copyright owner of all films and televmon productrnns made with its facilities

This topic proVIdes an opportumty for selected students of smtable craft skills to examme a sub1ect and a form to make 1) TeleVlSIOn productrnn of thirty mmutes

durat10n by use of multtple camera facilities The scnpt for this productton may be written by the director or another person but may not have been broadcast

345

School of Humamtzes

or produced previously Students are required to 101n crews for telev1s1on product10ns directed by staff and other students They are also required to attend classes with third year students

2) One (1) paper of 3,000 words (approx) to provide a context for the production 1s required

13457 WRITING FOR FILM AND TELEVISION (3rd Year) Mr G H Anderson

Umts 9 Level Third year Honours Duration 'Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week first semester, appointments, second semester

The rram ob1ecllve is the development of cr1ttcal awareness of the problems of writing film and teleVIston drama Minor ob1ect1ves are the development of execullve skill m this craft, w1lhngness to examine the writing of others, wilhngness to present writing for group d1scuss1on and discernment of the focus wntmg may take withm these media

The content 1s mainly descnptJ.ons of the forms used, the pracllces followed of examples of writing in scnpt and produced forms

13458 DIRECTING FOR FILM AND TELEVISION (3rd Year) Mr G H Anderson

Umts 9 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact 14 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Conveners approval

The main ob1ect1ves are the development of craft skill in and analytical awareness of t11e poss1b1hlles and responstb1hties of the director of drama productions in those media The minor ob1echves are skill 1n at least one production craft add1t1onal to d1rectton1

part1c1pat1on 1n pre planning and post product10n and knowledge of the hm1tat10ns and poss1b1ht1es of equipment 16mm cine eqmpment and interlock mull!ple video cameras to VHS recorders are used Students are required to 101n the crews for student and staff production

346

13461 PROJECf IN THEATRE DIRECTION Dr JM Holledge

Umt' 9 Level Fourth year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 4 hours plus research and ref'earsal/producbon time per week Pre reqmSite 13439 Theatre D1rect10n (3rd year)

Each student will be reqmred to direct one ma1or production and will assist staff and v1s1hng directors in other Drama Centre productions Theories of d1rect1ng and directmg problems will be dtscussed weekly

Reference books Artaud A The theatre and zts double (Calder

& Boyars, 1970) Barthes, R S/Z (Hill & Wang 1974) Braun, E Meyerhold on theatre (Methuen

1969) Eco, U The role of the reader (Hutchinson,

1983) Grotowsk1 1 J Towards a poor theat1e

(Methuen, 1969) Piscator, E The pol1tzcal theatre ed

H Rornson (Methuen, 1980)

13464 SPECIAL PROJECT IN FICTION, FILM DIRECTION Mr G H Anderson

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration Full year Class Contact By appointment Pre reqmstte 13458 Directing for F1lrr and Television

Tins topic oroVldes an opportumty for selected students of smtable craft slnlls to examme a sub1ect and a form to make one 16mm ftct10n film production of fifteen minutes duration using synchronised sound cine fac1httes Drama Centre performers must be used

The scnpt for thts product10n may be wntten by the director or another person but may not have been produced previously

Students are required to 101n crews for film producllons directed by staff and other students One paper of 3,000 words (approx) to provide a context for the production 1s required Costs are borne by students

13465 SPECIAL GENRE IN FILM Mr N F C Purdon

Not offered m 1991

(See under 13934 Special Half Toprc m Drama)

13466 19th CENTURY DRAMA DEVELOPMENT OF MUSIC THEATRE Professor M Morley

Umts 9 Level Thud and fourth year Honours Duratron Full year Class Contact 4 hours Pre requ1s1tes Normal entry into Honours

This toprc wrll look at selected examples of works rangmg from opera to the Broadway musical Works to be discussed wrll mclude Verdi Wagner, Pucc1n1, Berg, Weill, Stravinsky, Britten, Kern Rodgers and Hammeste1n1 Laesser and Sondheim The course will consider hbrett1 ong1nal dramas, recordings and videos of the works to be studied

A book !rst rs avarlable from the Drama office

13903 NATIONAL CINEMA STUDIES Mr G H Anderson

Umts 4 5 Level Honours Duration First semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes Cinema Studies or Austrahan Cinema

The mam ob1ectrve of !hrs topic rs the development of a cntical analytic awareness of the relat10nsh1p between !rims for the cinema and cultural context The content may be either Austrahan or another nation's cinema the alternate national selected will generally be that under cons1derat10n m Cmema Studies although m except10nal circumstances other cinema may be accepted by the Conveners

Prelzmznary readzng See also reading hsts for Cinema Studies

Reference books Bertrand, I Government and film zn

Australia (AF I, 1981) Dermody, S and Jacka, E Anatomy of a film

industry (Currency, 1987)

Honours Programme zn Humanities

Schou, K Policies for the Australian film industry (AFTS, 1982)

Schou, K The structure and operatzon of the film industry m Australia (AFTS, 1982)

Tulloch ) Australian cinema (Allen & Unwm, 1982)

13904 THE TELEVISION SERIES Mr G H Anderson

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Honours Duration First semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requisites None

Examination of television series as drstmgmshed from senals wrth particular reference to Australtan productions Attention will be directed to the contextual c1rcum stances of law, broadcasting pohcy and audience research Particular consideration wrll be grven to the differences (and therr results) eVIdent m Brrtam US A andAustraha

Reference books Armstrong, M Broadcasting law and policy

m Australia (Butterworth, 1982) Barr, T The electronic estate (Pengum, 1985) Hall, S Supertoy 20 years of Australian

televmon m the eighties (Cassell, 1981) Moran, A Images and industry (Currency,

1985)

13905 DRAMA AND FEMINISM Dr I M Holledge

Not offered m 1991

13934 SPECIAL HALF TOPIC IN DRAMA(l) All Members of Drama staff

Umts 4 5 Level Thrrd or fourth year Duration Semester Class Contact Vanable

Thrs topic offers an opportumty for Drama Centre students to investigate advanced techniques in drama analysis and production, both by research and practical work It also allows other students to continue work 1n an Honours topic (e g Brecht, Fem1n1sm1 Film, Shakespeare) which they have already studied at thud year level The general nature of this

347

School of Humamtzes

topic is the same as that of 13434, but the pro1ect undertaken, and the work involved 1s the equivalent of exactly half of the special topic

IndtVIdual reading programmes are assigned to students according to their special pro1ects

13935 SPECIAL HALF TOPIC IN DRAMA(2) All Members of Drama staff

Umts 4 5 Level Third or fourth year Duration Semester Class Contact Variable

This topic offers an opportumty for Drama Centre students to investigate advanced techniques in drama analysis and production both by research and pracllcal work

Ind1v1dual reading programmes are assigned to students according to their special pro1ects

13936 SPECIAL HALF TOPIC IN DRAMA(3) All Members of Drama staff

Umts 4 5 Level Third or fourth year Duration Semester Class Contact Variable

(See 13934 Special Half Topic in Drama)

Ind1v1dual reading programmes are assigned to students according to their special pro1ects

13906 AUSTRALASIAN, SOUTH EAST ASIAN AND SOUTH PACIFIC DRAMA DrGR Worby

Umts 4 5 Level Third or fourth year honours Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 two hour senunar1 1 one hour screenings Pre requ1s1te Entry into honours

Invesllgat10n of the influence of Asian, S E Asian and S Pacific performance styles on Australian theatre Examinat10n of the ways in which Australian theatre practitioners are

348

attempting to come to terms with the performing arts of neighbouring cultures -tradit10nal, popular and hybrid

Text books Blair R Last day zn Wooloomooloo

(Currency, 1985) Beier, U Voices of independents (Queensland

up 1980) Beier U Black wrztmg from New Guznea

(Queensland U P , 1973) Kolm, J Hrstorzcal plays (Inslltute of P NG

Studies 1978) O'Sullivan, V Shunken (Victoria UP, 1984) Pulvers, R Yamashita (Currency, 1981) Nowra1 L The preczous woman (Currency1

1981) Nowra, L Sunrzse (Currency, 1983) Radie, T Madame Mao (Currency, 1986) Raun Raun Theatre Nrugim, Niugini (Dept of

Ed , P N G , 1985) Rendra, W S The struggle of the Naga Tnbe

(Queensland U P , 1979) Shearer j Shimada (Currency, 1989)

Reference books Japanese Nat10nal Committee for llnesco

Theatre in Japan (Tokyo Mimstry of Finance, 1963)

The Noh Drama (Tuttle, 1955) Ernst, E The Kabuki theatre (Hawau U P ,

1974) Hsu, Tao Chmg The Chinese conceptwn of

the theatre (Washmgton UP, 1985) Mackerras, C The Chinese theatre in modern

times (Thames & Hudson 1975) Keene, D Bunraku (Kodansha, 1965) Powell, K The first Papua New Guinea

playwnghts (Papua New Gumea U P, 1978) Raz, J Audience and actors a study of their

interaction in the Japanese traditwnal theatre (Bnll, 1983)

R1mer1 T , Towards a modern Japanese theatre (Prmceton ll P, 1974)

Zurbuchen, M S The shadow theatre of Bali (Um Microfilms mtemallonal, 1981)

Preliminary reading Pacific Island Monthly

Further reading To be advised in class See also Bikmaus and G1g1bori

13469 COMMUNITY THEATRE DrG R Worby

Umts 9 Level Third or fourth year (Honours) Duration Whole year Class Contact 2 two-hour seminars, practical pro1ect up to 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours entry or equivalent Lecturer's approval

Investtgat10n of the theory and practice of Community fheatre 1n Austraha, and South Austraha m particular The topic wdl focus on the democrattsat1on of art cultural democracy debate Lmks will be estabhshed with local community arts/theatre organt~ations with a view to pro1ect development

Text books Fothermgham R ed Community theatre in

Australia (Methuen, 1987) Kelly, 0 Community art and the state

(Comedia, 1984)

Reference books Parsons, P Shooting the pianist (Currency,

1987) Rowse T Arguing the arts (Pengum, 1985)

Preliminary reading The ecology of the arts (Austraha Council,

1979)

Recommended reading Papers of the Nat10nal Commumty Arts Conferences Australia Council, C APE R papers etc

Honours Topics m Philosophy

Convener Mr KH Sievers

Students who wish to proceed to the Honours degree m Philosophy are normally expected to have a ma1or sequence m Philosophy with a grade of B or better m two of their four second or third year topics

The Disciplme of Philosophy offers only a 36 unit programme which can be made up of any comb1nat1on of 9 unit topics Students enrollmg m each topic are normally expected to wnte a long essay (9,000 words) under the supervision of at least one member of staff Some topics also involve coursework and some do not Work for all topics is assessed by an external examiner

Honours Programme zn Humanztzes

There is no compulsory thesis m Philosophy but it 1s possible by arrangement to combine the wntten work for two topics m the form of a longer essay (approXImately 18,000 words) which would allow more 1ntens1ve research into a particular area It is also possible to do 1omt Honours m Philosophy and other disciplmes m the Umversity, sub1ect to the approval of both Disciplmes

Some information on the topics offered in 1991 is hsted below, but more detailed information about each topic is available from the Philosophy Disciplme office or through consultat10n with the staff member(s) offenng the topic

14401 EPISTEMOLOGY Mr S G O'Hazr and Dr G Couvalzs

Umts 9 Duration Second semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requisites Pass level course in Epistemology and/ or Phdosophy of Science or consent of Instructor

Advanced study of issues in Epistemology and Metaphysics based on the period from Descartes to Hume

14408 METAPHYSICS MrS G O'Hazr

Umts 9 Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisites Entry to Honours 1n Philosophy or consent of mstructor

A study of issues in metaphysics, focusing on topics m the philosophy of mmd

14415 MARXISM LENINISM Mr IE Hunt

Umts 9 Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 hour per fortmght Students will be expected to attend lectures m 14209 Manosm Leninism Pre requ1s1tes A satisfactory standard in 14209 Manosm Leninism and at least one other second or third year level topic 1n Philosophy, or an equivalent groundmg acceptable to the Convener

349

School of Humanztzes

An abstract study of the plulosophical and theoretical problems of Marxism Len1n1sm covering topics such as Marx's theory of lu.story, theory of class, pohhcal economy, Lenin's theory in State and Revolution

14424 HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY Mr K H Szevers and Dr G Couvalzs

Umts 9 Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 hour per fortmght Pre reqmsites 14216 Ancient and Medieval Philosophy or 14217 Modern Philosophy or 14229 History of Philosophy Recent and Contemporary or 14236 Ancient Philosophy or an acceptable equivalent

Advanced study of selected topics m the History of Philosophy

14426 SOCIAL PHILOSOPHY Mr Rf Allen

Umts 9 Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre-requ1s1te Entry to Honours in Philosophy or consent of lecturer

1) An exam1nahon of cr1ttcal and normative social theories - theories of social 1ushce political freedom, political obhgat10n alienation and ltberat1on An exam1natlon of the 1mphcahons of ethical theones for social theory and practice

2) An mvestigat10n of epistemological and methodological problems relatmg to the social sciences

14427 ORIENTAL PHILOSOPHY Dr L E fohnson

Umts 9 Duration Full year, or part, as arranged Class Contact To be arranged Pre requ1s1te Consent of instructor

Topic m Asian Philosophy to be determmed by staff student discuss10n Possible topics might, for example, include various aspects of the one many problem

350

14428 PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Mr IE Hunt, Mr K H Szevers and Dr G Couvalzs

Umts 9 Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 hour per fortmght Pre reqmsites 14237 Philosophy of Science or 14201 Epistemology and Philosophy of Science or an acceptable equivalent

An advanced study of the nature of sc1enhf1c practice Scientific ob1ectiv1ty, scientific rationality, inductlonism and fals1flcat1on1sm, paradigms and research programmes, positivism, hermeneutics and cntical theory and naturaltsm in the social sciences are some of the topics covered

14437 SPECIAL TOPIC ON SOCIOBIOLOGY AND HUMAN AFFAIRS Dr LE Johnson

Umts 9 Duration Full year or part, as arranged Class Contact To be arranged Pre requ1s1te Consent of instructor

Topics concernmg the philosophical implica­tions of soc1obiology, to be determined by staff student discussion Possible topics might, for example, concern moral significance of b10logical fact

14438 SPECIAL TOPIC ON ENVIRONMENTAL ETHICS Dr L E fohnson

Umts 9 Duration Full year or part, as arranged Class Contact To be arranged Pre requ1s1te Consent of instructor

Topic 1n Environmental Ethics to be deter mmed by staff student discuss10n Possible topics might, for example include the moral s1gn1f1cance of environmental wholes, the moral status of animals and other hv1ng organisms species, ecosystems, etc , or the morality of human act1V1ty m the context of environmental hm1tabons

The following topics are also open to students as areas for supervised research

Umts 14402 Philosophy of Language 9 14404 Advanced Logic 9

14409 Ph!losophy of Mmd 9 14411 Moral Philosophy 9 14413 Aesthetics 9 14416 Ph!losophy of History and

Social Science 9 14425 Ph!losophy of Mathematics 9 14429 Pohtics and Art 9 14431 Women's Studies 9 14435 Recent and Contemporary

Philosophy 9 14439 Philosophy of Law 9

Honours Topics m Italian

Students may take Honours m Jtahan as either a 72 umt (two year) programme, or as a 36 umt (one year) programme Honours at either level may be taken part time

The pre requ1s1te for adm1ss1on to the 72-unit programme 1s a grade of B or better m 15251 ltahan Language II or 15253 Italtan Language IIB and m 15252 Society and Literature m Italy II For adm1ss10n to the 36-umt programme, the pre requ1s1te is a grade of B or better m 15351 Itahan Language III or 15353 Jtahan Language IIIB or 15391 Jtahan Language IIIS or 15393 Itahan Language IllBS and m 15352 Society and Literature m Italy III or 15392 Society and Literature m Italy IIIS Students WIShmg to enrol m less than 36 umts of Itahan Honours may do so, provided that a B grade or better has been obtamed at ltahan III level m their chosen field (ltahan Language or Society and Literature m Italy) Adelaide Umvers1ty students who wish to enrol in the 72 unit Honours programme will be required to transfer their enrolment to Fhnders Un1vers1ty, those who have completed a pass degree at Adelaide Un1vers1ty and have the third year ltahan pre reqms1tes md1cated above may enrol m a 36-umt (one year) Honours programme 1n Italian at Fltnders Un1vers1ty

All students enrolled m a full 36 umt or 72 umt programme of Itahan will nonnally be expected to choose topics m the areas of both Itaban Language and Itaban Society and Literature, and to submit a d1ssertahon as the assessment requirement for one 9 unit topic Furthermore in 1991, Honours students

Honours Programme zn I-lu1nanztzes

embarking on a 36 unit programme must enrol m 15492 Itahan Language !VHF those begm n1ng a 72-unit programme must include In their enrolment 15491 ltahan Language IIIHF and 15931 Dante IIIHH

Prospective Honours students are expected to contact the ltahan Disciphne prtor to enrol ment in order to discuss their proposed Honours programme Entry to an Honours topic In Itahan IS not automatic students must have obtained the perm1ss1on of each topic convener or co-ordinator before enrollmg

Sub1ect to staff ava1lab1hty, the followmg Honours topics will be offered m 1991

15428 DISSERTATION IN ITALIAN LITERATURE, PHILOLOGY, DIALECTOLOGY OR LANGUAGE Indwzdual staff members

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Durat10n Normally full year Class Contact To be detennmed Pre requis1te See the introductory statement under Honours Topics in ltahan

The d1ssertat10n, of the length prescribed by the Supervisor (for a hterary topic this 1s usually approX!mately 8,000 words), 1s based on md1V1dual research supervised by a staff member, and 1s normally carried out in an area with which the student already has some general fam1hanty The dissertation should be typewritten and submitted m duphcate by the begmnmg of October Students should contact the D1sciphne for Information regarding sub1ect areas available for superv1S1on m 1991

15436 NINETJ:ENTH CENTURY ITALIAN NARRATIVE ALESSANDRO MANZONI MsMA Baker

Umts 9 Level Third or fourth year Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqws1te See the mtroductory statement under Honours Topics m Itahan

The topic will mclude the study of Manzom's novel I p1 omessz sposz and a selection from his prose and poetry

351

School of Humanities

Set books Manzon1, A Storza della Colonna lnfame, a

cura dr Lanfranco Carettr (Emaudr, 1973) Manzon1, A I promessz sposz, a cura d1

Lanfranco Carettr (Laterza, 1979)

Reference book Marchese, A Come sono fatti "I promessz

sposz' Guida narratolog1ca al romanzo (Mondadon, 1986)

15491 ITALIAN LANGUAGE IIIHF Dr G Bolognese, Professor GA A Comm and Mr DJ 0 Connor

Umts 9 Level Thrrd year Honours Duratron Full year Class Contact Lectures tutorials, aural oral sessions an average of 4 hours per week Pre reqmsrte See the mtroductory statement under Honours Topics in Itahan

The matenal for this topic rs the same as that for 15391 Itahan Language IllS (or, for ex-Begmners 15393 ltahan Language IIIBS)

Set books As for 15391 Itahan Language IIIS (or 15393 Itahan Language IIIBS)

Reference books As for 15391 Itahan Language IIIS (or 15393 Itahan Language IIIBS)

15492 ITALIAN LANGUAGE IVHF All members of Italian staff

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duratron Full year Pre requ1s1te See the introductory statement under Honours Topics in ltahan

Course details to be determined in consultatron with the D1sc1plme

15903 ITALIAN DIALECTOLOGY I Professor GA A Comm

Not offered m 1991

352

15904 ITALIAN DIALECTOLOGY II Professor G A A Comm

Umts 4 5 Level Fourth-year Honours Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week m the second semester Pre requ1s1te A B grade or better m 15351 Itahan Language III or 15353 ltahan Language IIIB or 15391 ltahan Language IIIS or 15393 Itahan Language IIIBS

The topic will examme the development of the sounds of the mam dialectal areas and the history of dralectologrcal studies m Italy from Dante's De vulgarz eloquentza to the present day Students will be reqmred to undertake an md1v1dual and mdependent phonologrcal survey of an Itahan dialect by freld work

Set book Material will be made available by the D1sc1phne

Reference books Bollettino della Carta dei Dialetti Italzam, I,

1966 Cortelazzo, M Avvzamento cntico allo studio

della dzalettologza ztalzana, vol I and III (Pacmr, 1969, 1972)

Devoto, G and Gracomelh, G I dzalettz delle regzom d'Italza (Sansom, 1972)

Tekavc1c, P Grammatica stonca dell'italzano, vol 3 (II Mulmo, 1972)

The appropnate volumes of Profllo dez dzalettz ztalzanz, a cura dt Manha Cortelazzo (Pac1m)

15905 TRADITIONAL POPULAR CULTURE IN ITALY Professor G A A Comm

Not offered m 1991

15928 HALF-TOPIC BY DISSERTATION IN ITALIAN LITERATURE, PHILOLOGY, DIALECTOLOGY OR LANGUAGE Indzvzdual staff members

Umts 4 5 Level Fourth year Honours Duratron Half or full year Class Contact To be determmed Pre requ1s1te See the introductory statement under Honours Topics in Itahan

For details see under 15428 Dissertation in ltahan Literature, Philology Dialectology or Language

15931 DANTE IIIHH Ms D Cavuoto

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Honours Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqms1te See the mtroductory statement under Honours Topics m Itahan

The topic will be devoted to a comprehensive study of Dante s Inferno and Vita nuova

Set books Ahgh1er1, Dante La dzvzna commedza, vol 1,

Inferno, a cura d1 N Sapegno (La Nuova Italia, 1987)

Ahgh1eri Dante Vzta nuova1 Rzme, a cura d1 F Ch1appelh (Murs1a 1987)

15932 DANTE IVHH Ms D Cavuoto

Umts 4 5 Level Fourth-year Honours Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te See the introductory statement under Honours Topics 1n Italian

The topic will be devoted to a comprehensive study of Dante s Purgatorzo

Set book Ahgh1er1, Dante La dzvzna commedza, vol 2,

Purgatorzo 1 a cura di U Bosco and G Reggrn (Firenze, Le Monmer, 1989)

15933 DANTE VHH Ms D Cavuoto

Umts 4 5 Level Fourth year Honours Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqms1te 15932 Dante IVHH

The topic will be devoted to a comprehensive study of Dante s Paradiso

Set book Ahgh1eri, Dante La dzvzna commedza, vol 3,

Paradzso1 a cura d1 U Bosco and G Reggio (Firenze, Le Monmer, 1989)

Honours Programme zn Humanztzes

15934 DANTE AS LITERARY CRmc Dr G Bolognese

Umts 4 5 Level Fourth year Honours Duration Second semester Class Contact 1 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te A B grade or better in a third year or Honours Dante Topic

A detailed study of excerpts from Dante's works which establish him as the first cnllc of Itahan hterature, mcludmg his own wntmgs

Set book Dante, Opere, a cura d1 F Ch1appelh (Mursia,

1974)

Reference books Literary crztzczsm of Dante Alighieri Edited

by S Haller (Nebraska UP, 1973)

A reading hst will be set 1n consultation with the Convener

15935 PETRARCHISM IN SIXTEENTH CENTURY EUROPE Dr G Bolognese

Not offered m 1991

15937 GIACOMO LEOPARDI Mr D f 0 Connor

Umts 4 5 Level Fourth year Honours Duratrnn Half or full year Class Contact 1 or 2 hours per week Pre-requ1s1te Entry to Honours and Convener's approval

A detailed study of Leopard1's Gantz, supplemented by excerpts from his prose wr1t1ngs

Set book Leopardi, G Gantz (Garzanll I grand1 hbn)

Reference books A reading hst will be set in consultation with the Convener

15938 MODERN ITALIAN POETRY Mr D f O'Connor

Not offered m 1991

353

School of Humanities

15939 ITALIAN AND ITALIANS IN AUSTRALIA Mr D f 0 Connor

Umts 4 5 Level Third or fourth year Honours Duratrnn Half or full year Class Contact 1 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes See the introductory statement under Honours Topics in ltahan

Not avadable to students who completed this optrnn m 1990 as part of 15392 Society and Literature m Italy IIIS or of cognate 15234

A study of Italians m Australia the history of Itahan m1grahon, the Itahan language in Austraha, and ltalo Austrahan poetry

Reference books As for 15352 Society and Literature m Italy III

15953 TWENTIETH CENTURY ITALIAN NARRATIVE MsM Baker

Umts 4 5 Level 3rd or 4th year Honours Duration One semester Class Contact An average of l'/2 hrs per week Pre reqmSite A credit m 15252 Society and Literature In Italy II, or its equivalent

The topic proposes selected works by one of the ma1or twentieth century Itahan writers as representative modern Itahan ftchon, and will include a further contrastive study of a novel (by the same or another Italian author) The course w1ll offer a study of narrative techniques seen w1th1n a hterary cultural context

Prelzmznary reading Calvino, I The literature machzne, transl

(Secker & Warburg, 1987)

Set books CalVIno I Le cztta znvzszbzlz, 2nd ed (E1naud1,

1972) Calvmo, I Le cosmzcomiche (Emaud1 1969) And one further novel by another twentieth century Italian author, to be chosen in consultation with the student

Reference books Calvino, I The literature machine, transl

(Secker & Warburg, 1987)

354

Camon, F Il mestzere dz scrzttore (GarzantI, 1973)

Cannon, J Italo Calvino, writer and crztzc (Longo 1981)

Luper1n1, R Il novecento, 2 vols (Loescher Ed1tore, 1981)

Segre, C Introductzon to the analysis of the literary text, Transl (Indiana U P , 1988)

(Further b1bhograph1cal material will be advISed)

Honours Topics zn Visual Arts and Archaeology

The D1Sc1plme of Visual Arts and Archaeology offers a 36 unit Honours programme in advanced practice and theory 1n the visual arts Visual Arts and Archaeology Honours contmue the pattern of the VISual Arts and Archaeology maior for the Ordmary Degree m which students are offered a wide variety of topics The aim of a broadly based knowledge of the VISual Arts and Archaeology and the related d1Sc1plmes of Architectural HIStory and Museology IS modified at Honours level only by an emphasis on scholarship, especially with a view to subsequent postgraduate study

All VISual Arts and Archaeology Honours topics will be based on a series of seminars leadmg to a long essay (about 10 000 words) incorporating the results obtained in the course of research into history theory, practice or adm1n1stratlon

NOTE Students w1sh1ng to enrol in the topics named below should consult the Director of Studies about their chosen area and the structure of their Honours degree before the end of their third year VISual Arts and Archaeology studies, or at the very latest durmg Enrolment Week 1991

16431 SPECIAL GENRE IN THE VISUAL ARTS Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre requisites B or better 1n two topics of thud year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requisites To be determined in each case

This topic allows detailed examination of an area not already covered in one of the other designated Honours topics

Readmg hsts will be made available when the scope of each individual pro1ect has been determmed m consultat10n with the staff member who will supervise 1t

16432 MUSEUM STUDIES A Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes B or better in two topics of third year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requisites To be determined 1n each case

This topic is centred on an advanced study of a number of selected themes It is designed to enable students to undertake an or1g1nal 1nvest1gat1on and to compare several methodologies employed m the d1sc1phne of Museum Studies

Readmg hsts will be made available when the scope of each individual pro1ect has been determined in consultation with the staff member who wtll supervise it

16433 ART THEORY Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre requisites B or better in two topics of third year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requisites To be determined 1n each case

This topic 1s centred on an advanced study of a number of selected themes It is designed to enable students to undertake an original investigation and compare several method olog1es employed m the d1sc1plme of Art Theory

Readmg hsts will be made available when the

Honours Programme zn Humanitzes

scope of each 1ndiv1dual pro1ect has been determmed m consultat10n with the staff member who will supervise it

16434 HISTORY OF ART A Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre requrs1tes B or better m two topics of third year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requisites To be determined in each case

Thts topic IS centred on an advanced study of a number of selected themes It is designed to enable students to undertake an or1g1nal 1nvest1gat1on and to compare several methodologies employed 1n the d1sc1phne of History of Art

Readmg hsts will be made available when the scope of each md1v1dual project has been determmed m consultat10n with the staff member who will supervise 1t

16435 ART OF THE PACIFIC REGION A Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes B or better in two topics of thrrd year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requ1s1tes To be determined in each case

This topic is centred on an advanced study of a number of selected themes It 1s designed to enable students to undertake an original 1nvest1gation and to compare several methodologies employed m the d1sc1plme of Art of the Pac1!1c Reg10n (mcludmg Aborrgmal Art)

355

School of Humanztzes

Readmg hsts will be made available when the scope of each ind1v1dual pro1ect has been determmed m consultat10n with the staff member who will supervise it

16436 ARCHAEOLOGY A Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre reqms1tes B or better m two topics of

rthtrd year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requ1s1tes To be determined in each case

This topic 1s centred on an advanced study of a number of selected themes It is designed to enable students to undertake an or1g1nal 1nvest1gat1on and to compare several metbodolog1es employed m the d1sc1plme of Archaeology

Readmg hsts will be made available when the scope of each md1v1dual project has been determmed m consultat10n with the staff member who will supervise 1t

16437 MUSEUM STUDIES B Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes B or better in two topics of third year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requ1s1tes To be determined 1n each case

This topic is centred on an advanced study of a number of selected themes It ts designed to enable students to undertake an ongmal 1nvestlgatlon and to compare several method olog1es employed m the dtsc1plme of Museum Studies

356

Readmg hsts will be made ava!lable when the scope of each ind1v1dual pro1ect has been determmed m consultat10n with the staff member who will supervise it

16438 HISTORY OF ART B Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or Second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes B or better in two topics of thud year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requisites To be determined in each case

This topic is centred on an advanced study of a number of selected themes It ts designed to enable students to undertake an original 1nvest1gat1on and to compare several methodologies employed m the dtsc1plme of History of Art

Readmg hsts will be made available when the scope of each md1V1dual project has been determined 1n consultation with the staff member who will supervise 1t

16439 ART OF THE PACIFIC REGION B Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes B or better in two topics of third year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requ1s1tes To be determined 1n each case

This topic 1s centred on an advanced study of a number of selected themes It 1s designed to enable students to undertake an or1g1nal 1nvest1gatton and to compare several method olog1es employed m the d1sc1plme of Art of the Pacific Reg10n (mcludmg Abongmal Art)

Readmg hsts will be made available when the scope of each 1nd1v1dual pro1ect has been determined 1n consultation with the staff member who will supervise it

16440 ARCHAEOLOGY B Director of Studies

Umts 9 Level Fourth year Honours Duration First or second semester or full year Class Contact For semester course 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes B or better in two topics of third year Visual Arts and Archaeology Co requ1s1tes To be determined in each case

This topic is centred on an advanced study of a number of selected themes It ts designed to enable students to undertake an orlgmal 1nvesttgation and to compare several method­ologies employed m the d1sciphne of Archaeology

Readmg hsts will be made available when the scope of each md1v1dual project has been determined in consultation with the staff member who will supemse it

16450 ARCHAEOLOGICAL SCIENCE Dr FD Pate

Umts 6 Level Fourth year or post graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 12 lectures/practical sess10ns each of 3 hours durat10n held at Flmders University, the University of Adelaide, the South Australian Museum and the CSIRO D1v1s1ons of Sods and Water Resources Pre requlSlte Admiss10n to the Graduate Diploma m Archaeology or permiss10n of the instructor

This topic demonstrates the apphcation of a range of techniques from the natural and physical sciences to archaeolog1cal problems Subjects mclude chronometric datmg methods, paleochmate, faunal analysis, plant m1crofoss1ls and macrofoss1ls, bone chemistry and paleodiet, and paleopathology Lectures will be supplemented by several field trips to local laboratones

Prelzmznary reading Rathje, W L and Schiffer, MB Archaeology

(Harcourt, Brace and Jovanovich, 1982)

Set book Thomas, DH Archaeology (Holt, Rmehart

and Wmston, 1989)

Honours Programme in Humanztzes

357

School of Informatzon Science and Technology

Topics zn Computer Science

General Informat1on

The Computer Science D1sc1pltne offers a number of undergraduate topics which are available to all students enrolled at the Umvers1ty These topics may be undertaken as part of a larger sequence satisfymg the requirements for a degree 1n the School of Information Science and Technology, or as a ma1or sequence as part of a degree 1n another School Students enrolling m a School other than Informat10n Science and Technology should determme any constramts imposed by that School by consultmg the relevant section of the Calendar Students should consult the D1sc1plme to fmd out whether adm1ss10n quotas apply to topics

To gain a ma1or in Computer Science, students should pass 36 units of topics compns1ng Computer Science I, all second year topics, and (at least) 15 units of third year topics

A Diploma course 1s available to those having graduated 1n a non computing area (see Schedule for details) It comprises mamly second year and third year topics (with an option to pursue some honours topics) along with 68401 Software Engmeermg Proiect In all it is necessary to pass 48 units worth of topics to gain credit for the Diploma

Honours in Computer Science ts run 101ntly with the Umvers1ty of Adelaide Topics available are ahgned with staff research interests and may vary from year to year Consult the D1sc1plme for mformat10n

First Year Topics

68110 COMPUTER SCIENCE I

Umts 9 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and a 2 hour laboratory session per week Pre requ1s1te None

Structured methods of des1gmng algonthms and data structures for 1nformatlon processing tasks Learning aspects of a modern programming language Programme correctness and documentation Properties and hm1tat10n of algonthms Elements of computer hardware and system software Examples of important algorithms

An introduction to computer architecture and operating systems A microprogrammed computer and its interpreter Various components of the computer 1nclud1ng clocks, buses, registers and gates Using an assembly language The role of an operatmg system Processor allocation, processor scheduhng, memory management, 1/0 handling and file systems

A quota will apply to this topic No programming expenence is assumed

In addition to the scheduled laboratory time, students are expected to spend an average of 3 hours per week at the computer terminal

Text books Baver, D, Mac1unas, K.J and Oudshoom, M J

A first course zn programming (Addison Wesley 1990)

Set books and Text books are requrred read mg on which students may be tested Students are expected to have their own copies of all books hsted as Set books or Text books multiple copies of these books will not be available m the Library Prehmmary readmg IS readmg which the student IS expected to have completed before the commencement of teachmg and on which he or she may at any time be tested Further reading and Recommended reading where not othel'Wlse specifi.ed mdtcate reading which the student 1s expected to do m the course of studying the Set books Reference books are books which the student will find useful m the course of studymg the topics for which they arc specified

358

Goldschlager, L and Lister, A Computer sczence a modern zntroduct1on, 2nd ed (Prenllce Hall, 1988)

Second Year Topics

68211 DATA STRUCTURES

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te 68110 Computer Science I

The representallon and processmg of data structures Topics include computational structures, linear hsts, indexed structures, trees1 hst structures graphs, file structures hst processing, recursive processing and applications in data processing and data base management Relevant concepts in programmmg will be mtroduced for use m this course A quota will apply to this topic

Text book Stubbs, D F and Webre, NW Data structures

with abstract data types and Pascal, 2nd ed (Brooks/Cole, 1989)

Reference book Helman, P and Veroff, R Intermediate

problem solving and data structures (Beniamm Cummmgs, 1986)

68212 INFORMATION SYSTEMS

Umts 3 Level Second year DuratJ.on Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te 68211 Data Structures

Logical structure, physical 1mplementahon and algonthms for the mampulat10n of file organ1sahons File design and use Software eng1neer1ng, requirements spec1f1cahon structured systems design and implementation testing, documentation, maintenance, programmer psychology, software develop men! tools The COBOL language

Text books Grauer, R Structured COBOL programming

(Prentice Hall 1985)

Computer Sciences

Sommerville, I Software engineering, 3rd ed (Addison Wesley, 1989)

Reference book Brooks, F P The mythical man-month

(Addison Wesley, 1975)

68213 PROGRAM STRUCTURES

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ!Slte 68211 Data Structures

Computat10nal processes and the role of procedures 111 program design Data abstracllon selectors, constructors and mutators Modulanty System organisation, ob1ect oriented and mformal!on flow onented strategies Delayed evaluation Language abstraction generic packages, logic programmmg

Text book To be announced

Reference books Abelson, H and Sussman, G J Structure and

interpretatwn of computer programs (MIT Press 1985)

Dybv1g, R K The SCHEME programming language (Prenllce Hall, 1987)

Slade, S T Programming language (Prentice Hall, 1987)

68214 COMPUTER SYSTEMS

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite 68100 Computer Science I Co-reqmsite 68211 Data Structures

This topic will look at the mteractlon between the architecture of the computer system and its software The Von Neumann model, processor architectures, virtual memory, examination of an existing system Non Von Neumann architectures, VLSI systems, aspects of Operating Systems

Text book Tanenbaum A S , Structured computer

orgamsatzon, 3rd ed (Prenllce Hall, 1990)

359

School of Informatzon Science and Technology

Reference books Goar, A J , van de, Computer architecture and

design (Addison Wesley, 1989) Peterson, J L and Silbershatz, A Operating

systems concepts, 2nd ed (Addison Wesley, 1985)

Third Year Topics

NOTE students should check the Disciplme of Computer Sc1enc" notice board to ensure that all of the followmg topics will be presented m any given year

68311 DATABASE MANAGEMENT AND APPLICATIONS

Units 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ!Slte 68212 Infonnat10n Systems

The aim of this topic is to fam1har1se students with the basic concepts, fundamental structures and general techniques needed to design, ma1nta1n and use a data base system The nature and use of the maior Data Models will be considered as well as the basic constructs of the related Data Defmil!on and Data Mampulal!on Languages

Reference books McFadden F R and Hoffer, J A Database

management, 2nd ed (Beniamm Cummmgs, 1988)

Ullman, JD Prmczples of database and knowledge base systems vol 1 (Computer Science Pr 1988)

van der Lans, R F , Introductzon to SQL (Addison Wesley, 1988)

68312 LANGUAGE TRANSLATORS

Units 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requisite 68313 Programmmg Language Concepts

Run time storage a!locat10n for block structured languages Fonnal language theory, context free grammars, lexical analysis,

360

recursive descent comp1lat1on, LL(l) grammars, code opt1m1sat1on 1 comp1ler portmg Error handling and bottom-up parsmg A project (wntmg a compiler for a Block Structured Language) fonns a ma1or part of the course

Reference books Aho, AV , Sethi, R and Ullman, J D

Compilers prznczples, techniques and tools (Adchson Wesley, 1986)

Bnnch Hansen P On pascal compilers (Prenl!ce Hall, 1985)

Gnes, D Compiler construction for digital computers (Wiley, 1971)

Wirth, N Algorithms and data structures programs (Prentice Hall, 1976)

68313 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE CONCEPTS

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmsite 68213 Program Structures

This topic focuses on the semantics of programming language constructs It reviews the concepts presented m 68213 Program Structures m a fonnal manner The role of abstraction in programming languages is discussed m the context of control and data abstractions 1nclud1ng concurrency A comparison of programming languages and programmmg language features will be made Languages used mclude Ada, C", FORTRAN, Lisp Modula 2, Pascal LOOPS, CLU, Simula 67 and Smalltalk 80

Text books Dewhurst, S C , and Stark KT, Programming

zn C* (Prenl!ce-Hall, 1989) Sethi, R , Programming languages concepts

and constructs (Addison-Wesley, 1989)

Reference books Barnes, J GP, Programming zn Ada

(Addison Wesley, 1982) Ghezzi C and Jazayen, M Programming

language concepts, 2nd ed (Wiley, 1986) Pratt T W Programming languages design

and implementatzon, 2nd ed (Prenl!ce Hall, 1984)

Texel, P Introductory Ada packages for programming (Addison Wesley, 1986)

68315 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration To be announced Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 68213 Program Structures

Topics chosen from methodologies of AI, phtlosoplucal issues, cogrutlon and perception, knowledge representation methods, auto mated inference, rule based systems, search methods machme learnmg knowledge engineering, computer VIs1on, natural language understanding, game playing

Text book Wmston P H Artificial intelligence, 2nd ed

(Addison Wesley, 1984)

Reference books Cham1ak E and McDermott, D lntroductwn

to artificial intelligence (Addison-Wesley, 1985)

O'Shea, T and Eisenstadt, M Artzfzcial intelligence (Harper & Row 1984)

68316 THEORY OF COMPUTATION

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration To be announced Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmsite 68213 Program Structures

Introduct10n to the theory of computat10n Formal models of computat1on, the abstract machme and the funct10nal approach Computab1hty and complexity

Text book To be announced

Reference books Cohen, D I A lntroductwn to computer

theory (Wiley 1986)

McNaughton, R Elementary computabzlzty, formal languages, and automata (Pren!Jce Hall, 1982)

Mandr1olt, D and Ghezz1, E Theoretical foundatzons of computer science (Wiley, 1987)

Computer Sciences

68317 ADVANCED PROGRAM STRUCTURES*

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration To be announced Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 68213 Program Structures

Functional programming b1nd1ngs, patterns of recursion, evaluation modes, streams and alternative funct10nal styles Ob1ect onented programming enVIronments and continuations Lambdas calculus Type inference systems Interpretation techniques Combinators, SECD machine dataflow

Text book To be announced

Reference books Gordon, M J Programming language theory

and its 1mplementatwn (Pren!Jce Hall 1989)

Field, A and Harrison, P G Functional programming (Addison Wesley, 1988)

Meyer, B Ob1ect oriented software constructzon (Pren!Jce Hall, 1988)

68318 ADV AN CED DATA AND KNOWLEDGE BASE SYSTEMS

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration To be announced Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 68311 Database Management and Apphca!Jons

This topic expands and extends the material covered 1n topic 68311, Database Management and Apphcat10ns Advanced data modellmg concepts Query processing and optimisation Object onented database systems Distributed databases concepts, architecture and transaction management Knowledge bases theory and tools for modellmg knowledge, knowledge base engineering, implementation, management and maintenance

Text book To be announced

* Students should check that this topic 1s offered m 199i

361

School of Information Sczence and Technology

Reference books Ullman, ) D Prznczples of database and

knowledge base systems vol 2 The new technologies (Computer Science Pr , 1989)

Debenham, ) K Knowledge systems deszgn (Prentice-Hall 1989)

Gardann G and Valdunez P Relational databases and knowledge bases (Addison Wesley, 1989)

Ozsu, T and Valdunez, P Prznczples of dzstrzbuted database systems (Prentice Hall 1991)

68319 COMPUTER NETWORKS

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration To be announced Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1tes 68213 Program Structures and 68214 Computer Systems

Introduction to Data Commun1cat1ons, the ISO/OSI reference model, overv1ew of public data networks, local area networks, wide area networks The course will use IEEE 802 3 as the LAl'I paradigm and TCP/IP as the prmc1ple protocol example This course will relate closely with Database Management and Appllcat10ns

Text book Tanenbaum, AS Computer networks 2nd ed

(Prentice Hall, 1988)

Reference books Stallings, W Local networks an intro

ductwn 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1987) Halsall, F Data communicatzons, computer

networks & OSI, 2nd ed (AddISon Wesley, 1988)

68321 COMPUTATIONAL LOGIC

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration To be announced Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requmte 68213 Program Structures Knowledge of 61201 DIScrete Mathematics I 1s assumed

A study of the language and methods of logic, conceived as prov1d1ng natural tools for wnt1ng and evaluating computer programmes

362

Topics covered include concepts of propos1tlonal and predicate logic, theories with equality, and model logic as applied to art1flc1al intelligence

Text book Manna, Z and Waldmger R The logical baszs

for computer programming, vol 1 Deductive reasonzng (Addison-Wesley, 1985)

Diploma Topics

To qualify for the Diploma of Computer Science a student shall complete satisfactorily 48 umts of studies with a grade of C or better These units shall comprise (1) the 9 umt topic 68110 Computer

Science I (11) the followmg four 3 umt topics

68211 Data Structures 68212 Informat10n Systems 68213 Program Structures 68214 Computer Systems

(Ill) 18 umts from third year level topics and at the Head of D1Sc1plme's d1Scret10n, Honours topics offered by the Computer Science D1sc1phne

(1v) the 9 umt topic, 68401 Software Eng1neenng Pro1ect

Note that, under certain circumstances, status may be granted for (i) and for topics m (11) Consult the D1sc1phne for further 1nformatlon

68401 SOFIWARE ENGINEERING PROJECT

Umts 9 Level Diploma Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 hour class per week Pre reqmSite 68212 Informat10n Systems Co reqmsite 68311 Database Management and Apphcat10ns

ThIS pro1ect affords students the opportumty of applying software eng1neenng development and 1mplementat1on techniques to a substantial software pro1ect The course matenal will cover different techniques for the complete development process from system def1mt10n through deSign and mto productwn EmphaSis will be placed on the select10n of the techmques that are most

appropnate to a particular pro1ect and the actual use of the selected techniques Case studies and other course material may be given by v1s1t1ng speakers from industry and business

Reference books Charette, RN Software engineering

environments concepts and technology (McGraw Hill, 1986)

Macro A and Buxton) The craft of software engineering (Addison Wesley, 1987)

Pressman, R S Software engzneerzng a practztzoner's approach, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1987)

Topics zn Mathematics

General Informat1on

The D1sc1phne of Mathematics offers topics and programmes of study in pure, apphed and general mathematics These topics may be undertaken as part of a larger sequence satisfying the requirements for a degree in the School of Information Science and Techno logy or as a sequence where allowable, as part of a degree m other Schools The pre requ1s1tes for the topics are as shown in the subsequent pages

First Year Topics

60117 INTRODUCTORY MATIIEMATICS A DrWH Cornish

Umts 9 Level FirSt year Duration First and Second semesters Class Contact 4 lectures per week and 1 tutonal per week Pre requisites None apart from a very basic knowledge of high school algebra and geometry ThlS topic may not be undertaken by a student who 1s enrolled m, or has already gamed credit for Topic 60130 Mathemahcs I A student may count either 60117 Introductory Mathematics A or 60118 Introductory Mathematics B towards the degree, but not both

Graphs of funchons, some analytic geometry of lmes as a prelude to d1fferenhal calculus and its applications The exponential and loganthm functions The mean value theorem, and an introduction to integration, with simple

Mathematics

apphcations Vectors and some three d1mens1onal geometry

Set books Fraleigh ) B Calculus 2nd ed (Addison

Wesley, 1985) or Salas, S L Hille, E and Anderson, ) T

Calculus, 5th ed (Wiley, 1986)

60118 INTRODUCTORY MATIIEMATICS B Dr R R Huzlgol

Umts 9 Level Fust year Durat10n Fm! and Second semesters Class Contact 4 lectures per week and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes None except that the course is intended for mature age students or those who have not attempted any high school mathematics in the preceding year or two at the leaving level This topic may not be undertaken by a student who 1s enrolled in or has already gamed credit for Topic 60130 Mathemahcs I A student Play count either 60118 Introductory Mathemahcs B or 60117 Introductory Mathematics A towards the degree, but not both

Graphs of functions, some analytic geometry of lmes as a prelude to d1fferenhal calculus and its appltcat1ons The exponential and loganthm functions The mean value theorem, and an introduction to integration with simple applications

Set book Auvil, D Calculus with applzcatzons

(Addison Wesley, 1982)

60130 MATHEMATICS I Professor G I Gaudry

Umts 9 Level FlrSt year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 4 lectures and 1 two hour tutorial per week Pre-requisite A satisfactory pass in Matnculat10n Mathematics I and II or Mathematics IS

Elementary set theory, real and complex number systems, mathematical induction concepts of integral calculus with appltcations, continuous functions, d1fferent1al calculus

363

School of Informatwn Sczence and Technology

with apphcat1ons to growth, extrema and approx1mahon, pr1m1tive f1nd1ng and the fundamental theorem of calculus, the logar1thm1 exponential and tngonometr1c functions, Taylor's theorem, sequences, series and improper integrals, the integral test Vector algebra with apphcattons to analytic geometry, systems of hnear equations, hnear 1nde pendence, hnear spaces and mappmgs, bases and matrix representations, change of basis range of null space, rank of a matrix, inner products and orthogonal bases, determinants, Cramer's rule

Text book Apostol, TM Calculus, 2nd ed , vol I

(Blaisdell, 1967)

Second Year Topics

60201 SEVERAL VARIABLE CALCULUS Dr [( Gopalsamy

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 4 hours lectures and 1 two­hour tutorial per week Pre reqmStte 60130 Mathematics I Students who have gamed credit for any of the topics 60220 Mathemattcs II, 63221 Differential and Integral Calculus Bil, 63222 Differential and Integral Calculus Biii may not enrol m this topic

Review of hnear mappings and matrix representation determinants and volume D1fferenttal calculus d1fferentrnl, parhal derivatives exact and closed forms Line integrals, work, potentials Chain rule, inverse function theorem change of variables in partial d1fferent1al equations Extrernum problems, Lagrange multzphers Integration m higher dimens10ns Change of vanab!es Iterated mtegrals Fubim's theorem Asymptotic behav10ur and convergence of integrals Beta and Gamma functions Denvatives and hmits of mtegrals dependmg on a parameter Calculation of volumes, moments of 1nertta, centres of mass Curves and surfaces in R3 Integrals on curves and surfaces Stokes' and Gauss' theorems Vector analysis

Set book Apostol, T M Calculus, 2nd ed , vol II

(Blatsdell, 1969)

364

60202 LINEAR ALGEBRA Dr K Gopalsamy

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 one-hour tutorial per week Pre requ1S1te 60130 Mathemahcs I Students who have gamed credit for any of the topics 60220 Mathemattcs II, 61223 Matnx Theory I, may not enrol m thts topic

Further study of lmear mappmgs m fmzte d1mens1onal spaces and of determinants S1mtlar matnces, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces, unitary transformations, orthogonal matrices, quadratic forms, reduct10n to diagonal form

Set book Apostol, TM Calculus, 2nd ed , vol II

(Blazsdell, 1969)

60203 ELEMENTARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Dr P G Dodds

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 one hour tutonal per week Pre requ1S1te 60201 Several Vanable Calculus Students who have gamed credit for any of the topzcs 60220 Mathemattcs II 63241 Differential Equations I, may not enrol for thts topic

First order d1fferent1al equations and appltcations Linear differential equations and systems Power senes solut1ons, exponential of a matrix, Legendre and Bessel equations

Set book Apostol, T M Calculus, 2nd ed , vol II (Blatsdell, 1969)

61201 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS I Dr R Mathews

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requzStte 60130 Mathemaltcs I or a high pass m Matnculatlon Mathemattcs I and II

Sets, cartesian products, relations functions Graphs trees Logic, truth tables, rules of inference Induction, recursive definitions Combinations, permutations, 1nclus1on exclusion A brief introduction to the concepts of sem1groups, groups nngs, fields, vector spaces, with apphcation to Computer Science

Reference books Beckman, F S Mathematical foundatzons of

programming (Addison Wesley, 1980) Stana! D F and McAlhster, D F Discrete

mathematics in computer science (Prentice Hall 1977)

61202 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS II Dr R Matthews

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre-requisite 61201 Discrete Mathematics I

Error detectmg and correctmg codes Graph theory Languages and grammars F1n1te state automata Boolean algebras

Reference books Bened1cty, M and Sledge, FR Discrete

mathematzcal structures (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1987)

Dierker, PF and Voxman, W L Discrete mathematics (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1986)

61212 FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY Dr BB Phadke

Umts 3 Level Second or third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmsite 60130 Mathema!tcs I

The real affme plane and space treated axtomatically Vectors and associated vector spaces, coordinate frames Linear and affine functions Ratio, cross ratio, area Theorems of Ceva, Menelaus, Pappus, Desargues, the complete quadnlateral The geometry defmed by a symmetric metric Euchdean and M1nkowsk1an geometnes Groups of motions and associated 1nvar1ants Apphcahons to k1nemat1cs and special relatiVIty

Mathematics

NOTE This topic alternates with 61213 Geometric Structures It will not be offered 1Il 1991

61213 GEOMETRIC STRUCTURES Dr RS Booth

Umts 3 Level Second or third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite 60130 Mathematics I

Introduction to the geometry of real pro1echve and affine spaces with concentration on the two d1mens1onal case Fundamental theorems, 1nclud1ng existence of pro1ect1V1t1es properties of cross ratio, theorems of Desargues and Pascal Metric affine geometry and pro1ect1ve metrics m the plane Hyperbohc and elhpttc geo metr1es Associated transformation groups, their 1nvanants and geometnc algebra

NOTE This topic alternates with 61212 Founda!tons of Geometry It will be offered m 1991

61223 MATRIX THEORY Dr f Kautsky

Umts 3 Level Second or third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 60202 Lmear Algebra

Functions of matnces exponential, use of spectrum m defmmg f(A), relat10n to power senes def1n1tion calculation of components m the Perron formula apphcat10ns mcludmg y' =Ay Deterrrunant charactensahon of rank, positive definiteness Non negative matrices, indecomposable, decomposable, non cychc, basic spectral properties, stochastic matnces Convex sets in Rn, convex closures, separation of two d1s101nt convex sets, hyperplanes vertices a convex set is generated by its vertices

Reference book Ayres, F Schaum's outline of theory and problems of matnces (Schaum, 1962)

365

School of lnfonnatzon Science and Technology

61241 COMBINATORICS DrWH Cornish

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite 61201 Discrete Mathematics I or 60130 Mathema!Ics I

Additive and mult:J.phcatlve counting B1nom1al coeffic1ents and comb1nator1al 1dentities 1nclud1ng those of Pascal and Vandermonde The mult1nom1al theorem Placing r 1nd1stlngu1shable ob1ects into n different cells, r selections, placing flags on flagpoles, the number of terms in the multtnom1al theorem Recurrence relations as an approach to hnear and circular permutations Euler's problem of d1ssectton of a convex polygon into tnangles Segne1 's recurrence, the relattonsh1p with Catalan's assoc1ativity problem Derangements via recurrence relations The F1bonacc1 sequence and related recurrence relations The principle of inclusion exclusion, derangements Permutations with forbidden positions, rook-polynomials the direct sum, expansion, and forbidden board theorems Generating functions and exponential generating functions

Reference books Anderson, I A fzrst course zn combznatorzal

mathematics (Clarendon 1979) Liu, CL Introduction to combinatorial

mathematics (McGraw Hill, 1968) Polya G Taryan, RE and Woods, DR Notes

on introductory combznatoncs (B1rkhauser 1983)

Street1 A P and Walhs, W D Combinatorics a fzrst course (Charles Babbage Research Centre, Wmmpeg, 1982)

61243 CLASSICAL DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY DrBB Phadke

Umts 3 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requmte 60201 Several Vanable Calculus

Theory of curves and surfaces

366

Reference book Do Carmo, M P Differential geometry of

curves and surfaces (Prenl!ce Hall, 1976)

61244 ELEMENTARY TOPOLOGY OF SURFACES DrB B Phadke

Umts 3 Level Second or third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 60130 Mathematics I

The purpose of this topic is to provide an mtroduct10n to the topology of mamfolds Enough of the fundamentals of pomt set topology wdl be covered to make possible a treatment of topological manifolds, particularly surfaces their covering spaces and fundamental groups, s1mphc1al complexes, simphcial homology, and the classificat10n of two d1mens1onal triangulable manifolds

NOTE This topic 1s presented 1n alternate years It will be offered m 1991

Reference books Armstrong, MA Basic topology (Sprmger,

1983) Singer I M and Thorpe,] A Lecture notes on

elementary topology and geometry (Scott Foresman 1967)

63201 PRINCIPLES OF ANALYSIS Professor B B Phadke

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite 60201 Several Vanable Calculus

Metric spaces, compactness, connectedness, and continuity, Stone Weierstrass Theorem, uniform convergence, convex functions formal study of elementary transcendental functions

Reference book Stromberg, KR An zntroductzon to classical

real analysis (Wadsworth, 1981)

63214 MATHEMATICS FOR THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES Dr PG Dodds

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 one hour tutonal per week Pre requmte 60201 Several Variable Calculus Students who have gamed credit for the topic 65211 Elementary Mathematical Physics may not enrol m this topic

Elementary treatment of Founer senes and integrals for smooth functions Elementary ideas of d1stnbutlon theory Dirac s delta approxtmat1on kernels, Laplace transform The three equat10ns of classical physics Laplace, heat and wave equations 1n standard domains Maximum pnncxple and properties of harmonic functions Separations of variables Poisson and Gauss kernels Boundary value problems for standard domains Separation ofvanables Apphcattons of Fourier series and integrals, Bessel functions, Green's function methods

67201 COMPUTING WITH FORTRAN DrT W Sag

Umts 3 Level First or second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures, 1 tutorial and 3 hours computer access per week Pre-requ1s1te None1 however students who gam credit for the topic 68110 Computer Science I are permitted tO count only 1 5 units from this topic

Structure of computers Processing of a computer programme, user communication with a computer Batch and interactive 1obs, stages m a computer 1ob Ed1tmg and commands for runnmg a JOb Problem formulatJon and preparat10n of algonthms, flow charts Main concepts of a programming language illustrated by a simple subset of FORTRAN Detailed features of FORTRAN 1nclud1ng character set, layout of statements use of executable and declaration statements In a programme, constants1 variables, arrays1

expressions, replacement statements, control statements input/output statements, format statements, functions and sub routines, file

M athematzcs

declaration and manipulation Examples of usage of the above for programming frequently used computat10ns Use of packages Students will be expected to spend three hours per week using the computer by an interactive terminal for solving exercises

Reference books Chivers, ID and Clark, MW Interactive

FORTRAN77 (Halstead 1984) Elhs, TM R A structured approach to

FORTRAN77 programmmg (Addison Wesley, 1982)

Meissner LP and Orgamck EI FORTRAN77 featunng structured programming 3rd ed (Addison Wesley, 1980)

67214 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS Dr f Kautsky

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures, 1 tutonal and 3 hours computer access per week Pre reqU1s1tes 60130 MathematJcs I and either 68110 Computer Science I or 67201 ComputJng with FORTRAN Students who have prev10usly gamed credit for the topic 67212 Numencal Analysis I may not enrol for this topic

Non hnear equations, linear equations, matrix 1nvers1on determinant evaluation Iterative methods for the solut10n of algebraic eigenvalue problems Least squares curve flttmg Fm1te differences D1fferentJat10n and mterpolat10n formulae Elementary methods for numerical integration and integration of ordmary differen!Jal equa!Jons

Students will be required to write and run computer programmes for numerical methods related to the above topics and are expected to spend three hours per week using an mterac!Jve termmal ThJS work will be assessed and counted as approXJmately half the credit for the topic

Reference books Atkmson, KE An mtroductwn to numerical

analysis (Wiley, 1978) Conte, S D and de Boor, C Elementary

numerical analysis, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1980)

DahlqUJst G and B1orck, A Numerical methods (PrentJce Hall 1974)

367

School of Information Sczence and Technology

Froberg, CE Numerical mathematzcs 2nd ed (Addison Wesley, 1985)

Ralston, A A first course zn numerical analysis, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1978)

67215 NUMERICAL APPROXIMATION DrTW Sag

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures, 1 tutorial and 3 hours computer access per week Pre reqms1te 67214 Numencal Analysis

Polynom1al 1nterpolahon - Lagrange, Newton and Hermite forms Least squares polynomal curve fzttmg usmg orthogonal polynomials Tr1gonometr1c 1nterpolat1on Fast Fourier transform Least squares a pprox1mahon of functions 1nclud1ng tngonometnc functions, Jacobi, ultraspherzcal and Chebyshev polynomials Polynomial and rat10nal approx1mahons in uniform norm, Sphne approximation Interpolatory and Gaussian quadrature

67233 LINEAR PROGRAMMING Dr D K Kulshrestha

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1S1te 60130 Mathematics I

Linear 1nequaht1es Convex sets The linear programmmg problem The simplex method The art1flczal basis technique revised simplex method} degeneracy Examples of linear programming problems Interpretation of dualtty Flows in networks Integer hnear programming The transportat10n problem, the assignment problem

Reference books Hither, F S and Lieberman G J Introduction

to mathematical programming (McGraw­Hlll, 1990)

Winston, W L Operations research applzcatzons and algorithms (Duxbury, 1987)

368

67252 CLASSICAL MECHANICS DrCRA Rao

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1S1te 60130 Mathematzcs 1

Statics systems of forces and eqmhbrmm of a point, moment of a force, centre of mass, eqmhbrium of a rigid body, react10ns at supports K1nemat1cs motion, velocity, accelerat1on, normal and tangential components of acceleration, cyhndncal and sphencal polar coordinates Mohan of a single particle Newton's laws, pro1ectrles, effect of friction Work and energy conservative and non conservative forces, curl and grad operators Kepler's laws and planetary motion Force in an inextensible stnng and mass-pulley system Systems of particles and plane rigid bodies Euler's equatJons, moment of 1nert1a, rolling and shd1ng motion, energy equation, impact problems Mot10n with variable mass rockets and snow avalanches

Reference books Fowles, GR Analytical mechanics, 3rd ed

(Holt, Rinehart & Wmston, 1977) Smith, RC and Smith, P Mechanics (Wiley,

1971) Synge, J L and Gnffzth, B A Pnnczples of

mechanics, 3rd ed (McGraw-Hill, 1959)

67253 CONTINUUM MECHANICS Dr R R Huzlgol

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite 60201 Several Variable Calculus Students who have already gamed credit for 67351 Contmuum Mechamcs may not enrol in this course

Tensor notation, concept of stress, properties Rate of strain tensor, compattb1ltty conditions Eule-zan and Lagrangian equat10ns of motzon Constitutive equations of continua Navier Stokes equation, non Newtonian fluids Strain tensor, equations of elasticity Strain energy function, boundary value

problems of elasticity uniqueness of solutions Apphcat1ons to beams, reduction of the dynamical equations to wave equations

Reference books Fung, Y C A first course zn continuum

mechanics (Prenllce Hall, 1969) Sokolmkoff I S Mathematical theory of

elasticity 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1956)

Third Year Topics

61314 GROUPS AND RINGS Dr W H Cornish

Umts 4 5 Level Th1rd year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmS1tes 60130 Mathemallcs I and 61201 Dtscrete Mathematics I Students who have previously gained credit for the topic 61311 Algebra I are penmtted to count only 1 5 units from this topic

Groups, (normal) subgroups, nngs subnngs and (two Sided) ideals Homomorphisms of groups and nngs quotient groups and rings Fields d1v1s1on rings and the group of units of a un1tal ring The general ltnear group over the field of complex numbers and a fmite field, together with distmgmshed subgroups and quotient groups Lagrange's, Cauchy's and Sylow's group theorems Groups of permutat10ns, the altematmg group and the s1mphc1ty of A

5 Groups of symmetnes,

the cycle index and Polya's enumeration theorem

Fmite abehan groups

Reference books Fraleigh, J B A first course zn abstract

algebra, 2nd ed (Addison-Wesley, 1976) Berstein, I N Topics zn algebra, 2nd ed

(Wiley 1975) Rotman J J The theory of groups an

zntroductzon, 2nd ed (Allyn & Bacon, 1973)

Mathematzcs

61315 COMMUTATIVE ALGEBRA AND GALOIS THEORY Dr W H Cornish

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmS1te 61314 Groups and Rmgs Students who have previously gained credit for the topic 61313 Algebra IIJ are penmtted to count only 1 5 umts from th1S topic

Polynomial and formal power series nngs Integral domains and their fields of quotients Euclidean, principal ideal and unique factorisation domains

I Prime and maximal ideals prime and irreducible elements of a domain J(rull's lemma on prime ideals, Stone s representation of (finite) Boolean rings, Kaplansky's characterisation of a unique factor1sat1on domain The Gaussian integers and Fermat's sums of two squares theorem Gauss lemma and E1senste1n's cntenon Field extensions, the fundamental theorem of Galms theory Fmite fields Unsolvable qumllcs over the field of rationals

Reference books Fraleigh, J B A first course zn abstract

algebra, 2nd ed (Addison Wesley, 1976) Herstem IN Topics zn algebra, 2nd ed

(Wiley, 1975) Rotman, ) ) The theory of groups an

zntroductzon, 2nd ed (Allyn & Bacon 1973)

63311 COMPLEX ANALYSIS Dr PG Dodds

Umts 3 Level Th1rd year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre-requlSlte 60201 Several Variable Calculus

Complex power series domain of convergence, analytic functions Pnnc1ple of analytic continuation, the sum of a power series as the generating function for its coeff1c1ents Elementary transcendental

369

School of Informatzon Science and Technology

functions in the complex domain branch of argument branch of logarithm Holomorph1c functions Cauchy Riemann equations, harmon1c1ty of real and 1mag1nary parts Concept of conformal mapping, examples, Mob1us transformat1on, preservation of harmomc1ty Complex mtegrat10n the Cauchy integral theorem Cauchy's integral formula and its consequences Taylor series Laurent sertes The residue theorem, apphcatlons, especially to calculat10n of real mtegrals

Reference books Ahlfors, L V Complex analysis 3rd ed

(McGraw Hill, 1979) Cartan, H Elementary theory of analytic

functwns (AddJSon Wesley, 1963) Conway, J B Functions of one complex

vanable 2nd ed (Sprmger, 1978) Levinson, N and Redheffer, RM Complex

vanables (Holden Day, 1970)

63313 INTEGRATION THEORY DrP G Dodds

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqmSite 60201 Several Vanable Calculus

Lebesgue measure and Lebesgue integration m R' Fub1m Tonelh theorem Change of vanables formula The LP spaces Functions of bounded var1at1on, Lebesque Stielt1es integrals Lebesgue differentiation theorem

Reference books Asplund E and Bungart, L A fzrst course m

zntegratzon (Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1966)

Rudin, W Real and complex analysis, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1986)

63315 HARMONIC ANALYSIS Professor G I Gaudry

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmSite 63313 Integrat10n Theory Students who have prev10usly gamed credit for 63312 Fourier AnalySis are not permitted to enrol in this topic

370

Per1od1c functions and Fourier Series L 1

theory Summab1hty by partial sums and by Cesaro, de la Vallee Poussin and Poisson means Rlemann1an Lebesgue lemma Fe1er s theorem, Lebesgue set Nonconvergence 1n uniform and 1n L 1 norm Smooth functions and rates of decay of Fourier coeff1c1ents Tests for po1ntW1se convergence Localtsatton pr1nc1ple Gibbs phenomenon Fourier transform 1n Rn Gauss and PoISson kernels Approximate 1den!Jt1es and summab1hty of transforms Riemann Lebesgue lemma Action of dtlation, rotation and reflection groups Poisson summation formula Radial functions and the Melhn transform Schwartz functions and tempered d1stnbuttons Band and time hm1ted signals Founer analysis on groups F1n1te commutative groups The fast Founer transform Spherical harmonics and the rotation group

Reference books Dym H and McKean H P Fourier series and

integrals (Academic, 1972) Edwards, R E Fourier serzes a modern

introduction 2 vols , 2nd ed (Springer, 1982)

Katznelson, Y An zntroductzon to harmonic analysis (Wiley, 1968)

Stein, E M and Weiss, G Introductzon to Fourier analysis on Euclidean spaces (Prmceton UP, 1971)

Zygmund, A Tngonometnc senes (Cambndge up' 1959)

63344 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS DrPG Dodds

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requmte 63214 Mathematics for the PhySical Sciences Students who have prev10usly obtamed credit for the topic 63343 Partial D1fferent1al Equat10ns II are not permitted to enrol in this topic

Laplace's equation, fundamental solut1ons, maximum pr1nc1ple, Harnack 1nequahty, Perron's method of subharmonic functions, wave equation in higher d1mens1ons, method of spherical means, Hadamard's method of

descent, Duhamel's principle, energy cons1derat1on, parabolic equations, 1n1hal value and mixed problems, uniqueness and regularity

Reference books John, F Partzal dzfterentzal equatzons, 4th ed

(Sprmger, 1983) G1lbarg, D and Trudmger, N S Ellzptzc

partzal dzfferentzal equatzons of second order, 2nd ed (Sprmger Verlag, 1983)

63346 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Dr K Gopalsamy

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 63214 Mathematics for the Physical Sciences Students who have previously gamed credit for 63341 D1fferenl!al Equations III are not permitted to enrol 1n this topic

Stab1hty and asymptol!c behav10ur of lmear and almost linear systems of differential and differential difference equations, L1apunov functions and functionals, Volterra integral equations, the Poincare Bend1xson theorem, orbital stab1hty, app1Icat10ns to populat10n ecology

Reference books Bellman, RE and Cooke, K L Dzfferential

difference equatzons (Academic 1963)

Brauer, F and Nohel, J A The qualztatzve theory of ordznary dzfferentzal equatzons (Ben1amm 1969)

Hirsch, M W and Smale, S Dzfterentzal equations, dynamzcal systems and lznear algebra (Academic, 1974)

Miller, R K Nonlznear Volterra zntegral equatzons (Ben1amm, 1971)

Rabenstem A L lntroductzon to ordznary dzfferentzal equatzons, 2nd ed (Academic, 1972)

Simmons, G F Dzfferentzal equatzons (McGraw Hiii, 1972)

Willems, J L Stabzlzty theory of dynamzcal systems (Nelson 1970)

M athematzcs

63363 METIIODS OF MATIIEMATICAL PHYSICS DrP G Dodds

Umts 3 Level Thtrd year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1tes 60202 Lmear Algebra, 60203 Elementary Differential Equations Students who have previously gamed credit for the topic 63362 Elementary Hilbert Space Techmques are not permitted to enrol m this topic

This topic is an introduction to classical techmques of apphed mathematics and mathematical physics Elementary geometry of Hilbert space, the pro1ect1on theorem, spectral theory of compact self-ad1omt operators Fredholm alternative expansion theorem of Hiibert Schmidt, appltcahons to integral equations, general Founer expansions associated with regular Sturm L10uv11le problems Solut10ns to Dmchlet and Neumann problems 1n regular domains via boundary layer techmques

Reference book Courant, R and Hilbert D Methods of

mathematical physzcs vol II Partzal dzfterentzal equatzons (lnterscience, 1962)

67303 CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS Dr! W Rzce

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1tes 60201 Several Variable Calculus and 60203 Elementary D1fferenhal Equations

Classical problems on extrema of functionals D1fferent1al of a funct10nal second differential Cond1hons of extrema Euler's equation Conditional extrema Functionals with several unknown functions Lagrange function Functions of several vanables

Reference books Akhiezer N I The calculus of varzatzons

(Blaisdell 1962)

371

School of Informatwn Sczence and Technology

Bliss, GA Lectures on the calculus of varzatwns (Chicago UP, 1947)

Bhss, G A Calculus of varzatzons (Mathemallcal Assoc of Am , 1962)

Gel'fand, IM and Fomm, S V Calculus of varzatwns (Prentice Hall 1963)

Lavrent ev MA Varzatwnal methods for boundary value problems for systems of ellzptzc equatwns (Noordhoff, 1963)

Lmstem1k, LA Shortest paths (Pergamon, 1964)

67314 NUMERICAL METHODS OF LINEAR ALGEBRA Dr f Kautsky

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures, 1 tutorial and 3 hours computer access per week Pre reqms1tes 60202 Lmear Algebra and 67214 Numerical Analysis Students who have prev10usly gamed credit for 67312 Numerical Methods of Lmear Algebra are permitted to count only 1 5 umts from this topic

Numerical solution of hnear equations errors ans1ng in numerical solution cond1hon of the problem, ehm1nat1on and tnangulansahon methods for general matrices, error analysts for Gauss ehm1nahon Ehm1nabon methods for special matrices orthogonal triangular 1sat1on methods, estimates for overall perturbation errors in the solution of hnear equations, iterative scheme for improvement of an approximate solution Numerical solution of algebraic eigenvalue problems properties of eigenvalues and eigenvectors of general and Hermitian matrices S1milanty transformation methods for reduction of real symmetnc matnces to diagonal or tridiagonal matrices and general complex matrices to upper Hessenberg form The QR and double shift QR methods of determ1n1ng eigenvalues of Hessenberg matrices Inverse iteration methods for determining real and complex eigenvectors of Hessenberg matnces

Reference books Golub, G H and van Loan, C F Matrix

computatzons Uohns Hopkms, 1985) Isaacson, E and Keller, H B Analysis of

numerical methods (Wiley, 1966)

372

W!Ikmson j H The algebraic eigenvalue problem (Oxford Clarendon 1965)

67315 NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS DrT W Sag

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures, 1 tutonal and 3 hours computer access per week Pre reqms1tes 60203 Elementary D1fferen!Ial Equallons and 67214 Numerical Analysis Students who have previously gained credit for 67322 Numencal Solut10n of D1fferen!Ial Equat10ns are permitted to count only 1 5 umts from this topic Co reqms1te 63214 Mathema!Ics for the Physical Sciences

Ordmary differential equat10ns Initial value problems general methods (consistency, stab1hty, convergence) Lmear difference equat10ns Boundary value problems, shootmg and direct flmte difference methods Eigenvalue problems Partial d1fferen!Ial equat10ns Laplace equation eigenvalue problems Iterative methods for solvmg related systems of lmear algebraic equations Wave equations and an eqmvalent system Head equation expltc1t and 1mphc1t methods General theory of consistency, convergence and stability

Reference books Forsythe, G E and Wasow, WR Finite

difference methods for partial dzfferent1al equatwns (Wiiey, 1960)

Henr1ci, P Dzscrete variable methods zn ordinary differential equatzons (Wiley, 1962)

Isaacson, E and Keller H B Analysis of numencal methods (Wiley, 1966)

67332 OPERATIONS RESEARCH I Dr D K Kulshrestha

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 65205 Stat1st1cal Science

Inventory control Deterministic models Probabhshc models Dynamic programmmg models Forecasting Replacement Capital equipments Non maintainable items Staffing problems Miscellaneous replacement problems Scheduling Processmg n JObs through m machines The travelling salesman problem

Reference books Hdher, F S and Lieberman, G j Introduction

to operations research, 4th ed (Holden Day, 1989)

Winston, W L Operations research applications and algorithms (Duxbury, 1987)

67333 OPERATIONS RESEARCH II Dr DK Kulshrestha

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmSites 65205 Statistical Science and 67233 Lmear Programmmg

Topics of games theory Infinite games Two person general sum games

Linear programming approach to the solution of matrix games

Queuing theory Poisson arrival and exponential service times Poisson arrivals and Erlang service times, channels in parallel, channels in senes

Pollaczek Khmtchme formula for expected waiting time

Rehab1hty theory Measures of dependab1hty Parallel and series systems Redundancy Force of mortality Non mamtamable systems Theory of mamtenance

Reference books Hillier, F S and Lieberman, G j Introduction

to operations research, 4th ed (Holden Day, 1989)

Winston, W L Operations research applications and algorithms (Duxbury, 1987)

Mathematics

67353 ANALYTICAL MECHANICS Dr R R Huzlgol

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requmtes 63214 Mathematics for the Physical Sciences and 67252 Classical Mechanics

Generalised coordinates, holonom1c systems, work funct10n The Euler Lagrange formulations, the Hamilton formulation Canonical transformations Small oscillations

Reference books Goldstein, H Classical mechanics, 2nd ed,

(Addison Wesley 1980) Pars, LA A treatise on analytical dynamics

(Hememann, 1965) Rosenberg, RM Analytzcal dynamzcs of

dzscrete systems (Plenum, 1977)

67361 CLASSICAL HYDRODYNAMICS DrCRA Rao

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1S1te 60201 Several Variable Calculus

J(inematzcs Velocity fields, streamlines, tra1ectones, continuity equation, circulation and vorticity, rotational and 1rrotahonal flow velocity potential Dynamics of zdeal flow Equations of mot10n, barotropy energy equation Bernoulli's equation Irrotational flow Stream function Velocity potential Sources Smks Doublets Vortices General motion KelVIn s circulation theorem Vorticity equat10n and theorems of Helmholtz and Bjerknes Motzon of a body Milne Thomson's circle theorem Blasius' theorem l{utta Joukowsk1 theorem joukowsk1 profiles

Reference books Curle, N and Davies, H j Modern fluzd

dynamics, vol 1 Incompressible flow (Van Nostrand, 1968)

373

School of Informatzon Science and Technology

Milne Thomson, L M Theoretical hydro dynamics, 5th ed (Macmillan 1972)

Rutherford D E Fluid dynamics (Ohver & Boyd 1966)

67364 ELASTICITY AND FLUID MECHANICS Dr R R Huzlgol

Umts 3 Level Thud year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutonal per week Pre reqmSites 67253 Contmuum Mechamcs and 63214 Mathemal!cs for the Physical Sciences Students who have preVIOusly gamed credit for the topic 67365 Lmear Theory of Elas1Ic1ty may not enrol m thIS topic

Solutwns of two and three d1mens10nal problems from elast1c1ty and fluid mechanics, 1nclud1ng plane strain and plane stress problems, St Venant's problems, creeping flow, pipe flow, Couette flow and cort1c1ty d1ffuSion

Reference books Batchelor G K An zntroductzon to fluid

mecr!anzcs (Cambndge U P , 1967) Sokolmkoff, I S Mathematical theory of

elasticity (McGraw Hiii, 1956)

63345 DYNAMICAL SYSTEMS Dr RR Huilgol

Umts 3 Level Thud year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1S1te 63346 D1fferen!Ial Equatrnns

Systems of differential equal!ons, b1furcal!on from the steady state and its stab1hty, Hopf b1furcal!on and the centre mamfold theorem, b1furcahon to a torus, Po1ncare maps iterative maps, stable and unstable manifolds, homoclin1c po1nts1 exponential d1chotom1es Mel'n1kov's method and chaos the use of PC­software to study dynamical systems

Reference books Carr, J Applicatzons of centre manifold

theory (Spnnger Verlag, 1981) Chow, SN and Hale, J K Methods of

bifurcatzon theory (Sprmger-Verlage, 1982)

374

Devaney, R L An introduction to chaotzc dynamical systems, 2nd ed , (Addison Wesley, 1989)

Guckenhe1mer, J and Holmes P Nonlznear osczllatzons, dynamical systems, and bifurcatzons of vector fields (Sprmger 1986)

Irwm, M C Smooth dynamical systems (Acadeffi!c, 1980)

Pahs J and De Melo W Geometric theory of dynamical systems (Spnnger Verlag, 1982)

67389 COMPUTATIONAL PROJECT DrT W Sag

Umts 3 Level Th1rd year Durallon Full year Class Contact About once a week or as appropnate

This topic may only be taken as part of the thud year level work of the appropnate programme m the School of Mathemallcal Sciences

The student will be expected to work under supemsrnn on some pro1ect m the field of Numencal Analysts chosen in consultation with the supervisor, in order to acquaint the student with the techmques reqmred to analyse problems, to search the hterature for information regarding them, and to devise and execute procedures for solVIng them by the aid of a d1g1tal computer

Topics rn Statistical Science

General Information

The two lust year topics 65103 Elements of Data AnalySis and 65104 Elements of StatIStzcal Science I are designed for students of other Schools as service topics mtroducmg the concepts of Stahsl!cal Science without the need for a strong mathematical background They are also available as elective topics for students in the School of Information Science and Technology Note that there 1s no overlap between these two topics, both may be taken or either may be taken alone The math emallcal backgrounds reqmred for these two topics are

65103 Elements of Data Analysis Year 9 or 10

65104 Elements of Statistical Science I l{nowledge of

Matnculat1on Mathematics IS

These topics are recommended, but are not compulsory, for students 1ntend1ng to take further studies in Stat1shcal Science

65203 Elements of Stallsllcal Science II ts another service course It is an optional sequel to 65104 Elements of Stattsllcal Science I and therefore cannot be taken in the first year It is not available to students who have gamed credit for 65205 Stattstical Science

The rema1n1ng second and thrrd year topics form the Statistical Science core of a larger sequence satisfying the requirements for a degree m the School of Informallon Science and Technology (see Schedules 3 and 5 of Statute 7 1) These topics are also available to other students, provided that appropriate pre requ1s1tes and co requ1s1tes are sahsfied

A grade of C or better m 60130 Mathemahcs I is reqmred for either of the second year level Stahshcal Science topics A grade of C or better 1n each second-year level Statistical Science topic and also m 60201 Several Vanable Calculus and 60202 Lmear Algebra ts reqmred for any of the third year level Stahsllcal Science topics, except for 65305 Stochashc Processes for which a grade of C or better ts reqwred m each of 65205 Stattshcal Science and 60202 Lmear Algebra

Fzrst Year Topics

65103 (39103) ELEMENTS OF DATA ANALYSIS Dr A f Branford

Umts 3 Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week and 2 tutonals per three weeks Pre requ1s1te None This topic ts the same as topic 39103 m the School of Social Sciences Thzs topic may be sub7ect to a quota

This topic introduces the concepts and problems of 1nvestlgatlng and understanding stahshcal data Addit10nal aims of the topic are to instil quantitative confidence 1n students with hmited quantitative skills and expenence, to encourage critical interpretation of

Statistical Science

numerical and graphical techniques and to foster good report wntmg skills fechmques will be applied mihally to small data sets, usmg only hand held calculators Larger data sets are more common in practice, the data analytic facilihes of the stattstical computer package Mimtab will be used to relieve the burden of repellt10us calculahons These will be introduced side by side with the relevant theory, at a level accessible to users with no previous computing experience Un1vanate data, nature and types of data, graphical summaries (mcludmg htstogram and stem and leaf display), numerical summanes (1nclud1ng mean, median, standard deVIat1on and quartiles) Mulhvanate quantitative data, factor and response, assoc1ahon quantifying the strength of ltnear assoc1at1on (including Pearson's r), pred1ctton and regression Mulhvanate qualitative data cross tabulation, chi squared assoc1ahon between dichotomies (mcludmg cross product difference) Confounding variables, cause and effect1

correlation theorem for dichotomous attnbutes fallacious arguments

Reference books Ryan, BF ,Jamer, BL and Ryan TA Mimtab

handbook, 2nd ed (Duxbury, 1985) Velleman, P F and Hoaghn, D C

Applzcatzons, basics and computing of exploratory data analysis (Duxbury, 1981)*

65104 ELEMENTS OF STATISTICAL SCIENCE! Professor f N Darroch

Umts 3 Level Any year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requmte A knowledge of Matnculal!on Mathemallcs JS Thzs topic may be sub7ect to a quota

The aim of this topic is to provide an 1ntroduchon to statistical inference through non-paramet-1c methods Emp1r1cal ver1-ficat10n of results will be emphastsed Counting the multlphcatton rule, binomial coefficients Probab1hty empincal meaning, comb1natonal

375

School of lnformatzon Science and Technology

probab1hhes, independence, b1nom1al, hypergeometnc and Poisson probab1ht1es

Means and variances of d1str1buhons, approximating normal d1stnbuttons, the rank sum d1stnbut1on

Non parametric hypothesis tests, sign test, b1nom1al test Fisher exact test, median test Wilcoxon rank sum test, rank correlat1on test, runs test, test of a single frequency, exact and normal approximation tests

Reference books Freund, J E Modern elementary statzstzcs

7th ed (Prentice Hall 1988) Mendenhall, W Introductwn to probabzlzty

and statzstzcs, 7th ed (Duxbury, 1987)

Second Year Topics

65203 ELEMENTS OF STATISTICAL SCIENCE II Professor JN Darroch

Umts 3 Level Second or th1rd year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requmte 65104 Elements of Statistical Science I

The aim of this topic, in con1unchon with its pre reqmsite 65104 Elements of Stattsllcal Science I is to provide a grounding in Stahst1cal Science for students in social biological medical and physical sciences, and, in particular, a preparation for disc1phne based topics in quantitative analysis and research methods

Sampling and samplmg d1stnbut10ns, inferences about means, inferences about standard deviations, inferences about proportions, analysis of variance, regression, correlation

Text book Freund, J E Modern elementary statzstzcs

7th ed (Pren!tce Hall, 1988)

Reference book Mendenhall, W Introductzon to probability

and statistics 7th ed (Duxbury, 1987)

376

65205 STATISTICAL SCIENCE Professor JN Darroch

Umts 6 Level Second year Durahon First semester Class Contact 4 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite 60130 Mathematics I

Frequency mterpretat10n of the not10n of probabihty Baste formulae for probabihttes of events Rev1s1on of counting techn1ques1

cond1t1onal probabiht1es 1 independence Standard discrete d1stnbut10ns, mcludmg b1nom1al1 hypergeometr1c, Poisson, negative b1nom1al Expectations, variances and generating functions of discrete d1stnbuttons Sums of independent discrete random variables Continuous d1stribut1ons on the real hne1 including exponential, normal Moment generating functions of continuous d1s­tnbuhons Multid1mens1onal d1str1butions1

correlation Tr1nom1al, bivariate normal, chi squared distnbut10ns Central hmit theorem Properties of the mean and variance of a random sample Elements of pomt and mterval esttmat10n Elements of hypothesis testmg Tests based on the normal distnbut10n and tests based on the multmomzal distnbut10n

Reference books Freund, J E and Walpole, RE Mathematical

statistics, 4th ed (Pren!tce Hall, 1987) Hoel, P G Introduction to mathematical

statistics 5th ed (Wiley, 1984) Mendenhall, W , Scheaffer R L and Wackerly,

DD Mathematical statistics with applicatzons, 3rd ed (Duxbury, 1986)

65206 LINEAR MODEL COMPUTATIONS Dr A J Branford

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te 65205 Stat1s!tcal Science

Linear models and hypotheses as subspaces of Rn Least squares equations, residual sums of squares, and their der1vat1ons in some of the simpler apphcat10ns Statement of reqmred chi squared results Analysis of variance

(ANOV A) tables The statistical computer package GLIM (Generalised Lmear Interactive Modellmg) Computat10n based study of the followmg lmear models multiple regress10n, two and three factor experiments, Latin squares, covariance models

Thzrd Year Topics

65351 RANDOM VARIABLES Dr M fmna

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes 65205 Statist1cal Science, 65206 Lmear Model Computat10ns and 60201 Several Variable Calculus and 60202 Lmear Algebra

Standard un1var1ate d1str1butions and their generating functions Mult1var1ate d1str1but1ons, mult1nom1al normal, D1r1chlet, generating functions, cond1honal d1stnbuhon cond1honal expecta t1on, partial correlation Transformations of random variables, derivation of the x2 t and F d1stnbutions, variance stab1hs1ng transformations L1m1t theorems for samples mean, weak convergence, the central hmit theorem Order statistics

Reference books Bam, L j and Engelhardt, M Introductzon to

probabzlzty and mathematzcal statzstzcs (Duxbury, 1987)

DeGroot M H Probabzlzty and statzstzcs 2nd ed (Addison Wesley, 1986)

Hogg RV and Craig AT Introductzon to mathematzcal statzstzcs 4th ed (Macmillan, 1978)

65306 LINEAR MODEL THEORY Dr A I Branford

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week

Statzstzcal Sczence

Pre requ1s1tes 65205 Statistical Science 65206 Lmear Model Computat10ns and 60201 Several Variable Calculus and 60202 Lmear Algebra Co reqmsite 65351 Random Vanables

Theory of hnear models orthogonal pro1ecbons, least squares estimation, Gauss Markov Theorem, test of a smgle hypothesis, tests of a sequence of hypotheses, orthogonal hypotheses

Prelzmznary readzng Revzszon of Lznear Algebra (notes available

from Statistical Science Offtce)

Reference books Barn, L j and Engelhardt, M Introductzon to

probabzlzty and mathematzcal statzstzcs (Duxbury, 1987)

DeGroot, M H Probabzlzty and statzstzcs, 2nd ed (Addison Wesley, 1986)

Hogg, RV and Craig AT Introductzon to mathematzcal statzstzcs, 4th ed (Macmillan, 1978)

65305 STOCHASTIC PROCESSES Dr M fzrzna

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmsites 65205 Sta!ts!tcal Science and 60202 Lmear Algebra

Markov processes with discrete time and f1n1te state space, exphcit formulae for t step transition matrices, reducible and 1rreduc1ble, per1od1c and aper1od1c processes, hm1t behaviour, the stationary d1str1but1on, absorbing states probabthties and times of absorption Stationary time series, autocovar1ance function hnear ftlters, autoregressive moving averages times series (ARMA time series), predict10n theory for these time series, use of the computer package program Mimtab

Reference books Miller, R B Mznztab handbook for buszness

and economzcs (PWS Kent, 1988) Taylor, H M and Karlm, S An zntroductzon

to stochastzc modelzng (Academic, 1984)

377

School of Information Sczence and Technology

65303 APPLIED STATISTICAL SCIENCE A Dr A f Branfo1 d

Umts 45 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1tes 65351 Random Variables and 65306 Lmear Model Theory Co reqmsite 65304 Applied Stat1st1cal Science B

In this topic theory will be blended with extensive use of the computer package program GLIM Multiple regression, choice of values of x variables selection cr1ter1a for x variables mcludmgforward and backward selection and Mallow's cr1ter1on, residual d1agnost1cs transformation of variables, colhnear1ty Factorial experiments 1nteract1ons, Latin squares IIlCOIDplete blocks, zk experiments, confounding of 1nteract1ons, fracttonal rephcat10n spit! plots Random effects models mixed models, components of variance

Reference book Morrison, D F Applied lznear statzstzcal

methods (Prentice Hall, 1985)

65304 APPUED STATISTICAL SCIENCE B Dr G Glonek

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre re4ms1tes 65351 Random Vanables and 65306 Lmear Model Theory Co-requmte 65303 Apphed Statis!tcal Science A

Prehm1nary matrix algebra, the mult1vanate normal d1stnbutton, pr1nc1pal components, canonical correlations, multtvanate regress10n models and MANOVA,

d1stnbuhonal models for discrete data, log1st1c regression models, log lmear models for multt way contingency tables

378

Reference book Johnson RA and Wichern, D W Applied

multzvarzate statzstzcal analysis (Prentice Hall, 1982)

65307 lliEORY OF STATISTICAL INFERENCE Dr M fmna

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1tes 65351 Random Variables and 65306 Lmear Model Theory

Estimation, sufficient statistics, the Rao Blackwell theorem, Fisher mforma!ton and the Cramer Rao lower bound, maximum hkehhood estimates and their asymptotic d1stribut10n Hypothesis testing, most powerful tests Neyman Pearson lemma, hkehhood-ratio test and its asympto!tc distribut10n Entropy and discr1m1natory information

Reference books Bam, L J and Engelhardt, M Introduction to

probabzlzty and mathematical statistics (Duxbury, 1987)

DeGroot, M H Probabzlzty and statzstzcs, 2nd ed (Addison Wesley, 1986)

Hogg, RV and Craig, AT Introduction to mathematical statistics, 4th ed (Colher MacMillan, 1978)

Honours Programmes zn Information Science and Technology

The fourth year Honours B Sc and B A programmes may be taken in one of the following spec1ahsat1ons

For B Sc For BA Title of Programme

61410 61450 Pure Mathematics Honours Programme

63410 63450 Apphed Mathematics Honours Programme

65410 65450 Stattst1cal Science Honours Programme

67410 67450 Numerical Analysis Honours Programme

68410 68450 Computer Science Honours Programme

The reqmrements for complet10n of the programmes are set out in Schedules 3 and 5 of Statute 7 1 The topics offered m these five spec1allsations may vary from year to year The School of Informat10n Science and Technology collaborates with the Departments of Pure Mathematics, Applied Mathematics, Computer Science and Stat1st1cs of the Umvers1ty of Adelaide m producmg a combined programme of topics Flinders students will enrol only at Flinders Umvers1ty even though they are likely to be attending some lectures at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide

Statzstzcal Science

379

School of Medicine

The name of the staff member primarily responsible for the topic, and to whom enquiries about the topic should be directed, is shown in italics below the topic title.

A. Elective Topics including Topics available to students enrolled in other schools

It is the policy of the School of Medicine that elective topics offered within the School should be available as widely as possible to students enrolled in other Schools of the University who have satisfied the pre-requisites for the particular topic.

There are quotas on the number of places available in each topic, however, and students enrolled in the B.M., B.S. course will be given preference where the number of students wishing to enrol in a topic exceeds the number of places available.

The detailed syllabuses of all elective topics are provided in the booklet School of Medicine Elective Programme 1991, copies of which are available from Discipline Co­ordinators in all Schools and from the Teaching Resource Unit, School of Medicine, Room SE.201, Flinders Medical Centre.

Information about additional topics which may become available subsequent to preparation of this material will also be included in the booklet.

A full list of all School of Medicine elective topics follows.

A dagger (t) next to the topic name indicates that the topic is available to students enrolled in other Schools.

First Year

90107/99108 PROJECT IN FIRST YEAR MEDICINE

90112 BASIC MATHEMATICS FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS

380

90115/99116 EXTERNAL ELECTIVE STUDIES IN FIRST YEAR MEDICINE

99118 SPECIAL TOPIC IN FIRST YEAR MEDICINE

Second and Third Years

92201 EXTENDED STUDIES IN MEDICAL SCIENCE Dr A.J. Wilson (Radiology)

99207 ALCOHOL AND ITS EFFECTSt Associate Professor D.O. Southgate (Primary Health Care)

90210/99218 PROJECT IN SECOND YEAR MEDICINE Dr I. Gibbins (Anatomy and Histology)

90215/99216 EXTERNAL ELECTIVE STUDIES IN SECOND YEAR MEDICINE Dr J.J. Finlay-Jones (Clinical Microbiology)

99222 REGIONAL ANATOMY PROSECTION Associate Professor C. Straznicky and Dr I. Gibbins (Anatomy and Histology)

99228 FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS IN HUMAN NUTRITIONt Dr A.R. Grivell (Medical Biochemistry)

99230/99231 SPECIAL TOPIC IN SECOND YEAR MEDICINE Dr J.J. Finlay-Jones (Clinical Microbiology)

99233 CLINICAL LABORATORY COMPUTINGt Dr A.R. Grivell and Mr L.A. Penberthy (Medical Biochemistry)

99234 TOPICS IN THE NEUROSCIENCES - LANDMARKS OF DISCOVERYt Associate Professor R.A. Rush (Human Physiology) and Dr N.R. Sims (Medical Biochemistry)

t Available to students enrolled in any School but preference will be given to B.M., B.S. students.

99245 MOLECULAR BASIS OF DISEASEt Dr N R Sims, Professor M N Berry, Associate Professor G J Barritt, Dr A M Edwards Dr A R Grzvell Dr G H White and Dr M J Whiting (Medical Bzochemistry)

99263/99264 DEATH DYING, LOSS AND GRIEFt Professor A J Radford (Primary Health Care)

99266 ADVANCED FIRST AID Professor V R Marshall (Surgery) and Mr P Arbon (St John Ambulance Assoc)

99301 EXTENDED STUDIES IN MEDICAL SCIENCE Dr A J Wilson (Radzology)

90310/99318 PROJECT IN THIRD YEAR MEDICINE Dr J J Fznlay Jones (Clinical Microbzology)

99311 FOUNDATIONS OF BIOMEDICAL RESEARCHt Dr I Gibbins (Anatomy and Histology)

99312 THE HUMAN GENOME -STRUCTURE FUNCTION AND PATHOLOGYt Dr DR Turner (Haematology)

99313 DRUG AND FOREIGN CHEMICAL (XENOBIOTICS) DISPOSITION IN ANIMALS AND MANt Professor DJ Bzrkett Associate Professor L M H Wzng, Associate Professor J 0 Mzners and Dr K Knzghts (Clinical Pharmacology)

90315/99316 EXTERNAL ELECTIVE STUDIES IN THIRD YEAR MEDICINE Dr J J Fznlay Jones (Clinical Microbzology)

99326 NORMAL FLORAt Mr TR Grimmond and Dr J J Fznlay Jones (Clinical Microbzology)

99321 COUNSELLING IN MEDICAL PRACTICE Dr K Kobayashi (Paedzatrics)

99327/99328 MORPHOLOGY, PHYSIOLOGY AND RADIOLOGY Professor M R Sage (Diagnostic Radzology)

Elective Topzcs

99330/99331 SPECIAL TOPIC IN THIRD YEAR MEDICINE Dr J J Fznlay Jones (Clinical Microbzology)

99332 ENVIRONMENT AND HEALTHt Dr B Stoffell (Medical Ethics Unzt) and Dr R Hunt (Gerzatrzcs)

99333 COMPUTER ASSISTED TEACHING IN MEDICINEt Dr J Fznlay Jones (Clinical Microbwlogy)

99334 MEDICAL MICROBIOLOGYt:J: Mr T Grzmmond (Clinical Microbwlogy)

99335 MEDICAL ETHICS Dr B Stoffell (Medical Ethics Unzt)

99337 CRISIS CARE Associate Professor D 0 Southgate (Primary Health Care)

99339 ALTERNATIVE MEDICINE MEDICAL HYPNOSIS Professor I Maddocks (Medicine)

99340 PRINCIPLES OF NEUROANATOMYt Associate Professor C Straznzcky (Anatomy and Histology)

99341/99342 HEALTH AND MEDICAL CARE IN DISADVANTAGED COMMUNITIESt Professor A J Radford and Dr R Wight (Primary Health Care)

99344 ADVANCED PHYSIOLOGYt Dr WW Blessing (Human Physzology)

99346 PRINCIPLES OF TOXICOLOGY Associate Professor f Mzners (Clinical Pharmacology)

Fourth Year

90449 EXTERNAL ELECTIVE IN FOURTH YEAR

90461190462/90463 FOURTH YEAR MEDICAL ELECTIVE Dr J A Walsh (Surgery)

Umts 9 Co requ1s1te 90490 Fourth year Med1cme non elective aggregate

t Available to students enrolled m any School but preference will be given to B M B S students

:f Available only to students m other schools

381

School of Medicine

These topics comprise programmes of elective study offered w1thm the School of Medicme at Fourth Year level and are designed to provide an opportunity for students to pursue a chosen sub1ect in the form either of a research pro1ect or a d1agnost1c laboratory project m much greater depth than is possible in the core curriculum fhese topics occupy approximately eighteen hours of contact time per week during the relevant term ApproX!mately one third of the class will undertake elective studies 1n each term Projects are available m approX!mately forty separate areas of study and full details of each are proVIded m the Fourth Year electives booklet, copies of which are ava!lable from the Teachmg Resource Umt, Room SE 201, Flmders Medical Centre

B Topics for the Degrees of Bachelor of M ediczne and Bachelor of Surgery

The medical curriculum was designed with three pnnc1ples in mind

(1) that the academic Disciplmes contnbuttng to the medical course should mtegrate their efforts to the highest degree,

(u) that the cumculum should be at all times relevant to patient care, with a steady increase 1n patient contact from the first week of the course onwards

(m) that the curriculum should become progressively less structured as the course proceeds, with didactic teaching giVIng place increasingly to student directed learmng based on solvmg the problems presented by individual patients

The First Year of this curriculum is an mtroduchon to the study of medicme The Second and Third Years are bmlt around the mterd1sc1phnary study of the organ systems of the body m health and disease Fourth Year concentrates on problem solving in relation to md1V1dual pahents and thus helps the student to mtegrate his or her knowledge m the context of pahent care In Fifth Year the student has attachments to the ma1or chn1cal spec1ahttes, the ma1or formal examination comes at the end of this year The student m Sixth Year has an opportumty to act as a trainee intern with respons1b1hty for a limited

382

number of patients under considerable superv!Slon Sixth Year thus provides a lmk with the practice of medicine after graduation In all years, except Fifth Year about 25 o/o of the contact hours in the course are available for elective studies, which may be taken w1th1n or outs1de the School of Med1c1ne

Text books The followmg are the recommended SET BOOKS for the medical course Given the integrated nature of the cumculum, all set books should be retamed for later years First Year students are advised to delay purchase of books unttl counselled durmg onerttatrnn week about availab1hty and possible changes to this hst

Students are expected to procure the latest edition of all set books Those books indicated by an asterisk (*) are available m paperback or student editions

Lists of reference books for each year of the course are included in the syllabuses of core topics for that year

First Year First Aid, 2nd ed (St John Ambulance

Associatrnn 1979) Matthews C K and Van Holde K E

Bzochemzstry (Beniamm /Cummmgs 1990) or Stryer, L Bzochemzstry, 3rd ed (Freeman

1988) Moore, K L The developing human

clinically oriented embryology 4th ed (Saunders, 1988)

Moms J G A bzologzst's physical chemistry 2nd ed (Arnold 1974)*

Vander, A J , Sherman, J H and Luciano, D S Human physzology the mechanisms of body functzon 5th ed (McGraw Hill, 1990)

Second and Third Years R01tt IM Essential immunology, 6th ed

(Blackwell 1988) or R01tt I M Brostoff, J and Male D , 2nd ed

Immunology (Gower 1989) Davidson, L S P Principles and practice of

medicine, 15th ed (Churchill Livmgstone, 1987)

or Harrison, TR Prznczples of internal

medicine 11th ed (McGraw Hill, 1987) or

Kumar, P J and Clark, M L Clinical medicine (Ba!lhere Tmdall 1987)

or Weatherall, DJ ed Oxford textbook of

med1czne, 2nd ed (Oxford UP, 1987) or Stem, J H Internal medicine, 2nd ed (Little,

Brown, 1987) Dunphy, J E and Way, L W Current surgical

diagnosis and treatment, 5th ed (Lange 1981)

West, J B , ed Best and Taylors physzological basis of medical practzce 11th ed (Wiiliams & W1lkms, 1985)

Ross, M H and Romrell, L J Histology, 2nd ed (W1lhams & W1lkms 1989)

Hoffbrand, AV and Pettit, J E , eds Essential haematology, 2nd ed (Blackwell, 1984)

l{atzung, B G Baszc and clinical pharmacology, 4th ed (Appleton & Lange, 1989)

Moore, I{ Clinically oriented anatomy, 2nd ed (W1lhams & W1lkms 1985)

Swash, M, and Mason S , eds Hutchison's clinical methods 18th ed (Balhere Tmdall, 1984)

tWest, J B Respiratory physzology - the essentials, 3rd ed (Wilhams & W1lkms, 1985)

Robbms, S L , Angell, M and Kumar, V Basic pathology, 4th ed (Saunders, 1987)

or Rubm, E and Faber J L Pathology (Harper &

Row, 1988)

Barr, M L The human nervous system, 5th ed (L1ppmcott, 1988)

Kolb, L and Brodie HK H Modem clm1cal psychiatry 10th ed (Saunders 1982)

Stryer, L Bzochemistry, 3rd ed (Freeman, 1988)

Youmans, GP et al The bzolog1c and clinical basis of znfectzous diseases, 3rd ed (Saunders, 1985)

Greenspan, F S and Forsham, P H Baszc and clinical endocrinology, 2nd ed (Lange Medical, 1986)

Moore, K L The developing human cl1nzcally onented embryology, 4th ed (Saunders, 1988)

Page, E W , V11lee, C A and V1llee, D B Human reproduction the core content of obstetrics and gynaecology and perinatal medicine, 3rd ed (Saunders, 1981)

Topics for the Degrees of B M and B S

Fourth Yeai Bochner, F et al Handbook of clinical

pharmacology, 2nd ed (Little, Brown, 1983)

de Launey, WE and Land, WA Principles and practice of dermatology, 2nd ed (Butterworths, 1984)

Elhs, H Clinical anatomy, 7th ed (Blackwells, 1983)

Hull D and Johnston D I Essential paediatncs (Churchdl L1vmgstone, 1981)

or Robinson, M J Practzcal paedzatrzcs

(Churchill L1vmgstone, 1986) Oates, R K. ed Understanding and managing

child sexual abuse (Saunders, Ba1lhere, Tmdall)

Lim, A S M and Constable, K J Colour atlas of opthalmology (P G Medical Books, Smgapore, 1979)

Rook, A J , W1lkmson D S and Eblmg F J G Textbook of dermatology, 4th ed (Blackwell, 1986)

Sax, S H Strzfe of interests politics and polzczes zn Australian health services (Allen & Unwm, 1984)

Walmsley, R N and White G H A guide to dzagnostzc clznzcal chemistry, 2nd ed (Blackwell, 1988)

Fifth Year Aston, J N A short textbook of orthopaedics

and traumatology, 2nd ed (Hodder & Stoughton, 1976)

or Gartland J J Fundamentals of orthopaedics

4th ed (Saunders, 1987) or Pearson, JR and Austm RT Accident

surgery and orthopaedics for students, 2nd ed (Lloyd Luke, 1979)

Tomb, D Psychiatry for the house officer 3rd ed (Wdhams & Wdkms, 1988)

or Gregory, I and Smeltzer, D j Psychiatry

Essentials of clznzcal practice, 2nd ed (Little Brown, 1983)

)ones, P G Clinical paed1atnc surgery, 3rd ed (Blackwell Sc1ent1flc, 1986)

t Tius book should only be purchased 1f West J B ed Best and Taylors phy~mlogical basis of medical practice 1s not purchased Either book 1s smtable as the compamon manual for computer assisted instruction m the Respiratory System Course m second year

383

School of Medzcme

Oates, R K., ed Understanding and managing child sexual abuse (Saunders, Batlhere, Tmdall)

Liechty, R D and Soper, RT Synopsis of surgery, 5th ed (Mosby 1985)

or James E C , Corry, R J and Perry, J F , eds

Prmczples of baszc surgical practice (Hanley & Belfus, 1987)

or Bailey, H and Love, R J Short practice of

surgery, 20th ed (revised by A J Rams and HD Ritchie) (Lewis, 1988)

or Van Way, CV and Buerk, CT Pocket

manual of basic surgical skills (Mosby, 1986)

Llewellyn-Jones D Fundamentals of obstetrics and gynaecology, 4th ed (Faber & Faber, 1986)

O'Shea, RT , ed Reproductzve medicine an outlmefor students, 3rd ed (Flmders Umv, 1988)

Szxth Year Campbell, D and Spence A A Norris and

Campbell's anaesthetics, resuscitation and intensive care, 6th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1985)

Lau, LS , ed lmagzng guidelines (V1ctonan Medical Postgraduate Foundation Inc , 1990)

Medahe, J H Family med1czne (Wdhams & W1lkms, 1978)

Morrell, D C An mtroductwn to primary medical care, 2nd ed (Churchill Livmgstone, 1981)

Talley, NJ and O'Connor, S Clznzcal examznatzon a guzde to physical dzagnoszs (Williams & W1lkms, 1987)

Fzrst Year Course

(First Year Course Co ordinator Assoczate Professor A D Crocker)

The topics compr1s1ng the First Year course, taught by staff from the Schools of B10log1cal Sciences, Physical Sciences and Med1c1ne1 may be taken only by medical students and are designed as an mtegral part of the overall six year medical cumculum The topics cover areas of baste science as a foundation for the study of the body systems m subsequent years and also provide a theoretical and prac!Ical

384

mtroducllon to the social and mterpersonal aspects of practising medicine

The First Year course consists of four topics 90154 Med1cme m the Commumty, 90155 Chemical Basis of Medicme, 90156 B10log1cal Basis of Med1cme and 90157 Cellular Basis of Medicine, in addition to which each student is required to study elective topics amounting to one quarter of the years work

First Year Core Topics

90154 MEDICINE IN THE COMMUNITY DrM f Bond

Umts 7 Class Contact Lectures, tutorials, observation visits and a research pro1ect amounting to 48 hours in the first semester and 68 hours 1n the second semester

The course compnses several sub topics

a) Populallon Studies (fmt semester) b) Behav10ural Basis of Med1cme (fmt

semester) c) Observation V1s1ts in Med1c1ne (first and

second semesters)

d) Introduct10n to Research Design and Analysis (second semester)

e) Research Pro1ect in Community Med1c1ne (second semester)

f) Fmt Aid (second semester)

The aim of this topic is to provide mtroductory knowledge skills m a number of Disc1plmes which are important to the practice of med1c1ne Populatzon Studies (Professor A J Radford) provides basic ideas in human ecology the structures and dynamics of human populations, and the pr1nc1ples of the distnbution and determinants of disease and health care The Behavzoural Basis of Medicine orients the student to skills mvolved m the patient­doctor relationship Communication studies introduces concepts and practical exercises to develop knowledge m aspects of profess10nal communication, Family Studies provides a theorellcal onentat10n to the study of the family system from a health care perspective Observatzon Vmts m Med1czne provide the opportumty to see doctor patient relat10nsh1ps in action, and to report on the behaVIoural aspects of these interactions

Introduction to Research Design and Analysis (Dr M J Bond) mtroduces students to the theory, methods, and apphca!Ions of the statrstrcal analysis of research data The Research Pro1ect m Community Medicine (Dr M J Bond) allows the student to apply the research methods of medrcme m a community context First Aid (Associate Professor D 0 Southgate) rs a course grven by St John Ambulance offrcers that arms to provide medical students wrth some practrcal skills at the begmmng of their medical course

Set books See hst at commencement of Sectzon B Topzcs for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery

Prelrmznary readzng Bolton, R People skills (Prentice Hall, 1979) Bowden C L and Burstern, A G

Psychosocial basis of health care, 3rd ed (Wrlhams & Wrlkms, 1983)

Hams, RD and Ramsay, AT Health care counselling a behavioural approach (Wrlhams & Wrlkms, 1988)

90155 CHEMICAL BASIS OF MEDICINE Dr A M Edwards

Umts 8 Level First year Durat10n One and a half semesters all year Class Contact Frrst semester 3 4 hours per week of lectures, tutonals and practicals Second semester 5 hours per week of lectures, tutorials and practicals Pre reqmsrte Only available to medical students

This topic covers areas of basic organic and physical chemistry and b10chem1stry wrth an emphasis on their application in b1olog1cal systems as a foundat10n for the study of body systems 1n subsequent years It consists of 2 courses

1 Molecules m Medrcme (Dr A M Edwards) second semester

2 Physical Chemistry (Dr D Turner) frrst semester

Molecules in Medicine combines an introduction to some fundamentals of organic chemistry wrth aspects of basrc b10chem1stry m different body tissues An mtroduct10n to

Topics for the Degrees of B M and B S

the nomenclature, bonding, stereochem1stry and ma1or functional groups of organic molecules proVIdes the basis for descnbmg the chemistry of important cell molecules Basic pathways of carbohydrate, hprd and ammo acrd metabohsm and mechamsms for metabolic control and for rntegratrng metabohsm m mdrvrdual tissues are outlined Mechanisms and control of gene expression are descnbed In tutonals, lecture content is considered 1n more chn1cal context

In Physical Chemistry some ma1or concepts relating to the propertres of real and rdeal gases and of aqueous solutions 1nclud1ng colhgative properties, acid bases and buffers, thermodynamics, rate processes and eqwhbna, and redox are presented with emphasis on their appltcahon in b1olog1cal systems, a theme further illustrated in practtcal sessions based around routine tests in a b1ochem1stry dragnostrc laboratory

Set books Fzrst year See hst at commencement of Section B Topics for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference books Alberts, B et al Molecular bwlogy of the

cell 2nd ed (Garland, 1989) Holum, J R Fundamentals of general organic

and bwlogical chemistry, 3rd ed (Wrley, 1986)

Lehnmger, A L Principles of bwchemistry (Worth, 1982)

McGrlvery, R W Bwchemistry a functwnal approach, 3rd ed (Saunders, 1983)

Miller, B Orgamc chemistry the basis of lzfe (Ben1amm 1980)

Montgomery R, Conway, T W and Spector, A A Biochemzstry a case onented approach, 5th ed (Wrley, 1990)

90156 BIOLOGICAL BASIS OF MEDICINE Associate Professor R V Baudrnette

Umts 6 Level Frrst year Duration Two semesters Class Contact Lectures, tutorials, practicals 5 6 hours per week.1 first semester, 4 hours per week, second semester Pre reqmsrte Only available to medical students

385

School of Medzczne

To provtde an 1ntroductlon to the structure and funct10n of the organ systems of the body and the1r embryological ongm The topic consists of 2 courses

1 Structure and Functzon of Human Body -F1rst semester (Associate Professor RV Baudmette and Associate Professor AD Crocker) An overview of the structure and function of the Card1ovascular, Respiratory, Renal and Gast·omtestmal Systems and the control and integrations of their function by Autononuc and Endocrine Systems 1s given In addition the apphcatton of basic phys10logical prmc1ples to the study of adaphons to temperature, exercise and hypoxia is discussed

2 Human Embryology - Second semester (Dr IL Gibbms) An mtroduct10n to the concepts and terminology of human embryology and a survey of early human development up to the end of the fourth week of gestat10n

Set books Fzrst year See list at commencement of Section B Topics for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medzczne and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference books Berne, RM and Levy, M N Physwlogy 2nd ed (Mosby, 1988) Guyton, AC Textbook of medical physwlogy, 7th ed (Saunders, 1986)

90157 CELLULAR BASIS OF MEDICINE Professor A W Murray

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Two semesters Class Contact Lectures, tutonals, practicals 5 hours per week, first semester 7 hours per week1 second semester Pre requ1S1te Only ava!lable to medical students

This topic covers areas of basic science proVId1ng a foundation for material taught in subsequent years of the medical course It consists of three courses

1 Molecular and Cellular B10logy (first semester)

2 Human Genetics (second semester)

386

3 Microbiology and Immunology (second semester)

Molecular and cellular bzology (Professor AW Murray and Associate Professor K 0 Cox) Cell and membrane structure and functlon 1 structure and function of DNA, molecular events in m1tos1s and meiosis, detailed funct10ns of DNA and RNA, the structure and roles of proteins, enzymes cell metaboltsm, bioenerget1cs Prokaryotlc and eukaryotlc cell structure, mitosis and me1os1s, the mechanisms by which unicellular organism::. move, obtain and utlhse nutrients and energy, and reduce, vuuses the ecological role of m1croorgan1srns

Human genetics (Dr N G Brmk) An outlme of basic genetic concepts and of those aspects of human genetics which are of practical significance to medic1nc1 the nature of the genetic processes underlying human evolution

Microbwlogy and immunology (Associate Professor K 0 Cox) The general properties of microorganisms their class1f1cat1on and medical importance1 baste 1mmunolog1cal concepts at the molecular and cellular levels

Set books Fzrst year See list at commencement of Section B Topics for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference books Alberts B et al Molecular bwlogy of the

cell, 2nd ed (Garland 1989) B1rch, C and Abreecht P Genetics and the

quality of lzfe (Pergamon 1976) Brock, TD Bzology of microorganisms,

5th ed (Prenl!ce Hall, 1985) Cavalh Sforza1 L L and Bodmer, W F The

genetics of human populations (Freeman, 1978)

Davis, B D et al Mzcrobzology 4th ed 1Harper & Row, 1989)

Harns, H The principles of human bwchemical genetics, 3rd ed (North Holland, 1980)

Jawetz1 E Review of 1ned1cal m1crobzology1

18th ed (Appleton & Lange 1989) Levitan, M Textbook of human genetics,

3rd ed (Oxford UP, 1988) Matthews, C K and Van Holde, KE

Biochemistry (Ben1am1n & Cummings, 1990)

Nov1tsk1, E Human genetics 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1982)

Postgate, ) Microbes and man 2nd ed (Pengum, 1986)

Rosenberg, E and Cohen, I R Mzcrobzal bwlogy (Saunders, 1983)

Singer, S Hu1nan genetics, 2nd ed (Freeman 1985)

Stamer, RY General mzcrobwlogy, 5th ed (Macmillan 1986)

Thompson, ) S and Thompson, M W Genetzcs zn medzczne, 4th ed (Saunders, 1986)

Wolfe S L Bwlogy of the cell, 2nd ed (Wadsworth, 1981)

NURSING ATTACHMENT Professor A f Radford

Students enrolled m the B M B S course are reqmred to undertake w1thm the Flmders Medical Centre a nursing attachment of five days' duration dunng scheduled vacation penods This attachment must be earned out between the end of the Second Year of the course and the beginning of the Fifth Year of the course Full details of the spec1f1c ob1echves of this attachment, the vacation periods dunng which 1t may be earned out and the grounds on which exemption may be granted are available from the Secretary to the School Board

First Year Elective Topics

Each student is required to take elecl!ve topics amounting to six contact hours a week (or the equivalent of nine units for the year) which must be approved by the Dean or his nommee and are to be selected from

(1) Topics available m any School of the Umvers1ty for which the student has the necessary prerequ1s1tes and which the l!metable for the core topics will permit or

(u) Introductory topics m Chemistry Mathemahcs and/or Physics as appropnate (see syllabuses for topics 74101, 74110, 74120, 77101 and 90112) which students who have not studied Chemistry, Mathematics and/or Physics at Matriculation level must take, or

(m) Such other work as may be d!rected or approved In certain cases this may

Topics for the Degrees of B M and B S

mclude topics mcluded m the hst of Second Year elective topics

Second Year Course

From the commencement of the Second Year of their course, medical students undertake the ma1onty of their studies m the Flmders Medical Centre

Second Year Core Topics

90290 SECOND YEAR MEDICINE NON­ELECTIVE AGGREGATE Assoczate Professor C Straznicky

Umts 27 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact Up to 18 hours per week Pre req u1site Pass in First Year Med1c1ne Co requisite Elective topics amounting to one quarter of the year's work

This topic, together with the Third Year topic 90390 Thud Year Med1cme Non Elecl!ve Aggregate 1s designed to cover pertment knowledge in the D1sc1phnes of B1ochem1stry Anatomy and Histology, Pharmacology, Phystology, M1crob10logy, Immunology, Pathology Haematology Radtology and Primary Care It deals particularly with (1) normal structure and function of organ systems of the body, and (u) basic clm1cal skills 1nclud1ng interviewing techniques and physical examination

The topic occupies two semesters of 14 weeks each Lectures, practicals and tutorials mclude 20 hours per week formal contact time, allowing students opportumt1es for directed self learning usmg tape shdes, displays, demonstrations and computer assisted instruction

The sub topics which make up this ma1or topic the staff members responsible for co ordmatmg them and the number of hours devoted to each are

90271 Tissues and Defence Systems of the Body (Dr D Turner) 83 hours m the first semester

90272 Musculo skeletal System (Associate Professor C Strazmcky) 74 hours m the first semester

90273 Nervous System (Professor M Costa) 63 hours 1n the first semester 46 hours 1n the second semester

387

School of Medzczne

90274 Endocrme/Reproduchon/Gastro mtestmal Systems (Dr S Judd, Dr C Lunam and Associate Professor A M Mackmnon) 97 hours m the second semester

90275 Renal/Respiratory/Card1ovascular System (Dr C Damels, Associate Professor TE Nicholas, Associate Professor B) Gannon) 100 hours m the second semester

90276 Psyc1'osoc1al Psychobrnlog1cal Systems (to be advised) 40 hours m the first semester

90277 Introduction to Chmcal Skills (Dr A Ramsay) 40 hours m the first semester

90278 Cell Brnlogy (Associate Professor G Barritt) 35 hours m the lust semester

The topics 'Tissues and Defence Systems of the Body, 'Cell B10logy', 'Musculo Skeletal System' and 'Psychosocial/Psychob10logical Systems' will be assessed at the end of the first semester The topic 'Introduction to Chn1cal Skills' will be assessed at the end of Third Year All other topics will be assessed at the end of the second semester

Set books See hst at commencement of Section B Topics for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medzczne and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference books Alberts, B et al Molecular bzology of the

cell, 2nd ed (Garland 1989) Bailey, H Demonstratzons of physical signs

zn clznical surgery 17th ed (Wnght 1986) Bondy, PK and Rosenberg, LE Metabolic

control and disease, Btb ed (Saunders, 1980)

Bowden, C L and Burstein, A G Psychosocial basis of medical practice, 2nd ed (Wilhams & Wilkms, 1979)

Cecil R LaF Textbook of medicine, 18th ed (Saunders, 1988)

Clemente, C D Anatomy, a regional atlas of the human body, 3rd ed (Urban & Schwarzenberg, 1987)

Davenport, H W Physzology of the digestive tract an introductory text, 5th ed (Year Book Medical, 1982)

Fawcett, D W Textbook of histology, 1 lth ed (Saunders, 1986)

Fenner, F J and White, D 0 Medical virology, 3rd ed (Academic, 1986)

388

Ganong, W F Review of medical physzology 13th ed (Appleton & Lange, 1987)

Goodman, L S and Gilman, A The pharmacological baszs of therapeutics 7th ed (Macmillan, 1985)

Hampton, J R , ed Cardiovascular disease (Hememann Medical, 1983)

Harvey, A M et al Principles and practice of mediczne, 22nd ed (Appleton & Lange, 1988)

)uhan, D G Cardzology, 5th ed (Bailhere Tmdall, 1988)

Kandel, E R and Schwartz, J H Pnnciples of neural science 2nd ed (Elsevier, 1985)

Kaplan, H I and Sadock, BJ Synopszs of psychiatry, 5th ed (Williams & Wilkms, 1988)

Kempe, CH et al Current pediatric diagnoszs and treatment, 9th ed (Appleton & Lange 1987)

Kmg, D W , Fenogho, C M and Lefkowitch, ) H General pathology (Lea & Febiger, 1983)

Mims, C A The pathogenesis of mfectzous disease, 3rd ed (Academic, 1987)

Papper, S Clinical nephrology, 2nd ed (Little Brown, 1978)

Ross Russel, R W and Wiles, CM Neurology (Hememann 1985)

Shepherd, ) T and Vanhoutte, PM The human cardiovascular system (Raven, 1979)

Sle1senger, M H and Fordtran, JS , eds Gastrointestinal disease, pathophyszology, d1agnos1s, management, 4th ed (Saunders 1989)

Smith, EL et al Principles of bwchemzstry, 7th ed (McGraw Hill 1983)

Smith, J) and Kampme, ) P Circulatory physzology - the essentials, 2nd ed (Wilhams & Wilkms 1984)

Smith, L H and Thier, S 0 Pathophyszology the bzological principles of dzsease 2nd ed (Saunders, 1985)

Stanbury ) B et al Metabolic baszs of mherzted dzsease, 5th ed (McGraw-Hill 1983)

Stedman, A Stedman 's medical dzctzonary, 25th ed (Mosley, Wilhams and Wilkms 1990)

Sterling, G M Respiratory disease (Hememann, 1983)

Talley, N) and O'Connor, S Clinical examination a guide to physical dzagnoszs (Wilhams & Wilkms, 1987)

Troup1n, R H Diagnostic radzology zn clznzcal medzczne 2nd ed (Year Book Medical, 1978)

Valt1n H Renal functzon mechanisms preserving fluzd and solute balance in health, 2nd ed (Little Brown, 1983)

Walker, HK et al Clznzcal methods, 3rd ed (Butterworths 1988)

Walmsley, R N and White, G H A guzde to dzagnostzc clznzcal chemzstry, 2nd ed (Blackwell, 1988)

Wes~ J B Pulmonary pathophyszology- the essentzals, 3rd ed (Williams & Wilkms 1987)

Wheater, PR et al Functzonal hzstology, 2nd ed (Churchill Livmgstone, 1987)

Williams, RH Textbook of endocrinology, 7th ed (Saunders, 1985)

Wills, E D Bzochemzcal basis of medzczne (Wnght 1985)

Wright, R et al Liver and bzlzary disease, 2nd ed (Saunders 1985)

Yen S SC and Jaffe RB, eds Reproductzve endocrinology - physzology pathophysz ology and clznzcal management1 2nd ed (Saunders, 1986)

Second Year Elective Topics

In add1t10n to the core topics descnbed above each student is required to take elective topics amounting to approximately six contact hours per week during the standard academic year which must be approved by the Dean or his nominee and must be selected from among

(i) Topics available m the School of Med1cme or m any other School of the Umversity for which the student has the necessary pre reqws1tes and which the !Imetable for the core topics will permit, or

(11) such other work as may be directed or approved

Second Year level elec!Ive topics offered w1thm the School of Medicme will mclude those listed at the start of the School of Medicine syllabuses under Section A Some Third Year level topics may also be smtable for Second Year students Full details of the topics hsted and information concerning any topics which may subsequently be added to the hst of those avadable are proVlded m the booklet School of Medzczne Electzve Programme, which 1s available from the

Topzcs for the Degrees of B M and B S

Teaching Resource Unit, Room SE 201, Flmders Medical Centre

Thzrd Year Course

Third Year Core Topics

90390 THIRD YEAR MEDICINE NON ELECTIVE AGGREGATE Associate Professor C Straznzcky

Umts 27 Level Third year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Up to 18 hours of lectures, seminars tutonals, etc per week Pre requisite Pass in Second Year Med1c1ne Co requ1s1te Elective topics amounting to one quarter of the year's work

ThIS topic is a contmuat10n of 90290 Second Year Med1cme Non Elective Aggregate cover 1ng knowledge in the same Disciplines as listed under that topic It mcludes (1) dzseased structure and function of the organ systems hsted below covering chntcal manifestations and the prmc1ples of therapy but not the details of diagnosis or treatment and (u) baszc clznzcal skzlls 1nclud1ng 1nterv1ew1ng techniques and physical examination In addi!Ion to the sub topics hsted below, two mtegra!Ing themes will be studied m each of the first and second semesters for 14 hours each semester

Topic 90390 occupies two semesters of 14 weeks each, embodying up to 20 hou1s per week of fonnal contact and will follow the format for topic 90290

The sub topics which make up the ma1or topic 90390, the staff members responsible for coordmatmg them and the number of hours devoted to each are

90371 Tissues and Defence Systems of the Body (to be advised) 72 hours m the first semester

90374 Endocrme/Reproduchon/Gastro mtestmal Systems (Dr S Judd, Dr J A Need, and Associate Professor A M Mackmnon) 95 hours m the second semester

90375 Renal/Respiratory/Card1ovascular Systems (Dr L J Barratt, Dr P Marshall and Dr P Aylward) 118 hours m the first semester

389

School of Medzcme

90376 Psychosocial/Psychobiological Systems (Dr R Pols) 43 hours m the first semester and 44 hours in the second semester

90377 Introduction to Chmcal Skills (Dr M Fraenkel) 21 hours m the fmt semester and 21 hours in the second semester

90379 Musculo skeletal/Nervous Systems (Dr M Rozenb1lds and Associate Professor J Willoughby) 89 hours m the second semester

The topics 'Tissues and Defence Systems of the Body and 'Renal, Resptratory and Cardiovascular Systems' will be assessed at the end of the fmt semester All other topics will be assessed at the end of the second semester

Set books See hst at commencement of Section B Topzcs for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medzcme and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference books Ane!I, S , ed The American handbook of

psychiatry, 2nd ed (BaSlc Books, 1974 75) Bailey, H Demonstratwns of physzcal szgns

m clzmcal surgery, 17th ed (Wnght, 1986) Bates, B A guzde to physzcal exammatwn

and hzstory takmg, 4th ed (L1ppmcott, 1987)

Bowden, C L and Burstein, A G Psycho social basis of medical practice 2nd ed (W1lhams & W1lkms, 1979)

Cooke, RA and Stewart, B Colour atlas of anatomical pathology (L1vmgstone, 1987)

Copeman W S C ed Textbook of the rheumatic diseases 6th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1986)

Davenport H W Physwlogy of the digestive tract an mtroductory text, 5th ed (Year Book Medical, 1982)

Dick, W C An mtroductwn to clinical rheumatology, 2nct ed (Churchill Livingstone, 1984)

Furness, J B and Costa M The enterzc nervous system (Churchill L1v1ngstone, 1987)

Greenspan, F S and Forsham, P H Baszc and clmzcal endocrmology, 2nd ed (Lange Medical, 1986)

Hall, R et al Fundamentals of climcal endocrmology, 3rd ed (Pitman, 1980)

Kaplan, H I and Sadock B J Synopszs of

390

psychiatry, 5th ed (W1lhams & W1lkms 1988)

Kempe, C H et al Current pedzatrzc diagnosis and treatment, 9th ed (Appleton & Lange, 1987)

Mason M and Currey, H L F Clznzcal rheumatology 4th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1986)

Macleod, J Clmzcal exammatzon, 7th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1986)

Page, E W et al Human reproductzon essentials of reproductive and permatal medzcme 3rd ed (Saunders, 1981)

Robbins, S L et al Pathologic basis of dzsease, 3rd ed (Saunders, 1984)

Schiff, L , ed Dzseases of the liver, 6th ed (L1ppmott, 1987)

Sleisenger, M H and Fordtran J S , eds Gastrozntestznal dzsease pathophysrology dzagnoszs, 1nanagement, 4th ed (Saunders 1989)

Taylor, KB and Anthony, LE Clzmcal nutrztzon (McGraw Hiii, 1983)

Wahlqv1st, M L ed Food and nutrztzon in

Australza, 3rd ed (Nelson, 1988) Walker, H K et al Clzmcal methods, 3rd ed

(Butterworths, 1988) Way, L W Current surgzcal dzagnosis and

treatment, 8th ed (Lange Medical 1988) Wheater, P R , Burkitt, H E , Stevens, A and

Lowe, JS Baszc hzstopathology (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1985)

W1lhams, RH Textbook of endocrmology 7th ed (Saunders 1985)

Yen, SSC and Jaffe RB eds Reproductive endocrinology - physzology, pathophysz ology and clznzcal management 2nd ed (Saunders, 1986)

Zilva J F and Pannell, P R Clznzcal chemistry in dzagnoszs and treatment, 4th ed (Year Book Medical, 1984)

Thtrd Year Electtve Topirs

As 1n the earlier years of the course, each student 1s required to take elective topics amounting to approximately six contact hours per week during the standard academic year (or the eqmvalent of mne umts) which may be chosen from topics available in other Schools or w1thm the School of Med1cme and must be approved by the Dean or nommee Third Year level elec!Ive topics offered withm the School of Med1cme will mclude those hsted at the start of the School of Med1cme syllabuses

under Section A Some Second Year level topics may also be smtable for Thud Year students Full details of the topics hsted and information concerning any topics which may subsequently be added to the hst of those available are provided in the booklet School of Medicine Elective Programme, which is available from the Teaching Resource Unit Room SE 201, Flinders Medical Centre

Fourth Year Course

The Fourth Year of the course provides students with an opportunity to reinforce, digest and apply material covered in the Second and Third Year organ systems courses It extends over three terms of twelve weeks each with a vacation of two weeks between each term One term is devoted primarily to elective studies

Fourth Year Core Topics

90490 FOURTH YEAR MEDICINE NON ELECTIVE AGGREGATE Assoczate Professor L M H Wzng

Umts 27 Level Fourth year Dura t10n Full year Pre requisite Pass in Third Year Medicine Co requ1s1te Elective topics amounting to one quarter of the year's work

This mdJO .. topic consists of six sub top1cs1

each of which is assessed separately 1n add1t1on to which there are lectures and tutorials on a number of other sub1ects which are not separately assessed The sub too1cs are

90451 Case Studies (Associate Professor P Robert> Thomson) Under close supervision from tutors, students direct their own learning acllvilles based on the study of selected cltn1cal cases Each student 1s expected to document fully and present at least one case every fortnight Presentations focus on both chmcal and underlying basic science aspects of the case and are attended by staff members from the appropriate chn1cal and basic science disc1phnes

Case studies are based on actual patients in the wards or consulting chn1cs and are intended to provide

Topics for the Degrees of B M and B S

students with the opportumty and incentive to (a) continue to study baSlc medical

science (b) correlate basic science with chn1cal

problems, (c) seek 1nformahon for themselves (d) prepare a problem oriented

medical record and evaluate the relevant scient1f1c, chn1cal and social information obtained,

(e) define the principles underlying d1agnos1s 1nveshgabon, treatment, rehab1htation and prevention

90452 Chmcal Sktlls (Dr P A Frith)

The class 1s divided into nine or ten groups and one group at a time undertakes a four week block devoted 1n a concentrated manner to chn1cal skills In addit10n students have weekly clinical skills tutorials in Med1c1ne and Surgery throughout the year and chmcal skills tutorials in Psychiatry throughout one term On completion of this course students should be able to (1) interview a pallent and ehcit a

comprehensive history 1nclud1ng psychosocial factors,

(2) perform a full phySlcal exammallon, (3) idenllfy common and elementary

diagnostic procedures useful in the management of the pallent

(4) idenllfy pallents' problems by refemng to their history and to the results of the physical examination and relevant diagnostic procedures

(5) present this information 1n writing or orally 1n a clear concise and cohesive manner

90453 Anatomy D1Ssect10n (Dr M E ) ones) 50 hours The aim of this topic is to ensure that each student has a clear mastery of the baste anatomical knowledge necessary for the d1agnos1s and treatment of common cltnical conditions Students work m groups of approX!mately eight each group d!Ssectmg a whole body

90454 Chmcal Pharmacology (Associate Professor) 0 Mmers) 40 hours

In this topic students consoltdate their

391

School of Medicine

knowledge ofbastc pharmacology and place 1t m a pracl!cal chmcal settmg by concentratmg on therapeutic problems Students will also be introduced to aspects of drug regulation and evaluation and other issues such as non prescription drugs

90455 Health ServJces (Dr A M Stewart) 50 hours The course has three components (a) Issues m the proVIston of health

services Exammes the history of health services 1n Australia alternate methods of prov1dmg and fmancmg health care and evaluat10n of health serVJces A group project is part of this component

(b) Observat10n of health serVJces Students V1s1t a range of health services to develop a working knowledge of resources ava!lable to md1v1duals and groups m South Austraha

(c) Occupat10nal and environmental health (Associate Professor D Southgate) Covers ma1or influences on health and disease of people m the natural, altered and work environments

90456 Chmco patholog1cal Correlat10n (Dr M A M Rozenb1lds) 54 hours A series of patient based studies with student part1c1pat.Ion in which basic pr1nc1ples, mechanisms of disease and patho phys10log1cal alterat10ns will be correlated with chmcal and prognosl!c features of disease Most of the course will be 1n a problem solving classroom settmg but all students will also be expected md1v1dually to observe and participate 1n 3 post mortem exam1 nations There is an end of year exam1natlon

The other subjects covered by whole class studies in Fourth Year are

(1) Introductzon to Chemical Pathology (Dr G White) 7 hours

(u) Sexual medicine (Dr M Bond) 12 hours

(m) Specialties E NT (Dr G D Beaumont) 12 hours, Opthalmology

392

(Professor D Coster) 10 hours, Dermatology (Dr M Hanna) 4 hours

(1v) Immunological and znfectzous diseases (Professor P j McDonald and Professor j Bradley) 7 hours

(v) Orthopaedic Practice (Dr R Southwood) 18 hours

(VI) Clinical epidemzology (Professor I Maddocks and Dr j Lttt) 20 hours

(vu) Behavzoural medicine (Dr M Bond) 12 hours

Set books See hst at commencement of Section B Topzcs for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference books Bailey, H Demonstrations of physical signs

zn clinical surgery, 17th ed (Wnght, 1986) Bouch1er I A D and Morns, j F Clinical

skills, 2nd ed (Saunders 1982) Chnstopher, F Textbook of surgery 12th ed

(Saunders, 1981) Dilts, P V et al Core studies zn obstetrics

and gynaecology, 3rd ed (Wtlhams & Wtlkms, 1981)

Encyclopaedia of occupatzonal health and safety, 3rd ed (Internahonal Labor Orgamsat10n 1983)

Fairburn, C G et al Sexual problems and thezr management (Churchtll L1VIngstone, 1983)

Forrest, A D et al Companion to psychiatric studies, 2nd ed (Churchtll L1vmgstone 1978)

Galen, RS and Gambmo, S R Beyond normality the predictive value and efficiency of medical diagnoses (Wiley, 1975)

Gartland j j Fundamentals of orthopaedics, 4th ed (Saunders, 1987)

Gordon D Health, sickness and society (Queensland U P , 1976)

Gregory, I and Smeltzer, D j Psychiatry -essentials of clinical practice 2nd ed (Little, Brown 1983)

Hughes, j G Synopsis of pediatrics, 6th ed (Mosby, 1984)

)ones, P G Clinical paediatric surgery, 3rd ed (Blackwell, 1986)

Kaplan, H I and Sadock, B J Synopsis of psychiatry, 5th ed (Wtlhams & Wtlkms, 1988)

Kempe C H et al Current pediatric diagnosis and treatment, 9th ed (Appleton & Lange, 1987)

MacLeod, J Clznzcal examznation, 7th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1986)

Naish, J M et al The clinical apprentice, 5th ed (Wnght 1978)

Nelson, WE Textbook of pediatrics, 13th ed (Saunders, 1987)

Page E W et al Human reproduction essentials of reproductzve and perinatal medicine 3rd ed (Saunders, 1981)

Pappworth, M H A przmer of medicine, 5th ed (Butterworths, 1984)

Pearson, J R and Austm RT Accident surgery and orthopaedics for students, 2nd ed (Lloyd Luke 1979)

Rook, A et al Textbook of dermatology, 4th ed (Butterworths, 1986)

Rubm E and Farber J L Pathology (L1ppmcott, 1988)

Sax, S A strzfe of interests polztzcs and polzczes zn Australian health services (Allen & Unwm 1984)

Sclullmg, RS F ed Occupatzonal health practice, 2nd ed (Blackwell, 1981)

Swartz, M H Textbook of physical diagnosis (Saunders, 1989)

Symmers, W St C , Systemic pathology, 3rd ed (Churchdl L1vmgstone, 1987 et seq)

Turner, AL Logan Turner's diseases of the nose, throat and ear, 10th ed (Wnght, 1987)

Vaughan, D and Asbury, T General ophthalmology, 10th ed (Lange, 1983)

Vulhamy D G The newborn child 6th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1987)

Fourth Year Elective Topics (Dr f Walsh)

In the Fourth Year of the medical course the ma1or1ty of students are expected to take elective topics offered m the School of Med1c1ne These topics occupy approximately eighteen hours of contact time per week for one term Further details are given 1n the Syllabuses for topics 90461190462/90463 under sect10n A at the start of the School of Med1cme entry

Fifth Year Course

90590 FIFTH YEAR MEDICINE AGGREGATE Professor f Toouli

Umts 36

Topics for the Degrees of B M and B S

Level Fifth year Duration Full year Pre requisite Pass in Fourth Year Medicine

This ma1or core topic consists of the sub topics 90551 Med1cme I, 90552 Surgery I, 90553 Obstetncs and Gynaecology, 90554 Paediatncs, 90555 Psychiatry and 90560 Objective Structured Clm1cal Exammation

There is no provision for elective studies durmg Ftlth Year Durmg this year one fifth of the class 1s attached at any one time to one of the chmcal units listed above and rotates through all units throughout the year Each term 1s of seven weeks duration In addition to the chn1cal attachments students part1c1pate throughout the year m the followmg weekly act1v1t1es

a) Correlat10n sess10ns (opt10nal) (Dr M A M Rozenb1lds) 30 hours

b) Chmcal pharmacology semmars (Associate Professor L M H Wmg) 30 hours,

c) Semmars on utlhsatlon and interpretation of diagnostic procedures (Dr RN Walmsley, Professor P J McDonald, Professor J Bradley Associate Professor P Roberts Thomson and Professor M Sage) 31 hours and

d) Sess10ns on ethics and medico legal matters (Dr A Ved1g) 10 hours

It 1s mtended that durmg the Fifth Year of the course, the student should consohdate and develop the skills and knowledge acqmred m the prev10us years of the course and should apply these skills and knowledge to the care of patients In particular the student should acquire practical skills and experience in the total care of patients and at the end of the year should be able to

1 a) arrive at a diagnosis, b) formulate a plan of pal!ent manage

ment c) prescribe drugs in a rational manner, d) assess patient care and progress e) write a comprehensive problem

orientated medical record

2 Perform specific procedures deterrn1ned by the md1v1dual chmcal D1sc1phne

3 Select and interpret simple laboratory tests and x-rays

4 Find information from vanous sources 1nclud1ng the library, in the ma1or areas of med1c1ne

393

School of Mediczne

90551 MEDICINE I Dr R J M cRitchie

Umts Not applicable (eqmvalent to 7 2) Level Fifth year Duration Seven weeks Pre requ1s1te Pass in Fourth Year Med1c1ne

I Attachment to a clinical unit a) Students are attached mdmdually or

in pairs to spec1f1ed clln1cal units for the whole of their seven week assignment There are eight medical units, each of which is regarded as a general unit with a special interest As working members of a chn1cal unit, students will part1c1pate m the clm1cal care of the patients of that umt from the Accident and Emergency Department through to the wards, laboratones, theatres and outpatients

b) Students part1c1pate mall the workmg activttles of their unit including ward rounds, x ray sessions and other unit meetings

c) Students complete case hIStones and discharge summanes on the patients for whom they take particular respons1b1llty At least five such h1stones are reviewed for assessment

2 Clinical tutorials Four tutonals general med1c1ne, neurology and card1ology are conducted each week for all students

3 Outpatient attendances During their medical attachment students may attend outpatient sessions of their awn unit and specialist clinics of other units They are required to attend one dermatology outpatients clinic each week

Set books See hst at commencement of Section B Topzcs for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference book Scarer, G and Wing, A Deczszon making zn mediczne-the practice of its ethics (Edward Arnold, 1979)

90552 SURGERY I Dr J A Walsh

Umts Not applicable (eqmvalent to 7 2)

394

Level Fifth year Duration Seven weeks Pre requ1s1te Pass 1n Fourth Year Med1c1ne

1 Attachment to general surgical unzts Students are attached to a surgical tutor for the term including 2 weeks in Orthopaedic Surgery Each student IS

expected to clerk patients admitted under the care of their tutor Clerking entails recording history examination and the construction of a problem orientated case record with appropnate progress 1nformat1on and d1scha1ge summary These case records will be discussed and assessed by the student's tutor Students are expected to part1C1pate m all the ac!Iv1t1es of the surgical umt to which they are attached These include x-ray sessions, ward rounds and attendance at outpatients They are also rostered for emergency duty when their tutor's firm ts on 'take' far emergency adm1ss1ons While attached to the surgical units, students follow their awn patients' progress and this includes attendance at operations, special diagnostic procedures and treatment sessions such as phySiotherapy Each day the students attached to the general surgical units attend either a ward round or a chn1cal tutonal dunng which they present cases for d1scuss1on Students on take' are also expected to spend as much time as possible in the Accident and Emergency Department

2 Clznzcal tutorials

Throughout the term a senes of teachmg sessions are programmed to cover chn1cal aspects of general surgery, orthopaedics vascular surgery, breast surgery, urology and other spec1ahsed areas which may not be covered dunng the attachment to the general surgical umt There will be at least one patient oriented' tutorial each day and these will take precedence over other chn1cal commitments

Set books See hst at commencement of Section B Topics for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference books Apley, AG and Solomon, L Concise

system of orthopaedics and fractures (Butterworths, 1988)

Badey, H Demonstratwns of physical and clinical signs surgery, 17th ed (Wnght, 1986)

Badey, H and Love, R) M Short practice of surgery 20th ed (Lewis 1988)

Campbell, D and Spence, A A Norris and Campbell 1s anaesthetics resuscitation and mtenswe care 6th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1985)

McRae, R Clznzcal orthopaedic examznatzons, 2nd ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1983)

90553 OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY Dr R O'Shea

Umts Not apphcable (eqmvalent to 7 2) Level Fifth year Duration Seven weeks Pre requ1s1te Pass in Fourth Year Med1c1ne

The aim of this topic 1s to eqmp students with a knowledge of the core content and basic skills necessary for problem solving in Obstetrics and Gynaecology at the pnmary care level

At the end of the course students should be able to

a) Recognise and 1n1tiate management of disorders of the female reproductive system, counsel women with these disorders and treat common gynaecological problems

b) Diagnose pregnancy, manage the ante natal and post natal course of a normal woman and counsel her regardmg health care during pregnancy,

c) Recognise and 1n1hate management of obstetric abnorrnahhes and emergencies and counsel women regarding these problems

d) Understand the prmc1ples of management of labour and deliver and resuscitate an infant 1n an emergency

e) Counsel couples regardmg contracept10n

The course is not intended to train students to manage labour under normal circumstances This 1s the provmce of the vocat10nal trammg programmes for General Practitioners and Specialist Obstetncians The course begms with an 1ntens1ve four day programme of resource sessions for the presentation of core

Topzcs for the Degrees of B M and B S

material and practice of basic skills During the remamder of the term students (1) are attached to an Obstetric and

Gynaecological Unit, (u) attend special chmcs, mcludmg Family

Planning and Inferhhty Chn1cs, as rostered

(m) attend the Labour and Dehvery Suite, as rostered,

(1v) attend Seminars, Chn1co Patholog1cal Conferences and Small Group Tutorials

Set book 0 Shea, R ed Reproductive M edzczne - An outlzne for students, 3rd ed (available from Department of Obstetrics & Gynaecology)

Reference books Be1scher NA and Mackay, RV Obstetncs

and the newborn an illustrated textbook, 2nd ed (Saunders, 1986)

Dilts, P V et al Core studzes zn obstetrics and gynaecology 3rd ed (W1lhams & W1lkms 1981)

Llewellen )ones, D Fundamentals of Obstetrics & Gynaecology, vol I Obstetrics vol II Gynaecology 4th ed (Faber & Faber, 1986)

Page, E W et al Human reproduction essentzal.s of reproductive and perinatal medicine, 3rd ed (Saunders 1981)

90554 PAEDIATRICS Associate Professor D Lznes

Umts Not applicable (equivalent to 7 2) Level Fifth year Duration Seven weeks Pre requisite Pass in Fourth Year Med1c1ne

1 Azn1s To acqmre a thorough knowledge of the growth and development of the normal child and of the con1mun1ty resources prov1dmg care to healthy children To be able to manage with proper understandmg of the basic phys10log1cal and b1ochem1cal factors Involved, the common diseases of newborn infants and children To be able to manage the common behav10ural and psychological problems of children

2 Course Outlzne The course involves teaching In neonatal perinatal med1c1ne, paed1atnc med1c1ne

395

School of Medzczne

paediatnc surgery, child psychiatry and community paed1atncs Students are allocated mto two groups throughout their seven week paed1atnc attachment Activ1hes in which the students are required to part1c1pate include ward rounds, outpatient chn1cs, community based chtld health service vts1ts, medical specialty tutorials and alhed health tutorials

Set books See hst at commencement of Section B Topics for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medzcme and Bachelor of Surgery In add1twn students should purchase lecture notes on paed1atnc orthopaedics and surgery, by Freeman and Foster

Reference books Behrman, RE Neonatal perznatal medzczne

3rd ed (Mosby, 1983) Clements, A Infant and family health m

Australia (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1986) Hughes, J G SynopSls of pediatrics, 6th ed

(Mosby, 1984) Jones, P G Clim cal paediatric surgery, 3rd ed

(Blackwell Scient11Ic, 1986) Klaus M H and Fanaroff, A A Care of the

high risk neonate, 3rd ed (Ardmore Medical, 1986)

Nelson, W E Textbook of pediatrics, 13th ed (Saunders, 1987)

Robinson M) Practical paediatrics, 1st ed (Churchill L1vmgstone 1986)

90555 PSYCHIATRY Dr M B Battersby

Umts Not applicable (eqmvalent to 7 2) Level Fifth year Duration Seven weeks Pre requ1s1te Pass 1n Fourth Year Med1c1ne

1 Course Outline

396

Students are allocated to psychiatrists and registrars for experience in in patient and out patient work, ha1son psychiatry, cns1s 1ntervenhon etc The students are expected to clerk a minimum of three patients dunng this time Clerkmg will entail recordmg hIStory full examination and the preparation of a problem orientated case record with appropriate progress 1nformat1on and

discharge summary Students will keep a log book and are expected to cover a number of chmcal problems These mc!ude exposure to a range of disorders (e g schizophrenia rna1or affective disorders, neurotic disorders), a range of presentations (attempted su1c1de, decompensahon in cns1s etc), spec1f1c treatment expenences (a group achv1ty adm1mstratwn of E C T etc ) and other more general chn1cal expenences One case will be wntten as a comprehensive case commentary The log book requires the students to summanse the sahent chn1cal features of a case and then discuss any ISsue the case h1ghhghts for the student ThIS reqmres an entry of approximately 400 words

2 Seminars One case conference will be held each wee!< ThIS will take the form of two case presentations and d1scuss1on with a psychiatrist A weekly semmar covermg a range of topics m general psychiatry will be held Child Psychiatry semmars will be held on a term basis These involve the observation of the most common emotwnal problems affectmg children A weekly seminar will be conducted 1n psychoger1atncs and four tutonals deahng with the role of a chmcal psychologISt will be held

Set books See hst at commencement of Sectzon B Topics for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference books Forrest AD et al Companion to psychiatric

studies, 2nd ed (Church11l L1vmgstone, 1978)

Kaplan, H I and Sadock, B ) Synopsis of psychiatry, 5th ed (W1lhams & W1lkms, 1988)

or Kendell RE and Zealley, A K. Companion to

psychiatric studies, 4th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1988)

Szxth Year Course

90690 SIXTH YEAR MEDICINE AGGREGATE DrA/C Bune

Umts 36 Level Sixth year Durat10n Full year Pre requ1s1te Pass 1n Fifth Year Med1c1ne

In SIXth Year the student 1s required to apply the skills and knowledge acqmred m earlier years of the medical course to the care of patients and m particular will have an opportumty to

a) acquire experience in, and undertake respons1b1hty for, patient care under close superv1s1on,

b) study and acqmre skills ma field of special mterest to the student and

c) undertake further study and acqmre greater skills m particular fields which the students may not yet have mastered to a satisfactory standard

The work of the topic consists of seven sub topics which are descnbed below Each of these topics occupies one term of six weeks In add1tton each student will have a six week vacation term All students will be reqmred to undertake the final six week term at an approved post within South Australia Students will not, therefore be permitted to undertake an out of State elective term nor a vacation term in Term VIII

Set books See hst at commencement of Section B Topics for the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery

Reference books Atkmson R S et al A synopsis of

anaesthesia, 10th ed (Wnght, 1987) Hampton J R The E C G made easy, 3rd ed

(Churchill L1vmgstone, 1973) Hodgkm, K Towards earlier diagnosis A

guide to Przmary Care, 5th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1986)

Sokolow, M and Mcilroy, MB Clznzcal cardiology, 4th ed (Lange Medical, 1986)

Warne, R and Pr1nsley, D , eds A manual of geriatric care (Wiiliams & W1lkms, 1988)*

90651 MEDICINE II DrM Ahern

During this term students are assigned to one of the SIX medical umts at the Repatriation General Hospital, Daw Park Students are

Topics for the Degrees of B M and B S

expected to take part 1n the routine running of the ward, admitting and clerking patients and hVIng 1n as required Students are required to present cases at weekly radiology, cltn1cal pharmacology and medical tutorials

A comprehensive tutorial programme is provided By the complet10n of the term students will have acqmred some manual skills and ab1hty to haISe with allied health professionals

90652 SURGERY II DrPA Dupont

In this term students are attached to a surgical unit at the Repatriation General Hospital, Daw Park where they function as student interns Students attend datly tutorials, are involved 1n case conferences in general surgery and other spec1aht1es and attend chn1cal pharmacology tutorials and postgraduate meetings

90653 PRIMARY HEALTH CARE Professor A f Radford and Associate Professor D O Southgate

This topic has two components 1 The public health, acute and emergency

care and geriatric medicine Two weeks are devoted to issues in pubhc health, acute and emergency care and geriatric med1c1ne The Pubhc Health Section involves visits and d1scuss1ons related to communicable diseases various aspects of domestic violence, drug abuse and government issues 1n health care A series of half day themes in issues of acute and genatnc care cover patient assessment and management, eqmpment, techmques and health care resources

2 General practice The one month general practice component consists of a two week attachment to a rural practice in South Austraha, one week to a group general practice and one week to a single doctor practice 1n the metropolitan area Dunng these attachments students are expected to be closely mvolved m all aspects of general practice mcludmg the undertakmg of minor procedures and assisting in patient educat10n

397

School of Medicine

90654 and 90655 CLINICAL OPTION I AND CLINICAL OPTION II Dr A f C Bune

Students are reqmred to take two further chn1cal terms 1n the Flinders Medical Centre or affiliated institutions to be selected from the D1sc1phnes of Anaesthesia and Intensive Care (co ordinator, Dr P Brownrzdge), Obstetrics and Gynaecology (Dr R Bryce), Orthopaedics (Dr C Bradley), fcc1dent and Emergency (Dr C Baggoley), Paediatrics (Associate Professor D Lznes), ENT/Derma tology (Dr GD Beaumont and Dr M Hanna) Psychiatry (Dr D Ben Tov1m), Opthalmology (Professor D Coster), Rad10 logy (Professor M Sage), Vascular Surgery (Dr f Walsh), Palhat1ve Care (Dr L Langford), Plas!Ic Surgery (Dr R Hamilton) and Rehab1htatton Med1c1ne (Professor D Smith) As with the other cltn1cal terms, these chn1cal options are to be chosen for general content dunng them the student 1s to work as a student intern and is not expected to pursue the spec1altsed interests of a particular chn1cal group

90656 and 90657 ELECTIVE I AND ELECTIVE II Dr A f C Bune

These terms may be undertaken w1tP the Fhnders Medical Centre or outside 1t anywhere 1n the world Students are required to seek out terms of direct relevance to this stage of their medical training which may include basic research work In a diagnostlc laboratory or in a wide range of chnical areas Approval may be given in some cases for students to spend their two elective terms and the vacatlon term on an extended programme of research, pre vocational training, or attachment to, for instance, a health centre in a developing country

C Topics for the Honours Degree of Bachelor of Medical Science

The regulat10ns govemmg the Honours Degree of Bachelor of Medical Science are set out in Schedule 12 to Statute 7 1 Bachelors' Degrees and Diplomas The work for the degree consists of the smgle topic 91401 Honours Medical Science

398

91401 or 91402/91403 HONOURS MEDICAL SCIENCE Associate Professor TE Nicholas

Umts 36 Level Honours Duration Full year, In exceptional cases may be taken on a part lime basis (91402/91403, first and second years) Pre reqms1te Three years of B M , B S from Fhnders Un1vers1ty, or equivalent

The work of the topics comprise the followmg which must all be presented for assessment in a single year

a) A research project leadmg to the subm1ss1on of a thesis (50o/o of total marks plus 5% for the supervisor's assessment of the candidate's laboratory skills)

b) Coursework or other written assignments (30 % of total marks) Candidates will be required to submit essays aqd research proposals or, where appropriate to take topics offered m the School of Med1cme or elsewhere, and

c) Semmars (15% of total marks) Each student is required to present a brief proposal for the project and two bnef progress seminars during the year In addition, there is a 45 minute final seminar which is assessed Also students will be expected to attend relevant seminar senes m the School

D Topics for the Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science

The regulations governing the Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science are set out 1n Schedule 25 to Statute 7 1 Bachelors Degrees and Diplomas The work for the degree consists of the smgle topic 91410 Honours Science (Med1cme)

91410 HONOURS SCIENCE (MEDICINE) Associate Professor TE Nicholas

Umts 36 Level Honours Duration Full year Pre requtsite B Sc ordinary degree

The work of the topic compnses the followmg which must all be presented for assessment 1n a single year

Topics for the Degree of Master of Nutrztzon and Dietetics

a) A research project leading to the subm1ss1on of a thesis (50o/o of total marks plus So/o for the supervisor's assessment of the candidate s laboratory skills),

b) Coursework or other written assignments (30% of total marks) Candidates wdl be required to submit essays and research proposals or where appropriate, to take topics offered m the School of Med1cme or elsewhere and

c) Semmars (15% of total marks) Each student is required to present a brief proposal for the project and two bnef progress seminars during the year In add1hon, there is a 45 minute final seminar which 1s assessed Also students will be expected to attend relevant seminar series m the School

E Topics for the Degree of Master of Nutrztzon and Dzetetzcs

The overall aim of this course 1s to train graduates for practice as chn1cal or community d1ehhans and nutnt1on1sts The spec1f1c aims are (a) To produce graduates who have the knowledge and skills to work as base grade d1et1t1ans nutr1t1on1sts in hospitals or commumty settmgs, (b) To give students a broad view of the place of food m people's hves, and skills to enable them to understand the role and respons1b1hhes of health care professionals, (c) To foster diversity of interests among the students (d) To encourage inter disciplinary approaches to the management of nutnt10nal problems, and (e) To mtroduce the students to 1state of the art' nutrition practice, a vision of the future and a sense of the history of both the practice of nutrition and d1etet1cs and of their sc1enhflc underpinning The course extends over two academic years During the first year students undertake 7 topics and 10 the second year 5 topics

Set books Better Health Comm1ss10n (Austraha)

Nutrition Task Force Towards better nutrztzon for Australia (AGPS, 1987)

Davidson, S Principles and practzce of medicine, 15th ed (Churchdl L1vmgstone, 1987)

Mason M, Wenberg, BG and Welsh PK Dynamics of clinical dietetics (Wiiey & Son 1987)

Passmore, R , Eastwood, M A and Davidson, A Human nutrrtron and

dietetics, 8th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone 1986)

Stewart, L and Hunwick, H Nutrition zn food service (Hosp1tahty Press, 1988)

Thomas, B Manual of dietetic practice (Blackwell Sc1ent1f1c 1988)

Thomas S and Carden, M Metric tables of compositzon of Australian food (AGPS 1982)

Truswell, A et al Recommended nutrient intakes Austrahan papers (Australian Profess10nal, 1990)

Reference books Bnggs, D and Wahlqmst M Food facts

(Pengum 1984) Francis, D Diets for sick children (Blackwell

Sc1entif1c, 1987) Harns RD and Ramsay AT Health care

counsellzng a behavioural approach (W1lhams & W1lkms, 1988)

Holh, B B and Calabrese, R j Communz catron and education skills the dzetztzan s guide (Lea & Feb1ger 1986)

Owen, A Y and Frankie, RT Nutrition in the community the art of delzverzng services (Times Mirror/Mosby, 1986)

Reid, R L Healthy eating zn Australia a practical guzde to food nutrztzon and diet (Hyland House, 1984)

Truswell, AS ABC of nutrztzon (Bn!Ish Medical Assoc, 1986)

92431 COMMUNITY ORGANISATION FOR HEALTH Dr F Baum and Ms LA Daniels

Umts 2 Level Postgraduate, Year 1 of M N D Course

This topic concerns the social understanding of health It will examine those aspects of our society which he outside the formal health system but none the less have a considerable impact on the health of the commumty Issues analysed w1ll 1nclude community care, urban planning, transport, housing, violence and the environment The topic extends through first semester, consists of weekly plenary sessions followed by a tutorial Students will be expected to keep a readmg log book aimed at developing skills in cr1hcal analysis

92432 HUMAN NUTRITIONAL SCIENCES Associate Professor G / Barritt

399

School of Medicine

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate, Year 1 of M N D Course

The aim of this topic is to allow students to take advanced study of the b10chemistry and physiology relevant to nutnhon which underlie the practice of nutrition and dietetics, to gain a knowledge of drugs and their 1nteractton wtth nutrients and to obtain an apprec1atlon of the hm1tat10n of knowledge of the nutnbonal sciences Lectures, tutorials and self duected readmg Wiil mclude d1scuss10n of the composit10n and metabolism of the basic nutrients, nutrient input and energy metabohsm, VItam1ns, minerals, trace elements and fibre, a review of systems physiology, drug nutrient interactions and the chemistry of the action of anti oxidants and free radicals

92433 NUTRffiON IN HEALTH AND DISEASE Ms LA Daniels and Professor P Nestel

Umts 8 Level Postgraduate, Year 1 of M N D Course

This topic provides a theoretical, sc1enttf1c basts for the role of nutrition in the prevention of illness and treatment of disease It extends through first and second semesters and includes lectures from medical and dietetic staff, case study based workshops and practical tutorials

92434 NUTRffiON CARE PRACTICE (CLINICAL) Ms LA Daniels

Umts 6 Level Postgraduate, Year 1 of M ND Course

This topic provides a range of opportunities to develop the chmcal and profess10nal skills necessary to practice as a dietitian nutntion1st These include short placements in health care fac1hties to observe the role of the dietitian in a vanety of settings and ward allocations to provide interaction with patients and practice of 1nterv1ew1ng sktlls The topic extends throughout the year and also compnses lectures, tutorials and assignments Communication studies and counselling are mcluded

400

92435 NUTRffiON CARE PRACTICE (COMMUNITY) Dr A M Stewart

Umts 9 Level Postgraduate, Year 1 of M N D Course

This topic is to prepare students for nutnhonal care practice in community settings The aims are to enable students to develop a knowledge base of nutritional components of pnmary health care practice Students will also be introduced to issues such as the evolving poltttcal m1heu 1n which community nutntion IS practiced They will be expected to perform a community needs assessment, demonstrate skills 1n nutr1t1on education and undertake a group pro1ect

92436 FOOD STUDIES I (TECHNICAL AND PRODUCTION) Dr A M Stewart

Umts 3 Level Postgraduate, Year 1 of M ND Course

This topic deals Wlth food from the perspective of the dietitian nutnt10mst The focus IS on factors which influence the ava1lab1hty of particular foods and their nutr1t1onal contr1but1ons The aims are to provide a foundation of knowledge about food on which students can develop connections between food, nutnt10n and health Students will be given an overview of systems of food production processing, marketing and d1stnbut1on in Australia and also of the role of government in regulating and mon1tor1ng the actlv1hes of food manufacturers

92437 FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT Ms LA Daniels

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate, Year 1 of M N D Course

This topic aims to provide an understanding of the role function and management of large scale food serv1ce systems Areas considered include the role of the dietitian in food service, menu planning and analysis, hygiene, safety f1nanc1al controls, quahty assurance, accreditation, personnel management and 1ndustr1al relations Small scale food

Topics for the Degree of Master of Nutritzon and D1etet1cs

preparat10n skills mcludmg recipe mod1f1catlon will be developed through a series of prac!Icals The topic extends through second semester and will include lectures, tutorials practical assignments and v1s1ts to a vanety of food services fac1hties

92525 NUTRITION CARE PRACTICE II Ms LA Daniels

Umts 18 Level Postgraduate, Year 2 of M N D Course

This topic is designed to enable students to develop and refine their practitJ.oner sktlls and extend, consohdate and apply their knowledge of nutnhon and d1etehcs tn both cltn1cal and community settings It consists of supervised pracbcal work for 21 weeks dunng Second Year Coursework mcludmg lectures tutorials and case studies aimed at consohdahng education counselling and teamwork skills, will be held m blocks durmg the years

92526 ELECTIVE IN NUTRIDON AND DIETETICS DrD Topping

Umts 9 Level Postgraduate Year 2 of M N D Course

The aim of this topic ts to allow students to gain advanced knowledge 1n an area of nutnt10n and d1ete!Jcs Students will be required to undertake either a research pro1ect, 9 umts of appropnate topics m other courses offered at Flmders Umvers1ty or another approved institution, or a detatled hterature review on a specific topic The research pro1ect and hterature rev1ew1 which will occupy 10 weeks1 may be on any approved topic 1n the field of nutnt1on and dietetics such as a laboratory based project or a project which involves the assessment of nutnhonal needs of a subgroup of the commumty

92527 PROFESSIONAL MANAGEMENT AND ADMINISTRATION MsLA Daniels

Umts 3 Level Postgraduate, Year 2 of M N D Course

This topic provides an 1ntroduct1on to the issues and tools of management It examines the management of roles of dietitians n utnhonxsts 1n a vanety of practice settings and considers a range of professional issues

92528 CURRENT ISSUES IN NUTRITION Dr A M Stewart and Dr R B Gibson

Umts 3 Level Postgraduate, Year 2 of M N D Course

This topic 1s to enable students to develop their skills m cn!Ical thmkmg for the analysis of both sc1ent1f1c and lay literature Lecture sessions are focussed on the d1scuss1on of recent developments 1n nutnt1onal science and chn1cal nutrition and also items which appear 1n the media Emphasis is placed on students1

commun1cation skills 1nclud1ng fundamentals of written and oral sc1enttfic presentations

92529 FOOD STUDIES II (SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL) Associate Professor G J Bamtt (Interim)

Umts 3 Level Postgraduate Year 2 of M N D Course

The aims of this topic are, firstly, to promote the development of social and ecological issues which are related to systems of food production and d1str1but1on and their consequences for human nutnt1on A second aim 1s to examine actions which are required to ensure sustainable food systems and more eqmtable chstnbu!Ion of food By the end of the topic students should be able to 1dent1fy ways 1n which nutr1t1on1sts can address these issues in their professional practice

92430 CONVERSION COURSE FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF NUTRIDON AND DIETETICS Associate Professor G J Bamtt

Not offered m 1991

Umts 18 Level Postgraduate Year 2

This course 1s available to graduates holdmg the Bachelor of N utnt10n and D1ete!Ics degree from Flmders Umvers1ty This topic will be an advanced elective of 10 weeks full lime study

401

School of Medzcme

or of 20 weeks on a part time basis Candidates who successfully complete the convers10n course will be awarded the degree of Master of Nutnt1on and Dietetics upon surrender of their Bachelor of Nutr1t1on and D1etet1cs degree

F Topics for the Degree of Master of Nutrztzonal Sczence

The aim of this course is to prepare students for research 1n an area of nutrition and d1etehcs1 to undertake teaching, or other act1V1hes m the field of nutnt10n Students who have been awarded the M N S degree will not be ehgtble to practice as dtebbans and nutnhon1sts if the M N S degree is their sole quahf1cat1on 1n the spec1f1c area of nutntton and dietetics

Set books As descnbed for the precedmg M N D course

Reference books As descnbed for the precedmg M N D course

The followmg topics m the M N S course are the same as those rn the M N D course

Community Organ1satlon for Health Human Nutnbonal Sciences Nutr1hon in Health and Disease Food Studies I (Techmcal and Product10n)

Descr1phons of these topics are presented under the topic descnpt1ons for the preceding MN D degree

Students will be reqmred to undertake the 4 umt topic 95005 Data and Measurement for Health A descnphon of this topic 1s given under the Master of Science (Pnmary Health Care)

92438 NUTRITION EDUCATION Assoczate Professor G f Barritt (Interzm)

Umts 5 Level Postgraduate Yearl ofM NS Course

The aim of this course 1s to introduce the student to the ma1or theories from which nutntJ.on education strategies are designed, and to allow the student to gam an under standing of the analysis and assessment of nutntlonal data Topics to be discussed will mclude the theoretzcal and practzcal basis of nutnhonal education, an overview of the nutr1t1onal care process, analysis and

402

assessment of data, interpretation of food mtake data and mterpretatzon of medical records and associated ternunology

92439 INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH METHODS Assoczate Professor G f Barritt (Intenm)

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate, Year 1 of M N S Course

This aim of this topic 1s to provide students with slnlls necessary for the formulation and conduct of an independent research pro1ect, the analysis ol research data, and the oral and written presentation of research reports The topics to be presented will include 1nformahon retrieval cr1tical evaluation of the hterature, design of population surveys, oct.upational health and safety, the formulation of research proposal and the oral and wntten pre>entat10n of research fmdmgs

Topzcs available zn Flinders Unzverszty or another znstztutzon Assoczate Professor G f Barritt

Umts 6 Level Postgraduate, Year 1 ofM NS Course

Students will be reqmred to take 6 umts of approved topics from other courses offered by Flinders Un1vers1ty or courses offered rn another approved 1nshtuhon Topics at Flmders Umvers1ty which might be considered are as follows

Topic No Topic Unit Value

36120 Psychology IS 9 36336 State of Awareness 3 68110 Con1puter Science 1 9 68115 Computer Programming 45 65103 Elements of Data Analysis 3 65104 Elements of Statrstrcal Science 3 65205 Statistical Science 6 86226 Behaviour and Neurobiology 3 68228 Molecular B10logy 3 87371 Neurob10logy A 3 87372 Neurob10logy B 45 88352 M1crob10logy 6 88361 Immunology 45 89341 Topics m B10technology 45 99326 Nonna! Flora 45 99207 Alcohol and its Effects 45

99234 90276

Topics in Neuroscience Psychosocial and Psychobrnlogical Systems

92500 THESIS IN NUTRITIONAL SCIENCES Associate Professor G J Barritt

Umts 36

45

45

Level Postgraduate, Year2ofM NS Course

The aims are to conduct a self contained research project to gain laboratory bench skills or skills in the collectrnn of data to make cnhcal evaluation of experimental data and to provide a perspecllve of the background and future prospects of a research pro1ect Students will be expected to conduct research for a period of 10 months and to wnte the results of the report as a thesis

G Master of Science (Primary Health Care)

The degree of Master of Science (Pnmary Health Care) is designed for medical nursmg science and other graduates who are expenenced health care workers and who seek a higher degree in apphed pubhc health The study programme provides an opportunity to develop educational, community development and research skills through group part1c1pahon 1 pro1ect and field work Analyt1cal th1nk1ng, research design, pro1ect management and wnting skills will be extended through the complel!on of a successful thesis Collaborallon of students and staff from relevant d1sc1phnes and emphasis on vocattonal education create a unique envtronment for advanced study and research

The degree offers six graduate health programmes, namely Pnmary Health Care, Palhat1ve Care, Community Mental Health, Addictrnn Studies, Commumty Child Health and Health Educatrnn

Core Units Core stug1es are designed to address the knowledge, attitudes and skills necessary to work effecllvely m the field of Primary Health Care with indiVIduals, within organ1satlons and at a community level Integration of learning occurs as units are hnked concurrently and sequenl!ally

Master of Science (Primary Health Care)

Primary Health Care (Co ordinator Ms L Barclay)

The Primary Health Care programme consists of a total of 72 units, of which 36 units are coursework (24 in core studies and 12 in electives) and 36 units are thesis Core topics are as follows

The Social Context of Health 95001 Commumty Orgamsatrnn

Um ts

and Health 4 95002 The Management of Services

m Primary Health Care 4

Educatzon 95003 The Process of Learnmg 95004 Health Programmes

Evaluatzon

4 4

95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95006 Community Health Research 4

(1) The Social Context of Health investigates the ecology of health and health systems and describes social polit1cal1 economic and argan1sat1onal influences on health and the health system Addit10nally, strategies and approaches for the management of community health services which foster inter sectoral workmg Wiii be examined

(u) Educatzon addresses the educallonal roles and funct10ns of the health practitioner and compnses theoretical concepts related to learning and skills of mformmg and effectmg change m 1nd1vtduals, fam1hes, organisations and commun1hes There 1s ma1or emphasis on health promohon and community development skills and strategies

(m) Evaluatzon explores the measurmg and assessing funct10ns of the health practitioner by exam1n1ng theoretical concepts and skills necessary to research factors m community health These mclude design and methods, demography, ep1dem1ology1 quahty assurance and measures to ueterm1ne the effectiveness of programmes and 1ntervent1ons

Elective Studies Approved elechves are available withm the programme

1 The followmg topics have been developed

403

School of Medzcme

Umts

95009 Health Counsellmg 6 95010 International Health 6 95020 Systematic Approaches to

Children Family and Community 6

95021 Child Commumty Mental Health 6

95029 IndIVIdual Study m Pnmary Health Care 6

95035 Healthy C1!Ies The New Pubhc Health m Ac!Ion 6

95037 Women's Health 6

2 Core topics in any of the spec1ahst programmes are available as electives for students enrolled in other spec1ahst programmes

In add1tion, topics are available 1n Masters Level courses offered by the Schools of Education, Social Sciences and Nursing Students who wish to enrol in a topic offered by another ms!Itu!Ion may apply for the topic to be accepted as an approved elective

Research In add1!Ion candidates will submit a theSIS m Primary Health research undertaken w1thm the special area for which they are enrolled Thirty SIX umts of theSIS must be taken mcludmg 95007 TheSis Preparat10n Semmar and 27 umts from the followmg topics

Units

95102 Thesis work 1n progress Semester I 9

95103 Thesis work in progress Semester II 9

95104 Thesis work in progress Semester I 13 5

95105 Thesis work 1n progress Semester II 13 5

95106 Thesis work 1n progress Semester I 18

95107 Thesis work 1n progress Semester II 18

Palhative Care (Co ordinator Professor I Maddocks) The Pall1at1ve Care programme consists of a total of 72 umts, of which 36 umts are coursework (30 1n core studies and 6 in elecllves) and 36 umts are thesis Part of the core will be shared with the Primary Health

404

Care programme (above), with tutorials and pro1ects specific to Palhahve Care Specific Palha!Ive Care topics are

95023 The Practice of Palhallve Care 6 95024 Psychological Aspects of Palhat1ve

Care (opt10n) 4 95025 Oncology Aspects of Palhat1ve

Care (opt10n) 4 95026 Community Care and Orgamsa!Ion 4

Pallzatzve Care Speczalist Topics These umts will provide basic knowledge and pracllcal skills for all who pracllce Palhallve Care and will mclude a strong emphasis on communication and education skills It is envisaged that each student will brmg particular skills to Palhattve Care, but none wdl have a comprehensive set of skills embracing all the relevant areas of medical science, nursing practice, behavioural and pastoral care

Fieldwork Vanous topics will have a fieldwork component which will require students to part1c1pate in palhattve care programmes in various locations, g1v1ng opportunity for comparisons and evaluations, as well as practical experience in hospital assessment, home care, in patient hospice care, bereavement follow up and palhallve care

Electives One elective will be available to students undertaking the Palhahve Care ma1or See Primary Health Care elecllves (above) for details

Commumty Mental Health (Co ordinator Dr G Martin)

The Community Mental Health programme consists of a total of 72 umts, of which 36 units are coursework (28 units in core studies and 8 umts m elecllves) and 36 umts are thesis Part of the core will be shared with the Pnmary Health Care programme (above) with three topics exclusive to Community Mental Health

Community Mental Health Specialist Topics Units

95017 Mental Health Programmes 4 95018 Commumty Mental Health

Research 4 95019 The Basis of Commumty

Mental Health 4

Electzve Studies Students will be expected to take elective topics offered by the Department of Psychiatry Child and Adolescent Mental Health Semces and by the School of Nursmg Studies See Pnmary Health Care Electives (above) for details Note particularly 95020 and 95021

Commumty Child Health (Co ordinator Assoczate Professor D Lznes)

The Commumty Child Health Programme consists ofa total of 72 umts of which 36 umts are coursework (36 m core studies) and 36 um ts are theSis Part of the core will be shared with the Pnmary Health Care programme (above)

Communzty Chzld Health Speczalzst Topzcs

95030 95031 95032

Child Development Maternal and Child Health School and Commumty Health

Electzves

Umts 6

4 4

While 6 umts of elective studies are available for students enrolled m the graduate diploma program, M Sc candidates will be reqmred to take 95006 Commumty Health Research

Health Education (Co ordznator Mr G Banfzeld)

The Health Education programme consISts of a total of 72 umts of which 36 umts are coursework (30 1n core studies and 6 1n elecllves) and 36 umts of theSls Part of the core will be shared with the Pnmary Health Care pro gramme (above) Specific Health Education topics are

95033 Health Educat10n 4 95034 Health Educat10n Programmes 4

Addiction Studies (Co ordznator Dr R Pols) The Addiction Studies programme consists of a total of 72 units, 36 of which are coursework and 36 are theSis Part of the core wdl be shared with the Pnmary Health Care programme (above) and part will be offered m Special Addict10n Studies

Addzctzon Studzes Speczalzst Topzcs Umts

95011 The Basis of Add1ct1ve BehaVIour 4 95012 Drug Related Problems 4 95027 Addictive BehaVIour Research 4

Master of Sczence (Przmary Health Care)

95028 Intervent10n Skills m Addictive BehaVIour 4

95036 Health Programmes m Add1ct10n BehaVIour 4

Addiction StudleS examines the nature of addictive behaviour from b1opsychosoc1al perspectives and examines theoretical concepts of pharmacology, phys10logy, b10chem1stry, social psychology and ep1dem10logy of drug use and skills necessary to the assessment of drug related problems

Electzve Studzes Only students who have obtained exemptions from part of the spec1ahst programme will be able to elect to do up to 12 units of elective studies References Alcohol and other drug problems education

and traznzng requirements of practztzoners Report to the M1mstenal Council on Drug Strategy for the Task force on Trammg Requirements of Professional and Non Profess10nals entcrmg the Drug and Alcohol Field

Pols, R G and Henry Edwards S The role of general health workers zn detectzon and early znterventzon for alcohol and other drug problems (NH&MRC, 1988)

Rlchmond, R and Webster, I Become a non smoker (Hememan, 1988)

95001 COMMUNITY ORGANISATION AND HEALTH DrF Baum

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 11/2 hours plenary session, 2 two hour tutonal each week Pre reqmSite Entry to M Sc (Pnmary Health Care)

Ob1ectzves At the end of thIS topic, students will be able to

descnbe socio political organ1sahon w1th1n the Austrahan community, demonstrate knowledge of and ab1hty to use ep1dem1olog1cal pnnc1ples and methods, demonstrate an awareness of d1ffer1ng community and health needs across age, gender, cultural and socio economic spectra,

405

School of Medicine

understand the organ1sation of health care in Australia, demonstrate a knowledge of development, trans1t1on and change processes at 1nd1v1dual and community levels, demonstrate an understanding of the econom1c constraints and dec1s1ons mvolved m health systems

Content Community def1n1t1on theones and cultures Community organ1sahon pnnctples, polttical and econom1c factors in community organ1satton The orgamsal!on of the health system

Case study Med1bank to Medicare Health economtcs at macro and commun1ty level Health and welfare plannmg h1Story and future

Describing the populat.J.on and its commun1bes Age and gender vanables m health Social change and Health for AU Power and leadership m group change

Set books Sax, S A Strife of interests (Allen & Unwm,

1984) M1ntzberg, H Power zn and around

organizations (Prentice-Han, 1983)

Reference books Lee, R and Lawrence, P Organzzatzonal

behaviour polztzcs at work (Hutchinson, 1985)

Repetto, R The global possible resources, developments and the new century (Yale UP, 1986)

World Health Orgamzat10n Intersectoral action for health the role of mtersectoral co operation (WHO, 1986)

Scott, R Organzzatzons ratzonal, natural and open systems, 2nd ed (Prenl!ce Hall, 1987)

95002 MANAGEMENT OF SERVICES IN PRIMARY HEALTH CARE

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate Duration One semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre reqms1te 95001 Commumty Orgamsal!on and Health

Ob1ectwes At the end of this topic, students will be able to

406

Describe health service organisations 1n terms of m1ss1on, structure membership, resourcing, programmes and accountab1hty Show understandmg of the role of managers in health service organ1sahons 1nclud1ng their respons1b1hhes to mon1tor, ma1nta1n and develop product1v1ty and asS1st the service to functron w1thm budgetary restraints Show appreciatron of the skills and charactenshcs of the health servtce manager 1nclud1ng an assessed and accurate perception of their own strengths and weaknesses in these skills Demonstrate ab1hty to wnte terse and usable reports summanes, letters and subm1ss1ons Show understandmg of a vanety of methods and media by which health service managers may keep informed on worker produchv1ty and f1nanc1al controls Use innovative and creative approaches to people and issues, including team bu1ld1ng, conflict resolution, integrative methods and networking for 1ntersectoral co operation Show appreciatron of the external community as the rec1p1ent group for services and the possessor of vital 1nformahon on sernce needs and service adequacy

Content Management leadership framework for primary health care sernces theory and processes A ma1or proiect in management/ leadership of health services ts undertaken 10 syndicate groups and reported a) as outcomes 1n a publtc seminar and 10 wntten report, and b) as process man md1v1dual student diary

Set books Bates, E and Linder Pelzs, S Health care

issues, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1990) Frtedman, E Making choices ethzcal issues

for health care professwnals (Amencan Hospital Pub , 1986)

Reference book Rakich J J , Longest B B and Darr, K

Managing health servzces organizations, 2nd ed (Saunders, 1985)

95003 THE PROCESS OF LEARNING Ms L Barclay

Umts 4 Level Masters

Duration One semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None Co reqms1te 95001 Commumty Orgamsat1on and Health

Ob1ect1ves At the complet10n of this topic students will be able to

demonstrate slalls, as pnmary health care workers, in providing and promoting adult learmng on health and social issues w1thm their chent commun1ty1

act profess10nally to achieve social change for health m collaborat10n with the chent community, analyse social change activities in primary health care practice on the basis of relevant educational theory,

1dent1fy the personal, social and ethical dilemmas associated with applying social health models when dehvenng primary health care, cntically evaluate theory and p .. actice in achieving social change through education

Content Contents to be covered in the topic include adult learning community development, popular educat1on1 community education media and promotion, behaviour mod1ficahon and group learning

Set book Brookfield, S , Understanding and faczli

tating adult learning a comprehensive analysis of principles and effective practices (Open UP 1986)

Reference books The apphcat10n of learmng theory and methods to primary health care 1s qmte recent Journals provide a useful source of relevant examples with which students will be expected to become fam1har These Journals include Commumty Health Studies Australian Journal of Social Issues, Australian Society Amencan Journal of Public Health, Preventive Med1cme New Doctor Monographs, government and local govemmert reports will also be drawn on e g Reports of DIStnct Health Councils m V1ctona, Health for All Austrahans and Pohcy Documents from the Social Health Branch of the South Austrahan Health Comm1ss10n

Master of Science (Prrmary Health Care)

95004 HEALTH PROGRAMMES Ms L Barclay and Dr F Baum

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 2 4 hours per week (mcludes field work expenence) Pre requ1s1te 95003 The Process of Learning

At the end of this topic, the student will be able to

consult with communities, groups and mdlV!duals to determine health needs and establish co operative working relattonsh1ps1

use ep1dem1olog1cal, social and behavioural measures to establish programmes and goals, plan a health programme to meet established reeds and goals1

implement a programme In primary health care evaluate the effectiveness of a pnmary health care programme1

Students will have previous knowledge of data gathering and programme evaluation which will be drawn on m the topic Subiects to be covered include needs analysis, consultation, programme evaluation programme research, programme plann1ng/des1gn programme 1mplementatton/adm1n1strahon programme 1mplementatlon/evaluat.Ion

Set book Southern Community Health Services

Research Unit Plannzng healthy commun­ities (S C H R U S A Health Comm1ss10n, 1990)

Reference book Southern Commumty Health Services

Research Umt Planning healthy commun itzes (S C H R U S A Health CommISSion, 1990)

95005 DATA AND MEASUREMENT FOR HEALTH Dr I Litt

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requmte None This topic will be available for external enrolment (by DIStance Educauon) m 1991, although students may do the topic mternally

407

School of Medzcme

Ob1ectives Provide student with a theoretical framework for a vanety of research methods to assess health issues, and evaluate the effectiveness and eff1c1ency of health care services

accessing information and cr1hcal appraisal of the literature measurement of health status needs assessment qualitative ard quantitative research design samplmg, reliability and validity

Set books Mason, E J and Bramble, W j Understanding

and conducting research applications in education and the behavioural sczences, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1989)

Feuerstein, M Partners zn evaluation (Macmillan 1986)

Reference books Leeder, S , ed Research on health zn human

populatwns (Menzies Foundatton 1988) Rowntree D Statistics without tears

(Pengum, 1981)

95006 COMMUNITY HEALTH RESEARCH Dr f Litt and Dr N Piller

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te 95005 Data and Measurement for Health This topic will be ava!lable for external enrolments (by Distance Education) m 1991, although students may do the topic internally

Azms (1) To provide skills m plannmg and

conducting research 1n a primary health care setting

(11) To acqmre the skills necessary to prepare and defend a research proposal at NH&MRC or eqmvalent level

(111) To develop slnlls m usmg a microcomputer as an xnvesttgahve tool 1n health care research

(1v) To develop computer and statIShcal awareness and hteracy

(v) To evaluate the role of research m pnmary health care

408

Ob1ectives Develop cnt1cal reasoning and observational research skills Jdenl!fy and clanfy a Sigmficant problem relevant to an area of pnmary health care Develop a research outline and proposal to NH&MRC (PH&RDC) standards, Select an appropriate research design for a research questton/ob1ecttve1 Describe summarise and present different types of research data 1nclud1ng statistical, quahtatlve1 demograph1c1 ep1dem1olog1cal 1

Understand and descnbe the relat10nsh1p between research and theory 1n a primary health care settmg Develop baSic computmg skills on a P C computer 1nclud1ng data entry, man1pu latlon and application of appropriate basic statistical tests

Set books NorusIS, M J, SPSS/PC Studentware (SPSS,

1988) Mason, E j and Bramble, W j Understanding

and conducting research applzcatzons zn education and the behavzoral sciences, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1989)

Reference books Cohen, L and Holliday, M Statzst1cs for the

social scientists (Harper & Row, 1987) Pagano, R R Understanding statistics in the

behavioural sciences, 2nd ed (West Publishing, 1986)

95007 THESIS PREPARATION SEMINAR

Umts 9 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (Seminar) Pre requ1s1te Coursework for the degree will normally be completed before enrolment m thIS topic

Content The aim ts to assist the candidate to develop a research proposal which will be achievable within the time and other expectat10ns of the M Sc and which will be acceptable to the approved thesis supervisor At completion of the Thesis Preparation Seminar the candidate will have (1) refmed a research quest10n and stated hypotheSis, (2) negotiated the support 1n principle of an agency or government department 1f appropriate, (3) negol!ated the involved parttc1pahon of one or more industry

workers as 'stake holders' 1n successful completion of the project (4) negotiated a contract for supervis1on with an approved 11n house' supervisor, (5) written and refined a research proposal, (6) conducted and presented an initial review of hterature

95009 HEALTH COUNSELLING Ms E Cooper

Umts 6 Level Postgraduate Duration One semester Class Contact 52 hours arranged as 13 lectures Pre requ1s1te None

Ob1ectzves To provide a theoretical basis for health counselhng and supervised experience in competency development, using simulated learning settings, video tape

Content The defln1t1on of illness, hm1hng the effects of illness or 1n1ury rehab1htatlon following Illness and the promotion and maintenance of health form the major themes m which counsellmg 1s presented as an option for the primary health care worker Counselling is analysed and practised as a problem - resolution method, as an educational medium and as a vehicle for behav10ur change

Set books Harns, RD & Ramsay, AT Health care

counselling (Williams & W1lkms 1988) Egan, G The skilled helper (Brooks Cole

1990)

Reference book Watson, D L and Tharp, R G Self d!Tected

behavwur, 5th ed (Brooks Cole, 1989)

95010 INTERNATIONAL HEALTH Professor A/ Radford

Umts 6 Level Masters Durat10n 3 weeks full time Class Contact 5 6 hrs/ day x 5 days/week a mIXture of lectures, seminars, tutonals and practical sessions Pre requ1s1te Usually admission to Masters Programme, but also open to all graduates 10 health related professions and semor medical students

Master of Science (Primary Health Care)

Ob1ectzves The course 1s specifically designed for doctors, nurses and other health professionals going to work in developmg countnes or 1n isolated regions such as among Aborigines There are seven streams 1n the course First deals with the fac1htat10n of health care delivery m developing countries with special reference to primary health care, looking at issues such as health and development, community part1c1pa!Ion issues m family health water and health and illness, and usmg case studies from Asia, Papua New Guinea rural commumty and Abongmal Australia Second concerns ep1dem10logy, demography and anthropology Third - orgamsat10n and management of health care Fourth -prevention, management, control and d1stnbuhon and determinants of common 1nfect1ous diseases with special reference to 1mmun1sahon Fifth - other chn1cal issues Stxth self care in the tropics Seventh -assistance either of m1croscopy and parasttology for doctors and laboratory techn1c1ans, essential chn1cal skills for nurses, supervised reading for others

Set books No text books reqmred

Reference books A readmg list is provided

95011 BASIS OF ADDICTIVE BEHAVIOUR Dr R G Pols

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate Duration One semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requlSlte Masters entry

Ob1ectwes At the completion of thIS topic, students will be able to discuss the nature of addictive behaviour 10 1nd1v1duals, groups and society, demonstrate a knowledge of the pharmacology, phys10logy, b10chem1Stry, social psychology and ep1dem1ology of drug use demonstrate a knowledge of the acute and chrome effects of drugs most commonly associated with drug related problems and demonstrate advanced knowledge in the assessment of drug use in mdlVlduals and groups

409

School of Medicine

Content This top1c examines the nature of add1ct1ve behaviour from multiple theoretical b1opsychosoc1al prospectives

95012 DRUG RELATED PROBLEMS Dr R G Pols

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate Duration One semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requ1S1tes Masters entry 95011 Basis of Add1chve Behaviour

Ob1ectwes At the complet10n of this topic, students will be able to critically assess 1nd1v1dual and group drug use and drug related problems develop strategies to distmgmsh pnmary drug related problems from other medical, social or psychiatric disorders develop a range of strategies to intervene in med1cal, social psycholog1cal, legal and occupat10nal problems resultmg from drug use for 1nd1v1duals, demonstrate knowledge of the management of acute intoxtcatlon or overdosage of drugs of abuse, demonstrate knowledge of the management of withdrawal from drugs of abuse, demonstrate knowledge and skills m the behavioural management of add1ct1ve behaviour

Content This topJc aims to develop an advanced level of knowledge and skills m the assessment of drug related problems 1n 1nd1v1duals and groups

95017 MENTAL HEALTII PROGRAMMES DrG Martin

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate Duration One semester (part-tune enrol ment) Class Contact Pre requisite

Ob1ectwes

4 hours per week 95003 The Process of Leammg

ThIS topic will develop skills m the development implementation and evaluation of adult and child mental health programmes

Content Students will access information about existing

410

community mentdl health programmes They will work on a pro1ect to institute a community mental health programme targeted at either chldren or adults

Set books To be sJpphed

Reference books To be supphed

95018 COMMUNITY MENTAL HEALTII RESEARCH DrG Martin

Umts 4 I eve! Postgraduate Duration One semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te 95005 Data and Measurement for Health

Ob1ectwes Students will have developed the knowledge and skills to assess mental health problems m apphed set!mgs usmg different evaluat10n strategies

Content Addresses the apphcat10n of research methods to the field settmg with attent10n to specific research methodologies The student will conduct a study of a mental heaith problem m either children or adults usmg the concepts and methods gamed m thIS topic Students ...v1ll access quality assurance methods and designs for evaluation processes

Set books To be supphed

Reference books To be suppued

95019 TIIE BASIS OF COMMUNITY MENTAL HEALTII Dr G Martin

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate Durahon One semester (part hme enrolment) Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requisite 95001 Community Organisation and Health

Ob1ectives This topic will develop students' knowledge of community mental health promohon and prevention, treatment and rehab1htat1on

Content Seminars will cover the concept of commuruty mental health, mental illness and mental d1sab1hty mental health educat10n programmes and rehab1htation endeavours

Set books To be supphed

Reference books To be supphed

95020 SYSTEMATIC APPROACHES TO CHILDREN, FAMILY AND COMMUNITY MrA Wood

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact One week 1ntens1ve plus a follow-up day Pre requ1s1te None

Ob7ectives This topic will provide part1c1pants with a comprehensive exam1natlon of the child and family in an envtronmental context Informed by an overall framework of understandmg and based pnnc1pally on post modern theories, the topic will encourage part1c1pants to develop a systematic understanding of themes 1nclud1ng soc1ahsation, family context the child family school connect1on, adolescence, child abuse, loss and recovery of relationships and the role of wider environmental systems in human processes The overall goal of the topic 1s for part1c1pants to be able to develop and apply systematic knowledge and understanding to child development, famtly development, community organtsahon as well as key events and themes in human development Participants' success with this will be determmed by hterature cnt.J.ques, presentations and written work

Text books No text books reqmred

95023 PRACTICE OF PALLIATIVE CARE Dr L Langford and Professor I Maddocks

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 60 hours, field work mcluded Pre requ1s1te None

Master of Science (Primary Health Care)

Ob7ectwes On completmg this topic students will be able to

assess symptoms 1n terminally Ill patients from a hohshc perspective, descnbe and compare options for control of symptoms, especially pain, describe and discuss alternative/ complementary management options, demonstrate a comprehensive under standmg of the ethical issues mvolved, mvolve the chent, family and s1gmf1cant others in dec1s1on making, recogmse the further needs of the dymg patient when 1n1tlal symptoms have bet.n relieved, demonstrate awareness of the skills of all members of the palhat1ve care team ident.J.fy issues amenable to further research m the field reflect on personal clinical practice to identify area~ for development

Recommended texts Saunders, C The management of malignant

terminal disease, 2nd ed (Arnold, 1984) Twycross, R G and Lack S Al Therapeutics

rn terminal cancer, 2nd ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1990)

95024 PSYCHOLOGICAL ASPECTS OF PALLIATIVE CARE Professor I Maddocks

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 60 hours, field work mcluded Pre requ1s1te None

Ob7ect1ves On complet10n of tins topic students will be able to

discuss common psycholog1cal reactions to terminal Illness, describe the process of gnef, discuss the common reactions to bereavement, recogn1s1ng the influence of past expenence of loss on present reactions, demonstrate awareness of cultural differences in gnev1ng behaviour, demonstrate a capacity to attend reflect and respond appropnatelywith patients and fam1l1es in palhat1ve care settings

411

School of Medicine

respond appropriately to expressions of spmtual behef,

assess the needs of gr1ev1ng 1ndiv1duals and families

1dent1fy resources available and plan appropriate helpmg strategies for bereaved persons,

acknowledge awareness of one's own death,

recognise work stressors 1n palhative care, and discuss options for stress management

Recommended texts Egan, G The skilled helper, 4th ed

(Brooks Cole, 1990) Cassidy S Sharing the darkness (Longman &

Todd 1988) Macnab, F Lzfe after loss - getting over gnef,

getting on with life (M!llemum 1989)

95025 ONCOLOGY ASPECTS OF PALLIATIVE CARE SKILLS Dr M Ashby

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 30 hours, mcludmg chmcal attacnments Pre requ1s1tes First Year topics

Ob1ectwes To provide a theoretical basis for the understanding of chn1cal oncology and a fam1hanty with the chn1cal resources involved in curative and palhat1ve management of cancer

The course will review the ep1dem1ology, aet10logy, pathogenesis and natural history of mahgnant disease Reference will be made to the importance of ms1ghts from molecular b10logy and virology to the understandmg of cancer Practical chntcal sessions will be conducted at the oncology departments and related umts at the Royal Adelaide Hospital and the Flmders Medical Centre, and m particular at the Rad10therapy Department of the Royal Adelaide Hospital

Recommended text Rohm P Clinical oncology a multi

dzsciplmary approach for students and physicians, 6th ed (Pergamon 1990)

412

95026 COMMUNITY CARE AND ORGANISATION DrR Hunt

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 30 60 hours, dependmg upon field work Pre requ1s1tes First Year topics

Ob1ectwes On complet10n of this topic, students wzll be able to

function effectively as team members and case managers, undertake management and leadership roles 1n care teams, identify and co ordinate services and resources for clients and fam1hes 1

outline cntena for adm1ss1on to outreach programmes and 1n patient palhahve care identify def1c1ts 1n service prov1s1on, use 1nformatlon to plan better services to satisfy unmet needs of the termmally 111, and 1n1hate achv1bes1 1nclud1ng lobby1ng1

to fac1htate the mtroduct10n of such services, identify measures to measure and ma1nta1n standards and care and provide quahty assurance

Students who take this topic at the level of 6 umts, will undertake a field placement of at least 30 hours, working as members of a palhat.J.ve care outreach team, and preparing a case study which will include an analysis of quahty assurance

Recommended texts Spilhng, R , ed Terminal care at home

(Oxford U P , 1986) Hodder, P and Turley, A The creative optwn

of palliative care (Melbourne City M1ss10n, 1989)

Mor, V Hospice care systems structure, process costs and outcome (Spnnger, 1987)

95027 ADDICTIVE BEHAVIOUR RESEARCH Dr R G Pols

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate Duration One semester Class Contact 4 hours per week

Pre requisites Masters entry 95005 Data and Measurement for Health

Ob1ectzves On complet10n of this topic, the student will be able to outlme and conduct all the stages of a research study, from the delmeat10n of the research quest10n to the 1mplementat10n of the strategy and mcludmg the selecl!on of appropnate statistical analyses, develop knowledge and skills of some of the more spec1ahsed evaluation strategies 1 e g 1n behavioural research, health economics drug education harm reduction use appropnate computensed stat1sl!cal packages m the evaluat10n of health care

Content The course wtll include quahty assurance methods, and design of evaluat10n strategies

95028 INTERVENTION SKILLS IN ADDICTIVE BEHAVIOUR Dr R G Pols

Umts 4 Level Postgraduate Duration One semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre reqms1te Masters entry 95012 Drug Related Problems

Ob1ectzves At the completrnn of this topic students will be able to develop and carry out behav10ural pro grammes including assessment, motivational 1nterview1ng, cueing relapse prevention and controlled drmkmg, be aware of and appropnately use a range of strategies available in a mult1d1sc1phnary team1 use appropnately community programmes for persons with hazardous or harmful drug use use appropnately group, manta!, rational emotive, assertive, individual and relaxation therapies personally or coniomtly with other health professionals

Content This topic aims to develop core skills m the prevention and management of addictive behaVIour in 1nd1v1duals and groups

95029 INDIVIDUAL STUDY IN PRIMARY HEALTH CARE Ms L Barclay

Master of Science (Pnmary Health Care)

Umts 6 Level Postgraduate Duration One semester Pre requ1S1te Agreement by the Board to the md1vidual study proposal

Ob1ectzves The goal of the elecl!ve will be to deepen knowledge m an area of Pnmary Health Care of particular relevance to the student The study topic and project proposal must be submitted by the student and agreed with the supervisor then approved by the Board of Studies m the semester pnor to that m which the student will enrol for the elecl!ve The student will present the fmd1ngs from the elective pro1ect to a departmental seminar late in the semester and will submit a wntten report of not less than 5000 words by the last day of lectures for graded assessment

This topic provides an option for expenenced health workers to explore research or professional practice issues which are not covered by core studies or existing elective topics but which are important in pnmary health care

95030 CHILD DEVELOPMENT Associate Professor D R Lines

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact One full l!me week of lectures and seminars plus attachment to community ch!ld health semce(s) assignment and essay Pre requ1s1te None

Ob1ectzves The subject matter to be covered m this topic is development neurology, theories of child development, behavioural paediatrics, screening and assessment of developmental disorders, management of developmental disorder nutntlon and development, disease processes and development

Set books Hall D M B The chzld with a handzcap

(Blackwell, 1984) Ilhngworth, R S The development of the

znfant and young chzld, 9th ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1987)

V1mpan1, G V and Parry, TS , eds Communzty child health an Australian perspectzve (Churchdl L1vmgstone, 1989)

413

School of Medicine

Reference book L1ndzey, G and Aronson1 E Handbook of

social psychology 3rd ed, vol 2 (Random House, 1985)

95031 MATERNAL AND CHILD HEALTH Associate Professor DR Lines

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 1 full !tme week of lectures and seminars plus attachment to community child health service(s) assignment and essay Pre requ1s1te None

Ob1ectives The sub1ect matter to be covered in this topic is A systems view of health and health care, health and social problems of mothers and children, perinatal epidem10logy, mfant nutnt10n, preventive child health, family development evaluation of programme of health care for mothers and children

Set book V1mpan1, G V and Parry T S , eds

Community child health an Australian perspective (Churchill Livmgstone 1989)

Reference book Lmdzey, G and Aronson E Handbook of

social psychology, 3rd ed , vol 2 (Random House, 1985)

95032 SCHOOL AND COMMUNITY HEALTH Associate Professor D R Lznes

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 1 full-!tme week of lectures and seminars plus practicum attachments, assignment and essay Pre requ1s1te None

Ob1ectives The sub1ect matter to be covered in this topic is Health professionals 1n other systems, dynamics of health care teams, agency consultat1on, health education for children learning disorders, health screening, normahsallon of the handicapped child, accident prevention

Set books Dworkin, P H Learnzng and behavior

414

problems of school children (Saunders, 1985)

V1mpan1, G V and Parry, T S eds Community child health an Australian perspective (Churchill Livmgstone, 1989)

Wallace, HM et al, eds Maternal and child health practices, 2nd ed (WJley 1982)

95033 HEALTH EDUCATION Mr G Banfield

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 13 lectures 13 seminars and 26 tutorials Pre requisite Co-requ1s1te Programmes

Ob1ectrves

95003 The Process of Learnmg 95034 Health Educat10n

This topic aims to further develop the educat10nal founda!tons established m 95003 Emphasis will be given to the umque contnbutJOn of educat10nal theory and prac!tce to the promot10n of health A range of educational theories influencing current health educa!ton thmkmg and practice will be examined Underlying assumptions and basic concepts will be scrut1n1sed, together with their recommendation for practice and their ability to address contemporary health issues

Set book Bates, I J and Wmder, A E Introduction to

health education (Palo ACH Mayfield 1984)

Reference books Lapp, D , et al, Teaching and learning philo

sophzcal, psychological currzcular applicatzons (Macmillan, 1975)

95034 HEALTH EDUCATION PROGRAMMES Dr f Nicholas

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 13 lectures, 13 seminars and 26 tutonals Pre requ1S1te Co requ1S1te

Ob1ectives

95003 The Process of Learnmg 95033 Health Educa!ton

This topic provides the applied methods and teachmg strategies for Health Educat10n

practzce The topic will survey the teachmg technologies and approaches which are relevant to health educat10n practice and will provide skill development opportunttles in design and, where possible 1mplementat1on of a health education programme

Set book Joyce, B and Weil, M Models of teaching, 3rd

ed (Prentice Hall lnternat10nal, 1986)

Reference book Green, L W, et al, Health education

planning a dzagnosttc approach (Mayfield, 1980)

95035 HEALTHY CITIES - THE NEW PUBLIC HEALTH IN ACTION DrF Baum

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te 95001 Community Organ1 satrnn and Health

Ob1ectzves Description and analySis of the World Health Orgamsat10n's Healthy Cities Pro1ect Students will analyse the pro1ect's operation in Europe North Amen ca and Australia The apphcab1hty of the pro1ect's concepts to rural areas and developing countries will be considered

Set book Ashton, ) and Seymour, H The new public

health (Open U P , 1988)

95036 HEALTH PROGRAMMES IN ADDICTION BEHAVIOUR Ms L Barclay

Units 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact A total of 52 hours m 4 days of workshop actzVIty Pre reqms1te 95003 The Process of Leammg

Ob1ectwes To develop skills m health program deSign, 1mplementatton and evaluation in add1cbon studies The topic will be taught m con1unct10n with 95004 Health Programmes, with special pro1ect work m Add1ct10n Studies

Master of Science (Health Service Management)

Reference books A book of selected readmgs will be avadable for purchase

95037 WOMEN'S HEALTH Dr F Baum (with Ms L Barclay)

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 3 hour session for 13 weeks Pre reqmSite Entry to MSc (Primary Health Care) usually Bachelor Degree

Aims (1) Cons1derat10n of femmst and hIStoncal

theory m relat10n to med1cme and the development of health services

(u) The practical apphcat10n of femm1st theory to womens health issues

(111) Development of a cntlcal understanding of health systems and a cons1derahon of strategies for changing them

Ob1ectzves To examine pohhcal econom1c1 environ mental, cultural and social factors affecting womens health status To conSider the development of the Womens Health Movement, 1nclud1ng 1deolog1es, service development, pohcy frameworks and social processes To examine the pos1tlon of specific groups of women and consider their different health needs To examine the contnbuhon of different d1sc1phnes (med1c1ne, soc1ology anthro pology poh!Ics) to understandmg women s health ISSues

The topic will be taught m three blocks The first will c0ns1der nineteenth century and twentieth century fem1n1st theory and \\1Ill provide a h1stoncal analySis of the construction of medtc1ne The second will consider the current status of women ir the health system, both as workers and patients The fmal block will examme the development of the women's health movement and the associated changes

Set books Select10n of articles

H Master of Science (Health Service Management) The degree of Master of Science (Health Service Management) 1s designed for medical,

415

School of Medicine

nursing science and other graduates who are experienced managers of chn1cal or other health services The degree is cooperative with the M Bus (Health Servlce Management) of the Graduate School of Management, University of South Australia (prev10usly SAIT) with which course some topics are taught 1n common The aim of the degree is to provide strategic knowledge relevant to analysis and management of health service issues and to provide supervised experience m the design and conduct of health service research, particularly m management The mulll d1sc1plmary student and faculty group and the collaborative trans 1nstltutJ.onal nature of the course will foster the development of conceptual and behavioural competenc1es1 an ethical awareness of the management context in health services, and skill 1n the cntlcal analysis and conduct of health services research

Relatzonship with M Sc (Primary Health Care)

Three of the coursework topics offered m the first year (part lime model) will be m common with topics m the M Sc (Pnmary Health Care)

95001 Community Organisat10n and Health

Units

4 95005 Data and Measurement for Health 4 95006 Community Health Research 4

Relatzonship with the M Bus (Health Service Management) University of South Australia (prev10usly SAIT)

Three of the coursework topics offered in the second year (part time model) will be m common with topics m the M Bus (Health Service Management) of the University of South Austraha (prev10usly SA!T)

Umts 95043 Health Servlces Law (U S A) 5 95044 Health Serv1ces Economics and

Fmance (U S A ) 5 95045 Health Care Management (U S A ) 5

iwo topics, in add1tton, are required to complete the 36 units of the coursework component

95041 Fmancrnl and Behav10ural Management

416

Units

4

95042 Dec1s10n makmg and Ethics for Health Servlces 5

The research component consists of 36 units mcludmg 95007 Thesis Preparallon Semmar and 27 umts from the following topics

Um ts 95102 Thesis work in progress

Semester I 9 95103 Thesis work in progress

Semester II 9 95104 Thesis work in progress

Semester I 13 5 95105 Thesis work in progress

Semester II 13 5 95106 Thesis work m progress

Semester I 18 95107 Thesis work 1n progress

Semester II 18

A proposal for research will be developed m the Thesis Preparation Seminar The topic for research will be drawn from an area of relevance to Health Services Management Whenever possible the research project will be undertaken with the co operat10n of a health sernce organ1sat1on

95041 FINANCIAL AND BEHAVIOURAL MANAGEMENT Professor L Parker

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

Ob1ectwes The topic will have two ma1or aims 1 To describe and analyse the structure,

function and behav10ur of health organ1sahons (first half semester),

2 To develop knowledge and expertise m fmancial management (second half semester)

Perspectives from which a manager needs to approach health organ1sation issues i e (1) the health care system, (2) the organisallon ( chmate & income, product1v1ty and 1ts appraisal, change and its management), (3) the small group (dynamics of work groups, leadership theory project format, mtra and mter group conflict and its resolut10n), (4) the 1nd1v1dual (learning, mot1vatton and JOb

satisfaction, work related stress and its management work design performance appraisal) Financial management will examine ~he role of the accounting system in publtc sector organisations, cash and accrual accounting hne and program budgeting, f1nanc1al control and review mechanisms The budget process Wlll be taught, mcludmg the budget cycle, budget, constructwn budgetmg control and management plannmg The recordmg cycle mcludmg Balance Sheet and Income Statement the Funds Statement and F1nanc1al Ratio analysis

Set books Bailey, J , et al Managing organzsatlon

behaviour zn Australia Uacaranda Wiiey, 1986)

Forster j and Wanna, j , eds Budgetary management and control (Macm1llan Aust, 1990)

Grant, C and Lapsley, H The Australian health care system, 1989 (School of Health Admm1stratwn, Umv of N S W , 1990)

Palmer, G and Short S Health care and public policy (Macmillan, 1989)

Reference books Buchanan, D and Huczynskl A Orgamzatronal

behavrour (Prentice-Hall, 1986) Bates, E and Lmder Pelz, S Health care

issues, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1990) Hiii, S , Where the health dollar goes (Health

Issues Centre, 1987) McDonald, R C Cooper, R G and Asttll B j

Accountzng for the non finance executive, 2nd ed (Longman Cheshtre, 1983)

Van Horne, J et al, Financial management and policy rn Australia 3rd ed (Prentice Hall, 1990)

W1ldavsky A The new politics of the budgetary process (Scott, Foresman, 1987)

95042 DECISION MAKING AND ETHICS FOR HEALTII SERVICES Mr f Blandford

Umts 5 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 4 hours per week (2 lectures, 2 tutonals) Pre requisite First Year topics

Ob1ectrves The topic addresses the leadership role of the manager in addressing organ1sat1onal issues

Master of Science (Health Service Management)

Dec1s1on malnng in the context of ethical, resource organ1sahonal interpersonal and wider community cons1derahon wtll be the ma1or theme Students will use case study methods to clanfy ethical issues m management of health services B1omed1cal issues will include resource allocation, informed consent, exper1mentat1on, death, abortion, organ1sahonal issues including fiduciary duty, confhct of interest and conf1denttal!ty together Wlth changmg public sentiment as expressed by consumer nghts, eqmty and social iusttce Part1c1pants wdl consider infonnahon sources and systems and dec1s1on strategies for health care servtces in the twenty-first century

Set books Bates, E and Linder Pelz, S Health care

issues, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, Sydney 1990)

Australian Hospital Assoc The health system issues for the next decade (The Assoc , 1989)

Fnedman, E Making choices ethzcs zssues for health care professronals (Amencan Hospitals Publishmg, 1986)

Reference books Janis, I and Mann, L Decision makzng (Free

Press, 1977) Bates, E and Lapsley, H The health machine

the impact of medical technology(Pengum, 1985)

Rumbold G Ethics in nursing practice (Badliere Tmdall, 1986)

Mooney, G Economics, medzczne and health care (Wheatsheaf, 1986)

95043 HEALTII SERVICES LAW (US A) (GRADUATE) Mr K Bennetts

Umts 5 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisite Semester 1 topics

Ob]ectrves This topic aims to proVIde students with an understanding of the operation of law as it relates to the adm1n1strahon and promoting of health services Lectures and seminars will cover the Australian legal system, liability of health care employers for c1V1l wrongs

417

School of Medicine

committed by employees, c1v1l claims arising from the prov1s1on of health services, 1nclud1ng negltgent prov1s1on of health care, loss of or damage to patient's property, 1n1ury ans1ng from cond1bons of premises, obta1n1ng consent to medical treatment, medical confidentiahty and defamation Law in respect of organ transplantat10n, the law relating to mentally Ill and mentally dISabled pal!ents Legal ISsues ansmg from death and dymg m health care 1nstltuhons An outline of employment law

Set books Dix, et al Law for the medical professwn

(Butterworth, 1988) Staunton, P J and Whybum, B Nursing and

the law 2nd ed (Saunders Balhere Tmdall 1989)

O'Sullivan J Law for nurses and allied health professwnals 3rd ed (Law Book, 1983)

Reference books Flemmg, J The law of Torts, 7th ed (Law

Book 1987) Jacob J L Speller's Law relating to hospitals

and kindred mstitutwns, 6th ed (LewIS 1978)

Luntz, H Hambly, AD and Hayes, R Torts cases and commentary (Butterworths 1980)

Venneessch RB and Lindgren, l( B Business law of Australia 6th ed (Butterworths, 1983)

95044 HEALTH SERVICES ECONOMICS AND FINANCE (US A) Mr K O'Brien

Umts 5 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

Ob1ectzves On complet10n, the student should demonstrate under,.tand1ng of the workings of the economic system and of the health industry participate m formulatmg and analysing economic aspects of health programmes and demonstrate understanding of the basic financial management techniques employed m health service orgamsat10ns The topic will mtroduce the Austrahan Economy as a mixed market system the role of an

418

economic system, the market economy, 1nclud1ng operation of a market economy, utzltty analysts theory of product10n costs and supply, effectiveness of market system with regard to efficiency and d1stnbuhon1

1ushflcahons for intervention externaltties, market 1mperfect10ns public goods, d1Stnbut10n etc

Apphcatzon of economics to health markets Economic aspects of health services 1n industry demand (special characteristics impact of insurance government subsidies, Australian patterns), supply (medical practitioners supply and produchv1ty, economics of hospital operations) cost benefit analysis Financing health care 1n Australia Health insurance, provider reimbursements, Commonwealth State f1nanc1ng relationsh1ps1

SA Health Comm1ss10n budget process Budget process in financial management

Set book Feldstem, P J Health care economics 3rd ed

(Wiley, 1988)

Reference books Fuchs, V R Who shall lzve? Health

economics & soczal choice (Basic Books, 1974)

Mooney1 G H Economics, medzczne and health care (Wheatsheaf, 1986)

Perlman, M , ed The economics of health and medical care (Macmillan, 1974)

Sorkin, A Health econo11ucs1 2nd ed (Lexmgton Books 1984)

Tisdell, CA Mzcroeconomzcs of markets (Wiley, 1982)

95045 HEALTH CARE MANAGEMENT (U S A) (GRADUATE) MsMG Hams

Umts 5 Level Masters Duration One semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmstte 95041 Fmanctal and Behav 1oural Management

Aim To descnbe the impact of changes m federal and state pollc1es upon structure and process of health organ1sahons to use team process to analyse a health problem and to use appropnate management models m developmg a proposal to address a management problem

Competition for resources, commerc1ahsation, changes in approaches to allocating and controlhng resources organisational change 1nclud1ng mergers, quahty of care and approaches to protecting consumer well being, the prov1s1on of well coordinated, efficient long term care services, social 1ust1ce, fostering linkage between primary and tertiary care services Organ1sat1onal analysis and performance expectations 1nclud1ng measures of provider functions for organisation accountabihty, essential competencies of health service managers will be outhned, including dec1s1on making planning and evaluation relevant to the provision and control of services, negotiation and conflict resolution within an 1nterd1sc1phnary and political environment leading and developing others, commun1cat1ng effectively with the external and internal environments understanding poht1cal and industrial context

Set books Grant, C Australian hospitals operation and

management, 2nd ed (Churchill L1vmgstone, 1985)

Rakich, J J Longest, B B and Darr K Managing health services organizations, 2nd ed (Saunders 1985)

Master of Science (Health Service Management)

419

School of Physical Sciences

Students are expected to procure the prescribed edition of all set books. Where no edition is prescribed they should procure the latest edition. Those books indicated by an asterisk (*) are available in paperback or student editions.

The name of the staff member primarily responsible for a topic, and to whom enquiries about the topic should be directed, is shown in italics below the topic title.

Students studying topics in the School will find that the following book contains a collection of general scientific data which will be of assistance to them during their course:

Tennent, R.M., ed. Science data book (Oliver & Boyd, 1986)

Associate Diploma in Applied Science students may enrol only in those topics listed at the end of this syllabus under the reading 'Associate Diploma in Applied Science'.

Topics in Chemistry

Enquiries relating to Chemistry topics may be directed to the staff member named.

Students who are uncertain about which first year level course in Chemistry is most suitable for their needs are advised to discuss the matter with the Chemistry Discipline co­ordinator at the earliest opportunity.

74100 CHEMISTRY I Dr M.f. Thompson

Units: 9 Level: First year Duration: Full year Class Contact: 3 lectures, 1 tutorial, and 1 three-hour laboratory session per week Pre-requisite: A sound knowledge of chemistry at matriculation level is assumed.

The first semester deals with equilibrium: enthalpy change, calorimetry, Le Chatelier's principle, solubility of sparingly soluble salts; acids, bases, electrolytes, pH, pKa, pKb, buffers, indicators. Thermodynamics: First Law, energy, work and heat; standard state of gases, liquids and solids, Hess' Law, Second Law, entropy; Third Law, Gibbs free energy and equilibrium. Property of gases; reaction rates, rate laws; nuclear and electronic structure of atoms; radioactive decay, Covalent bonding, V.S.E.P.R. theory, hybridisation of atoms, resonance. Organic chemistry: origin, preparation and properties of alkanes and haloalkanes; structural and rotational isomerism, the mechanism of nucleophilic substitutions.

The second semester deals with phase equilibria, liquids vapours and solids. Solutions and colloids: particle size, Raoult's Law. Oxidation-reduction reactions, electro­chemistry, electrochemical and galvanic cells. Chemistry of the s, p and d block elements, transition elements; co-ordination chemistry, electrostatic crystal field theory. Solid state: amorphous and crystalline solids, x-ray diffraction. Organic chemistry: chemistry of the functional groups - alkenes, alkynes,

Set books and Text books are required reading on which students may be tested. Students are expected to have their own copies of all books listed as Set books or Text books; multiple copies of these books will not be available in the Library. Preliminary reading is reading which the student is expected to have completed before the commencement of teaching and on which he or she may at any time be tested. Further reading and Recommended reading, where not otherwise specified, indicate reading which the student is expected to do in the course of studying the Set books. Reference books are books which the student will find useful in the course of studying the topics for which they are specified.

420

aromatics, alcohols, aldehydes and ketones, carboxyhc acids, amines and amino acids, reaction mechanisms and stereochem1stry

Set books Brady, ) E and Hoium,) R Fundamentals of

chemistry, 3rd ed (Wiley, 1988) Brown, W H Introduction to organzc

chemistry, 3rd ed (Willard Grant, 1983)

Reference books Brady, ) E and Hoium, ) R Study guide to

accompany Fundamentals of chemistry 3rd ed (Wiley 1988)

Eastwood, F W Swan,) M and Youatt,) B Organic chemistry, Programs 1 6 (Science Pr, 1967)*

Heslop, R B and Wild, G M SI umts m chemistry (Applied Science, 1971)*

Traynham, ) G Organic nomenclature a programmed mtroductzon (Prentice Hall 1966)*

Zumdahl, S S Chemistry (Heath, 1986)

74101 INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY Dr KP Wamwrzght

Umts 9 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 lectures, 1 tutorial and 1 three hour laboratory session per week

ThIS topic has been designed specifically for students who have not studied ChemIStry beyond elementary levels at secondary school or who have not studied ChemIStry at Matriculation level in recent years, and 1s normally available only to them

The subiect matter m the topic has been chosen and orgamsed to provide students with a background of chemical knowledge to assISt them with their studies 1n other Disciplines of the Uruvers1ty It will be of special value to students who are msuffic1ently prepared m ChemIStryto enter 74100 ChemIStry I and who mtend to proceed to a degree m the Schools of B1olog1cal Sciences (B A or B Sc ), Med1cme, and some D1Sc1plmes of Earth Sciences and Social Sciences The topic does not proVIde entry to any second year Chenustry progranune Successful completion of the topic proVIdes entry to 74100 ChemIStry I or, for except10nal

t A hst of these topics may be obtained from the D1sc1phne co ordinator

Chemistry

students, to some second and third year Chemistry top1cst when these are taken as part of a degree in another School or D1sc1phne This topic may not be taken concurrently W1th 74100 ChemIStry I nor by those who have taken 74100 ChemIStry I

Set book Brady ) E and Hoium, ) R Fundamentals of

chemistry, 3rd ed (Wiley, 1988)

Reference book Bucat, RB Elements m cliemistry (Aust

Academy of Science, 1984)

74110 INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY A Dr KP Wamwrzght

Umts 4 5 Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures, 1 tutorial and 1 three hour laboratory session per week

This topic is available only to first year medical students with the approval of the Boards of the Schools of Med1cme and Physical Sciences ThIS topic may not be counted for credit towards a B Sc degree ThIS topic comprises the first semester of 74101 Introduct10n to ChemIStry

Set book Brady,) E and Hoium,) R Fundamentals of

chemistry, 3rd ed (Wiley, 1988)

74120 INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRYB Dr KP Wamwrzght

Umts 4 5 Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures, 1 tutorial and 1 three hour laboratory session per week Pre requ1s1te Matriculation chemistry or 74110 Introduction to ChemIStry A

This topic comprises the second semester of 74101 Introduction to ChemIStry

Set book Brady,) E and Hoium, ) R Fundamentals of

chemistry, 3rd ed (Wiley, 1988)

421

School of Physical Sciences

Second Year Topics m Chemistry

74210 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY II (GENERAL TECHNIQUES) Dr EF McCoy

Umts 2 Level Second year Durat10n First half of fmt semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre reqms1te 74100 Chemistry I

To illustrate mstrumental techmques of general appltcahon 1n analyt1cal1 1norgan1c, organic and physical chemistry

74211 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY II (ORGANIC) Dr EW Della

Umts 2 Level Second year Duration Second half of first semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre reqms1te 74100 Chem1Stry I Co requ!S!tes 74213 Orgamc Chemistry II and 74210 Chem1Stry Laboratory II (General Techmques)

Illustrating experimental techniques in chemistry with emphasis on organic chemistry

74213 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY II DrW Adcock

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 74100 Chemistry I

This topic deals with the stereochem1Stry of carbon compounds with particular reference to the molecules of nature, the electronic theory of structure and reaction mechanism in organic chemistry particularly for subst1tut1on ehm1nat1on and add1t1on reactions

Set book Mornson RT and Boyd, RN Organic

chemistry 5th ed (Allyn & Bacon, 1987)

Reference books Ege, S N Organic chemistry (Heath , 1984) Stre1tw1eser, A and Heathcock, CH

lntroductwn to organic chemistry 3rd ed (Collier Macmillan, 1985)

422

74214 THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETIC THEORY Professor B G Baker and Dr DB Matthews

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal every second week Pre requ!S!te 74100 Chemistry I or 77102 Physics I

The first law of thermodynamics, heat, work, heat capacity Isothermal adiabatic and reversible processes State functions and differentials The Joule-Thomson effect Thermochem1stry, standard enthalpy formation The second law, entropy and free energy Cr1tenon for equ1hbnum1 reversible processes, heat engines and eff1c1ency of energy conversion Homogeneous equ1hbna, fugac1ty Standard states, act1V1ty Open systems chemical potential

Introduction to stahshcal thermodynamics molecular partthon function, Boltzmann distr1buhon Canonical partition function, relat10n to thermodynamic funct10ns, entropy of a monatomic gas Kinetic theory, pressure of a gas kinetic energy and temperature, molecular speeds distribution of molecular velocities, equipartition of energy Coll1sions between gas molecules, v1scos1ty of a gas thermal conduct1v1ty Non-ideal gases, corresponding states, van der Waals reduced equation

Set book Atkms PW Physical chemistry 4th ed

(Oxford U P , 1989)

Reference book Moore, W J Basic physical chemistry

(Prentice Hall, 1982)

74215 MOLECULAR PROPERTIES Dr E F McCoy and Dr KP Wamwnght

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week and 1 tutonal every second week Pre reqms1te 74100 Chemistry I

Quantum chemistry and its apphcahon to simple problems Approximate methods

Atomic structure the orbital concept and the periodic table, angular momentum and the vector model of the atom Molecular structure, valence bond theory, hybridisation, resonance, molecular orbitals and the structure of sunple molecules The electrical properties of molecules polarisation polarisab1hty1 dipole moments, refractive index Molecular spectroscopy, rotational vibrational and electromc energy levels the spectra of small molecules Molecular symmetry

Set book Atkms PW Physical chemistry, 4th ed

(Oxford UP, 1989)

Reference books Cotton, F A Chemical applicatzons of group

theory, 2nd ed (Interscience, 1971) O Dwyer M F Kent, J E and Brown R D

Valency (Monash UP, 1975)* Pimentel, G C and Spratley, ED Chemical

bonding clarified through quantum mechanics (Holden Day, 1970)*

74216 COMPUTING METHODS IN CHEMISTRY Dr E F McCoy and Dr W D Lawrance

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and I two hour tutorial per week Pre reqms1tes 74100 Chemistry I and 60130 Mathematzcs I or 60116 Introductory Mathematzcs

Introduct10n to computer systems FORTRAN Programmmg Chemical applzcat10ns of descnptzve stallsllcs and data modellmg Error analysis Chemical apphcat10ns of numencal methods (1nterpolahon, approximation, integration, algebraic equations, e1gensystems1

differential equations)

Reference books Elhs, T M R A structural approach to

FORTRAN 77 (Addison Wesley, 1982) Johnson, K j Numerical methods in

chemistry (Dekker, 1980) Press, W H, Flannery, BP Teukolsky, SA

and Vetterhng, WT Numerical recipes (Cambridge UP 1986)

Ryan, B F , Jamer, B L and Ryan, TA Mmztab handbook, 2nd ed (Duxbury, 1985)

Chemistry

74220 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY II (PHYSICAL) DrEF McCoy

Umts 2 Level Second year Duration First half of second semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre reqms1te 74100 Chemistry I Co requ1S1te 74210 Chemistry Laboratory II (General Techmques)

Experience the methods and instrumentation of experimental physical chemistry

74221 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY II (INORGANIC) Dr N f Clark

Umts 2 Level Second year Duration Second half of second semester Class Contact 6 hours per week Pre reqms1te 74100 ChemIStry I Co reqms1tes 74213 lnorgamc Chemistry II and 74210 Chemistry Laboratory II (General Techmques)

Experimental techniques in chemistry with emphdsis on inorganic chemistry

74223 ORGANIC SYNTHESIS Dr M f Thompson

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 74100 ChemIStry I Co reqms1te 74213 Orgamc Chemistry II

ThIS topic deals with standard syntheses m organic chemistry, with the main emphasis on the format10n of carbon carbon bonds Synthetic procedures 1nvolv1ng carban1ons enam1nes1 and organometalhc species will be discussed The chemistry of aromatic systems will be detazled

Set book Morrison, RT and Boyd, RN Organic

chemistry, 5th ed (Allyn & Bacon, 1987)

Reference books Carruthers, W Some modern methods of

organic synthesis, 2nd ed (Cambridge U P , 1978)*

423

School of Physical Sciences

House1 H 0 Modern synthetic reactions 2nd ed (Ben1amm, 1972)

Stre1tw1eser, A and Heathcock, C H Introductwn to organic chemistry, 3rd ed (Collier Macmtl!an, 1985)*

74224 EQUILIBRIUM AND RATE PROCESSES Dr DB Matthews and Professor BG Baker

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutortal every second week Pre reqms1tes 74100 Chemtstry I and 74214 Thermodynamics and Kmet1c Theory

Changes of state, phase equ1hbr1a and phase diagrams, phase boundaries, surfaces, cap1llar1es Partial molar quantities, thermodynamics of m1xmg Colhgattve properties Solutions, ideal and real, activity Mtxtures of volatile ltqu1ds d1st11lallon

The Phase rule Phase diagram for two component systems Ions in solution, act1V1lles, Debye Huckel theory Electrodes, electrochemical cells, standard electrode potenllals Thermodynamic data from cell emf Ion transport1 solution conductiv1ty1 mob1llhes of ions Col101ds, electrok1netlc phenomena

Rates of chem1cal reaction, rate laws, expenmental methods Temperature dependence Consecutive reactions, steady state approximatton, pre eqmltbrta Cham react1ons 1 photochem1cal reactions, homogeneous catalysis Colhs1on theory, activated complex theory

Set book Atkms, PW Physical chemistry, 4th ed

(Oxford U P , 1989)

Reference books Aveyard, R and Haydon, DA An zntro

ductwn to the principles of surface chemistry (Cambndge U P , 1973)

Selley, N) Experimental approaches to electrochemistry (Wiley, 1977)

Shaw, D ) Introductwn to colloid and surface chemistry, 3rd ed (Butterworths 1970)

424

74225 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY II Dr N l Clark

Umts 3 Level Second year Durat.J.on Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal every second week Pre reqmstte 74100 Chemtstry I

This topic emphasises general pr1nciphes rather than detatled descrtp!tve chemtstry of individual compounds, including transition metal chemistry, co ordination compounds, their stereochem1stry isomensm and stability, ECFT and molecular orbital descr1pt10ns of bonding, crystal chemistry of ionic compounds, non aqueous solvents and acid base phenomena, main group chemistry

Set book Shnver, D F , Atkms, PW and Langford, C H

Inorganic chemistry (Oxford U P , 1990)

Reference books Cotton, FA and Wtlkmson, G W Advanced

morganzc chemistry, 5th ed (Wtley, 1988) Huheey, ) E Inorganic chemistry, 3rd ed

(Harper & 'Row, 1983)

Thzrd Year Topics m Chemistry

74310 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY III (PHYSICAL) Dr W D Lawrance

Umts 2 Level Thtrd year Duration First semester Class Contact 12 hours per week for 6 weeks Pre requ1s1tes 74214 Thermodynamics and Kme!tc Theory, 74215 Molecular Properties and 74220 Chemtstry Laboratory II (PhyStcal)

Advanced techmques, methods and mstrumentation m phystcal chemtstry

74311 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY IIIA Professor R H Prager

Umts 3 Level Thtrd year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqmSttes 74213 Orgamc Chemtstry II and 74223 Organic Synthests

This topic discusses oxidation and reduction methods, stereochemistry of reduction, alkylat10ns and acylatlons, the orgamc chemistry of boron, stl1con, phosphorous and sulfur and general appltcatJ.ons to synthesis

Set book Mornson, R T and Boyd, R N Organic

chemistry, 5th ed (Allyn & Bacon, 1987)

Reference books Carruthers, W Some modern methods of

organic synthesis, 3rd ed (Cambndge U P , 1978)

House, H 0 Modern synthetic reactions, 2nd ed (Ben1amm, 1972)

74312 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY III (INORGANIC) Dr KP Wainwright

Umts 2 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 12 hours per week for 6 weeks Pre requlSltes 74221 Chemistry Laboratory II (lnorgamc) and 74225 Inorgamc Chemistry II Co requisite 74315 Inorgamc Chemtstry III

Advanced experimental and instrumental techniques of inorganic chemistry and organometallic chemistry

74313 STRUCTURAL METHODS IN CHEMISTRY Dr M f Thompson and Dr M R Taylor

Umts 3 Level Third year Duratlon Fmt semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requlSltes 74213 Orgamc Chemistry II and 74225 Inorgamc Chemistry II

Practical aspects of structure determ1nahon of orgarnc compounds using ultraviolet, infrared and nuclear magnetic spectroscopy, and mass spectrometry (18 lectures) Uses of x ray, neutron and electron d1ffrachon in chemistry phenomena, apphcat1ons analysis and rehabihty of results, uses of data bases (8 lectures)

Chemistry

Set books Ebsworth, EA V , Rankm, D W H and

Cradock, S Structural methods in

inorganic chemistry (Blackwell, 1987) Kemp, W Organic spectroscopy, 2nd ed

(Macmillan, 1987)

74314 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY III Professor B G Baker

Umts 45 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre requlSltes 74214 Thermodynamics and Kmettc Theory, 74224 Eqmhbrmm and Rate Processes and 74215 Molecular Properties

Pnnc1ples of quantum chemistry, molecular electronic structure, introduction to group theory, molecular spectroscopy, statistical thermodynamics, thermodynamics of phase equ1ltbna two and three component systems, adsorption, separation methods, chemical kinetics, electrochem1stry

Set book Atkms, PW Physical chem1Stry, 4th ed

(Oxford U P , 1989)

Reference books Atkins, PW Molecular quantum mechanics,

2nd ed (Oxford U P , 1983) Harmony, MD Introductwn to molecular

energies and spectra (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1972)

Herzberg, G Molecular spectra and molecular structure, vols 1 3 (Van Nostrand, 1964 1966)

74315 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY III Dr MR Taylor

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre reqmsites 74215 Molecular Properties and 7 4225 lnorgamc Chemtstry II

This represents the core topic 1n Inorganic Chemtstry, and deals with crystal chemtstry, radiocheffilstry, magnetism and spectra of co ord1nat1on compounds, organometalhc chemistry and inorganic reaction mechanisms

425

School of Physical Sciences

Reference books Adams D M Inorganic solids (Wiley, 1974) Cotton, FA and Wilkmson, G Advanced

morgamc chemistry, 5th ed (Wiley, 1988) Fnedlander, G , !(ennedy, J W 1 Macias, E S

and Miller, JM Nuclear and radw chemistry, 3rd rd (Wiley, 1981)

Galasso F S Structures and properties of morgamc solids (Pergamon 1970)

Huheey J E Inorganic chemistry 3rd ed (Harper & Row, 1983)

Krebs, H Fundamentals of morgamc crystal chemistry (McGraw Hill 1968)

MacGillavry, C H Symmetry aspects of M C Escher's periodic drawings (Oosthoek 1965)

Purcell, K F a'ld Kotz, JC Inorganic chemistry (Saunders, 1977)

Wells, AF Structural morgamc chemzstry 4th ed (Clarendon 1975)

74320 INTRODUCTION TO CRYSTAL STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Dr T>f R Taylor

Umts 15 Level Third year Duration First half of second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per v1eek for 4 weeks plus assigned pro1ect of ca !Oh computer terminal use Pre-requisites 74216 Computmg Methods m Chemistry a'ld 74315 Inorgamc Chemistry III

An 1ntroduct1on to some methods of determmmg the structure of crystallme substances by x ray crystallography Determmat10n of the structure of a small organic or 1norgan1c compound and a d1scuss1on of the structural chemistry of the problem

Reference books Internat10nal Umon of Crystallographers

Comm1ss1on on Crystallographic Teaching Pamphlets for teachmg crystallography 1st and 2nd serzes (International Union of Crystallographers, 1981 and 1984)

Ladd, M F C and Palmer, R A Structure determmatwn by x-ray crystallography, 2nd ed (Plenum, 1985)

426

74321 ORGAMC CHEMISTRY IIIB Dr E W Della

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqmsites 74213 Orgamc Chemistry II and 74223 Orgamc Synthes!S

This topic comprises ca 13 lectures on heterocychc chemistry, both ahcychc and aromatic, and ca 13 lectures on re arrangements of electron deficient carbon, oxygen and nitrogen species, and of carban1ons

Set book Morrison, R I and Boyd, RN Organic

chemistry 5th ed (Allyn & Bacon, 1987)

74322 PHYSICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Dr W Adcock

Umts 3 Level Tmrd ;ear Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requ.site 74213 Orgamc Chemistry II

This topic deals with the Huckel (4n+2) rule and the apphcat10n of perturbatlon molecular orbital theory to cychc con1ugated hydro carbons and pencychc reactions, general principles of chemical react1v1ty 1n organic systems, linear free energy relationships and substttuent effects

Set book Morrison, RT and Boyd, R N Organic

chemistry, 5th ed (Allyn & Bacon, 1987)

Reference books Dewar, M J S and Dougherty, RC The

P M 0 theory of organic chemistry (Plenum, 1975)*

Gill, G B and Willis, M R Pencycl1c reactzons (Chapman & Hall, 1974)

Gilliom RD Introductwn to physical organic chemistry (Addison Wesley, 1970)

Johnson CD The Hammett equatwn (Cambridge U P , 1973)

Lehr, R E and Marchand, AP Orbital symmetry (Academic 1972)*

Lowry, TH and Richardson, RS Mechanism and theory m organic chemistry (Harper & Row 1987)

74323 REACTIVE INTERMEDIATES Dr M f Thompson

Umts 15 Level Third year Duration First half of second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requisites 74213 Orgamc Chemistry II and 74223 Orgamc Synthesis

This topic discusses organic photochemistry, and the generation and reaction of radicals, carbenes and arynes

Set book Morrison, RI and Boyd, RN Organic

chemistry 5th ed (Allyn & Bacon 1987)

74324 BIO ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Professor R H Prager

Umts 15 Level Third year Duration Second half of second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqmsites 74213 Orgamc Chemistry II and 74223 Orgamc Synthests

This topic discusses the chemistry, b1ogenes1s and ut1hty of natural products such as insect pheremones and hormones, polyket1des terpen01ds and alkal01ds

Set book Morrison R I and Boyd R N Organic

chemistry, 5th ed (Allyn & Bacon, 1987)

Reference book Packter, N M Biosyntheszs of acetate derzved

compounds (Wiley 1973)

74325 BIO INORGANIC CHEMISTRY Dr KP Wainwright

Umts 15 Level Third year Duration Second half of second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week (13 lectures) Pre reqmsite 74315 Inorgamc Chemistry III

Studies of the functions of metal ions in b1olog1cal processes with particular reference to structure, stereochem1stry, stab1hty and mechanism Topics to be covered include metalloprote1ns metal activated enzymes red ox systems, VItam1n B 12, oxygen carriers nitrogen fixation and metal ton interaction with nucleic acids

Chemistry

Reference book Hughes, MN The morgamc chemistry of

bzological processes, 2nd ed (Wiley, 1981)

74326 INTRODUCTION TO MATERIALS Dr N / Clark

Umts 15 Level Third year Duration Second half of second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requ1s1tes Completion of Programmes PS P6, P7 or PB

An 1ntroductlon to the m1croscop1c properties of materials cohesive energies structures of metals and alloys glasses and polymers defects m sohds Macroscopic properties as the reflection of microscopic properties, elastic and plastic deformation, strength and hardness, the role of d1slocahons modern hght ceramics Brittle fracture Griffith crack theory s1nter1ng Phase equilibria. the phase rule, 1nvar1ant reactions Phase trans formations and TIT curves

Reference books Atkms, P W Physical cheml'try, 4th ed

(Oxford UP 1989) Barrett, C R , Nix, W D and Tetelman, A S

The prznczples of engineering materials (Prentice Hall, 1973)

Hutchison, TS and Baird DC The physics of engmeermg solids (Wiley 1968)

McColm, I J Ceramzc science for materzal technologists (Leonard Hill, 1983)

Van Vlack, L H Material science for engineers (AddISon Wesley 1970)

74327 PHOTOCHEMISTRY AND SPECTROSCOPY Dr W D Lawrance

Umts 15 Level Third year Duration First half of second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqmsite 74314 Phystcal Chemistry III

Non radiative energy transfer 1n molecular systems, lasers, photochem1stry, contemporary studies in 1nolecular spectroscopy

Reference books Ben Shaul, A , Haas Y Kampa K L and

Levine, RD Lasers and chemical change (Sprmger Verlag, 1981)

427

School of Physzcal Sczences

Calvert, ) G and Pitts, J N Photochemzstry (Wiiey, 1966)

Lengyel, BA Lasers, 2nd ed (Wiley, 1971)

Schawlow, A L ed Lasers and lzght readzngs from Sczentzfzc Amerzcan (Freeman, 1969)

Stenholm, S Foundatzons of laser spectroscopy (Wiley, 1984)

74328 APPLIED ELECTROCHEMISTRY Dr DB Matthews

Umts 15 Level Thud year Duration Second half of second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre requ1S1tes 74224 Eqmhbrmm and Rate Processes, 74214 Thermodynamics and Kme!Jc Theory and 74314 Physical Chemistry III

Charge transfer Ill electrolytes, collo1ds, m1scelles, vesicles and other charged interfaces, electrode processes

Set book Atkms, PW Physzcal chemzstry, 4th ed

(Oxford UP, 1989)

Reference books Bamford C H and Compton R G

Comprehensive chemical kznetzcs, vol 26, Electrode kznetzcs principles and methodology (Elsevier, 1986)

Bell, RP The tunnel effect zn chemzstry (Chapman & Hall, 1980)

Buscall, C , Corner, T and Stageman, J F, eds Polymer collozds (Elsevier, 1985)

Cannon, R D Electron transfer reactions (Butterworths, 1980)

Drever, J The geochemistry of natural waters, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1988)

Eberson, L Electron transfer reactions zn organzc chemzstry (Sprmger Verlag, 1987)

H1emenz, PC Prznczples of collozd and surface chemzstry (Dekker, 1977)

Hunter, R J Zeta potentzal zn collozd sczence (Academic, 1981)

K!tahara, A and Watanabe, A , eds Electrzcal phenomena at znferfaces (Dekker, 1984)

428

Laidler, K) Chemzcal kznetzcs, 3rd ed (Harper & Row, 1987)

Southampton Electrochem1stry Group Instrumental methods zn electrochemzstry (Elhs Horwood, 1985)

74329 HETEROGENEOUS CATALYSIS Professor B G Baker

Umts 15 Level Third year Duration First half of second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week Pre reqms1tes 74214 Thermodynamic and Kinetic Theory 74224 Equ!l1bnum and Rate Processes and 7 4314 Physical Chemistry III

Chemisorphon charactensahon of catalysts, techmques for the study of surfaces and adsorbates, kinetics of catalytic reactions Catalysis by metals, oxides and zeohtes, preparat10n of catalysts

Reference books Anderson, J R Structure of metallzc catalysts

(Academic, 1975)

Bond, G C Heterogeneous catalysis principles and applications, 2nd ed (Oxford UP, 1987)

Pearce R and Patterson, W E , eds Catalysis and chemzcal processes (L Hill 1981)

Satterfield, C N Heterogeneous catalyszs zn practzce (McGraw Hill, 1980)

74330 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY III (ORGANIC) Dr M f Thompson

Unit~ 2 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 12 hours per week for 6 weeks Pre reqms1tes 74211 Chemistry Laboratory II Orga'1lc, 74213 Orgamc Chemistry II and 74223 Orgamc Synthesis Co reqms1tes 74311 Orgamc Chemistry IIIA and 74321 Orgamc Chemistry IIIB

Laboratory work 1llustratmg the basic experimental and mstrumental methods and techniques of organic chemistry

74331 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY III PROJECTS Professor B G Baker

Units 2 Level Third year Duration Second half of second semester Class Contact 12 hours per week laboratory work on an assigned pro1ect 1n an area of analytical, theoretical, phys1cal1 1norgan1c or organic chemistry Pre requmtes At least two of 74310 Chemistry Laboratory III (Physical) 74312 Chemistry Laboratory III (Inorganic) or 74330 Chemistry Laboratory III (Orgamc)

Enrolment m this topic reqmres special approval

Each student will be allocated a pro1ect with a view to developing experimental and/or theoretical techniques appropriate to the particular problem

74332 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY III TECHNIQUES DrEW Della

Units 2 Level Third year Duration Six allotted weeks in rotation with other laboratory topics or, by arrangement, the second half of second semester Class Contact 12 hours laboratory work for six weeks Co reqms1tes At least two of 74310 Chemistry Laboratory III (Physical), 74312 Chemistry Laboratory III (Inorganic) or 74330 Chemistry Laboratory Ill (Organic)

Advanced mstrumental and laboratory techniques

Topics m Physzcsf

77101 INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICS Dr AL McCarthy

Units 9 Level Fmt year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and 3 hours laboratory per week and 1 tutorial Pre requmte Mathematical background approXImately at Year 11 level will be assumed

This topic IS deSigned for students who have

Physics

not had an adequate preparat10n m PhySics at senior level in secondary school It is suitable for those wishmg to mclude a one-year course of phySics m their general studies

J(Jnemahcs and dynamics of particle motion, fluids, electromagnehsm, waves The topic may not be taken concurrently with 77102 PhySICS I

Reference book Halhday, D and Resnick, R Physics for

students of science and engzneertng, 1st or 2nd ed (Wiley)

77102 PHYSICS I Dr L W Mitchell, Dr/ Fletcher and Dr P / 0 Teubner

Units 9 Level Fmt year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and 3 hours laboratory per week and 1 tutorial

ThIS topic IS deSigned for students who have studied PhySics and Mathematics at Year 12 level The lectures and laboratory work deal with Newtonian mechanics of smgle particles, rigid bodies and fluids, special relat1v1ty, elementary particles and quantum phenomena, wave motion, optics, electnc1ty and magnetism

Set book G1ancoh, D C Physics for sczentzsts and

engineers wzth modern physics, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1989)

Reference books Feynman RP et al The Feynman lectures on

physics, vol I (Addison Wesley 1964) Halhday, D and Resnick, R Fundamentals of

physics, 3rd ed extended vers10n (Wiley, 1988)

77103 STRUCTURE OF THE UNIVERSE Dr R T Cahill, Professor E Weigold, Dr L W Mitchell and Dr R G Storer

Umts 9 Level Fust year Duration First and second semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre requ1s1te None

t Sa!Jsfactory parttc1pa1Jon Jn Laboratory Classes and Tutonal Classes is compulsory m all physics topics Unsatisfactory participation m these areas will result m failure

429

School of Physical Sciences

The purpose ofthIS topic IS to provide students with a broad descnpbve account of the vanous concepts involved in under standing the small and large scale structure of the universe The general nature of the class1cal and quantum theories will be presented The small scale structures will include atoms, molecules, nuclei and particles The large scale structures include planets stars, galaxies, supernovae and black holes The special and general theory of relat1V1ty and some aspects of class1cal and quantum cosmology will also be considered ldeas about the explanation for space and time wdl be presented The big bang models of the format10n of the umverse, mcludmg the mflat10nary era ideas will be studied ThlS topic can be taken concurrently with 77102 Physics I

Reference books Close, F The cosmzc onion (Heinemann,

1984) Davies, P , ed The new physics

(Cambridge UP , 1989) Gnbbon, J In search of the big bang (Corgi,

1988) Hawkmg, S A brief history of time (Bantam,

1988) Kaufmann, W J Astronomy the structure of

the universe (Macmillan, 1977) Narhkar, J The przmeval unzverse

(Oxford U P , 1988) Narltkar, ] The structure1 of the universe

(Oxford U P , 1980) Wolf F Taking the quantum leap (Harper &

Row, 1981)

77104 SMALL SCALE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIVERSE Dr R T Cahill Professor E Weigold and Dr L W Mitchell

Umts 6 Level Fust year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic 1s mtended for students studymg for a B A degree The purpose of this topic 1s to provide students with a broad descriptive account of the vanous concepts involved in understandmg the small scale structure of the universe, 1nclud1ng atoms, molecules nuclei and particles The general nature of the classical and quantum theories will be

430

presented This topic has the same content as the first semester of 77103 Structure of the Umverse, except that additional readmg will be required Assessment will be by an essay and a 2 hour examination

Reference books Close, F The cosmic onzon (Heinemann,

1984) Davies, P The cosmic blueprint (Heinemann,

London, 1988) Davies, P , ed The new physics

(Cambridge UP, 1989) Pagels, H The cosmic code (Bantam, 1984) Wolf, F Taking the quantum leap (Harper &

Row, 1981)

77105 LARGE SCALE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIVERSE Dr R T Cahill Dr L W Mitchell and Dr R G Storer

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre reqmSite 77104 Small Scale Structure of the Universe is recommended

This topic IS mtended for students studymg for a B A degree The purpose of this topic is to provide students with a broad descriptive account of the vanous concepts involved tn understandmg the large scale structure of the universe This includes the structure of planets, stars galaxtes, supernovae and black holes The big bang models of the forrnat10n of the universe, 1nclud1ng the inflationary era ideas will be studied The special and general theory of relattVIty and some aspects of classical and quantum cosmology will also be considered Ideas about the explanation for space and lime wtll be presented This topic has the same content as the second semester of 77103 Structure of the Universe, except that addit10nal readmg will be reqmred Assess ment will be by an essay and a 2 hour exam1nat.J.on at the end of the semester

Reference books Davies, P , ed The new physics

(Cambridge UP, 1989) Ferns, T Coming of age m the milky way

(Morrow 1988) Gnbbm, J In search of the big bang (Corgi,

1988)

Hawkmg, S A brief history of time (Bantam Press, 1988)

Narhkar, J The primeval universe (Oxford U P , 1988)

Narhkar, J The structure of the universe (Oxford UP, 1977)

Second Year Level Topics zn Physicsf

All second year level topics normally require 77102 Physics I and 60130 Mathematics I as pre requ1S1tes, and 60201 Several Vanable Calculus, 60202 Lmear Algebra and 60203 Elementary Differential Equat10ns as co requ1s1tes

77210 PROBLEM SOLVING IN PHYSICS Dr R G Storer

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te 77102 Physics I

The topic is designed to teach sit.dents how to solve problems m physics A workmg knowledge of the physics contamed m 77102 Physics I is assumed The topic also contains an 1ntroductton to the use of computers in physics

Reference books Chivers, I and Clark, M Interactive

Fortran 77 - a hands on approach (Ellis-Horwood, 1984)

Vandergraft, J S Introductwn to numerical computations, 2nd ed (Academic, 1983)

77211 QUANTUM MECHANICS I Dr RT Cahill

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te 77102 Physics I

The theme of this topic 1s the mtroduct10n of

t Satisfactory partic1patl.on m laboratory classes and attention to tutorial exercises are compulsory m all Physics topics Unsatisfactory part1c1pat10n m these areas will result m failure

Physics

quantum mechanics usmg the Schrod1nger equation Examples such as step, barrier and square well potentials, are used to illustrate phenomena such as transm1ss1on, reflection, tunnelhng, resonances etc The harmonic oscillator potential 1s used as a model to describe the v1brat10nal spectra The importance of matnx elements to descnbe radiative transitions is outltned The Coulor1b potential is treated leading to a d1scuss1on of the hydrogen atom

Set book Ohaman H C Prmczples of quantum

mechanics (Prentice Hall, 1990)

Reference books E1sberg, RM Fundamentals of modern

physics (Wiley, 1963) Merzbacher, E Quantum mechanics, 2nd ed

(Wiley, 1970) Pohl, H A Quantum mechanics for science

and engzneermg (Prentice Hall 1967) Scharff, M Elementary quantum mechanics

(Wiley, 1969) Schiff, L I Quantum mechanics, 3rd ed

(McGraw-Hill, 1968)

77212 ELECTRONICS Dr EL Murray and Dr L W Mitchell

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 6 hours laboratory work per week Pre requ1S1te 77102 Physics I

A C and D C circmt prmc1ples, networks circJ.it analysis, sohd state devices, amplifiers, feedback, pulse and logic circuits, microprocessors

Set book Smith, R J Electronics circuits and devices,

3rd ed (Wiley, 1987)

Reference books Horowitz, P and Hill, W The art of

electronics, 2nd ed (Cambndge U P , 1989) Savant, CJ Electronic circuit design

(Beniamm/Cummmgs, 1987) Simpson R E Introductory electronics for

scientists and engzneers, 2nd ed (Allyn & Bacon, 1987)

Wade, J T , Edwards, P L and Clark, j E Electronic circuit analysis (Wiley, 1973)

431

School of Physical Sciences

77220 ELECTROMAGNETIC TIIEORY I Professor IR /ones

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te 77102 Physics I

Vector calculus Electrostatics Maxwell's equations in d1fferenttal form, electromagnetic waves 1n free space

77221 PHYSICS LABORATORY 2 Dr/ Fletcher

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 6 hours laboratory work per week Pre reqms1te 77220 Electromagnettc Theory I

The experiments are selected in the area of electr1c1ty, magnetism, optics and radiation

77222 PHYSICS LABORATORY 2A Dr/ Fletcher

Umts 15 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours laboratory work per week Pre reqms1te 77220 Electromagnettc Theory I

The expenments are selected 1n the area of electrtc1ty magnetism optics and radiatton The expenment selectton and schedulmg of the laboratory times is done tn con1unctlon with the topic advisers from other D1sc1pltnes

77223 OPTICAL PHYSICS Dr A L McCarthy

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te 77102 PhySics I

Geometric optics, optical 1nstrumentat1on, Fresnel equations, fibre optics, polarization of ltght, mterference and d1ffract10n of ltght coherence 1ntroduct1on to lasers, laser appltcat10ns mcludmg holography

432

Set book Hecht, E Optics 2nd ed (Addison Wesley,

1987)

Reference book Guenther, RD Modern optics (Wiley, 1990)

Third Year Level Topics m Physics

77310 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY AND OPTICS Dr/ Fletcher and Dr P / 0 Teubner

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre reqms1te 77220 Electromagnettc Theoiy I

Boundary value problems Vector potential Maxwell's equations Unbounded electro magnetic waves Bounded waves and wavegmdes Retarded potenl!als Radiatton from accelerated charges Vectorial nature of hght, coherence and interference, diffraction, quantum optics

Set books Grant, I S and Phillips, W R Electro

magnetism (Wiley, 1975) Hecht E Optics (Addison Wesley, 1987)

Reference books Born M and Wolf, E Pnnciples of optics,

4th ed (Pergamon, 1970) Cheng, D K Field and wave electromagnetics

(Addison Wesley, 1983) Fowles, G R Introductwn to modern optics

(Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1968) Frankl D R Electromagnetic theory

(Prenl!ce-Hall 1986) Guenther RD Modern optics (Wiley, 1990) Longhurst, R S Geometrical and physical

optics (Longmans, 1967) Lorra1n, P and Corson, D R Electromagnetzc

fields and waves, 2nd ed (Freeman 1970) Meyer Arendt, JR Jntroductwn to classical

and modern optics, 2nd ed (Prenl!ce Hall, 1984)

Read, F H Electromagnetic radiatwn (Wiley, 1980)

Rtetz, JR and Milford, F J Foundatwns of electromagnetic theory, 3rd ed (Addison Wesley, 1979)

77311 QUANTUM MECHANICS 2 Dr IR Afnan

Units 4 5 Level Thud year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 77211 Quantum Mechanics I

This 1s a continuation of 77211 Quantum Mechanics I and wdl cover scattering by central potential matrix formulat10n of Quantum Mechamcs and Dirac notat10n symmetry and Conservation Laws Angular momentum and its addition, Perturbation theory and var1ahonal method

Reference books Gas1orow1cz S Quantum physics (Wiley

1974) Merzhacher, E Quantum mechanics 2nd ed

(Wiley 1970) Schiff, LI Quantum mechanzcs, 3rd ed

(McGraw Hiii, 1968)

77312 PHYSICS LABORATORY 3 Professor E Weigold

Units 3 Level Thud year Duration First semester Class Contact 6 hours laboratory work per week Pre requ1s1te Co requ1s1te and Op!tcs

77211 Quantum Mechanics I 77310 Electromagnettc Theory

Expenments are selected from the areas of electromagnetic waves, atomic physics, nuclear physics, plasma physics and sohd state physics

77313 PHYSICS LABORATORY 3A Professor E Weigold

Umts 15 Level Third year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours laboratory work per week Pre requ1s1te Co requ1s1te and Optics

77211 Quantum Mechamcs I 77310 Electromagnetic Theory

Selected experiments in the areas of electromagnet.le waves, atomic physics, nuclear physics, plasma physics and sohd state physics

Physics

77320 PLASMA AND ASTROPHYSICS Professor IR Jones and Dr R G Storer

Umts 4 5 Level Thud year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week Pre reqms1te 77310 Electromagnetic Theory and Optics Co reqms1tes 77321 Thermal Physics and 77322 Quantum Theory of Matter

Charged particle mot10n m electromagnetic fields Flmd model of a plasma Waves m plasmas Thermonuclear fusion, Stellar structure and evolution, Galactic structure

Reference books

Chen F F Introductzon to plasma physics (Plenum Press, 1974)

I<aufmann, W J Astronomy the structure of the universe (Macmillan, 1977)

Spitzer, L Physics of fully zonzzed gases 2nd rev ed (Intersc1ence, 1962)

Tanenbaum, B S Plasma physics (McGraw Hiii 1967)

77321 THERMAL PHYSICS Dr IR Afnan

Units 3 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te 77211 Quantum Mechamcs I

Stat1s!Jcal mechamcs of systems of particles, ensembles, partition functions, relation to thermodynam1cs1 ideal gases, Ferm1-D1rac and Bose E1nste1n stat1st1cs Apphcat1ons to rad1ahon, electrons in metals, v1brat1on in sohds, and paramagnetic and terromagnetic systems

Reference books

Kittel C Thermal physics (Wiley, 1969)

Mandi, F Statistical physics (Wiley, 1988)

Morse P M Thermal physics 2nd ed (Ben1amm, 1969)

Reif, F Fundamentals of statistical and thermal physics (McGraw Hiii, 1965)

433

School of Physical Sciences

77322 QUANTUM THEORY OF MATIER Professor IE McCarthy

Umts 4 5 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te Co requ1s1te

77311 Quantum Mechamcs 2 77321 Thermal Phystcs

This topic presents a un1f1ed descnptlon of atoms, molecules, nuclei and sohds A detailed d1Scuss10n of Hartree Fock and the smgle parl!Gle model for all these systems IS

presented Collective exc1tat1on such as rotation, vtbration and superconduchv1ty are introduced

Reference books Ashcroft, N W and Mermm N D Solid state

physics (Holt, Rmehart and Wmston, 1976) McCarthy I E Introduction to nuclear theory

(Wiley, 1968)

77323 INSTRUMENTATION Dr EL Murray

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 6 hours laboratory work per week Pre reqmsite 77212 Expenmental PhyS1cs I

Transducers, signal cond1tlon1ng, probes and low level measurements noise and signal to noise problems, analogue/d1g1tal conversion, signal processing d1g1tal techniques interfacing of equipment

Set book Smith RA Electronics circuits and devices,

3rd ed (Wiley 1987)

Reference books Horowitz, P and Hill, W The art of

electronics 2nd ed (Cambridge U P , 1989) Malmstadt, H V et al Electronics and

znstrumentatzon for sczentzsts (Ben1am1n/ Cummmgs 1981)

Neubert H KP Instrument transducers, 2nd ed (Oxford UP 1975)

Roberts, RA and Mulhs, C T Digital signal processing (AddISon Wesley, 1987)

Weber, L J and McLean D I Electrical measurement systems for biological and physical scientists (Addison Wesley, 1975)

434

Fourth Year Level Topics m Physics

76421 RELATIVITY AND ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY Professor IE McCarthy

Level Fourth year Duration 9 weeks in first semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week

Special relat1V1ty - four d1mens10nal representation of equations of mechanics and electromagnetic theory Electromagnetic rad1at10n theory Synchrotron rad1at10n

76431 ADVANCED QUANTUM MECHANICS Professor IE McCarthy

Level Fourth year Duration 9 weeks 1n first semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week

Scattermg theory for many body system• Coupled channels op!Ical poten!Ial, breakup

76432 SPECIAL TOPICS IN QUANTUM MECHANICS Professor E Weigold

Level Fourth year Duration 9 weeks 1n second semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week

Many body theory Green's Function and propagator techniques Feynman diagrams

Reference book Mattuck R D A guide to Feynman diagrams

in the many body problem 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1976)

76441 ATOMIC COLLISION PROCESSES Dr Pf 0 Teubner

Level Fourth year Duration 9 weeks in second semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week

D1scuss1on of electron atom 1nteract1ons 1nclud1ng elastic scattering, excitation and 1on1satlon Resonant scattenng phenomena Positron scattenng Charge transfer colhs1ons

Reference books Bransden, B H Atomic collision theory

(Beniamm Cummings, 1982) Bransden, B H and Joacham, CJ Physics of

atoms and molecules (Longman, 1983)

Fano, U and Fano, L Physics of atoms and molecules (Chicago UP, 1972)

Massey, H S W , Burhop, E H S and G1lbody, H M Electronic and zonzc zmpact phenomena vols I and II (Oxford U P 1969)

Mott N F and Massey H S W The theory of atomzc colliszons, 3rd ed (Oxford Clarendon, 1965)

76442 PLASMA PHYSICS Professor IR /ones

Level Fourth year Duration 9 weeks 1n second semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week

Statistical descr1pt1on of a plasma The continuum descr1pt1on of a plasma The connect1on between these two theoretical descr1phons Selected topics in plasma behaviour Wave propagation in hot and cold plasmas

76451 ADVANCED STATISTICAL MECHANICS Dr R G Storer

Level Fourth year Duration 9 weeks in first semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week

Statistical mechanics of interacting particles 1nclud1ng quantum effects Apphcahons to hqu1ds sohds, super conductors, hqu1d hehum, etc

Reference books Feynman, RP Statzstzcal mechanics

(Beniamm 1972) Huang K Statistical mechanics (Wiley

1963)* lsihara, A Statistical physics (Academic 1971) Mackinnon, L Experzmental physics at low

temperatures (Wayne State UP, 1966) March, NH, Young, W H and

Sampanthar S The many body problem zn quantum mechanics (Cambridge UP, 1967)

Mattock, R D A guide to Feynman diagrams zn the many body problem, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1976)

Associate Diploma zn Applied Sciences

Pryde, J A The liquid state (Hutchmson, 1966)

Rowhnson, ) S et al Liquids (Taylor & Francis 1971)*

76461 NUCLEAR THEORY Dr IR Afnan

Level Fourth year Duration 9 weeks 1n first semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week

The nucleon nucleon force Models of the nucleus Quark degrees of freedom

Reference books Brown, GE and Jackson, AD The nucleon

nucleon znteractwn (North Holland 1976) Eisenberg, J M and Greiner, W Nuclear

Models, Vol I, Excztalzon mechanisms of the nucleus, Vol II, Mzcro:,copzc theory of the nucleus Vol III (North-Holland, 1970)

Shah! A de and Feshbach H Theoretical nuclear physics nuclear structure (Wiley 1974)

76463 PARTICLE PHYSICS Dr RT Cahill

Level Fourth year Duration 9 weeks in second semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week

Special relativity, classical fields, vartational pnnctple and field quantisation leading to theortes of electromagnetic, strong and weak interaction phenomena

Reference book Kane, G Modern elementary particle physics

(Addison Wesley, 1987)

76471 PHYSICS SEMINAR

Level Fourth year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 lecture per week

Associate Diploma zn Applied Science

The following topics are available to Associate Diploma m Apphed Science students only

435

School of Physical Sciences

79101 INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICS D Dr A L McCarthy

Umts 9 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te Mathematical background approXImately at Year 11 level will be assumed Restrrct10n Associate Diploma of Applied Science studentG only

ThIS topic may not be taken concurrently with or after 77102 or 77103 Kmemallcs and dynamics of particle motion fluids, electro magnetism, waves

Reference books Halliday D and Resmck, R Physics for

students of science and engineering, 1st or 2nd ed (Wiley)

Kaufmann W J Astronomy the structure of the universe (Macmillan, 1977)

79102 APPLIED PHYSICS LABORATORY ID Dr EL Murray

Umts 4 5 Level First year Durallon Full year Class Contact 3 hours laboratory per week Restriction Associate Diploma of Apphed Science students only

Experiments 1llustrat1ng phenomena 1n mechanics, wave motion optJcs, quantum effects, electr1c1ty and magnetism will be undertaken A series of reports on the procedures and results of the experiments will form part of the assessment

79103 PHYSICAL PRINCIPLES I Dr L W Mitchell, Dr f Fletcher and Dr Pf 0 Teubner

Umts 9 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 lectures per week and 1 tutorial Assumed knowledge PhySics at Year 12 level

Restrrct10n Associate Diploma of Applied Science students only

436

The lectures deal with Newtonian mechanics of single particles, rigid bodies and fluids, special relativity, elementary particles and quantum phenomena, wave motion, optics electnc1ty and magnetISm Students will be expected to undertake a series of readings and problem solving sets associated with the lecture material

Set book Grnncoli D C Physics for scientists and

engzneers with modern physics, 2nd ed (Prenllce Hall, 1989)

79104 APPLIED PHYSICS LABORATORY I Dr EL Murray

Umts 4 5 Level First year Durallon Full year Class Contact 3 hours laboratory per week Restrrct10n Associate Diploma of Applied Science students only

Experiments illustrating phenomena 1n mechanics, wave motion, optics, quantum effects, electnc1ty and magnetISm will be undertaken A series of reports on the procedures and results of the experiments will form part of the assessment

79105 INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRYD Dr KP Waznwrrght

Umts 9 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Restnct10n Associate Diploma of Applied Science students only Co reqmSite 79106 Applied Chemistry Laboratory ID

ThIS topic aims to mtroduce the fundamentals of chemIStry and its applicat10ns m mdustry and the environment The topic 1s intended for students takmg a Diploma program m an area other than chemistry

Semester 1 Class1fication of matter, chemical symbols formulae and equations, laws of chem1cal comb1nat1on, atomic structure,

bondmg, relat10nship between bond type and physical properties, 1ntermolecular forces, acids and bases, molanty, gas laws, hqu1ds and their vapour pressures, elementary kmetics and thermodynam1cs, equ1hbnum

Semester 2 The pH scale 1on1c equ1hbna, buffer solut1ons, redox and reactions electrochem1cal cells, electrolys1s, organic chemistry of ahphat1c and aromatic hydrocarbons and compounds having other important funct10nal groups, the penodic table and the morgamc chemistry of the more important elements selected topics in industrial and enVIronmental chemistry e g iron and steel production chemistry of glass, photography atmosphenc chemistry

Set book Brady, j E and Hoium, j R Fundamentals of

chemistry, 3rd ed (Wiley 1988)

79106 APPLIED CHEMISTRY LABORATORY ID Dr KP Wainwright

Umts 4 5 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 3 hours laboratory per week Restnct10n Associate Diploma of Apphed Science students only Co requmte 79105 Introduct10n to Chemistry D

Experiments 1llustrat1ng pr1nc1ples and apphcat10ns of Chemistry Assessment of performance at each laboratory session is made by the demonstrator

79107 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES I Dr M f Thompson

Umts 9 Level F!fSt year Dural!on Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre-requisite Assumes a knowledge of chemistry at Year 12 level Restncl!on Associate Diploma of Apphed Science students only Co reqmsite 79108 Apphed Chemistry Laboratory

Chemical equ1hbr1um, thermodynamics, k1net1cs atomic and nuclear structure,

Associate Diploma m Applied Sciences

bonding Solutions, electrochem1stry inorganic and organic chemistry Industnal and environmental aspects of chemistry

Set book Brady, j E and Hoium, j R Fundamentals of

chemistry, 3rd ed (Wiley, 1988)

Reference books Eastwood, F W Swan, j M and Youatt, j B

Organic chemistry, Programs 1 6 (Science Pr, 1967)*

Heslop, RB and Wild, G M SI units m chemistry (Apphed Science, 1971)*

Traynham, j G Organic nomenclature a programmed introductwn (Prentice Hall 1966)*

Zumdahl, S S Chemistry (Heath, 1986)

79108 APPLIED CHEMISTRY LABORATORY I Dr M f Thompson

Umts 4 5 Level Fust year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 3 hours laboratory per week Restnct10n Associate Diploma of Apphed Science students only Co reqmsite 79107 Chemical Pnnciples I

Expenments !llustratmg the prmciples and apphcat10ns of Chemistry Assessment of performance at each laboratory session is made by the demonstrator

437

The requirements for degrees and diplomas offered m the School of Social Sciences are set out in Statute 7 1 Persons requiring any add1tional information about degree require ments should contact the School of Social Sciences Adm1n1stratlve Officer, Ms Leonie Hardcastle (Social Sciences South), or Secretary of the School Board, Mr Cynl Brown (Academic Services Sectwn of the Registry)

Syllabuses for topics taught m the School of Social Sciences are set out on the following pages Persons requ1nng additional informa­tion about any particular topic should contact the Topic Convener whose name ts included at the top of the topic syllabus Persons requiring additional information about the studies of a Disciplme m general should contact the Director of Studies of that D1sc1phne Topics are hsted under each D1sc1phne in numerical order The first two digits of a top c number mdicate the Disciplme in which it 1s offered, the next number gives an mdicat10n of its level and the last two digits differentiate it from other topics m that Disciphne at that level Thus topic 30204 is an Economics topic at second year level, and the fourth such topic given a number The following codes are used for the various Disciplmes and programmes (t) withm the School

t 23 - Austrahan Studies 30 - Economics 31 - Economic History 32 - Geography 33 - History 34 - American Studies 35 - Pohllcs

36 - Psychology 37 - Asian Studies 38 - Sociology 39 - Mullldisciplmary and School topics 40 - Accounting and Finance

t 41 - Women's Studies 50 - Social Admmistrat10n

t 51 - Pohcy and Admmistrat10n t 52 - Development Studies

Attentwn is drawn to School topics 39103 Elements of Data Analysis and 39221 Stallsllcs 1n the Social Sciences Problems and Poss1b1hties which are hsted after the Mulhd1sc1phnary topics Students are also remmded of the avai!abihty of programmes m Women's Studies Australian Studies and Development Studies

Students are expected to procure the prescnbed edit10n of all set text books Those books mdicated by an asterisk(*) are available m paper back edil!ons

Unless otherwise stated, pre requ1s1tes for all Social Sciences topics are required at C grade or better

Students must check the University timetable before enrol/mg and the supplementary timetable sheet which will be issued with the Enrolment Handbook on enrolment day

Topzcs m Economzcs

General Information

Topzcs Avazlable B Ee (General Stream) At first year level 30110 Economics I and 30130 Economics IA are taught throughout

Set books and Text books are required read mg on which students may be tested Students are expected to have their own copies of all books listed as Set books or Text books mult.tp!e copies of these books Wiii not be available in the Library Prehmmary read.mg IS reading which the student 1s expected to have completed before the commencement of teaching and on which he or she may at any lime be tested Further read.mg and Recommended readmg where not otherwise specified indicate reading which the student 1s expected to do m the course of studymg the Set hooks Reference books are books which the student Will fmd useful in the course of studymg the topics for which they are spec1f1ed

438

the year 30112 Introductory Macroecononucs is taught m the second semester The followmg second year topics are offered

30201 Macroeconom1cs 30202 M1croeconom1cs 30205 Quanlltaltve Methods for

Econom1cs I 30206 Quantttallve Methods for

Econom1cs II 30207 Introductory Econometncs

The followmg third year topics will be avatlable

30301 International Econom1cs

30302 Economic Development 30303 The Economics of Labour 30304 Industrial Orgamsat10n 30305 Pubhc Fmance 30307 Money and Finance 30308 Comparative Econom1c Systems

30309 Econometr1cs 30311 Mathematical Econom1cs

30313 (31301) Australian Economic Development

30314 Apphed Econometncs 30315 Asian Economic Development 30316 Introduchon to Chometncs 30317 Intemat10nal Fmance 30318 Environmental Econom1cs

Honours Programme

Units

6 6

6

6

6

6 6

6 6

6 6 6

6 6

6 6

6 6 6

6

A single Honours programme 1n Econom1cs con51sts of the followmg which IS a JOmt programme of Flmders UmverS1ty and the University of Adelaide Students are normally reqmred to take courses 30420, 30401, 30402 and any three other hsted topics

30420 Econom1cs Honours Thesis of not more than 12,000 words

30401 Advanced M1croeconom1cs

30402 Advanced Macroeconomics 30421 Labour Economics 30422 Intemat10nal Trade 30423 Intemat10nal Fmancial Issues 30424 Pubhc Economics 30425 Money 30426 Economic Development

Economics

30427 Econometncs 30428 Mathemahcal Economics 30429 Methods of Economic Research 30431 History of Economic Thought 30432 Economic H!Story

Any other approved sub1ect

Full time students must enrol m 30490 Econom1cs Honours, as well as in the 1nd1Yidual courses Part-time students must enrol m 30495 (first year) or 30496 (second year) as well as m the md1v1dual topics

Master of Economics

M Ee may be undertaken by theSlS, or by a comb1natlon of coursework and thesis The M Ee by thesis consists of a dissertation of not more than 60 000 words The M Ee by combination of coursework and thesis 1s a 101nt programme of Flinders Un1vers1ty and the Umver51ty of Adelaide, and conSlsts of 54 units of which 30 are coursework, and the remamder (24 umts) bytheSls The coursework topics can be chosen from the following

Units a) Core requirements

30501 Microeconomics 6 30502 Macroeconomics 6 30503 Economics of Pubhc Pohcy 6

(b) Elechves (up to three to be selected, of which no more than two can be chosen from group (b)(II))

30504 Transport Economics 6 30530 Advances m Economic

Theory I 6 30531 Advances m Economic

Theory II 6 30532 Advances m Quanhtahve

Mathematical and Apphed Economics I 6

30533 Advances m Quanhtahve Mathematical and Apphed Economics II 6

30534 Advances m Quantitative Mathematical and Apphed Economics III 6

Note that the Director of Graduate Studies may, in appropriate circumstances, allow a candidate to substitute an elecllve sub1ect(s) for one (or more) of the core sub1ects hsted m Group (a) Candidates with an inadequate

439

School of Social Sciences

quantlta!Jve background will be required to take an approved quantitative subject

FITst Year Topics

30130 Economics IA 30110 Economics I

Each of these topics 1s made up of two parts as follows

Part (a) A co'!lmon course m the first semester in introductory micro econom1cs

Part (b)

(1) In the second semester Economics IA will deal with apphcat10ns of micro economics to policy issues

(u) In the second semester, Economics I will conSist of mtroductory macro economics and an 1ntroduct1on to the development of econom1c ideas

AU students mll enrol 1n1tially 1n Economics IA Those who pass the first semester exam1natton in June with a grade of C or better will have the option of transferrmg to Econorn1cs I for the second semester

A student who m different years takes both 30130 Economics IA and 30110 Economics I will be allowed to count a maximum of 18 units towards his or her degree

30130 ECONOMICS IA Professor M E Burns (First semester) Mr R Wallace (Second semester)

Umts 12 Level First year All first level students m Econom1cs are required to enrol 1n1hally in this topic Durat10n Full year Class Contact 3 lectures 1 workshop and 1 tutorial per week in the first semester, 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week m the second semester Pre requ1s1te None

This topic (m con1unct10n with 30112 Intro ductory Macroeconom1cs) IS designed for students taking Econom1cs as a baste d1sc1p1Ine m either the B A or the B Ee degree, or those taking Econom1c History as a basic d1sc1phne m the B A degree It 1s also designed to be suitable as a cognate topic or as an elective topic for other d1Sc1plmes

440

The first semester will be concerned with a study of the contemporary capitalist economy through an ana!ySis of pnce determmat10n In the second semester, the elementary m1croeconom1c pnnc1ples developed in the first semester are used to study some important economic Institutions and pohcy issues Particular emphasis will be given to some contemporary debates 1n Austraha In view of the weight given to contemporary economic issues, specific topics studied In the second semester are varied from year to year

Previous study of Economics IS not assumed Students are not assumed to have achieved any particular level of mathematical competence, but are expected to master the elementary mathematical concepts and techmques mtroduced and explamed m the course Students are advised that Economics courses in subsequent years will involve add1t10nal mathematical and quantitative techmques (See 30202 M1croeconom1cs) The necessary techmques will be developed by the staff members in those courses Some students with an interest in mathematics may wish to include appropnate mathematics courses Ill

their degree programmes Such students should consult Mr P Wagstaff, the Director of Studies Ill the Economics Disc1pl!ne

Set book Fischer S , Dornbusch, R and Schmalensee, R

Economics, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1988)

Reference books As for Econom1cs I and dependmg on the topics chosen for the second semester, some of the followmg Atkmson, A B The economics of inequality

2nd ed (Oxford UP, 1983) Fuchs V R Who shall live? Health,

economics and social choice (Basic 1974) Hollingworth, P Australians m poverty, 4th

ed (Nelson, 1985) Kasper, W Australian polztzcal economy

(Macm11lan, 1982)* Lipsey, R G , Langley P C and Mahoney,

D M Posztzve economics for Australian students, 2nd ed (We1denfeld & Nicolson, 1986)

Mendelsohn, R Fair Go, welfare zssues zn Australia (Pengmn, 1982)

N1euwenhuysen, JP 1 ed Australian trade practices readings, 2nd ed (Croom Helm, 1976)*

Scotton, RB and Ferber, H , eds Public expenditures and social policy m Australia, vol I "The Whitlam years" vol II 'The first Fraser years 1 (Longman Cheshire vol I 1978 vol II 1980)

Thurow, L C Generating inequality (Macmillan, 1975)

30110 ECONOMICS I Professor M E Bums

Umts 12 Level First year Dura!Ion Full year Class Contact 3 lectures, 1 tutorial and 1 workshop per week Pre requ1s1te A grade of C or better m the May exammat10n (or the supplementary exammat1on m June/July) Ill 30130 Economics IA

This topic 1s designed for students takmg Economics as a basic d1sc1phne 1n either the Arts or Econom1cs degree, or taking Econom1c History as a basic d1sc1pltne 1n the Arts degree It is designed also to be suitable as a cognate topic for other d1sc1phnes and as an elective topic The first semester will be concerned with a study of the contemporary capitalist economy through an analysis of modern theories of price The second semester is concerned wtth income deternunat1on both in the short run and m the long Particular attention is given to econom1c growth and the d1stnbution of income

Previous study of Econom1cs is not assumed Students are not expected to have achieved any par!Icular level of mathema!Ical competence, but are required to master elementary mathema!Ical concepts and techmques mtroduced and explamed m the topic Students are advised that Economics courses 1n subsequent years involve additional mathema!Jcal and quan!Ita!Ive techmques The necessary techmques will be developed by the staff in those courses in their progra1nmes Some students with an interest in mathematics may wish to include appropriate mathematics courses 1n their degree programmes Such students are adVIsed to consult the Director of Studies

Text book Fischer, S , Dornbusch, R and Schmalansee,

R Economics 2nd ed (McGraw-Hiil, 1988)

Economzcs

Reference books Indecs Economics State of play 5 (Allen &

Unwm, 1988)* Jackson, J and McConnell1 C R Economzcs

3rd Australian ed (McGraw Hill 1988)* Jones, R S and Perkms, J 0 N Contemporary

macroeconomzcs, 2nd ed (Prentice-Hall, 1986)*

Kasper, W, Blandy, R, Freebairn J , Hockmg D and O'Neill, R Australza at the crossroads (Harcourt Brace, 1980)*

Lipsey, R G, Langley, PC and Mahoney, D M Posztwe economics for Australian students, 2nd ed (We1denfeld & Nicholson, 1986)

Samuelson, P A 1 Hancock, K] and Wallace RH Economics, 2nd Australian ed (McGraw Hill, 1975)*

Shaw A G L The economic development of Australia, 7th ed (Longman, 1980)*

Sinclair, WA The process of economic development zn Australia (Longman Cheshire, 1985)*

Stewart, M Keynes and after, 2nd ed (Pelican 1972)*

Wonnacott P and Wonnacott, R Economzcs, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1986)

30112 INTRODUCTORY MACROECONOMICS Professor M E Bums

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 lectures 1 workshop and 1 tu tonal Pre reqms1te A grade of B or better m 30130 Economics IA, or with the perm1sszon of the Head of the Economics D1sc1plme

This topic 1s designed to enable those students who have completed 30130 Economics IA to undertake a ma1or sequence 1n Econormcs

The topic consists of the macroeconom1cs and economic history sections of 30110 Economics I, including the measurement of an economy's output, the factors that influence the size of that output and the operat10n of the fmanc1al system It also looks at some elementary models of mflat10n

Set book Fischer, S Dornbusch, R and Schmalansee, R

Economics, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1988)

441

School of Social Sciences

Reference books Indecs Economics State of play 5 (Allen &

Unwm, 1988)* Jackson, J and McConnell, CR Economics

3rd Australian ed (McGraw Hill, 1988)* Jones, RS and Perkins J 0 N Contemporary

macroeconomzcs, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1986)*

Kenwood A G and Lougheed A L The growth of the znternatwnal economy 1820 1980 (Allen & Unwm, 1983)

Lipsey, R G, Langley, P C and Mahoney, D M Positive economzcs for Australzan students, 2nd ed (Weidenfeld & Nicholson, 1986)

Malthus, TR Populatwn the first essay (Michigan U P , 1971)

Samuelson, P A , Hancock, K J and Wallace, R H Economics 2nd Australian ed (McGraw-Hill, 1975)*

Stewart, M Keynes and after, 2nd ed (Pelican 1972)*

Second Year Topics

30201 MACROECONOMICS Mr G McL Scott

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures, 1 tutorial per \Veek Pre reqmsite A grade of C or better m30110 Economics I or 30112 Introductory Macroeconom1cs

For tins topic, students will be expected to be familiar with the mathemal!cal techniques taught m the first half of 30205 Quanl!tal!ve Methods for I:conomics I The purpose of the topic 1s to provide an 1ntroduction to the theory of the determmat10n of the level of employment and producl!on and the level and rate of change of prices, in a small economy that engages 1n international trade and which 1S subject to mternat10nal capital flows The basic 'l(eynes1an' model 1s developed and critically examined with reference to both Keynes' own writing and modern 'Post-Keynesian' work

Text book Dornbusch, R and Fischer, S Macro

economics, 4th ed (McGraw Hill, 1988)*

442

Reference books Ackley G Macroeconomics (Collier

Macmillan, 1978)* Brown, W S Macroeconomics (Prent.Ice Hall,

1988) Dern burg, T F M acroeconomzcs, 7th ed

(McGraw Hill, 1985)* Glahe FR Marroeconomzcs 3rd ed

(Harcourt Brace Jova·10vich, 1985)* Gordon, RJ Macroeconomics, 4th ed (Little,

Brown 1987) Jndecs Economics State of play 5 (Allen &

Unwm, 1988)* Jones, RS and Perkms, J 0 N Contemporary

macroeconomics 2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1986)

Keynes, J M The general theory of employment, interest and money (Papermac, 1974)*

Laidler, D E The demand for money 3rd ed (Harper & Row, 1985)*

Lindauer J Macroeconomics, 3rd ed (Wiley, 1976)*

Rowan, D C Output, znflatzon and growth Australian ed (Macmillan, 1975)*

Sawyer M Macroeconomzcs zn question (Wheatsheaf, 1982)

30202 MICROECONOMICS Mr J Hayles

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures, 1 tutonal per week In addit10n all students are reqmred to take 9 lectures in elementary calculus in the first semester Pre requisite A grade of C or better m 30110 Economics I or a grade of B or better in 30130 Economics IA, or with the perm1ss1on of the Head of the Economics D!Sciplme

This topic bmlds on the elementary m1croeconom1cs studies in Economics I Students will be expected to be familiar with the mathemal!cal techmques taught m the first half of 30205 Quantital!ve Methods for Economics I Sub1ects covered include demand theory, producl!on theory, the effects of uncertainty and forms of market behaviour other than perfect competition These subjects are integrated 1n a general equ11Ibr1um system which is u&ed to discuss welfare aspects of a market economy

Text book Pmdyck, R and Rubmfeld, D Micro

economics (Macmillan, 1989)

Reference books De Serpa, AC Microeconomic theory, 2nd

ed (Allyn & Bacon, 1988) Gravelle, H and Rees R Mzcroeconomzcs

(Longman, 1981)' Htrshle1fer J Price theory and applzcatwns

4th ed (Prentice Hall 1988)* Hyman, D N Modern mzcroeconomzcs

2nd ed (Irwm 1988)* Laidler, D and Estnn, S Introduction to

mzcroeconomzcs 3rd ed (Ph1hp Allan, 1989)*

Maddala, GS and Miller E Mzcroeconomzcs theory and applicatwns (McGraw Hill 1989)

Nicholson, W Mzcroeconomzc theory, 3rd ed (Holt Saunders 1985)*

Quirk, JP Intermediate mzcroeconomzcs, 3rd ed (SR A 1986)

Ruffm, R Modern price theory (Scott Foresman 1988)

Tisdell C Mzcroeconomzcs of markets (Wiley 1982)*

Varian H Intermediate mzcroeconomzcs, 2nd ed (Norton, 1990)*

30205 QUANTITATIVE METHODS FOR ECONOMICS I Ms S Gunner

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 lectures, 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te A grade of C or betterm 30110 Econom1cs I, or a grade of B or better in 30130 Econom1cs IA, or with the perm1ss1on of the Head of D1sc1plme

This topic is spht mto two areas of study One half of the topic will be concerned with basic algebra elementary d1fferent1al calculus and lmear algebra Apphcattons of calculus to total and partial differentiation, opt1misatJ.on and comparative static analysis and basic integration will be covered Matnx operations 1nclud1ng 1nvers1on and Cramer s Rule will be considered Students in need of remedial work m elementary algebra should see the topic convener at the time of enrolment The second half of the topic will focus on mtroductory statistics It will provide an introduction to

Economics

the use of quantitative data 1n economics including aspects covering the sources of and reltab1hty of numerical data, measures of central tendency and d1spers1on elementary probability and d1str1butions, and hypothesis testing A brief introduction to the use of computers and their apphcat1ons to quanl!tal!ve analysis wtll be mcluded

Prelzmznary reading l(ennedy, G Mathematzcs for innumerate

economists (Duckworth 1982)

Set book Karmel, P H and Polasek M Applied

statzstzcs for economists, 4th ed (Pitman 1978)

or Newbold P Statistics for business and

economics 2nd ed (Prenl!ce Hall, 1988)*

Reference books Archibald, G C and Lipsey, R G An

zntroductzon to a mathematzcal treatment of economics, 3rd ed (We1denfeld & Nicolson, 1977)

Berenson M L and Levine D M Baszc business statistzcs concepts and applzcat10ns, 3rd ed (Prenltce Hall, 1986)

Chiang, A Fundamental methods of mathematical economics, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1984)

Freund J E Statzstzcs a fzrst course, 4th ed (Prentice Hall, 1986)

Kohler, H Statzstzcs for business and economics, 2nd ed (Scott Foresman 1988)

Smith L H and Wtlhams, D R Statistical analyszs for business a conceptual approach, 2nd ed (Wadsworth, 1976)

Wonnacott, TH and Wonnacott R j Introductory statistics for business and economics, 3rd ed (Wiley, 1984)

30206 QUANTITATIVE METHODS FOR ECONOMICS II Mr J Hayles

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te A grade of D m 30205 Quantitative Methods for Economics I, or with perm1ss10n of the Head of D1sc1phne

A student will not be able to count both 30206

443

School of Social Sciences

Quant1tal!ve Methods for Economics II and 30207 Introductory Econometncs towards his or her degree The course focuses on the various statistical tools used in econom1cs The topics to be covered include the inter pretation of sample data estimation dec1s1on making, time series, index numbers and elementary regression analysis Students will be required to use computers

Set books Gu1arat1, D N Basic econometncs, 2nd ed

(McGraw-Hiil, 1988) Newbold, P Statistics for business and

economics, 2nd ed (Prenlice Hall 1988)*

Reference books Hamson, N and Rickard, J K , eds Statistics

for business and economics, Aust ed (Harper & Row, 1989)*

Berenson, M and LeVIne D Baszc business statzstzcs concepts and applzcatzons, 3rd ed (Prentice Hall, 1986)

Freund, J , W1lhams, F and Perles, B Elementary business statzstzcs, 5th ed (Prentice Hall, 1988)

Keller, G , Warrack, B and Bartel, H Statzstzcs for management and economics (Wadsworth, 1987)

Kennedy P A guide to econometrics, 2nd ed (Blackwell, 1985)

Kohler, H Statistics for business and economics, 2nd ed (Scott Foresman, 1988)

Mendenhall, W , Re1nmuth, J , Beaver, R and Duhan, D Statistics for management and economics (Duxbury, 1986)

Pindyck, R and Rubinfeld D Econometric models and economic forecasts, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1991)

Thomas J An zntroductzon to statistical analysis for economists, 2nd ed (Weidenfeld & Nicholson, 1983)

30207 INTRODUCTORY ECONOMETRICS Ms S Gunner

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite Grade C or better in 30205 Quantitative Methods for Economics I, or with permission of the Head of Discipline

444

A student will not be able to count both 30206 Quanlitative Methods for Economics II and 30207 Introductory Econometncs towards his or her degree

This course is intended for students who wish to pursue further study in either 30309 Econometncs and/or 30314 Applied Econo metrics in their third year The course focuses on estimation and testing the hnear regression model Students taking this course will have covered elementary probab1hty d1str1button theory in 30205 Quanlitalive Methods for Economics I The course wtll provide a standard introduction to both theorelical and applied aspects of econometnc analysis The following topics wdl be covered ordinary least squares estimation and inference based on the Gauss Markov theorem, the imphcat1ons of the failure of the assumptions underlying the classical (Gauss Markov) model simultaneous equation bias and 1dent1f1cat1on 1 and forecasting using the econometric regression model Topics relatmg to data handlmg (dummy vanables, seasonality, etc) overlap the more general areas to be studied

Preliminary reading Pindyck R S and Rubinfeld, D L Econo

metric models and econometric forecasts, 2nd ed (McGraw Hiil, 1981)

Set books Gu1arati, D Basic econometrzcs, 2nd ed

(McGraw Hill, 1988)

Johnston, J Econometric methods 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1984)

Reference books Chow, G Econometric methods (McGraw

Hill, 1983)

Kmenta J Elements ofeconometrzcs, 2nd ed (Macmdlan, 1986)

Koutsoy1ann1s1 A Theory of econometrics (Harper & Row, 1973)

Maddala, G S Econometrics (McGraw Hill, 1977)

Theil, H Principles of econometrics (Wiley, 1971)

Third Year Topics

30301 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Dr M Polasek

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te 30201 Macroeconom1cs and 30202 Microeconomics with a grade of C or better m one and a grade of D or better m the other

This topic introduces students to basic concepts and analylical tools used m the study of international econom1c relations Sub1ects to be discussed include the balance of payments, foreign exchanges, the 1nteractton of different econom1es through trade and investment, commerc1al pohcy, the funchon1ng of the post war world monetary system, and the role of 1nternat1onal 1nshtut1ons such as the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank

Set book Kenen, PB The znternatzonal economy,

2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1989)

Reference books Argy, V The post war zntematzonal money

crzs1s (Allen & Unwm, 1981)* Baldwm, R E and Richardson, J D , eds

International trade and finance, 3rd ed (Little, Brown 1985)*

Caves, RE and Jones R W World trade and payments, 4th ed (Little, Brown, 1985)

Carden, W M Trade polzcy and economic welfare (Oxford UP, 1974)*

Carden, WM Inflatzon, exchange rates and the world economy, 3rd ed (Oxford UP, 1985)

Dornbusch, R Open economy, macro economics (Basic, 1980)*

Ethier, W Modem internatzonal economics 2nd ed (Norton, 1988)*

Heffernan, S and S1ncla1r, P Modern mternatzonal economics (Blackwell, 1990)

Krueger, A 0 Exchange rate determination (Cambrtdge UP, 1983)*

Krugman, P R and Obstfeld, M Internatzonal economics (Scott Foresman, 1988)

MacDonald, R Floating exchange rates (Unwm Hyman 1988)*

Ntehans, J International monetary economics Oohns Hopkms, 1984)

Economics

Pearce, IF Intematzonal trade (Norton 1970) Reserve Bank of Austraha Bulletm (monthly) Scammell W M The internatzonal economy

smce 1945 (Macmillan, 1983)* Thulwall, A P Bal.ance of payments theory and

UK expenence, 3rd ed (Macnullan, 1986) Wdhamson J The open economy and the

world economy (Harper & Row, 1983)* Yarbrough, B V and Yarbrough, R M

The world economy trade and finance (Holt Rmehart & Wmston, 1988)

30302 (37307) (52302) ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT MrGKC Tan

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes 30201 Macroeconomics and 30202 M1croeconom1cs with a grade of C or better 1n one and a grade of D or better 1n the other For those who are takmg 30201 Macroeconomics concurrently with this topic, the pre reqmSite will be a grade of C or better m 30202 M1croeconom1cs

The emphasis ofth1s topic is on the appltcabon of economic theory to the problems of economic growth and development of the low-1ncome countries Students will be introduced to the ma1or development models, but wdl consider broader issues of under development, 1nclud1ng the influence of social, demographic and pohttcal impediments to development The topic will include some case studies in economic development

Preliminary readmg Dasgupta, A Economic theory and the

developing countrzes (Macmillan, 1974)* Donaldson P Worlds apart the economic

gulf between natzons (Penguin 1973)* Elkan, W Introductzon to development

economics (Pengum, 1973)* Galbraith, J K The nature of mass poverty

(Pengum, 1980)*

Reference books Colman, D and Nixson, F Economics of

change zn less developed countries, 2nd ed (Phihp Allan, 1986)*

Donaldson, L Economzc development analysis and policy (West, 1984)

445

School of Social Sciences

Gemmell, N Surveys of development economics (Blackwell, 1987)

Ghatak, S and lngersent K Agnculture and economzc development (Harvester, 1984)

Ghatak, S An zntroductzon to development economics, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1986)*

G1lhs M Perkins, D H , Roemer, M and Snodgrass, D R Economics of development 2nd ed (Norton, 1987)

Hagen, E The economics of development, 4th ed (Irwm, 1986)

Hall, P Growth and development an economic analysis (Martm Robertson, 1983)

Herrick, B and Kmdleberger C Economic development 4th ed (McGraw Hill, 1983)

Hunt, D Economic theories of development (Wheatsheaf, 1989)

L1v1ngstone I Development economics and policy readings (Allen & Unwm, 1981)

Meier G ed Leadzng issues in economic development, 4th ed (Oxford U P 1984)

Nafziger E W The economics of developing countnes (Wadsworth, 1984)

Roxborough, I Theorzes of under development (Macmillan, 1979)*

Smger, H W and Ansan, J Rich and poor countnes 3rd ed (Alien & Unwm, 1982)*

Thirlwall A P Growth and development 3rd ed (Macmillan, 1983)*

Todaro M P Economic development and the Thzrd World, 4th ed (Longman, 1989)*

Toye, j Dilemmas of development (Blackwell 1987)*

Wilber, C K ed The political economy of development and underdevelopment, 4th ed (Random House, 1988)*

Yotopoulos, PA and Nugent, J B Economics of development (Harper & Row, 1976)

30303 THE ECONOMICS OF LABOUR Dr R Drago

Umts 6 Level Third year Duratzon Full year Class Contact 1 lecture per week and 1 tutorial per fortmght Pre requ1s1tes 30201 Macroeconom1cs and 30202 Microeconomics with a grade of C or better m one and a grade of D or better m the other

This topic is essenl!aliy a study of the 1nteraction of econom1c and 1nstltutional

446

factors in the labour market The matters studied will include processes of wage determ1natlon, factors 1nfluenc1ng the relative wage structure, industnal relations systems, unemployment and the labour force basic theories of inflation, and wages and incomes pohcies

Text book Norris, K The economics of Australian

labour markets 2nd ed (Longman Cheshire 1988)

Wachtel, H M Labour and the economy 2nd ed (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1988)

Reference books Burton, j Wage znflatzon (Macmillan, 1972)* Chapman, BJ , Isaac, j E and Nliand, j R

Australian laboureconomzcs readings, 3rd ed (Macmillan, 1984)

Doennger, PB and P1ore, M J Internal labour markets and manpower analysis (Heath, 1971)

Ehrenberg R G and Smith, R S Modern labour economics theory and policy, 3rd ed (Scott Foresman, 1987)

Fleisher B M and Kmeser, T J Labor economics theory, evidence and polzcy (Prenl!ce Hall, 1984)

Gordon D M Theorzes of poverty and underemployment (Lexmgton 1974)

Hamermesh D and Rees, A The economzcs of work and pay, 3rd ed (Harper & Row 1984)

Phelps Brown, E H The znequalzty of pay (Oxford UP, 1977)*

Pohlman, j E Economics of wage and pnce controls (Gnd, 1972)

Whitfield K The Australzan labour market (Harper & Row, 1987)

30304 INDUSTRIAL ORGANISATION Mr f W Hayles

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes 30201 Macroeconomics and 30202 Microeconomics with a grade of C or better m one and a grade of D or better m the other For those who are takmg 30201 Macroeconom1cs concurrently with this topic, the pre reqmsite wlil be a grade of C or better in 30202 M1croeconom1cs

In this topic attention ts focused on how the performance of markets 1s affected by the structure of industry, the behaviour of indus trial leaders and the policies of governments Aspects to be studied include concentratJ.on, size of firms growth of firms, competition policy internal and external entry, managerial enterprise, mergers and take overs trade practices leg1slatJ.on tariffs, pnces surveillance, and industrial re structuring

Prelzmznary reading Caves, R , Ward I , Wilhams, P and Wnght, C

Australian zndustry structure conduct performance, 2nd ed (Pren!Jce-Hall, 1987)

Text book To be advised

Reference books Brazen Y Concentration mergers and publzc

policy (Macmillan, 1982) Clarke, R and McGu1nness, T , eds The

economics of the firm (Blackwell, 1987)* Dav1dson 1 F G and Stewardson 1 B R

Economics and Australian industry1

2nd ed (Longman Cheshire, 1979)* Johns, BL, Dunlop, WC and Sheehan W J

Small business zn Australia, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1983)

McGee, J S Industrzal organization (Pren!Jce Hall, 1988)*

Parry, T G, ed Australian industry policy (Longman Cheshire 1982) *

Ricketts, M The economics of buszness enterprise (Wheatsheaf, 1987)*

Scherer, FM Industrial market structure and economic performance, 2nd ed (Rand McNally, 1980)*

Terole, J The theory of zndustrzal organization (M IT Press, 1988)

Waterson, M Economic theory of the industry (Cambndge UP 1984)*

Webb, L R and Allan, RH , eds Industrzal economics Australian studies (Allen & Unwm, 1982)*

30305 PUBLIC FINANCE DrD Damama

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre-requisites 30202 M1croeconomics and 30205 Quan!Jtatlve Methods m Economics I with a grade of C or better m each

Economics

This topic is concerned with the theory and practice of publtc finance with emphasis on its apphcat1on in the Australian economy The publtc sector will be discussed in its role as an allocatmg, d1stnbutmg and regulatmg body The ma1or sections will therefore cover the mc1dence of taxat10n, pubhc goods and cost benefit analysis

Text books Brown C and Jackson, P Public sector

economics, 3rd ed (Blackwell, 1986) Groenewegen, P Publlc flnance zn Australza

theory and practice, 2nd ed (Pren!Jce Hall, 1984)*

Musgrave, R and P B Public fznance, zn theory and practice 4th ed (McGraw-Hill 1984)

Reference books Atkinson, A and Stlghtz, J Lectures on public

economics (McGraw-Hill, 1981) Groenewegen, P, ed Australian taxatzon

polzcy (Longman Cheshue 1980) Meade, J E The structure and reform of

direct taxatwn (Allen & Unwm 1978) Treasury Taxation Papers, 1-14 (AGPS

September, 1974 July, 1975)* Taxation Revzew Committee, Full Report

(AGPS January, 1975)*

30307 MONEY AND FINANCE Mr G McL Scott

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes 30201 Macroeconom1cs and 30202 Microeconomics with a grade of C or better m one and a grade of D or better m the other

This topic is concerned with more advanced issues m monetary theory and pohcy and finance The simple analysis introduced in topic 30201 wdl be extended to consider m more detail the special nature of a money using economy and the role of finance In such an economy Particular attention wdl be paid to the financial poltcies of firms, f1nanc1al tnshtut1ons and households and the impact of the monetary authorities on these policies

447

School of Social Sciences

Australian fmancial mstitut10ns will be used to illustrate relevant sections of the course

Prelzmznary readzng Ritter, LS and Silber, W L Money, 5th ed

(Basic Books, 1984)* Tew, J H B Monetary theory (Sage, 1969)*

Text books LewlS, M K and Davis, KT Domestzc and

mternatzonal banking (Phillip Allan, 1987) Lewis, M K and Wallace, R H , eds

Australza's fznanczal mstztutzons and markets (Chesh!Te, 1985)

Reserve Bank of Australia Bulletzn (The Bulletin is published monthly and 1s available from the Secretary, Reserve Bank of Austraha, Box 394 7 G P 0 Sydney NS W 2001)

Reference books Alexander, G J and Sharpe, W F Investments,

4th ed (Prenl!ce Hall, 1989) Bam, AD The economzcs of the fmanczal

system (Martm Robertson 1981) Campbell J K (Chairman), Australian

Fznanczal System, Interim Report of Committee of Inqmry (AGPS, 1980)*, Report (AGPS, 1981) and Commissioned Studies vols 1 4 (AGPS, 1982)

Coghlan, R The theory of money and finance (Macmillan, 1980)*

Davis, I< and Lewts, M Monetary polzcy zn Australza (Longman Cheshire, 1980)*

Davis, I< and Lewis, M Australian monetary economzcs (Longman Chesh!Te, 1981)

Duffie, JD Futures markets (Prentice Hall, 1989)

Juttner, DJ Fznanczal markets, interest rates and monetary economics (Longman Cheshire, 1987)

Keynes, J M The general theory of employ ment, interest and money (Macm1llan, 1936)*

Laidler, D E The demand for money, 3rd ed (Harper & Row, 1986)*

Le11onhufvud1 A On Keynesian economics and the economics of Keynes (Oxford U P , 1968)

Moore, B J An zntroductzon to the theory of fznance (Free P; 1968)*

Newlyn WT andBootle,R Theoryofmoney, 3rd ed (Oxford U P , 1978)

448

30308 (52308) COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS Mr R H Wallace

Units 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te 30202 M1croeconom1cs with a grade of C or better or 30110 Economics I with a grade of B or better or 30130 Economics IA with a grade of B or better

Th!S topic begms with a study of the bases for the classiflcat10n of systems Then follows a study of various theoretical models of soc1ahst econom1es

The development of the economy of the U S S R together with an assessment of its current problems, comprises a ma1or section The alternative soc1ahst systems of Hungary and Yugoslavia, and other econom1c reforms suggested for Eastern European soc1ahst systems, are discussed The corporate economy 1s considered, with case studies of Fascist Italy and Nat10nal Socialism m Germany Topics studied may vary from year to year dependmg upon current developments

Class members are given the opportumty to prepare a case study on a suitable topic of their own choice No particular textbook ts used, but the book suggested for prelimmary reading also serves as a general 1ntroductlon to most of the topics

Prelzmznary reading Nave, A The economics of feaszble soczalzsm

(Allen & Unwm 1983)

Reference books Bergson A Planning and performance in

soczalzst economies the US SR and Eastern Europe (Unwm Hyman, 1988)

Bornstein, M ed Comparative economic systems models and cases, 6th ed (Irwin, 1989)

Brus, W Socialist ownership and polztzcal systems (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1975)

Dyker D A The future of the Sovzet economic planning system (M E Sharpe, 1988)

Eckstein A China's economic development (Michigan U P , 1975)

Gray, J and Wh1te 1 G China's new development strategy (Academic, 1982)

Gregory, PR and Stuart, RC Soviet economic structure and performance, 3rd ed (Harper & Row, 1986)

Ha1tan1, K Comparative economic systems (Prentice-Hall, 1986)

Hewett, E A , Reforming the Soviet economy (Brookmgs Institution, 1988)

l{ohler, H Comparative economic systems (Scott Foresman, 1989)

Korna1, J Contradzctzons and dilemmas studies on the socialist economy and society (M I T , 1986)

Lange, 0 and Taylor, FM On the economic theory of socialism (McGraw Hill, 1964)

Lydall, H Yugoslav socialism theory and practice (Oxford U P , 1983)

Nave, A and Nuh, D M , eds Socialist economzcs, selected readings (Penguin, 1972)

Pickersgill, G M and J E Contemporary economic systems a comparative vzew (West, 1985)

Pryor, FL A guidebook to the comparative study of economic systems (Prentice-Hall, 1985)

Prybyla, J S The political economy of Communist Chzna (International Textbook Co, 1970)

Umted States Congress fomt Economic Committee Chzna a re assessment of the economy (Washmgton U S Govt Prmtmg Office, 1975)

Zunbahst, A and Sherman, HJ Comparing economic systems a polztzcal economic approach (Academic, 1985)

30309 ECONOMETRICS Dr J McDonald

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsites A grade of C or better m 30206 Introductory Econometncs or with perm1ss1on of the Head of Disciplme

This topic is concerned with quantitatlve techniques for the ernp1r1cal analysts of econom1c phenomena and ts designed as a programme in research methods The course will reflect recent developments in mainstream econometnc analysis and will emphasise the formal denvatrnn of results mcludmg tests of

Economics

spec1flcatlon and mis spec1f1catton Tech mques of model selectrnn and testmg will be discussed

Set books Gu1arat1, D N Baszc econometncs 2nd ed

(McGraw-Hill, 1988) Johnston, ) Econometrzc methods, 3rd ed

(McGraw Hill 1984)

Reference books Christ, CF Econometric models and

methods (Wiley, 1966) Dhrymes, P J Econometrics statistical

foundatzons and applicatzons (Harper & Row, 1970)

Goldberger, A S Econometric theory (Wiley, 1964)

Harvey, AC The econometrzc analysis of time serzes (Wiley, 1981)

Intnhgator M D Econometric models, techniques and applications (North Holland, 1978)

Judge, G C et al, Theory and practice of econometncs, 2nd ed (Wiley, 1985)

Malmvaud, E Statistical methods of econo metrzcs, 2nd ed (North Holland, 1976)

30311 MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS Mr P Wagstaff

Umts 6 Level Third year Duratlon Full year Class Contact 1 lecture per week and 1 tutorial per fortmght Pre requ1s1tes 30201 Macroeconom1cs and 30202 Microeconomics with a grade of C or better m one and a grade of D or better m the other, and 30205 Quantztative Methods for Economics I with a grade of C or better, or with the permissrnn of the Head of the Economics D1sc1phne

The topic consists of a mathematzcal treatment of selected topics in rrucroeconom1cs and macroeconom1cs

Text book Birchenhall, C and Grout, P Mathematics for

modem economics (Phlhp Allan, Barnes & Noble, 1984)*

Reference books Chiang, A C Fundamental methods of

mathematical economics, 3rd ed (McGraw-Hill, 1984)*

449

School of Social Sciences

Doot, A K Optzmzzatzon zn economic theory (Oxford UP, 1976)*

Lambert, P ], Advanced mathematzcs for economists (Blackwell, 1985)*

Madden, P Concavzty and optzmzzatzon zn m1croeconom1cs (Blackwell, 1986)

Minford, P and Peel, D Ratwnal expecta tzons and the new macroeconomzcs (Blackwell, 1984) *

Smith A A A mathematical mtroductwn to economics (Blackwell, 1982)*

Tumovsky, SJ Macroeconomic analysis and stab1lizatwn polzcy (Cambndge UP , 1977)*

30313 (31301) (23301) AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Economic History Staff

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite 30110 Economics I, with a grade of C or better, except with the perm1ss1on of the Head of the Disciplme of Economic History

This topic 1s concerned with the economic development of Austraha dunng the penod 1850 to 1985 In lectures, considerat10n will be given to the causes and consequences of growth and fluctuations in econom1c activity, at both the macro and micro levels Particular emphasis will be placed upon the regional diversity of this act!Vlty Tutonals will be used to examine the various methods employed by Australian econom1c h1stonans, as well as a number of current issues (such as unemployment and inflation) 1n h1stoncal perspective

Text books Btitlm, NG Investment zn Australzan

economic development 1861 1900 (A N U , 1972)*

S1ncla1r, WA The process of economic development mAustral1a (Cheshue, 1976)*

Reference books Buthn, NG Australian domestzc product

investment and foreign borrowing 1861 193811939 (Cambridge UP, 1962)

Butlm, NG , Barnard, A and Pmcus, J J Government and capitalism (Allen & Unwm, 1982)*

450

Coghlan, TA Labour and industry zn Australia, 4 vols (Macmillan, 1969) *

Fitzpatrick, B The Brzt1sh empzre zn Australia, 1834 1939 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1969)*

Forster, C, ed Australian economic develop ment in the twentieth century (Allen & Unwm 1970)*

Gregory, R G and Butlm, N G Recovery from the Depresszon (Cambndge UP 1988)*

Maddock, R and McLean, I eds The Australzan economy zn the long run (Cambridge UP, 1987)

Schedvm, CB Australia and the great depresszon (Sydney U P , 1970)

Shann E 0 G An economic history of Australia (Georgian House 1963)*

Snooks, G D Depression and recovery zn Western Australia, 1928129 1938139 (WA UP, 1974)*

30314 APPLIED ECONOMETRICS

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes 30201 Macroeco'1om1cs, 30202 Microeconomics and 30207 Intro ductory Econometncs with a grade of C or better, or with perm1ss1on of the Head of D1sc1phne

This topic aims to provide a comprehensive co\ erage of econometric techniques used by economists to investigate issues in apphed economics The student will gain an under standing of the wide range of Government statistics available and a working knowledge of a variety of modern statlsttcal software In addition, students wtll be encouraged and gmded m the skills of report wntmg

Reference books Areslls P and Hadiimatheou, G Introducing

macroeconomzc modelling (Macmillan, 1982)

Bowerman, B L and 0 Connell, RT Time serzes and forecasting (Duxbury 1979)

Challen, D W and Hagger, A J Modelling the Australian economy (Longman Cheshire, 1979)

Desai, M Testing monetarism (Frances Pinter, 1981)

Harvey, AC The econometnc analysis of tzme series (Wiley 1981)

Hebden, j Applzcatzons of econometrics (Ph1hp Allan, 1983)

Hendry, D F and Walhs K Econometncs and quantztatzve economics (Blackwell, 1985)

Holden, K Peel, D A and Thompson, J L Modelling the UK economy (Martm Robertson, 1982)

Intr1lhgator M D Econometric models, techniques, and applzcatzons (North Holland, 1978)

I<uh, E and Schmalensee, R L An zntro ductzon to applied macroeconomics (North Holland, 1973)

Thomas, R L Introductory econometrics theory and applzcatzons (Longmans, 1985)

Wynn, RF and Holden, K Introductzon to applied econometric analyszs (Macmillan, 1974)

30315 (52315) ASIAN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT DrG KC Tan

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requisites 30201 Macroeconomics and 30202 M1croeconom1cs with a grade of C or better in one and a grade of D or better in the other Students are strongly advised to take 30302 Economic Development m the first semester before enrolling in this course

This topic is concerned with the economic development of the newly mdustnahsmg countries of Asia (Hong Kong, Singapore, South Korea and Taiwan) and the Chmese economy Its main focus will be on the development strategies pursued by these countnes, their rapid development since 1950, and their impact on other less developed countries as well as on the OECD countries In particular the impact of the development of these countries on Austraha will be examined together with recent proposals for a Pacific Free Trade Area

Reference books Balassa, B The newly zndustrialzzing

countries zn the world economy (Pergamon, 1981)

Economics

Chossudovsky M Towards capztalzst restoration? Chinese soczalzsm after Mao (Macmillan, 1986)

Drydale, P Internatzonal economic pluralism economic policy zn East Asia and the Paczfzc (Allen & Unwm, 1988)

OECD, The newly zndustrialzzzng countries challenge and opportunity for OECD countries (OECD, 1988)

Rlskm, C China's polztzcal economy the quest for development sznce 1949 (Oxford up' 1988)

30316 INTRODUCTION TO CLIOMETRICS Dr f McDonald

Not offered m 1991

30317 INTERNATIONAL FINANCE Dr M Polasek

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes 30201 Macroeconomics and 30202 M1croeconom1cs with a grade of C or better 1n one and a grade of D or better in the other or wtth the permission of Head of D1sc1plme

This topic covers selected areas tn inter­national monetary economics theories of exchange rate determination, spot and forward exchange, currency futures and options, exchange risk management international banking, eurocurrenc1es and international capital markets, current and prospective world monetary developments

Reference books Argy, V The post war zntematzonal money

crzszs (Allen & Unwm, 1981) Ethier, W Modern intematzonal economics,

2nd ed (Norton, 1988) juttner, D j International finance and global

fznanczal markets (Longman Cheshire, 1990)

Kenen, P B The znternatzonal economy, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1989)

I<rueger, A 0 Exchange rate determination (Cambridge UP, 1983)

Lewis, M I{ and Davis, KT , Domestic and znternatzonal banking (Phillip Lane 1987)

451

School of Social Sciences

Madura j Jnternatzonal financial management 2nd ed (West Publishmg Co, 1989)

Manuell, G Floatzng down under (The Law Book Co , 1986)

Melvin, M International money and fznance 2nd ed (Harper & Row 1988)

Shapiro AC Multznatzonal financial management (Allyn Bacon 1972)

We1ssweiler, R Foreign exchange (Allen & Unwm, 1972)

30318 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS Dr D Da1tzanza

Units 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial Pre requ1s1tes 30202 M1croeconom1cs and 30205 Quantitative Methods for Economics I with a grade of C or better

The objective of this topic 1s to mtroduce students to the basic concepts and techniques of environmental economics The main areas to be covered mclude externality and public goods in the environment, the control of pollut1on through econom1c incentives, waste disposal and recychng, the renewable resource problem, and techniques for measuring environmental damages and benefits (such as benefit cost analysis and hedomc pncmg)

Set books None

Reference books Common, M Environmental and resource

economics an introduction (Longman 1988)

Cooper C Economic evaluation and the environment (Hodder and Stoughton, 1985)

Dasgupta, P and Heal, G M Economic theory and exhaustible resources (Nisbet 1979)

Honours Topzcs

Full time students must enrol m 30490 Economic Honours as well as in the individual topics, part time students must enrol in 30495 in their first year and 30496 in their second year as well as in the 1nd1VIdual topics

452

30401 ADVANCED MICROEC01'0MICS Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

The topic will review the core elements of 1ntermed1ate m1croeconom1c theory and introduce students to an advanced treatment of optimal decision making by consumers and firms Attent10n will be paid to both product market and factor market outcomes, and take account of uncertainty The welfare impltca hon of 1nd1vidual ophm1s1ng behaVIour and of government intervention will also be considered

30402 ADVANCED MACROECONOMICS Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requisite Honours standing

The topic will proceed from a review of the core elements of macroeconom1c theory and introduce students to an advanced treatment of modern contr1but1ons to wages and employment theory, and to monetary theory Attention will be paid to the relevance of these theories to current problems 1n the conduct of macroeconomic policy 1n open economies

30420 ECONOMICS HONOURS THESIS Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duraho

1n Full year

Class Contact Not applicable Pre-requ1s1te Honours standing

A tbes1s of no more than 12,000 words to be written under the supervision of a member of staff m the iomt Flmders Adelaide Honours programme The thesis is to give eVIdence of the student's ability to collect and evaluate 1nformahon, construct, test and defend an argument and critically examine theories in the area of mqmry Students should select a topic, and obtain agreement of a supervisor, in the previous December Work 1n progress

will be presented in mid-year Theses of excessive length will be pena~sed

30421 LABOUR ECONOMICS Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duratrnn To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

A baSic understanding of labour economics as contained 1n an undergraduate course such as 30303 is a destrable pre reqmsite Honours Labour proceeds from this base to consider modern developments in the theoretical and emp1r1cal literatures and current pohcy issues

30422 INTERNATIONAL TRADE Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic introduces students to the tools necessary for applying general eqwbbnum m1croeconom1c theory to op en econom1cs Beg1nn1ng with a d1agrammabc exposition of the Heckscher Ohlin Model, the topic will move on to consider the effects of various structural and pohcy changes Attentrnn will be given to the empmcal eVIdence regardmg these theories and their 1mphcat10ns for trade pohcy, as well as to positive erplanat1ons of actual trade policies

30423 INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL ISSUES Convener of Honours

Level Honours Durallon To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre-requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic is concerned with the mternat1onal monetary irnphcallons of trade and capital flows Particular attention is paid to the mternallonal fmanc1al mslltutrnns and to the role they play m a world where there are ma1or movements m commod1ty pnces and very large payments imbalances

Economzcs

30424 PUBLIC ECONOMICS Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requisite Honours standing

The normative theory of pubhc expenditures, particularly on pubhc goods The theory of optimal taxation across commodities, md1v1duals and llme The posillve (pubhc choice) approach to pubhc expenditures, taxation and borrowing, 1n theory and In practice

30425MONEY Convener of Honours

Level Honours Durallon To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requ1Slte Honours standing

This topic looks at a number of current issues m monetary theory and pohcy Particular attention is paid to the evolullon of monetary poltcy In Australia Other topics include the evolution of money, compehbon and the role of banks m the financial system, the level and structure of Interest rates

30426 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Convener of Honours

Level Honours Durallon To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre-requisite Honours standing

This topic explores a range of economic issues pertment to developmg countnes The analysis draws on both economic theory and the historical experience of the currently developed economies The issues and countries addressed will vary each year accordmg to the mterosts of students and staff but the mam geographic focus will be on Asia

30427 ECONOMETRICS Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duratrnn To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre reqmsites A grade of C or better m 30309 Econometncs, or its equivalent together with Honours standing

453

School of Soczal Sciences

The topzc zs concerned with prachcal problems of modelling of economic hme series for the purpose of testmg theories and for pohcy and forecasting The aim is to give students an m!Lut1ve understanding of methods and enable them to tackle applied economic problems 1nvolv1ng time series data It is hoped that students will then use these methods where applicable m their theSis work

30428 MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre reqms1tes Agrade of C orbetterm 30311 Mathematical Econom1cs or its equivalent, together with Honours standing

The topic develops methods of stahc and dynamic ophm1sat1on and apphes them to a selection of advanced topics in econom1c theory

30429 METHODS OF ECONOMIC RESEARCH Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

The topic 1s avadable only to those students who have not undertaken spec1ahst under graduate courses in quantitative areas It aims to provtde insight into and understanding of the mathemahcal and stahshcal tools and techniques common in apphed econom1c research Attention ts also paid to research methodology and the maior themes of the topic are reinforced through consideration of a number of carefully selected case studies, drawing upon ma1or 1ournal articles embodying the methods described m the course

30431 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

454

An advanced treatment of topics m the hIStory of economic analysis, from the time of Adam Smith ConS1derat10n will be given to maior developments 1n and contnbut1ons to theories of value, dtstnbution, growth, fluctuation and trade

30432 ECONOMIC HISTORY Convener of Honours

Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requisite Honours standing

In its examination of the relationship between economic theory and economic history, this topic will concentrate on selected issues where there are special problems m the apphcahon of theory, the use of evidence the selection of statistical techn1ques1 and modes of inference Sub1ects covered may include regulation of product and factor markets mdustry studies (mcludmg sports), mequahty fIScal history Resort to pnmary matenals will be encouraged

M Ee Topics

30500/30510 M EC COURSEWORK THESIS Director of Graduate Studzes

Umts 12 or 24 Level Masters Durahon Full year Class Contact Not applicable Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

A theszs of approximately 12,000 words (12 umts)(30500) or 24,000 words (24)(30510) written under the superv1s1on of a member of staff The thesis should give evidence of the student's ab1hty to collect and evaluate 1nformat1on 1 construct test and defend an argument, and cnhcally examine theories 1n the area of mqmry

30501 MICROECONOMICS Director of Graduate Studies

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours (semester) or 3 hours (semester) Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

An advanced treatment of dec1s1on making by 1nd1v1duals and by firms, taking into account 1ntertemporal behaviour and uncertainty Attent10n will be paid to both the predrctrve and prescr1pt1ve content of opt1m1s1ng behav10ur wlthm both standard and generahsed frameworks

30502 MACROECONOMICS Director of Graduate Studies

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours (semester) or 3 hours (semester) Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

An exam1nat1on of the ma1or recent developments in macroeconomic theory and the consequent 1mphcatlons for pohcy Particular attent10n will be paid to expectations format10n and the wider role of expectations in 1nfluenc1ng macroeconomic outcomes, alternative models of production and supply and wage and price setting behaviour The discussion of the influence of each of these matters on macroeconomic pohcy prescnpt10n will be integrated with a consideration of the ma1or economic models used for pohcy guidance in Australia

30503 ECONOMICS OF PUBLIC POLICY Director of Graduate Studies

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours (semester) or 3 hours (semester) Pre reqmsrte Masters standmg

This topic presents the theory of economic pohcy at an advanced level The welfare economics of pohcy and the positive economics of pohcy, and especially their connect10ns, will be hrghhghted Topics include the variety of pohcy analyses, constitut1onal1sm, corporatism and the economic theory of the state the Coase theorem, theory of second best cost benefit analysis, 1ncent1ve compatlbihty, rent seeking, theories of collective dec1s1on making, voting paradoxes the pubhc mterest and private mterest theories of pohcy Jllustratrons will be

Economzcs

drawn from h1stor1cal experience and contemporary pohcy issues both macro and micro economic

30504 TRANSPORT ECONOMICS Director of Graduate Studies

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours (semester) or 3 hours (semester) Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic will cover issues 1n transport economics using the techniques of inter mediate m1croeconom1cs Topics to be covered include cost/benefit analysis, analysis of investment 1n transport infrastructure, design of optimal pnc1ng rules for transport facilities the theory of the demand for transport, and the effects of regulation on the structure, conduct and performance of transport markets

30530 ADVANCES IN ECONOMIC THEORY I Dr D Damanza or Economics Higher Degrees Convener

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 1 one hour lecture and 1 one hour workshop per week Pre reqmsrtes 30501, 30502 and 30503, or permission of the Convener

This topic deals with some advanced theoretical issues in econom1cs Possible issues include general equ1hbnum analysis, trade theory, game theory and monetary theory

30531 ADVANCES IN ECONOMIC THEORY II Dr D Damania or Economzcs Higher Degrees Convener

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 1 one hour lecture and 1 one hour workshop per week Pre reqmsrtes 30530 30502 and 30503 or perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic deals with some advanced

455

School of Social Sciences

theoretical issues 1n economics Possible issues include general equ1hbrium analysis, trade theory game theory and monetary theory

30532 ADVANCES IN QUANTITATIVE MATHEMATICAL AND APPLIED ECONOMICS! Dr D Damanza or Economics Hzglzer Degrees Convener

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 1 one hour lecture and 1 one hour workshop per week Pre requzsites 30501, 30502 and 30503 or perm1ss1on of Convener

This topic deals with advanced techmques in econometr1cs, mathematical and apphed econom1cs It is offered 1n con1unchon with 30521 30432 A research paper or addit10nal exam1nahon will be required

30533 ADVANCES IN QUANTITATIVE MATHEMATICAL AND APPLIED ECONOMICS II Dr D Daman1a or Economics Higher Degrees Convener

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two liour lecture and 1 two hour workshop per week Pre requzsites 30501, 30502 and 30503 or perm1ss1on of Convener

This topic deals with advanced techmques in econometr1cs, mathernat1cal and apphed econom1cs It 1s offered 1n con1unchon with 30521 30432 A research paper or addit10nal exam1natlon will be required

30534 ADVANCES IN QUANTITATIVE MATHEMATICAL AND APPLIED ECONOMICS III Dr D Damania or Economics Hzgher Degrees Convener

Units 6 Level Masters Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 one hour lecture and 1 one hour workshop per fortnight Pre requ!Slte Adrmss10n to Masters prognumne

456

This topic deals with advanced techniques m econometrics, mathematical and applied economics It is offered in con1unction with 30521-30532 A research paper or add1llonal examination will be required

Topzcs zn Accountzng and Fznance

General Information

Bachelor of Economics (Accounting)

The B Ee (Ace ) degree reqmres 90 umts of compulsory topics and 18 units of elecllve topics The compulsory topics are offered by both the Disc1plme of Accounting and Finance and the Discipline of Economics The structure of the degree consists of the following

First Year Umts

40110 Accounting I 12

30110 Economics I (or equivalent) 12

or 30130 Economics IA plus 30112 Introductory Macroeconomics 18

40111 Commercial Law A 6

30205 Quanlltat1ves Methods for Economics I 6

Second Year 40210 Account1rg II 12

40211 Financial Management 6

30201 Macroeconomics 6

30202 Microeconomics 6

Electives 6

Thzrd Year 40311 Financial Accounting 6

40323 External Aud1tmg 6

40314 Advanced Fmanc1al Accounting 6

or 40315 Corporate Finance 6

or 40318 Advanced Management

Accounting 6

One Th1rd year Econormcs topic 6

Elecllves 12

Elective topics may be selected from any D1sc1plrne provided enrolment cond1hons are satisfied The elective topics offered in Accounting and Finance in 1991 are

40216 Commercial Law B

Um ts

6

40313 Taxat10n Law and Practice 40314 Advanced Fmancial Accountmg 40315 Corporate Fmance 40316 Informat10n Systems

6 6

6 6

40318 Advanced Management Accounting 6

Bachelor of Economics (Accounting) Honours Degree

An Honours (Fourth Year) programme 1s available m Accountmg that conststs of the followmg topics

Part A 40411 Accountmg Theory

40418 Research Methods m Accountmg

Units

6

6

Part B

Part C

Two topics from the Accounting Honours topics Those currently avatlable are

40413 Management Science 6

40419 Managerial Plannmg and Control 6

40421 Pubhc Sector and Non Profit Management 6

40423 Advanced F1nanc1al Management 6

40424 Management Informatton Systems 6

Topics from another Discipline may be mcluded by special arrangement

40440 Accounting and Finance Honours TheSIS 12

Diploma in Accounting

The Diploma 1n Accounting is a course in accounting finance, econom1cs and law It 1s open to all graduates from this Umversity and other approved tertiary institut10ns The course meets the requirements for tertiary studies of the Austrahan Society of Accountants and the Institute of Chartered Accountants m Australia The course requires completion of the following topics

Accountzng & Finance

Part A 30110 Economics I or

Part B

30130 Economics IA and

30112 Introductory Macroeconom1cs

40110 Accounting I 40111 Commercial Law A 40113 Quantitative Methods 40210 Accounting II

Um ts

12

18

12 6 6

12 40211 F1nanc1al Management 6

6 6

40216 40311 40313

40323

Commerc1al Law B F1nanc1al Accounting Taxation Law and Practice External Auditing

6 6

On apphcation to the School Board, status for topics completed at the Un1vers1ty or equi­valent topics at other inshtuhons may be granted for the topic m Part A and for Ui? to 24 units in Part B The course may be taken either full time or part time The course's timetable makes particular allowance for the needs of part time students m employment

Bachelor of Commerce

The Bachelor of Commerce reqmres a maior sequence tn either Accounting, Economics, Economic History or Computing Science and at least one minor sequence 1n another of these areas or 1n Asian Studies, Auditing, Business Polley, Business Law, F1nance1

Geography, Management Account1ng1

l?sychology or Soc10logy The degree consists of 108 umts mcludmg

First Year

40110 Accountmg I 30110 Economics I

or 30130 Economics IA

plus 30112 Introductory Macroeconomics 40111 Commercial Law A 40113 Quantitattve Methods

or 30205 Quan!ttat1ve Methods for

Econom1cs I or

Umts 12

12

18

6 6

6

457

School of Soczal Sczences

68110 Computer Science I 9

Second Year

40210 Accountmg II 12 40211 Fmanc1al Management 6 40212 Marketmg Management 6

or 40215 Personnel Management 6 Topics as per Schedule 9B 12

or Second Year Computer Science topics 12

Thzrd Year Topics as per Schedule 9B 24 Topics as per Schedule 9B 12

or Third Year Computer Sciences topics 9

Bachelor of Commerce Honours Degree

An Honours (Fourth Year) programme 1s available m Accountmg (as for the Bachelor of Econom1cs (Accountmg)) Econom1cs, Econom1c History or Computer Science (see entries for these d1sc1phnes)

Fzrst Year Topics

40110 ACCOUNTING I Mr P G Gerhardy

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 lectures, 1 tutonal and 1 workshop per weelc. Pre requ1s1te Student ofB Ee (Ace), B Com cou-se or Dip Ace course

An introduction to f1nanc1al accounting and computerised management 1nformat1on systems Material covered includes the accounting cycle and recording process, revenue recogn1hon, valuation of assets, hab1ht1es and owners' equity items, preparation of profit and loss statements and balance sheets partnerships funds statements, cash flow statements, and a discussion of the issues currently facing the accounting profess10n The second part of the topic integrates computer applications and the accounting process It includes the concepts of data, software and hardware, with practical work using word processing, and database management and integrated accounting

458

packages Previous study of accounting 1s not assumed

Text books Gerrard, M] , l(a1don1s, M A and Bronson, G Computerzsed accountzng uszng SYBIZ (Prentice Hall 1989)* Haggett ] and Edwards, L Fznanczal

accounting zn Australia Oonn Wiiey 1986)* Ingalsbe, L Business applications software

for the IBM PC alternate edztzon wzth VP Planner, dBase Ill Plus ard WordPerfect tMemll 1988)*

Page, J and Hooper, P Accountzng and znformatzon systems, 3rd ed (Prentice Hall, 1987)*

A practice set to be announced

Reference books Anthony, RN Essential of accounting,

3rd ed (Addison Wesley, 1983)* Arevalo C B Effectzve wrzting a handbook

for accountants (Prentice Hall, 1984) Barton, AD The anatomy of accounting,

3rd ed (Queensland UP 1984)* Cold1tz, BT, G1bbms, R W and Noller, G C

Australzan accountzng, 4th ed (McGraw Hiil, 1988)*

Gaffikm M Walgenbach, P H , D1ttnch N E and Hanson, E I Princzples of accounting 2nd ed (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1990)*

Harnson ] , Horrocks, J and Newman, R L Accounting a dzrect approach, 4th ed (Longman Cheshire, 1985)'

Wise, TD , Needles1 BE, Anderson, HR and Caldwell,] C Accountzng in Australza (Houghton M1fflm 1990)*

40111 COMMERCIAL LAW A Ms R LaForgza

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te Student of B Ee (Ace), B Com or Dip Ace course

An mtroduct10n to the legal system and the legal env1ronn1ent of business d1stingu1sh1ng Common Law and Statute Law, and an introduction to the law of contract and other statutes relating to bus1ress (agency, pnnc1ples of property, negotiable mstruments, sale of goods, consumer protection trade practices and bankruptcy)

Text book To be advised

Reference books Cheshue, G C and F1foot, C H S Law of

contract, 4th Aust ed (Butterworth, 1981) Powell, R The law of agency (Pitman, 1961) Shtem, B j L and Lmdgren, KE An

zntroductzon to business law (Law Book 1977)

Starke, j G , Higgins, P j F and Swanton, j P Casebook on law of contract (Butterworth, 1979)

Taperell, G Q , Vermeesch, R G and Harland D j Trade practices and consumer protection, 3rd ed (Butterworth, 1983)

40113 QUANTITATIVE METHODS Ms G Lzaw

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1S1tes Student of B Com or Dip A<:c:- course

This topic provides students with the quant1tallve skills and concepts reqmred to support later topics The sub1ects to be covered include elementary algebra, matrix algebra, functions, mathematJ.cs of finance, introductory calculus, index numbers, descnpttve statistics, methods of sampling, probab1hty, confidence intervals, hypothesis testing, correlation, regression and non parametnc tests

Text books Lewis D E , O'Bnen, D T Thampap1lla1 D

Statistics for business and economics (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1990)

O'Brien, D T , Lewis, D E and Guest, j F Mathematics for business and economics (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1989)

Reference books Anderson, D R , Sweeney, DJ , W1lhams, TA ,

Hamson, N j and Richards, j A Statzstrcs for business and economics (Harper & Row, 1989)

Pervau, G , Quantztatzve methods for business students (McGraw Hill, 1989)

Wakman1 P and Mauthner, P Business maths and statzstzcs wzth calculator applzcatzons (Prenllce Hall, 1990)

Accounting & Finance

Second Year Topics

40210 ACCOUNTING II Mr C Mathews

Umts 12 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 lectures, 1 tutonal and 1 workshop per week Pre reqms1te 40110 Accountmg I with a grade of C or better

This ts an integrated course in management accounting for business organisations, 1nclud 1ng organ1satlon ob1ecttves and structure, cost concepts, product costing, analysis and design of management accoun*mg systems budgetacy planning and control and managerial dec1s1on makmg It mcludes the use and design of computerised 1nformat1on systems for accountants and managers

Text books Davis, j R, Robmson, L A and Alderman

CW Accounting znformatzon systems a cycle approach (Wiley, 1990)

Hirsch, M L , Louderback, j G and Smith, E Cost accounting zn Australia accumulation analyszs and use (Nelson, 1989)*

Ingalsbe, L Business applrcatrons software for the IBM PC alternate edztron with VP Planner, dBase III Plus and Word Perfect (Mernll, 1988)*

Puxty, A G Organzzatlon and managenient an accountant's perspective (Pitman, 1986)*

Reference book Horngren, C T and Foster G Cost

accounting a managenal emphasis, 6th ed (Prenl!ce Hall, 1987)*

40211 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT Mr R GP McMahon

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 40110 Accounting I with a grade of C or better and 30110 Economics I or 30130 Economics IA with a grade of C or better

459

School of Soczal Sczences

This topic introduces students to the ma1or concepts and analytical tools used in the theory and pracltce of fmancrnl management The topic will cover the role and obiectzves of f1nanc1al management financial analysis and planning, working cap1ta1 management, capital budgetmg, the cost of capital, operatmg and f1nanc1al leverage, the capital structure dec1s1on, the d1v1dend dec1s1on and sources of finance

Text book Scott, D F , Martm, j D Petty, j W and

Keown, A J Baszc fznanczal management 4th ed (Prenttce Hall, 1988)*

Reference books Bzshop, S R Crapp, H R and Twite, G j

Corporate fznance, 2nd ed (Holt, Rmehart and Wmston, 1988)*

Peirson, G , Bird, R Howard P Business (McGraw Hill, 1990)

Brown, R and fznance, 5th ed

Scott, D F Martm, j D Petty j W and Keown, A j Study guzde to baszc fznanczal management, 4th ed (Prenltce Hall, 1988)

40212 MARKETING MANAGEMENT Mr NC Mangos

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te Student of B Com course or wtth perm1ss1on of the Head of D1sc1phne

To provide students with an 1ntroductJ.on to the concepts and tools used in marketing management The topic will cover the role of marketing in society and the firm, the marketing environment, customer behaviour, information for marketing decisions, marketing strategies and mu:, planning and control of marketing activities

Text book Kotler, P Chandler, P , Gibbs R and

McColl, R, Marketing zn Australia, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1989)

460

40213 BUSINESS POLICY AND STRATEGIC PLANNING Professor L D Parker

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmsites 40110 Accountmg I with a grade of C or better and 30110 Economics I with a grade of C or better

The study of strategic plannmg and management with reference to the national, 1nternahonal, business and industry environ­ment Content mcludes plannmg theory, planning methods, analysis of business capabihties and strategies forging corporate identity, strategic choices and strategic implementation

Text book Jauch, L R and Glueck, W F Buszness polzcy and strategzc management, 5th ed (McGraw Hzll, 1988)

Reference books To be advzsed

40214 SMALL ENTERPRISE POLICY &FINANCE Mr R GP McMahon

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite 40211 Fmancial Management with a grade of C or better

This topic will provide a general understanding of the role, significance and problems of small enterprises m society It will also proV!de a broad, strategic perspective of the management of small enterprises and an in depth understandmg of processes, problems and mstttut10ns m the financrnl management of small enterprises

Topics to be covered include the nature of enterprise, entrepreneurship and small enterpnse, the role and significance of small cnterpnses in society and the economy, the small enterprzse development/life cycle small enterpnse f1nanc1ng and case studies in small enterprise strategic management

Text books Johns, BL, Dunlop, WC and Sheehan, W J

Small busmess znAustralza problems and prospects 3rd ed (Allen & Unwm 1990)

McMahon, R GP Small business, Australia a research companion (New England U P , 1989)

Reference books Abbott, B and Meredith, G G family

business management zn Australia (McGraw Hill 1984)

Eng!tsh, J W How to organise and operate a small business in Australia, 4th ed (Allen & Unwm 1990)

English, ) W Small business financial managenzent in Australia (Allen & Unw1n 1990)

McMahon, R G P Financial management for small business (CCH, 1986)

Meredith, G G Financial management of the small enterprise (McGraw Hill, 1986)

Walker, E W and Petty, J N Fznanczal management of the small firm (Prentice Hall, 1986)

40215 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te Student of B Com course or with permiss10n of the Head of Disciphne

Tius topic 1s intended to provide students with an introduction to concepts and practices of personnel management and industrial relations Topics to be covered include the evolution of personnel management the personnel function, the labour movement, the 1ndustr1al relations system, the role of government national wage determination, occupat10nal health and safety, human resource planning, 1ob/work design, recruitment and selection and performance appraisal

Text books Duffy, N F and Fells, RE Dynamics of

zndustrzal relations zn Australia (Prentice Hall 1989)

Schuler, RS , Dawlmg, P J and Smart, J P Personnel/human resource management m Australia (Harper & Row, 1988)

Accounting & Finance

40216 COMMERCIAL LAW B Ms K Hall

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmsite 40111 Commercial Law A with a grade of C or better

A topic relating to the pnnc1pal forms 1n which busmess is conducted m Australia Although pnmanly concerned with company Jaw, the topic includes the law of partnerships and certain aspects of the Jaw relating to Trusts

Text books Companies (South Australia) Code (latest)

(CCH or Butterworth) Ffrench, H L Guzde to company law 3rd ed

(Butterworth, 1990)

Reference books Drake, C D Law of partnership (Sweet &

Maxwell, 1977) Ford, H A J Principles of co1npany law, 4th

ed (Butterworth, 1986) Gower L C B Pnnczples of modern company

law (Law Book, 1974) Hlggms P F B and Fletcher, KC Law of

partnership zn Australia and New Zealand, 4th ed (Law Book, 1981)

Yorston, R K and Brown, SR Company law (Law Book, 1972)

Third Year Topics

40311 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING Ms KI Allen

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week and 1 workshop per fortmght Pre reqmsite 40110 Accountmg I with a grade of C or better

The topic consists of two parts The first part is an extension of the company accounting procedures mtroduced m 40110 Accountmg I It traces the hie cycle of a company f10m formahon to hquidat10n with emphasis on the accountmg procedures and problems mvolved

The second part of the topic mtroduces a

461

School of Social Sciences

theorehcal framework for accountmg Current and proposed accountmg standards are then evaluated and the issues mvolved discussed withm the theorehcal framework

Text books Henderson, S and Peirson, G Issues in

fznanczal accounting, 4th ed (Longman Chesh1re 1988)*

Leo, K) and Haggett, ) R Company accounting zn Australza1 2nd ed (Wiiey, 1988)*

Reference books Bowra, R L and Clark, FL Group accounts

in Australia (Butterworth, 1984) Clift R C Corporate accounting 3rd ed

(Prenhce-Hall, 1989)* Graham, KM )ager, M 0 and Taylor, RB

Company accountzng procedures, 3rd ed (Butterworth, 1988)*

Smyth, EB , Kenley, W J and Syme, B Advanced accounting, 10th ed (Law Book, 1988)*

40313 TAXATION LAW AND PRACTICE Ms R LaForgra

Umts 6 Level Th1rd year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite 40111 Commercial Law A with a grade of C or better

The topic proVIdes a practical approach to the adm1n1strahon and content of Australian income tax law

Text books CC H Income Tax Assessment Act (latest)* CC H Australian Master Tax Guide (latest)•

Reference books Baxt, R et al Cases and materials on

taxatzon, 2nd ed (Butterworth, 1984 )* Butterworth Tax Handbook (Butterworth,

1991) Lehman and Coleman Taxation law zn

Australia, 2nd ed (Butterworth, 1991) Mannix, E F and Mannix, J E Leadzng cases

on income tax, 6th ed (Butterworth, 1990)* Ryan, KW Manual of the law of income

tax m Australia (Law Book, 1989)* Woellner, Vella and Chippendale, Australian

Taxatzon Law (CCH, 1987) with supplement

462

40314 ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING Mr P G Gerhardy

Umts 6 Level Th1rd year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te 40311 F1nanc1al Accounting with a grade of C or better

This topic bullds on the corporate account mg studies mtroduced m 40311 Fmancial Accounting to consider general measurement theories of accounting, some complex techmcal problems of accounting for companies and groups1 the framework and practical 1mpllcat1ons of accounting regulation and standard settmg, the structure of and concepts m accountmg theory together with alternate approaches and proposed ob1echves, and the opinions and arguments concerning controversial issues 1n contemporary financial accounting

Text book Henderson, M S and Peirson, C G Fznanczal

accounting theory its nature and development (Longman Chesh1re, 1983) *

Reference books Belkaom, A Accounting theory (Harcourt

Brace Jovanovich, 1981) Chambers, R) Accounting evaluatzon and

economic behavzour (Prenl!ce Hall, 1966) Edwards, E 0 and Bell, PW The theory and

measurement of business income (Cahforma UP 1961)

Henderson, M S and Peirson, C G Issues zn fmanczal accounting, 4th ed (Longman Chesh1re, 1988)*

Haggett, ) R and Leo, K) Company accounting zn Australia (Wiley, 1988)*

Johnston, TR, Jager, M 0 and Taylor, RB The law and practice of company accounting, 6th ed (Butterworth, 1987)*

Parker, RH and Harcourt, G C Readings zn the concept and measurements of zncome (Cambridge U P , 1969)

Whittred, G and Zimmer, I Fznanczal accounting zncentzve effects and economic consequences (Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1988)*

40315 CORPORATE FINANCE Mr R GP McMahon

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite 40211 Fmancial Management with a grade of C or better

This topic is concerned with the theory and practice of f1nanc1al management of business corporat1ons The concepts and issues mtroduced m 40211 Fmancial Management will be expanded to consider in more detail investment, f1nanc1ng and dividend dec1s1ons of the firm and interactions between them A number of special topics will also be covered 1nclud1ng leasing, takeovers, international flnanc1al management futures and treasury management

Text book

Pe~~~~r~ ~' ~~~zn~s; fz~:~: S~h 3endd

(McGraw-Hill, 1990)*

Reference books B•shop, S R , Crapp H R and Twite G J

Corporate finance, 2nd ed (Holt, Rmehart and Wmston 1988)•

Brealey, R and Myers S Principles of corporate finance, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1989)

Bruce, R , McKern, B , Pollard, I and Skully, M Handbook of Australian corporate finance, 3rd ed (Butterworth, 1989)*

Van Horne, J , Nicol, R and Wright F K Financial manage"ient and polzcy zn Australia, 3rd ed (Pren!Jce Hall 1990)*

40316 INFORMATION SYSTEMS MrC Mathews

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite 40210 Accountmg II with a grade of C or better

Advanced study of the analysis and design of computer based accountmg systems This topic includes systems development

Accounting & Fznance

methodology, 1mplementat1on of common accounting apphcatlons accounting, spread­sheet and database software mternal control in on-ltne systems

Text book To be advised

Reference books Brookes, C H P , Grouse P J , Jeffery D R

and Lawrence, M J Information systems design (Pren!Jce Hall, 1982)

Davis, GB and Olson M H Management znformatzon systems- conceptual founda tzons, structure and develop1nent, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill, 1985)*

Ehason, A Onlzne buszness computer applzcatzons, 2nd ed (Science Research Associates, 1983)*

Hicks, S A and Saftner, D V The use of mzcrocomputers zn accounting (West, 1987)*

Gerrard M J Kaidoms M A and Bramson, G Computerised accounting usmg SYBIZ (Prentice Hall, 1989)*

40317 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN TAXATION LAW

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ!Sltes 40313 Taxat10n Law and Pracllce with a grade of C or better

This topic examines issues in taxation law that are recent or new developments such as capital gains tax, fnnge benefits tax, 1mputatton of company d!Vldends, mternallonal tax and superannuation

Text books CCH Income Tax Assessment Act (latest)* CCH Master Tax Guide (latest)*

Reference books Bax! R et al Cases and materials on

taxatwn, 2nd ed (Butterworth, 1984) Mannix, E F and Mannix, J E Leading cases

on income tax, 5th ed (with supplement) (Butterworth, 1984)

463

School of Soczal Sciences

40318 ADVANCED MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING Professor L D Parker

Units 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ!Slte 40210 Accountmg II with a grade of C or better

The study of advanced issues in management accounting with emphasis on the interface between accounting systems and organ1sat1onal management Content includes incremental, zero base and programme budgeting, 1nform­atlon for strategic planning, issues in d1VIs1onal performance measurement and transfer pncmg accounting for the marketing function accounting to and for human resources, accounting commun1cahon to management and employees, pubhc sector organ1sat1on performance evaluation and control

Text books Louderback, J G and Hirsch, M L Cost

accounting accumulation, analysis and use (Kent 1986)

Parker, L D Fems, KR and Otley D T Accountmg for the human factor (Pr0nl!ce Hall, 1989)

Reference books Ramanathan KV Management control zn

nonprofzt organzzatwns ( Wiley, 1982) Rappaport A , ed Information for deczszon

makmg (Prenl!ce Hall, 1982)

40319 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT Professor L D Parker

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmSite 40213 Busmess Pohcy and Strategic Plannmg with a grade of C or better

The study of strategic dec1S10n makmg and control, structure and process Includes theocy and pracl!ce of pohcy formulation, development and 1mplementatlon1 structures systems and procedures for plannmg and controlling large organisations, integrating functional orgarus al!onal components m the context of orgamsal!on obJecl!ves, analylical and behav10ural frameworks for management dec1s1on makmg

464

Text books Montanan, j R Morgan, C P and

Bracker, J S Strategzc management a chozce approach (The Dryden Press 1990)

Reference books To be advISed

40321INVESTMENTS MrNC Mangos

Umts 6 Level Second year or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te 40211 Financial Management with a grade of C or better

An introductory course on modern portfolio theory and investment analysis It analyses the choice between investment and saving, concepts of nsk and return the secunhes and other markets, valuation of investments, portfolio analySis and the capital asset pncmg model The topic then looks at the Austrahan f1nanc1al markets and how they operate 1n the field of mvestment

Text book Alexander, G j and Sharpe, W F ,

Fundamentals of investment (Prentice Hall, 1989)

Reference books Elton E j and Gruber M J Modern portfolzo

theory and znvestment analysis (Wiley, 1984)

Hagin R Dow Jones Irwzn guide to modern portfolzo theory (Irwm, 1979)

Jacob NL and Petl!t RR Investments (lrwm 1984)

40323 EXTERNAL AUDITING MrC Mathews

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te 40311 F1nanc1al Accounting with a grade of C or better

Topics covered will be the role of the auditor, mtemal control and its relat10nsh1p to the work of the external auditor, audit ob1echves, programmes and evidence, valuation and

verification apphcat1ons under various systems including computer systems the respons1b1hty of the auditor and aud1tmg standards 1 and performance/operat1onal aud1tmg

Text book Arens, A A Loebbecke, J K , Best, P J and

Shader, GE P Auditing m Australia an integrated approach, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1990)*

Reference books Burch, J G , Jr and Sardmas, J L , Jr Computer

control and audit a total systems approach (Wiiey, 1978)*

Fraser, DJ and A1ken1 M E Stettler1s system based audits (Prenl!ce Hall, 1986)*

Gul F A Teoh H Y and Andrew B Theory and practzce of Australzan audztzng (Wadsworth, 1987)

Institute of Chartered Accountants 1n Australta Statements on auditmg (latest)

Parker, L D Value-for money audztzng conceptual development and operatzonal zssues (Austrahan Accounting Research Foundal!on, 1986)

Pound, G W1lhngham, J J and Carmichael, DR Australian auditing (McGraw-Hiil, 1983)

Robertson, J C and DaVIs, F C Auditing, 4th ed (Busmess Pubhcal!ons, 1985)

Honours Topzcs

40411 ACCOUNTING THEORY Ms KL Allen

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour lecture and 1 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic w!ll proVIde the student with an apprec1at1on of the ma1or accounting theones which underpin accounting research The followmg theones w!ll be addressed mforma tlon theory1 pos1t1ve accounting theory, cntical accounting theory, systems theory, expectancy theory

Reference books Watts R L and Zimmerman, J L Positive

accounting theory (Prentice Hall 1986)*

Accounting & Finance

Bloom R and Elgers, PT Accounting theory and policy (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1987)*

40413 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE MrC Mathews

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqms1te Honour• standmg

A model fonnulat10n approach to management science It includes study of mathematical programming models, probab1hstic models, mventory models proiect schedulmg models and fmancrnl modellmg

Text book To be adVIsed

Reference books Anton H and Kolman, B Applied fmite

mathematics, 3rd ed (Academic, 1982) James DE and Throsby, CD Introductzon

to quantztatzve methods zn economics (Wiley, 1974)*

LeVIn, RI and Klrkpatnck, CA Quantitative approaches to management, 6th ed (McGraw Hiil, 1986)

Thierauf, R J Klekamp, R C and Rowe, M L Management science - a model formula tzon approach with computer applzcatzons (Memll, 1985)

Wheelwright S C and Makridak1s S Forecastzng methods for management, 4th ed (Wiley, 1985)

40418 RESEARCH METHODS IN ACCOUNTING Mr PG Gerhardy

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour lecture and 1 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An exammat10n of the methods and procedures of research in accounting Content will mclude methodological perspec!Ives, research des1gn1 hterature reviews event studies, field and case studies, historical method experimental method, survey

465

School of Social Sciences

methods, secondary data collection methods of quantitative analysis, report wnhng and oral presentations

Reference books Anderson, DR, et al Statistics for business

and economics (Harper & Row, 1989) Balley, K D Methods of social research,

3rd ed (Free Press, 1987) Emory, C W Business research methods

3rd ed (Irwm 1985) Siegel, S Nonparametric statzstzcs for the

behavzoural sciences (McGraw Hill, 1956)*

40419 MANAGERIAL PLANNING AND CONTROL Professor L D Parker

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

Content will mclude theorel!cal perspectives of plannmg and control, plannmg processes and control systems, emp1ncal eVIdence and management issues, the strategic management context and cr1hcal perspectives

Reference books Ansof! H I The new corporate strategy

(Wiiey, 1988) Chua W F Lowe T and Puxty, T , eds

Crztzcal perspectives zn management control (Macmillan, 1989)

40421 PUBLIC SECTOR AND NONPROFIT MANAGEMENT Professor L D Parker

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hour seminar per week Pre requisite Honours standing

Content will mclude the role of nonprofit organisations planning and control processes, budgeting and resource management cost/ benefit issues, programme management, accountab1hty and manageriahsm, economy, efficiency and effectiveness in the nonprofit sector, and behaVIoural d1mens1ons

466

Text book Guthrie,) , Parker, L D and Shand D Public

sector accounting, flnanczal management and auditing issues (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1990)

Reference books Ramanathan, KV and Hegstad, L P Readings

zn management control zn nonprofzt orgamsatzons (Wiley, 1982)

Ramanathan 1 I< V Management control zn nonprofit organisations text and cases (Wiley, 1982)

40423 ADVANCED FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT Mr R GP McMahon

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic 1s intended to provide a sound understandmg of the field of corporate fmance at an advanced level It will explore the pnnc1pal theories upon which modern corporate fmance 1s founded mcludmg utility theory, state preference theory1 mean variance theory, opt10n pncmg theory, the Mod1gham­M1ller theorems, eff1c1ent market theory and agency theory It will also examine the emp1ncal evidence on these theones and their apphcation to corporate pohcy issues

Text books Copeland TE and Weston ) E Financial

theory and corporate policy, 3rd ed (Addison Wesley, 1988)

Reference books Smith, CW The modern theory of corporate

finance, 2nd ed (McGraw H1ll 1990) Serramo, W) , Smghv1 S S and

Sodldofsky, RM Frontiers of financial management, 4th ed (South Western 1984)

40424 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS Mr C Mathews

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hour seminar per week Pre-requ1s1tes Honours standing

The topic will examine issues relating to information needs of management Topics mclude systems modellmg methods, data as a corporate resource, data base structures management of systems change, human information processing, and information for strategic planning

Reference books Parker, C S Management znformatzon

systems (McGraw Hiil, 1989)* Award, E M Systems analysis and design

(Irwm, 1985)

40440 ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE HONOURS THESIS

Units 12 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

A thesis of apprmumately 12 000 words to be written under the supervision of a member of the staff of the Disc1phne of Accounting and Fmance The thesis should demonstrate the student s ab1httes to collect and evaluate information, cr1t1cally examine the ma1or theones in the area of the chosen topic, and construct, test and defend an argument or thesis Work m progress semmars will be held in second semester

Topics m Economic History

General Informat1on

Topics Available

Second and Third Year topics Units

31202 The Ongms of Economic Development the Bnt1sh Case (First semester) 6

31205 Japanese Economic Development (Second semester) 6

31301 Austrahan Economic Development (Second semester) 6

31302 American Economic Development (First semester) 6

Honours topics 31406 Sport Economics and History

(First or second semester) 12

Economzc History

31408 Economic Inequahty Theory and History (First or second semester) 12

31411 Economic History and Economic Theory A 6

31412 Economic Htstory and Economic Theory B 6

By approval from the Head of D1sc1phne, an Honours topic, selected from an Honours programme in another d1sc1phne at Fhnders may be included 31430 Thesis m Economic History 12

Economic History can be taken as a ma1or sequence for a B A or a second ma1or for a B Ee by takmg 30110 Economics 1 m first year and selectmg from the topics hsted above m later years If students mtend to do this, there is much to be said for 1nclud1ng a History I topic in their first year topics Economic History ts also offered as a minor sequence In the B Com degree

There IS considerable scope for comb1n1ng some Economic History with other interests 31202 The Ongms of Economic Development the Bnllsh Case can be taken as part of a ma1or sequence in History and this and all other Economic History topics can be chosen as options 1n con1unctlon wtth any ma1or sequence m the School of Social Sciences One hm1tatlon is that, with the exception of 31202 The Ongms ofEconom1c Development the Bnttsh Case It is preferable for students taking Economic History topics to have done Economics 1

Economic Htstory ts part1cularly smted for inclusion In courses for the degree of Bachelor of Economics and is a component of 30110 Economics I All Economic History topics have m common the theme of the h1stoncal treatment of economic development The topics are defmed on a reg10nal basts the ch01ce of reg10n bemg based on aspects of economic development pecuhar to each 31301 Austrahan Economic Development can be taken as a th1rd year Economics topic w1thm the B Ee degree Fourth year work towards a single or 101nt Honours degree may be done In Economic History

It ts also posstb!e to take the Diploma m Social Sciences 1n Economic History The details of the courses avatlable are set out below

467

School of Social Sciences

Second Year and Third Year Topics

31202 (33217) THE ORIGINS OF ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT THE BRITISH CASE Economic History Staff

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te None

Although 1ndustnahsahon is often seen as a possible solut10n to the problems of the Thzrd World, m the case of the Bntzsh Industnal Revolution, the first example of successful industnaltsahon, op1n1on is d1v1ded as to whether the benefits outweighed the costs This issue will be examined 1n the context of econom1c development in a free market economy Ma1or topics considered include the quahty and quantzty of productzve factors, the operation of the markets for goods, labour and capital, the relat1onsh1ps between econom1c sectors, and the econom1c eff1c1ency and welfare consequences of xndustr1ahsatlon based upon pnvate enterpnse Emphasis will be placed upon possible lessons which developmg and underdeveloped countnes might learn from the Bnhsh experience Students presentmg topic 33217 Bntzsh Industrial Revolution for their degree may not enrol in this topic

Text books Deane, P The first industrial revolutzon,

2nd ed (Cambndge UP, 1980)* Floud R and Mccloskey, D The economic

history of Brztazn sznce 1700 vol 1 (Cambndge UP, 1981)*

Mathias, P The first zndustrzal natzon 2nd ed (Methuen, 1983)*

Reference books Hartwell RM The zndustrzal revolutzon and

economic growth (Methuen, 1971)* Hobsbawm E J Industry and empire

(We1denfeld & Nicolson, 1968)* Holderness, BA Pre zndustrzal England

(Dent, 1976) Jones, EL Agriculture and the zndustr1al

revolutzon (Blackwell, 1974)

468

Langton, j and Moms R J Atlas of zndustrzalizzng Britazn 1780 1914 (Methuen, 1986)

Mokyr J The economics of the zndustrzal revolutzon (Allen & Unwm 1985)*

More, C The zndustrzal age (Longman, 1989) Pawson E The early zndustrzal revolutzon

(Batsford, 1979) Rule J The labouring classes zn early

zndustrzal England 1750 1850 (Longman, 1986)

Taylor A J The standard of lzvzng zn Brztazn zn the zndustrzal revolution (Methuen 1975)*

31205 (37211) (52205) JAPANESE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Dr R Shlomowitz

Umts 6 Level Second and third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

The central theme of the topic will be the record and determinants of Japanese economic growth from about 1600 to the present day Consideration will be given, 1n particular, to 1nshtuttonal features of the Japanese economy and how they relate to the process of growth

Text book M1nam1, R The econom1c development of

Japan (Macmillan, 1986)*

Reference books Caves RE and Uekusa, M Industrial

organzzatzon zn Japan (Brookings Institution, 1976)

Demson, E F and Chung WK How Japan's economy grew so fast (Brookings Inst1tut10n, 1976)

Okawa, K and Rosovsky, H Japanese economic growth trend acceleration zn the twentieth century (Stanford UP, 1973)

Patrick, HT, ed Japanese zndustrialzzation and zts social consequences (California up. 1976)

Patnck, H T and Rosovsky, H 1 eds Asza 1s new giant (Brookmgs lnstztut10n 1976)

Taua1 I< Economic development and the labour market zn Japan (Columbia U P , 1970)

31301 (30313) (23301) AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Economic History Staff

Units 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te 30110 Econom1cs I, with a grade of C or better, except With the penn1ss1on of the Head of the Disciplme of Economic H!Story

This topic is concerned with the economic development of Austraha durmg the period 1850 to 1985 In lectures consideratrnn will be given to the causes and consequences of growth and fluctuations in econom1c activity at both the macro and micro levels Particular emphasis will be placed upon the regrnnal d1vers1ty of this activity Tutorials will be used to examine the various methods employed by Australian econom1c h1stonans as well as a number of current issues (such as unemployment and inflation) in h1stor1cal perspective

Text books Buthn, NG Investment zn Australian

economic development 1861 1900 (A N U 1972)*

Smclair, W A The process of economic development m Australia (Cheshire 1976)*

Reference books Butlm NG Australian domestic product

investment and forezgn borrowzng 1861 193811939 (Cambridge UP, 1962)

Butlm, N G , Barnard, A and Pmcus, J J Government and capitalism (Allen & Unwm 1982)*

Coghlan, TA Labour and industry m Australia, 4 vols (Macmillan, 1969)*

Fitzpatrick, B The British empire in

Australia, 1834 1939 (Macmdlan, 1969)* Forster, C 1 ed Australzan economic

development in the twentieth century (Australian Publishmg Co, 1970)*

Gregory, R G and Butlm N G Recovery from the depresszon (Cambridge U P , 1988)*

Maddock, R and McLean, I , eds The Australian economy in the long run (Cambridge U P , 1987)

Schedvm, C B Australia and the great depresszon (Sydney UP, 1970)

Economzc Hzstory

Shann E 0 G An economic history of Australia (Georgian House, 1963)*

Snooks, G D Depression and recovery in Western Australia, 1928129 1938/39 (WA UP, 1974)*

31302 AMERICAN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Dr P Mem Smith and Dr R Shlomowitz

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisite None

This topic deals with selected sub1ects m American economic history from about 1600 to the present day The ma1or themes are the causes and consequences of economic growth, regional d1spar1ties, 1nst1tut1onal and pohcy responses and economic welfare

Reference books Davis, L E et al eds American economic

growth an economzst's history of the United States (Harper & Row, 1972)

Fogel, R W and Engerman, S L , eds The reznterpretatzon of Amerzcan economic history (Harper & Row, 1971)

Hughes, J R American economic hzstory 2nd ed (Scott, Foresman and Co , 1987)

Lee, S P and Passell, P A new economic vzew of American history (Norton 1979)*

Walton, G and Robertson, RM History of the American economy, 6th ed (Harcourt Brace JovanoV!ch, 1990)

Honours Topics

31406 SPORT ECONOMICS AND HISTORY DrW Vamplew

Umts 12 Level Honours Duration Semester Pre requisite Honours standing

This topic will mvesl!gate empmcally the theories of economists and historians as applied to professrnnal sport m Bntam m the nineteenth and twentieth centuries Emphasis will be placed on methodology and the use of primary material

469

School of Soczal Sciences

31408 ECONOMIC INEQUALITY THEORY AND HISTORY Dr R Shlomowztz

Umts 12 Level Honours Duration Semester Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic will examine 1nequahty in income and wealth m Austraha, Bntam and the U S A 1n the nineteenth and twentieth centuries

31411 ECONOMIC HISTORY AND ECONOMIC THEORY A Dr R Schlomowztz and Dr P Mem Smzth

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

Thzs topzc zs offered m con1unction with 30432, an Econom1c Honours option Students enrolled m 31411 wtll be reqwred to write an extra extended essay The topic examines the relationship between econom1c theory and econom1c history and concentrates on issues where there are special problems in the apphcation of theory Spec1f1c areas covered may include regulation of product and factor markets, industry studies (1nclud1ng sports), 1nequahty, health Resort to primary materials will be encouraged

31412 ECONOMIC HISTORY AND ECONOMIC THEORY B Dr R Schlomowztz and Dr P Mem Smith

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic is offered m con1unct10n wtth 30432 an Economic Honours option It ts taken at the Umversity of Adelaide Students enrolled m 31412 will be reqmred to wnte an extra extended essay The topic examines the relationship between economic theory and econoM1c history and concentrates on issues where there are special problems in the

470

apphcat10n of theory Specific areas covered may include regulation of product and factor markets, mdustry studies (mcludmg sports) inequality, health Resort to primary materials will be encouraged

Dzploma zn Social Sciences

It is possible to take the Diploma m Social Sciences 1n Economic History through a combmat10n of Honours and undergraduate courses, as follows

a) At least 24 umts selected from the Honours level Economic History topics

Umts

31406 Sport Economics and History 12 31408 Economic Inequahty Theory

and History 12 31411 Economic History and

Economic Theory A 6 31412 Economic History and

Economic Theory B 6

b) A maXImum of 12 umts selected from second and thlfd year level Economic History topics

31202 The Ongms of Economic Development The British Case 6

31205 Japanese Economic Development 6

31301 Australian Economic Development 6

31302 Amencan Economic Development 6

Topzcs zn Geography

General Information

Geography is concerned wtth three ma1or areas of study The flfst is the relat10nship between society and the b1ophys1cal environment, involving a study of such issues as pressures on resources conflicts between development and conservation, and problems of environ mental management The second concerns the way in which economic, social and demographic processes influence different places m different ways, and the effect these differences have on the nature of our society

For example, changes 1n the economy, or 1n people's preferences for particular lifestyles, produce growth m some places and declme m others, while w1th1n cities there are ma1or social and economic 1nequahhes between suburbs The third area 1s the study of the natural environment as an integrated system 1n which climate, landforms, soils and plants interrelate 1n spec1f1c places to produce d1sttncttve ecosystems

Second and third year level Geography topics are organised into three streams which reflect the particular strengths of geography at Fhnders Umvers1ty

an enVIronmental stream comb1n1ng the ftrst and third areas of study described above

a social and urban geography stream based on the second area of study,

an economic and development geography stream also denved from the second area of study

A research methods topic 1s offered at third year level Two second year topics, based on the semester components of Geog1aphy I, are available as electives to students who have not taken Geography I

A ma1or sequence m Geography consists of Geography I and the complet10n of two of the three streams of second and third year topics The streams consist of the fol!owmg topics

Stream EnVIronmental

Second Year AusLralian Environmental Patterns

Third Year Australtan Resource Management

Stream Social and urban

Second Year Social Geography

Third Year The Western City geography and pohcy

Stream Economic and development

Second Year Uneven Development

Third Year Regional Economic Development

Geography

32110 GEOGRAPHY I SOCIETY, ENVIRONMENT AND PLACE Mr KL Bardsley (Convener) and Geography Staff

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and 2 hours of tutorials or practicals per week Pre requ1s1te None Students offering this topic towards a degree cannot also offer 32217 Water Resources and Austrahan Society or 32218 Austrahan C1l!es as Human Environments

Geography I 1s concerned with the relat10n ships between society and the b10phys1cal environment and its resources, with spatial variations 1n the effect of social and econom1c processes on particular places and the influence of these variations on society, and with the study of the natural environment as an integrated system

No previous study of geography 1s assumed, and the topic 1s designed both for students who do not plan to make geography their baste disc1phne, and for students taking geography as a ma1or sequence

The first semester examines the relatlonsh1ps between society and water resources in Austraha Themes discussed include social explanahons of environmental problems, the ecosystem and the drainage basin as 1ntegrat1ng concepts and functioning systems1

the av01labl11ty and use of water m Australia, and water resource problems and their management

The second semester studies the growth and charactenstlcs of Austrahan cities Themes examined include the nature of pre 1ndustnal and mdustnal cities, population growth and urban development in Australia, the process of suburban1satJ.on, res1denbal segregation and its consequences, the effects of economic change and restructuring on Austrahan cities and the urban environment

Text books

Fzrst semester Pigram, J J Issues m the management of

Australia's water resources (Longman Cheshire, 1986)*

471

School of Social Sciences

Second semester Logan, MI Whitelaw, JS and McKay, j

Urbanization the Australian experience (Shtllmgton House, 1981)*

Reference books First semester Austraha Department of Resources and

Energy Water 2000 a perspective on Australza s water resources to the year 2000 (AG PS , 19a3)•

Crabb, P Australia s water resources their use and management (Longman Cheshire, 1986)*

Davis, P S and Moore, P j Who owns the Murray? (River Pubhcat10ns, 1985)*

Goudie, A The nature of the environment (Blackwell, 1984)•

Heathcote, R L and Mabbutt, J A , eds Land, water and people (Allen & Unwm, 1988)•

Miller, G T Envzronmental science 2nd ed (Nelson Wadsworth, 1988)*

White, I D , Mottershead, D N and Harrison, SJ Environmental systems, an introductory text (Allen & Unwm, 1984)*

Second semester Austraha Bureau of Statts!tcs South

Austrahan Offtce Adelaide a social atlas 1986 Census (Bureau of Sta!Jst1cs 1988)

Burnley, I H Population society and environment zn Australia (Sh1lhngton House, 1982)*

Day L H and Rowland, D T, eds How many more Australzans? (Longman Cheshire, 1988)*

Gist, NP and Fava, S Urban society, 6th ed (Cromwell 1974)

Hamnett, S and Bunker, R , eds Urban Australza plannzng issues and polzcies (Nelson Wadsworth, 1987)

Hugo, G j Australia's changing populatzon trends and 1mpl1catzons (Oxford UP, 1986)

Ley, D A social geography of the city (Harper & Row, 1983)

Stretton, H Ideas for Australian cztzes, 3rd ed (Transit, 1989)*

472

Second Year Topics

32213 SOCIAL GEOGRAPHY Dr G J Hugo Dr CA Forster and MsDM Rudd

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 2 hours of workshops per week and a field camp of 4 days duration in the mid-semester break Students Will be responsible for their own accommodation costs during field work Pre reqms1te Geography I with a grade of C or better

The topic aims to introduce students to the idenbf1catlon, analysis 1 and explanation of spa!Jal aspects of social problems especially 1n developed societies Students are not only mtroduced to the study of the spatial d1mens1ons of particular problems, but also to a range of primary and secondary data and methods of data collec!Jon and techmques appropriate to the analysts and understandmg of these problems

Reference books de Vaus, D A Surveys in social research

(Allen & Unwm, 1985) Fmk, A and Kosecoff, J How to conduct

surveys (Sage, 1986) Jones, E and Eyles, J An zntroductzon to

social geography (Oxford UP, 1977)* Smith, D M Patterns zn human geography

(DaVId & Charles 1975) S!Jmson, R j The Australian czty a welfare

geography (Longman Cheshire 1982)

32215 (37215) (52215) UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT Dr JG Browett (Convener), Dr A M Maude and Dr C Manning

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week and 1 tutorial per fortmght Pre requisites Not avatlable to students who have already completed 32207 Geography of Economic Ac!Jv1ty or 32212 Southeast Asta

The ob1ec!Jve of this topic ts to discuss the nature of and to examine some reasons for, spatial vanabons in economic prospenty at the global level and WJthm Southeast Asta

Spec1f1c themes to be addressed include (1) concepts and measurements of develop men! (2) patterns, trends and explanat10ns for uneven development 1n the world and 1n Southeast Asia and (3) case studies of the interaction between internal and external factors m the determmat10n of development problems and prospects 1n selected regions of Southeast Asia

Reference books Lea, D A M and Chaudlm D P , eds Rural

development and the state (Methuen 1983)*

Reitsma, H A and !Gempenmng j M G The Third World in perspectwe (Rowman & Allenheld, 1985)

Wilber, C !(, ed The politzcal economy of development and underdevelopment 3rd ed (Random House, 1984)

World Development Report Internat10nal Bank for Reconstruction and Development (Oxford U P 1990)

32216 (23216) AUSTRALIAN ENVIRONMENTAL PATTERNS Mr KL Bardsley (Convener) Mr A S Fraser and Dr R L Heathcote

Uruts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 pracllcal (total of 3 hours) per week, plus field work of 4 days' duration 1n the mid semester break Students will be responsible for thelf own accommoda!Ion costs dunng field work Pre-reqms1te Grade of C or better m Geography I or at least 9 umts of first year Earth Sciences or first year B1olog1cal Sciences topics with a grade of C or better

A systematic introduction to the Australian enVIronment considered as the expression of an integrated set of b1ophys1cal processes This will be followed by a comparallve reg10nal study of the ma1or Austrahan environmental systems 1n terms of their resource potential

Themes covered may include processes of land surface development, ecosystem dynamics and biological productivity, sod formation, soil vegetation relahonsh1ps, soil erosion and soil conservation, drought and flood hazards, human impact on environmental systems

Geography

Reference books Courtenay PP Northern Australia

(Longman Cheshlfe, 1982)* Hanley, W and Cooper M, eds Man and the

Australian environment (McGraw Hill 1982)*

Heathcote, R L Australia (Longman, 1975) Heathcote R L, ed The Australian

experience (Longman Chesh1re 1988)* jeans, D N , ed Australza, a geography

Volume 1 the natural envzronment (Sydney UP, 1986)'

Powell, j M An historical geography of 1nodern A ustralza the restive frznge (Cambndge UP 1988)

Recher, HF Lunney, D and Dunn, I A natural legacy for Australia, 2nd ed (Pergamon, 1987)*

Russell JS and Isbell RP Australian soils the human impact (Queensland UP I Aust Soc Sml Sci Inc 1986)

Sabath, M D and Qmnnell S Ecosystems energy and nzaterzals (Longman Cheshire, 1985)*

32217 (23217) WATER RESOURCES AND AUSTRALIAN SOCIETY Mr KL Bardsley (Convener) and Geography Staff

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 2 hours of tutorials or practicals per week Pre requ1s1te None Students offenng this topic towards a degree cannot also offer 32110 Geography I

The topic exammes the rela1Ionsh1ps between society and water resources in Australia Themes discussed include social explanations of environmental problems, the ecosystem and the drainage basin as integrating concepts and functioning systems, the ava1lab1hty and use of water in Australia, and water resource problems and their management

No previous study of geography 1s assumed

Text book Pigram, j j Issues zn the management of

Australia's water resources (Longman Cheshire, 1986)*

473

School of Sacral Sciences

Reference books Austraha Department of Resources and

Energy Watei 2000 a perspective on Australza s water 1esources to the year 2000 (A G P S 1983)*

Crabb, P Australia's water resources their use and management (Longman Cheshire, 1986)*

Davis, P S and Moore P j Who owns the Murray? (River Pubhcatzons 1983)*

Goudie, A The nature of the envzronment (Blackwell 1984)"

Heathcote R L and Mabbut, j A , eds Land, water and people (Allen & Unwm, 1988)*

Hugo, G j Australia s changing populatzon trends and implicatzons (Oxford U P , 1986)

Miller, GT Environmental sczence, 2nd ed (Nelson Wadsworth 1988)*

White, I D 1 Mottershead, D N and Harrison, SJ Envzronmental systems an introductory text (Allen & Unwm, 1984)*

32218 (23218) AUSTRALIAN CITIES AS HUMAN ENVIRONMENTS Dr A M Maude (Convener) and Geography Staff

Umts 6 Level Second year Duratzon Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 2 hours of tutorials or practicals per week Pre requ1s1te None Students offering this topic towards a degree cannot also offer 32110 Geography I

The topic studies the growth and charactenstics of Australian cities Themes examined include the nature of pre industrial and industnal c1t1es, population growth and urban development in Australia, the process of suburbanisation, res1dent1al segregation and its consequtnces, the effects of economic change and restructunng on Australian cities, and the urban environment

No previous study of geogrdphy 1s assumed

Text book Logan, M I Whitelaw, J S and McKay, j

Urbanzzatzon the Australzan experzence (Skillington House 1981)*

Reference books Austraha Bureau of Statzst1cs South

Australian Office Adelaide a social atlas 1986 Census (Bureau of Statzstzcs, 1988)

474

Gist NP and Fava S Urban society, 6th ed (Cromwell, 1974)

Burnley, I H Populatzon 1 soczety and environment zn Australia (Shillington House 1982)*

Day, L H and Rowland D T, eds flow many more Australians? (Longman Cheshire, 1988)*

Hamnet! S and Bunker R eds Urban Australia plannz'tg issues and polzczes (Nelson Wadsworth, 1987)

Hugo G J Australia's changing populatzon trends and zmplicatwns (Oxford UP, 1986)

Ley, D A social geogwphy of the czty (Harper & Row 1983)

Stretton H Ideas for Australzan cztzes1 3rd ed (Transit 1989)*

Thzrd Year Topics

32307 THE WESTERN CITY GEOGRAPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY Professor M McCaskill (Convener)

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (lectures, tutorials and workshops) and 5 days of field study durmg the mid semester break Students will be responsible for their own accom­modation costs dunng fieldwork Pre requisite 32213 Social Geography with agrade of C or better Not available to students who have already completed 32302 Urban Geography or 32304 Geography and Pubhc Pohcy

The topic examines the ways 1n which the soczal geography of western c1t1es 1s shaped by economic, demographic and technological change, and by the pohc1es of pubhc mstztut10ns The first half of the topic deals with the foundations of publtc intervention in Western urban development, res1dent1al segregation and housing markets In the modern city and the regulation of develop ment in the modern city After fieldwork in Adelaide or Melbourne the topic then examines case studies of 1gentrrl'1cation' urban consohdat10n the geography of urban government, 1nequahty In Austrahan cities and the role of pubhc pohcy m urban Australia

Text books Badcock, B Unfairly structured cities

(Blackwell, 1984) Hall P Urban and regzonal plannzng

(Pelican, 1982)

Reference books Bassett, K and Short, JR Housing and

residential structure (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1980)

Cox, KR and Johnston R j, eds Conflict, polztzcs and the urban scene (Longman, 1982)

Hamnett, S and Bunker R, eds Urban Australia planning rssues and polzczes (Nelson Wadsworth, 1987)

Lawless P and Brown, F Urban growth and change zn Brztazn (Harper & Row, 1986)

McLoughlm j B and Huxley, M eds Urban planning zn Australia crztzcal readings (Longman Cheshire 1986)

32308 (52312) REGIONAL ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Dr A M Maude (Convener) Dr RM Steele and Professor M McCaskill

Units 6 Level Th1rd year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours of lectures, tutonals or seminars per week Pre requ1s1tes 32215 Uneven Development, 32207 Geography of Economic Act1V1ty, or 32212 Southeast Asia with a grade of C or better

This topic 1s concerned with two inter related themes The first entails an assessment of those factors hypothesised by theory, which have been thought responSible for the 1n1t1ation and perpetuation of uneven regional econom1c development The second part of the topic examines various planning responses which have been instituted on the basts of this theory, either to promote regional development or to arrest regional dechne

Reference books Corbndge, S Capitalrst world development

(Macmillan 1986) Gore, C Regzons zn questwn (Methuen, 1984) Hlggms B and Zagorski, K, eds Australian

regional developments readings zn regional experzences, polzczes and prospects (AGPS, 1989)

Geography

32309 RESEARCH METHODS IN GEOGRAPHY Dr CA Forster, Mr A S Fraser, Dr G J Hugo and Ms D M Rudd

Umts 6 Level Th1rd year Duration Full year Class Contact I hour of lectures per week and 1 two hour workshop per fortmght Pre requ1s1te 12 units of second year Geography topics with a grade of C or better

ThIS topic IS deS1gned for students who are completing a ma1or sequence 1n Geography Students w1sh1ng to pursue a career 1n applied geography are strongly encouraged to take this topic It is a pre requ1s1te for entry into the Geography Honours programme

The topic will provide students with a tra1n1ng 1n various approaches to geographical research methods and techmques of analysIS These latter will include research design geo graphical data sources, statistical inference SPSS and computer graphics Students will undertake a research pro1ect for this topic

Reference books Curran P J Pnnczples of remote senszng

(Longman, 1985) Eyles, j , ed Research zn human geography

(Blackwell 1988) Foddy, W H Elementary applied statistics for

the social sciences (Harper & Row, 1988) Mitchell B Geography and resource

analyszs 2nd ed (Wiley 1989) Norusis M j The SPSS guzde to data analysis

for SPSSX (SPSS, 1987)

32311 (23309) AUSTRALIAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT Dr R L Heathcote (Convener), Mr [( L Bardsley and Mr AS Fraser

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week and 1 pracllcal workshop per fortnight plus a field camp of 4 days durmg the mid semester break Students will be responS1ble for the cost of accommodation and meals on the camp Pre requ1S1te 32216 Australian Env1ron mental Patterns, or 32213 Social Geography or 32215 Uneven Development Wlth a grade of C or better

475

School of Soczal Sczences

A review of the theory and practice of resource perception and management with spec1f1c reference to Australian cond1tlons Themes may mclude histoncal review of methods of resource inventory and appraisal societal perception of and ad1ustment to environ mental hazards, and management strategies for sustainable resource use The field camp will provide experience 1n primary data collect10n and analysis m the field

Reference books Gllpm, G Environmental policy m Australza

(Queensland U P , 1980) Heathcote, R L, ed The Australian

experience essays ln Australzan land settlement and resource management (Longman Cheshire, 1988)

Heathcote, R L and Mabbutt j A , eds Land water and people essays in Australian resource management (Allen & Unw1n, 1988)

jeans, D N ed Space and soczety (Sydney up. 1987)

Lo, C P Applied remote sensing (Longman, 1979)

Mitchell, B Geography and resource analyszs, 2nd ed (Wiley, 1989)

O'Riordan, T Envzronmentalzsm, 2nd ed (P10n, 1981)

Powell, j M An hzstorzcal geography of modern Australia (Cambndge UP, 1988)

Honours Topics

Honours programme

An Honours programme in Geography consists of the following

Umts a) 2 topics from among the followmg

32402 Environ1nental Perception (Dr R L Heathcote) 6

32405 Urban Social Geography (Dr CA Forster) 6

32411 Urbanisation and Development in Southeast Asia (Dr C Mannzng and Dr R Steele) 6

32413 Advanced Physical Geography (Mr KL Bardsley and Mr A S Fraser) 6

32414 Advanced Populat10n Studies (DrG f Hugo) 6

476

32416 Capitalism and Uneven Development (Dr f G Browett) 6

By special arrangement, a topic from another Dzsczplzne or School 6

b) 32422 Modem Geographical Thought (Professor M McCaskill) 6

c) 32440 Thesis and Literature Review 18

A thesis of 10,000 to 15,000 words to be wntten under the supervts1on of a member of the staff The thesis is to give evidence of the student's ab1hties 1n collecting and evaluating information, constructing testing and defending an argument and critically examining theones 1n the area of enquiry

A hterature review or work in the general area of the thesis mvesllgation to be submitted by the end of the first semester

Diploma zn Soczal Sciences Geography

A general descnpllon of the Diploma m Social Sciences is set out m Statute 7 1 Schedule 16 The Diploma m Social Sciences Students studymg Geography for the Diploma 1n Social Sciences will complete 36 units chosen from the followmg

a) Honours topics up to a total of 36 umts but excluding topic 32440 Thesis and Literature Review

b) A topic from another Disciplme or School deemed by the Head of the Discipline of Geography to be cognate to the advanced study of Geography and not exceeding 6 units

c) 32450 Thesis 12 umts

d)

A thesis of approXImately 10 000 words to be written under the superv1s1on of a member of the staff The thesis is to give evidence of the student s ab1ht1es in collecting and evaluating information and critically exam1n1ng theones in the area of enquiry

Up to a maximum of 12 units chosen from the followmg topics

Umts 32307 The Western City Geography

and Pohcy 6 32308 Reg10nal Economic

Development 6

32309 Research Methods m Geography

32311 Austrahan Resource Management

6

6

Any topic approved under (b) above which 1s not hsted as a fourth year topic

32402 ENVIRONMENTAL PERCEPTION Dr R L Heathcote

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

This topic will extend some of the quest10ns considered 1n topic 32311 Australian Resource Management offered m 1990, namely ph1losoph1es of resource management the role of aesthetics in resource evaluation, and human ad1ustment to environmental hazards

32405 URBAN SOCIAL GEOGRAPHY Dr CA Forster

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

An advanced level exam1nat1on of the relat1onsh1p between social processes, 1nstltut1ons and spatial form in the western city

32411 (37405) (52401) URBANISATION AND DEVELOPMENT IN SOUTHEAST ASIA Dr A M Maude, Dr C Manning and Dr RM Steele

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Pre-requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

A study of urbamsahon and development m Southeast Asia This topic 1s also offered as part of fourth year programmes m Asian Studies and Development Studies

Geography

32413 ADVANCED PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY Mr KL Bardsley and Mr A S Fraser

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Pre reqms1te Honours or Diploma standmg

The topic will mvolve the advanced study of some of the matenal mtroduced m the undergraduate courses in the environmental stream The basic approach adopted will be the study of the land surface as a dynamic b10 physical system The detailed content of the topic 1s fleXIble and will vary accordmg to the previous experience and interests of the students undertakmg the topic, but might mclude a select10n of the followmg topics process form and change in the beach-dune system, sea level change and its effect on the coast, the conservation and management of coastal resources, soil class1f1cat1on and mapping, sod erosion and conservation, sod and vegetation associations with particular reference to South Austraha techmques of remote sensing 1n the analysis of physical land surface the evaluation of b1ophys1cal systems as a human resource

32414 (37411) (52405) ADVANCED POPULATION STUDIES Dr G J Hugo

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

A study of advanced demographic techmques and their appltcat10n to the study and understandmg of contemporary demographic trends m Austraha and the Thud World Particular attent10n 1s paid to pohcy issues

32416 CAPITALISM AND UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT Dr J G Browett

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

477

School of Social Sciences

An examination of recent perspectives on the relationsh1ps between the imperatives of capital accumulation: urbanisation and uneven regional development Attention will be focussed on both theorettcal debates and case studies of the interaction between spatial structure and social and economic processes

32422 MODERN GEOGRAPHICAL THOUGHT Professor M McCaskill

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Durat10n Full year Pre-requisite Honours or Diploma standing

The topic will explore some important issues m the philosophy and methodology of geography m the 20th century This topic will be taught iomtly with the Umversity of Adelaide Geography Honours class

32440 THESIS AND LITERATURE REVIEW

Umts 18 Level Honours

A thesis of 10,000 to 15,000 words to be written under the superv1s1on of a member of the staff The thesis ts to give eVIdence of the student's abiht1es 1n collecting and evaluating information constructing, testing and defendmg an argument and cntlcally exam1n1ng theories in the area of enquiry

A literature reVIew of work in the general area of the thesis mvesllgat10n to be submitted by the end of the first semester

32450 THESIS

Umts 12

Level Diploma and students pursuing a 101nt Honours programme In two D1sc1phnes

A thesis of approximately 10,000 words to be written under the superv1ston of a member of the staff The thesis is to give evidence of the student's abiltties in collecting and evaluating information and cntically exam1n1ng theones in the area of 1nqu1ry

478

MA m Geography

MA studies m Geography may be undertaken by thesis, by coursework1 or by a combination of thesis and coursework The M A by thesis consists of a dissertation of not more than 60,000 words The M A by coursework, or by a comb1nat1on of thesis and coursework, consists of 54 umts chosen from the followmg

a) Up to 12 units of instructional topics, involving the learning of skills necessary to the students programme (such as statistics, computing or a language)

b) 32500 MA Coursework Thesis 24 or 32513 MA Coursework Pro1ect 12

c) 32501 Chmate and Landforms 6 32502 Resource Evaluation and

Management 6 32503 Populat10n Studies 6 32504 The Geography of the

Western City 6 32505 Development Studies 6 32506 Regional Development

and Planmng 6 32507 Supervised Research Pro1ect

m Geography 6 32508 Populat10n Data Analysis 6 32509 Human Resource Development 6 32511 Urbamsat10n and Development 6

Enrolment In each component of the M A programme must be approved by both the Head of the Disciplme of Geography and the Higher Degrees Committee of the School of Social Sciences

32500 MA COURSEWORK THESIS Professor M McCaskill

Umts 24 Level Masters Duration Full year Pre requisite Masters standing

A thesis of approximately 24,000 words wntten under the supervmon of a member of the staff The thesis should give evidence of the student's ability to collect and evaluate information, construct, test and defend an argument1 and cnhcally examine theories 1n the area of enqmry

32501 CLIMATE AND LANDFORMS Mr [( L Bardsley

Units 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

The topic will focus m11Ially on the significance of chmahc variables for various geomorph1c processes The formation and evolution of particular landforms and of surface rehef under an array of chmates (glac1al, penglac1al, humid, and) will be considered The vahd1ty of the chmatogenct1c model as an organ1s1ng framework for geomorphological studies will be assessed

32502 (52501) RESOURCE EVALUATION AND MANAGEMENT Dr R L Heathcote

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

The topic may mcluc,e study of the cntena used in, and variables affecting the process of, the evaluation of environmental resources by different soc1ehes or groups w1th1n soc1ebes and the 1mphcat1ons of such cntena and variables tn the management of these resources Case studies may be drawn from both the developed and developmg world and may be concerned with the theory and practice of resource inventory and allocation and recognition of and response to en11ronmental hazards

32503 (38514) (51523) (52502) POPULATION STUDIES Dr R M Steele and Populatzon Studies Staff

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite Masters standing

This topic will focus on a number of core questions relating to the causes and consequences of changes 1n population growth, migration fert1hty1 mortality and

Geography

population structure The ma1or theories advanced to explain these demographic changes wdl be cntically exammed and related to wider economic and social change There will be an approximately equal d1v1s1on of attention between ma1or issues relating more spec1f1cally to Third World populat10ns and those relating to 1ndustna1Ised soc1eiles A small secllon of the topic will be devoted to a consideration of some advanced methods of demographic analysts, especially with respect to population movement and population pro1echons

32504 THE GEOGRAPHY OF THE WESTERN CITY Dr CA Forster

Units 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite Masters standing

An examination of the relationship between social processes inshtuhons and spatial structure 1n Western cities with particular emphasis on Austrahan and Bnhsh examples Topics studied may include housing urban government residential segregation, employment and unemployment vanatlons in access to services, and methodological issues in geographical explanation

32505 (52503) DEVELOPMENT STUDIES Dr J Browett

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre-requisite Masters standing

Attention will mainly be focused on the evaluation of different and competing perspectives which have been advanced to account for the 1n1tiat.J.on and perpetuation of uneven development both between nations and w1thm them In particular the strengths and weaknesses of neoclassical economic theory1 modern1sabon/d1ffus1on1st depend ency and post dependency perspectives will be considered and related to recent changes 1n the world economy

479

School of Social Sciences

32506 (52504) REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT AND PLANNING Dr A Maude Dr RM Steele and Dr f Browett

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Master standing

This topic may mclude a study of the s1gn1f1cance of the region and spatial analysis in develop ment theory and practice, an exam1nat1on of theories of regional development, case studies of particular regions, and a study of regional development pohc1es Particular emphasis may be given to the problems of low income regions in developing countries, and to the role of m1grat1on in reg1onal development

32507 SUPERVISED RESEARCH PROJECT IN GEOGRAPHY Professor M McCaskill

Umts 6 Level Masters Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

Students will undertake a small research proiect on some aspect of geographical study and produce a research paper of about 6,000 words The proiect may mvolve field work, the analysis of secondary data, or a critical study and evaluation of the hterature on a specific topic or problem

Populatzon and Human Resources Programme

Co ordmator Dr C Manning

The postgraduate programme in Population and Human Resources 1n the School of Social Sciences is adm1n1stered by the D1sc1phne of Geography but draws on theones and material from demography, geography, soc10logy and economics The programme stresses the 1nterd1sc1pllnary nature of population studies, and the inter relationships between population and development m both advanced and Thud World countnes The programme offers a two year coursework Masters degree1 a three year

480

Doctor of Philosophy degree by thesis, and a Diploma For details of the Diploma see Schedule 30 of Statute 7 1 Bachelor Degrees and Diplomas

MA m Populatzon and Human Resources

The M A consists of 54 umts of study, normally completed over two years and IS

available m two different programmes The first compnses a range of topics on various aspects of populat10n studies, while the second allows a candidate to spec1ahse 1n economics and economic aspects of population studies A grade of C or better or NGP must be obtamed m all 54 units

A Population and Human Resources

In this programme candidates may complete either 42 units of coursework and a 12 unit research pro1ect1 or 30 units of coursework and a 24 umt thesIS The coursework component must be chosen from the following 6 umt topics

a) Core Population Studies topics (candidates must complete all three of these topics)

32503 Populat10n Studies 32508 Popula!Ion Data Analysis 32509 Human Resource Development

b) Elec!Ive Populat10n Studies topics (candidates taking 42 units of coursework must complete at least two of these topics, while candidates takmg 30 umts of coursework must complete one topic)

32506 Reg10nal Development and Plannmg

32511 Urbamsat10n and Development 32512 Popula!Ion Mob1hty 32514 Popula!Ion Economics 32516 Demography of the Family 32517 Agemg of Popula!Ions 32518 Popula!Ion and the Envrronment

c) Elective Social Science topics (candidates taking 42 units of coursework may choose one of these topics)

32515 Supervised Research Proiect m Popula!Ion Studies

An approved Masters level topic in another D1sc1phne

Enrolment 1n each component of this programme must be approved by both the Head of the Disciplme of Geography and the Higher Degrees Committee of the School of Social Sciences

B Population Studies and Economics

This programme consists of a 12 unit research pro1ect and 42 units of coursework, divided equally between Population Studies and Economics topics as specified below

a) 32513 MA Coursework Proiect

b) Core Populat10n Studies and Economics topics (candidates must complete all four of these topics)

30531 Advanced M1croeconom1cs (Topic 30401 assessed at Masters level)

32503 Populat10n Studies 32508 Populabon Data AnalysIS 32514 Population Economics

c) At least one of the followmg Economics topics 30504 Transport Economics 30511 Labour Econom1cs 30514 Pubhc Economics 30516 Economic Development 30517 Econometrics 30532 Advanced Macroeconomics

(Topic 30402 assessed at Masters level)

d) At least one of the followmg Populabon Studies topics 32506 Regional Development and

Planning 32509 Human Resource Development 32511 Urbanisation and Development 32512 Populat10n Mob1hty 32516 Demography of the Family 32517 Agemg of Populat10ns 32518 Populat10n and the Environment

Enrolment in each component of this programme must be approved by the Heads of the D1Sc1phnes of Geography and Economics and by the Higher Degrees Committee of the School of Social Sciences For further mforma tlon on entry and other requirements see the Information Brochure on the Graduate

Populatzon and Human Resources Programme

Programme 1n Population and Human Resources available from the Academic Registrar

32503 (38514) (51523) (52502) POPULATION STUDIES Dr R M Steele and Programme Staff

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 houf' per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic will focus on a number of core questions relating to the causes and consequences of changes in population growth m1grat10n fertihty, mortahty and population structure The ma1or theories advanced to explam these demographic changes will be critically examined and related to wider economic and social change There will be an approxtmately equal d1v1s1on of attention between ma1or issues relating more spec1f1cally to Third World populat10ns and those relating to 1ndustnahsed societies A small sect10n of the topic will be devoted to a consideration of some advanced methods of demographic analysis, especially with respect to population movement and population pro1ecttons

32506 REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT AND PLANNING Dr A Maude, Dr RM Steele and Dr J Browett

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic may mclude a study of the s1gn1f1cance of the region and spatial analysts in development theory and practice, an examination of theones of reg1onal develop ment, case studies of particular regions, and a study of reg10nal development policies Particular emphaSis may be given to the problems of low income regions in developing countries, and to the role of m1grat1on in regional development

481

School of Social Sciences

32508 (52519) POPULATION DATA ANALYSIS Ms D M Rudd and Dr C Manning

Units 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

The topic aims to give students a working knowledge of a range of the basic techniques reqmred m the analysis of populat10n change and d1stnbu!Ion and of populat10n development mterrelat10nsh1ps It will impart practical skills m analysis and mterpretahon of populat10n data and trends, focusmg particularly on analysis of fert1hty, m1gral!on and labour force data, and on pro1ectlons It will also h1ghhght the ma1or vanables of mterest in the study of populatwn and development cr1t1cally exam1n1ng and proVId1ng students with practical expenence m applymg vanous techniques to testing maior theones in this field The practical work will famihanse students with the use of both roam frame and micro computers It ts intended that the topic should complement the more theoretical approach taken in the core courses m the Populat10n Studies programme

32509 (52511) HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT Dre Manning

Units 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

An exam1natlon of human resource develop ment issues and planning with special reference to the Asia Pac1f1c Region The topic wdl include analysis of labour force and labour markets in developing countries, an introduction to and cnhcal evaluation of ma1or approaches to manpower plannmg and educational planning poltc1es and planning of health and nutnt10nal improvement The topic will provide an overview to analysis and issues, and deal with selected case studies in the Asia Pacific Region on all these sub1ects

482

32511 (52512) URBANISATION AND DEVELOPMENT DrAM Maude

Not offered m 1991

Units 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

An exam1natton of the relahonsh1ps between urbamsal!on and development, with particular reference to Southeast Asta The topic may include a study of the analysis and explanation of urban1sat1on, the relationships between urbanisation and development, the problems of urban1sahon, and urban1satton pohc1es

32512 (52517) POPULATION MOBILITY Dr RM Steele

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

The topic aims firstly to cover m depth the ma1or conceptual and measurement issues related to population movement 1n developing and developed socie!Ies It deals with the ma1or theones of population movement, its causes and consequences for social and economic change Finally there is a cons1derat1on of planning and pohcy issues related to population movement especially in developing countnes

32513 M A COURSEWORK PROJECT DrC Manmng

Umts 12 Level Masters Durat10n Full year Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

A report on a research task of approXImately 12,000 words, wntten under the supervision of a member of staff The research task may involve a hterature review, the study of a particular problem through the collect10n and evaluatton of informatton, and/or the analysis of a data set

32514 (52518) POPULATION ECONOMICS DrC Manning

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

Examines basic micro and macro econom1c theories of population change and d1stnbut1on with particular emphasis on their appltcahon to less developed countries Deals with the home econom1cs of fert1hty behaviour and population control, the causes and consequences of rapid population growth and econom1c theories of m1grahon

32515 SUPERVISED RESEARCH PROJECT IN POPULATION STUDIES Dre Manning

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

Students will undertake a small research pro1ect on some aspect of population studies, and produce a research paper of about 6,000 words The pro1ect may involve field work1

the analysis of secondary data, or a critical study and evaluation of the literature on a specific topic or problem

32516 DEMOGRAPHY OF THE FAMILY Programme Staff

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours a week Pre requisite Masters standing

This topic examines baste theories 1n social demography with emphasis on the demography of the family Lectures will examine the social determinants of family formation patterns such as marriage, childbearing and family planning and labour force part1c1pahon Comparisons of trends and

Population and Hunzan Resources Programme

patterns rn developrng and developed countries will be made with a focus on Austraha and the Asia Pac1f1c region Vanous analytical approaches to the study of family formation and d1ssoluhon patterns will also be discussed and applied

32517 AGEING OF POPULATIONS CAUSES AND CONSEQUENCES DrG J Hugo

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic aims firstly to give students a thorough background 1n contemporary patterns and levels of growth of the older population 1n both Less Developed and More Developed countries It examines the causes of the current and impending rapid growth of the aged and the complex interface between ageing of populations and economic development and social change in relation to the changing relationships between genera hons The changing character1st1cs of the elderly in LDCs and MDCs are explored The imphcahons of ageing for prov1s1on of health services, providing economic support for the aged, housing and other areas of pubhc pohcy are discussed in relat10n to both LDCs and MDCs Changing patterns of behav10ur of the elderly with respect to housing, permanent and temporary migration and health are also examined

32518 (52524) POPULATION AND ENVIRONMENT Dr RM Steele (Convener) and Geography! Populatzon Studies Staff

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

483

School of Social Sczences

The topic introduces basic concepts and analysis of ecosystems and key mterrelatwnships between populatwn and environment w1th1n the context of develop ment issues and pohc1es It deals with resource depletion and management, land use and agricultural systems related to populatwn pressure, population mob1ltty, urban1satlon and the environment and integrated approaches to populat1on-env1ronment planmng

Topzcs zn History

General Information

General questions of course design, penn1ss1on to undertake special combmatwns or broad problems about the study of the sub1ect should be addressed to the D1rector of Studies Dr B K Dickey (first semester), Dr A R G Griffiths (second semester) Admm1stral!ve aspects of each topic are co ordinated by a Convener, whose name ts shown below the title of each topic Requests for exemptwn of pre reqms1tes wdl be dealt with by the Head of D1sc1plme

Fzrst Year Topics

The topics available for study at first year level assume no previous h1stoncal studies

Any one of the topics, completed at C grade level or better permits a student to proceed to any second year topics in history

All topics are designed, through the study of a substantial body of h1stoncal literature, to introduce students to such fundamental h1stoncal issues as the nature and evaluatton of evidence the construction of h1stoncal narratives, the assessment of the wntlngs of other h1stonans, and the analysis of such h1stoncal problems as the nature of cause and the impact of mdlVlduals on the course of history Each topic reflects a ma1or mterest of a group of historians w1thm the D1sc1plme These mterests are normally represented at all levels of the D1sc1plme's teachmg programme Therefore each of these first year topics may be considered as the commencement of a sequence of historical studies in a specific

484

area It must be emphasised, however that such an arrangement is not compulsory, for some students will prefer to pursue a wide vanety of mterests See the table which follows to illustrate these various possib1ht1es

33120 HISTORY 1B - THE FOUNDATION OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND, 1770 1870 Dr D L Hilliard (Convener) wzth Dr B Dzckey, Dr PA Howell Dr V M Drapac and Dr R Crocker

Umts 12 Level Fust year Dural!on Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic 1s concerned with the ong1ns and development to c 1870 of Bnl!sh colomes m Australasia New South Wales, South Austraha and New Zealand Specific areas to be covered include the convict system, race relations, land settlement and pastorahsm, rehgion, education, social welfare, the place ofwomen1

and the development of class relattonsh1ps, as well as the relal!onship of the Australasian colonies to Great Britain Special attention is paid to the careful exammat10n of pnmary sources Collections of documents will be d1stnbuted to all students for study m both semesters

Recommended readzng Blamey, G A land half won (Sun Books

1983)* Crowley, F K, ed A new hzstory of Australia

(Hememann, 1974)* Fletcher, B H ColomalAustralza before 1850

(Nelson 1976)* Hirst, J B 1 Convict society and zts enemies

(Allen & Unwm, 1983)* Ohver, W H , ed The Oxford hzstory of New

Zealand (Oxford UP, 1981)* Smcla!f, K A history of New Zealand, 3rd ed

(Pehcan, 1980)* Ward, J M Empzre zn the Antzpodes (Arnold,

1966)* Ward, R Fzndzng Australia (Heinemann,

1987)*

History

TABLE TO ILLUSTRATE POSSIBLE PATTERNS OF HISTORY COURSES (Subject to alteration you are advised to check at Enrolment)

(NB Topics asterisked not available 10 1991)

Year Australia Asia America Europe Other

1 33120 The 33140 33170 33160 (all 12 uruts) Foundation of Contmwty and TheAmencas Contemporary

Australia and Change tn Chtna 1770 1900 Europe• New Zealand and Ind.ta to 1770 1870 about 1870

2 33204 Twentleth 33208 33201 191h and 33211 W .. terloo (all 6 uruts) Century Modemlnd1a 20th Century to Luneburg

Austraha* Laun Amenca"' Heath"'

33224 Colorual 33219 33213 33212 Austraha ModemChma* Emergence of Contemporary

Modem Scandmav1a Amenca 1880 to the present

33229 Gender 33227 History 33217 Bnttsh m Australian of Modem Industnal History Southeast Asta• Revolution

Note see also 33221 The Rise entnes for and Fall of Amen can European Studies Impenahsm*

33223 Nazt Germany its ongms and nature 1870-1945

33225 Rehg1on Science and Society m Europe 1500 1700

33226 Contemporary Europe*

3 33225 33302 The 33319 Regions 33317 33315 (all 6 uruts) Aus trait an Partition of mAmenca The English V1ctonans m

Rehg1ous India 1933-47"' Reformabon Southern Afnca History* 1833 1902*

33329 33331 33324 Cuban 33321 Culture 33322 Austrahan Contemporary Revolution"' 1n V1ctonan Melanesian Welfare History India, England History*

1940 1980* 1851 1901

' 33333 33326 33323 33328 Ong1ns Smgapore Conquest and Resistance 1n of Intemat1onal Society Colonisation Wartune Migration 1914-1941 ofMex1co Europe• 1700-1914

and Peru 1519 1550*

485

School of Social Sciences

33140 HISTORY ID - CONTINUITY AND CHANGE IN CHINA AND INDIA TO ABOUT1870 Dr CF Yong (Convener) with Dr L Brennan

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic 1s pnmanly concerned with the evolution of the states and soc1ehes of pre modern China and India It examines change and conttnu1ty in the econom1c soc1al, cultural and political hfe of the people and analyses the factors for change and conhnu1ty in these two countnes

For the Chmese society, the analysis wdl be made agamst a background of events of the Mmg and the Ch'mg dynasties up to 1864 It wtll examine five main themes 1nclud1ng the trad1t1onal Chinese ehte, Confuc1an1sm, agranan society and peasant rebellion central control and reg1onahsm, and foreign mfluences and theu Impact Indian soc10ty will be observed from the first mtrus10ns of Muslims to the aftennath of the Indian Revolt of 1857-58 Atten!Jon will be focused on the changes brought by the Muslim conquest, the continued development of a Hindu dominated society and culture in South India, and the impact of British influence on the sub contment This topic will be studied with a view to estabhsh1ng the common features and differences In change and cont1nu1ty of these pre modern Asian societies

A collection of documents will be d1stnbuted to all students to be used to demonstrate the themes of the topic and to develop techmques of h1stoncal analysIS

Preliminary reading Cohn, B S India the social anthropology of

a cw1l1zatzon (Prentice Hall 1971)* Faubank, j K The Umted States and Chzna,

4th ed (Harvard UP, 1980)*

Set books Fairbank, ] K and Reischauer, E O China

trad1tzon and transformatzon (Allen & Unwm, 1989)*

Wolpert, S A new history of India, 3rd ed (Oxford UP, 1989)*

486

33160 HISTORY IF - CONTEMPORARY EUROPE Conveners Dr D H Close and Dr A R G Griffiths, with Dr V M Drapac

Not offered m 1991

33170 HISTORY JG THE AMERICAS, 1700 1900 Dr Ff Brooks (Convener) with Mr f Mallon, Dr DA DeBats and Dr GM Tobzn

Umts 12 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

The focus of this topic 1s on the process of change which over a penod of two centunes, transformed several societies of European ongm established m the New World from colomal outposts to formally autonomous nat10ns The topic will concentrate on compansons between Anglo American and Latin American societies, tracing their development from approximately 1700 to 1900 It will examme the European mteract10n with the Amenndians and study the pervasive effects of black slavery It will trace the change from agrarian to 1ndustnahs1ng societies In the first half of the year the topic w11l look at ways In which these societies changed dunng the eighteenth century through mternal development and as a result of new imperial pohc1es of the European governments Between 1776 and 1824 new nations pohtlcally mdependent of Europe were established throughout the Amencas

In the second half of the topic, the focus will be on the conhnuit.Ies and d1sconhnu1hes expenenced in the passage from colonial status to 11at10nhood and on the shapmg of new national structures Common conshtuhonal1

economic and social problems and developments will be analysed

Considerable emphasis will be given to exploring comparisons and contrasts among the different American soc1et1es in the eighteenth and nmeteenth century The topic will provide a h1stoncal framework for the emergence of modern societies and social

orders In each semester a set of h1stoncal documents will be issued to each student

Preliminary reading Henretta, J A and Nobles, Gregory H

Evolution and revolution, American society, 1600 1820 (Heath, 1987)*

Pendle, G A history of Latin America (Pengum 1985)

Stem, SJ and B H The colonial heritage of Latin America (Oxford U P , 1979) •

Reference books Bethell, L ed The independence of Latin

America (Cambndge lJ P 1987)* Bethell, L ed Spanish America after

independence, c 1820 c 1870 (Cambndge up' 1987)*

Lockhart J and Schwartz, S Early Latin America a history of colonial Spanish America and Brazzi (Cambndge U P , 1983)*

Nash, G B , et al The American people, vol 1 (Harper & Row, 1986)*

Second Year Topicst

FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN HISTORY

The topics available for study at second year level provide substantial surveys of broad, important areas of modern history

Listed below are the topics expected to be offered m 1991 (short titles only) These are sub1ect to alteration Students are advised to check at Enrolment

Commencing February

33208 Modem India 33217 Industnal Revolut10n 33223 Nazi Germany

Commencing July

33212 Contemporary Scandmav1a 33213 Emergence of Modem Amenca 33224 Coloma! Austraha 33225 Rehg10n, Science and Society 33229 Gender m Austraha

t Apphcallons for exempllon from pre reqws1te requirements will be entertained by the Head 0CD1sc1plme While the normal pre reqms1te for second year level topics m History 1s 12 units or any first year History topic nt n grade of C or better students who have completed 72 units towards a degree may take up to 12 units of second year level History as cognates or electives without first passing a first year level History topic

History

33201 (52211) NINETEENTH AND TWENTIETH CENTURY LATIN AMERICA Mr f Mallon

Not offered ID 1991

33204 (23205) TWENTIEffi CENTURY AUSTRALIA Dr A R G Gritfzths

Not offered ID 1991

33208 (37207) (52208) MODERN INDIA Dr L Brennan

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per Wef'k Pre requ1s1te 12 units of first year History with a grade of C or bettert

This topic is a study of the impact on Indian society and pohhcs of British rule Emphasis will be placed on such aspects of Indian society as communal host1hty landlord tenant relat10ns and caste and untouchab1hty, and on the mteract10n of these with the pohtical movement for Indian mdependence The topic will conclude with discussion of pohtical, economic and social developments in Independent India

Preliminary reading Masselos, J C Indian natzonalzsm (Sterlmg

1985) Snn1vas, M N Soczal change zn modern Indza

(Cahforma UP, 1973)'

Set text Jeffrey, R et al, eds Rebellwn to Republic

(Sterlmg, 1990)

Reference book Sarkar, s, Modern India 1885 1947

(Macmillan, 1989)

33211 WATERLOO TO LUNEBURG HEAm EUROPEAN WAR FROM JUNE 1815 TO MAY 1945 Dr f M Phillzps

Not offered m 1991

487

School of Soczal Sczences

33212 CONTEMPORARY SCANDINAVIA Dr A R G Grzffzths

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre-requ1s1te 12 units of first year History with a grade of C or bettert

While the tapir will look at economic and poh!Ical factors which have shaped Scand1nav1a as a whole, attention will be given to the particular character1shcs of 1nd1v1dual states from the Napoleomc era to the present Sweden, Finland, Denmark, Norway and Iceland The topic covers the poht1cal, social, artistic and m1htary h1stones of these nations

Text book Griffiths, A R G Scandznavza (Wakefield

Press, 1990)

Preliminary reading Derry, T K A hzstory of Scandznav1a (Allen &

Unwm 1979) Popperwell, R G Norway (Benn, 1972) Scobb1e, I Sweden (Benn, 1972) )ones, W G Denmark (Croom Helm, 1986)) )ut1kkala, E and Pmnen, K A history of

Fznland (Praeger, 1974)

33213 (34204) TIIE EMERGENCE OF MODERN AMERICA DrGM Tobzn

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te 12 units of first year History with a grade of C or bettert

A study of the impact on American society of 1ndustnal change from the m1d-n1neteenth century to the present, and of the subsequent extension of American power and influence on a global scale Emphasis will be placed on the extent to which the move away from a rural economy and rural values brought about unexpected shlfts in social structure, and gave a new d1mens10n to the longstandmg debate concerning the nature of American society

t Refer to note at beginnmg of second year topics

488

and the place of the md1V1dual w1thm that society Areas discussed will include race ethn1c1ty, urban1sat1on and foreign policy Audio visual matenals and film accompany the study

Text book Nash, GB, et al TheAmericanpeople, vol II

(Harper & Row, 1986)

Reference books Burner D , ed The diversity of modern

Amerzca (Appleton Century Crofts, 1970)* Leuchtenberg, W E The perzls of prosperzty,

1914 1932 (Chicago UP, 1958)* Polenberg, R One natzon d1vmble (Pengum,

1980)* Wiebe, R The search for order, 1877 1920

(Hill & Wang 1967)*

33217 (31202) BRIDSH INDUSTRIAL REVOLUTION Economic History Staff

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 12 umts of first year History with a grade of C or better

This topic will suggest reasons why Bntrun was the first natJ.on to 1ndustnahse1 and analyse the nature of the 1ndustnahsatJ.on process by a cons1deratJ.on of factors such as the population explosion, the education and d1sc1phne of the labour force, the accumulation and mob1hty of investment funds1 technolog1cal invention and 1nnovatlon, home and overseas markets and the role of agricultural and transport improvements The welfare consequences of the Industrial Revolut10n will be assessed by a study of economic pohcy, class relatlonsh1ps, and the standard of llVlng Emphasis Will be placed upon the validity of current lustorical op1n1on data sources, and possible lessons which the Third World might draw from Britain's experience

Students presentmg topic 31202 The Origms of Economic Development the Bnlish Case for their degree may not enrol 1n this topic

Text books Deane, P The first zndustrzal revolution

(Cambridge UP, 1980)*

Floud R and Mccloskey, D The economic history of Brztam since 1700 vol 1 (Cambridge UP, 1981)*

Matluas, P The first mdustnal nation, 2nd ed (Methuen, 1983)*

Reference books Fhnn M W The orzgms of the mdustrzal

revolution (Longman 1966)* Floud P and Mccloskey, D The economic

history of Brztam since 1700, vol 1 (Cambridge UP 1981)

Hartwell, R M The causes of the mdustrzal revolution (Methuen, 1969)*

Hartwell R M The mdustnal revolution and economic growth (Methuen, 1971)*

Hobsbawm, E j Industry and empire (Pengum, 1969)*

Holderness, BA Pre mdustrzal England (Dent, 1976)•

Jones EL Agrzculture and the mdustrzal revolution (Blackwell, 1974)

Mokyr, j The economics of the zndustnal revolution (Allen & Unwm, 1985)*

More C The zndustrzal age (Longman, 1989) Pawson1 E The early industrial revolution

(Batsford, 1979) Taylor, A j The standard of lzvzng zn Bntazn

m the zndustrzal revolutwn (Methuen, 1975)

33219 (37208) HISTORY OF MODERN CHINA 1840 1949 Dre F Yong

Not offered m 1991

33221 THE RISE AND FALL OF EUROPEAN IMPERIALISM Professor R J Moore

Not offered m 1991

33223 NAZI GERMANY ITS ORIGINS AND NATURE 1870 1945 Dr JM Phillips

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te 12 units of first year History with a grade of C or bettert

t Refer to note at begmmng of second year topics

History

Thts topic ts concerned with the impact of polthcal unification and rapid 1ndustnahsatlon on traditional German society, with the further dtslocat10n of German hfe caused by the Great War and by the successive econom1c crises of mflat10n and depress10n between 1922 and 1933, with the attempt to estabhsh a repubhcan democracy after 1919, the gradual breakdown of thts Weimar Republic and the substitution of a Nazi d1ctatorsh1p, with a study of how far and why the Nazis were successful in their aims between 1933 and 1945 mcludmg attent10n to the quest10n of how the Holocaust became posstble It should be emphastsed that thts ts not a course on the ideology of Nazism, still less of fascism, but, rather, a study of a ma1or European society undergoing VIOient change in peace and war Students who have completed 33305 Nazi Germany may not enrol for this topic

Recommended reading Bessel, R ed Life zn the Third Reich (Oxford

up' 1987)* Carr, W A history of Germany 1815 1945

(Arnold 1969)* David, j A square of sky and a touch of

earth a wartime childhood m Poland (Pengum, 1981)*

Gtlbert, M The Holocaust the Jewish tragedy (Fontana, 1987)*

Grunberger, R A social history of the Third Reich (Pengum, 1986)*

Kershaw I Popular opinion and political dissent zn the Third Reich Bavaria 1933 1945 (Oxford, 1983)*

Kershaw, I The Nazz dicatorship problems and perspectives of mterpretatwn (Arnold 1989)*

Mann, A Judgment at Nuremberg (N E L 1961)* also film of same l!tle available on video

Maschmann, M Account rendered (Abelard Schuman, 1964)

Peukert D j K Inside Nazi Germany confor1n1ty1 opposition and racism zn everyday life (Pengum, 1987)*

Phtlhps, P The tragedy of Nazi Germany (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1969)

Remak, J, ed The Nazi years a documentary history (Stmon & Schuster, 1986)*

Stone, N Hitler (Coronet, 1982)*

489

School of Social Sciences

Vogt, H The burden of guilt a short history of Germany, 1914-1945 (Oxford U P , 1965)*

Weber, E Varieties of fasczsm (Anvil 1964)*

33224 COLONIAL AUSTRALIA, 1856 1914 DrB K Dickey

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 12 umts of first year HIStory with a grade of C or bettert

This topic will examine the nse to social, economic and poht1cal dommance of the middle classes in Austraha, it will seek charactensations of their dominant ideas and practices 1n such areas as rehg1on, education, and race relations, it will consequently investigate such evidence as is available about subordinate groups, e g workers, women, poor, aliens, Abong1nes, it will also examine the expl01tat10n/development of the environ men!, the challenges mounted to the estabhsh ed middle class pos1t10n m the 1890s and the responses to those challenges, 1t will examine the expressions of Australtan nahonahsm and Bntish 1mpenaltsm culminating 1n Australian participation in World War I

Text books Crowley, F, ed A new history of Australia

(Hememann 1974)* Clark, CM H A history of Australia, IV & V

(Melbourne UP, 1978, 1981)*

Reference books Buxton, G The Rwenna (Melbourne U P ,

1967) Coghlan, TA Labour and industry in

Australia, 4 vols (Macmillan, 1969)* Crowley, F K A documentary history of

Australia II 1841 1874, III 1875 1900, IV 1900 1939 (Nelson, 1980)*

Dickey B No charity there A short history of social welfare in Australia (Allen & Unwm, 1987)*

Evans, R et al Exclusion, exploitation and extermmatwn (ANZ, 1975)*

490

Gollan, R Radical and working class politics (Melbourne UP, 1960)*

Hirst, J Adelaide and the country (Melbourne up' 1973)

Loveday, P and Martin, AW Parlzament, factions and parties (Melbourne U P , 1966)

McQueen H A new Britannia (Pengum, 1970)*

O'Farrell, P The Catholic Church and community m Australia (New South Wales u p' 1985)

Serle, G The golden age (Melbourne U P , 1963)*

33225 (28206) RELIGION, SCIENCE AND SOCIETY IN EUROPE, 1500 1700 Dr Ff Brooks

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te 12 units of first year History with a grade of C or bettert

The focus of this topic is the connection between new rehg1ous forms, social change and the sc1enl!f1c revolul!on of the sIJcteenth and seventeenth centuries Special attention will be paid to the achievements of Copernicus, Kepler, Gahleo and Newton m astronomy and rrechamcs and to the development of the sc1ent:Jf1c method, particularly in the work of Bacon and Descartes An examination of the growth of scep1Ic1sm will lead mto the debate on the connection between religion, science and social change The pr1nc1pal theoret:Jcal model will be Weber's thesis on the Protestant Ethic and the spmt of Cap1tahsm This will be extended along hnes suggested by Weber, to include such topics as government pohcy on poverty, sickness, vagrancy and cnme1 the place of the geographical d1scovenes m the elaboration of the new 'world view', the role of art1st1c forms, particularly Mannerism and the Baroque, as a reaction to scepticism and to change, and the dechne of magic

Preliminary reading Butterfield, H The orzgzns ofmodent science,

1300 1800 (Bell 1973)* Harman, PM The sczentzfzc revolution

(Methuen, 1983)*

t Refer to note at bcg.mmng of second year topics

Mandrou R From hurnanzsm to sczence1

1480 1700 (Pengum, 1978)* Rabb T The struggle for stability m early

modern Europe (Oxford UP, 1975)* Weber, M The Protestant ethic and the spmt

of capztalzsm1 trans T Parsons, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1958)*

33226 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE Dr DH Close

Not offered ID 1991

33227 (37204) (52209) HISTORY OF MODERN SOUTHEAST ASIA DrCF Yong

Not offered ID 1991

33229 (23212) (41202) GENDER IN AUSTRALIAN HISTORY Dr L Ryan

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours of lectures and tutonals Pre requ1s1te None Students undertaking a History ma1or who wish to take this topic should consult with Dr L Ryan

This topic explores the h1stoncal experiences of women as a means of understanding changing relations between women and men and the institutions of power in Australia smce 1788 By usmg language and the sexual d1VIs1on of labour as fem1n1st analytical tools, and colonisat1on as the structural framework, this topic wdl focus on penods of economic, social and poht1cal cns1s, to understand the process of h1stoncal change

Preliminary reading Summers, A Damned whores and God's

police (Pengum, 1975)*

Set books Thomley, J , McMurchey, M and Oliver M

For love or money a pictorial history of women and work zn Australia (Penguin, 1983)

Ryan E and Conlon, A Gentle invaders Australian women and the workforce, 1788 1974 (Pengum, 1988)

History

Thzrd Year Topzcsf

PROBLEMS IN MODERN HISTORY

The topics available for study at third year level are investigations 1n depth of ma1or h1stoncal problems emphasising the use of contemporary source materials such as pamphlets, novels, parliamentary debates, newspapers and collecllons of manuscripts

Listed below are the topics expected to be offered m 1991 (short titles only) These are sub1ect to alterat10n Students are advised to check at enrolment

Commencing February 33319 Regions in America 33329 Austrahan Welfare History 33333 Singapore Society, 1914 1941

Commencing July 33317 Enghsh Reformat10n 33321 Culture 1n V1ctonan England,

1851-1901 33328 Ongms of Internat10nal M1grat10n

33302 (37304) THE PARTITION OF INDIA, 1935 47 Professor R J Moore

Not offered ID 1991

33315 VICTORIANS IN SOUTHERN AFRICA, 1833 1902 Dr JM Phillzps

Not offered ID 1991

33317 (28304) THE ENGLISH REFORMATION Dr D L Hilliard

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week for 9 weeks and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te 12 units of History at second year level with a grade of C or bettert

This topic will examine, with reference to pnmary sources the rehg10us changes that occurred m England between 1529 and 1570

t Apphcabons for exemption from pre requ1s1te requtrcments will be entertamed by the Head of D1sc1plme

491

School of Social Sczences

Topics to be studied will include Henry VIII's breach with Rome and the subsequent spohat10n of the Enghsh church, the begmmngs and spread of Protestan!Jsm, the role of parliament 1n the refonnatlon, the Elizabethan Settlement and the effects of the reformation on Enghsh hfe

Prelzmznary readzng Cross, C Church and people, 1450 1660

(Fontana, 1976)* Dickens, AG The Englzsh reformatzon, 2nd

ed (Fontana, 1980)* Elton G R Reform and reformatzon England

1509 1558 (Arnold, 1977)* Guy, J, Tudor England (Oxford UP, 1990)* Haigh, C ed The Englzsh reformatzon

revzsed (Cambndge UP 1987)* O'Dea, R The debate on the Englzsh

reformatzon (Methuen, 1986)*

Documents Dickens, A G and Carr, D , eds The reform

atzon zn England to the accession of Elzzabeth I (Arnold 1967)*

33319 (34304) REGIONS IN AMERICA DrG M Tobzn

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te 12 units of History at second year level with a grade of C or bettert

An enquiry into the 1mphcahons of regional 1dent1f1cation in American society from the mneteenth century to the present Documentary case studies on broad regions such as the South, New England, the Middle West and the Far West will be pursued Attent10n will also be paid to the ways m which regional, pohtical, cultural and social !mks are altered by the processes commonly called modermsat1on Students will be expected to undertake research 1n a vanety of pnmary sources Audio VIsual materials and film accompany the study

Reference books Bradshaw, M Regions and regionalism in

the Unzted States (Macnullan, 1988) Hofstadter, R ed Turner and the soczology

of the frontzer (Basic Books, 1968)*

492

Jensen, M M , ed Regzonallsm in Amenca (W1sconsm U P , 197 4)

Tobm, G M The makzng of a hzst01y (Texas up 1976)

Turner1 F J Frontier and section ed R B1llmgton (Spectrum, 1961)*

Wiebe, RH The search for order, 1877 1920 (Hill & Wang, 1967)*

Woodward, C V The burden of Southern hzstory (New Amencan Library, 1974)*

33321 CULTURE IN VICTORIAN ENGLAND 1851 1901 Dr JM Plullzps

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requisite 12 units of History at second year level with a grade of C or bettert

This topic will explore the usefulness of cultural evidence in understanding Victorian society between 1851 and 1901, particularly its attitudes to such things as rehg1on, women, the poor, 'Progress' industry (1n both senses of the word) the pubhc school and Empire Cultural evidence 1s understood broadly to include novels, poems1 plays painting, music, architecture and entertainments such as sport1

music hall parlour ballads1 ch1ldren1s books The topic will not be concerned with JUdgmg the quahty of an 1magma!Jve work - whether 1t 1s good or bad' art but with iudgmg its value as historical evidence about the nature of V1ctonan society Students will not be expected to cover any of the arts m which they are uninterested

Recommended readzng Best, G Mzd-Vzctorzan England 1851 70

(Fontana, 1979)* Denv1r, B The late Victorians art, deszgn

and soczety 1852-1910 (Longman, 1986)* Golby, J M Culture and soczety zn Bntazn

1850 1890 (Oxford UP, 1986)* Hiiton, T The pre Raphaelites (Thames &

Hudson, 1974)* Houghton, W The Vzctorzan frame of mznd

1830 1870 (Yale 1957)*

t Refer to note at begmnmg of third year topics

Hughes M V A London chzld of the 1870s (Oxford UP, 1979)*

Marsden, G , ed Vzctorzan values personalztzes and perspectives zn nineteenth century soczety (Longmans, 1990)

Ph1lhps, J and P Victorians at home and away (Croom Helm, 1978)

Sanson, W (Intro ) Vzctorzan lzfe in photographs (Thames & Hudson 1974)

Thompson, F Lark rzse to Candleford (Pengum, 1979)*

Turner, M R ed The parlour song book (Michael Joseph, 1967)*

Turner, M R ed Parlour poetry (Michael Joseph, 1972)*

Vmey, N and Grant, N An illustrated history of ball games (Hememann, 1978)

33322 (52320) MELANESIAN HISTORY Dr D L Hilliard

Not offered m 1991

33323 RESISTANCE IN WARTIME EUROPE, 1939 1945 Dr DH Close

Not offered m 1991

33324 THE CUBAN REVOLUTION, 1959 1976 Mr f Mallon

Not offered m 1991

33325 (23305) (28305) AUSTRALIAN RELIGIOUS HISTORY Dr D L Hz/Izard

Not offered m 1991

33326 CONQUEST AND COLONISATION OF MEXICO AND PERU, 1519 1550 Dr F / Brooks

Not offered m 1991

33328 THE ORIGINS OF INTERNATIONAL MIGRATION 1700 1914 Professor E S Richards

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester

History

Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te 2nd year History or 2nd year Econom1c History, or 2nd year American Studies, with a grade of C or bettert

In the nmeteenth century more than 50 mdhon people left Europe and Afnca for the new worlds This vast and unprecedented exodus had its ong1ns in the previous century The causes are httle understood This topic examines the scale, management and character of internal and external movements In particular it considers bodies of statistical and hterary evidence from the Americas and Australasia well as the countries of origin

Recommended reading

Ba1lyn, B The peopling of Bntish North Amenca (Knopf 1986)

Erickson, C Invisible immigrants (Wetdenfeld & Nicholson, 1972)

Erickson, C Emigratzon from Europe (1815 1914) (Black, 1976)

F1tzpatnck, D Irish emigratzon 1801 1921 (Economic and Social History Society of Ireland 1984)

Hanson, ML The Atlantic migratzon 1607 1860 (Harper, 1961)*

Jupp, J, ed The Australian people (Angus & Robertson, 1988)

Richards, E , Reid, R and F1tzpatnck, D Visible immigrants neglected sources for the history of Australian zmmigratzon (AN U 1989)

Scott, F D World migratzon in modern times (n d )*

Sher1ngton, G Australia s zmmzgrants 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1990)

t Refer to note at begmmng of third year topics

493

School of Social Sciences

33329 (23306) AUSTRALIAN WELFARE HISTORY Dr BK Dickey

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te 12 units of History at second year level with a grade of C or better Not available to students who have passed 33327

This topic examines the development 1n white Austraha smce 1788 of those pohc1es and practices designed to manage social dependence variously called 'charity', social welfare 'the welfare state', 'social pohcy and much bestdes The range of pohcy fields will mclude the unemployed, children, the aged, fam1hes, the sICk poor Analytic problems addressed mclude social control causes of poverty, the role of the state, the s1gn1f1cance of gender, the relationsh1p between econom1c and social pohcy, the impact of social the ones There will be a body of pnmary sources for study

Set books

Dickey, B No charity there A short history of social welfare m Australia 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm 1987)*

Kennedy, R, ed Australian welfare history Critical essays (Macmillan, 1982)

Reference books Dickey, B Rations residence and resources

A history of social welfare m South Australia smce 1836 (Wakefield 1986)*

Jones MA The Australian welfare state, 3rd ed (Allen & Unwm 1990)*

Mendelsohn R The condztwn of the people (Allen & Unwm, 1979)*

Roe, J, ed Soczal polzcy zn Australia some perspectives, 1901 1975 (Cassell, 1975)*

33331 (52318) CONTEMPORARY INDIA 1940 1980 Dr l Brennan

Not offered m 1991

494

33333 (37333) SINGAPORE SOCIETY IN TRANSmON, 1914 1941 DrCF Yong

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week for 10 weeks and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 12 umts of History at second year level with a grade of C or bettert

This topic studies changes 1n Singapore society during the interwar years arising from 1mm1grat1on and settlement improved educat10nal standards, the development of social and community 1nshtuhons, the growth of trade1 commerce and industry, and the emergence of nattonahsm, anarchism and communism It also examines the Bntish management of social, educational and poht1cal problems denvmg from the social change While it aims at prov1dmg an ms1ght into the complex Singapore society in transition, it hopes, by using a body of primary sources from Coloma! and Foreign Office records, to encourage students to engage in onginal h1stonal research and to sharpen their analytical techmques and capacity

Preliminary readzng

Turnbull, C M A history of Singapore, 1819 1988, 2nd ed (Oxford U P 1989)

Reference books Arasaratnam, S Indians zn Malaysia and

Singapore (Oxford U P , 1970)*

Butcher JG The Brztzsh m Malaya 1880 1941 (Oxford UP, 1979)

Heussler, R British rule zn Malaya (Hememann, 1985)

Roff, WR The orzgms of Malay natzonalzsm (Oxford UP 1967)*

Yong CF Tan Kah kee, the making of an overseas Chinese legend (Oxford U P , 1989)*

Yong, C F and McKenna, R B The Kuomzntang movement zn Brztzsh Malaya, 1912 1949 (Smgapore UP, 1990)*

t Refer to note at begmmng of thtrd year topics

Honours Programme

Convener Dr CF Yong

Honours students in History w11l be required to undertake the followmg programme

a) Topic 53450, Thesis A work of not more than 15,000 words to be wntten under the supems10n of a member of the History staff due on 1st November A series of work-in-progress seminars will be conducted dunng first semester The thesis will count for 12 umts

b) Honours Topics Two topics selected from those hsted as Honours topics Each topic counts for 12 units Assessment for each Honours topic will be based on essays and on exams in November

Students may, alterriahvely, enrol for J01nt Honours comb1n1ng History with any other D1sc1phne 1n the School of Social Sciences, provided the student enrols for at least 12 umts m each D1sc1phne The programmes of all students enrollmg m any part of History Honours must be approved by the Professor of History (or his delegate), and by the Heads of such other D1sc1phnes as may be concerned

The Honours topics available m 1991 (sub1ect to alteratIOn) are hkely to mclude (short !Jtles only)

Full year

31406 Sport, Economics and History 33415 Amencan Social Cn1Ic1sm 33422 New Ways m Social History 33426 Coloma! South Austraha 1836 1901 33429 MeXIco and Peru 1500 1550 33432 Comparalive Studies m Welfare

History 33433 1890 1929 End of V1ctonan

England?

Diploma in Social Sciences History

Convener Dr CF Yong

The programme of studies m History for this diploma 1s designed to permit holders of pass degrees with History as a baste d1sc1phne and others whose quahficabons are 1udged to be suff1C1ently s1m1lar, to proceed to further studies m History These further studies may

History

be intended to permit access to areas of history not previously studied, perhaps as a form of retraining or further education The Discipline s teaching emphases can for this purpose be broadly grouped mto Austrahan, Asian, European and Amencan History The last mcludes both Latm Amenca and the courses cross hsted from the Disc1phne of Amencan StJd1es Groupmg of topics w1thm any one of these areas can usually be attained and ts well worth cons1denng

The D1Sc1plme further recognises that the Diploma may represent the way forward for students ailX.lous to proceed to higher degree studies Provision therefore exists for the presentation of a substantial research pro1ect as partial fulfilment of the reqmrements of the Diploma This option requires specific and detailed d1scuss1on and approval

Smee Diploma studies may well be undertaken on a part-time basis, at least some topics will be timetabled from 4 6 p m Students are urged to dIScuss spec1hc poss1b1ht1es with the Convener at an early date

Applications are also welcome from students who wish to move from another basic d1sc1phne into History In this case evidence of at least some work in History already completed at tertiary level will be reqmred, m add1t10n to the fulfilment of the formal requirements laid down in the Schedule Formal pre requisites are set out in Statute 7 1, Schedule 16 The Diploma m Social Sciences The topics offered are those taught to undergraduates at third year and Honours level Diploma students will therefore conform to the spec1f1c requirements of those topics as laid out 1n the syllabus entries in subsequent pages

Potenllal students should m the first mstance consult the Convener whose approval to enrol in the History component of the Diploma 1s reqmred pnor to any formal agreement by the School of Social Sciences

33430 HONOURS THESIS

A work of not more than 15,000 words to be written under tne supervision of a member of the History staff, due on 1st November A senes of work-in progress seminars will be conducted durmg fust semester The thesis will count for 12 umts

495

School of Social Sciences

33415 (34401) STUDIES IN AMERICAN SOCIAL CRITICISM Dr G M Tobin and Dr DA DeBats

Umts 12 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 weekly two hour lecture/ seminar in the first semester per1od1c seminars, a.;;. arranged, and 1nd1v1dual superv1s1on in the second semester Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

The first half of the topic, which may be taken as a 6 umt topic or as the first part of a 12 umt topic, proceeds by way of a weekly lecture/ seminar on ma1or authors, and groups of authors in the development of modern American social cntlc1sm Writers considered vary from year to year but have generally mcluded, from the per10d 1910 to the present, a range of ltberal, conservative and radical 1deolog1es The second half of the topic, which may be taken as a 6 unit topic or as the second part of a 12 unit topic, is a research seminar, based on a substantial collection of penod 1cals, of social cnhc1sm pubhshed between 1880 and the present Students choose one of these penod1cals, or part of the sequence of a per1od1cal, for concentrated study and work towards the presentation of a research report on the context, history and content of the penod1cal Penod1cals available include ma1or weekly, fortmghtly, monthly and quarterly pubhcahons in the twentieth century1 ranging from anarchist to conservative cnttc1sm

33416 THE ENGLISH REFORMATION Dr D L Hzlllard

Not offered ID 1991

33419 MEXICO UNDER CARDENAS, 1934 1940 Mr f Mallon

Not offered ID 1991

33422 NEW WAYS IN SOCIAL HISTORY Professor ES Richards

Umts 12 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

496

This topic will explore some recent developments in the literature of social history with particular regard to research methods Its aim IS to bnng to the atten!Ion of honours students some lillportant historical work, for example, that of Robert Darnton, Fernand Braudel Charles Tilly, Paul Thompson, Michael Katz, Alan Armstrong In add1t10n to this the topic will consider some of the benefits associated with special approaches to h1stor1cal study for example, oral history, women 1s h1story1 quantitative history, rehg1ous history, minority h1stones1 history from below1

psycho history, and the claims made on behalf of social history as an 1ntegrat1ng h1stor1cal disc1plme The general theme of the course will be the use of social sciences methods in history

Preliminary reading Burke, P Soczology and history (Allen &

Unwm, 1980) Stone, T The past and the present revlSlted

(Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1987) Darnton, R The kiss of Lamourette

reflectzons on cultural hzstory (Norton, 1990)

Drake, M Applzed historical studies (Methuen, 1973)

33424 PROTEST AND POLICY IN EARLY TWENTIETH CENTURY INDIA c 1900 1935 Professor R l Moore

Not offered ID 1991

33426 THE HISTORY OF COLONIAL SOUTH AUSTRALIA 1836 1901 DrPA Howell

Umts 12 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 seminar each week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic will explore the foundat10n and certam themes m the early history of the colony, and will consider several of the more stnkmg polI!Ical and social developments of the second half of the nmeteenth century

Prelzmznary reading Pike, D Paradise of dissent South Australia

1829 1857, 2nd ed (Melbourne UP, 1967)

Hirst, J B Adelazde and the country 1870 1917 (Melbourne UP, 1973)

Wllhams, E A way of lzfe (Adelaide Um Umon Pr , 1980)

Set books Dickey, B and Howell, P, eds South

Australza's foundation select documents (Wakefield, 1986)*

Jaensch D ed The Flmders History of South Australia political history (Wakefield, 1986)*

Richards, E, ed The Flmders History of South Australia social history (Wakefield, 1986)*

33427 THE CUBAN REVOLUTION Mr J Mallon

Not offered m 1991

33429 CONQUEST AND COLONISATION OF MEXICO AND PERU, 1500 1550 Dr Ff Brooks

Umts 12 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic will examine the primary evidence concerning Aztec and Inca soc1et1es and the degree of social stra!Jf1ca!Ion and poh!Jcal stab1hty withm them Early sixteenth century Spamsh society will provide a background to the first hand reports of the exped1t10ns to MeXIco led by Hernan Cortes and to Peru led by Francisco Pizarro The econom1c, m1htary, poht1cal and rehg10us d1mens10ns of the v10lent contact between the Spamsh and the Amerindian c1v1hsahons will be analysed Fmally early colomal society will be exammed as a product of the process of acculturat10n

Prelimznary reading Mason, J A The ancient czvzl1zatzons of Peru

(Pengum, 1968)* Prescott, W H History of the conquest of

Mexico (various editions)* Prescott, W H History of the conquest of

Peru (vanous ed1t10nsJ• Soustelle J The daily life of the Aztecs

(Pengum, 1961)*

History

Reference books Cortes, H Five letters, trans J Bayard Morns

(Norton, 1962) de Sahagun B General history of the thmgs

of New Spam (trans A J 0 Anderson and CE Dibble), 13 vols (School of American Research, 1970 92)

Diaz B The Conquest of New Spam, trans JM Cohen (Pengum 1963)*

Letters and people of the Spanish Indies Sixteenth century (trans and ed by J Lockhart and E Otte), (Cambridge UP, 1976)

Liss, P Mexico unde1 Spam, 1521 1556 Society and the orzgms of natzonality (Chicago UP, 1975)

Lockhart, J The men of Ca1amarca A social and bzographical study of the fzrst conquerors of Peru (Texas U P , 1972)

Lockhart ) Spanish Peru, 1532 1560, a colonial society (Wmsconsm U P 1968)

33432 COMPARATIVE STUDIES IN WELFARE HISTORY Dr BK Dickey

Umts 12 Level Honours Dura!Jon Full year Class Contact 1 seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing Not available 1! 33327 has already been passed

This topic will examine a succession of ma1or issues 1n the pohcy and practices of social welfare in three 1ndustr1ahs1ng Enghsh speaking commun1tles, Austraha, the U S A and Br1ta1n These issues, illustrated appropnately from the ong1nal sources, will mclude poor law entitlement for the able bodied, voluntary versus state agencies, the sick poor and the nse of the 'modem hospital', the aged pension mothers endow men!, child care, universal social secunty welfare and social relationsh1ps1 welfare as employment In most cases Australian examples will be examined in detail with Bnbsh or Amencan cases used for comparative purposes

Set books Dickey, B No charzty there A short history

of social welfare zn Australia (Allen & Unwin, 1987)*

Fraser, D The evolutzon of the Brztish welfare state (Macmillan, 1984)*

497

School of Soczal Sczences

Trattner1 W From poor law to welfare state A hzstory of soczal welfare zn Amerzca, 4th ed (Free Pr , 1989)

Recommended reading Henriques, U Before the welfare state

(Longmans, 1977) * Kennedy R , ed Australzan welfare hzstory

(Macmillan, 1983) Leiby, J A hzstory of social welfare and soczal

work zn the United States (Columbia U P , 1978)*

Mendelsohn, R The conditzon of the people (Allen & Unwm, 1979)*

Mishra, R Society and social policy, 2nd ed (Macmdlan 1981)*

P1ven FF and Cloward, R Regulating the poor (Random House, 1971)*

Rodgers, B N The study of social policy a comparative approach (Allen & Unwm 1979)*

Townsend, P Poverty in the United Kingdom (Pengum, 1979)*

33433 1890 1930 THE END OF VICTORIAN ENGLAND? Dr JM Phillips

Umts 12 Level Honours Duration Full year Class Contact 1 seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

The underlymg aim of thzs topic is to explore the nature of cultural history and the usefulness of cultural artefacts to h1stonans To thzs end the topic will discuss the extent to which V1ctor1an values were challenged dismantled or survived beyond 1901 Primary sources w11l 1nclude material from popular as well as elite culture of the period, e g A E W Mason's The Four Feathers as well as Thomas Hardy s Tess of the D'Urbevilles ragtime as well as Elgar's Enzgma Vanatzons suburban 'Tudor' as well as the Country House advertisements as well as paintings

Recommended reading Denv1r, B The late V1ctonans art, design

and society 1852 1910 (Longman, 1986)* Fisher, J The world of the Forsytes (Secker

and Warburg, 1976) Garner P , ed Phaidon encyclopaedia of

decorative arts 1890 1940 (Phaidon, 1978) Jenkms, A The Twenties (Hememann, 1974)

498

Mason, A E W , The four feathers (Dent, 1986)*

Stevenson, J British society 1914 1945 (Pengum 1984)*

Strachey L , Emznent Victorians (Penguin, 1986)*

Thompson, P The Edwardians (Weiden!eld & Nicolson, 1975)

33441 STUDIES IN WELFARE HISTORY Dr BK Dickey

Umts 6 Level Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 1 seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Diploma standing Not avadable if 33327 has been passed

This topic will explore the history of policy and adm1n1strahon in the field of social dependence (or social welfare), focusing on three problems, viz support forthe able bodied poor, dependent children and aged care Examples for examination will be chosen from American, British and Australian experience smce 1830 Teachmg will be by semmar Wntten work will consist of 5,000 6,000 words, spread over three tasks

Set books Dickey, B No charity there A short history

of welfare in Australia (Allen & Unwm, 1987)*

Fraser D The evolutzon of the British welfare state (Macmillan, 1984) •

Trattner W From poor law to welfare state a history of social welfare in America, 4th ed (Free Pr, 1989)

In additrnn a substantial set of documents will be used

Graduate Studies

Convener Dr F J Brooks

Students interested in purswng studies w1th1n the Dzsciplme of History beyond the honours or diploma level should consult the D1sc1phne's Convener of Graduate Studies in the first mstance The School of Social Sciences Higher Degree Student Handbook mdicates formal details of what quahflcatrnns are required, and the formal adm1ss1on procedures to follow Bnefly admission to M A studies is available to students with a

B A Honours degree in history, at least at !IA level, or some equivalent achievements For entrance to Ph D studies a Master's degree 1n history or a first class B A degree 1n history 1s requrred ProVJs10n eiosts for quahfymg studies to be prescnbed where appltcants do not meet these requirements Any application to be admitted to higher degree studies is dealt with by the School of Social Sciences Higher Degrees Committee, and must have the support of the D1sc1phne to be successful

Graduate studies m History may be pursued through three programmes The M A by coursework the M A by thesis, the Ph D by the SIS

MA BY COURSEWORK

The M A by Coursework consists of 54 umts which may be undertaken over three or four semesters compnsing

(1) 33551 33552 33553 M A Coursework thesis m History at either 12, 18 or 24 units and

(n) any two of the followmg coursework topics taken at 12 or 18 unit d1mens1on 33555, 33556 MA Studies m Austrahan

History 33558, 33559 M A Studies m Brillsh

and European History 33561 (34551) MA Studies in American

Social History (12 umts only)

33562 (34552) M A Studies m American Pohllcal History (12 umts only)

33563 (34553) M A Studies m Amencan Intellectual History (12 umts only)

33564, 33565 M A Stuches m Asian History

33567, 33568 M A Studies in Social History

33570, 33571 M A Studies m Economic History

(m) 33560 Graduate Research Semmar (6 umts)

33551, 33552, 33553 M A Coursework Thesis 1n History

A thesis of 15,000, 20,000 or 30,000 words

History

(dependmg on the umt value of the topic enrolment) prepared under the supervis1on of a member of staff The thesis will be examined by at least one external examiner, and the supervlsor will not be an examiner

33555, 33556 M A STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN HISTORY

This topic involves attendance at lectures and seminars and completion of written work totalhng 12,000 or 18,COO words (dependmg on the umt value of the topic enrolment), relating to the study of Austrahan h1Story

33558, 33559 MA STUDIES IN BRITISH AND EUROPEAN HISTORY

This topic involves attendance at lectures and seminars and completion of wntten work totallmg 12,000 or 18,000 words (dependmg on the umt value of the topic enrolment) relatmg to the study of Brillsh and European h1Story

33561 (34551) MA STUDIES IN AMERICAN SOCIAL HISTORY

A programme of supervised reading and seminars 1n designated areas to the social history of the Umted States and, where possible, Canada, leading to the presentation of a senes of papers totallmg 12,000 words

33562 (34552) M A STUDIES IN AMERICAN POLffiCAL HISTORY

A programme of supervised reading and seminars 1n designated areas to the pohbcal history of the Umted States and, where possible, Canada, leading to the presentation of a series of papers totallmg 12,000 words

33563 (34553) M A STUDIES IN AMERICAN INTELLECTUAL HISTORY

A programme of supervised reading and seminars in designated areas to the mtellectual history of the Umted States and where possible, Canada leaduig to the presentation of a series of papers totallmg 12,000 words

499

School of Soczal Sciences

33564, 33565 M A STUDIES IN ASIAN HISTORY

This topic involves attendance at lectures and seminars and completion of written work totallmg 12,000 or 18,000 words (dependmg on the umt value of the topic enrolment) relatmg to the study of Aszan h!Story

33567, 33568 MA STUDIES IN SOCIAL HISTORY

This topic involves attendance at lectures and seminars and completion of written work totalhng 12,000 or 18,000 words (dependmg on the unit value of the topic enrolment), relatzng to the study of Soczal history

33570, 33571 MA STUDIES IN ECONOMIC HISTORY

This topic involves a programme of supervised reading and seminars and possibly attendance at lectures in designated areas of econom1c history, leading to the presentation of a series of papers totallzng 12 000 or 18,000 words dependzng on the umt value of the topic enrolment

MA BYTHESIS

A thesis of not more than 60,000 words presented after the equivalent of at least twelve months full time study prepared under the superv1s1on of one or more appropriate members of staff

PH D

A thesis of not more than 100,000 words prepared under the superns1on of one or more appropriate members of staff, and presented after at least two (and normally three) years full time study or the eqmvalent m part-time study In addit10n, courses of formal study may be prescnbed in particular cases in which satisfactory performance is req u1red

Topzcs m American Studies

General Information

American Studies is an 1nterd1sc1phnary programme designed to allow second and third

500

year students to develop a concentration of study on the Umted States Basic ma1or sequence requirements are described in AppendlX A of Statute 7 1, Schedule 2 The Ordmary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts m the School of Social Science Students should note that any of the History I options or Pohtics I may serve both as the first part of a ma1or 1n those D1sc1phnes, and as the flrst part of a ma1or m Amencan Studies Students may also take these topics as part of a maior sequence mother d1sc1plmes e g topic 34204 may be taken as topic 33213 m History, topic 34205 may be taken as topic 35216 m Pohtics, topic 34305 may be taken as topic 35217 zn Politics, 34301 may be taken as a cognate zn Enghsh 34304 may be taken as topic 33319 zn History Amencan studies topics may also be taken as electives Students taking a topic in American Studies as part of a ma1or sequence m another Disciplme should consult that D1sc1pltne's entry 1n the Calendar for pre requ1s1tes Students talong a topic in Arnencan Studies as an elective will fmd pre requlSites set out below

Second year topzcs

The following second year topics are available 34205 Pohtzcs and Society m Modem

America 34204 The Emergence of Modem Amenca

The second year topics are intended to mtroduce students to the study of American society and pohtics The first topic examines the development of modern Amencan society from the mid nineteenth century to the present, the second explores the 1nstltutlons and practices of American pohbcs

Thzrd year topzcs

The followmg third year topics are avazlable 34301 Literature and Society zn Amenca 34304 Reg10ns m America 34305 The Makzng of Umted States Foreign

Pohcy (not offered zn 1991) 34306 History of Women m the USA

1780 1939

The third year topics are concerned pnmanly with the study of modem American hterature

and Amen can society The first topic identifies a number of themes and sources 1n modern Amencan wnting and students are encouraged to focus their reading around certain of these areas The second topic approaches the study of the Umted States through the history, social structure and culture of its separate regions The third topic deals with the experience of women smce 1780

Honours programme

Students may enter fourth year American Studies after satisfactory performance 1n either third year Amencan Studies or (with the penmsston of the Head of D1sc1plme) m one of the second or third year American Studies topics The Honours programme ts spec1f1ed m AppendIX C of Statute 7 1, Schedule 2 Topic 34401 Studies m American Social Cntic1sm 1s also available as Politics Honours topic 35408 or as a smgle topic m History Honours, 33415

Diploma zn Social Sciences American Studies

The programme for students takmg the Diploma in Social Sciences in American Studies consists of 36 units chosen as follows

Units 34403 Readmgs m American

B1bhography and Historiography 12

and 24 umts chosen from the followmg prov1dmg that not more than 12 umts are taken from the five topics 34301, 18202, 34304, 34305, and 34306

34301 Literature and Society m America 6

18202 North American Themes and Styles 6 34304 Regions m America 6 34305 The Malang of Umted States

Foreign Policy (not offered m 1991) 6 34306 History of Women m the USA

1780-1939 6 34401/34402 Studies m Amencan

Social Cnllc1sm 12/6

34440 A literature review and small scale research proiect written under the supervis10n of a member of staff 12

Amerzcan Studzes

Second Year Topics

34204 (33213) THE EMERGENCE OF MODERN AMERICA DrGM Tobm

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

A study of the impact en American society of 1ndustnal change from the m1d-n1neteenth century to the present, and of the subsequent extension of Amencan power and influence on a global scale Emphasis will be placed on the extent to which the move away from a rural economy and rural values brought about unexpected shifts tn social structure, and gave a new d1menston to the long standmg debate concerrung the nature of Amencan society and the place of the md1V1dual withm that society Areas discussed will include race, ethmc1ty, urbamsat10n and foreign pohcy Audio visual matenals and film accompany the study

Text book Nash, GB et al The American people,

vol II (Harper and Row, 1986)

Reference books Burner D ed The diversity of modern

America (Appleton Century Crofts, 1970)* Leuchtenberg, W E The penis of prospenty,

1914 1932 (Chicago UP, 1958)* Polenberg, R One nation dwzszble (Pengum,

1980) Wiebe, RH The search for order, 1877 1920

(Hzll & Wang, 1967)*

34205 (35216) POLmcs AND SOCIETY IN MODERN AMERICA Dr DA DeBats

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre-requ1s1te None

A bastcally contemporary topic on selected aspects of American poht1cs and society The lectures are structured about the following

501

School of Soczal Sciences

themes (1) American pohtlcal culture1 racial, ethnic, and econom1c aspects of American society, (2) American poltt.J.cal 1nstltutlons1 a cnhcal assessment, (3) the nature of Amencan ideology, specifically hberal, left1st and nght1st 1deolog1es, black pohl!cs (4) models useful m understanding U S foreign pohcy and confhcts w1thm Amencan society The followmg books are especially useful for the purpose of thIS topic A programme of films accompanies the topic

Set book Burns, J M Peltason, J W and Cronm, J E

Government by the people (Pren!Ice Hall 1990)

or Katznelson I and Kesselman, M The

polztzcs of power, 3rd ed (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1987)*

Reference books Burnham W D Critical electzons and the

maznsprzngs of American polztzcs (Norton, 1970)*

Kammen, M G A machine that would go of itself the Constztutzon zn American culture (Vmtage, 1986)

Lasch, C The agony of the American left (Deutsch, 1970)

Low1, T J The end of lzberalzsm (Norton, 1979)*

Nie, N H et al The changing Amen can voter 2nd ed (Harvard, 1979)*

Preston, MB, et al, eds The new black polztzcs the search for political power (Longman, 1982)

Rose, R The postmodern president the White House meets the world (Chatham, 1988)

W1lhams, WA The tragedy of American diplomacy, 2nd ed (Delta 1972)*

Thzrd Year Topzcs

34301 LITERATURE AND SOCIETY IN AMERICA Dr L M Bazrd

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te Comple!Ion of 12 umts of work m first year topics

502

The follow1ng sections have been chosen to illustrate some of the ma1or concerns of Amencan hterature The emphasis 1s chiefly, but not entirely, on twentieth century developments An opt10nal segment of film 1s also mcluded to suggest contmmty of theme m film and f1ct10n Students are expected to select suggested themes for study from the sections below

Romanticism and Realism Bellow, S Mr Sammler's planet

(Pengum) Hawthorne, N The scarlet letter,

(Pengum) Hemmgway E The snows of Kzlzman1aro

(Pengum or Scnbner) Twam, M The adventures of Huckleberry

Fznn (Pengum) Wharton, E The age of innocence

(Pengum) Roth P The ghost writer (Pengmn)

II Symbolism

Elhson, R Invisible man (Modern Library)

Faulkner, W Lzght zn August (Pengum) O'Connor, F Everything that rzses must

converge (Pengum) Oates, J C Unholy loves (Dent) Vonnegut, K Mother nzght (Avon)

III Soczal History Through Film (Optzonal Extra) (Thzs list zs sub1ect to the avazlabzlzty of the fzlms)

Altman, R , d1r A wedding Ivory J d1r The Europeans Kazan, E , d1r A streetcar named Deszre Rouleau, R , d1r The crucible Silver, J, d1r Hester Street

34304 (33319) REGIONS IN AMERICA DrGM Tobzn

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te Comple!Ion of 12 umts of work 1n first year topics

An enqmry mto the 1IDphcat10ns of regional 1denl!flcat10n m Amencan society from the nineteenth century to the present

Documentary case studies on broad regions such as the South New England the Middle West and the Far West will be pursued Attent10n will also be paid to the ways m which regional pohttcal, cultural and social !mks are altered by the processes commonly called modermsatwn Students will be expected to undertake research in a variety of primary sources Audio visual materials accompany the study

Reference books Bradshaw, M Regzons and regzonalzsm zn

the United States (Macmillan, 1988) Hofstadter R , ed Turner and the soczology

of the frontier (Basic Books 1968)* Jensen, M M , ed Regzonalzsm in ATnenca

(Wisconsm UP, 1974)* Tobm, G M The making of a history (Texas

up' 1976) Turner, F J Frontzer and sectzon1 ed

R Billmgton (Spectrum, 1961)* Wiebe RH The search for order, 1877 1920

(Hill & Wang 1967)* Woodward, CV The burden of Southern

history (New American Library, 1974)

34305 (35217) THE MAKING OF UNITED STATES FOREIGN POLICY Ms G McDonald

Not offered m 1991

34306 HISTORY OF WOMEN IN THE USA 1780 1939 Dr S Holton

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmsite Complet10n of 12 umts of first year work

This topic will examine a range of perspectives on the history of women m the Umted States Issues considered will include work and economic achv1ty1 the demographic transition domesticity, fem1n1nity, and women's sphere, conceptions of female sexuahty1 female worlds and female culture1 resistance and challenge Parhcular reference will be made to the work of Nancy Cott Carrol Smith Rosenberg, Mary Ryan, Gerda Lerner, Ellen DuB01s and Lmda Gordon, and the debate concernmg the

American Studzes

relative importance of culture and pohhcs in shaping the expenence of American women

Set book Degler, C N At odds women and the family

zn Amerzca from the revolution to the present (Oxford U P , 1980)

Reference books Cott N The bonds of womanhood

'women's sphere' zn New England 1780-1835 (Yale UP 1977)

DuB01s, E C Femznzsm and suffrage the emergence of an Independent Women's Movement m America, 1848 1869 (Cornell up' 1978)

Gordon L Woman's body woman's rzght a soczal history of bzrth control inAmerzca (Grossman, 1976)

Lerner, G The maJOTlty finds its past placing women m history (Oxford U P , 1979)

Ryan M P Cradle of the Middle Class the family m Oneida Co New York, 1790 1863 (Cambridge U P , 1987)

Smith Rosenberg, C Disorderly conduct vzszons of gender zn Vzctorzan America (Knopf, 1985)

Honours Topics

34401 (33415) or 34402 (35408) or 34404 STUDIES IN AMERICAN SOCIAL CRffiCISM Dr DA DeBats and Dr G M Tobin

Umts 12 (34401/33415) or 6 (34402/35408) or 6 (34404) Level Honours Durahon Full year Class Contact 1 weekly two hour lecture/ seminar in the first semester, per1od1c seminars, as arranged, and 1nd1v1dual supervision in the second semester Pre requisite Honours standing

The first half of the topic which may be taken as a 6 umt topic or as the first part of a 12 unit topic proceeds by way of a weekly lecture/ seminar on ma1or authors, and groups of authors 1n the development of modern American social cntic1sm Wnters considered vary from year to year but have generally mcluded, from the penod 1910 to the present, a range of liberal, conservative and radical

503

School of Soczal Sczences

ideologies The second half of the topic, which may be taken as a 6 unit topic or as the second part of a 12 unit topic, is a research seminar based on a substantial collection ofpenodicals of social cnticism pubhshed between 1880 and the present Students choose one of these per1od1cals or part of the sequence of a periodical for concentrated study and work towards the presentation of a research report on the context, history and content of the penodical Penodicals available mclude maior weekly, fortmghtly, monthly and quarterly pubhcahons in the twentieth century, ranging from anarchist to conservative crit1c1sm

34405 COMMUNITY IN AMERICA American Studies staff

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An exammat10n of selected developments m the mterdisciplmary study of commumty m America look1ng in particular at the hterature on the study of commuml!es m the Umted States and relating this to specific examples such as rural and urban commun1bes ethnic and social communrhes, and the use of the community metaphor 1n United States pohcy

34406 LITERARY PERSPECTIVES ON UNITED STATES CULTURE DrL M Bazrd

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

A study of American fict10n as an aspect of the culture of the U S , the topic begms with a late 18th Century novel and ends with some contemporary examples of post modernist fiction Special emphasis 1s given to authors' uses of myth, hero and anti-hero The uses of symbohsm, reahsm, modernism and post-

504

modernism in h1stoncal contexts receive a ma1or focus (Not available to students enrolled m topic 10909)

34430 AMERICAN STUDIES HONOURS TIIESIS Amerzcan Studzes Staff

Umts 12/18

A thesis of 15,000 words to be written under the superv1s1on of a member of the American Studies staff Students should choose a topic and have 1t approved for superns1on as early as possible Preliminary d1scuss1ons can be commenced in the second semester of the previous year, so that the ava1lab11Ity of source materials can be established

Hzgher Degree Studzes

Convener Dzrector of Studzes

Students mterested m pursuing Higher Degree Studies withm the Disciphne of American Studies are advised to contact the Head of Disciplme They should also consult the School of Social Sciences Higher Degree Student Handbook for details of necessary quahfications, and the formal procedures for adm1ss1on The School of Social Sciences Higher Degrees Committee adm1n1sters Higher Degree Studies withm the School

Higher Degree Studies in Amencan Studies may be pursued through three programmes the M A by coursework the M A by thesis, and the Ph D by theS!S

MA BY COURSEWORK

The M A by coursework consists of 54 units, which shall be completed satisfactorily m a m1n1mum of three semesters, comprising

Units

34550 MA Coursework Thesis m American Studies 18

34551 MA Studies m American Social History 12

34552 M A Studies m American Pohllcal History

34553 M A Studies m American Intellectual History

34550 M A COURSEWORK THESIS IN AMERICAN STUDIES

12

12

A thesis of 18 000 words prepared under the supervts1on of a member of staff

34551 (33561) M A STUDIES IN AMERICAN SOCIAL HISTORY A programme of supervised reading and seminars in designated areas in the social history of the Umted States and, where possible, Canada, leading to the presentation of a series of papers totallmg 12 000 words

34552 (33562) M A STUDIES IN AMERICAN POLITICAL HISTORY

A programme of supervised reading and seminars in designated areas of the political history of the Umted States and, where possible, Canada, leading to the presentation of a senes of papers totalling 12,000 words

34553 (33563) M A STUDIES IN AMERICAN INTELLECTUAL HISTORY

A programme of supervised reading and seminars in designated areas in the intellectual history of the Umted States and, where poss1ble1 Canada leading to the presentation of a senes of papers totallmg 12,000 words

MA BYTHESIS

A thesis of not more than 60,000 words presented after the eqmvalent of at least twelve months full lime study and prepared under the supervision of Disciplme Staff

PHD

A thesis of not more than 100,000 words prepared under the superv:rs1on of D1sc1phne Staff and presented after the eqmvalent of at least two (and normally three) years of full­llme study The Disciplme may reqmre the student to undertake prescnbed courses of

Polztws

formal study if it is considered that such courses are needed to strengthen the student's training in areas essential to the conduct of research on the thesis topic

Diploma Topics

34403 READINGS IN AMERICAN BIBLIOGRAPHY AND HISTORIOGRAPHY American Studies Staff

Umts 12 Level Diploma Duration To be announced Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre reqmsite Diploma standmg

A programme of directed reading on the main developments in American h1stoncal writing and histoncal theory, together with a survey of the ma1or findmg aids and bibliographical tools for the study of Amencan lustory

34440 AMERICAN STUDIES DIPLOMA LITERATURE REVIEW American Studies Staff

Umts 12

A literature review and small scale research pro1ect, which is not mtended to provide the level of research tra1n1ng involved in an Honours thesis, but emphasises a thorough exan11nat1on of the range of hterature relevant to a specific area of research

Topics zn Polztzcs

General Information

Ordinary Degree

From 1989, the basic ma1or sequence requirement in Politics 1s 36 units compr1s1ng Pohllcs I (12 umts), either 35213 or 35218 (each 6 umts), one other core topic mdicated by an astensk alongside the topic number (6 umts) and two further topics (each 6 umts) chosen from other upper year topics offered 1n the d1sc1phne Students who commenced a ma1or sequence prior to 1989 and who intend to proceed to an Honours Year 1n Pohtics are advised to mclude atleast one of 35213, 35218,

505

School of Soczal Sciences

or 35208 among their upper level topics It IS mtended that topics m 1991 be offered m the following semesters, but conftnnation must be obtamed by checkmg the Umvers1ty Timetable

First year topic

35110 Pohtzcs I

Upper year topics

First semester 35203

Um ts 12

(37209) The Government and Pohtics of the Chmese People's Repubhc

35204* Intemat10nal Pohtics Peace and War

35208 Pohtzcal Theory Problems of Democratic Theory

35214* (37212) The Polltzcs of New States 35216 Pohtzcs and Society m Modem

America 35218 Baste Issues m Contemporary

Polltzcal Theory 35221 Australlan Pohtical Economy 35306 South East Astan Poh!tcal

Development 35317 Urban Poll!tcs 35325 Soviet Foreign Pohcy 35327 Race' and Austrahan Pohtzcs

Second semester 35213* Poh!tcal Philosophy and its HIStory 35215* Australlan Government and Pubhc

Po hey 35304 Internat1onal Pohhcs Austrahan

Foreign Polley :l5312 People and Poh!tcs A Cross

Nat10nal Study of Austraha the Umted States and Canada

35313 Comparative Strategies for Development

35321 Party Party System and Society m Australia

35322 ASEAN Problems and Prospects 35331 Reason Freedom and the State

Problems m Modern European Poll!tcal Philosophy

35332 The Pollt1cal Economy of the Paczfzc Rtm

35334 War, States and Markets in East Asza 1930 1990

506

Honours Degree

An Honours Programme tn Pohhcs consists of the followmg

a) Two topics chosen from among these topics offered m 1991 35403 The Chmese Cultural Revolut10n 6

35405 Internat10nal Poh!tcs The Cold War

35408 Studies m Amencan Social Cntic1sm

6

6 6 35409 Polltical Philosophy

35416 Ehtes m Southeast Asza 6

35424 Dependency and Development 6 35435 Australlan Government and

Polltics 6

35436 Problems m Recent European Social and Polltzcal Philosophy 6

35441 Urban Poll!tcs and Pubhc Polley 35442 Revolut10ns 6 35445 Internat10nal Pohtzcs Theones

and Debates 6

By special arrangement, an Honours topic from another D1sc1phne 1n the School or from the Poh!tcs Department at the Umverstty of Adelaide 6

b) 35421 Readmg Course

c) 35450 Honours Theszs

Diploma zn Soczal Sciences Politics

6

18

Pre requ1s1tes for adm1ss1on to the Diploma in Social Sciences are set out in Statute 7 1, Schedule 16 The Diploma m Social Sciences A hst of topics available to Pohttcs diploma students IS contamed m Appendix A to the schedule The course of study for the Diploma 1n Social Sciences Pohtics, which may extend for a maximum of three consecutive years, compnses 36 umts as follows

Units

a) 35425 Bibllographic Studies m Poh!tcs 12

b) two Honours level Polzttcs topics each 6

c) two thud year level Pohtzcs topics each 6

Further enqumes should be made to staff members or to the Pohhcs D1sc1phne office

First Year Topzc

35110 POLmcs I Mr f Summers (Convener)

Umts 12 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic 1s d1VIded into two semesters The first semester focuses on Australian Pohttcs and selected issues in Poht1cal Theory and the second on Internat1onal Relations and Development Both semesters integrate the mam topic with theoretical perspectives

Preliminary reading Ambrose, S Rise to globalism 5th ed

(Pengum, 1988) Jaensch, D and Teichmann M Australzan

polltzcs and foreign policy an introductzon (Longman Cheshire 1987)*

McWilhams, W C and P10trowsk1, H The world since 1948, 2nd ed (Lynne Remner, 1990)*

Thomson D , ed Pol1tzcal ideas (Pengum, 1980)*

Text books First semester Summers, J Woodward, D and Parlan, A , eds

Government politics and power in Australia, 4th ed (Longman Cheshrre 1990)*

Second semester To be announced

Second Year Topics

35203 (37209) (52203) THE GOVERNMENT AND POLmcs OF THE CHINESE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC Professor B Brugger

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

Polztzcs

A brief mtroduction to the history of twentieth century Chrna followed by a detailed examination of the Yan'an and Soviet models of development and the mod1ficatlon of those models dunng the 1950s and 1960s Areas examined will include rural pohcy, urban pohcy, and the development of the Chmese Commumst Party The topic mcludes a study of the Cultural Revolut10n and its aftermath and concludes with a study of developments smce the death of Mao Zedong

Reference books Brugger, B Chzna lzberatzon and trans

formatzon, 1942-1962 (Croom Helm, 1981)' Brugger B China rad1calzsm to revzszonzsm,

1962 1979 (Croom Helm, 1981)* G1ttmgs, J China changes face (Oxford U P ,

1990)* Mao Zedong Selected readings (Foreign

Language Pr 1971)* Maxwell, N and Mcfarlane B China's

changed road to development (Pergamon 1984)*

Meisner, M Mao's Chzna and after (Free Press 1986)'

Rtsk1n, C Chzna's polztical economy (Oxford up. 1987)*

Schram, S, ed Mao Tse tung (Pehcan, 1966)* Schram, S , ed Mao Tse tung unrehearsed

(Pehcan, 1974)* Schurmann, HF Ideology and organisatzon

zn communist Chzna, rev ed (Cahforn1a up. 1971)

A hst of prehmmary readmg 1s available from the Pohtics Office

35204 (52218) INTERNATIONAL POLmcs PEACE AND WAR Dr M Griffiths, Dr JD E Plant and MrH Manning

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duratton Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic 1s a general mtroduchon to the 1ntematlonal pohhcs of the post war era It presents various frameworks for the analysis of this penod, and attempts to assess the adequacy of these by lookmg at a number of case studies of particular issues and confhcts

507

School of Social Sciences

Some examples of the topics covered 1n this topic mclude the causes of war and the cond1t1ons of peace and order 1n the 1nternat1onal system, the Cold War and the partition of Europe, the or1g1ns and conse­quences of the l(orean war the Vietnam war, the nse and fall of superpower detente m the 1970s, Amencan and Soviet nuclear strategies and the 1mphcat10ns of contemporary changes 1n 1nternatlonal pohtics for order and stab1hty in 1nternahonal politics

Preliminary reading Ambrose, S E Rise to globalism, 5th ed

(Pengum, 1988) Halhday, F The making of the second cold

war, 2nd ed (Verso, 1986) Howard, M The causes of wars, 2nd ed

(Temple Smith, 1982) Waltz, KN Man, the state and war

(Columbia U P , 1964) Ziegler, D W War, peace and international

politics, 5th ed (Scott, Foresman, 1990)

Further reading Gaddis, j L Strategies of containment

(Oxford UP, 1982) Garthoff, R L Detente and confrontatzon

(Brookmgs, 1985) Kaplan, S S Diplomacy of power (Brookmgs,

1981) LaFeber, W America, Russia and the cold

war, 1945 84, 5th ed (Knopf, 1985) Mandelbaum M The nuclear revolutzon

(Cambndge UP, 1981)

35207 (52207) THE POLmcs OF UNDERDEVELOPMENT THE AFRICAN CASE Dr C Gertzel

Not offered m 1991

35208 POLIDCAL THEORY PROBLEMS OF DEMOCRATIC THEORY MrN Wzntrop

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 seminar and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

508

This is a pohtical theory course which has representative democracy as its subject and which focuses on normative issues About half the semester will be given to the cnbcal exam1nahon of some influential academic wntmg on the subject In the remammg weeks there will be a more direct exam1nat1on of some of the pohtlcal, economic and cultural problems of modern representative demo crac1es These problems are hkely to mclude those pertinent to ehtes, pohhcal parties, cap1tahsm, soc1ahsm, corporatism, and un1vers1ty education

Preliminary reading

Barker, E Principles of social and polztzcal theory (Oxford u P, 1961)*

Cnck, B In defence of politics, 2nd ed (Pengum, 1982)*

Dahl RA A preface to democratic theory (Chicago U P , 1962)*

De Tocqueville, A Democracy in Amenca (Fontana, 1968)*

Downs A An economic theory of democracy (Harper & Row, 1957)*

Dunn, j The politics of socialism (Cambndge up' 1984)*

Gasset, Ortega, Y The revolt of the masses (Allen & Unwm, 1961)*

Hayek, FA The road to serfdom (Routledge, 1962)*

Lippmann, W Essays zn the public philosophy (Mentor, 1955)*

Macpherson C B The life and times of liberal democracy (Oxford U P , 1978)*

Mmogue, KR The concept of a University (We1denfeld, 1973)

Plamenatz, J Democracy and illusion (Longman, 1973)*

Sarton, G The theory of democracy revisited (Chatham House 1987)*

W1lhamson, P j Corporatzon in perspective (Sage, 1989)*

35209 (52219) POWER, POLmcs AND SOCIETY AN INTRODUCTION TO POLIDCAL SOCIOLOGY Dr R DeAngelis

Not offered m 1991

35213 POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY AND ITS HISTORY Mr N Wzntrop

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

ThIS topic will proVIde an mtroduchon to central problems m pohhcal philosophy, such as the state, human nature, c1hzensh1p, 1ustice, freedom, the character of poht1cal knowledge, and the purposes of government Ma1or pohtical phdosoph1cal texts will be examined, compared and evaluated Attempts will also be made to locate the 1mmed1ate context of these texts, their h1storical background, and their relations to other pohhcal writings

Preliminary reading

Berk1, RN The history of political theory, 4th ed (Dent 1977)•

Sabme G H and Thorson, TL A history of political thought (Dryden, 1973)*

Strauss, L and Cropsey J , eds History of polzticalphilosophy, 3rd ed (Chicago UP 1987)*

Text books

Aristotle The politics (Pengum, 1962)*

Hegel, G W F Lectures on the philosophy of history (Cambridge UP, 1975)*

Hegel, G W F Philosphy of rzght (Oxford up' 1967)*

Hobbes, T Leviathan (Fontana, 1962)*

Locke, J Two treatises of government (Cambridge UP, 1989)*

Mill, JS Utilitarzamsm on liberty, and considerations on representative government (Dent, 1972)*

Machiavelli The prince (Pengum, 1961)*

Plato The republic (Pengum, 1955)*

Rousseau, J J The social contract and Discourses (Dent, 1973)*

St Augustme Concerning the City of God (Pengum, 1972)*

St Thomas Aqmnas Selected political wrztzngs (Blackwell, 1965)*

Politics

35214 (37212) (52202) THE POLITICS OF NEW STATES Dr C Gertzel

Umts 6 Level Second or th1rd year Durat10n Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic proVJdes an mtroduct10n to the pohhcs of the new states which have emerged out of colon1al rule in Asta and Africa since 1945 It seeks to raise the key issues which face these states m the late twentieth century and which influence their efforts to overcome their underdevelopment Among the topics to be discussed will be the politics of de colon1sation, ethn1c1ty and class formation 1n the post colonial state, peasants and poltt1cs the rise of the authontanan state, the m1htary in the new state, new states and the international system

Reference books Brett, EA Colonzalrsm and under develop

ment zn EastAfnca the politics of economic change 1919 39 (Hememann, 1973)*

Clapham, C Third World politics an introductwn (Croom Helm, 1985)

Cohen, D L and Dame! j D , eds Political economy of Africa, selected readings (Longman, 1982)

Evers, HD, Modemizatzon in South East Asia (Oxford U P , 1980)

H1ggott, R and Robison, R, eds Southeast Asia essays zn the political economy and structural change (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1985)*

Leys, C Underdevelopment zn Kenya (Hememann, 1975)*

MarkoVJtz, I L Power and class in Africa (Prentice Hall, 1977)*

35215 (21420) (23211) AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT AND PUBLIC POLICY Dr A Parkin, Ms J Robbins and Mr J Summers

Umts 6 Level Second or th1rd year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour lecture and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1S1te 35110 Poh!Ics I or at the d1scretlon of the Convener

509

School of Soczal Sczences

This topic begins by cons1der1ng the cr1ter1a which might 1ust1fy the role of government m contemporary Australia with particular reference to recent cnt1c1sm of the efficiency and effectiveness of the pubhc sector It then examines the processes by which governments m Australia formulate and implement pohc1es and manage their employees A s1gmficant part of the topic involves the analysis of spec1f1c policy areas these may include taxation, the economy the environment, housing, ethnic affairs, the human services and cnm1nal JUStice

Reference books Blandy R and Walsh, C eds Budgetary

stress the South Australzan experience (Allen & Unwm 1989)*

Coaldrake, P and N ethercote, P , eds What should government do? (Hale and Iremonger, 1989)*

Cranston R Law, government and public policy (Oxford UP, 1987)*

DavIS, G et al Public policy m Australia (Allen & Unwm, 1988)

Freeba1rn1 J Porter, M and Walsh, C 1 eds Spending and taxing II taking stock (Allen & Unwm, 1988)*

Galhgan B ed Comparative state pol1c1es (Longman Cheshire, 1988)*

Galligan, B , Hughes, 0 and Walsh, C , eds Intergovernmental relations and publzc policy (Allen & Unwm, 1990)*

Head, B and Patience, A eds From Fraser to Hawke (Longman Cheshire, 1989)*

Indecs Economics, State of play 6 (Allen & Unwm, 1990)*

Jennett C and Stewart, R eds Hawke and Australian public policy Consensus and restructunng (Macmillan 1990)*

Jones M The Australian welfare state 3rd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1990)*

Le Grand,] and Robinson, R The economzcs of social problems the market versus the state 2nd ed (Macmillan 1984)*

35216 (34205) POLmcs AND SOCIETY IN MODERN AMERICA DrDA DeBats

Units 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

510

A basically contemporary topic on selected aspects of American pohtJcs and society The lectures are structured about the followmg themes (1) Amencan pohtical culture, racial, ethnic, and economic aspects of American society, (2) American pohhcal 1nst1tut1ons, a critical assessment, (3) the nature of American ideology, spec1flcally hberal, leftISt and nght1St ideologies, black politics, (4) models useful m understandmg US foreign pohcy and conflicts withm American society The followmg books are especially useful for the purpose of thIS topic A programme of films accompanies the topic

Set book Burns J M Peltason, J W and Cronm, J E

Government by the people (Prenllce Hall, 1990)

or Katznelson 1 and Kesselman, M The pol1t1cs

of power (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1979)*

Reference books Burnham, W D Critical electwns and the

mainsprzngs of Amencan polztzcs (Norton, 1970)*

Kammen, M G A machine that would go of itself (Vmtage, 1986)

Lasch C The agony of the American left (Deutsch, 1970)

Lowi, T J The end of 11beral1sm (Norton, 1979)*

Nie, N H et al The changing Amencan voter, 2nd ed (Harvard, 1979)*

Preston M B et al , eds The new black pol1t1cs the search for political power (Longman, 1982)

Rose R The post modern president the White House meets the world (Chatham, 1988)*

W1lhams, WA The tragedy of American diplomacy, 2nd ed (Delta, 1972)*

35217 (34305) THE MAKING OF UNITED STATES FOREIGN POLICY Ms G McDonald

Not offered m 1991

35218 BASIC ISSUES IN CONTEMPORARY POLITICAL THEORY Dr N Porter

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

The topic introduces some ma1or issues 1n contemporary pohtical theory The orgamsmg theme 1s that of modernity, and cons1deratlon 1s given to important responses to issues associated with it, especially those emanating from hberal, commun1tar1an and post structuralist sources The issues to be discussed include the following rationality language history, morality, 1nd1vtduahsm commun1ty, freedom and JUstlce

Recommended reading

Arendt, H The human conditzon (Chicago up. 1958)*

Beynes, K et al , eds After philosophy End or transformatzon? (MIT 1987)*

Berlm I Four essays on liberty (Oxford U P 1969)*

Bernstein, R Beyond ob1ect1v1sm and relatwzsm (Blackwell, 1983)*

Dallmayr, F Language and politics (Notre Dame UP, 1984)

Habermas, j The philosophical discourse of modernity (Pohty Pr , 1988)

Macmtyre, A After virtue A study in moral theory (Duckworth, 1981)*

Nozick R Anarchy, state and utopia (Oxford up' 1974)*

Rabmow, P, ed The Foucault reader (Pengum, 1986)*

Rawls, j A theory of 1ustice (Oxford U P , 1972)*

Taylor, C Philosophical papers, vol 1, Human agency and language, vol 2, Philosophy and the human sciences (Cambridge UP, 1985)*

35221 AUSTRALIAN POLITICAL ECONOMY Dr P Hanratty

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester

Politics

Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te Pohttcs I or perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic focuses upon the poh!lcs of economic pohcy makmg at the nat10nal level m Australia It begms by surveymg neo­classical maooan and statlst approaches to pohllcal economy and pohcy makmg This 1s followed by a series of case studies which analyse policy issues such as unemployment, inflahon, external debt pubhc spending and taxation, the welfare system and poverty, the regulation of wages industry policy, import protection, structural change, foreign direct investment and Australian responses to econom1c growth 1n the Asia Pac1f1c region It concludes with a d1scuss1on of the develop ment paths open to Australia's pohtical economy m the future

Reference books Anderson, K and Garnaut, R Australian

protectzomsm (Allen & Unwm, 1987) Buthn, N et al Government and capztalzsm

(Allen & Unwm, 1982) Castles, F Australian publzc policy and

economic vulnerabilzty (Allen & Unwm 1988)

Crough, C and Wheelwright, T Australia a client state (Pengum, 1982)

Dunleavy, P and O'Leary, B Theorzes of the state (Macmillan, 1987)

Ferguson, T and Rogers, J , eds The political economy (Sharpe, 1984)

Head, B , ed State and economy zn Australza (Oxford U P , 1983)

Hughes H Australia m a developing world (Australian Broadcastmg Corporatrnn 1985)

Lmdblom C Politics and markets (Basic Books 1977)

Macintyre, S Winners and losers (Allen & Unwm, 1985)

Mathews j Age of democracy (Oxford U P , 1989)

Olson, M The rise and decline of natwns (Yale UP, 1982)

511

School of Social Sciences

Przeworsk1, A Capztalzsm and social democracy (Cambridge U P , 1985)

Smgleton, G The Accord and theAustralzan labour movement (Melbourne U P , 1990)

St1llwell F The Accord and beyond (Pluto, 1986)

Third Year Topics

35301 (37305) (52304) PO LID CAL CHANGE IN TWENTIETH CENTURY CHINA Professor B Brugger

Not offered m 1991

35304 (23303) INTERNATIONAL POLIDCS AUSTRALIAN FOREIGN POLICY Dr/DE Plant

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 two hour tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

Australian government and oppos1tlon foreign pohcy smce the advent of the Curtm Labor Government in 1941 Emphasis in this topic Will be on the relat10nsh1p of nat10nal and 1ntemattonal factors 1n the development and implementat.J.on of a national foreign policy

Prelzmrnary reading Ball, D A base for debate the US satellzte

station at Nurrungar (Allen & Unw1n, 1987)*

Barclay, G St J Friends zn hzgh places (Oxford up' 1985)

Bell, C Dependent ally (Oxford UP, 1988)* Cam1llen, J A ANZUS Australza's

predicament zn the nuclear age (Macm1llan, 1987) *

Harper, N A great and powerful frzend (Queensland UP , 1987)*

Hudson, W J Blznd loyalty Australza and the Suez crzszs, 1956 (Melbourne UP 1989)*

Manne, R The Petrov affair polztzcs and espzonage (Pergamon, 1987)*

Renouf, A Malcolm Fraser and Australzan forezgn polzcy (Aust Profess10nal Pubhcations, 1986)*

512

Sexton M War for the askmg Australia's Vietnam secrets (Penguin, 1983) *

There are no presenbed texts The following are among books referred to in the topic which will necessarily make extensive use of Hansard newspapers, per1od1cals and theses

Albmsk1, H S Polztzcs and forezgn policy zn Australia the zmpact of Vzetnam and conscrzptzon (Duke U P , 1970)

Andrews, EM Australza and Chzna (Melbourne U P , 1985)

Ball, D A suztable pzece of real estate American znstallatzons zn Australza (Hale & Iremonger 1980)*

Bell, R J Unequal allzes (Melbourne U P , 1977)

Boyce, P) and Angel J R , eds Independence and alliance Australza zn world atfazrs 1976 1980 (A I I A, 1983)*

Cam1ller1, J A Australian Amerzcan relatzons the web of dependence (Macmillan 1980) *

Evatt, H V Forezgn polzcy of Australza (Angus & Robertson, 1945)

Hasluck, P Dzplomatzc wztness (Melbourne up' 1980)

Hudson, W J , ed Australia zn world affairs, 1971-1975 (Allen & Unwm, 1980)

King P, ed Australza's Vzetnam (Allen & Unwm, 1983)*

Meaney, N Australia and the world (Longman Cheshue, 1985)

Millar, TB Australia zn peace and war (AN U Pr', 1978)

Pemberton, G All the way Australza's road to Vzetnam (Allen & Unwm 1987)*

Reese TR Australza New Zealand and the Unzted States a survey of zntematzonal relatzons 1941 1968 (Oxford UP, 1969)

Renouf, A Let 1ustzce be done (Queensland up' 1983)

35306 (37303) (52306) SOUTHEAST ASIAN POLITICAL DEVELOPMENT Dr HS Leng

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 two hour seminar per week Pre reqms1te Completrnn of 12 umts of work 1n second year topics

A comparative study of political change in Southeast Asia Particular attention will be paid to the following topics colon1ahsm, nat1onahsm and the creation of nation states problems of ethn1c1ty, national identity and integration types of regimes and their legitimation, political competition and confhct as expressed in pohtical parties and elections nots, revolts and proxy wars, competing elites and the struggle for authonty and effectiveness, changes In polrtlcal awareness and the effect on the type and mtens1ty of poh!Jcal demands and on government and poh!Jcal response reg1onaltsm and foreign involvement

This topic may not be counted towards a degree m add1!Jon to topic 37302 Poh!Jcal and Economic Development 1n Southeast Asia

Preliminary reading Stemberg, D J ed In search of Southeast

Asza a modem history rev ed (Pall Mall, 1987)

W1lhams, L E Southeast Asia (Oxford U P , 1976)*

Reference books Chan, Heng Chee The dynamics of one party

dominance the PAP at the grass roots (Smgapore U P , 1978)

Dahm, B Sukarno and the struggle for Indonesian independence (Cornell U P 1969)

Drysdale, J Singapore struggle for success (Allen & Unwm, 1984)

Fifield, R Natzonal and regzonal interest in ASEAN (!SEAS, 1979)

Grrlmg, J L S Thailand society and politics (Cornell UP, 1981)

Hlggott, R and Robison, R , eds Southeast Asia essays zn the political economy of structural change (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1985)*

Husm Ah S , ed Ethnicity, class and development in Malaysza (Persatuan S1ans Sos1al Malaysia, 1984)

Mackie, J A C , ed Indonesia the making of a natzon (A N U Pr , 1980)

May, R J and Nemenzo, F, eds The Philippines afler Marcos (Croom Helm, 1985)

McAhster, J T ed Southeast Asia the politics of natzonal zntegratzon (Random House, 1973)

Politics

Millar, TB ed Internatzonal security in the Southeast Asian and Southwest Pacific region (Queensland U P , 1983)

Pauker, G J Golay, F H and Enloe, CH Diversity and development zn Southeast Asza (McGraw Hiil, 1977)

Robison, R Jndonesza the rzse of capital (Allen & Unwm, 1986)

Robison, R 1 Hew1son, K and Higgott R , eds, Southeast Asia zn the 1980s the politics of economic crisis (Allen & Unwm, 1987)*

S1lverstem, ) Burma r111litary rule and the politics of an Asian socialist state (Cornell up' 1978)

Sundaram, J K A questzon of class capital, the state and uneven development tn Malaya (Oxford UP, 1986)*

van der Kroef, J M Communism zn Southeast Asia (Macmillan, 1981)

van Vorys, K Democracy without consensus (Prmceton UP, 1975)

Zacher, M W and Milne, R S , eds Conflict and stability zn Southeast Asia (Anchor, 1974)

35312 PEOPLE AND POLmcs A CROSS NATIONAL STUDY OF AUSTRALIA, THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA Dr DA DeBats

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requisite None

The topic 1s designed to explore the u!Jhty of comparative analysis in the understanding of the poh!Jcs of Austraha the Umted States and Canada Methodologies of comparative analysis as defmed m poh!Jcal science hterature will form the first section of the topic, In the second section, attention will be focused on the baste h1stor1cal, soc1olog1cal and institutional differences and s1mdar1ties among the three societies e g social origins of populat10n, poh!Jcal geography, the def1n1tion and institutionahsation of polttics, and the role of poh!Jcal parties m determmmg the lmkage between social and poht1cal

513

School of Social Sciences

tens10n The fmal sect10n of the topic will attempt to define the convergent and divergent developmental trends which have shaped the contemporary pohttcs of each society Among the development trends considered will be the changing structures of power, deternunants of poh!Jcal behaVJour and funct10ns of pohllcal parties The conclus1on of the topic will focus qmte specifically on the quest10n of whether we can speak of 'd1stlnct1ve pohtles' in the modern world Students may opt for this topic at either the second or th1rd year level although they may fmd courses m Australian and/or Amencan pohllcs valuable introductlons

Set books Maddox, G Australian democracy m theory

and practice (Longman Chesh1re, 1985)•

Pocklington, TC Liberal democracy zn Canada and the United States (Holt Rinehart and Wmston 1985)*

Reference books

Albmsk1 HS Canadian and Australzan politics m comparative perspective (Oxford up' 1973)

Alford R R Party and society the Anglo American democracies (Rand McNally, 1964)

Hartz, L The foundzng of new soczetzes studies zn the history of the United States, Latin America, South Africa, Canada and Australia (Harcourt, Brace & World 1964)

Holt, R and Turner, J, eds The methodology of comparative research (Free Pr , 1970)

Mayer, H and Nelson, H , eds Australian politics a fzfth reader (Longman Chesh1re, 1980)

Pierce, ] C and Pride, RA Cross national mzcro analyszs procedures and problems (Sage, 1972)

Prescott, JR V Political geography (Methuen, 1972)

Rose, R Electoral behaviour a comparative handbook (Free Pr, 1974)

Taylor, P J and Johnston R J Geography of electzons (Pengum, 1979)

Warwick D and Osherson, S , eds Comparative research methods (Prentlce­Hall, 1973)

514

35313 (52307) COMPARATIVE STRATEGIES FOR DEVELOPMENT Dr C Gertzel

Umts 6 Level Second or th1rd year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite No pre requ1s1te but students are strongly recommended to take 35214 The Poh!Ics of New States

This topic will cnt1cally examine the strategies of development followed m Kenya, Tanzania and Zambia 1n relation to contemporary theories of development and under development, and m the context of the contemporary African cns1s, using a case study approach

Reference books Brett E A Colonialism and under

development zn East Africa (Hememann 1973)*

Chffe, L and Saul, S , eds Socialism zn Tanzania, 2 vols (East Afncan Pub House, 1972)*

Coulson, A Tanzania a polztzcal economy (Oxford U P , 1982)*

Employment, incomes and equalzty (I L 0 , 1972)*

Hyden G Beyond U7amaa zn Tanzanza, underdevelopment and an uncaptured peasantry (Hememann 1980)*

Leys, C Underdeve,lopment zn Kenya (Hememdnn, 1975)*

Nyerere, J Freedom and development (Oxford U P , 1973)*

Nyerere, J Freedom and socialism (Oxford up 1968)*

Tordoff, W, ed Politics zn Zambia (Manchester U P , 197 4)

Turok, B , ed Development zn Zambza (Zed Pr , 1979) *

World Bank Accelerated development zn Sub Saharan Africa an agenda for actzon (World Bank, 1981)

35316 GOVERNMENT AND POLffiCS IN WESTERN EUROPEAN SOCIETY Dr R De Angelis

Not offered m 1991

35317 URBAN POLITICS Dr L R Orchard

Umts 6 Level Second and thud years Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

ThlS topic explores the poh!Ical soc10logy and poht1cal economy of cities The primary focus will be on contemporary urban problems and issues in Australia These include the housing cns1s, urban 1nequaltty and its causes, the urban impact of econom1c change, urban planning versus urban management, the role of pubhc investment in Austraha s cities, and urban consohdat1on and its s1gn1ficance Reference will be made to overseas debates and examples where appropriate

Reference books Burke T, Hancock L and Newton, P A roof

over their heads housing zssues and families in Australia (Institute of Famdy Studies, 1984) *

Halligan, J and Pans, C, eds Australian urban polztzcs crztzcal perspectives (Longman Cheshue, 1984)*

Hamnet!, S and Bunker, R eds Urban Australia planning issues and policies (Mansell, 1987)*

Kendig, H and Pans C Towards fazr shares m Australian housing (Highland Pr 1987)

Kllmarhn L Thoms, D and Burke, T Social theory and the Australian city (Allen & Unwm, 1985)*

McLoughlm, J B and Huxley, M, eds Urban planning zn Australia crztzcal readings (Longman Cheshue 1986)*

Maher, C Australian cztzes zn transztzon (Shdlmgton House, 1982)*

Neutze 1 GM Australian urban policy (Allen & Unwin, 1978)*

Parkm, AW Governing the cities the Australian experience zn perspective (Macmdlan 1982)*

Stretton, H Urban planning zn rzch and poor countnes (Oxford UP, 1978)*

Stretton, H Ideas for Australian cztzes, 3rd ed (TranSit, 1989)*

Politics

35318 CONTEMPORARY SOCIALIST SOCIETIES Professor B Brugger

Not offered m 1991

35321 (23207) PARTY, PARTY SYSTEM AND SOCIETY IN AUSTRALIA Dr DH faensch and Mr H Manning

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmSite Not avadable to students who have already taken 35201 Party, Party System and Society 1n Austraha

This topic will focus on the role of party m Austrahan poh!Ics and on the Austrahan party system It will mvolve a study of party hIStory, function, ideology, organisation and electoral compehhon One ma1or emphasis will be the apphcatton of contemporary theoretical analyses of parties and party systems to the Austrahan s1tuahon, a second wtll be an exam1nahon of the environmental and social supports of Australian parties and the Austrahan party system, a thud will be an analySis of the relevant parties, and theu funct10ns w1thm the pohty and party system

Reference books Altken D Stability and change in Australian

politics, 2nd ed (AN U Pr, 1982)* Alford RR Party and society (Rand McNally

1964) Jaensch, D Power politics Australia's party

system, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwin, 1989)* jaensch, D The Hawke Keating hi7ack

(Allen & Unwm, 1989)* Jupp, J Australian party politics (Melbourne

up' 1968)* Jupp, J Party politics Australia 1966 81

(Allen & Unwm, 1982)* Kemp, D A Society and electoral behavwur

in Australia (Queensland UP, 1978)* La Palombara, J and Werner M Political

parties and political development (Prmceton U P , 1966)

Mayer, H and Nelson, H 1 eds Australian politics a fzfth reader (Cheshire, 1980)*

McDonald N A The study bf political parties (Random House, 1967)

515

School of Social Sciences

Overacker, L Australian partzes in a changing society (Longman Cheshire, 1968)

Rose, R Electoral behavwur (Free Pr, 1974) Sartori G Parties and party systems

(Cambridge UP 1976)*

35322 (37306) (52309) ASEAN PROBLEMS AND PROSPECTS DrH S Leng

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 semmar and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te Complet10n of24 umts of work m second year topics or 35306/37303/52306 Southeast Asian Poht1cal Development

This topic 1s concerned with the pohttcs of regional co operation of the Assoc1atton of Southeast Asian Na!lons (ASEAN) Issues to be covered mclude the antecedents of ASEAN centrifugal and centripetal tendencies of reg1onahsm in Southeast As1a1 the character of component regimes and econom1es, problems of economic co operal!on, relal!ons with external powers 1nclud1ng Australia and the pursuit of pohtical neutrahty, regional security and stability Particular attention is paid to the Kampuchean Cnsts and its impact on ASEAN solidarity

Reference books Boyce, P J and Angel, J R , eds

Independence and alliance Australia zn world affairs, 1976 1980 (A I I A, 1983)

Bromowsk1 A , ed Understanding ASEAN (Macmillan, 1982)

F1f1eld, RH Natzonal and regional interest m ASEAN (!SEAS, 1979)*

Garnaut, R, ed ASEAN zn a changing Paczfzc and world economy (A N U , 1980)

Haas, M Basic documents of Asian regional orgamsatwns (Oceana, 1974)

lracentzran M ASEAN's foreign relatzons (Arenabuku, 1985)

Joint Comm on Foreign Affairs and Defence1

Australia and ASEAN Challenges and Opportumtzes (AG PS, 1984)

Martm, L G The ASEAN success story (Hawan East-West Center, 1987)

McLeod K and Utrecht, E , eds The ASEAN papers (James Cook U P , 1978)*

516

Millar, TB 1 ed Internatzonal security zn the Southeast Aszan and Southwest Paczfzc regzon (Queensland U P 1983)

Na1r1 KK ASEAN-lndochzna relations since 1975 Canberra Papers on Strategy and Defence (ANU, 1984)

Palmer R D and Reckford, T J Buzldzng ASEAN 20 years of Southeast Aszan co operatzon (Praeger, 1987)

Pauker, G 1 Golay, F H and Enloe, C Dwerszty and development zn Southeast Asza (McGraw Hill, 1977)

Pfenmg, W and Suh, M M B , eds Aspects of ASEAN (Weltforum Verlag, 1984)

Simon, SW The A SEAN states and regzonal security (Hoover Inst Pr, 1982)

Sop1e M N , Chew, L S and Lim, S ) eds , ASEAN at the crossroads (ISIS, Malaysia, 1987)

Weatherbee, DE ed SoutheastAsza dzvzded the ASEAN-Indochzna crzszs (Westv1ew, 1985)*

Wilson, D The neutralisatzon of Southeast Aszan (Praeger, 1975)

Wong, ] ASEAN economies zn perspectzve (Macmillan, 1979)

35325 SOVIET FOREIGN POLICY Dr l Fztzpatrzck

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 5 hours per week Pre reqws1te None

The topic will aim to provtde an understanding both of the Soviet role in, and impact on, contemporary world pohl!cs and also the role of 1ntematlonal pressures in shaping the Soviet social order itself Drawing on a variety of theoretical sources (inter national relations, Sovtet studies, 1ntemational political economy and theories of revolution and post­revoluhonary development) 1t will approach the SoVIet Union as a transxttonal state within a transitional international order The more detailed d1scuss1on of foreign pohcy will focus on the post World War II period Possible topics include Soviet m1htary doctrine and pohcy, Soviet thlrd world doctrine and pohcy, the Soviet economy and Soviet foreign pohcy, cold war and detente m SoVIet Amencan relations

Recommended readzng B1alfer, S The Sovzet paradox external

expansion, internal decline (Knopf, 1986) Flynn G ed Soviet military doctrine and

western securztypol1cy (Croom Helm, 1987) Goldman, M Gorbachev's challenge (Norton

1987) Hough, J Russza and the West (Simon &

Schuster, 1988) Light M The Soviet theory of mternatwnal

relations (Wheatsheaf, 1988) Steele, J The lzmzt of Soviet power the

Kremlin's foreign policy - Brezhnev to Chernenko (Pengum, 1985)

Walker, M The waking gzant (Pengum, 1987)

35326 LEFTIST TRADITIONS THEORY AND PRACTICE OF LtFI' TRADITIONS Dr R De Angelzs

Not offered m 1991

35327 (23307) RACE' AND AUSTRALIAN POLITICS Mr f Summers

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic 1s a study of the percept10n of 'race' and ethn1c1ty 1n Austrahan poht1cs The topic will have a s1gn1f1cant h1stoncal content and will focus on the way ideas about 'race', and the changing ethnic compos1tlon of Australian society, have affected the Australian political system Issues covered w1ll 1nclude European settlement and colon1al race relations, the gold rushes and Chinese 1mm1gration, the development of Abongmal pohcy from 1856 to 1914 the federat10n movement and the development of the White Australia Pohcy, Abongmal policy from 1914 to 1945 and the 1nstltutionahsatlon of Abong1nal life post World War II ass1m1lation pohc1es, the impact of post war 1mm1gration on Abong1nal pohttcs, the d1Smantlmg of the White Australia Pohcy, the adopt10n of multiculturahsm the pohl!cs of m111111g and of Abongmal Land Rights Abongmal self determ111at10n' and the poht1cs of Abongmal orgamsal!ons, Abongmals and the law, Abongmal demography, and recent 1mm1grat1on debates

Politz cs

Prelzmmary reading Broom R Aborzgmal Australians (Allen &

Unwm 1988)

Reference books Bennett, S Aborzgznes and political power

(Allen & Unwm, 1989) Collins, J Migrant hands zn a dzstant land

Australia's post war 1mmzgratzon (Pluto, 1987)

Cowhshaw, G Blach whzte or brzndle race m rural A ustralza (Cambridge U P , 1988)

Dmgle, A E Aborzgmal economy (Pengum 1988)

Hasluck P Shades of darkness, Aborzgmal affairs 1925 1965 (Melbourne U P , 1988)

jupp, j Ethnzc pol1tzcs zn Australza (Allen & Unwm, 1984)*

)upp, ] The Australian people an ency clopedza of the nation, its people and their origins (Angus & Robertson 1988)

Maddock K Your land 1s our land (Pengum, 1987)'

Meaney, N Matthews T and Ence!, S The Japanese connection (Longman Cheshire, 1988)

Peterson, N , ed Aborzgznal land rzghts a handbook (Austrahan Institute of Abongmal Studies, 1981)*

Pnce, CA The great white walls are buzlt restrictive zmmzgratzon to North America and Australiasza 1836-1888 (AN U Pr, 1974)

Reynolds H The other szde of the frontier Aborzginal resistance to the European invasion of Australia (Pengum 1982)*

Reynolds, H The law of the land (Pengum, 1987)*

Rowley, CD The destruction of Aborzgznal soczety (Pengum, 1972)*

Tatz C Race polztzcs zn Australia Aborzgmes, polzt1cs and the law (New England UP, 1979)*

Toyne P and Vachon, D Growing up the country the Pzt1ant1at1ara struggle for their land (Pengum, 1984)•

35328 (23308) POLITICS OF THE AUSTRALIAN STATES Dr D H faensch

Not offered m 1991

517

School of Social Sciences

35329 (52313) INTERNATIONAL POLITICS CONCEPTS AND ISSUES Dr S Makznda

Not offered m 1991

35331 REASON FREEDOM AND THE STATE PROBLEMS IN MODERN EUROPEAN POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY Dr N Porter

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 semmars per week Pre-requ1s1te None

A selective introduction to ma1or areas of modern European pohllcal philosophy The topic focuses on problems such as the role of reason in pohhcal conduct the relattonsh1p between theoretical and practical reason, the dispute between 1nd1v1duahst and commun1tanan views of freedom, the tension between freedom and authority the purpose and hmits of the state and the relat10nship between the state and c1V1l society These problems are discussed with par\lcular reference to the theories of Kant, Hegel and Marx The contemporary s1gruf1cance of their treatment of the problems is stressed This topic ts not available to those who have already taken 35212

Prelzmznary readzng Gay, P The enllghten111ent an interpretatzon,

vol 2 The science of freedom (Wildwood House 1973)*

Set books Hegel, G W F Philosophy of rzght (Oxford

up' 1967)* Hegel, G W F The philosophy of history

(Dover, 1956)* Kant, I Polztical wrztzngs, H Reiss, ed

(Cambndge UP, 1977)' Marx, K Early wrztzngs, L Colletti ed

(Pengum 1975)*

Reference books l(olakowsk1, L Main currents zn Marxism,

vol 1 The founders (Oxford UP, 1978)* Taylor C Hegel (Cambridge UP, 1977)* W1lhams H Kant s political philosophy

(Blackwell 1983)*

518

35332 (52319) THE POLITICAL ECONOMY OF THE PACIFIC RIM Dr P Hanratty

Umts 6 Level Second or thzrd year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te Pohhcs I or perm1ss1on of the Convener

The principal arena of world econom1c growth seems to be sh1ftmg from the Atlanl!c to the Pacific region The bilateral relat10nsh1p between the Umted States and japan 1s now of utmost importance for the world economy This topic focuses upon econom1c, pohhcal and pohcy change m the Pacific Rim The ong1ns and international impact of the nse of japan and the Asian Newly Industnahzmg Countries are analysed, pohbcal and pohcy responses by the United States are considered The evolut10n and future of the US japan alliance is given particular attention The topic concludes with a d1scuss1on of the effect of these changes on the development opt10ns for Australia s poht1cal economy

Reference books David, A and Wheelwright E The thzrd

wave (Left Book Club Cooperallve, 1989) Destler, IM and Sato H , eds Coping with

US Japanese econonzrc conflzcts (Lexmgton Books 1982)

Deyo, F, ed The polztzcal economy of the new Aszan rndustrzalzsm (Cornell U P 1987)

Garnaut, R Australia and the Northeast Asian ascendency (AG PS , 1989)

G1lpm R The political economy of international relations (Pnnceton UP 1987)

Halberstam, D The reckoning (Bantam 1983) Hofhemz R and Calder K The Eastasza edge

(Basic Books, 1983) Johnson C MIT/ and the Japanese miracle

(Stanford UP 1982) Morley, j , ed The Pacific baszn new

challenges for the Umted States (Amencan Academy of Pohl!cal Science 1986)

Olnmoto, D Between MIT! and the market (Stanford UP, 1989)

Olnmoto, D and Rohlen, T , eds Inside the Japanese system (Stanford U P , 1988)

Schm1egelow, M, ed japans response to crzszs and change in the world economy (Sharpe, 1986)

Tob.moya, A The Japan US alliance a Japanese perspective (Internahonal Institute for Strategic Studies, 1986)

Welfield, J An errpzre zn eclipse Japan zn the postwar American alliance system (Athlone Pr , 1988)

Woronoff, J World trade war (Praeger 1984) Yamamura, I{ and Yasuba, Y, eds The

political economy of Japan, vol I (Stanford up 1987)

35333 NUCLEAR STRATEGY AND ARMS CONTROL

Not offered m 1991

35334 WAR, STATES AND MARKETS 1N EAST ASIA 1930 1990 Dr J Fitzpatrick

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 31/2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Perm1ss1on of Convener

This topic will explore the inter relations between three areas of analysIS not often related geostrategy, mtematzonal pohl!cal economy and the poht1cal soc10logy of revolution and collective VIOience It will focus on a region and a period in which the interpenetration of these different areas of analysis seems particularly important It will h1ghhght, and examine the 1mphcabons of, the sh1ftmg territorial bases and changmg poht1cal regimes of various 'national' units over the period e g the contraclton of the Guommdang from mamland Chma to Taiwan, the expansion of Chinese Communist control from the Yenan 'base area' to the whole of mamland Chma, the trans1t10n from the Japanese 'Greater East Asian Co Prosperity Sphere' before WWI to the 'Neo Co Prospenty Sphere' after WWII

Reference books Buzan, B People, states and fear

(Wheatsheaf, 1983) Cummgs, B The origins of the Korean War

(Pnnceton UP, 1981)

Politics

Gill, S and Law, D The global political economy prospectives, problems and policies (Harvester, 1988)

G1lpm R The political economy of znflatzonal relatzon (Prmceton UP, 1987)

Kennedy, P The rzse and fall of great powers (Unwm Hyman, 1989)

Mann, M States, war and capztal1sm (Bastl Blackwell, 1987)

Mead, W Mortal splendour the American empire zn transztzon (Houghton Mifflin, 1987)

Schurmann, F The logzc of world power (Random House, 1974)

Skocpol T States and social revolutzons (Cambridge UP, 1979)

Strange, S States and markets (Pmter, 1988) Thorne, C The issue of War states, soczetzes

and the Far Eastern conflict of 1941 45 (Hamish Hamilton, 1985)

Tnmberger, E Revolutzon from above (Transactzon Books, 1978)

Honours and Diploma Topics

Conveners Dr JD E Plant (Honours) and Dr H S Leng (Diploma)

35450 POLITICS HONOURS THESIS

Umts 18 Level Honours Duration 1 year Pre requisite Honours standing

An essay of 15,000 to 18,000 words to be written under the supervision of a member of the staff of Poht1cs Honours theses must not exceed 20 000 words A penaltywtll be apphed for excessive length The thesis is to give evidence of students' ab1hltes m collectmg and evaluating information, constructing testmg and defendmg an argument or thesis, and cnttcally exam1n1ng the dominant theories in their area of enquiry Work in progress seminars are held in the first semester Students should choose a thesis topic and obtam the agreement of a member of staff to act as sup ems or before the end of the preVIous December

In 1991, supervISzon will be offered m the following sub1ect areas Austrahan Government and Poht1cs, International Pohhcs, Poht1cs of China,

519

School of Social Sciences

Austrahan Foreign Fahey, the Pohucs and Government of New Nations, Development Strategies Southeast Asian Pohhcs, American Poht1cs Selected Topics m Comparative Pohhcs and Government, Poht.Ical Theory, Urban Pohtics Pohtical Soc10logy, and Poht1cal Economy

35421 GENERAL PAPER AND READING COURSE Polztzcs Staff

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 10 one hour semmars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

35425 (52409) BIBLIOGRAPHIC STUDIES IN POLITICS (DIPLOMA TOPIC) Polztzcs Staff

Umts 12 Level Diploma In Social Sciences Duration By arrangement Pre requ1s1te Diploma 1n Social Sciences stand mg

Preparat10n by students of a cnt1cal b1bho graphical essay on a contemporary controversy in pohttcal studies, and the preparation of a cnhcal general survey of the recent hterature m one field of poht1cal studies With the express prior perm1ss1on of the D1sc1phne a research paper may be subsl!tuted

35403 (37407) THE CHINESE CULTURAL REVOLUTION Professor B Brugger

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An advanced topic for students who have already taken Politics or equivalent work on Chm a

520

35405 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS THE COLD WAR Dr JD E Plant

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An advanced topic for students who have already taken International Poht1cs

35408 (34402) STUDIES IN AMERICAN SOCIAL CRITICISM Dr D A DeBats and Dr G M Tobzn

Umts 6 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact 9 two hour seminars 1n the first semester, seminars as arranged and 1nd1VIdual supeI'Vlston 1n the second semester Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

For topic descnpt10n refer to topic 34401 Studies 1n Amencan Social Cnt1c1sm

35409 POLmCAL PHILOSOPHY Mr N Wzntrop

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic will be centred on ancient Greek pohtical thought

35416 (37403) (52402) ELITES IN SOUTHEAST ASIA DrH S Leng

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

A soc10/pohtical analysis of Southeast Asian elites Only the ASEAN countries are to be covered

35424 (52403) DEPENDENCY AND DEVELOPMENT Dr C Gertzel

Umts 6 Level Honours Durat10n To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour semmars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

A cr1t1cal revtew of contemporary theories of dependency and development

35427 STABILITY AND CHANGE IN CONTEMPORARY FRANCE Dr RA De Angelis

Not offered m 1991

35435 AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT ANDPOLmcs Dr D H faensch and Dr A Parkin

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour sermnars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An advanced examination of various aspects of the study of Australian government and politics While the mterests of students will influence the parllcular topics to be examined, the seminar may include cons1derahon of the party system, electoral behav10ur, State pollhcs1 1mm1grahon and ethnic affairs pohcy, cnmmal 1ustice policy, and the political impact of the mass media

35436 RECENT EUROPEAN SOCIAL AND POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY Dr N Porter

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

D1scuss1on of such problems as pubhc morahty and ratlonahty, meaning 1n history, language and community, and approaches to the human sciences, in relation to recent writings of theorists, such as Apel, Gadamer and Habermas

Polztzcs

35441 URBAN POLITICS AND PUBLIC POLICY Dr L R Orchard

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An explorat10n of the political soc10logy and pohtlcal economy of c1t1es, focusing in particular, on urban and housing issues and policies m Australia

35442 REVOLUTION AND INTERNATIONAL POLmcs Dr J Fitzpatrick

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An advanced topic for students interested in studying theoretical and emp1r1cal issues involved 1n contemporary revolutions, particularly in an international context

35445 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS THEORIES AND DEBATES Dr M Gnfftths

Umts 6 Level Honours Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An 1ntroductton to competing theoretical perspectives tn the study of 1nternat1onal politics The approach IS both h1stoncal and soc10logical The topic will trace the evolut10n of the field as an Anglo Amencan d1sc1plme, cnhcally exam1n1ng the 'great debates that have characterised its development between 1reahsm' and '1deahsm in the 1940s and 1950s, 'trad1tionahsm' and 1behaVIourahsm' 1n the 1960s, and the 'mterparad1gm' debate of the last ten years

Post graduate Studies

Convener (to be announced)

Students mterested m pursumg post graduate studies w1thm the D1sc1phne of Politics are

521

School of Social Sciences

advised to contact the Convener of Graduate Studies They should also consult the School of Social Sciences Higher Degree Student Handbook for details of necessary quah ficahons adm1ss1on procedures and so on The School of Sacral Sciences Higher Degrees Committee adm1msters the post graduate study programmes

Post graduate studies 1n Poht1cs may be pursued through three programmes the M A by thesis the M A by coursework and the Ph D by thesis The M A by thesis consists of a d1ssertatlon of not more than 60,000 words The Ph D consists of a d1ssertat10n of not more than 100,000 words

The MA by coursework consists of a pro gramme of 54 umts of topics Each student's programme must be approved by the Convener of Graduate Studies, who must be satisfied that the programme 1s of sufficient breadth and contains suff1c1ent theoretical content The programme shall consist of

I) One of the followmg topics Units

35500 MA Coursework Mmor Thesrs 12 or

35520 M A Coursework Ma1or Thesis or

35530 M A Coursework Pro1ect

18

12

II) The remammg umts shall be drawn from the followmg topics

522

a) 35511 M A Studies m Australian Government, Pohbcs and Pubhc Pohcy 6

35502 M A Studies m Austrahan Government Pohhcs and Pubhc Pohcy 12

35512 MA Studies m Austrahan Government, Pohhcs and Pubhc Pohcy 18

35513 (52522) M A Studies m

Comparative Poht1cs and Pohtrcal Socrology 6

35503 (52505) M A Studies m

Comparative Pohhcs and Pohtrcal Sociology 12

35514 MA Studies m Comparative Pohhcs and Poht1cal Socrology 18

35515 (52523) M A Studies m

Intematronal Relatrons and Development 6

35504 (52506) M A Studies m

International Relations and Development 12

35516 MA Studies m Intemat1onal Relations and Development 18

35507 M A Studies m Pohtrcal Theory 6

35501 MA Studies m Pohtrcal Theory 12

35508 M A Studies m Pohtrcal Theory 18

b) 35505 (52521) MA Studies m

Development Pohcy 6 35506 (52509) M A Studies m the

Poht1cs of Development 6 35509 (51507) Austrahan Government

and Pohtrcs 6 35517 (51506) Pubhc Pohcy 6 35518 (51532) Urban Plannmg, Housmg

and Pubhc Pohcy 6

c) Plus up to 12 umts of any other topics which from hme to hme, may, with the approval of the Convener of Graduate Studies, be drawn from other masters level topics of relevance to pohhcal studies or may involve the 1earmng of skills relevant to the student's prograr.ame (such as statistics, compuhng1 or a language)

III) Course descnpt10ns 35500, 35520, POLmcs M A COURSEWORK THESIS An essay under the superv1s1on of a member of staff of either, respectively, not more than 12 15,000 words (12 umts)

or 18 20,000 words (18 umts) The thesis will be examined by two examiners and the supervisor will not be an examiner

35530 MA COURSEWORK PROJECT An essay under the superv1s1on of a member of staff of not more than 12 15,000 words mtemally exammed by at least two staff members

35511, 35502, 35512 M A STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT, POLmcs AND PUBLIC POLICY This topic (whether at 6, 12 or 18 umts) involves both attendance at lectures and/ or seminars and complet1on of essays totallmg approXImately 6,000 (6 umts) 12,000 (12 umts) or 18 000 (18 umts) words dealmg with advanced studies of Austrahan government and pohtics and/ or pubhc pohcy Specific subjects may include the legislative, the executive, the Judiciary, the party system, political behaviour power, the pohcy-mak1ng process, organ1sat1onal theory, federahsm/state pohhcs, pohhcal economy

35513, 35503, 35514 M A STUDIES IN COMPARATIVE POLmcs AND POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY This topic involves both attendance at lectures and/ or seminars and the complet10n of essays totalhng approXImately 6,000 (6 umts), 12 000 (12 umts), and 18,000 (18 umts) words, relating to the government, society and pohtics of predommantly non Australian nation states Spectf1c topics and areas may include Western Europe, the Soviet Union and Eastern Europe, China, Africa, the United States, Southeast Asta, Northeast Asta, Leftist traditions, poht1cal sociology and revolutions

35515, 35504, 35516 M A STUDIES IN INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS AND DEVELOPMENT This topic mvolves both attendance at lectures and/or seminars and completion of essays totallmg approXImately 6,000 (6 umts), 12,000 (12 umts) and 18 000 (18 umts) words, deahng with the pohllcs and pohhcal economy of 1ntemat1onal

Psychology

relations, Austrahan foreign pohcy, and the pohllcal development of Third World countnes

35507 35501, 35508 M A STUDIES IN POLIDCAL THEORY This topic mvolves both attendance at lectures and/or seminars and completion of essays totallmg approXImately 6,000 (6 umts) 12,000 (12 uruts) and 18,000 (18 umts) words, relatmg to the study of pohttcal theory and pobllcal philosophy, especially the history of pohtlcal philosophy, democratic theory and problems m pohtical philosophy

Topics zn Psychology

General Information

The Basic Ma1or Sequence m Psychology

(The mformat1on that follows relates to the ma1or sequence tn Psychology for students enrolled m the Bachelor of Arts degree A programme of study m Psychology is also available for the Bachelor of Science degree Details of the Bachelor of Science programme In Psychology are set out in Statute 7 1, Schedules 4 and 28 )

To obtam a ma1or m Psychology towards a B A degree a student must complete the followmg work

Umts

36110 Psychology I, which is taught throughout the year 12

36230 Psychology II A Cognitive Approach 12

Twelve umts of third year level topics The available third year topics are

36331 Introduction to Psychopathology 3 36332 Human Motivation 3 36333 Development dunng Adulthood

andAgemg 3 36334 Orgamsat10nal Psychology I

(semester) 3 36335 Health Psychology (semester) 3 36336 Psychophysiology of Awareness 3 36337 Learning and Memory 3 36338 Cogn1t1ve Processes 3 36339 Psychophysiological Theory and

Measurement 3

023

School of Soc1al Sc1ences

Additional second year topics available are 36231 Phys10log1cal Basis of Behaviour 3 36232 Leammg Processes 36233 Study of Personahty

3

3 36234 Group and Collective Processes 3

Add1t10nal third year topics which cannot be counted toward the baste ma1or sequence are 36301 Research Methods 6 36318 Supervised Literature Review and

Research Pro1ect 6

All second year level Psychology topics have Psychology I as a pre-requ1s1te Pre requ1s1tes for third year level topics are hsted separately for each topic All pre requ1s1tes must be completed with a grade of C or better

Practical work ts an important component of all Psychology topics Usually second and third year 3-umt topics mvolve 9 14 hours of practical work the nature of this work varies from topic to topic and may mvolve laboratory work, group projects, demonstrations and v1s1ts to 1nstltutions

Honours Programme

Convener Dr E R Peay

Admiss10n to the Psychology Honours programme requires completion of

The 36 unit basic ma1or sequence in Psychology at the level set by the School of Social Sciences for entry to Honours

6 umt course 36301 Research Methods

Students who have not met these reqwrements but who wish to attempt Honours in Psychology should make special apphcallon to the Head of D1sc1plme

The Honours programme aims to provide a groundmg for students who will enter either the academic or profess10nal fields of psychology Completion of four years of study constitutes the basic academic requirement for membership of the profess10nal body the Austrahan Psychological Society Students are required to undertake the followmg programme

Units a) Topic 36440 Psychology Honours

Thes1S of approXImately 15,000 words 18 b) Honours Topics

(1) Students will take the topic

524

36401 Conceptual Foundat10ns of Psychology 6

(11) Students will also take three topics (4 umts each) selected from the hst of Psychology fourth year topics shown m the Honours Handbook

By arrangement this component may include one topic (4 umts) selected from the Honours programme m Psychology at the Umversity of Adelaide or Honours programmes in other D1sc1plmes at Flmders

Master of Psychology Programme

Convener Dr MM Wood

This course of study 1s offered on a two year full time basis Part-time arrangements can be considered Half of the academic year will be devoted to coursework and the conduct of an ong1nal research pro1ect The rema1n1ng time will be spent m supervised work at approved mslltut10ns to develop chmcal skills Expenence will be provided m both adult and ch!ld settmgs and also m the area of mtel lectual handicap when possible The aim of the course 1s to prepare graduates for professional work 1n a wide vanety of health care fac1hties as well as community welfare and correctional service settmgs

Students with an Honours I or Honours IIA m Psychology (or eqmvalent 4th year quahflcat10n) will be considered for acceptance Only a hm1ted number of places are available 1n each intake Intending students should consult the M Psych handbook for details of the programme as early as possible, as certain topic areas will be required before acceptance

/oznt Master of Psychology/Doctor of Philosophy

The 1omt M Psych /Ph D provides an mtegrated opt10n for students w1shmg to combine a postgraduate professional quahfJcat10n (the Master of Psychology) with a postgraduate research quahfJcat10n (the Doctor of Philosophy) m chmcal psychology With the approval of the School Board, students enrolled m the 1omt M Psych /Ph D programme undertake supervised chn1cal

practice m lieu of the 18 umt M Psych dtssertahon, and the two degrees are awarded simultaneously upon completion of the 1omt programme The doctoral thesis undertaken by such students ts completed in accordance with Statute 7 5 Schedule 1 Penmss10n to enter the M Psych /Ph D programme is normally based on a student's performance as determmed at the completion of Year I of the M Psych programme The mm1mum time for completion of the two degrees 1s four years of full time study The combmed M Psych /Ph D programme enables students to complete the two degrees concurrently, but does not preclude other students from undertakmg the two degrees sequentially

Fzrst Year Topics

36110 PSYCHOLOGY I Course co ordinator Mr f Crowley

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 two hour practical class per week Pre requ1s1te None However, the data analyses component of the course requires elementary maths skills

Students studymg psychology toward the B A degree take this course

Psychology aims to be the empmcal study of human behav10ur Behav10ur refers to the whole range of human activities both internal (mental events, emotions) and external (act10ns) An empmcal study of behav10ur requires a methodology which tests claims against data Statements about factors 1nfluenc1ng a particular behaviour must be based on rehable observahons and these findmgs must be generahsable The sub1ect matter will be treated first by descnbmg the ma1or aspects of human activity, personahty traits, motives, beliefs and attitudes, then the processes that give nse to these characteristics will be examined, learning, development and mformat10n processmg and fmally the phys10log1cal bases for these processes will be considered The ob1ect1ves of the course are to have students develop the followmg capab1hhes

Psychology

knowledge of facts and theoretical accounts 1n the content areas studied knowledge of procedures for des1gmng research and analysing data from research reasoning skills of analysis and evaluation for theory and research, academic skills of comprehending psychological text and wntmg clear and coherent prose

Set book Gle1tman, H Psychology, 2nd ed (Norton,

1986)*

Reference books Evans, P Motivation (Methuen, 1975)* Feather, NT, ed Australian psychology

review of research (Allen & Unwm, 1985)* Flavell, J H Cognitive development, 2nd ed

(Prentice Hall, 1985) Lazarus, RS and Monat A Personality 3rd

ed (Prentice Hall, 1979)* Mann, L Social psychology (Wiley, 1969)* McClelland, D C Human motivation (Scott

Foresman, 1985) McGurk, H Growing and changing

(Methuen, 1975)* Ornstein R and Thompson, R F The amazzng

brain (Houghton M1fflm, 1984) Rachlm H Introductzon to modern

behaviourism (Freeman 1970)* Rosenzweig, M R and Le1man, A L

Physzological psychology (Heath, 1982) Vasta, R Studyzng chzldren an introduction

to research methods (Freeman, 1979)

36120 PSYCHOLOGY IS Mr f Crowley

Umts 9 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 two hour practical class per week Pre requisite None

Students studymg m the fmt year of the B Sc take this course as part fulfillment of the Schedule 4 reqmrements for that degree

Psychology IS has the same content and ob1ectives as Psychology I with the exception that prachcal (laboratory) work has a heavier we1ghtmg and pro1ect work has no we1ghtmg in the assessment requirements

525

School of Social Sciences

Second Year Topics

36230 PSYCHOLOGY II A COGMTIVE APPROACH Course co ordinator Dr ER Peay

Umts 12 Level Second year Duratrnn Full year Class Contact 2 hours of lectures per week and a total of 56 hours of prac!Ical/tutonal work Pre reqms1te 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS at a grade of C or better

This ts the second year core course in Psychology, reqmred of all students ma1onng m the sub1ect It deals with some of the central subject areas m contemporary psychology and includes sequences on cogn1hve psychology, human development, cogn1hve social psycho­logy, and methodology It 1s constructed around a unrlied v1ewpo1nt, which emphasises the cogn1hve and 1nformahon processing capab1hhes and act1v1hes of humans

Set books Berk, L Child development (Allyn & Bacon,

1989)* Best, J B Cognitive psychology (West, 1986) Fiske, S T and Taylor, S G Social cognztzon

(Random House, 1984)* Shavelson, R J Statistical reasoning for the

behavwral sciences, 2nd ed (1988)*

36231 PHYSIOLOGICAL BASIS OF BEHAVIOUR Dr LC Lack

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 hour lecture per week and a total of 14 hours of prac!Ical work Pre reqms1te 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS with a grade of C or better

This topic will be an mtroductrnn to the baste btology and physiology relevant to the study of behaviour It will include an 1ntroduction to sensory and motor systems, neuro chemical mechanisms neural integration and brain functrnn The topic 1s designed as a basis for the phys10log1cal understanding of perceptton, motor performance, mohvat1on, learning, memory, emotion, and states of awareness

526

Set book Carlson, N R Physwlogy of behavwr, 3rd ed

(Allyn & Bacon, 1986)

Reference books Bloom FE Lazerson A and Hotstader, L

Brazn1 mind and behaviour (Freeman, 1985)

Grossman, S P A textbook of physwlogzcal psychology (Wiiey, 1967)

Kalal, J W Bwlogical psychology 3rd ed (Wadsworth, 1988)

Kolb, B and Wh1shaw, IQ Fundamentals of human neuropsychology (Freeman, 1980)

Levmthal, C F The physwlogical approach m psychology (Prentice Hall, 1979)

Rosenzweig, M R and Le1man A L Physwlogical psychology (Heath, 1982)

36232 LEARNING PROCESSES Dr CL Hart

Umts 3 Level Sec..ond year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 hour lecture per week and a total of 9 hours of prac!Ical work Pre reqms1te 36110 Psychology I or 36210 Psychology IS with a grade of C or better

This topic 1s the first in a two course sequence of theoretical and applied research 1n learning This course examines the theoretical research 1n classical and instrumental cond1tton1ng This mcludes the Rescorla Wagner model of Pavlovian conditioning, compound cue learning, schedule of reinforcement effects d1scr1m1nat1on learning generalisation and transfer This literature will be examined in relation to everyday human problems and students will discuss its 1mphcat1ons for behaviour mod1f1cation procedures used to improve human behav10ur through technolog1es of teachmg and improved motivational consequences

Text book Klein, S B Learnzng principles and

applicatwns (McGraw-Hill, 1987)*

Reference books Publzcatwn manual of the American

Psychological Associatwn, 3rd ed (Amencan Psychological Associat10n, 1984)

Black, AH and Prokasy, W F Classical condztzonzng II current research and theory (Appleton Century Crofts, 1972)

Bolles, R C Learning theory (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1975)

Gray j A Elements of a two process theory of learning (Academic, 1975)

Hall, j F Classical conditioning and znstrumental learning a contemporary approach (Lippincott, 1976)

Hintzman, D L The psychology of learning and memory (Freeman, 1978)

Honig, W I( Operant behaviour areas of research and appltcatwn (Appleton Century Crofts 1966)

Homg, WK and James, PH R Ammal memory (Academic, 1971)

Marx, M H and Bunch, M E Fundamentals and appltcatzons of learning (Macmillan 1977)

Restle, F Learning anzmal behaviour and human cogmtzon (McGraw Hiii, 1975)

Schwartz B Psychology of learning and behavzour (Norton, 1978)

36233 STUDY OF PERSONALITY Dr M Tiggemann

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact I lecture per week and a total of 9 hours of practtcal/tutonal work Pre reqms1te 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS with a grade of C or better

This topic will place pnmary emphasis on ma1or theories of personahty structure and dynamics, together with an exam1nat1on of related empmcal findings

Text book To be announced

Reference books Babladehs G The study of personality (Holt,

Rinehart & Winston, 1984) Bavelas, j P Personality current theory and

research (Brooks/Cole 1978) Liebert, RM and Spiegler, MD Personality

strategies and issues (Dorsey, 1982)

Psychology

36234 GROUP AND COLLECTIVE PROCESSES Professor L Mann and Dr GE O'Brien

Not offered in 1991

Umts 3 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact ! lecture per week and a total of 9 hours of practtcal/tutonal work Pre reqmsite 36110 or 36120 at a grade of C or better

How does membership in groups affect the behefs and behav10ur of ind1v1duals? This topic exammes ho\v social processes, including confonn1ty, commun1catlon, dec1s1on making, leadership co operation and compet1t1on operate in various groups - such as the family, work groups, policy making groups, treatment groups to mfluence the behav10ur of members

Reference books Brown, R Group processes dynamics wzthzn

and between groups (Blackwell, 1988) Deaux, K and Wrightsman, L Social

psychology 5th ed (Brooks/Cole 1988) Grune berg, M and Wall, T Sacral psychology

and organizational behaviour (Wiley, 1984)

Myers, D G Sacral psychology, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1990)

Thrrd Year Topics

36301 RESEARCH METIIODS Course Co ordinator Dr ER Peay

Units 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requisite 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS, 36230 Psychology II A Cogmttve Approach, with a grade of C or better

Intended as an mtroduct10n for students cons1denng Honours In Psychology, th1s topic is oes1gned to provide students with the basic skills needed to carry out research In Psychology Students will gam experience m formulating problems for research, generating hypotheses, des1gn1ng experiments, question na1res and interview schedules and analysing

527

School of Social Sciences

and 1nterpret1ng data, 1nclud1ng the use of computensed stahst1cal packages It is a formal pre requisite for entry into Honours

Set book To be adVIsed

Reference books Keppel, G Design and analysis a

researcher's handbook, 2nd ed (Prenttce­Hall, 1982)

Norusis, M J SPSS x advanced stat1st1cs guide, 2nd ed (SPSS Inc 1988)

SPSS Inc SPSS X user's guide, 3rd ed (SPSS Inc, 1987)

Warn'lck, DP and Lmmger, CA The sample survey theory and practice (McGraw Hill, 1975)

36318 SUPERVISED LITERATURE REVIEW AND RESEARCH PROJECT DrM A Luszcz

Not offered m 1991

36331 INTRODUCTION TO PSYCHOPATHOLOGY DrMM Wood

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture plus a 11/i hour seminar per week 1n a Psychiatric hospital Pre reqmsites 36110 or 36120, and 36230 Psychology II A Cogmttve Approach all With a grade of C or better

This topic will involve cons1derahons of the concepts of normahty and abnorrnahty, class1f1catory concepts, and the nature of mental disorder It Wiii deal WI th theories of aetiology, structure, and prognosis of mental disorder and other forms of devtance, taking account of b10logical, psychological and socrnlogical data

Set book DaVIson, G L and Neale, JM Abnormal

psychology (Wiley 1986)

Reference book Costm, F and Draguns, JG Abnormal

psychology (Wiley 1989)

528

Hooley, JM, Neale, JM and DaVIson, G Readings m abnormal psychology (Wiley, 1989)

Meyer R G and Salmon, P Abnormal psychology, 2nd ed (Allyn & Bacon 1988)

36332 HUMAN MOTIVATION Professor N T Feather

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week for 8 weeks, 1 hour practtcal for 10 weeks Pre reqmsites 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS, 36230 Psychology II A Cogmttve Approach, all with a grade of C or better, or by perm1ss1on of instructor

An analysis of recent approaches to the systematic 1 study of human mot1vat1on Cognitive theones are emphasised, including expectancy value theory and attnbut10n theory A practical proiect mvolvmg the class as a whole will be conducted Theories will be applied to the analysis of the psychological impact of unemployment

Set book Feather, NT The psychological impact of

unemployment (Sprmger Verlag 1990)

Reference books Arkes H R, and Garske, J P Psychological

theories of motzvatzon (Brooks/Cole 1982)

Atkmson, J W and Birch D lntroductzon to motzvatzon 2nd ed (Van Nostrand, 1978)

Atkmson, ) W and Feather, N T A theory of achievement motzvatzon (Wiley, 1966)

Atkmson, J W and Raynor, ) 0 Motzvatzon and achievement (Wiley, 1974)

Beck, R C M otzvatzon theories and principles (Pren!tce-Hall, 1978)

Brody, N Human fflotzvatzon commentary on goal directed actzon (Academic, 1983)

Feather, NT Values zn education and society (Free Pr , 1975)

Feather, NT Expectations and actzons expectancy value models m psychology (Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1982)

Feather, NT Australian psychology review of research (Allen & Unwm, 1985)

Franken R E Human motzvatzon (Brooks/ Cole, 1982)

Green R G , Beatty WW and Arkm, R M Human motivation physzologzcal, behavioural and social approaches (Allyn & Bacon, 1984)

McClelland DC Human motzvatzon (Scott Foresman 1985)

Weiner B Human motivation (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1980)

36333 DEVELOPMENT DURING ADULTHOOD AND AGEING Dr MA Luszcz

Umts 3 Level Thlfd year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 hour lecture per week and up to 14 hours of practical work Pre reqmsites 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS and 36230 Psychology II A Cogmttve Approach each with a grade of C or better

This topic wdl provide a cntlcal survey of selected areas of development occurring during adulthood and ageing A hfe span onentation will be followed and emphasis will be placed on cognitive, ind1v1dual and interpersonal development Consideration of possible gender differences within domains and across time periods will be an mtegral part of the topic

Set book Cavanaugh, J C Adult development and

ageing (Nelson, 1990)

Reference books Cunningham, W R and Brookbank, J W

Gerontology the psychology, bzology, and soczology of aging (Harper and Row 1988)

Perlmutter, H and Hall, E Adult development and aging (Wiley 1985)

Rybash, J M , Hoyer, W J and Roodin, PA Adult cognztzon and ageing (Pergamon, 1986)

Salthouse, TA Adult cognztzon an experimental psychology of human ageing (Springer Verlag, 1982)

Psychology

36334 ORGANISATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY I Dr GE 0 Brien

Umts 3 Level Thlfd year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture per week and a total of 9 hours of practical/tutorial work Pre reqmsites 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS and 36230 Psychology II A Cogmttve Approach, each with a grade of C or better

This topic exammes the effect of orgamsat10nal structure and 1ob content upon employee behaviour Specific topics will be selected from

a) Perceptions of the meaning of work b) Reciprocal effects of ]Ob experience and

psychological functtonmg c) Theories of 1ob sallsfact10n and 1ob design d) The relat10nsh1ps between work health

and leisure e) Psychological effects of unemployment

Prelzmznary reading Terkel, S Working (Penguin, 1977)

Set book O'Brien G E The psychology of work and

unemployment (Wiley, 1986)

Reference books Reading hsts will be issued at the beginning of the course

36335 HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY Mr EA Cleland

Umts 3 Level Thlfd year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 hour lecture plus a total of 9 hours of tutorial/practtcal sess10ns Pre reqms1tes 36110 Psychology I, or 36120 Psychology IS 36230 Psychology II A Cognitive Approach, each at a grade of C or better, 36232 Learning Processes is strongly recommended

Health Psychology 1s an mter disciplmary field which integrates techmques and knowledge derived from both behavioural and b10medical science The aim of the field is to promote a greater understanding of health and illness

529

School of Social Sciences

and to apply this knowledge and associated techniques to prevention, d1agnos1s, treatment and rehab1htation This course covers some of the basic concepts of health psychology behav10ural ep1dem10logy, learnmg and cond1t10nmg, b10feedback, and self management The techmques and methods which charactense the field along with representative appltcations are discussed in lectures and tutorials

Set book Gatchell R) , Baum, A and Kranz, D S An

introduction to health psychology, 2nd ed (Random House 1989)

Reference books Bloom, BL Health psychology (Prentice

Hall 1988) Kmg, N) and Remeny1 A Health care a

behavioural approach (Harcourt Brace & )ovanoVlch, 1986)

Morton, R F and Hebel,) R A study guide to epidemiology and biostatistics, 2nd ed (Umvers1ty Park, 1984)

Pomerleau Q F and Brady ) P , eds Behavioural medicine theory and practice (Wilhams & Wdkms, 1979)

36336 PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY OF AWARENESS Dr L C Lack

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 hour lecture per week and a total of 14 hours of practical work Pre reqms1tes 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS and 36206 Phys10logical Psychology or 36231 Phys10logical BaSls of Behaviour at a grade of C or better

ThlS topic wdl dlScuss the psychophys10logical measures and the underlymg phys10logy associated with all levels of arousal and consciousness with a concentration on the phenomena of b10logical rhythms, sleep and dreaming Other specific topics to be discussed will mclude the phys10logy of arousal attention, med1tat1on, hypnosis, and b10feedback

Text books Anch, AM et al Sleep a scientific

perspectzve (Prentice Hall, 1988)

530

Hassett, ) A primer of psychophysiology (Freeman, 1978)

Webb W B Sleep the gentle tyrant (Prentice Hall, 1975)

Reference books Bowers, K S Hypnosis for the seriously

curious (Brooks/Cole, 1976) Brown, B B , ed The biofeedback syllabus

(Charles C Thomas, 1975) Cartwnght, R D Night life explorations zn

dreaming (Prentice Hall 1977) Greenfield, N S and Sternbach, RA , eds

Handbook of psychophysiology (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1972)

Kamiya, J et al , eds Bio feedback and self control an Aldzne reader on the regulations of bodily processes and consciousness (Aldme Atherton, 1971)

Kanellakos, D P and Lukas, J S The psycho bzology of transcendental meditation a literature review (Ben1amm, 1974)

Luce, G G Bzologzcal rhythms zn human and animal physiology (Dover, 1971)

MavromatlS, A Hypnagogza (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1987)

MeddlS, R The sleep znstznct (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1977)

Ornstein, RE , ed The nature of human consciousness (Freeman 1973)

Tart, CT Altered states of consciousness (Wiley, 1969)

Venables, P H and Chr1st1e, M ] , eds Research zn psychophysiology (Wiley 1975)

36337 LEARNING AND MEMORY Dr M Tiggemann

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 hour lecture per week and a total of 9 hours practical work Pre reqmSites 36110 Psychology I or 36120 Psychology IS 36230 Psychology II A Cogm!tve Approach and 36232 Learnmg Processes each with a grade of C or better

This topic is the second learning course This one will examine the theoretical research 1nvest1gat1ng how humans learn baste information and motor skills This will include basic d1scnminat1on learning, rote memory tasks, memory for meaningful prose, the acqu1s1tion ofbas1c concepts and rule governed

behaVIours, and transfer of past learning to the acqmS1t10n of skills m the future This topic will also examine the difference between acquiring new 1nformat1on (learning) and retammg it for use m the future (memory) Dunng the last part of the topic each student will be required to design, run, analyse, and wnte up the results of an experiment in standard 1oumal article style Although the topic 36301 Research Methods is not a pre requ1s1te for this topic, 1t is recommended

Text book Klem, S B Learning principles and

appllcatzons (McGraw Hill, 1987)*

Reference books Publication manual of the American

Psychological Association, 3rd ed (Amencan Psychological Assoc 1984)

Gagne, RM The conditions of learning (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1985)

Houston, J P Fundamentals of leamzng and memory, 3rd ed (Harcourt, 1986)

36338 COGNITIVE PROCESSES Dr CR Clark

Units 3 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 hour lecture per week and a total of 9 14 hours of pracllcal work Pre-requlSlte 36230 Psychology II A Cogmllve Approach with a grade of C or better

This topic will study human performance and cogn1hon Cognitive and cybernetic models of behav10ur will be discussed An attempt will be made to relate the concepts to pracl!cal issues of the tra1n1ng and learning of a wide vanety of skills A laboratory programme is used to measure and evaluate skills and cognition

Set book To be advised

Reference books Annett, J et al Human znformation

processing, 2 vols (Open UP, 1974) Arb1b M A Brains, machines and mathematics,

2nd ed (Spnnger-Verlag, 1987) Best, J B Cognztzve psychology (West, 1989) Kelso, J A S Human motor behaviour an

zntroductzon (Erlbaum, 1982)

Psychology

Posner, M I Chronometric explorations of mznd (Erlbaum, 1978)

Posner, M I Foundations of cognitive sczence (MIT/Cambridge, 1989)

Regan D Human brazn electrophyszology (Elsevier 1989)

Stillmgs, N A et al Cognztzve science an zntroductzon (MIT/Bradford, 1987)

36339 PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGICAL THEORY & MEASUREMENT Dr C R Clark and Dr I Lack

Umts 3 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 14 lectures a11d 9 14 hours Practical Class Pre reqmsite 36230 Psychology II Co requisite 36336 States of Awareness or 36338 Cogmllve Processes

A range of psychophys1olog1cal measures will be considered with respect to their theoretical bases and pracl!cal apphcat10n m the study of normal cogml!ve state and funct10n and to the study of abnormal cogmt10n followmg disease or drugs Particular attention will be paid to the source and denvahon of brainwaves' using electroencephalographic (EEG) recording methods and to analytical techniques such as event-related potenl!als (ERPs) and power spectral analysis using microcomputers Other psychophys10logical measures considered will include electrodermal act1v1ty, electro myography electro oculography, resp1rahon, heart rate, body temperature and mol!hty

Set book Andreassi, J L Psychophyszology human

behavzor and physzological response, 2nd ed (Lawrence Erlbaum, 1989)

Reference books Handbooks of Electroencephalography and

Chmcal Neurophys10logy vol 1 Methods of analysis of bram electrical

and magnetic szgnals eds Gev1ns, A S and Remand, A (Elsevier 1987),

vol 2, Clznzcal applications of computer analysis of EEG and other neuro physiological signals eds Lopes da Silva, F H , Storm van Leeuwen, W and Remand, A (Elsevier, 1986)

Regan, D Human bram electrophyszology (Elsevier, 1989)

531

School of Soczal Sciences

Honours Topics

36401 CONCEPTUAL FOUNDATIONS OF PSYCHOLOGY Mr] R Crowley and Dr ER Peay

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 14 two hour semmars Pre requ1s1te Honours status

The topic will first mtroduce some of the general accounts of the nature of progress in sc1ent1f1c 1nqu1ry (e g 1nductiv1sm, fals1f1 catlon1sm and research programmes) so as to evaluate examples of current research and theory development m psychology

Then the special status of psychology as the study of human behaviour will be exammed lntent10nahty and attempts to produce computer models of mtenhonal behav10ur will be treated Consideration will be given to the prospects for reductive explanations of human behav10ur, both phys10log1cal and behav1our1st

Reference books Chalmers, A F What is this thmg called

science? (Queensland UP, 1982)* Chaplm, J P and Krawiec, T S Systems and

theories of psychology, 4th ed (Holt Rmehart & Wmston 1979)

Haugeland J ed Mmd design (MIT Pr, 1981)* Kaplan, A The conduct of inquiry (Chandler,

1964)*

36440 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS THESIS

Umts 18

Students will design and carry out an independent emp1ncal 1nvestigation and report their fmdmgs ma thesis approX!mately 15,000 words m length

The development of research design should begm early m February so that a proposal givmg detatls of hypotheses, procedures and methods of analysis can be presented for cons1derat.J.on by a corruruttee of staff early m March

The completed thesis 1s submitted at the end of the second semester

Detalis on the 4 umt topics avaliable can be obtamed from the Secretary of the Psychology D1sc1plme

532

Master of Psychology (Chmcal) Students are referred to Schedule 4 of Statute 7 3

Master of Psychology (Educational) Students are referred to Schedule 4A of Statute 7 3

36521 COUNSELLING THEORIES AND PRACTICE Dr L Kapelzs

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

These seminars are designed to provide students with a fundamental understandmg and competence m the use of those skills which form the bmldmg blocks of psychological counsellmg and therapeutic mtervenhons Students will become fam1har with the maior theoretical approaches and will gain some practical experience Video and aud10 recordmg and playback will be used extensively throughout the course

Set books Egan, G The skilled helper 3rd ed (Brooks/

Cole, 1986) Garfield, SL and Bergm, A E, eds Handbook

of psychotherapy and behavwur change, 3rd ed (Wiley, 1986)

Ivey, A E and Auth1er, J Mzcrocounselling, 2nd ed (Thomas, 1978)

Ivey A E Intentional znterv1ewzng and counselling, 2nd ed (Brooks/Cole, 1988)

Mahoney, M J Human change processes notes on the facilitation of personal development (Basic Books, 1989)

36526 CLINICAL NEUROPSYCHOLOGY Professor G Geffen

To be taught m 1992

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or eqmvalent m Psychology

This topic addresses the role of the neuro

psychologist in the assessment and rehab1ht­at10n of chents with disorders of bram funct10nmg due to disease or accident The nature of dysfunction following degenerative neurological disorders will be contrasted with acute onset due to trauma or c1rculahon disorders Anatomy of the central nervous system as well as contemporary information processing views of basic cognitive functions will be taught Neuropsycholog1cal assessment will be taught in the context of its purpose, e g prior to neurosurgery to reheve focal ep!lepsy or for determmmg the structure of a rehabihtat10n programme after bram m1ury There will be a practical component 1nvolv1ng assessment, recommendation and presentation of cases by each student

Text books Elhs AW and Young, AW Human cogmtzve

neuropsychology (Lawrence Erlbaum Assoc, 1988)

Kolb B and Whishaw, I Q Fundamentals of human neuropsychology, 3rd ed (W H Freeman 1990)

Reference books Filskov, S B and Boll, T J eds Handbook of

cl1mcal neuropsychology (Wiley 1981) Lezak MD Neuropsycholog1cal assessment

2nd ed (Oxford U P , 1983) Luna A The neuropsychology of memory

(Wmston W!ley, 1976) Pngatano, GP Neuropsycholog1cal rehab1l1t

atron after brain rn7ury Oohn Hopkms, 1986)

Uzzell, BP and Gross, Y, eds Clznzcal neuropsychology of rnterventzon (Martmms Ni1hoff, 1986)

36528 COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY Mr EA Cleland

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or eqmvalent m Psychology

Commumty Psychology has been descnbed as the third mental health revolut10n where aet10logy and treatment of 'ill health' are located at a commumty level with an emphasis on prevention rather than cure The Commumty Psychologist typically works as a

Psychology

consultant to non professionals whose aims are to produce health promotmg enV!ron ments The general area of Commumty Psychology is mtroduced m this course The emphasis, however, 1s on the investigation of community needs and on the evaluation of community based programmes Current community programmes in South Australia will be discussed

Prelzmmary reading Korchm, S j Modern clinical psychology

prznczples of intervention zn the clinic and community (Basic Buoks, 1976)

Reference books Cronbach, L j Des1gmng evaluatrons of

educational and soczal programs Oossey Bass, 1982)

Heller, K K and Monahan, j Psychology and community change (Dorsey, 1977)

Rappaport, j Community psychology values research and action (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston 1977)

36534 CLINICAL HYPNOSIS Dr L Kapelis

Umts 4 Level Masters Durat10n Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

This topic aims to instruct students 1n the theory and techniques of hypnosis, m order to enable them to attam a level of proficiency so that they can incorporate hypnosis in the treatment of medical and psychological disorders encountered in a vanety of settings The format will be a small step approach proceedmg systemallcally from the language of hypnosis to 1nduchon practice, deepening alerting and therapeutic suggestions, leading to treatment work With chents

Preliminary reading Bowers, KS Hypnosis for the serzously

curzous (Norton, 1983) Sheehan, PW and Mcconkey K H Hypnosis

and expenence (Erlbaum, 1982)

Reference books Clarke, j C and Jackson, j R Hypnosis and

behavwur therapy (Sprmger, 1983)

533

School of Social Sciences

Crasilneck H B and Hall, J A Clinical hypnosis principles and applicatzons, 2nd ed (Grune & Stratton, 1985)

Gardner, G G and Olness, K Hypnosis and hypnotherapy with children (Grune & Stratton, 1981)

Hllgard E R Hypnosis m the relief of pam, 2nd ed (Kaufmann, 1983)

Hilgard, E R Divided consczousness 2nd ed (Wiley 1986)

Kroger W S and Fezler, W D Hypnosis and behaviour modzfzcatzon imagery conditzonzng (Lippmcott, 1976)

Sheehan, PW and Perry, C W Methodologies of hypnosis (Erlbaum, 1976)

Udolf R Handbook of hypnosis for professzonals, 2nd ed (Van Nostrand Remholt 1987)

36536 PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT DrMM Wood

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

A series of seminars and demonstrations covenng the main areas of 1nvesttgatlon of abnormal psychological states The chief types of psychological deficit will be outlmed, and followed by coverage of the techmques avatlable for their assessment 1n cltn1cal and experimental settings Subject matter wtll include disorders of affect, th1nk1ng, memory mtelhgence, language, personality and the evaluat10n of psychotherapy, Standardised tests, psychomotor and psychophys10logical measures and gnd techniques will be considered as tools

Set book To be announced

Recommended readrng AnastaSl A Psychological testing

(Macmillan, 1982) Barlow, D H Behavioural assessment of

adult disorders (Gmlford Pr, 1981)

534

Ley, P Quantitative aspects of psychological assessment (Duckworth, 1972)

McReynolds, P, ed Advances m psycho/ ogzcal assessment vols, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Mittler, P The psychological assessment of mental and physzcal handicap (Methuen, 1974)

Nunnally, J C Psychometric theory (McGraw Hill 1978)

Tyler, L E and Walsh W B Tests and measurements (Prenllce Hall, 1978)

Wemer, I B Clinical methods zn psychology (Wiley, 1976)

Wolman, BJ, ed Clinical diagnosis of mental disorders (Plenum Pr, 1978)

36540 M PSYCH (ED & CLIN) DISSERTATION Clinical Lecturing Staff

Units 18 Level Masters Duration First and second year Pre requ1s1te Honours Degree or equivalent m Psychology

An ong1nal piece of work conducted in an apphed settmg It may take the form of an experiment or a survey A topic area must be 1denllfied m the first year with the hypotheses, method and background prepared m the second semester It is expected that data collect10n will be commenced durmg the long vacat10n The completed work should be comparable to an Honours dissertation and should be completed by the end of the second semester of the second year according to the spec1ficatlons noted 1n the Statute

36541/36542/36543 PRACTICUM Clinical Lecturing Staff

Umts 6 (total 18) Level Masters Durat10n See below Class Contact 6 sess10ns per week

Students will work for 3 days per week m the second semester of the first year and for three days per week for both semesters of the second year of the course Workshops may be arranged dunng the semester in order to gain more experience 1n spec1altsed areas

In the first year a student enrols for 36541 and m the second year 36542 and 36543

36544 REHABILITATION Dr C Hart and Dr MM Wood

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

The topic 1s aimed at covering the main issues related to the rehabihtat10n of the mtellectually handicapped and the bram miured The topics covered will include a h1stoncal ovemew as well as treatment trends and future d1rectlons The issues of normahsahon, functional skills tra1n1ng (commun1cat1on, ambulation, totlett1ng, feeding dressing) enVIronmental design social, vocational and recreational tra1n1ng Recent advances in cogn1t1ve tra1n1ng and the trammg of specific def1c1ts such as visual inattention, will be reviewed

Set book To be announced

Reference books Bach y Rita P , ed Recovery of functzon

theoretical considerations for brazn zn7ury rehabil1tatzon (Hans Huber 1980)

Bishop, D S Behavioural problems and the disabled assessment and management (Williams & W!lkms, 1980)

Boyd, R Children handicapped in language (NSW U P 1980)

Flynn R V and Nitsch K E , eds Normalzsatzon, social zntegratzon and community services (Un1vers1ty Park Pr , 1980)

Granger, V C and Gresham G E , eds Functional assessment zn rehabzlztatzon medicine (Williams & Wilkms, 1984)

Gnffln, MW and Hudson, A Parents as therapists the behavzoural approach (Evans, Methuen Educat10nal 1979)

Ince, L P Behavzoural psychology rn rehabilitatzon medicine clinical applicatzons (Williams & W1lkms, 1980)

LeVIn, H S , Grafman J and Eisenberg, H M Neurobehavzoural recovery from head m7ury (Oxford U P , 1987)

Ne1sworth, J and Smith, M , eds Retardation zssues assessment and znterventzon (McGrawHlll, 1978)

Psychology

Pr1gatano 1 G Neuropsychologzcal rehabzlztatzon after brazn zn1ury (John Hopkms UP 1986)

Schiefelbusch, R L ed Non speech, language and communzcatzon analysis and mterventzon (Umversity Park Pr 1980)

Uzzell BP and Gross, Y, ed Clmicalneuro psychology of interventzon (Martmus Niihoff, 1986)

36547 CURRENT TRENDS IN CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY Mr E Cleland and Dr L Lack

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

A series of seminars on current trends in chmcal psychology will be presented, m relation to the 1mpltcat1ons of such trends for approaches to chmcal practice Topics to be presented may include gnef counselhng rape child sexual abuse, domestic violence, substance abuse, sleep disorders, stress management, sexual counselling, su1c1de, adolescence and youth issues, treatment for obsessive compulsives, social skills with adults, and gerontology Also to be mcluded is a forum on the changmg role of the chmcal psychologist Semmars will be presented by practitioners acknowledged as experts in these areas The topics to be emphasised in any one year may be ascertained from the topic conveners

Reference books and 1ournals Crandall, RC Gerontology (Random House,

1980) Groth, AN Men who rape (Plenum 1981) Journal of Consulting and Clinical

Psychology Kryger, M H , Roth T and Dement, W C

Prznczples and practzce of sleep medzczne (Saunders 1989)

Nixon, M and Taft R, eds Psychology in Australia achievements and prospects (Pergamon, 1977)

Russell, D E Rape in marriage (Macmillan, 1982)

The counseling psychologist Worden, j W Grief counselling (Sprmger

1982)

535

School of Social Sciences

36548 SMALL COMPUTERS IN HUMAN SERVICE ORGANISATIONS Dr CL Hart

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

This topic will mtroduce the use of m1crocomputers in human service organ1sat1ons w1th1n six problem areas (1) word processmg (2) the use of critical path analysis to plan and manage mdividual therapy programmes, (3) the use of computer spreadsheets to create data sheets, then record and summarise data onlme, (4) the use of computer graphing to record, summarise and evaluate the results of therapy, (5) the use of database management to store chent records, sort and summanse them and to prepare predictions of future chent needs, and (6) the use of computer aided 1nstruchon 1nvolv1ng trad1tlonal dnll and-practice programmes, as well as s1mulation and the use of productIVIty tools as teachmg and promptmg devices

The course will meet once a week for 3 hours Students will see the problem demonstrated, then hear a lecture, and will finish by d1scuss1ng how a computer system could be adapted to smt a particular example

Ownership of a small computer, although not a pre-requ1s1te for this course 1s certainly demable

Reference books Apple Computer Co Appleworks reference

manual (Cupertmo 1984) Apple Computer Co MacPro7ect znstructzonal

manual (Cupertmo, 1984) Apple Computer Co MacWrzte reference

manual (Cupertmo, 1984) Apple Computer Co The shell games

(Cupertmo, 1984) Carpenter, J, Delona D and Morganste1n, D

Stat1stlcal software for microcomputers Byte1

Apnl, 1984, Vol 9, No 4, pages 234 264 Cobb, D F, EXCEL zn business (Microsoft Pr

1985) Hersen, M and Barlow, D H Szngle case

experimental designs strategies for studying behavior change, 2nd ed (Pergamon, 1984)

536

Lang, D W Critical path analysis (Teach Yourself Books, 1970)

Levm, R I and Klrkpatnck, C A Planning and control with PERTICPM (McGraw Hill, 1966)

Peters, T J and Waterman R H , Jr In search of excellence lessons from America's best run companies (Warner, 1984)

Sprouster J TOG total quality control the Australian experience (Castle Books, 1984)

36551 ESSENTIALS OF BEHAVIOUR MODIFICATION Instructor to be announced

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

Behav10ur modlficat10n (or behaviour therapy) 1s undoubtedly the predominant approach' of contemporary chmcal psychology It would be misleadmg, however to imply that behaviour mod1f1catton represents a unitary set of pr1nc1ples and practices While always attemptmg to be broadly encompassmg, the field of behav10ur modificat10n has expenenced exponential growth over the past two decades or so Hence contemporary behaviour mod1f1cation consists of a rich diversity of theory and apphcat10n concernmg a vast array of problems of human health and welfare

This topic attempts to impart an appreciation of and a commitment to the theoretical traditions of behaviour mod1fication and a working knowledge of the principal areas of appltcatton

Essentials of Behav10ur Modificat10n will review the ma1or theoretical perspectives of contemporary behaviour modif1cat1on, including respondent, operant, and social learning theories, cognitive models, and, especially, principles of apphed behav10ur analysis A prmcipal objective will be to assist students to develop essential skills and knowledge as preparation for the first placement in the second semester Single subject experimental design will also be

considered m some depth such that by the end of the course students will be expected to be able to evaluate their own effectiveness as therapists

Set text

To be announced

Selected texts

Barlow, DH Hayes SC and Nelson R 0 The scientist practitioner research and accountabzlzty zn clznzcal and educational settings (Pergamon, 1984)

Barlow, D H and Hersen, M Szngle case experimental designs strategies for studying behavior changes, 2nd ed (Pergamon, 1984)

Bellack A S Hersen, M and Kazdm, A E , eds Internatzonal handbook of behavzour modifzcatzon and therapy (Plenum 1982)

Craighead, W E , Kazdm, A E and Mahoney M J Behavzour modifzcatzon pr1nczples1 issues and appl1catzons, 2nd ed (Houghton Mifflm, 1982)

Franks CM 1 ed New developments zn behaviour therapy from research to clznzcal applzcatzon (Harworth Pr, 1984)

Hersen, M , ed Outpatient behavior therapy a clinical guide (Grune & Stratton, 1983)

Hersen, M and Turner, S M, eds Dzagnostzc interviewing (Plenum 1985)

Kaplan, S J The private practice of behavzor therapy (Plenum 1986)

Kazd1n, A E Single case research designs methods for empmcal and applied settings (Oxford U P 1982)

Kazd1n, A E Behavior modzfzcatzon zn applied settings, 3rd ed (Dorsey, 1984)

Matson, J L and D1 Lorenzo, TM Punishment and zts alternatives a new perspective for behavzor modzficatzon (Sprmger, 1984)

Rosenbaum, M et al Perspectzves on behavzor therapy in the eighties (Spnnger, 1983)

Sulzer Azaroff, B and Mayer, G R Achieving educatzonal excellence (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1986)

Turkat I D Behavioural case formulatzon (Plenum 1985)

Turner, S M , Calhoun, K S and Adams, H E Handbook of clinical behavzour therapy (Wiley 1981)

Psychology

36552 FURTHER APPLICATIONS IN BEHAVIOUR MODIFICATION Instructor to be announced

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Co requ1s1te Pass at C grade or better in 36551 Essenl!als of Behaviour Modiflcat10n Pre requisite Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

Further Appltcat1ons in Behaviour Mod1f1ca lion will expand upon the knowledge of behavioural theory and practice developed m 36551 Essentials of Behav10ur Modiflcat10n The development of applied chmcal skills wdl be especially emphasised and a practical component will form an mtegral part of the course Some of the broader chntcal areas to be covered will be anxiety and obsessive compulsive disorders depression, social skills def1c1ts, male and female sexual dysfunction, behaVIoural medicine, and biofeedback

Set text To be announced

Selected texts Beck, AT et al Cognztzve therapy of

depresszon (Gmlford, 1979) Da1tzman, R J Dzagnoszs and znterventton

in behavzor therapy and behavzoral medicine (Sprmger, 1983)

Davidson P 0 and Davidson, S M , eds Behavzoral medicine changing health lzfestyles (Brunner/Maze!, 1980)

Felste1n, I L Understanding sexual medicine a guide for family practitzoners and students (MTP Pr 1987)

Gelfand D M and Hartmann, D P Child behavzor analysis and therapy (Pergamon, 1984)

Gentry, W D, Benson H and De Wolf!, CJ , eds Behavioral mediczne work, stress and health (Martmus Ni1hoff, 1986)

Hand, I Panic and phobias empmcal evidence of theoretical models and long term effects of behavzoral treatments (Sprmger Verlag 1986)

Hersen, M , Van Hassett, V B and Matson, J L eds Behavzor therapy for the developmentally and physically disabled (Academic, 1983)

537

School of Social Sciences

Karoly, P and Kanfer, F H , eds Self management and behavior change (Pergamon, 1982)

Keefe, F J and Blumenthal, J A eds Assessment strategies zn behavioral medicine (Grune & Stratton, 1982)

Last C C and Hersen, M, eds Handbook of anxiety disorders (Pergamon, 1988)

Mostofsky, D I and Piedmont, R L Therapeutic practice zn behavzoral medicine (Jossey Bass, 1985)

Ollendick, T H and Hersen M Child behavioral assessment prznczples and procedures (Pergamon 1983)

Pomerleau, 0 F and Brady J P , eds Behavioral medzczne theory and practice (W1lhams & Wilkms, 1979)

Ross, A 0 Child behavrnr therapy prznczples1 procedures, and experimental basis (Wiiey, 1981)

Shaw, B F et al , eds Anxiety disorders psychological and brnlogical perspectives (Plenum, 1984)

Upper, D and Ross, SM, eds Handbook of behavwral group therapy (Plenum, 1984)

36553 INTRODUCTION TO CLINICAL CHILD PSYCHOLOGY Instructor to be announced

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or eqwvalent m Psychology

The topic will span the ages of 0 to 14 and will provide an 1ntroduct1on to the role of the chn1cal child psycholog1st w1th1n 1nst1tutlonal and community settings An understanct1ng of normal child development is expected as a pre requ1s1te and the ma1or emphasis of the topic will be on effecl!ve methods for assessment of rhild and family problems and the formulat10n of data dnven hypotheses An introduction to direct observation techniques, interviewing techniques and th8 use of a variety of standardised assessment mstruments will be provided Students will be expected to practice these assessment methods with children and produce wr1tter reports of their fmdmgs Interaclion with children 1s a primary component of this topic

538

Preliminary reading Hethermgton, E M and Parke, R Child

psychology a contemporary viewpoint, 3rd ed (McGraw Hill, 1986)

Set book Sattler, J Assessment of children, 3rd ed

(Jerome M Sattler, 1988)

Reference books Sulzer Azaroff, B and Mayer, GR Achieving

educatzonal excellence uszng behavioural strategzes (Holt Rinehart and Winston, 1986)

Salva, J and Ysseldyke, J Assessment zn speczal and remedial education, 3rd ed (Houghton M1fflm, 1985)

36554 INTERVENTION IN CHILDHOOD DISORDERS Instructor to be announced

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Co requ1s1te Pass at C grade or better in 36553 Introduct10n to Clm1cal Child Psychology Pre requisite Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

The aim of the topic 1s to expand upon the mformat10n about childhood disorders presented m the mtroductory topic (36553) The topic will focus on applying assessment information to the development of inter ventlon strategies with emphasis on evaluating the effectiveness of these intervention strategies w1th1n a Sc1ent1st Practitioner Model A sample of the problem areas to be covered include chdd sexual abuse, attention deficit disorder, social sktlls deficits, sleep disorders, conduct disorders, and enuresis/ encopresis It is expected that students will have mastered the fundamental skills by the end of the topic

Prelzmznary reading Sattler, J Assessment of children, 3rd ed

(Jerome M Sattler, 1988)

Set text To be announced

Reference books

Patterson, G Coerczve famzly processes (Castaha Pubhshmg Co 1982)

Bollard, J and Nettlebeck, T Bedwettzng a treatment manual for professronal staff (Chapman and Hall, 1989)

Fisch, R , Weakland, J and Segal, L The tactzcs of change Oossey Bass, 1982)

Ferber R Solve your child s sleep problems (Simon and Schuster 1985)

36555 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY AND PROFESSIONAL ISSUES DrMM Wood

Units 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours degree or equivalent m Psychology

This topic will be directed towards a study of the development organ1satlon and class1f1 cation of the ma1or behaVIour disorders In addttlon, the topic will cover the issues relating to the professional role of psychologists m the community and their relationship to other groups of profess10nals Workmg largely from examples and recent theoretical papers, ethical issues will be examined, particularly with reference to the law and society

Preliminary reading

Bootzm, RA and Accocella, JR Abnormal psychology current perspectives, 5th ed (Random House, 1988)

Set text

To be announced

Reference books

Amencan Psych1atnc Assoc1abon Dzagnostzc and statistical manual of mental disorders (DSM 111), 3rd ed (Washmgton, 1980)

Davison, G C and Neale JM Abnormal psychology (Wiley, 1982)

Sahakian, W S Psychopathology today (F E Peacock, 1985)

Turner, S M and Hersen, M Adult psychopathology and diagnosis (John Wiley, 1984)

Psychology

36556 PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE IN EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY Instructor to be announced

Umts 4 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours Degree or equivalent m Psychology

The aim of the topic 1s to fam1har1se students with the field of Educat10nal/School Psychology and the professional issues which surround its practice Issues to be presented will mclude a descnpt1on of (1) the contexts w1thm which educal!onal psychologists pracllse (2) ethical ISsues which are commonly encountered, (3) common referral problems encountered by educat10nal psychologists, (4) strategies for assessment and 1ntervent1on m educat10nal settmgs, (5) relevant agencies and comri1un1ty services which provide support seTV1ces to school children and theu fam1hes and (6) means to evaluate the effecbveness of educational psychology semce provts1on Students will prepare a case study which includes psycho educational assessment spec1f1c intervention strategies, and the means for evaluating the effectiveness of proposed intervention strategies

Reference books

Gilham, B Reconstructing educat10nal psychology (Croom Helm, 1980)

Grimes J Communzcatzng psyclwlogzcal znformat10n zn wrztzng (Department of Pubhc Instruct10n, 1983)

Reynolds, C R and Gutkm, T B , eds A handbook for school psychology (Wiley, 1982)

Salvia, J and Ysseldyke, J Asse'5ment zn speczal and remedial educatron, 4th ed (Houghton M1fflm, 1988)

Sulzer Azaroff, B and Mayer, GR Achieving educatzonal excellence uszng behavzoral strategies (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1986)

Thomas A and Gnmes, J Best practices zn school psychology (National Associat10n of School PsychologISts, 1985)

Westwood, P S Commonsense methods for children wzth special needs (Croom Helm, 1988)

539

School of Social Sciences

Topics zn Asian Studies

General Information

Asian Studies is an 1nterd1sc1phnary pro gramme with an emphasis on the study of development and change m modern Asia Topics in Indonesian language are also offered and these may constitute an elective or second ma1or sequence Basic D1sc1phne requirements are described m Appendix A of Statute 7 1, Schedule 2

Ma1or sequences

1 A ma1or sequence in Asian Studies consists of 36 units compris1ng

Fzrst Year 37150 Indonesian I or 37160 Indonesian IA or 37170 Indonesian Studies I or 37110 Asian Studies I or any otherf1rst year Social Sciences topic (12 umts) The attentrnn of students mtendmg to take a History topic 1s directed to topic 33140 History ID

Second Year any two of the follow1ng topics (each worth 6 umts)

37204 (33227) History of Modern Southeast Asia (Not offered m 1991)

37207 (33208) Modem India 37208 (33219) History of Modern Chma,

1840 1949 (Not offered m 1991)

37209 (35203) The Government and Poht1cs of the Chmese People's Repubhc

37211 (31205) Japanese Eoonom1c Development

37212 (35214) The Politics of New States 37213 Indonesian Musical Culture Theory

and Practice 37215 (32215) Uneven Development 37216 Modem Asia and the West

Thzrd Year any two of the following topics (each worth 6 um ts)

37303 (35306) Southeast Asian Pohtical Development

37304 (33302) The Part1t10n of India, 1935-1947 (Not offered m 1991)

37305 (35301) Pohllcal Change m Twenlleth Century Chma (Not offered m 1991)

540

37306 (35322) ASEAN Problems and Prospects

37307 Economic Development 37308 Percepllons of Modern Indonesia 37309 (38305) Socrnlogy of Developmg

Soc1etles 37312 (38327) Comparative Socrnlogy

(May not be offered m 1991) 37313 Literature and Society m Indonesia 37314 Indonesian Pohllcal Economy 37333 Singapore Society in Transition,

1914-1941 37334 Rich Asia-Poor Asia Wealth Power

and Environment 37335 Indonesian Musical Culture, Theory

and Pracllce II 37361 Language and Natrnnal Culture m

Modern Indonesia (Not offered m 1991)

2 A ma1or sequence in Indonesian consists of 36 umts compnsmg

Units

37150 Indonesian I 12 or 37160 Indonesian IA 12 or 37151 Introductory Indonesian A 6 and 37152 Introductory Indonesian B 6

or 37170 Indonesian Studies I 12

37250 Indonesian II 12 37360 Indonesian III 12

In addition to these topics, an 1ntens1ve course in Indonesian is offered for students who have completed 12 units of Indonesian at first year level See 37217 Intensive Summer Course in Indonesian Language

Topics in Chinese and Japanese languages offered by the University of Adelaide may also be taken as electives provided the pre­requ1s1tes are satisfied in each instance See syllabus detads below Students are reqmred to enrol for these topics at the Umversity of Adelaide

Students mtendmgto take Asian Studies topics, mcludmg the Asian language topics offered by the Umvers1ty of Adelaide, are advised to consult the Director of Asian Studies

Honours Programme

An Honours programme 1n Asian Studies consists of the followmg

a) Three of the followmg topics Umts

37403 Ehtes m Southeast Asia 6

37405 Urbarusallon and Development 1n Southeast Asia 6

37407 The Chmese Cultural Revolution 6

37408 Soc10logy of Developmg Societies 6

37409 Supervised Research Proiect m ASlan Studies 6

37411 (32414) Advanced Populat10n Studies 6

37415 lndoneS1an Society and Culture (Not offered m 1991) 6

37416 Gender and Society m ASla 6 37417 Australia 1n Asia 6 37419 Rehg10n and Social Change m

Modern Indonesia 6 37420 Modem Indonesian Political

Thmkmg 6 37421 Indonesian Language and

Literature 6 37422 Javanese Language 6

b) 37450 An Honours thesis of not more than 15,000 - 20,000 words 18

A Joint Honours programme is available with another D1sc1plme

Diploma in Social Sciences Aszan Studies

Students takmg the Diploma m Social Sciences m Asian Studies will complete 36 umts chosen from the followmg

a) at least 18 umts selected from Honours level Asian Studies topics

b) a maximum of 12 umts chosen from selected topics at third year level

In special cases, the Director of Asian Studies may approve a theSJS, worth up to 18 umts to be written under the superv1s1on of a member of the staff (Topic Number 37440)

Fzrst Year Topzcs

37110 ASIAN STUDIES I Mr A I Patience

Umts 12 Level First year Durat10n Full year

Asian Studzes

Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

Tlus topic introduces students to the main Asian c1v1hsations and explores Austrahan responses to Asia through an analysis of case studies In 1991 the case studies will be the White Australia Policy Australia Japan relations, Austraha-Ch1na relations, Austraha­Indones1a relations, and the Vietnam War

Reference books Hofhemz R and Calder, K. The Eastasia edge

(Basic Books 1983) Smart, N The religwus experience of

mankmd (Collins, 1984) Woronoff, J Asza's 'Mzracle' Economies

(Sharpe 1986)

37150 INDONESIAN I Ms Firdaus and Mr PG T1ckell

Umts 12 Level First year Durat10n Full year Class Contact Language classes and laboratory 5 hours per week Lectures/ tutorials on culture and society l hour per week Pre-requ1s1te Consent of the Director of Studies

This topic IS deS1gned to provide basic communication skills in modem Indonesian EmphaSls will be on preparmg students to negotiate successfully the types of everyday situations which a foreign vts1tor may expect to encounter in Indonesian society Some reading and written work wtll be introduced, but this aspect of the language study will not be fully developed until upper year levels One hour per week will be devoted to a study of some themes 1n the soc1al, cultural and pohllcal hfe of modem Indonesia The other five contact hours will be d1v1ded between class work, language laboratory sess10ns, and conversation classes

541

School of Social Sczences

No previous knowledge of Indonesian ts assumed This topic is not avatlable to students whose home country or country of ong1n is Indones1a1 Malaysia, Singapore or Brunei, or to students who have already studied Indonesian or Malaysian at secondary school as a second language

Language Set book Wolff, JU et al Begznnzng lndoneszan

through self znstructzon (Cornell UP 1986)*

Culture and Society Set book Ricklefs, M C A history of modem Indonesza

(Macmillan, 1981)

Reference books Avehng, H , ed The development of

Indoneszan soczety (Queensland U P , 1979)*

Caldwell, M and Utrecht, E Indonesza, an alternatzve hzstory (Alternative Pubhshmg Cooperative, 1979)*

Keeler, W Javanese shadow plays, Javanese selves (Pnnceton U P , 1987)

McDonald H Suharto's Indonesia (Fontana, 1980)*

McKay E , ed Studzes in Indoneszan hzstory (Pitman, 1976)*

37151 INTRODUCTORY INDONESIAN A Ms Fzrdaus and Mr P G Tzckell

Umts 6 Level First year Duratton First semester Class Contact Language classes, con­versation and laboratory 5 hours per week, Social and Cultural Background (lectures/ tutorials) 1 hour per week Pre requ1s1te Consent of the Director of Studies

Introductory Indonesian A is designed for students outside the School of Social Sciences who are unable to take the 12 umt Indonesian I topic, but who would hke to acqmre some knowledge of spoken and wntten Indonesian It consists of the language and background components of Indonesian I for the first half of the full year topic Successful completion of Introductory Indonesian A will not qualify a student for adnuss10n to 37250 Indonesian II

542

Students who have completed Introductory IndoneS1an A wantmg to proceed to 37250 Indonesian II must fmt complete 37152 Introductory Indonesian B This topic is not avatlable to students whose home country or country of or1g1n is Indonesia, Malaysia, Smgapore or Brunei or to students who have already studied Indonesian or Malaysian at secondary school as a second language

Set books Ricklefs, M C A hzstory of modern Indonesza

(Macmillan, 1981) Wolff, JU, et al Begmnzng lndoneszan through

self mstructzon (Cornell UP, 1986)*

Reference books Avelmg H , ed The development of

Indoneszan soczety (Queensland U,P, 1979)*

Caldwell, M and Utrecht, E Indonesza, an altematzve hzstory (Alternative Pubhshmg Cooperative, 1979)*

McDonald H Suharto's Indonesza (Fontana, 1980)

McKay E ed Studzes m Indonesian history (Pitman, 1976)*

37152 INTRODUCTORY INDONESIAN B Ms Fzrdaus and Mr PG Tzckell

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact Language classes con versatlon and laboratory 5 hours per week, Social and Cultural Background (lectures/ tutorials) 1 hour per week Pre reqUJs1te 37151 Introductory Indonesian A with a grade of C or better

Introductory Indonesian B 1s designed for students who have successfully completed 37151 Introductory IndoneS1an A and who wish to increase their knowledge of Indonesian The topic consists of the second half year s work for the full year topic Successful complet10n of 37152 Introductory lndoneS1an B will quahfy a student for enrolment m 37250 Indonesian II

Set books Ricklefs, M C A hzstory of modern Indonesia

(Macmillan, 1981) Wolff, JU , et al Begmnmg Indoneszan

through self instructzon (Cornell UP , 1986)*

Reference books Avehng, H , ed The development of

Indonesian society (Queensland U P , 1979)*

Caldwell, M and Utrecht, E Indonesia, an alternative history (Alternative Pubhshmg Cooperative, 1979)*

McDonald, H Suharto's Indonesia (Fontana, 1980)

McKay, E , ed Studies zn Indonesian history (l'Itman, 1976)*

37160 INDONESIAN IA Mr P G Tickell

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact Language classes and laboratory 3 hours per week Jectures/tutonals on culture and society 1 hour per week, conversation class 1 hour per week Pre requ1s1te Consent of the Director of Studies

This topic 1s designed for students who have studied lndones1an or Malaysian as a second language to matr1culation level or whose Indonesian is approximately of matnculabon standard It is not available to students whose home country or country of ong1n is Indonesia Malaysia, Singapore or Brunei It covers the same matenal as 37150 Indonesian I, but extends this with some more advanced language work One hour per wee! will be devoted to a study of some themes m the social, cultural and poht1cal hie of modern Indonesia Assessment will be based on tests conducted in the language laboratory, exercises and essays or tutorial papers To achieve a pass 1n this topic students must pass both the language and the culture and society components of the topic

Set books Ricklefs, M C A history of modern Indonesia

(Macmillan, 1981) Wolff, j U , et al Begmnmg Indonesian

through self-mstructzon (Cornell U P, 1986)*

Reference books Avehng, H , ed The development of

Indonesian society (Queensland U P , 1979)*

Asian Studies

Caldwell, M and Utrecht E Indonesia an alternative history (Alternative Pubhshmg Cooperative 1979)*

McDonald, H Suharto's Indonesia (Fontana, 1980)

McKay, E, ed Studies zn Indonesian history (Pitman, 1976)*

Add1t10nal material will be supplied by the D1sc1phne

37170 INDONESIAN STUDIES I Dr KR Foulcher

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requisite Consent of the Director of Studies

This topic IS designed for students whose home country or country of ongtn is Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore or Brunet

Indonesian Language One lecture and one tutorial per week devoted to Indonesian language expression at an advanced level, 1nclud1ng a survey of ma1or differences between modern Malay In its Indonesian and Malaysian forms and translation from English into Indonesian on topics related to Indonesian culture and society

Indonesian Literature One lecture or tutorial per week devoted to a study of some examples of modern Indonesian literature

Social and Cultural Background One lecture or one tutonal per week devoted to a study (1n Enghsh) of some themes m the social, cultural and polttical ltfe of modern Indonesia

Set books

Culture and Society

Ricklefs, M C A history of modern Indonesia (Macmillan, 1981)

McDonald H Suharto's Indonesia (Fontana 1980)

Add1t10nal material will be supplied by the Disciphne

543

School of Social Sciences

Second Year Topics

37204 (33227) (52209) HISTORY OF MODERN SOUTHEAST ASIA DrCF Yong

Not offered ID 1991

37207 (33208) (52208) MODERN INDIA Dr L Brennan

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te 12 units of first year History with a grade of C or better

This topic is a study of the impact on Indian society and pohhcs of British rule Emphasis will be placed on such aspects of Indian society as communal hostility, landlord tenant relations and caste and untouchab1hty, and on the mteract10n of these with the pohtical movement for Indian 1Ddependence The topics will conclude with discuss10n of pohhcal econom1c and social developments m Independent India

Preliminary reading Masselos, JC Indian nationalism (Sterling

1985) Snn1vas, M N Social change in modem India

(Cahfornia UP, 1973)*

Set text Jeffrey, R India Rebellwns to republic

(Sterlmg 1990)

Reference book Sarkar, S Modern India 1885 1947

(Macmillan, 1989)

37208 (33219) HISTORY OF MODERN CHINA, 1840 1949 Dre F Yong

Not offered ID 1991

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic will examme the qmckenmg process of declme and demise of the Manchu regime

544

and analyse causes of revolutionary change 1n the 20th century agamst the background of intense rivalry w1th1n the Chinese society among such contending socio political forces as Confuc1an1sm, warlord1sm, nat1onahsm, 11berahsm, 1mper1ahsm and communism Special attention will be given to the followmg topics The Opium Wars, the Ta1p1ng Upns1ng, the Self strengthenmg Movement the first Smo Japanese War, the Hundred Days of Reform, the Boxer Rebelhon, the 1911 Revolution, the origins and role ofwarlord1sm, the May Fourth Movement, the Kuommtang 1n power the Sino Japanese conflicts, and communism in China

Prelzmznary reading Bianco, L Origins of the Chinese revolution,

1915 1949 (Stanford UP, 1971)* Chesneaux, J Peasant revolts in Chzna

1840 1949 (Thames & Hudson, 1973)* Fairbank, J K The United States and Chzna,

4th ed (Harvard UP, 1980)* Schurmann, F and Schell, 0 , eds Chzna

readings, vol 2 Republican China (Pengum, 1968)*

Text books Sheridan, J E China zn dzszntegratzon

(Free Pr , 1977)* Wakeman, F , Jr The fall of lmperzal Chzna

(Free Pr, 1977)*

37209 (35203) (52203) THE GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS OF THE CHINESE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC Professor B Brugger

Umts 6 Level Second and tlurd year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

A brief mtroducllon to the history of twentieth century Chma, followed by a detailed exanunatJ.on of the Yan an and Soviet models of development and the modiflcat10n of those models durmg the 1950s and 1960s Areas examined will include rural pohcy, urban pohcy and the development of the Chmese Commumst Party The topic mcludes a study of the Cultural Revolution and its aftermath and concludes with a study of developments smce the death of Mao Zedong

Reference books Brugger, W Chzna lzberatzon and trans

formatzon, 1942 1962 (Croom Helm, 1981)* Brugger W Chzna radzcalzsm to revzszonzsm

1962 1979 (Croom Helm, 1981)* G1ttmgs j Chma changes face (Oxford UP,

1990)-Mao Zedong Selected readings (Foreign

Language Pr , 1971) * Maxwell, N and McFarlane, B Chma s

changed road to development (Pergamon, 1984)'

Meisner, M Mao's Chzna and after (Free Pr, 1986)*

R1Skm C China's political economy (Oxford up 1987)*

Schram S ed Mao Tse tung (Pehcan 1966)* Schram S , ed Mao Tse tung unrehearsed

(Pehcan 1974)* Schurmann H F Ideology and organzsatzon

zn communzst Chzna, rev ed (Cahforn1a up 1971)*

A hst of preltm1nary reading is available from the Pohllcs Office

37211 (31205) (52205) JAPANESE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Dr R Shlomowitz

Umts 6 Level Second and thlfd year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te None

The central theme of the topic will be the record and determinants of Japanese econom1c growth from about 1600 to the present day Cons1deratton will be given, 1n particular, to 1nstltuhonal features of the Japanese economy and how they relate to the process of growth

Text book M1nam1 R The economzc development of

Japan (Macmillan 1986)*

Reference books Caves RE and Uckusa, M Industrial

organization zn Japan (Brookings Inslltut10n, 1976)

Demson E F and Chung WK How Japan's economy grew so fast (Brookmgs Inslltut10n 1976)

Okawa, K and Rosovsky, H Japanese economic growth trend acceleration zn the twentieth century (Stanford UP, 1973)

Asian Studies

Patrick, HT, ed Japanese zndustrialzzatzon and zts social consequences (Cahforn1a up' 1976)

Patrick HT and Rosovsky H eds Asza s new gzant (Brookmgs lnslltut10n, 1976)

Taira I{ Economic development and the labour market zn Japan (Columbia UP, 1970)

37212 (35214) (52202) THE POLITICS OF NEW STATES Dr C Gertzel

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

This topic provides an introduction to the politics of the new states which have emerged out of colonial rule in Asia and Africa since 1945 It seeks to ra1Se the key issues which face these states in the late twentieth century and which influence their efforts to overcome their underdevelopment Among the topics to be discussed will be the pohllcs of de colonisation ethn1c1ty and class formation 1n the post colonial state, peasants and poltt1cs the rise of the author1tanan state the m1htary in the new state new states and the international system

Reference books Brett, EA Colonialzsm and under

development zn East Afrzca (Heinemann 1973)

Cohen, D L and Dame!, j D Political economy of Afrzca selected readings (Longman, 1982)

Evers H D M odernizatzon zn South East Asia (Oxford UP, 1973)

Hlggott RA and Rob1Son R eds Southeast Asza essays zn the political economy of structural change (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1985)

Leys, C Underdevelopment zn Kenya (Hememann 1975)*

Markovitz, I L Power and class zn Africa (Prentice Hall, 1977)

Pauker, G j Golay, F H and Enloe CH Diversity and development zn South-East Asza (McGraw Hill 1977)

Young, C The politics of cultural pluralism (W1Sconsm UP, 1976)

545

School of Social Sciences

37213 INDONESIAN MUSICAL CULTURE THEORY AND PRACTICE I Mr PG Tickell (Convener) and Ms H Stark

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 2 hours of demonstration per week

Topics covered include the history of Indonesian music since the nineteenth century, folk versus court musical styles and trad1tions, comparison of perform ance practice in Javanese and Baltnese gamelan, contemporary trends m both musical trad1t10ns the theory of compos1t10n, and organology (the theory of class1f1catton of musical instruments)

Demonstration sessions will relate the theoretical d1scuss1ons to knowledge of the Javanese gamelan orchestra For example students will be expected to make a critical appraisal of playmg m the Javanese slendro mode, havmg been mtroduced to the theore!Ical debate between Hood, Kunst and Becker about mode Similarly students will learn to play instruments of the gamelan orchestra in order to learn how they are clasSified

Prelzmznary readzng Lmdsay, j Javanese gamelan (Oxford U P

1986)*

Set books Becker, J Traditional music in modem Java

(Hawau U P , 1980) McPhee C Music zn Bali (Da Capo Pr , 1976)

Reference books Kunst, j Music zn Java its history, its theory

and zts technique, 2 vols (N1ihoff 1974)

Add1t10nal material will be dIStributed by the D1sc1phne

37215 (32215) UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT Dr JG Browett (Convener), Dr A Maude and Dr C Manning

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week and 1 tutorial per fortmght Pre requ1s1te Not available to students who have already completed 32207 Geography of Economic Ac!Iv1ty or 32212 Southeast ASia

546

The obiec!Ive of thIS topic IS to dIScuss the nature of, and to examine some reasons for, spatial variations in econom1c prosperity at the global level and w1thm Southeast Asia Spec1f1c themes to be addressed mclude (1) concepts and n1easurements of develop ment (2) patterns, trends and explanations for uneven development in the world and in Southeast Asia and (3) case studies of the 1nteractton between internal and external factors in the determ1nation of development problems and prospects m selected reg10ns of Southeast Asia

Reference books Lea, DAM and Chaudhn, D P, eds Rural

development and the state (Methuen, 1983)* Reitsma, H A and Klempennmg, j M G The

third world zn perspective (Rowman & Allanheld, 1985)

Wilber, C K , ed The political economy of development and underdevelopment, 3rd ed (Random House, 1984)

World Development Report Internat10nal Banks for Reconstruction and Development (Oxford U P , 1990)

37216 MODERN ASIA AND THE WEST Dr KR Foulcher and Mr A I Patience

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 seminar per week Pre reqmSite 37110 ASian Studies I with a grade of C or better

This topic examines historical and contempo rary aspects of the relationship between Asian societies and the West Atten!Ion will be given to the influence of Western social and political ph1losoph1es on ASian thought and its social and political expression (such as nationalism, communism and liberalism) as well as Western Impact on Asian societies and economic systems (both through colomal and neo colonial structures and through Asian initiatives 1n response to Western models) Contemporary examples of Asian hterature in Engltsh translation will be used to examine the nature of the Asian response to Western cultural norms In a variety of contexts The mter d1Sc1plmary study of rela!Ive degrees of resistance to and ass1mtlat1on of the West in ASia will form the maior theme of the topic

Reference books Ahs1ahbana, ST Indonesza soczal and

cultural revolutzon (Oxford U P Kuala Lumpur 1966 or later ed )*

Hearn L Kohoro, hznts and echoes of Japanese inner life (Tuttle, 1987)

Ish1guro, K An artist of the floating world (Faber, 1986)

Kart1n1, RA Letters of a Javanese princess (Umv Press of America 1985)*

Morns Suzuki, T Showa an inszde history of Hirohito s Japan (Athlone, 1984)

Sternberg D j ed In search of Southeast Asza (Allen & Unwm, 1987)

Stokes, H S The lzfe and death of Yukzo Mishima (Tuttle, 1980)

Third Year Topics

37303 (35306) (52306) SOUTHEAST ASIAN POLIDCAL DEVELOPMENT Dr HS Leng

Umts 6 Level Thzrd year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requzs1te Completrnn of 12 umts of work in second year topics

A comparal!ve study of pohtical change rn Southeast Asia Particular attent10n will be paid to the followrng topics colomahsm, natlonahsm and the creation of nation states problems of ethmc1ty, nat10nal 1dentzty and 1ntegrat1on, types of regimes and their legttimation, pohttcal competltlon and conflict expressed in pohttcal parties and elections, nots revolts, and proxy wars competing ehtes and the struggle for authonty and effectzveness, changes 1n pohtlcal awareness and the effect on the type and rntens1ty of pohtical demands and on government and pohtlcal response reg1onahsm and foreign involvement

This topic may not be counted towards a degree rn additrnn to topic 37302 Poht1cal and Economic Development 1n Southeast Asia

Preliminary reading Sternberg, D J , ed In search of Southeast

Asia a modern history, rev ed (Pall Mall, 1987)

Asian Studies

Wtlhams LE Southeast Asza (Oxford U P , 1976)

Reference books

Chan, Heng Chee The dynamics of one party dominance the PAP at the grass roots (Smgapore UP 1978)

Dahm B Sukarno and the struggle for Indonesian independence (Cornell UP 1969)

Drysdale, J Singapore struggle for success (Allen & Unwrn, 198")

Fifield, RH Natzonal and regzonal interest in A SEAN (!SEAS, 1979)

G1rlrng, J L S Thailand politics and society (Cornell UP, 1981)

Higgott, RA and Robson, R , eds Southeast Asza essays zn the political economy of structural change (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1985)*

Hus1n Ah, S ed Ethnicity, class and development in Malaysia (Persatuan Srnns Sosrnl Malaysia 1984)

Mackie, J A C , ed Indonesia the making of a natzon (AN U, 1980)

May, R j and Nemanzo F, eds The Philippines after Marcos (Croom Helm, 1985)

Millar, TB, ed International securzty zn the Southeast Asian and Southwest Pacific regzon (Queensland U P, 1983)

Pauker, G j, Golay, F H and Enloe, CH Diversity and development zn Southeast Asia (McGraw Hiii, 1977)

Robison, R Indonesia the rzse of capital (Allen & Unwrn, 1986)

Robison, R Hewson, IC and H1ggott, R , eds Southeast Asia in the 1980s the politics of economic crzszs (Allen and Unw1n, 1987)*

S1lverste1n, J Burma mzlitary rule and the polztics of stagnatzon (Cornell UP, 1978)

Sunduram, j K A questzon of class capital, the state and uneven development zn Malaya (Oxford UP, 1986)

van der Kroef, j M Communism zn Southeast Asia (Macmillan, 1980)

von Vorys K Democracy wzthout consensus (Pnnceton UP, 1975)

Zacher, M W and Miine, R S , eds Conflict and stability in Southeast Asia (Anchor, 1974)

547

School of Soclal Sciences

37304 (33302) THE PARTITION OF INDIA, 1935 4 7 Professor R / Moore

Not offered m 1991

37305 (35301) (52304) POLITICAL CHANGE IN TWENTIETH CENTURY CHINA Professor B Brugger

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 seminar and 1 tutorial pe1 week Pre reqmsite 35203 The Government and Pohl!cs of the Chmese People's Republic with a grade of C or better

This topic consists of the following core topics, revolutionary strategy relationshtp between the Communist Party and the state structure class and revolution 1&sues in Chinese pohttcal economy poht1cs of industrial and agricultural development and Chmese foreign policy Addit10nal topics which may be studied mclude the role of Confucms m 20th century China poltcy towards national m1norittes, the pohhcs of art, literature and education, the role of the Chmese army and the role of women Students are expected to choose one core topic and one other topic for detailed study

37306 (35322) (52309) ASEAN PROBLEMS AND PROSPECTS Dr HS Leng

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 seminar and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite Completion of24 units of work in second year topics or 37303 Southeast Asian Pohl!cal Development

This topic 1s concerned with the politics of regional co operation of the Association of Southeast Asian Nat10ns (ASEAN) Issues to be covered mclude the antecedents of ASEAN centrifugal and centripetal tendencies of reg1onahsm 1n Southeast Asia, the character

548

of component regimes and economies, problems of economic co operation relations with external powers 1nclud1ng Australia and the pursuit of political neutrahty, regional security and stability Particular attention ts paid to the I<ampuchean Crisis and its impact on ASEAN sohdanty

Reference books Boyce P J and Angel JR eds Independence

and alllance Australia zn world affairs 1976 1980 (A I I A, 1983)

Bro1nowski, A ed Understandzng ASEAN (Macmillan, 1982)

F1f1eld, RH National and regional znterest in ASEAN (!SEAS, 1979)*

Gamaut, R , ed ASEAN in a changing Paczfzc and world economy (A N U , 1980)

Haas, M Basic documents of Aszan regional organzsatzons (Oceana, 1974)

Iracenhran M ASEAN's forezgn relatzons (Arenabuku, 1985)

Joint Comm on Foreign Affairs and Defence Australia and ASEAN challenges and opportumtzes (AG PS , 1984)

Martm, L G The ASEAN success story (Hawau East West Center, 1987)

McLeod K and Utrecht, E eds The ASEAN papers (James Cook UP, 1978)*

Millar, TB , ed International security in the Southeast Asian and Southwest Paczflc regzon (Queensland U P , 1983)

Nair, K K ASEAN Indochzna relatzons since 1975 Canberra Papers on Strategy and Defence (AN U, 1984)

Palmer R D and Rockford T j Buzldzng ASEAN 20 years of Southeast Aszan co operatzon (Praeger, 1987)

Pauker G Golay, F H and Enloe C Dzverszty and development zn Southeast Asza (McGraw-Hill 1977)

Pfenmg W and Suh, M M B , eds Aspects of ASEAN (Weltforum Verlag, 1984)

Simon S W The A SEAN States and regzonal securzty (Hoover Inst Press, 1982)

Sopie, M N Chen, L S and Lim, S j eds ASEAN at the crossroads (ISIS Malaysza, 1987)

Weatherbee, DE, ed SoutheastAsza dzvzded the ASEAN Indochina crzszs (Westview, 1985)

Wilson D The neutralzsatzon of Southeast Asza (Praeger 1975),

Wong, J ASEAN economies zn perspective (Macmillan 1979)

37307 (30302) (52302) ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT MrGKC Tan

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1tes 30201 Macroeconomics and 30202 M1croeconom1cs with a grade of C or better m one and a grdde of D or better m the other For those who are takmg 30201 Macroeconom1cs concurrently ~11th this topic, the pre requ1S1te will be a grade of C or better in 30202 M1croeconom1cs

The emphasis ofth1s topic 1s on the apphcat10n of economic theory to the problems of economic growth and development of the low income countnes Students will be introduced to the ma1or development models, but will consider broader issues of under development, mcludmg the mfluence of social, demographic and poht1cal 1mped1ments to development The topic will include some case studies in econom1c development

Prelzmznary readzng Dasgupta, AK Economic theory and the

developing countries (Macmillan, 1974)* Donaldson, P Worlds apart the econom1c

gulf between natwns (Pengum, 1973)* Elkan, W Introduction to development

economics (Penguin, 1980)*

Reference books Colman, D and NIXSon, F Economzcs of

change in less developed countries (Ph1hp Allan,, 1978)*

Donaldson, L Economic develop ment analysis and policy (West, 1984)

Ghatak, S and Ingersent K Agriculture and economic development (Harvester, 1984)

Ghatak, S An introductwn to development economics, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1986)*

G1llts, M , Perkins, D H , Roemer, M and Snodgrass, D R Economics of development, 2nd ed (Norton, 1987)

Hagen, E The economics of development 4th ed (Irwm, 1986)

Hall, P Growth and development an economic analysis (Martin Robertson, 1983)

Aszan Studies

Hernck, B and IUndleberger, C Economic development, 4th ed (McGraw Hill 1983)

L1v1ngstone I Development economics and policy readings (Allen & Unwm 1981)

Meier G , ed Leadzng issues zn economic development, 4th ed (Oxford UP, 1984)

Nafziger, E W The economics of developing countries (Wadsworth 1984)

Roxborough, I Theories of under development (Macmillan, 1979)*

Singer, H W and Ansari, J Rzch and poor countries, 3rd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1982)*

Thirlwall, A P Growth and development, 3rd ed (Macmillan, 1983)*

Todaro M P Econo1nzc development and the Third World 4th ed (Longman 1989)*

Toye j Dilemmas of development (Blackwell 1987) •

Wilber, C K., ed The political economy of development and underdevelopment, 4th ed (Random House 1988)*

Yotopoulos, PA and Nugent, j B Economics of development (Harper & Row 1976)

37308 PERCEPTIONS OF MODERN INDONESIA Mr PG Tickell

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite 12 units of Asian Studies at second year level with a grade of C or better

This topic ~1ms to mtroduce students to maior developmants m the percept10n of Indonesian society and history smce the begmnmg of the Twentieth Century It surveys how the Dutch saw Indonesia before 1942, and how the Indonesians viewed therr history and society m the context of the nat10nahst awakenmg of the early Twentieth Century The topic also examines formal theoretical frameworks used in vanous approaches to the study of Indonesia smce the 1945 49 revolut10n, the idea of vertical and honzontal divisions problems of class and the dynamics of social change

Preliminary reading Ricklefs, M C A history of modem Indonesia

(Macmillan, 1981)*

549

School of Social Sciences

Reference bdoks Feith, H and Castles, L Indoneszan polztzcal

thmkzng 1945 1965 (Cornell UP, 1970) Geertz, C The relzgzon of Java (Free Pr ,

1963)* Kahm, AT Regzonal dynamics of the

Indonesrnn revolutwn (Hawan UP, 1985) Keeler, W Javanese shadow plays Javanese

selves (Prmceton U P , 1987) Mortimer, R Indoneszan communism under

Sukarno (Cornell UP, 1974) Reid, A and Marr, D Perceptzons of the past

zn South East Asia (Hememann, 1979)* Robison R Indonesia the rise of capital

(Allen & Unwm, 1986)

37309 (38305) (52305) SOCIOLOGY OF DEVELOPING SOCIETIES Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmsite 38110 Soc10logy I 12 umts of Sociology II topics at C grade or above, or by special perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic will deal with the nature and developments of the lnternat10nal Strat1f1cat10n System Special atten!ton will be paid to the social structure of developing Asian countnes and to the processes of social change in them

Reference books Alatas, S H The myth of the lazy natwe

(Frank Cass, 1977) Alavi H and Shanm, T eds Introductzon to

the sociology of developing soczetzes (Macmillan 1982)

Cockcroft j D, Frank AG and Johnson, D L Dependence and underdevelopment (Doubleday, 1972)

Gellner, E Muslim soczety (Cambndge UP, 1981)

Hoogvelt, AM M The soczology of developing soczet1es, 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1978)

L1mqueco P and Mcfarlane B , eds Neo Marxist theories of development (Croom Helm, 1983)

Myrdal, G An approach to the Asian drama (Vmtage, 1970)

Roxborough I Theones of under development (Macmillan, 1979)

550

37312 (38327) COMPARATIVE SOCIOLOGY Mr A I Patience

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes 12 units of second year Soc10logy topics at C or better or by perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic focuses on selected key social 1nstltut1ons 1n different socio cultural settings, 1n order to understand Austrahan society better Key mstttut10ns to be constdered may include the famlly, schoohng and education, gender, rehg1on, work Socio cultural contexts may mclude Austraha japan and Smgapore In 1991 the mam focus will be Australta and japan

Prelzmznary reading

Maugham W S The gentleman m the parlour (Hememann 1930)

Tan1zak1, J The M akzoa szsters (Pengree Books 1981)

Reference books

Chen, P ed Singapore development polzczes and trends (Oxford U P , 1983)

Clammer J Singapore ideology, soczety culture (Chopman, 1985)

Dale, P N The myth of Japanese umqueness (Routledge 1988)

Dore R City life m Japan (Caltfoma UP 1973)

Fukutake, T Rural soczety m Japan (Tokyo up 1980)

Hendry j Understanding Japanese soczety (Methuen, 1987)

Little, R and Reed W The Confucian renaissance (Federation Pr 1 1989)

McCormack, G and Sugimoto, Y eds Democracy zn contemporary Japan (ME Sharpe, 1986)

Monsh1ma M Why has Japan succeeded? (Cambndge UP, 1982)

Nakane, C Japanese society (Pengum 1981) N1tobe I 0 Bushido the soul of Japan

(Tuttle, 1981)

Re1schauer, E The Japanese (Tuttle, 1977)

Smith, R j Japanese society (Cambridge U P 1983)

Storry, R A history of modem Japan (Pehcan 1982)

Vogel, E F Japan as No 1 (Tuttle 1982)

37313 LITERATURE AND SOCIETY IN INDONESIA Dr KR Foulcher

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and one 11/2 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te None

The topic arms to survey ma1or trends in the cultural and social history of modern Indonesia through the medium of Indonesian literature in translation The works of ma1or Indonesian authors such as Cha1r1l Anwar, Rendra and Pramoedya Ananta Toer will be studied as examples of cultural onentat1ons m modem Indonesia and related to broader social and poht1cal themes Some attention will be given to the nature of aesthetic mediation between context and text, as it applies 1n the Indonesian case

Reference books

Anwar, C B The complete poetry and prose of Chaml Anwar (State University of New York, 1970)*

Avelmg H From Surabaya to Armageddon Indonesian short stories (Heinemann, 1976)*

johns, AH Cultural optzons and the role of traditzon (AN U Pr, 1979)*

Muhammad Salleh, Traditzon and change zn contemporary Malay Indonesian poetry (Umvers1tI Kebangsaan Malaysia, 1977)*

Rendra, W S Ballads and blues poems (Oxford UP, 1974)*

Rendra W S State of emergency (Wild & Woolley, 1980)

Teeuw1 A Modem Indonesian literature, vols 1 & 2 (Martmus N11hoff, 1979)*

Toer, P A This earth of mankind (Pengum, 1982)*

Asian Studies

37314 (52317) INDONESIAN POLITICAL ECONOMY Dr f Schiller

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and one 1112 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te 12 units of second year Asian Studies topics or the perm1ss1on of the Convener

Indonesian Pohtical Economy 1s a study of the ma1or features of state society 1nteract1on dunng the New Order The topic will stress the hnk between pohhcs and econom1cs and the importance of 1nshtuhons 1n under­standmg social and pohtical change The topic looks for patterns 1n Indonesian pohhcal and econom1c behaviour and assumes that most behaviour most of the time seems rational (goal oriented) to the actor concerned, from his or her perspechve The ob1ect of the topic 1s to achieve a sympathetic understandmg of how Indonesians from various 1nshtutlons, classes and regions perceive and respond to what they see as opportun1t1es and constraints

Set book Anderson, B and l(ah1n1 A Interpreting

Indonesian politics (Camell UP, 1982)

Reference books Feith H and Castles L , eds Indonesian

political thmkzng (Ithaca, Camell U P , 1970)

jenkms, D Suharto and his generals (Ithaca, Cornell UP 1984)

37333 (33333) SINGAPORE SOCIETY IN TRANSffiON, 1914 1941 Dr CF Yong

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week for 10 weeks and I tutonal per week

This topic studies changes m Smgapore society during the 1nterwar years ar1s1ng from 1mm1grat1on and settlement, improved educat10nal standards, the development of social and community 1nstitut1ons, the growth of trade, commerce and industry, and the emergence of nattonahsm, anarchism and

551

School of Social Sciences

communism It also examines the British management of social, educational and poh!Ical problems denvmg from the social change While it aims at providmg an msight into the complex Singapore society in trans1hon, 1t hopes1 by using a body of primary sources from Coloma! and Foreign Office records to encourage students to engage in ongmal histoncal research and to sharpen their analyt1cal techniques and capacity

Prelzmznary readzng Turnbull C M A history of Singapore, 1819

1988, 2nd ed (Oxford U P , 1989)

Reference books Arasaratnam, S Indians zn Malaysia and

Singapore (Oxford U P , 1970)* Butcher, JG The British in Malaya 1880

1941 (Oxford UP, 1979) Heussler R Brztzsh rule in Malaya

(Hememann, 1985) Roff, WR The origins of Malay natwnalzsm

(Oxford UP, 1967)* Yong, CF Tan Kah kee, the making of an

overseas Chinese legend (Oxford U P , 1989)*

Yong, CF and McKenna, RB The Kuomzntang movement zn British Malaya, 1912 1949 (Smgapore UP, 1990)*

37334 RICH ASIA-POOR ASIA WEALTH, POWER AND ENVIRONMENT Dr f Schiller

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and one 11/2 hour seminar per week Pre reqmsite 37216 Modem Asia and the West at C grade or better

This topic is an inquiry into the or1g1ns, d1stnbutxon, and consequences of wealth and poverty in East and Southeast Asia It examines Asian history to see how the region came to be perceived as poor and 'backward It looks at the past and present 'development' experience of selected Asian soc1ettes to see what policies were followed m an effort to 'catch up' with the West with what human and environmental costs It studies the development debate withm selected Asian societies to see how those 1n power and their critics perceive development goals 1 and

552

development efforts, and how they view the social and enVIronmental consequences of patterns of development

Preliminary reading Berger, P L Pyramids of sacrifice (Pengum,

1985)

Text books Higgot, R and Robison, R Southeast Asia

(Allen & Unwm 1986) Johnson, C MIT! and the Japanese miracle

the growth of zndustrzal policy, 1925 1975 (Stanford U P , 1983)

Reid, A Southeast Asia zn the age of commerce, 1450 1680 (Yale UP, 1988)

Robison, R Indonesia the rzse of capital (Macmillan, 1987)

Wolf, ER Europe and the people without hzstory (Cahforma UP, 1982)

37335 INDONESIAN MUSICAL CULTURE, THEORY AND PRACTICE II Mr PG Tickell and Ms H Stark

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requ1S1te 37213 Indonesian Musical Culture Theory and Practice I, at C grade or better

This topic will focus on the gamelan and social organisation in Java and Bala1, the social funct10ns of gamelan and other tradit10nal music forms, current trends and developments 1n the trad1tional performing arts 1n modern Indonesian society, and the development of Javanese gamelan performance skills through a study of tradit10nal repertmre m both Slendro and Pelog modes The more complex musical forms Kedrang and Ketawang will be mtroduced and performed m Irama Tanggong and Dados

Text book Lmdsay, J Javanese game/an (Oxford U P ,

1981)

Reference books Becker,] Tradztzonal music in modem Java

gamelan zn a changing society (Hawau up' 1980)

Holt, C Art zn Indonesia contznuztzes and change Part II Lzvzng traditwns (Cornell up' 1976)

Kartom1, M 'Social functions of muszc 1n j Merson, ed Investigating music (Sydney ABC, 1977)

Suryod1n1ngrat Was1sto Gamelan, dance and wayang zn Jog7akarta (Gad1ah Mada UP, 1971)

Upper Year Indonesian Topics

37217 INTENSIVE SUMMER COURSE IN INDONESIAN LANGUAGE Ms Fzrdaus and Dr KR Foulcher and (Co ordinators)

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration 4 6 weeks dunng summer vacation Class Contact Six hours per day, five days per week at Gad1ah Mada University m Indonesia Pre reqmsite C grade or better m 37150 Indonesian I or 37160 Indonesian IA

Extended knowledge of spoken and written Indonesian through 1ntens1ve class contact with Indonesian lecturers experienced in courses for foreign students Class time will be spent m the study of Indonesian morphology and syntax, practical dnlls and exercises and small group conversation in an Indonesian language environment

Text books Wolff, j U , et al Begznnzng Indonesian

through self znstructzon (Cornell U P , 1986)

Reference books Echols, j M and Shadily, H An Indonesian

English dictzonary, 3rd ed (Cornell U P , 1989)

Echols j M and Shadily, H An English Indonesian dictzonary (Corne! UP, 1975)

37250 INDONESIAN II Dr KR Foulcher

Umts 12 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre requ1S1te 37150 Indonesian I or 37152 Introductory Indonesian B or 37160 Indonesian IA with a grade of C or better

The topic aims to consolidate the acqmsitlon of communication skills in modern

Asian Studies

Indonesian as begun m 37150 Indonesian I Extensive use continues to be made of language laboratory sessions and oral-aural learning techn1ques1 but writing in Indonesian and translation from English into Indonesian 1s developed more than at the first year level One hour per week will be devoted to small group free conversation and d1scuss1on 1n Indonesian, and one hour to extension exercises in writing in Indonesian

Set book Wolff j U, et al Begznmng Indonesian

through self znstructzon (Cornell U P , 1986)*

Reference books Echols, J M and Shadily, H An Indonesian

English d1ctzonary, 3rd ed (Cornell U P , 1989)

Echols, j M and Shadily, H An English Indonesian dictzonary (Cornell U P , 1975)*

or Wo1owaS1to, S and Poerwadarmmta, W JS

Kamus Lengkap Inggerzs Indonesia, Indonesia Inggeris (Hasta 1974)*

Further reading material will be provided by the D1sciplme

37360 INDONESIAN III Dr KR Foulcher and Mr PG Tickell

Umts 12 Level Third year Durat10n Full year Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre reqmsite 37250 Indonesian II with a grade of C or better

This topic aims to develop Indonesian language skills at an advanced level, g1vmg emphaSis to both oral and written forms of commun1cat1on

Core Reading d1scuss1on and writing in Indonesian based on contemporary Indonesian source matenal relating to the social sciences

First Semester Intensive Indonesian reading and translation at an advanced level, and a study of particular aspects of social and cultural change m modern Indonesia through the medmm of modem Indonesian literary texts

553

School of Soczal Sczences

Second Semester Intensive Indonesian conversation at an advanced level, and a study of the theory and methodology of oral history techniques and their application in modern Indonesia

Reference books Dard1owid1010 SoenJono Vocabulary buzldzng

zn lndoneszan an advanced reader (Oh10 up' 1984)

Schmidgall Tellmgs, A E and Stevens, A M Contemporary Indoneszan-Englzsh dzctzonary (Oh10 UP, 1981)*

Further readmg material will be provided by the Disciplme

37361 LANGUAGE AND NATIONAL CULTURE IN MODERN INDONESIA Dr KR Foulcher

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1S1te 37360 Indoneszan III wzth a grade of C or better, or co requ1s1te of concurrent enrolment in 37360 Indonesian III or perm1ss10n of the lecturer

The topic will examine the 1nteractlon of nationalism, national language and national culture in modem Indonesia Both h1stor1cal and contemporary examples of Indonesian language texts (m literature, drama and fllm) will be used to examine the evolution and character of a national culture in Indonesia and its relation to the modern Indonesian state

Set books R1antlamo N Bom Waktu (Teater Koma,

1986)* Suryad1, Ag, Lmus Pengakuan Panyem (Smar

Harapan, 1981)* W11aya, P Nyalz (Balai Pustaka, 1983)*

Reference books Anderson, B Imagined communztzes,

reflectzons on the orzgzn and spread of natzonalzsm (Verso, 1983)

Jackson, K.D and Pye, L W Polztzcal power and commun1cat1on zn Indonesia (Cahforma U P , 1978)

554

Honours Topics

37403 (35416) (52402) ELITES IN SOUTHEAST ASIA Dr HS Leng

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

A soc10/pohtical analysis of Southeast Asian elites Only the ASEAN countries are to be covered

37405 (32411) (52401) URBANISATION AND DEVELOPMENT IN SOUTHEAST ASIA Dr AM Maude, Dr C Mannzng and Dr R Steele

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 1 seminar per fortnight Pre requisite Honours or Diploma standing

A study of urbanisation, urban problems, and the role of urban1sat1on 1n development in Southeast Asia This topic is also offered as part of fourth year programmes m Geography and Development Studies

37407 (35403) THE CHINESE CULTURAL REVOLUTION Professor B Brugger

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration To be announced Class Contact 9 two hour seminars Pre requisite Honours or Diploma standing

An advanced topic for students who have already taken equivalent work on China

37408 (38413) (52404) SOCIOLOGY OF DEVELOPING SOCIETIES Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqwsite Honours or Diploma standmg

Students will be required to undertake independent research pro1ects (based on hbrary resources) on the social structure and social change in selected developing societies

37409 SUPERVISED RESEARCH PROJECT IN ASIAN STUDIES Staff of Asian Studies Discipline

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration One year Pre requisite Honours or Diploma standing

Students will carry out a research pro1ect on some aspects of Asian Studies The scope and szze of the pro1ect should approximate the time and effort ordinarily expected 1n a 6 unit fourth year topic The pro1ect should lead to a research paper of about 6,000 words in length Students 1ntend1ng to do such a research project should discuss their topic with the staff member who will act as supervisor before the end of March

37411 (32414) (52405) ADVANCED POPULATION STUDIES Dr G J Hugo

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

A study of advanced demographic techmques and their apphcatrnn to the study and understanding of contemporary demographic trends m Australia and the Third World Particular attention is paid to policy issues

37415 INDONESIAN SOCIETY AND CULTURE Mr PG Tickell

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

This topic will study Indonesian society and culture in its h1stor1cal context from both western and Indonesian perspectives The wntmgs of Schneke and van Leur and the impact of nationalism and the revolution on

Aszan Studzes

studies of Indonesian society will be studied, as well as the liberal American and Australian traditions of 1ndonesian research The wnt1ngs of Indonesian social scientists such as the LP3ES group, and Islamic groups will also be considered

37416 (52407) GENDER AND SOCIETY IN ASIA Dr B M artzn Schiller

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre-requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic will examine gender relations 1n selected Asran soc1et1es, with an emphasis on Southeast Asta particularly Indonesia Gender will be examined 1n its societal context work class, soc1ahsahon the home, rehg1on etc The topic will deal with women in agriculture, industry and cities and the question of gender aid and development Students will be allowed considerable freedom of choice 1n selecting a research topic or society for their essay

37417 (52408) AUSTRALIA IN ASIA Mr A I Patience

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma standing Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

This topic will examine Austraha's place and current role 1n Asta The nature of Australia's past and current relations with Asia will be exammed and the potential for developmg closer or different relations 1n the future will be conszdered The topic will employ an mterdisciphnary approach focusmg especially on socio cultural aspects affecting Australian Asian relations

37419 RELIGION AND SOCIAL CHANGE IN MODERN INDONESIA Dr f Schiller and Dr A Lucas

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honou1s standing in Indonesian or Asian Studies

555

School of Social Sciences

The topic will examine the role of rehg1on as a social and poht1cal force in modem Indonesia, focusing on varieties of religious experience in different contexts and their social and poht1cal s1gn1f1cance The relat1onsh1p between rehg1on as a basis of social orgamsat10n at both the local and nat10nal level and the nature of rehg10us plurality m modern Indonesia will be ma1or areas of study

Text books Anderson B Nakamura, M Slanet, M

Religion and social ethos zn Indonesia (Monash CSEAS 1987)

Castles L Religion, politics and economic behaviour zn Java the kudus cigarette industry (Yale UP, 1967)

Geertz C Relzgzon of Java (Free Press, 1960) Geertzs, C Islam observed (Yale UP, 1968) Nakamura Mttsuo The Crescent arzses over

the Banyan tree (Gad1ah Mada U P , 1983)

Reference books Walud Abdurrachman Muslzm dz Tengah

Pergumulan (Leppenas, 1983) Mulder N Kebatznan & Hzdup Sehan harz

Orang fawa (Gramed1a, 1983) KortodirdJO, S Ratu Adu (SH, 1984) Magn1s Suseno, F Etzka /awa (Gramed1a,

1984) Hasy1m Wamd, KW Mengapa Memzlzh NU?

(Intl Sarma Aksara, 1985) Zuhn S and Sa1d1, R eds PPP NU & MI

Ge1olak Wadah Polztzk Islam (Dialog) (Integnta Press, 1984)

37420 MODERN INDONESIAN POLffiCAL THINKING Dr f Schiller

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semster Class Contact 2 two hour seminars per week Pre-requ1s1te Honours standing in Indonesian Studies or Asian Studies

The aims o! this topic are to understand what Indonesian pohl!cal debate has been about smce 1945, to understand the role of ideology in ma1nta1n1ng and changing poht1cal systems, and to look at the relat10nsh1p between pohllcal structures, ideology and cultural hegemony

556

Text books Feith H and Castles, L , eds Indonesian

polztzcal thznkzng (Cornell U P 1970) Holt C , ed Culture and politics zn Indonesia

(Cornell U P , 1972) Anderson B and Kah1n, A , eds Interpreting

Indonesian polztzcs (Cornell UP 1981) Emmerson, D !( Indonesia s elite cultural

polztzcs and polztzcal cultures (Cornell U P , 1982)

Reference books Akhmad1, H Breaking the chazns of

oppresszon (Cornell UP, 1981) Mortimer RA , ed Showcase state (Angus &

Robertson, 1973) Doran, C ed Indonesian politics a reader

Games Cook U P 1987)

37421 INDONESIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Dr KR Foulcher and Mr PG Tzckell

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semster Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing In Indonesian Studies

The topic is designed to extend students' fam1har1ty with a range of contempoiary Indonesian literature and provide an opportunity for development of Indonesian language skills at an advanced level Recent novels and short stones will be studied through seminar discussions conducted in Indonesian

Text books Chudon, Leda S Malam Terakhzr (Graflti,

1989) Dim Nurhayatl falan Bandungan

(DJambatan, 1989) Hoerip, Satyagraha, Sesudah Berszh Desa

(Bala1 Pustaka, 1989) Toer, PA Gadzs Pantaz (Basta Mitra 1987)

37422 JAVANESE LANGUAGE Ms Fzrdaus and Dr B Martzn 6chzller

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 two hour seminars per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing in Indonesian Studies

The topic 1s designed to provide a basic knowledge of spoken and wntten modern Javanese m both its high (krama) and low (ngoko) forms A s1tuat10nal approach will be used, covering vocabulary and structures appropriate to a vanety of everyday situations m which the language 1s used

Text book ICeeler, W , Javanese a cultural approach

(Oh10 U P Centre for International Studies, 1984)

Reference books Praw1roatmo10, S Bausastra jawa-Indonesza

2 vols (Gunung Agung, 1985)

Recommended reading Taruna ) CT Cm Budaya Manusia /awa

(Kamsms, 1987)

University of Adelaide Topics

05121 (5978) CHINESE I Ms S Chan and Mr A Watson

Umts 9 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 5 language classes and 2 laboratory hours per week Pre reqms1te None

The topic consists of the study of the basic grammar, vocabulary and structures of Modern Standard Chmese (Mandarm) with special emphasis on the style and usage found m Chma today The students will learn approximately 650 basic Chinese characters and associated compounds concentrating on vocabulary which relates to contemporary Chma

Text books Elementary Chinese readers Books 1 and 2

(Foreign Language Pr, 1980)

ThIS text will be supplemented and expanded by matenals prepared by the lecturers

[This topic will be offered m 1991 at the Umvers1ty of Adelaide ]

05152 (2725) JAPANESE I INTRODUCTORY JAPANESE Ms V Mackie

Umts 9 Level First year Durat10n Full year

So cw logy

Class Contact 5 hours of class work plus language laboratory work Pre requ1s1te No previous knowledge of Japanese 1s required Students who have sat1sfactor1ly completed matr1culat1on Japanese or have an equivalent previous knowledge of the language may, upon consultation with the Chairman of the Centre, enrol duectly m Japanese II

This introductory course is designed to achieve a solid foundation in the basic grammar and vocabulary of modern spoken Japane~e, together with a baste knowledge of the writing system Emphasis will be on the intensive practice of oral skills through class lectures, practical tutonals and language laboratory sessions

Text book Swinburne Institute Japanese reading and

writing (available from the Centre)

[This topic will be offered m 1991 at the Umvers1ty of Adelaide ]

Topics in Socwlogy

General lnformahon

General questions of course design penn1ss1on to take special comb1nat1ons or broad quest10ns about the study of Soc10logy at Flmders should be addressed either to the Head of D1sc1plme or to the Director of Studies

Ordinary degree

A basic ma1or sequence 1n Soc1ology requires 36 umts of work done w1thm the D1sc1phne This should be made up of twelve umts from Soc10logy I (Soc10logy 38110) and twelve umts from topics m Sociology at each of second and thud year levels Twelve umts of second year level topics must normally be completed prior to enrolment in third year level topics Students who have twelve umts of a first year

557

School of Social Sciences

Soc1al Sciences topic other than Soc1ology taken pnor to 1978 may offer that topic m place of 38110

In 1991 the followmg topics may be available m Soc10logy at second and third year level Students should call at the Soc10logy Disciplme office in January or early February for final details of topics that will be available

Second Year topics (Socwlogy II) Units

38205 Methods of Sociological Inqmry (Dr W Martin and Staff) 6

38208 Soc10logical Theory (Associate Professor R Holton) 6

38209 Introduct10n to Social Structure (Socwlogy Staff) 6

Third Year topics

38305 Soc10logy of Developing Socielles (Professor R Hassan) 6

38306 Political Soc10logy (DrW Martin) 6

38314 Soc10logy of Deviance (Dr S Roach Anleu) 6

38316 Family, State and Society (Socwlogy Staff) 6

38317 Urban Soc10logy (P10fessor R Hassan) 6

38319 Medical Soc10logy (Dr M Zadorozny7) 6

38322 Industrial Sociology (Dr C Williams) 6

38324 Economic Soc10logy (Dr/ Carr) 6 38326 Soc10logy of Law (Dr S Roach

Anleu) 6 38327 Comparative Soc1ology

(Socwlogy Staff) 6 38328 Culture and Society

(Dr/ Kaperer) 6 38331 Contemporary Social Problems

(Dr/ Carr) 6 38332 Postmodernrsm and Cultural

Pohtics I (Socwlogy Staff) 6

NOTE Students who have successfully completed any of the following courses under their former numbers are not pernutted to repeat such courses under the new number 38205 Methods of Soc10logical Inqmry, 38317 Urban Soc10logy, 38323 Soc10logical Theories of Social Change, 38318 Sociology of Rehg10n,

558

38319 Medical Soc10logy, 38321 Australian Society In addit10n 38213 Family and Kmsh1p has been renamed and renumbered 38316 Family, State and Society The above rule also applies m this case

First Year Topic

38110 SOCIOLOGY I Dr/ Carr (Convener), Dr S Roach Anleu and Dr M Zadorozny/

Umts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 one hour lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes None

The topic introduces students to basic concepts of soc10logy by analysing the emergence and development of modern Western society Nineteenth and early twentieth century soc1olog1cal theories will be discussed and interpretations of contemporary cap1tahsm and basic socio economic pro cesses hke industnahsation, urbanisation and bureaucratisation considered The explanatory value of these approaches Will be assessed h1stoncally, comparatively and 1n relation to contemporary society Throughout the course, special emphasis will be made to the way m which soc10log1cal theories may be used to understand Austrahan society

Prelzmznary readzng Berger P L lnvztatzon to soczology a

humanzstzc perspective (Anchor Books, 1963)

Giddens A Soczology a brief but crztzcal mtroductzon (Macmillan 1982)

Recommended texts Giddens, A Capztalzsm and modern social

theory (Cambridge UP, 1971) Giddens, A Socwlogy (Pohty Pr 1989) )agtenberg, T and D'Alton, P, eds Four

dzmenszonal social space (Harper & Row 1989)

Mac10ms,)) Socwlogy (Prenllce Hall, 1990) McConnoch1e, I{ et al Race and racism zn

Australia (Social Science Pr , 1988) Naiman, ) and Western, ) S eds A socwlogy

of Australian society (Macmillan, 1988) Robertson, MI Soczology, 3rd ed (Worth

Publishers, 1987)

Second Year Topics

38205 METHODS OF SOCIOLOGICAL INQUIRY Dr W Martin and staff

Umts 6 Le\ el Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 one hour lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 38110 Soc10logy I at a C grade or better, or perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic will mtroduce students to the maior methods by which soc10log1sts collect and construct information about the social world and analyse 1t The aim is to provide students with practical experience of some of these methods and to ensure that they can understand and evaluate research reports based on them

Set books

Burgess, R G In the field an mtroductwn to fleld research (Allen & Unwm 1984)

de Vaus, D A Surveys zn social research 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1984)

Ho1nv11le 1 G et al Survey research practice (Hememann, 1978)

Wadsworth, Y Do zt yourself social research (Allen & Unwm, 1988)

Reference books

Babbie, ER The practice of social research (Wadsworth, 1975)

Badey, K D Methods of social research (Free Press, 1987)

Blalock, H M Social statlStics, 2nd ed (McGraw-Hiil 1979)

Denzin, N I{ The research act a theoretical introduction to sociological methods (McGraw Hiii, 1978)

Lofland,) and Lofland C H Analyzing social settings, 2nd ed (Wadsworth 1984)

Moser, C and Kalton G Survey methods rn social znvestigatzon, 2nd ed (Heinemann 1975)

Sell!Jz, C et al Research methods rn social relatwns, 3rd ed (Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1976)

Socwlogy

38208 SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY Associate Professor Rf Holton

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1S1te 38110 Soc10logy I at a C grade or better or perm1ss10n of the Convener

NOTE Students at second year level who mtend to read for a baste ma1or In Soctology are advised that topic 38209 Introduction to Social Structure closely complements thlS topic

Tlus topic IS an analytical treatment of classical soc1olog1cal theory where, on a selective basis some key texts will be discussed in relation to a particular problem or set of problems Works by Durkheim, Marx and Weber will feature in this selection Assessment will be based on written work

Prelzmznary reading Hughes, HS Consciousness and society

(Octagon 1976)* Parsons, f The structure of social action

(Free Pr, 1968)*

Reference books Durkhenn, E Professzonal ethics and czvzc

morals (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1959) Durkheim, E Rules of socwlogical method

(Macmillan, 1982)* Durkheim, E The d1v1s1on of labor zn soczety

(Mac!Illllan, 1984)* Marx K and Engels, F The German ideology

(any ed1t10n) Weber M The methodology of the social

sciences (Free Pr, 1949) Weber, M Economy and soczety, 2 vols

(Cahfomia UP, 1978)*

38209 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL STRUCTURE Socwlogy Staff

Units 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1S1te 38110 Soc10logy I at grade C or better or perm1ss1on of the Convener

ThlS topic wdl deal with the ongm and nature of social 1nequahhes, social strat1f1catton

559

School of Social Sciences

social class, ethn1c1ty the professions, social change and social movements There will be an opportunity to carry out an emp1r1cal research pro1ect

Reference books Bell, D The cultural contradictions of

capitalism (Heinemann, 1975) Bottomore, T Theories of modern capitalism

(Allen & Unwm, 1985) Parkin, F M arxzsm and class theory

(Tavistock, 1978) Smohcz, G Culture and education zn a plural

soczety (Cumculum Development Centre, 1979)

Wild, R Social stratification m Australia (Allen & Unwm, 1978)

Thzrd Year Topics

Students cannot proceed to third year topics unlll they have completed 12 umts of second year Soc10logy topics at Grade C or above

38305 (37309) SOCIOLOGY OF DEVELOPING SOCIETIES Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1S1te 38110 Soc10logy I, 12 umts of Soc10logy II topics at Grade C or better or perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic will deal with the nature and development of the 1nternattonal strat1f1cat1on system Special attent10n will be paid to the social structure of developing Asian countnes and to the process of social change 1n them

Reference books Alatas, S H The myth of the lazy native

(Frank Cass 1977) Alavi, H and Shan1n, T, eds Introduction to

the soczology of developing societies (Macmillan 1982)

Cockcroft, JD , Frank, A G and Johnson, D L Dependence and underdevelopment (Doubleday, 1972)

Gellner, E Muslim society (Cambridge U P , 1981)

560

Hoogvelt, A M M The socwlogy of developing soczetzes, 2nd ed (Macm1llan1

1978) L1mqueco P and Mcfarlane, B , eds Neo

Marxist theories of development (Croom Helm 1983)

Myrdal G An approach to the Asian drama (Vmtage, 1970)

Roxborough, I Theones of under development (Macmdlan, 1979)

38306 POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY DrW Martin

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 one hour lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmSites 38110 Soc10logy I, plus 12 umts of Second Year Soc10logy II topics at C or better, or by permission of the Convener

This topic surveys the ma1or issues in poht1cal sociology including power, the state, democracy and electoral poht1cs, pohhcal ideology and socrnl movements It will bnefly trace the emergence of modern pohtlcal mslltut10ns (the state and pohllcal parties) and modern modes of poht1cal action (particularly class politics and social movements) in Western societies In the light of these established political forms the s1gn1f1cance of 1new social movements , post materialist pohbcal values, and other aspects of 'post modern' pohbcs will be considered The topic will compare the accounts of poht1cal processes and their consequences provided by several maior theoretical onentat1ons 1n sociology In particular, 1t will consider the contnbuttons of Manast and neo Mana.st Webertan, and pluralist traditions to the explanation of pohttcal 1nstltuttons and pohttcal action

Reference books H1ndess B Politics and class analysis

(Blackwell, 1987) IUng, R The state zn modern society new

dzrectzons zn polztzcal sociology (Macmdlan, 1986)

L1pset, S M Political man, expanded ed (Hememann, 1983)

38314 (21413) SOCIOLOGY OF DEVIANCE Dr S Roach Anleu

Units 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 38110 Soc10logy I, plus 12 units of Second Year Sociology topics at C or better, or by perm1ss1on of the Convener

Tins topic will examine various conceptions and soc1olog1cal theories of deviant behaviour This mvolves the 1denl!!Jcat10n of the social processes and cond1hons leading to the def1n1hon and treatment of acts as deviance and actors as deviant The focus will be comparative The topic will explore conceptions of and reactions to deviance h1stoncally and cross culturally Special attention will be given to deVIance and its control 1n Austrahan society

Preliminary reading

Goffman, E Stigma (Pengum, 1968)

Erikson, l{a1 Wayward Purztans (Wiiey, 1966)

Reference books

Anleu, S Roach Deviance, conformity and control (Longman Cheshire, 1991)

Becker H S Outsiders (Free Pr , 1963)

Box, S Deviance, realzty and society, 2nd ed (Holt Rmehart & Wmston 1981)

Chappell D and Wilson, P , eds The Australzan crimznal 1ustzce system of the mid 1980s (Butterworths, 1988)

Cohen S ed Images of deviance (Pelican, 1975)

Edwards, A Regulation and represszon (Allen & Unwm, 1988)

Fmlay, M and Hogg R, eds Understanding crime and criminal 1ustzce (Law Book Co , 1988)

Rock, P Deviant behaviour (Hutchinson, 1973)

Schur, EM Labeling women devzant (Random House, 1984)

Soczology

38316 FAMILY, STATE AND SOCIETY Soczology Staff

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre requzsite 38110 Soc10logy I plus 12 umts of Second Year Sociology II topics at C or better, or by perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic explores the place of the family withm the modem type of social system In doing so, it will examine the dtfferent1at1on between domestic and publtc domains, and their mterdependence A particular focus will be the domain of intersection between the family (domestic domam) and the state (public domain) a domain which has been termed 'the social sector Some emp1r1cal illustrative reference will be made to Australian materials

Preliminary reading

Lash S and Urry, J The end of organized capitalzsm (Pohty, 1987)

Mishra, R The welfare state in crzszs (Wheatsheaf, 1984)

Reference books

Baldock, CV and Cass, B Women, soczal welfare and the state in Australia (Allen & Unwm, 1983)

Blustem, ) Parents and children the ethics of the family (Oxford U P , 1982)

Castles, F) The working class and welfare (Allen & Unwm, 1985)

Diamond, I , ed Families, politics and public policy (Longman, 1983)

Donzelot ) The policing of families welfare versus the state (Hutchmson, 1979)

Parsons, T and Bales, RF Family soczalzzation and interaction process (Free Pr 1960)

Reiger, K The dzsenchantment of the home modernizing the Australian family, 1880 1940 (Oxford UP, 1985)

Sassoon, A S , ed Women and the state (Hutchmson, 1987)

Voydanoff, P , ed Work and family changing roles of men and women (Mayfield, 1984)*

Watts, R The foundatzons of the natzonal welfare state (Allen & Unwzn 1987)

561

School of Social Sciences

38317 URBAN SOCIOLOGY Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te 38110 Socrnlogy I and 12 umts of Socrnlogy II topics at grade C or better, or perm1ss1on of the Convener

The topic will examme the work done by urban soCiolog1sts in this century, 1nclud1ng an analysis of the Chicago School, American Community Studies, the New Urban Socio logy, and recent French attempts to develop a Marxist urban soc ology The topic will offer a short survey of Australian urban problems

Reference books Castells, M City, class and power (Macmillan,

1978) Gist N P and Fava S Urban society

(Cromwell 1964) Harloe, M ed Captive cities (Wiley, 1977) Harvey D Social 7ustzce and the czty

(Arnold, 1973) K.Ilmarhn, L , Thorns D and Burke, T Soczal

theory and the Australian city (Allen & Unwm, 1985)

P1ckvance C G Urban soczology crztzcal essays (Tavistock, 1976)

Smith, N and Wiiliams P Gentriflcatwn of the city (Allen & Unwm 1986)

Stretton, H Ideas for Australian cities, 3rd ed (Transit 1989)

38319 MEDICAL SOCIOLOGY Dr M Zadorozny/

Umts 6 Level Thlrd year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 one hour lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1tes 38110 Socrnlogy I and 12 umts of Socrnlogy II topics at grade C or better, or perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic will cover a range of sub1ects relevant to a socrnlogy of health and illness The underlymg theme will be the cnt1cal examination of the social, poht1cal and economic determinants of health and illness in contemporary Australian society Inequities m the health status of the populatrnn accordmg

562

to class, gender, occupation and race ethnicity will be problema!Ic1sed and analysed through the use of histoncal and cross national data A range of theoretical and biomedical explanat10ns of health and illness will be explored, and their relevance evaluated through a substantive examination of the roles of health profess10ns the orgamsat10n of health care systems both here and abroad, and pubhc health policy

Preliminary readzng Doyal L The political economy of health

(Pluto Press, 1979)

Reference books Lupton G and Naiman J , eds Socwlogy of

health and illness Aust•alian readings (Macmillan, 1989)

Bates E and Lmder-Pelz S Health care issues (Allen & Unwm, 1987)

Davis, A and George, J States of health health and illness zn Australia (Harper & Row 1988)

W1lhs, E Medical dominance, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1989)

38321 (23208) AUSTRALIAN SOCIETY Socwlogy Staff

Not offered m 1991

38322 INDUSTRIAL SOCIOLOGY Dr C Williams

Umts 6 Level Thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre-requisite 12 units of Sociology II topics at C grade or better, or with permission of the Convener

This topic will consider Australia s labour history, managenal perspec!Ives of the 20th century, the relat1onsh1p of class to work, the labour process debate the impact of automation on work for men and women, unemployment the employment of Abongmes and migrants women 1n the paid workforce, mdustnal health and safety, work and disabled people

Prelzm1nary reading Rose M Industrial behaviour (Penguin,

1988)*

Set books Bray M and Taylor, V, eds Managing

labour> essays zn the political economy of Australzan zndustrzal relations (McGraw Hz]] 1986)

Hill, S Competitzon and control at work the new zndustrzal sociology (Heinemann 1981)

Wtlhams, C R Blue1 whzte and pznk collar workers zn Australza (Allen & Unw1n, 1988)*

Reference book O'Donnell, C and Hall, P Getting equal

(Allen & Unwm 1988)

38324 (52316) ECONOMIC SOCIOLOGY Dr J Carr

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqms1te 12 umts of Soc10logy II topics at C grade or better or with perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic examines the h1stor1cal development of international cap1tahsm and the place of small, medium and corporate companies w1th1n it It analyses forms of econom1c organ1sat1on ranging through matters of class ethn1c1ty and gender Competing theones of cap1tahst and simple commod1ty production petite bourgeois achv1ty, 1mm1grant enterprise, female entrepreneurship, etc , will be examined Special emphasis will be given to the role of women managers and entrepreneurs in small and large companies, and the impact of 1mm1gratlon on business formation in Australia

Preliminary readzng Bechhofer F and Elhott B eds The petite

bourgeozsze comparatzve studzes of the uneasy stratum (Macmillan, 1981)

Reference books Goffee, R and Sease, R Women zn charge

the experiences of female entrepreneurs (Allen & Unwm, 1985)

Light, I and Bonac1ch E Immigrant entrepreneurs (Cahforma U P 1988)

Soczology

Marx, K Capital Vol I (Progress, 1983) Pahl RE Dzviszons of labour (Basil

Blackwell, 1984) Redchft, N and Mmg10ne, E Beyond

employment household, gender and subsistence (Basil Blackwell, 1985)

Sachs, C E The invisible farmers women zn agricultural productzon (Rowman & Allanheld, 1983)

Wald1nger, R et al Immigrant entrepreneurs immigrant business zn western industrial societies (Sage, 1990)

38326 (21415) THE SOCIOLOGY OF LAW Dr S Roach Anleu

Umts 6 Level Third year Durat10n Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqms1te 38110 Soc10logy I, plus 12 umts of Second Year Soc10logy topics at C or bette'", or by perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic examines the law as a social 1nstttution, the organ1sat1on of the legal system, and its part1c1pants Topics of d1scuss1on include the deftn1t1on of law, trends in legal theory, the relationsh1p between legal systems and social structures, and the role and effectiveness of law m social change

Prelzmznary readzng Derham DP Maher F K H and Waller, PL

An zntroductzon to law, 5th ed (The Law Book Company, 1986)

Reference books Hanks, P and l{eon Cohen, B , eds

Aborzgznes and the law (Allen & Unwm 1984)

Hunt, A The soczologzcal movement zn law (Macmillan, 1978)

Ka1rys D The politics of law ((Pantheon, 1982)

O'Malley, P Law, capztalzsm and democracy (Allen & Unwm, 1983)

Thompson, E P Whigs and hunters (Pantheon, 1976)

Tomasic, R The soczology of law (Sage, 1985) Smart, C Feminism and the power of law

(Routledge 1989)

563

School of Soczal Sczences

38327 (52314) (37312) COMPARATIVE SOCIOLOGY Mr A I Patzence

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes 12 units of second year Soc10logy topics at C or better, or by perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic focuses on selected key social 1nshtutlons in different socio cultural settings, 1n order to understand Austrahan society better Key ms1Itut10ns to be considered may include the family schoohng and education, gender, rehg1on work Soc10 cultural contexts may mclude Austraha, Japan and Smgapore In 1991 the mam focus will be Austraha and Japan

Prelzmznary reading Maugham, W S The gentleman zn the parlour

(Hememann 1930) Tamzak1, J The Makzoka szsters (Perigree

Books 1981)

Reference books Chen, P , ed Singapore development polzczes

and trends (Oxford UP, 1983) Clammer J Singapore ideology society

culture (Chapman, 1985) Dale, P The myth of Japanese unzqueness

(Croom Helm, 1986) Dore, R Czty lzfe zn Japan (Cahfom1a UP

1973) Fukutake, T Rural soczety zn Japan (Tokyo

up' 1980) Hendry, J Understanding Japanese society

(Methuen, 1987) Little R and Reed, W The Confucian

renaissance (Federallon Pr 1989) McCormack, G and Sug1moto, Y , eds

Democracy zn contemporary Japan (M E Sharpe, 1986)

Mor1sh1ma, M Why has Japan succeeded ?

(Cambridge UP, 1982) Nakane, C Japanese soczety (Pengum, 1981) N1tobe, I Bushzdo the soul of Japan (Tuttle

1981) Re1schauer E The Japanese (Tuttle, 1977) Smith, R Japanese soczety (Cambridge U P ,

1983)

564

Starry, R A hzstory of modern Japan (Pehcan, 1982)

Vogel E Japan as No 1 (Tuttle 1982)

38328 CULTURE AND SOCIETY Dr J Kapferer

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqms1te 38110 Soc10logy I plus 12 units of Second Year Soc1ology II topics at C or better, or by perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic constitutes an exam1nahon of some of the ways 1n which cultural analysis informs the study of society The theorellcal focus 1s upon cultural production and reproduction, and 1deolog1cal critique Substanllvely, such topics as style of hie, high culture popular culture and the not10n of subculture and dealt with Emphasis 1s placed upon the Australian cultural experience wherever possible

Reference books Barthes, R Mythologzes (any ed1t10n) Bourd1eu, P Dzstznctzon (Routledge & Kegan

Paul, 1984) Eco U Travels zn hyperrealzty (any ed1t1on) FISke, J, Hodge, B and Turner, G Myths of

Oz (Allen & Unwm, 1987) Kapferer B Legends of people, myths of state

(Sm1thsoman, 1988) Wuthnow, R et al Cultural analysis

(Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1984)

38331 CONTEMPORARY SOCIAL PROBLEMS Dr J Carr

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqms1te 38110 Soc10logy I plus 12 units of Soc1ology II at grade C or better, or perm1ss1on of the Convener

The topic will concentrate on a number of key social problems m contemporary Austrahan society These include su1c1de, drug abuse,

racism, poverty and unemployment The problems will be analysed with reference to sociological theor1es 1 and w1th1n the framework of the underlying causes of particular social problems

Preliminary reading McConnochie, K , Hollmsworth, D and

Pettman1 J Race and raczsm in Australia (Social Science Pr , 1988)

Sargent, M Sociology for Australians (Longman Cheshire, 1983)

Reference books Durkheim, E Suzcide (Routledge & Kegan

Paul, 1975) Sargent, M Socwlogy for Australians

(Longman Cheshire, 1983) Western1 JS Social znequalzty in Australian

society (Macmdlan, 1983)

38332 POSTMODERNISM AND CULTURAL POLITICS I Socwlogy Staff

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requisite 12 umts of Soc10logy II topics at grade C or better, or with perm1ss1on of Convener

This topic explores the sigmficance of post modermsm for the soc10logy of knowledge and contemporary pohttcs It represents also an enquiry mto the soczology of post modermsm Particular attent10n will be given to the followmg the new social movements and their significance for postmodern poht1cs, the relat10nship of multiracial and multi cultural poht1cs to postmodern1sm the emergence of 'difference' as a central value in cultural exchange and politics, and the development of post colomal global sub1ect1Vltles and politics

Prelzmznary readzng Memmi, A The colonizer and the colonized

(Beacon Pr , 1965)

Reference books Keane, j Democracy and civil soczety (Verso,

1988) Keane, j Czvzl soczety and the state (Verso,

1988)

So cw logy

Lyotard j F The postmodern condztwn a report on knowledge (Minnesota U P 1

1984) Mies, M Patnarchy and accumulation on a

world scale (Zed Books, 1986) Milner, A et al , eds Postmodern condztzons

(Centre for General and Comparative Lit , Monash U P , 1988)

Nicholson, L Femznzsmlpostmodernzsm (Routledge, 1990)

WeedonJ C Feminist practice and post structuralzst theory (Blackwell, 1987)

Honours Programme

Convener Dr C Wzllzams

The Honours programme compnses 18 umts of coursework and an 18 unit research thesis The 1ntent1on of the programme IS to combine a broad theoretical tra1n1ng 1n advanced soc10logical theory with the opportunity to design and execute an emp1r1cal research pro1ect

Students are assessed by essays In their coursework

Examinat1on of the thesis includes an oral defence

It should be emphasised that Honours students can not choose topics avatlable to Diploma students

Honours coursework Coursework at this level is an advanced tra1n1ng in soc1olog1cal theory apphed soc10logy, and advanced soc10log1cal research methods

Honours thesis Students are expected to have clarified their thesis topic by early February, and to have developed by then a workmg relat10nship with their supervisor(s) The Disciphne provides the opportunity for students to offer work in progress seminars on their thesis research

38440 SOCIOLOGY HONOURS THESIS

Umts 18 Level Honours Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An essay of about 15,000 words to be written under the superns1on of a member of the Soc10logy staff The thesis should demonstrate

565

School of Social Sciences

the students abihtles to collect and evaluate information construct, test and defend an argument or thesis, and cntlcally examine the dominant theories of his or her area of enquiry Work 1n progress seminars are held 1n the first semester Students should choose a thests topic and obtam the agreement of a member of staff to act as a supervisor before the end of December of the year immediately prior to their enrolling 1n the Honours programme The thesis should normally be submitted at the begmnmg of October m the year m which the student is completing his or her Honours programme

38441 ADVANCED SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY Convener Sociology staff

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact A 1112 hour semmar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

A close analysis of a range of ma1or theonsts, debates or problems m soc10logical thought

38442 APPLIED SOCIOLOGY Convener Sociology staff

Umts 6 Duration Semester Class Contact A l 1/2 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An analysis of the apphcatlon of soctological theory 1n one or more policy related areas

38443 ADVANCED SOCIOLOGICAL RESEARCH METHODS Convener Sociology staff

Umts 6 Duration Semester Class Contact A 11/2 hour seminar per week Pre requisite Honours standing

This topic provides an advanced level trammg m the relat10nsh1p between socwlogical theory concept formation, research design and data collectton methods

566

The Diploma of Social Sciences m Soczology

This diploma 1s mtended to enable holders of pass degrees m Soctology and other people whose quahf1cat1ons are suff1c1ently similar, to proceed to further studies m Sociology The purpose ofthts diploma programme ts to allow continuing students or students returning to the Un1vers1ty who do not wish to pursue studies for research degrees to acquire skills m apphed soc10logical research which will be useful in areas hke social planning, pubhc dec1s1on making, etc

The Diploma in Social Sciences in Sociology is composed of 36 units, which may include a thests

Students are remmded that at least 24 umts of this programme must be at Honours level

Students enrolled for an Honours degree in Soc10logy can not choose topics from the followmg hst

38413 (37408) (52404) SOCIOLOGY OF DEVELOPING SOCIETIES Professor R Hassan

Units 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

Students will be reqmred to undertake mdependent research projects (based on library resources) on the social structure and social change m selected developmg soctelles

38414 URBAN SOCIOLOGY Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

This topic deals with the recent accomphshments of the new urban sociology, with special attenllon bemg directed to the debates between the Marxists and Webenans m the field

38434 ADVANCED RESEARCH METHODS DrW Martin

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

This topic will focus on the relationship between theory and data in soc1olog1cal research

38435 SOCIOLOGY OF KNOWLEDGE

Not offered m 1991

38436 MEDICAL SOCIOLOGY Dr M Zadorozny/

May not be offered m 1991

Uruts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite Honours or Diploma standmg

This topic is an advanced study of the soc1ology of medical 1nshtuhons, health and illness behaviour in 1ndustnal soc1etles

38437 SOCIAL PROBLEMS Dr f Carr

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite Honours or Diploma standmg

This is an advanced level topic which wdl survey the soc1olog1cal hterature on one or more social problems These may include unemployment, cnme, poverty, etc

38438 FAMILY, STATE AND SOCIETY Sociology Staff

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requmte Honours or Diploma standmg

Sociology

This topic will explore closely and cntlcally theoretical perspectives on the sexual d1v1s1on of labour the famdy and the state

38439 ECONOMY AND SOCIETY Associate Professor R J Holton

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honour" or Diploma standing

This is an advanced level topic focusing on theoretical issues connected wtth the soc1ology of economic hfe Particular emphasis will be given to the soc1olog1cal critique of utthtanan1sm

38444 SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVES ON THE STATE AND BUREAUCRACY Sociology Staff

May not be offered m 1991

38445 VALUE CLARIFICATION AND APPLIED SOCIOLOGY

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

This topic is concerned with several themes

1 The impact of the histoncal processes of the seculansation and relativ1sation of values on the status of values 1n modern society, 2 The consequential perception of values as functions of 'interested positions, of values as 'ideologies' 3 The promise and hmits of Weber s methodology of value clanficat10n 4 The imphcatwns of all this for the concept10n and practice of Applied Soc10logy

38446 COMPARATIVE POLIDCAL SOCIOLOGY Socwlogy Staff

May not be offered m 1991

567

School of Social Sciences

38448 POSTMODERNISM AND CULTURAL POLITICS II Soczology Staff

Umts 6 Level Honours or Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing

This topic explores the sigmf1cance of po•lmodermsm for the soc10logy of knowledge and contemporary pohttcs It represents also an enquiry into the soc1ology of post modernism Particular attention will be given to the follow1ng the new social movements and their s1gn1flcance for postmodern politics, the relat10nship of multiracial and multt­cultural poh!tcs to postmodermsm the emergence of difference' as a central value 1n cultural exchange and poh!tcs, and the development of post colomal global sub1ecttv11tes and pohltcs

Preliminary reading Memm1 A The colonizer and the colonized

(Beacon Press, 1967)

Reference books Keane1 J Democracy and crvil society (Verso,

1988) Keane, j Czv1l society and the state (Verso,

1988) Lyotard, j F The postmodern conditwn a

report on knowledge (Mmnesota UP 1984)

Mies, M Patriarchy and accumulation on a world scale (Zed Books, 1986)

Miiner, A et al, eds Postmodern conditions (Centre for General and Comparattve Lit , Monash U P , 1988)

N1cholson, L Femznzsmlpostmodernism (Routledge, 1990)

Weedon C Femznzst practice and post structuralist theory (Blackwell, 1987)

Masters Coursework Topics

Convener Dr C Williams

Students with an honours degree 1n sociology, or its equivalent, may apply to undertake research and/ or coursework towards the M A degree m Soc10logy

The followmg coursework topics are available for students who wish to include a coursework

568

component m their MA studies Up to 12 units of elective topics may be taken from other masters coursework programmes with the approval of the Convener of Graduate Studies m Soc10logy

For students who W!Sh to do a Masters by coursework m Soc1ology, they must do a total of 54 umts mcludmg either the ma1or thestS for 24 umts or the mmor thests for 12 umts

38500 SOCIOLOGY MA COURSEWORK MINOR THESIS

Umts 12 Level Masters Duration Full year Pre reqrnstte Admtsston to Masters programme

An essay of about 15,000 words to be written under the supervmon of a member of the Sociology staff The thests should demonstrate the student's abihttes to collect and evaluate information, construct, test and defend an argument or thesis, and critically examine theories 1n his/her area of enquiry In consultation with the Director of Graduate Studies 1n Soc1ology, students should choose a thesis topic and obtain the agreement of a member of staff to act as supervisor pnor to enrolling

38503 STATE INTERVENTION AND SOCIAL CHANGE IN AUSTRALIA Dr S Roach Anleu

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqws1te Adm1ss1on to Masters programme

An exammat10n of the lmks between the state and the law and their relat1onsh1p to social change in Austrahan society

38504 MARXISM IN CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THOUGHT Socwlogy Staff

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqrnS1te Adnussmn to Masters programme

A cnhcal examination of the relevance of Marxist structuralism to contemporary sociology Assessment will be based on one ma1or paper

38505 (52516) ISSUES IN THE SOCIOLOGY OF DEVELOPMENT Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite Admission to Masters programme

An examination of the political sociology of nahonahsm and independence movements 1n the Thud World soc1et1es Case studies will be drawn from East and West Afnca, lndo Chma, Labn America and Melanesia

Assessment will be based on one ma1or paper

38507 COMPARATIVE POLIDCAL SOCIOLOGY DrW Martin

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite Adrruss1on to Masters programme

This topic will compare approaches to public policy m Australia and japan and other countries such as Singapore and Papua New Gumea The central focus wdl be on the role of the state in regulating, servicing, funding promoting, and/or replacing elements in the 'mixed' economies of the countries under review

38508 SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY Soczology Staff

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2-3 hours per week Pre requisite Admission to Masters programme

An 1ntroduchon to central traditions and issues 1n soc1olog1cal theory at Masters level

Soczology

38509 (52515) SOCIOLOGICAL RESEARCH METHODS DrW Martin

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requisite Adrrussion to Masters programme

An 1ntroduchon to research techniques 1n sociology at Masters level

38511 (51521) FAMILY, STATE AND SOCIAL POLICY Soczology Staff

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite Adrruss1on to Masters programme

This topic m applied soc10logy explores the range of policy issues which arise from the gendered div1s1on of labour between the state, civil society and family hfe

38512 (51509) SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVES ON THE STATE AND BUREAUCRACY Soczology Staff

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqws1te AdmISs10n to Masters programme

This topic explores soc1olog1cal perspectives on a range of issues concerning the late 20th century state tn cap1tahst society, and the adm1n1strative staff of the state

38513 (51522) VALUE CLARIFICATION AND PUBLIC POLICY Soczology Staff

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requ1S1te Adm1ss10n to Masters programme

569

School of Soczal Sciences

This topic will concern itself with several themes 1 The lffipact of the histoncal processes of

the secularisation and relat1v1sat1on of values on the status of values in modem society

2 The consequential perception of values as functions of 11nterested positions of values as '1deolog1es

3 The promise and hm1ts of Weber's methodology of value clar1ficat1on,

4 The nature of the inst1tut1ons and structures required for stable and peaceful fonns of value debate

The topic will examme the 1mphcat10ns of the above for the concept10n and practice of pubhc sector pohcy Australian case materials will be used

38514 (32503, 51523,52502) POPULATION STUDIES Dr RM Steele

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic will focus on a number of core questions relating to the causes and consequences of changes in population growth, m1grat1on, fert1hty, mortality and population structure The ma1or theories advanced to explam these demographic changes will be cr1tically examined and related to wider economic and social change There will be an approximately equal d1v1s1on of attention between ma1or issues relating more spec1flcally to Third World populations and those relating to 1ndustnahsed soc1ehes A small section of the topic will be devoted to a constderat10n of some advanced methods of demographic analySis especially with respect to populat10n movements and population pro1echons

38515 GRADUATE READING SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY Professor R Hassan and Soczology Staff

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Pre reqwstte Adrruss10n to Masters programme

570

Students takmgth1s topic will have estabhshed an area of interest 1n consultation with an mdividual member of staff and with the approval of the co ordmator of the Masters programme m Soc10logy Study m this topic will comprise supervised 1nd1v1dual reading of the relevailt hterature and research in their selected area, and completion of assignments totallmg about 6,000 words

38516 (52525) ISSUES IN CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGY Professor R Hassan and Associate Professor Rf Holton

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqwstte Adrruss10n to Masters programme

Thts topic wt!! focus on some of the key debates in contemporary sociology chosen by the topic Convener

38517 (52526) SOCIAL THEORY AND SOCIAL PROBLEMS Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2-3 hours per week Pre reqws1te Adn11ss1on to Masters programme

This topic will focus on the relationship between social theory and social proble1ns and how the relat1onsh1p has contributed to the development of modern sociology

38518 (52527) APPLIED SOCIOLOGICAL RESEARCH Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqmstte Adrrusston to Masters programme

This topic will examine the apphcatlon of research methodology in soc1olog1cal analysis The emphasis will be on the development of appropriate research design and process to analyse organ1sahonal culture and and its relationship to organ1sat1onal structure

Students will be introduced to the apphcatron of surrogate variables 1n social analysis

38519 POSTMODERNISM AND CULTURAL POLITICS Soczology Staff

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 4 hours per week Pre reqwsrte Adnuss10n to Masters programme

This topic explores the s1gn1f1cance of postmodernrsm for the sociology of knowledge and contemporary pohtrcs It represents also an enquiry into the soc1ology of postmodern1sm Particular attention will be given to the follow1ng the new social movements and their s1gn1f1cance for postmodern pohtrcs, the relat10nsh1p of multrracral and multrcultural pohtrcs to postmodern1sm the emergence of 'difference' as a central value in cultural exchange and pohhcs, and the development of post colon1al global sub1ectiv1t1es and pohhcs

38520 SOCIOLOGY MA COURSEWORK MAJORIBESIS

Umts 24 Level Masters Duration Full year Pre reqwsrte Adnussron to Masters programme

A thesis of approximately 24,000 words wntten under the superns1on of a member of the Socrnlogy staff The thesis should give eVIdence of a students abrhty to collect and evaluate 1nformahon, construct, test and defend an argument, and cntlcally examine theones in the area of enqmry In consultat10n wrth the Director of Graduate Studies, students should choose a thesis topic and obtain the agreement of a member of staff to act as supeI'Vlsor pnor to enrollmg

38521 (21414) CRIMINOLOGY Dr S Roach Anleu

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2-3 hours per week Pre reqwsrte Adnussron to Masters programme

Australzan Studzes Programme

An examination of the Austrahan cnm1nal 1ust1ce system Attent10n will be paid to theones of cnme and cnm1nahsabon and also to issues 1n cnm1nolog1cal research

38530 MA SOCIOLOGY RESEARCH PROJECT

Umts 12 Level Masters Duratrnn Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes Masters level standing

The research pro1ect will involve production of a report of 12,000 to 15,000 words, wntten under the superv1s1on of a member of staff The pro1ect will enable students to develop areas of interest ans1ng out of the theoretical and research hterature in sociology The pro1ect should demonstrate the student s ab1lltles to undertake a hterature reVIew, to collect and evaluate information, construct, test and defend an argument and cntrcally examine theones 1n his/her area of 1nqu1ry

Reference book Smelser, N j ed Handbook of soczology

(Sage Pubhcatrnns, 1988)

Australian Studies Programme

Chainnan, and Co ordinator for Humanities Dr G Worby Co ordmator for Social Sciences Mr A I Patience Programme Adviser Ms L Hardcastle

There is a wide range of topics 1n a variety of D1sc1plmes m the Umversrty focused on the study of Austraha

Australian Studies is an 1nterd1sc1phnary programme available to students m the Schools of Humamtres and Social Sciences It can be taken as a second ma1or sequence of topics m either School provided that the student is enrolled to complete another ma1or 1n a basic D1sc1phne in his or her respective School It may not be offered as the sole ma1or zn a degree in ezther School

This ma1or sequence brings those topics together 1n a coherent whole and encourages the development of perspectives of enqmry relevant to more than one D1sc1phne Students

571

School of Social Sciences

must plan the pattern of topics in the ma1or with one of the Co ordinators Alternatively, students may enrol in these topics as cognates or electives, whatever thezr degree, sub1ect to fulfillmg relevant pre requmtes many specific case Takmg mto account the high Austrahan content 1n some multi d1sc1phnary topics, students are advised to consider enrolhng in

39208 Urbamsatlon 39212 Public Decmon Makmg 39215 Federalism m Australia 39218 Agemg

Before enrolhng in a ma1or 1n Austrahan Studies, students should check their proposed programme carefully with the Australian Studies Co ordmator m the School m which they are enrolled

Prospective ma1ors in Australtan Studies are advised that 1t IS posSible that usual pre requ1s1tes specified for topics ltsted 1n Groups A B and C may be waived for those students ta

1

la~g the courses as part of an Austrahan Studies ma1or Th!S must be confirmed with the lecturer(s) m charge of the top1c(s) and with the relevant School Co ordinator

Ma1or sequence

A ma1or sequence 1n Austrahan Studies consists of topics chosen from the follow1ng groups of first, second and third year topics, full details of which may be found under the topic numbers listed m brackets

Fzrst year

12 umts selected from one of the followmg topics (10110) English I (13110) Drama I (14110) Philosophy (16110) VISual Arts and Archaeology I (30110) Economics I (30130) Economics IA (32110) Geography I (33120) HIStory IB (33140) HIStory ID (33160) HIStory IF (35110) HIStory JG (37110) ASian Studies I (38110) Politics I (38110) Socrnlogy I

572

Second and thzrd years

24 umts chosen from the followmg three groups of sub1ects in which at least six units must be chosen from each group No more than six units may be chosen from the D1Sc1plme makmg up the student's first maior sequence

Umts Group A

22201 (18207) Australian Prose and Poetry m the Nmeteenth Century (Not offered m 1991) 6

22202 (16231) Australian Art A 1788 c 1900 (Not offered m 1991) 6

22203 (16232) Austrahan Art B c 1900 to present day (Ms L Dauth) (Semester) 6

22204 (18208) Australian Prose and Poetry m the Twentieth Century (Dr BE Matthews) (Semester) 6

22213 (16226) Australian Archaeology (Dr F D Pate) (Semester) 6

22231 (13231) Australian Drama - Part I Ongins and Influences (Dr G R Worby) (Semester) 6

22234 (21213) Language Literature and the Law Australian Contexts (Dr MF Meehan) 6

22235 (18270) Australian Studies Humamlles (All Humanitzes Australian Studies Staff) (Semester) 6

Group B

23203 ( 41201)

23205 (33204)

23206 (33224)

23207 (35321)

Women 1n Contemporary Australian Society (Dr L Ryan and Dr S Shendan) (Semester) 6 Twentieth Century Australia (Dr A R G Gnffzths) (Not offered m 1991) 6 Coloma! Australia 1856-1914 (Dr B Dickey) 6 Party, Party System and Society m Australia (Dr D H faensch) (Semester) 6

Development Studzes Programme

23208 (38321) Australian Society 23305 (33325) Australian Rehg1ous History (Mr A I Patience) (Dr D L Hilliard) (Not offered m 1991) 6 (Semester) (Not offered

23216 (32216) Australian EnVIronmental m 1991) 6 Patterns (Mr K Bardsley) 23306 (33329) Australian Welfare History (Semester) 6 (Dr B Dickey) 6

23217 (32217) Water Resources and 23307 (35327) 'Race and Australian Austrahan Society Polillcs (Mr J Summers) (Mr K Bardsley) (Semester) 6 (Semester) 6 23308 (35328) Politics of the Austrahan

23301 (31301) Australian Economic States (Dr D H faensch)

Development (Economic (Semester) (Not offered m History Staff) (Semester) 6 1991) 6

24201 (53780) Youth m Australia 23309 (32311) Austrahan Resource

(Dr J Kapferer) (May Management

not be offered m 1991) 6 (Dr R L Heathcote

24208 (53228) Education and Society Mr K Bardsley and

in Australia an historical Mr A S Fraser)

analysis (Dr D Grundy) (Semester) 6

(Semester) 6 23312 (41302) Feminism and Cultural Studies (Dr S Sheridan)

Group C (Semester) 6

22206 (14243) Appbed Philosophy 24202 (53781) Growmg Up m Australia

(Dr J Kapferer) (Issues for Australians) (Not offered m 1991) 6 (Mr R Allen) (Full year) 6

24203 (53785) History of Austrahan 22209 (18209) The Mass Media m Educallon Twenlleth

Australia (Mr A S Bear) Century Issues (Semester) 6 (Dr B K Hyams)

22214 (16227) Australian Archaeology II (Semester) 6 Problems m Archaeological

Seminars Theory and 'Vlethod (Dr FD Pate) (Semester) 6 In add1t1on, students in their third year of the

22232 (13232) Australian Drama - Part II sequence may be invited to a short senes of

Alternatives (Mr G H seminars 1n which the vanety of approaches

Anderson) (Semester) 6 to the study of Australia will be discussed and

23211 (35215) Australian Government common themes examined

and Pubhc Policy Honours (Dr A W Parkin and The Austrahan Studies sequence is only Mr J Summers) available in the ordinary degree However, (Semester) 6 there are honours topics on Australian sub1ects

23212 (41202) (33229) Gender m in a vanety of Disc1phnes See appropnate Australian History sections of the Calendar (Dr L Ryan) (Semester) (Not available m 1991) 6

23218 (32218) Austrahan Cities as Human Development Studies Programme

EnVIronments Topzcs for a Ma1or Sequence (Dr CA Forster) (Semester) 6 Co ordinator Director, Centre for

23303 (35304) Intemallonal Polillcs Development Studies, School of

Australian Foreign Policy Social Sciences

(Dr JD E Plant) Development Studies is an 1nterd1sc1phnary (Semester) 6 programme available to students m the School

573

School of Soczal Sciences

of Social Sciences who wish to study the processes of change and development m Thud World countries It may be taken as a second ma1or sequence by students enrolled to complete another ma1or in a basic D1sc1phne in the School of Social Sciences It may not be offered as the sole ma1or in a degree in the School

There 1s a wide range of topics withm the School of Social Sciences concerned with the study of development This maior sequence brmgs these topics together mto a broadly based programme which emphasises the 1nter­d1sc1plmary basis of Development Studies The student will be expected to determme his or her choice of spec1£1c topics, 1n consultation with the co ordinator of the programme, to ensure a coherent programme which also complements the d1sc1pltnary ma1or

A ma1or sequence in Development Studies consists of the core course Contemporary World Development (Group I) and topics chosen from Groups II and III of second and thud year topics Full details of the courses 1nclud1ng pre requ1s1tes, will be found under D1sc1plme entries m this Calendar

At least 36 umts compnsmg

First year

One topic selected from Socrnlogy I Econom1cs I Poht1cs I A History I topic Geography I Asian Studies I

Second and third years At least 6 umts from each of the followmg groups

Group I 52201 (39222) Contemporary World

Development (Compulsory Core Course)

Group II

52202 (35214) Poht1cs of New States 52215 (32215) Uneven Development 52218 (35204) Internatrnnal Pohllcs Peace

and War 52219 (35209) Power, Pohllcs and Society

(Not offered m 1991)

574

52302 (30302) Econom1c Development 52305 (38305) Socrnlogy of the Developmg

Societies 52312 (32308) Regional Economic

Development 52313 (35329) International Politics

Concepts and Issues 52316 (38324) Econom1c Soc1ology

Group III

52203 (35203) Government and Poht1cs of the Chmese People's Repubhc

52205 (31205) Japanese Econom1c Development

52207 (35207) The Poht1cs of Underdevelopment -The African Case (Not offered m 1991)

52208 (33208) Modern Indrn 52209 (33227) History of Modern

Southeast Asia (Not offered m 1991)

52211 (33201) Nmeteenth and Twentieth Century Lalin America (Not offered m 1991)

52304 (35301) Pohl!cal Change m 20th Century Chma (Not offered m 1991)

52306 (35306) Southeast Asian Pohhcal Development

52307 (35313) Comparative Strategies for Development

52308 (30308) Comparative Economic Systems

52309 (35322) ASEAN Problems and Prospects

52314 (38327) Co1nparat1ve Soc1ology 52315 (30315) Asian Econom1c

Development 52317 (37314) Indonesian Pohhcal

Economy 52318 (33331) Contemporary Indrn

(Not offered m 1991) 52319 (35332) Poht1cal Economy of the

Pac1f1c Rim 52320 (33322) Melanesian History

(Not offered m 1991)

The followmg Mult1d1sc1plmary topics are highly recommended for students takmg a ma1or sequence in Development Studies

39205 Ecology of Man and Society 39211 Demography 39216 Famme

(Note that topic 52201 (39222) Contemporary World Development may not be counted both towards the Development Studies ma1or sequence and as a mulhd1sc1phnary topic )

In add1tton students' attention is drawn to the followmg School topics which are also highly recommended

39103 Elements of Data Analysis 39221 Stabsbcs m the Social Sciences

Problems and Poss1b1hbes

Diplo1na in Soczal Sciences (Development Studies) A general descnpbon of the Diploma m Social Sciences 1s set out 1n Statute 7 11 Schedule 16 The Diploma 1n Social Sciences

Students taking the programme in Development Studies will complete 36 umts chosen from the followmg

a) A maximum of 12 units chosen from the followmg topics

Units

52201 (39222) Contemporary World Development 6

52302 (30302) Economic Development 6

52305 (38305) Soc10logy of Developmg Soc1ettes 6

52306 (35306) Southeast Asian Pohbcal Development 6

52307 (35313) Compara!Ive Strategies for Development 6

52309 (35322) ASEAN Problems and Prospects 6

52312 (32308) Regional Economic Development 6

52313 (35329) Interna!Ional Poh!Ics Concepts and Issues 6

52314 (38327) Comparative Soc10logy 6 39211 Demography 6 39216 Famme 6 52220 (39224) Social Change m Lahn

Amen ca 6 52317 (37314) Indonesian Poht1cal

Economy 6 52202 (35214) Poh!Ics of New States 6

Development Studies Programme

52219 (35209) Power, Politics and Society (Not offered m 1991) 6

52304 (35301) Poh!Ical Change m 20C Chma (Not offered m 1991) 6

52319 (35332) Poht1cal Economy of the Pacwc Rim 6

52320 (33322) Melanesian History (Not offered m 1991) 6

52316 (38324) Econom1c Soc1ology 6 52323 (32309) Research Methods

m Geography 6

b) A mm1mum of 24 units chosen from the followmg topics

Units

52401 (32511) Urbanisation and Development in Southeast Asia 6

52402 (35416) Ehtes m Southeast Asia (Not offered m 1991) 6

52403 (35424) Dependency and Development 6

52404 (38413) Soc10logy of Developmg Soc1ettes 6

52405 (32414) Advanced Populat10n Studies 6

52406 (32416) Cap1tahsm and Uneven Development 6

52407 (37416) Gender and Society in Asia 6

52408 (37417) Australia in Asta 6 52409 (35425) B1bhograph1c Studies

in Poht1cs 6 52450 A thesis of approXImately

15,000 words 12

Intendmg students should discuss their programmes with the Director of the Centre for Development Studies

MA m Development Studies M A studies m Development Studies may be undertaken by thesis, by coursework, or by a comb1natlon of thesis and coursework The M A by thesis consists of a thesis of not more than 60,000 words The MA by a combma!Ion of thesis and coursework, consists of 54 units made up of

a) Core Topics Umts 52503 (32505) Development Studies 6

575

School of Social Sciences

52509 (35506) M A Studies m the Under certain circumstances up to 12 units of Politics of 1nstruchonal top1cs1 1nvolv1ng the learning of Development 6 skills necessary to the student's programme

b) Thesis (such as statistics, computing or a language)

52500 MA Coursework Thesis 24 The M A by Coursework conszsts of 54 umts made up of

c) Electives - at least 12 units chosen from a) Core Topzcs Units 52501 (32502) Resource Evaluation 52503 (32505) Development Studies 6

and Management 6

52502 (32503) Populatrnn Studies 6 52509 (35506) M A Studies m the

Polll!cs of 52504 (32506) Regrnnal Planmng and Development 6

Development 6

52505 (35503) MA Studies m b) Electives - 36 umts chosen from Comparative Polll!cs 12

52501 (32502) Resource Evaluation 52506 (35504) MA Studies m and Management 6

Internatrnnal Relatrnns 52502 (32503) Populatrnn Studies 6 and Development 12

52508 Selected Development Issues 6 52504 (32506) Regrnnal Planning and Development 6

52511 (32509) Human Resource 52505 (35503) MA Studies m Development 6

Comparative Pohtics 12 52512 (32511) Urban1sahon and

52506 (35504) MA Studies m Development 6 International Relations

52514 (51527) Econom1cs and Pubhc and Development 12 Policy 6

52508 Selected Development Issues 6 52515 (38509) Socrnlog1cal Research

52510 M A Coursework Thesis m Methods 6

Issues in the Soctology Development Studies 12

52516 (38505) 52511 (32509) Hurn an Resource of Development 6

Development 6 52517 (32512) Populal!on Mob1hty 6

52518 (32514) Population Econom1cs 6 52512 (32511) Urban1sahon and

Development 6 52519 (32508) Populatrnn Data 52514 (51527) Econom1cs and Pubhc

Analyszs 6 Pohcy (May not be 52521 (35505) Development Policy 6 offered m 1991) 6 52522 (35513) MA Studies m 52515 (38509) Socrnlog1cal Research

Comparative Poht1cs Methods 6 and Pohl!cal Sociology 6 52516 (38505) Issues m the Socrnlogy

52523 (35515) MA Studies m of Development 6 Internal!onal Relatrnns

52517 (32512) Populatrnn Mob1hty 6 and Development 6

52524 (32518) Populatrnn and 52518 (32514) Population Econom1cs 6

Environment (Not 52519 (32508) Population Data offered m 1991) 6 Analysis 6

52525 (38516) Issues in Contemporary 52520 MA Proiect m Development Sociology 6 Studies 12

52526 (38517) Social Theory and 52521 (35505) Development Polley 6 Social Problems 6 52522 (35513) MA Studies m

52527 (38518) Applied Social Comparative Poht1cs Research 6 and Political Soc10logy 6

576

52523 (35515) MA Studies m International Relations and Development 6

52524 (32518) Population and EnVIronment (Not offered m 1991) 6

52525 (38516) Issues in Contemporary Sociology 6

52526 (38517) Social Theory and Social Problems 6

52527 (38518) Apphed Social Research 6

ThlS programme may mclude up to 12 umts of instructional topics 1nvolv1ng the learning of skills necessary to the student s other coursework (such as statistics, computing or a language)

52500 M A COURSEWORK THESIS

A thestS of about 24,000 words wntten under the superv1s1on of a member of staff The thesis should give evidence of the student1s abthty to collect and evaluate 1nformatton, construct test and defend an argument, and cr1hcally examine theories in the area of enquiry

52501 (32502) RESOURCE EVALUATION AND MANAGEMENT Dr R L Heathcote

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

The topic may mclude study of the critena used in, and vanables affecting the process of1

the evaluation of environmental resources by different soc1et1es or groups within soc1et1es and the 1mphcat1ons of such criteria and variables in the management of these resources Case studies may be drawn from both the developed and developmg world and may be concerned with the theory and practice of resource inventory and allocation, and recognition of and response to environmental hazards

Development Studies Programme

52502 (32503) POPULATION STUDIES Dr RM Steele

Umts 6 Level Masters Durallon Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic will focus on a number of core questions relating to the causes and consequences of changes in population growth, migrat10n, fertihty, mortahty and populahon structure The ma1or tlieor1es advanced to explam these demographic changes will be critically examined and related to wider econonuc and social change There wt!! be an approximately equal divis10n of attent10n between ma1or issues relating more specifically to Third World populat10ns and those relatmg to 1ndustnahsed soc1ettes A small section of the topic will be devoted to a considerat10n of some advanced methods of demographic analysis, especially wtth respect to population movement and population pro1echons

52503 (32505) DEVELOPMENT STUDIES Dr J G Browett

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

Attent10n will mamly be focused on the evaluat10n of different and competmg perspectives which have been advanced to account for the 1n1tiat1on and perpetuation of

' uneven development both between nations and withm them In parllcular, the strengths and weaknesses of neoclassical economic theory, modern1satJ.on/chffus1on1st1 depen dency, and post dependency perspechves will be considered and related to recent changes m the world economy

52504 (32506) REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT AND PLANNING Dr A M Maude and Dr JG Browett

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

577

School of Social Sciences

This topic may Include a study of the s1gmf1cance of the reg10n and spatial analysis 1n development theory and practice, an exam1natton of theories of regional develop ment case studies of particular regions, and a study of regional development pohc1es Particular emphasis may be given to the problems of low income reg1ons 1n developing countnes, and to the role of m1grat1on in reg10nal development

52505 (35503) M A STUDIES IN COMPARATIVE POLITICS AND POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY

Umts 12 Level Masters Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic involves attendance at lectures and seminars, and completion of essays totalhng about 12,000 words, relat:J.ng to the govern ment and politics of foreign countries Specific countries and areas may include Western Europe, Eastern Europe, China, Afnca, the Umted States, South-East Asia, the Soviet Umon, the Middle East

52506 (35504) M A STUDIES IN INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS AND DEVELOPMENT Dr C Gertzel and Dr H S Leng

Umts 12 Level Masters Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2-3 hours per week Pre reqt11s1te Masters standing

This topic involves attendance at lectures and seminars, and complehon of essays totalhng about 12,000 words dealmg with the poh!Ics of 1nternat1onal relations and the pohhcal development ofThird World countnes

52508 SELECTED DEVELOPMENT ISSUES Director of Studzes

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

578

Students takmg this topic will follow a supervised readmg programme on selected development issues to be chosen in consultation with the Director of Studies The programme w11l 1nvolve a c11hcal survey of the literature on a specific problem area

52509 (35506) M A STUDIES IN THE POLffiCS OF DEVELOPMENT Dr C Gertzel and Dr H S Leng

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic mvolves the study of a number of key issues m Thud World development smce the end of the Second World War, related to problems of mequahty w1thm and between states and the relat1onsh1p between the two

Followmg on the discuss10n of theory m Topic 52503, the focus will be empmcal The obiec!Ive will be to consider the social and poht1cal environment w1thm which develop ment occurs, the pressures on dec1s1on makers and dec1s1on-mak1ng, the reasons why particular poltc1es are or are not adopted, and why some pohc1es 'work' and others do not, the choices available to state and to people in their search for development, and what influences those choices This involves cons1deratlon of four parameters w1th1n which the mdependent but poor state operates - the h1stoncal, the societal, the regional, and the 1nstitut1onal

52510 MA COURSEWORK THESIS IN DEVELOPMENT STUDIES

Umts 12 Level Masters Durat10n Full year Class Contact Meetings wzth supervzsor Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

A thesis of 12 15,000 words to be written under the superv1s10n of a member of staff

The thesis is to give evidence of the student s ability to collect and evaluate information and to construct and defend an argument

52511 (32509) HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT DrC Manning

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requu.ite Masters standing

An examination of human resource development issues and planning with special reference to Indonesia and the Asta Pac1f1c Region The topic will include analysis of labour force and labour markets m developmg countries, an introduction to and critical evaluation of ma1or approaches to manpower planning and educational planu1ng pohctes and planmng of health and nutnt10nal improvement 1nterrelat1onsh1ps between education health and population and pohctes and planning for population distribution and mob1hty The topic will provide an overview to analysis and issues and deal with selected case studies in the Asia Pacific Region on all these sub1ects

52512 (32511) URBANISATION AND DEVELOPMENT DrA Maude

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

An examination of the relabonsh1ps between urban1sat1on, urban areas, and economic change, with particular reference to Southeast Asia Austraha and North Amenca The topic may mclude a study of the analysis and explanation of urban1sat1on, the relationsh1ps between urban1sabon and development, the restructunng of urban economies and urban systems, and urbanisation pohc1es

Development Studies Programme

52514 (51527) ECONOMICS AND PUBLIC POLICY Professor A W Evans

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requisite Masters standing

This topic provides an account of the nature and role of mtcroeconcnucs in public pohcy It will cover baste assumptions of micro economics and of welfare economics markets and market failure pubhc goods and services collective action cost benefit analysis economics of public sector decision making taxation regulation redistnouhon central local l!scal relat10ns There Wiii be case studies from spec11Ic pohcy areas

52515 (38509) SOCIOLOGICAL RESEARCH METHODS DrW Martin

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite Masters standing

An introduction to research techniques in soc1ology at Masters level

52516 (38505) ISSUES IN THE SOCIOLOGY OF DEVELOPMENT Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Masters D.iratton Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

An exam1nation of the pohttcal soc1ology of nahonahsm and independence movements 1n the Third World soC!ehes Case studies will be drawn from East and West Africa Inda Chma, Lahn America and Melanesia

579

School of Social Sciences

52517 (32512) POPULATION MOBILITY Dr RM Steele

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

The topic aims firstly to cover m depth the ma1or conceptual and measurement issues related to population movement m developing and developed sociel!es It deals with the maior theones of population movement its causes and consequences for social and econom1c change Finally there ts a consider ahon of planmng and pohcy issues related to populal!on movement especially 1n developing countnes

52518 (32514) POPULATION ECONOMICS Dre Manning

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

Examines basic micro and macro econom1c theories of population change and d1stnbutton with particular emphasis on their apphcatton to less developed countnes Deals with the home econom1cs of fert1hty behaviour and population control the causes and con sequences of rapid population growth and economic theories of migration

52519 (32508) POPULATION DATA ANALYSIS Dr C Manning and Ms D M Rudd

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre-requisite Masters standing

The topic aims to give students a working knowledge of a range of the basic techmques reqmred m the analysis of populat10n change and d1stnbut10n, and of populat10n development mterrelatzonsh1ps It will impart practical skills in analysis and interpretation of populat10n data and trends, focusmg

580

particularly on analysis of fert1hty, migration and labour force data, and on pro1ections It wzll also h1ghhght the ma1or variables of mterest m the study of populatzon and development cnl!cally exammmg and prov1d1ng students with practical experience 1n applying various techniques to testing ma1or theones m this field The prachcal work wzll fam1har1se students with the use of both main frame and micro computers It is intended that the topic should complement the more theoretical approach taken ID the core courses 1n the Population Studies programme

52520 MA PROJECT IN DEVELOPMENT STUDIES Dr/ G Browett

Umts 12 Level Masters Duratzon Full year Class Contact Meetings with supervisor Pre requisite Masters standing

A report on a research task of approXImately 12 000 words, written under the superv1s1on of a member of staff The research task may Involve a literature review, the study of a particular problem through the collectzon and evaluation of information, and/or the analysis of a data set

52521 (35505) MA STUDIES IN DEVELOPMENT POLICY Dr C Gertzel

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 31h hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic involves attendance at lectures for the undergraduate topic 35313 Comparal!ve Development Strategies plus a special tutorial for Masters students The topic examines development pohcy and plannmg m Afnca m the 1980s At the regzonal level the topic focuses on Eastern Africa, with particular emphasis on the agricultural and rural development and education sectors The ob1ect1ve is to explore the process of development poltcy and practice in the region, as 1dent1fled in a number of case studies and the key constraints upon pohcy makers In the contemporary .Afncan situation

52522 (35513) M A STUDIES IN COMPARATIVE POLITICS AND POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic involves both attendance at lectures and/or seminars and the completion of essays totalling apprmamately 6,000 words, relatmg to the government, society and pohhcs of predominantly non Australian nation states Spec1f1c topics and areas may include Western Europe the Soviet Union and Eastern Europe, China, Africa, the United States Southeast Asta, Northeast Asia, Leftist trad1t1ons, pohllcal soc10logy and revolutions

52523 (35515) MA STUDIES IN INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS AND DEVELOPMENT

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic involves both attendance at lectures and/or seminars and completion of essays totalling approXImately 6,000 words, dealmg with the politics and pohllcal economy of 1nternat1onal relations, Austrahan foreign pohcy, and the poh!!cal development of Third World countnes

52524 (32518) POPULATION AND ENVIRONMENT Dr R M Steele (Convener) and Geography! Populatzon Studies Staff

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite Masters standmg

The topic introduces basic concepts and analysis of ecosystems and key mter­relationships between popula!!on and environ ment w1th1n the context of development issues

Development Studzes Programme

and pohc1es It deals with resource depletion and management, land use and agncultural systems related to populat10n mobihty, urbanisation and the environment and mtegrated approaches to populat10n environment planning

52525 (38516) ISSUES IN CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGY Professor R Hassan and Assoczate Professor Rf Holton

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite Masters standmg

This topic will focus on some of the key debates m contemporary soc10logy chosen by the topic Convener

52526 (38517) SOCIAL THEORY AND SOCIAL PROBLEMS Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic will focus on the relat10nship between social theory and social problems and how the rela!!onship has contributed to the development of modem soc10logy

52527 (38518) APPLIED SOCIOLOGICAL RESEARCH Professor R Hassan

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite Masters standing

This topic will examme the apphcat10n of research methodology 1n sociolog1cal analysts The emphasis will be on the development of appropriate research design and process to analyse organ1sat1onal culture and its relationship to organ1sahonal structure Students will be mtroduced to the apphcat10n of surrogate vanables in social analysis

581

School of Social Sciences

Multzdzsczplznary Topics

Co ordinator Dr P Howell (History)

General Informat1on

Students takmg a B A degree m the School of Social Sciences are required to take 12 units m multtd1sc1phnary topics In 1991 the followmg offenngs are available m the School's pool of such mult1d1sc1plinary topics

These topics may not be presented as part of a ma1or sequence in any d1sc1phne1 but may be taken as electives

It 1s mtended t':Iat topics m 1991 be offered m the follow1ng semesters, however con firmat10n must be obtamed by checkmg the Umvemty Timetable

Umts First Semester 39205 Ecology of Man and Society 6 39215 Federalism m Australia 6 39225 Multiculturalism 6 39228 Sport Issues and History 6

Second Semester 39208 Urban1sahon 39211 Demography 39216 Famine 39222 Contemporary World Development 39226 Disease and Society 39227 Env1ronmentahsm

39205 ECOLOGY OF MAN AND SOCIETY Mr A S Fraser (Geography) (Convener), Dr L Brennan (History) and Dr CM Bull (Bzology)

Umts 6 Level Second and third year Duration Semester

6 6 6 6 6 6

Class Contact 2 lectures or seminars per week, 4 tutonals per semester Pre requ1s1te 86100 B10logy I or 86110 Perspecttves m B10logy or 30110 Economics I or 81100 Earth Sciences or 32110 Geography I, each with a grade of C or better

The topic 1s mtended as an analysis of the physical and cultural factors which affect the relat10nsh1p between man and his environment Introductory lectures will provide a basic background to the topic m the

582

pr1nc1ples of B1ology, Earth Sc1enc.es, Economics, and Geography Themes which wtll be developed on this foundahon may include general pnnc1ples of ecology and 1nterachon w1th1n ecosystems, history of man's concern for the environment, population growth and dynamics, resource ava1lab1lity and control, waste disposal, relationship between economic system and enVIronmental problems, the long term effects of economic growth on consumption of natural resources the environmental impact of imgahon and transport technology in northern India

Reference books

Burell R, Hill, D and Stanley, J, eds Quarry Australza? (Oxford UP, 1982)*

Dasmann, R F The conservation alternative (Wiley, 1975)*

Day, L H and Rowland, D T, eds How many more Australians? (Longman Cheshire 1988)*

D1esendorf, M , ed Energy and people (Society for Socml Respons1b1lity m Science 1979)*

Dorfman, R and Dorfman, N S , eds Economics of the environment (Norton, 1977)

Fisher DE Environmental law in Australia (Queensland UP, 1980)*

Gilpm, A Envzronmental polzcy zn Australia (Queensland UP, 1980)*

Gilpin, A The Australian environment (Sun Books, 1980)*

J{neese, A IC Econo1nzcs and the envzron1nent (Pengum 1977)*

Michel, A A The Indus nver (Yale UP, 1967) Miller, GT and Armstrong, P Livzng zn the

envzronment (Wadsworth, 1982)* Simon J L and !Cahn, H The resourceful

earth (Blackwell, 1984) Turk, ] Introduction to environmental

studies, 2nd ed (Holt Saunders, 1985)* Wagner, R H Envzronment and man, 3rd ed

(Norton 1978) Ward B Progress for a small planet (Pengum,

1979)*

39206 REVOLUTION Dr D H Close (History) (Convener), and Professor B Brugger (Polztzcs)

Not offered m 1991

39208 URBANISATION Professor M McCaskill (Geography) (Convener) and Economic History Staff

Umts 6 Level Second and third years Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and tutorials to be arranged Pre requ1s1te None

This topic will be concerned with urbanisation in Australia as a process occurring over time and having important spatial charactenstics It is intended to set urban growth in Austraha in the context of the more general forces makmg for the growth of c1bes m history and to make particular reference to the experience of regions of recent white settlement One ma1or sub topic will be the mterrelat10nsh1p between urban growth and the economic development of Austraha, and a second will involve analysis of such internal urban processes as trends in the d1stnbution of the urban work force, urban capital format1on 1

changes in spatial organisation of cities and the role of government planning agencies The teaching of the topic wt!! be shared largely between members of the D1sc1phnes of Economic History and Geography

Reference books z M azn references

Glynn, S Urbanzsatzon in Australian hzstory, 1788 1900 (Nelson, 1975)

Logan, MI Whitelaw, JS and McKay, j Urbanizatzon the Australian experience (Sh1llmgton House 1981)

zz Other references Barrett, B The znner suburbs the

evolutzon of an tndustrzal area (Melbourne UP, 1971)

Burnley, I H The Australzan urban system (Longman Cheshire 1980)

Butlm NG Investment zn Australian economic development, 1861 1900 (Cambridge UP, 1964)

Daly, M T Sydney boom Sydney bust (Allen & Unwm, 1982)

DaV!son, G The rzse and fall of marvellous Melbourne (Melbourne UP, 1978)

Neutze, G M Urban development zn Australia a descr1pt1veanalys1s, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1981)

Multidisczplznary Topzcs

Neutze, GM Australzan urban policy (Allen & Unwm, 1978)

Schedvm, C B and McCarthy, J W , eds Urbamsatzon zn Australia (Sydney U P , 1974)

Stretton, H Ideas for Australian cztzes, 3rd ed (Transit, 1989)

39209 RECREATIONAL RESOURCE EVALUATION AND MANAGEMENT Mr A S Fraser (Geography), Mr R J Paddick (Educatzon) and Dr W Vamplew (Economic Hzstory) (Convener)

Not offered m 1991

39211 DEMOGRAPHY Dr G J Hugo (Geography) (Convener), Dr P Mezn-Smith

Umts 6 Level Second and third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqrns1te None

This topic will only be offered m each alternate year It will be offered m 1991 but not m 1992

Demography concerns itself with the study of the size, d1str1but1on and structure of populat10ns and the processes whereby these undergo change In a six umt topic 1t 1s clearly not possible to attempt a comprehensive coverage of this very broad field Instead, this topic seeks to mtroduce students to the study of demography by focusing on several contemporary demographic problems Ma1or sources of demographic data, basic demographic measures and some important aspects of demographic theory are introduced However the topic 1s not one 1n technical demography and techniques are introduced to assist m the analysis and understanding of the ma1or processes and problems which are the main concern in this topic The perspective of the topic 1s not t•ed spec1f1cally to the exam1nat1on of the demography of one particular reg10n and will look at populat10n trends in both developed countnes and less developed countries However, special attenbon will be focused on Austraha and

583

School of Social Sciences

Indonesia as examples of more developed and less developed countnes

The topics to be considered will be hsted m the programme of lectures and tutonals The fmt block of lectures will consider some fundamental demographic theones and then move on to introducing some aspects of Austrahan populat10n growth and its relat1onsh1p with several pohcy areas The next block of lectures will introduce some basic demographic measures and techniques of analysis followed by a considerat10n of some issues of population planning and the development of demographic models The fJnal sect10n of the topic will focus upon the determinants and consequences of some contemporary developments 1n fert1hty, mortahty and m1grat10n m Th1rd World countries, especially Indonesia

Text books

Hugo G j Australia's changing populatzon trends and impl1catzons (Oxford UP, 1986)

Hugo, G j et al The demographic dzviszon m Indonesian development (Oxford U P , 1988)

Reference books

Caldwell, j C Theory of fertility decline (Academic, 1982)

Haupt j C and Kane, TT Populatzon handbook (Washmgton Populat10n Reference Bureau, 1978)

Hugo, G J Atlas of Australian people Vol V South Australia (AGPS,1989)

Palmore, J A and Gardner, R W Measuring mortality, fert1lzty and natural increase (East West Center, 1983)

Shryock, HS et al The methods and materzals of demography 2 vols (U S Dept of Commerce, 1973)

United Nations Determinants and consequences of populatwn trends (U N , 1974)

39212 PUBLIC DECISION MAKING Mr I W Hayles (Economics) Professor L Mann (Psychology), Dr A W Parkin (Politics)

Not offered m 1991

584

39215 (21412) FEDERALISM IN AUSTRALIA Dr PA Howell (History) (Convener), Ms f M Healy (Social Administration) Mr R H Wallace (Economics) Dr D H faensch and Dr A W Parkin (Polztics)

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week and 1 tutonal per fortmght Pre requ1s1te None

This topic JS a study of the operation of a federal system of government m Austraha It examines the ong1ns and the 1mplementatlon of those features of the Cons!Itu!Ion of the Commonwealth which have proved to be content10us (e g the d1stnbut10n of powers between the Commonwealth and the States, the powers of the Senate and the Governor General, and the proVIs1ons for the regulation offmance and trade) Particular attent10n w!ll be paid to the ways m which the balance between Federal and State and governments has been changed smce 1901 by 1ud1c1al mterpretat10n of the Cons1Itut10n by amendments to the Cons!Itut10n, and by the exercise of the Commonwealth Parliament's financial and leg1slahve powers The fate of States' rights and new State movements in attemptmg to restore the balance of the Cons!Jtut10n, the role of the Loan Council and the Grants Comm1ss1on and aspects of the further extens10ns of Commonwealth powers will also be considered and an analysis made of the recent attempts to promote new concepts of federahsm

Introductory reading Crisp, L F Australian natzonal government,

5th ed (Longman Cheshire, 1983) Ence! S Horne D and Thompson E

Change the rules' (Pengum, 1977) Groenewegen, P D Publzc finance in

Australia (Pren!Ice Hall 1979) Holmes, J and Sharman, C The Australian

federal system (Allen & Unwm, 1977) Pahence, A and Scott, j, eds Australian

federalism future tense (Oxford U P , 1983) Sawer, G Federation under strain

(Melbourne UP, 1977) Summers, ] et al , eds Government, polztzcs

and power zn Australia (Longman Cheshire, 1990)

39216 FAMINE Dr L Brennan (History) (Convener), Dr R L Heathcote (Geography), Professor ES Richards (History), Professor R Hassan (Soczology), Dr G f Hugo (Geography), Dr A Stewart (Medicine), and Dr C Gertzel (Politics)

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures, 1 tutonal/ seminar per week (approx ) Pre requ1s1te None

The topic will view famme m the context of modern theories of human response to natural disasters The nature of famme will be considered m terms of the followmg quest10ns the phys1olog1cal and nutnttonal defin1hon of famine the ecology of famine prone soc1ehes and the 1mmed1ate response to famine and associated stress The problem of rehef strategies from the local to the 1nternahonal levels, and the effects of famines on demographic trends, social structures and econonuc systems will also be discussed These general questions will be examined dunng the study of the conquest of famine 1n Europe, and the contmumg problem m other parts of the world The analysis of the European experience will mclude topics on England from the middle ages, Ireland m the mneteenth century, and Russia in this century The cont1nu1ng problem of famine in Asia and Afnca will be dealt with against the background of the development of the Indian Fanune Code 1n the nineteenth century The topic will conclude by focusing on case studies drawn from famines in Bengal Ireland, Russia, Nigeria and the Sahel

Reference books Arnold, D Famine soczal crzszs and

historical change (Blackwell 1989) Aykroyd, W R The conquest of famzne

(Chatto & Wmdus, 1974) Bhalla B M Famines zn India a study in

some aspects of the economic history of Indza, 1860 1965 (Asia, 1967)

Clarkson, L Death, disease and famine (Gill & Macmillan, 1975)

Currey, B and Hugo, G eds Famzne as a geographical phenomenon (Reidel, 1984)

Multidisciplinary Topics

Glantz, M H, ed Politics of natural disaster the case of the Sahel Drought (Praegar, 1975)

Laslett, P The world we have lost, 2nd ed (Methuen, 1971)

Sen, A Poverty and famines (Oxford U P , 1982)

Sorolnn, P Hunger as a factor zn human affairs (Flonda U P , 1975)

White, G F Natural hazards local, national, global (Oxford UP, 1974)

39218 AGEING Ms f M Healy (Social Administration) (Convener), Dr MA Luszcz (Psychology) and Dr G f Hugo (Geography)

To be offered 1n even numbered years

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week 1 tutorial per fortmght Pre requisite None

The ma1or aim of thts topic 1s to introduce students to social science conceptual and operational perspectives on issues and problems of agemg and the aged The topic will focus upon the rapidly growmg aged population in contemporary Australian society Sub1ects to be covered include b10logical and psychological aspects and some of their behavioural 1mphcat1ons, attitudes toward ageing, ma1or theories of how successful adapt10n to tlus phase of hie may occur, the demography of ageing in Australia, the changmg spatial distribut10n of the aged, agemg and the family, housmg and llVlng arrangements among the aged, and social pohcy and service delivery issues

Preliminary reading Hugo, G J Australia's changing populatzon

(Oxford UP, 1986) Kendig, H L and McCallum, ) Greying

Australia (AG PS , 1986)

Text books Kendig, H L , ed Ageing and families

(Allen & Unwm, 1986) Kendig H L and Mccallum, ) , eds Grey

policy (Allen & Unwm, 1990) Warnes, AM , ed Human ageing zn later life

multidisciplinary perspective (Arnold, 1989)

585

School of Social Sciences

Reference books Birren,) E and Schate, KW, eds Handbook

of the psychology of agzng (Van Nostrand Rembold, 1990)

Botwmtck ) We are aging (Springer, 1981) Ford, BF The elderly Australian (Pengum,

1984) Howe, AL, ed Towards an older Australia

readings in social gerontology (Queensland up' 1981)

Poon, L W , ed Ageing zn the 1980 s psychological issues (Amencan Psycho logical Assoctatton 1980)

39219 CULTURE OF DISILLUSION LITERATURE AND SOCIETY IN THE U S A AND U K 1897 1941 Dr L M Baird (American Studies) and Dr f M Phillips (History) (foznt Conveners)

Not offered m 1991

39222 (52201) CONTEMPORARY WORLD DI:VELOPMENT Dr f G Browett (Geography) (Convener), Dr A M Maude (Geography) Dr C Manning (Geography), Dr C Gertzel (Politics) and Mr f Mallon (History)

Units 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te None

Thts topic has a threefold focus (1) the contextual background to the emergence of contemporary development problems facing different kmds of nattons, (2) the analysis of confl1ct1ng and competing interpretations as to the origins and reasons for the perpetuation of these development problems, and (3) the evaluation of current pohc1es that have been or may be instituted in an attempt to alleviate the development problems 1denttf1ed

Reference books Brandt Report North South a programme

for survival (Pan, 1980)* Hayter T The creatwn of world poverty

(Pluto Pr 1981)• Hoogvelt, A M M The Thzrd World rn global

development (Macmillan, 1983)*

586

Kttchmg G Development and under development zn hzstorzcal perspective (Methuen, 1982)*

Roxborough, I Theorzes of under development (Macmillan, 1979)*

Seers D ed Dependency theory a critical reassessment (Pmter 1981)

Spero, ) E The politics of mternatwnal econotnzc relatzons, 3rd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1985)

World Bank World development report (World Bank, 1987)*

39224 (52220) SOCIAL CHANGE IN LATIN AMERICA Mr f Mallon (History) (Conve11er) Dr Ff Brooks (History), Dr M f Scurrah (Spanish), Dr f G Browett (Geography)

Not offered m 1991

39225 MULTICULTURALISM Associate Professor Rf Holton (Socwlogy) (Convener), wzth the assistance of Dr A R G Griffiths (History), Dr G f Hugo (Geography), Dr A W Parkin (Politics) and Mr A I Patience (Asian Studies)

Units 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisite None

This topic examines the evolution of the idea of multtculturahsm (or cultural plurahsm) particularly as it has evolved In Australia over the past forty years The central social demographic, and political issues relating to Australran multiculturahsm are examined and 1nternat1onal compar1sons are drawn to htghhght Austraha s cultural plurahsm

Reference books Dugan, M and Swarcz, ) There goes the

ne1ghbourhoodf Australia's mzgrant experience (Macmillan, 1985)

Glazer, N and Moynihan, D , eds Ethnicity (Harvard U P , 1975)

)upp J ed Ethnic politics zn Australia (Allen & Unwm, 1984)

Martm ) The migrant experience (Allen & Unwm 1979)

Martm J The ethnic dimenswn (Allen & Unwm, 1984)

Sherr1ngton G Australia's zmmzgrants (Allen & Unwm, 1980)

Smollcz ) Culture and education zn a plural society (CDC, 1979)

39226 DISEASE AND SOCIETY Dr Ff Brooks (History) (Convener), Dr P Mezn Smith (Economic History)

Umts 6 Level Second or tlurd year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite None

Disease has several meanings Many diseases but by no means all, are iden!Iflable as m1crob1olog1cal processes, as syndromes open to chn1cal 1nvest1gat1on and as endemic, and pandemic patterns which, in pnnc1ple, may be expressed stat1st1cally Disease however, 1s also a social or cultural construct In this sense diseases are the product of a society in its historically and culturally specific condthons, and they serve as its preferred metaphors for the health of the Body pollhc

H1stoncal notions of disease will be examined as well as current debates on the social construction of disease Techniques from a number of the social sciences will be applied to spec1f1c case studies 1n, among other places, Australia the Umted States of America, Mexico, and England Among the diseases which will be smgled out for special study will be Plague, Syphilis, Smallpox, Cholera, Tuberculosis, Cancer, and A ID S

Prelzmznary reading Hudson, R Dzsease and its control the

shaping of modem thought (Greenwood, 1983)

McKeown, T The role of med1czne dream, mzrage or nemesis (Blackwell, 1979)

Z1nsser, R H Rats, lice and history (Papermac, 1985)

Set books McNe1ll, W H Plagues and people (Pengum,

1979) Sontag, S Illness as metaphor (Pengum,

1983)

Multidisciplinary Topics

Reference book Corsi, P and We1ndhng P Information

sources zn the history of science and medicine (Butterworth, 1983)

39227 ENVIRONMENTALISM Dr DH Close (History) (Convener), Dr LE Johnson (Philosophy), Mr R H Wallace (Economics) and Dr R DeAngelzs (Pol1t1cs)

Umts 6 Level Second or thzrd year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te None

The topic will introduce students to contemporary debates about env1ro'1mental protection and natural resource use, and explore the historical and phtlosoph1cal context of those debates This context includes ph1losoph1cal concept10ns of the natural world and athtudes to material progress The topic wtll proceed to analyse enVIronmental controversies and pressure groups in vanous countnes 1nclud1ng Austraha, West Germany and the SoVIet Union Among issues to be d1Scussed will be the alleged hmits to economic growth, questions of social equity the social context of environmental movemen~s, the treatment of animals, nuclear energy uranium m1n1ng atmospheric pollution Wiiderness preservation

Reference books Birrell, R, Hill, D and Stanley,), eds Quarry

Australia? (Oxford UP, 1982) Bolton, G Spoils and spoilers Australians

make their envzronment 1788 1980 (Allen & Unwm, 1981)

Capra, F and Spretnak, C Green politics (Hutchinson 1984)

Cotgrove, S Catastrophe or cornucopia? The env1ronment, polztzcs and the future (Wiley, 1982)

G1lp1n A The Ar...stralian environment twelve controversial zssues (Sun, 1980)

Johnson LE, A morally deep world (Depts of Phtlosophy, Austrahan Nat10nal Umvers1ty, 1987)

Paehlke, RC Envzronmentalzsm and the future of progressive polzt1cs (Yale UP, 1989)

587

School of Social Sciences

Schumacher E G Small is beautiful a study of economics as if people mattered (Sphere, 1984)

VanDeVeer, D and Pierce, C, eds People, penguin, and plastic trees Baszc issues zn environmental ethics (Wadsworth, 1986)

World Comm1ss1on on Environment and Development Our common future (Australian ed , Oxford U P , 1990)

39228 SPORT ISSUES AND HISTORY Dr W Vamplew and Mr Rf Paddick

Units 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes None Co reqms1tes None Students may not count both this topic and 39209 Recreat10n Resource Management towards their degree requirements

The aim m this topic 1s to develop an understandmg of the ways in wluch sport in many contemporary soc1eties, 1nclud1ng Austraha, has developed and come to be regarded as important A number of issues will be studied from both historical and ph1losoph1cal perspectives sport 1n Austraha sport, nahonahsm and pohhcs, violence in sport, rules, cheating and drugs, the media commerc1ahsahon and profess1onahsm, sport and gender, sport and gambling, the Olympic games, cr1tlc1sms of sport

Set book Stodart, B Saturday afternoon fever (Angus

& Robertson, 1986) Rowe D and Lawrence, G Sport and leisure

(Harcourt, Brace & Jovanovich 1990)

Reference books Cantelon, H and Gruneau, R Sport, culture

and the modem state (Toronto U P , 1982) Cashman, R and McKeman, M Sport zn

history (Queensland U P 1978) Cashman, R and Mcl{ernan, M Sport,

money, morality and the media (NS W up 1981)

Guttmann, A From ntual to record (Columbia up' 1978)

Hargreaves, J ed Sport, culture and ideology (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1982)

588

Lapch1ck, R E Fractured focus (Lexmgton Books, 1986)

Lawrence, G and Rowe D Power play (lremonger, 1986)

Lmk, H Social philosophy of athletics (S!Jpes, 1979)

Vamplew, W Pay up and play the game (Cambridge U P , 1988)

School Topics

Students takmg a B A or B Ee degree w1thm the School of Social Sciences may include the following topics as electives or, in some cases as cognates, in their degree programmes

39103 (65103) ELEMENTS OF DATA ANALYSIS Dr A f Branford

Units 3 Level Fmt year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week and 2 tutonals per three weeks Pre requ1s1te None This topic is the same as topic 65103 m the School of Informat10n Science and Technology

This topic may be sub1ect to a quota

This topic introduces the concepts and problems of mves!Jgatmg and understanding sta!Jst1cal data Add1t10nal a1ms of the topic are to 1nstJ.l quantitative confidence 1n students with limited quantitative skills and expenence, to encourage cr1t1cal interpretation of numerical and graphical techmques and to foster good reporting skills Techmques wdl be apphed 1ml!ally to small data sets, usmg only hand-held calculators Larger data sets are more common in practice the data analytic fac1h!Jes of the sta!Js!Jcal computer package M1rutab will be used to reheve the burden of repet1t1ous calculat1ons These will be mtroduced s1de-by-s1de with the relevant theory, at a level accessible to users with no previous computing experzence

Un1var1ate data, nature and types of data, graplucal summaries (includmg histogram and stem and leaf display), numencal summanes (1ncludrng mean, median, standard deVIatlon and quartdes)

Multivariate quantitative data factor and response, assoc1ahon1 quant1fy1ng the strength of hnear assoc1ahon (1nclud1ng Pearson's r) prediction and regression

Multivanate qualitative data1 cross tabulation, cht squared, assoc1at1on between dichotomies (mcludmg cross product difference) Confounding variables, cause and effect, correlations theorem for dichotomous attributes, fallacious arguments

Reference books Ryan, BF ,Jamer, BL and Ryan, TA Mznztab

handbook, 2nd ed (Duxbury, 1985)* Velleman, P F and Hoaglm D C

Applzcatzons basics and computing of exploratory data analysis (Duxbury, 1981)*

39221 STATISTICS IN THE SOCIAL SCIENCES PROBLEMS AND POSSIBILITIES Dr DA DeBats (Convener), Dr G f Hugo, Dr A Parkzn, Ms F Robertson, Mr f Summers and Dr W Vamplew

Not offered 1n 1991

Women's Studies Second Ma7or

Women's Studies introduces students to the methods, findings and ideas which compnse contemporary fem1n1sm As an inter d1sc1phnary area of study Women's Studies uses an Australian focus to examine the role of gender 1n the past and the present and uses an 1ntemahonal focus to address cultural and philosophical issues of fem1n1sm

A second ma1or 1n Women's Studies consists of a m1n1mum of 33 units comprising

First Year Units A m1n1mum of 9 units of first year level topics accepted by any School of the Umversity 9/12

Second Year 41201 Women m Contemporary Austrahan

Society (Semester) 6 41202 Gender m Austrahan History

(Semester) (Not available 1991) 6

Thzrd Year 41301 Issues m Femmist Theory

(Semester) 6

Women's Studies

41302 Femmism and Cultural Studies (Semester) 6

Students must complete all 4 topics to obtam a second ma1or 1n Women's Studies

Semester 1n which topics are offered must be confirmed by referrmg to the 1991 Umversity Timetable

Pre requzsztes Students must complete at least 21 umts of first year topics at C grade or better to enter the second ma1or

The topic 41201 Women m Contemporary Australian Society is a pre requ1s1te for any or all of the other 3 topics 41202 Gender m Australian History, 41301 Issues in Fem1n1st Theory and 41302 Femmism and Cultural Studies

Application for permission to enrol in any one of these topics without pre requ1s1te may be made to the Convener

Relatzonship to other Ma1ors and Programmes The topics 41201 Women m Contemporary Austrahan Society and 41302 Fem1n1sm and Cultural Studies, have been cross listed with the Austrahan Studies Programme

The topic 41202 Gender m Austrahan History has been cross hsted with the History Disciplme and with the Austrahan Studies Programme

The topic 34306 (41303) The History of Women m the Umted States, 1780 1939, from Amencan Studies, wtll be cross hsted for Women's Studies m second semester 1991

Second Year Topzcs

41201 (23203) WOMEN IN CONTEMPORARY AUSTRALIAN SOCIETY Dr L Ryan and Dr S Sheridan

Umts 6 Level Second year Durat10n Semester Class Contact 4 hours of lectures, tutorials and films per week Pre requ1s1te 21 units of first year topics at C grade or better

Thts topic introduces students to a range of femimst debates about Australian women m

589

School of Soczal Sczences

social cultural and pohbcal contexts and explores questions about the future of women 1n relation to these contexts This topic is a pre reqmStte for all the other topics m the Women's Studies second ma1or

Prelimznary readzng Archer, R et al The pack of women

(Pengum 1986)

Set book Grieve, N and Burns A, eds Australian

women new femznzst perspectives (Oxford UP, 1986)

Reference books Baldock, C and Cass B , eds Women soczal

welfare and the state zn Australza (Allen & Unwm, 1988)

Broom, D , ed Unfinished business soczal /Ustzce for women zn Australza (Allen & Unwm 1984)

Elsenstem, H Contemporary femznist thought (Allen & Unwm, 1984)

Hampton, S and Llewellyn K , eds The Penguzn book of Australian women poets (Pengum, 1986)

41202 (23212) (33229) GENDER IN AUSTRALIAN HISTORY Dr L Ryan

Not avadable m 1991

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week Pre reqwsite 41201 Women m Contemporary Australian Society or perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic explores the h1stor1cal expenences of women as a means of understanding changing relations between women and men '­and the institutions of power in Austraha smce 1788 By usmg language, and the sexual diVIs1on of labour as fem1n1st analytical tools, and colon1ahsm as the structural framework, this topic will focus on penods of economic, social and poht1cal crises, to understand the process of h1stoncal change

590

Prelzmznary reading

Summers, A Damned whores and God's police (Pengum 1975)

Set books

Thornley, J, McMurchy, M and Oliver M For love or money a pzctorzal hzstory of women and work zn Australia (Penguin, 1983)

Ryan E and Conlon, A Gentle invaders Australian women and the workforce 1788 1974 (Pengum, 1989)

Thzrd Year Topics

41301 ISSUES IN FEMINIST THEORY Dr L Ryan and Dr S Sherzdan

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week Pre requisite 41201 Women m Contemporary Austrahan Society or permission of the Convener

This topic will examine a range of contemporary debates and campaigns m fem1n1sm (e g reproductive technologies, notions of female dependency, the question of a female aesthetic, women, war and peace gender, class and race) 1n order to investigate the assumptions and frameworks which underlie and shape them

The topic will examine the historical context of these debates and their contnbut1on to the development of femimst theory

Set books

Pateman, C and Gross, E eds Femznzst challenges (Allen & Unwm, 1986)

Tong, R (1989) Femmzst theory (Allen & Unwm, 1989)

Reference books

Marks, E and de Courtivron, I New French femznzsms (Schocken, 1981)

Weedon, C Femznzst practzce and post structuralzst theory (Blackwell, 1987)

41302 FEMINISM AND CULTURAL STUDIES Dr S Sheridan

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour lecture/semmar and 1 one hour tutonal per week Pre reqws1te 41201 Women m Contemporazy Australian Society or perm1ss1on of the Convener

This topic will mvest1gate a range of cultural texts from the popular media through film and the arts with a focus on Australian matenals The investtgat10n will be gmded by feminist questions about the pos1hon of women as cultural producers and representdtions of gender difference 1n various media

Text books Gunew, S and Mahyuddm, J eds Beyond the

echo (Queensland UP, 1988) Whitlock, G , ed Eight voices of the eighties

(Queensland U P , 1989)

Reference books Blonskt, A et al eds Don't shoot darling

women's independent film making zn Australia (Greenhouse, 1987)

Coward, R Female desire (Paladin, 1984) Schaffer, K , Women and the Bush

(Cambridge U P , 1988) Shendan, S, ed Grafts femzmst cultural

critzcism (Verso, 1988) Weedon, C Feminist practice & post

structuralist theory (Blackwood, 1987)

Honours & Diploma Topzcs

Convener Dr S M Sheridan and Dr L Ryan

An Honours Programme in Women's Studies consists of the following

a) 41405 Cnt1que and Construct in Womens Studies

Umts

(Compulsory toptc) 6 b) Two topics chosen from among these

topics offered in 1991 41402 Contemporary Feminist Theory 6 41404 History of Fem1mst Thought

(Dr S Magarey Umvers1ty of Adelaide) 6

Women's Studzes

41401 Women's Studies Reading Course

41403 Feminist Cultural Analysis 6 6

Or by special arrangement, an Honours topic from another D1sc1phne 1 or from another School, from the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide or from the South Australian College of Advanced Educat10n

c) 41440 Women's Studies Honours Thesis 18

41401 WOMEN'S STUDIES READING COURSE DrL Ryan

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week

41402 CONTEMPORARY FEMINIST THEORY Dr L Ryan

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqws1te Entry to Honours

To fam1har1se students with the range of contemporary debates about fem1n1st theory drawn from Austrahan and overseas 1oumals Each year the topic will focus on particular issues 1n contemporary fem1n1st theory

41403 FEMINIST CULTURAL ANALYSIS Dr S M Sheridan

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Entry to Honours

To inves!tgate a range of cultural texts from the popular media through film and the arts \vttn attention to some Austrahan matenals The mves!tga!ton will be gmded by femm1st questions about the position of women as cultural producers and representations of gender difference 1n vanous media

591

School of Social Sciences

41404 HISTORY OF FEMINIST THOUGHT DrS Magarey

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Entry to Honours

To analyse the development of fem1rust theory from Mary Wollstonecraft to Simone de Beauvoir, focusing upon Br1hsh, European, Australian and North American theorists

41405 CRITIQUE AND CONSTRUCT IN WOMEN'S STUDIES Dr S M Sheridan

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour senunar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

To explore theoretical debates surroundmg the concept of 1fem1n1st knowledge' and its relat10nsh1p to other d1sc1phnes

41406 THEORIES OF GENDER AND RACE Dr L Ryan

Not avadable m 1991

Umts 6 Level Honours Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

To explore debates from 18th century to the present about the relahonsh1p between gender and race The topic will explore the impact of ma1or theories of race to question their s1gn1f1cance to contemporary gender theory

41440 WOMEN'S STUDIES HONOURS THESIS Dr L Ryan

Umts 18 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact 1 hour (with supervisors) per week Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

592

An essay of 15,000 to 18,000 words to be written under the superv1s1on of a member of staff of the Women s Studies Umt A penalty will be apphed for excessive length The thesis 1s to give eVIdence of students' abtlrtles in collect1ng and evaluating information, constructing, testing and defending an argument or thesis, and cnhcally exam1n1ng the dominant theories in their area of enquiry Students should choose a thesis topic and obtam the agreement of a member of staff to act as supervISor before the end of the prevtous December

Post Graduate Studies

Master of Arts in Women's Studies (MA (Women's Studies))

The degree of Master of Arts m Women's Studies 1s designed to develop an apprec10t10n of the nch, diverse and rapidly growmg field of Women's Stud1es1 to extend students' cntical understandmg and prac!Ice withm the boundanes of a d1sc1phne area, to develop the capacity to apply mterd1sc1plmary approaches to fem1n1st questions and to develop the conceptual and analytical thmkmg and the research and wr1t1ng skdls1 necessary to complete a successful thesis

The degree programme comprises 54 units cons1st1ng of 1ndependent1 supervised study leadmg to a thesis (12 or 24 umts), 2 compulsory core topics (6 umts each), and up to 24 umts of elective topics (6 umts each)

The Compulsory Core topics are designed specdically for the programme The elec!Ive topics will be offered by members of the Women s Studies Unit, from the Sociology D1sc1plme from the Umvers1ty of Adelaide and from the South Austrahan College of Advanced Educat10n

The degree may be completed by three semesters of full-time study Candidates should consult the Appendix to Statute 7 3, Schedule 12 Tue Degree of Masters of Arts (Women's Studies) for further details of course reqwrements

41501 WOMEN'S STUDIES INTRODUCTION Dr L Ryan

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 one hour lectures, 1 one hour film, 1 one hour seminar per week Pre reqms1te Entry to Masters programme

To explore the demographic, social, cultural and pohbcal and econom1c changes upon the cond1t.J.on of women in Australian society since 1961 To mtroduce students to a range of fem1n1st debates about women 1n social, cultural and poht1cal concepts, and to explore questions about the future of women in relation to these contexts

41502 WOMEN S STUDIES IIlSTORY Dr L Ryan

Not avadable m 1991

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 one hour lectures, 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Entry to Masters programme

This topic will address the content10n that experiences of women in Austraha since 1788 provide different debates about the gender order m Austraha 1788 1961 ThIS topic will examine the importance of demography, rehg10n, ideology, the economy the family and the state m shapmg the experiences and expectations of women by focusing upon moments of cr1s1s as a catalyst for change

41503 WOMEN'S STUDIES THEORIES DrL Ryan

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqms1te Entry to Masters programme

To fam1hanse students with the range of contemporary debates about fem1mst theory drawn from Australian and overseas Journals Each year the topic will focus on particular issues 10 contemporary fem1n1st theory

Women's Studies

41504 WOMEN'S STUDIES CULTURAL TEXTS Dr S M Shendan

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours lectures/film and 1 seminar per week Pre reqms1te Entry to Masters programme

To mvest1gate a range of cultural texts from the popular media through f!lm and arts with attent10n to South Austrahan materials The mvest1gat10n will be guided by fem1mst questions about the position of women as cultural producers and representations of gender difference in various media

41505 CRIDQUE AND CONSTRUCT IN FEMINIST KNOWLEDGE Dr S M Sheridan

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Entry to Masters programme

To explore theoretical deoates surrounding the concept of 1fem1n1st knowledge' and its relat10nsh1p to other d1sc1plmes

41506 THEORIES OF RACE AND GENDER Dr L Ryan

Not avadable m 1991

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Entry to Masters programme

To explore debates from 18th century to the present about the relat10nslup between gender and race The topic wdl explore the impact of ma1or theories of races to question their s1gn1f1cance to contemporary gender theory

593

School of Social Sczences

41507 WOMEN'S STUDIES READING TOPIC Dr L Ryan

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Entry to Masters programme

Students takmg this topic will follow a supervised reading programme on selected issues 1n Women's Studies to be chosen in consultat10n with the Director of Studies The programme will mvolve a cnttcal survey of the literature on a spec1f1c problem area

41508 FEMINIST QUESTIONS Dr L Ryan, Dr S Magarey (Adelaide University) Dr [( Schaffer (SACAE) and Ms S Franzway (SACAE)

Umts 6 Level Masters Durat10n Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te .Entry to Masters programme

Tins topic will mtroduce students to the pohltcs and theones of women's studies, by addressmg the impact of select fenurust queshons on existmg pohtJ.cal philosophies, e g ltberahsm, anarchism, mana.sm, structuralism and post structurahsm, pos1t.J.VIsm emp1nc1sm and functJ.onahsm

41509 RESEARCH STRATEGIES Dr L Ryan, Dr S Magarey Dr K Schaffer, Ms S Franzway

Umts 6 Level Masters Durat10n Full year Class Contact 2 hours per fortmght Pre requlSlte Entry to Masters programme

In this topic students will become fam1har with the range of methods and procedures employed in current fem1n1st research and acqmre the knowledge and skills to 1mttate a successful research pro1ect They will consider arguments for and agamst a spec1f1cally femm1st methodology, mvesttgate the uses of qualitative and quantitative models, consider ph1losoph1cal, ethical and 1deolog1cal assumptions underlying various modes of research and explain the nexus between research social practices and social change

594

41511 WOMEN'S HEALTH Dr L Ryan, Dr F Baum Ms C Power

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Entry to Masters programme

The aim of this topic ts to analyse factors affecting women's health status by exam1n1ng three areas 19th and 20th century femm1st theories in relation to h1stoncal construction of med1c1ne, women's current status 1n the health system workers and consumers, and the development of women's health movement and associated changes

Elective Topics offered at the University of Adelaide and The South Australian College of Advanced Educatzon (SACAE)

University of Adelaide

05521 Austrahan Fermmst Htstonography

05522 History of Femm1st Thought

05523 Special Topics m Women's Studies

SACAE

04531 Women In History

04532 Feminist Theory

04533 Women and the D1v1s10n of Labour

04534 Women and Social Pohcy

04535 Family Fem1msm and The State

04536 Gender and Trade Umons

04537 Gender Issues In Educatton

04538 Women Writers and The Literary Tradition

04539 Sem10ttcs and Gender Representation

04541 Women and Popular Culture

04542 Language and Gender

04543 Mothers Daughters and Memory

04544 Femmme Sub1ect1v1ty

04545 Female Sexuahty

04546 Women's Studies Special Seminar

Topics m Social Administration

General Information

Bachelor of Social Admznzstratzon

Programme Requzrements

First year

50821 Social Admimstrat10n 50823 Human Development and the

Social Environment 50824 Fieldwork A 50825 Social Work 50826 Social Work Practice 50827 Social Welfare Services

Units 6

6 6 6 6 6

Students who have ma1ored in Psychology or another behavioural science in their preVIous studies, and who believe they have sub stan!!ally covered the subiect matter of topic 50823, may, with the approval of the Director of Studies subsl!tute another topic of equal umt weighting

Second year

50921 Fieldwork B

24 units of topics chosen from 50922 Human Service Organ1sahons 50923 Evaluation of Human Services 50924 Social Pohcy 50925 Social Planning 50926 Community Organ1sahon 50927 Social Groupwork 50928 Social Work with IndlV!duals

and Fam1hes

Units 12

6 6 6 6 6 6

6 50929 Social Work in Selected Settings 6 50931 Social Casework 6 50932 Professional Issues 1n Agency

Practice 6 50933 Change in Hum an Services 6 50934 Research Design in Social

Adm1n1stratlon 6 50935 Research Proiect in Social

Adm1n1strahon 6 50936 Integrated Direct Practice Methods 6 50937 Advanced Social Work Pracl!ce 6

Social Admznzstratzon

With the approval of the Director of Studies a student may substitute 6 units of third year or higher level studies relevant to the purposes of Social Admimstrat10n offered by another D1sc1phne within the Un1vers1ty

First Year Topics

50821 SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION Dr PD Travers

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

The scope of social adm1nistrat1on, elements of social programmes, the general welfare services

Preliminary reading Deveson A Australians at rzsk (Cassell

1978)* Dickey, BK No charity there a short history

of social welfare zn Australia, rev ed (Allen & Unwm, 1987)*

Dickey, B K Rations, residence and resources a hzstory of social welfare zn South Australia since 1836 (Wakefield, 1986)*

Kewley TH Australian social securzty today ma1or developments from 1900 to 1978 (Sydney UP, 1980)

Mendelsohn R Fazr go welfare issues zn Australia (Pengum 1982)*

50823 HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND THE SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT Dr C Irizarry

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

The topic s ob1ect1ve 1s to provide students with a theoretical framework for analysing the contribution that a person's environment makes to his or her psychological develop ment The 1mphcations for social work practice are examined

Preliminary reading Peterson, C C Looking forward through the

life span (Prentlce Hall, 1984)

595

School of Social Sciences

Reference books Lidz, T The person development throughout

the life cycle, rev ed (Basic Books, 1976) Raphael, B The anatomy of bereavement

(Basic Books, 1983)

50824 FIELDWORK A

Umts 6 Level Graduate Durallon Full year Class Contact 2 3 days per week mcludmg practice tutorials Co reqmsite 50826 Social Work Pracllce, except by pnor arrangement

Students spend part of each week of the academic year In the acqu1s1tlon of practice skills 1n social welfare settings, such as hospital soCial work departments child guidance clm1cs, family service agencies, correctional services Practice tutonals integrate theory and practice

50825 SOCIAL WORK Mr M Bull

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Co reqmsite 50824 Fieldwork A

An 1ntroductlon to the profession of social work, and a prehm1nary exam1nahon of its values, theoretical bases, and practice methods

Reference books Boas, P J and Crawley, J eds Social work zn

Australia (Australian Internat1onal Pr, 1976)

Compton, B and Galaway B Social work processes, 4th ed (Wadsworth, 1989)*

Fischer, J Effective casework practice (McGraw Hill, 1978)

Shulman, L The skills of helping individuals and groups (Peacock, 1984)

50826 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE Dr L Cooper

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 4 hours per week Co reqmsites 50824 Fieldwork A, 50825 Social Work

596

Further development of social work practice with emphasis on application of ma1or models and theones of practice

Reference books Germain, C , ed Social work practice people

and environment (Columbia UP 1979)* Shulman, L The skills of helping individuals

and groups (Peacock, 1984) Sipor1n, M Introductzon to soczal work

practice (Macmillan, 1975) Turner, F J Social work treatment

interlocking theoretical approaches, 3rd ed (Free Pr, 1986)

50827 SOCIAL WELFARE SERVICES Ms/ M Healy

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisite 50821 Social Adnun1strat1on

The dehvery of human services in Austraha, with particular reference to welfare services, debates over the respective responsib1hties of the pubhc and private sectors, selected issues in the delivery of the human services

Reference books Graycar, A and Jamroz1k 1 A How

Australians lzve soczal polzcy in theory and practice (MacMillan, 1989)

Rein M From polzcy to practice (MacMillan, 1983)

Kendig, H L and Mccallum, J , eds Gray polzcy Australzan polzczes for an ageing society, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1990)

Gilbert, N and Specht, H Dimenswns of social welfare policy, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1986)

Second Year Topzcs

50921 FIELDWORIC B

Umts 12 Level Graduate Duration Full year Class Contact 5 days per fortnight mcludmg fieldwork seminars Pre reqms1te 36 umts of first year level topics except by prior arrangement Co requisite 12 units of second year level topics

In field and 1n school learning 1s concurrent with academic work throughout the year Students spend the eqmvalent of five days per fortnight 1n selected government departments, hospitals, voluntary agencies or other suitable auspices working under superv1s1on at the administration, pohcy or service delivery levels Emphasis will be given m tutonals to the mtegrat10n of theory, method and research m fieldwork

50922 HUMAN SERVICE ORGANISATIONS Ms EM W Martin

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Co requisite Current or recent expenence in a service organisation

This topic aims at increasing students' understanding of human service organ1satlons, how they operate, and how they might operate more effectively

The issues covered include the charactenstics of human service organisations, the relationships between professions and bureaucracies, goals and pnonbes, dec1s1on making and influence, teamwork and 1ob deftn1tion, commun1cat1on and confhct, consumer service relations use of scarce resources and accountabihty

Preliminary reading Lansbury, RD and Gilmour, P

Organzzatzons an Australian perspectzve (Longman Chesh1re, 1977)*

Lauffer A et al Understanding your social agency A Sage Human Servtces Guide vol 3 (Sage, 1977) *

Reference books Bamford, T Managing social work

(Tavistock 1982)* Chnstian, W P and Hannah, GT Effective

management zn human servzces (Prentice Hall, 1983)

M1ringoff M Management zn human service organizations (Macmillan 1980)

Perlmutter FD and Slavm, S Leadership zn social admmistratzon (Temple U P , 1980)

Sam, R C and Hasenfeld, Y , eds The management of human services (Columbrn UP 1978)

Soczal Admznzstratzon

Skidmore, R Social work admznzstratzon (Prentice Hall, 1983)

50923 EVALUATION OF HUMAN SERVICES

Not offered m 1991

50924 SOCIAL POLICY Dr P D Travers

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

The analysis and evaluation of social policy The effects of social pohc1es on the welfare of different economic groups

Prelzmznary readzng George V and W1ldmg, P Ideology and social

welfare (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1976)* Goldthorpe, J H Order and conflict m

contemporary capitalism (Oxford UP 1985)

Marshall, T H The right to welfare (Hememann, 1981)*

Titmuss, R M Soczal polzcy an zntroductzon (Allen & Unwm, 1974)*

50925 SOCIAL PLANNING Ms/ M Healy

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

The processes and cntena by which welfare programmes can be formulated and compared, with particular reference to service dehvery at the state and local level Social plannmg approaches are reviewed, and the planning and implementation of pohcies and social delivery systems are explored

Reference books Gilbert, N and Specht, H Dimenswns of

social welfare policy (Prentice-Hall, 1986) Midgley, J and Prnchaud, D The fwlds and

methods of social planning (Hememann, 1984)

Rem, M From polu:y to practice (l'/lacm1llan, 1983)

597

School of Soczal Sciences

50926 COMMUNITY ORGANISATION Mr F Regan

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Co requ1s1te Current or recent community work experience

Approaches to commun1ty organ1satlons will be discussed e g locahty development, social action and social planning Strategies and ta ch cs will be studied with particular reference to the Australian experience

Reference books Bowman, M , ed Beyond the city (Longman

Cheshue, 1981)* Cox FM et al Strategies of community

organizatzon, 4th ed (Peacock 1987)* Henderson P and Thomas, D N Skills zn neigh

bourhood work (Allen & Unwm 1980)* Marns P and Rem, M Dilemmas of soczal

reform, 2nd ed (Aldme, 1973) Midgley, J et al Community part1cipatzon, social

development and the state (Methuen, 1986) Rubm, H ) and Rubm, I Community

organizing and development (Memll, 1986) Scott, D Don t mourn for me - organise

(Allen & Unwm, 19811* Taylor S H and Roberts, R W Theory and

practzce of community soczal work (Columbia UP, 1985)

Thorpe, R and Petruchen1a J , eds Community work or soczal change (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1985)*

Twelvetrees, A Community work (Macmillan, 1982)

50927 SOCIAL GROUPWORK

Not offered ID 1991

50928 SOCIAL WORK WITH INDIVIDUALS AND FAMILIES

Not offered ID 1991

50929 SOCIAL WORK IN SELECTED SETTINGS Ms EM W Martzn

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

598

The focus of this topic varies from year to year In 1991 it will be concerned with the follow1ng two areas 1) social work m mul!lcultural settmgs, which

includes a focus on work with recently arrived refugees and ethnic/cultural minority groups, and

2) social work with vulnerable groups such as the homeless, at nsk young people, AIDS sufferers etc

Seminars will be given by practitioners from agencies in the field as well as academic staff Reading hsts will be prepared in consultation with the VIsttlng lecturers

50931 SOCIAL CASEWORK

Not offered m 1991

50932 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES IN AGENCY PRACTICE Dr L Cooper

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 4 hours per week

This topic introduces students to some professional issues in agency practice, including social 1ust1ce in social work practice pnor1ty setting, quality of practice clients' nghts and ethics

Preliminary reading Pmcus,A andMmahan,A Soczalworkpractzce.

model and method (Peacock, 1973)*

Reference books Deutsch, M Distributive 7ustice a social

psychological perspective (Yale U P , 1985) Rhodes, M L Ethical dilemmas in soczal work

practice (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1986)

50933 CHANGE IN HUMAN SERVICES Ms EM W Martzn

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite Completrnn of 50922 Human Service Organ1sat1ons or perm1ss1on of Convener Co requisite Current or recent experience 1n some field of human services

Ob1echves for student a cnt1cal understanding of theories of change 1n organisations and their appropriate application to vanous fields of human sernces some capacity to analyse processes of change and to propose appropriate strategies for mfluencmg them

Content a) Understandmg change processes m human

services studymg change the context of change, the targets of change, the change system, models of change

b) Implementmg and mfluencmg change processes in human services sources of change 1nit1at1ves and consequent strategies intervention tactics, evaluative research and change1 skills for change agents, ethical issues

Case studies of change presented by guest lecturers

Reference books Benms, W et al The planning of change,

3rd ed (Holt Rmehart & Wmston, 1976) Brager, GA and Holloway, S Changing

human service organzsatzons (Free Pr 1978)

Resmck, H and Patb, J Change from within (Temple UP 1980)

Weiner, M Human servzces management analysis and publications 2nd ed (Wadsworth 1990)

50934 RESEARCH DESIGN IN SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION Dr P D Travers

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

The topic will focus on research design and evaluation in social adm1n1strat1on The course wtll be divided mto three modules each taught by a different member of staff Research m Social Work Practice, Evaluation of Programs and Services, Social Pohcy Research These three modules cover the pnncipal fields of research in which graduates of the D1sc1phne work The aim of the topic is to eqmp graduates with the skills that will enable them to design research pro1ects 1n their professional work Teaching and assessment will focus on exemplars of research m the three fields

Social Admznzstratzon

Reference books Bloom, M and Fischer j Evaluating practice

guidelines for the accountable professwnal (Prenltce Hall, 1982)

Erikson, R and Aberg, R Welfare m transztzon Lzvrng condztzons zn Sweden 1968 1981 (Clarendon Press, 1987)

Moser C A and Kalton, G Survey methods m social mvestigatwn (Gower, 1985)

Sam R S and Lawrence, R j Issues m the evaluatwn of social welfare programs Australian case illustratwns (N S W U P , 1980)

50935 RESEARCH PROJECT IN SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION Ms/ Healy

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

Extensive research ts being earned out by members of staff withm the Disciplme This topic will permit a small number of students to work with staff, e g drawmg on data bases already developed, in a supervised research pro1ect This opportumty is mtended for a hm1ted number of students who enVIsage either moVIng on to higher degree work, or under taking a spec1ahsed career in research w1th1n the social work profession Both teachmg and assessment will be by means of a 6,000 word proiect

Reference books This will vary, dependmg on the pro1ect selected

50936 INTEGRATED DIRECT PRACTICE METHODS Mr M Bull and Dr C !marry

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

This topic presents an integrated methods approach to social work direct professional practice It focusses on generic aspects of current practice methods and emphasises a choice of service dehvery based on client assessment

599

School of Social Sciences

Reference books Kadush1n, A The soczal work intervzew,

2nd ed (Columbia UP, 1983) Fischer J Effective casework practice

(McGraw Hill, 1978) Garvin, C D and Seabury, B A Interpersonal

practice in soczal work processes and procedures (Pren!Jce Hall, 1984)

Munson, CE Social work with families (Free Press, 1980)

G1tterman, A and Schulman, L , eds Mutual aid groups and the life cycle (Peacock, 1985)

50937 ADVANCED SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE Dr C Irzzarry and Mr M Bull

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

This topic exammes the theore!Jcal models of advanced profess10nal prac!Jce The goal 1s 'or students to develop the capacity for critical analysts and reflection of social work practice, mcludmg their own work

Reference books Turner, F Soczal work treatment

znterlockzng theoretical approaches (Free Press, 1986)

l{adush1n A The social work zntervzew (Columbia UP 1983)

Gamn C D and Seabury, B A Interpersonal practzce zn social work processes and procedures (Prentice Hall, 1984)

Post Basic Studzes zn Social Admznzstratzon

Diploma rn Social Sciences (Social Administration)

With the approval of the Director of Post basic Studies, gradJates holdmg the degree of Bachelor of Soc1al Adm1n1strahon or its equivalent and other people who have approved quahf1cahons in a related D1sc1phne and have substantial employment expenence m social welfare or an alhed field may enrol as candidates for the Diploma m Social Sciences (Social Admm1strahon) Details of the requirements for the Diploma in Social Sciences are given m Statute 7 1 Schedule 16

600

With the approval of the Director of Post basic Studies, units may be chosen from the followmg a 12 umt Thesis Diploma topics hsted below, second year topics from the Bachelor of Social Admm1strat10n programme hsted below, up to 12 umts chosen from third year Honours, Diploma or Masters topics in other D1sc1phnes in the Un1vers1ty

Post Basic Diploma Topics

Ava1lab1hty of these topics will depend on enrolment

50955 SUPERVISION IN SOCIAL WORK

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Post basic Diploma Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqms1te B Soc Admm or eqmvalent or perm1ss1on of lecturer Co requ1s1te Concurrent involvement in student or staff supervts1on

This topic explores the function of supems1on as a teachmg learnmg model for apphed learning in social work practice The model is concerned with max1m1s1ng learning from expenence through analysis of knowledge and values reflected in professional action

50974 LIFE CYCLE STAGES OF DEVELOPMENT Dr C Irzzarry

Umts 6 Level Post basic Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact 4 hours per weeek Pre requ1s1te B Soc Adm1n or equivalent or pernuss1on of Director of Studies

This topic is a further development of topic 50823 Students will be expected to attend lectures m 50823 and to undertake the add1t10nal work of selectmg one hfe cycle stage for m depth explorat10n Students will be asked to present a paper on this material at seminars for post basic students

Prelzmznary readzng Peterson C Looking forward through the

life span developmental psychology (Prenltce Hall 1984)

Reference books Lidz, T The person, hzs or her development

throughout the life cycle, 2nd ed (Basic Books, 1976)

Maas, H People and contexts soczal development from birth to old age (Prenllce Hall, 1984)

Raphael B The anatomy of bereavement (Basic Books 1983)

50975 READING SEMINAR IN SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION Dr PD Travers

Umts 6 Level Post basic Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact By mdividudl arrangement Pre reqmsite B Soc Admm or eqmvalent or perm1ss1on of Director of Studies

Students takmg this topic will select an individual aspect of social administration in consultation with the Director of Studies The selectwn will depend on the availability of staff Study m this topic will comprise attendance at seminars supervised ind1v1dual reading in a selected area of social adm1n1stration and completion of assignments

50976 RESEARCH SEMINAR IN SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION Dr L Cooper

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Post basic Diploma Duration Semester Class Contact By mdividual arrangement Pre requ1s1te B Soc Adm1n or equivalent or perm1ss1on of Director of Studies

Students m this topic will examme the research process (problem formulatwn, methodology and data analysis) and undertake a small piece of research 1n some aspect of social admimstratrnn Study m this topic will comprise attendance at seminars, supefVlsed mdividual readmg, and complet10n of assignments relatmg to the research proiect

Social Admznzstratzon

Prelzmznary reading Polansky N Social work research (Chicago

up 1975) Trtpod1, T Uses and abuses of soczal research

zn soczal work (Columbia UP, 1974)

Text book Grmnell, R M Social work research and

evaluatzon (Peacock, 1981)

Reference books Bulmer M Soczologzcal research methods

an mtroductzon, 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1984) Mayer, RR and Greenwood E The design of

soczal policy research (Prenltce Hall, 1980) Shipman, M D The limitations of social

research 3rd ed (Longman 1988)

Thesis

50950 SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA THESIS (12 umts)

A thesis of approximately 10,000 words m association with seminars and guided reading under the supervision of staff 1n Social Adm1n1stration

Topics from the Bachelor of Social Adminzstratwn

With the approval of the Director of Post basic Studies 1n Social Adm1n1strat1on, students may enrol m topics from the second year of the Bachelor of Social Admimstratwn programme hsted below

Umts

50922 Human Service Organ1sat1ons 6 50923 Evaluation of Human Services 6 50924 Social Pohcy 6 50925 Social Planmng 6 50926 Community Organ1sat1on 6 50927 Social Groupwork 6 50928 Social Work with Individuals and

Fam1ltes 6 50929 Social Work m Selected Settmgs 6 50931 Social Casework 6 50932 Professwnal Issues m Agency

Practice 6 50933 Change in Human Services 6

601

School _of Soczal Sciences

50934 Research Design m Social Adm1n1strat1on

50935 Research Proiect m Social 6

Admm1strat10n 6 50936 Integrated Duect Practice Methods 6 50937 Advanced Social Work Practice 6

For syllabuses see second year topics in the Bachelor of Social Adm1n1stratlon

Non graduating students zn Social Admznzstratzon

With the approval of the Director of Studies, graduates holdmg the degree of Bachelor of Social Adm1n1stratlon or its equivalent and other people who have approved quahf1cations in a related D1sc1phne and have substantial employment expenence in social welfare or an allied field, may enrol as non graduating students in particular topics in Socia 1

Adm1n1strahon

Master of Soczal Admznzstratzon

The Degree of Master of Social Adm1n1stratlon requires three semesters of full time study, or its eqmvalent m part time study It 1s a 54 umt programme approximately half by thesis and the rest by coursework

Before bemg accepted as higher degree students 1n Soc1al Admnnstratlon, candidates will be expected to submit satisfactory proposals for their studies to the Director of Higher Degree Studies m the D1sc1plme of Social Adm1mstrat10n A proposal should outline a relatively well defined area of interest which will determine both the coursework and thesis topic of the Master's pro gramme The proposal should make clear the candidate s present grasp of the sub1ect, as well as gaps in his or her understanding, and 1t should indicate how he or she proposes to use the Master's year to further that understanding

All candidates will be expected to take part in work-in progress seminars and to present papers to tnese seminars The quahty of work for work in progress seminars will be considered when assessments are made

Candidates should consult the Appendix to Statute 7 3, Schedule 5 The Degree of Master of Social Adm1mstrat10n for details of course requirements

602

50516 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE A Dr L Cooper

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester

50519 SUPERVISED INDIVIDUAL COURSE OF STUDY B

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester

50523 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE B Dr C Irizarry

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester

50524 ISSUES IN SOCIAL POLICY Dr P D Travers

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqws1te Adrruss1on to Masters programme

A one semester topic covenng selected social pohcy content Emphasis will be on the empmcal analysis of the development of the welfare state

Prelzmznary reading Goldthorpe, J H ed Order and conflict zn

contemporary capztalzsm (Oxford UP 1984)

0 E C D The welfare state zn crzszs (0 EC D 1981)

50525 PLANNING THE SOCIAL SERVICES Ms/ M Healy

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqws1te Adm1ss1on to Masters programme

A one semester topic of lectures and seminars with assignments totallmg about 6,000 words on selected aspects of social plannmg The topic considers social planning models, inter organ1sat1onal theory, programme planning

and implementation The emphasis will be upon social welfare programmes

Prelzmznary readzng Bryson,) M Strategic planning for public and

non profit orgamsatwns (Jossey Bass 1988) Midgley, J aod Pmchaud D The fields and

methods of socialplannmg (Hememann, 1984) Rem, M From policy to practice (Macmillan,

1983)* Scott, W R and Black, B L The orgamsatwn

of mental health services (Sage, 1986)

50526 ADMINISTRATION OF HUMAN SERVICE ORGANISATIONS Ms BMW Martin

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester Class Contact 3 hour seminar each week plus individual or group tutorials Pre requisite Some previous study of organ1satJ.ons or adnurustrahon, or penruss1on of Convener wluch will usually be condI!Ional upon attendance at degree level lectures m 50922 Co requ1s1te Current or recent experience 1n a human seI'VJ.ce organisation

The topic apphes theory concernmg human service organ1sahons and adm1n1strahon to selected issues which are relevant to the funct10ns of middle management and the particular mterests of the students

Prelzmznary reading Austm, M) Supervisory management for the

human services (Pren!Ice Hall, 1981) Gruber ML ed Management systems in the

human services (Temple, 1981) Wemer, M E Human sennces management.

analysis and appllcatwns (Wadsworth 1990)

50527 REVIEW AND EVALUATION IN HUMAN SERVICE ORGANISATIONS Ms BMW Martin

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hour seminar each week plus md1v1dual or group tutonals Pre requisite Some previous study of organ1satlons and of research methods, or perm1ss1on of Convener Attendance may be reqmred at some sess10ns of topics 50923

Social Adminzstratzon

The topic examines a range of approaches and methods in the areas of review and evaluation, especially as they relate to decision making and purposive change w1th1n human service orgamsations Students will have the opportumty to concentrate upon aspects of the topic which are of particular value to their employment or special interests

Preliminary reading Sam, R and Lawrence, R] Issues zn the

evaluatwn of social welfare programs Australian case zllustratwns (NS W UP, 1980)

Austraha Parbament, Senate Standing Committee on Social Welfare Through a glass, darkly evaluatwn m Australian health and welfare services 2 vols (AGPS, 1979)*

50529 SEMINAR IN SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION Dr PD Travers

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqrnSite Adimss1on to Masters programme

This topic involves attendance at seminars, supervised reading on themes and issues chosen by part1C1patmg staff and complet10n of asSignments totallmg about 6,000 words

Set books References will be supplied by the part1c1pa!Ing lecturers at the beg1nn1ng of the semester

50531 ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE IN HUMAN SERVICES Ms BMW Martin

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 hour seminar plus tutorial Pre requ1s1tes Some previous study of adm1n1strahon and organtsatlonal changes or perm1ss1on of Convener which may be cond1tlonal upon attendance at relevant degree level lectures Current or recent experience at higher than basic staff level m human service organ1sattons

603

School of Soczal Sczences

The topic aims to assist staff at supervisory and nuddle management levels of human semces to analyse, plan, and manage change processes more effectively

Content Wiil mclude both analysis of change processes and consideration of strategies for 1mplementmg and mfluencmg change m human services Students Wiii work on detailed case studies related ard relevant to their own experience and respons1b1hhes

Prelzmznary readmg Abels, P and Murphy M Admzmstratzon zn

the human services (Prenllce Hall, 1981) Brager, G and Holloway S Changing human

servzce organisations (Free Pr , 1978) Drucker, P Managing zn turbulent tzmes

(Harper & Row, 1980) Weiner, M Human services management

analysis and applicatzons (Wadsworth, 1990)

50532 BEREAVEMENT AND LOSS Dr C Inzarry and Mr M Bull

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First semester C'lass Contact The eqmvalent of 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite Masters level standmg

This topic examines death and bereavement as it impacts on various stages of human development and experience w1th1n a cultural context Special attenllon Wiii be given to the impact on family dynamics and children's reactions to death and loss Interventions for prof Pss1onal practice with the bereaved, especially 1n situations of chronic or terminal illness, child death, su1c1de, violent death and disaster will be considered

Reference books Becker, E The denzal of death (Free Pr , 1973) Griffin, G and Tovm D In the nzzdst of life

the Australzan response (Melbourne UP, 1982)

Raphael, B The anatomy of berea11ement (Basic Books, 1983)

Rosen, H Unspoken grief copzng wzth childhood sibling loss (Lexmgton, DC, 1986)

604

50533 THEORIES OF SOCIAL WORK INTERVENTION Dr C Inzarry and Dr L Cooper

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact The eqmvalent of 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing

This topic examines the development of social work practice theones and 1denttf1es current conceptuahsahons in relation to social work practice Social work models Wiil be examined 1n relation to their h1stor1cal development empmcal data base and theorellcal framework

Reference book Turner F] Social work treatment

znterlockzng theoretzcal approaches (Free Pr , 1986)

50534 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE EDUCATION Dr L Cooper and Dr C Irizarry

Not offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact The eqmvalent of 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing

This topic addresses the nature of social work practice education by exam1n1ng a range of htstoncal, theoretical and apphed concerns Some of the specific issues addressed mclude adult learning reflective learning, education for chn1cal practice and supervts1on

Reference books Boga M and Vayda, E The practice of fzeld

znstructzon zn soczal work theory and process (Toronto UP, 1987)

Kadush1n, A Supervzszon zn soczal work, 2nd ed (Columbia UP, 1985)

Middleman, R and Rhodes, G Competent supervzszon making zmagznatzve 7udgements (Prenllce-Hall, 1985)

50535 PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE IN HEALTHCARE Dr C Irizarry Mr M Bull and Dr L Cooper

Not offered m l!l91

Units 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact The eqmvalent of 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing

This topic examines current issues related to the development and adm1n1strabon of social work services 1n health care settings This mcludes exploratwn of pohcy and management concerns service delivery, resource allocat1on and qualtty assurance of social work practice Relevant research and plannmg projects w1thm the health context will be emphasised

Reference books Davis, A and George, J States of health

health and illness m Australia (Harper & Row, 1988)

Miller, R and Rehr, H Social wo1 k issues zn health care (Prentice Hall, 1983)

50560 M SOC ADMIN THESIS

Umts 24

This thesis should involve a substantial analysis of a problem or issue in social pohcy, in the adm101strahon of social programmes or 1n the prov1s1on of social services The length expected 1s 15,000 20,000 words

Topics zn Policy and Admznistratzon

Diploma Topics

51440 POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA DISSERTATION

Umts 6 Level Diploma Duration Full year Pre requ1s1te Diploma standmg

Policy and Admmistratzon

A dissertation extended essay, or research pro1ect of not more than 10,000 words written under the duection of a member of staff The work will give evidence of the student's ab1ht1es in collect1ng and evaluating 1nformat1on and in cr1t1cally exam1n1ng theories m the area of enqmry

51441 AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT AND PUBLIC POLICY Dr A Parkin and Dr L Orchard

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3'12 hours per week Pre reqms1te Diploma level standmg

Tins topic involves attendance at lectures for the undergraduate topic 35215 Australian Govermnent and Pubhc Pohcy plus tutorial attendance and assessment at the Diploma level The topic begms by cons1denng the cntena which might ius!Jfy the role of government in contemporary Australta, with particular reference to recent cnhc1sm of the eff1c1ency and effectiveness of the pubhc sector It then examines the process by which governments 1n Austraha formulate and implement pohc1es and manage their emplovees A s1gn1ficant part of the course involves the analysis of specific pohcy areas these may include taxation, the economy the environment, housing, ethnic affairs, the human services and criminal 1ust1ce

Reference books Blandy, R et al, eds Budgetary stress (Allen

& Unwm, 1989)* Coaldrake, P and Nethercote, j R, eds What

should government do?' (Hale & Iremonger, 1989)*

Cranston R Law, government and public policy (Oxford U P , 1987)

Davis, G et al Public policy in Australia (Allen & Unwm, 1988)*

Evatt Research Centre, State of siege (Pluto Press, 1989)*

Freeba1rn J W , Porter, M and Walsh, C , eds Spending and taxing II taking stock (Allen & Unwm 1988)*

Galligan, B ed Comparative state policies (Longman Cheshue, 1988)*

Galligan, B Hughes, 0 and Walsh, C , eds Intergovernmental relatzons and publzc policy (Allen & Unwm, 1990)*

605

School of Social Sciences

Head, B W and Patience, A eds From Fraser to Hawke (Longman Cheshire 1989)*

Indecs Economics, State of play 6 (Allen & Unwm 1990)*

Jennett, C and Stewart, R, eds Hawke and Australian public policy consensus and restructuring (Macmillan 1990)*

Le Grand, J and Robinson, R , The ecqnomzcs of socwl problems the market versus the state 2nd ed (Macmtllan, 1984)*

51442 STUDIES IN POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION A

Umts 6 Level Diploma/Masters Quahfymg Duration Semester Class Contact Ind1v1dual arrangement Pre reqms1te Diploma or Masters Quahfymg standmg

This topic involves attendance at such lectures, seminars and tutonals, and completion of such wntten work as may be spec1f1ed by the Director of Studies m Pohcy and Admm 1strahon, after consultation with the student, on a topic related to the study of pohcy and adm1n1stratton

51443 STUDIES IN POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION B

Umts 6 Level Diploma/Masters Quabfymg Duration Semester Class Contact Individual arrangement Pre reqmsite D1poma or Masters Quabfymg standmg

This topic involves attendance at such lectures, seminars and tutorials, and complehon of such wntten work, as may be specified by the Director of Studies m Pabey and Admm 1stratton, after consultation with the student, on a topic related to the study of pobcy and adm1n1strat1on

Master of Polley and Admimstratzon

The degree of Master of Pabey and Admm 1stration ts an 1nterdisc1phnary programme that aims to promote an under standing of pubhc and service sector adm1nistrat1ve

606

processes and to develop quahtatlve and quantitative approaches to pohcy planning and analysis

The degree programme for students who commenced pnor to 1991 comprises 48 units consistmg of either a dtssertat10n (51501) or a pro1ect (51510) valued at 12 umts, the Readmg Semmar (51502) valued at 6 umts, at least 18 units of core topics, not more than 12 units of elective topics

The degree programme for students commencing in 1991 and thereafter compnses 54 umts of either a dtssertat10n (51505) valued at 18 umts or a pro1ect (51510) valued at 12 umts the Readmg Semmar (51502) valued at 6 units, at least 18 units of core topics, not more than 12 units of elective topics

Candidates should consult the Appendix to Statute 7 3, Schedule 8 The Degree of Master of Po hey and Admmistratton for further details of course requirements

51501 MASTER OF POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION DISSERTATION

Umts 12 Level Graduate Durat10n Full year Class Contact Ind1v1dual arrangement Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing

The course of study shall involve supervised 1nd1v1dual reading and research in an area of pohcy and/or adm1n1stratton culm1natlng 1n a d1ssertatton ofabout 15,000 words m length The d1ssertat10n Wiii be assessed by at least two examiners at least one of whom 1s external to the Umvers1ty The supervisor will not be an examiner

51505 MASTER OF POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION DISSERTATION

Umts 18 Level Graduate Durat10n Full year Class Contact Ind1v1dual arrangements Pre requ1S1te Masters level standmg

The course of study shall involve supervised 1nd1v1dual reading and research in an area of policy and/or adm1n1stratton, culm1nahng 1n a d1ssertat10n of about 20,000 words m length The dtssertat10n will be assessed by at least

two examiners at least one of whom is external to the University The supervisor will not be an examiner

51510 PROJECT IN POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION

Umt5 12 Level Graduate Durat10n Full year Class Contact Individual arrangements Pre requisite Masters level standmg

The project will enable students to develop areas of interest ans1ng out of the theoretical and research literature 1n pohcy and adm1n1strahon A range of achv1hes will be permissible, leadmg to the product10n of a report of about 12 000 words In each case the student should demonstrate mastery of the literature, analysing and evaluating it to show its strengths and weaknesses The student must then show how propos1hons from the literature might be tested, or how the literature might be used 1n adm1n1strahve practlce or how the literature might apply to the analysis and understandmg of particular policies The project will not necessarily be externally examined

51502 READING SEMINAR IN POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION Dr L Orchard (Convener) and other staff

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Master's level standing

This topic involves attendance at seminars, supervised reading on themes and issues on pohcy and admmistrat10n, and completion of assignments totallmg about 6 000 words

Core Topzcs

51506 PUBLIC POLICY Dr A Parkzn and Dr L Orchard

Units 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3i;, hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing

Policy and Admznzstratzon

This topic involves attendance at lectures for the undergraduate topic 35215 Australian Government and Public Polley plus tutorial attendance and assessment at the Masters level The topic begms by considermg the cntena which might jUStlfy the role of government in contemporary Austraha, with particular reference to recent cr1hc1sm of the efficiency and effectlveness of the public sector It then examines the process by which governments 1n Austraha formulate and implement policies and manage their employees A sigmflcant part of the course mvolves the analysis of specific policy areas, these may include taxation, the economy, the environment, housing ethnic affairs the human services and cnm1nal JUShce

Reference books

Blandy, R et al , eds Budgetary stress (Allen & Unwm, 1989)*

Coaldrake, P and Nethercote, J R , eds What should government do? (Hale and Iremonger, 1989)*

Cranston R Law, government and public policy (Oxford UP, 1987)*

DaVIs, G et al Public polzcy zn Australza (Allen & Unwm, 1988)*

Evatt Research Centre, State of szege (Pluto Press, 1989)*

Freeba1m, J W, Porter, M and Walsh, C, eds Spendzng and taxzng II taking stock (Allen & Unwm, 1988)*

Galligan, B , ed Comparative state policies (Longman Cheshire, 1988)*

Galligan, B , Hughes, 0 and Walsh, C , eds Intergovernmental relatzons and public policy (!Jlen & Unwm, 1990)*

Head, B W and Patience, A , eds From Fraser to Hawke (Longman Cheshire, 1989)*

Indecs Economics, State of play 6 (Allen & Unwm, 1990)*

Jennett, C and Stewart, R, eds Hawke and Australzan public polzcy consensus and restructurzng (Macmillan 1990)*

Le Grand, J and Robinson R , The economics of social problems the market versus the state, 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1984)

607

School of Social Sciences

51507 AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS Dr A Parkin and Dr D H /aensch

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqws1te Adrruss10n to Masters programme

This topic evaluates, through a series of seminars, a number of contemporary aspects of Australian government, pohhcs and pubhc policy The content of the seminars will be deternuned pnor to the commencement of the topic, but may include recent federal elections, the ma1or poht1cal parties the mass media M1n1stenal bureaucratic relations, 1mm1gra t1on policy crime and corrections pohcy, econom1c pohcy, South Austrahan pohhcs, and the poht1cal impact of rehg10n

51508 HISTORICAL STUDIES IN SOCIAL POLICY Dr BK Dickey

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration First or second semester Class Contact 2 hour seminar Pre requ1s1te Graduate standing

This topic will explore the history of pohcy and adm1n1strahon in the field of social dependence (or social welfare), focusing on three problems VIZ support for the able bodied poor, dependent children and aged care Examples for exammat10n wtll be chosen from American Bnt1sh and Austrahan expe nence smce 1830 Teachmg will be by semmar Written work will consist m total of 5,000 6,000 words, spread over three tasks

Set books Dickey B No charity there A short history

of social welfare m Australia, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm, 1987)*

Fraser, D The evolutron of the British welfare state, 2nd ed (Macmillan 1984)*

Trattner, WI Fro1n poor law to welfare state a Jnstory of social welfare zn America 2nd ed (Free Pr, 1977)*

In addition, a substantial set of documents will be used

608

51509 (38512) SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVES ON fHE STATE AND BUREAUCRACY Socrology Staff

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours per week Pre reqms1te Adrruss1on to Masters programme

This topic explores soc1olog1cal perspectives on a range of issues concerning the late 20th Century state m cap1tahst society, and the adm1mstratlve staff of the state

51511 (55101) DEVELOPMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE CONCEPTS Dr DJ Thomas

Umts 6 Level Graduate Durat10n Semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing (students who have completed 53651 EvolVIng Concepts of Administration may not take this topic for credit)

This topic introduces an h1stoncal review of adm1n1strattve theory and is intended to give the candidate some understandmg of the various concepts which have contributed to current thought about the task of adm1n1stenng organisations

Concepts to be discussed include the following sc1entlf1c management, bureau cracy, the human relations and behavioural approaches to management, and the concept of the human service organ1satlon

Reference books Hasenfeld, Y and English, RA , eds Human

service orgamzatrons (Michigan UP, 1974) Hoy, WK and Miske!, CG Educatronal

admznistration theory, research and practice, 3rd ed (Random House, 1987)

Hunt J W The restless orgamzatron (Wiley Australasia, 1972)

Lansbury R D and Sp1llane, R Organzsatzonal behaviour the Australian context (Longman Cheshire, 1983)*

Owens, R G Organisational behavzour zn educatron, 3rd ed (Prentice Hall, 1987)*

Sam, R C and Hasenfeld, Y eds The management of human servzces (Columbia U P , 1978)

51512 (55102) THE ORGANISATION IN ACTION Staff of School of Educatron

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Durat10n Semester Class Contact 1 two hour semmar per week Pre reqms1te 51511 Development of Adm1n1strahve Concepts (students who have completed both 53652 Patterns of Organisation and Organ1sat1onal Change and 53681 The Orgamsat10nal Process may not take this topic for credit)

This topic exanunes the process of adm1n1ster-1ng organ1sat1ons with special reference to their contmumg development Vanous approaches to planned change the change process and resistance to 1t will be studied Selected ma1or organ1sat1onal problems encountered by the adm1n1strator, such as confhct and cns1s, wtll be examined together with strategies for deahng with them

Reference books Bignell, V , Peters, G and Pym, C

Catastrophic failures (Open UP, 1977)* Hunt, J W The restless orgamzatzon (Wiley

Australasia, 1972) Owens, R G Organizational behaviour zn

educatzon, 3rd ed (Prentice Hall, 1987)*

Appropnate Journal arttcles will be recommended as the topic proceeds

51513 (55107) PLANNING AND ADMINISTRATION Dr P W OBrien

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar weekly Pre requmte Masters level standmg (students who have completed 53658 The Planning Process may not take this topic for credit)

This topic examines planning as an adm1n1strative process w1th1n education and

Polley and Admznzstration

other pubhc agencies It exammes planmng theory smce World War II, and develops spec1f1c themes such as the debate between schools of thought, plannmg attitudes and planning methods The topic also examines suggested causes of the apparent failure of plannmg m pubhc agencies

Reference books Bryson, J M Strategic planning for public

and nonprofit orgamzatwns Gossey Bass, 1988)

David, F R Concepts of strategic management (Mernll 1987)

51514 (55108) THE DESIGN OF SOCIAL POLICY RESEARCH DrP W OBrien

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre-requ1s1te Masters level standing and consent of the lecturer

The maior emphasis m the topic will be the research design process, covering such issues as the nature of research design, 1ustif1catton of the need for It, stages which constitute the research design process and how these stages are interrelated as a sequence of operations carried out by an analyst

Set book Maichrzak, A Methods for policy research

(Sage, 1984)

51521 (38511) FAMILY, STATE AND SOCIAL POLICY Soczology Staff

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 3 hours Pre reqws1te Adm1ss10n to Masters Programme

This topic explores the relationships between the modem welfare state, the market and the family, with a view to understandmg con temporary issues m pubhc poltcy which bear on these relattonsh1ps Of special concern will

609

School of Soczal Sczences

be the 'crisis' of the welfare state, and its 1mphcat1ons for women caring and famtly structure

Prelzmznary reading Lash, S and Urry, J The end of organized

capztalism (Pohty, 1987) Mishra, R The welfare state zn crzszs soczal

thought and social change (Wheatsheaf 1984)

Reference books Baldock, C V and Cass B Women social

welfare and the state m Australza (Allen & Unwm, 1983)

Blustem, J Parents and children the ethzcs of the famzly (Oxford UP, 1982)

Castles F G The working class and welfare (Allen & Unwm, 1985)

Diamond I ed Famzlzes politics and public polzcy (Longman, 1983)

Donzelot J The polzcmg of famzlzes welfare versus the state (Hutchmson, 1980)

Voydanoff P, ed Work and family changing roles of men and women (Mayfield, 1984)

Watts, R The foundatwns of the natwnal welfare state (Allen & Unwm, 1987)

51522 (38513) VALUE CLARIFICATION AND PUBLIC POLICY Socwlogy Staff

May not be offered ID 1991

51523 (32503) (38514) POPULATION STUDIES Dr RM Steele

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

ThIS topic wdl focus on a number of core questions relating to the causes and consequences of changes in population growth, 1Illgrat10n fertihty mortahty and population structure The ma1or theories advanced to explam these demographic changes Wiii be cnl!cally exammed and related to wider econom1c and social change There will be an approximately equal divis10n of attention between ma1or issues relating more

610

specifically to Third World populat10ns and those relating to 1ndustnaltsed societies A small sect10n of the topic wdl be devoted to a consideration of some advanced methods of demographic analySls, especially With respect to population movement and population pro1ect1ons

Reference books Hugo, G J Australia s changing populatzon

trends and implicatwns (Oxford U P , 1986)

Hugo, G J , Hull, T H , Hull, VJ and )ones, G W, The demographic dimenswn m Indonesian development (Oxford U P , 1987)

51524 (55103) HUMAN COMMUNICATION Staff of the School of Educatwn

May not be offered ID 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour semmar per week Pre requ1s1te Masters level standing (students who have completed 53653 Communication and Interpersonal Relations may not take this topic for credit)

This topic enquires into the nature and functions of human commun1cahon in general, with spec1f1c reference to educational settings Topics covered include (1) Communzcatzon as a Concept, Human Communzcatzon as a Process, Models, Definitions and Theones, Intrapersonal Communzcatzon - self aware ness1 perceptual factors (2) Interpersonal Communzcatron - group dynamics verbal/ non verbal commun1cat1on, analysing commun1catton, and (3) Organisational Commun1cat1on - formal/1nformal verbal/ non verbal, negotiations, and (4) Aspects of 1nass communzcatzon and the mass media

Reference books Bett1nghaus E P Persuasive communzcatzon,

2nd ed (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1973) Burgoon M and Ruffner, M Human

communzcatwn (Holt, Rmehart & Wmston, 1978)

More, E A and Laird, R K Organzsatzons zn the communications age (Pergamon, 1985)

Rasberry, R W and Lemome L F Effective managerial communzcatzon (Kent, 1986)

Reuss, C and S1lv1s, D , eds Inszde organizational communzcatzon (Longman, 1985)

Weinberg S B 1 ed Messages a reader zn human communzcatzon, 3rd ed (Random House, 1980)

51525 (55104) MANAGING HUMAN RESOURCES Staff of the School of Educatzon

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1S1te None (students who have completed 53655 Personnel m Educat10n Systems may not take this topic for credit)

This topic will examine pohc1es and practices designed to ensure that an organ1sat1on's human resources are developed so as to satisfy the needs of both the orgamsation and the 1nd1v1dual Areas to be studied include personnel situations and problems career development and programmes designed to enhance the quahty of human hfe Topics covered include (1) Human Resources Management, (2) Manpower Planning, (3) Employee Relatwns, (4) fob Analysis, Recruztment, Selection, (5) Indw1dual Assessment, (6) Traznmg and Development, (7) Career Management and EEO, (8) Performance Apprazsal, (9) Absence and Turnover, (10) Occupatzonal Health and Safety, (11) Stress and Burnout (12) Qualzty of Work Lzfe

Reference book Schuler, R S , Dowlmg, P) and Smart, ) P

Personnel/human resource management zn Australza (Harper & Row, 1988)

51527 (52514) ECONOMICS AND PUBLIC POLICY Professor A W Evans

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2-3 hours per week

Policy and Admznistratzon

This topic provides an account of the nature and role of m1croeconom1cs in pubhc pohcy It will cover Basic assumptions of micro economics and of welfare economics, markets and market failure, pubhc goods and services collective action, cost benefit analysis, economics of pubhc sector dec1s1on making, taxation, regulation, redistribution, central local ftscal relations There will be case studies from specific pohcy areas

Reference books Barr, N The economics of the welfare state

(Weidenfeld and Nicholson 1987) Brown, CV and Jackson, P M Public sector

economics, 3rd ed (Longmans, 1986) Groene\vegen, P Publzcflnance zn Australia,

2nd ed (Prenl!ce Hall, 1984) Kmg, D N Fzscal tzers the economzcs of

multz level government (Allen & Unwm 1984)

Le Grand, J and Robinson R The economics of social problems, 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1984)

Pearce, D W Cost benefzt analyszs, 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1983)

Stightz ) E Economzcs of the publzc sector, 2nd ed (Norton, 1986)

51532 URBAN PLANNING, HOUSING AND PUBLIC POLICY Dr L Orchard

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2-3 hours per week Pre reqms1te Adrruss1on to Masters progranune

This topic examines Austraha's urban and housing structures, the pubhc pohc1es and 1nshtuhons which bear upon them and the theories which help orgamse the understanding of the structures and influence pohcymakmg The pohcy debates about urban and housing issues 1n Austraha will be of particular concern These include debates about urban inequahty urban land urban concentration and regional growth, the urban impact of structural change, urban consohdat1on, urban management versus urban plannmg, the Austrahan housmg cns1s and the emergmg mfrastructure problem and its urban consequences Reference will be made to overseas debates and examples where appropnate

611

School of Social Sciences

Prelzmznary reading Hamnett S and Bunker, R, eds Urban

Australia planning issues and policies (Nelson Wadsworth, 1987)

Reference books Australia Parliament House of Representatives

Standing Committee on Transport Commun1cat1ons and Infrastructure Constructing and Restructunng Australia's Public Infrastructure (AGPS 1987)

Badcock, BA Unfairly structured cities (Blackwell, 1984)

Burke, T, Hancock, L and Newton, P A roof over their heads houszng issues and families in Australia (lnslltute of Family Studies, 1984)

Halligan, J and Pans, C, eds Australian urban polztzcs crztzcal perspectzves (Longman Cheshire, 1984)

Kend1g1 H and Pans, C Towards fazr shares m Australian housing (Canberra, 1987)

McLoughlin, J B and Huxley, M, eds Urban planning zn Australza crztzcal readzngs (Longman Cheshire, 1986)

Maher, C Australian cztzes zn transition (Shillington House, 1982)

Neutze, GM Australian urban policy (Allen & Unwin, 1978)

Stretton, H Ideas for Australian cztzes, 3rd ed (Transit, 1989)

Troy, P N Equity m the city (Allen & Unwm, 1981)

50524 ISSUES IN SOCIAL POLICY Dr P D Travers

May not be offered m 1991

Units 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqmsite Adnussion to Masters programme

A half year topic covering selected social pohcy content Emphasis will be on the empmcal analysis of the development of the welfare state

Prelzmznary reading Conference on social policies in the 1980s

The welfare state zn crms (0 EC D , 1981) Goldthorpe ] H ed Order and conflict zn

contemporary capitalism (Oxford UP, 1984)

612

50525 PLANNING THE SOCIAL SERVICES Ms/ M Healy

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre-requisite Admission to Masters programme

A half year topic of lectures and seminars with assignments totallmg about 6,000 words on selected aspects of social plannmg The topic considers social planning models, interorgan1sat1onal theory programme planning and 1mplementahon, with an emphasis upon social welfare programmes

Reference books Bryson, JM , Strategic planning for public

and non profit organzsatzons Gossey Bass, 1988)

Gilbert N and Specht H Dimensions of social welfare policy, 2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1986)

Midgley, J and l'lachaud D The fields and methods of social planning (Hememann, 1984)

Rem M From policy to practice (Macmillan, 1983)*

50526 ADMINISTRATION OF HUMAN SERVICE ORGANISATIONS MsEMW Martin

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour seminar each week plus md!Vldual or group tutorials Pre requisite Some previous study of organ1sattons or adm1n1strat1on, or penn1ss1on of Convener which will usually be conditrnnal upon attendance at degree level lectures in 50922 Co requ1s1te Current or recent experience 1n a human service organ1satlon

The topic applies theory concemmg human sefVlce organ1satlons and adm1n1stratlon to selected issues which are relevant to the functions of middle management and the particular interests of the students

Preliminary reading Austm M j Supervisory management for the

human services (Prentice Hall, 1981) Gruber, M L, ed Management systems in the

human services (Temple UP, 1981) Weiner, ME Human services management

analysis and applzcatzons, 2nd ed (Wadsworth Pubhshmg, 1990)

50527 REVIEW AND EVALUATION 1N HUMAN SERVICE ORGANISATIONS Ms EM W Martin

May not be offered m 1991

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hour seminar each week plus 1nd1v1dual or group tutorials Pre requ1s1te 50923 Evaluation of Human Servlces or perm1ss1on of Convener

The topic examines a range of approaches and methods 1n the areas of review and evaluation, especially as they relate to decis10n makmg and purposive change w1th1n human service organ1sat1ons Students will have the opportunity to concentrate upon aspects of the topic which are of particular value to thetr employment or special interests

Preliminary reading Australia Parhament, Senate Standing

Committee on Social Welfare Through a glass, darkly evaluation zn Australian health and welfare services, 2 vols (AGPS, 1979)*

Sarri, RC and Lawrence, R J Issues zn the evaluation of social welfare programs Australian case illustratzons (NS W UP 1980)

50529 SEMINAR IN SOCIAL ADMlNISTRATION Dr PD Travers

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre-reqwsite Adnussion to Masters programme

This topic involves attendance at seminars, supervised reading on themes and issues chosen by partlClpating staff, and complet10n of assignments totalling about 6,000 words

Policy and Adminzstratzon

Set books References will be supphed by the participating lecturers at the beg1nn1ng of the semester

50531 ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE 1N HUMAN SERVICES Ms EM W Martin

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact Two hour seminar plus tutonal Pre requ1s1tes Some previous study of administration and organisational changes, or permission of Convener which may be cond1honal upon attendance at relevant degree level lectures Current or recent experience at higher than basic staff level in human service organisation

The topic aims to assist staff at supervisory and middle management levels of human services to analyse plan, and manage change processes more effectively

Content will include both analysis of change processes and consideration of strategies for implementing and influencing change in human semces Students will work on detailed case studies related and relevant to their own experience and responsibthttes

Prelzmznary reading Abels, P and Murphy, M Adminzstratzon in

the human services (Prenttce Hall, 1981) Brager, G A and Holloway, S Changing

human service organzsatzons (Free Pr , 1978)

Drucker, PF Managing in turbulent times (Harper & Row, 1980)

Weiner M Human services management analysis and applzcatzons, 2nd ed (Wadsworth Publishing, 1990)

Elective Topics

The following topics are available as electives 1n the Master's Programme 1n Pabey and Admin1Strat10n For details of the other electtves avadable withm and outside Flinders Un1vers1ty, contact the Director of Studies

613

School of Social Sciences

51503 POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION SELECTED AREAS

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact By 1nd1v1dual arrangement Pre requ1s1te Consent of Director of Studies

Students takmg this topic will select an 1nd1v1dual area of interest in consultation with the Director of Studies The select10n will depend on the avallab1hty of specialist advisers Study m this topic will comprise supervised 1nd1vidual reading of the relevant hterature and research in the selected area of pohcy and/or adm1n1strat1on and completion of assignments totalling about 6,000 words

51504 POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION SELECTED ISSUES

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact By md1v1dual arrangement Pre requ1s1te Consent of Director of Studies

Students takmg this topic will select issues of interest in consultation with the Director of Studies The select10n will depend on the ava1lab1ltty of spec1ahst advisers Study 1n this topic will compnse supervised 1nd1v1dual reading of the relevant literature and research 1n the selected area of policy and/or adm1n1stration issue or issues, and completion of assignments totalling about 6,000 words

51529 ELECTIVE STUDIES A Director of Studies

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact By arrangement

This topic enables the reg1strat10n and recording of 6 units of elective studies for the Masters of Pohcy and Admmistrat10n m topics for which there is no Fhnders Un1vers1ty Masters level topic number

614

51531 ELECTIVE STUDIES B Director of Studies

Umts 6 Level Graduate Duration Semester Class Contact By arrangement

This topic enables the reg1strat1on and recording of 6 units of elective studies for the Masters of Pohcy and Adrmmstrat10n m topics for which there is no Flmders Umvers1ty Masters level topic number

Courses forming part of a first year programme in Engineering will be offered at Flinders based upon the accredited engineering course of the South Australian Institute of Technology. Students who participate in this course will be enrolled in the S.A.l.T. and will transfer to the Levels campus of the S.A.I.T. for second year studies. The Mathematics, Computing, Physics and Chemistry elements of the syllabus will be given by Flinders University staff whilst the various Engineering components will be presented at Flinders University by S.A.I.T. staff. Students will be required to travel to the Levels campus of S.A.I.T. on one day per week in the second semester. Transport will be provided.

During the first semester all Engineering students will undertake a common course of study. This entails

Engineering Maths 1 Introduction to Computing Engineering Physics 1 Engineering Chemistry and Materials 1 Engineering Mechanics Introduction to Engineering Engineering Drawing 1 Language in Use

Second semester courses taken will be dependent upon the type of engineering course undertaken.

All Students Engineering Maths 2

Civil Engineering Engineering Physics 2 Engineering Chemistry and Materials 2

Engineering Mechanics F Engineering Drawing F Civil Engineering F * Computer Systems Engineering Engineering Physics 2 Programming (Pascal)

Engineering

Electrical and Electronic Fundamentals Electronic Processes * Discrete Mathematics * Electrical Engineering and Electronic Engineering Engineering Physics 2 Programming (Pascal) Electrical and Electronic Fundamentals Electronic Processes * Engineering Practice * Mechanical Engineering Physics for Mechanical Engineers I Engineering Chemistry and Materials 2 Engineering Mechanics F Engineering Drawing F Mechanical Engineering F * Engineering Practice F *

Mining Engineering Engineering Physics 2 Engineering Chemistry and Materials 2 Engineering Mechanics F Engineering Drawing F Introduction to Mining * Engineering Practice *

*Presented at the Levels campus of S.A.l.T. on the Common Day.

* Presented at the S.A.l.T. if necessary.

Set books and Text books are required reading on which students may be tested. Students are expected to have their own copies of all books listed as Set books or Text books; multiple copies of these books will not be available in the Library. Preliminary reading is reading which the student is expected to have completed before the commencement of teaching and on which he or she may at any time be tested. Further reading and Recommended reading, where not otherwise specified, indicate reading which the student is expected to do in the course of studying the Set books. Reference books are books which the student will find useful in the course of studying the topics for which they are specified.

615

Studzes zn Engzneerzng

Students are expected to have their own copies of the set books

The name of the staff member 1m!Jally responsible for a topic 1s shown where possible, m 1tahcs below the topic !Ille

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS 1 Dr/ W Rice

Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 2 tutorials per week Pre requisite None

Mathematical modelhng, derivatives, def1n1te integrals, differential equations, systems of hnear equations random numbers

Set books Grossman S I Calculus, 4th ed (Harcourt

Brace Jovanovich, 1987) Hiil, R 0 Elementary linear algebra, Int ed

(Academic, 1986)

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS 2 Dr J W Rice

Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te First semester engineering

Differential calculus, integral calculus, polar co ordinates, sequences and series, hnear algebra random variables and probab1hty functions

Set books Grossman, S I Calculus 4th ed (Harcourt

Brace Jovanovich, 1987) Hill R 0 Elementary linear algebra

(Academic, 1986)

INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTING Mr SP Tyerman

Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

Using a word processing package, using a spreadsheet package, programming in Pascal

616

Set book Duncan, A K Introduction to Computzng

(Techsearch, 1990)

PROGRAMMING (PASCAL) Mr SP Tyerman

Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 2 tutorials per week Pre requ1s1te First semester eng1neer1ng

Programme design, development and testing, simple data structures, Pascal programming data types Char and Boolean expressions control structures, input/output, programme structures, recursion fundamental algorithms

Set book Crawley, J W and McArthur, W G Structured

programming using Pascal (Prentice Hall, 1988)

Reference book Garland, S] Introductwn to computer

science with applzcatzons zn Pascal (Addison Wesley 1986)

ENGINEERING PHYSICS 1 Dr EL Murray

Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week plus 1 tutorial per week for 10 weeks and a 2 hour laboratory for 8 weeks Pre requ1s1te None

Measurements and standards, geometrical op!Ics elementary electrostatics DC theory, elementary electromagnetism, fundamentals and engineering apphcat1ons of radioactive decay, v1brat1ons

Set book Serway, RA Physics for sczentzsts and

engineers, 2nd ed , 2 vol (Saunders 1987)

Reference books Sears F W, ZemanskI MW and Young HD

University physics, 7th ed (Addison Wesley 1987)

Bueche F J Introductwn to physics for sczentzsts and engzneers, 4th ed (McGraw Hill, 1986)

Halhday, D and Resmck, R Fundamentals of physics 2nd ed (Wiiey 1986)

ENGINEERING PHYSICS 2 Dr EL Murray

Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week plus 1 tutorial per week for 10 weeks and a 2 hour laboratory per week for 8 weeks Pre requ1s1te First semester eng1neer1ng

Errors, electrostatics electromagnetism and electromagnetic induction electnc c1rcu1ts1

magnetic materials, waves and acoustics, physical optics, polarised hght, radrnhon physics spectra and the sohd state

Set book Serway, RA , Physics for sczentzsts and

engineers, 2nd ed 2 vols (Saunders 1987)

Reference books As for Engmeenng Physics 1

PHYSICS FOR MECHANICAL ENGINEERS Dr EL Murray

Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week for 7 weeks plus 1 tutorial per week for 6 weeks and a 2 hour laboratory per week for 3 weeks Pre requ1s1te First semester eng1neer1ng

Electromagnet1sm and electromagnet1c induction waves and acoustics, physical opl!cs, polarised hght

Set book Serway, RA Physics for scientists and

engineers, 2nd ed 2 vols (Saunders, 1987)

Reference books As for Engmeering Physics 1

Ei'IGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND MATERIALS 1

Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and a 2 hour laboratory /tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

Introducl!on, Physical chemistry Fuels and energy, Electrochem1stry and corrosion Organic chenustry Classes, property and

Engineering

structure of materials, Defects In sohds, Diffusion In sohds, Elastic-plastic behavtour, Effect of reheating Mixtures, Fracture 1n sohds

Set book for Chem1Stry Breck W G , Brown, R J C and McCowan,

J D Chemistry for science and engineering, 2nd ed, (McGraw Hill 1989)

Reference books for Chemistry Barnard, J A and Bradley, J N Flame and

combustwn, 2nd ed (Chapman Hall, 1985) Chang R Chemistry, 3rd ed (Random House,

1988) Cheremismoff IN and Young, RA Pollutzon

engmeerzng, practice handbook (Ann Arbor, 1975)

Eghngton, M S , Concrete and zts chemical behavzour (Telford, 1987)

Jastrebski Z D The nature and properties of engmeenng materials 3rd ed (Wdey, 1987)

Masterton W L , Slowinsk1, E J and Staitsk1, C L Chemical principles 6th ed (Holt Saunders, 1985)

Steedman, W , Snadden, R B and Anderson, I H Chemistry for engineering and applied sciences, 2nd ed (Pergamon 1980)

Van Vlack, L H Elements of materials science and engineering 5th ed (Addison Wesley, 1985)

Zumdahl, S S Chem1Stry, 2nd ed (Heath, 1989)

Set book for Materials Askeland D R The science and engineering

of materials, S I ed, (Van Nostrand Remhold 1988)

or Van Vlack, L Elements of material science

and engzneenng 5th ed (Addison Wesley, 1985)

or Jastrebski, Z D The nature and properties of

engineering materials, 3rd ed (Wiley, 1987)

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND MATERIALS2

Level Fmt year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and a 2 hour pracllcal per week Pre requ1s1te First semester eng1neenng

General chemistry Explosives Water and waste treatment Cement and lime products

617

Studies zn Engzneerzng

Functional eng1neer1ng fluids Phase equ11tbr1a Alloy systems, Polymers Ceramics Special materials Review of strengthening mechanisms

Set books As for Eng1neenng Chemistry and Materials 1

Reference books As for Engmeenng Chemistry and Matenals 1

INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING

Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 3 lectures per week for 8 weeks plus a 3 hour laboratory for 5 weeks Pre requ1s1te None

C1v1l eng1neer1ng computer system eng1neer1ng1 electrical eng1neenng, electronic eng1neer1ng, mechan1cal eng1neer1ng, metallurg1cal engineenng, m1n1ng engmeenng

Set book None

ENGINEERING MECHANICS 1

Level Fmt year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 lectures and one tutorial per week Pre requ1s1te None

Statistics vectors, forces and moments stress and strain, shear forces, bending moments

Dynamics particle dynamics Newton's laws applled to rectilinear and circular motion, pro1ectiles, friction colhs1ons

Set book Menam, J L and Kra1ge, L G , Engineering

mechanics SI edn, vols 1 & 2 (Wiiey, 1987)

or Atkms, K j and Darvall, P LeP Mechanics

and structures (Science Pr 1988)

Reference books Atkms, K j and Darvall, P LeP, Mechanics

and structures, worked problems tests and solutwns (Science Pr, 1985)

Kinsky R Engineering mechanzcs and strength of materials (McGraw Hiii, 1986)

618

ENGINEERING DRAWING 1

Level Fmt year Duration First semester Class Contact A 2 hour laboratory per week Pre requ1s1te N~ne

Drawing instruments, hne types, graphs, orthographic pro1ect1on, sect1on1ng and conventional practices

Set books Pearson, W H 1 Visualzsatzon and analysis,

4th ed (Techsearch, 1989) Roth, R and van Haenngen, I, edsAustralzan

engzneerzng drawing handbook, part 1 baszc prmczples and techniques (Institute of Engmeers, Australia 1988)

LANGUAGE IN USE

Level First year Duration First semester Class Contact 2 hours of tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te None

Language users and use, language for thought, practical commun1cat1ons for personal, professional and academic purposes, current issues in commun1catlon

Set book Neufeld, j K, A handbook for technical

communicatwn (Prentice Hall, 1987) A recommended Dictionary and Thesaurus

Reference books Barrass RT Scientists must write (Science

Paperbacks, 1987) Be1sler, F , Scheers, H and Pinner, D

Communzcatwn skzlls (Pitman, 1987) Clanchy j and Ballard, B Essay wrztzng for

students (Longman Cheslure, 1986) Eagleson, R D , Threadgold, T and Collins, P

lnszde language (Pitman, 1985) Fiske, J Introduction to communication

studies (Methuen, 1985)

ENGINEERING MECHANICS F

Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutonal per week Pre requ1s1te First semester eng1neenng

Statics shear forces, bending moment Hookes law, deformations, prevention of strain, hydrostatics, effects of pressure, buoyancy

Dynamics, ngid bodies energy and momentum methods, mechanisms

Set book Menam, J L & l{ra1ge1 L G Engzneerzng

mechanics statzcs and dynamics, S I edn (Wiley, 1987)

Reference books l{1nsky, R Engineering mechanics and

strength of materzals (McGraw Hill, 1986) Atkms K j & Darvall P LeP M echanzcs and

structure (Science Pr, 1988)

ENGINEERING DRAWING F

Level First year Duration Second semester Class Contact A 4 hour laboratory per week Pre requ1s1te None

Descnptive geometry engineering drawing drawing pro1ect, computer aided drafting

Set book Standards Assoc1at1on of Austraha, Technical

drawing practice for students 2nd ed , 1986

ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC FUNDAMENTALS

Level First year Duration Second semester Course Contact 2 lectures and 4 hours tutonal/laboratory per week Pre requ1s1te First semester engineenng

Energy and informatton, basic ctrcuit elements, elementary c1rcu1t analysts, introduction to measuring instruments, electronic devices and circuits, amphf1ers and modelhng, electrical signals, d1g1tal c1rcwts power supplies, electro mechanical energy conversion

Set book Carlson, AB and G1sser, D C Electrical

engmeermg (Addison Wesley 1981)

Reference books McKenzie Smith, I and Hosie K,T Basic

electrical engineering science (Longman, 1979)

O'Malley, j R Circuit analysis (Prentice Hall, 1980)

Smith R J Czrcuzts, devzces and systems, 4th ed (Wiley, 1984)

Sydenham, P H Basic electronics for znstrumentatzon (Instrument Society of America, 1982)

Engzneerzng

619

Studies in Theology

The requirement for degrees administered by the Board of Studies in Theology are set out in Schedule 23 to Statute 7 .1.

The term Set books is used for books of which students are expected to have their own copies; they are not expected to have their own copies of books listed as Prelimina1y reading or Reference books. Many of the books will be unavailable in the University Library, but can be found in the libraries of the Theological Colleges affiliated with the Adelaide College of Divinity.

Students are asked to note that topic 26102 Preliminary New Testament Greek is a pre­requisite for New Testament exegesis topics. A short course in New Testament Greek is available in February to people with insufficient or no prior knowledge of the topic.

25101 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE AND HISTORY OF THE OLD TESTAMENT The Revd Dr J. Roffey

Units: 6 Level: First year Duration: Semester Class Contact: 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre-requisite: A working knowledge of the Old Testament is assumed.

The aim of this topic is to provide a general introduction to the Old Testament scriptures: their content, historical setting, literary forms and leading theological themes. The course will include attention to the composition of the literature; trends and methodology in Old

Testament scholarship; and the significance of the material as sacred scripture to Jews and Christians.

Prelimina1y reading Before classes commence, each student is required to read the book of Deuteronomy carefully. It is suggested that the book be read two or three times (preferably using different translations), and at least once in a single sitting.

Set books Anderson, E.W. Living world of the Old

Testament, 4th ed. (Longman, 1986) Rendtdorff, R. The Old Testament: an

introduction (S.C.M., 1985) Rogerson, J. Beginning Old Testament study

(S.P.C.K., 1983) Turner, N. Handbook for biblical studies

(Blackwell, 1982)

Reference books Anderson, G.W. Tradition and interpretation

(Clarendon, 1979) Barton, J.A. Reading the Old Testament

(Longman, 1984) Bright, J. A history of Israel, 3rd ed. (S.C.M.,

1980) Childs, B.S. Introduction to the Old

Testament as scripture (Fortress, 1979) Gottwald, N.K. The Hebrew Bible: a socio­

literary introduction (Fortress, 1985) Hayes, J.H. and Miller, J.M. Israelite and

fudean history (S.C.M., 1977) Knight, D.A. and Tucker, G.M. Israelite and

fudean history (S.C.M., 1979) La Sor, W.S., Hubbard, D.A. and Bush, F.W.

Old Testament survey (Eerdmans, 1982)

Set books and Text books are required reading on which students may be tested. Students are expected to have their own copies of all books listed as Set books or Text books; multiple copies of these books will not be available in the Library. Preliminary reading is reading which the student is expected to have completed before the commencement of teaching and on which he or she may at any time be tested. Further reading and Recommended reading, where not otherwise specified, indicate reading which the student is expected to do in the course of studying the Set books. Reference books are books which the student will find useful in the course of studying the topics for which they are specified.

620

Miiler J M and Hayes, J H A hzstory of anczent Israel and Judah (S C M , 1986)

Miller, PD , Hanson, P D and McBnde S D Ancient Jsraelzte religion (Fortress, 1987)

Soggin, J A Introductzon to the Old Testament (S C M , 1976)

25201 OLD TESTAMENT EXEGESIS THE PENTATEUCH The Revd Dr/ Roftey

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre requ1szte 25101 Introductzon to Literature and History of the Old Testament

This topic 1s designed to give an 1ntroduchon to the books of the Pentateuch showmg the forms, traditions and purposes which have contributed to their structure and composrb.on Passages from Genesis and Exodus will be selected for exegesis

Set books Ch!lds, BS Exodus (S CM, 1974) Noth, M Levztzcus (S C M , 1965) Noth, M Numbers (S CM , 1968) Rad, G von Geneszs, 3rd ed (S CM, 1972)

Reference books Anderson, G W ed Tradztzon and

znterpretatzon (Oxford UP, 1979) Brueggemann, W Geneszs Oohn Knox 1984) Budd P j Numbers (Word Books, 1984) Noth, M A hzstory of Pentateuchal tradztzons

(Prentice Hall 1972) Rad, G von The problem of the Hexateuch

and other essays (Ohver & Boyd 1966) Rowley, H H, ed The Old Testament and

modern study (Oxford UP, 1951) Sna1th, N , ed Leviticus & Numbers (Nelson,

1967) Vaux, R de The early history of Israel, 2 vols

(Darton, Longman & Todd, 1978) Westermann, C Creatzon (SP CK, 1971)* Westermann, C Genesis, 3 vols (S P C K ,

1985 87) Westermann, C Genesis I-XI a commentary

(SP CK, 1984) Westermann C The promises to the Fathers

(Fortress 1980)

Theology

25202 OLD TESTAMENT EXEGESIS THE DEUTERONOMIC HISTORY The Revd Dr C R Biggs

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre requ1s1te 25101 Introduction to Literature and History of the Old Testament

This topic ts designed to give an 1ntroduct1on to the Deuteronom1c History and will consider literary quest10ns as well as the theological standpoint and the view of hIStory taken by the work Passages will be selected from Deuteronomy, Samuel and IUngs for exegesis

Set books Gray j I and II Kzngs 3rd ed (revised)

(SC M 1977) Hertzberg, H W I and II Samuel (S C M ,

1964) Noth, M The Deuteronomistic history

() S 0 T, 1981) Rad G Von Deuteronomy (SC M 1966)

Reference books Anderson G W Tradztzon and znterpretatzon

(Oxford UP, 1979) Frethe1m, T E Deuteronomzc history

(Abmgdon 1983) Mayes, AD H The story of Israel between

settlement and exile (S CM, 1983) Nelsoa, RD The double redactzon of the

Deuteronomistic history OS 0 T, 1981) Nicholson E W Deuteronomy and traditzon

(Fortress, 1969) Packham, B The compositzon of the

Deuteronomzst1c hzstory (Scholars Press, 1985)

25203 OLD TESTAMENT EXEGESIS THE PROPHETS The Revd Dr C R Biggs

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre-requmte 25101 Introduct10n to Literature and History of the Old Testament

This topic 1s designed to show the role of the

621

Studies zn Theology

prophets m the society of Israel under the monarchy and m the penod of the eXJle, and to consider literary questions related to the prophetic books Passages for exegesis will be selected from the followmg

1991 Jeremiah Amos, Hosea 1992 Ezekiel, Haggai Zechariah 1993 Isaiah

Set books Bright J Jeremiah (Doubleday, 1974) Carroll, RP , Jeremiah (S C M , 1986) Holladay J Jeremiah (2 vols) (Fortress, Vol 1,

1986, Vol 2, 1989) McKane, W Jeremiah (Vol 1, I XXC)

(T & T Clark, 1986) Mays, J L Amos (S CM, 1969) Mays, J L Hosea (S CM , 1969) Thompson J A The book of Jeremiah

(Eerdmans 1986)

Reference books Mays, J L and Achteme1er, P J Interpreting

the prophets (Fortress, 1987) Koch, K The prophets (S C M , 1982) Peterson, D L Prophecy zn Israel (S P C KI

Fortress, 1987) Rad, G van The message of the prophets

(SC M, 1968) Rad, G van Old Testament theology, vol 2

(SC M, 1965) Wilson, RR Prophecy and society in Ancient

Israel (Fortress, 1980)

25204 OLD TESTAMENT EXEGESIS THE WRITINGS To be announced

Units 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutonal) Pre-requ1S1te 25101 Introduct10n to Literature and HIStory of the Old Testament

The topic is designed to give an 1ntroduchon to the Wntmgs with specrnl reference to the Psalter the WISdom Literature and Apocalyptic Attent10n will be given to the clasSifJcat10n of the Psalms, the relat10nsh1p of WISdom Literature to the rest of the Old Testament and other literature, and to the hIStoncal background of Apocalyptic Passages for exegeSis Wiil be selected from the following

1991 Psalms

622

Set books Collms, j I Dame!, with an zntroductwn to

apocalyptic literature (Eerdmans 1984) Murphy, RE Ruth, Esther Job, Proverbs,

Ecclesiastes Canticles with an introduction to wisdom literature (Eerdmans, 1981)

Stone M E Scriptures sects and vzszons (Collms 1980)

Reference books Collms, J J The apocalyptic zmagznatzon

(Crossroad, 1984) Crenshaw, J L studzes zn ancient Israelite

wisdom (Ktav, 1975) Crenshaw, J L Old Testament wisdom an

zntroductwn (S CM, 1981) Hellholm, D Apocalypt1c1sm zn the

Mediterranean world and the Near East 2nd ed G C B Mohr 1989)

Mulder M] M1kra text, translation, reading and znterpretatzon of the Hebrew Bible zn ancient Judaism and early Chrzstianzty (Fortress, 1988)

Rowland, C The open heaven (S P C K , 1982)

Stone, M E Jewish wrztzngs of the second temple period (Fortress 1984)

25205 OLD TESTAMENT STUDIES ISRAEL'S SACRED STORY Not offered m 1991

NOTE ThIS topic IS mcompat1ble with 25201 and 25202 A student may not take thIS topic for credit havmg already passed either 25201 or 25202, nor take either of them having passed thIS topic

25301 OLD TESTAMENT THEOLOGY The Revd Dr C R Biggs

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutonal) Pre reqmSites 25101 Introduct10n to Literature and HIStory of the Old Testament, and any two of 25201, 25202, 25203 25204

In thIS topic the problem whether there can be Old Testament Theology' or only a hIStory of lsrael s rehg1on is first discussed Vanous themes (e g Creat10n, the Exodus, the

Covenant, the Messiah, Revelation) and d1ffenng theologies to be found w1thm the Old Testament itself are considered and then recent attempts at writing theologtes of the Old Testament are reviewed

Set books E1chrodt W Theology of the Old Testament,

2 vols (S CM, 1961 & 1967) Rad G von Old Testament theology 2 vols

(Oliver & Boyd, 1962 & 1965) Z1mmerh, W An old Testament theology in

outline (Clark 1978)

Reference books Becker,) Messzanzc znterpretatzon in the Old

Testament (T & T Clark, 1980) Brueggemann W and Wolff, H W The v1tal1ty

of tne Old Testament traditions Oohn Knox Pr, 1975)*

Clements, RE Old Testament theology (Marshall, Morgan & Scott, 1978)

Elhs P The Yahwist, the Bible's fzrst theologian (Geoffrey Chapman 1968)

Gunneweg, A H) Understanding the Old Testament (Westminster, 1978)

Harnngton, W The path of biblical theology (Gill & Macmillan, 1973)

Hase!, G Old Testament theology basic zssues zn the current debate rev ed (Eerdmans, 1982)

Hayes, ) and Prussner, F C Old Testament theology its history and development (SC M 1985)

Kaiser, W C Towards an Old Testament theology (Zandervan 1978)

Kohler, L Old Testament theology (Westmmster, 1957)

McKenzie, ) L A theology of the Old Testament (Doubleday, 1974)

Mowinckel, S He that cometh (Blackwell, 1956)

Renckens, H The religzon of Israel (Sheed & Ward 1967)

Reventlow, H G Problems of Old Testament theology in the twentieth century (S C M , 1985)

Spnggs, D Two Old Testament theologies (SC M, 1974)

Terrien, S The elusive presence towards a new biblical theology (Harper & Rowe, 1978)

Vaux R de The early history of Israel, 2 vols (Darton, Longman & Todd, 1978)

Theology

Vnezen, Th C An outline of Old Testament theology (Blackwell, 1958)

Westermann, C Essays on Old Testament interpretatzon (S CM, 1960)

Westermann, C Creatzon (SP CK, 1974)* Westermann, C The elements of Old

Testament theology (John Knox, 1982)

25401 BIBLICAL HEBREW The Revd Dr CR Biggs

Umts O Level Honours Class Contact As arranged Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

An 1ntens1ve course 1s provided in the month of February which involves attendance on four mornings a week over a penod of four weeks The aim is to give an 1n1hal 1ntroduct1on to Biblical Hebrew During the remainder of the year classes will be provtded leading to a full knowledge of Hebrew grammar, together with the readmg of set passages in Hebrew (e g 2 lungs, 1 7) In February of the year in which the honours programme is begun, an exanunat10n will be held which will consist of (1) quest10ns on basic grammar (u) translation from the set book (m) questions on the grammar and syntax of the passages given fortranslat10n, (1v) pointmg ola passage from the set book, (v) translat10n from Enghsh to Hebrew A student may make alternative arrangements for classes or elect not to attend classes, but a pass in the exam1nahon is a pre requ1s1te for honours topics 1n Old Testament exegesis

Reference books Ell!ger, K and Rudolf, W eds Biblza

Hebraica Stuttgartensia (Deutsche B1belgesellschaft Stuttgart, 1967)

or Snaith NH, ed Hebrew Bible (Bntlsh and

Foreign Bible Society, 1958) Holladay, W L A concise Hebrew and

Aramaic lexicon of the Old Testament (Bnll 1971)

Watts, ) D W List of words occurrzng frequently zn the Hebrew Bible, 2nd ed (Bnll, 1973)*

One of the followmg grammars Davidson, AB An introductory Hebrew

grammar, 29th ed rev ) Mauchlme (T & T Clark 1974)

623

Studies m Theology

Lambdm, T 0 Introductzon to Biblical Hebrew (Darton Longman & Todd, 1973)

We1ngreen, ] A practzcal grammar for classical Hebrew, 2nd ed (Oxford UP, 1959)

25402 READINGS IN OLD TESTAMENT STUDIES The Revd Dr C R Biggs

Umts 6 Level Honours Duratrnn Full year Class Contact As arranged Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic is a course of reading 1n an aspect of Old Testament Studies This aspect might be recent Old Testament exegesis new dxscovenes concerning the ancient Middle East and its relat10nsh1p to Old Testament Studies Old Testament semantic studies, or a special topic withm Old Testament theology A proposed course of reading and methods of assessment must be submitted to the topic convener After approval has been given a supel'Vlsor with whom the student will work will be appomted Attendance at lectures, tutonals and/or seminars may be reqwred

26101 NEW TESTAMENT BACKGROUNDS The Revd Dr J E Akehurst

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutonal) Pre requ1s1te None

The aim of the topic ts to gain an understandmg of the milieu of Jesus and the Apostolic Church and to h1ghhght the most s1gn1f1cant trends in Jewish pohhcal, rehg1ous and social history 1n the New Testament era An attempt will also be made to give an analysis of the nature and mfluence of the Roman Imperium on the early Christian mission The topic will consider the vanety of religrnus groups w1thm Judaism e g the Pharisees, Sadduccees, Essenes, and the literature and theological outlook of the Qumran commumty Close attentrnn will be paid to the pnmary hterary sources of the inter testamental period and their influence

624

on the thought of the New Testament authors Emphasis will also be placed on the development of skills m readmg and evaluatmg the work of early historians and the way in which they mterpret the events and thoughts of their perrnd

Set books Barrett, C K The New Testament back

ground selected documents (Harper, 1958)*

or Kee H C Orzgms of Chnstianzty sources

and documents (Prentice Hall, 1973) Jeremias, J Jerusalem zn the time of Jesus

(SC M, 1969)* Lohse, E The New Testament envzronment

(S CM, 1976)* or Jagersma, H A history of Israel from

Alexander the Great to Bar Kochba (SC M 1985)

Reference books Charlesworth, J H The Old Testament

Pseudepigrapha, 2 vols (Doubleday, 1983) Cohen SJ D From the Maccabees to the

Misnah (Westmmster Press, 1987) Danby, H The Mishnah (Oxford UP, 1977) Koester1 H Introduction to the New

Testament 2 vols (Fortress, 1982) Malma, BJ The New Testament world (John

Knox Press, 1981) Neusner1 ] Messiah zn context (Fortress,

1984) Ntckelsburg, G W E Jewish literature

between the Bzble and the Mishnah (S CM Press, 1981)

Ntckelsburg, G W E and Stone M E Faith and piety m early Judaism (Fortress 1983)

Vermes, G The Dead Sea Scrolls m English, 3rd ed (Pehcan, 1987)

Vermes, G The Dead Sea Scrolls Qumran m perspective (S C M , 1982)

26102 PRELIMINARY NEW TESTAMENT GREEK The Revd Dr J E Akehurst

Umts O Level First year Class Contact As arranged Pre requ1s1te None

The aim of this topic IS to mtroduce students to the basic structure and vocabulary of Kome

Greek and to explore the syntax idiomatic forms and grammar of the language Students are introduced to the basic lexicographical aids which are available and given practice in their use An intensive course is provided in the month of February Attendance is reqmred on four mornings a week over a period of four weeks Performance is tested at the end of each week A student may make alternative arrangements for classes or elect not to attend classes, but a pass in either the examinations during the intensive course or one of the alternative exammat10ns which will normally be held towards the end of the first semester and of the second semester 1s a pre requ1s1te for New Testament exegesis topics The exam1nat1on w11l 1nclude translation of stated passages from the Greek New Testament

Recommended books Aland, K et al , eds The Greek New

Testament, 3rd ed (United Bible Societies, 1966)*

Newman, B M A conczse Greek Englzsh dictionary of the New Testament (Umted Bible Societies, 1971)

Walther j A New Testament Greek workbook (Chicago UP, 1966)*

Wenham, ) W The elements of New Testament Greek (Cambridge UP 1965)*

26103 INTRODUCTION TO THE NEW TESTAMENT The Revd E Espzna

Umts 6 Level Fust year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre requisite None

The aim of this topic is to proVJde a general 1ntroduct1on to the New Testament scnptures, 1nclud1ng their h1stoncal setting literary forms and leadmg theological themes The course will mclude the format10n of the New Testament canon early Christianity and its world, the literary and theological charactenstics of the ma1or books, trends and methodology m New Testament scholarship, and the s1gn1f1cance of the matenal as sacred scripture for Chnstlans

\

Theology

Set books Chilton, B Begznnzng New Testament study

(S P C K, 1983) Collms RF Introduction to the New

Testament (Doubleday, 1987) Johnson, LT The wrztzngs of the New

Testament (S C M , 1986) Turner, N Handbook for bzblzcal studzes

(Blackwell, 1982)

Reference books Childs, BS Introduction to the New

Testament as canon (SC M 1984) Dunn, JD G Unzty and dzverszty zn the New

Testament (S C M , 1977) Epp, ES and MacRae, G W The New

Testament and its modern interpreters (Scholars Pr , 1989)

Kee H C Understanding the New Testament, 4th ed (Prentice Hall 1983)

Kummel, W G Introductzon to the New Testament (S C M , 1973)

Lohse E The formatzon of the New Testament (Abmgdon, 1981)

Martm, RP New Testament foundatzons, 2 vols (Paternoster, 1975 77)

Perno, N and Dulmg D C The New Testament an zntroduction, 2nd ed (H BJ, 1982)

Rowland, C Chrzstzan orzgzns (S PC K, 1985)

Tuckett C Readzng the New Testament (S P C K, 1987)

26201 NEW TESTAMENT EXEGESIS SYNOPTIC GOSPELS The Revd Dr f E Akehurst

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre reqmsites 26102 Prehmmary New Testament Greek and either 26101 New Testament Backgrounds or 26103 Introduct10n to the New Testament

This topic is concerned with the exegesis of the Synoptic Gospels, with special reference to the Gospel of Matthew Emphasis will be placed on methodology and the various types of Gospel literature, the birth stones and temptation narratives, Caesarea Ph1hpp1, the transfiguration, parables, miracles, the

625

Studies in Theology

kmgdom and the ethics of the kmgdom the passion and Easter narratives A second area of study will be a cr1t1cal 1ntroductlon to each of the synoptic gospels, an outlme of their theology, and the relat10nsh1ps between them A third area of study will be a cons1derat10n of Matthews aims and theological emphases

Set books Beare F W The earliest records of Jesus

(Blackwell, 1964) Hill The Gospel of Matthew (Ohphant 1972) Lohse E The formatzon of the New

Testament (Abmgdon, 1981) Mmear, PS Matthew the teacher's Gospel

(Darton Longman & Todd 1984) Schweizer E The Good News according to

Mark (SP CK, 1976) Throckmorton B H Gospel parallels

(Nelson, 1967)

Reference books Aland, K Synopsis of the four gospels (U B S

1972) or Synopsis quattuor evangelzorum (1973) Bornkamm, G Barth, G and Held H J

Tradition and znterpretatzon zn Matthew (SC M, 1965)

Guthrie, D New Testament zntroductzon (Inter Varsity Pr, 1970)

Houlden, J L Backward into light (S C M 1987)

Jeremias,) New Testament theology (S CM, 1971)

Kmgsbury, JD The parables of Jesus in Matthew 13 (SP CK, 1969)

Kingsbury, ] D Matthew structure, chrzstology, kingdom (Fortress, 1975)

Kummel, W G lntroductzon to the New Testament (S CM 1966)

Matera, F J Passion narratives and Gospel theologies (Pauhst, 1986)

Semor, D What are they saying about Matthew? (Pauhst, 1983)

Semor, D The Passzon of Jesus in Matthew (M Glazier 1985)

Stanton, G , ed The znterpretatzon of Matthew (Fortress, 1983)

Stendahl K The school of St Matthew (Fortress, 1968)

Telford, W, ed The znterpretatzon of Mark (SP CK, 1985)

Weeden, T J Mark traditzons zn conflict (Fortress, 1971)

626

26202 NEW TESTAMENT EXEGESIS PAULINE EPISTLES The Revd Dr KN Gzles

Umts 6 Level Second year Durat10n Half year Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutonal) Pre requ1s1tes 26101 New Testament Backgrounds and 26102 Prehmmary New Testament Greek

This topic w!ll be taught twice m 1991, once by Fr Espina 1n first semester and again by Dr I{ N Giles 1n second semester

As it will be taught m the fmt semester 1991, the aim of the topic is to understand something of the background of thought and methods of the apostle Paul through a study of his wntmgs with special emphasis on the Epistle to the Romans

Recommended readzng

a) Paul Life and Theology Bornkamm G Paul (Hodder & Stoughton,

1971) Cunnmgham, PA Jewish Apostle to the

Gent1les1 Paul as he saw himself (Twenty third Pubhcat10ns, 1986)

Luedemann, G Paul, Apostle to the Gentiles (Fortress, 1984)

Thompson, G Paul, and hzs messsage for life s 7ourney (Pauhst Press, 1986)

b) Pauline Corpus Bnsebms, M St Paul zntroductzon to St

Paul and his letters (St Paul Pubhcat10ns 1986)

Cranfield, C E B A crztical and exegetical commentary on the Epistle to the Romans, 2 vols (I 0 CC, 1975, 1979)

Kasemann, E Commentary on Romans (Eerdmans, 1980)

Keck, L E and Furnish, V P The Pauline letters Interpreting Bible Texts (Abmgdon, 1984)

Keck, L E Paul and his letters Proclamation commentaries, 2nd ed (Fortress, 1988)

Marrow, B Paul, his letters and his theology An zntroductzon to Paul's Epistles (Pauhst Press, 1986)

Morris, L The Epistle to the Romans (Erdmans, 1988)

Robinson, J A Wrestling wzth Romans (SC M 1979)

As taught in second semester, this topic is concerned with the exegesis of a selection of Pauhne Epistles, with special reference to the Connth1an correspondence There will be a study of the hfe of Paul, his thought, theology and methods of evangehsation

Recommended reading Barrett C K A commentary on the First

Epistle to the Corinthians (Black 1971) Barrett, C K The Second Epistle to the

Corinthians (Black 1976) Beker JC Paul the apostle (T & T Clark,

1980) Bornkamm, G Paul (Hodder & Stoughton,

1971) Bruce, F F Paul apostle of the free spzrzt

(Paternoster, 1977)

Bultmann, R Theology of the New Testament, vol 1 (SC M)

Conzelman H 1 Corinthians (Fortress, 1975) Davies W D Paul and Rabbinic Judaism

(SP CK, 1955) Fallon, FT 2 Corinthians (Michael Glazier,

1980)

Hermg, J The Second Epistle of St Paul to the Corinthians (Epworth 1967)

Kasemann, E Perspectives on Paul (S C M , 1969)

Murphy 0 Connor, j 1 Corinthians (Michael Glazier, 1979)

Orr, W F and Walther j A 1 Connthians (Doubleday, 1976)

Rldderbos, H Paul an outline of his theology (Eerdmans 1975)

Ruef, J Paul's First Letter to Connth (Pehcan 1971)

Sanders E P Paul and Palestinian Judaism (SC M, 1977)

Whiteley D E H The theology of St Paul (Blackwell, 1974)

26203 NEW TESTAMENT EXEGESIS JOHANNINE LITERATURE

Not offered m 1991

Theology

26204 NEW TESTAMENT EXEGESIS LUKE-ACTS The Revd Dr M Trainor

Umts 6 Level Second year Durat10n Half year Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre requmte 26101 New Testament Backgrounds and 26102 Prehmmary New Testament Greek

This topic aims to provide an intensive study of the thought of the most prohftc smgle writer in the New Testament by an examination of the book of Acts, though reference will also be made to the Gospel of Luke

The role of the author as theologian, h1stonan and writer will be assessed as will his motives for writing what amounts to our only record of the apostohc age

There will be a critical introduction to the questions of authorship sources and time of composit10n and a detailed study of the text so that students may come to a cr1t1cal appreciation of the author's place in the format10n of early Christian thmkmg

Recommended reading Bruce FF The Acts of the Apostles

(Eerdmans 1952) Crowe, j The Acts (Michael Glazier, 1979) Dibelms M Studies zn the Acts of the

Apostles (S C M 1956) Fitzmyer, J A The Gospel According to Luke,

2 vols (Doubleday, 1981 85) Haenchen E The Acts of the Apostles

(Blackwell, 1971) Juel, D Luke Acts (S c M , 1983) Keck, L E and Martyn, j L eds Studies in

Luke Acts (SP CK, 1976) Munck, J The Acts of the Apostles

(Doubleday 1967) Ned, W The Acts of the Apostles (Ohphants,

1973) O'Neill, j C The theology of Acts zn its

historical setting (S P C K 1970) Talbert, C H ed Perspectives on Luke Acts

(Clark, 1978) Wilhams, C A commentary on the Acts of

the Apostles (Black, 1984) Wilson S G The gentiles and the gentile

misswn in Luke Acts (Cambridge, 1973)

627

Studies m Theology

26205 NEW TESTAMENT EXEGESIS HEBREWS AND REVELATION

Not offered m 1991

26301 NEW TESTAMENT THEOLOGY The Revd Dr f E Akehurst

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre reqms1tes 26101 or 26103 and at least two of 26201 26202, 26203, 26204, 26205

This topic aims to introduce the student to the theolog1cal 1mphcations of several of the New Testament writers and to examine s1gn1ftcant past and contemporary New Testament theological scholarship Close attent10n wdl be paid to the prmc1ples underlying the study of New Testament theology and the assumptions made by vanous scholars m the field A ma1or port10n of the topic will be devoted to a detailed examination of ma1or doctrines w1thm the New Testament corpus mcludmg Chnstology, Eccles10!ogy, Salvat10n and the Chnsllan understandmg of Man The problem of umty and d1vers1ty w1thm the New Testament canon will also be studied

Set books Boers H What zs New Testament theology>

(Fortress, 1979) Bultmann, R Theology of the New Testament,

2 vols (SC M, 1952 & 1955) Childs, B S The New Testament as canon

(SC M 1984) Guthne, D New Testament theology (IV P,

1981) Kummel, W G The theology of the New

Testament (Abingdon, 1973) Richardson, A An zntroductzon to the

theology of the New Testament (Harper & Bros, 1958)

Reference books Barr, J Holy scripture, canon, authority,

crzticzsm (Westmmster 1983) Brown, C , ed The new international

dzctzonary of New Testament theology 3 vols (Zondervan, 1982)

Dunn, ) Unzty and dzverszty zn the New Testament (SC M 1977)

628

Epp, E) and MacRae G W The New Testament and its modern interpreters (Scholars Pr, 1989)

Harrmgton, W) The path of biblical theology (Gd! & McMillan 1973)

Henry, P New Directwns NT study (S C M , 1979)

Hultgren, A) Chrzst and hzs benefits (Fortress, 1987)

Jeremias, J New Testament theology, vol I (SC M, 1977)

Schelk!e, K H Theology of the New Testament, vol 1 (L1turg1cal Pr, 1971)

Schnackenburg R The moral teaching of the New Testament (Herder/Burns & Oates, 1965)

Schnackenburg, R New Testament theology today (Chapman, 1963)

Stauffer, E New Testament theology (SC M, 1955)

Stendahl, K, Meanings the bzble as document and as guzde (Fortress, 1984)

26401 ADVANCED NEW TESTAMENT GREEK The Revd Dr f E Akehurst

Umts 0 Level Honours Class Contact As arranged Pre-requ1S1te 26102 Prehmmary New Testament Greek

Tlus topic builds on the introduction to Koine Greek gamed m 26102 Prehmmary New Testament Greek by increasing the scope of New Testament ltterature to be translated and by a more detailed exam1nat1on of the structure of the language Close attent10n wzll be paid to the Pau!me Corpus and to the later epIStles In February of the year m which the honours programme is begun, an examination will be held which will conSist of the followmg sections 1 translation of a passage from the set gospel, 2 translation of a passage from the Letter to the Romans 3 translation from an unseen passage chosen from an area other than the gospels or the Pau!me epIStles, and 4 questions on the grammar and syntax chosen from the passages used in sections 1 and 2 A student may elect not to attend classes but a pass in the examination ts a pre requisite for honours topics 1n New Testament exegesis

Reference books (m add1t10n to those for 26102)

Arndt, W F and Grmgnch, F W A Greek Englzsh lexicon of the New Testament (Chicago UP, 1957)

Jay, E G New Testament Greek an introductory grammar (S P C K , 1958)

Metzger, B M Lexical aids for students of New Testament Greek (Theological Book Agency Prmceton, 1977)

Maule, C F D An idiom book of New Testament Greek 2nd ed (Cambndge U P 1959)*

Moulton, J F and Milhgan, G The vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930)

26402 READINGS IN NEW TESTAMENT STUDIES The Revd Dr f E Akehurst

Umts 6 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact As arranged Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic is a course of reading 1n an aspect of New Testament studies This aspect might be a recent contr1button to New Testament exegesis (e g work of the post Bultmann1an school) or a special topic in New Testament theology (e g recent d1scuss1ons concerning the relat10nship of New Testament theology to other theological disciplmes) A proposed course of reading and methods of assessment must be submitted to the topic convener After approval has been given a supervisor with whom the student Wlll work will be appointed Attendance at lectures, tutorials and/ or seminars may be required

27101 INTRODUCTION TO THEOLOGY REVELATION AND FAITH The Revd Dr R G Simons

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre requ1s1te None

This topic Wlll mtroduce the folloWlng issues 1 The scope, Sources, method and vahd1ty of

theology 2 The concept of revelation and its place in

theology

Theology

3 The concepts of rehg1on, faith, and Christian faith

Recommended reading Burnham F B ed Postmodern theology

Christian faith zn a pluralist world (Harper and Row, 1989)

Davis, JG Theology primer (Baker 1981) Dulles A Models or revelatzon (Doubleday

1983) Fiorenza, F S Foundational theology

(Crossroad, 1984) Hodgson P C and Kmg, RH , eds Christian

theology, 2nd ed (Fortress, 1985) Houlden J L Connectzons the mtegratzon

of theology and faith (S C M , 1986) Hughes E) WC Smith a theology for

the world (S C M , 1986) Kasper, W An zntroductzon to Christian faith

(Pauhst, 1980) Kung, H and Tracy D , eds Paradigm change

zn theology a symposium for the future (T & T Clark, 1989)

Lane, D The expenence of God an znvztatzon to do theology (Pauhst, 1981)

Latourelle, R and O'Colhns G Problems and perspectives of fundamental theology (Pauhst 1982)

McFague S Metaphorical theology models of God zn religious language (S C M , 1983)

Polkmghorne, J One world the znteractzon of science and theology (SP CK 1987)

Smith, W C Faith and belief (Princeton U P 1979)

Tracy, D Plurality and ambiguity (Harper & Row 1987)

W1ldiers, N M The theologian and his universe theology and cosmology from the Middle Ages to the present (Seabury, 1982)

27201 THE PERSON AND WORK OF CHRIST The Revd Dr R G Simons

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutonal) Pre requmte 27101 Introducllon to Theology Revelat10n and Faith Students are advised to complete 28101 Early Church History and a N T Exegesis tropic before attemptmg this topic

629

Studies zn Theology

This topic combmes bibhcal, historical and doctrinal approaches to the person and work of Christ An mtroduct10n will be given to the b1bltcal evidences, to Patnst1c and Conc11Iar Chr1stolog1es and sotenolog1es, and to the developments of the doctrines in the mediaeval, Reformation and modern periods

Recommended reading Borg, M A Jesus a new vision spznt, culture,

and the life of dzsczpleship (Harper & Row, 1987)

Carnley P The structure of resurrectwn belief (Oxford UP, 1987)

Dunn, JD G Chrzstology zn the making (SC M, 1980)

Gr1llme1er, A Christ in Chnstzan tradztzon, vol 1, rev ed (Mowbrays, 1975)

Grdln1e1er, A Christ zn Chnstzan tradztzon, vol 2 (Mowbrays, 1987)

Goergen, D J The misswn and ministry of Jesus, vol 1 (Glazier, 1986)

Haughton, R The passwnate God (Darton, Longman & Todd, 1981)

Kasper, W Jesus the Chrzst (Burns & Oates, 1976)

O'Collms G Jesus risen (Pauhst, 1985) Ogden, S The poznt of Chrzstology

(Harper & Row, 1982) Pawhkowski, J T Christ zn the light of the

Christian Jewzsh dialogue (Pauhst, 1982) Perkms, P Resurrectwn (Doubleday, 1984) Rahner/Thusmg A new Chrzstology (Bums

& Oates, 1980) Sch11lebeeckx, E Jesus an experiment zn

Chrzstology (Seabury, 1979) Schussler F1orenza1 E In memory of Her a

femznzst theological reconstructzon of Chrzstzan orzgzns (S C M , 1983)

Thompson, W The Jesus debate (Pauhst 1985)

27202 HUMANITY AND GRACE The Revd Dr R G Szmons

Not offered m 1991

27203 CHURCH AND MINISTRY The Revd Dr A Dutney

Units 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre iequmte 27101 Introduct10n to Theology Revelat10n and Faith

630

The subject matter deals with the Christian church and its m1n1stnes Biblical creedal, concd1ar, and ecumen1cal documents are the main sources H1stor1cal developments in the church are used as 1llustrat1ons of the way in which theology interacts with practice Some of the contemporary issues are the relation between sp1nt and structure 1n the church, b1bhcal ideas of m1n1stry or service and their apphcat10n to today authority m the church the meaning of ord1nat1on, ecumenical convergence on the doctrine of rrun1stry and the problem of mutual recogn1t1on of m1n1stnes

Recommended reading Baptism, eucharzst and mzmstry (W C C

1982) Baff, L Church charism and power

lzberatzon theology and the znstztutwnal church (Crossroad, 1985)

Doohan, L Lazty 1s mzsszon zn the local church (Harper & Row, 1986)

Dulles, A The catholzczty of the church (Oxford, 1987)

Edwards D Called to be church zn Australia (St Paul's, 1987)

Hanson, AT and Hanson, RP C The zdentzty of the church (S C M , 1987)

Kasper, W Theology and church (S C M , 1989)

Kress, R The church communion, sacrament, communzcatzon (Pauhst, 1985)

0 Meara, T F Theology of mznzstry (Pauhst, 1983)

Osborne, KB Przesthood a history of ordained mznzstry (Pauhst, 1988)

Ramsey, M The Chrzstzan przest today (SP CK 1985)

Rabner, K Concern for the church (Crossroad, 1981)

Riskhof H The concept of church a methodological znquzry znto the use of metaphors zn eccleszology (Sheed & Ward, 1981)

Ruether, RR Contemporary Roman Catholicism crzses and challenges (Sheed & Ward 1987)

Russell, L M Household of freedom authorzty zn femznzst theology (Westmmster 1987)

Sch11!ebeeckx, E The church wzth a human face (S C M , 1985)

Sullivan, FA The church we believe zn one, holy catholic, apostolic (Pauhst, 1988)

Z1z1oulas J D Being as communion studies in personhood and the church (DLT 1985)

27204 SACRAMENTS The Revd Dr Dr A Dutney

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutonal) Pre requ1S1te 27101 Introduction to Theology Revela!Ion and Faith

This topic deals with the meaning of sacraments and the method appropnate to this area of doctrine The relation with other doctrines such as Chnstology, pneumatology, eccles10logy and eschatology is developed In different years there will be parl!cular concentration on particular sacraments As this doctrine is of ecumenical importance, recent documents emerging from off1c1al dialogues are examined

Rerommended readzng Australian churches' response to 'Baptism,

eucharist and ministry' (A C C , 1986) Baptism eucharzst and ministry (W C C ,

1982) Jenson R Vzszble words, the znterpretatzon

and practzce of Chrzstzan sacraments (Fortress, 1978)

Kurht, G Believing in baptism (Mowbray, 1987)

Martos, J Doors to the sacred (SC M, 1981) Martos, J The Catholic sacraments (Glazier,

1983) Osborne, K The Chrzstzan sacraments of

znztzatzon baptism, confzrmatzon, eucharist (Pauhst, 1987)

Osborne, K Sacramental theology a general introductzon (Pauhst 1988)

Schillebeeckx E Christ the sacrament of encounter with God (Sheed & Ward, 1963)

Schmaus, M The Church as sacrament (Sheed & Ward, 1975)

Taylor, M , ed The sacraments (Alba House 1981)

White, J F Sacraments as God's self giving (Abmgdon, 1983)

Worgul, G From magic to metaphor a valzdation of the Chrzstzan sacraments (Pauhst, 1980)

27205 THE HOLY SPIRIT Not offered m 1991

27206 CREATION The Revd Dr A F Dutney

Not offered m 1991

27207 ESCHATOLOGY The Revd Dr R G Simons

Not offered m 1991

27208 CHRISTIAN ETHICS The Revd L f McNamara

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

Theology

Pre requ1S1te 27101 Introduct10n to Theology Revelat10n and Faith

The course introduces students to the study of Christian ethics It aims to acquaint them with the ternunology and methods of moral reasoning as developed by moral philosophers and theologians In the process they will engage in moral reasoning Detailed analysis will be given to the followmg areas the status and use of ethical terms, the sources, methods and models of Christian ethics, religion and morahty, the role of scripture, Christian anthropology, freedom, responsibility and the formation of character, conscience, law, the moral evaluation of the human act Practical application will focus on one or more of the following issues human commun1cahon, sexual morality, marriage and divorce, deliberate hom1c1de

Books for reference Childress, ] and Macquarrie J , eds A new

dictwnary of Christian ethics (S C M 1986)

Gustafson, j Protestant and Roman Catholic ethics, prospects for rapprochement (Chicago U P , 1978)

Mahoney, J The making of moral theology A study of the Roman Catholic traditwn (Clarendon, 1987)

Recommended reading Anderson, R On being human essays zn

theological anthropology (Eerdmans, 1982)

631

Studies zn Theology

Birch B C and Rasmussen, L L The Bible and ethics in the Christian life (Ausburg 1989)

Curran, CE and McCormick, RA Readings zn moral theology Nos 1 6 (Pauhst, 1979 1988)

Curran, C Dzrectzons in fundamental moral theology (Giil & Macmillan, 1986)

Frankena, W Ethics 2nd ed (Prentice Hall, 1973)

Gulu, R M Reason informed by fazth Foundatzons of Catholic morality (Pauhst, 1989)

Hamel RP and Hmes, KR Introductzon to Christian ethics a reader (Pauhst, 1989)

Harmg, B Free and faithful in Christ vol 1 (Society of St Paul 1978)

Hauerwas, S The peaceable kingdom a primer zn Chrzstzan ethics (S C M 1983)

I<ammer, C Ethzcs and lzberatzon an introduction

O'Connell, TE Principles for a Catholic morality, rev ed (Harper & Row 1990)

Outka, C Agape an ethical analysis (Yale UP, 1972)

Perkins P Love commands zn the New Testament (Pauhst, 1982)

27213 THEOLOGY OF GOD AND THE TRINITY The Revd Dr R G Szmons

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre reqms1te 27101 Introduct10n to Theology Revelat10n and Faith

In this topic the first area of concern is the doctrine of God God's nature and activity will be examined specifically as 1t is contained m the wntmgs of the Old and New Testaments The second area is that of God as Tnmty This doctrine will be studied as it emerges in the New Testament wr1t1ngs and in Patristic ltterature and in the credal and Conctl1ar documents of the Christian Church The use made of these developments by mediaeval and modern theologians may also be studied

Prelzmznary reading Bracken, J A What are they saying about the

Trinzty? (Pauhst, 1979)*

632

Recommended readzng Boff, L Trzmty and soczety (Burns & Oates,

1988) Bracken, J The Trzune symbol persons,

process, and communzty (Un1vers1ty Pr of America, 1985)

Fortman, E j The Trzune God (Hutchmson, 1972)

Gelp1 D The dzvzne mother a trznztarzan theology of the Holy Spzrzt (University Pr of America, 1984)

Hill W J The Three Personed God the Trinzty as a mystery of salvatzon (C U A , 1982)

Kasper, W The God of Jesus Chrzst (Crossroad, 1984)

Kelly, A The trznzty of love a theology of the chrzstzan God (Glazier, 1989)

Kenny A The God of the philosphers (Oxford Clarendon, 1979)

Macquarrie, J In search of deity an essay zn dzatectzcal thezsm (SC M, 1984)

McFague S Models of God (S CM, 1987) O'Donnell, j The mystery of the Triune God

(Sheed & Ward 1988) Ruether, RR Sexzsm and God talk (Beacon,

1983) Wamwright, AW The Trznzty zn the New

Testament (S P C K 1975)

27215 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS To be announced

Umts 6 Level Second or thud year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1S1te 27101 Introduct10n to Theology Revelat10n & Faith

This topic introduces students to social ethical theory as it has developed m the Chnsllan churches After a brief cons1derahon of society and social change, the task, method and foundations of Christian soCial ethics will be explored A detailed analysis of 1usllce and human rights follows Particular areas of social hfe will then be considered, e g war and peace, international order, the citizen and the state, ecology and environmental issues, wealth and poverty, human development, work and leisure

Recommended reading Baum G The soczal zmperatzve (Pauhst

1979)

Baum, G Theology and soczety (Paulist, 1987) Brown N Chrzstzans in a pluralist society

(Catholic Institute of Sydney, 1986) Cooper E What are the cardinal vzrtues?

(Mercier, 1987) Crossin, J "1hat are they sayzng about vzrtue?

(Paulist, 1985) Curran, C and McCormick, R , ed Readings

zn moral theology No 5 Offzczal Catholzc soczal teachzng (Paulist 1986)

Dorr, D Optwn for the poor A hundred years of Vatzcan social teaching (Gill & Macmillan, 1984)

Dorr, D Spzrztuality and 1ustice (Gill & Macmillan, 1985)

Feinberg J Social philosophy (Prentice Hall, 1973)

Gardner, E Chrzstocentrzsm in Chrzstzan soczal ethzcs A depth study of eight modern protestants (U P of Amenca 1983)

Gremillion, J , ed The gospel of peace and 1ustzce Catholic soczal teaching since Pope John (Orb1s, 1976)

Hauerwas, S A community of character Toward a constructzve Chrzstzan soczal ethzc (Notre Dame UP, 1981)

Holland ) and Hennot P Social analysis Lznking faith and 1ustzce (Dove, 1986)

Hollenbach, D Claims zn conflict Retrieving and renewing the Catholzc human rzghts traditzan (Paulist, 1979)

l{amenka, E and Er Soon Tay, A , eds Human rzghts (Arnold 1978)

Lane, D Foundations for a social theology Praxis, p1 ocess and salvation (Gill & Macmillan, 1984)

Lebacquz K Six theories of 1ustice (Augsburg, 1986)

Lebacquz K Justice in an un1ust world (Augsburg, 1987)

27216 LITURGY THEOLOGY, SYMBOL AND CELEBRATION The Revd Dr BJ Jackson,

Not offered m 1991

27217 BIO MEDICAL ETHICS The Revd L J McNamara

Umts 6 Level Second or thlfd year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week

Theology

The topic will mtroduce students to contemporary d1scuss1ons on the ethical 1mphcatlons of medicine and the life sciences The course will explore the basic pnnc1ples 1

secular and Chnst1an, that contribute to analysis ofbio medical issues These pnnc1ples will then be applied to such !Ssues as the body and bodily life, health and illness allocation of health care resources, issues at the begmnmg of hie (e g reproductive technologies, abortion disabled neonates, 1nfantic1de) trans plantation, research and experimentation behaviour control, ageing, the termmally ill, dymg and death, euthanasia

Tutonals will be based on case studies

Reference books Childress J F and Macquarne, J ed The

Westminster dzctzonary of Christian ethics (Westmmster, 1986)

Reich WT , ed Encyclopedia of Bzoethzcs, 4 vols (Free Press, 1978)

Recommended reading Ashley, BM and O'Rourke, K D Health care

ethics A theologzcal analyszs, 2nd ed (Catholic Hospital Assoczat10n, 1982)

Beauchamp, TL and Childress,) F Principles of bzomedical ethics 2nd ed (Oxford U P , 1983)

Beauchamp, T L and Walters, L , ed Contemporary zssues zn bzoethzcs (Wadsworth, 1978)

Brody B A and Engelhardt, H T Bzoethics Readings and cases (Prenllce Hall, 1987)

Gillon, R Philosophical medical ethics (John Wiley, 1986)

Glover, ) Causing death and savzng lzves (Pengum, 1977)

Harns, ) The value of lzfe (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1985)

Lammers, SE and Verhey, A, eds On moral medzczne Theological perspectives zn medical ethics (Eerdmans, 1987)

Mappes, TA and Zembaty ) S , eds Bzo medical ethics (McGraw-Hill, 1986)

Marty, M E and Vaux, KL , eds Health! medicine in the faith tradztzons An inquiry znto religion and medzcine (Fortress, 1982)

May, W F The physician s covenant Images of the healer zn medical ethics (Westmmster, 1983)

Nelson, ) B and Rohncht, ) S Human medzczne Ethzcal perspectzves zn today's medical issues (Augsburg, 1984)

633

Studies m Theology

Shannon TA, ed Bwethics, 3rd ed (Pauhst, 1987)

Shelp, E E ed Theology and bwethics Exploring the foundatwns and frontiers (Reidel 1985)

Veatch, RM ed Cross cultural perspectives m medical ethics readings (Jones & Bartlett, 1989)

Veatch RM, ed Medical ethics (Jones & Bartlett, 1989)

Weir, R F , ed Ethical issues zn death and dymg, 2nd ed (Columbia U P , 1986)

27301 TIIE STUDY OF RELIGIONS Not offered m 1991

27307 WOMAN, MAN AND GOD Not offered m 1991

27403 READINGS IN SYSTEMATIC TIIEOLOGY To be announced

Umts 6 Level Honours Durat10n Full year Class Contact As arranged Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

This topic is a course of reading in an aspect of Systematic Theology This aspect might be an extension of the sub1ect matter studied in a Systemauc Theology topic for the ordinary degree, the work of a ma1or theologian or group of theologians the development of a doctrine through a penod of history or the vanous approaches to a particular theolog1cal issue A proposed course of reading and methods of assessment must be submitted to the topic convener After approval has been given a supemsor with whom the student will work w:tll be appomted Attendance at lectures, tutonals and/or seminars may be reqwred

28101 EARLY CHURCH HISTORY The Revd Dr B Jackson

Umts 6 Level First year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre requ1s1te None

This topic 1s a study of Chrisllamty to A D 451, mfluencmg the history of peoples and

634

cultures and bemg mfluenced by them Some issues to be considered are the environment of the Church, its encounter with society and cultures, the relation between Church and State, the growth of the Church - its hfe organ1sahon, m1ss1on and theology ma1or Church Fathers and their writmgs the theological confhcts, heresies and schisms, and maior Church Councils

Preliminary reading Chadwick, H The eaily church (Pehcan, 1967)* Frend, W H C The early church (Hodder &

Stoughton 1965)*

Recommended readzng Dan1elou J and Marrou, H The Chnstzan

centuries vol 1 (London 1964) Fox, R L Pagans and Chnstians (Harper &

Row, 1986) Frend W H C The nse of Christianity

(Darton Longman & Todd, 1984) Library of Chrzstzan classics, vols 1 B L1etzman, H A history of the early church,

4 vols (Lutterworth, 1953) Quasten, ) Patrology, 3 vols (Spectrum,

1975), vol 4 (Christian Classics 1986) Stevenson, J , ed A new Eusebzus, rev ed

(SP CK, 1987)* Stevenson J , ed Creeds councils and

controversies, rev ed (S PC K, 1989)* Young, FM From Nicea to Chalcedon

(SC M 1983)

28202 MEDIAEVAL CHURCH HISTORY The Revd Dr BJ Jackson

Not offered m 1991

28203 REFORMATION CHURCH HISTORY The Revd PB Nicol

Not offered m 1991

28204 HISTORY OF TIIE CHURCH IN TIIE MODERN WORLD, FROM TIIE SEVENTEENTII TO THE TWENTIETH CENTURY The Revd Dr G H artcher

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 per week, normally 2 lectures and 1 tutorial Pre reqms1te 28101 Early Church History

The topic aims to trace the development of some of the ma1or strands of organised Chnsl!amty from the end of the sixteenth century, marking the conclusion of the formative years of the Reformation, to the present l!me Maior emphasis will be placed upon the development of the churches m Europe, particularly Cathohc1sm and Anghcanism, but with emphasis also on the evolution of the Reformed tradition Ma1or movements, from P1etism and Method.ism through Enhghtenment and revolut10n to Ecumenism will be treated

Recommended readzng Anchor, R Enlightenment traditwn Anderson M S Europe in the eighteenth

century, 1713 1783 Barrington Moore Jr Soczal orzgzns of

dictatorship and democracy Bolt, C and Drescher S , eds Anti slavery

relzgzon and reform Cragg G R The church and the age of reason Drummond AL and Bulloch j Scottish

church, 1688 1843 Fey, E , ed A hzstory of the ecumenzcal

movement, 1948 1968 Fieldhouse DK Colonial empires Moorman j RH History of the church m

England Neill, S History of the Christian misswns Pennington, DH Seventeenth century

Europe Rouse R and Nelli, SC A history of the

ecumenical movement, 1517 1948 Stoeffler, FE Continental pietism and early

Amerzcan Chrzstianzty Stoye j Europe unfolding Vidler, AR The church m an age of

revolutzon

28206 (33225) RELIGION, SCIENCE AND SOCIETY IN EUROPE, 1500 1700 Dr Ff Brooks

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre reqmS!te 28101 Early Church History

The focus of this topic is the connect10n between new rebgious forms, social change and the sc1entif1c revolution of the sncteenth and seventeenth centuries Special attention

Theology

will be paid to the acluevements of Copernicus, Kepler Gahleo and Newton m astronomy and mechamcs, and to the development of the scientific method, particularly m the work of Bacon and Descartes An exam1nat1on of the growth of scepllcJSm will lead mto the debate on the connection between rehgion science and social change The principal theoretical model will be Weberts thesis on the Protestant Ethic and the spmt of Capitahsm This will be extended, along Imes suggested by Weber to include such topics as government pohcy on poverty, sickness, vagrancy and crime, the place of the geographical d1scover1es 1n the elaboration of the new world VIew , the role of artisl!c forms particularly Mannerism and the Baroque as a reaction to scepticism and to change and the decline of magic

Prelzmznary readzng Butterfield, H The orzgzns of modern science,

1300 1800 (Bell 1973)* Harman, PM The sczentzfzc revolution

(Methuen, 1983)* Mandrou, R From humanism to science

1480 1700 (Pengum, 1978)* Rabb T The struggle for stability m early

modern Europe (Oxford UP, 1975)* Weber, M The Protestant ethic and the spmt

of capztalzsm, trans T Parsons, 2nd ed (Allen & Unwm 1976)

28207 THE EUCHARIST IN HISTORY AND TRADITION The Revd Dr Bf Jackson

Umts 6 Level Second year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre reqmS!te 28101 Early Church History

This topic offers a critical evaluation of the euchanst from the pomt of view of hturgy and systematic theology The methodology allows questions to be raised in their historical context (from ongms to the present day) m order to examine key aspects of euchar1stic theology and practice w1thi, an interpretative framework which lends itself to ecumenical concerns

635

Studies in Theology

Recommended reading Buxton, R F Eucharist and znstztutzon

narratzve a study zn Roman and Anglican traditwns of the consecratwn of the Eucharist from the eighth to the twentieth centuries (London S P C K, 1976)

Daly, R The origins of the Christian doctrine of sacrzfzce (London Darton, Longman and Todd, 1978)

Jasper and Cummg Prayers of the Eucharist, early and reformed (New York Oxford UP , 1980)

Jungmann, J The Mass (Collegeville The Liturgical Press, 1975)

l{e1fer, R Blessed and broken an exploration of the contemporary experience of God in Eucharistic celebratwn (Michael Glazier 1982)

Lee B, ed Alternative futures for worship, vol 3, The Eucharist (Collegeville The Liturgical Press, 1987)

Leon Dufour, X Sharing the Eucharistic bread the witness of the New Testament (New York Pueblo, 1982)

Marshall, I H Last Supper and Lord's Supper (Michigan Eerdmans, 1980)

Martimort, A G , ed The church at prayer the Eucharist (London Geoffroy Chapman, 1987)

Mitchell, N Cult and controversy the worship of the Eucharist outside Mass (New York Pueblo, 1982)

Power, D The sacrifice we offer the trzdentzne dogma and zts reznterpretatzon (New York Crossroad, 1987)

Rordorf, W and others The Eucharist of the early Christians (New York Pueblo, 1978)

Reumann J The Supper of the Lord the New Testament, ecumenical dialogues, and faith and order on the Eucharist (Philadelphia Fortress Press 1985)

Seasoltz R Lzvzng bread, savzng cup readings on the Eucharist (Collegeville The Liturgical Press, 1982)

Senn, F C, ed New Eucharzstzc prayers an ecumenical study of their development and structure (New York Paulis! Press 1987)

Stevenson, K Eucharist and offering (New York Pueblo 1986)

Thompson B Liturgies of the Western church (Philadelphia Fortress Press 1980)

Thunan M and Wamwnght, G Baptism and Eucharzst Ecumenical convergence zn celebration (Geneva WCC and Eerdmans 1983)

636

28301 HISTORY OF CHRISTIAN MISSIONS The Revd Dr A D Hunt

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week (2 lectures and 1 tutorial) Pre requ1s1te Two second year H1stor1cal and Systemallc Theology topics

This topic 1s designed to give an understanding of the history, theology and pracllce of Christian M1ss1ons from the sixteenth century to the present day Attenllon will be given to contemporary d1scuss1ons on the m1ss1on of the Church m a changmg society

Baszc text Neill, S A history of Christian misswns

(Pengum, 1986)

Recommended reading Bassham, R C M1sswn theology (Wilham

Carey Library, 1979) Forman, CW The Island churches of the

South Pacific (Orbis 1982) Garrett, J To live among the stars Christian

ongins m Oceania (W C C , 1982) Glasser, A F and McGavran D Contemp

orary theologies of mission (Baker, 1983) Latourette KS A history of the expansion of

Christianity, vols 6 & 7 (London, 1945) NeIII, S Colonialzsm and Christzan missions

(Lutterworth, 1978) Newbigm, L The open secret (SP CK, 1978) Scherer, J A Gospel, church and kingdom

(Augsburg, 1987) Verkuyl, J Contemporary misswlogy

(Eerdmans, 1978) The 1n1t1al hand out will list other resources

28302 HISTORY OF LITURGY Not offered m 1991

28303 HISTORY OF ECUMENISM The Revd Dr A F Dutney

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Two second year H1stoncal and Systemallc Theology topics

The topic ts designed to introduce students to the modern ecumenical movement (1) its historical shape mterpreted through the soc1opohtical history of the twentieth century (u) its theological preoccupat10ns mcludmg mission, social responsib1hty and 1ust1ce faith and order, and (111) its eccles10logical significance from h1stor1cal and systematic perspectives

Recommended reading Bassham, RC Mission theology (Wilham

Carey, 1980) B1lheimer R S Breakthrough the emergence

of the ecumenical tradition (Eerdmans, 1989)

Fey, F, ed The ecumenzcal advance (Westmmster 1970)

Goodall N The ecumenzcal movement (Oxford UP 1961)

Newb1gm, L Unfinished agenda (SP CK 1985)

Patelos, C , ed The Orthodox Church zn the ecumenical movement (W C C , 1978)

Rouse, R and Neill, S , eds A history of the ecumenical movement (1957)

Thomas, MM Towards a theology of contemporary ecumenism (CL S , 1978)

V1sser1t Hooft, WA Has the ecumenzcal movement a future? (Chnsllan Journals, 1974)

Wainwright, G The ecumenical movement (Eerdmans, 1973)

28304 (33317) THE ENGLISH REFORMATION Dr D L Hilliard

Umts 6 Level Third year Duration Semester Class Contact 2 lectures per week for 9 weeks and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes Two second year Historical and Systematic Theology topics, one at least of which must be a Church History topic

This topic will exarrune, wtth refereTJ.ce to primary sources, the rehgious changes that occurred m England between 1529 and 1570 Topics to be studied mclude Henry VIII's breach with Rome and the subsequent spohat10n of the Enghsh church, the

Theology

begmnmgs of English Protestanllsm the role of parliament in the reformation, and the Elizabethan Settlement

Preliminary reading Cross C Church and people 1450 1660

(Fontana, 1976) Dickens, AG The English reformation,

2nd ed (Fontana, 1980) Elton, G R Reform and reformatzon

England 1509 1558 (Arnold, 1977) Guy J Tudor England (Oxford lJ P , 1990)* Haigh, C , ed The English reformatzon

revzsed (Cambridge UP, 1987)* 0 Dea, R The debate on the English

reformatzon (Methuen, 1986)*

Documents Dickens, AG and Carr, D , eds The

reformatzon zn England to the accession of Elizabeth I (Arnold, 1967)

28305 (33325) (23305) AUSTRALIAN RELIGIOUS HISTORY Dr B K Dzckey and Dr D L Hilliard

Not offered m 1991

28306 PATRISTIC SEMINAR

Not offered m 1991

28307 HISTORY OF SPIRITUALITY SEMINAR

Not offered m 1991

28308 THE LITURGICAL YEAR HISTORY AND MEANING The Revd Dr BJ Jackson

Umts 6 Level Second or third year Duration Semester Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre-requisite 27101 Introduct10n to Theology Revelallon & Faith

The topic addresses the or1g1ns and development of the hturg1cal year, as context for worship and as central to Christian spmtuahty The meanmg of time, the cychcal celebration of reltgious event in an historical rehg10n, the development of the lectionary

637

Studies in Theology

and related books preachmg and the lechonary are investigated Issues such as models of community prayer rehg1ous language, inculturahon, and interpretation of the psalms are addressed as they pertam to the celebrahon of worship in this context The study is historical and theological with an emphasis on pastoral apphcatrnn m the hie of today'& churches

Recommended reading Adam , A The liturgical year its history and

its meaning after the reform of the liturgy (New York Pueblo, 1981)

Anderson, L Out of the depths the Psalms speak for us today (Philadelphia The Westmmster Press 1974)

Bradshaw, P Daily prayer in the early church (London SP CK, 1981)

Brown P The cult of the saints Its rise and functzon zn Latin Chrzstzanzty (Chicago UP, 1981)

Chupungco, A The CO!:,mlc elements of Christian passover (Roma Ed1tr1ce Anselmiana, 1977)

Chupungco, A Cultural adaptatwn of the liturgy (New York Pauhst Press, 1982)

Cummg, G A history of the Anglican liturgy, 2nd ed (Macmillan, 1982)

jabusch, W The person m the pulpit preaching as caring (Nashville Abmgdon 1981)

Johnson, S The year of the Lord's favor preaching the three year lectzonary (New York The Seabury Press, 1983)

Marhmort, A G The church at prayer vol IV The liturgy and time (London Geoffrey Chapman 1983)

N ocent, A The liturgical year, vols 1 4 (The Liturgical Press, 1978)

Sabou11n, L The Psalms thezr ongzn and meaning (New York Alba House, 1974)

Searle, M Sunday morning a time for worship (CollegeVJlle The Liturgical Press 1982)

Senn, F Christian worship zn zts cultural setting (Philadelphia Fortress Press, 1983)

Taft, R The liturgy of the hours in east and west the orgins of the divine office and its meaning for today (Collegeville The Liturgical Press, 1986)

Talley T The orgins of the liturgical year (New York Pueblo 1986)

Waznak, R Sunday after Sunday preaching the homily as story (New York Pauhst Press, 1983)

638

28403 READINGS IN CHURCH HISTORY To be announced

Umts 6 Level Honours Duratzon Full year Class Contact As arranged Pre requ1s1tes Honour& standing

This topic is a course of reading 1n an aspect of Church History This aspect might be an extensrnn of the sub1ect matter studied m a Church History topic for the ordinary degree or an aspect defined m terms of a penod of history, geographical extent, confessional relationship and/ or particular issue A proposed course of reading and methods of assessment must be submitted to the topic convener After approval has been given a supervisor with whom the student will work will be appomted Attendance at lectures, tutorials and/or seminars may be required

29403 READINGS IN BIOETHICS The Revd L f McNamara

Umts 6 Level Honours Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes Honours or Masters standing

The topic Wiil consider at some depth the philosophical and theological aspects of a number of contemporary b10 medical issues and how these are addressed in a pluralist society Special attention will be given to reproductive technology Students will be expected to show famihanty with a range of issues in addition to presenting a pro1ect 1n a spec1f1c area

Reference books Fisher, A IV F the critical issues (Collms

Dove, 1989) Ford, NM When did I begin? Conceptwn of

the human zndzvzdual zn history, philosophy and science (Cambridge U P , 1988)

Kuhse, H The sanctity of life doctrine in medicine A critique (Clarendon 1987)

McCullagh, F The foetus as transplant donor, sczentzftc, social and ethical perspectives Oohn Wiley, 1987)

Moore, K L The developing human, clznzcally orzented embryology, 4th ed (W B Saunders, 1988)

Shannon, TA What are they saying about genetzc engzneerzng? (Pauhst, 1985)

Vaux, K Bzrth ethzcs Relzgzous and cultural values zn the genesis of life (Crossroad, 1989)

Wood C & Trounson, A eds Clznzcal zn vitro fertilzzatzon (Sprmger Verlag, 1984)

29430 HONOURS THESIS Umts 18 Level Honours Pre requ1s1te Honours standing Co requisite 29401 Honours Seminar

A thesis of not more than 20,000 words The thesis may be a cntical survey of existing knowledge or an original contr1buhon to the sub1ect In either case it should demonstrate the student's ab1ht1es to collect and evaluate information, to test and defend an argument or thesis, and to examine cr1hcally the ma1or theories 1n the area of enquiry

Ma7or sequences m Theology

The following ma1or sequences 1n Theology have been approved by the Acadeffilc Programmes Committee and may be taken as part of other degrees where this has been approved by the Board of the appropnate School

Old Testament Unzts 36 units comprising

Fzrst Year level 25101 Introduct10n to the Literature and

History of the Old Testament 6 Ezther 26101 New Testament Backgrounds 6

or 26103 Introduct10n to the New Testament 6 26102 Prehmmary New Testament Greek 0

Second Year level 12 umts selected from the following 25201 Old Testament Exegesis

The Pentateuch (may not be taken with 25205) 6

Theology

25202 Old Testament Exegesis The Deuteronomic History (may not be taken with 25205)

25203 Old Testament Exege;is The Prophets

25204 Old Testament ExegeSls TheWntmgs

25205 Old Testament Studies Israel s Sacred Story (may not be taken with 25201 or 25202)

Thzrd Year level 25301 Old Testament Theology

6

6

6

6

6

6 units selected from second year topics 1n New Testament

New Testament 36 units compr1s1ng

Fzrst Year level 25101 Introduct10n to the Literature and

History of the Old Testament 6 Ezther 26101 New Testament Backgrounds 6 or 26103 Introduction to the New Testament 6 26102 Prehmmary New Testament Greek O

Second Year level 12 umts selected from the following 26201 New Testament Exegesis

Synoptic Gospels 26202 New Testament ExegeSls

Paulme Epistles 26203 New Testament Exegesis

Johann1ne Literature 26204 New Testament Exegesis

Luke-Acts 26205 New Testament Exeges15

Hebrews and Revelation

Thzrd Year level 26301 New Testament Theology

6

6

6

6

6

6 6 units selected from second year topics 1n Old Testament

Systematic Theology 36 units comprising

Fzrst Year level 27101 Introduction to Theology

Revelat10n and Faith 28101 Early Church History

6

6

639

Studies zn Theology

Second Year level 12 units selected from topics in Group A

Thzrd Year level 12 umts selected from the topics m Group A and Group B

GROUP A

(Topics which may be taken at either second or third year level) 27201 The Person and Work of Chnst 6 27202 Theology of Humanity and Grace 6 27203 Church and Mmistry 6 27204 Sacraments 6 27205 The Holy Spmt 6 27206 Creat10n 6 27207 Eschatology 6 27208 Christian Ethics 6 27213 Theology of God and the Trinity 6 27215 Chrisllan Social Ethics 6 27216 Liturgy Theology, Symbol and

Celebrat10n 6 27217 B10medical Ethics 6

GROUP B

(Topics which may be taken at third year level only)

27301 Study of Rehg10ns 27307 Woman, Man and God

Church History 36 units compns1ng

Fzrst Year level 27101 Introduct10n to Theology

Revelallon and Faith 28101 Early Church History

Second Year level

6 6

6 6

12 units selected from the topics in Group A

Thzrd Year level 12 units selected from the topics 1n Group A and Group B

GROUP A

(Topics which may be taken at either second or third year level)

28202 Mediaeval Church History 6 28203 Reformat10n Church History 6 28204 The Church m the Modern World

(17th 20th Century) 6

640

28206 Reltg1on, Science and Society in Europe, 1500 1700 6

28207 The Eucharist m History and Tradit10n 6

GROUPB

(Topics which may be taken at third year level only)

28301 HIStory of Christian M1ss10ns 6 28302 History of Liturgy 6 28303 History of Ecumemsm 6 28304 The Enghsh Reformat10n 6 28305 Austrahan Rehg10us History 6 28306 Patnsllc Semmar 6 28307 HIStory of Spmtuahty Semmar 6 28308 The L1turg1cal Year History and

Meanmg 6

Historzcal and Systematic Theology 36 units compns1ng

Fzrst Year level 27101 Introduct10n to Theology Revelat10n

and Faith 6 28101 Early Church History

Second Year level

6

12 umts selected from the topics m Group A

Thzrd Year level 12 umts selected from the topics m Group A and Group B

GROUP A

(Topics which may be taken at either second or thud year level)

27201 The Person and Work of Chnst 6 27202 Theology of Humamty and Grace 6 27203 Church and Mmistry 6 27204 Sacraments 6 27205 The Holy Spmt 6 27206 Creat10n 6 27207 Eschatology 6 27208 Chnsllan Ethics 6 27213 Theology of God and the Tnmty 6 27215 Chrisllan Social Ethics 6 27216 Liturgy Theology, Symbol

and Celebrat10n 6 27217 B10med1cal Ethics 6 28202 Mediaeval Church History 6 28203 Reformat10n Church History 6

28204 The Church m the Modern World (17th 20th Century) 6

28206 Rehg10n Science and Society m Europe, 1500 1700 6

28207 The Eucharist m History and Tradit10n 6

GROUP B

(Topics which may be taken at thrrd year level only)

27301 Study of Rehg10ns 6 27307 Woman, Man and God 6 28301 History of Christian Miss10ns 6 28302 History of Liturgy 6 28303 History of Ecumenism 6 28304 The English Reformation 6 28305 Austrahan Rehg10us History 6 28306 Patnstic Seminar 6 28307 History of Spmtuahty Seminar 6 28308 The Liturgical Year History and

Meaning 6

Master of Theological Studies

29501 THE NEW TESTAMENT AS CANON The Revd Dr/ E Akehurst

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic will focus on the quest10n 'What is the New Testament?' Attention will be given to the forces and influences which shaped the formation of the New Testament Canon and on recent debate about the meaning of canon Questions of the 1nsp1ratJ.on, authonty and use of the New Testament m the history of the Christian Church will be studied mcludmg an exam1nat1on of recent developments in New Testament hermeneutics

Prelzmmary reading Moule, C FD The phenomenon of the N T

(SC M, 1967) Boers, H What zs New Testament theology?

(Fortress, 1979)

Set books Barr J Holy Scripture canon, authority,

crztzczsm (Clarendon, 1983)

Theology

Childs, BS The New Testament as canon an mtroductzon (SC M, 1984)

Stendahl K Meanings the Bible as document and guide (Fortress, 1984)

Reference books Achtemeier P J The mspzratzon of scripture

(Westrnmster, 1980) Epp, J and McRae, G W eds The New

Testament and zts modern interpreters (Scholars, 1989)

Ferguson, D S B1bl1cal hermeneutics (SC M, 1986)

Grant, RM and Tracy, D A short history of the interpretation of the Bible, 2nd ed (SC M, 1984)

Hahn, F Hzstorzcal znvestzgatzon and New Testament faith (Fortress, 1983)

Henry, P New dzrectzons in New Testament study (SC M 1980)

Jeremias, ) The central message of the New Testament (S C M , 1965)

Leon Dufour, X Dictwnary of the New Testament (Harper & Row, 1980)

29502 READINGS IN ASIAN RELIGIONS Dr A D Hunt and Dr V Hayes

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Seme~ter

Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

The study of hterature regarded as authoritative by the rehg1ons of Hmdmsm Buddhism and Islam The texts considered sacred will be examined m the context of the or1g1n and development of each religion

Reference books Burtt, EA ed The teachings of the

compasswnate Buddha (Mentor) Coward, H Sacred word and sacred text

(SC M) Cragg, A K Readings m the Quran (Collms,

1980) Cragg, A K The mmd of the Quran (George

Allen & Unwm, London, 1973) Dawood, M) , trans The Koran (Pengum) Mascaro, J trans The Dhammapada

(Pengum) Mascaro, J , trans The Bhagavad Gita

(Penguin) Mascaro, ) trans Upanishads (Pengum)

641

Studies zn Theology

Mortimer, E Faith and power the politics of Islam (Faber, 1982)

Smart N and Hecht, R Sacred texts of the world (Macmillan, 1982)

Smart, N The world's relzgzons old tradztzons and modern transformations (Cambridge up 1989)

Smith, H The religions of man (Harper &Row)

Zaehner, R C The Bhagavad Gita (Oxford Clarendon, 1369)

29503 ORTHODOXY HETERODOXY AND POPULAR PIETY Mr V V Korobacz

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact One 2 hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

ThlS topic is a study of the vane hes of Chnshan theories and practices and the development of not10ns of Chnstrnn orthodoxy and heresy as shown in the 1nstttuhons and socio rehg1ous movements of medieval Europe

Reference books Cohn, N The pursuit of the millennium

(London, 1957) Lambert, M Medieval heresy (London, 1977) Leff G Heresy zn the later Middle Ages

2 vols (Manchester, 1967) Moore, R The bzrth of popular heresies

(London, 1975) Morrison K F Tradztzon and authority zn

the western church, 300 1140 (Princeton, 1969)

Oberman H A The harvest of medieval theology (Cambndge, Mass, 1963)

Ullmann W A short history of the Papacy (London, 1972)

Ullmann, W The growth of Papal government m the Middle Ages (London, 1965)

29504 SPECIAL TOPIC IN THEOLOGICAL STUDIES Umts 12 Level Masters Duration One year Class Contact 1 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic involves supervised reading on themes and issues in a selected area of study

642

and completion of assignments totalhng 12 15 thousand words

29505 REFORMATION THINKERS AND THEIR THOUGHT Dr G H artcher

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration Semester Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 5 hour semmar per week Pre requ1s1te Masters standing

Selected wntmgs of a variety of leadmg sixteenth century re1Ig1ous reformers will be studied m translat10n with the 01m of develop 1ng an understanding of the reformers' thought within the historical context A reading knowledge of Reformation history 1s assumed

Text books Atkmson, ) ed Luther early theological

works (Ph1ladelphrn Westmmster Press) McNeil, ) T, ed John Calvin institutes of

the Christian religion (Philadelphrn Westminster Press)

Matheson P , ed Collected works of Thomas Muntzer (T & T Clark, 1988)

29510 DISSERTATION FOR THE DEGREE OF M Th ST MrM Kennedy

Umts 12 Level Masters Duration One year Class Contact 1 2 hours per week Pre-requ1s1te Masters standing

This topic involves the wnting of a d1ssertat1on of about 15,000 words to be written under the supervision of an appropnate staff member The d1ssertat10n should give eVIdence of ability to collect and evaluate material m the form of an extended literature review of a topic The student should also give eVIdence of an ab1hty to construct and defend an argument and critically examine theories in the area of enqmry

29520 M Th St INDIVIDUAL PROJECT MrM Kennedy

Umts 6 Level Masters Duration One year

Class Contact 1 2 hours per fortnight Pre requ1s1te Masters standing The project will enable students to develop areas of interest arising out of the theoretical and research literature in the selected sub1ect area A range of acttv1t1es will be perm1ss1ble, leadmg to the product10n of a report of about 7 ,000 words In each case, the student should demonstrate mastery of the literature, analysing and evaluating 1t to show its strengths and weaknesses The proiect will not necessarily be externally examined

Theology

643

Index

Index to Topics

Topic Title Number Units Page

1890 1930 The End ofV1ctonan England? 33433 12 498 Abongmal Educat10n 53359 6 216 Accounting I 40110 12 458 Accountmg II 40210 12 459 Accounting and Finance Honours Thesis 40440 12 467 Accountmg Theory 40411 6 465 Acqms1t10n and Analysis of Satellite

Sensed Image Data In the Earth Sciences 81404 207 Add1chve Behaviour Research 95027 4 412 Adm1n1strat1on of Human Service Organisations 50526 6 603 612 Adult Educat10n The Adult as a Learner 54801 6 250 Adult/Further Educat10n Soc10log1cal Approaches 54802 6 250 Advanced Data and Knowledge Base Systems 68318 3 361 Advanced Exercise Phys10logy 53433 9 227 Advanced Exercise Phys10logy 54603 12 246 Advanced F1nanc1al Accounting 40314 6 462 Advanced F1nanc1al Management 40423 6 466 Advanced First Aid (Semester 1) 99266 45 381 Advanced French Readmg Programme 11949 45 340 Advanced French Readmg Programme 11449 9 340 Advanced Macroeconom1cs 30402 452 Advanced Management Accountmg 40318 6 464 Advanced M1craeconom1cs 30401 452 Advanced Mineralogy and Petrogenes1s 84403 208 Advanced New Testament Greek 26401 0 330 493, 628 Advanced Oral Prof1c1ency 1n French 11941 45 339 Advanced Physical Geography 32413 6 477 Advanced Phys10logy 99344 45 381 Advanced Populat10n Studies 32414 6 477 Advanced Populauon Studies 37411 6 555 Advanced Populat10n Studies 52405 6 575 Advanced Programme Structures 68317 3 361 Advanced Quantum Mechanics 76431 434 Advanced Reading Programme in Rumanian 11923 45 341 Advanced Reading Programme in Rumanian 11423 9 341 Advanced Research Methods Soc10logy 38434 6 567 Advanced Social Work Practice 50937 6 600 Advanced Soc10log1cal Research Methods 38443 6 566 Advanced Soc10log1cal Theory 38441 6 566 Advanced Statistical Mechanics 76451 435 Advanced Wntmg Skills m French 11942 45 339 Advances in Economic Theory I 30530 6 455 Advances 1n Economic Theory II 30531 6 455 Advances in Quantitative Mathematical

and App!Jed Economics I 30532 6 456 Advances 1n Quantitative Mathematical

and App!Jed Economics II 30533 6 456

644

Topzc Tztle Number Unzts Page

Advances m Quan!Itat1ve Mathema!Ical and Apphed Economics III 30534 6 456

Aeronautics for Meteorologists 82410 209 Aesthetics 14245 6 299,320 Aesthel!cs 16240 6 299,320 Aesthetics and Educat10n 53224 6 213 Agemg 39218 6 585 Ageing of Populations 32517 6 483 Alcohol and Its Effects (Semester 1) 99207 45 380 Alternative Med1cme - Medical HypnoSis 99339 45 381 American Econom1c Development 31302 6 469 American Studies Diploma Literature Review 34440 12 505 American Studies Honours Thesis 34430 12/18 504 Analysis and Management of Change in

Human Services 50531 6 603 613 Analytical Mechamcs 67353 3 373 Anatomy D1ssect1on 90453 391 Ancient and Mediaeval Philosophy 14216 6 296 Ancient Philosophy 14236 6 297 Anunal Behaviour 87395 3 183 Animal Behaviour 87390 6 183 Ammal PhySiology 86223 3 178 Apphed Astronomy 82216 3 199 Apphed ChemIStry Laboratory I 79108 45 437 Apphed ChemIStry Laboratory II 79203 12 117 Apphed ChemIStry Laboratory ID 79106 45 437 Apphed Econometncs 30314 6 450 Apphed ElectrochemIStry 74328 15 428 Apphed Mathematics Honours Programme (B A ) 63450 40 378 Apphed Mathematics Honours Programme (B Sc ) 63410 40 378 Apphed Philosophy (Issues for Austrahan) 14243 6 298 Apphed Philosophy (Issues for Austrahans) 22206 6 329, 573 Apphed PhyS1cs II 79201 9 117 Apphed PhySlcs III 79202 9 117 Apphed PhyS1cs Laboratory I 79104 45 436 Apphed PhyS1cs Laboratory ID 79102 45 436 Apphed Soc1olog1cal Research 38518 6 570 Apphed Soc10log1cal Research 52527 6 581 Apphed Sociology 38442 6 566 Apphed Stat1St1cal Science A 65303 45 378 Apphed StatISIIcal Science B 65304 45 378 Approaches in Human Resources Development 55119 6 268 Archaeolog1cal Science 16450 6 357 Archaeological Theory and Method 16451 6 Archaeology A 16436 9 356 Archaeology B 16440 9 357 Archaeology Its HIStory,

Techmques and Methodology 16218 6 316 Art1f1cial Intelhgence 68315 3 361 Art of the Pac1fzc Reg10n A 16435 9 355 Art of the Pacific Reg10n B 16439 9 356 Arts of Other Peoples 16216 6 316 Art Theory 16433 9 355

645

Index

Tztle

ASEAN Problems and Prospects ASEAN Problems and Prospects ASEAN Problems and Prospects Asian Econom1c Development Asian Econom1c Development Asian Studzes I Asian Studies Diploma Course Asian Studies Honours Thesis Assessment and Evaluation 1n Special Education Atmosphenc Circulat10n Theory Atmosphenc Development Theory Atmosphenc lnstabzhty Theory Atomic Colhs1on Processes Australasian, South East Asian and South Pac1f1c Drama Australta 1n Asta Australia in Asia Australian Archaeology I A Chronological Survey Australian Archaeology I A Chronological Survey Austrahan Archaeology II Problems m Archaeological

Theory and Method Australian Archaeology II Problems m Archaeological

Theory and Method Australian Art 1788 c 1900 Australian Art A 1788 c 1900 Australian Art c 1900 to the Present Day Austrahan Art B c 1900 to the Present Day Austrahan Cities as Human Envtronments Austrahan Cities as Human Environments Australian Drama - Part I Ong1ns and Influences Australian Drama - Part II Alternatives Australian Econom1c Development Australian Economrc Development Australian Econom1c Development Austrahan Education System Australian Env1ronmental Patterns Australian Environmental Patterns Austrahan Fem1n1st H1stonography Australian Gcvernment and Pohhcs Australian Government and Poht1cs Austrahan Government and Poht1cs Australian Government and Public Pohcy Austrahan Government and Pubhc Pohcy Australian Government and Pubhc Pohcy Austrahan Government and Public Pohcy Austrahan Literature Austrahan Pohtical Economy Australian Prose and Poetry m the Nmeteenth Century Australian Prose and Poetry m the Nmeteenth Century Australian Prose and Poetry m the Twenlieth Century Australian Prose and Poetry m the Twenlieth Century Australian Rehg10us History Australian Rehg10us History Australian Relig10us History

646

Topzc Number

35322 37306 52309 30315 52315 37110 37440 37450 54027 82401 82402 82403 76441 13906 37417 52408 16226 22213

22214

16227 22202 16231 22203 16232 23218 32218 22231 22232 23301 30313 31301 55105 23216 32216 05521 51507 35509 35435 14247 23211 35215 51441 10910 35221 18207 22201 18208 22204 23305 33325 28305

Unzts

6 6 6 6 6

12 12 18

6

45 6 6 6 6

6

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

6 6 6 6 6 6 6

45 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Page

516 548 575 451 574 541 541 541 260 208 208 209 434 348 555 575 318

329, 572

329,573

319 329,572

319 329, 572

319 330 573

474 329, 572 330,573 329 573

450 469 263

329, 573 473 594 608 522 521 328

330, 573 509 605 338 511 331

329, 572 331

329, 572 330,573

493 637

Topic Title Number Unzts Page

Austrahan Resources Management 23309 6 330, 573 Austrahan Resource Management 32311 6 475 Austrahan Society 23208 6 329 573 Australian Society 38321 6 562 Australtan Studies Humanities 18270 6 331 Australian Studies Humanities 22235 6 329,572 Austrahan Theatre 13426 9 343 Austrahan Welfare History 23306 6 330, 573 Austrahan Welfare History 33329 6 494 Backgrounds of Contemporary C1v1hsat1on 18280 6 323 Basic Issues in Contemporary Pohtical Theory 35218 6 511 Basic Mathematics for Medical Students 90112 2 380 Basic Metabohsm 86224 3 178 Basic M1crob1ology 86225 3 178 Basin Tectonics 83418 208 Basis of Add1ct1ve Behaviour 95011 4 409 Basis of Commumty Mental Health 95019 4 410 Beginners' French High 11119 6 277, 278 Beginners' French Low 11117 9 276, 278 Beginners' French Mid 11118 6 276 278 Behavioural Management 95016 6 109 Behav10ur and Neurob10logy 86226 3 179 Behaviour Management in Schools 53782 6 219 Behaviour Problems 54015 6 256 Bereavement and Loss 50532 6 604 Biblical Hebrew 25401 0 623 B1bhograph1c Studies 1n Poht1cs 35425 12 520 B1bhograph1c Studies 1n Poht1cs 52409 6 575 B10chemical Control Mechamsms (S) 89345 4 189 B1ochem1cal Control Mechanisms 89335 6 189 Bio inorganic Chemistry 74325 15 427 B10logical Basis of Medicme 90156 6 385 Biolog1cal Experimentation I 86231 6 181 Biological Expenmentahon II 86222 3 177 Biological Science I 86100 9 176 B10logy Essay A S T 89398 1 192 BtologyEssay B ST 89399 1 192 B10 Medical Ethics 14247 6 300 B10 Medical Ethics 27217 6 633 Bio organic Chemistry 74324 15 427 Boundary Layer Meteorology 82404 209 Bnl!sh Industrial Revolution 33217 6 488 Business Policy and Strategic Planning 40213 6 460 Calculus of Vanatlons 67303 3 371 Capitalism and Uneven Development 32416 6 477 Cap1tahsm and Uneven Development 52406 6 575 Case Studies 90451 391 Cell and Developmental B10logy 88358 45 186 Cell and Membrane Phys10logy 89301 35 188 Cell and Membrane Phys10logy 89302 45 188 Cell B10logy 90278 388 Cell Phys10logy 86227 3 179 Cellular Basis of Medicme 90157 6 386

647

Index

Topic Title Number Unzts Page

Change in Human Services 50933 6 598 Chemical Basis of Med1c1ne 90155 8 385 Chemical Oceanography 81313 2 195 Chemical Pathology 94508 18 124 Chemical Prmc1ples I 79107 9 437 Chemical Prmc1ples II 79204 9 117 Chemistry I 74100 9 420 Chemistry Laboratory II (General Techmques) 74210 2 422 Chemistry Laboratory II (lnorgamc) 74221 2 423 Chemistry Laboratory II (Orgamc) 74211 2 422 Chemistry Laboratory II (Physical) 74220 2 423 Chemistry Laboratory III (lnorgamc) 74312 2 425 Chemistry Laboratory III (Orgamc) 74330 2 428 Chemistry Laboratory III (Physical) 74310 2 424 Chemistry Laboratory III Proiects 74331 2 429 Chemistry Laboratory III Techmques 74332 2 429 Child Commumty Mental Health 95021 6 109 Child Development 95030 6 413 Ch!ld Development m Contemporary Society 53783 6 220 Chmese I 05121 9 557 Chmese I 5978 9 557 Chinese Cultural Revolution, The 35403 6 520 Chmese Cultural Revolut10n The 37407 6 554 Chnsl!an Ethics 27208 6 631 Chnsl!an Social Ethics 27215 6 632 Church and Mimstry 27203 6 630 C1vtl Eng1neenng F 615 Classical D1fferent1al Geometry 61243 3 366 Classical Hydrodynamics 67361 3 373 Classical Mechamcs 67252 3 368 Classroom Processes 54504 6 244 Chmate and Land Forms 32501 6 479 Chmcal Hypnosis 36534 4 533 Clm1cal Laboratory Computmg 99233 45 380 Chmcal Neuropsychology 36526 4 532 Clm1cal Opt10n I 90654 398 Chmcal Opt10n II 90655 398 Chn1cal Pharmacology 90454 391 Clm1cal Slnlls 90452 391 Chmco patholog1cal Correlat10n 90456 392 Cognitive Processes 36338 3 531 Coloma! Austraha 1856 1914 23206 6 329 572 Coloma! Austraha 1856 1914 33224 6 490 Comb1natoncs 61241 3 366 Comedy 13401 9 343 Commerc1al Law A 40111 6 458 Commercial Law B 40216 6 461 Commun1cation Studies 18220 6 331 Community Care and Organ1sation 95026 4 412 Commumty Development m Mental Health 95022 6 109 Commumty Ecology 87396 4 192 Commumty Ecology 87391 6 184 Commumty Health Research 95006 4 408

648

Topic Title Nuffzber Unzts Page

Community 1n America 34405 6 504 Community Mental Health Research 95018 4 410 Community Nutr1t1on 95014 6 109 Community Organ1sahon 50926 6 598 Community Organisation and Health 95001 4 405 Commumty Orgamsat10n for Health 92431 2 399 Community Psychology 36528 4 533 Community Theatre 13469 9 349 Commutative Algebra and Gal01s Theory 61315 45 369 Comparative Econom1c Systems 30308 6 448 Comparative Econom1c Systems 52308 6 574 Comparative Pohtical Sociology 38446 6 567 Comparative Pohtical Soc10logy 38507 6 569 Comparative Sociology 37312 6 550 Comparative Soc1ology 38327 6 564 Comparative Soc1ology 52314 6 575 Comparative Strategies for Development 35313 6 514 Comparative Strategies for Development 52307 6 575 Comparative Studies in Welfare History 33432 12 497 Complex Analysts 63311 3 369 Compos1hon 1n Spanish 12317 6 287 Computat10nal Logic 68321 3 362 Computat10nal Proiect 67389 3 374 Computer Assisted Teaching in Med1c1ne 99333 381 Computer Networks 68319 3 362 Computer Science Honours Programme (B A) 68450 40 379 Computer Science Honours Programme (B Sc ) 68410 40 379 Computer Science I 68110 9 358 Computers in Schools 53230 6 215 Computers in Schools 56230 6 230 Computer Systems 68214 3 359 Computers 1n Society Issues and Applications 54004 6 234 Computmg Methods m Chemistry 74216 3 423 Computmg with FORTRAN 67201 3 367 Concepts of Seismic Stral!graphy 83419 3 208 Concepts of Work, Leisure and Recreation 55111 6 265 Conceptual Foundat10ns of Psychology 36401 6 532 Conceptual Problems of Leisure and Play 53432 9 227 Conquest and Colon1satlon of

Mexico and Peru, 1519 1550, The 33326 6 497 Conquest and Colomsat10n of

Mexico and Peru, 1500 1550 33429 12 493 Contemporary Abongmal Art

Techniques and Methods 16238 6 320 Contemporary Europe 33226 6 491 Contemporary Fem1n1st Theory 41402 6 591 Contemporary Greek Theatre and Cinema 19211 6 326 Contemporary India 52318 6 574 Contemporary India 1940 1980 33331 6 494 Contemporary Issues 1n Taxation Law 40317 6 463 Contemporary Latin Amenca,

State Civil Society and Pohl!cs 12426 9 342

649

Index

Topic Title Number Units Page

Contemporary Latin Amencan State and C1v1l Society 12319 6 287

Contemporary Scand1nav1a 33212 6 488 Contemporary Soc1altst Soc1etles 35318 6 515 Contemporary Social Problems 38331 6 564 Contemporary Spamsh Poetry 12318 6 287 Contemporary World Development 39222 6 586 Contemporary World Development 52201 6 575 Contmental Dnft and Plate Tcctomcs 83218 3 196 Continuum Mechanics 67253 3 368 Conversion Course for the Degree of

Master of Nutrition and Dtetettcs 92430 18 401 Corporate Finance 40315 6 463 Counselltng 1n Medical Practice 99321 381 Counselhng - Theories and Practice 36521 4 532 Coursework Pro1ect 1n Education 54008 12 235 Coursework Pro1ect in Educational Adm1n1stratlon 55113 12 266 Coursework Pro1ect in Special Education 54025 12 259 Crea hon 27206 6 631 Cnmmology 21414 6 328, 571 Cnm1nology 38521 6 571 Cr1s1s Care 99337 45 381 Cn!lcal Thmkmg 14239 6 297 Cn!lque and Construct m Femm1st Knowledge 41505 6 592 Critique and Construct m Women's Studies 41405 6 593 Cross Cultural Perspectives in Education 53218 6 211 Cuban Revolut10n, 1959 1976, The 33324 6 493 Cuban Revolu!lon The 33427 12 497 Culture and Society 38328 6 564 Culture m V1ctonan England 1851 1901 33321 6 492 Culture of D1sillus1on Literature and Society

m the US A and UK 1897 1941 39219 6 586 Current Aspects of Manne Geochemistry 84404 208 Current Developments in Aboriginal Education 54904 6 252 Current Issues in Education

Educational Adm1nistrat1on 55106 6 264 Current Issues in Nutrition 92528 3 401 Current Perspectives in Special Education 54010 6 253 Current Trends m Clmical Psychology 36547 4 535 Curnculum Development and Culture 54501 6 243 Curriculum Innovation and Implementation 54503 6 244 Curriculum Studies I Curriculum Theory 53215 6 211 Curriculum Studies II Arts (m Educat10n) 53367 6 216 Curriculum Studies II Educat10nal Media 53373 1 219 Curriculum Studies II Language and Readmg 53368 6 217 Curnculum Studies II Mathematics 53369 5 217 Curnculum Studies II Science 53372 3 218 Curriculum Studies II Social Studies ' 218 53371 3 Curriculum Studies Ill Abongmes and Educat10n 53442 4 223 Curriculum Studies Ill Handicapped Child 53441 4 223 Curriculum Studies III Music and Education 53443 4 224 Curriculum Studies Ill Rehg10n and Educat10n 53444 4 224 Curriculum Studies IV Curnculum Organisation 53445 4 225

650

Topic Tztle 1Vumber Unzts Page

Curnculum Studies V Educat10n Evaluat10n 53446 4 225 Curriculum Studies VI Curriculum Overview 53416 6 226 Curnculum Theory 53421 6 226 Curnculum Theory 54502 6 244 Curriculum Theory and Special Education 54012 6 254 Dante as Literary Cnt1c 15934 45 353 Dante IIIHH 15931 45 353 Dante JVHH 15932 45 353 DanteVHH 15933 45 353 Data Analysis in the Earth Sciences 81301 3 195 Data and Measurement for Health 95005 4 407 Database Management and Applications 68311 3 360 Data Structures 68211 3 359 Death, Dymg Loss and Grief (Semester 1) 99263 45 381 Death, Dymg, Loss and Gnef (Semester 2) 99264 45 381 Dec1S1on Makmg and Ethics for Health Services 95042 5 417 Demography 39211 6 583 Demography of the Family 32516 6 483 Dependency and Development 35424 6 521 Dependency and Development 52403 6 575 Design of Social Policy Research, The 51514 6 609 Developmental B10logy A S T 89362 1 192 Developmental B10logy B S T 89363 2 192 Development Durmg Adulthood and Agemg 36333 3 529 Development m Early Childhood 54701 6 248 Development of Adm1n1strative Concepts 55101 6 262 Development of Adm1n1strattve Concepts 51511 6 608 Development Studies 32505 6 479 Development Studies 52503 6 577 Development Studies Diploma TheSIS 52450 12 575 Diagnostic Laboratory Practice 94507 18 124 Differential Equations 63346 3 371 Diploma Topic by Thesis 18413 9 335 Diploma Topic m Drama by Thesis 13468 9 335 Diploma Topic m Philosophy by Thesis 14436 9 335 Diploma Topic m Spamsh by Thesis 12424 9 334 Diploma Topic m Visual Arts and Archaeology

by Thesis 16418 9 335 Directed Study (Honours) 53434 6 228 Directed Study 54007 6 235 Directmg for Film and Televis10n (3rd year) 13458 9 346 Discrete Mathematics 615 Discrete Mathematics I 61201 3 364 Discrete Mathematics II 61202 3 365 Disease and Society 39226 6 587 Dissertation in Itahan Literature, Philology,

D1alectology or Language 15428 9 351 D1ssertat10n for the Degree of M Th St 29510 12 642 DNA Structure, Funct10n and Mampulahon (S) 89346 4 189 DNA Structure, Function and Manipulation 89336 6 189 Drama I Introduction to Drama

Concepts and Practices 13110 12 288 Drama and Fem1n1sm 13905 45 347

651

Index

Topic Title Number Units Page

Drama II Modern Drama Concepts and Practices 13210 12 289 Drama IIA Cmema Studies I 13220 12 289 Drama IIE Theatre Studies 13270 12 289 Drama IIF Austrahan Drama -

Theatre Film, Radio and Telev1s1on 13280 12 290 Drama IIF Part I Austrahan Drama

Or1g1ns and Influences 13231 6 293 Drama IIF Part II, Australian Drama Alternatives 13232 6 293 Drama III Cmema Studies II 13310 12 291 Drama IIIC Bertolt Brecht 13390 12 291 Drama IIID Modem Theatre 13300 12 291 Drug and Foreign Chemical (Xenob10llcs)

D1spos1hon in Animals and Man 99313 45 381 Drug Related Problems 95012 4 410 Durkheim on Education 54303 6 240 Dynamical Meteorology 82305 2 204 Dynamical Oceanography 82303 2 204 Dynamical Systems 63345 3 374 Early Celtic Art and Archaeology 16237 6 319 Early Childhood Curnculum Development 54704 6 249 Early Church History 28101 6 634 Early Development and Except10nahty 54013 6 255 Earth Sciences I 81100 9 193 Earth Sciences IS 81105 6 194 Earth's Magnetic Field 83415 208 Earthquake Seismology and The Earth s Intenor 83309 45 201 Ecology of Man and Society 39205 6 582 Econometncs 30309 6 449 Econometr1cs (Honours) 30427 453 Econom1c Development 30302 6 445 Econom1c Development 30426 6 453 Econom1c Development 37307 6 549 Econom1c Development 52302 6 575 Econom1c History 30432 454 Econom1c History and Econom1c Theory A 31411 6 470 Econom1c History and Econom1c Theory B 31412 6 470 Econom1c Inequaltty Theory and History 31408 12 470 Econom1c Mineral Deposits I 84314 3 202 Economic Mineral Deposits II 84324 3 202 Economics I 30110 12 441 Economics IA 30130 12 440 Economics and Pubhc Pohcy 51527 6 611 Economics and Public Polley 52514 6 579 Economics Honours Programme (Ff) 30490 36 439 Economics Honours Programme (PT) 30495 18 439 Economics Honours Programme 30496 18 439 Economics Honours Thesis 30420 452 Economic Sociology 38324 6 563 Economic Sociology 52316 6 575 Economics of Labour, The 30303 6 446 Economics of Pubhc Pohcy 30503 6 455 Economy and Society 38439 6 567 Ecophys10logy of Plants 87397 3 184

652

Topzc Tztle Number Unzts Page

Ecophys10logy of Plants 87398 4 184 Ecosystem Ecology 87392 6 184 Educatmg Gifted Students Research and Practice 54028 6 260 Educat10n and Social Theory 54304 6 241 Educat10n and Society 53922 6 223 Education and Society in Australia 24208 6 329, 573 Educat10n and Society m Australia 53228 6 214 Educat10n and the Individual 53921 6 222 Education in Australia 54045 6 268 Educat10n of Children with Learmng Difficulties 54018 6 257 Educat10n of Children with Physical Disabilities 54016 6 256 Educat10n of Hearmg Impaired Students I 54021 6 258 Educallon of Hearmg Impaired Students II 54022 6 258 Education of Visually Impaired Students I 54023 6 258 Education of Visually Impaired Students II 54024 6 259 Education Ideology and Culture 54901 6 251 Educational Counselhng 54026 6 260 Educat10nal Media 56007 1 228 Educat10nal Research Methodologies 54000 0 232 Elasticity and Flmd Mechamcs 67364 3 374 Elective 1n Nutrition and Dietetics 92526 9 401 Elective Studies A 51529 6 614 Elective Studies B 51531 6 614 Electrical and Electronic Fundamentals 619 Electromagnetic Theory I 77220 3 432 Electromagnetic Theory and Optics 77310 45 432 Electron1c Processes 615 Electronics 77212 6 431 Elementary Differential Equat10ns 60203 3 364 Elementary Topology of Surfaces 61244 3 366 Elements of Data Analysis 39103 3 588 Elements of Data Analysis 65103 3 375 Elements of Statistical Science I 65104 3 375 Elements of Statistical Science II 65203 3 376 Elites m Southeast Asia 35416 6 520 Ehtes m Southeast Asia 37403 6 554 Elites m Southeast Asia 52402 6 575 Emergence of Modern America The 33213 6 488 Emergence of Modem America, The 34204 6 501 Emp1ncal and Expenmental Studies 53422 6 226 Employment and Persons with D1sab1ltties 54029 6 261 Endocr1ne/Reproducttve/Gastro1nteshnal Systems 90274 388 Endocnne/Reproduchve/Gastro1ntesttnal Systems 90374 389 Eng1neer1ng Practice 615 Engmeermg Chemistry and Materials 1 617 Engmeermg Chemistry and Materials 2 617 Engmeering Drawmg 1 618 Engmeermg Drawmg F 619 Engmeermg Maths 1 616 Engmeermg Maths 2 616 Eng1neenng Mechanics 1 618 Engineering Mechanics F 618 Engmeermg Physics 1 616

653

Index

Topzc Tztle Number Unzts Page

Engineering Physics 2 617 Engineenng Practice 615 Engineering Practice F 615 Enghsh Cognate A 10211 6 273 Englzsh Cognate B 10212 6 273 Englzsh Cognate C 10311 6 274 English Cognate D 10312 6 274 English I 10110 12 272 Englzsh II 10210 12 272 Englzsh III 10310 12 273 Enghsh Novel m the N meteenth Century 10905 45 338 Enghsh Reformat10n 28304 6 491 637 English Reformat10n, The 33317 6 491 Englzsh Reformat10n The 33416 12 496 Environmental Econom1cs 30318 6 452 Environmental Ethics 14231 6 296 Env1ronmentahsm 39227 6 587 EnVIronmental Perception 32402 6 477 EnVIronment and Health 99332 381 Epistemology 14401 9 349 Epistemology and Metaphysics 14202 6 295 Epistemology and Metaphysics I 14232 6 296 Epistemology and the Philosophy of Science 14201 6 295 Equ11Ibr1um and Rate Processes 74224 3 424 Eschatology 27207 6 631 Essay m Spanish 12402 9 342 Essentials of Behavtour Mod1f1cahon 36551 4 536 Eucharist 1n History and Trad1t1on 28207 6 635 European Art 1830 1914 16203 6 315 Evaluation of Human Services 50923 6 597 Evolution and Heredity 86220 6 177 Exercise Physiology 53356 45 268 Experimental Slnlls in Meteorology and Oceanography 82323 3 206 Explorat10n Geophysics I 83204 3 196 Explorat10n Geophysics II 83312 3 201 Explorat10n Geophysics Laboratory IA 83297 2 197 Explorat10n Geophysics Laboratory II 83394 2 202 Extended Studies in Medical Science 99201 380 Extended Studies in Medical Science 99301 381 External Auditing 40323 6 464 External Elechve 1n Fourth Year 90449 9 381 External Elective Studies in First Year Med1c1ne 99116 45 380 External Elective Studies in First Year Medicine 90115 9 380 External Elective Studies tn Second Year Medicine 99216 45 380 External Elective Studies in Second Year Med1c1ne 90215 9 380 External Elective Studies in Third Year Med1c1ne 99316 45 381 External Elective Studies in Third Year Med1c1ne 90315 9 381 Family Fem1n1sm and the State 04535 594 Family State and Social Pohcy 38511 6 569 Family State and Social Polzcy 51521 6 609 Family, State and Society 38316 6 561 Family, State and Society 38438 6 567 Famine 39216 6 585

654

Topzc Tztle Number Units Page

Federahsm m Australia 21412 6 328, 584 Federahsm 1n Austraha 39215 6 584 Female Sexuahty 04545 594 Fem1n1ne Sub1ectlv1ty 04544 594 Fem1n1sm 14224 6 296 Fem1n1sm and Cultural Studies 23312 6 330 573 Femmism and Cultural Studies 41302 6 591 Fem1n1st Cultural Analysis 41403 6 591 Fem1n1st Theory 04532 594 Femmist Quest10ns 41508 6 594 Fieldwork A 50824 6 596 Fieldwork B 50921 12 596 Fifth Year Medzcme Aggregate 90590 36 393 F1nanc1al Accounting 40311 6 461 F1nanc1al and Behavioural Management 95041 4 416 F1nanc1al Management 40211 6 459 Food Service Management 92437 4 400 Food Studies I (Techmcal and Product10n) 92436 3 400 Food Studies II (Social and Environmental) 92529 3 401 Foundations of B1omed1cal Research 99311 45 381 Foundations of Geonetry 61212 3 365 Fourth Year Medical Elecl!ve (Term 1) 90461 9 381 Fourth Year Medical Elective (Term 2) 90462 9 381 Fourth Year Medical Elective (Term 3) 90463 9 381 Fourth Year Med1c1ne Non elective Aggregate 90490 27 391 Freedom Law and Society 14242 6 298 328 Freedom, Law and Society 21418 6 298 328 French Cinema Documentary Film 11216 6 279 French Cinema French Comedy 11205 6 279 French Culture I 11121 6 279 French for Medical Students 11199 9 279 French Literature (Selected penod) 11214 6 279 French Poetry 11206 6 279 French Stage I 11240 12 275 French Stage I 11110 12 275 French Stage II 11210 12 277 French Stage II 11350 12 277 French Stage III 11310 12 277 Fundamental Concepts 1n Human Nutrition 99228 45 380 Fungal Populat10n B10logy 88325 3 185 Further Apphcahons in Behaviour Mod1f1cahon 36552 4 537 Gender and Society 1n Asia 37416 6 555 Gender and Society 1n Asia 52407 6 575 Gender and Trade Unions 04536 594 Gender in Australian History 23212 6 330, 573 Gender in Austrahan History 33229 6 491 Gender in Austrahan History 41202 6 590 Gender Issues in Education 04537 594 General L1ngu1stics 11918 45 340 General L1ngu1shcs 11418 9 340 General Paper and Reading Course 35421 6 520 Genetics 89369 45 191 Geography I Society, Environment and Place 32110 12 471

655

Index

Topzc Tztle Number Unzts Page

Geography Diploma Theszs 32450 12 476 Geography of the Western City The 32504 6 479 Geological Field Camp II 84398 4 204 Geological Field Techmques 84297 4 199 Geomagnetic Induction Phenomena 83410 208 Geometric Structures 61213 3 365 Geophysical Data Processing 83416 3 207 Geophysical Well Loggmg 84319 3 203 Gerentology and Health 95015 6 109 Giacomo Leopardi 15937 45 353 Glac10logy 81403 206 Government and Poht1cs in Western

European Society 35316 6 514 Government and Poht1cs of the Chinese

People's Repubhc 35203 6 507 Government and Poh!Jcs of the Chmese

People's Republic 37209 6 544 Government and Poht1cs of the Chinese

People's Repubhc 52203 6 544 Graduate Reading Seminar 1n Soc1ology 38515 6 570 Groundwater Modellmg 81415 209 Group and Collective Processes 36234 3 527 Groups and Rmgs 61314 45 369 Growing Up in Australia 24202 6 330, 573 Growmg Up m Austraha 53781 6 91 Half Cognate m French Language 11224 6 280 Half-Topic by Dissertation 1n Itahan Literature,

Phdology, D1alectology or Language 15928 45 352 Harmonic Analysis 63315 3 370 Health and Medical Care 1n Disadvantaged Comrnun1hes

(Semester 1) 99341 45 381 Health and Medical Care m Disadvantaged Commum!Jes

(Semester 2) 99342 45 381 Health Care Management (U S A ) 95045 5 418 Health Counsellmg 95009 6 409 Health Educat10n 95033 4 414 Health Educat10n Programmes 95034 4 414 Health Programmes 95004 4 407 Health Programmes 1n Add1ctlon Behaviour 95036 4 415 Health Psychology 36335 3 529 Health Services 90455 392 Health Services Economics and Fmance (U S A ) 95044 5 418 Health Services Law (U S A ) 95043 5 417 Healthy Cities The New Pubhc Health m Act10n 95035 6 415 Hero in American F1ct1on 10909 45 337 Heterogeneous Catalysis 74329 15 428 H1stor1cal French Linguistics 11911 45 338 H1stor1cal French Linguistics 11411 9 338 Historical Studies 1n Social Pohcy 51508 6 608 History and Development of the Greek Language 19215 6 327 History Honours Thesis 33430 12 495 History IB The Foundat10n of Austral!a

and New Zealand 1770 1870 33120 12 484

656

Topic Tztle Number Unzts Page

History ID Continuity and Change in China and Indza to about 1870 33140 12 486

History IF Contemporary Europe 33160 12 486 Hzstory JG The Americas 1700 1900 33170 12 486 History of Art A 16434 9 355 Hzstory of Art B 16438 9 356 History of Austrahan Educat10n

Twentzeth Century Issues 24203 6 330 573 Hzstory of Austrahan Educa\10n

Twentzeth Century Issues 53785 6 221 History of Chr1stldn M1ss1ons 28301 6 636 Hzstory of Coloma! South Austraha 1836 1901 33426 12 496 History of Economzc Thought 30431 454 History of Ecumenism 28303 6 636 Hzstory of Femznzst Thought 05522 594 Hzstory of Femmist Thought 41404 6 592 History of Liturgy 28302 6 636 Hzstory of Modern Chma 1840 1949 33219 6 489 Hzstory of Modern Chma, 1840 1949 37208 6 544 History of Modern Southeast Asia 33227 6 491 Hzstory of Modern Southeast Asta 37204 6 544 History of Modern Southeast Asta 52209 6 574 History of Philosophy 14424 9 350 History of Philosophy Recent and Contemporary 14229 6 296 History of Spmtuahty Semmar 28307 6 637 History of the Church m the Modern World

(17th 20th Century) 28204 6 634 History of Women m the USA, 1780 1939 34306 6 503 Holy Spmt 27205 6 631 Honours Biology 86400 36 192 Honours Medical Science 91402 18 398 Honours Medical Science 91403 18 398 Honours Medical Science 91401 36 398 Honours Science (Medicine) 91410 36 398 Honours Seminar 29401 0 Honours Thesis 29430 18 639 Honours Thesis (B Ed ) 53424 12 227 Honours Thesis in Economic History 31430 12 467 Honours Topics m Enghsh by Thesis 10443 9 337 Human Commun1cation 51524 6 610 Human Commun1cat1on 55103 6 263 Human Development and the Social Environment 50823 6 595 Human Genome - Structure, Function and Pathology The 99312 45 381 Humanity and Grace 27202 6 630 Human Motivation 36332 3 528 Human Nutnhonal Sciences 92432 4 399 Human Resource Development 32509 6 482 Human Resource Development 52511 6 579 Human Service Organisations 50922 6 597 Hydrological Measurements and Practice 81318 3 196 Hydrology Honours Topic 81402 209 Immunology 88360 3 187 Immunology 88361 45 187

657

Index

Topic Title Number Unzts Page

Indian Philosophy 14238 6 297 Ind1V1dual Study m Pnmary Health Care 95029 6 413 Indonesian I 37150 12 541 Indonesian IA 37160 12 543 Indonesian II 37250 12 553 Indonesian III 37360 12 553 Indonesian Language and Literature 37421 6 556 Indonesian Musical Cul1..ure, Theory and Practice I 37213 6 546 Indones1an Musical Culture, Theory

and Practice II 37335 6 552 Indonesian Pohhcal Economy 37314 6 551 Indonesian Poht1cal Economy 52317 6 575 Indonesian Society and Culture 37415 6 555 Indonesian Studies 1 37170 12 543 Industrial Organ1sat1on 30304 6 446 Jndustnal Socrology 38322 6 562 Information Systems 40316 6 463 Informatron Systems 68212 3 359 Inorganrc Chemistry II 74225 3 424 Inorgamc Chemistry III 74315 45 425 Instrumentation 77323 6 434 Integrated Direct Practrce Methods 50936 6 599 Integratron Theory 63313 3 370 Intensive Summer Course in Indonesian Language 37217 6 553 Internal Auditmg 40322 6 70 Internat1onal Econom1cs 30301 6 445 International Finance 30317 6 451 International F1nanc1al Issues 30423 453 Intematronal Health 95010 6 409 International Pohtics Australian Foreign Pohcy 23303 6 330 573 International Pohhcs Austrahan Foreign Pabey 35304 6 512 International Poht1cs Concepts and Issues 35329 6 518 International Politics Concepts and Issues 52313 6 575 International Poht1cs Peace and War 35204 6 507 International Polttics Peace and War 52218 6 574 International Pohhcs The Cold War 35405 6 520 International Poht1cs Theories and Debates 35445 6 521 International Trade 30422 453 Intervention in Chtldhodd Disorders 36554 4 538 Interventron Skills m Addictrve Behav10ur 95028 4 413 Introduct10n to Cellular and Molecular B10logy 86235 3 181 Introduction to Chemistry 74101 9 421 Introduct10n to Chemistry A 74110 45 421 Introduct10n to Chemistry B 74120 45 421 Introduct10n to Chemistry D 79105 9 436 Introduct10n to Clmical Child Psychology 36553 4 538 Introduct10n to Chmcal Skills 90277 388 Introduct10n to Clmical Skills 90377 390 Introduction to Chometncs 30316 451 Introductron to Computmg 616 Introduction to Crystal Structure Determination 74320 15 426 Introduction to Engineering 618 Introduction to French Cinema 11204 6 279

658

Topic Title Number Um ts Page Introduct10n to Legal Studies 21110 12 327 Introduction to Literature and History

of the Old Testament 25101 6 620 Introduction to Materials 74326 15 427 Introduction to M1n1ng 615 Introduction to Physics 77101 9 429 Introduchon to Physics D 79101 9 436 Introduct10n to Production and

Performance Techniques 13130 12 292 Introduct10n to Psychopathology 36331 3 528 Introduct10n to Research Methods 92439 4 402 Introduction to Social Structure 38209 6 559 Introduct1on to the New Testament 26103 6 625 Introduct10n to Theology Revelat10n and Faith 27101 6 629 Introductory Econometncs 30207 6 444 Introductory Indonesian A 37151 6 542 Introductory Indonesian B 37152 6 542 Introductory Macroeconom1cs 30112 6 441 Introductory Mathematics A 60117 9 363 Introductory Mathematics B 60118 9 363 Introductory Symbolic Logic 54204 6 239 Investments 40321 6 464 Issues 1n Australian Sports History 54606 12 247 Issues in Contemporary Soc1ology 38516 6 570 Issues in Contemporary Soc1ology 52525 6 581 Issues m Early Childhood Educat10n 54702 6 248 Issues 1n Fem1n1st Theory 41301 6 590 Issues in Human Resources Development 55118 6 267 Issues 1n Programme and Curriculum Evaluation 54506 6 245 Issues 1n Social Polley 50524 6 602, 612 Issues in Special Education 56001 6 228 Issues m the Soc10logy of Development 38505 6 569 Issues m the Soc10logy of Development 52516 6 579 Issues in the Theory and Practice

of Instruct10nal Psychology 54104 6 237 Italian and Italians m Australia 15939 45 354 Italian Dialectology I 15903 45 352 Italian Dialectology II 15904 45 352 Italian for Medical Students and for Intendmg

Commumty Health Workers 15235 9 311 Italian IA 15140 12 304 Italian IB Part I 15153 6 304 Italian IB Part II 15154 6 305 Italian JBS 15199 9 305 Italian IIBS 15291 12 308 ltaban IS 15198 9 304 Italian IIS 15290 12 307 Italian Language 15298 9 312 Italian Language and Italians m Australia 15234 6 312 Italian Language I 15151 6 303 Italian Language II 15251 6 306 Italian Language IIB 15253 6 307

659

Index

Topzc Tztle Number Units Page

Italian Language lil 15351 6 308 Italian Language IIIB 15353 6 309 Italian Language IIIBS 15393 9 310 Itahan Language IIIHF 15491 9 352 Italian Language lllS 15391 9 310 Itahan Language !VHF 15492 9 352 Japanese I Introductory Japanese 05152 9 557 Japanese I Introductory Japanese 2725 9 557 Japanese Econorruc Development 31205 6 468 Japanese r.conom1c Development 37211 6 545 Japanese Econom1c Development 52205 6 574 Javanese Language 37422 6 556 Knowledge and Educat10n 54202 6 238 Laboratory Techniques in Exercise Physiology 54604 12 247 Labour Econom1cs 30421 453 Language and Education 54902 6 251 Language and Gender 04542 594 Language and Nat10nal Culture 1r

Modern Indonesia 37361 6 554 Language in Education 53231 6 215 Language m Use 618 Language, Literature and the Law Austrahan Contexts 21213 6 333 Language, Literature and the Law Australian Contexts 22234 6 329, 572 Language Society and Culture m Spam

and Lahn America 12222 6 286 Language Translators 68312 3 360 Large Scale Structure of the Universe 77105 6 430 Lahn Amencan Studies A An Introduction

to Latin America 12218 6 286 Lahn Amencan Studies B Contemporary

Latin America 12219 6 286 Latvian Language and Culture 11290 12 280 Latvian L1ngu1shcs 11925 45 341 Latvian L1ngu1st1cs 11425 9 341 Latvian An Introd uchon 11919 45 340 Latvian An Introduction 11419 9 340 Leaders and Leadership 55115 6 266 Learning and Memory 36337 3 530 Learning Development and Educational Practice 54101 6 235 Learning Processes 36232 3 526 Leftist Trad1t10ns Theory and Practice

of Left Trad1t10ns 35326 6 517 Legal Aspects of Mul!Iculturahsm 21417 6 328 Legal Reasoning 21419 6 328 Legal Reasonmg 14249 6 328 Life Cycle Stages of Development 50974 6 600 Lmear Algebra 60202 3 364 Lmear Model Computat10ns 65206 3 376 Lmear Model Theory 65306 3 377 Linear Programming 67233 3 368 Literary Perspectives on United States Culture 34406 6 504 Literature and Society in Amenca 34301 6 330 Literature and Society 1n Amenca 34301 6 501

660

Topic Title Number Um ts Page

Literature and Society 1n Indonesia 37313 6 551 Liturgical Year History and Meaning 28308 6 637 Liturgy Theology, Symbol and Celebrat10n 27216 6 633 MA Coursework Ma]or Thesis Politics 35520 18 522 MA Coursework Minor Thesis Polrt1cs 35500 12 522 MA Coursework Project 32513 12 482 MA Coursework Pro1ect - Pohllcs 35530 12 523 MA Coursework TheSlS 52500 24 577 MA Coursework Thesis Geography 32500 24 478 MA Coursework Thesis 1n American Studies 34550 12 505 MA Coursework Thesis 1n Development Studies 52510 12 578 MA Coursework Thesis 1n History 33551 12 499 MA Coursework Thesis m History 33552 18 499 MA Coursework Thesis in History 33553 24 499 Macroeconom1cs 30201 6 442 Macroeconom1cs (M Ee ) 30502 6 455 Makmg of Umted States Foreign Pohcy The 34305 6 503 Makmg of Umted States Foreign Pohcy, The 35217 6 510 Management Information Systems 40424 6 466 Management of Services 1n Pnmary Health Care 95002 4 406 Management Science 40413 6 465 Managerial Planning and Control 40419 6 466 Managing Hurn an Resources 51525 6 611 Managing Human Resources 55104 6 263 MA Pro1ect m Development Studies 52520 12 580 Manne Ecology Field Tnp S T 89375 2 192 Manne Ecology Field Tnp S T 89376 3 192 Manne Science Laboratory I 82271 1 200 Manne Science Laboratory II 82371 45 206 Marketing Management 40212 6 460 Marxism 1n Contemporary Sociological Thought 38504 6 568 Marxism Leninism 14209 6 296 Marxism Len1n1sm 14415 9 349 Marxism Philosophical Issues 14244 6 299 MA Soc10logy Research Pro1ect 38530 12 571 Mass Media in Austraha 18209 6 331 Mass Media in Australia 22209 6 329 573 MA Studies m Amencan Intellectual History 33563 12 499 MA Studies 1n Amencan Intellectual History 34553 12 505 MA Studies m Amencan Pohl!cal History 33562 12 499 MA Studies m Amencan Pohl!cal History 34552 12 505 MA Studies in Amencan Social History 34551 12 505 MA Studies m Amencan Social History 33561 12 499 MA Studies m Apphed Social Research 52527 6 581 MA Studies Ill Asian History 33564 12 500 MA Studies m Asian History 33565 18 500 MA Studies 1n Austrahan Government Poht1cs

and Pubhc Pohcy 35502 12 523 MA Studies Ill Australian Government, Politics

and Pubhc Pohcy 35511 6 523 MA Studies 1n Australtan Government Pohl!cs

and Pubhc Pohcy 35512 18 523 MA Studies m Austrahan History 33555 12 499

661

Index

Topzc Tztle Number Unzts Page

MA Studies m Australian History 33556 18 499 MA Studies m Bnt1sh and European History 33558 12 499 MA Studies m Bntish and European History 33559 18 499 MA Studies in Comparative Pohhcs and

Pohllcal Soc10logy 52505 12 578 MA Studies in Comparative Pohhcs and

Pahllcal Sac10lagy 35503 12 523 MA Studies 1n Comparative Pohhcs and

Poht1cal Sac10lagy 35513 6 523 MA Studies m Camparallve Paht1cs and

Pahllcal Sac10lagy 35514 18 523 MA Studies in Comparative Politics and

Pohllcal Sac10logy 52522 6 581 MA Studies m Development Pabey 35505 6 522 MA Studies m Development Pabey 52521 6 580 MA Studies m Economic History 33570 12 500 MA Studies 1n Econom1c History 33571 18 500 MA Studies m Internat10nal Relat10ns

and Development 35504 12 523 MA Studies in International Relations and

Development 35515 6 523 MA Studies 1n International Relations and

Development 35516 18 523 MA Studies 1n International Relations and

Development 52506 12 578 MA Studies in International Relations and

Development 52523 6 581 MA Studies m Paht1cal Theory 35501 12 523 MA Studies m Pahllcal Theory 35507 6 523 MA Studies m Pahllcal Theory 35508 18 523 MA Studies m Social History 33567 12 500 MA Studies m Social History 33568 18 500 MA Studies m the Pahllcs of Development 35506 6 522 MA Studies m the Politics of Development 52509 6 578 Maternal and Child Health 95031 4 414 Mathematical Econom1cs 30311 6 449 Mathematical Econom1cs (Honours) 30428 454 Mathematics for the Physical Sciences 63214 3 367 Mathematics I 60130 9 363 Matnx Theory 61223 3 365 M Ee Coursework Thesis 30500 12 454 M Ee Coursework Thesis 30510 24 454 Mechanical Eng1neer1ng F 615 Mechanics II 81214 3 194 Mediaeval Church History 28202 6 634 Mediaeval Literature 10902 45 337 Medical Demography 95013 6 Medical Ethics 21521 6 300 328 Medical Ethics 99335 381 Medical Ethics Philasaph1cal Issues 14246 6 300,328 Medical Microb10lagy 99334 381 Medical Sac10lagy 38319 6 562 Medical Sac10lagy 38436 6 567

662

Topic Title Number Units Page

Med1c1ne I 90551 394 Med1c1ne II 90651 397 Med1c1ne 1n the Community 90154 7 384 Melanesian History 33322 6 493 Melanesian History 52320 6 575 Mental Health Programmes 95017 4 410 Mental Retardat10n 54014 6 255 Metaphysics 14408 9 349 Meteorological and Oceanographical Measurements II 82391 9 206 Meteorolog1cal, Oceanograph1cal

and Hydrolog1cal Measurements 82291 3 200 Meteorology and Climatology 82219 3 200 Methods of Econom1cs Research 30429 454 Methods of MathematJcal Physics 63363 3 371 Methods of Soc1olog1cal Inquiry 38205 6 559 Mexico under Cardenas 1934 1940 (Honours) 33419 12 496 M1crob1ology 88352 6 185 M1croeconom1cs 30202 6 442 M1croeconom1cs (M Ee ) 30501 6 454 M1crometeorology and Chmatonomy 82311 2 205 Migration The Greek Experience 19213 6 326 Milton 10904 45 338 Mmd and Knowledge 14241 6 297 M1neralog1cal and Geochemical Methods 84397 2 204 Models and Outcomes m Early Childhood Educat10n 54703 6 249 Models of Course Design for Language Learning 54812 6 251 Models of Language Learmng 54811 6 251 Models of Language Use 54810 6 250 Modern Asia and the West 37216 6 546 Modem Geographical Thought 32422 6 478 Modem Greek for Medical Students 19199 9 322 Modern Greek I Advanced Course 19110 12 320 Modern Greek I Introductory Course 19115 6 321 Modern Greek IB Beginners Course 19120 12 322 Modern Greek IB Introductory Course 19125 6 322

1Modern Greek JBS Beginners Course 19198 9 323 Modern Greek II Advanced Course 19210 12 324 Modern Greek IIB Beginners Course 19220 12 324 Modern Greek III Advanced Course 19310 12 325 Modem Greek IIIB Beginners Course 19320 12 325 Modern Greek IS Advanced 19197 9 323 Modern India 33208 6 487 Modern India 37207 6 544 Modern India 52208 6 574 Modem Indonesian PohtJcal Thmkmg 37420 6 556 Modern Itahan Poetry 15938 45 353 Modern Latin American Novel 12216 6 285 Modern Latin American Novel 12421 9 342 Modern Philosophy 14217 6 296 Modern Teaching Practices over Two Centuries 53784 6 220 Modern Theatre 13427 9 343 Molecular and Cellular B10logy

Laboratory (Theory) (S) 89349 3 190

663

Index

Topic Title Number Units Page

Molecular and Cellular B10logy Laboratory 89339 6 190 Molecular Basts of Disease 99245 45 381 Molecular B10logy 86228 3 179 Molecular Properties 74215 3 422 Money 30425 453 Money and Finance 30307 6 447 Moral Philosophy 14203 6 295 Morphology, Phys10logy and Rad10logy (Semester 1) 99327 45 381 Morphology, Pnys10logy and Rad10logy (Semester 2) 99328 45 381 Mothers Daughters and Memory 04543 594 M Pol Adm1n Dissertation 51501 12 606 M Pol Adm1n Dissertation 51505 18 606 M Psych (Ed & Clm ) Dissertat10n 36540 18 534 M Soc Admm TheS!S 50560 24 605 M Th St Research Proiect 29520 6 642 Mult1culturahsm 39225 6 586 Mult1vanate Analysts and Text Analysis 54003 6 234 Musculo skeletal System 90272 387 Musculo Skeletal/Nervous Systems 90379 390 Museum Studies A 16432 9 355 Museum Studies B 16437 9 356 Museum An H1stoncal and Cultural Survey 16221 6 317 National Cinema Studies 13903 45 347 Nazi Germany Its Ongms and Nature 1870 1945 33223 6 489 Nervous System 90273 387 Neurob10logy A 87371 45 183 Neurob10logy B 87372 45 183 New Legal Studies #1 21211 328 New Legal Studies #2 21212 328 New Literatures 1n English Caribbean 10912 45 338 New Literatures 1n English Indian 10911 45 337 New Testament as Canon 29501 6 641 New Testament Backgrounds 26101 6 624 New Testament Exegesis Hebrews and Revelation 26205 6 628 New Testament Exegesis J ohann1ne Literature 26203 6 627 New Testament Exegesis Luke Acts 26204 6 627 New Testament Exegesis Pauhne Epistles 26202 6 626 New Testament Exegesis Synoptic Gospels 26201 6 625 New Testament Greek 19212 6 326 New Testament Theology 26301 6 628 New Ways 1n Social History 33422 12 496 Nineteenth and Twentieth Century Latin America 33201 6 487 Nineteenth and Twentieth Century Latin America 52211 6 574 Nineteenth Century Architecture 16206 6 316 Nineteenth Century Drama

Development of Music Theatre 13466 9 347 Nineteenth Century Italian Narrative

Alessandro Manzon1 15436 9 351 Normal Flora 99326 45 381 North American Themes 18202 6 331 Nuclear Strategy and Arms Control 35333 6 519 Nuclear Theory 76461 435 Numerical Analysis 67214 3 367

664

Topzc Tztle Number Unzts Page

Numerical Analysis Honours Programme (B A ) 67450 40 379 Numerical Analysis Honours Programme (B Sc ) 67410 40 379 Numerical Approx1matlon 67215 3 368 Numerical Methods of Lmear Algebra 67314 45 372 Numerical Solution of Differential Equations 67315 45 372 Nutnhon Care PractJ.ce (Chn1cal) 92434 6 400 Nutrit10n Care Practice (Commumty) 92435 9 400 Nutnhon Care Practice II 92525 18 401 Nutnhon Education 92438 5 402 Nutnt1on 1n Health and Disease 92433 8 400 Objective Structured Chn1cal Exam1nat1on 90560 393 Obstetrics and Gynaecology 90553 395 Occ1taman Literature m the Middle Ages 11921 45 341 Occ1taman Literature m the Middle Ages 11421 9 341 Ocean Circulation Theory 82405 209 Oceanography 82218 3 199 Old Engltsh 10901 45 338 Old Testament Exegesis The Deuteronom1c History 25202 6 621 Old Testament Exegesis The Pentateuch 25201 6 621 Old Testament Exegesis The Prophets 25203 6 621 Old Testament Exegesis The Wntmgs 25204 6 622 Old Testament Studies Israel s Sacred Story 25205 6 622 Old Testament Theology 25301 6 622 Oncology Aspects of Palliative Care Skills 95025 4 412 Operations Research I 67332 3 372 Operations Research II 67333 3 373 Optzcal Mmeralogy and Petrography Laboratory 84281 4 198 Opttcal Mmeralogy Laboratory A 84284 2 198 Opttcal Physics 77223 3 432 Orgamc Chemistry II 74213 3 422 Orgamc Chemistry IIIA 74311 3 424 Orgamc Chemistry IIIB 74321 3 426 Orgamc Synthesis 74223 3 423 Orgamsat10nal Psychology I 36334 3 529 Organ1sahon in Action The 51512 6 609 Organ1sahon in Action 55102 6 262 Oriental Philosophy 14221 6 296 Oriental Philosophy 14427 9 350 Ong1ns of Econom1c Development The

The Bnttsh Case 31202 6 468 Ongms of Internat10nal M1grat10n 1700 1914, The 33328 6 493 Or1g1ns of Modem Education 53920 6 222 Orthodoxy, Heterodoxy and Popular Ptecy 29503 6 642 Paed1atr1cs 90554 395 Partial D1fferenttal Equat10ns 63344 3 370 Particle Physics 76463 435 Part1t10n of India 1935 1947, The 33302 6 491 Part1t10n of India, 1935 1947, The 37304 6 548 Party, Party System and Society m Australta 23207 6 329 572 Party, Party System and Society m Austraha 35321 6 515 Patristic Seminar 28306 6 637 People and Poht1cs A Cross nat10nal Study

of Austraha, USA and Canada 35312 6 513

665

Index

Topic Title Number Units Page

Perceptions of Modern Indonesia 37308 6 549 Performance A 13435 9 344 Performance B 13436 9 345 Performance C 13437 9 345 Performance D 13438 9 345 Person and Work of Chnst 27201 6 629 Personnel Management 40215 6 461 Perspectives in Biology 86110 12 176 Petrarch1sm in Sixteenth Century Europe 15935 45 353 Petrofabncs and Expenmental Deformation 84401 208 Petrogenes1s Laboratory 84312 2 202 Petrology 84221 3 197 Philosophy and Educat10n 53227 6 214 Philosophy I An Introduct10n to Phdosophy 14110 12 294 Phdosophy of History and Social Science 14208 6 296 Philosophy of Law 14439 9 Phtlosophy of Law 21520 6 328 Philosophy of Science 14235 6 296 Phdosophy of Science 14428 9 350 Photochemistry and Spectroscopy 74327 15 427 Physical Chemistry III 74314 45 425 Physical Oceanography 82321 2 205 Physical Orgamc Chemistry 74322 3 426 Physical Prmciples I 79103 9 436 Physics for Mechamcal Engmeers 1 617 Physics I 77102 9 429 Physics Laboratory 2 77221 3 432 Physics Laboratory 2A 77222 1 5 432 Physics Laboratory 3 77312 3 433 Physics Laboratory 3A 77313 15 433 Physics Laboratory II 79205 3 117 Physics Seminar 76471 435 Phys10logical Basis of Behav10ur 36231 3 526 Phys10logical Systems 89310 3 188 Phys10logical Systems 89304 35 188 Phys10logy of Manne Orgamsms 88390 3 187 Planetary Explorat10n 81302 3 195 Planetary Science 82217 3 199 Planning and Adm1n1strahon 51513 6 609 Planning and Adm1n1stration 55107 6 264 Planning the Social Services 50525 6 602, 612 Plant Anatomy, Phys10logy and Development 86229 3 180 Plant B10chemistry 87330 45 181 Plant Evolution and Spec1ahon 87367 3 182 Plant Evolut10n and Speciat10n 87369 4 182 Plant Phys10logy and Development 87364 45 182 Plant Phys10logy and Development 87365 6 182 Plasma and Astrophysics 77320 45 433 Plasma Physics 76442 435 Play Leisure and Games 54602 6 246 Poetics of C P Cavafy 19214 6 326 Pohcy and Adm1n1strahon Diploma Dissertation 51440 6 605 Pohcy and Adm1n1strat1on Selected Areas 51503 6 614

666

Topic Tztle Number Unzts Page

Polley and Adm1n1stratton Selected Issues 51504 6 614 Pohtical Change m 20th Century Chma 35301 6 512 Pohllcal Change m 20th Century Chma 37305 6 548 Pohltcal Change m 20th Century Chma 52304 6 575 Pohllcal Economy of the Pacific Rim 35332 6 518 Pohltcal Economy of the Pacific Rim 52319 6 575 Pohllcal Philosophy 35409 6 520 Political Philosophy and its History 35213 6 509 Pohllcal Soc10logy 38306 6 560 Pohltcal Theory Problems of Democraltc Theory 35208 6 508 Poht1cs I 35110 12 507 Politics and Society in Modern Amenca 34205 6 501 Politics and Society 1n Modern America 35216 6 510 Pohtics Honours Thesis 35450 18 519 Politics of New States, The 35214 6 509 Poht1cs of New States The 37212 6 545 Pohttcs of New States 52202 6 575 Pohltcs of the Australian States 23308 6 330,573 Poht1cs of the Australtan States 35328 6 517 Politics of Underdevelopment, The

The African Case 35207 6 508 Pohltcs of Underdevelopment The African Case 52207 6 574 Popular Education in Australia Since 1900 54404 6 243 Popular Education 1n Austraha to 1900 54402 6 242 Popular Educat10n m England 1780 1870 54401 6 241 Population and Environment 32518 6 483 Population and Environment 52524 6 581 Populat10n Data Analysis 32508 6 482 Populat10n Data Analysis 52519 6 580 Populat10n Ecology 86230 3 180 Population Econom1cs 32514 6 483 Population Econom1cs 52518 6 580 Populat10n Mob1hty 32512 6 482 Populat10n Mob1hty 52517 6 580 Population Studies 32503 6 479, 481 Populat10n Studies 38514 6 570 Populat10n Studies 51523 6 610 Populat10n Stuches 52502 6 577 Postmodermsm and Cultural Pohltcs 38519 6 571 Postmodermsm and Cultural Pohtics I 38332 6 565 Postmodem1sm and Cultural Poht1cs II 38448 6 568 Power Politics and Society 35209 6 508 Power Pohttcs and Society 52219 6 575 Practical Reasoning and Education 54203 6 238 PractJ.ce of Palhatlve Care 95023 6 411 Practicum 36541 6 534 Practicum 36542 6 534 Practicum 36543 6 534 Preliminary New Testament Greek 26102 0 624 Primary Health Care 90653 397 Prmciples of Analysis 63201 3 366 Pr1nc1ples of Neuroanatomy 99340 45 381 Principles of Structural Analysis 84406 208

667

Index

Topic Title Number Units Page

Prmc1ples of ToXJcology 99346 381 Problems m Geophysical Flwd Dynamics 82406 209 Problem Solvmg m Physics 77210 3 431 Process of Learning The 95003 4 406 Production and Performance Techniques I 13260 12 292 Production and Perfonnance Techniques II 13340 12 293 Profess1onal Issues In Agency Practice 50932 6 598 Professional Management and Adm1n1stration 92527 3 401 Profess1onal Practice in Educational Psychology 36556 4 539 Professional Practice 1n Health Care 50535 6 605 Programme and Curriculum Evaluation

Models and Issues 54505 6 245 Programming Language Concepts 68313 3 360 Programmmg (Pascal) 616 Program Structures 68213 3 359 Project in First Year Med1c1ne 99108 45 380 Project in First Year Med1c1ne 90107 9 380 Project 1n Pohcy and Adm1n1strat1on 51510 12 607 Pro1ect in Second Year Med1c1ne 99218 45 380 Project in Second Year Med1c1ne 90210 9 380 Pro1ect m Telev1s10n Product10n (4th year) 13451 9 345 Pro1ect 1n Theatre D1rechon 13461 9 346 Pro1ect m Third Year Med1cme 99318 45 381 Project 1n Third Year Med1c1ne 90310 9 381 Pro1ects m Molecular and Cellular Brnlogy 89340 45 190 Protest and Pohcy m Early 20th Century

India c 1900 1935 33424 12 496 Psychiatry 90555 396 Psychological Aspects of Palhat1ve Care 95024 4 411 Psycholog1cal Assessment 36536 4 534 Psychology I 36110 12 525 Psychology II A Cogmt1ve Approach 36230 12 526 Psychology IS 36120 9 525 Psychology and Educat10n 53222 6 212 Psychology and Instruction 54102 6 236 Psychology and the Law 21416 6 328 Psychology Honours Thesis 36440 18 532 Psychopathology and Profess10nal Issues 36555 4 539 Psychophys10logy of Awareness 36336 3 530 Psychophys10log1cal Theory and Measurement 36339 3 531 Psychosocrnl/Psychob10log1cal Systems 90276 388 Psychosoc1al/Psychob10log1cal Systems 90376 390 Pubhc Dec1s1on Making 39212 6 584 Public Econom1cs 30424 453 Pubhc Finance 30305 6 447 Pubhc Pohcy 35517 6 522 Pubhc Pohcy 51506 6 607 Public Sector and Nonprofit Management 40421 6 466 Pure Mathemal!cs Honours Programme (B A) 61450 40 378 Pure Mathematics Honours Programme (B Sc ) 61410 40 378 Quanl!tat1ve Methods 40113 6 459 Quan!Ita!Ive Methods for Economics I 30205 6 443 Quan!Jtal!ve Methods for Economics II 30206 6 443

668

Topic Title Number Unzts Page

Quantum Mechanics I 77211 3 431 Quantum Mechanics 2 77311 45 433 Quantum Theory of Matter 77322 45 434 Race and Australian Pohtics 23307 6 330, 573

'Race' and Australian Poht1cs 35327 6 517 Radiation 1n the Atmosphere 82312 2 205 Random Variables 65351 3 377 Reactive Intermediates 74323 15 427 Reading Programme 1n L1ngu1st1cs 11916 45 340 Reading Programme in Lingmstics 11416 9 340 Reading Seminar in Pabey and Admimstratrnn 51502 6 607 Reading Seminar in Social Adm1n1stration 50975 6 601 Readings in American Biblrngraphy

and Historiography 34403 12 505 Readings 1n Asian Rehg1ons 29502 6 641 Readings in B1oeth1cs 29403 6 638 Readings 1n Church History 28403 6 638 Readings in Molecular Brnlogy S T 89392 2 192 Readings 1n New Testament Studies 26402 6 629 Readings in Old Testament Studies 25402 6 624 Readings 1n Organ1sm1c Biology S T 89391 2 192 Readings in Populatrnn Brnlogy S T 89390 2 192 Readings 1n Systematic Theology 27403 6 634 Reason Freedom and the State Problems

in Modern European Pohtical Philosophy 35331 6 518 Recent European Social and Pohllcal Philosophy 35436 6 521 Recreational Resource Evaluation and

Management 39209 6 583 Reflections and Voices on the

Cypnot Cultural Traditrnn 19216 6 327 Reformat10n Church History 28203 6 634 Reformat10n Thinkers and Their Thoughts 29505 6 642 Regrnnal Anatomy Prosectrnn 99222 45 380 Reg10nal Development and Planning 32506 6 480, 481 Regional Development and Planning 52504 6 577 Regional Econom1c Development 32308 6 475 Regional Econom1c Development 52312 6 575 Regions in America 33319 6 492 Regions in America 34304 6 502 Rehabihtatrnn 36544 4 535 Relallvity and Electromagnellc Theory 76421 434 Reltg1on and Social Change 1n Modern Indonesia 37419 6 555 Rehgrnn, Science and Society m Europe 1500 1700 28206 6 490,635 Rehgrnn, Science and Society m Europe 1500 1700 33225 6 490, 635 Renal/Respiratory/Cardrnvascular Systems 90275 388 Renal/Respiratory/Cardrnvascular Systems 90375 389 Research Design 1n Social Adm1n1stratton 50934 6 599 Research in Cogn1tton and Instruction 54103 6 236 Research Methods in Accounting 40418 6 465 Research Methods 1n Education 53225 6 213 Research Methods in Geography 32309 6 475 Research Methods m Geography 52323 6 575 Research Methods Psychology 36301 6 527

669

Index

Topic Title Number Unzts Page

Research Pro1ect 53609 18 232 253 Research Project and D1ssertat10n

for M Sc m Clmical B10chem1stry 94506 36 124 Research Project (Educat10nal Admm1strat10n) 55100 24 262 Research Pro1ect 1n Social Adm1n1strahon 50935 6 599 Research Seminar in Soc1al Adm1n1strat1on 50976 6 601 Research Strategies 41509 6 594 Resistance 1n Wartime Europe, 1939 1945 33323 6 493 Resource Evaluation and Management 32502 6 479 Resource Evaluation and Management 52501 6 577 Review and Evaluation in Human Service

Organ1sahons 50527 6 603, 613 Revolution 39206 6 582 Revolution and International Politics 35442 6 521 Rich Asta Poor Asta Wealth, Power

and Environment 37334 6 552 Rise and Fall of European Impenahsm The 33221 6 489 Rococo and Rornanhc1sm in France and England 16202 6 315 Rumanian Language and Literature 11415 9 340 Rumanian Language and Literature 11340 12 281 Sacraments 27204 6 631 Sample Surveys and Field Studies 54002 6 233 School and Commumty Health 95032 4 414 School and Society in England and Amenca 54403 6 242 School and the Community 55110 6 265 Sea Level and Tides 82408 209 Second Year Cognate for Medical Students 12221 9 283 Second Year Med1c1ne Non elective Aggregate 90290 27 387 Sedimentary Environments and Basin Analysts 84205 3 197 Sedimentary Environments Laboratory 84383 2 203 Sedimentary Geochemistry 84328 3 203 Se1sm1c Exploration 83311 3 201 Se1sm1c Laboratory 83395 2 202 Selected Aspects of Meteorology,

Hydrology and Oceanography 82324 3 205 Selected Development Issues 52508 6 578 Selected French Author 11946 45 339 Selected French Author 11446 9 339 Selected French Genre 11947 45 339 Selected French Genre 11447 9 339 Selected Management Approaches 55117 6 267 Selected Management Issues 55116 6 267 Selected Penod 1n French Literature 11948 45 340 Selected Penod m French Literature 11448 9 340 Seminar 1n Social Adm1n1stration 50529 6 603, 613 Sem1ot1cs and Gender Representation 04539 594 Several Vanable Calculus 60201 6 364 Shakespeare 13432 9 344 Singapore Society 1n Transition, 1914 1941 33333 6 494 Smgapore Society m Trans1!Jon 1914 1941 37333 6 551 Sixth Year Elecllve I 90656 398 Sixth Year Elective II 90657 398 Sixth Year Medicme Aggregate 90690 36 397

670

Topzc Tztle Number Unzts Page

Small Computers in Human Service Organisations 36548 4 536 Small Enterprise Pohcy and Finance 40214 6 460 Small Scale Structure of the Umverse 77104 6 430 Social Adm1nistrahon 50821 6 595 Social Adm1mstrat10n Diploma Thesis 50950 12 601 Social Casework 50931 6 598 Social Change in Lahn America 39224 6 586 Social Change in Lalin Amenca 52220 6 575 Social Geography 32213 6 472 Social Groupwork 50927 6 598 Social Philosophy 14207 6 295 Social Philosophy 14426 9 350 Social Planmng 50925 6 597 Social Pohcy 50924 6 597 Social Problems 38437 6 567 Social Theory and Social Problems 38517 6 570 Social Theory and Social Problems 52526 6 581 Social Welfare Services 50827 6 596 Social Work 50825 6 596 Social Work m Selected Settmgs 50929 6 598 Social Work Practice 50826 6 596 Social Work Practice A 50516 6 602 Social Work Practice B 50523 6 602 Social Work Practice Education 50534 6 604 Social Work with Individuals and Families 50928 6 598 Society and Literature tn Italy I 15152 6 303 Society and Literature in Italy II 15252 6 306 Society and Literature in Italy III 15352 6 309 Society and Literature in Italy IIIS 15392 9 310 Sociobiology and Human Affairs 14233 6 296 Soc1olog1cal Perspectives on the State

and Bureaucracy 38444 6 567 Soc1olog1cal Perspectives on the State

and Bureaucracy 38512 6 569 Sociological Perspectives on the State and

Bureaucracy 51509 6 608 Soc10logical Research Methods 38509 6 569 Soc10logical Research Methods 52515 6 579 Soc10logical Theory 38208 6 559 Soc10logical Theory 38508 6 569 Soc10logy I 38110 12 558 Soc1ology Honours Thesis 38440 18 565 Sociology M A Coursework Ma1or Thesis 38520 24 571 Sociology M A Coursework Minor Thesis 38500 12 568 Sociology of Developing Societies 37309 6 550 Soc10logy of Developing Socielles 37408 6 554 Sociology of Developing Societies 38305 6 560 Sociology of Developing Societies 38413 6 566 Soc10logy of Developing Societies 52305 6 575 Soc10logy of Developing Societies 52404 6 575 Soc10logy of Deviance 21413 6 328, 561 Soc10logy of Deviance 38314 6 561 Soc10logy of Educat10n 53223 6 212

671

Index

Topzc Tztle Number Un1ts Page

Soc10logy of Educat10n 54301 6 240 Soc10logy of Educat10n 56223 6 230 Soc1ology of Education Themes and Issues 54302 6 240 Soc10logy of Knowledge 38435 6 567 Soc10logy of Law 21415 6 328, 563 Soc10logy of Law 38326 6 563 Software Engmeermg Proiect 68401 9 362 Southeast Asian Poht1cal Development 35306 6 512 Southeast Asian Pohl!cal Development 37303 6 547 Southeast Asian Pohl!cal Development 52306 6 575 Soviet Foreign Policy 35325 6 516 Spamsh I Spamsh for Nal!ve Speakers

and Matriculants 1n Spanish 12110 12 282 Spanish IA Modern Spanish for Beginners 12120 12 281 Spamsh !AS Modern Spamsh for Begmners 12198 9 282 Spamsh IB Spamsh for Medical Students 12199 9 282 Spamsh II (Advanced) 12270 12 284 Spamsh II 12210 12 283 Spamsh IIS 12209 12 283 Spamsh III (Advanced) 12370 12 285 Spamsh III 12310 12 284 Spamsh ms 12390 18 285 Spamsh Language 12401 9 341 Spanish L1ngu1stics 12428 9 343 Spamsh Literature 12427 9 343 Special Genre m Film 13465 9 347 Special Genre m the Visual Arts 16431 9 354 Special Half Cognate m Spamsh 12217 6 286 Special Half Topic m Drama (1) 13934 45 347 Special Half Topic m Drama (2) 13935 45 348 Special Half Topic m Drama (3) 13936 45 348 Special Interest Topic (Educat10nal Admm1strat10n) 55112 6 265 Special Introductory Topic m Logic 14115 3 301 Special Introductory Topic m Philosophy 14111 6 301 Special Introductory Topic m Philosophy D 14114 9 301 Special Methods (Dip Ed) 56011

56043 6 229 Special Methods Abongmal Educal!on 56021 6 229 Special Methods B10logy 56043 6 229 Special Methods Chemistry 56042 6 229 Special Methods Drama 56012 6 229 Special Methods Econom1cs 56015 6 229 Special Methods Enghsh 56011 6 229 Special Methods Enghsh as a Second Language 56020 6 229 Special Methods French 56018 6 229 Special Methods Geography 56014 6 229 Special Methods History 56013 6 229 Special Methods Itahan 56017 6 229 Special Methods Mathematics 56039 6 229 Special Methods Physics 56041 6 229 Special Methods Rehg1ous Instruction 56025 6 229 Special Methods Science 56040 6 229 Special Methods Social Sciences 56016 6 229

672

Topzc Tztle Number Unzts Page

Special Methods Spamsh 56019 6 229 Special Methods Special Topic A 56023 6 229 Special Methods Special Topic B 56024 6 229 Special Methods Teachmg the Special Child 56022 6 230 Special Pro1ect in Fiction, Film Direction 13464 9 346 Special Topic 1n Drama 13434 9 344 Special Topic 1n First Year Med1c1ne 99118 45 380 Special Topic 1n French A 11209 6 279 Special Topic in French B 11219 6 280 Special Topic m Philosophy 14219 6 296 Special Topic m Second Year Medicme (Semester 1) 99230 45 380 Special Topic m Second Year Med1cme (Semester 2) 99231 45 380 Special Topic m Spamsh by D1ssertat10n 12410 9 342 Special Topic m Spamsh Language 12429 9 343 Special Topic m Theological Studies 29504 12 642 Special Topic m Thud Year Med1cme (Semester 1) 99330 45 381 Special Topic m Third Year Medicme (Semester 2) 99331 45 381 Special Topic on Environmental Ethics 14438 9 350 Special Topic on Soc1ob1ology and Human Affairs 14437 9 350 Special Topics in Palaeontology 84389 3 203 Special Topics in Quantum Mechanics 76432 434 Special Topics in Womens Studies 05523 594 Spherical Astronomy 82409 204 Sport and Athletics In Modern Society 54601 6 246 Sport, Econom1cs and History 31406 12 469 Sport Issues and History 39228 6 588 Stability and Change m Contemporary France 35427 6 521 State Intervention and Social Change 1n Austraha 38503 6 568 Statistical Description and Inference 1n Research 54001 6 233 Stallstical Science 65205 6 376 Stallsllcal Science Honours Programme (B A) 65450 40 379 Stat1st1cal Science Honours Programme (B Sc ) 65410 40 379 Stattst1cs 1n the Social Sciences Problems

and Poss1bihhes 39221 6 589 Stochastic Processes 65305 3 377 Strategic Management 40319 6 464 Structural Geology 84213 3 197 Structural Geology Laboratory 84282 2 198 Structural Methods m Chemistry 74313 3 425 Structure of the Universe 77103 9 429 Studies in Amencan Social Cnhc1sm 33415 12 496 Studies in American Social Cnhc1sm 34401 12 503 Studies in American Social Cr1hc1sm 34402 6 503 Studies in American Social Cnhc1sm 34404 6 503 Studies in American Social Cr1hc1sm 35408 6 520 Studies in Italian Language and Linguistics 15233 6 312 Studies m Pohcy and Adm1mstrat10n A 51442 6 606 Studies m Pohcy and Admmistrat10n B 51443 6 606 Studies m Welfare History 33441 6 498 Studies m Western Art Smee 1900 16224 6 318 Study of Personality 36233 3 ">27 Study of Rehg10ns 27301 6 634 Substantive Curriculum Analysis 53423 6 227

673

Index

Topzc Tztle Number Units Page

Supervised Individual Course of Study B 50519 6 602 Supervised Literature Review and Research Pro1ect 36318 6 528 Supervised Research Pro1ect 1n Asian Studies 37409 6 555 Supervised Research Proiect m Geography 32507 6 480 Supervised Research Pro1ect in Population Studies 32515 6 483 Superv1s1on in Social Work 50955 6 600 Supervised Research Topic 21411 6 328 Supplementary Half Topic m French Language 11901 45 338 Surface and Subsurface Hydrology I 81217 3 194 Surface and Subsurface Hydrology II 81317 3 195 Surgery I 90552 394 Surgery II 90652 397 Systematic Approaches to Children, Family

and Community 95020 6 411 Systems and the Professional in Special Education 54011 6 253 Taxation Law and Practice 40313 6 462 Teaching Observation and Experience 53417 6 226 Teaching Observat10n and Practice 56008 5 228 Teaching Observation and Practice

1n Abong1nal Education 56009 5 228 Teaching Observation and Practice

m Secondary School (Special Educat10n) 56010 5 229 Tectonics 84317 2 202 Telev1s1on Senes 13904 45 347 Tertiary Educat10n 54803 6 261 Theatre Direct10n (3rd year) 13439 9 345 Theology of God and the Tnmty 27213 6 632 Theories of Gender and Race 41406 6 592 Theories of Race and Gender 41506 6 593 Theories of Social Work Intervention 50533 6 604 Theory of Computat10n 68316 3 361 Theory of Stal!sl!cal Inference 65307 3 378 Thermal Physics 77321 3 433 Thermodynamics and l{Inetlc Theory 74214 3 422 Thesis 53610 36 232 253 Thesis 95008 27 144 Thesis and Literature Review 32440 18 478 Thesis 1n French 11402 9 338 Thesis in N utntion Sciences 92500 36 403 Thesis Preparation Seminar 95007 9 408 Thesis Work in Progress Semester I 95102 9 404 Thesis Work 1n Progress Semester I 95104 13 5 404 Thesis Work In Progress Semester I 95106 18 404 Thesis Work in Progress Semester II 95103 9 404 Thesis Work in Progress Semester II 95105 13 5 404 Thesis Work in Progress Semester II 95107 18 404 Theoretical Seismology 83417 207 Third Year Cognate m French 11320 12 281 Third Year Cognate in Itahan 15320 12 313 Third Year Half Cognate m Itahan 15321 6 313 Third Year Medicine Non elecl!ve Aggregate 90390 27 389 Third Year Special Cognate m Spamsh 12316 6 287 Third Year Special Cognate 1n Spanish 12340 12 288

674

Topic Title Number Um ts Page

TISsues and Defence Systems of the Body 90271 387 Tissues and Defence Systems of the Body 90371 389 Topic m Italian I 15213 6 311 Topic m Italian I 15299 9 311 Topic m Italian Language IIB 15245 45 312 Topics m B10technology 89341 45 191 Topics in the Neurosc1ences - Landmarks of Discovery 99234 45 380 Tradit10nal Popular Culture m Italy 15905 45 352 Transport Economtcs 30504 6 455 Turbulence 82407 209 Twentieth Century Architecture 16205 6 316 Twentieth Century Australia 33204 6 487 Twentieth Century Australia 23205 6 329, 572 Twentieth Century Italian Narrative 15953 45 354 Understanding Research in Adm1n1strat1on 55114 6 266 Uneven Development 32215 6 472 Uneven Development 37215 6 546 Uneven Development 52215 6 574 Un Tour de France L1ngu1shque 11217 6 279 Urban1sahon 39208 6 583 Urban1sahon and Development 32511 6 482 Urbamsat10n and Development 52512 6 575 Urban1sat1on and Development in Southeast Asta 37405 6 554 Urban1sahon and Development in Southeast Asta 32411 6 477 Urban1sat1on and Development in Southeast Asia 37405 6 554 Urban1sahon and Development in Southeast Asia 52401 6 575 Urban Plannmg, Housmg and Public Policy 35518 6 522 Urban Plannmg Housmg and Public Policy 51532 6 611 Urban Polil!cs 35317 6 515 Urban Politics and Public Policy 35441 6 521 Urban Social Geography 32405 6 477 Urban Soc10logy 38317 6 562 Urban Soc10logy 38414 6 566 Value Clanflcat10n and Applied Soc10logy 38445 6 567 Value Clanficat10n and Public Policy 38513 6 569 Value Clanflcat10n and Public Policy 51522 6 610 Values and Educat10n 54201 6 237 Vertebrate Palaeontology I 89370 2 192 Vertebrate Palaeontology II 89371 3 192 Victonans m Southern Afnca 1833 1902 33315 6 491 Vuology 88355 3 186 Visual Arts and Archaeology I 16110 12 314 War, States and Markets m East Asia 1930 1990 35334 6 519 Waterloo to Luneburg Heath 33211 6 487 Water Resources and Austrahan Society 23217 6 329, 573 Water Resources and Austrahan Society 32217 6 473 W B Yeats 10907 45 337 Weather Forecast I 82207 1 200 Weather Forecast II 82317 1 205 Western City Geography and Pubhc Policy The 32307 6 474 Woman and Popular Culture 04541 594 Woman, Man and God 27307 6 634 Women and Social Pohcy 04534 594

675

Index

Title

Women and the D1vis1on of Labour Women in Contemporary Australian Society Women m Contemporary Austrahan Society Women m History Women Wnters and the Literary Trad1t10n Women's Health Women's Health Women's Studies Cultural Texts Women's Studies History Women's Studies Honours Thesis Women1s Studies Introduction Women's Studies Reading Course Women's Studies Readmg Topic Women's Studies Special Seminar Women's Studies Theories Wnter and the Law

\Wntmg for Film and Telev1S1on (3rd year) 'i!outh m Austraha Youth m Austraha

\

676

' ' •• •,'

'

,. " '

Topic Number Um ts Page

04533 594 23203 6 329, 572 41201 6 589 04531 594 04538 594 41511 6 594 95037 6 415 41504 6 593 41502 6 593 41440 18 592 41501 6 593 41401 6 591 41507 6 594 04546 594 41503 6 593 21314 6 333 13457 9 346 24201 6 329 573 53780 6 219